The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}598|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
  • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
  • Helping employees navigate personal and business responsibilities to find solutions that ensure both are taken care of.
  • Reducing potential disruption to business operations through employee absenteeism due to increased care-provider responsibilities.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Remote work is complicated by children at home with school closures. Implement alternative temporary work arrangements that allow and support employees to balance work and personal obligations.
  • Adjustments to work arrangements and pay may be necessary. Temporary work arrangements while caring for dependents over a longer-term pandemic may require adjustments to the duties carried out, number of hours worked, and adjustments to employee pay.
  • Managing remotely is more than staying in touch by phone. As a leader you will need to provide clear options that provide solutions to your employees to avoid them getting overwhelmed while taking care of the business to ensure there is a business long term.

Impact and Result

  • Develop a policy that provides parameters around mutually agreed adjustments to performance levels while balancing dependent care with work during a pandemic.
  • Take care of the business through clear guidelines on compensation while taking care of the health and wellness of your people.
  • Develop detailed work-from-home plans that lessen disruption to your work while taking care of children or aged parents.

The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday Research & Tools

Start here. Read The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday

Read our recommendations and follow the steps to develop a policy that will help your employees work productively while managing care-provider responsibilities at home.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

  • The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday Storyboard
  • Pandemic Dependent Care Policy
  • COVID-19 Dependent Care Policy Manager Action Toolkit
  • COVID-19 Dependent Care Policy Employee Guide
  • Dependent-Flextime Agreement Template
  • Workforce Planning Tool
  • Nine Ways to Support Working Caregivers Today
  • Employee Resource Group (ERG) Charter Template
[infographic]

Establish Data Governance

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}123|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $48,494 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Data Management
  • Parent Category Link: /data-management
  • Organizations are faced with challenges associated with changing data landscapes, evolving business models, industry disruptions, regulatory and compliance obligations, as well as changing and maturing user landscapes and demands for data.
  • Although the need for a data governance program is often evident, organizations often miss the mark.
  • Your data governance efforts should be directly aligned to delivering measurable business value by supporting key strategic initiatives, value streams, and underlying business capabilities.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Your organization’s value streams and their associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you may experience elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.
  • Ensure your data governance program delivers measurable business value by aligning the associated data governance initiatives with the business architecture.
  • Data governance must continuously align with the organization’s enterprise governance function. It should not be perceived as a pet project of IT, but rather as an enterprise-wide, business-driven initiative.

Impact and Result

Info-Tech’s approach to establishing and sustaining effective data governance is anchored in the strong alignment of organizational value streams and their business capabilities with key data governance dimensions and initiatives. Info-Tech's approach will help you:

  • Align your data governance with enterprise governance, business strategy, and the organizational value streams to ensure the program delivers measurable business value.
  • Understand your current data governance capabilities and build out a future state that is right-sized and relevant.
  • Define data governance leadership, accountability, and responsibility.
  • Ensure data governance is supported by an operating model that effectively manages change and communication and fosters a culture of data excellence.

Establish Data Governance Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Data Governance Research – A step-by-step document to ensure that the people handling the data are involved in the decisions surrounding data usage, data quality, business processes, and change implementation.

Data governance is a strategic program that will help your organization control data by managing the people, processes, and information technology needed to ensure that accurate and consistent data policies exist across varying lines of the business, enabling data-driven insight. This research will provide an overview of data governance and its importance to your organization, assist in making the case and securing buy-in for data governance, identify data governance best practices and the challenges associated with them, and provide guidance on how to implement data governance best practices for a successful launch.

  • Establish Data Governance – Phases 1-3

2. Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook – A structured tool to assist with establishing effective data governance practices.

This workbook will help your organization understand the business and user context by leveraging your business capability map and value streams, develop data use cases using Info-Tech's framework for building data use cases, and gauge the current state of your organization's data culture.

  • Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

3. Data Use Case Framework Template – An exemplar template to highlight and create relevant use cases around the organization’s data-related problems and opportunities.

This business needs gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization. This template provides a framework for data requirements and a mapping methodology for creating use cases.

  • Data Use Case Framework Template

4. Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool – A visual roadmapping tool to assist with establishing effective data governance practices.

This tool will help your organization plan the sequence of activities, capture start dates and expected completion dates, and create a roadmap that can be effectively communicated to the organization.

  • Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool

5. Business Data Catalog – A comprehensive template to help you to document the key data assets that are to be governed based on in-depth business unit interviews, data risk/value assessments, and a data flow diagram for the organization.

Use this template to document information about key data assets such as data definition, source system, possible values, data sensitivity, data steward, and usage of the data.

  • Business Data Catalog

6. Data Governance Program Charter Template – A program charter template to sell the importance of data governance to senior executives.

This template will help get the backing required to get a data governance project rolling. The program charter will help communicate the project purpose, define the scope, and identify the project team, roles, and responsibilities.

  • Data Governance Program Charter Template

7. Data Governance Policy

This policy establishes uniform data governance standards and identifies the shared responsibilities for assuring the integrity of the data and that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of your organization.

  • Data Governance Policy

8. Data Governance Exemplar – An exemplar showing how you can plan and document your data governance outputs.

Use this exemplar to understand how to establish data governance in your organization. Follow along with the sections of the blueprint Establish Data Governance and complete the document as you progress.

  • Data Governance Exemplar
[infographic]

Workshop: Establish Data Governance

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Establish Business Context and Value

The Purpose

Identify key business data assets that need to be governed.

Create a unifying vision for the data governance program.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand the value of data governance and how it can help the organization better leverage its data.

Gain knowledge of how data governance can benefit both IT and the business.

Activities

1.1 Establish business context, value, and scope of data governance at the organization

1.2 Introduction to Info-Tech’s data governance framework

1.3 Discuss vision and mission for data governance

1.4 Understand your business architecture, including your business capability map and value streams

1.5 Build use cases aligned to core business capabilities

Outputs

Sample use cases (tied to the business capability map) and a repeatable use case framework

Vision and mission for data governance

2 Understand Current Data Governance Capabilities and Plot Target-State Levels

The Purpose

Assess which data contains value and/or risk and determine metrics that will determine how valuable the data is to the organization.

Assess where the organization currently stands in data governance initiatives.

Determine gaps between the current and future states of the data governance program.

Key Benefits Achieved

Gain a holistic understanding of organizational data and how it flows through business units and systems.

Identify which data should fall under the governance umbrella.

Determine a practical starting point for the program.

Activities

2.1 Understand your current data governance capabilities and maturity

2.2 Set target-state data governance capabilities

Outputs

Current state of data governance maturity

Definition of target state

3 Build Data Domain to Data Governance Role Mapping

The Purpose

Determine strategic initiatives and create a roadmap outlining key steps required to get the organization to start enabling data-driven insights.

Determine timing of the initiatives.

Key Benefits Achieved

Establish clear direction for the data governance program.

Step-by-step outline of how to create effective data governance, with true business-IT collaboration.

Activities

3.1 Evaluate and prioritize performance gaps

3.2 Develop and consolidate data governance target-state initiatives

3.3 Define the role of data governance: data domain to data governance role mapping

Outputs

Target-state data governance initiatives

Data domain to data governance role mapping

4 Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

The Purpose

Consolidate the roadmap and other strategies to determine the plan of action from Day One.

Create the required policies, procedures, and positions for data governance to be sustainable and effective.

Key Benefits Achieved

Prioritized initiatives with dependencies mapped out.

A clearly communicated plan for data governance that will have full business backing.

Activities

4.1 Identify and prioritize next steps

4.2 Define roles and responsibilities and complete a high-level RACI

4.3 Wrap-up and discuss next steps and post-workshop support

Outputs

Initialized roadmap

Initialized RACI

Further reading

Establish Data Governance

Deliver measurable business value.

Executive Brief

Analyst Perspective

Establish a data governance program that brings value to your organization.

Picture of analyst

Data governance does not sit as an island on its own in the organization – it must align with and be driven by your enterprise governance. As you build out data governance in your organization, it’s important to keep in mind that this program is meant to be an enabling framework of oversight and accountabilities for managing, handling, and protecting your company’s data assets. It should never be perceived as bureaucratic or inhibiting to your data users. It should deliver agreed-upon models that are conducive to your organization’s operating culture, offering clarity on who can do what with the data and via what means. Data governance is the key enabler for bringing high-quality, trusted, secure, and discoverable data to the right users across your organization. Promote and drive the responsible and ethical use of data while helping to build and foster an organizational culture of data excellence.

Crystal Singh

Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice

Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

The amount of data within organizations is growing at an exponential rate, creating a need to adopt a formal approach to governing data. However, many organizations remain uninformed on how to effectively govern their data. Comprehensive data governance should define leadership, accountability, and responsibility related to data use and handling and be supported by a well-oiled operating model and relevant policies and procedures. This will help ensure the right data gets to the right people at the right time, using the right mechanisms.

Common Obstacles

Organizations are faced with challenges associated with changing data landscapes, evolving business models, industry disruptions, regulatory and compliance obligations, and changing and maturing user landscape and demand for data. Although the need for a data governance program is often evident, organizations miss the mark when their data governance efforts are not directly aligned to delivering measurable business value. Initiatives should support key strategic initiatives, as well as value streams and their underlying business capabilities.

Info-Tech’s Approach

Info-Tech’s approach to establishing and sustaining effective data governance is anchored in the strong alignment of organizational value streams and their business capabilities with key data governance dimensions and initiatives. Organizations should:

  • Align their data governance with enterprise governance, business strategy and value streams to ensure the program delivers measurable business value.
  • Understand their current data governance capabilities so as to build out a future state that is right-sized and relevant.
  • Define data leadership, accountability, and responsibility. Support these with an operating model that effectively manages change and communication and fosters a culture of data excellence.

Info-Tech Insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operating costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and increased business risk.

Your challenge

This research is designed to help organizations build and sustain an effective data governance program.

  • Your organization has recognized the need to treat data as a corporate asset for generating business value and/or managing and mitigating risk.
  • This has brought data governance to the forefront and highlighted the need to build a performance-driven enterprise program for delivering quality, trusted, and readily consumable data to users.
  • An effective data governance program is one that defines leadership, accountability, and responsibility related to data use and handling. It’s supported by a well-oiled operating model and relevant policies and procedures, all of which help build and foster a culture of data excellence where the right users get access to the right data at the right time via the right mechanisms.

As you embark on establishing data governance in your organization, it’s vital to ensure from the get-go that you define the drivers and business context for the program. Data governance should never be attempted without direction on how the program will yield measurable business value.

“Data processing and cleanup can consume more than half of an analytics team’s time, including that of highly paid data scientists, which limits scalability and frustrates employees.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

Image is a circle graph and 30% of it is coloured with the number 30% in the middle of the graph

“The productivity of employees across the organization can suffer.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

Respondents to McKinsey’s 2019 Global Data Transformation Survey reported that an average of 30% of their total enterprise time was spent on non-value-added tasks because of poor data quality and availability. – Petzold, et al., 2020

Common obstacles

Some of the barriers that make data governance difficult to address for many organizations include:

  • Gaps in communicating the strategic value of data and data governance to the organization. This is vital for securing senior leadership buy-in and support, which, in turn, is crucial for sustained success of the data governance program.
  • Misinterpretation or a lack of understanding about data governance, including what it means for the organization and the individual data user.
  • A perception that data governance is inhibiting or an added layer of bureaucracy or complication rather than an enabling and empowering framework for stakeholders in their use and handling of data.
  • Embarking on data governance without firmly substantiating and understanding the organizational drivers for doing so. How is data governance going to support the organization’s value streams and their various business capabilities?
  • Neglecting to define and measure success and performance. Just as in any other enterprise initiative, you have to be able to demonstrate an ROI for time, resources and funding. These metrics must demonstrate the measurable business value that data governance brings to the organization.
  • Failure to align data governance with enterprise governance.
Image is a circle graph and 78% of it is coloured with the number 78% in the middle of the graph

78% of companies (and 92% of top-tier companies) have a corporate initiative to become more data-driven. – Alation, 2020

Image is a circle graph and 58% of it is coloured with the number 58% in the middle of the graph

But despite these ambitions, there appears to be a “data culture disconnect” – 58% of leaders overestimate the current data culture of their enterprises, giving a grade higher than the one produced by the study. – Fregoni, 2020

The strategic value of data

Power intelligent and transformative organizational performance through leveraging data.

Respond to industry disruptors

Optimize the way you serve your stakeholders and customers

Develop products and services to meet ever-evolving needs

Manage operations and mitigate risk

Harness the value of your data

The journey to being data-driven

The journey to declaring that you are a data-driven organization requires a pit stop at data enablement.

The Data Economy

Data Disengaged

You have a low appetite for data and rarely use data for decision making.

Data Enabled

Technology, data architecture, and people and processes are optimized and supported by data governance.

Data Driven

You are differentiating and competing on data and analytics; described as a “data first” organization. You’re collaborating through data. Data is an asset.

Data governance is essential for any organization that makes decisions about how it uses its data.

Data governance is an enabling framework of decision rights, responsibilities, and accountabilities for data assets across the enterprise.

Data governance is:

  • Executed according to agreed-upon models that describe who can take what actions with what information, when, and using what methods (Olavsrud, 2021).
  • True business-IT collaboration that will lead to increased consistency and confidence in data to support decision making. This, in turn, helps fuel innovation and growth.

If done correctly, data governance is not:

  • An annoying, finger-waving roadblock in the way of getting things done.
  • Meant to solve all data-related business or IT problems in an organization.
  • An inhibitor or impediment to using and sharing data.

Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

Create impactful data governance by embedding it within enterprise governance

A model is depicted to show the relationship between enterprise governance and data governance.

Organizational drivers for data governance

Data governance personas:

Conformance: Establishing data governance to meet regulations and compliance requirements.

Performance: Establishing data governance to fuel data-driven decision making for driving business value and managing and mitigating business risk.

Two images are depicted that show the difference between conformance and performance.

Data Governance is not a one-person show

  • Data governance needs a leader and a home. Define who is going to be leading, driving, and steering data governance in your organization.
  • Senior executive leaders play a crucial role in championing and bringing visibility to the value of data and data governance. This is vital for building and fostering a culture of data excellence.
  • Effective data governance comes with business and IT alignment, collaboration, and formally defined roles around data leadership, ownership, and stewardship.
Four circles are depicted. There is one person in the circle on the left and is labelled: Data Governance Leadership. The circle beside it has two people in it and labelled: Organizational Champions. The circle beside it has three people in it and labelled: Data Owners, Stewards & Custodians. The last circle has four people in it and labelled: The Organization & Data Storytellers.

Traditional data governance organizational structure

A traditional structure includes committees and roles that span across strategic, tactical, and operational duties. There is no one-size-fits-all data governance structure. However, most organizations follow a similar pattern when establishing committees, councils, and cross-functional groups. Most organizations strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic and operational level. Several factors will influence the structure of the program, such as the focus of the data governance project and the maturity and size of the organization.

A triangular model is depicted and is split into three tiers to show the traditional data governance organizational structure.

A healthy data culture is key to amplifying the power of your data.

“Albert Einstein is said to have remarked, ‘The world cannot be changed without changing our thinking.’ What is clear is that the greatest barrier to data success today is business culture, not lagging technology. “– Randy Bean, 2020

What does it look like?

  • Everybody knows the data.
  • Everybody trusts the data.
  • Everybody talks about the data.

“It is not enough for companies to embrace modern data architectures, agile methodologies, and integrated business-data teams, or to establish centers of excellence to accelerate data initiatives, when only about 1 in 4 executives reported that their organization has successfully forged a data culture.”– Randy Bean, 2020

Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture

  • In a data-driven culture, decisions are made based on data evidence, not on gut instinct.
  • Data often has untapped potential. A data-driven culture builds tools and skills, builds users’ trust in the condition and sources of data, and raises the data skills and understanding among their people on the front lines.
  • Building a data culture takes an ongoing investment of time, effort, and money. This investment will not achieve the transformation you want without data literacy at the grassroots level.

Data-driven culture = “data matters to our company”

Despite investments in data initiative, organizations are carrying high levels of data debt

Data debt is “the accumulated cost that is associated with the sub-optimal governance of data assets in an enterprise, like technical debt.”

Data debt is a problem for 78% of organizations.

40% of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.

66% of organizations say a backlog of data debt is impacting new data management initiatives.

33% of organizations are not able to get value from a new system or technology investment.

30% of organizations are unable to become data-driven.

Source: Experian, 2020

Absent or sub-optimal data governance leads to data debt

Only 3% of companies’ data meets basic quality standards. (Source: Nagle, et al., 2017)

Organizations suspect 28% of their customer and prospect data is inaccurate in some way. (Source: Experian, 2020)

Only 51% of organizations consider the current state of their CRM or ERP data to be clean, allowing them to fully leverage it. (Source: Experian, 2020)

35% of organizations say they’re not able to see a ROI for data management initiatives. (Source: Experian, 2020)

Embrace the technology

Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:

  • Data catalog
  • Business data glossary
  • Data lineage
  • Metadata management

While data governance tools and technologies are no panacea, leverage their automated and AI-enabled capabilities to augment your data governance program.

Logos of data governance tools and technology.

Measure success to demonstrate tangible business value

Put data governance into the context of the business:

  • Tie the value of data governance and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.
  • Leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with senior leadership.

Don’t let measurement be an afterthought:

Start substantiating early on how you are going to measure success as your data governance program evolves.

Build a right-sized roadmap

Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right-sized to deliver value in your organization.

Key considerations:

  • When building your data governance roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
  • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data governance partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
  • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organization’s fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolize the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data governance milestones.

Sample milestones:

Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Definition

Define the home for data governance and other key roles around ownership and stewardship, as approved by senior leadership.

Data Governance Charter and Policies

Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.

Data Culture Diagnostic

Understand the organization’s current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.

Use Case Build and Prioritization

Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritize accordingly.

Business Data Glossary

Build and/or refresh the business’ glossary for addressing data definitions and standardization issues.

Tools & Technology

Explore the tools and technology offering in the data governance space that would serve as an enabler to the program. (e.g. RFI, RFP).

Key takeaways for effective business-driven data governance

Data governance leadership and sponsorship is key.

Ensure strategic business alignment.

Build and foster a culture of data excellence.

Evolve along the data journey.

Make data governance an enabler, not a hindrance.

Insight summary

Overarching insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face the impact of elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

Insight 1

Data governance should not sit as an island in your organization. It must continuously align with the organization’s enterprise governance function. It shouldn’t be perceived as a pet project of IT, but rather as an enterprise-wide, business-driven initiative.

Insight 2

Ensure your data governance program delivers measurable business value by aligning the associated data governance initiatives with the business architecture. Leverage the measures of success or KPIs of the underlying business capabilities to demonstrate the value data governance has yielded for the organization.

Insight 3

Data governance remains the foundation of all forms of reporting and analytics. Advanced capabilities such as AI and machine learning require effectively governed data to fuel their success.

Tactical insight

Tailor your data literacy program to meet your organization’s needs, filling your range of knowledge gaps and catering to your different levels of stakeholders. When it comes to rolling out a data literacy program, there is no one-size-fits-all solution. Your data literacy program is intended to fill the knowledge gaps about data, as they exist in your organization. It should be targeted across the board – from your executive leadership and management through to the subject matter experts across different lines of the business in your organization.

Info-Tech’s methodology for establishing data governance

1. Build Business and User Context 2. Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities 3. Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan
Phase Steps
  1. Substantiate Business Drivers
  2. Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance
  1. Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
  2. Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture
  1. Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan
Phase Outcomes
  • Your organization’s business capabilities and value streams
  • A business capability map for your organization
  • Categorization of your organization’s key capabilities
  • A strategy map tied to data governance
  • High-value use cases for data governance
  • An understanding of the core components of an effective data governance program
  • An understanding your organization’s current data culture
  • A data governance roadmap and target-state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook data-verified=

Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

Use the Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook as you plan, build, roll-out, and scale data governance in your organization.

Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Use Case Framework Template

Data Use Case Framework Template

This template takes you through a business needs gathering activity to highlight and create relevant use cases around the organization’s data-related problems and opportunities.

Screenshot of Info-Tech's Business Data Glossary data-verified=

Business Data Glossary

Use this template to document the key data assets that are to be governed and create a data flow diagram for your organization.

Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard data-verified=

Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard

Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to understand how your organization scores across 10 areas relating to data culture.

Key deliverable:

Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

Measure the value of this blueprint

Leverage this blueprint’s approach to ensure your data governance initiatives align and support your key value streams and their business capabilities.

  • Aligning your data governance program and its initiatives to your organization’s business capabilities is vital for tracing and demonstrating measurable business value for the program.
  • This alignment of data governance with value streams and business capabilities enables you to use business-defined KPIs and demonstrate tangible value.
Screenshot from this blueprint on the Measurable Business Value

In phases 1 and 2 of this blueprint, we will help you establish the business context, define your business drivers and KPIs, and understand your current data governance capabilities and strengths.

In phase 3, we will help you develop a plan and a roadmap for addressing any gaps and improving the relevant data governance capabilities so that data is well positioned to deliver on those defined business metrics.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

"Our team, has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

Guided Implementation

"Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keeps us on track."

Workshop

"We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

Consulting

"Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

Establish Data Governance project overview

Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

1. Build Business and User context2. Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities3. Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan
Best-Practice Toolkit
  1. Substantiate Business Drivers
  2. Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance
  1. Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
  2. Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture
  1. Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan
Guided Implementation
  • Call 1
  • Call 2
  • Call 3
  • Call 4
  • Call 5
  • Call 6
  • Call 7
  • Call 8
  • Call 9
Phase Outcomes
  • Your organization’s business capabilities and value streams
  • A business capability map for your organization
  • Categorization of your organization’s key capabilities
  • A strategy map tied to data governance
  • High-value use cases for data governance
  • An understanding of the core components of an effective data governance program
  • An understanding your organization’s current data culture
  • A data governance roadmap and target-state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

Guided Implementation

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

An outline of what guided implementation looks like.

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

Workshop overview

Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
Establish Business Context and Value Understand Current Data Governance Capabilities and Plot Target-State Levels Build Data Domain to Data Governance Role Mapping Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State
Activities
  • Establish business context, value, and scope of data governance at the organization
  • Introduction to Info-Tech’s data governance framework
  • Discuss vision and mission for data governance
  • Understand your business architecture, including your business capability map and value streams
  • Build use cases aligned to core business capabilities
  • Understand your current data governance capabilities and maturity
  • Set target state data governance capabilities
  • Evaluate and prioritize performance gaps
  • Develop and consolidate data governance target-state initiatives
  • Define the role of data governance: data domain to data governance role mapping
  • Identify and prioritize next steps
  • Define roles and responsibilities and complete a high-level RACI
  • Wrap-up and discuss next steps and post-workshop support
Deliverables
  1. Sample use cases (tied to the business capability map) and a repeatable use case framework
  2. Vision and mission for data governance
  1. Current state of data governance maturity
  2. Definition of target state
  1. Target-state data governance initiatives
  2. Data domain to data governance role mapping
  1. Initialized roadmap
  2. Initialized RACI

Phase 1

Build Business and User Context

Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 1 is highlighted.

“When business users are invited to participate in the conversation around data with data users and IT, it adds a fundamental dimension — business context. Without a real understanding of how data ties back to the business, the value of analysis and insights can get lost.” – Jason Lim, Alation

This phase will guide you through the following activities:

  • Identify Your Business Capabilities
  • Define your Organization’s Key Business Capabilities
  • Develop a Strategy Map that Aligns Business Capabilities to Your Strategic Focus

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Data Governance Leader/Data Leader (CDO)
  • Senior Business Leaders
  • Business SMEs
  • Data Leadership, Data Owners, Data Stewards and Custodians

Step 1.1

Substantiate Business Drivers

Activities

1.1.1 Identify Your Business Capabilities

1.1.2 Categorize Your Organization’s Key Business Capabilities

1.1.3 Develop a Strategy Map Tied to Data Governance

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Leverage your organization’s existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map, guided by info-Tech’s approach
  • Determine which business capabilities are considered high priority by your organization
  • Map your organization’s strategic objectives to value streams and capabilities to communicate how objectives are realized with the support of data

Outcomes of this step

  • A foundation for data governance initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

Info-Tech Insight

Gaining a sound understanding of your business architecture (value streams and business capabilities) is a critical foundation for establishing and sustaining a data governance program that delivers measurable business value.

1.1.1 Identify Your Business Capabilities

Confirm your organization's existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map:

  • If you have an existing business capability map, meet with the relevant business owners/stakeholders to confirm that the content is accurate and up to date. Confirm the value streams (how your organization creates and captures value) and their business capabilities are reflective of the organization’s current business environment.
  • If you do not have an existing business capability map, follow this activity to initiate the formulation of a map (value streams and related business capabilities):
    1. Define the organization’s value streams. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define how your organization creates and captures value.
    2. Define the relevant business capabilities. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define the business capabilities.

Note: A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities are business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.” They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of each other, and typically will have a defined business outcome.

Input

  • List of confirmed value streams and their related business capabilities

Output

  • Business capability map with value streams for your organization

Materials

  • Your existing business capability map or the template provided in the Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook accompanying this blueprint

Participants

  • Key business stakeholders
  • Data stewards
  • Data custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group

For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

Define or validate the organization’s value streams

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. These value realization activities, in turn, depend on data.

If the organization does not have a business architecture function to conduct and guide Activity 1.1.1, you can leverage the following approach:

  • Meet with key stakeholders regarding this topic, then discuss and document your findings.
  • When trying to identify the right stakeholders, consider: Who are the decision makers and key influencers? Who will impact this piece of business architecture related work? Who has the relevant skills, competencies, experience, and knowledge about the organization?
  • Engage with these stakeholders to define and validate how the organization creates value.
  • Consider:
    • Who are your main stakeholders? This will depend on the industry in which you operate. For example, customers, residents, citizens, constituents, students, patients.
    • What are your stakeholders looking to accomplish?
    • How does your organization’s products and/or services help them accomplish that?
    • What are the benefits your organization delivers to them and how does your organization deliver those benefits?
    • How do your stakeholders receive those benefits?

Align data governance to the organization's value realization activities.

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Info-Tech Insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face the possibilities of elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, negative impact to reputation and brand, and/or increased exposure to business risk.

Example of value streams – Retail Banking

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Retail Banking

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Model example of value streams for retail banking.

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

Example of value streams – Higher Education

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Higher Education

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Model example of value streams for higher education

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

Example of value streams – Local Government

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Local Government

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Model example of value streams for local government

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

Example of value streams – Manufacturing

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Manufacturing

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Model example of value streams for manufacturing

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

Example of value streams – Retail

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Retail

Model example of value streams for retail

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

Define the organization’s business capabilities in a business capability map

A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities represent stable business functions and typically will have a defined business outcome.

Business capabilities can be thought of as business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.”

If your organization doesn’t already have a business capability map, you can leverage the following approach to build one. This initiative requires a good understanding of the business. By working with the right stakeholders, you can develop a business capability map that speaks a common language and accurately depicts your business.

Working with the stakeholders as described above:

  • Analyze the value streams to identify and describe the organization’s capabilities that support them.
  • Consider: What is the objective of your value stream? (This can highlight which capabilities support which value stream.)
  • As you initiate your engagement with your stakeholders, don’t start a blank page. Leverage the examples on the next slides as a starting point for your business capability map.
  • When using these examples, consider: What are the activities that make up your particular business? Keep the ones that apply to your organization, remove the ones that don’t, and add any needed.

Align data governance to the organization's value realization activities.

Info-Tech Insight

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

Example business capability map – Retail Banking

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Retail Banking

Model example business capability map for retail banking

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

Example business capability map – Higher Education

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Higher Education

Model example business capability map for higher education

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

Example business capability map – Local Government

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Local Government

Model example business capability map for local government

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

Example business capability map – Manufacturing

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Manufacturing

Model example business capability map for manufacturing

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

Example business capability map - Retail

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Retail

Model example business capability map for retail

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

1.1.2 Categorize Your Organization’s Key Capabilities

Determine which capabilities are considered high priority in your organization.

  1. Categorize or heatmap the organization’s key capabilities. Consult with senior and other key business stakeholders to categorize and prioritize the business’ capabilities. This will aid in ensuring your data governance future state planning is aligned with the mandate of the business. One approach to prioritizing capabilities with business stakeholders is to examine them through the lens of cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, and/or by high value/high risk.
  2. Identify cost advantage creators. Focus on capabilities that drive a cost advantage for your organization. Highlight these capabilities and prioritize programs that support them.
  3. Identify competitive advantage differentiators. Focus on capabilities that give your organization an edge over rivals or other players in your industry.

This categorization/prioritization exercise helps highlight prime areas of opportunity for building use cases, determining prioritization, and the overall optimization of data and data governance.

Input

  • Strategic insight from senior business stakeholders on the business capabilities that drive value for the organization

Output

  • Business capabilities categorized and prioritized (e.g. cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, high value/high risk)

Materials

  • Your existing business capability map or the business capability map derived in the previous activity

Participants

  • Key business stakeholders
  • Data stewards
  • Data custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group

For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

Example of business capabilities categorization or heatmapping – Retail

This exercise is useful in ensuring the data governance program is focused and aligned to support the priorities and direction of the business.

  • Depending on the mandate from the business, priority may be on developing cost advantage. Hence the capabilities that deliver efficiency gains are the ones considered to be cost advantage creators.
  • The business’ priority may be on maintaining or gaining a competitive advantage over its industry counterparts. Differentiation might be achieved in delivering unique or enhanced products, services, and/or experiences, and the focus will tend to be on the capabilities that are more end-stakeholder-facing (e.g. customer-, student-, patient,- and/or constituent-facing). These are the organization’s competitive advantage creators.

Example: Retail

Example of business capabilities categorization or heatmapping – Retail

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

1.1.3 Develop a Strategy Map Tied to Data Governance

Identify the strategic objectives for the business. Knowing the key strategic objectives will drive business-data governance alignment. It’s important to make sure the right strategic objectives of the organization have been identified and are well understood.

  1. Meet with senior business leaders and other relevant stakeholders to help identify and document the key strategic objectives for the business.
  2. Leverage their knowledge of the organization’s business strategy and strategic priorities to visually represent how these map to value streams, business capabilities, and, ultimately, to data and data governance needs and initiatives. Tip: Your map is one way to visually communicate and link the business strategy to other levels of the organization.
  3. Confirm the strategy mapping with other relevant stakeholders.

Guide to creating your map: Starting with strategic objectives, map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance to initiatives that support those capabilities. This is one approach to help you prioritize the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organization.

Input

  • Strategic objectives as outlined by the organization’s business strategy and confirmed by senior leaders

Output

  • A strategy map that maps your organizational strategic objectives to value streams, business capabilities, and, ultimately, to data program

Materials

Participants

  • Key business stakeholders
  • Data stewards
  • Data custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group

Download Info-Tech’s Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

Example of a strategy map tied to data governance

  • Strategic objectives are the outcomes that the organization is looking to achieve.
  • Value streams enable an organization to create and capture value in the market through interconnected activities that support strategic objectives.
  • Business capabilities define what a business does to enable value creation in value streams.
  • Data capabilities and initiatives are descriptions of action items on the data and data governance roadmap and which will enable one or multiple business capabilities in its desired target state.

Info-Tech Tip:

Start with the strategic objectives, then map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance initiatives that support those capabilities. This process will help you prioritize the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organization.

Example: Retail

Example of a strategy map tied to data governance for retail

For this strategy map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

Step 1.2

Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance

Activities

1.2.1 Build High-Value Use Cases

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Leveraging your categorized business capability map to conduct deep-dive sessions with key business stakeholders for creating high-value uses cases
  • Discussing current challenges, risks, and opportunities associated with the use of data across the lines of business
  • Exploring which other business capabilities, stakeholder groups, and business units will be impacted

Outcomes of this step

  • Relevant use cases that articulate the data-related challenges, needs, or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed ,will deliver value to the organization

Info-Tech Tip

One of the most important aspects when building use cases is to ensure you include KPIs or measures of success. You have to be able to demonstrate how the use case ties back to the organizational priorities or delivers measurable business value. Leverage the KPIs and success factors of the business capabilities tied to each particular use case.

1.2.1 Build High-Value Use Cases

This business needs-gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

  1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owner, stewards, SMEs) from a particular line of business as well as the relevant data custodian(s) to build cases for their units. Leverage the business capability map you created for facilitating this act.
  2. Leverage Info-Tech’s framework for data requirements and methodology for creating use cases, as outlined in the Data Use Case Framework Template and seen on the next slide.
  3. Have the stakeholders move through each breakout session outlined in the Use Case Worksheet. Use flip charts or a whiteboard to brainstorm and document their thoughts.
  4. Debrief and document results in the Data Use Case Framework Template
  5. Repeat this exercise with as many lines of the business as possible, leveraging your business capability map to guide your progress and align with business value.

Tip: Don’t conclude these use case discussions without substantiating what measures of success will be used to demonstrate the business value of the effort to produce the desired future state, as relevant to each particular use case.

Input

  • Value streams and business capabilities as defined by business leaders
  • Business stakeholders’ subject area expertise
  • Data custodian systems, integration, and data knowledge

Output

  • Use cases that articulate data-related challenges, needs or opportunities that are tied to defined business capabilities and hence if addressed will deliver measurable value to the organization.

Materials

  • Your business capability map from activity 1.1.1
  • Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template
  • Whiteboard or flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
  • Markers/pens

Participants

  • Key business stakeholders
  • Data stewards and business SMEs
  • Data custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group

Download Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template

Info-Tech’s Framework for Building Use Cases

Objective: This business needs-gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

Leveraging your business capability map, build use cases that align with the organization’s key business capabilities.

Consider:

  • Is the business capability a cost advantage creator or an industry differentiator?
  • Is the business capability currently underserved by data?
  • Does this need to be addressed? If so, is this risk- or value-driven?

Info-Tech’s Data Requirements and Mapping Methodology for Creating Use Cases

  1. What business capability (or capabilities) is this use case tied to for your business area(s)?
  2. What are your data-related challenges in performing this today?
  3. What are the steps in this process/activity today?
  4. What are the applications/systems used at each step today?
  5. What data domains are involved, created, used, and/or transformed at each step today?
  6. What does an ideal or improved state look like?
  7. What other business units, business capabilities, activities, and/or processes will be impacted or improved if this issue was solved?
  8. Who are the stakeholders impacted by these changes? Who needs to be consulted?
  9. What are the risks to the organization (business capability, revenue, reputation, customer loyalty, etc.) if this is not addressed?
  10. What compliance, regulatory, and/or policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?
  11. What measures of success or change should we use to prove the value of the effort (such as KPIs, ROI)? What is the measurable business value of doing this?

The resulting use cases are to be prioritized and leveraged for informing the business case and the data governance capabilities optimization plan.

Taken from Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template

Phase 2

Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities

Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 2 is highlighted.

This phase will guide you through the following activities:

  • Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
  • Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Data Leadership
  • Data Ownership & Stewardship
  • Policies & Procedures
  • Data Literacy & Culture
  • Operating Model
  • Data Management
  • Data Privacy & Security
  • Enterprise Projects & Services

Step 2.1

Understand the Key Components of Data Governance

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Understanding the core components of an effective data governance program and determining your organization’s current capabilities in these areas:
    • Data Leadership
    • Data Ownership & Stewardship
    • Policies & Procedures
    • Data Literacy & Culture
    • Operating Model
    • Data Management
    • Data Privacy & Security
    • Enterprise Projects & Services

Outcomes of this step

  • An understanding the core components of an effective data governance program
  • An understanding your organization’s current data governance capabilities

Review: Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

Key components of data governance

A well-defined data governance program will deliver:

  • Defined accountability and responsibility for data.
  • Improved knowledge and common understanding of the organization’s data assets.
  • Elevated trust and confidence in traceable data.
  • Improved data ROI and reduced data debt.
  • An enabling framework for supporting the ethical use and handling of data.
  • A foundation for building and fostering a data-driven and data-literate organizational culture.

The key components of establishing sustainable enterprise data governance, taken from Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework:

  • Data Leadership
  • Data Ownership & Stewardship
  • Operating Model
  • Policies & Procedures
  • Data Literacy & Culture
  • Data Management
  • Data Privacy & Security
  • Enterprise Projects & Services

Data Leadership

  • Data governance needs a dedicated head or leader to steer the organization’s data governance program.
  • For organizations that do have a chief data officer (CDO), their office is the ideal and effective home for data governance.
  • Heads of data governance also have titles such as director of data governance, director of data quality, and director of analytics.
  • The head of your data governance program works with all stakeholders and partners to ensure there is continuous enterprise governance alignment and oversight and to drive the program’s direction.
  • While key stakeholders from the business and IT will play vital data governance roles, the head of data governance steers the various components, stakeholders, and initiatives, and provides oversight of the overall program.
  • Vital data governance roles include: data owners, data stewards, data custodians, data governance steering committee (or your organization’s equivalent), and any data governance working group(s).

The role of the CDO: the voice of data

The office of the chief data officer (CDO):

  • Has a cross-organizational vision and strategy for data.
  • Owns and drives the data strategy; ensures it supports the overall organizational strategic direction and business goals.
  • Leads the organizational data initiatives, including data governance
  • Is accountable for the policy, strategy, data standards, and data literacy necessary for the organization to operate effectively.
  • Educates users and leaders about what it means to be “data-driven.”
  • Builds and fosters a culture of data excellence.

“Compared to most of their C-suite colleagues, the CDO is faced with a unique set of problems. The role is still being defined. The chief data officer is bringing a new dimension and focus to the organization: ‘data.’ ”

– Carruthers and Jackson, 2020

Who does the CDO report to?

Example reporting structure.
  • The CDO should be a true C- level executive.
  • Where the organization places the CDO role in the structure sends an important signal to the business about how much it values data.

“The title matters. In my opinion, you can’t have a CDO without executive authority. Otherwise no one will listen.”

– Anonymous European CDO

“The reporting structure depends on who’s the ‘glue’ that ties together all these uniquely skilled individuals.”

– John Kemp, Senior Director, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group

Data Ownership & Stewardship

Who are best suited to be data owners?

  • Wherever they may sit in your organization, data owners will typically have the highest stake in that data.
  • Data owners need to be suitably senior and have the necessary decision-making power.
  • They have the highest interest in the related business data domain, whether they are the head of a business unit or the head of a line of business that produces data or consumes data (or both).
  • If they are neither of these, it’s unlikely they will have the interest in the data (in terms of its quality, protection, ethical use, and handling, for instance) necessary to undertake and adopt the role effectively.

Data owners are typically senior business leaders with the following characteristics:

  • Positioned to accept accountability for their data domain.
  • Hold authority and influence to affect change, including across business processes and systems, needed to improve data quality, use, handling, integration, etc.
  • Have access to a budget and resources for data initiatives such as resolving data quality issues, data cleansing initiatives, business data catalog build, related tools and technology, policy management, etc.
  • Hold the influence needed to drive change in behavior and culture.
  • Act as ambassadors of data and its value as an organizational strategic asset.

Right-size your data governance organizational structure

  • Most organizations strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic and operational level. Several factors will influence the structure of the program such as the focus of the data governance project as well as the maturity and size of the organization.
  • Your data governance structure has to work for your organization, and it has to evolve as the organization evolves.
  • Formulate your blend of data governance roles, committees, councils, and cross-functional groups, that make sense for your organization.
  • Your data governance organizational structure should not add complexity or bureaucracy to your organization’s data landscape; it should support and enable your principle of treating data as an asset.

There is no one-size-fits-all data governance organizational structure.

Example of a Data Governance Organizational Structure

Critical roles and responsibilities for data governance

Data Governance Working Groups

Data governance working groups:

  • Are cross-functional teams
  • Deliver on data governance projects, initiatives, and ad hoc review committees.

Data Stewards

Traditionally, data stewards:

  • Serve on an operational level addressing issues related to adherence to standards/procedures, monitoring data quality, raising issues identified, etc.
  • Are responsible for managing access, quality, escalating issues, etc.

Data Custodians

  • Traditionally, data custodians:
  • Serve on an operational level addressing issues related to data and database administration.
  • Support the management of access, data quality, escalating issues, etc.
  • Are SMEs from IT and database administration.

Example: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

Info-Tech Insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

Enabling business capabilities with data governance role definitions

Example: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

Operating Model

Your operating model is the key to designing and operationalizing a form of data governance that delivers measurable business value to your organization.

“Generate excitement for data: When people are excited and committed to the vision of data enablement, they’re more likely to help ensure that data is high quality and safe.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

Operating Model

Defining your data governance operating model will help create a well-oiled program that sustainably delivers value to the organization and manages risks while building and fostering a culture of data excellence along the way. Some organizations are able to establish a formal data governance office, whether independent or attached to the office of the chief data officer. Regardless of how you are organized, data governance requires a home, a leader, and an operating model to ensure its sustainability and evolution.

Examples of focus areas for your operating model:

  • Delivery: While there are core tenets to every data governance program, there is a level of variability in the implementation of data governance programs across organizations, sectors, and industries. Every organization has its own particular drivers and mandates, so the level and rigor applied will also vary.
  • The key is to determine what style will work best in your organization, taking into consideration your organizational culture, executive leadership support (present and ongoing), catalysts such as other enterprise-wide transformative and modernization initiatives, and/or regulatory and compliances drivers.

  • Communication: Communication is vital across all levels and stakeholder groups. For instance, there needs to be communication from the data governance office up to senior leadership, as well as communication within the data governance organization, which is typically made up of the data governance steering committee, data governance council, executive sponsor/champion, data stewards, and data custodians and working groups.
  • Furthermore, communication with the wider organization of data producers, users, and consumers is one of the core elements of the overall data governance communications plan.

Communication is vital for ensuring acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users as well as for sharing success stories of the program.

Operating Model

Tie the value of data governance and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.

“Leading organizations invest in change management to build data supporters and convert the skeptics. This can be the most difficult part of the program, as it requires motivating employees to use data and encouraging producers to share it (and ideally improve its quality at the source)[.]” – Petzold, et al., 2020

Operating Model

Examples of focus areas for your operating model (continued):

  • Change management and issue resolution: Data governance initiatives will very likely bring about a level of organizational disruption, with governance recommendations and future state requiring potentially significant business change. This may include a redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units, which will require tweaking the organization’s culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data.
  • Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the steps necessary to adapt and reduce potential confrontation. By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

    Attempting to implement change without an effective communications plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

  • Performance measuring, monitoring and reporting: Measuring and reporting on performance, successes, and realization of tangible business value are a must for sustaining, growing, and scaling your data governance program.
  • Aligning your data governance to the organization's value realization activities enables you to leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with your senior business leadership.

Info-Tech Tip:

Launching a data governance program will bring with it a level of disruption to the culture of the organization. That disruption doesn’t have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

Policies, Procedures & Standards

“Data standards are the rules by which data are described and recorded. In order to share, exchange, and understand data, we must standardize the format as well as the meaning.” – U.S. Geological Survey

Policies, Procedures & Standards

  • When defining, updating, or refreshing your data policies, procedures, and standards, ensure they are relevant, serve a purpose, and/or support the use of data in the organization.
  • Avoid the common pitfall of building out a host of policies, procedures, and standards that are never used or followed by users and therefore don’t bring value or serve to mitigate risk for the organization.
  • Data policies can be thought of as formal statements and are typically created, approved, and updated by the organization’s data decision-making body (such as a data governance steering committee).
  • Data standards and procedures function as actions, or rules, that support the policies and their statements.
  • Standards and procedures are designed to standardize the processes during the overall data lifecycle. Procedures are instructions to achieve the objectives of the policies. The procedures are iterative and will be updated with approval from your data governance committee as needed.
  • Your organization’s data policies, standards, and procedures should not bog down or inhibit users; rather, they should enable confident data use and handling across the overall data lifecycle. They should support more effective and seamless data capture, integration, aggregation, sharing, and retention of data in the organization.

Examples of data policies:

  • Data Classification Policy
  • Data Retention Policy
  • Data Entry Policy
  • Data Backup Policy
  • Data Provenance Policy
  • Data Management Policy

Data Domain Documentation

Select the correct granularity for your business need

Diagram of data domain documentation
Sources: Dataversity; Atlan; Analytics8

Data Domain Documentation Examples

Data Domain Documentation Examples

Data Culture

“Organizational culture can accelerate the application of analytics, amplify its power, and steer companies away from risky outcomes.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

A healthy data culture is key to amplifying the power of your data and to building and sustaining an effective data governance program.

What does a healthy data culture look like?

  • Everybody knows the data.
  • Everybody trusts the data.
  • Everybody talks about the data.

Building a culture of data excellence.

Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to understand your organization’s culture around data.

Screenshot of Data Culture Scorecard

Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for more information on the Data Culture Diagnostic

Cultivating a data-driven culture is not easy

“People are at the heart of every culture, and one of the biggest challenges to creating a data culture is bringing everyone into the fold.” – Lim, Alation

It cannot be purchased or manufactured,

It must be nurtured and developed,

And it must evolve as the business, user, and data landscapes evolve.

“Companies that have succeeded in their data-driven efforts understand that forging a data culture is a relentless pursuit, and magic bullets and bromides do not deliver results.” – Randy Bean, 2020

Hallmarks of a data-driven culture

There is a trusted, single source of data the whole company can draw from.

There’s a business glossary and data catalog and users know what the data fields mean.

Users have access to data and analytics tools. Employees can leverage data immediately to resolve a situation, perform an activity, or make a decision – including frontline workers.

Data literacy, the ability to collect, manage, evaluate, and apply data in a critical manner, is high.

Data is used for decision making. The company encourages decisions based on objective data and the intelligent application of it.

A data-driven culture requires a number of elements:

  • High-quality data
  • Broad access and data literacy
  • Data-driven decision-making processes
  • Effective communication

Data Literacy

Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture.

  • Building a data-driven culture takes an ongoing investment of time, effort, and money.
  • This investment will not realize its full return without building up the organization’s data literacy.
  • Data literacy is about filling data knowledge gaps across all levels of the organization.
  • It’s about ensuring all users – senior leadership right through to core users – are equipped with appropriate levels of training, skills, understanding, and awareness around the organization’s data and the use of associated tools and technologies. Data literacy ensures users have the data they need and they know how to interpret and leverage it.
  • Data literacy drives the appetite, demand, and consumption for data.
  • A data-literate culture is one where the users feel confident and skilled in their use of data, leveraging it for making informed or evidence-based decisions and generating insights for the organization.

Data Management

  • Data governance serves as an enabler to all of the core components that make up data management:
    • Data quality management
    • Data architecture management
    • Data platform
    • Data integration
    • Data operations management
    • Data risk management
    • Reference and master data management (MDM)
    • Document and content management
    • Metadata management
    • Business intelligence (BI), reporting, analytics and advanced analytics, artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning (ML)
  • Key tools such as the business data glossary and data catalog are vital for operationalizing data governance and in supporting data management disciplines such as data quality management, metadata management, and MDM as well as BI, reporting, and analytics.

Enterprise Projects & Services

  • Data governance serves as an enabler to enterprise projects and services that require, use, share, sell, and/or rely on data for their viability and, ultimately, their success.
  • Folding or embedding data governance into the organization’s project management function or project management office (PMO) serves to ensure that, for any initiative, suitable consideration is given to how data is treated.
  • This may include defining parameters, following standards and procedures around bringing in new sources of data, integrating that data into the organization’s data ecosystem, using and sharing that data, and retaining that data post-project completion.
  • The data governance function helps to identify and manage any ethical issues, whether at the start of the project and/or throughout.
  • It provides a foundation for asking relevant questions as it relates to the use or incorporation of data in delivering the specific project or service. Do we know where the data obtained from? Do we have rights to use that data? Are there legislations, policies, or regulations that guide or dictate how that data can be used? What are the positive effects, negative impacts, and/or risks associated with our intended use of that data? Are we positioned to mitigate those risks?
  • Mature data governance creates organizations where the above considerations around data management and the ethical use and handling of data is routinely implemented across the business and in the rollout and delivery of projects and services.

Data Privacy & Security

  • Data governance supports the organization’s data privacy and security functions.
  • Key tools include the data classification policy and standards and defined roles around data ownership and data stewardship. These are vital for operationalizing data governance and supporting data privacy, security, and the ethical use and handling of data.
  • While some organizations may have a dedicated data security and privacy group, data governance provides an added level of oversight in this regard.
  • Some of the typical checks and balances include ensuring:
    • There are policies and procedures in place to restrict and monitor staff’s access to data (one common way this is done is according to job descriptions and responsibilities) and that these comply with relevant laws and regulations.
    • There’s a data classification scheme in place where data has been classified on a hierarchy of sensitivity (e.g. top secret, confidential, internal, limited, public).
    • The organization has a comprehensive data security framework, including administrative, physical, and technical procedures for addressing data security issues (e.g. password management and regular training).
    • Risk assessments are conducted, including an evaluation of risks and vulnerabilities related to intentional and unintentional misuse of data.
    • Policies and procedures are in place to mitigate the risks associated with incidents such as data breaches.
    • The organization regularly audits and monitors its data security.

Ethical Use & Handling of Data

Data governance will support your organization’s ethical use and handling of data by facilitating definition around important factors, such as:

  • What are the various data assets in the organization and what purpose(s) can they be used for? Are there any limitations?
  • Who is the related data owner? Who holds accountability for that data? Who will be answerable?
  • Where was the data obtained from? What is the intended use of that data? Do you have rights to use that data? Are there legislations, policies, or regulations that guide or dictate how that data can be used?
  • What are the positive effects, negative impacts, and/or risks associated with the use of that data?

Ethical Use & Handling of Data

  • Data governance serves as an enabler to the ethical use and handling of an organization’s data.
  • The Open Data Institute (ODI) defines data ethics as: “A branch of ethics that evaluates data practices with the potential to adversely impact on people and society – in data collection, sharing and use.”
  • Data ethics relates to good practice around how data is collected, used and shared. It’s especially relevant when data activities have the potential to impact people and society, whether directly or indirectly (Open Data Institute, 2019).
  • A failure to handle and use data ethically can negatively impact an organization’s direct stakeholders and/or the public at large, lead to a loss of trust and confidence in the organization's products and services, lead to financial loss, and impact the organization’s brand, reputation, and legal standing.
  • Data governance plays a vital role in building and managing your data assets, knowing what data you have, and knowing the limitations of that data. Data ownership, data stewardship, and your data governance decision-making body are key tenets and foundational components of your data governance. They enable an organization to define, categorize, and confidently make decisions about its data.

Step 2.2

Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

Activities

2.2.1 Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Conduct a data culture survey or leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to increase your understanding of your organization’s data culture

Outcomes of this step

  • An understanding of your organizational data culture

2.2.1 Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

Conduct a Data Culture Survey or Diagnostic

The objectives of conducting a data culture survey are to increase the understanding of the organization's data culture, your users’ appetite for data, and their appreciation for data in terms of governance, quality, accessibility, ownership, and stewardship. To perform a data culture survey:

  1. Identify members of the data user base, data consumers, and other key stakeholders for surveying.
  2. Conduct an information session to introduce Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic survey. Explain the objective and importance of the survey and its role in helping to understand the organization’s current data culture and inform the improvement of that culture.
  3. Roll out the Info-Tech Data Culture Diagnostic survey to the identified users and stakeholders.
  4. Debrief and document the results and scorecard in the Data Strategy Stakeholder Interview Guide and Findings document.

Input

  • Email addresses of participants in your organization who should receive the survey

Output

  • Your organization’s Data Culture Scorecard for understanding current data culture as it relates to the use and consumption of data
  • An understanding of whether data is currently perceived to be an asset to the organization

Materials

Screenshot of Data Culture Scorecard

Participants

  • Participants include those at the senior leadership level through to middle management, as well as other business stakeholders at varying levels across the organization
  • Data owners, stewards, and custodians
  • Core data users and consumers

Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for details on launching a Data Culture Diagnostic.

Phase 3

Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan

Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 3 is highlighted.

“Achieving data success is a journey, not a sprint.” Companies that set a clear course, with reasonable expectations and phased results over a period of time, get to the destination faster.” – Randy Bean, 2020

This phase will guide you through the following activities:

  • Build your Data Governance Roadmap
  • Develop a target state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Data Governance Leadership
  • Data Owners/Data Stewards
  • Data Custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group(s)

Step 3.1

Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Build your data governance roadmap
  • Develop a target state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

Outcomes of this step

  • A foundation for data governance initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

Build a right-sized roadmap

Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right sized to deliver value in your organization.

Key considerations:

  • When building your data governance roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
  • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data governance partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
  • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organization’s fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolize the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data governance milestones.

Sample milestones:

Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Definition

Define the home for data governance and other key roles around ownership and stewardship, as approved by senior leadership.

Data Governance Charter and Policies

Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.

Data Culture Diagnostic

Understand the organization’s current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.

Use Case Build and Prioritization

Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritize accordingly.

Business Data Glossary/Catalog

Build and/or refresh the business’ glossary for addressing data definitions and standardization issues.

Tools & Technology

Explore the tools and technology offering in the data governance space that would serve as an enabler to the program. (e.g. RFI, RFP).

Recall: Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

Build an actionable roadmap

Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Division

Define key roles for getting started.

Use Case Build & Prioritization

Start small and then scale – deliver early wins.

Literacy Program

Start understanding data knowledge gaps, building the program, and delivering.

Tools & Technology

Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you.

Key components of your data governance roadmap

By now, you have assessed current data governance environment and capabilities. Use this assessment, coupled with the driving needs of your business, to plot your data Governance roadmap accordingly.

Sample data governance roadmap milestones:

  • Define data governance leadership.
  • Define and formalize data ownership and stewardship (as well as the role IT/data management will play as data custodians).
  • Build/confirm your business capability map and data domains.
  • Build business data use cases specific to business capabilities.
  • Define business measures/KPIs for the data governance program (i.e. metrics by use case that are relevant to business capabilities).
  • Data management:
    • Build your data glossary or catalog starting with identified and prioritized terms.
    • Define data domains.
  • Design and define the data governance operating model (oversight model definition, communication plan, internal marketing such as townhalls, formulate change management plan, RFP of data governance tool and technology options for supporting data governance and its administration).
  • Data policies and procedures:
    • Formulate, update, refresh, consolidate, rationalize, and/or retire data policies and procedures.
    • Define policy management and administration framework (i.e. roll-out, maintenance, updates, adherence, system to be used).
  • Conduct Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic or survey (across all levels of the organization).
  • Define and formalize the data literacy program (build modules, incorporate into LMS, plan lunch and learn sessions).
  • Data privacy and security: build data classification policy, define classification standards.
  • Enterprise projects and services: embed data governance in the organization’s PMO, conduct “Data Governance 101” for the PMO.

Defining data governance roles and organizational structure at Organization

The approach employed for defining the data governance roles and supporting organizational structure for .

Key Considerations:

  • The data owner and data steward roles are formally defined and documented within the organization. Their involvement is clear, well-defined, and repeatable.
  • There are data owners and data stewards for each data domain within the organization. The data steward role is given to someone with a high degree of subject matter expertise.
  • Data owners and data stewards are effective in their roles by ensuring that their data domain is clean and free of errors and that they protect the organization against data loss.
  • Data owners and data stewards have the authority to make final decisions on data definitions, formats, and standard processes that apply to their respective data sets. Data owners and data stewards have authority regarding who has access to certain data.
  • Data owners and data stewards are not from the IT side of the organization. They understand the lifecycle of the data (how it is created, curated, retrieved, used, archived, and destroyed) and they are well-versed in any compliance requirements as it relates to their data.
  • The data custodian role is formally defined and is given to the relevant IT expert. This is an individual with technical administrative and/or operational responsibility over data (e.g. a DBA).
  • A data governance steering committee exists and is comprised of well-defined roles, responsibilities, executive sponsors, business representatives, and IT experts.
  • The data governance steering committee works to provide oversight and enforce policies, procedures, and standards for governing data.
  • The data governance working group has cross-functional representation. This comprises business and IT representation, as well as project management and change management where applicable: data stewards, data custodians, business subject matter experts, PM, etc.).
  • Data governance meetings are coordinated and communicated about. The meeting agenda is always clear and concise, and meetings review pressing data-related issues. Meeting minutes are consistently documented and communicated.

Sample: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

Info-Tech Insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

Enable business capabilities with data governance role definitions.

Sample: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

Consider your technology options:

Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:

  • Data catalog
  • Business data glossary
  • Data lineage
  • Metadata management

Logos of data governance tools and technology.

These are some of the data governance tools and technology players. Check out SoftwareReviews for help making better software decisions.

Make the data steward the catalyst for organizational change and driving data culture

The data steward must be empowered and backed politically with decision-making authority, or the role becomes stale and powerless.

Ensuring compliance can be difficult. Data stewards may experience pushback from stakeholders who must deliver on the policies, procedures, and processes that the data steward enforces.

Because the data steward must enforce data processes and liaise with so many different people and departments within the organization, the data steward role should be their primary full-time job function – where possible.

However, in circumstances where budget doesn’t allow a full-time data steward role, develop these skills within the organization by adding data steward responsibilities to individuals who are already managing data sets for their department or line of business.

Info-Tech Tip

A stewardship role is generally more about managing the cultural change that data governance brings. This requires the steward to have exceptional interpersonal skills that will assist in building relationships across departmental boundaries and ensuring that all stakeholders within the organization believe in the initiative, understand the anticipated outcomes, and take some level of responsibility for its success.

Changes to organizational data processes are inevitable; have a communication plan in place to manage change

Create awareness of your data governance program. Use knowledge transfer to get as many people on board as possible.

Data governance initiatives must contain a strong organizational disruption component. A clear and concise communication strategy that conveys milestones and success stories will address the various concerns that business unit stakeholders may have.

By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

Governance recommendations will require significant business change. The redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units will require an overhaul of the organization’s culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data. Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the necessary steps to adapt and reduce potential confrontation.

Because a data governance initiative will involve data-driven business units across the organization, the governance team must present a compelling case for data governance to ensure acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users.

Attempting to implement change without an effective communication plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

Info-Tech Insight

Launching a data governance initiative is guaranteed to disrupt the culture of the organization. That disruption doesn’t have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

Create a common data governance vision that is consistently communicated to the organization

A data governance program should be an enterprise-wide initiative.

To create a strong vision for data governance, there must be participation from the business and IT. A common vision will articulate the state the organization wishes to achieve and how it will reach that state. Visioning helps to develop long-term goals and direction.

Once the vision is established, it must be effectively communicated to everyone, especially those who are involved in creating, managing, disposing, or archiving data.

The data governance program should be periodically refined. This will ensure the organization continues to incorporate best methods and practices as the organization grows and data needs evolve.

Info-Tech Tips

  • Use information from the stakeholder interviews to derive business goals and objectives.
  • Work to integrate different opinions and perspectives into the overall vision for data governance.
  • Brainstorm guiding principles for data and understand the overall value to the organization.

Develop a compelling data governance communications plan to get all departmental lines of business on board

A data governance program will impact all data-driven business units within the organization.

A successful data governance communications plan involves making the initiative visible and promoting staff awareness. Educate the team on how data is collected, distributed, and used, what internal processes use data, and how that data is used across departmental boundaries.

By demonstrating how data governance will affect staff directly, you create a deeper level of understanding across lines of business, and ultimately, a higher level of acceptance for new processes, rules, and guidelines.

A clear and concise communications strategy will raise the profile of data governance within the organization, and staff will understand how the program will benefit them and how they can share in the success of the initiative. This will end up providing support for the initiative across the board.

A proactive communications plan will:

  • Assist in overcoming issues with data control, stalemates between stakeholder units, and staff resistance.
  • Provide a formalized process for implementing new policies, rules, guidelines, and technologies, and managing organizational data.
  • Detail data ownership and accountability for decision making, and identify and resolve data issues throughout the organization.
  • Encourage acceptance and support of the initiative.

Info-Tech Tip

Focus on literacy and communication: include training in the communication plan. Providing training for data users on the correct procedures for updating and verifying the accuracy of data, data quality, and standardized data policies will help validate how data governance will benefit them and the organization.

Leverage the data governance program to communicate and promote the value of data within the organization

The data governance program is responsible for continuously promoting the value of data to the organization. The data governance program should seek a variety of ways to educate the organization and data stakeholders on the benefit of data management.

Even if data policies and procedures are created, they will be highly ineffective if they are not properly communicated to the data producers and users alike.

There needs to be a communication plan that highlights how the data producer and user will be affected, what their new responsibilities are, and the value of that change.

To learn how to manage organizational change, refer to Info-Tech’s Master Organizational Change Management Practices.

Understand what makes for an effective policy for data governance

It can be difficult to understand what a policy is, and what it is not. Start by identifying the differences between a policy and standards, guidelines, and procedures.

Diagram of an effective policy for data governance

The following are key elements of a good policy:

Heading Descriptions
Purpose Describes the factors or circumstances that mandate the existence of the policy. Also states the policy’s basic objectives and what the policy is meant to achieve.
Scope Defines to whom and to what systems this policy applies. Lists the employees required to comply or simply indicates “all” if all must comply. Also indicates any exclusions or exceptions, i.e. those people, elements, or situations that are not covered by this policy or where special consideration may be made.
Definitions Define any key terms, acronyms, or concepts that will be used in the policy. A standard glossary approach is sufficient.
Policy Statements Describe the rules that comprise the policy. This typically takes the form of a series of short prescriptive and proscriptive statements. Sub-dividing this section into sub-sections may be required depending on the length or complexity of the policy.
Non-Compliance Clearly describe consequences (legal and/or disciplinary) for employee non-compliance with the policy. It may be pertinent to describe the escalation process for repeated non-compliance.
Agreement Confirms understanding of the policy and provides a designated space to attest to the document.

Leverage myPolicies, Info-Tech’s web-based application for managing your policies and procedures

Most organizations have problems with policy management. These include:

  1. Policies are absent or out of date
  2. Employees largely unaware of policies in effect
  3. Policies are unmonitored and unenforced
  4. Policies are in multiple locations
  5. Multiple versions of the same policy exist
  6. Policies managed inconsistently across different silos
  7. Policies are written poorly by untrained authors
  8. Inadequate policy training program
  9. Draft policies stall and lose momentum
  10. Weak policy support from senior management

Technology should be used as a means to solve these problems and effectively monitor, enforce, and communicate policies.

Product Overview

myPolicies is a web-based solution to create, distribute, and manage corporate policies, procedures, and forms. Our solution provides policy managers with the tools they need to mitigate the risk of sanctions and reduce the administrative burden of policy management. It also enables employees to find the documents relevant to them and build a culture of compliance.

Some key success factors for policy management include:

  • Store policies in a central location that is well known and easy to find and access. A key way that technology can help communicate policies is by having them published on a centralized website.
  • Link this repository to other policies’ taxonomies of your organization. E.g. HR policies to provide a single interface for employees to access guidance across the organization.
  • Reassess policies annually at a minimum. myPolicies can remind you to update the organization’s policies at the appropriate time.
  • Make the repository searchable and easily navigable.
  • myPolicies helps you do all this and more.
myPolicies logo myPolicies

Enforce data policies to promote consistency of business processes

Data policies are short statements that seek to manage the creation, acquisition, integrity, security, compliance, and quality of data. These policies vary amongst organizations, depending on your specific data needs.

  • Policies describe what to do, while standards and procedures describe how to do something.
  • There should be few data policies, and they should be brief and direct. Policies are living documents and should be continuously updated to respond to the organization’s data needs.
  • The data policies should highlight who is responsible for the data under various scenarios and rules around how to manage it effectively.

Examples of Data Policies

Trust

  • Data Cleansing and Quality Policy
  • Data Entry Policy

Availability

  • Acceptable Use Policy
  • Data Backup Policy

Security

  • Data Security Policy
  • Password Policy Template
  • User Authorization, Identification, and Authentication Policy Template
  • Data Protection Policy

Compliance

  • Archiving Policy
  • Data Classification Policy
  • Data Retention Policy

Leverage data management-related policies to standardize your data management practices

Info-Tech’s Data Management Policy:

This policy establishes uniform data management standards and identifies the shared responsibilities for assuring the integrity of the data and that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of the organization. This policy applies to all critical data and to all staff who may be creators and/or users of such data.

Info-Tech’s Data Entry Policy:

The integrity and quality of data and evidence used to inform decision making is central to both the short-term and long-term health of an organization. It is essential that required data be sourced appropriately and entered into databases and applications in an accurate and complete manner to ensure the reliability and validity of the data and decisions made based on the data.

Info-Tech’s Data Provenance Policy:

Create policies to keep your data's value, such as:

  • Only allow entry of data from reliable sources.
  • Employees entering and accessing data must observe requirements for capturing/maintaining provenance metadata.
  • Provenance metadata will be used to track the lifecycle of data from creation through to disposal.

Info-Tech’s Data Integration and Virtualization Policy:

This policy aims to assure the organization, staff, and other interested parties that data integration, replication, and virtualization risks are taken seriously. Staff must use the policy (and supporting guidelines) when deciding whether to integrate, replicate, or virtualize data sets.

Select the right mix of metrics to successfully supervise data policies and processes

Policies are only as good as your level of compliance. Ensure supervision controls exist to oversee adherence to policies and procedures.

Although they can be highly subjective, metrics are extremely important to data governance success.

  • Establishing metrics that measure the performance of a specific process or data set will:
    • Create a greater degree of ownership from data stewards and data owners.
    • Help identify underperforming individuals.
    • Allow the steering committee to easily communicate tailored objectives to individual data stewards and owners.
  • Be cautious when establishing metrics. The wrong metrics can have negative repercussions.
    • They will likely draw attention to an aspect of the process that doesn’t align with the initial strategy.
    • Employees will work hard and grow frustrated as their successes aren’t accurately captured.

Policies are great to have from a legal perspective, but unless they are followed, they will not benefit the organization.

  • One of the most useful metrics for policies is currency. This tracks how up to date the policy is and how often employees are informed about the policy. Often, a policy will be introduced and then ignored. Policies must be continuously reviewed by management and employees.
  • Some other metrics include adherence (including performance in tests for adherence) and impacts from non-adherence.

Review metrics on an ongoing basis with those data owners/stewards who are accountable, the data governance steering committee, and the executive sponsors.

Establish data standards and procedures for use across all organizational lines of business

A data governance program will impact all data-driven business units within the organization.

  • Data management procedures are the methods, techniques, and steps to accomplish a specific data objective. Creating standard data definitions should be one of the first tasks for a data governance steering committee.
  • Data moves across all departmental boundaries and lines of business within the organization. These definitions must be developed as a common set of standards that can be accepted and used enterprise wide.
  • Consistent data standards and definitions will improve data flow across departmental boundaries and between lines of business.
  • Ensure these standards and definitions are used uniformly throughout the organization to maintain reliable and useful data.

Data standards and procedural guidelines will vary from company to company.

Examples include:

  • Data modeling and architecture standards.
  • Metadata integration and usage procedures.
  • Data security standards and procedures.
  • Business intelligence standards and procedures.

Info-Tech Tip

Have a fundamental data definition model for the entire business to adhere to. Those in the positions that generate and produce data must follow the common set of standards developed by the steering committee and be accountable for the creation of valid, clean data.

Changes to organizational data processes are inevitable; have a communications plan in place to manage change

Create awareness of your data governance program, using knowledge transfer to get as many people on board as possible.

By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

Governance recommendations will require significant business change. The redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units will require an overhaul of the organization’s culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data. Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the necessary steps to adapt and reduce potential confrontation.

Because a data governance initiative will involve data-driven business units across the organization, the governance team must present a compelling case for data governance to ensure acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users.

Attempting to implement change without an effective communications plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

Data governance initiatives will very likely bring about a level of organizational disruption. A clear and concise communications strategy that conveys milestones and success stories will address the various concerns that business unit stakeholders may have.

Info-Tech Tip

Launching a data governance program will bring with it a level of disruption to the culture of the organization. That disruption doesn’t have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

Additional Support

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

Picture of analyst

Contact your account representative for more information.

workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team. Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Screenshot of example data governance strategy map.

Build Your Business and User Context

Work with your core team of stakeholders to build out your data governance strategy map, aligning data governance initiatives with business capabilities, value streams, and, ultimately, your strategic priorities.

Screenshot of Data governance roadmap

Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

Develop a data governance future state roadmap and plan based on an understanding of your current data governance capabilities, your operating environment, and the driving needs of your business.

Related Info-Tech Research

Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

Create a Data Management Roadmap

Streamline your data management program with our simplified framework.

The First 100 Days as CDO

Be the voice of data in a time of transformation.

Research Contributors

Name Position Company
David N. Weber Executive Director - Planning, Research and Effectiveness Palm Beach State College
Izabela Edmunds Information Architect Mott MacDonald
Andy Neill Practice Lead, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Dirk Coetsee Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Graham Price Executive Advisor, Advisory Executive Services Info-Tech Research Group
Igor Ikonnikov Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Jean Bujold Senior Workshop Delivery Director Info-Tech Research Group
Rajesh Parab Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Reddy Doddipalli Senior Workshop Director Info-Tech Research Group
Valence Howden Principal Research Director, CIO Info-Tech Research Group

Bibliography

Alation. “The Alation State of Data Culture Report – Q3 2020.” Alation, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Allott, Joseph, et al. “Data: The next wave in forestry productivity.” McKinsey & Company, 27 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Bean, Randy. “Why Culture Is the Greatest Barrier to Data Success.” MIT Sloan Management Review, 30 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Brence, Thomas. “Overcoming the Operationalization Challenge with Data Governance at New York Life.” Informatica, 18 March 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Bullmore, Simon, and Stuart Coleman. “ODI Inside Business – a checklist for leaders.” Open Data Institute, 19 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Canadian Institute for Health Information. “Developing and implementing accurate national standards for Canadian health care information.” Canadian Institute for Health Information. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Carruthers, Caroline, and Peter Jackson. “The Secret Ingredients of the Successful CDO.” IRM UK Connects, 23 Feb. 2017.

Dashboards. “Useful KPIs for Healthy Hospital Quality Management.” Dashboards. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Dashboards. “Why (and How) You Should Improve Data Literacy in Your Organization Today.” Dashboards. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Datapine. “Healthcare Key Performance Indicators and Metrics.” Datapine. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Datapine. “KPI Examples & Templates: Measure what matters the most and really impacts your success.” Datapine. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Diaz, Alejandro, et al. “Why data culture matters.” McKinsey Quarterly, Sept. 2018. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Everett, Dan. “Chief Data Officer (CDO): One Job, Four Roles.” Informatica, 9 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Experian. “10 signs you are sitting on a pile of data debt.” Experian. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Fregoni, Silvia. “New Research Reveals Why Some Business Leaders Still Ignore the Data.” Silicon Angle, 1 Oct. 2020.

Informatica. Holistic Data Governance: A Framework for Competitive Advantage. Informatica, 2017. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Knight, Michelle. “What Is a Data Catalog?” Dataversity, 28 Dec. 2017. Web.

Lim, Jason. “Alation 2020.3: Getting Business Users in the Game.” Alation, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

McDonagh, Mariann. “Automating Data Governance.” Erwin, 29 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

NewVantage Partners. Data-Driven Business Transformation: Connecting Data/AI Investment to Business Outcomes. NewVantage Partners, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Olavsrud, Thor. “What is data governance? A best practices framework for managing data assets.” CIO.com, 18 March 2021. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Open Data Institute. “Introduction to data ethics and the data ethics canvas.” Open Data Institute, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Open Data Institute. “The UK National Data Strategy 2020: doing data ethically.” Open Data Institute, 17 Nov. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Open Data Institute. “What is the Data Ethics Canvas?” Open Data Institute, 3 July 2019. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Pathak, Rahul. “Becoming a Data-Driven Enterprise: Meeting the Challenges, Changing the Culture.” MIT Sloan Management Review, 28 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Redman, Thomas, et al. “Only 3% of Companies’ Data Meets Basic Quality Standards.” Harvard Business Review. 11 Sept 2017.

Petzold, Bryan, et al. “Designing data governance that delivers value.” McKinsey & Company, 26 June 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Smaje, Kate. “How six companies are using technology and data to transform themselves.” McKinsey & Company, 12 Aug. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Talend. “The Definitive Guide to Data Governance.” Talend. Accessed 25 June 2021.

“The Powerfully Simple Modern Data Catalog.” Atlan, 2021. Web.

U.S. Geological Survey. “Data Management: Data Standards.” U.S. Geological Survey. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Waller, David. “10 Steps to Creating a Data-Driven Culture.” Harvard Business Review, 6 Feb. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

“What is the Difference Between A Business Glossary, A Data Dictionary, and A Data Catalog, and How Do They Play A Role In Modern Data Management?” Analytics8, 23 June 2021. Web.

Wikipedia. “RFM (market research).” Wikipedia. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Windheuser, Christoph, and Nina Wainwright. “Data in a Modern Digital Business.” Thoughtworks, 12 May 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Wright, Tom. “Digital Marketing KPIs - The 12 Key Metrics You Should Be Tracking.” Cascade, 3 March 2021. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}414|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
  • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity

You have made significant investments in availability and disaster recovery – but your ability to recover hasn’t been tested in years. Testing will:

  • Improve your DR capabilities.
  • Identify required changes to planning documentation and procedures.
  • Validate DR capabilities for interested customers and auditors.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • If you treat testing as a pass/fail exercise, you aren’t meeting the end goal of improving organizational resilience.
  • Focus on identifying gaps and risks, and addressing them, before a real disaster hits.
  • Take a realistic, iterative approach to resilience testing that starts with small, low-risk tests and builds on lessons learned.

Impact and Result

  • Identify testing scenarios and scope that can deliver value to your organization.
  • Create practical test plans with Info-Tech’s template.
  • Demonstrate value from testing to gain buy-in for additional tests.

Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Storyboard – A guide to establishing a right-sized approach to DR testing that delivers durable value to your organization.

Use this research to understand the different types of tests, prioritize and plan tests for your organization, review the results, and establish a cadence for testing.

  • Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Storyboard

2. Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template – A template to document your organization's DR test plan.

Use this template to document scope and goals, participants, key pre-test milestones, the test-day schedule, and your findings from the testing exercise.

  • Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

3. Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary – A template to outline your organization's DR testing program.

Identify the tests you will run over the next year and the expertise, governance, process, and funding required to support testing.

  • Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary

[infographic]

 

Further reading

Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing

Reduce costly downtime with a right-sized testing program that improves IT resilience.

Analyst Perspective

Reduce costly downtime with a right-sized testing program that improves IT resilience.

Andrew Sharp

Most businesses make significant investments in disaster recovery and technology resilience. Redundant sites and systems, monitoring, intrusion prevention, backups, training, documentation: it all costs time and money.

But does this investment deliver expected value? Specifically, can you deliver service continuity in a way that meets business requirements?

You can’t know the answer without regularly testing recovery processes and systems. And more than just validation, testing helps you deliver service continuity by finding and addressing gaps in your plans and training your staff on recovery procedures.

Use the insights, tools, and templates in this research to create a streamlined and effective resilience testing program that helps validate recovery capabilities and enhance service reliability, availability, and continuity.

Andrew Sharp

Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

You have made significant investments in availability and disaster recovery (DR) – but your ability to recover hasn’t been tested in years. Testing will:

  • Improve your DR capabilities.
  • Identify required changes to planning documentation and procedures.
  • Validate DR capabilities for interested customers and auditors.

Common Obstacles

Despite the value testing can offer, actually executing on DR tests is difficult because:

  • Testing is often an IT-driven initiative, and it can be difficult to secure business buy-in to redirect resources away from other urgent projects or accept risks that come with testing.
  • Previous tests have been overly complex and challenging to coordinate and leave a hangover so bad that no one wants to do them again.

Info-Tech's Approach

Take a realistic approach to resilience testing by starting with small, low-risk tests, then iterating with the lessons you’ve learned:

  • Identify testing scenarios and scope that can deliver value to your organization.
  • Create practical test plans with Info-Tech’s template.
  • Get buy-in for regular DR testing from key stakeholders with a testing program summary.

Info-Tech Insight

If you treat testing as a pass/fail exercise, you aren’t meeting the end goal of improving organizational resilience. Focus on identifying gaps and risks so you can address them before a real disaster hits.

Process and Outputs

This research is accompanied by templates to help you achieve your goals faster.

1 - Establish the business rationale for DR testing.
2 - Review a range of options for testing.
3 - Prioritize tests that are most valuable to your business.
4 - Create a disaster recovery test plan.
5 - Establish a Test Program to support a regular testing cycle.

Outputs:

DR Test Plan
DR Testing Program Summary

Example Orange Activity slide.
Orange activity slides like the one on the left provide directions to help you make key decisions.

Key Deliverable:

Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

Build a plan for your first disaster recovery test.

This document provides a complete example you can use to quickly build your own plan, including goals, milestones, participants, the test-day schedule, and findings from the after-action review.

Why test?

Testing helps you avoid costly downtime

  • In a disaster scenario, speed matters. Immediately after an outage, the impact on the organization is small, but impact increases rapidly the longer the outage continues.
  • A quick and reliable response and recovery can protect the organization from significant losses.
  • A DRP testing and maintenance program helps ensure you’re ready to recover when you need to, rather than figuring it out as you go.

“Routine testing is vital to survive a disaster… that’s when muscle memory sets in. If you don’t test your DR plan it falls [in importance], and you never see how routine changes impact it.”

– Jennifer Goshorn
Chief Administrative Officer
Gunderson Dettmer LLP

Info-Tech members estimated even one day of system downtime could lead to significant revenue losses. Estimated loss of revenue over 24 hours. Core Infrastructure has the highest potential for lost revenue.

Average estimated potential loss* in thousands of USD due to a 24-hour outage (N=41)

*Data aggregated from 41 business impact analyses (BIAs) conducted with Info-Tech advisory assistance. BIAs evaluate potential revenue loss due to a full day of system downtime, at the worst possible time.

Run tests to enhance disaster recovery plans

Testing improves organizational resilience

  • Identify and address gaps in your plans before a real disaster strikes.
  • Cross-train staff on systems recovery.
  • Go beyond testing technology to test recovery processes.
  • Establish a culture that centers resilience in everyday decision-making.

Testing keeps DR documentation ready for action

  • Update documentation ahead of tests to prepare for the testing exercise.
  • Update documentation after testing to incorporate any lessons learned.

Testing validates that investments in resilience deliver value

  • Confirm your organization can meet defined recovery time objectives (RTOs) and recovery point objectives (RPOs).
  • Provide proof of testing for auditors, prospective customers, and insurance applications

Overcome testing challenges

Despite the value of effective recovery testing, most IT organizations struggle to test recovery plans

Common challenges

  • Key resources don’t have time for testing exercises.
  • You don’t have the technology to support live recovery testing.
  • Tests are done ad hoc and lessons learned are lost.
  • A lack of business support for test exercises as the value isn’t understood.
  • Tests are always artificially simple because RTOs and RPOs must be met to satisfy customer or auditor inquiries

Overcome challenges with a realistic approach:

  • Start small with tabletop and recovery tests for specific systems.
  • Include recovery tests in operational tasks (e.g. restore systems when you have a maintenance window).
  • Create testing plans for larger testing exercises.
  • Build on successful tests to streamline testing exercises in the future.
  • Don’t make testing a pass-fail exercise. Focus on identifying gaps and risks so you can address them before a real disaster hits.

Go beyond traditional testing

Different test techniques help validate recovery against different threats

  • There are many threats to service continuity, including ransomware, severe weather events, geopolitical conflict, legacy systems, staff turnover, and day-to-day outages caused by human error, software updates, hardware failures, or network outages.
  • At its core, disaster recovery planning is about recovery. A plan for service recovery will help you mitigate against many threats at once. The testing approaches on the right will help you validate different aspects of that recovery process.
  • This research will provide an overview of the approaches outlined on the right and help you prioritize tests that are most valuable to your organization.
Different test techniques for disaster recover training: System Failover tests, tabletop exercises, ransomware recovery tests, etc.

00 Identify a working group

30 minutes

Identify a group of participants who can fill the following roles and inform the discussions around testing in this research. A single person could fill multiple roles and some roles could be filled by multiple people. Many participants will be drawn from the larger DRP team.

Roles and expectations for Disaster Recovery Planning. DRP sponsor, Testing coordinator, System testers, business liaisons, executive team.

Input

  • Organizational context

Output

  • A list of key participants for test planning and execution

Participants

  • Typically, start by identifying the sponsor and coordinator and have them identify the other members of the working group.

Start by updating your disaster recovery plan (DRP)

Use Info-Tech’s Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan research to identify recovery objectives based on business impact and outline recovery processes. Both are tremendously valuable inputs to your test plans.

Overall Business Continuity Plan

IT Disaster Recovery Plan

A plan to restore IT services (e.g. applications and infrastructure) following a disruption. A DRP:

  • Identifies critical applications and dependencies.
  • Defines appropriate recovery objectives based on a business impact analysis (BIA).
  • Creates a step-by-step incident response plan.

BCP for Each Business Unit

A set of plans to resume business processes for each business unit. A business continuity plan (BCP) is also sometimes called a continuity of operations plan (COOP).

BCPs are created and owned by each business unit, and creating a BCP requires deep involvement from the leadership of each business unit.

Info-Tech’s Develop a Business Continuity Plan blueprint provides a methodology for creating business unit BCPs as part of an overall BCP for the organization.

Crisis Management Plan

A plan to manage a wide range of crises, from health and safety incidents to business disruptions to reputational damage.

Info-Tech’s Implement Crisis Management Best Practices blueprint provides a framework for planning a response to any crisis, from health and safety incidents to reputational damage.

01 Confirm: why test at all?

15-30 minutes

Identify the value recovery testing for your organization. Use language appropriate for a nontechnical audience. Start with the list below and add, modify, or delete bullet points to reflect your own organization.

 

Drivers for testing – Examples:

 

  • Improve service continuity.
  • Identify and address gaps in recovery plans before a real disaster strikes.
  • Cross-train staff on systems recovery to minimize single points of failure.
  • Identify how we coordinate across teams during a major systems outage.
  • Exercise both recovery processes and technology.
  • Support a culture that centers system resilience in everyday decision-making.
  • Keep recovery documentation up-to-date and ready for action.
  • Confirm that our stated recovery objectives can be met.
  • Provide proof of testing for auditors, prospective customers, and insurance applications.
  • We require proof of testing to pass audits and renew cybersecurity insurance.

Info-Tech Insight

Time-strapped technical staff will sometimes push back on planning and testing, objecting that the team will “figure it out” in a disaster. But the question isn’t whether recovery is possible – it’s whether the recovery aligns with business needs. If your plan is to “MacGyver” a solution on the fly, you can’t know if it’s the right solution for your organization.

Input

  • Business drivers and context for testing

Output

  • Specific goals that are driving testing

Participants

  • DR sponsor
  • Test coordinator

Think about what and how you test

Different layers of the stack to test: Network, Authentication, compute and storage, visualization platforms, database services, middleware, app servers, web servers.

Find gaps and risks with tabletop testing

Tabletop planning had the greatest impact on meeting recovery objectives (RTOs/RPOs).

In a tabletop planning exercise, the team walks through a disaster scenario to outline the recovery workflow, and risks or gaps that could disrupt that workflow.

Tabletops are particularly effective because:

  • It enables you to play out a wider range of scenarios than technology-based testing (e.g. full-scale, parallel) due to cost and complexity factors.
  • It is non-intrusive, so it can be executed more easily than other testing methodologies.
  • The exercise translates into recovery documentation: you create a workflow as you go.
  • A major site or service recovery scenario will review all aspects of the recovery process and create the backbone of your recovery plan.

02 Run a tabletop exercise

2 hours

Tabletop testing is part of our core DRP methodology, Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan. This exercise can be run using cue cards, sticky notes, or on a whiteboard; many of our facilitators find building the workflow directly in flowchart software to be very effective.

Use our Recovery Workflow Template as a starting point.

Some tips for running your first tabletop exercise:

Do

  • Review the complete workflow from notification all the way to user acceptance testing.
  • Keep focused; stay on task and on time.
  • Revisit each step and record gaps and risks (and known solutions, but don’t dwell on this).
  • Revise and improve the plan with task owners.

Don't

  • Get weighed down by tools.
  • Try to find solutions to every gap/risk as you go. Save in-depth research/discussion for later.
  • Document the details right away – stick to the high-level plan for the first exercise.
  1. Ahead of the exercise, decide on a scenario, identify participants, and book a meeting time.
    • For your first walkthrough of a DR scenario, we often recommend a scenario that considers a site failure requiring failover to a DR site.
    • For the first exercise, focus on technical aspects of recovery before bringing in members of the business. The technical team may need space to discuss the appropriate steps in the recovery process before you bring in business liaisons to discuss user acceptance testing (UAT).
    • A complete failover considers all systems, the viability of your second site, and can help identify parts of the process that require additional exercises.
  2. Review the scenario with participants. Then, discuss and document the recovery process, starting with initial notification of an event.
    • Record steps in the process on white cards or boxes.
    • On yellow and red cards, document gaps and risks in people process and technology requirements.
  3. Once you’ve walked through the process, return to the start.
    • Record the time required to complete each step. Consider identifying who is responsible for key steps. Identify any additional gaps and risks.
  4. Clean up and record the results of the workflow. Save a copy with your DRP documentation.

Input

  • Expert knowledge on systems recovery

Output

  • Recovery workflow, including gaps and risks

Participants

  • Test coordinator
  • Technical SMEs

Move from tabletop testing to functional exercises

See how your plans fare in the real world

In live exercises, some portion of your recovery plans are executed in a way that mimics a real recovery scenario. Some advantages of live testing:

  • See how standby systems behave. A tabletop exercise can miss small issues that can make or break the recovery process. For example, connectivity or integration issues on a new subnet might be difficult to predict prior to actually running services in that environment.
  • Hands-on practice: Familiarize the team with the steps, commands, and interfaces of your recovery toolset.
  • Manage the pressure of the DR scenario: Nothing’s quite like the real thing, but a live exercise may be the closest your team can get to a disaster situation without experiencing it firsthand.

Examples of live exercises

Boot and smoke test Turn on a standby system and confirm it boots up correctly.
Restore and validate data Restore data or servers from backup. Confirm data integrity.
Parallel testing Send familiar transactions to production and standby systems. Confirm both systems produce the same result.
Failover systems Shut down the production system and use the standby system in production.

Run local tests ahead of releases

Think small

Most unacceptable downtime is caused by localized issues, such as hardware or software failures, rather than widespread destructive events. Regular local testing can help validate the recovery plan for local issues and improve overall service continuity.

Make local testing a standard step in maintenance work and new deployments to embed resilience considerations in day-to-day activities. Run the same tests in both your primary and your DR environment.

Some examples of localized tests:

  • Review backup logs and check for errors.
  • Restore files or whole systems from backup.
  • Run application-based tests as part of release management, including unit, regression, and performance tests.
    • Ensure application tests are run for both the primary and DR environment.
    • For a deep-dive on application testing, see Info-Tech’s research Automate Testing to Get More Done.

Info-Tech Insight

Local tests will vary between different services, and local test design is usually best left to the system SMEs. At the same time, centralize reporting to understand where tests are being done.

Investigate whether your IT Service Management or ticketing system can create recurring tasks or work orders to schedule, document, and track test exercises. Tasks can be pre-populated with checklists and documentation to support the test and provide a record of completed tests to support oversight and reporting.

Have the business validate recovery

If your business doesn’t think a system’s recovered, it’s not recovered.

User acceptance testing (UAT) after system recovery is a key step in the recovery process. Like any step in the process, there’s value in testing it before it actually needs to be done. Assign responsibility for building UATs to the person who will be responsible for executing them.

An acceptance test script might look something like the checklist below.

  • Does the application open?
  • Does the interface look right?
  • Do you see any unusual notifications or warnings?
  • Can you conduct a key transaction with dummy data?
  • Can you run key reports?

“I cannot stress how important it is to assign ownership of responsibilities in a test; this is the only way to truly mitigate against issues in a test.”

– Robert Nardella
IT Service Management
Certified z/OS Mainframe Professional

Info-Tech Insight

Build test scripts and test transactions ahead of time to minimize the amount of new work required during a recovery scenario.

Beyond the Basics: Full Failover Testing

  • A failover test – a full failover of your production environment to a secondary environment – is what many IT and businesspeople think about when they think of disaster recovery testing.
  • A full test can validate previous local or tabletop tests, identify additional gaps and risks, and provide hands-on training experience with recovery processes and technologies.
  • Setting a date for failover testing can also inject some urgency into otherwise low-priority (but high importance) disaster recovery planning and documentation exercises, which need to be completed prior to the test.
  • Despite these benefits, full failover tests carry significant risk and require a great deal of effort and cost. Typically, only businesses that already have an active-active environment capable of supporting in-scope production systems are able to run a full environment failover.
  • This is especially true the first time you test. While in theory a DR plan should be ready to go at any time, there will be documents to update, gaps to address, and risks to mitigate before you go ahead with the test.

Full Failover Testing

What you get:

  • Provide hands-on experience with recovery processes and technology.
  • Confirm that site failover works in practice as you assumed in tabletop or local testing exercises.
  • Identify critical gaps you might have missed without a full failover test.

What you need:

  • An active-active secondary site, with sufficient standby equipment, data, and licensed standby software to support production.
  • A completed tabletop exercise and documented recovery workflow.
  • A documented test plan, backout plan, and formal sign-off.
  • An off-hours downtime window.
  • Time from technical SMEs and business resources, both for creating the plan and executing the test.

Beyond the Basics: Site Reliability Engineering

  • Site reliability engineering (SRE) is an application of skills and approaches from software engineering to improve system resilience.
  • SRE is focused on “availability, latency, performance, efficiency, change management, monitoring, emergency response, and capacity planning” across a set portfolio of services (Sloss, 2017).
  • In many organizations, SRE is implemented as a team that supports separate applications teams.
  • Applications must have defined and granular resilience requirements, translated into service objectives. The SRE team and applications teams will work together to meet these objectives.
  • Site reliability engineers (the folks that do SRE, and often also abbreviated as SREs) are expected to build solutions and processes to ensure services remain stable and performant, not just respond when they fail. For example, Google allows their SREs to spend just half their time on incident response, with the rest of their time focused on development and automation tasks.

Site Reliability Testing

What you get:

  • Improved reliability and reduced frequency and impact of downtime.
  • Increased use of automation to address problems before they cause an incident.
  • Granular resilience objectives.

What you need:

  • Systems running on software-defined infrastructure.
  • Specialized skills in programming, infrastructure-as-code.
  • Business & product owners able to define and fund acceptable and appropriate resilience objectives.
  • Technical experts able to translate product requirements into technical design requirements.

Beyond the Basics: Chaos Engineering

  • Chaos engineering, a term and approach first popularized by the team at Netflix, aims to improve the resilience of particularly large and distributed systems by simulating system failures and evaluating performance against a baseline.
  • Experiments simulate a variety of real-world events that could cause outages (e.g. network slowdowns or server failures). Experiments run continuously, and the recommendation is to run them in production where feasible while minimizing the impact on customers.
  • Tools to help you run chaos testing exist, including open-source toolkits like Chaos Monkey or Mangle and paid software as a service (SaaS) solutions like Gremlin.
  • Deciding whether the long-term benefits of tests that can degrade production are worth the potential risk of system slowdowns or outages is a business or product decision. Technical considerations aside, if the business owner of a particular system doesn’t see the value of continuous testing outweighing the introduced risk, this approach to testing isn’t going to happen.

Chaos Engineering

What you get:

  • Confidence that systems can weather volatile and unpredictable conditions in a production environment.
  • An embedded resilience culture.

What you need:

  • High-maturity IT incident, monitoring and event practices.
  • Standby/resilient systems to minimize downtime impact.
  • Business buy-in for introducing risk into the production environment.
  • Specialized skills to identify, develop, and run tests that degrade production performance in a controlled way.
  • Budget and time to act on issues identified through testing.

Beyond the Basics: Security Event Simulations

  • Ransomware is driving demands for proof of recovery testing from customers, executives, auditors, and insurance companies. Systems recovery is part of ransomware recovery, but recovering from a breach includes detection, analysis, containment, and eradication of the attack vector before systems recovery can begin.
  • Beyond technical recovery, internal legal and communications teams will have a role, as will your insurance provider, consultants specialized in ransomware recovery, or professional ransom negotiators.
  • A tabletop exercise focused on ransomware incident response is a key first step. You can find Info-Tech’s methodology for a ransomware tabletop in Phase 3 of Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks.
  • Live testing approaches can offer hands-on experience and further insight into how your systems are vulnerable to malware. A variety of open source and proprietary tools can simulate ransomware and help you identify problems, though it’s important to understand the limitations of different simulators (Allon, 2022).
  • A “red team” exercise simulates an adversarial attack against your processes and systems. A specialized penetration tester will often take on the role of the red team and provide a report of identified gaps and risks after the engagement.

Security Event Simulation

What you get:

  • Hands-on experience managing and recovering from a ransomware attack in a controlled environment.
  • A better understanding of gaps in your response process.

What you need:

  • A completed ransomware tabletop exercise and mature security incident response processes.
  • For Ransomware Simulators: An air-gapped sandbox environment hosting a copy of your production systems and security tools, and time from your technical SMEs.
  • For Red Team Exercises: A trusted provider, scope for your testing plans, and time from your security incident response team.

Prioritize tests by asking these three questions

1. Will the scope of this test deliver sufficient value?

  • Yes, these are critical systems with low tolerance for downtime or data loss.
  • Yes, major changes or new systems require validation of DR capabilities.
  • Yes, there’s high probability of an outage, or recent experience of an outage.
  • •Yes, we have audit requirements or customer demands for testing.

2. Are we ready for this test?

  • Yes, recovery plans and recovery objectives are documented.
  • Yes, key technical and business resources have time to commit to testing exercises.
  • Yes, technology is currently able to support proposed tests.

3. Is it easy to do?

  • Yes, effort required to complete the test is low (i.e. minimal work, few participants).
  • Yes, the risks related to testing are low.
  • Yes, it won’t cost much.

Info-Tech Insight

More complex, challenging, risky, or costly tests, such as full failover tests, can deliver value. But do the high-value, low-effort stuff first!

03 Brainstorm and prioritize test ideas

30-60 minutes

Even if you have an idea of what you need to test and how you want to run those tests, this brainstorming exercise can generate useful ideas for testing that might otherwise have been missed.

    1. Review the slides above to develop ideas on how and what you want to test. These slides may be enough to kickstart a brainstorming process. Don’t debate or discount ideas at this point. Write down these ideas in a space where all participants can see them (e.g. whiteboard or shared screen).

The next steps will help you prioritize the list – if needed – to tests that are highest value and lowest effort.

  1. Discuss where you have the greatest need to test. Assign a score of 0 – 3 for each test, with a score of 3 being high-need and a score of zero being low-need. Consider whether:
    • These applications have a low tolerance for downtime.
    • There’s a high chance of an outage, or recent experience with an outage.
    • There’s a need to train or cross-train staff on recovery for the system(s) in question.
    • Major changes require a review or validation of DR capabilities.
    • Audit requirements or customer/executive demands can be met via testing.
  2. Discuss which tests will require the least effort to complete – where readiness is high and tests are easier to do. Assign a score between 0 and 3 for each test, with a score of 3 being least effort and a score of 0 being high effort. Consider whether:
    • Recovery plans and recovery objectives are documented for these systems.
    • Technical experts are available to work on testing exercises.
    • For active testing, standby/sandbox systems are available and capable of supporting proposed tests.
    • The effort required to complete the test is low (e.g. minimal new work, few participants).
    • The risks related to testing are low.
    • You will need to secure additional funding.
  3. Sum together the assigned scores for each test. Higher scores should be the highest priority, but of course use your judgement to validate the results and select one or two tests to execute in the coming year.

“There are different levels of testing and it is very progressive. I do not recommend my clients to do anything, unless they do it in a progressive fashion. Don’t try to do a live failover test with your users, right out of the box.”

– Steve Tower
Principal Consultant
Prompta Consulting Group

Input

  • Organizational and technical context

Output

  • Prioritize list of DR testing ideas

Participants

  • DR sponsor
  • Test coordinator

04 Build a test plan

3-5 days

Building a test plan helps the test run smoothly and can uncover issues with the underlying DRP as you dig into the details.

The test coordinator will own the plan document but will rely on the sponsor to confirm scope and goals, technical SMEs to develop system recovery plans, and business liaisons to create UAT scripts.

Download Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template. Use the structure of the template to build your own document, deleting example data as you go. Consider saving a separate copy of this document as an example and working from a second copy.

Key sections of the document include:

  • Goals, scenario, and scope of the test.
  • Assumptions, constraints, risks, and mitigation strategies.
  • Test participants.
  • Key pre-test milestones, and test-day schedule.
  • After-action review.

Download the Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

Input

  • Scope
  • High-level goals

Output

  • Test plan, including goals, scope, key milestones, risks and mitigations, and test-day schedule

Participants

  • Test coordinator develops the plan with support from:
    • Technical SMEs
    • Business liaisons
    • DR sponsor

05 Run an after-action review

30-60 minutes

Take time after test exercises – especially large-scale tests with many participants – to consider what went well, what didn’t, and where you can improve future testing exercises. Track lessons learned and next steps at the bottom of your test plan.

  1. Start with a short (5-10 minute) debrief of the test and allow participants to ask questions. Confirm:
    • Did we meet the goals we set for the exercise, including RTOs and RPOs?
    • What was done well? What issues, gaps, and risks were identified?
  2. Work through variations of the following questions:
    • Was the test plan effective, and was the test well organized?
    • Was the documentation effective? Where did we follow the plan as documented, and where did we deviate from the plan?
    • Was our communication/collaboration during the test effective?
    • Have gaps and issues found during the test been reported to the testing coordinator? Could some of the issues uncovered apply more broadly to other IT services as well?
    • What could we test next, based on what was discovered?
    • Are there other tools or approaches that could be useful?

Input

  • Insights and experience from a recent testing exercise

Output

  • Identified gaps and risks, and action items to address them
  • Ideas to improve future test exercises

Participants

  • Test coordinator develops the plan with support from:
    • Test coordinator
    • Test participants

Follow a testing cycle

All tests are expected to drive actions to improve resilience, as appropriate. Experience from previous tests will be applied to future testing exercises.

The testing cycle: 1. Plan a test, 2. Run test, 3. Take action.

Use your experience to simplify testing

The fifth testing exercise should be easier than the first

Outputs and lessons learned from testing should help you run future tests.

  • With past experience under their belt, participants should have a better understanding of their role, and of their peers’ roles, and the goal of the exercise.
  • Facilitators will be more comfortable facilitating the exercise, and everyone should be more confident in the steps required to recover their systems.
  • Gather feedback from participants through after-action reviews to identify what worked and what didn’t.
  • Documentation from previous tests can provide a template for future tests.
  • Gaps identified in previous tests can provide ideas for future tests.

Experience, lessons learned, improved process, new test targets, repeat.

Info-Tech Insight

Testing should get easier over time. But if you’re easily passing every test, it’s a sign that you’re ready to run more challenging tests.

06 Create a test program summary

2-4 hours

Regular testing allows you to build on prior tests and helps keep plans current despite changes to your environment.

Keeping a regular testing schedule requires expertise, a process to coordinate your efforts, and a level of governance to provide oversight and ensure testing continues to deliver value. Create a call to action using Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary Template.

The result is a summary document that:

  • Identifies key takeaways and testing goals
  • Presents key elements of the testing program
  • Outlines the testing cycle
  • Lists expected milestones for the next year
  • Identifies participants
  • Recommends next steps

“It is extremely important in the early stages of development to concentrate the focus on actual recoverability and data protection, enhancing these capabilities over time into a fully matured program that can truly test the recovery, and not simply focusing on the testing process itself.”

– Joe Starzyk
Senior Business Development Executive
IBM Global Services

Research Contributors and Experts

  • Bernard A. Jones, Business Continuity & Disaster Recovery Expert
  • Robert Nardella, IT Service Management, Certified z/OS Mainframe Professional
  • Larry Liss, Chief Technology Officer, Blank Rome LLP
  • Jennifer Goshorn, Chief Administrative and Chief Compliance Officer, Gunderson Dettmer LLP
  • Paul Kirvan, FBCI, CISA, Independent IT Consultant/Auditor, Paul Kirvan Associates
  • Steve Tower, Principal Consultant, Prompta Consulting Group
  • Joe Starzyk, Senior Business Development Executive, IBM Global Services
  • Thomas Bronack, Enterprise Resiliency and Corporate Certification Consultant, DCAG
  • Paul S. Randal, CEO & Owner, SQLskills.com
  • Tom Baumgartner, Disaster Recovery Analyst, Catholic Health

Bibliography

Alton, Yoni. “Ransomware simulators – reality or a bluff?” Palo Alto Blog, 2 May 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://www.paloaltonetworks.com/blog/security-operations/ransomware-simulators-reality-or-a-bluff/

Brathwaite, Shimon. “How to Test your Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Plan,” Security Made Simple, 13 Nov 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://www.securitymadesimple.org/cybersecurity-blog/how-to-test-your-business-continuity-and-disaster-recovery-plan

The Business Continuity Institute. Good Practice Guidelines: 2018 Edition. The Business Continuity Institute, 2017.

Emigh, Jacqueline. “Disaster Recovery Testing: Ensuring Your DR Plan Works,” Enterprise Storage Forum, 28 May 2019. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
Disaster Recovery Testing: Ensuring Your DR Plan Works | Enterprise Storage Forum

Gardner, Dana. "Case Study: Strategic Approach to Disaster Recovery and Data Lifecycle Management Pays off for Australia's SAI Global." ZDNet. BriefingsDirect, 26 Apr 2012. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
http://www.zdnet.com/article/case-study-strategic-approach-to-disaster-recovery-and-data-lifecycle-management-pays-off-for-australias-sai-global/.

IBM. “Section 11. Testing the Disaster Recovery Plan.” IBM, 2 Aug 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 2023. Section 11. Testing the disaster recovery plan - IBM Documentation Lutkevich, Ben and Alexander Gillis. “Chaos Engineering”. TechTarget, Jun 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://www.techtarget.com/searchitoperations/definition/chaos-engineering

Monperrus, Martin. “Principles of Antifragility.” Arxiv Forum, 7 June 2017. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://arxiv.org/ftp/arxiv/papers/1404/1404.3056.pdf

“Principles of Chaos Engineering.” Principles of Chaos Engineering, 2019 March. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://principlesofchaos.org/

Sloss, Benjamin Treynor. “Introduction.” Site Reliability Engineering. Ed. Betsy Beyer. O’Reilly Media, 2017. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://sre.google/sre-book/introduction/

Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}357|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Project Management Office
  • Parent Category Link: /project-management-office
  • You use Microsoft tools to manage your work, projects, and/or project portfolio.
  • Its latest offering, Project for the web, is new and you’re not sure what to make of it. Microsoft says it will soon replace Microsoft Project and Project Online, but the new software doesn’t seem to do what the old software did.
  • The organization has adopted M365 for collaboration and work management. Meetings happen on Teams, projects are scoped a bit with Planner, and the operations group uses Azure Boards to keep track of what they need to get done.
  • Despite your reservations about the new project management software, Microsoft software has become even more ubiquitous.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • The various MS Project offerings (but most notably the latest, Project for the web) hold the promise of integrating with the rest of M365 into a unified work management solution. However, out of the box, Project for the web and the various platforms within M365 are all disparate utilities that need to be pieced together in a purpose-built manner to make use of them for holistic work management purposes. If you’re looking for a cohesive product out of the box, look elsewhere. If you’re looking to assemble a wide array of work, project, and portfolio management functions across different functions and departments, you may have found what you seek.
  • Rather than choosing tools based on your gaps, assess your current maturity level so that you optimize your investment in the Microsoft landscape.

Impact and Result

Follow Info-Tech’s path in this blueprint to:

  • Perform a tool audit to trim your work management tool landscape.
  • Navigate the MS Project and M365 licensing landscape.
  • Make sense of what to do with Project for the web and take the right approach to rolling it out (i.e. DIY or MS Gold Partner driven) based upon your needs.
  • Create an action plan to inform next steps.

After following the program in this blueprint, you will be prepared to advise the organization on how to best leverage the rapidly shifting work management options within M365 and the place of MS Project within it.

Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should make sense of the MS Project and M365 landscapes, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Determine your tool needs

Assess your work management tool landscape, current state maturity, and licensing needs to inform a purpose-built work management action plan.

  • M365 Task Management Tool Guide
  • M365 Project Management Tool Guide
  • M365 Project Portfolio Management Tool Guide
  • Tool Audit Workbook
  • Force Field Analysis Tool
  • Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool
  • Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Workbook (With Tool Analysis)
  • Project Management Maturity Assessment Workbook (With Tool Analysis)

2. Weigh your MS Project implementation options

Get familiar with Project for the web’s extensibility as well as the MS Gold Partner ecosystem as you contemplate the best implementation approach(s) for your organization.

  • None
  • None

3. Finalize your implementation approach

Prepare a boardroom-ready presentation that will help you communicate your MS Project and M365 action plan to PMO and organizational stakeholders.

  • Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

Infographic

Workshop: Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Assess Driving Forces and Risks

The Purpose

Assess the goals and needs as well as the risks and constraints of a work management optimization.

Take stock of your organization’s current work management tool landscape.

Key Benefits Achieved

Clear goals and alignment across workshop participants as well as an understanding of the risks and constraints that will need to be mitigated to succeed.

Current-state insight into the organization’s work management tool landscape.

Activities

1.1 Review the business context.

1.2 Explore the M365 work management landscape.

1.3 Identify driving forces for change.

1.4 Analyze potential risks.

1.5 Perform current-state analysis on work management tools.

Outputs

Business context

Current-state understanding of the task, project, and portfolio management options in M365 and how they align with the organization’s ways of working

Goals and needs analysis

Risks and constraints analysis

Work management tool overview

2 Determine Tool Needs and Process Maturity

The Purpose

Determine your organization’s work management tool needs as well as its current level of project management and project portfolio management process maturity.

Key Benefits Achieved

An understanding of your tooling needs and your current levels of process maturity.

Activities

2.1 Review tool audit dashboard and conduct the final audit.

2.2 Identify current Microsoft licensing.

2.3 Assess current-state maturity for project management.

2.4 Define target state for project management.

2.5 Assess current-state maturity for project portfolio management.

2.6 Define target state for project portfolio management.

Outputs

Tool audit

An understanding of licensing options and what’s needed to optimize MS Project options

Project management current-state analysis

Project management gap analysis

Project portfolio management current-state analysis

Project portfolio management gap analysis

3 Weigh Your Implementation Options

The Purpose

Take stock of your implementation options for Microsoft old project tech and new project tech.

Key Benefits Achieved

An optimized implementation approach based upon your organization’s current state and needs.

Activities

3.1 Prepare a needs assessment for Microsoft 365 and Project Plan licenses.

3.2 Review the business case for Microsoft licensing.

3.3 Get familiar with Project for the web.

3.4 Assess the MS Gold Partner Community.

3.5 Conduct a feasibility test for PFTW.

Outputs

M365 and Project Plan needs assessment

Business case for additional M365 and MS Project licensing

An understand of Project for the web and how to extend it

MS Gold Partner outreach plan

A go/no-go decision for extending Project for the web on your own

4 Finalize Implementation Approach

The Purpose

Determine the best implementation approach for your organization and prepare an action plan.

Key Benefits Achieved

A purpose-built implementation approach to help communicate recommendations and needs to key stakeholders.

Activities

4.1 Decide on the implementation approach.

4.2 Identify the audience for your proposal.

4.3 Determine timeline and assign accountabilities.

4.4 Develop executive summary presentation.

Outputs

An implementation plan

Stakeholder analysis

A communication plan

Initial executive presentation

5 Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

The Purpose

Finalize your M365 and MS Project work management recommendations and get ready to communicate them to key stakeholders.

Key Benefits Achieved

Time saved in developing and communicating an action plan.

Stakeholder buy-in.

Activities

5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

Outputs

Finalized executive presentation

A gameplan to communicate your recommendations to key stakeholders as well as a roadmap for future optimization

Further reading

Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization

View your task management, project management, and project portfolio management options through the lens of M365.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst Perspective

Microsoft Project is an enigma

Microsoft Project has dominated its market since being introduced in the 1980s, yet the level of adoption and usage per license is incredibly low.

The software is ubiquitous, mostly considered to represent its category for “Project Management.” Yet, the software is conflated with its “Portfolio Management” offerings as organizations make platform decisions with Microsoft Project as the incorrectly identified incumbent.

And incredibly, Microsoft has dominated the next era of productivity software with the “365” offerings. Yet, it froze the “Project” family of offerings and introduced the not-yet-functional “Project for the web.”

Having a difficult time understanding what to do with, and about, Microsoft Project? You’re hardly alone. It’s not simply a question of tolerating, embracing, or rejecting the product: many who choose a competitor find they’re still paying for Microsoft Project-related licensing for years to come.

If you’re in the Microsoft 365 ecosystem, use this research to understand your rapidly shifting landscape of options.

(Barry Cousins, Project Portfolio Management Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group)

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

You use Microsoft (MS) tools to manage your work, projects, and/or project portfolio.

Their latest offering, Project for the web, is new and you’re not sure what to make of it. Microsoft says it will soon replace Microsoft Project and Project Online, but the new software doesn’t seem to do what the old software did.

The organization has adopted M365 for collaboration and work management. Meetings happen on Teams, projects are scoped a bit with Planner, and the operations group uses Azure Boards to keep track of what they need to get done.

Despite your reservations about the new project management software, Microsoft software has become even more ubiquitous.

Common Obstacles

M365 provides the basic components for managing tasks, projects, and project portfolios, but there is no instruction manual for making those parts work together.

M365 isn’t the only set of tools at play. Business units and teams across the organization have procured other non-Microsoft tools for work management without involving IT.

Microsoft’s latest project offering, Project for the web, is still evolving and you’re never sure if it is stable or ready for prime time. The missing function seems to involve the more sophisticated project planning disciplines, which are still important to larger, longer, and costlier projects.

Common Obstacles

Follow Info-Tech’s path in this blueprint to:

  • Perform a tool audit to trim your work management tool landscape.
  • Navigate the MS Project and M365 licensing landscape.
  • Make sense of what to do with Project for the web and take the right approach to rolling it out (i.e. DIY or MS Gold Partner driven) for your needs.
  • Create an action plan to inform next steps.

After following the program in this blueprint, you will be prepared to advise the organization on how to best leverage the rapidly shifting work management options within M365 and the place of MS Project within it.

M365 and, within it, O365 are taking over

Accelerated partly by the pandemic and the move to remote work, Microsoft’s market share in the work productivity space has grown exponentially in the last two years.

70% of Fortune 500 companies purchased 365 from Sept. 2019 to Sept. 2020. (Thexyz blog, 2020)

In its FY21 Q2 report, Microsoft reported 47.5 million M365 consumer subscribers – an 11.2% increase from its FY20 Q4 reporting. (Office 365 for IT Pros, 2021)

As of September 2020, there were 258,000,000 licensed O365 users. (Thexyz blog, 2020)

In this blueprint, we’ll look at what the what the phenomenal growth of M365 means for PMOs and project portfolio practitioners who identify as Microsoft shops

The market share of M365 warrants a fresh look at Microsoft’s suite of project offerings

For many PMO and project portfolio practitioners, the footprint of M365 in their organizations’ work management cultures is forcing a renewed look at Microsoft’s suite of project offerings.

The complicating factor is this renewed look comes at a transitional time in Microsoft’s suite of project and portfolio offerings.

  • The market dominance of MS Project Server and Project Online are wanning, with Microsoft promising the end-of-life for Online sometime in the coming years.
  • Project Online’s replacement, Project for the web, is a viable task management and lightweight project management tool, but its viability as a replacement for the rigor of Project Online is at present largely a question mark.
  • Related to the uncertainty and promise around Project for the web, the Dataverse and the Power Platform offer a glimpse into a democratized future of work management tools but anything specific about that future has yet to solidify.

Microsoft Project has 66% market share in the project management tool space. (Celoxis, 2018)

A copy of MS project is sold or licensed every 20 seconds. (Integent, 2013)

MS Project is evolving to meet new work management realities

It also evolved to not meet the old project management realities.

  • The lines between traditional project management and operational task management solutions are blurring as organizations struggle to keep up with demands.
  • To make the software easier to use, modern work management doesn’t involve the complexities from days past. You won’t find anywhere to introduce complex predecessor-successor relationships, unbalanced assignments with front-loading or back-loading, early-start/late-finish, critical path, etc.
  • “Work management” is among the latest buzzwords in IT consulting. With Project for the web (PFTW), Azure Boards, and Planner, Microsoft is attempting to compete with lighter and better-adopted tools like Trello, Basecamp, Asana, Wrike, and Monday.com.
  • Buyers of project and work management software have struggled to understand how PFTW will still be usable if it gets the missing project management function from MS Project.

Info-Tech Insight

Beware of the Software Granularity Paradox.

Common opinion 1: “Plans and estimates that are granular enough to be believable are too detailed to manage and maintain.”

Common opinion 2: “Plans simple enough to publish aren’t detailed enough to produce believable estimates.”

In other words, software simple enough to get widely adopted doesn’t produce believable plans. Software that can produce believable plans is too complex to use at scale.

A viable task and project management option must walk the line between these dichotomies.

M365 gives you the pieces, but it’s on PMO users to piece them together in a viable way

With the new MS Project and M365, it’s on PMOs to avoid the granularity paradox and produce a functioning solution that fits with the organization’s ways of working.

Common perception still sees Microsoft Project as a rich software tool. Thus, when we consider the next generation of Microsoft Project, it’s easy to expect a newer and friendlier version of what we knew before.

In truth, the new solution is a collection of partially integrated but largely disparate tools that each satisfy a portion of the market’s needs. While it looks like a rich collection of function when viewed through high-level requirements, users will find:

  • Overlaps, where multiple tools satisfy the same functional requirement (e.g. “assign a task”)
  • Gaps, where a tool doesn’t quite do enough and you’re forced to incorporate another tool (e.g. reverting back to Microsoft Project for advanced resource planning)
  • Islands, where tools don’t fluently talk to each other (e.g. Planner data integrated in real-time with portfolio data, which requires clunky, unstable, decentralized end-user integrations with Microsoft Power Automate)
A colourful arrangement of Microsoft programs arranged around a pile of puzzle pieces.

Info-Tech's approach

Use our framework to best leverage the right MS Project offerings and M365 components for your organization’s work management needs.

The Info-Tech difference:

  1. A simple to follow framework to help you make sense of a chaotic landscape.
  2. Practical and tactical tools that will help you save time.
  3. Leverage industry best practices and practitioner-based insights.
An Info-Tech framework titled 'Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization, subtitle 'View your task, project, and portfolio management options through the lens of Microsoft 365'. There are four main sections titled 'Background', 'Approaches', 'Deployments', and 'Portfolio Outcomes'. In '1) Background' are 'Analyze Content', 'Assess Constraints', and 'Determine Goals and Needs'. In '2) Approaches' are 'DIY: Are you ready to do it yourself?' 'Info-Tech: Can our analysts help?', and 'MS Gold Partner: Are you better off with a third party?'. In '3) Deployments' are five sections: 'Personal Task Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Person. 'Team Task Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Team. 'Project Portfolio Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Project. 'Project Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Functionally Incomplete. 'Enterprise Project and Portfolio Management', Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Underadopted. In '4) Portfolio Outcomes' are 'Informed Steering Committee', 'Increased Project Throughput', 'Improved Portfolio Responsiveness', 'Optimized Resource Utilization', and 'Reduced Monetary Waste'.

Determine the Future of Microsoft Project in Your Organization

View your task, project, and portfolio management options through the lens of Microsoft 365.

1. Background

  • Analyze Content
  • Assess Constraints
  • Determine Goals and Needs

2. Approaches

  • DIY – Are you ready to do it yourself?
  • Info-Tech – Can our analysts help?
  • MS Gold Partner – Are you better off with a third party?

3. Deployments

    Task Management

  • Personal Task Management
    • Who does it? Knowledge workers
    • What is it? To-do lists
    • Common Approaches
      • Paper list and sticky notes
      • Light task tools
    • Applications
      • Planner
      • To Do
    • Level of Rigor 1/5
    • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Person
  • Team Task Management
    • Who does it? Groups of knowledge workers
    • What is it? Collaborative to-do lists
    • Common Approaches
      • Kanban boards
      • Spreadsheets
      • Light task tools
    • Applications
      • Planner
      • Azure Boards
      • Teams
    • Level of Rigor 2/5
    • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Team
  • Project Management

  • Project Portfolio Management
    • Who does it? PMO Directors, Portfolio Managers
    • What is it?
      • Centralized list of projects
      • Request and intake handling
      • Aggregating reporting
    • Common Approaches
      • Spreadsheets
      • PPM software
      • Roadmaps
    • Applications
      • Project for the Web
      • Power Platform
    • Level of Rigor 3/5
    • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Isolated to One Project
  • Project Management
    • Who does it? Project Managers
    • What is it? Deterministic scheduling of related tasks
    • Common Approaches
      • Spreadsheets
      • Lists
      • PM software
      • PPM software
    • Applications
      • Project Desktop Client
    • Level of Rigor 4/5
    • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Functionally Incomplete
  • Enterprise Project and Portfolio Management

  • Enterprise Project and Portfolio Management
    • Who does it? PMO and ePMO Directors, Portfolio Managers, Project Managers
    • What is it?
      • Centralized request and intake handling
      • Resource capacity management
      • Deterministic scheduling of related tasks
    • Common Approaches
      • PPM software
    • Applications
      • Project Online
      • Project Desktop Client
      • Project Server
    • Level of Rigor 5/5
    • Barriers to Portfolio Outcomes: Underadopted

4. Portfolio Outcomes

  • Informed Steering Committee
  • Increased Project Throughput
  • Improved Portfolio Responsiveness
  • Optimized Resource Utilization
  • Reduced Monetary Waste

Info-Tech's methodology for Determine the Future of MS Project for Your Organization

1. Determine Your Tool Needs

2. Weigh Your MS Project Implementation Options

3. Finalize Your Implementation Approach

Phase Steps

  1. Survey the M365 Work Management Tools
  2. Perform a Process Maturity Assessment to Help Inform Your M365 Starting Point
  3. Consider the Right MS Project Licenses for Your Stakeholders
  1. Get Familiar With Extending Project for the Web Using Power Apps
  2. Assess the MS Gold Partner Community
  1. Prepare an Action Plan

Phase Outcomes

  1. Work Management Tool Audit
  2. MS Project and Power Platform Licensing Needs
  3. Project Management and Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment
  1. Project for the Web Readiness Assessment
  2. MS Gold Partner Outreach Plan
  1. MS Project and M365 Action Plan Presentation

Insight Summary

Overarching blueprint insight: Microsoft Parts Sold Separately. Assembly required.

The various MS Project offerings (but most notably the latest, Project for the web) hold the promise of integrating with the rest of M365 into a unified work management solution. However, out of the box, Project for the web and the various platforms within M365 are all disparate utilities that need to be pieced together in a purpose-built manner to make use of them for holistic work management purposes.

If you’re looking for a cohesive product out of the box, look elsewhere. If you’re looking to assemble a wide array of work, project, and portfolio management functions across different functions and departments, you may have found what you seek

Phase 1 insight: Align your tool choice to your process maturity level.

Rather than choosing tools based on your gaps, make sure to assess your current maturity level so that you optimize your investment in the Microsoft landscape.

Phase 2 insight: Weigh your options before jumping into Microsoft’s new tech.

Microsoft’s new Project plans (P1, P3, and P5) suggest there is a meaningful connection out of the box between its old tech (Project desktop, Project Server, and Project Online) and its new tech (Project for the web).

However, the offerings are not always interoperable.

Phase 3 insight: Keep the iterations small as you move ahead with trials and implementations.

Organizations are changing as fast as the software we use to run them.

If you’re implementing parts of this platform, keep the changes small as you monitor the vendors for new software versions and integrations.

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

Key deliverable: Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

The Action Plan will help culminate and present:

  • Context and Constraints
  • DIY Implementation Approach
Or
  • MS Partner Implementation Approach
  • Future-State Vision and Goals
Samples of Info-Tech's key deliverable 'Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template'.

Tool Audit Workbook

Sample of Info-Tech deliverable 'Tool Audit Workbook'.

Assess your organization's current work management tool landscape and determine what tools drive value for individual users and teams and which ones can be rationalized.

Force Field Analysis

Sample of Info-Tech deliverable 'Force Field Analysis'.

Document the driving and resisting forces for making a change to your work management tools.

Maturity Assessments

Sample of Info-Tech deliverable 'Maturity Assessments'.

Use these assessments to identify gaps in project management and project portfolio management processes. The results will help guide process improvement efforts and measure success and progress.

Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool

Sample of Info-Tech deliverable 'Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool'.

Determine the best licensing options and approaches for your implementation of Microsoft Project.

Curate your work management tools to harness valuable portfolio outcomes

  • Increase Project Throughput

    Do more projects by ensuring the right projects and the right amount of projects are approved and executed.
  • Support an Informed Steering Committee

    Easily compare progress of projects across the portfolio and enable the leadership team to make decisions.
  • Improve portfolio responsiveness

    Make the portfolio responsive to executive steering when new projects and changing priorities need rapid action.
  • Optimize Resource Utilization

    Assign the right resources to approved projects and minimize the chronic over-allocation of resources that leads to burnout.
  • Reduce Monetary Waste

    Terminate low-value projects early and avoid sinking additional funds into unsuccessful ventures.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

Guided Implementation

Workshop

Consulting

"Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Guided Implementation

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

A typical GI is between 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 4 months.

    Introduction

  • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.
  • Phase 1

  • Call #2: Explore the M365 work management landscape.
  • Call #3: Discuss Microsoft Project Plans and their capabilities.
  • Call #4: Assess current-state maturity.
  • Phase 2

  • Call #5: Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps.
  • Call #6: Assess the MS Gold Partner Community.
  • Phase 3

  • Call #7: Determine approach and deployment.
  • Call #8: Discuss action plan.

Workshop Overview

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Day 1
Assess Driving Forces and Risks

Day 2
Determine Tool Needs and Process Maturity

Day 3
Weigh Your Implementation Options

Day 4
Finalize Implementation Approach

Day 5
Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

Activities

  • 1.1 Review the business context.
  • 1.2 Explore the M365 work management landscape.
  • 1.3 Identify driving forces for change.
  • 1.4 Analyze potential risks.
  • 1.5 Perform current-state analysis on work management tools.
  • 2.1 Review tool audit dashboard and conduct the final audit.
  • 2.2 Identify current Microsoft licensing.
  • 2.3 Assess current-state maturity for project management.
  • 2.4 Define target state for project management.
  • 2.5 Assess current-state maturity for project portfolio management.
  • 2.6 Define target state for project portfolio management.
  • 3.1 Prepare a needs assessment for Microsoft 365 and Project Plan licenses.
  • 3.2 Review the business case for Microsoft licensing.
  • 3.3 Get familiar with Project for the web.
  • 3.4 Assess the MS Gold Partner Community.
  • 3.5 Conduct a feasibility test for PFTW.
  • 4.1 Decide on the implementation approach.
  • 4.2 Identify the audience for your proposal.
  • 4.3 Determine timeline and assign accountabilities.
  • 4.4 Develop executive summary presentation.
  • 5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.
  • 5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

Deliverables

  1. Force Field Analysis
  2. Tool Audit Workbook
  1. Tool Audit Workbook
  2. Project Management Maturity Assessment
  3. Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment
  1. Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool
  1. Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan
  1. Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan

Determine the Future of Microsoft Project for Your Organization

Phase 1: Determine Your Tool Needs

Phase 1: Determine Your Tool Needs

Phase 2: Weigh Your Implementation Options Phase 3: Finalize Your Implementation Approach
  • Step 1.1: Survey the M365 work management landscape
  • Step 1.2: Explore the Microsoft Project Plans and their capabilities
  • Step 1.3: Assess the maturity of your current PM & PPM capabilities
  • Step 2.1: Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps
  • Step 2.2: Assess the MS Gold Partner Community
  • Step 3.1: Prepare an action plan

Phase Outcomes

  • Tool Audit
  • Microsoft Project Licensing Analysis
  • Project Management Maturity Assessment
  • Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessments

Step 1.1

Survey the M365 Work Management Landscape

Activities

  • 1.1.1 Distinguish between task, project, and portfolio capabilities
  • 1.1.2 Review Microsoft’s offering for task, project, and portfolio management needs
  • 1.1.4 Assess your organizational context and constraints
  • 1.1.3 Explore typical deployment options

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Assessing your organization’s context for project and project portfolio management
  • Documenting the organization’s constraints
  • Establishing the organization’s goals and needs

This step involves the following participants:

  • PMO Director
  • Resource Managers
  • Project Managers
  • Knowledge Workers

Outcomes of Step

  • Knowledge of the Microsoft ecosystem as it relates to task, project, and portfolio management
  • Current organizational context and constraints

Don’t underestimate the value of interoperability

The whole Microsoft suite is worth more than the sum of its parts … if you know how to put it together.

38% of the worldwide office suite market belongs to Microsoft. (Source: Statistica, 2021)

1 in 3 small to mid-sized organizations moving to Microsoft Project say they are doing so because it integrates well with Office 365. (Source: CBT Nuggets, 2018)

There’s a gravity to the Microsoft ecosystem.

And while there is no argument that there are standalone task management tools, project management tools, or portfolio management tools that are likely more robust, feature-rich, and easier to adopt, it’s rare that you find an ecosystem that can do it all, to an acceptable level.

That is the value proposition of Microsoft: the ubiquity, familiarity, and versatility. It’s the Swiss army knife of software products.

The work management landscape is evolving

With M365, Microsoft is angling to become the industry leader, and your organization’s hub, for work management.

Workers lose up to 40% of their time multi-tasking and switching between applications. (Bluescape, 2018)

25 Context switches – On average, workers switch between 10 apps, 25 times a day. (Asana, 2021)

“Work management” is among the latest buzzwords in IT consulting.

What is work management? It was born of a blurring of the traditional lines between operational or day-to-day tasks and project management tasks, as organizations struggle to keep up with both operational and project demands.

To make the software easier to use, modern work management doesn’t involve the complexities from days past. You won’t find anywhere to introduce complex predecessor-successor relationships, unbalanced assignments with front-loading or back-loading, early-start/late-finish, critical path, etc.

Indeed, with Project for the web, Azure Boards, Planner, and other M365 utilities, Microsoft is attempting to compete with lighter and better-adopted tools (e.g. Trello, Wike, Monday.com).

The Microsoft world of work management can be understood across three broad categories

  1. Task Management

    Task management is essentially the same as keeping track of a to-do list. While you can have a project-related task, you can also have a non-project-related task. The sum of project and non-project tasks make up the work that you need to complete.
  2. Project Management

    Project management (PM) is a methodical approach to planning and guiding project processes from start to finish. Implementing PM processes helps establish repeatable steps and controls that enable project success. Documentation of PM processes leads to consistent results and dependable delivery on expectations.
  3. Portfolio Management

    Project portfolio management (PPM) is a strategic approach to approving, prioritizing, resourcing, and reporting on project. In addition, effective PPM should nurture the completion of projects in the portfolio in the most efficient way and track the extent to which the organization is realizing the intended benefits from completed projects.

The slides ahead explain each of these modes of working in the Microsoft ecosystem in turn. Further, Info-Tech’s Task, Project, and Project Portfolio Management Tool Guides explain these areas in more detail.

Use Info-Tech’s Tool Guides assess your MS Project and M365 work management options

Lean on Info-Tech’s Tool Guides as you navigate Microsoft’s tasks management, project management, and project portfolio management options.

  • The slides ahead take you through a bird’s-eye view of what your MS Project and M365 work management options look like across Info-Tech’s three broad categories
  • In addition to these slides, Info-Tech has three in-depth tool guides that take you through your operational task management, project management, and project portfolio management options in MS Project and M365.
  • These tool guides can be leveraged as you determine whether Microsoft has the required toolset for your organization’s task, project, and project portfolio management needs.

Download Info-Tech’s Task Management, Project Management, and Project Portfolio Management Tool Guides

Task Management Overview

What is task management?

  • It is essentially the same as keeping track of a to-do list. While you can have a project-related task, you can also have a non-project-related task. The sum of project and non-project tasks make up the work that you need to complete.

What are the benefits of task management using applications within the MS suite?

  • Many organizations already own the tools and don't have to go out and buy something separately.
  • There is easy integration with other MS applications.

What is personal task management?

  • Tools that allow you to structure work that is visible only to you. This can include work from tasks you are going to be completing for yourself and tasks you are completing as part of a larger work effort.

What is team task management?

  • Tools that allow users to structure work that is visible to a group. When something is moved or changed, it affects what the group is seeing because it is a shared platform.

Get familiar with the Microsoft product offerings for task management

A diagram of Microsoft products and what they can help accomplish. It starts on the right with 'Teams' and 'Outlook'. Both can flow through to 'Personal Task Management' with products 'Teams Tasks' and 'To-Do', but Teams also flows into 'Team Task Management' with products 'Planner' and 'Project for the web'. See the next two slides for more details on these modes of working.

Download the M365 Task Management Tool Guide

Personal Task Management

The To-Do list

  • Who does it?
    • Knowledge workers
  • What is it?
    • How each knowledge worker organizes their individual work tasks in M365
  • When is it done?
    • As needed throughout the day
  • Where is it done?
    • Paper
    • Digital location
  • How is it done?
    • DIY and self-developed
    • Usually not repeatable and evolves depending on work location and tools available
    • Not governed

Microsoft differentiator:

Utilities like Planner and To-Do make it easier to turn what are often ad hoc approaches into a more repeatable process.

Team Task Management

The SharedTo-Do list

  • Who does it?
    • Groups of knowledge workers
  • What is it?
    • Temporary and permanent collections of knowledge workers
  • When is it done?
    • As needed or on a pre-determined cadence
  • Where is it done?
    • Paper
    • Digital location
  • How is it done?
    • User norms are established organically and adapted based upon the needs of the team.
    • To whatever extent processes are repeatable in the first place, they remain repeatable only if the team is a collective.
    • Usually governed within the team and not subject to wider visibility.

Microsoft differentiator:

Teams has opened personal task management tactics up to more collaborative approaches.

Project Management Overview

2003

Project Server: This product serves many large enterprise clients, but Microsoft has stated that it is at end of life. It is appealing to industries and organizations where privacy is paramount. This is an on-premises system that combines servers like SharePoint, SQL, and BI to report on information from Project Desktop Client. To realize the value of this product, there must be adoption across the organization and engagement at the project-task level for all projects within the portfolio.

2013

Project Online: This product serves many medium enterprise clients. It is appealing for IT departments who want to get a rich set of features that can be used to intake projects, assign resources, and report on project portfolio health. It is a cloud solution built on the SharePoint platform, which provides many users a sense of familiarity. However, due to the bottom-up reporting nature of this product, again, adoption across the organization and engagement at the project task level for all projects within the portfolio is critical.

2020

Project for the web: This product is the newest on the market and is quickly being evolved. Many O365 enthusiasts have been early adopters of Project for the web despite its limited features when compared to Project Online. It is also a cloud solution that encourages citizen developers by being built on the MS Power Platform. This positions the product well to integrate with Power BI, Power Automate, and Power Apps. It is, so far, the only MS product that lends itself to abstracted portfolio management, which means it doesn’t rely on project task level engagement to produce portfolio reports. The portfolio can also run with a mixed methodology by funneling Project, Azure Boards, and Planner boards into its roadmap function.

Get familiar with the Microsoft product offerings for project management

A diagram of Microsoft products and what they can help accomplish in Personal and Team Project Management. Products listed include 'Project Desktop Client', 'Project Online', 'SharePoint', 'Power Platform', 'Azure DevOps', 'Project for the web', Project Roadmap', 'Project Home', and 'Project Server'. See the next slide for more details on personal and team project management as modes of working.

Download the M365 Project Management Tool Guide

Project Management

Orchestrating the delivery of project work

  • Who does it?
    • Project managers
  • What is it?
    • Individual project managers developing project plans and schedules in the MS Project Desktop Client
  • When is it done?
    • Throughout the lifecycle of the project
  • Where is it done?
    • Digital location
  • How is it done?
    • Used by individual project managers to develop and manage project plans.
    • Common approaches may or may not involve reconciliation of resource capacity through integration with Active Directory.
    • Sometimes usage norms are established by organizational project management governance standards, though individual use of the desktop client is largely ungoverned.

Microsoft differentiator:

For better or worse, Microsoft’s core solution is veritably synonymous with project management itself and has formally contributed to the definition of the project management space.

Project Portfolio Management Overview

Optimize what you’re already using and get familiar with the Power Platform.

What does PPM look like within M365?

  • The Office suite in the Microsoft 365 suite boasts the world’s most widely used application for the purposes of abstracted and strategic PPM: Excel. For the purposes of PPM, Excel is largely implemented in a suboptimal fashion, and as a result, organizations fail to gain PPM adoption and maturation through its use.
  • Until very recently, Microsoft toolset did not explicitly address abstracted PPM needs.
  • However, with the latest version of M365 and Project for the web, Microsoft is boasting of renewed PPM capabilities from its toolset. These capabilities are largely facilitated through what Microsoft is calling its Power Platform (i.e. a suite of products that includes Power, Power Apps, and Power Automate).

Explore the Microsoft product offering for abstracted project portfolio management

A diagram of Microsoft products for 'Adaptive or Abstracted Portfolio Management'. Products listed include 'Excel', 'MS Lists', 'Forms', 'Teams', and the 'Power Platform' products 'Power BI', 'Power Apps', and 'Power Automate'. See the next slide for more details on adaptive or abstracted portfolio management as a mode of working.

Download the M365 Project Portfolio Management Tool Guide

Project Portfolio Management

Doing the right projects, at the right time, with the right resources

  • Who does it?
    • PMO directors; portfolio managers
  • What is it?
    A strategic approach to approving, prioritizing, resourcing, and reporting on projects using applications in M365 and Project for the web. In distinction to enterprise PPM, a top-down or abstracted approach is applied, meaning PPM data is not tied to project task details.
  • Where is it done?
    • Digital tool, either homegrown or commercial
  • How is it done?
    • Currently in M365, PPM approaches are largely self-developed, though Microsoft Gold Partners are commonly involved.
    • User norms are still evolving, along with the software’s (Project for the web) function.

Microsoft differentiator:

Integration between Project for the web and Power Apps allows for custom approaches.

Project Portfolio Management Overview

Microsoft’s legacy project management toolset has contributed to the definition of traditional or enterprise PPM space.

A robust and intensive bottom-up approach that requires task level roll-ups from projects to inform portfolio level data. For this model to work, reconciliation of individual resource capacity must be universal and perpetually current.

If your organization has low or no maturity with PPM, this approach will be tough to make successful.

In fact, most organizations under adopt the tools required to effectively operate with the traditional project portfolio management. Once adopted and operationalized, this combination of tools gives the executives the most precise view of the current state of projects within the portfolio.

Explore the Microsoft product offering for enterprise project portfolio management

A diagram of Microsoft products for 'Enterprise or Traditional Portfolio Management'. Products listed include 'Project Desktop Client', 'SharePoint', 'Project Online', 'Azure DevOps', 'Project Roadmaps', and 'Project Home'. See the next slide for more details on this as a mode of working.

Download the M365 Project Portfolio Management Tool Guide

Enterprise Project and Portfolio Management

Bottom-up approach to managing the project portfolio

  • Who does it?
    • PMO and ePMO directors; portfolio managers
    • Project managers
  • What is it?
    • A strategic approach to approving, prioritizing, resourcing, and reporting on projects using applications in M365 and Project for the web. In distinction to enterprise PPM, a top-down or abstracted approach is applied, meaning PPM data is not tied to project task details.
  • Where is it done?
    • Digital tool that is usually commercial.
  • How is it done?
    • Microsoft Gold Partner involvement is highly likely in successful implementations.
    • Usage norms are long established and customized solutions are prevalent.
    • To be successful, use must be highly governed.
    • Reconciliation of individual resource capacity must be universal and perpetually current.

Microsoft differentiator:

Microsoft’s established network of Gold Partners helps to make this deployment a viable option.

Assess your current tool ecosystem across work management categories

Use Info-Tech’s Tool Audit Workbook to assess the value and satisfaction for the work management tools currently in use.

  • With the modes of working in mind that have been addressed in the previous slides and in Info-Tech’s Tool Guides, the activity slides ahead encourage you to engage your wider organization to determine all of the ways of working across individuals and teams.
  • Depending on the scope of your work management optimization, these engagements may be limited to IT or may extend to the business.
  • Use Info-Tech’s Tool Audit Workbook to help you gather and make sense of the tool data you collect. The result of this activity is to gain insight into the tools that drive value and fail to drive value across your work management categories with a view to streamline the organization’s tool ecosystem.

Download Info-Tech’s Tool Audit Workbook

Sample of Info-Tech's Tool Audit Workbook.

1.2.1 Compile list of tools

1-3 hours

Input: Information on tools used to complete task, project, and portfolio tasks

Output: Analyzed list of tools

Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Tool Audit Workbook

Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers, Business Stakeholders

  1. Identify the stakeholder groups that are in scope. For each group that you’ve identified, brainstorm the different tools and artifacts that are necessary to get the task, project, and project portfolio management functions done.
  2. Make sure to record the tool name and specify its category (standard document, artifact, homegrown solution, or commercial solution).
  3. Think about and discuss how often the tool is being used for each use case across the organization. Document whether its use is required. Then assess reporting functionality, data accuracy, and cost.
  4. Lastly, give a satisfaction rating for each use case.

Excerpt from the Tool Audit Workbook

Excerpt from Info-Tech's Tool Audit Workbook on compiling tools.

1.2.1 Review dashboard

1-3 hours

Input: List of key PPM decision points, List of who is accountable for PPM decisions, List of who has PPM decision-making authority

Output: Prioritized list of PPM decision-making support needs

Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Tool Audit Workbook

Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, CIO

Discuss the outputs of the Dashboards tab to inform your decision maker on whether to pass or fail the tool for each use case.

Sample of a BI dashboard used to evaluate the usefulness of tools. Written notes include: 'Slice the data based on stakeholder group, tool, use case, and category', and 'Review the results of the questionnaire by comparing cost and satisfaction'.

1.2.1 Execute final audit

1 hour

Input: List of key PPM decision points, List of who is accountable for PPM decisions, List of who has PPM decision-making authority

Output: Prioritized list of PPM decision-making support needs

Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Tool Audit Workbook

Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, CIO

  1. Using the information available, schedule time with the leadership team to present the results.
  2. Identify the accountable party to make the final decision on what current tools pass or fail the final audit.
  3. Mind the gap presented by the failed tools and look to possibilities within the M365 and Microsoft Project suite. For each tool that is deemed unsatisfactory for the future state, mark it as “Fail” in column O on tab 2 of the Tool Audit Workbook. This will ensure the item shows in the “Fail” column on tab 4 of the tool when you refresh the data.
  4. For each of the tools that “fail” your audit and that you’re going to make recommendations to rationalize in a future state, try to capture the annual total current-state spending on licenses, and the work modes the tool currently supports (i.e. task, project, and/or portfolio management).
  5. Additionally, start to think about future-state replacements for each tool within or outside of the M365/MS Project platforms. As we move forward to finalize your action plan in the last phase of this blueprint, we will capture and present this information to key stakeholders.

Document your goals, needs, and constraints before proceeding

Use Info-Tech’s Force Field Analysis Tool to help weigh goals and needs against risks and constraints associated with a work management change.

  • Now that you have discussed the organization’s ways of working and assessed its tool landscape – and made some initial decisions on some tool options that might need to change across that landscape – gather key stakeholders to define (a) why a change is needed at this time and (b) to document some of the risks and constraints associated with changing.
  • Info-Tech’s Force Field Analysis Tool can be used to capture these data points. It takes an organizational change management approach and asks you to consider the positive and negative forces associated with a work management tool change at this time.
  • The slides ahead walk you through a force field analysis activity and help you to navigate the relevant tabs in the Tool.

Download Info-Tech's Force Field Analysis Tool

Sample of Info-Tech's Force Field Analysis Tool.

1.2.1 Identify goals and needs (1 of 2)

Use tab 1 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook to assess goals and needs.

30 minutes

Input: Opportunities associated with determining the use case for Microsoft Project and M365 in your organization

Output: Plotted opportunities based on probability and impact

Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Force Field Analysis Tool

Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers

  1. Brainstorm opportunities associated with exploring and/or implementing Microsoft Project and the Microsoft 365 suite of products for task, project, and project portfolio management.
  2. Document relevant opportunities in tab 1 of the Force Field Analysis Tool. For each driving force for the change (note: a driving force can include goals and needs) that is identified, provide a category that explains why the driving force is a concern (i.e. with this force is the organization looking to mature, integrate, scape, or accelerate?).
  3. In addition, assess the ease of achieving or realizing each goal or need and the impact of realizing them on the PMO and/or the organization.
  4. See the next slide for a screenshot that helps you navigate tab 1 of the Tool.

Download the Force Field Analysis Tool

1.2.1 Identify goals and needs (2 of 2)

Screenshot of tab 1 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook.

Screenshot of tab 1 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook. There are five columns referred to as columns B through F with the headings 'Opportunities', 'Category', 'Source', 'Ease of Achieving', and 'Impact on PMO/Organization'.

In column B on tab 1, note the specific opportunities the group would like to call out.

In column C, categorize the goal or need being articulated by the list of drop-down options: will it accelerate the time to benefit? Will it help to integrate systems and data sources? Will it mature processes and the organization overall? Will it help to scale across the organization? Choose the option that best aligns with the opportunity.

In column D, categorize the source of the goal or need as internal or external.

In column E, use the drop-down menus to indicate the ease of realizing each goal or need for the organization. Will it be relatively easy to manifest or will there be complexities to implementing it?

In column F, use the drop-down menus to indicate the positive impact of realizing or achieving each need on the PMO and/or the organization.

On tab 3 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook, your inputs on tab 1 are summarized in graphical form from columns B to G. On tab 3, these goals and needs results are contrasted with your inputs on tab 2 (see next slide).

1.2.2 Identify risk and constraints (1 of 2)

Use tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook to assess opposing forces to change.

30 minutes

Input: Risks associated with determining the use case for Microsoft Project and M365 in your organization

Output: Plotted risks based on probability and impact

Materials: Whiteboard/Flip Charts, Force Field Analysis Tool

Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers

  1. With the same working group from 1.2.1, brainstorm risks, constraints, and other opposing forces pertaining to your potential future state.
  2. Document relevant opposing forces in tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Tool. For each opposing force for the change (note: a driving force can include goals and needs) that is identified, provide a category that explains why the opposing force is a concern (i.e. will it impact or is it impacted by time, resources, maturity, budget, or culture?).
  3. In addition, assess the likelihood of the risk or constraint coming to light and the negative impact of it coming to light for your proposed change.
  4. See the next slide for a screenshot that helps you navigate tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Tool.

Download the Force Field Analysis Tool

1.2.2 Identify risk and constraints (2 of 2)

Screenshot of tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook.

Screenshot of tab 2 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook. There are five columns referred to as columns B through F with the headings 'Risks and Constraints', 'Category', 'Source', 'Likelihood of Constraint/Risk/Resisting Force Being Felt', and 'Impact to Derailing Goals and Needs'.

In column B on tab 2, note the specific risks and constraints the group would like to call out.

In column C, categorize the risk or constraint being articulated by the list of drop-down options: will it impact or is it impacted by time, resources, budget, culture or maturity?

In column D, categorize the source of the goal or need as internal or external.

In column E, use the drop-down menus to indicate the likelihood of each risk or constraint materializing during your implementation. Will it definitely occur or is there just a small chance it could come to light?

In column F, use the drop-down menus to indicate the negative impact of the risk or constraint to achieving your goals and needs.

On tab 3 of the Force Field Analysis Workbook, your inputs on tab 2 are summarized in graphical form from columns I to N. On tab 3, your risk and constraint results are contrasted with your inputs on tab 1 to help you gauge the relative weight of driving vs. opposing forces.

Step 1.2

Explore the Microsoft Project Plans and their capabilities

Activities

  • 1.1.1 Review the Microsoft 365 licensing features
  • 1.1.2 Explore the Microsoft Project Plan licenses
  • 1.1.3 Prepare a needs assessment for Microsoft 365 and Project Plan licenses

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Review the suite of task management, project management, and project portfolio management options available in Microsoft 365.
  • Prepare a preliminary checklist of required M365 apps for your stakeholders.

This step usually involves the following participants:

  • PMO/Portfolio Manager
  • Project Managers
  • CIO and other executive stakeholders
  • Other project portfolio stakeholders (project and IT workers)

Outcomes of Step

  • Preliminary requirements for an M365 project management and project portfolio management tool implementation

Microsoft recently revamped its project plans to balance its old and new tech

Access to the new tech, Project for the web, comes with all license types, while Project Online Professional and Premium licenses have been revamped as P3 and P5.

Navigating Microsoft licensing is never easy, and Project for the web has further complicated licensing needs for project professionals.

As we’ll cover in step 2.1 of this blueprint, Project for the web can be extended beyond its base lightweight work management functionality using the Power Platform (Power Apps, Power Automate, and Power BI). Depending on the scope of your implementation, this can require additional Power Platform licensing.

  • In this step, we will help you understand the basics of what’s already included in your enterprise M365 licensing as well as what’s new in Microsoft’s recent Project licensing plans (P1, P3, and P5).
  • As we cover toward the end of this step, you can use Info-Tech’s MS Project and M365 Licensing Tool to help you understand your plan and licensing needs. Further assistance on licensing can be found in the Task, Project, and Portfolio Management Tool Guides that accompany this blueprint and Info-Tech’s Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era.

Download Info-Tech’s Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era

Licensing features for knowledge workers

Please note that licensing packages are frequently subject to change. This is up to date as of August 2021. For the most up-to-date information on licensing, visit the Microsoft website.

Bundles are extremely common and can be more cost effective than à la carte options for the Microsoft products.

The biggest differentiator between M365 and O365 is that the M365 product also includes Windows 10 and Enterprise Mobility and Security.

The color coding in the diagram indicates that the same platform/application suite is available.

Platform or Application M365 E3 M365 E5 O365 E1 O365 E3 O365 E5
Microsoft Forms X X X X X
Microsoft Lists X X X X X
OneDrive X X X X X
Planner X X X X X
Power Apps for Office 365 X X X X X
Power Automate for Office X X X X X
Power BI Pro X X
Power Virtual Agents for Teams X X X X X
SharePoint X X X X X
Stream X X X X X
Sway X X X X X
Teams X X X X X
To Do X X X X X

Get familiar with Microsoft Project Plan 1

Please note that licensing packages are frequently subject to change. This is up to date as of August 2021. For the most up to date information on licensing, visit the Microsoft website.

Who is a good fit?

  • New project managers
  • Zero-allocation project managers
  • Individuals and organizations who want to move out of Excel into something less fragile (easily breaking formulas)

What does it include?

  • Access to Project Home, a landing page to access all project plans you’ve created or have been assigned to.
  • Access to Grid View, Board View, and Timeline (Gantt) View to plan and manage your projects with Project for the web
  • Sharing Project for the web plans across Microsoft Teams channels
  • Co-authoring on project plans

When does it make sense?

  • Lightweight project management
  • No process to use bottom-up approach for resourcing data
  • Critical-path analysis is not required
  • Organization does not have an appetite for project management rigor

Get familiar with Microsoft Project Plan 3

Please note that licensing packages are frequently subject to change. This is up to date as of August 2021. For the most up to date information on licensing, visit the Microsoft website.

Who is a good fit?

  • Experienced and dedicated project managers
  • Organizations with complex projects
  • Large project teams are required to complete project work
  • Organizations have experience using project management software

What does it include?

Everything in Project Plan 1 plus the following:

  • Reporting through Power BI Report template apps (note that there are no pre-built reports for Project for the web)
  • Access to build a Roadmap of projects from Project for the web and Azure DevOps with key milestones, statuses, and deadlines
  • Project Online to submit and track timesheets for project teams
  • MS Project Desktop Client to support resource management

When does it make sense?

  • Project management is an established discipline at the organization
  • Critical-path analysis is commonly used
  • Organization has some appetite for project management rigor
  • Resources are expected to submit timesheets to allow for more precise resource management data

Get familiar with Microsoft Project Plan 5

Please note that licensing packages are frequently subject to change. This is up to date as of August 2021. For the most up to date information on licensing, visit the Microsoft website.

Who is a good fit?

  • Experienced and dedicated project managers
  • Experienced and dedicated PMO directors
  • Dedicated portfolio managers
  • Organizations proficient at sustaining data in a standard tool

What does it include?

Everything in Project Plan 3 plus the following:

  • Portfolio selection and optimization
  • Demand management
  • Enterprise resource planning and management through deterministic task and resource scheduling
  • MS Project Desktop Client to support resource management

When does it make sense?

  • Project management is a key success factor at the organization
  • Organization employs a bottom-up approach for resourcing data
  • Critical-path analysis is required
  • Formal project portfolio management processes are well established
  • The organization is willing to either put in the time, energy, and resources to learn to configure the system through DIY or is willing to leverage a Microsoft Partner to help them do so

What’s included in each plan (1 of 2)

Plan details are up to date as of September 2021. Plans and pricing can change often. Visit the Microsoft website to validate plan options and get pricing details.
MS Project Capabilities Info-Tech's Editorial Description P1 P3 P5
Project Home Essentially a landing page that allows you to access all the project plans you've created or that you're assigned to. It amalgamates plans created in Project for the web, the Project for the web app in Power Apps, and Project Online. X X X
Grid view One of three options in which to create your project plans in Project for the web (board view and timeline view are the other options). You can switch back and forth between the options. X X X
Board view One of three options in which to create your project plans in Project for the web (grid view and timeline view are the other options). You can switch back and forth between the options. X X X
Timeline (Gantt) view One of three options in which to create your project plans in Project for the web (board view and grid view are the other options). You can switch back and forth between the options. X X X
Collaboration and communication This references the ability to add Project for the web project plans to Teams channels. X X X
Coauthoring Many people can have access to the same project plan and can update tasks. X X X
Project planning and scheduling For this the marketing lingo says "includes familiar scheduling tools to assign project tasks to team members and use different views like Grid, Board, and Timeline (Gantt chart) to oversee the schedule." Unclear how this is different than the project plans in the three view options above. X X X

X - Functionality Included in Plan

O - Functionality Not Included in Plan

What’s included in each plan (2 of 2)

Plan details are up to date as of September 2021. Plans and pricing can change often. Visit the Microsoft website to validate plan options and get pricing details.
MS Project Capabilities Info-Tech's Editorial Description P1 P3 P5
Reporting This seems to reference Excel reports and the Power BI Report Template App, which can be used if you're using Project Online. There are no pre-built reports for Project for the web, but third-party Power Apps are available. O X X
Roadmap Roadmap is a platform that allows you to take one or more projects from Project for the web and Azure DevOps and create an organizational roadmap. Once your projects are loaded into Roadmap you can perform additional customizations like color status reporting and adding key days and milestones. O X X
Timesheet submission Project Online and Server 2013 and 2016 allow team members to submit timesheets if the functionality is required. O X X
Resource management The rich MS Project client supports old school, deterministic project scheduling at the project level. O X X
Desktop client The full desktop client comes with P3 and P5, where it acts as the rich editor for project plans. The software enjoys a multi-decade market dominance as a project management tool but was never paired with an enterprise collaboration server engine that enjoyed the same level of success. O X X
Portfolio selection and optimization Portfolio selection and optimization has been offered as part of the enterprise project and portfolio suite for many years. Most people taking advantage of this capability have used a Microsoft Partner to formalize and operationalize the feature. O O X
Demand Management Enterprise demand management is targeted at the most rigorous of project portfolio management practices. Most people taking advantage of this capability have used a Microsoft Partner to formalize and operationalize the feature. O O X
Enterprise resource planning and management The legacy MS Project Online/Server platform supports enterprise-wide resource capacity management through an old-school, deterministic task and resource scheduling engine, assuming scaled-out deployment of Active Directory. Most people succeeding with this capability have used a Microsoft Partner to formalize and operationalize the feature. O O X

X - Functionality Included in Plan

O - Functionality Not Included in Plan

Use Info-Tech’s MS Project and M365 Licensing Tool

Leverage the analysis in Info-Tech’s MS Project & M365 Licensing Tool to help inform your initial assumptions about what you need and how much to budget for it.

  • The Licensing Tool can help you determine what Project Plan licensing different user groups might need as well as additional Power Platform licensing that may be required.
  • It consists of four main tabs: two set-up tabs where you can validate the plan and pricing information for M365 and MS Project; an analysis tab where you set up your user groups and follow a survey to assess their Project Plan needs; and another analysis tab where you can document your Power Platform licensing needs across your user groups.
  • There is also a business case tab that breaks down your total licensing needs. The outputs of this tab can be used in your MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template, which we will help you develop in phase three of this blueprint.

Download Info-Tech's Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool

Sample of Info-Tech's Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool.

1.2.1 Conduct a needs assessment

1-2 hours

Input: List of key user groups/profiles, Number of users and current licenses

Output: List of Microsoft applications/capabilities included with each license, Analysis of user group needs for Microsoft Project Plan licenses

Materials: Microsoft Project & 365 Licensing Tool

Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers

  1. As a group, analyze the applications included in your current or desired 365 license and calculate any additional Power Platform licensing needs.
  2. Screenshot of the 'Application/Capabilities' screen from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool'.
  3. Within the same group, use the drop-down menus to analyze your high-level MS Project requirements by selecting whether each capability is necessary or not.
  4. Your inputs to the needs assessment will determine the figures in the Business Case tab. Consider exporting this information to PDF or other format to distribute to stakeholders.
  5. Screenshot of the 'Business Case' tab from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool'.

Download Info-Tech's Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool

Step 1.3

Assess the maturity of your current PM & PPM capabilities

Activities

  • Assess current state project and project portfolio management processes and tools
  • Determine target state project and project portfolio management processes and tools

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Assess current state project and project portfolio management processes and tools
  • Determine target state project and project portfolio management processes and tools

This step usually involves the following participants:

  • PMO/Portfolio Manager
  • Project Managers
  • CIO and other executive stakeholders
  • Other project portfolio stakeholders (project and IT workers)

Outcomes of Step

  • Current and target state maturity for project management and project portfolio management processes

Project portfolio management and project management are more than tools

Implementing commercial tools without a matching level of process discipline is a futile exercise, leaving organizations frustrated at the wasted time and money.

  • The tool is only as good as the data that is input. There is often a misunderstanding that a tool will be “automatic.” While it is true that a tool can help make certain processes easier and more convenient by aggregating information, enhancing reporting, and coauthoring, it will not make up the data. If data becomes stale, the tool is no longer valid for accurate decision making.
  • Getting people onboard and establishing a clear process is often the hardest part. As IT folk, it can be easy to get wrapped up in the technology. All too often excitement around tools can drown out the important requisites around people and process. The reality is people and process are a necessary condition for a tool to be successful. Having a tool will not be sufficient to overcome obstacles like poor stakeholder buy-in, inadequate governance, and the absence of a standard operating procedure.

  • Slow is the way to go. When deciding what tools to purchase, start small and scale up rather than going all in and all too often ending up with many unused features and fees.

"There's been a chicken-egg debate raging in the PPM world for decades: What comes first, the tool or the process? It seems reasonable to say, ‘We don't have a process now, so we'll just adopt the one in the tool.’ But you'll soon find out that the tool doesn't have a process, and you needed to do more planning and analysis before buying the tool." (Barry Cousins, Practice Lead, Project Portfolio Management)

Assess your process maturity to determine the right tool approach

Take the time to consider and reflect on the current and target state of the processes for project portfolio management and project management.

Project Portfolio Management

  • Status and Progress Reporting
    1. Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

      PPM is the practice of selecting the right projects and ensuring the organization has the necessary resources to complete them. PPM should enable executive decision makers to make sense of the excess of demand and give IT the ability to prioritize those projects that are most valuable to the business.
    2. Resource Management

    3. Project Management

      1. Initiation
      2. Planning
      3. Execution
      4. Monitoring and Controlling
      5. Closing
      Tailor a project management framework to fit your organization. Formal methodologies aren’t always the best fit. Take what you can use from formal frameworks and define a right-sized approach to your project management processes.
    4. Project Closure

    5. Benefits Tracking

Info-Tech’s maturity assessment tools can help you match your tools to your maturity level

Use Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool and Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool.

  • The next few slides in this step take you through using our maturity assessment tools to help gauge your current-state and target-state maturity levels for project management (PM) and project portfolio management (PPM).
  • In addition to the process maturity assessments, these workbooks also help you document current-state support tools and desired target-state tools.
  • The outputs of these workbooks can be used in your MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template, which we will help you develop in phase three of this blueprint.

Download Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool and Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool

Samples of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool and Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool.

Conduct a gap analysis survey for both project and project portfolio management.

  • Review the category and activity statements: For each gap analysis tab in the maturity assessments, use the comprehensive activity statements to identify gaps for the organization.
  • Assess the current state: To assess the current state, evaluate whether the statement should be labeled as:
    • Absent: There is no evidence of any activities supporting this process.
    • Initial: Activity is ad hoc and not well defined.
    • Defined: Activity is established and there is moderate adherence to its execution.
    • Repeatable: Activity is established, documented, repeatable, and integrated with other phases of the process.
    • Managed: Activity execution is tracked by gathering qualitative and quantitative feedback

Once this is documented, take some time to describe the type of tool being used to do this (commercial, home-grown, standardized document) and provide additional details, where applicable.

Define the target state: Repeat the assessment of activity statements for the target state. Then gauge the organizational impact and complexity of improving each capability on a scale of very low to very high.

Excerpt from Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool, the 'PPM Current State Target State Maturity Assessment Survey'. It has five columns whose purpose is denoted in notes. Column 1 'Category within the respective discipline'; Column 2 'Statement to consider'; Column 3 'Select the appropriate answer for current and target state'; Column 4 'Define the tool type'; Column 5 'Provide addition detail about the tool'.

Analyze survey results for project and project portfolio management maturity

Take stock of the gap between current state and target state.

  • What process areas have the biggest gap between current and target state?
  • What areas are aligned across current and target state?

Identify what areas are currently the least and most mature.

  • What process area causes the most pain in the organization?
  • What process area is the organization’s lowest priority?

Note the overall current process maturity.

  • After having done this exercise, does the overall maturity come as a surprise?
  • If so, what are some of the areas that were previously overlooked?
A table and bar graph documenting and analysis of maturity survey results. The table has four columns labelled 'Process Area', 'Current Process Completeness', 'Current Maturity Level', and 'Target State Maturity'. Rows headers in the 'Process Area' column are 'Intake, Approval, and Prioritization', 'Resource Management', 'Portfolio Reporting', 'Project Closure and Benefits Realization', 'Portfolio Administration', and finally 'Overall Maturity'. The 'Current Process Completeness' column's values are in percentages. The 'Current Maturity Level' and 'Target State Maturity' columns' values can be one of the following: 'Absent', 'Initial', 'Defined', 'Repeatable', or 'Managed'. The bar chart visualizes the levels of the 'Target State' and 'Current State' with 'Absent' from 0-20%, 'Initial' from 20-40%, 'Defined' from 40-60%, 'Repeatable' from 60-80%, and 'Managed' from 80-100%.
  • Identify process areas with low levels of maturity
  • Spot areas of inconsistency between current and target state.
  • Assess the overall gap to get a sense of the magnitude of the effort required to get to the target state.
  • 100% doesn’t need to be the goal. Set a goal that is sustainable and always consider the value to effort ratio.

Screenshot your results and put them into the MS Project and M365 Action Plan Template.

Review the tool overview and plan to address gaps (tabs 3 & 4)

Tool Overview:

Analyze the applications used to support your project management and project portfolio management processes.

Look for:

  • Tools that help with processes across the entire PM or PPM lifecycle.
  • Tools that are only used for one specific process.

Reflect on the overlap between process areas with pain points and the current tools being used to complete this process.

Consider the sustainability of the target-state tool choice

Screenshot of a 'Tool Overview' table. Chart titled 'Current-to-Target State Supporting Tools by PPM Activity' documenting the current and target states of different supporting tools by PPM Activity. Tools listed are 'N/A', 'Standardized Document', 'Homegrown Tool', and 'Commercial Tool'.

You have the option to create an action plan for each of the areas of improvement coming out of your maturity assessment.

This can include:

  • Tactical Optimization Action: What is the main action needed to improve capability?
  • Related Actions: Is there a cross-over with any actions for other capabilities?
  • Timeframe: Is this near-term, mid-term, or long-term?
  • Proposed Start Date
  • Proposed Go-Live Date
  • RACI: Who will be responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed?
  • Status: What is the status of this action item over time?

Determine the Future of Microsoft Project for Your Organization

Phase 2: Weigh Your Implementation Options

Phase 1: Determine Your Tool Needs

Phase 2: Weigh Your Implementation Options

Phase 3: Finalize Your Implementation Approach
  • Step 1.1: Survey the M365 work management landscape
  • Step 1.2: Perform a process maturity assessment to help inform your M365 starting point
  • Step 1.3: Consider the right MS Project licenses for your stakeholders
  • Step 2.1: Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps
  • Step 2.2: Assess the MS Gold Partner Community
  • Step 3.1: Prepare an action plan

Phase Outcomes

  • A decision on how best to proceed (or not proceed) with Project for the web
  • A Partner outreach plan

Step 2.1

Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps

Activities

  • Get familiar with Project for the web: how it differs from Microsoft’s traditional project offerings and where it is going
  • Understand the basics of how to extend Project for the web in Power Apps
  • Perform a feasibility test

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Get familiar with Project for the web
  • Understand the basics of how to extend Project for the web in Power Apps
  • Perform a feasibility test to determine if taking a DIY approach to extending Project for the web is right for your organization currently

This step usually involves the following participants:

  • Portfolio Manager (PMO Director)
  • Project Managers
  • Other relevant PMO stakeholders

Outcomes of Step

  • A decision on how best to proceed (or not proceed) with Project for the web

Project for the web is the latest of Microsoft’s project management offerings

What is Project for the web?

  • First introduced in 2019 as Project Service, Project for the web (PFTW) is Microsoft’s entry into the world of cloud-based work management and lightweight project management options.
  • Built on the Power Platform and leveraging the Dataverse for data storage, PFTW integrates with the many applications that M365 users are already employing in their day-to-day work management and collaboration activities.
  • It is available as a part of your M365 subscription with the minimum activation of P1 license – it comes with P3 and P5 licenses as well.
  • From a functionality and user experience perspective, PFTW is closer to applications like Planner or Azure Boards than it is to traditional MS Project options.

What does it do?

  • PFTW allows for task and dependency tracking and basic timeline creation and scheduling and offers board and grid view options. It also allows real-time coauthoring of tasks among team members scheduled to the same project.
  • PFTW also comes with a product/functionality Microsoft calls Roadmap, which allows users to aggregate multiple project timelines into a single view for reporting purposes.

What doesn't it do?

  • With PFTW, Microsoft is offering noticeably less traditional project management functionality than its existing solutions. Absent are table stakes project management capabilities like critical path, baselining, resource load balancing, etc.

Who is it for?

  • Currently, in its base lightweight project management option, PFTW is targeted toward occasional or part-time project managers (not the PMP-certified set) tasked with overseeing and/or collaborating on small to mid-sized initiatives and projects.

Put Project for the web in perspective

Out of the box, PFTW occupies a liminal space when it comes to work management options

  • More than a task management tool, but not quite a full project management tool
  • Not exactly a portfolio management tool, yet some PPM reporting functionality is inherent in the PFTW through Roadmap

The table to the right shows some of the functionality in PFTW in relation to the task management functionality of Planner and the enterprise project and portfolio management functionality of Project Online.

Table 2.1a Planner Project for the web Project Online
Coauthoring on Tasks X X
Task Planning X X X
Resource Assignments X X X
Board Views X X X
MS Teams Integration X X X
Roadmap X X
Table and Gantt Views X X
Task Dependency Tracking X X
Timesheets X
Financial Planning X
Risks and Issues Tracking X
Program Management X
Advanced Portfolio Management X

Project for the web will eventually replace Project Online

  • As early as 2018 Microsoft has been foreshadowing a transition away from the SharePoint-backed Project environments of Server and Online toward something based in Common Data Service (CDS) – now rebranded as the Dataverse.
  • Indeed, as recently as the spring of 2021, at its Reimagine Project Management online event, Microsoft reiterated its plans to sunset Project Online and transition existing Online users to the new environment of Project for the web – though it provided no firm dates when this might occur.
    • The reason for this move away from Online appears to be an acknowledgment that the rigidity of the tool is awkward in our current dynamic, collaborative, and overhead-adverse work management paradigm.
    • To paraphrase a point made by George Bullock, Sr. Product Marketing Manager, for Microsoft at the Reimagine Project Management event, teams want to manage work as they see fit, but the rigidity of legacy solutions doesn’t allow for this, leading to a proliferation of tools and data sprawl. (This comment was made during the “Overview of Microsoft Project” session during the Reimagine event.)

PFTW is Microsoft’s proposed future-state antidote to this challenge. Its success will depend on how well users are able to integrate the solution into a wider M365 work management setting.

"We are committed to supporting our customers on Project Online and helping them transition to Project for the Web. No end-of-support has been set for Project Online, but when the time comes, we will communicate our plans on the transition path and give you plenty of advance notice." (Heather Heide, Program Manager, Microsoft Planner and Project. This comment was made during the “Overview of Microsoft Project” session during the Reimagine event.)

Project for the web can be extended beyond its base lightweight functionality

Project for the web can be extended to add more traditional and robust project and project portfolio management functionality using the Power Platform.

Microsoft plans to sunset Project Online in favor of PFTW will at first be a head-scratcher for those familiar with the extensive PPM functionality in Project Online and underwhelmed by the project and portfolio management in PFTW.

However, having built the solution upon the Power Platform, Microsoft has made it possible to take the base functionality in PFTW and extend it to create a more custom, organizationally specific user experience.

  • With a little taste of what can be done with PFTW by leveraging the Power Platform – and, in particular, Power Apps – it becomes more obvious how we, as users, can begin to evolve the base tool toward a more traditional PPM solution and how, in time, Microsoft’s developers may develop the next iteration of PFTW into something more closely resembling Project Online.

Before users get too excited about using these tools to build a custom PPM approach, we should consider the time, effort, and skills required. The slides ahead will take you through a series of considerations to help you gauge whether your PMO is ready to go it alone in extending the solution.

Extending the tool enhances functionality

Table 2.1a in this step displayed the functionality in PFTW in relation to the task management tool Planner and the robust PPM functionality in Online.

The table to the right shows how the functionality in PFTW can differ from the base solution and Project Online when it is extended using the model-driven app option in Power Apps.

Caveat: The list of functionality and processes in this table is sample data.

This functionality is not inherent in the solution as soon as you integrate with Power Apps. Rather it must be built – and your success in developing these functions will depend upon the time and skills you have available.

Table 2.1b Project for the web PFTW extended with PowerApps Project Online
Critical Path X
Timesheets X
Financial Planning X X
Risks and Issues Tracking X X
Program Management X
Status Updates X
Project Requests X
Business Cases X
Project Charters X
Resource Planning and Capacity Management X X
Project Change Requests X

Get familiar with the basics of Power Apps before you decide to go it alone

While the concept of being able to customize and grow a commercial PPM tool is enticing, the reality of low-code development and application maintenance may be too much for resource-constrained PMOs.

Long story short: Extending PFTW in Power Apps is time consuming and can be frustrating for the novice to intermediate user.

It can take days, even weeks, just to find your feet in Power Apps, let alone to determine requirements to start building out a custom model-driven app. The latter activity can entail creating custom columns and tables, determining relationships between tables to get required outputs, in addition to basic design activities.

Time-strapped and resource-constrained practitioners should pause before committing to this deployment approach. To help better understand the commitment, the slides ahead cover the basics of extending PFTW in Power Apps:

  1. Dataverse environments.
  2. Navigating Power App Designer and Sitemap Designer
  3. Customizing tables and forms in the Dataverse

See Info-Tech’s M365 Project Portfolio Management Tool Guide for more information on Power Apps in general.

Get familiar with Power Apps licensing

Power Apps for 365 comes with E1 through E5 M365 licenses (and F3 and F5 licenses), though additional functionality can be purchased if required.

While extending Project for the web with Power Apps does not at this time, in normal deployments, require additional licensing from what is included in a E3 or E5 license, it is not out of the realm of possibility that a more complex deployment could incur costs not included in the Power Apps for 365 that comes with your enterprise agreement.

The table to the right shows current additional licensing options.

Power Apps, Per User, Per App Plan

Per User Plan

Cost: US$10 per user per app per month, with a daily Dataverse database capacity of 40 MB and a daily Power Platform request capacity of 1,000. Cost: US$40 per user per month, with a daily Dataverse database capacity of 250 MB and a daily Power Platform request capacity of 5,000.
What's included? This option is marketed as the option that allows organizations to “get started with the platform at a lower entry point … [or those] that run only a few apps.” Users can run an application for a specific business case scenario with “the full capabilities of Power Apps” (meaning, we believe, that unlicensed users can still submit data via an app created by a licensed user). What's included? A per-user plan allows licensed users to run unlimited canvas apps and model-driven apps – portal apps, the licensing guide says, can be “provisioned by customers on demand.” Dataverse database limits (the 250 MB and 5,000 request capacity mentioned above) are pooled at the per tenant, not the per user plan license, capacity.

For more on Power Apps licensing, refer to Info-Tech’s Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era for more information.

What needs to be configured?

Extending Project for the web requires working with your IT peers to get the right environments configured based upon your needs.

  • PFTW data is stored in the Microsoft Dataverse (formerly Common Data Service or CDS).
  • The organization’s Dataverse can be made up of one to many environments based upon its needs. Environments are individual databases with unique proprieties in terms of who can access them and what applications can store data in them.
  • Project for the web supports three different types of environments: default, production, and sandbox.
  • You can have multiple instances of a custom PFTW app deployed across these environments and across different users – and the environment you choose depends upon the use case of each instance.

Types of Environments

  • Default Environment

    • It is the easiest to deploy and get started with the PFTW Power App in the default environment. However, it is also the most restricted environment with the least room for configuration.
    • Microsoft recommends this environment for simple deployments or for projects that span the organization. This is because everyone in the organization is by default a member of this environment – and, with the least room for configuration, the app is relatively straightforward.
    • At minimum, you need one project license to deploy PFTW in the default environment.
  • Production Environment

    • This environment affords more flexibility for how a custom app can be configured and deployed. Unlike the default environment, deploying a production environment is a manual process (through the Power Platform Admin Center) and security roles need to be set to limit users who can access the environment.
    • Because users can be limited, production environments can be used to support more advanced deployments and can support diverse processes for different teams.
    • At present, you need at least five Project licenses to deploy to production environments.
  • Sandbox Environment

    • This environment is for users who are responsible for the creation of custom apps. It offers the same functionality as a production environment but allows users to make changes without jeopardizing a production environment.

Resources to provide your IT colleagues with to help in your PFTW deployment:

  1. Project for the web admin help (Product Documentation, Microsoft)
  2. Advanced deployment for Project for the web (Video, Microsoft)
  3. Get Started with Project Power App (Product Support Documentation, Microsoft)
  4. Project for the Web Security Roles (Product Support Documentation, Microsoft)

Get started creating or customizing a model-driven app

With the proper environments procured, you can now start extending Project for the web.

  • Navigate to the environment you would like to extend PFTW within. For the purposes of the slides ahead, we’ll be using a sandbox environment for an example. Ensure you have the right access set up for production and sandbox environments of your own (see links on previous slide for more assistance).
  • To begin extending PFTW, the two core features you need to be familiar with before you start in Power Apps are (1) Tables/Entities and (2) the Power Apps Designer – and in particular the Site Map.

From the Power Apps main page in 365, you can change your environment by selecting from the options in the top right-hand corner of the screen.

Screenshot of the Power Apps “Apps” page in a sandbox environment. The Project App will appear as “Project” when the application is installed, though it is also easy to create an app from scratch.

Model-driven apps are built around tables

In Power Apps, tables (formerly called entities and still referred to as entities in the Power Apps Designer) function much like tables in Excel: they are containers of columns of data for tracking purposes. Tables define the data for your app, and you build your app around them.

In general, there are three types of tables:

  • Standard: These are out-of-the box tables included with a Dataverse environment. Most standard tables can be customized.
  • Managed: These are tables that get imported into an environment as part of a managed solution. Managed tables cannot be customized.
  • Custom: These types of tables can either be imported from another solution or created directly in the Dataverse environment. To create custom tables, users need to have System Administrator or System Customizer security roles within the Dataverse.

Tables can be accessed under Data banner on the left-hand panel of your Power Apps screen.

The below is a list of standard tables that can be used to customize your Project App.

A screenshot of the 'Data' banner in 'Power Apps' and a list of table names.

Table Name

Display Name

msdyn_project Project
msdyn_projectchange Change
msdyn_projectprogram Program
msdyn_projectrequest Request
msdyn_projectrisk Risk
msdyn_projectissue Issue
msdyn_projectstatusreport Status

App layouts are designed in the Power App Designer

You configure tables with a view to using them in the design of your app in the Power Apps Designer.

  • If you’re customizing a Project for the web app manually installed into your production or sandbox environment, you can access Designer by highlighting the app from your list of apps on the Apps page and clicking “Edit” in the ribbon above.
    • If you’re creating a model-driven app from scratch, Designer will open past the “Create a New App” intro screen.
    • If you need to create separate apps in your environment for different PMOs or business units, it is as easy to create an app from scratch as it is to customize the manual install.
  • The App Designer is where you can design the layout of your model-driven app and employ the right data tables.
Screenshot of the 'App Designer' screen in 'Power Apps'.

The Site Map determines the navigation for your app, i.e. it is where you establish the links and pages users will navigate. We will review the basics of the sitemap on the next few slides.

The tables that come loaded into your Project Power App environment (at this time, 37) via the manual install will appear in the Power Apps Designer in the Entity View pane at the bottom of the page. You do not have to use all of them in your design.

Navigate the Sitemap Designer

With the components of the previous two slides in mind, let’s walk through how to use them together in the development of a Project app.

As addressed in the previous slide, the sitemap determines the navigation for your app, i.e. it is where you establish the links and the pages that users will navigate.

To get to the Sitemap Designer, highlight the Project App from your list of apps on the Apps page and click “Edit” in the ribbon above. If you’re creating a model-driven app from scratch, Designer will open past the “Create a New App” intro screen.

  • To start designing your app layout, click the pencil icon beside the Site Map logo on the App Designer screen.
  • This will take you into the Sitemap Designer (see screenshot to the right). This is where you determine the layout of your app and the relevant data points (and related tables from within the Dataverse) that will factor into your Project App.
  • In the Sitemap Designer, you simply drag and drop the areas, groups, and subareas you want to see in your app’s user interface (see next slide for more details).
Screenshot of the 'Sitemap Designer' in 'Power Apps'.

Use Areas, Groups, and Subareas as building blocks for your App

Screenshots of the main window and the right-hand panel in the 'Sitemap Designer', and of the subarea pop-up panel where you connect components to data tables. The first two separate elements into 'Area', 'Group', and 'Subarea'.

Drag and drop the relevant components from the panel on the right-hand side of the screen into the main window to design the core pieces that will be present within your user interface.

For each subarea in your design, use the pop-up panel on the right-hand side of the screen to connect your component the relevant table from within your Dataverse environment.

How do Areas, Groups, and Subareas translate into an app?

Screenshots of the main window in the 'Sitemap Designer' and of a left-hand panel from a published 'Project App'. There are notes defining the terms 'Area', 'Group', and 'Subarea' in the context of the screenshot.

The names or titles for your Areas and Groups can be customized within the Sitemap Designer.

The names or titles for your Subareas is dependent upon your table name within the Dataverse.

Area: App users can toggle the arrows to switch between Areas.

Group: These will change to reflect the chosen Area.

Subarea: The tables and forms associated with each subarea.

How to properly save and publish your changes made in the Sitemap Designer and Power Apps Designer:

  1. When you are done making changes to your components within the Sitemap Designer, and want your changes to go live, hit the “Publish” button in the top right corner; when it has successfully published, select “Save and Close.”
  2. You will be taken back to the Power App Designer homepage. Hit “Save,” then “Publish,” and then finally “Play,” to go to your app or “Save and Close.”

How to find the right tables in the Dataverse

While you determine which tables will play into your app in the Sitemap Designer, you use the Tables link to customize tables and forms.

Screenshots of the tables search screen and the 'Tables' page under the 'Data' banner in 'Power Apps'.

The Tables page under the Data banner in Power Apps houses all of the tables available in your Dataverse environment. Do not be overwhelmed or get too excited. Only a small portion of the tables in the Tables folder in Power Apps will be relevant when it comes to extending PFTW.

Find the table you would like to customize and/or employ in your app and select it. The next slides will look at customizing the table (if you need to) and designing an app based upon the table.

To access all the tables in your environment, you’ll need to ensure your filter is set correctly on the top right-hand corner of the screen, otherwise you will only see a small portion of the tables in your Dataverse environment.

If you’re a novice, it will take you some time to get familiar with the table structure in the Dataverse.

We recommend you start with the list of tables listed on slide. You can likely find something there that you can use or build from for most PPM purposes.

How to customize a table (1 of 3)

You won’t necessarily need to customize a table, but if you do here are some steps to help you get familiar with the basics.

Screenshot of the 'Columns' tab, open in the 'msdyn_project table' in 'Power Apps'.

In this screenshot, we are clicked into the msdyn_project (display name: Project) table. As you can see, there are a series of tabs below the name of the table, and we are clicked into the Columns tab. This is where you can see all of the data points included in the table.

You are not able to customize all columns. If a column that you are not able to customize does not meet your needs, you will need to create a custom column from the “+Add column” option.

“Required” or “Optional” status pertains to when the column or field is used within your app. For customizable or custom columns this status can be set when you click into each column.

How to customize a table (2 of 3)

Create a custom “Status” column.

By way of illustrating how you might need to customize a table, we’ll highlight the “msdyn_project_statecode” (display name: Project Status) column that comes preloaded in the Project (msdyn_project) table.

  • The Project Status column only gives you a binary choice. While you are able to customize what that binary choice is (it comes preloaded with “Active” and “Inactive” as the options) you cannot add additional choices – so you cannot set it to red/yellow/green, the most universally adopted options for status in the project portfolio management world.
  • Because of this, let’s look at the effort involved in creating a choice and adding a custom column to your table based upon that choice.
Screenshots of the '+New choice' button in the 'Choices' tab and the 'New choice' pane that opens when you click it.

From within the Choices tab, click “+New choice” option to create a custom choice.

A pane will appear to the right of your screen. From there you can give your choice a name, and under the “Items” header, add your list of options.

Click save. Your custom choice is now saved to the Choices tab in the Dataverse environment and can be used in your table. Further customizations can be made to your choice if need be.

How to customize a table (3 of 3)

Back in the Tables tab, you can put your new choice to work by adding a column to a table and selecting your custom choice.

Screenshots of the pop-up window that appear when you click '+Add Column', and details of what happens when you select the data type 'Choice'.

Start by selecting “+ Add Column” at the top left-hand side of your table. A window will appear on the right-hand side of the page, and you will have options to name your column and choose the data type.

As you can see in this screenshot to the left, data type options include text, number and date types, and many more. Because we are looking to use our custom choice for this example, we are going to choose “Choice.”

When you select “Choice” as your data type, all of the choice options available or created in your Dataverse environment will appear. Find your custom choice – in this example the one name “RYG Status” – and click done. When the window closes, be sure to select “Save Table.”

How to develop a Form based upon your table (1 of 3 – open the form editor)

A form is the interface users will engage with when using your Project app.

When the Project app is first installed in your environment, the main user form will be lacking, with only a few basic data options.

This form can be customized and additional tabs can be added to your user interface.

  1. To do this, go to the table you want to customize.
  2. In the horizontal series of tabs at the top of the screen, below the table title select the “Forms” option.
  3. Click on the main information option or select Edit Form for the form with “Main” under its form type. A new window will open where you can customize your form.
Screenshot of the 'Forms' tab, open in the 'msdyn_project' table in 'Power Apps'.

Select the Forms tab.

Start with the form that has “Main” as its Format Type.

How to develop a Form based upon your table (2 of 3 – add a component)

Screenshot of the 'Components' window in 'Power Apps' with a list of layouts as a window to the right of the main screen where you can name and format the chosen layout.

You can add element like columns or sections to your form by selecting the Components window.

In this example, we are adding a 1-Column section. When you select that option from the menu options on the left of the screen, a window will open to the right of the screen where you can name and format the section.

Choose the component you would like to add from the layout options. Depending on the table element you are looking to use, you can also add input options like number inputs and star ratings and pull in related data elements like a project timeline.

How to develop a Form based upon your table (3 of 3 – add table columns)

Screenshot of the 'Table Columns' window in 'Power Apps' and instructions for adding table columns.

If you click on the “Table Columns” option on the left-hand pane, all of the column options from within your table will appear in alphabetical order.

When clicked within the form section you would like to add the new column to, select the column from the list of option in the left-hand pane. The new data point will appear within the section. You can order and format section elements as you would like.

When you are done editing the form, click the “Save” icon in the top right-hand corner. If you are ready for your changes to go live within your Project App, select the “Publish” icon in the top right-hand corner. Your updated form will go live within all of the apps that use it.

The good and the bad of extending Project for the web

The content in this step has not instructed users how to extend PFTW; rather, it has covered three basic core pieces of Power Apps that those interesting in PFTW need to be aware of: Dataverse environments, the Power Apps and Sitemaps Designers, and Tables and associated Forms.

Because we have only covered the very tip of the iceberg, those interested in going further and taking a DIY approach to extending PFTW will need to build upon these basics to unlock further functionality. Indeed, it takes work to develop the product into something that begins to resemble a viable enterprise project and portfolio management solution. Here are some of the good and the bad elements associated with that work:

The Good:

  • You can right-size and purpose build: add as much or as little project management rigor as your process requires. Related, you can customize the solution in multiple ways to suit the needs of specific business units or portfolios.
  • Speed to market: it is possible to get up and running quickly with a minimum-viable product.

The Bad:

  • Work required: to build anything beyond MVP requires independent research and trial and error.
  • Time required: to build anything beyond MVP requires time and skills that many PMOs don’t have.
  • Shadow support costs: ungoverned app creation could have negative support and maintenance impacts across IT.

"The move to Power Platform and low code development will […increase] maintenance overhead. Will low code solution hit problems at scale? [H]ow easy will it be to support hundreds or thousands of small applications?

I can hear the IT support desks already complaining at the thought of this. This part of the puzzle is yet to hit real world realities of support because non developers are busy creating lots of low code applications." (Ben Hosking, Software Developer and Blogger, "Why low code software development is eating the world")

Quick start your extension with the Accelerator

For those starting out, there is a pre-built app you can import into your environment to extend the Project for the web app without any custom development.

  • If the DIY approach in the previous slides was overwhelming, and you don’t have the budget for a MS Partner route in the near-term, this doesn’t mean that evolving your Project for the web app is unattainable.
  • Thanks to a partnership between OnePlan (one of the MS Gold Partners we detail in the next step) and Microsoft, Project for the web users have access to a free resource to help them evolve the base Project app. It’s called the “Project for the web Accelerator” (commonly referred to as “the Accelerator” for short).
  • Users interested in learning more about, and accessing, this free resource should refer to the links below:
    1. The Future of Microsoft Project Online (source: OnePlan).
    2. Introducing the Project Accelerator (source: Microsoft).
    3. Project for the web Accelerator (source: GitHub)
Screen shot from one of the dashboards that comes with the Accelerator (image source: GitHub).

2.1.1 Perform a feasibility test (1 of 2)

15 mins

As we’ve suggested, and as the material in this step indicates, extending PFTW in a DIY fashion is not small task. You need a knowledge of the Dataverse and Power Apps, and access to the requisite skills, time, and resources to develop the solution.

To determine whether your PMO and organization are ready to go it alone in extending PFTW, perform the following activity:

  1. Convene a collection of portfolio, project, and PMO staff.
  2. Using the six-question survey on tab 5 of the Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool (see screenshot to the right) as a jumping off point for a discussion, consider the readiness of your PMO or project organization to undertake a DIY approach to extending and implementing PFTW at this time.
  3. You can use the recommendations on tab 5 of the Microsoft Project & 365 Licensing Tool to inform your next steps, and input the gauge graphic in section 4 of the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template.
Screenshots from the 'Project for the Web Extensibility Feasibility Test'.

Go to tab 5 of the Microsoft Project & M365 Licensing Tool

See next slide for additional activity details

2.1.1 Perform a feasibility test (2 of 2)

Input: The contents of this step, The Project for the Web Extensibility Feasibility Test (tab 5 in the Microsoft Project & 365 Licensing Tool)

Output: Initial recommendations on whether to proceed and how to proceed with a DIY approach to extending Project for the web

Materials: The Project for the Web Extensibility Feasibility Test (tab 5 in the Microsoft Project & 365 Licensing Tool)

Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), Project Managers, Other relevant PMO stakeholders

Step 2.2

Assess the Microsoft Gold Partner Community

Activities

  • Review what to look for in a Microsoft Partner
  • Determine whether your needs would benefit from reaching out to a Microsoft Partner
  • Review three key Partners from the North American market
  • Create a Partner outreach plan

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Review what to look for in a Microsoft Partner.
  • Determine whether your needs would benefit from reaching out to a Microsoft Partner.
  • Review three key Partners from the North American market.

This step usually involves the following participants:

  • Portfolio Manager (PMO Director)
  • Project Managers
  • Other relevant PMO stakeholders

Outcomes of Step

  • A better understanding of MS Partners
  • A Partner outreach plan

You don’t have to go it alone

Microsoft has an established community of Partners who can help in your customizations and implementations of Project for the web and other MS Project offerings.

If the content in the previous step seemed too technical or overly complex in a way that scared you away from a DIY approach to extending Microsoft’s latest project offering (and at some point in the near future, soon to be its only project offering), Project for the web, fear not.

You do not have to wade into the waters of extending Project for the web alone, or for that matter, in implementing any other MS Project solution.

Instead, Microsoft nurtures a community of Silver and Gold partners who offer hands-on technical assistance and tool implementation services. While the specific services provided vary from partner to partner, all can assist in the customization and implementation of any of Microsoft’s Project offerings.

In this step we will cover what to look for in a Partner and how to assess whether you are a good candidate for the services of a Partner. We will also highlight three Partners from within the North American market.

The basics of the Partner community

What is a Microsoft Partner?

Simply put, an MS Gold Partner is a software or professional services organization that provides sales and services related to Microsoft products.

They’re resellers, implementors, integrators, software manufacturers, trainers, and virtually any other technology-related business service.

  • Microsoft has for decades opted out of being a professional services organization, outside of its very “leading edge” offerings from MCS (Microsoft Consulting Services) for only those technologies that are so new that they aren’t yet supported by MS Partners.
  • As you can see in the chart on the next slide, to become a silver or gold certified partner, firms must demonstrate expertise in specific areas of business and technology in 18 competency areas that are divided into four categories: applications and infrastructure, business applications, data and AI, and modern workplace and security.

More information on what it takes to become a Microsoft Partner:

  1. Partner Center (Document Center, Microsoft)
  2. Differentiate your business by attaining Microsoft competencies (Document Center, Microsoft)
  3. Partner Network Homepage (Webpage, Microsoft)
  4. See which partner offer is right for you (Webpage, Microsoft)

Types of partnerships and qualifications

Microsoft Partner Network

Microsoft Action Pack

Silver Competency

Gold Competency

What is it?

The Microsoft Partner Network (MPN) is a community that offers members tools, information, and training. Joining the MPN is an entry-level step for all partners. The Action Pack is an annual subscription offered to entry-level partners. It provides training and marketing materials and access to expensive products and licenses at a vastly reduced price. Approximately 5% of firms in the Microsoft Partner Network (MPN) are silver partners. These partners are subject to audits and annual competency exams to maintain silver status. Approximately 1% of firms in the Microsoft Partner Network (MPN) are gold partners. These partners are subject to audits and annual competency exams to maintain Gold status.

Requirements

Sign up for a membership Annual subscription fee While requirements can vary across competency area, broadly speaking, to become a silver partner firms must:
  • Pass regular exams and skills assessments, with at least two individuals on staff with Microsoft Certified Professional Status.
  • Hit annual customer, revenue, and licensing metrics.
  • Pay the annual subscription fee.
While requirements can vary across competency area, broadly speaking, to become a gold partner firms must:
  • Pass regular exams and skills assessments, with at least two individuals on staff with Microsoft Certified Professional Status.
  • Hit annual customer, revenue, and licensing metrics.
  • Pay the annual subscription fee.

Annual Fee

No Cost $530 $1800 $5300

When would a MS Partner be helpful?

  • Project management and portfolio management practitioners might look into procuring the services of a Microsoft Partner for a variety of reasons.
  • Because services vary from partner to partner (help to extend Project for the web, implement Project Server or Project Online, augment PMO staffing, etc.) we won’t comment on specific needs here.
  • Instead, the three most common conditions that trigger the need are listed to the right.

Speed

When you need to get results faster than your staff can grow the needed capabilities.

Cost

When the complexity of the purchase decision, implementation, communication, training, configuration, and/or customization cannot be cost-justified for internal staff, often because you’ll only do it once.

Expertise & Skills

When your needs cannot be met by the core Microsoft technology without significant extension or customization.

Canadian Microsoft Partners Spotlight

As part of our research process for this blueprint, Info-Tech asked Microsoft Canada for referrals and introductions to leading Microsoft Partners. We spent six months collaborating with them on fresh research into the underlying platform.

These vendors are listed below and are highlighted in subsequent slides.

Spotlighted Partners:

Logo for One Plan. Logo for PMO Outsource Ltd. Logo for Western Principles.

Please Note: While these vendors were referred to us by Microsoft Canada and have a footprint in the Canadian market, their footprints extend beyond this to the North American and global markets.

A word about our approach

Photo of Barry Cousins, Project Portfolio Management Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group.
Barry Cousins
Project Portfolio Management Practice Lead
Info-Tech Research Group

Our researchers have been working with Microsoft Project Online and Microsoft Project Server clients for years, and it’s fair to say that most of these clients (at some point) used a Microsoft Partner in their deployment. They’re not really software products, per se; they’re platforms. As a Microsoft Partner in 2003 when Project Server got its first big push, I heard it loud and clear: “Some assembly required. You might only make 7% on the licensing, but the world’s your oyster for services.”

In the past few years, Microsoft froze the market for major Microsoft Project decisions by making it clear that the existing offering is not getting updates while the new offering (Project for the web) doesn’t do what the old one did. And in a fascinating timing coincidence, the market substantially adopted Microsoft 365 during that period, which enables access to Project for the web.

Many of Info-Tech’s clients are justifiably curious, confused, and concerned, while the Microsoft Partners have persisted in their knowledge and capability. So, we asked Microsoft Canada for referrals and introductions to leading Microsoft Partners and spent six months collaborating with them on fresh research into the underlying platform.

Disclosure: Info-Tech conducted collaborative research with the partners listed on the previous slide to produce this publication. Market trends and reactions were studied, but the only clients identified were in case studies provided by the Microsoft Partners. Info-Tech’s customers have been, and remain, anonymous. (Barry Cousins, Project Portfolio Management Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group)

MS Gold Partner Spotlight:

OnePlan

Logo for One Plan.
Headquarters: San Marcos, California, and Toronto, Ontario
Number of Employees: ~80
Active Since: 2007 (as EPMLive)
Website: www.oneplan.ai

Who are they?

  • While the OnePlan brand has only been the marketplace for a few years, the company has been a major player in MS Gold Partner space for well over a decade.
  • Born out of EPMLive in the mid-aughts, OnePlan Solutions has evolved through a series of acquisitions, including Upland, Tivitie, and most recently Wicresoft.

What do they do?

  • Software: Its recent rebranding is largely because OnePlan Solutions is as much a software company as it is a professional services firm. The OnePlan software product is an impressive solution that can be used on its own to facilitate the portfolio approaches outlined on the next slide and that can also integrate with the tools your organization is already using to manage tasks (see here for a full rundown of the solutions within the Microsoft stack and beyond OnePlan can integrate with).
  • Beyond its ability to integrate with existing solutions, as a software product, OnePlan has modules for resource planning, strategic portfolio planning, financial planning, time tracking, and more.

  • PPM Consulting Services: The OnePlan team also offers portfolio management consulting services. See the next slide for a list of its approaches to project portfolio management.

Markets served

  • US, Canada, Europe, and Australia

Channel Differentiation

  • OnePlan scales to all the PPM needs of all industry types.
  • Additionally, OnePlan offers insights and functionality specific to the needs of BioTech-Pharma.

What differentiates OnePlan?

  • OnePlan co-developed the Project Accelerator for Project for the web with Microsoft. The OnePlan team’s involvement in developing the Accelerator and making it free for users to access suggests it is aligned to and has expertise in the purpose-built and collaborative vision behind Microsoft’s move away from Project Online and toward the Power Platform and Teams collaboration.
  • 2021 MS Gold Partner of the Year. At Microsoft’s recent Microsoft Inspire event, OnePlan was recognized as the Gold Partner of the Year for Project and Portfolio Management as well as a finalist for Power Apps and Power Automate.
  • OnePlan Approaches: Below is a list of the services or approaches to project portfolio management that OnePlan provides. See its website for more details.
    • Strategic Portfolio Management: Align work to objectives and business outcomes. Track performance against the proposed objectives outcomes.
    • Agile Portfolio Management: Implement Agile practices across the organization, both at the team and executive level.
    • Adaptive Portfolio Management: Allow teams to use the project methodology and tools that best suit the work/team. Maintain visibility and decision making across the entire portfolio.
    • Professional Services Automation: Use automation to operate with greater efficiency.

"OnePlan offers a strategic portfolio, financial and resource management solution that fits the needs of every PMO. Optimize your portfolio, financials and resources enterprise wide." (Paul Estabrooks, Vice President at OnePlan)

OnePlan Case Study

This case study was provided to Info-Tech by OnePlan.

Brambles

INDUSTRY: Supply Chain & Logistics
SOURCE: OnePlan

Overview: Brambles plays a key role in the delivery or return of products amongst global trading partners such as manufacturers, distributors and retailers.

Challenge

Brambles had a variety of Project Management tools with no easy way of consolidating project management data. The proliferation of project management solutions was hindering the execution of a long-term business transformation strategy. Brambles needed certain common and strategic project management processes and enterprise project reporting while still allowing individual project management solutions to be used as part of the PPM platform.

Solution

As part of the PMO-driven business transformation strategy, Brambles implemented a project management “operating system” acting as a foundation for core processes such as project intake, portfolio management, resource, and financial planning and reporting while providing integration capability for a variety of tools used for project execution.

OnePlan’s new Adaptive PPM platform, combining the use of PowerApps and OnePlan, gives Brambles the desired PPM operating system while allowing for tool flexibility at the execution level.

Results

  • Comprehensive picture of progress across the portfolio.
  • Greater adoption by allowing flexibility of work management tools.
  • Modern portfolio management solution that enables leadership to make confident decision.

Solution Details

  • OnePlan
  • Project
  • Power Apps
  • Power Automate
  • Power BI
  • Teams

Contacting OnePlan Solutions

www.oneplan.ai

Joe Larscheid: jlarscheid@oneplan.ai
Paul Estabrooks: pestabrooks@oneplan.ai
Contact Us: contact@oneplan.ai
Partners: partner@oneplan.ai

Partner Resources. OnePlan facilitates regular ongoing live webinars on PPM topics that anyone can sign up for on the OnePlan website.

For more information on upcoming webinars, or to access recordings of past webinars, see here.

Additional OnePlan Resources

  1. How to Extend Microsoft Teams into a Collaborative Project, Portfolio and Work Management Solution (on-demand webinar, OnePlan’s YouTube channel)
  2. What Does Agile PPM Mean To The Modern PMO (on-demand webinar, OnePlan’s YouTube channel)
  3. OnePlan is fused with the Microsoft User Experience (blog article, OnePlan)
  4. Adaptive Portfolio Management Demo – Bringing Order to the Tool Chaos with OnePlan (product demo, OnePlan’s YouTube channel)
  5. How OnePlan is aligning with Microsoft’s Project and Portfolio Management Vision (blog article, OnePlan)
  6. Accelerating Office 365 Value with a Hybrid Project Portfolio Management Solution (product demo, OnePlan’s YouTube channel)

MS Gold Partner Spotlight:

PMO Outsource Ltd.

Logo for PMO Outsource Ltd.

Headquarters: Calgary, Alberta, and Mississauga, Ontario
Website: www.pmooutsource.com

Who are they?

  • PMO Outsource Ltd. is a Microsoft Gold Partner and PMI certified professional services firm based in Alberta and Ontario, Canada.
  • It offers comprehensive project and portfolio management offerings with a specific focus on project lifecycle management, including demand management, resource management, and governance and communication practices.

What do they do?

  • Project Online and Power Platform Expertise. The PMO Outsource Ltd. team has extensive knowledge in both Microsoft’s old tech (Project Server and Desktop) and in its newer, cloud-based technologies (Project Online, Project for the web, the Power Platform, and Dynamics 365). As the case study in two slides demonstrates, PMO Outsource Ltd. Uses its in-depth knowledge of the Microsoft suite to help organizations automate project and portfolio data collection process, create efficiencies, and encourage cloud adoption.
  • PPM Consulting Services: In addition to its Microsoft platform expertise, the PMO Outsource Ltd. team also offers project and portfolio management consulting services, helping organizations evolve their process and governance structures as well as their approaches to PPM tooling.

Markets served

  • Global

Channel Differentiation

  • PMO Outsource Ltd. scales to all the PPM needs of all industry types.

What differentiates PMO Outsource Ltd.?

  • PMO Staff Augmentation. In addition to its technology and consulting services, PMO Outsource Ltd. offers PMO staff augmentation services. As advertised on its website, it offers “scalable PMO staffing solutions. Whether you require Project Managers, Business Analysts, Admins or Coordinators, [PMO Outsource Ltd.] can fulfill your talent search requirements from a skilled pool of resources.”
  • Multiple and easy-to-understand service contract packages. PMO Outsource Ltd. offers many prepackaged service offerings to suit PMOs’ needs. Those packages include “PMO Management, Admin, and Support,” “PPM Solution, Site and Workflow Configuration,” and “Add-Ons.” For full details of what’s included in these services packages, see the PMO Outsource Ltd. website.
  • PMO Outsource Ltd. Services: Below is a list of the services or approaches to project portfolio management that PMO Outsource Ltd. Provides. See its website for more details.
    • Process Automation, Workflows, and Tools. Facilitate line of sight by tailoring Microsoft’s technology to your organization’s needs and creating custom workflows.
    • PMO Management Framework. Receive a professionally managed PPM methodology as well as governance standardization of processes, tools, and templates.
    • Custom BI Reports. Leverage its expertise in reporting and dashboarding to create the visibility your organization needs.

"While selecting an appropriate PPM tool, the PMO should not only evaluate the standard industry tools but also analyze which tool will best fit the organization’s strategy, budget, and culture in the long run." (Neeta Manghnani, PMO Strategist, PMO Outsource Ltd.)

PMO Outsource Ltd. Case Study

This case study was provided to Info-Tech by PMO Outsource Ltd.

SAMUEL

INDUSTRY: Manufacturing
SOURCE: PMO Outsource Ltd.

Challenge

  • MS Project 2013 Server (Legacy/OnPrem)
  • Out-of-support application and compliance with Office 365
  • Out-of-support third-party application for workflows
  • No capability for resource management
  • Too many manual processes for data maintenance and server administration

Solution

  • Migrate project data to MS Project Online
  • Recreate workflows using Power Automate solution
  • Configure Power BI content packs for Portfolio reporting and resource management dashboards
  • Recreate OLAP reports from legacy environment using Power BI
  • Cut down nearly 50% of administrative time by automating PMO/PPM processes
  • Save costs on Server hardware/application maintenance by nearly 75%

Full Case Study Link

  • For full details about how PMO Outsource Ltd. assisted Samuel in modernizing its solution and creating efficiencies, visit the Microsoft website where this case study is highlighted.

Contacting PMO Outsource Ltd.

www.pmooutsource.com

700 8th Ave SW, #108
Calgary, AB T2P 1H2
Telephone : +1 (587) 355-3745
6045 Creditview Road, #169
Mississauga, ON L5V 0B1
Telephone : +1 (289) 334-1228
Information: info@pmooutsource.com
LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/company/pmo-outsource/

Partner Resources. PMO Outsource Ltd.’s approach is rooted within a robust and comprehensive PPM framework that is focused on driving strategic outcomes and business success.

For a full overview of its PPM framework, see here.

Additional PMO Outsource Ltd. Resources

  1. 5 Benefits of PPM tools and PMO process automation (blog article, PMO Outsource Ltd.)
  2. Importance of PMO (blog article, PMO Outsource Ltd.)
  3. Meet the Powerful and Reimagined PPM tool for Everyone! (video, PMO Outsource Ltd. LinkedIn page)
  4. MS Project Tips: How to add #Sprints to an existing Project? (video, PMO Outsource Ltd. LinkedIn page)
  5. MS Project Tips: How to add a milestone to your project? (video, PMO Outsource Ltd. LinkedIn page)
  6. 5 Benefits of implementing Project Online Tools (video, PMO Outsource Ltd. LinkedIn page)

MS Gold Partner Spotlight:

Western Principles

Logo for Western Principles.

Headquarters: Vancouver, British Columbia
Years Active: 16 Years
Website: www.westernprinciples.com

Who are they?

  • Western Principles is a Microsoft Gold Partner and UMT 360 PPM software provider based in British Columbia with a network of consultants across Canada.
  • In the last sixteen years, it has successfully conducted over 150 PPM implementations, helping in the implementation, training, and support of Microsoft Project offerings as well as UMT360 – a software solution provider that, much like OnePlan, enhances the PPM capabilities of the Microsoft platform.

What do they do?

  • Technology expertise. The Western Principles team helps organizations maximize the value they are getting form the Microsoft Platform. Not only does it offer expertise in all the solutions in the MS Project ecosystem, it also helps organizations optimize their use and understanding of Teams, SharePoint, the Power Platform, and more. In addition to the Microsoft platform, Western Principles is partnered with many other technology providers, including UMT360 for strategic portfolio management, the Simplex Group for project document controls, HMS for time sheets, and FluentPro for integration, back-ups, and migrations.
  • PPM Consulting Services: In addition to its technical services and solutions, Western Principles offers PPM consulting and staff augmentation services.

Markets served

  • Canada

Channel Differentiation

  • Western Principles scales to all the PPM needs of all industry types, public and private sector.
  • In addition, its website offers persona-specific information based on the PPM needs of engineering and construction, new product development, marketing, and more.

What differentiates Western Principles?

  • Gold-certified UMT 360 partner. In addition to being a Microsoft Gold Partner, Western Principles is a gold-certified UMT 360 partner. UMT 360 is a strategic portfolio management tool that integrates with many other work management solutions to offer holistic line of sight into the organization’s supply-demand pain points and strategic portfolio management needs. Some of the solutions UMT 360 integrates with include Project Online and Project for the web, Azure DevOps, Jira, and many more. See here for more information on the impressive functionality in UMT360.
  • Sustainment Services. Adoption can be the bane of most PPM tool implementations. Among the many services Western Principles offers, its “sustainment services” stand out. According to Western Principles’ website, these services are addressed to those who require “continual maintenance, change, and repair activities” to keep PPM systems in “good working order” to help maximize ROI.
  • Western Principles Services: In addition to the above, below is a list of some of the services that Western Principles offers. See its website for a full list of services.
    • Process Optimization: Determine your requirements and process needs.
    • Integration: Create a single source of truth.
    • Training: Ensure your team knows how to use the systems you implement.
    • Staff Augmentation: Provide experienced project team members based upon your needs.

"One of our principles is to begin with the end in mind. This means that we will work with you to define a roadmap to help you advance your strategic portfolio … and project management capabilities. The roadmap for each customer is different and based on where you are today, and where you need to get to." (Western Principles, “Your Strategic Portfolio Management roadmap,” Whitepaper)

Contacting Western Principles

www.westernprinciples.com

610 – 700 West Pender St.
Vancouver, BC V6C 1G8
+1 (800) 578-4155
Information: info@westernprinciples.com
LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/company/western-principle...

Partner Resources. Western Principles provides a multitude of current case studies on its home page. These case studies let you know what the firm is working on this year and the type of support it provides to its clientele.

To access these case studies, see here.

Additional Western Principles Resources

  1. Program and Portfolio Roll ups with Microsoft Project and Power BI (video, Western Principles YouTube Channel)
  2. Dump the Spreadsheets for Microsoft Project Online (video, Western Principles YouTube Channel)
  3. Power BI for Project for the web (video, Western Principles YouTube Channel)
  4. How to do Capacity Planning and Resource Management in Microsoft Project Online [Part 1 & Part 2] (video, Western Principles YouTube Channel)
  5. Extend & Integrate Microsoft Project (whitepaper, Western Principles)
  6. Your COVID-19 Return-to-Work Plan (whitepaper, Western Principles)

Watch Info-Tech’s Analyst-Partner Briefing Videos to lean more

Info-Tech was able to sit down with the partners spotlighted in this step to discuss the current state of the PPM market and Microsoft’s place within it.

  • All three partners spotlighted in this step contributed to Info-Tech’s research process for this publication.
  • For two of the partners, OnePlan and PMO Outsource Ltd., Info-Tech was able to record a conversation where our analysts and the partners discuss Microsoft’s current MS Project offerings, the current state of the PPM tool market, and the services and the approaches of each respective partner.
  • A third video briefing with Western Principles has not happened yet due to logistical reasons. We are hoping we can include a video chat with our peers at Western Principles in the near future.
Screenshot form the Analyst-Partner Briefing Videos. In addition to the content covered in this step, you can use these videos for further information about the partners to inform your next steps.

Download Info-Tech’s Analyst-Partner Briefing Videos (OnePlan & PMO Outsource Ltd.)

2.2.1 Create a partner outreach plan

1-3 hours

Input: Contents of this step, List of additional MS Gold Partners

Output: A completed partner outreach program

Materials: MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template

Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers, CIO

  1. With an understanding of the partner ecosystem, compile a working group of PMO peers and stakeholders to produce a gameplan for engaging the MS Gold Partner ecosystem.
    • For additional partner options see Microsoft’s Partner Page.
  2. Using slide 20 in Info-Tech’s MS Project and M365 Action Plan Template, document the Partners you would want or have scheduled briefings with.
    • As you go through the briefings and research process, document the pros and cons and areas of specialized associated with each vendor for your particular work management implementation.

Download the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

2.2.2 Document your PM and PPM requirements

1-3 hours

Input: Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment, Project Management Maturity Assessment

Output: MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template

Materials: Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment, Project Management Maturity Assessment, MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template

Participants: Portfolio Manager (PMO Director), PMO Admin Team, Project Managers, CIO

  1. As you prepare to engage the Partner Community, you should have a sense of where your project management and project portfolio management gaps are to better communicate your tooling needs.
  2. Leverage tab 4 from both your Project Portfolio Management Assessment and Project Management Assessment from step 1.3 of this blueprint to help document and communicate your requirements. Those tabs prioritize your project and portfolio management needs by highest impact for the organization.
  3. You can use the outputs of the tab to inform your inputs on slide 23 of the MS Project & M365 Action Plan Template to present to organizational stakeholders and share with the Partners you are briefing with.

Download the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

Determine the Future of Microsoft Project for Your Organization

Phase 3: Finalize Your Implementation Approach

Phase 1: Determine Your Tool NeedsPhase 2: Weigh Your Implementation Options

Phase 3: Finalize Your Implementation Approach

  • Step 1.1: Survey the M365 work management landscape
  • Step 1.2: Perform a process maturity assessment to help inform your M365 starting point
  • Step 1.3: Consider the right MS Project licenses for your stakeholders
  • Step 2.1: Get familiar with extending Project for the web using Power Apps
  • Step 2.2: Assess the MS Gold Partner Community
  • Step 3.1: Prepare an action plan

Phase Outcomes

An action plan concerning what to do with MS Project and M365 for your PMO or project organization.

Step 3.1

Prepare an action plan

Activities

  • Compile the current state results
  • Prepare an Implementation Roadmap
  • Complete your presentation deck

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Assess the impact of organizational change for the project
  • Develop your vision for stakeholders
  • Compile the current state results and document the implementation approach
  • Create clarity through a RACI and proposed implementation timeline

This step usually involves the following participants:

  • Portfolio Manager (PMO Director)
  • PMO Admin Team
  • Business Analysts
  • Project Managers

Outcomes of Step

  • Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan

Assess the impact of organizational change

Be prepared to answer: “What’s in it for me?”

Before jumping into licensing and third-party negotiations, ensure you’ve clearly assessed the impact of change.

Tailor the work effort involved in each step, as necessary:

  1. Assess the impact
    • Use the impact assessment questions to identify change impacts.
  2. Plan for change
    • Document the impact on each stakeholder group.
    • Anticipate their response.
    • Curate a compelling message for each stakeholder group.
    • Develop a communication plan.
  3. Act according to plan
    • Identify your executive sponsor.
    • Enable the sponsor to drive change communication.
    • Coach managers on how they can drive change at the individual level.

Impact Assessment Questions

  • Will the change impact how our clients/customers receive, consume, or engage with our products/services?
  • Will there be a price increase?
  • Will there be a change to compensation and/or rewards?
  • Will the vision or mission of the job change?
  • Will the change span multiple locations/time zones?
  • Are multiple products/services impacted by this change?
  • Will staffing levels change?
  • Will this change increase the workload?
  • Will the tools of the job be substantially different?
  • Will a new or different set of skills be needed?
  • Will there be a change in reporting relationships?
  • Will the workflow and approvals be changed?
  • Will there be a substantial change to scheduling and logistics?

Master Organizational Change Management Practices blueprint

Develop your vision for stakeholders

After careful analysis and planning, it’s time to synthesize your findings to those most impacted by the change.

Executive Brief

  • Prepare a compelling message about the current situation.
  • Outline the considerations the working group took into account when developing the action plan.
  • Succinctly describe the recommendations proposed by the working group.

Goals

  • Identify the goals for the project.
  • Explain the details for each goal to develop the organizational rationale for the project.
  • These goals are the building blocks for the change communication that the executive sponsor will use to build a coalition of sponsors.

Future State Vision

  • Quantify the high-level costs and benefits of moving forward with this project.
  • Articulate the future- state maturity level for both the project and project portfolio management process.
  • Reiterate the organizational rationale and drivers for change.

"In failed transformations, you often find plenty of plans, directives, and programs, but no vision…A useful rule of thumb: If you can’t communicate the vision to someone in five minutes or less and get a reaction that signifies both understanding and interest, you are not yet done…" (John P. Kotter, Leading Change)

Get ready to compile the analysis completed throughout this blueprint in the subsequent activities. The outputs will come together in your Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan.

Use the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template to help communicate your vision

Our boardroom-ready presentation and communication template can be customized using the outputs of this blueprint.

  • Getting stakeholders to understand why you are recommending specific work management changes and then communicating exactly what those changes are and what they will cost is key to the success of your work management implementation.
  • To that end, the slides ahead walk you through how to customize the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template.
  • Many of the current-state analysis activities you completed during phase 1 of this blueprint can be directly made use of within the template as can the decisions you made and requirements you documented during phase 2.
  • By the end of this step, you will have a boardroom-ready presentation that will help you communicate your future-state vision.
Screenshot of Info-Tech's Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template with a note to 'Update the presentation or distribution date and insert your name, role, and organization'.

Download Info-Tech’s Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

3.1.1 Compile current state results

1-3 hours

Input: Force Field Analysis Tool, Tool Audit Workbook, Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool, Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool

Output: Section 1: Executive Brief, Section 2: Context and Constraints

Materials: Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

Participants: PMO Director, PMO Admin Team, Business Analysts, Project Managers

  1. As a group, review the results of the tools introduced throughout this blueprint. Use this information along with organizational knowledge to document the business context and current state.
  2. Update the driving forces for change and risks and constraints slides using your outputs from the Force Field Analysis Tool.
  3. Update the current tool landscape, tool satisfaction, and tool audit results slides using your outputs from the Tool Audit Workbook.
  4. Update the gap analysis results slides using your outputs from the Project Management and Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tools.

Screenshots of 'Business Context and Current State' screen from the 'Force Field Analysis Tool', the 'Tool Audit Results' screen from the 'Tool Audit Workbook', and the 'Project Portfolio Management Gap Analysis Results' screen from the 'PM and PPM Maturity Assessments Tool'.

Download the Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

3.2.1 Option A: Prepare a DIY roadmap

1-3 hours; Note: This is only applicable if you have chosen the DIY route

Input: List of key PPM decision points, List of who is accountable for PPM decisions, List of who has PPM decision-making authority

Output: Section 3: DIY Implementation Approach

Materials: Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

Participants: PMO Director, PMO Admin Team, Business Analysts, Project Managers

  1. As a group, review the results of the Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool. Use this information along with organizational knowledge and discussion with the working group to complete Section 3: DIY Implementation Approach.
  2. Copy and paste your results from tab 5 of the Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool. Update the Implementation Approach slide to detail the rationale for selecting this option.
  3. Update the Action Plan to articulate the details for total and annual costs of the proposed licensing solution.
  4. Facilitate a discussion to determine roles and responsibilities for the implementation. Based on the size, risk, and complexity of the implementation, create a reasonable timeline.
Screenshots from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template' outlining the 'DIY Implementation Approach'.

Download the Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

3.2.1 Option b: Prepare a Partner roadmap

1-3 hours; Note: This is only applicable if you have chosen the Partner route

Input: Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool, Information on Microsoft Partners

Output: Section 4: Microsoft Partner Implementation Route

Materials: Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

Participants: PMO Director, PMO Admin Team, Business Analysts, Project Managers

  1. As a group, review the results of the Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool. Use this information along with organizational knowledge and discussion with the working group to complete Section 4: Microsoft Partner Implementation Route.
  2. Copy and paste your results from tab 5 of the Microsoft Project and M365 Licensing Tool. Update the Implementation Approach slide to detail the rationale for selecting this option.
  3. Develop an outreach plan for the Microsoft Partners you are planning to survey. Set targets for briefing dates and assign an individual to own any back-and-forth communication. Document the pros and cons of each Partner and gauge interest in continuing to analyze the vendor as a possible solution.
  4. Facilitate a discussion to determine roles and responsibilities for the implementation. Based on the size, risk, and complexity of the implementation, create a reasonable timeline.

Screenshots from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template' outlining the 'Microsoft Partner Implementation Route'.

Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

3.1.2 Complete your presentation deck

1-2 hours

Input: Outputs from the exercises in this blueprint

Output: Section 5: Future-State Vision and Goals

Materials: Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

Participants: PMO Director, PMO Admin Team, Business Analysts, Project Managers

  1. Put the finishing touches on your presentation deck by documenting your future- state vision and goals.
  2. Prepare to present to your stakeholders.
    • Understand your audience, their needs and priorities, and their degree of knowledge and experiences with technology. This informs what to include in your presentation and how to position the message and goal.
  3. Review the deck beginning to end and check for spelling, grammar, and vertical logic.
  4. Practice delivering the vision for the project through several practice sessions.

Screenshots from the 'Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template' regarding finishing touches.

Microsoft Project and M365 Action Plan Template

Pitch your vision to key stakeholders

There are multiple audiences for your pitch, and each audience requires a different level of detail when addressed. Depending on the outcomes expected from each audience, a suitable approach must be chosen. The format and information presented will vary significantly from group to group.

Audience

Key Contents

Outcome

Business Executives

  • Section 1: Executive Brief
  • Section 2: Context and Constraints
  • Section 5: Future-State Vision and Goals
  • Identify executive sponsor

IT Leadership

  • Sections 1-5 with a focus on Section 3 or 4 depending on implementation approach
  • Get buy-in on proposed project
  • Identify skills or resourcing constraints

Business Managers

  • Section 1: Executive Brief
  • Section 2: Context and Constraints
  • Section 5: Future-State Vision and Goals
  • Get feedback on proposed plan
  • Identify any unassessed risks and organizational impacts

Business Users

  • Section 1: Executive Brief
  • Support the organizational change management process

Summary of Accomplishment

Problem Solved

Knowledge Gained
  • How you work: Work management and the various ways of working (personal and team task management, strategic project portfolio management, formal project management, and enterprise project and portfolio management).
  • Where you need to go: Project portfolio management and project management current- and target-state maturity levels.
  • What you need: Microsoft Project Plans and requisite M365 licensing.
  • The skills you need: Extending Project for the web.
  • Who you need to work with: Get to know the Microsoft Gold Partner community.
Deliverables Completed
  • M365 Tool Guides
  • Tool Audit Workbook
  • Force Field Analysis Tool
  • Project Portfolio Management Maturity Assessment Tool
  • Project Management Maturity Assessment Tool
  • Microsoft Project & M365 Action Plan Template

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Contact your account representative for more information
workshops@infotech.com
1-888-670-8889

Additional Support

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

Photo of Barry Cousins.
Contact your account representative for more information
workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Perform a work management tool audit

Gain insight into the tools that drive value or fail to drive value across your work management landscape with a view to streamline the organization’s tool ecosystem.

Prepare an action plan for your tool needs

Prepare the right work management tool recommendations for your IT teams and/or business units and develop a boardroom-ready presentation to communicate needs and next steps.

Research Contributors and Experts

Neeta Manghnani
PMO Strategist
PMO Outsource Ltd.

Photo of Neeta Manghnani, PMO Strategist, PMO Outsource Ltd.
  • Innovative, performance-driven executive with significant experience managing Portfolios, Programs & Projects, and technical systems for international corporations with complex requirements. A hands-on, dynamic leader with over 20 years of experience guiding and motivating cross-functional teams. Highly creative and brings a blend of business acumen and expertise in multiple IT disciplines, to maximize the corporate benefit from capital investments.
  • Successfully deploys inventive solutions to automate processes and improve the functionality, scalability and security of critical business systems and applications. Leverages PMO/PPM management and leadership skills to meet the strategic goals and business initiatives.

Robert Strickland
Principal Consultant & Owner
PMO Outsource Ltd.

Photo of Robert Strickland, Principal Consultant and Owner, PMO Outsource Ltd.
  • Successful entrepreneur, leader, and technologist for over 15 years, is passionate about helping organizations leverage the value of SharePoint, O365, Project Online, Teams and the Power Platform. Expertise in implementing portals, workflows and collaboration experiences that create business value. Strategic manager with years of successful experience building businesses, developing custom solutions, delivering projects, and managing budgets. Strong transformational leader on large implementations with a technical pedigree.
  • A digital transformation leader helping clients move to the cloud, collaborate, automate their business processes and eliminate paper forms, spreadsheets and other manual practices.

Related Info-Tech Research

  • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy
    Time is money; spend it wisely.
  • Establish Realistic IT Resource Management Practices
    Holistically balance IT supply and demand to avoid overallocation.
  • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects
    Spend less time managing processes and more time delivering results

Bibliography

“13 Reasons not to use Microsoft Project.” Celoxis, 14 Sept. 2018. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Advisicon. “Project Online vs Project for the Web.” YouTube, 13 Nov. 2013. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Branscombe, Mary. “Is Project Online ready to replace Microsoft Project?” TechRepublic, 23 Jan. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Chemistruck, Dan. “The Complete Office 365 and Microsoft 365 Licensing Comparison.” Infused Innovations, 4 April 2019. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Compare Project management solutions and costs.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Day to Day Dynamics 365. “Microsoft Project for the web - Model-driven app.” YouTube, 29 Oct. 2019. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Deploying Project for the web.” Microsoft, 24 Aug. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Differentiate your business by attaining Microsoft competencies.” Microsoft, 26 Jan. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Extend & Integrate Microsoft Project.” Western Principles. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Get Started with Project Power App.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Hosking, Ben. “Why low code software development is eating the world.” DevGenius, May 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“How in the World is MS Project Still a Leading PM Software?” CBT Nuggets, 12 Nov. 2018. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Integent. “Project for the Web - Create a Program Entity and a model-driven app then expose in Microsoft Teams.” YouTube, 25 Mar. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Introducing the Project Accelerator.” Microsoft, 10 Mar. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Join the Microsoft Partner Network.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Kaneko, Judy. “How Productivity Tools Can Lead to a Loss of Productivity.” Bluescape, 2 Mar. 2018 Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Kotter, John. Leading Change. Harvard Business School Press, 1996.

Leis, Merily. “What is Work Management.” Scoro. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Liu, Shanhong. “Number of Office 365 company users worldwide as of June 2021, by leading country.” Statistica, 2021. Web.

Manghnani, Neeta. “5 Benefits of PPM tools and PMO process automation.” PMO Outsource Ltd., 11 Apr. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Microsoft 365 and Office 365 plan options.” Microsoft, 31 Aug. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Microsoft 365 for enterprise.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021

“Microsoft Office 365 Usage Statistics.” Thexyz blog, 18 Sept. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Microsoft Power Apps, Microsoft Power Automate and Microsoft Power Virtual Agents Licensing Guide.” Microsoft, June 2021. Web.

“Microsoft Project service description.” Microsoft, 31 Aug. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Microsoft Project Statistics.” Integent Blog, 12 Dec. 2013. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Nanji, Aadil . Modernize Your Microsoft Licensing for the Cloud Era. Info-Tech Research Group, 12 Mar. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Number of Office 365 company users worldwide as of June 2021, by leading country.” Statista, 8 June 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Overcoming disruption in a digital world.” Asana. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Pajunen, Antti. “Customizing and extending Project for the web.” Day to Day Dynamics 365, 20 Jan. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Partner Center Documentation.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Pragmatic Works. “Building First Power Apps Model Driven Application.” YouTube, 21 June 2019. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Project architecture overview.” Microsoft, 27 Mar. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Project for the web Accelerator.” GitHub. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Project for the web admin help.” Microsoft, 28 Oct. 2019. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Project for the Web – The New Microsoft Project.” TPG. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Project for the Web Security Roles.” Microsoft, 1 July 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“Project Online: Project For The Web vs Microsoft Project vs Planner vs Project Online.” PM Connection, 30 Nov. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Redmond, Tony. “Office 365 Insights from Microsoft’s FY21 Q2 Results.” Office 365 for IT Pros, 28 Jan. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Reimagine Project Management with Microsoft. “Advanced deployment for Project for the web.” YouTube, 4 Aug. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Reimagine Project Management with Microsoft. “Overview of Microsoft Project.” YouTube, 29 July 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“See which partner offer is right for you.” Microsoft. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Shalomova, Anna. “Microsoft Project for Web 2019 vs. Project Online: What’s Best for Enterprise Project Management?” FluentPro, 23 July 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Speed, Richard. “One Project to rule them all: Microsoft plots end to Project Online while nervous Server looks on.” The Register, 28 Sept. 2018. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Spataro, Jared. “A new vision for modern work management with Microsoft Project.” Microsoft, 25 Sept. 2018. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Stickel, Robert. “OnePlan Recognized as Winner of 2021 Microsoft Project & Portfolio Management Partner of the Year.” OnePlan, 8 July 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Stickel, Robert. “The Future of Project Online.” OnePlan, 2 Mar. 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Stickel, Robert. “What It Means to be Adaptive.” OnePlan, 24 May 2021. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“The Future of Microsoft Project Online.” OnePlan. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Weller, Joe. “Demystifying Microsoft Project Licensing.” Smartsheet, 10 Mar. 2016. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Western Principles Inc. “Dump the Spreadsheets for Microsoft Project Online.” YouTube, 2 July 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Western Principles Inc. “Project Online or Project for the web? Which project management system should you use?” YouTube, 11 Aug. 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

“What is Power Query?” Microsoft, 22 July 2021. Web.

Wicresoft. “The Power of the New Microsoft Project and Microsoft 365.” YouTube, 29 May 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Wicresoft. “Why the Microsoft Power Platform is the Future of PPM.” YouTube, 11 June 2020. Accessed 17 Sept. 2021.

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}582|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
  • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
  • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
  • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
  • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Enterprise architecture is not a technical function – it should be business-value driven and forward looking, positioning organizational assets in favor of long-term strategy rather than short-term tactics.

Impact and Result

  • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
  • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
  • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
  • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our Executive Brief to find out how implementing a successful enterprise architecture governance framework can benefit your organization.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Current State of EA Governance

Identify the organization’s standing in terms of the enterprise architecture practice, and know the gaps and what the EA practice needs to fulfill to create a good governance framework.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 1: Current State of EA Governance
  • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
  • EA Governance Assessment Tool

2. EA Fundamentals

Understand the EA fundamentals and then refresh them to better align the EA practice with the organization and create business benefit.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 2: EA Fundamentals
  • EA Vision and Mission Template
  • EA Goals and Measures Template
  • EA Principles Template

3. Engagement Model

Analyze the IT operating model and identify EA’s role at each stage; refine it to promote effective EA engagement upfront in the early stages of the IT operating model.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 3: Engagement Model
  • EA Engagement Model Template

4. EA Governing Bodies

Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies, and creating an architecture review process.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 4: EA Governing Bodies
  • Architecture Board Charter Template
  • Architecture Review Process Template

5. EA Policy

Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 5: EA Policy
  • EA Policy Template
  • EA Assessment Checklist Template
  • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
  • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

6. Architectural Standards

Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability. Develop a process to update the architectural standards to ensure relevancy and promote process transparency.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 6: Architectural Standards
  • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

7. Communication Plan

Craft a plan to engage the relevant stakeholders, ascertain the benefits of the initiative, and identify the various communication methods in order to maximize the chances of success.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 7: Communication Plan
  • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
  • EA Governance Framework Template
[infographic]

Workshop: Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Current State of EA governance (Pre-workshop)

The Purpose

Conduct stakeholder interviews to understand current state of EA practice and prioritize gaps for EA governance based on organizational complexity.

Key Benefits Achieved

Prioritized list of actions to arrive at the target state based on the complexity of the organization

Activities

1.1 Determine organizational complexity.

1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.

1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps.

1.4 Conduct senior management interviews.

Outputs

Organizational complexity score

EA governance current state and prioritized list of EA governance component gaps

Stakeholder perception of the EA practice

2 EA Fundamentals and Engagement Model

The Purpose

Refine EA fundamentals to align the EA practice with the organization and identify EA touchpoints to provide guidance for projects.

Key Benefits Achieved

Alignment of EA goals and objectives with the goals and objectives of the organization

Early involvement of EA in the IT operating model

Activities

2.1 Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools.

2.2 Craft the EA vision and mission.

2.3 Develop the EA principles.

2.4 Identify the EA goals.

2.5 Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

Outputs

EA vision and mission statement

EA principles

EA goals and measures

Identified EA engagement touchpoints and EA level of involvement

3 EA Governing Bodies

The Purpose

Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies and creating an architecture review process.

Key Benefits Achieved

Business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models while no additional layers of bureaucracy are introduced

Activities

3.1 Identify the number of governing bodies.

3.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.

3.3 Define the architecture review process.

Outputs

Architecture board structure and coverage

Identified architecture review template

4 EA Policy

The Purpose

Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

Key Benefits Achieved

Improved architecture compliance, which ties investments to business value and provides guidance to architecture practitioners

Activities

4.1 Define the scope.

4.2 Identify the target audience.

4.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.

4.4 Craft an assessment checklist.

Outputs

Defined scope

Inclusion and exclusion criteria for project review

Architecture assessment checklist

5 Architectural Standards and Communication Plan

The Purpose

Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability.

Craft a communication plan to implement the new EA governance framework in order to maximize the chances of success.

Key Benefits Achieved

Consistent development of architecture, increased information exchange between stakeholders

Improved process transparency

Improved stakeholder engagement

Activities

5.1 Identify and standardize EA work products.

5.2 Classifying the architectural standards.

5.3 Identifying the custodian of standards.

5.4 Update the standards.

5.5 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

5.6 Create a communication plan.

Outputs

Identified set of EA work products to standardize

Architecture information taxonomy

Identified set of custodian of standards

Standard update process

List of EA governance initiatives

Communication plan for EA governance initiatives

Further reading

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Focus on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

"Enterprise architecture is not a technology concept, rather it is the foundation on which businesses orient themselves to create and capture value in the marketplace. Designing architecture is not a simple task and creating organizations for the future requires forward thinking and rigorous planning.

Architecture processes that are supposed to help facilitate discussions and drive option analysis are often seen as an unnecessary overhead. The negative perception is due to enterprise architecture groups being overly prescriptive rather than providing a set of options that guide and constrain solutions at the same time.

EA groups should do away with the direct and control mindset and change to a collaborate and mentor mindset. As part of the architecture governance, EA teams should provide an option set that constrains design choices, and also be open to changes to standards or best practices. "

Gopi Bheemavarapu, Sr. Manager, CIO Advisory Info-Tech Research Group

Our understanding of the problem

This Research Is Designed For:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

This Research Will Help You:

  • Understand the importance of enterprise architecture (EA) governance and how to apply it to guide architectural decisions.
  • Enhance your understanding of the organization’s current EA governance and identify areas for improvement.
  • Optimize your EA engagement model to maximize value creation.
  • Learn how to set up the optimal number of governance bodies in order to avoid bureaucratizing the organization.

This Research Will Also Assist:

  • Business Relationship Managers
  • Business Analysts
  • IT Managers
  • Project Managers
  • IT Analysts
  • Quality Assurance Leads
  • Software Developers

This Research Will Help Them:

  • Give an overview of enterprise architecture governance
  • Clarity on the role of enterprise architecture team

Executive summary

Situation

  • Deployed solutions do not meet business objectives resulting in expensive and extensive rework.
  • Each department acts independently without any regular EA touchpoints.
  • Organizations practice project-level architecture as opposed to enterprise architecture.

Complication

  • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
  • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
  • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

Resolution

  • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
  • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints, rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
  • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
  • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology imperatives.

Info-Tech Insight

Enterprise architecture is critical to ensuring that an organization has the solid IT foundation it needs to efficiently enable the achievement of its current and future strategic goals rather than focusing on short-term tactical gains.

What is enterprise architecture governance?

An architecture governance process is the set of activities an organization executes to ensure that decisions are made and accountability is enforced during the execution of its architecture strategy. (Hopkins, “The Essential EA Toolkit.”)

EA governance includes the following:

  • Implement a system of controls over the creation and monitoring of all architectural components.
  • Ensure effective introduction, implementation, and evolution of architectures within the organization.
  • Implement a system to ensure compliance with internal and external standards and regulatory obligations.
  • Develop practices that ensure accountability to a clearly identified stakeholder community, both inside and outside the organization.

(TOGAF)

IT governance sets direction through prioritization and decision making, and monitors overall IT performance.

The image shows a circle set within a larger circle. The inner circle is connected to the bottom of the larger circle. The inner circle is labelled EA Governance and the larger circle is labelled IT Governance.

EA governance ensures that optimal architectural design choices are being made that focus on long-term value creation.

Harness the benefits of an optimized EA governance

Core benefits of EA governance are seen through:

Value creation

Effective EA governance ensures alignment between organizational investments and corporate strategic goals and objectives.

Cost reduction

Architecture standards provide guidance to identify opportunities for reuse and eliminate redundancies in an organization.

Risk optimization

Architecture review processes and assessment checklists ensure that solutions are within the acceptable risk levels of the organization.

EA governance is difficult to structure appropriately, but having an effective structure will allow you to:

  • Achieve business strategy through faster time-to-market innovations and capabilities.
  • Reduced transaction costs with more consistent business processes and information across business units.
  • Lower IT costs due to better traceability, faster design, and lower risk.
  • Link IT investments to organizational strategies and objectives
  • Integrate and institutionalizes IT best practices.
  • Enable the organization to take full advantage of its information, infrastructure, and hardware and software assets.
  • Support regulatory as well as best practice requirements such as auditability, security, responsibility, and accountability.

Organizations that have implemented EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA programs

Modern day CIOs of high-performing organizations use EA as a strategic planning discipline to improve business-IT alignment, enable innovation, and link business and IT strategies to execution.

Recent Info-Tech research found that organizations that establish EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA initiatives.

The image shows a bar graph, with Impact from EA on the Y-axis, and different initiatives listed on the X-axis. Each initiative has two bars connected to it, with a blue bar representing answers of No and the grey bar representing answers of Yes.

(Info-Tech Research Group, N=89)

Measure EA governance implementation effectiveness

Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an “enabler” of business outcomes to senior executives.

EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

Enterprise Architecture Management

  • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

IT Investment Portfolio Management

  • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

Solution Development

  • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
  • Number of building blocks reused.

Operations Management

  • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

Business Value

  • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
  • Decreased time to production.
  • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

An insurance provider adopts a value-focused, right-sized EA governance program

CASE STUDY

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

The insurance sector has been undergoing major changes, and as a reaction, businesses within the sector have been embracing technology to provide innovative solutions.

The head of EA in a major insurance provider (henceforth to be referred to as “INSPRO01”) was given the mandate to ensure that solutions are architected right the first time to maximize reuse and reduce technology debt. The EA group was at a critical point – to demonstrate business value or become irrelevant.

Complication

The project management office had been accountable for solution architecture and had placed emphasis on short-term project cost savings at the expense of long term durability.

There was a lack of awareness of the Enterprise Architecture group within INSPRO01, and people misunderstood the roles and responsibilities of the EA team.

Result

Info-Tech helped define the responsibilities of the EA team and clarify the differences between the role of a Solution Architect vs. Enterprise Architect.

The EA team was able to make the case for change in the project management practices to ensure architectures are reviewed and approved prior to implementation.

As a result, INSPRO01 saw substantial increases in reuse opportunities and thereby derived more value from its technology investments.

Success factors for EA governance

The success of any EA governance initiative revolves around adopting best practices, setting up repeatable processes, and establishing appropriate controls.

  1. Develop best practices for managing architecture policies, procedures, roles, skills, and organizational structures.
  2. Establish organizational responsibilities and structures to support the architecture governance processes.
  3. Management of criteria for the control of the architecture governance processes, dispensations, compliance assessments, and SLAs.

Info-Tech’s approach to EA governance

Our best-practice approach is grounded in TOGAF and enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.

Right-sized. Insert EA governance into existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.

Measured. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance, and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.

Balanced. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

Info-Tech’s EA governance framework

Info-Tech’s architectural governance framework provides a value-focused, right-sized approach with a strong emphasis on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

Use Info-Tech’s templates to complete this project

  1. Current state of EA governance
    • EA Capability - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
    • EA Governance Assessment Tool
  2. EA fundamentals
    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template
    • EA Principles Template
  3. Engagement model
    • EA Engagement Model Template
  4. EA governing bodies
    • Architecture Board Charter Template
    • Architecture Review Process Template
  5. EA policy
    • EA Policy Template
    • Architecture Assessment Checklist Template
    • Compliance Waiver Process Template
    • Compliance Waiver Form Template
  6. Architectural standards
    • Architecture Standards Update Process Template
  7. Communication Plan
    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template

As you move through the project, capture your progress with a summary in the EA Governance Framework Template.

Download the EA Governance Framework Template document for use throughout this project.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

Guided Implementation

“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

Workshop

“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

Consulting

“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (1/2)

Current state of EA governance EA Fundamentals Engagement Model EA Governing Bodies
Best-Practice Toolkit

1.1 Determine organizational complexity

1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

2.1 Craft the EA vision and mission

2.2 Develop the EA principles

2.3 Identify the EA goals

3.1 Build the case for EA engagement

3.2 Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

4.1 Identify the number of governing bodies

4.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies

4.3 Define the architecture review process

Guided Implementations
  • Determine organizational complexity
  • Assess current state of EA governance
  • Develop the EA fundamentals
  • Review the EA fundamentals
  • Review the current IT operating model
  • Determine the target engagement model
  • Identify architecture boards and develop charters
  • Develop an architecture review process

Phase 1 Results:

  • EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment
  • EA governance assessment

Phase 2 Results:

  • EA vision and mission
  • EA goals and measures
  • EA principles

Phase 3 Results:

  • EA engagement model

Phase 4 Results:

  • Architecture board charter
  • Architecture review process

EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (2/2)

EA Policy Architectural Standards Communication Plan
Best-Practice Toolkit

5.1 Define the scope of EA policy

5.2 Identify the target audience

5.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria

5.4 Craft an assessment checklist

6.1 Identify and standardize EA work products

6.2 Classify the architectural standards

6.3 Identify the custodian of standards

6.4 Update the standards

7.1 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

7.2 Identify stakeholders

7.3 Create a communication plan

Guided Implementations
  • EA policy, assessment checklists, and decision types
  • Compliance waivers
  • Understand architectural standards
  • EA repository and updating the standards
  • Create a communication plan
  • Review the communication plan

Phase 5 Results:

  • EA policy
  • Architecture assessment checklist
  • Compliance waiver process
  • Compliance waiver form

Phase 6 Results:

  • Architecture standards update process

Phase 7 Results:

  • Communication plan
  • EA governance framework

Workshop overview

Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

Pre-workshopWorkshop Day 1Workshop Day 2Workshop Day 3Workshop Day 4
ActivitiesCurrent state of EA governance EA fundamentals and engagement model EA governing bodies EA policy Architectural standards and

communication plan

1.1 Determine organizational complexity

1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

1.4 Senior management interviews

  1. Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools
  2. Craft the EA vision and mission
  3. Develop the EA principles.
  4. Identify the EA goals
  5. Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model
  1. Identify the number of governing bodies
  2. Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
  3. Define the architecture review process
  1. Define the scope
  2. Identify the target audience
  3. Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
  4. Craft an assessment checklist
  1. Identify and standardize EA work products
  2. Classifying the architectural standards
  3. Identifying the custodian of standards
  4. Updating the standards
  5. List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
  6. Identify stakeholders
  7. Create a communication plan
Deliverables
  1. EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment tool
  2. EA governance assessment tool
  1. EA vision and mission template
  2. EA goals and measures template
  3. EA principles template
  4. EA engagement model template
  1. Architecture board charter template
  2. Architecture review process template
  1. EA policy template
  2. Architecture assessment checklist template
  3. Compliance waiver process template
  4. Compliance waiver form template
  1. Architecture standards update process template
  2. Communication plan template

Phase 1

Current State of EA Governance

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Current State of EA Governance

  1. Current State of EA Governance
  2. EA Fundamentals
  3. Engagement Model
  4. EA Governing Bodies
  5. EA Policy
  6. Architectural Standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Determine organizational complexity
  • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components
  • Identify and prioritize gaps

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Prioritized list of gaps

Info-Tech Insight

Correlation is not causation – an apparent problem might be a symptom rather than a cause. Assess the organization’s current EA governance to discover the root cause and go beyond the symptoms.

Phase 1 guided implementation outline

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 1: Current State of EA Governance

Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

Step 1.1: Determine organizational complexity

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Discuss how to use Info-Tech’s EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool.
  • Discuss how to complete the inputs on the EA Governance Assessment Tool.

Then complete these activities…

  • Conduct an assessment of your organization to determine its complexity.
  • Assess the state of EA governance within your organization.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
  • EA Governance Assessment Tool

Step 1.2: Assess current state of EA governance

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Review the output of the EA governance assessment and gather feedback on your goals for the EA practice.

Then complete these activities…

  • Discuss whether you are ready to proceed with the project.
  • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Governance Assessment Tool

Right-size EA governance based on organizational complexity

Determining organizational complexity is not rocket science. Use Info-Tech’s tool to quantify the complexity and use it, along with common sense, to determine the appropriate level of architecture governance.

Info-Tech’s methodology uses six factors to determine the complexity of the organization:

  1. The size of the organization, which can often be denoted by the revenue, headcount, number of applications in use, and geographical diversity.
  2. The solution alignment factor helps indicate the degree to which various projects map to the organization’s strategy.
  3. The size and complexity of the IT infrastructure and networks.
  4. The portfolio of applications maintained by the IT organization.
  5. Key changes within the organization such as M&A, regulatory changes, or a change in business or technology leadership.
  6. Other negative influences that can adversely affect the organization.

Determine your organization’s level of complexity

1.1 2 hours

Input

  • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

Output

  • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

Materials

  • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Capability section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool to facilitate a session on determining your organization’s complexity.

Download EA Organizational - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool

Step 2 - Summarize

Summarize the results in the EA governance framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Understand the components of effective EA governance

EA governance is multi-faceted and it facilitates effective use of resources to meet organizational strategic objectives through well-defined structural elements.

EA Governance

  • Fundamentals
  • Engagement Model
  • Policy
  • Governing Bodies
  • Architectural Standards

Components of architecture governance

  1. EA vision, mission, goals, metrics, and principles that provide a direction for the EA practice.
  2. An engagement model showing where and in what fashion EA is engaged in the IT operating model.
  3. An architecture policy formulated and enforced by the architectural governing bodies to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.
  4. Governing bodies to assess projects for compliance and provide feedback.
  5. Architectural standards that codify the EA work products to ensure consistent development of architecture.

Next Step: Based on the organization’s complexity, conduct a current state assessment of EA governance using Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool.

Assess the components of EA governance in your organization

1.2 2 hrs

Input

  • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

Output

  • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

Materials

  • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Governance section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the “EA Governance Assessment Tool” to facilitate a session on identifying the best practices to be applied in your organization.

Download Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool

Step 2 - Summarize

Summarize the identified best practices in the EA governance framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template


Conduct a current state assessment to identify limitations of the existing EA governance framework

CASE STUDY

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

INSPRO01 was planning a major transformation initiative. The organization determined that EA is a strategic function.

The CIO had pledged support to the EA group and had given them a mandate to deliver long-term strategic architecture.

The business leaders did not trust the EA team and believed that lack of business skills in the group put the business transformation at risk.

Complication

The EA group had been traditionally seen as a technology organization that helps with software design.

The EA team lacked understanding of the business and hence there had been no common language between business and technology.

Result

Info-Tech helped the EA team create a set of 10 architectural principles that are business-value driven rather than technical statements.

The team socialized the principles with the business and technology stakeholders and got their approvals.

By applying the business focused architectural principles, the EA team was able to connect with the business leaders and gain their support.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Determine organizational complexity.
  • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.
  • Identify and prioritize gaps.

Outcomes

  • Organizational complexity assessment
  • EA governance capability assessment
  • A prioritized list of capability gaps

Phase 2

EA Fundamentals

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

EA Fundamentals

  1. Current State of EA Governance
  2. EA Fundamentals
  3. Engagement Model
  4. EA Governing Bodies
  5. EA Policy
  6. Architectural Standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Craft the EA vision and mission
  • Develop the EA principles.
  • Identify the EA goals

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance

Info-Tech Insight

A house divided against itself cannot stand – ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned with the organization’s goals and objectives.

Phase 2 guided implementation outline

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 2: EA Fundamentals

Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

Step 2.1: Develop the EA fundamentals

Review findings with analyst:

  • Discuss the importance of the EA fundamentals – vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
  • Understand how to align the EA vision, mission, goals, and measures to your organization’s vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.

Then complete these activities…

  • Develop the EA vision statements.
  • Craft the EA mission statements.
  • Define EA goals and measures.
  • Adopt EA principles.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Vision and Mission Template
  • EA Principles Template
  • EA Goals and Measures Template

Step 2.2: Review the EA fundamentals

Review findings with analyst:

  • Review the EA fundamentals in conjunction with the results of the EA governance assessment tool and gather feedback.

Then complete these activities…

  • Refine the EA vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
  • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Vision and Mission Template
  • EA Principles Template
  • EA Goals and Measures Template

Fundamentals of an EA organization

Vision, mission, goals and measures, and principles form the foundation of the EA function.

Factors to consider when developing the vision and mission statements

The vision and mission statements provide strategic direction to the EA team. These statements should be created based on the business and technology drivers in the organization.

Business Drivers

  • Business drivers are factors that determine, or cause, an increase in value or major improvement of a business.
  • Examples of business drivers include:
    • Increased revenue
    • Customer retention
    • Salesforce effectiveness
    • Innovation

Technology Drivers

  • Technology drivers are factors that are vital for the continued success and growth of a business using effective technologies.
  • Examples of technology drivers include:
    • Enterprise integration
    • Information security
    • Portability
    • Interoperability

"The very essence of leadership is [that] you have a vision. It's got to be a vision you articulate clearly and forcefully on every occasion. You can't blow an uncertain trumpet." – Theodore Hesburgh

Develop vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles to define the EA capability direction and purpose

EA capability vision statement

Articulates the desired future state of EA capability expressed in the present tense.

  • What will be the role of EA capability?
  • How will EA capability be perceived?

Example: To be recognized by both the business and IT as a trusted partner that drives [Company Name]’s effectiveness, efficiency, and agility.

EA capability mission statement

Articulates the fundamental purpose of the EA capability.

  • Why does EA capability exist?
  • What does EA capability do to realize its vision?
  • Who are the key customers of the EA capability?

Example: Define target enterprise architecture for [Company Name], identify solution opportunities, inform IT investment management, and direct solution development, acquisition, and operation compliance.

EA capability goals and measures

EA capability goals define specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. EA capability measures define how to validate the achievement of the EA capability goals.

Example:

Goal: Improve reuse of IT assets at [Company Name].

Measures:

  • The number of building blocks available for reuse.
  • Percent of projects that utilized existing building blocks.
  • Estimated efficiency gain (= effort to create a building block * reuse count).

EA principles

EA principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of IT in constructing, transforming, and operating the enterprise by informing and restricting target-state enterprise architecture design, solution development, and procurement decisions.

Example:

  • EA principle name: Reuse.
  • Statement: Maximize reuse of existing assets.
  • Rationale: Reuse prevents duplication of development and support efforts, increasing efficiency, and agility.
  • Implications: Define architecture and solution building blocks and ensure their consistent application.

EA principles guide decision making

Policies can be seen as “the letter of the law,” whereas EA principles summarize “the spirit of the law.”

The image shows a graphic with EA Principles listed at the top, with an arrow pointing down to Decisions on the use of IT. At the bottom are domain-specific policies, with two arrows pointing upwards: the arrow on the left is labelled direct, and the arrow on the right is labelled control. The arrow points up to the label Decisions on the use of IT. On the left, there is an arrow pointing both up and down. At the top it is labelled The spirit of the law, and at the bottom, The letter of the law. On the right, there is another arrow pointing both up and down, labelled How should decisions be made at the top and labelled Who has the accountability and authority to make decisions? at the bottom.

Define EA capability goals and related measures that resonate with EA capability stakeholders

EA capability goals, i.e. specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. Use COBIT 5, APO03 process goals, and metrics as a starting point.

The image shows a chart titled Manage Enterprise Architecture.

Define relevant business value measures to collect indirect evidence of EA’s contribution to business benefits

Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an enabler of business outcomes to senior executives.

EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

Enterprise Architecture Management

  • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

IT Investment Portfolio Management

  • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

Solution Development

  • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
  • Number of building blocks reused.

Operations Management

  • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

Business Value

  • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
  • Decreased time to production.
  • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

Refine the organization’s EA fundamentals

2.1 2 hrs

Input

  • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

Output

  • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

Materials

  • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows the Table of Contents with four sections highlighted, beginning with EA Vision Statement and ending with EA Goals and Measures.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the three templates and hold a working session to facilitate a session on creating EA fundamentals.

Download the EA Vision and Mission Template, the EA Principles Template, and the EA Goals and Measures Template

Step 2 - Summarize

Document the final vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures within the EA Governance Framework.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template


Ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned to the organizational needs

CASE STUDY

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

The EA group at INSPRO01 was being pulled in multiple directions with requests ranging from architecture review to solution design to code reviews.

Project level architecture was being practiced with no clarity on the end goal. This led to EA being viewed as just another IT function without any added benefits.

Info-Tech recommended that the EA team ensure that the fundamentals (vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures) reflect what the team aspired to achieve before fixing any of the process concerns.

Complication

The EA team was mostly comprised of technical people and hence the best practices outlined were not driven by business value.

The team had no documented vision and mission statements in place. In addition, the existing goals and measures were not tied to the business strategic objectives.

The team had architectural principles documented, but there were too many and they were very technical in nature.

Result

With Info-Tech’s guidance, the team developed a vision and mission statement to succinctly communicate the purpose of the EA function.

The team also reduced and simplified the EA principles to make sure they were value driven and communicated in business terms.

Finally, the team proposed goals and measures to track the performance of the EA team.

With the fundamentals in place, the team was able to show the value of EA and gain organization-wide acceptance.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Craft the EA vision and mission.
  • Develop the EA principles.
  • Identify the EA goals.

Outcomes

  • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance.

Phase 3

Engagement Model

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Engagement Model

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Build the case for EA engagement
  • Engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
  • Target EA engagement model

Info-Tech Insight

Perform due diligence prior to decision making. Use the EA Engagement Model to promote conversations between stage gate meetings as opposed to having the conversation during the stage gate meetings.

Phase 3 guided implementation outline

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 3: EA engagement model

Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

Step 3.1 Review the current IT operating model

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Review Info-Tech’s IT operating model.
  • Understand how to document your organization’s IT operating model.
  • Document EA’s current role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.

Then complete these activities…

  • Document your organization’s IT operating model.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Engagement Model Template

Step 3.2: Determine the target engagement model

Review findings with analyst:

  • Review your organization’s current state IT operating model.
  • Review your EA’s role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.
  • Document the role and responsibility of EA in the future state.

Then complete these activities…

  • Document EA’s future role within each stage of your organization’s IT operating model.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Engagement Model Template.

The three pillars of EA Engagement

Effective EA engagement revolves around three basic principles – generating business benefits, creating adaptable models, and being able to replicate the process across the organization.

Business Value Driven

Focus on generating business value from organizational investments.

Repeatable

Process should be standardized, transparent, and repeatable so that it can be consistently applied across the organization.

Flexible

Accommodate the varying needs of projects of different sizes.

Where these pillars meet: Advocates long-term strategic vs. short-term tactical solutions.

EA interaction points within the IT operating model

EA’s engagement in each stage within the plan, build, and run phases should be clearly defined and communicated.

Plan Strategy Development Business Planning Conceptualization Portfolio Management
Build Requirements Solution Design Application Development/ Procurement Quality Assurance
Run Deploy Operate

Document the organization’s current IT operating model

3.1 2-3 hr

Input

  • IT project lifecycle

Output

  • Organization’s current IT operating model.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, IT department leads, business leaders.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to document the current IT operating model. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

1. Map out the IT operating model.

  1. Find a project that was just deployed within the organization and backtrack every step of the way to the strategy development that resulted in the conception of the project.
  2. Interview the personnel involved with each step of the process to get a sense of whether or not projects usually move to deployment going through these steps.
  3. Review Info-Tech’s best-practice IT operating model presented in the EA Engagement Model Template, and add or remove any steps to the existing organization’s IT operating model as necessary. Document the finalized steps of the IT operating model.

2. Determine EA’s current role in the operating model.

  1. Interview EA personnel through each step of the process and ask them their role. This is to get a sense of the type of input that EA is having into each step of the process.
  2. Using the EA Engagement Model Template, document the current role of EA in each step of the organization’s IT operation as you complete the interviews.

Download the EA Engagement Model Template to document the organization’s current IT operating model.

Define RACI in every stage of the IT operating model (e.g. EA role in strategy development phase of the IT operating model is presented below)

Strategy Development

Also known as strategic planning, strategy development is fundamental to creating and running a business. It involves the creation of a longer-term game plan or vision that sets specific goals and objectives for a business.

R Those in charge of performing the task. These are the people actively involved in the completion of the required work. Business VPs, EA, IT directors R
A The one ultimately answerable for the correct and thorough completion of the deliverable or task, and the one who delegates the work to those responsible. CEO A
C Those whose opinions are sought before a decision is made, and with whom there is two-way communication. PMO, Line managers, etc. C
I Those who are kept up to date on progress, and with whom there is one-way communication. Development managers, etc. I

Next Step: Similarly define the RACI for each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

Best practices on the role of EA within the IT operating model

Plan

Strategy Development

C

Business Planning

C

Conceptualization

A

Portfolio Management

C

Build

Requirements

C

Solution Design

R

Application Development/ Procurement

R

Quality Assurance

I

Run

Deploy

I

Operate

I

Next Step: Define the role of EA in each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

3.2 2 hrs

Input

  • Organization’s IT operating model.

Output

  • Organization’s EA engagement model.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, CIO, business leaders, IT department leaders.

The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Engagement Model Template with the EA Engagement Summary section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA Engagement Model Template and hold a working session to define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model.

Download the EA Engagement Model Template

Step 2 - Summarize

Document the target state role of EA within the EA Governance Framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template


Design an EA engagement model to formalize EA’s role within the IT operating model

CASE STUDY

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

INSPRO01 had a high IT cost structure with looming technology debt due to a preference for short-term tactical gains over long-term solutions.

The business satisfaction with IT was at an all-time low due to expensive solutions that did not meet business needs.

INSPRO01’s technology landscape was in disarray with many overlapping systems and interoperability issues.

Complication

No single team within the organization had an end-to-end perspective all the way from strategy to project execution. A lot of information was being lost in handoffs between different teams.

This led to inconsistent design/solution patterns being applied. Investment decisions had not been grounded in reality and this often led to cost overruns.

Result

Info-Tech helped INSPRO01 identify opportunities for EA team engagement at different stages of the IT operating model. EA’s role within each stage was clearly defined and documented.

With Info-Tech’s help, the EA team successfully made the case for engagement upfront during strategy development rather than during project execution.

The increased transparency enabled the EA team to ensure that investments were aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Build the case for EA engagement.
  • Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

Outcomes

  • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
  • Target EA engagement model

Phase 4

EA Governing Bodies

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

EA Governing Bodies

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Identify the number of governing bodies
  • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
  • Define the architecture review process

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Charter definition for each EA governance board

Info-Tech Insight

Use architecture governance like a scalpel rather than a hatchet. Implement governing bodies to provide guidance rather than act as a police force.

Phase 4 guided implementation

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 4: Create or identify EA governing bodies

Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

Step 4.1: Identify architecture boards and develop charters

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Understand the factors influencing the number of governing bodies required for an organization.
  • Understand the components of a governing body charter.

Then complete these activities…

  • Identify how many governing bodies are needed.
  • Define EA governing body composition, meeting frequency, and domain of coverage.
  • Define the inputs and outputs of each EA governing body.
  • Identify mandatory inclusion criteria.

With these tools & templates:

  • Architecture Board Charter Template

Step 4.2: Develop an architecture review process

Follow-up with an analyst call:

  • Review the number of boards identified for your organization and gather feedback.
  • Review the charters developed for each governing body and gather feedback.
  • Understand the various factors that impact the architecture review process.
  • Review Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process.

Then complete these activities…

  • Refine the charters for governing bodies.
  • Develop the architecture review process for your organization.

With these tools & templates:

  • Architecture Review Process Template

Factors that determine the number of architectural boards required

The primary purpose of architecture boards is to ensure that business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models without introducing additional layers of bureaucracy.

The optimal number of architecture boards required in an organization is a function of the following factors:

  • EA organization model
    • Distributed
    • Federated
    • Centralized
  • Architecture domains Maturity of architecture domains
  • Project throughput

Commonly observed architecture boards:

  • Architecture Review Board
  • Technical Architecture Committee
  • Data Architecture Review Board
  • Infrastructure Architecture Review Board
  • Security Architecture Review Board

Info-Tech Insight

Before building out a new governance board, start small by repurposing existing forums by adding architecture as an agenda item. As the items for review increase consider introducing dedicated governing bodies.

EA organization model drives the architecture governance structure

EA teams can be organized in three ways – distributed, federated, and centralized. Each model has its own strengths and weaknesses. EA governance must be structured in a way such that the strengths are harvested and the weaknesses are mitigated.

Distributed Federated Centralized
EA org. structure
  • No overarching EA team exists and segment architects report to line of business (LOB) executives.
  • A centralized EA team exists with segment architects reporting to LOB executives and dotted-line to head of (centralized) EA.
  • A centralized EA capability exists with enterprise architects reporting to the head of EA.
Implications
  • Produces a fragmented and disjointed collection of architectures.
  • Economies of scale are not realized.
  • High cross-silo integration effort.
  • LOB-specific approach to EA.
  • Requires dual reporting relationships.
  • Additional effort is required to coordinate centralized EA policies and blueprints with segment EA policies and blueprints.
  • Accountabilities may be unclear.
  • Can be less responsive to individual LOB needs, because the centralized EA capability must analyze needs of multiple LOBs and various trade-off options to avoid specialized, one-off solutions.
  • May impede innovation.
Architectural boards
  • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and common services.
  • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB-specific needs.
  • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns and common services.
  • Cross-enterprise boards to ensure adherence to enterprise standards and reduce integration costs.
  • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB specific needs.
  • Enterprise working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and all services.
  • Central board to ensure adherence to enterprise standards.

Architecture domains influences the number of architecture boards required

  • An architecture review board (ARB) provides direction for domain-specific boards and acts as an escalation point. The ARB must have the right mix of both business and technology stakeholders.
  • Domain-specific boards provide a platform to have focused discussions on items specific to that domain.
  • Based on project throughput and the maturity of each domain, organizations would have to pick the optimal number of boards.
  • Architecture working groups provide a platform for cross-domain conversations to establish organization wide standards.
Level 1 Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
Level 2 Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
Level 3 Architecture Working Groups Architects

Create a game plan for the architecture boards

  • Start with a single board for each level – an architecture review board (ARB), a technical architecture committee (TAC), and architecture working groups.
  • As the organization matures and the number of requests to the TAC increase, consider creating domain-specific boards – such as business architecture, data architecture, application architecture, etc. – to handle architecture decisions pertaining to that domain.

Start with this:

Level 1 Architecture Review Board
Level 2 Technical Architecture Committee
Level 3 Architecture Working Groups

Change to this:

Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
Architecture Working Groups Architects

Architecture boards have different objectives and activities

The boards at each level should be set up with the correct agenda – ensure that the boards’ composition and activities reflect their objective. Use the entry criteria to communicate the agenda for their meetings.

Architecture Review Board Technical Architecture Committee
Objective
  • Evaluates business strategy, needs, and priorities, sets direction and acts as a decision making authority of the EA capability.
  • Directs the development of target state architecture.
  • Monitors performance and compliance of the architectural standards.
  • Monitor project solution architecture compliance to standards, regulations, EA principles, and target state EA blueprints.
  • Review EA compliance waiver requests, make recommendations, and escalate to the architecture review board (ARB).
Composition
  • Business Leadership
  • IT Leadership
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Business Managers
  • IT Managers
  • Architects
Activities
  • Review compliance of conceptual solution to standards.
  • Discuss the enterprise implications of the proposed solution.
  • Select and approve vendors.
  • Review detailed solution design.
  • Discuss the risks of the proposed solution.
  • Discuss the cost of the proposed solution.
  • Review and recommend vendors.
Entry Criteria
  • Changes to IT Enterprise Technology Policy.
  • Changes to the technology management plan.
  • Approve changes to enterprise technology inventory/portfolio.
  • Ongoing operational cost impacts.
  • Detailed estimates for the solution are ready for review.
  • There are significant changes to protocols or technologies responsible for solution.
  • When the project is deviating from baselined architectures.

Identify the number of governing bodies

4.1 2 hrs

Input

  • EA Vision and Mission
  • EA Engagement Model

Output

  • A list of EA governing bodies.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to identify the number of governing bodies. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

  1. Examine the EA organization models mentioned previously. Assess how your organization is structured, and identify whether your organization has a federated, distributed or centralized EA organization model.
  2. Reference the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide. Assess the architecture domains, and define how many there are in the organization.
  3. Architecture domains:
    1. If no defined architecture domains exist, model the number of governing bodies in the organization based on the “Start with this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
    2. If defined architecture domains do exist, model the number of governing bodies based on the “Change to this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
  4. Name each governing body you have defined in the previous step. Download Info-Tech’s Architecture Board Charter Template for each domain you have named. Input the names into the title of each downloaded template.

Download the Architecture Board Charter Template to document this activity.

Defining the governing body charter

The charter represents the agreement between the governing body and its stakeholders about the value proposition and obligations to the organization.

  1. Purpose: The reason for the existence of the governing body and its goals and objectives.
  2. Composition: The members who make up the committee and their roles and responsibilities in it.
  3. Frequency of meetings: The frequency at which the committee gathers to discuss items and make decisions.
  4. Entry/Exit Criteria: The criteria by which the committee selects items for review and items for which decisions can be taken.
  5. Inputs: Materials that are provided as inputs for review and decision making by the committee.
  6. Outputs: Materials that are provided by the committee after an item has been reviewed and the decision made.
  7. Activities: Actions undertaken by the committee to arrive at its decision.

Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

4.2 3 hrs

Input

  • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

Output

  • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Governance Framework document, with the Architecture Board Charters highlighted.

Step 1 Facilitate

Hold a working session with the stakeholders to define the charter for each of the identified architecture boards.

Download Architecture Board Charter Template

Step 2 Summarize

  • Summarize the objectives of each board and reference the charter document within the EA Governance Framework.
  • Upload the final charter document to the team’s common repository.

Update the EA Governance Framework document


Considerations when creating an architecture review process

  • Ensure that architecture review happens at major milestones within the organization’s IT Operating Model such as the plan, build, and run phases.
  • In order to provide continuous engagement, make the EA group accountable for solution architecture in the plan phase. In the build phase, the EA group will be consulted while the solution architect will be responsible for the project solution architecture.

Plan

  • Strategy Development
  • Business Planning
  • A - Conceptualization
  • Portfolio Management

Build

  • Requirements
  • R - Solution Design
  • Application Development/ Procurement
  • Quality Assurance

Run

  • Deploy
  • Operate

Best-practice project architecture review process

The best-practice model presented facilitates the creation of sound solution architecture through continuous engagement with the EA team and well-defined governance checkpoints.

The image shows a graphic of the best-practice model. At the left, four categories are listed: Committees; EA; Project Team; LOB. At the top, three categories are listed: Plan; Build; Run. Within the area between these categories is a flow chart demonstrating the best-practice model and specific checkpoints throughout.

Develop the architecture review process

4.3 2 hours

Input

  • A list of all EA governing bodies.
  • Info-Tech’s best practice architecture review process.

Output

  • The new architecture review process.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

Hold a working session with the participants to develop the architecture review process. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

  1. Reference Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process embedded within the “Architecture Review Process Template” to gain an understanding of an ideal architecture review process.
  2. Identify the stages within the plan, build, and run phases where solution architecture reviews should occur, and identify the governing bodies involved in these reviews.
  3. As you go through these stages, record your findings in the Architecture Review Process Template.
  4. Connect the various activities leading to and from the architecture creation points to outline the review process.

Download the Architecture Review Process Template for additional guidance regarding developing an architecture review process.

Develop the architecture review process

4.3 2 hrs

Input

  • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

Output

  • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents, with the Architecture Review Process highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download Architecture Review Process Template and facilitate a session to customize the best-practice model presented in the template.

Download the Architecture Review Process Template

Step 2 - Summarize

Summarize the process changes and document the process flow in the EA Governance Framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Right-size EA governing bodies to reduce the perception of red tape

Case Study

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

At INSPRO01, architecture governance boards were a bottleneck. The boards fielded all project requests, ranging from simple screen label changes to complex initiatives spanning multiple applications.

These boards were designed as forums for technology discussions without any business stakeholder involvement.

Complication

INSPRO01’s management never gave buy-in to the architecture governance boards since their value was uncertain.

Additionally, architectural reviews were perceived as an item to be checked off rather than a forum for getting feedback.

Architectural exceptions were not being followed through due to the lack of a dispensation process.

Result

Info-Tech has helped the team define adaptable inclusion/exclusion criteria (based on project complexity) for each of the architectural governing boards.

The EA team was able to make the case for business participation in the architecture forums to better align business and technology investment.

An architecture dispensation process was created and operationalized. As a result architecture reviews became more transparent with well-defined next steps.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Identify the number of governing bodies.
  • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.
  • Define the architecture review process.

Outcomes

  • Charter definition for each EA governance board

Phase 5

EA Policy

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

EA Policy

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Define the EA policy scope
  • Identify the target audience
  • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
  • Create an assessment checklist

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • The completed EA policy
  • Project assessment checklist
  • Defined assessment outcomes
  • Completed compliance waiver process

Info-Tech Insight

Use the EA policy to promote EA’s commitment to deliver value to business stakeholders through process transparency, stakeholder engagement, and compliance.

Phase 5 guided implementation

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 5: EA Policy

Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

Step 5.1–5.3: EA Policy, Assessment Checklists, and Decision Types

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Discuss the three pillars of EA policy and its purpose.
  • Review the components of an effective EA policy.
  • Understand how to develop architecture assessment checklists.
  • Understand the assessment decision types.

Then complete these activities…

  • Define purpose, scope, and audience of the EA policy.
  • Create a project assessment checklist.
  • Define the organization’s assessment decision type.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Policy Template
  • EA Assessment Checklist Template

Step 5.4: Compliance Waivers

Review findings with analyst:

  • Review your draft EA policy and gather feedback.
  • Review your project assessment checklists and the assessment decision types.
  • Discuss the best-practice architecture compliance waiver process and how to tailor it to your organizational needs.

Then complete these activities…

  • Refine the EA policy based on feedback gathered.
  • Create the compliance waiver process.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
  • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

Three pillars of architecture policy

Architecture policy is a set of guidelines, formulated and enforced by the governing bodies of an organization, to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.

Architecture compliance – promotes compliance to organizational standards through well-defined assessment checklists across architectural domains.

Business value – ensures that investments are tied to business value by enforcing traceability to business capabilities.

Architectural guidance – provides guidance to architecture practitioners on the application of the business and technology standards.

Components of EA policy

An enterprise architecture policy is an actionable document that can be applied to projects of varying complexity across the organization.

  1. Purpose and Scope: This EA policy document clearly defines the scope and the objectives of architecture reviews within an organization.
  2. Target Audience: The intended audience of the policy such as employees and partners.
  3. Architecture Assessment Checklist: A wide range of typical questions that may be used in conducting Architecture Compliance reviews, relating to various aspects of the architecture.
  4. Assessment Outcomes: The outcome of the architecture review process that determines the conformance of a project solution to the enterprise architecture standards.
  5. Compliance Waiver: Used when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

Draft the purpose and scope of the EA policy

5.1 2.5 hrs

Input

  • A consensus on the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

Output

  • Documented version of the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Policy section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA Policy Template and hold a working session to draft the EA policy.

Download the EA Policy Template

Step 2 - Summarize

  • Summarize purpose, scope, and intended audience of the policy in the EA Governance Framework document.
  • Update the EA policy document with the purpose, scope and intended audience.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Architecture assessment checklist

Architecture assessment checklist is a list of future-looking criteria that a project will be assessed against. It provides a set of standards against which projects can be assessed in order to render a decision on whether or not the project can be greenlighted.

Architecture checklists should be created for each EA domain since each domain provides guidance on specific aspects of the project.

Sample Checklist Questions

Business Architecture:

  • Is the project aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives?
  • What are the business capabilities that the project supports? Is it creating new capabilities or supporting an existing one?

Data Architecture:

  • What processes are in place to support data referential integrity and/or normalization?
  • What is the physical data model definition (derived from logical data models) used to design the database?

Application Architecture:

  • Can this application be placed on an application server independent of all other applications? If not, explain the dependencies.
  • Can additional parallel application servers be easily added? If so, what is the load balancing mechanism?

Infrastructure Architecture:

  • Does the solution provide high-availability and fault-tolerance that can recover from events within a datacenter?

Security Architecture:

  • Have you ensured that the corporate security policies and guidelines to which you are designing are the latest versions?

Create architectural assessment checklists

5.2 2 hrs

Input

  • Reference architecture models.

Output

  • Architecture assessment checklist.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Assessment Checklist section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template and hold a working session to create the architectural assessment checklists.

Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template

Step 2 - Summarize

  • Summarize the major points of the checklists in the EA Governance Framework document.
  • Update the EA policy document with the detailed architecture assessment checklists.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Architecture assessment decision types

  • As a part of the proposed solution review, the governing bodies produce a decision indicating the compliance of the solution architecture with the enterprise standards.
  • Go, No Go, or Conditional are a sample set of decision outcomes available to the governing bodies.
  • On a conditional approval, the project team must file for a compliance waiver.

Approved

  • The solution demonstrates substantial compliance with standards.
  • Negligible risk to the organization or minimal risks with sound plans of how to mitigate them.
  • Architectural approval to proceed with delivery type of work.

Conditional Approval

  • The significant aspects of the solution have been addressed in a satisfactory manner.
  • Yet, there are some aspects of the solution that are not compliant with standards.
  • The architectural approval is conditional upon presenting the missing evidence within a minimal period of time determined.
  • The risk level may be acceptable to the organization from an overall IT governance perspective.

Not Approved

  • The solution is not compliant with the standards.
  • Scheduled for a follow-up review.
  • Not recommended to proceed until the solution is more compliant with the standards.

Best-practice architecture compliance waiver process

Waivers are not permanent. Waiver terms must be documented for each waiver specifying:

  • Time period after which the architecture in question will be compliant with the enterprise architecture.
  • The modifications necessary to the enterprise architecture to accommodate the solution.

The image shows a flow chart, split into 4 sections: Enterprise Architect; Solution Architect; TAC; ARB. To the right of these section labels, there is a flow chart that documents the waiver process.

Create compliance waiver process

5.4 3-4 hrs

Input

  • A consensus on the compliance waiver process.

Output

  • Documented compliance waiver process and form.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows the Table of Contents with the Compliance Waiver Form section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA compliance waiver template and hold a working session to customize the best-practice process to your organization’s needs.

Download the EA Compliance Waiver Process Template

Step 2 - Summarize

  • Summarize the objectives and high-level process in the EA Governance Framework document.
  • Update the EA policy document with the compliance waiver process.
  • Upload the final policy document to the team’s common repository.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Creates an enterprise architecture policy to drive adoption

Case Study

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

EA program adoption across INSPRO01 was at its lowest point due to a lack of transparency into the activities performed by the EA group.

Often, projects ignored EA entirely as it was viewed as a nebulous and non-value-added activity that produced no measurable results.

Complication

There was very little documented information about the architecture assessment process and the standards against which project solution architectures were evaluated.

Additionally, there were no well-defined outcomes for the assessment.

Project groups were left speculating about the next steps and with little guidance on what to do after completing an assessment.

Result

Info-Tech helped the EA team create an EA policy containing architecture significance criteria, assessment checklists, and reference to the architecture review process.

Additionally, the team also identified guidelines and detailed next steps for projects based on the outcome of the architecture assessment.

These actions brought clarity to EA processes and fostered better engagement with the EA group.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Define the scope.
  • Identify the target audience.
  • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.
  • Create an assessment checklist.

Outcomes

  • The completed EA policy
  • Project assessment checklist
  • Defined assessment outcomes
  • Completed compliance waiver process

Phase 6

Architectural Standards

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Architectural Standards

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Identify and standardize EA work products
  • Classify the architectural standards
  • Identify the custodian of standards
  • Update the standards

This step involves the following participants:

  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • A standardized set of EA work products
  • A way to categorize and store EA work products
  • A defined method of updating standards

Info-Tech Insight

The architecture standard is the currency that facilitates information exchange between stakeholders. The primary purpose is to minimize transaction costs by providing a balance between stability and relevancy.

Phase 6 guided implementation

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 6: Architectural standards

Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

Step 6.1: Understand Architectural Standards

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Discuss architectural standards.
  • Know how to identify and define EA work products.
  • Understand the standard content of work products.

Then complete these activities…

  • Identify and standardize EA work products.

Step 6.2–6.3: EA Repository and Updating the Standards

Review with analyst:

  • Review the standardized EA work products.
  • Discuss the principles of EA repository.
  • Discuss the Info-Tech best-practice model for updating architecture standards and how to tailor them to your organizational context.

Then complete these activities…

  • Build a folder structure for storing EA work products.
  • Use the Info-Tech best-practice architecture standards update process to develop your organization’s process for updating architecture standards.

With these tools & templates:

  • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

Recommended list of EA work products to standardize

  • EA work products listed below are typically produced as a part of the architecture lifecycle.
  • To ensure consistent development of architecture, the work products need to be standardized.
  • Consider standardizing both the naming conventions and the content of the work products.
  1. EA vision: A document containing the vision that provides the high-level aspiration of the capabilities and business value that EA will deliver.
  2. Statement of EA Work: The Statement of Architecture Work defines the scope and approach that will be used to complete an architecture project.
  3. Reference architectures: A reference architecture is a set of best-practice taxonomy that describes components and the conceptual structure of the model, as well as graphics, which provide a visual representation of the taxonomy to aid understanding. Reference architectures are created for each of the architecture domains.
  4. Solution proposal: The proposed project solution based on the EA guidelines and standards.
  5. Compliance assessment request: The document that contains the project solution architecture assessment details.
  6. Architecture change request: The request that initiates a change to architecture standards when existing standards can no longer meet the needs of the enterprise.
  7. Transition architecture: A transition architecture shows the enterprise at incremental states that reflect periods of transition that sit between the baseline and target architectures.
  8. Architectural roadmap: A roadmap that lists individual increments of change and lays them out on a timeline to show progression from the baseline architecture to the target architecture.
  9. EA compliance waiver request: A compliance waiver request that must be made when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

Standardize the content of each work product

  1. Purpose - The reason for the existence of the work product.
  2. Owner - The owner of this EA work product.
  3. Target Audience - The intended audience of the work product such as employees and partners.
  4. Naming Pattern - The pattern for the name of the work product as well as its file name.
  5. Table of Contents - The various sections of the work product.
  6. Review & Sign-Off Authority - The stakeholders who will review the work product and approve it.
  7. Repository Folder Location - The location where the work product will be stored.

Identify and standardize work products

6.1 3 hrs

Input

  • List of various documents being produced by projects currently.

Output

  • Standardized list of work products.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to identify and standardize work products. Facilitate the activity using the steps below.

  1. Identifying EA work products:
    1. Start by reviewing the list of all architecture-related documents presently produced in the organization. Any such deliverable with the following characteristics can be standardized:
      1. If it can be broken out and made into a standalone document.
      2. If it can be made into a fill-in form completed by others.
      3. If it is repetitive and requires iterative changes.
    2. Create a list of work products that your organization would like to standardize based on the characteristics above.
  2. The content and format of standardized EA work products:
    1. For each work product your organization wishes to standardize, look at its purpose and brainstorm the content needed to fulfill that purpose.
    2. After identifying the elements that need to be included in the work product to fulfill its purpose, order them logically for presentation purposes.
    3. In each section of the work product that need to be completed, include instructions on how to complete the section.
    4. Review the seven elements presented in the previous slide and include them in the work products.

EA repository - information taxonomy

As the EA function begins to grow and accumulates EA work products, having a well-designed folder structure helps you find the necessary information efficiently.

Architecture meta-model

Describes the organizationally tailored architecture framework.

Architecture capability

Defines the parameters, structures, and processes that support the enterprise architecture group.

Architecture landscape

An architectural presentation of assets in use by the enterprise at particular points in time.

Standards information base

Captures the standards with which new architectures and deployed services must comply.

Reference library

Provides guidelines, templates, patterns, and other forms of reference material to accelerate the creation of new architectures for the enterprise.

Governance log

Provides a record of governance activity across the enterprise.

Create repository folder structure

6.2 5-6 hrs

Input

  • List of standardized work products.

Output

  • EA work products mapped to a repository folder.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, IT department leads.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to create a repository structure. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

  1. Start with the taxonomy on the previous slide, and sort the existing work products into these six categories.
  2. Assess that the work products are sorted in a mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive fashion. This means that a certain work product that appears in one category should not appear in another category. As well, make sure these six categories capture all the existing work products.
  3. Based on the categorization of the work products, build a folder structure that follows these categories, which will allow for the work products to be accessed quickly and easily.

Create a process to update EA work products

  • Architectural standards are not set in stone and should be reviewed and updated periodically.
  • The Architecture Review Board is the custodian for standards.
  • Any change to the standards need to be assessed thoroughly and must be communicated to all the impacted stakeholders.

Architectural standards update process

Identify

  • Identify changes to the standards

Assess

  • Review and assess the impacts of the change

Document

  • Document the change and update the standard

Approve

  • Distribute the updated standards to key stakeholders for approval

Communicate

  • Communicate the approved changes to impacted stakeholders

Create a process to continually update standards

6.3 1.5 hrs

Input

  • The list of work products and its owners.

Output

  • A documented work product update process.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows the screenshot of the Table of Contents with the Standards Update Process highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the standards update process template and hold a working session to customize the best practice process to your organization’s needs.

Download the Architecture Standards Update Process Template

Step 2 - Summarize

Summarize the objectives and the process flow in the EA governance framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Create architectural standards to minimize transaction costs

Case Study

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

INSPRO01 didn’t maintain any centralized standards and each project had its own solution/design work products based on the preference of the architect on the project. This led to multiple standards across the organization.

Lack of consistency in architectural deliverables made the information hand-offs expensive.

Complication

INSPRO01 didn’t maintain the architectural documents in a central repository and the information was scattered across multiple project folders.

This caused key stakeholders to make decisions based on incomplete information and resulted in constant revisions as new information became available.

Result

Info-Tech recommended that the EA team identify and standardize the various EA work products so that information was collected in a consistent manner across the organization.

The team also recommended an information taxonomy to store the architectural deliverables and other collateral.

This resulted in increased consistency and standardization leading to efficiency gains.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Identify and standardize EA work products.
  • Classify the architectural standards.
  • Identify the custodian of standards.
  • Update the standards.

Outcomes

  • A standardized set of EA work products
  • A way to categorize and store EA work products
  • A defined method of updating standards

Phase 7

Communication Plan

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Communication Plan

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
  • Identify stakeholders
  • Create a communication plan

This step involves the following participants:

  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Communication Plan
  • EA Governance Framework

Info-Tech Insight

By failing to prepare, you are preparing to fail – maximize the likelihood of success for EA governance by engaging the relevant stakeholders and communicating the changes.

Phase 7 guided implementation

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 6: Operationalize the EA governance framework

Proposed Time to Completion: 1 week

Step 7.1: Create a Communication Plan

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Discuss how to communicate changes to stakeholders.
  • Discuss the purposes and benefits of the EA governance framework.

Then complete these activities…

  • Identify the stakeholders affected by the EA governance transformations.
  • List the benefits of the proposed EA governance initiative.
  • Create a plan to communicate the changes to impacted stakeholders.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
  • EA Governance Framework Template

Step 7.2: Review the Communication Plan

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Review the communication plan and gather feedback on the proposed stakeholders.
  • Confer about the various methods of communicating change in an organization.
  • Discuss the uses of the EA Governance Framework.

Then complete these activities…

  • Refine your communication plan and use it to engage with stakeholders to better serve customers.
  • Create the EA Governance Framework to accompany the communication plan in engaging stakeholders to better understand the value of EA.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
  • EA Governance Framework Template

Communicate changes to stakeholders

The changes made to the EA governance components need to be reviewed, approved, and communicated to all of the impacted stakeholders.

Deliverables to be reviewed:

  • Fundamentals
    • Vision and Mission
    • Goals and Measures
    • Principles
  • Architecture review process
  • Assessment checklists
  • Policy Governing body charters
  • Architectural standards

Deliverable Review Process:

Step 1: Hold a meeting with stakeholders to review, refine, and agree on the changes.

Step 2: Obtain an official approval from the stakeholders.

Step 3: Communicate the changes to the impacted stakeholders.

Communicate the changes by creating an EA governance framework and communication plan

7.1 3 hrs

Input

  • EA governance deliverables.

Output

  • EA Governance Framework
  • Communication Plan.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to create the EA governance framework as well as the communication plan. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

  1. EA Governance Framework:
    1. The EA Governance Framework is a document that will help reference and cite all the materials created from this blueprint. Follow the instructions on the framework to complete.
  2. Communication Plan:
    1. Identify the stakeholders based on the EA governance deliverables.
    2. For each stakeholder identified, complete the “Communication Matrix” section in the EA Governance Communication Plan Template. Fill out the section based on the instructions in the template.
    3. As the stakeholders are identified based on the “Communication Matrix,” use the EA Governance Framework document to communicate the changes.

Download the EA Governance Communication Plan Template and EA Governance Framework Template for additional instructions and to document your activities in this phase.

Maximize the likelihood of success by communicating changes

Case Study

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

The EA group followed Info-Tech’s methodology to assess the current state and has identified areas for improvement.

Best practices were adopted to fill the gaps identified.

The team planned to communicate the changes to the technology leadership team and get approvals.

As the EA team tried to roll out changes, they encountered resistance from various IT teams.

Complication

The team was not sure of how to communicate the changes to the business stakeholders.

Result

Info-Tech has helped the team conduct a thorough stakeholder analysis to identify all the stakeholders who would be impacted by the changes to the architecture governance framework.

A comprehensive communication plan was developed that leveraged traditional email blasts, town hall meetings, and non-traditional methods such as team blogs.

The team executed the communication plan and was able to manage the change effectively.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative.
  • Identify stakeholders.
  • Create a communication plan.
  • Compile the materials created in the blueprint to better communicate the value of EA governance.

Outcomes

  • Communication plan
  • EA governance framework

Bibliography

Government of British Columbia. “Architecture and Standards Review Board.” Government of British Columbia. 2015. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.gov.bc.ca/cio/standards/asrb.page >

Hopkins, Brian. “The Essential EA Toolkit Part 3 – An Architecture Governance Process.” Cio.com. Oct 2010. Web. April 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2372450/enterprise-architecture/the-essential-ea-toolkit-part-3---an-architecture-governance-process.html >

Kantor, Bill. “How to Design a Successful RACI Project Plan.” CIO.com. May 2012. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2395825/project-management/how-to-design-a-successful-raci-project-plan.html >

Sapient. “MIT Enterprise Architecture Guide.” Sapient. Sep 2004. Web. Jan 2016. < http://web.mit.edu/itag/eag/FullEnterpriseArchitectureGuide0.1.pdf >

TOGAF. “Chapter 41: Architecture Repository.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap41.html >

TOGAF. “Chapter 48: Architecture Compliance.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap48.html >

TOGAF. “Version 9.1.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/

United States Secret Service. “Enterprise Architecture Review Board.” United States Secret Service. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.archives.gov/records-mgmt/toolkit/pdf/ID191.pdf >

Virginia Information Technologies Agency. “Enterprise Architecture Policy.” Commonwealth of Virginia. Jul 2006. Web. Jan 2016. < https://www.vita.virginia.gov/uploadedfiles/vita_main_public/library/eapolicy200-00.pdf >

Research contributors and experts

Alan Mitchell, Senior Manager, Global Cities Centre of Excellence, KPMG

Alan Mitchell has held numerous consulting positions before his role in Global Cities Centre of Excellence for KPMG. As a Consultant, he has had over 10 years of experience working with enterprise architecture related engagements. Further, he worked extensively with the public sector and prides himself on his knowledge of governance and how governance can generate value for an organization.

Ian Gilmour, Associate Partner, EA advisory services, KPMG

Ian Gilmour is the global lead for KPMG’s enterprise architecture method and Chief Architect for the KPMG Enterprise Reference Architecture for Health and Human Services. He has over 20 years of business design experience using enterprise architecture techniques. The key service areas that Ian focuses on are business architecture, IT-enabled business transformation, application portfolio rationalization, and the development of an enterprise architecture capability within client organizations.

Djamel Djemaoun Hamidson, Senior Enterprise Architect, CBC/Radio-Canada

Djamel Djemaoun is the Senior Enterprise Architect for CBC/Radio-Canada. He has over 15 years of Enterprise Architecture experience. Djamel’s areas of special include service-oriented architecture, enterprise architecture integration, business process management, business analytics, data modeling and analysis, and security and risk management.

Sterling Bjorndahl, Director of Operations, eHealth Saskatchewan

Sterling Bjorndahl is now the Action CIO for the Sun Country Regional Health Authority, and also assisting eHealth Saskatchewan grow its customer relationship management program. Sterling’s areas of expertise include IT strategy, enterprise architecture, ITIL, and business process management. He serves as the Chair on the Board of Directors for Gardiner Park Child Care.

Huw Morgan, IT Research Executive, Enterprise Architect

Huw Morgan has 10+ years experience as a Vice President or Chief Technology Officer in Canadian internet companies. As well, he possesses 20+ years experience in general IT management. Huw’s areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, integration, e-commerce, and business intelligence.

Serge Parisien, Manager, Enterprise Architecture at Canada Mortgage Housing Corporation

Serge Parisien is a seasoned IT leader with over 25 years of experience in the field of information technology governance and systems development in both the private and public sectors. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, strategy, and project management.

Alex Coleman, Chief Information Officer at Saskatchewan Workers’ Compensation Board

Alex Coleman is a strategic, innovative, and results-driven business leader with a proven track record of 20+ years’ experience planning, developing, and implementing global business and technology solutions across multiple industries in the private, public, and not-for-profit sectors. Alex’s expertise includes program management, integration, and project management.

L.C. (Skip) Lumley , Student of Enterprise and Business Architecture

Skip Lumley was formerly a Senior Principle at KPMG Canada. He is now post-career and spends his time helping move enterprise business architecture practices forward. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture program implementation and public sector enterprise architecture business development.

Additional contributors

  • Tim Gangwish, Enterprise Architect at Elavon
  • Darryl Garmon, Senior Vice President at Elavon
  • Steve Ranaghan, EMEIA business engagement at Fujitsu

Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

  • IT spend has increased in volume and complexity, but how IT spend decisions are made has not kept pace.
  • In most organizations, technology has evolved faster than the business’ understanding of what it is, how it works, and what it can do for them.
  • How traditional financial accounting methods are applied to IT expenditure don’t align well to modern IT realities.
  • IT is often directed to make cuts when cost optimization and targeted investment are what’s really needed to sustain and grow the organization in the long term.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Meaningful conversations about IT spend don’t happen nearly as frequently as they should. When they do happen, they are often inhibited by a lack of IT financial management (ITFM) maturity combined with the absence of a shared vocabulary between IT, the CFO, and other business function leaders.
  • Supporting data about actual technology spend taking place that would inform decision making is often scattered and incomplete.
  • Creating transparency in your IT financial data is essential to powering collaborative and informed technology spend decisions.

Impact and Result

  • Understand the uses and benefits of making your IT spend more transparent.
  • Discover and organize your IT financial data.
  • Map your organization’s total technology spend against four IT stakeholder views: CFO, CIO, CXO, and CEO.
  • Gain vocabulary and facts that will help you tell the true story of IT spend.

Members may also be interested in Info-Tech's IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service.

Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Deck – A detailed, do-it-yourself framework and process for clearly mapping your organization’s total technology spend.

This deck mirrors Info-Tech’s own internal methods for delivering its IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service in a do-it-yourself format. Based on Info-Tech’s proven ITFM Cost Model, it includes an IT spend mapping readiness assessment, expert advice for sourcing and organizing your financial data, a methodology for mapping IT staff and vendor spend according to four key stakeholder views (CFO, CIO, CXO, and CEO), and guidance on how to analyze and share your results.

  • Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Storyboard

2. IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook – A structured Excel tool that allows you to allocate your IT spend across four key stakeholder views and generate high-impact visualizations.

This workbook offers a step-by-step approach for mapping and visualizing your organization’s true IT spend.

  • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

3. IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation Template – A PowerPoint template that helps you summarize and showcase key results from your IT spend transparency exercise.

This presentation template offers a recommended structure for introducing key executive stakeholders to your organization’s true IT spending behavior and IT financial management as a whole.

  • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation Template

Infographic

Further reading

Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

Lay a foundation for meaningful conversations with the business.

Analyst Perspective

Take the first step in your IT spend journey.

Talking about money is hard. Talking to the CEO, CFO, and other business leaders about money is even harder, especially if IT is seen as just a cost center, is not understood by stakeholders, or is simply taken for granted. In times of economic hardship, already lean IT operations are tasked with becoming even leaner.

When there's little fat to trim, making IT spend decisions without understanding the spend's origin, location, extent, and purpose can lead to mistakes that weaken, not strengthen, the organization.

The first step in optimizing IT spend decisions is setting a baseline. This means having a comprehensive and transparent view of all technology spend, organization-wide. This baseline is the only way to have meaningful, data-driven conversations with stakeholders and approvers around what IT delivers to the business and the implications of making changes to IT funding.

Before stepping forward in your IT financial management journey, know exactly where you're standing today.

Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice

Jennifer Perrier
Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
IT spend has increased in volume and complexity, but how IT spend decisions are made has not kept pace:
  • Technology has evolved faster than the business' understanding of what it is, how it works, and what it can do for them.
  • How traditional financial accounting methods are applied doesn't align well to modern IT realities.
  • IT is directed to make cuts when cost optimization and targeted investment are what's really needed to sustain and grow the organization in the long-term.
Meaningful conversations about IT spend don't happen nearly as much as they should. This is often due to:
  • A lack of maturity in how ITFM (IT financial management) is executed within IT and across the organization as a whole.
  • The absence of a shared vocabulary between IT, the CFO, and other business function leaders.
  • Scattered and incomplete data about the actual technology spend taking place in the organization.
Lay a foundation for meaningful conversations and informed decision-making around IT spend.
  • Understand the uses and benefits of making your IT spend more transparent.
  • Discover and organize your IT financial data.
  • Map your organization's total technology spend against four IT stakeholder views: CFO, CIO, CXO, and CEO.
  • Gain both vocabulary and facts that will help you tell the true story of IT spend.

Info-Tech Insight
Create transparency in your IT financial data to power both collaborative and informed technology spend decisions.

IT spend has grown alongside IT complexity

IT spend has grown alongside IT complexity

Growth creates change ... and challenges

IT has become more integral to business operations and achievement of strategic goals, driving complexity in how IT funds are allocated and managed.

How IT funds are spent has changed
Value demonstration is two-pronged. The first is return on performance investment, focused on formal and objective goals, metrics, and KPIs. The second is stakeholder satisfaction, a more subjective measure driven by IT-business alignment and relationship. IT leaders must do both well to prove and promote IT's value.
Funding decision cadence has sped up
Many organizations have moved from three- to five-year strategic planning cycles to one-year planning horizons or less, most noticeably since the 2008/2009 recession. Not only has the pace of technological change accelerated, but so too has volatility in the broader business and economic environments, forcing rapid response.
Justification rigor around IT spend has increased
The need for formal business cases, proposals, and participation in formal governance processes has increased, as has demand for financial transparency. With many IT departments still reporting into the CFO, there's no getting around it - today's IT leaders need to possess financial management savvy.
Clearly showing business value has become priority
IT spend has moved from the purchase of discrete hardware and software tools traditionally associated with IT to the need to address larger-scale issues around interoperability, integration, and virtualized cloud solutions. Today's focus is more on big-picture architecture than on day-to-day operations.

ITFM capabilities haven't grown with IT spend

IT still needs to prove itself.

Increased integration with the core business has made it a priority for the head of IT to be well-versed in business language and practice, specifically in the areas of measurement and financial management.

However, IT staff across all industries aren't very confident in how well IT is doing in managing its finances via three core processes:

  • Accounting of costs and budgets.
  • Optimizing costs to gain the best return on investment.
  • Demonstrating IT's value to the business.

Recent data from 4,137 respondents to Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Diagnostic shows that while most IT staff feel that these three financial management processes are important, notably fewer feel that IT management is effective at executing them.

IT leadership's capabilities around fundamental cost data capture appear to be lagging, not to mention the essential value-added capabilities around optimizing costs and showing how IT contributes to business value.

Graph of Cost and Budget Management

Graph of Cost Optimization

Questions for support transition

Source: IT Management & Governance Diagnostic, Info-Tech Research Group, 2022.

Take the perspective of key IT stakeholders as a first step in ITFM capability improvement

Other business unit leaders need to deliver on their own specific and unique accountabilities. Create true IT spend transparency by accounting for these multiple perspectives.

Exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them?
Many IT costs, like back-end infrastructure and apps maintenance, can be invisible to the business.

Why doesn't my department get more support from IT?
Some business needs won't align with spend priorities, while others seem to take more than their fair share.

Does the amount we spend on each IT service make sense?
IT will get little done or fall short of meeting service level requirements without appropriate funding.

I know what IT costs us, but what is it really worth?
Questions about value arise as IT investment and spend increase. How to answer these questions is critical.

At the end of the day, telling IT's spend story to the business is a significant challenge if you don't understand your audience, have a shared vocabulary, or use a repeatable framework.

Mapping your IT spend against a reusable framework helps generate transparency

A framework makes transparency possible by simplifying methods, creating common language, and reducing noise.

However, the best methodological framework won't work if the materials and information plugged into it are weak. With IT spend, the materials and information are your staff and your vendor financial data. To achieve true transparency, inputs must have the following three characteristics:

Availability Reliability Usability
The data and information are up-to-date and accessible when needed. The data and information are accurate, complete, and verifiable. The data and information are clearly defined, consistently and predictably organized, consumable, and meaningful for decision-making.

A framework is an organizing principle. When it comes to better understanding your IT spend, the things being organized by a framework are your method and your data.

If your IT spend information is transparent, you have an excellent foundation for having the right conversations with the right people in order to make strategically impactful decisions.

Info-Tech's approach enables meaningful dialogue with stakeholders about IT spend

View of meaningful dialogue with stakeholders about IT spend

Investing time in preparing and mapping your IT spend data enables better IT governance

While other IT spend transparency methods exist, Info-Tech's is designed to be straightforward and tactical.

Info-Tech method for IT spend transparency

Put your data to work instead of being put to work by your data.

Introducing Info-Tech's methodology for creating transparency on technology spend

1. Know your objectives 2. Gather required data 3. Map your IT staff spend 4. Map your IT vendor spend 5. Identify implications for IT
Phase Steps
  1. Review your business context
  2. Set IT staff and vendor spend transparency objectives
  3. Assess effort and readiness
  1. Collect IT staff spend data
  2. Collect IT vendor spend data
  3. Define industry-specific CXO Business View categories
  1. Categorize IT staff spend in each of the four views
  2. Validate
  1. Categorize IT vendor spend in each of the four views
  2. Validate
  1. Analyze your findings
  2. Craft your key messages
  3. Create an executive presentation
Phase Outcomes Goals and scope for your IT spend and staffing transparency effort. Information and data required to perform the IT staff and vendor spend transparency initiative. A mapping of the allocation of IT staff spend across the four views of the Info-Tech ITFM Cost Model. A mapping of the allocation of IT vendor spend across the four views of the Info-Tech ITFM Cost Model. An analysis of your results and a presentation to aid your communication of findings with stakeholders.

Insight Summary

Overarching insight
Take the perspective of key stakeholders and lay out your organization's complete IT spend footprint in terms they understand to enable meaningful conversations and start evolving your IT financial management capability.

Phase 1 insight
Your IT spend transparency efforts are only useful if you actually do something with the outcomes of those efforts. Be clear about where you want your IT transparency journey to take you.

Phase 2 insight
Your IT spend transparency efforts are only as good as the quality of your inputs. Take the time to properly source, clean, and organize your data.

Phase 3 insight
Map your IT staff spend data first. It involves work but is relatively straightforward. Practice your mapping approach here and carry forward your lessons learned.

Phase 4 insight
The importance of good, usable data will become apparent when mapping your IT vendor spend. Apply consistent and meaningful vendor labels to enable true aggregation and insight.

Phase 5 insight
Communicating your final IT spend transparency mapping with executive stakeholders is your opportunity to debut IT financial management as not just an IT issue but an organization-wide concern.

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

Use this tool in Phases 1-4

IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

Input your IT staff and vendor spend data to generate visual outputs for analysis and presentation in your communications.

Key deliverable:

IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation

Create a showcase for your newly-transparent IT staff and vendor spend data and present it to key business stakeholders.

Use this tool in Phase 5

IT and business blueprint benefits

IT Benefits Business Benefits
  • Gain insight into exactly where you're spending IT funds on hardware, software, service providers, and the workforce.
  • Understand how much it's costing IT to deliver specific IT services.
  • Illustrate differences in business consumption of IT spend.
  • Learn the ratio of spend allocated to innovation vs. growth vs. keeping the lights on (KTLO).
  • Develop a series of core IT spend metrics including IT spend as a percent of revenue, IT spend per organization employee, and IT spend per IT staff member.
  • Create a complete IT spend baseline to serve as a foundation for future benchmarking, cost optimization, and other forms of IT financial analysis.
  • Understand the relative allocation of IT spend across capital vs. operational expenditure.
  • See the degree to which IT differentially supports and enables organizational goals, strategies, and functions.
  • Have better data for informing the organization's IT spend allocation and prioritization decisions.
  • Gain better visibility into real-life IT spending behaviors, cadences, and patterns.
  • Identify potential areas of spend waste as well as underinvestment.
  • Understand the true value that IT brings to the business.

Measure the value of this blueprint

You will know that your IT spend and staffing transparency effort is succeeding when:

  • Your understanding of where technology funds are really being allocated is comprehensive.
  • You're having active and meaningful dialogue with key stakeholders about IT spend issues.
  • IT spend transparency is a permanent part of your IT financial management toolkit.

In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you identify initiatives where you can leverage the outcomes of your IT spend and staffing transparency effort.

In phases 2, 3, and 4, we will guide you through the process of mapping your IT staff and vendor spend data so you can generate your own IT spend metrics based on reliable sources and verifiable facts.

Win #1: Knowing how to reliably source the financial data you need to make decisions.

Win #2: Getting your IT spend data in an organized format that you can actually analyze.

Win #3: Having a framework that puts IT spend in a language stakeholders understand.

Win #4: Gaining a practical starting point to mature ITFM practices like cost optimization.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
"Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

Guided Implementation

Info-Tech recommends the following calls in your Guided Implementation.

Phase 1: Know your objectives Phase 2: Gather required data Phase 3: Map your IT staff spend Phase 4: Map your IT vendor spend Phase 5: Identify implications for IT
Call #1: Discuss your IT spend and staffing transparency objectives and readiness. Call #2: Review spend and staffing data sources and identify data organization and cleanup needs. Call #3: Review your mapped IT staff spend and resolve lingering challenges. Call #4: Review your mapped IT vendor spend and resolve lingering challenges. Call #5: Analyze your mapping outputs for opportunities and devise next steps.

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

A typical GI is between four to six calls over the course of two to three months.

Want even more help with your IT spend transparency effort?

Let us fast-track your IT spend journey.

The path to IT financial management maturity starts with knowing exactly where your money is going. To streamline this effort, Info-Tech offers an IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking service that provides full transparency into where your money is going without any heavy lifting on your part.

This unique service features:

  • A client-proven approach to meet your IT spend transparency goals.
  • Vendor and staff spend mapping that reveals business consumption of IT.
  • Industry benchmarking to compare your spending and staffing to that of your peers.
  • Results in a fraction of the time with much less effort than going it alone.
  • Expert review of results and ongoing discussions with Info-Tech analysts.

If you'd like Info-Tech to pave the way to IT spend transparency, contact your account manager for more information - we're happy to talk anytime.

Phase 1

Know Your Objectives

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Establish IT spend and staffing transparency uses and objectives
  • Assess your readiness to tackle IT spend and staffing transparency

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead
  • Other members of IT management

Phase 1: Know your objectives

Envision what transparency can do.

You're at the very beginning of your IT spend transparency journey. In this phase you will:

  • Set your objectives for making your IT spend and staffing transparent.
  • Assess your readiness to tackle the exercise and gauge how much work you'll need to do in order to do it well.

"I've heard this a lot lately from clients: 'I've got my hands on this data, but it's not structured in a way that will allow me to make any decisions about it. I have these journal entries and they have some accounting codes, GL descriptors, cost objects, and some vendors, but it's not enough detail to make any decisions about my services, my applications, my asset spend.'"
- Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Transparency positively enables both business outcomes and the practice of business ethics

However, transparency's real superpower is in how it provides fact-based context.

  • More accurate and relevant data for decision-making.
  • Better managed and more impactful financial outcomes.
  • Increased inclusion of people in the decisions that affect them.
  • Clearer accountabilities for organizational efficiency and effectiveness goals.
  • Concrete proof that business priorities and decisions are being acted on and implemented.
  • Greater trust and respect between IT and the business.
  • Demonstration of integrity in how funds are being used.

IT spend transparency efforts are only useful if you actually do something with the outputs

Identify in advance how you plan to leverage IT spend transparency outcomes.

CFO expense view

  • Demonstrate actual IT costs at the right level of granularity.
  • Update/change the categories finance uses to track IT spend.
  • Adjust the expected CapEx/OpEx ratio.

CXO business view

  • Calculate consumption of IT resources by department.
  • Implement a showback/chargeback mechanism.
  • Change the funding conversation about proposed IT projects.

CIO service view

  • Calculate the total cost to deliver a specific IT service.
  • Adjust the IT service spend-to-value ratio as per business priorities.
  • Rightsize IT service levels to reflect true value to the business.

CEO innovation view

  • Formalize the organization's position on use of cloud/outsourcing.
  • Reduce the portion of spend dedicated to "keeping the lights on."
  • Develop a plan for boosting commitment to innovation investment.

When determining your end objectives, think about the real questions IT is being asked by the business and how IT spend transparency will help you answer them.

CFO: Financial accounting perspective

IT spend used to be looked at from a strictly financial accounting perspective - this is the view of the CFO and the finance department. Their question, "exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them," is really about how money is distributed across different asset classes. This question breaks down into other questions that IT leaders needs to ask themselves in order to provide answers:

  • How should I classify my IT costs? What are the standard categories you need to have that are meaningful to folks crunching the corporate numbers? If you're too detailed, it won't make sense to them. If you pick outmoded categories, you'll have to adjust in the future as IT evolves, which makes tracking year-over-year spend patterns harder.
  • What information should I include in my plans and reports? This is about two things. One is about communicating with the finance department in language that reduces back-and-forth and eliminates misinterpretation. The other is about aligning with the categories the finance department uses to track financial data in the general ledger.
  • How do I justify current spend? This is about clarity and transparency. Specifically itemizing spend into categories that are meaningful for your audience does a lot of justification work for you since you don't have to re-explain what everything means.
  • How do I justify a budget increase? In a declining economy, this question may not be appropriate. However, establishing a baseline puts you in a better position to discuss spend requirements based on past performance and to focus the conversation.

Exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them?

Example
Asset Class % IT Spend
Workforce 42.72%
Software - Cloud 9.26%
Software - On Prem 13.61%
Hardware - Cloud 0.59%
Hardware - On Prem 15.68%
Contract Services 18.14%
Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Studies, 2022.

CIO: IT operations management perspective

As the CIO role was adopted, IT spend was viewed from the IT operations management perspective. Optimizing the IT delivery model is a critical step to reducing time to provision services. For the IT leader, the questions they need to ask themselves are:

  • What's the impact of cloud adoption on speed of delivery? Leveraging a SaaS solution can reduce time to deployment as well as increase your ability to scale; however, integration with other functionality will still be a challenge that will incur costs.
  • Where can I improve spend efficiency? This is about optimizing spend in your IT delivery model. What service levels does the business require and what's the most cost-effective way to meet those levels without incurring significant technical debt?
  • Is my support model optimized? By reviewing where support staff are focused and which services are using most of your resources, you can investigate underlying drivers of your staffing requirements. If staff costs in support of a business function are high, perhaps the portfolio of applications needs to be reviewed.
  • How does our spend compare to others? Benchmarking against peers is a useful input, but reflects common practice, not best practice. For example, if you need to invest in IT security, your entire industry is lagging on this front, and you happen to be doing slightly better than most, then bringing forth this benchmark won't help you make the case. Starting with year-over-year internal benchmarking is essential - establish your categories, establish your baseline, and track it consistently.

Does the amount we spend on each IT service make sense?

Example
Service Area % IT Spend
App Development 9.06%
App Maintenance 30.36%
Hosting/Network 25.39%
End User 18.59%
Data & BI 3.58%
Security & Risk 5.21%
IT Management 7.82%
Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Studies, 2022.

CXO: Business unit perspective

As business requests have increased, so too has the importance of the business unit perspective. Each business function has a unique mandate to fulfill in the organization and also competes with other business functions for IT resources. By understanding business consumption of IT, organizations can bring transparency and drive a different dialog with their business partners. Every IT leader should find out the answers to these questions:

  • Which business units consume the most IT resources? By understanding consumption of IT by business function, IT organizations can clearly articulate which business units are getting the highest share of IT resources. This will bring much needed clarity when it comes to IT spend prioritization and investment.
  • Which business units are underserved by IT? By providing full transparency into where all IT spend is consumed, organizations can determine if certain business functions may need increased attention in an upcoming budget cycle. Knowing which levers to pull is critical in aligning IT activities with delivering business value.
  • How do I best communicate spend data internally? Different audiences need information presented to them differently. This is not just about the language - it's also about the frequency, format, and channel you use. Ask your audiences directly what methods of communication stand the best chance of you being seen and heard.
  • Where do I need better business sponsorship for IT projects? If a lot of IT spend is going toward one or two business units, the leaders of those units need to be active sponsors of IT projects and associated spend that will benefit all users.

Why doesn't my business unit get more support from IT?

Example
Business Function % IT Spend
HR Department 6.16%
Finance Department 15.15%
IT Department 10.69%
Business Function 1 23.80%
Business Function 2 10.20%
Business Function 3 6.80%
Business Function 4 27.20%
Source: Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Studies, 2022.

CEO: Strategic vs. operations perspective

With a business view now available, evaluating IT spend from a strategic standpoint is critical. Simply put, how much is being spent keeping the lights on (KTLO) in the organization versus supporting business or organizational growth versus net-new business innovations? This view is not about what IT costs but rather how it is being prioritized to drive revenue, operating margin, or market share. Here are the questions IT leaders should be asking themselves along with the organization's executive leadership and the CEO:

  • Why is KTLO spend so high? This question is a good gauge of where the line is drawn between operations and strategy. Many IT departments want to reduce time spent on maintenance and redeploy resource investment toward strategic projects. This reallocation must include retiring or eliminating technologies to free up funds.
  • What should our operational spend priorities be? Maintenance and basic operations aren't going anywhere. The issue is what is necessary and what could be done more wisely. Are you throwing good money after bad on a high-maintenance legacy system?
  • Which projects and investments should we prioritize? The answer to this question should tightly align with business strategic goals and account for the lion's share of growth and innovation spend.
  • Are we spending enough on innovative initiatives? This is the ultimate dialogue between business partners, the CEO, and IT that needs to take place, yet often doesn't.

I know what IT costs us, but what is it really worth?

Example
Focus Area % IT Spend
KTLO 89.16%
Grow 7.18%
Innovate 3.66%
Info-Tech IT Spend Studies, 2022.

Be clear about where you want your IT spend transparency journey to take you in real life

Transparent IT spend data will allow you to have conversations you couldn't have before. Consider this example of how telling an IT spend story could evolve.

I want to ...
Analyze the impact of the cloud on IT operating expenditure to update finance's expectations of a realistic IT CapEx/OpEx ratio now and into the future.

To address the problem of ...

  • Many of our key software vendors have eliminated on-premises products and only offer software as an OpEx service.
  • Assumptions that modern IT solutions are largely on-premises and can be treated as capitalizable assets are out-of-date and don't reflect IT financial realities.

And will use transparency to ...

  • Provide the CFO with specific, accurate, and annotated OpEx by product/service and vendor for all cloud-based and on-premises solutions.
  • Facilitate a realistic calculation of CapEx/OpEx distribution based on actuals, as well as let us develop defendable projections of OpEx into the future based on typical annual service fee increases and anticipated growth in the number of users/licenses.

1.1 Establish ITFM objectives that leverage IT spend transparency

Duration: One hour

  1. Consider the problems or issues commonly voiced by the business about IT, as well as your own ongoing challenges in communicating with stakeholders. Document these problems/issues as questions or statements as spoken by a person. To help structure your brainstorming, consider these general process domains and examples:
    1. Spend tracking and reporting. E.g. Why is IT's OpEx so high? We need you to increase IT's percentage of CapEx.
    2. Service levels and business continuity. E.g. Why do we need to hire more service desk staff? There are more of them in IT than any other role.
    3. Project and operations resourcing. E.g. Why can't IT just buy this new app we want? It's not very expensive.
    4. Strategy and innovation. E.g. Did output increase or decrease last quarter per input unit? IT should be able to run those reports for us.
  2. For each problem/issue noted, identify:
    1. The source(s) of the question/concern (e.g. CEO, CFO, CXO, CIO).
    2. The financial process involved (e.g. accurate costing, verification of costs, building a business case to invest).
  3. For each problem/issue, identify a broader project-style initiative where having transparent IT spend data is a valuable input. One initiative may apply to multiple problems/issues. For each initiative:
    1. Give it a working title.
    2. State the goal for the initiative with reference to ITFM aspirations.
    3. Identify key stakeholders (these will likely overlap with the problem/issue source).
    4. Set general time frames for resolution.

Document your outputs on the slide immediately following the instruction slides for this exercise. Examples are included.

1.1 Establish ITFM objectives that leverage IT spend transparency

Input Output
  • Organizational knowledge
  • List of the potential uses and objectives of transparent IT spend and staffing data
Materials Participants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead

ITFM initiatives that leverage transparency

Problem/Issue Statement Source/ Stakeholder Associated ITFM Process Potential Initiative Initiative Goal Time Frame
"Why is IT's OpEx so high? We need you to increase IT's percentage of CapEx." CFO IT spend categorization and reporting. Analyze the impact of the cloud on IT operating expenditure. To update finance's expectations of a realistic IT CapEx/OpEx ratio. <12 months
"Why do we need to hire more service desk staff? There are more of them in IT than any other role." CFO, VP of HR Business case for hiring IT staff. Document ongoing IT support requirements for proposed ERP platform migration project. To ensure sufficient resources for an anticipated increase in service desk tickets due to implementation of a new ERP system. 1-3 months
"Why can't IT just buy this new app we want? It's not very expensive." CEO, all CXOs/VPs Total cost of technology ownership. Develop a mechanism to review the lifecycle impact on IT of proposed technology purchases. To determine if functionality of new tool already exists in the org. and the total cost of ownership of a new app. <6 months
"Did output increase or decrease last quarter per input unit? IT should be able to run those reports for us." CEO, CFO, VP of Production IT service costing. Develop an organizational business intelligence strategy. To create a comprehensive plan for evolving BI capability in the organization and transferring report development to users. Select a department for pilot. <12 months

Your organization's governance culture will affect how you approach transparency

Know your governance culture Lower Governance
  • Few regulations.
  • Financial reporting is largely internal.
  • Change is frequent and rapid.
  • Informal or nonexistent mechanisms and structures.
  • Data sharing behavior driven by competitive concerns.
Higher Governance
  • Many regulations.
  • Stringent and regular external reporting requirements.
  • Change is limited and/or slow.
  • Defined and established mechanisms and structures.
  • Data sharing behavior driven by regulatory concerns.
Determine impact on opportunities How does your governance culture impact IT spend transparency opportunities?
Resistance to formality and bureaucracy Resistance to change and uncertainty
Set expectations and approach You have plenty of room to implement transparency rigor within the confines of IT, but getting others to give you the time and attention you want will be a challenge. One-on-one, informal relationship building to create goodwill and dialogue is needed before putting forth recommendations or numbers. Many existing procedures must be accommodated and respected. While you can benefit by working with preexisting mechanisms and touchpoints, expect any changes you want to make to things like IT cost categories or CapEx/OpEx ratios to require a lot of time, meetings, and case-making.

IT's current maturity around ITFM practice will also affect your approach to transparency

Know your ITFM maturity level Lower ITFM Maturity
  • No/few formal policies, standards, or procedures exist.
  • There is little/no formal education or experience within IT around budget, costing, charging, or accounting practices.
  • Financial reporting is sporadic and inconsistent in its contents.
  • Business cases are rarely used in decision-making.
  • Financial data is neither reliable nor readily available.
Higher ITFM Maturity
  • Formal policies, standards, and procedures are enforced organization-wide for all financial management activities.
  • Formally-trained accountants are embedded within IT.
  • Financial reporting is regular, scheduled, and defined.
  • Business cases are leveraged in most decision-making activities.
  • Financial data is governed, centralized, and current.
Determine stakeholders' financial literacy How does your degree of ITFM maturity impact IT spend transparency opportunities?
Improve your own financial literacy first Determine stakeholders' financial literacy
Set expectations and approach Brush up on core financial management and accounting concepts before taking the discussion beyond IT's walls. Do start mapping your costs, but just know how to communicate what the data is saying before sharing it. Not everyone will be at your level, familiar with ITFM language and concepts, or focused on the same things you are. Gauge where your audience is at so you can prepare for meaningful dialogue.

1.2 Assess your readiness to tackle IT spend transparency

Duration: One hour

Note: This assessment is general in nature. It's intended to help you identify and prepare for potential challenges in your IT spend and staffing transparency effort.

  1. Rate your agreement with the "Data & Information" and "Experience, Expertise, & Support" statements listed on the slide immediately following the two instruction slides for this exercise. For each statement, indicate the extent to which you agree or disagree, where:
    1. 1 = Strongly disagree
    2. 2 = Disagree
    3. 3 = Neither agree nor disagree
    4. 4 = Agree
    5. 5 = Strongly agree
  2. Add up your numerical scores for all statements, where the highest possible score is 65.
  3. Assess your general readiness against the following guidelines:
    1. 50-65: Ready. The transparency exercise will involve work, but should be straightforward since you have the data, skills, tools, processes, and support to do it.
    2. 40-49: Ready, with caveats. The transparency exercise is doable but will require some preparatory legwork and investigation on your part around data sourcing, organization, and interpretation.
    3. 30-39: Challenged. The transparency exercise will present some obstacles. Expect to encounter data gaps, inconsistencies, errors, roadblocks, and frustrations that will need to be resolved.
    4. Less than 30: Not ready. You don't have the data, skills, tools, processes, and/or support to do the data transparency exercise. Take time to develop a stronger foundation of financial literacy and governance before tackling it.

Document your outputs on the slide immediately following the two instruction slides for this exercise.

1.2 Assess your readiness to tackle IT spend transparency

InputOutput
  • Organizational knowledge
  • Estimation of IT spend and staffing transparency effort
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead

IT spend transparency readiness assessment

Data & Information
Statement Rating
We know how to access all IT department spend records.
We know how to access all non-IT-department technology spend records.
We know how to access all IT vendor/contractor agreements.
We know how to access data about our IT staff costs and allocation, such as organizational charts and salaries/benefits.
Our financial and staffing data is up-to-date.
Our financial and staffing data are labeled, described, and organized so that we know what they're referring to.
Our financial and staffing data are in a format that we can easily manipulate (e.g. export, copy and paste, perform calculations).
Experience, Expertise, & Support
Statement Rating
We have sufficient expertise within the IT department to navigate and accurately interpret financial records.
We have reasonable access to expertise/resources in our finance department to support us in an IT spend transparency exercise.
We can allocate sufficient time (about 40 hours) and resources in the near term to do an IT spend transparency exercise.
We have current accountabilities to track and internally report financial information to others on at least a monthly basis.
There are existing financial policies, procedures, and standards in the organization with which we must closely adhere and comply.
We have had the experience of participating in, or responding to the results of, an internal or external audit.

Rating scale:
1 = Strongly Disagree; 2 = Disagree; 3 = Neither agree nor disagree; 4 = Agree; 5 = Strongly agree
Assessment scale:
Less than 30 = Not ready; 30-39 = Challenged; 40-49 = Ready with caveats; 50-65 = Ready

Take a closer look at the statements you rated 1, 2, or 3. These will be areas of challenge no matter what your total score on the assessment scale.

Phase 1: Know your objectives

Achievement summary

You've now completed the first two steps on your IT spend transparency journey. You have:

  • Set your objectives for making your IT spend and staffing transparent.
  • Assessed your readiness to tackle the exercise and know how much work you'll need to do in order to do it well.

"Mapping to a transparency model is labor intensive. You can do it once and never revisit it again, but we would never advise that. What it does is play well into an IT financial management maturity roadmap."
- Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Phase 2

Gather Required Data

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Gather, clean, and organize your data
  • Build your industry-specific business views

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead
  • Other members of IT management

Phase 2: Gather required data

Finish your preparation.

You're now ready to do the final preparation for your IT spend and staffing transparency journey. In this phase you will:

  • Gather your IT spend and staffing data and information.
  • Clean and organize your data to streamline mapping.
  • Identify your baseline data points.

"Some feel like they don't have all the data, so they give up. Don't. Every data point counts."
- Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Your IT spend transparency efforts are only as good as the quality of your inputs

Aim for a comprehensive, complete, and accurate set of data and information.

Diagram of comprehensive, complete, and accurate set of data and information

Start by understanding what's included in technology spend

Info-Tech's ITFM Technology Inventory

In scope:

  • All network, telecom, and data center equipment.
  • All end-user productivity software and devices (e.g. laptops, peripheral devices, cell phones).
  • Information security.
  • All acquisition, development, maintenance, and management of business and operations software.
  • All systems used for the storage and management of business assets, data, records, and information.
  • All managed IT services.
  • Third-party consulting services.
  • All identifiable spend from the business for the above.

Expand your thinking: Total tech spend goes beyond what's under IT's operational umbrella

"Technology" means all technology in the organization regardless of where it lives, who bought it, who owns it, who runs it, or who uses it.

IT may have low or no visibility into technologies that exist in the broader business environment beyond IT. Accept that you won't gain 100% visibility right now. However, do get started and be persistent.

Where to look for non-IT technology ...

  • Highly specialized business functions - niche tools that are probably used by only a few people.
  • Power users and the "underserved" - cloud-based workflow, communication, and productivity tools they got on their own.
  • Operational technology - network-connected industrial, building, or physical security sensors and control systems.
  • Recently acquired/merged entities - inherited software.

Who might get you what you need ...

  • Business unit and team leaders - identification of what they use and copies of their spend records and/or contracts.
  • Finance - a report of the "software" expenditure category to spot unrecognized technologies and their owners.
  • Vendors - copies of contracts if not forthcoming internally.
  • Your service desk - informal knowledge gained about unknown technologies at play in the course of doing their job.

The IT spend and staffing transparency exercise is an opportunity to kick-start a technology discovery process that will give you and the business a true picture of your technology profile, use, and spend.

Seek out data at the right level of granularity with the right supporting information

Key data and information to seek out:

  • Credits applied to appropriate debits that show net expense, or detailed descriptions of credits with no matching debit.
  • Cash-based accounting (not accrual accounting). If accrual, will need to determine how to simplify the data for your uses.
  • Vendor names, asset classes, descriptors, and departments.
  • A total spend amount (CapEx + OpEx) that:
    • Aligns with the spend period.
    • Passes your gut check for total IT spend.
    • Includes annual amounts for multi-year contracts (e.g. one year of a three-year Microsoft enterprise agreement).
    • Includes technology spend from the business (e.g. OT that IT supports).
  • Insights on large projects.
  • Consolidated recurring payments, salaries and benefits, and other small expenses.

Look for these data descriptors in your files:

  • Cost center/accounting unit
  • Cost center/department description
  • GL ACCT
  • CL account description
  • Activity description
  • Status
  • Program/business function/project description
  • Accounting period
  • Transaction amount
  • Vendor/vendor name
  • Product/product name

Avoid data that's hard to use or problematic as it will slow you down and bring limited benefits

Spend data that's out of scope:

  • Depreciation/amortization.
  • Gain or loss of asset write-off.
  • Physical security (e.g. key cards, cameras, motion sensors, floodlights).
  • Printer consumables costs.
  • Heating and cooling costs (for data centers).

Challenging data formats:

  • Large raw data files with limited or no descriptors.
  • Major accounts (hardware and software) combined in the same line item.
  • Line items (especially software) with no vendor reference information.
  • PDF files or screenshots that you can't extract data from readily. Use Excel or CSV files whenever possible.

Getting at the data you need can be easy or hard – it all depends

This is where your governance culture and ITFM maturity start to come into play.

Data source Potential data and information What to expect
IT Current/past budget, vendor agreements, IT project records, discretionary spend, number of IT employees. The rigor of your ITFM practice and centralization of data and documents will affect how straightforward this is.
Finance General ledger, cash and income statements, contractor payments and other accounts payable, general revenue. Secure their expertise early. Let them know what you're trying to do and what you need. They may be willing to prepare data for you in the format you need and help you decipher records.
Purchasing List of vendors/suppliers, vendor agreements, purchase invoices. Purchasing often has more descriptive information about vendors than finance. They can also point you to tech spend in other departments that you didn't know about.
Human Resources Organizational chart, staff salaries and benefits, number of employees overall and by department. Data about benefits costs is something you're not likely to have, and there's only one place you can reliably get it.
Other Business Units Non-IT technology spend vendor agreements and purchase invoices, number of department employees. Other departments may be tracking spend in an entirely different way than you. Be prepared to dig and reconcile.

There may be some data or information you can't get without a Herculean effort. Don't worry about it too much - these items are usually relatively minor and won't significantly affect the overall picture.

Commit to finding out what you don't know

Many IT leaders don't have visibility into other departments' technology spend. In some cases, the fact that spend is even happening may be a complete surprise.

Near-term visibility fix ...

  • Ask your finance department for a report on all technology-related spend categories. "Software" is a broad category that finance departments tend to track. Scan the report for items that don't look familiar and confirm the originating department or approver.
  • Check in with the procurement office. See what technology-related contracts they have on record and which departments "own" them. Get copies of those contracts if possible.
  • Contact individual department heads or technology spend approvers. Devise your contact shortlist based on what you already know or learned from finance and procurement. Position your outreach as a discovery process that supports your transparency effort. Avoid coming across as though you're judging their spend or planning to take over their technologies.

Long-term visibility fix ...

  • Develop your relationships with other business unit leaders. This will help open the lines of communication permanently.
  • Establish a cross-functional central technology office or group. The main task of this unit is to set and manage technology standards organization-wide, including standards for tracking and documenting technology costs and asset lifecycle factors.
  • Ensure IT is formally involved in all technology spend proposals and plans. This gives IT the opportunity to assess them for security compliance, IT network/system interoperability, manageability, and IT support requirements prior to purchase.
  • Ensure IT is notified of all technology financial transactions. This includes contracts, invoices, and payments for all one-time purchases, subscription fees, and maintenance costs.

Finally, note any potential anomalies in the IT spend period you're looking at

No two years have the exact same spend patterns. One-time spend for a big capital project, for example, can dramatically alter your overall spend landscape.

Look for the following anomalies:

  • New or ongoing capital implementations or projects that span more than one fiscal year.
  • Completed projects that have recently transitioned, or are transitioning, from CapEx (decreasing) to OpEx (increasing).
  • A major internal reorganization or merger, acquisition, or divestiture event.
  • Crises, disasters, or other rare emergencies.
  • Changes in IT funding sources (e.g. new or expiring grants).

These anomalies often explain why IT spend is unusually high in certain areas. There's often a good business reason.

In many cases, doing a separate spend transparency exercise for these anomalous projects or events can isolate their costs from other spend so their true nature and impact can be better understood.

2.1 Gather your input data and information

Duration: Variable

  1. Develop a complete list of the spending and staffing data and information you need to complete the transparency mapping exercise. For each required item, note the following:
    1. Description of data needed (i.e. type, timeframe, and format).
    2. Ideal timeframe or deadline for receipt.
    3. Probable source(s) and contact(s).
    4. Additional facilitation/support required.
    5. Person on your transparency team responsible for obtaining it.
  2. Set up a data and information repository to store all files as soon as they're received. Ideally, you'll want all data/information files to be in an electronic format so that everything can be stored in one place. Avoid paper documents if possible.
  3. Conduct your outreach to obtain the input data and information on your list. This could include delegating it to a subordinate, sending emails, making phone calls, booking meetings, and so on.
  4. Review the data and information received to confirm that it's the right type of data, at the correct level of granularity, for the right timeframe, in a usable format, and is generally accurate.
  5. Enter documentation about your data and information sources in tab "1. Data & Information Sources" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook to reflect what you needed and where you got it in order to make the discovery process easier in the future.
  6. In the same tab in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook, document any significant events that occurred that directly or indirectly impacted the selected year's spend values. These could include mergers/acquisitions/divestitures, major reorganizations or changes in leadership, significant shifts in product offerings or strategic direction, large capital projects, legal/regulatory changes, natural disasters, or changes in the economy.

Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

2.1 Gather your input data and information

InputOutput
  • Knowledge of potential data and information sources
  • List of data and information required to complete the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead

Tidy up your data before beginning any spend mapping

Most organizations aren't immaculate in their tech spend documentation and tracking practices. This creates data rife with gaps that lives in hard-to-use formats.

The more preparation you do to approach the "good data" intersection point in the diagram below, the easier your mapping effort will be and the more useful and insightful your final findings.

Venn diagram of good data

Make your data "un-unique" to reduce the number of line items and make it manageable

There's a good chance that the IT spend data you've received is in the form of tens of thousands of unique line items. Use the checklist below to help you roll it up.

Warning: Never overwrite your original data. Insert new columns/rows and put your alternate information in these instead.

Step 1: Standardize vendor names

  • Start with known large vendors.
  • Select a standard name for the vendor.
  • Brainstorm possible variations on the vendor name, including abbreviations and shortforms.
  • Search for the vendor in your data and document the new standardized vendor name in the appropriate row.
  • Repeat the above for all vendors.
  • Sort the new vendor name column from A-Z. Look for instances where names remain unique or are missing entirely. Reconcile if needed and fill in missing data.

Step 2: Consolidate vendor spend

  • Sort the new vendor name column from A-Z. Start with vendors that have the most line items.
  • Add together related spend items from a given vendor. Create a new row for the consolidated spend item and flag it as consolidated. Keep the following item types in separate rows:
    • Hardware vs. software spend for the same vendor.
    • Cloud vs. on-premises spend for the same vendor.
  • Repeat the above for all vendors.
  • Consider breaking out separate rows for overly consolidated line items that contain too many different types of IT spend.

2.2 Clean and organize your data

Duration: Variable

  1. Check to ensure that you have all data and information required to conduct the IT spend transparency exercise.
  2. Conduct an initial scan to assess the data's current state of hygiene and overall usability. Flag anything of concern and follow up with the data/information provider to fix or reconcile any issues.
  3. Normalize your data to make it easier to work with. This includes selecting data format standards and changing anything that doesn't conform to those standards. This includes items such as date conventions, currencies, and so on.
  4. Standardize product and vendor naming/references throughout to enable searching, sorting, and grouping. For example, Microsoft Office may be variably referred to as "Microsoft", "Office", "Office 365", and "Office365" throughout your data. Pick one descriptor for the product/vendor and replace all related references with that descriptor.
  5. Consolidate and aggregate your data. Ideally, the data you received from your sources has already been simplified; however, you may need to further organize it to reduce the number of individual line items to a more manageable number. The transparency exercise uses relatively high-level categories, so combine data sets and aggregate where feasible without losing appropriate granularity.
  6. Archive any original copies of files that have been modified or replaced with consolidated/aggregated versions for future reference if needed.

2.2 Clean and organize your data

InputOutput
  • Data and information files
  • A normalized set of data and information for completing the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead

Select IT spend "buckets" for the CXO Business View as your final preparatory step

Every organization has both industry-agnostic and industry-specific lines of business that are the direct beneficiaries of IT spend.

Common shared business functions:

  • Human resources.
  • Finance and accounting.
  • Sales/customer service.
  • Marketing and advertising.
  • Legal services and regulatory compliance.
  • Information technology.

It may seem odd to see IT on the business functions list since the purpose of this exercise is to map IT spend. For business view purposes, IT spend refers to what IT spends on itself to support its own internal operations.

Examples of industry-specific functions:

  • Manufacturing: Product research and development; production operations; supply chain management.
  • Retail banking: Core banking services; loan, mortgage and credit services; investment and wealth management services.
  • Hospitals: Patient intake and admissions; patient diagnosis; patient treatment; patient recovery and ongoing care.
  • Insurance: Actuarial analysis; policy creation; underwriting; claims processing.

See the Appendix of this blueprint for definitions of shared business functions plus sample industry-specific business view categories.

Define your CXO Business View categories to set yourself up well for future ITFM analyses

The CXO Business View buckets you set up today are tools you can and should reuse in your overall approach to ITFM governance. Spend some time to get them right.

Stay high-level

Getting too granular invites administrative headaches and overhead. Keep things high-level and general:

  • Limit the number of direct stakeholders represented: This will reduce communication overhead and ensure you're dealing only with people who have real decision-making authority.
  • Look to your org. chart: Note the departments or business units listed across the top of the chart that have one executive or top-ranking senior manager accountable for them. These business units often translate as-is into a tidy CXO Business View category.

Limit your number of buckets

Tracking IT spend across more than 8-10 shared and industry-specific business categories is impractical.

  • Simplify your options: Too many buckets gets confusing and invites time-wasting doubt.
  • Reduce future rework: Business structures will change, which means recategorizing spend data. Using a forklift is a lot easier than using tweezers.
  • Stick to major business units: Create separate "Business Other" and "Industry Other" catch-all categories to track IT spend for smaller functions that fall outside of major business unit structures.

Stay high-level with the CXO Business View

Be clear on what's in and what's out of your categories to keep everyone on the same page

Clear lines of demarcation between CXO Business View categories reduce confusion, doubt, and wheel-reinvention when deciding where to allocate IT spend.

Ensure clear boundaries

Mutual exclusivity is key when defining categories in any taxonomical structure.

  • Avoid overlaps: Each high-level business function category should have few or no core function or process overlaps with another business function category. Aim for clear vertical separation.
  • Be encompassing: When defining a category, list all the business capabilities and sub-functions included in that category. For example, if defining the finance and accounting function, remember to specify its less obvious accountabilities, like enterprise asset management if appropriate.

Identify exclusions

Listing what's out can be just as informative and clarifying as listing what's in.

  • Beware odd bedfellows: Minor business groups are often tucked under a bigger organizational entity even though the two use different processes and technologies. Separate them if appropriate and state this exclusion in the bigger entity's definition.
  • Draw a line: If a process crosses business function categories, state which sub-steps are out of scope.
  • Document your decisions: This helps ensure you allocate IT spend the same way every time.

Clear lines of demarcation between CXO Business View categories

2.3 Build your industry-specific business views

Duration: Two hours

  1. Confirm your list of high-level shared business services (human resources, finance and accounting, etc.) as provided in Info-Tech's IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. Rename them if needed to match the nomenclature used in your organization.
  2. Set and define your additional list of high-level, industry-specific business categories that are unique to or define your industry. See the slides immediately following this exercise for tips on developing these categories, as well as the appendix of this blueprint for some examples of industry-specific categories and definitions.
  3. Create "Business Other" and "Industry Other" categories to capture minor groups and activities supported by IT that fall beyond the major shared and industry-specific business functions you've shortlisted. Briefly note the business groups/activities that fall under these categories.
  4. Edit/enter your shared and industry-specific business function categories and their definitions on tab "2. Business View Definitions" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.

Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

2.3 Build your industry-specific business views

InputOutput
  • Knowledge about your organization's structure and business functions/units
  • A list of major shared business functions and industry-specific business functions/capabilities that are defining of your industry
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead

Lock in key pieces of baseline data

Calculating core IT spend metrics relies on a few key numbers. Settle these first based on known data before diving into detailed mapping.

These baseline data will allow you to calculate high-level metrics like IT spend as a percent of revenue and year-over-year percent change in IT spend, as well as more granular metrics like IT staff spend per employee for a specific IT service.

Baseline data checklist

  • IT spend analysis period (date range).
  • Currency used.
  • Organizational revenue.
  • Organizational OpEx.
  • Total current year IT spend.
  • Total current year IT CapEx and IT OpEx.
  • Total previous-year IT spend.
  • Total projected next-year IT spend.
  • Number of organizational employees.
  • Number of IT employees.

You may have discovered some things you didn't know about during the mapping process. Revisit your baseline data when your mapping is complete and make adjustments where needed.

2.4 Enter your baseline data

Duration: One hour

  1. Navigate to tab "3. Baseline Data" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. Using the data you've gathered, enter the following information to set your baseline data for future calculations:
    1. Your IT spend analysis date range. This can be concrete dates, a fiscal year abbreviation, etc.
    2. The currency you will be using throughout the workbook. It's important that all monetary values entered are in the same currency.
    3. Your organization's total revenue and total operating expenditure (OpEx) for the spend analysis data range you've specified. Revenue includes all sources of funding/income.
    4. Your total IT OpEx and total IT capital expenditure (CapEx). The workbook will add your OpEx and CapEx values for you to arrive at a total IT spend value.
    5. Total IT spend for the year prior to the current IT spend analysis date range, as well as anticipated total IT spend for the year following.
    6. Total IT staff spend (salaries, benefits, training, travel, and fees for employees and contractors in a staff augmentation role) for the spend analysis date range.
    7. The total number of organizational employees and total number of IT employees. These are typically full-time equivalent (FTE) values and include contractors in a staff augmentation role.
  2. Make note of any issues that have influenced the values you entered.

Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

2.4 Enter your baseline data

InputOutput
  • Cleaned and organized spend and staffing data and information
  • Finalized baseline data for deriving spend metrics
MaterialsParticipants
  • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead

Phase 2: Gather required data

Achievement summary

You've now completed all preparation steps for your IT spend transparency journey. You have:

  • Gathered your IT spend and staffing data and information.
  • Cleaned and organized your data to streamline mapping.
  • Identified your baseline data points.

"As an IT person, you're not speaking the same language at all as the accounting department. There's almost always a session of education that's required first."
- Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Phase 3

Map Your IT Staff Spend

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Mapping your IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
  • Validating your mapping

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead
  • Other members of IT management

Phase 3: Map your IT staff spend

Allocate your workforce costs across the four views.

Now it's time to tackle the first part of your hands-on spend mapping effort, namely IT staff spend. In this phase you will:

  • Allocate your IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
  • Validate your mapping to ensure that it's accurate and complete.

"We're working towards the truth. We know the answer, but it's how to get it. Take Data & BI. For some organizations, four FTEs is too many. Are these people really doing Data & BI? Look at the big picture and see if something's missing."
- Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Staffing costs comprise a significant percent of OpEx

Staffing is the first thing that comes to mind when it comes to spend. Intentionally bring it out of the shadows to promote constructive conversations.

  • Total staffing costs stand out from other IT spend line items. This is because they're comparatively large, often comprising 30-50% of total IT costs.
  • Standing out comes at a price. Staff costs are where business leadership looks first if they want cuts. If IT leadership doesn't bring forward ways to cut staffing costs as part of a broader cost-cutting mandate, it will be seen as ignorant of business priorities at best and outright insubordinate at worst.
  • Staffing costs as a percentage of total costs vary between IT functions. On the business side, there's a lack of understanding about what functions IT staff serve and support and the real-world costs of obtaining (and keeping) needed IT skills. For example, IT security staffing costs as a percentage of that service's total OpEx will likely be higher than service desk staff given the scarcity and higher market value of the former. Trimming 20% of IT staffing costs from the IT security function has much different implications than cutting 20% of service desk staffing costs.

Staffing spend transparency can do a lot to change the conversation from one where the business thinks that IT management is just being self-protecting to one where they know that IT management is actually protecting the business.

Demonstrating the legitimate reasons behind IT staff spend is critical in both rationalizing past and current spend decisions as well as informing future decisions.

Info-Tech recommends that you map your IT staffing costs before all other IT costs

Mapping your IT staffing spend first is a good idea because:

  • Staffing costs are usually documented more clearly, simply, and accurately than other IT costs.
  • Gathering all your IT staffing data is usually a one-stop shop (i.e. the HR department).
  • The comparative straightforwardness of mapping staff costs compared to other IT costs gives you the opportunity to:
    • Get familiar with the ITFM Cost Model views and categories.
    • Get the hang of the hands-on mapping process.
    • Determine the kinds of speed bumps and questions you'll encounter down the road when you tackle the more complicated mappings.

"Some companies will say software developer. Others say application development specialist or engineer. What are these things? You have to have conversations ..."
- Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Understand the CFO Expense View: "Workforce" categories defined

For the staffing spend mapping exercise, we're defining the Workforce category here and will offer Vendor category definitions in the vendor spend mapping exercise later.

Workforce: The total costs of employing labor in the IT organization. This includes all salary/wages, benefits, travel/training, dues and memberships, and contractor pay. Managed services expenses associated with an external service provider should be excluded from Workforce and included in Contract Services.

Employee: A person employed by the IT organization on a permanent full-time or part-time basis. Costs include salary, benefits, training, travel and expenses, and professional dues and memberships. These relationships are managed under human resources and the bulk of spend transactions via payroll processes.

Contractor: A person serving in a non-permanent staff augmentation role. These relationships are typically managed under procurement or finance and spend transactions handled via invoicing and accounts payable processes. Labor costs associated with an external service provider are excluded.

CFO Expense View

Mapping your IT staff across the CFO Expense View is relatively cut-and-dried

The CFO Expense View is the most straightforward in terms of mapping IT staffing costs as it's made up of only two main categories: Workforce and Vendor.

In the CFO Expense View, all IT spend on staffing is allocated to the Workforce bucket under either Employee or Contractor.

What constitutes a Contractor can be confusing given increased use of long-term labor augmentation strategies, so being absolutely clear about this is imperative. For spend mapping purposes:

  • Any staff members under independent contract where individuals are paid directly by your organization as opposed to indirectly via a service provider (e.g. staffing firm) are considered Workforce > Contractor.
  • Any circumstances where you pay a third-party organization for labor is slotted under Vendor > Contract Services.

CFO Expense View

Understand the CIO Service View: Categories defined

We've provided definitions for the major categories that require clarification.

Applications Development: Purchase/development, testing, and deployment of application projects. Includes internally developed or packaged solutions.

Applications Maintenance: Software maintenance fees or maintaining current application functionality along with minor enhancements.

Hosting & Networks: Compute, storage, and network functionality for running/hosting applications and providing communications/connectivity for the organization.

End User: Procurement, provision, management, and maintenance (break/fix) of end-user devices (desktop, laptops, tablets, peripherals, and phones) as well as purchase/support and use of productivity software on these devices. The IT service desk is included here as well.

PPM & Projects: People, processes, and technologies dedicated to the management of IT projects and the IT project portfolio as a whole.

Data & BI: Strategy and oversight of the technology used to support data warehousing, business intelligence, and analytics.

IT Management: Senior IT leadership, IT finance, IT strategy and governance, enterprise architecture, process management, vendor management, talent management, and program and portfolio management oversight.

Security: Information security strategy and oversight, practices, procedures, compliance, and risk mitigation to protect and prevent unauthorized access to organizational data and technology assets.

CIO Service View

Mapping your IT staff across the CIO Service View is a slightly harder exercise

The complexity of mapping staff across this view depends on how your IT department is organized and the degree of role specialization vs. generalization.

The CIO Service View mirrors how many IT departments are organized into teams or work groups. However, some partial percentage-based allocations are probably required, especially for smaller IT units with more generalized, cross-functional roles. For example:

  • A systems administrator's costs may need to be allocated 80% to Hosting & Networks and 20% to Security.
  • An app development team lead may spend about 40% of their time doing hands-on Development work and the other 60% on project management (i.e. PPM & Projects).

Info-Tech has found that allocating staffing costs for Data & BI raises the most doubts as it can be very entangled with Applications and other spend. Do the best you can.

Understand the CXO Expense View: Categories defined

Expand shared services and industry function categories as suits your organization.

Industry Functions: As listed and defined by you for your specific industry.

Human Resources: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of organizational human resource management.

Finance & Accounting: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of corporate finance and accounting.

Shared Services Other: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of all other shared enterprise functions.

Information Technology: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of IT performing its own internal IT operations functions.

Industry Other: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of all other industry-specific functions.

CXO Expense View

Mapping your IT staff across the CXO Business View warrants the most time

This view is probably the most difficult as many IT department roles are set up according to lines of IT service, not lines of business. Prepare to do a little math.

The CXO Expense View also requires percentage-based splitting of role spend, but to a greater extent.

  • Start by mapping staff cost allocations for those roles that are at, or close to, 100% dedicated to a specific business function (if any).
  • For IT roles that support organization-wide or multi-department functions, knowing the percent of employees that work in each relevant business unit and parceling IT staff spend by those same percentages may be easiest. For example, a general systems administrator's costs could be allocated as 4% to HR, 2% to finance, 25% to sales, 20% to production operations, and so on based on the percentage of employees in each of the supported business units.

Take a minute to figure out how you plan to map IT's indirect CXO Business View costs

Direct IT costs are those that are dedicated to a specific business unit or user group, such a marketing campaign management app, specialized devices used by a specific subset of workers in the field, or a business analyst embedded full-time in a sales organization.

VS

Indirect IT costs are pretty much everything else that's shared broadly across the organization and can't be tied to just one stakeholder or user group, such as network infrastructure, the service desk, and office productivity apps. These costs must be fairly and evenly distributed.

No indirect mapping method is perfect, but here's a suggestion:

  • Take the respective headcount of all business functions sharing the IT resource/service in question.
  • Calculate each business function's staff as a percentage of all organizational staff.
  • Use this same percent of staff to calculate and allocate a business function's indirect staff and indirect vendor costs.

"There is always a conversation about indirect allocations. There's never been an organization I've heard of or worked for which has been able to allocate every technology cost directly to a business consumption or business unit."
Monica Braun, ITFM Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

Example:

  • A company of 560 employees has six HR staff (about 1.1% of total staff).
  • Network admin staffing costs $143,000, so $1,573 (1.1%) would be allocated to HR.
  • Internet services cost $40,000, so $440 (1.1%) would be allocated to HR.

Some indirect costs are shared by multiple business functions, but not all. In these cases, exclude non-participating business functions from the total number of organizational employees and re-calculate a new percent of staff for each participating business function.

Know where you're most likely to encounter direct vs. indirect IT staffing costs

Info-Tech has found that direct vs. indirect staffing spend is more commonly found in some areas than others. Use this insight to focus your work.

Direct IT staffing spend

Definition: Individuals or teams whose total time is formally dedicated to the support of one business unit/function.

  • Data & BI (direct to one non-IT unit)
  • IT Management (direct to IT)
    • Service planning & Architecture
    • Strategy & Governance
    • Financial Management
    • People & Resources

Hybrid IT staffing spend

Definition: Teams with a percent of time or entire FTEs formally dedicated to one business unit/function while the remainder of the time or team is generalized.

  • Applications
    • Applications Development
    • Applications Maintenance
  • IT Management
    • PPM & Projects

Indirect IT staffing spend

Definition: Individuals or teams whose total time is generalized to the support of multiple or all business units or functions.

  • Infrastructure
    • Hosting & Networks
    • End Users
  • Security

Indirect staff spend only comes into play in the CXO Business View. Thoroughly map the CIO Service View first and leverage its outcomes to inform your allocations to individual business and industry functions.

Understand the CEO Innovation View: Categories defined

Be particularly clear on your understanding of the difference between business growth and business innovation.

Business Innovation: IT spend/ activities focused on the development of new business capability, new products and services, and/or introduction of existing products/ services into new markets. It does not include expansion or update of existing capabilities.

Business Growth: IT spend/activities focused on the expansion, scaling, or modernization of an existing business capability, product/service, or market. This is specifically related to growth within a current market.

Keep the Lights On: IT spend/activities focused on keeping the organization running on a day-to-day basis. This includes all activities used to ensure the smooth operation of business functions and overall business continuity.

CEO Innovation View

Important Note

Info-Tech analysts often skip mapping staff for the CEO Innovation View when delivering the IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service.

This is because, for many organizations, either most IT staff spend is allocated to Keep the Lights On or any IT staff allocation to Business Growth and Business Innovation activities is untracked, undocumented, and difficult to parse out.

Mapping your IT staff across the CEO Innovation View is largely straightforward

Clear divisions between CapEx and OpEx can be your friend when it comes to mapping this view. Focus your efforts on parsing growth vs. innovation.

  • The majority of IT staff costs are OpEx: And the majority of OpEx will land in the Keep the Lights On category. This is a comparatively simple mapping exercise. Know in advance that this will be the largest of the three buckets in the CEO Innovation View by a very wide margin, so don't be surprised if over 90% of IT staffing costs end up here.
  • Most of the remaining IT staff costs will be tied to capital projects and investments: This means that they will land in either Business Growth or Business Innovation, with the majority typically sitting under Business Growth. Again, don't be surprised if the Business Innovation category holds less than 3% of total IT staffing spend.

Take your IT staff spend mapping to the next level with detailed time and headcount data

Overlay a broader assessment of your IT staff

Info-Tech's IT Staffing Assessment diagnostic can expand your view of what's really happening on the staffing front.

  • Learn your true distribution of IT staff across the same IT services listed in the ITFM Cost Model's CIO Service View.
  • Get other metrics such as degrees of seniority, manager span of control, and IT staff perception of their effectiveness.

Take action

  1. Set it up: Contact your Info-Tech Account Manager and sign your team up to take the diagnostic.
  2. Assess the findings: Review the output report, specifically how your staff says they spend their time versus what your organization chart's been telling you.
  3. Apply the percentages: Use the FTE allocation percentages in the output report to guide how you distribute your staff spend across the CIO Service View.
  4. Expand your analysis: Use your staff's feedback around perceived aids and obstacles to effectiveness in order to inform and defend your recommendations and decisions on how IT funds should be spent.

Consider these final tips for mapping your IT staffing costs before diving in

Mapping your IT staffing costs definitely requires some work. However, knowing the common stumbling blocks and being systematic will yield the best results.

Approach: Be efficient to be effective

Start with what you know best: Map the CFO Expense View first to plug in information you already have. Next, map the CIO Service View since it's most aligned to your organization chart.

Keep a list of questions: You'll need to seek clarifications. Note your questions, but don't reach out until you've done a first pass at the mapping - don't annoy people with a barrage of questions.

Delegate: Your managers and leads have a more accurate view of exactly what their staff do. Consider delegating the CIO Service View and CXO Business View to them or turn the mapping exercise into a series of collaborative leadership team activities.

Biggest challenge: Role/title ambiguity

  • The Business Analyst role is often vague. These staffers are often jacks-of-all-trades in IT. You probably can't rely on a generic job description to figure out exactly which services and business functions BAs are spending their time on. Plan to ask a lot of questions.
  • Other role titles may be completely inaccurate. Is the word "system" referring to apps, infrastructure, or both? Is the user experience specialist actually a programmer? Is a manager really managing anything? Know your organization's tendencies around meaningful job titling and set your workload expectations accordingly.

Key step - validate! If you see services or functions with low or no allocation, or something just doesn't look right, investigate. Someone's doing that work - take the time to figure out who.

3.1 Map your IT staffing costs

Duration: Variable

  1. Navigate to tab "4. Staff Spend Mapping" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. On one row, enter the name of an individual or group to be mapped, their role/title (if an individual), and their total known cost as per your collected data.
  2. Under the CFO Expense View (columns F-G), enter the number of FTEs represented by the individual or group named and their status (i.e. Employee or Contractor).
  3. Under the CIO Service View (columns L-AF), allocate the individual or group's spend as a percentage across all service categories. If the allocation for a service is 0%, leave the cell blank.
  4. Under the CXO Business View (columns AI-BA), allocate the individual or group's spend as a percentage across all business function and industry-specific function categories. If the allocation for a function is 0%, leave the cell blank.
  5. Under the CEO Innovation View (columns BD-BH), allocate the individual or group's spend as a percentage across Business Innovation, Business Growth, and Keep the Lights On. If the allocation for an investment type is 0%, leave the cell blank.
  6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for all other IT staff (as individuals or groups).
  7. Follow up on and resolve any additional inquiries you need to make based on questions that arose during the mapping process.
  8. Validate your mapping by:
    1. Identifying spend categories that have zero staff spend allocation. Additional percentage allocation splits for certain roles are probably required.
    2. Investigating spend categories that seem to have very high or very low spend allocations based on a gut check. Again, double-check your percentage allocation splits.
    3. Ensuring your amounts add up to your previously calculated total IT staff spend. A balance tracker is provided on tab "6. Tracker & General Outputs" of the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.

Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

3.1 Map your staffing costs

Input Output
  • Cleaned and organized IT staffing data and information
  • Finalized mapping of IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
Materials Participants
  • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead
  • Other IT management as required

Phase 3: Map your IT staff spend

Achievement summary

You've now completed your IT staff spend mapping. You have:

  • Allocated your IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
  • Validated your mapping to ensure it's accurate and complete.

"Some want to allocate everybody to IT, but that's not how we do it. [In one CXO Business View mapping], a client allocated all their sand network people to the IT department. At the end of the process, the IT department itself accounted for 20% of total IT spend. We went back and reallocated those indirect staff costs across the business."
- Kennedy Confurius, Research Analyst, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Phase 4

Map Your IT Vendor Spend

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Mapping your IT vendor spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
  • Validating your mapping

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead
  • Other members of IT management

Phase 4: Map your IT vendor spend

Allocate your vendor costs across the four views.

Now you're ready to take on the second part of your spend mapping, namely IT vendor spend. In this phase you will:

  • Allocate your IT vendor spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
  • Validate your mapping to ensure it's accurate and complete.

"[One CIO] said that all technology spend runs through their IT group. But they didn't have hardware in their financial data file - no cellphones or laptops, no network or server expenses. They thought they had everything, but they didn't know what they didn't have. Assume it's out there somewhere."
- Kennedy Confurius, Research Analyst, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Tackle the non-staff side of IT spend

Info-Tech analysts find that mapping the IT vendor spend data is harder because the source data is often scattered and not meaningfully labeled.

  • Be patient and systematic. As with mapping your IT staff spend data, the more organized you are from the outset and the more thoroughly you've prepared your data, the more straightforward the exercise will be.
    • Did you "un-unique" your data? If not, do that now before attempting mapping.
  • Get comfortable with making some assumptions. You need to get through the exercise, so sometimes making a best guess and entering a value is better than diving down a rabbit hole. Your gut is probably right anyway. But only make assumptions around smaller line items that don't have a massive impact on your final numbers. Never assume anything when it comes to big-ticket items.
  • Curb your urge to fix. Some of your buckets will start to get big, while others will barely budge. This is normal ... and interesting! Resist the urge to "balance" staffing spend in a bucket by loading it with apps and hardware for fear that the staffing spend looks too high and will be questioned. This exercise is about how things are, not how they look.

"A common financial data problem is no vendor names. I've noticed that, even if the vendor name is there, there are no descriptors. You cannot actually tell what type of service it is. Data security? Infrastructure? Networking? Ask yourself 'What did we purchase and what does it do?'"
- Aman Kumari, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Understand the CFO Expense View: Vendor categories defined

These are the final definitions for this view. See the previous section for CFO Expense View > Workforce definitions used in the IT staffing cost mapping exercise.

Vendor: Provider of a good or service in exchange for payment.

Hardware: Costs of procuring, maintaining, and managing all IT hardware, including end-user devices, data center and networking equipment, cabling, and hybrid appliances for both on-premises and cloud-based providers.

Software: Costs for all software (applications, database, middleware, utilities, tools) used across the organization. This includes purchase, maintenance, and licensing costs.

Contract Services: Costs for all third-party services including managed service providers, consultants, and advisory services.

Cloud: Offsite hosting and delivery of an on-demand software or hardware computing function by a third-party provider, often on a subscription-type basis.

On-Prem: On-site hosting and delivery of a software or hardware computing function, often requiring upfront purchase cost and subsequent maintenance costs.

Managed Services: Costs for outsourcing the provision and maintenance of a technical process or function.

Consulting & Advisory: Costs for the third-party provision of professional or technical advice and expertise.

CFO Expense View

Know if a technology is cloud-based or on-premises before mapping

A technology may be one, the other, or both if multiple versions are in play. Financial records rarely indicate which, but on-premises vs. cloud matters in your planning.

On-Premises

  • Check your CapEx. Any net-new purchases of software or hardware for the IT spend analysis year in question should appear on the CapEx side of the equation. After the first year of implementation/rollout, all ongoing maintenance and management costs should be found under OpEx.
  • Focus on real in-year costs.
    • Don't try to map depreciation or amortization associated with CapEX. Instead, map any upfront purchase costs that occurred in the relevant IT spend analysis year.
    • Map any OpEX costs incurred from maintenance and management. For multi-year maintenance contracts, apply the percentage of fees paid for the relevant year.

Cloud

  • Check your OpEx. Cloud services are typically fee-based, which means the costs often come in the form of regularly timed bills akin to a subscription.
  • Differentiate new services from older ones. If the cloud service was initiated during the IT spend analysis year in question, there may be some one-time service setup and initiation fees that were legitimately slotted under CapEx. If the cloud service isn't new, then all costs should be OpEx.

Vendors are increasingly "retiring" on-premises software products. This means an older version may be on-prem, a newer one cloud, and you may have both in play.

Mapping built-in data, analytics, and security functions can raise doubts

With so many apps focused on capturing, manipulating, and protecting data, built-in analytics, reporting, and security functions blur CIO Service View bucket boundaries.

Applications vs. Data & BI

  • In recent years, much more powerful analysis and report-generation features have been added to core enterprise applications. If analytics and reporting functionality is an extended feature of a database-driven application, such as ERP or CRM, then map it to one of the Applications buckets.
  • If the sole purpose of the application is to store, manipulate, query, analyze, and/or visualize data, then log its costs under Data & BI. These would include technologies such as data warehouses, marts, cubes, and lakes; desktop data visualization tools; enterprise business intelligence platforms; and specialized reporting tools.

Applications vs. Security

  • A similar conundrum exists for Security. So many tools today have built-in security functionality that cannot be unintegrated from the app they support. Don't even try to isolate native security functionality for spend mapping purposes - map it to Applications.
  • If the tool is a special-purpose, standalone security tool or security platform, then map it to Security. These tools usually sit within, and are used/managed by, IT. They include firewalls; antivirus/anti-malware; intrusion prevention, detection and response; access control and authentication; encryption; and penetration testing and vulnerability assessment.

Putting spend in the right bucket does matter. However, if uncertainty persists, err on the side of consistency. For most organizations Applications Maintenance does end up being the biggest bucket.

When mapping the CXO Business View, do the biggest vendors first

Below is a suggested order of operations to clear through the majority of vendor spend as early as possible in the process.

1 Sort high to low Sort your list of vendor spend from highest to lowest. Your top 20 vendors should constitute most of the spend.
2 Map multi-department enterprise apps Flag your top apps vendors that have presence in most or all of your business units. Map these first. These tend to be enterprise-level business apps "owned" by core business functions but used broadly across the organization such as enterprise resource planning (ERP), customer relationship management (CRM), and people management systems.
3 Map end-user spend Identify top vendors of general end-user technologies like office productivity apps, desktop hardware, and IT service desk tools. Allocate percentages according to your selected indirect spend mapping method.
4 Map core infrastructure spend Map the behind-the-scenes network, telecom, and data center technologies that underpin IT, plus any infrastructure managed services. Again, apply your selected indirect spend mapping method.
5 Map business-unit specific technologies This is the spend that's often incurred by just one department. This may also be technology spend that's out in the business, not in IT proper. Map it to the right business function or put it in Business Other or Industry Other if the business function doesn't have its own bucket.
6 Map the miscellaneous Only smaller spend items likely remain at this point. When in doubt, map them to either Business Other or Industry Other.

After mapping the CXO Business View, your Other buckets might be getting a bit big

It's common for the Business Other and Industry Other categories to be quite large, and even the largest. This is okay, but plan to dig deeper and understand why.

Remember "when in doubt, map to either the Business Other or Industry Other category"? Know what large Other buckets might really be telling you. After your first pass at mapping the CXO Business View, review Business Other and Industry Other if either is more than about 10% of your total spend.
Diversification: Your organization has a wide array of business functions and/or associated staff that exist outside the core business and industry-specific categories selected. Are there minor business functions that can reasonably be included with the core categories identified? If not, don't force it. Better to keep your core buckets clean and uncomplicated.
Non-core monolith: There's a significant technology installation outside the core that's associated with a comparatively minor business function. Is there a business function incurring substantial technology spend that should probably be broken out on its own and added to the core? If so, do it. Spend is unlikely to get smaller as the organization grows, so best to shine a light on it now.
Shadow IT: There's significant technology spend in several areas of the organization that is unowned, unmanaged, or serving an unknown purpose as far as IT is concerned. Is a lot of the spend non-IT technology in the business? If yes, flag it and plan to learn more. It's likely that technologies living elsewhere in the organization will become IT concerns eventually. Better to be ready than to be surprised.

As with staffing, CapEx vs. OpEx helps map the CEO Innovation View

Mapping to this view was optional for IT staffing. For hard technology vendor spend, mapping this view is key. Use the guidance below to determine what goes where.

Keep the Lights On
Spend usually triggered by a service deck ticket or work order, not a formal project. Includes:

  • Daily maintenance and management.
  • Repair or upgrade of existing technology to preserve business function/continuity.
  • Purchase of "commodity" technology, such as standard-issue laptops and licenses for office productivity software.

Business Growth
Spend usually in the context of a formal project under a CapEx umbrella. Includes:

  • Technology spend that directly supports business expansion of an existing product or service and/or market.
  • Modernizing existing technology.
  • Extension of, or investment in, existing infrastructure to ensure reliability and availability in response to growth-driven scaling of headcount and utilization.

Business Innovation
Spend is always in the context of a formal project and should be 100% CapEx in the first year after purchase. Includes:

  • Technology spend that directly supports development and rollout of new products or service and/or entry into new markets.
  • Use of existing technology or investment in net-new technology in direct support of a new business initiative, direction, or requirement.

In many organizations, most technology spend will be allocated to Keep the Lights On. This is normal but should generate conversations with the business about redirecting funds to growth and innovation.

Remember these top tips when mapping your technology vendor spend

The benefits of having tidy and organized data can't be overstated, as your source data will be in a more varied state for this phase of the mapping than with IT staffing data.

Approach: Move from macro to micro

  • Start with the big enterprise apps: These will probably be in the top five of your vendor spend list and will likely have good info about how and by whom they're used. Get them out of the way.
  • Clear out shared technologies. This will feature infrastructure and operations plus office productivity and communications spend. Portioning spend by department headcount for the CXO Business View is the hardest part. Get this forklift task out of the way too.
  • Don't sweat the small stuff. Wasting hours chasing the details of a $500 line item isn't worth it when you have five-, six-, or even seven-figure line items to map.

Biggest challenge: Poor vendor labeling

  • Vendor labels are often an inconsistent mess or missing entirely. Standardize and apply consistent vendor labels throughout your data so that you can aggregate your data into a workable form.
  • Spend transactions with the same vendor can be scattered all over the place in your general ledger. Take the time to "un-unique" your data to save yourself tremendous grief later on.
  • Start new go-forward labeling habits. Talk to finance about your new list of vendor naming standards and tagging spend as on-prem or cloud. Getting their cooperation with these are major wins.

Key step - validate! If you see services or functions with low or no allocation, or something just doesn't look right, investigate. There's probably a technology out there in the business doing that work.

4.1 Map your IT vendor spend

Duration: Variable

  1. Navigate to tab "5. Vendor Spend Mapping" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. On one row, enter a spend line item (vendor, product, etc.), a brief description, and the known amount of spend.
  2. Under the CFO Expense View (columns F-P), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across all asset-class categories. If the allocation for a line item is 0%, leave the cell blank.
  3. Under the CIO Service View (columns S-AM), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across all service categories. If the allocation for a service is 0%, leave the cell blank.
  4. Under the CXO Business View (columns AP-BH), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across all business function and industry-specific function categories. If the allocation for a function is 0%, leave the cell blank.
  5. Under the CEO Innovation View (columns BK-BO), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across Business Innovation, Business Growth, and Keep the Lights On. If the allocation for an investment type is 0%, leave the cell blank.
  6. Repeat steps 2-5 for all spend line items.
  7. Follow up on and resolve any additional inquiries you need to make based on questions that arose during the mapping process.
  8. Validate your mapping by:
    1. Ensuring your amounts add up to your previously calculated total IT vendor spend. A balance tracker is provided on tab "6. Tracker & General Outputs" of the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.
    2. Identifying spend categories that have zero spend allocation. Additional percentage allocation splits for certain line items are probably required.
    3. Investigating spend categories that seem to have very high or very low spend allocations based on a gut check. Again, double-check your percentage allocation splits.

Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

4.1 Map your IT vendor spend

InputOutput
  • Cleaned and organized IT vendor spend data and information
  • Finalized mapping of IT vendor spend across the four views of the IT Cost Model
MaterialsParticipants
  • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead
  • Other IT management as required

Phase 4: Map your IT vendor spend

Achievement summary

You've now completed your IT vendor spend mapping. You have:

  • Allocated your IT vendor spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
  • Validated your mapping to ensure it's accurate and complete.

"A lot of organizations log their spending by vendor name with no description of the goods or services they actually purchased from the vendor. It could be hardware, software, consulting services ... anything. Having a clear understanding of what's really in there is an essential aspect of the spend conversation."
- Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Phase 5

Identify Implications for IT

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Analyzing the results of your IT staff and vendor spend mapping across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
  • Preparing an executive presentation of your transparent IT spend

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead
  • Other members of IT management

Phase 5: Identify implications for IT

Analyze and communicate.

You're now nearing the end of the first leg in your IT spend transparency journey. In this phase you will:

  • Analyze the results of your IT spend mapping process.
  • Revisit your transparency objectives.
  • Prepare an executive presentation so you can share findings with other leaders in your organization.

"Don't plug in numbers just to make yourself look good or please someone else. The only way to improve is to look at real life."
- Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

You've mapped your IT spend data. Now what?

With mapped data in hand, now you can start to tell IT's spend story with stakeholders in the business.

Mapping your IT spend is a lot of work, but what you've achieved is impressive (applause!) as well as essential for growing your ITFM maturity. Now put your hard work to work.

  • Consider benchmarking. While not covered in-depth here, benchmarking against yourself in a year-over-year approach as well as against external industry peers are very useful exercises in your technology spend analysis.
  • Review your numbers and graphs. Your IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook contains a series of data visualizations that will help you see the big picture as well as relationships between spend categories.
  • Note the very big numbers, the very small numbers, and the things that just look odd. You'll want to investigate and understand these further.
  • Prepare to communicate. Facilitating conversations with stakeholders in the business is the immediate objective of the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise. Decide where and with whom you want to start dialogue.

The slides that follow show sample data summaries and visualizations generated in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. We'll take a look at the metrics, tables, and graphs you now have available to you post-mapping and how you can potentially use them in conversations with different IT stakeholders.

Evaluate how you might use benchmarks before diving into your analysis

Benchmarking can be a useful input for contextualizing and interpreting your IT spend data. It's not essential at this point but should be part of your ITFM toolkit.

There are two basic types of benchmarking ...

Internal: Capturing a current-state set of data about an in-house operation to serve as a baseline. Over time, snapshots of the same data are taken and compared to the baseline to track and assess changes. Common uses for internal benchmarking include:

  • Assessing the impact of a project or initiative.
  • Measuring year-over-year performance.

External: Seeking out aggregated, current-state data about a peer-group operation to assess your own relative status or performance on the same operation. Common uses for external benchmarking include:

  • Understanding common practices in the industry.
  • Strategic and operational visioning, planning, and goal-setting.
  • Putting together a business case for change or investment.

Both types of benchmarking benefit from some formality and rigor. Info-Tech can help you stand up an ITFM benchmarking approach as well as connect you with actual IT spend peer benchmarks via our IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking service.

5.1 Analyze the results of your IT spend mapping

Duration: Variable

  1. Review the guidance slides that follow the two instruction slides for this exercise to provide yourself with a grounding on how to interpret and analyze your mapped IT staff and vendor spend data.
  2. Systematically review the data tables and graphs on the "Outputs" tabs 6 through 10 in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. There are several approaches you can take - use the one that works best for you. For example:
    1. Review each view in its entirety, one at a time.
    2. Review all workforce spend collectively across all four views, followed by all vendor spend across all four views (or vice versa).
  3. Make note of any spend values that are comparatively high or low or strike you as odd or worth further investigation.
  4. Craft a series of spend-related questions you want to answer for yourself and your stakeholders using the data.
    1. For example, you need to cut costs and apps maintenance is high. Your question could be, "Can we cut costs on applications maintenance staffing?"
    2. Alternatively, you can develop a series of statements (research hypotheses) that you seek to prove true or false with the data. This approach is useful for testing assumptions you've been making. For example, "We can cut spending on applications maintenance staff. True or false?"
  5. Use the template provided on tab "11. Data Analysis" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook to document your findings and conclusions, along with the data that supports them.

Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

5.1 Analyze the results of your IT spend mapping

InputOutput
  • Tabular and graphical data outputs
  • Conclusions and potential actions about IT staff and vendor spend
MaterialsParticipants
  • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
  • Head of IT
  • IT financial lead
  • Other IT management as required

High-level findings: Use these IT spend metrics to review and set big picture goals

Think of these metrics as key anchors in your long-term strategic planning efforts.

Use IT spend metrics to review and set big goals

It's common for the business to want a sacrifice in IT OpEx in favor of CapEx

CapEx and OpEx approval mechanisms are often entirely separate. Different tax treatment for CapEx means that it's usually preferred by the business over OpEx.

OpEx is often seen as a sunk cost (i.e. an IT problem).

  • Barring a major decision or event, OpEx on an individual item will generally trend upward over time, often by a few percent every year, in lockstep with inflation and growth in organizational headcount.
  • A good portion of OpEx, however, is necessary for basic business continuity.

CapEx is usually seen as investment (i.e. a business growth opportunity).

  • CapEx behaves quite differently than OpEx. On-the-books capitalized spend on an individual asset tends to trend downward over time due to depreciation or amortization.
  • CapEx only tends to go up when a net-new capital project is initiated, and organizations often have more control over if, when, and how this spend happens.

Break down the OpEx/CapEx wall. Reference OpEx whenever you talk about CapEx. The best way to do this is via Total Cost of Ownership (TCO).

  • Present data on long-term OpEx projections whenever a new capital project is proposed and ensure ongoing maintenance funds are secured.
  • Educate your CFO about the impact of the cloud on OpEx. See if internal OpEx/CapEx ratio expectations can be adjusted to reflect this reality.

Spend by asset class offers the CFO a visual illustration of where the money's really gone

The major spend categories should look very familiar to your CFO. It's the minor sub-categories that sit underneath where you ultimately want to drive the conversation.

Traditional categories don't reflect IT reality anymore.

  • Most finance departments have "software" accounts that contain apples and oranges, plus other dissimilar fruit.
  • Software isn't just software anymore. Now it's on-premises (CapEx) or cloud (OpEx). The same distinction applies to traditional hardware due to the advent of managed services.
  • The basic categories traditionally used to tag IT spend are out of date. This makes it hard for IT to have meaningful conversations with the CFO since they're not working from the same glossary.

"Software (on-premises)" and "hardware (cloud)" are more meaningful descriptors than "software" and "hardware." Shift the dialogue.

Start the migration from major categories to minor categories.

  • Still give the CFO the traditional major categories they're looking for but start including minor category breakdowns into your communications. Most importantly, have a meeting to explain what these minor categories are and why they're important to managing IT effectively.
  • Next, see if the CFO can formally split on-premises vs. cloud software on the books as a first step in making IT spend tracking more meaningful.

Employees vs. contractors warrants a specific conversation, plus a change in mindset

IT leaders often find it easier to get approval for contracted labor than to hire a permanent employee. However, the true value proposition for contractors does vary.

The decision to go with permanent employees or contractors depends on your ultimate goals.

  • Contractors tend to be less expensive and provide more flexibility when adjusting to changing business needs. However, contractors may be less dedicated and take their skills and knowledge with them when they leave.
  • Permanent employees bring additional costs like benefits and training. Plus, letting them go is a lot more complicated. However, they can also bring real value in a way a contractor can't when it comes to sustaining long-term strategic growth. They're assets in themselves.

Far too often, labor-sourcing decisions are driven by controlling near-term costs instead of generating and sustaining long-term value.

Introduce the cost-to-value ratio to your workforce spend conversations.

  • Your mapped data will allow you to talk about comparative headcount and spend. This is a financial conversation devoid of context.
  • Go beyond. Show how workforce spend has allowed stated goals to be achieved while controlling for costs. This is the true definition of value.

CFO Expense View: Shift the ITFM conversation

Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CFO Expense View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

  • How should I classify my IT costs?
  • What information should I include in my plans and reports?
  • How do I justify current spend?
  • How do I justify a budget increase?

You now have:

  • A starting point for educating the CFO about IT spend realities.
  • A foundation for creating a shared glossary of terms that works for both IT and the finance department and facilitates more meaningful conversations.
  • Proof that there are major areas of IT spend, such as cloud software, that are distinctive and probably warrant their own financial category in the general ledger.
  • A transparent record of IT spend that shows that you understand and care about financial issues, fostering the goodwill and trust that facilitates investment in IT.
  • A starting point to change the ITFM conversation with the CFO from one focused on cost to one focused on value.

Exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them?

Exactly like this ...

Chart of the CFO Expense View

The CIO Service View aligns with how IT organizes and manages itself – this is your view

The data mapped here is a critical input for IT's service planning and management program and should be integrated into your IT performance measurement activities.

Major service categories: These values give a high-level snapshot of your general IT service spend priorities. In most organizations, Applications dominates, making it a focus for cost optimization.

Minor service categories: The level of granularity for these values prove more practical when measuring performance and making service management decisions - not too big, not too small. While not reflected in this example, application maintenance is usually the largest relative consumer of IT spend in most organizations.

Data & BI and security: Isolating the exact spend for these services is challenging given that they're often entangled in applications and infrastructure spend respectively, and separate spend tracking for both is a comparatively recent practice.

Table of CIO Service View

Check the alignment of individual service spend against known business objectives

Some IT services are taken for granted by the business, while others are virtually invisible. This lack of visibility often translates into funding misalignments.

Is the amount of spend on a given service in parallel with the service's overall importance?

  • Though often unstated, ensuring continuity of basic business operations is always the top priority. This means business apps, core infrastructure, end users, and security need to be appropriately funded - these should collectively comprise the majority of IT service spend.
  • Strategy-supporting IT services, like data & BI, see high investment variability between organizations. If its strategic role/importance doesn't align with spend, flag it as an issue you'll need to reconcile with the business by increasing funding (important) or reducing service levels (unimportant).
  • The strategic importance of IT as a whole is often reflected in the spend on IT management services. If spend is low, IT's probably seen as a support function, not a strategic one.

Identify the hot spots and pick your battles.

  • Spend levels are just approximate gauges of where and how the business is willing to spend its money. Start with this simple gut check.
  • Noting the areas of importance vs. spend misalignment will help you identify where negotiations with the business should probably happen.

A mature IT cost optimization practice is often approached from the service perspective

When optimizing IT costs, you have two OpEx levers to pull - vendor spend and staff spend. Isolating these two sources of IT service spend will help shortlist your options.

It's all about how much room you have to move.

  • Any decision made about how a service is provisioned will push vendor and staff spend in clear, predictable, and often opposite directions (e.g. in-house and people-intensive services tend to see higher staff spend, while outsourced and tech-intensive services higher vendor spend).
  • Service levels required by the business should be the driving factor behind service design and spend decisions. High service spend may reflect priority but may also indicate it's over-built and is ripe for a cost-optimization treatment.
  • Service spend is a useful barometer for tracking the financial impact of any changes made to IT. Add simple unit-cost metrics like "service spend per organizational employee" and "service spend per FTE assigned to the service" to see if and how the dial has moved over time.

Grow your IT service management practice.

  • The real power of the CIO Service View is laying the groundwork for next-level IT service management initiatives like developing a service catalog, negotiating service-level agreements, rolling out chargeback and showback mechanisms, and calculating IT's value to the business.
  • Use service spend as a common denominator for both your IT service management and IT performance management programs. Better yet, integrate the two programs to ensure a single version of the truth.

CIO Service View: Optimize your cost-to-value ratio

Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CIO Service View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

  • What's the impact of cloud adoption on speed of delivery?
  • Where can I improve spend efficiency?
  • Is my support model optimized?
  • How does our spend compare to others?

You now have:

  • Data that shows the financial impact of change decisions on service costs.
  • Insight into the relationship between vendor spend and staff spend within a given IT service.
  • The information you need to start developing service unit costing mechanisms.
  • A tool for setting and right-sizing service-level agreements with the business.
  • A more focused starting point for investigating IT cost-optimization opportunities.
  • A baseline for benchmarking common IT services against your peers.

Does the amount we spend on each IT service make sense?

We have some good opportunities for optimization ...

Chart of CIO Service View

The CXO Business View will spur conversations that may have never happened before

This view is a potential game changer as previously unknown technology spend is often revealed, triggering change in IT's relationship with business unit leaders.

Table of CXO Business View

The big beneficiaries of IT spend will leap out

The CXO Business View mapping does have a "shock and awe" quality to it given large spend disparities. They may be totally legitimate, but they're still eye-catching.

Share information, don't push recommendations.

  • Have a series of one-on-one meetings with business unit leaders to present these numbers.
    • Approach initial meetings as information-sharing sessions only. The data is probably new to them, and they'll need time to reflect and ask questions.
    • Bring a list of the big-ticket spend items for that business unit to focus the conversation.
  • Present these numbers at a broader leadership meeting.
    • It's critical for everyone to hear the same truth and learn about each other's technology needs and uses.
    • This is where recommendations for better aligning IT spend with business goals and cost-optimization strategies should surface. A group approach will bring technology haves and have-nots into the open, as well as provide a forum for collaborative solutioning.

If possible, slice the numbers by business unit headcount.

  • IT spend per business unit employee is an attention-getting metric that can help gain entry to important conversations.
  • Comparing per-employee spend across different business functions is not necessarily an apples-to-apples comparison, as units like HR may have few employees but serve the entire organization. Bring up these kinds of differences to provide context and avoid misinterpretations.

Questions will arise in how you calculated and allocated indirect IT spend

IT spend for things like core infrastructure and end-user services must be distributed fairly across multiple or all business units. Be prepared to explain your methods.

Be transparent in your transparency.

  • Distributing indirect spend is imprecise by nature. You can't account for every unique circumstance. However, you can devise a logic-driven, general approach that's defensible, fair, and works for most people most of the time.
  • Lay out your assumptions from the start. This is an important part of communicating transparently and can prevent unwanted descent into weedy rabbit holes.
    • List what you classified as indirect spend. Use the CFO Expense View and/or CIO Service View categories to aid your presentation of this information.
    • Point out known circumstances that didn't fit your general allocation method and how you handled them. Opting to ignore minor anomalies is reasonable but be sure to tell business unit leaders you did this and why.

Use questions about indirect IT staff spend distribution to engage stakeholders.

  • As a percentage, the indirect IT staff spend allocation to a specific business unit may be higher than that for IT vendor spend since IT staff tend to operate more generally than the technologies they support.
  • Leverage any pushback about indirect spend as an opportunity to engage the broader business leadership group. Let them arrive at a consensus of how they want it done and confirm buy-in.

CXO Business View: Bring the truth to light

Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CXO Business View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

  • Which business units consume the most IT resources?
  • Which business units are underserved by IT?
  • How do I best communicate spend data internally?
  • Where do I need better business sponsorship for IT projects?

You now have:

  • A reason-based accounting of direct and indirect amounts spent on IT vendors and staff in support of each major business unit.
  • Insight into the technology haves and have-nots in your organization and where opportunities to optimize costs may exist.
  • Attention-getting numbers that will help you engage business-unit leaders in meaningful conversations about their use of IT resources and the value they receive.
  • A mechanism to assess if a business unit's consumption of IT is appropriate and aligned with its purpose and mandate in the organization.
  • A list of previously unknown business-side technologies that IT will investigate further.

Why doesn't my business unit get more support from IT?

Let's look at how you compare to the other departments ...

Chart of the CXO Business View

From the CEO's high-level perspective, IT spend is a collection of distinct financial islands

From IT's perspective, these islands are intimately connected, with events on one affecting what happens (or doesn't) on another. Focus on the bridges.

Table of CEO High-level Perspective

Focus more on unifying the view of technology spend than on the numbers

When talking to the CEO, seek to build mutual understanding and encourage a holistic approach to the organization's technology spend.

Use the numbers to get to the real issues.

  • Clarify with the CEO what business innovation, business growth, and KTLO means to them and the role each plays in the organization's strategic and operational plans.
  • Find out the role they think IT, and technology as a whole, has in realizing business plans. Only then can you look at the relative allocation of IT spend with them to see if the aspiration aligns with reality.
  • Eventually, you'll need to discuss expectations around who pays the bills for operationally supporting capital technology investments over the long-term (i.e. IT or the business units that actually want and use it). You'll have concrete examples of business projects that consumed IT operations resources without a corresponding increase in IT's OpEx budget.

Focus your KTLO spend conversation on risk and trade-off.

  • Every strategic conversation needs to look at the impact on ongoing operations. Every discussion about CapEx needs to investigate the long-term repercussions for OpEx. Look at the whole tech spend picture.
  • Use risk to get KTLO/OpEx into the conversation. Be straightforward (i.e. "If we do/don't do this, then we can/can't do that"). Simply put, mitigating the risks that get in the way of having it all usually requires spending.

CEO Innovation View: Learn what's really expected of IT

Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CEO Innovation View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

  • Why is KTLO spend so high?
  • What should our operational spend priorities be?
  • Which projects and investments should we prioritize?
  • Are we spending enough on innovative initiatives?

You now have:

  • A holistic, organization-wide view of total technology spend in support of different investment types, namely business innovation, business growth, and keeping things up and running.
  • Data-driven examples that prove the impact of near-term capital spend on long-term operational expenses and the intimate relationship between the two types of spend.
  • A way to measure the degree of alignment between the innovation and growth goals the organization has and how money is actually being spent to realize those goals.
  • A platform to discuss how technology investment decision-making and governance can work better to realize organizational mandates and goals.

I know what IT costs us, but what is it really worth?

Here's how tech spend directly supports business objectives ...

Chart of CEO Innovation View

Revisit your IT spend transparency objectives before crafting your executive presentation

Go back to exercise 1.1 to remind yourself why you undertook this effort in the first place, clear your head of all that data, and refocus on the big picture.

Review the real problems and issues you need to address and the key stakeholders.
This will guide what data you focus on or showcase with other business leaders. For example, if IT OpEx is perceived as high, be prepared to examine the CapEx/OpEx ratio as well as cloud-related spend's impact on OpEx.

Flag ITFM processes you'll develop as part of your ITFM maturity improvement plan.
You won't become a TCO math expert overnight, but being able to communicate your awareness of and commitment to developing and applying ITFM capabilities helps build confidence in you and the information you're presenting.

Use your first big presentation to debut ITFM.
ITFM as a formal practice and the changes you hope to make may be a novel concept for your business peers. Use your newfound IT spend and staffing transparency to gently wade into the topic instead of going for the deep dive.

Now it's time to present your transparent IT spend and staffing data to your executive

Pull out of analysis mode. You're starting to tell the IT spend story, and this is just the first chapter. Introduce your cast of characters and pique your audience's interest.

The goal of this first presentation is to showcase IT spend in general and make sure that everyone's getting the same information as everyone else.

Go broad, not deep
Defer any in-depth examinations until after you're sure you have everyone's attention. Only dive deep when you're ready to talk about specific plans via follow-up sessions.

Focus on the CXO
Given your audience, the CXO Business View may be the most interesting for them and will trigger the most questions and discussion. Plan to spend the largest chunk of your time here.

Avoid judgment
Let the numbers speak for themselves. Do point out what's high and what's low, but don't offer your opinion about whether it's good or bad. Let your audience draw their own conclusions.

Ask for impressions
Education and awareness are primary objectives. What comes up will give a good indication of what's known, what's news, who's interested, and where there's work to do.

Pick a starting point
Ask what they see as high-priority areas for both optimizing IT costs as well as improving the organization's approach to making IT spend decisions in general.

What to include in your presentation ...

  • Purpose: Why you did the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise.
  • Method: The models and processes you used to map the data.
  • Data: Charts from the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.
  • Feedback: Space for your audience to voice their thoughts.
  • Next steps: Discussion and summary of actions to come.

5.2 Develop an executive presentation

Duration: Two hours

  1. Download the IT Staff & Spend Executive Presentation Template.
  2. Copy and paste the IT spend output tables and graphs into the template. (Note: Pasting as an image will preserve formatting.)
  3. Incorporate observations and insights about your analysis of your IT spend metrics.
  4. Conduct an internal review of the final presentation to ensure it includes all the elements you need and is error free.
  5. Book time to make your presentation to the executive team. Plan time after the presentation to field questions, engage in follow-up information sessions, and act on feedback.

Note: Refer to your organization's standards and norms for executive-level presentations and either adapt the Info-Tech template accordingly or use your own.

Input Output
  • Tabular and graphical data outputs in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
  • Executive presentation summarizing your organization's actual IT spend
Materials Participants
  • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
  • IT Staff & Spend Executive Presentation Template
  • CIO/IT directors
  • IT financial lead
  • Other IT management

Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation TemplateTemplate

Phase 5: Identify implications for IT

Achievement summary

You've done the hard part in starting your IT spend transparency journey. You have:

  • Analyzed the results of your IT spend mapping process.
  • Revisited your transparency objectives.
  • Prepared an executive presentation so you can share findings with other leaders in your organization.

"Having internal conversations, especially if there is doubt, allows for accuracy and confidence in your model. I was showing someone the cost of a service he managed. He didn't believe the service was so expensive. We went through it: here are the people we allocated, the assets we allocated, and the software we allocated. It was right - that was the total cost. He was like, 'No way. Wow.' The costs were high, and the transparency is what allowed for a conversation on cost optimization."
- Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

Next Steps

Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

This final section will provide you with:

  • An overall summary of accomplishment
  • Recommended next steps
  • A list of contributors to this research
  • Some related Info-Tech resources to help you grow your ITFM practice

Summary of Accomplishment

Congratulations! You now have a fully transparent view of your IT spend.

You've now mapped the entirety of technology spend in your organization. You've:

  1. Learned the key sources of spend data and information in your organization.
  2. Set some standards for data organization and labeling.
  3. Have a methodology for continuing to track and document spend in a transparent way.
  4. Crafted an executive presentation that's a first step in having more meaningful and constructive conversations about IT spend with your key stakeholders.

What's next?

With a reliable baseline, you can look forward to more informed and defensible IT budgeting and cost optimization. Use your newly-transparent IT spend as a foundation for improving your financial data hygiene in the near term and evolving your overall ITFM governance maturity in the long-term.

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech full-service engagement or Guided Implementation.

Contact your account representative for more information.

1-888-670-8889

Research Contributors and Experts

Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice

Monica Braun
Research Director, ITFM Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Dave Kish, Practice Lead, ITFM Practice

Dave Kish
Practice Lead, ITFM Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Kennedy Confurius, Research Analyst, ITFM Practice

Kennedy Confurius
Research Analyst, ITFM Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Aman Kumari, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice

Aman Kumari
Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice

Rex Ding
Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice

Angie Reynolds
Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Related Info-Tech Research

Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

  • Cost optimization often doesn't go beyond the cutting part, but cutting costs isn't strategic - it's reactive and can easily result in mistakes.
  • True cost optimization is much more than this. Re-focus your efforts on optimizing your cost-to-value ratio and implementing a sustainable cost-optimization practice.

Build an IT Budget

  • Budgetary approval is difficult because finance executives have a limited understanding of IT and use a different vocabulary.
  • Detailed budgets must be constructed in a way that is transparent but at a level of appropriate detail in order to limit complexity and confusion.

Manage an IT Budget

  • No one likes to be over budget, but being under budget isn't necessarily good either.
  • Implement a budget management process that documents your planned budget and actual expenditures, tracks variances, and responds to those variances to stay on track.
  • Control for under- or overspending using Info Tech's budget management tool and tactics.

APPENDIX

Sample shared business services

Sample industry-specific business services

Sample shared business functions

Business function Definition
Human Resources The management of the recruitment, training, development, appraisal, compensation/reward, retention, and departure of employees in an organization. Does not include management of subcontractor or outsourced relationships.
Finance and Accounting The management and analysis of an organization's revenue, funds, spend, investments, financial transactions, accounts, and financial statements. Often includes enterprise asset management.
Procurement and Supplier Management Acquiring materials, goods, and services from an external party, including identifying potential suppliers/providers, managing tendering or bidding processes, negotiating terms and agreements, and managing the relationship with the vendor/provider.
Information Technology The development, management, and optimization of information technology resources and systems over their lifecycle in support of an organization's work priorities and goals. Includes computer-based information and communication systems, but typically excludes industrial operational technologies.
Legal Expertise in interpretation, implication, and application of legislation and regulation that affects the enterprise, including guidance and support in the areas of risk, contracting, compliance, ownership, and litigation.
Regulatory Affairs and Compliance Management Identification, operationalization, monitoring, reporting, and enforcement of the standards, rules, codes, and laws that apply to an organization's operating environment and the products and services it offers.
Sales Transactional provision of a product or service to a buyer at an agreed-upon price. Includes identifying and developing prospective buyers, presenting and explaining the product/service, overcoming prospect objections and concerns to purchase, negotiating terms, developing contracts, and billing or invoicing.
Customer Service and Support A range of activities designed to optimize the customer experience with an organization and its products and services throughout the customer lifecycle with the goals of retaining the customer; encouraging additional spend or consumption; the customer positively influencing other potential customers; and minimizing financial and reputational business risks.
Marketing and Advertising Understanding customer/prospect needs, developing strategies to meet those needs, and promotion of the organization's products/services to a target market via a range of channels to maximize revenue, membership, donations, and/or develop the organization's brand or reputation. Includes market research and analysis and promotion, campaign, and brand management.

Sample industry-specific functions

Supply chain and capital-intensive industries.

Industry function Definition
Product Innovation Research, design, development, and launch of new products, including the engineering of their underlying production processes.
Product and Service Portfolio Management The management of an organization's collection of products and services, including management of the product/service roadmap; product/service portfolio and catalog; product/service quality and performance; and product/service pricing, bundling and markdown.
Logistics and Supply Chain Management Sourcing raw materials or component parts needed and shipping of a finished product. Includes demand planning; procurement/supplier management; inventory management; yard management; allocation management; fulfillment and replenishment; and product distribution and delivery.
Production Operations Manufacture, storage, and tracking of a product and ensuring product and production process quality. Includes operations management, materials management, quality/safety control, packaging management, and management of the tools, equipment, and technologies that support it.
Architecture & Engineering The design and planning of structures or critical infrastructure systems according to scientific, functional, and aesthetic principles.
Construction New construction, assembly, or alteration of buildings and critical infrastructure (e.g. transportation systems; telecommunications systems; utilities generation/transmission/distribution facilities and systems). Includes management of all construction project plans and the people, materials, and equipment required to execute.
Real Estate Management Management of any residential, commercial, or industrial real estate holdings (land and buildings), including any financial dealings such as its purchase, sale, transfer, and rental as well as ongoing maintenance and repair of associated infrastructure and capital assets.

Sample industry-specific functions

Financial services and insurance industries.

Industry function Definition
Core Banking Services Includes ATM management; account management (opening, deposit/withdrawal, interest calculation, overdraft management, closing); payments processing; funds transfers; foreign currency exchange; cash management.
Loan, Mortgage, and Credit Services Includes application, adjudication, and approval; facility; disbursement/card issuance; authorization management; merchant services; interest calculation; billing/payment; debt/collections management.
Investment and Wealth Management Processes for the investment of premiums/monies received from policy holders/customers to generate wealth. Often two-pronged: internal investment to fund claim payout in the case of insurance, and customer-facing investment as a financial service (e.g. retirement planning/annuities). Includes product development and management, investment management, safety deposit box services, trust management services.
Actuarial Analysis & Policy Creation Development of new policy products based on analysis of past losses and patterns, forecasts of financial risks, and assessment of potential profitability (i.e. actuarial science). These processes also include development of rate schedules (pricing) and the reserves that the insurer needs to have available for potential claim payouts.
Underwriting & Policy Administration Processes for assessing risk of a potential policy holder; determining whether to insure them or not; setting the premiums the policy holder must pay; and administering the policy over the course of its lifecycle (including updates and billing).
Claims Processing & Claims Management Processes for receiving, investigating, evaluating, approving/denying, and disbursing a claim payout. This process is unique to the insurance industry. In health insurance, ongoing case management processes need to be considered here whereby the insurer monitors and approves patient treatments over a long-term basis to ensure that the treatments are both necessary and beneficial.

Sample industry-specific functions

Healthcare industry

Industry function Definition
Patient Intake & Admissions Processes whereby key pieces of information about a patient are registered, updated, or confirmed with the healthcare provider in order to access healthcare services. Includes patient triage, intake management, and admissions management. These processes are generally administrative in nature.
Patient Diagnosis A range of methods for determining the medical condition a patient has in order to provide appropriate care or treatment. Includes examination, consultation, testing, and diagnostic imaging.
Patient Treatment The range of medical procedures, methods, and interventions to mitigate, relieve, or cure a patient's symptom, injury, disease, or other medical condition. Includes consultation and referral; treatment and care planning; medical procedure management; nursing and personal support; medicine management; trauma management; diet and nutrition management; and patient transportation.
Patient Recovery & Ongoing Care Processes and methods for tracking the progress of a patient post-treatment; improving their health outcomes; restoring, maintaining, or improving their quality of life; and discharging or transferring them to other providers. Includes remote monitoring of vital parameters, physical therapy, post-trauma care, and a range of restorative and lifestyle modification programs.

Sample industry-specific functions

Gaming and hospitality industries

Industry function Definition
Accommodation Short-term lodging in hotel facilities. Includes management and maintenance of guest rooms and common spaces, amenities (e.g. swimming pool), and other related services (e.g. valet parking).
Gaming Includes table wagering games and gambling activities such as slot machines or any other activity that includes on premises mobile casino gaming.
Food & Beverage Services Food and beverages prepared, served, or available for sale by the hotel on the hotel premises via restaurants and bars and room service. Excludes catering (see Events Management) and management or operation of independent leased food and beverage establishments located on the hotel premises.
Entertainment & Events Planning, coordination, and on-premises hosting of events including conferences, conventions, trade shows, parties, ceremonies and live entertainment, and other forms of recreation on the hotel premises. Includes all aspects of entertainment operations, facility management and catering for the event.

Create an Agile-Friendly Project Gating and Governance Approach

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}162|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $33,499 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 57 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Development
  • Parent Category Link: /development
  • Organizations often apply gating and governance to IT projects to ensure resources are being used efficiently and effectively.
  • Agile project teams often complain that traditional project gating and governance interfere with their ability to delivery because traditional gating and governance were designed for Waterfall delivery methods.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Imposing a traditional gating and governance approach on an Agile project can eliminate the advantages that Agile delivery methods offer. Make sure to rework your traditional project gating and governance approach to be Agile friendly.

Impact and Result

  • Create a project gating and governance approach that is Agile friendly and helps your organization realize the most benefit from its Agile transformation.
  • Oversee your Agile projects with confidence by adjusting the level of support and oversight they receive based on their Agilometer score.
  • Define a revised set of project gating artifacts that support Agile delivery methods.
  • Adopt a “trust but verify” approach to Agile project gating that will reduce risk and help ensure value delivery.

Create an Agile-Friendly Project Gating and Governance Approach Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Create an Agile-Friendly Project Gating and Governance Approach Deck – A step-by-step guide to creating an Agile-friendly project gating and governance approach that will support Agile delivery methods in your organization.

This deck is a guide to creating your own Agile-friendly project gating and governance approach using Info-Tech’s Agile Gating Framework.

  • Create an Agile-Friendly Project Gating and Governance Approach – Phases 1-3

2. Your Gates 3 and 3A Checklists – The Gates 3 and 3A Checklists are used to determine when a project is ready to enter and exit the Risk Reduction & Value Confirmation phase.

Modify Info-Tech’s Gates 3 and 3A Checklists to meet your organization’s needs, and then use them to determine when Agile projects are ready to enter and exit the RRVC phase.

  • Gates 3 and 3A Checklists

3. Your Agilometer – The Agilometer is used to determine a project’s readiness to use an Agile delivery method.

Modify Info-Tech’s Agilometer to meet your organization’s needs, and then use it to determine the level of support and oversight the project will need.

  • Agilometer

4. Your Agile Project Status Report – An Agile Status Report will be used to monitor project progress.

Modify Info-Tech’s Agile Project Status Report to meet your organization’s needs, and then use it to monitor in-flight Agile projects.

  • Agile Project Status Report

5. Project Burndown Chart – A tool to let you monitor project burndown over time.

Use Info-Tech’s Project Burndown Chart to monitor the progress of your in-flight Agile projects.

  • Project Burndown Chart

6. Traditional to Agile Gating Artifact Mapping – A tool to help you rework your project gating artifacts to be Agile-friendly.

Use Info-Tech’s Traditional to Agile Gating Artifact Mapping tool to modify your gating artifacts for Agile projects.

  • Traditional to Agile Gating Artifact Mapping
[infographic]

Further reading

Create an Agile-Friendly Project Gating and Governance Approach

Use Info-Tech’s Agile Gating Framework as a guide to gating your Agile projects using a “trust but verify” approach.

Table of Contents

Analyst Perspective

Executive Summary

Phase 1: Establish Your Gating and Governance Purpose

Phase 2: Understand and Adapt Info-Tech’s Agile Gating Framework

Phase 3: Complete Your Agile Gating Framework

Where Do I Go Next?

Bibliography

Facilitator Slides

Analyst Perspective

Make your gating and governance process Agile friendly by following a “trust but verify” approach

Most project gating and governance approaches are designed for traditional (Waterfall) delivery methods. However, Agile delivery methods call for a different way of working that doesn’t align well with these approaches.

Applying traditional project gating and governance to Agile projects is like trying to fit a square peg in a round hole. Not only will it make Agile project delivery less efficient, but in the extreme, it can lead to outright project failure and even derail your organization’s Agile transformation.

If you want Agile to successfully take root in your organization, be prepared to rethink your current gating and governance practices. This document presents a framework that you can use to rework your approach to provide both effective oversight and support for your Agile projects.

Photo of Alex Ciraco, Principal Research Director, Application Delivery and Management, Info-Tech Research Group. Alex Ciraco
Principal Research Director,
Application Delivery and Management
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge
  • Many government organizations are adopting Agile project delivery methods because they have proven to be more effective than traditional delivery approaches at responding to today’s fast pace of change.
  • Government organizations have an obligation to govern projects to ensure effective use of public resources, regardless of the delivery method being used.
Common Obstacles
  • Most government gating and governance frameworks were designed around traditional (often called “Waterfall”) delivery methods.
  • Agile and Waterfall work in completely different ways, so imposing traditional gating and governance frameworks on Agile projects will stifle progress and can even lead to project failure.
  • Government organizations must adjust their gating and governance frameworks to accommodate Agile delivery methods.
Info-Tech’s Approach
  • Begin by understanding the fundamental purpose of project gating and governance.
  • Next, understand the major differences between Agile and Waterfall delivery methods.
  • Then, armed with this knowledge, use Info-Tech’s Agile Gating Framework to redefine your gating and governance approach to be Agile friendly.
Info-Tech Insight

Imposing a traditional governance approach on an Agile project can eliminate the advantages that Agile delivery methods offer. Make sure to rework your project gating and governance approach to be Agile friendly.

Info-Tech’s methodology for Creating an Agile-Friendly Project Gating and Governance Approach

1. Establish Your Gating and Governance Purpose 2. Understand and Adapt Info-Tech’s Agile Gating Framework 3. Complete your Agile Gating Framework
Phase Steps

1.1 Understand How We Gate and Govern Projects

1.2 Compare Traditional to Agile Delivery

1.3 Realize What Traditional Gating Looks Like and Why

2.1 Understand How Agile Manages Risk and Ensures Value Delivery

2.2 Introducing Info-Tech’s Agile Gating Framework

2.3 Create Your Agilometer

2.4 Create an Agile-Friendly Project Status Report

2.5 Select Your Agile Health Check Tool

3.1 Map Your Traditional Gating Artifacts to Agile Delivery

3.2 Determine Your Now, Next, Later Roadmap for Implementation

Phase Outcomes
  1. Your gating/governance purpose statement
  2. A fundamental understanding of the difference between traditional and Agile delivery methods.
  1. An understanding of Info-Tech’s Agile Gating Framework
  2. Your Gates 3 and 3A checklists
  3. Your Agilometer tool
  4. Your Agile project status report template
  5. Your Agile health check tool
  1. Artifact map for your Agile gating framework
  2. Roadmap for Agile gating implementation

Key Deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals, including:

Agilometer Tool

Create your customized Agilometer tool to determine project support and oversight needs.
Sample of the 'Agilometer Tool' deliverable.

Gates 3 and 3A Checklists

Create your customized checklists for projects at Gates 3 and 3A.
Sample of the 'Gates 3 and 3A Checklists' deliverable.

Agile-Friendly Project Status Report

Create your Agile-friendly project status report to monitor progress.
Sample of the 'Agile-Friendly Project Status Report' deliverable.

Artifact Mapping Tool

Map your traditional gating artifacts to their Agile replacements.
Sample of the 'Artifact Mapping Tool' deliverable.

Create an Agile-Friendly Project Gating and Governance Approach

Phase 1

Establish your gating and governance purpose

Phase 1

1.1 Understand How We Gate and Govern Projects

1.2 Compare Traditional to Agile Delivery

1.3 Realize What Traditional Gating Looks Like And Why

Phase 2

2.1 Understand How Agile Manages Risk and Ensures Value Delivery

2.2 Introducing Info-Tech’s Agile Gating Framework

2.3 Create Your Agilometer

2.4 Create Your Agile-Friendly Project Status Report

2.5 Select Your Agile Health Check Tool

Phase 3

3.1 Map Your Traditional Gating Artifacts to Agile Delivery

3.2 Determine Your Now, Next, Later Roadmap for Implementation

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Understand why gating and governance are so important to your organization.
  • Compare and contrast traditional to Agile delivery.
  • Identify what form traditional gating takes in your organization.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • PMO/Gating Body
  • Delivery Managers
  • Delivery Teams
  • Other Interested Parties

Agile gating–related facts and figures

73% of organizations created their project gating framework before adopting or considering Agile delivery practices. (Athens Journal of Technology and Engineering)

71% of survey respondents felt an Agile-friendly gating approach improves both productivity and product quality. (Athens Journal of Technology and Engineering)

Moving to an Agile-friendly gating approach has many benefits:
  • Faster response to change
  • Improved productivity
  • Higher team morale
  • Better product quality
  • Faster releases
(Journal of Product Innovation Management)

Traditional gating approaches can undermine an Agile project

  • Most existing gating and governance frameworks (often referred to as phase-gate) impose requirements on projects that are anti-patterns to an Agile delivery approach
  • For example, any gating approach that requires a project to deliver a detailed requirements document before coding can begin will make it difficult or impossible for the project to use an Agile delivery method.
  • The same can be said for other common phase-gate requirements including:
    • Imposing a formal (and onerous) change control process on project requirements.
    • Requiring a detailed design document and/or detailed user acceptance test plan at the beginning of the project.
    • Asking the project to produce a detailed project plan.
(DZone)
Don’t make the mistake of asking an Agile project to follow a traditional phase-gate approach to project delivery!

Before reworking your gating approach, you need to consider two important questions

Answering these questions will help guide your new gating process to both be Agile friendly and meet your organization’s needs

  1. What is the fundamental purpose of gating? By examining the fundamental purpose of gating, you will be better able to adjust your approach to achieve the desired outcomes in an Agile context.
  2. How does Agile delivery differ from traditional? By understanding how Agile delivery differs from traditional, you will be better able to adjust your gating approach to support Agile delivery methods.

Stock image of speech bubbles hanging on string with a question mark and lightbulb drawn on them.

Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}336|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
  • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

Mainframes remain a critical part of an organization’s infrastructure and will need to support these platforms for the foreseeable future. Despite the importance, it can be a challenge for organizations to find qualified resources to support them. Meanwhile, companies are unsure of where to find help to train and develop their teams on mainframe technologies and are at risk of a skills gap within their teams.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Mainframes continue to have wide usage, particularly in enterprise organizations. The complexity of moving or replatforming many of these applications means these platforms will be around for a long time still.
  • Companies need to be proactive about developing their teams to support their mainframe systems.

Impact and Result

  • Companies can protect their assets by cultivating a pipeline of qualified resources to support their mainframe infrastructure.
  • There is a robust training ecosystem headed by large, reputable organizations to help develop and support companies' resources. You don’t have to do it alone.

Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard – An overview of the solutions available to support your mainframe training and skills development needs.

Your mainframes are not going to disappear overnight. These systems often support the most critical operations in your organization. You need to ensure you have the right qualified resources to support your platforms.

  • Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard
[infographic]

Help Managers Inform, Interact, and Involve on the Way to Team Engagement

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}595|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Employee Development
  • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
  • Employee engagement impacts a company’s bottom line as well as the quality of work life for employees.
  • Employee engagement surveys often fail to provide the value you are hoping for because they are treated like an annual project that quickly loses steam.
  • The responsibility for fixing the issues identified falls to HR, and ultimately HR has very little control over an employee’s concerns with their day-to-day role.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • HR and the executive team have been exclusively responsible for engagement for too long. Since managers have the greatest impact on employees, they should also be primarily responsible for employee engagement.
  • In most organizations, managers underestimate the impact they can have on employee engagement, and assume that the broader organization will take more meaningful action.
  • Improving employee engagement may be as simple as improving the frequency and quality of the “3Is”: informing employees about the why behind decisions, interacting with them on a personal level, and involving them in decisions that affect them.

Impact and Result

  • Managers have the greatest impact on employee engagement as they are in a unique situation to better understand what makes employees tick.
  • If employees have a good relationship with their manager, they are much more likely to be engaged at work which ultimately leads to increases in revenue, profit, and shareholder return.

Help Managers Inform, Interact, and Involve on the Way to Team Engagement Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Get more involved in analyzing and improving team engagement

Improve employee engagement and ultimately the organization’s bottom line.

  • Storyboard: Help Managers Inform, Interact, and Involve on the Way to Team Engagement

2. Gather feedback from employees

Have a productive engagement feedback discussion with teams.

  • Engagement Feedback Session Agenda Template

3. Engage teams to improve engagement

Facilitate effective team engagement action planning.

  • Action Planning Worksheet

4. Gain insight into what engages and disengages employees

Solicit employee pain points that could potentially hinder their engagement.

  • Stay Interview Guide

5. Get to know new hires on a more personal level

Develop a stronger relationship with employees to drive engagement.

  • New Hire Conversation Guide
[infographic]

Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}593|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
  • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
  • Managers are responsible for driving the best performance out of their staff while still developing individuals professionally.
  • Micromanaging tasks is an ineffective, inefficient way to get things done and keep employees engaged at the same time.
  • Both managers and employees view goal setting as a cumbersome process that never materializes in day-to-day work.
  • Without a consistent and agile goal-setting environment that pervades every day, managers risk low productivity and disengaged employees.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Effective performance management occurs throughout the year, on a daily and weekly basis, not just at annual performance review time. Managers must embrace this reality and get into the habit of setting agile short-term goals to drive productivity.
  • Employee empowerment is one of the most significant contributors to employee engagement, which is a proven performance driver. Short-term goal setting, which is ultimately employee-owned, develops and nurtures a strong sense of employee empowerment.
  • Micromanaging employee tasks will get managers nowhere quickly. Putting in the effort to collaboratively define goals that benefit both the organization and the employee will pay off in the long run.
  • Goal setting should not be a cumbersome activity, but an agile, rolling habit that ensures employees are focused, supported, and given appropriate feedback to continue to drive performance.

Impact and Result

  • Managers who have daily meetings to set goals are 17% more successful in terms of employee performance than managers who set goals annually.
  • Managers must be agile goal-setting role models, or risk over a third of their staff being confused about productivity expectations.
  • Managers that allow tracking of goals to be an inhibitor to goal setting are most likely to have a negative effect on employee performance success. In fact, tracking goals should not be a priority in the short-term.

Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Learn the agile, short-term goal-setting process

Implement agile goal setting with your team right away and drive performance.

  • Storyboard: Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance
[infographic]

Define Your Digital Business Strategy

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}55|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $83,641 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Innovation
  • Parent Category Link: /innovation
  • Your organizational digital business strategy sits on the shelf because it fails to guide implementation.
  • Your organization has difficulty adapting new technologies or rethinking their existing business models.
  • Your organization lacks a clear vision for the digital customer journey.
  • Your management team lacks a framework to rethink how your organization delivers value today, which causes annual planning to become an ideation session that lacks focus.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Pre-pandemic digital strategies have been primarily focused on automation. However, your post-pandemic digital strategy must focus on driving resilience for growth opportunities.

Impact and Result

  • Design a strategy that applies innovation to your business model, streamline and transform processes, and make use of technologies to enhance interactions with customers and employees.
  • Use digital for transforming non-routine cognitive activities and for derisking key elements of the value chain.
  • Create a balanced roadmap that improves digital maturity and prepares you for long-term success in a digital economy.

Define Your Digital Business Strategy Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Digital Business Strategy Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to identify top value chains and a digitally enabled growth opportunity, transform stakeholder journeys, and build a digital transformation roadmap.

This blueprint guides you through a value-driven approach to digital transformation that allows you to identify what aspects of the business to transform, what technologies to embrace, what processes to automate, and what new business models to create. This approach to digital transformation unifies digital possibilities with your customer experiences.

  • Define Your Digital Business Strategy – Phases 1-4

2. Digital Business Strategy Workbook – A tool to guide you in planning and prioritizing projects to build an effective digital business strategy.

This tool guides you in planning and prioritizing projects to build an effective digital business strategy. Key activities include conducting a horizon scan, conducting a journey mapping exercise, prioritizing opportunities from a journey map, expanding opportunities into projects, and lastly, building the digital transformation roadmap using a Gantt chart visual to showcase project execution timelines.

  • Digital Strategy Workbook

3. Digital Business Strategy Final Report Template – Use this template to capture the synthesized content from outputs of the activities.

This deck is a visual presentation template for this blueprint. The intent is to capture the contents of the activities in a presentation PowerPoint. It uses sample data from “City of X” to demonstrate the digital business strategy.

  • Digital Business Strategy Final Report Template
[infographic]

Workshop: Define Your Digital Business Strategy

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Identify Two Existing Value Chains

The Purpose

Understand how your organization creates value today.

Key Benefits Achieved

Identify opportunities for digital transformation in how you currently deliver value today.

Activities

1.1 Validate business context.

1.2 Assess business ecosystem.

1.3 Identify and prioritize value streams.

1.4 Break down value stream into value chains.

Outputs

Business context

Overview of business ecosystem

Value streams and value chains

2 Identify a Digitally Enabled Growth Opportunity

The Purpose

Leverage strategic foresight to evaluate how complex trends can evolve over time and identify opportunities to leapfrog competitors.

Key Benefits Achieved

Identify a leapfrog idea to sidestep competitors.

Activities

2.1 Conduct a horizon scan.

2.2 Identify leapfrog ideas.

2.3 Identify impact to existing or new value chains.

Outputs

One leapfrog idea

Corresponding value chain

3 Transform Stakeholder Journeys

The Purpose

Design a journey map to empathize with your customers and identify opportunities to streamline or enhance existing and new experiences.

Key Benefits Achieved

Identify a unified view of customer experience.

Identify opportunities to automate non-routine cognitive tasks.

Identify gaps in value delivery.

Improve customer journey.

Activities

3.1 Identify stakeholder persona.

3.2 Identify journey scenario.

3.3 Conduct one journey mapping exercise.

3.4 Identify opportunities to improve stakeholder journey.

3.5 Break down opportunities into projects.

Outputs

Stakeholder persona

Stakeholder scenario

Journey map

Journey-based projects

4 Build a Digital Transformation Roadmap

The Purpose

Build a customer-centric digital transformation roadmap.

Key Benefits Achieved

Keep your team on the same page with key projects, objectives, and timelines.

Activities

4.1 Prioritize and categorize initiatives.

4.2 Build roadmap.

Outputs

Digital goals

Unified roadmap

Further reading

Define Your Digital Business Strategy

After a major crisis, find your place in the digital economy.

Info-Tech Research Group

Info-Tech is a provider of best-practice IT research advisory services that make every IT leader’s job easier.

35,000 members sharing best practices you can leverage

Millions spent developing tools and templates annually

Leverage direct access to over 100 analysts as an extension of your team

Use our massive database of benchmarks and vendor assessments

Get up to speed in a fraction of the time

Analyst Perspective

Build business resilience and prepare for a digital economy.

This is a picture of Senior Research Analyst, Dana Daher

Dana Daher
Senior Research Analyst

To survive one of the greatest economic downturns since the Great Depression, organizations had to accelerate their digital transformation by engaging with the Digital Economy. To sustain growth and thrive as the pandemic eases, organizations must focus their attention on building business resilience by transforming how they deliver value today.
This requires a value-driven approach to digital transformation that is capable of identifying what aspects of the business to transform, what technologies to embrace, what processes to automate, and what new business models to create. And most importantly, it needs to unify digital possibilities with your customer experiences.
If there was ever a time for an organization to become a digital business, it is today.

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

  • Your organization has difficulty adapting new technologies or rethinking the existing business models.
  • Your management lacks a framework to rethink how your organization delivers value today, which causes annual planning to become an ideation session that lacks focus.
  • There is uncertainty on how to meet evolving customer needs and how to compete in a digital economy.

Common Obstacles

  • Your organization might approach digital transformation as if we were still in 2019, not recognizing that the pandemic resulted in a major shift to an end-to-end digital economy.
  • Your senior-most leadership thinks digital is "IT's problem" because digital is viewed synonymously with technology.
  • On the other hand, your IT team lacks the authority to make decisions without the executives’ involvement in the discussion around digital.

Info-Tech’s Approach

  • Design a strategy that applies innovation to your business model, streamline and transform processes, and make use of technologies to enhance interactions with customers and employees.
  • Use digital for transforming non-routine cognitive activities and for de-risking key elements of the value chain.
  • Create a balanced roadmap that improves digital maturity and prepares you for long-term success in a digital economy.

Info-Tech Insight

After a major crisis, focus on restarting the growth engine and bolstering business resilience.

Your digital business strategy aims to transform the business

Digital Business Strategy

  • Looks for ways to transform the business by identifying what technologies to embrace, what processes to automate, and what new business models to create.
  • Unifies digital possibilities with your customer experiences.
  • Accountability lies with the executive leadership.
  • Must involve cross-functional participation from senior management from the different areas of the organization.

IT Strategy

  • Aims to identify how to change, fix, or improve technology in support of the organization’s business strategy.
  • Accountability lies with the CIO.
  • Must involve IT management and gather strategic input from the business.

Becoming a digital business

Automate tasks to free up time for innovation.

Business activities (tasks, procedures, and processes, etc.) are used to create, sell, buy, and deliver goods and services.

When we convert information into a readable format used by computers, we call this digitization (e.g. converting paper into digital format). When we convert these activities into a format to be processed by a computer, we have digitalization (e.g. scheduling appointments online).

These two processes alter how work takes place in an organization and form the foundation of the concept digital transformation.

We maintain that digital transformation is all about becoming a “digital business” – an organization that performs more than 66% of all work activities via executable code.

As organizations take a step closer to this optimal state, new avenues are open to identify advances to promote growth, enhance customer experiences, secure sustainability, drive operational efficiencies, and unearth potential future business ventures.

Key Concepts:

Digital: The representation of a physical item in a format used by computers

Digitization: Conversion of information and processes into a digital format

Digitalization: Conversion of information into a format to be processed by a computer

Why transform your business?

COVID-19 has irrefutably changed livelihoods, businesses, and the economy. During the pandemic, digital tools have acted as a lifeline, helping businesses and economies survive, and in the process, have acted as a catalyst for digital transformation.

As organizations continue to safeguard business continuity and financial recovery, in the long term, recovery won’t be enough.

Although many pandemic/recession recovery periods have occurred before, this next recovery period will present two first-time challenges no one has faced before. We must find ways to:

  • Recover from the COVID-19 recession.
  • Compete in a digital economy.

To grow and thrive in this post-pandemic world, organizations must provide meaningful and lasting changes to brace for a future defined by digital technologies. – Dana Daher, Info-Tech Research Group

We are amid an economic transformation

What we are facing today is a paradigm shift transforming the ways in which we work, live, and relate to one another.

In the last 60 years alone, performance and productivity have been vastly improved by IT in virtually all economic activities and sectors. And today, digital technologies continue to advance IT's contribution even further by bringing unprecedented insights into economic activities that have largely been untouched by IT.

As technological innovation and the digitalization of products and services continue to support economic activities, a fundamental shift is occurring that is redefining how we live, work, shop, and relate to one another.

These rapid changes are captured in a new 21st century term:

The Digital Economy.

90% of CEOs believe the digital economy will impact their industry. But only 25% have a plan in place. – Paul Taylor, Forbes, 2020

Analyst Perspective

Become a Digital Business

this is a picture of Research Fellow, Kenneth McGee

Kenneth McGee
Research Fellow

Today, the world faces two profoundly complex, mega-challenges simultaneously:

  1. Ending the COVID-19 pandemic and recession.
  2. Creating strategies for returning to business growth.

Within the past year, healthcare professionals have searched for and found solutions that bring real hope to the belief the global pandemic/recession will soon end.

As progress towards ending COVID-19 continues, business professionals are searching for the most effective near-term and long-term methods of restoring or exceeding the rates of growth they were enjoying prior to 2020.

We believe developing a digital business strategy can deliver cost savings to help achieve near-term business growth while preparing an enterprise for long-term business growth by effectively competing within the digital economy of the future.

The Digital Economy

The digital economy refers to a concept in which all economic activity is facilitated or managed through digital technologies, data, infrastructure, services, and products (OECD, 2020).

The digital economy captures decades of digital trends including:

  • Declining enterprise computing costs
  • Improvements in computing power and performance; unprecedent analytic capabilities
  • Rapid growth in network speeds, affordability, and geographic reach
  • High adoption rates of PCs, mobile, and other computing devices

These trends among others have set the stage to permanently alter how buying and selling will take place within and between local, regional, national, and international economies.

The emerging digital economy concept is so compelling that the world economists, financial experts, and others are currently investigating how they must substantially rewrite the rules governing how taxes, trade, tangible and intangible assets, and countless other financial issues will be assessed and valued in a digital economy.

Download Info-Tech’s Digital Economy Report

Signals of Change

60%
of People on Earth Use the Internet
(DataReportal, 2021)
20%
of Global Retail Sales Performed via E-commerce
(eMarketer, 2021)
6.64T
Global Business-to-Business
E-commerce Market
(Derived from The Business Research Company, 2021)
9.6%
of US GDP ($21.4T) accounted for by the digital economy ($2.05T)
(Bureau of Economic Analysis, 2021)

The digital economy captures technological developments transforming the way in which we live, work, and socialize

Technological evolution

this image contains a timeline of technological advances, from computers and information technology, to the digital economy of the future

Info-Tech’s approach to digital business strategy

A path to thrive in a digital economy.

  1. Identify top value chains to be transformed
  2. Identify a digitally enabled growth opportunity
  3. Transform stakeholder journeys
  4. Build a digital transformation roadmap

Info-Tech Insight

Pre-pandemic digital strategies have been primarily focused on automation. However, your post-pandemic digital strategy must focus on driving resilience for growth opportunities.

The Info-Tech difference:

  • Understand how your organization creates value today to identify opportunities for digital transformation.
  • Leverage strategic foresight to evaluate how complex trends can evolve over time and identify opportunities to leapfrog competitors.
  • Design a journey map to empathize with your customers and identify opportunities to streamline or enhance existing and new experiences.
  • Create a balanced roadmap that improves digital maturity and prepares you for long-term success in a digital economy.

A digital transformation starts by transforming how you deliver value today

As digital transformation is an effort to transform how you deliver value today, it is important to understand the different value-generating activities that deliver an outcome for and from your customers.

We do this by looking at value streams –which refer to the specific set of activities an industry player undertakes to create and capture value for and from the end consumer (and so the question to ask is, how do you make money as an organization?).

Our approach helps you to digitally transform those value streams that generate the most value for your organization.

Higher Education Value stream

Recruitment → Admission → Student Enrolment → Instruction & Research → Graduation → Advancement

Local Government Value Stream

Sustain Land, Property, and the Environment → Facilitate Civic Engagement → Protect Local Health and Safety → Grow the Economy → Provide Regional Infrastructure

Manufacturing Value Stream

Design Product → Produce Product → Sell Product

Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify your industry’s value streams

Assess your external environment to identify new value generators

Assessing your external environment allows you to identify trends that will have a high impact on how you deliver value today.

Traditionally, a PESTLE analysis is used to assess the external environment. While this is a helpful tool, it is often too broad as it identifies macro trends that are not relevant to an organization's addressable market. That is because not every factor that affects the macro environment (for example, the country of operation) affects a specific organization’s industry in the same way.

And so, instead of simply assessing the macro environment and trying to project its evolution along the PESTLE factors, we recommend to:

  • Conduct a PESTLE first and deduce, from the analysis, what are possible shifts in six characteristics of an organization’s industry, or
  • Proceed immediately with identifying evolutionary trends that impact the organization’s direct market.

the image depicts the relationship of factors from the Macro Environment, to the Industry/Addressable Market, to the Organization. the macro environmental factors are Political; Economic; Social; Technological; Legal; and Environmental. the Industry/addressable market factors are the Customer; Talent; Regulation; technology and; Supply chain.

Info-Tech Insight

While PESTLE is helpful to scan the macro environment, the analysis often lacks relevance to an organization’s industry.

An analysis of evolutionary shifts in five industry-specific characteristics would be more effective for identifying trends that impact the organization

A Market Evolution Trend Analysis (META) identifies changes in prevailing market conditions that are directly relevant to an organization’s industry, and thus provides some critical input to the strategy design process, since these trends can bring about strategic risks or opportunities.
Shifts in these five characteristics directly impact an organization:

ORGANIZATION

  • Customer Expectations
  • Talent Availability
  • Regulatory System
  • Supply Chain Continuity
  • Technological Landscape

Capture existing and new value generators through a customer journey map

As we prioritize value streams, we break them down into value chains – that is the “string” of processes that interrelate that work.

However, once we identify these value chains and determine what parts we wish to digitally transform, we take on the perspective of the user, as the way they interact with your products and services will be different to the view of those within the organization who implement and provide those services.

This method allows us to build an empathetic and customer-centric lens, granting the capability to uncover challenges and potential opportunities. Here, we may define new experiences or redesign existing ones.

This image contains an example of how a school might use a value chain and customer journey map. the value streams listed include: Recruitment; Admission; Student Enrolment; Instruction& Research; Graduation; and Advancement. the Value chain for the Instruction and Research Value stream. The value chain includes: Research; Course Creation, Delivery, and assessment. The Customer journey map for curricula delivery includes: Understanding the needs of students; Construct the course material; Deliver course material; Conduct assessment and; Upload Grades into system

A digital transformation is not just about customer journeys but also about building business resilience

Pre-pandemic, a digital transformation was primarily focused around improving customer experiences. Today, we are facing a paradigm shift in the way in which we capture the priorities and strategies for a digital transformation.

As the world grows increasingly uncertain, organizations need to continue to focus on improving customer experience while simultaneously protecting their enterprise value.

Ultimately, a digital transformation has two purposes:

  1. The classical model – whereby there is a focus on improving digital experiences.
  2. Value protection or the reduction of enterprise risk by systematically identifying how the organization delivers value and digitally transforming it to protect future cashflows and improve the overall enterprise value.
Old Paradigm New Paradigm
Predictable regulatory changes with incremental impact Unpredictable regulatory changes with sweeping impact
Reluctance to use digital collaboration Wide acceptance of digital collaboration
Varied landscape of brick-and-mortar channels Last-mile consolidation
Customers value brand Customers value convenience/speed of fulfilment
Intensity of talent wars depends on geography Broadened battlefields for the war for talent
Cloud-first strategies Cloud-only strategies
Physical assets Aggressive asset decapitalization
Digitalization of operational processes Robotization of operational processes
Customer experience design as an ideation mechanism Business resilience for value protection and risk reduction

Key deliverable:

Digital Business Strategy Presentation Template

A highly visual and compelling presentation template that enables easy customization and executive-facing content.

three images are depicted, which contain slides from the Digital Business Strategy presentation template, which will be available in 2022.

*Coming in 2022

Blueprint deliverables

The Digital Business Strategy Workbook supports each step of this blueprint to help you accomplish your goals:

Initiative Prioritization

A screenshot from the Initiative Prioritization blueprint is depicted, no words are legible in the image.

Use the weighted scorecard approach to evaluate and prioritize your opportunities and initiatives.

Roadmap Gantt Chart

A screenshot from the Roadmap Gantt Chart blueprint is depicted, no words are legible in the image.

Populate your Gantt chart to visually represent your key initiative plan over the next 12 months.

Journey Mapping Workbook

A screenshot from the Journey Mapping Workbook blueprint is depicted, no words are legible in the image.

Populate the journey maps to evaluate a user experience over its end-to-end journey.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

Guided Implementation

“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

Workshop

“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

Consulting

“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Guided Implementation

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

Phase 0 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
Call #1:
Discuss business context and customize your organization’s capability map.
Call #2:
Assess business ecosystem.
Call #3:
Perform horizon scanning and trends identification.
Call #5:
Identify stakeholder personas and scenarios.
Call #7:
Discuss initiative generation and inputs into roadmap.
Call #3:
Identify how your organization creates value.
Call #4:
Discuss value chain impact.
Call #6:
Complete journey mapping exercise.
Call #8:
Summarize results and plan next steps.

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.
A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

Workshop Requirements

Business Inputs

Gather business strategy documents and find information on:

  • Business goals
  • Current transformation initiatives
  • Business capabilities to create or enhance
  • Identify top ten revenue and expense generators
  • Identify stakeholders

Interview the following stakeholders to uncover business context information:

  • CEO
  • CIO

Download the Business Context Discovery Tool

Optional Diagnostic

  • Assess your digital maturity (Concierge Service)

Visit Assess Your Digital Maturity

Phase 1

Identify top value chains to be transformed

  • Understand the business
  • Assess your business ecosystem
  • Identify two value chains for transformation

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

Understand how your organization delivers value today and identify value chains to be transformed.

This phase involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across all levels of the organization.

Outcomes

  • Business ecosystem
  • Existing value chains to be transformed

Step 1.1

Understand the business

Activities

  • Review business documents.

Identify top value chains to be transformed

This step will walk you through the following activities:

In this section you will gain an understanding of the business context for your strategy.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

Business Context

Understand the business context

Understanding the business context is a must for all strategic initiatives. A pre-requisite to all strategic planning should be to elicit the business context from your business stakeholders.

Inputs Document(s)/ Method Outputs
Key stakeholders Strategy Document Stakeholders that are actively involved in, affected by or influence outcome of the organization, e.g. employers, customers, vendors.
Vision and mission of the organization Website Strategy Document What the organization wants to achieve and how it strives to accomplish those goals.
Business drivers CEO Interview Inputs and activities that drive the operational and financial results of the organization.
Key targets CEO Interview Quantitative benchmarks to support strategic goals, e.g. double the enterprise EBITD, improve top-of-mind brand awareness by 15%,
Strategic investment goals CFO Interview
Digital Strategy
Financial investments corresponding with strategic objectives of the organization, e.g. geographic expansion, digital investments.
Top three value-generating lines of business Financial Document Identification of your top three value-generating products and services or lines of business.
Goals of the organization over the next 12 months Strategy Document
Corporate Retreat Notes
Strategic goals to support the vision, e.g. hire 100 new sales reps, improve product management and marketing.
Top business initiatives over the next 12 months Strategy Document
CEO Interview
Internal campaigns to support strategic goals, e.g. invest in sales team development, expand the product innovation team.
Business model Strategy Document Products or services that the organization plans to sell, the identified market and customer segments, price points, channels and anticipated expenses.
Competitive landscape Internal Research Analysis Who your typical or atypical competitors are.

1.1 Understand the business context

Objective: Elicit the business context with a careful review of business and strategy documents.

  1. Gather the strategy creation team and review your business context documents. This includes business strategy documents, interview notes from executive stakeholders, and other sources for uncovering the business strategy.
  2. Brainstorm in smaller groups answers to the question you were assigned:
    • What are the strengths and weaknesses of the organization?
    • What are some areas of improvement or opportunity?
    • What does it mean to have a digital business strategy?
  3. Discuss the questions above with participants and document key findings. Share with the group and work through the balanced scorecard questions to complete this exercise.
  4. Document your findings.

Assess your digital readiness with Info-Tech’s Digital Maturity Assessment

Input

  • Business Strategy Documents
  • Executive Stakeholder Interviews

Output

  • Business Context Information

Materials

  • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

Participants

  • Executive Team

Step 1.2

Assess your business ecosystem

Activities

  • Identify disruptors and incumbents.

Info-Tech Insight

Your digital business strategy cannot be formulated without a clear vision of the evolution of your industry.

Identify top value chains to be transformed

This step will walk you through the following activities:

In this section, we will assess who the incumbents and disruptors are in your ecosystem and identify who your stakeholders are.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

Business Ecosystem

Assess your business ecosystem

Understand the nature of your competition.

Learn what your competitors are doing.

To survive, grow, or transform in today's digital era, organizations must first have a strong pulse on their business ecosystem. Learning what your competitors are doing to grow their bottom line is key to identifying how to grow your own. Start by understanding who the key incumbents and disruptors in your industry are to identify where your industry is heading.

Incumbents: These are established leaders in the industry that possess the largest market share. Incumbents often focus their attention to their most demanding or profitable customers and neglect the needs of those down market.

Disruptors: Disruptors are primarily new entrants (typically startups) that possess the ability to displace the existing market, industry, or technology. Disruptors are often focused on smaller markets that the incumbents aren’t focused on. (Clayton Christenson, 1997)

An image is shown demonstrating the relationship within an industry between incumbents, disruptors, and the organization. The incumbents are represented by two large purple circles. The disruptors are represented by 9 smaller blue circles, which represent smaller individual customer bases, but overall account for a larger portion of the industry.

’Disruption’ specifically refers to what happens when the incumbents are so focused on pleasing their most profitable customers that they neglect or misjudge the needs of their other segments.– Ilan Mochari, Inc., 2015

Example Business Ecosystem Analysis

Business Target Market & Customer Product/Service & Key Features Key Differentiators Market Positioning
University XYZ
  • Local Students
  • Continuous Learner
  • Certificate programs
  • Associate degrees
  • Strong engineering department with access to high-quality labs
  • Strong community impact
Affordable education with low tuition cost and access to bursaries & scholarships.
University CDE University CDE
  • Local students
  • International students
  • Continuous learning students
  • Continuous learning offerings (weekend classes)
  • Strong engineering program
  • Strong continuous learning programs
Outcome focused university with strong co-ops/internship programs and career placements for graduates
University MNG
  • Local students
  • Non degree, freshman and continuous learning adults
  • Associate degrees
  • Certificate programs (IT programs)
  • Dual credit program
  • More locations/campuses
  • Greater physical presence
  • High web presence
Nurturing university with small student population and classroom sizes. University attractive to adult learners.
Disruptors Online Learning Company EFG
  • Full-time employees & executives– (online presence important)
  • Shorter courses
  • Full-time employees & executives– (online presence important)
Competitive pricing with an open acceptance policy
University JKL Online Credential Program
  • High school
  • University students
  • Adult learners
  • Micro credentials
  • Ability to acquire specific skills
Borderless and free (or low cost) education

1.2 Understand your business ecosystem

Objective: Identify the incumbents and disruptors in your business ecosystem.

  1. Identify the key incumbents and disruptors in your business ecosystem.
    • Incumbents: These are established leaders in the industry that possess the largest market share.
    • Disruptors: Disruptors are primarily new entrants (startups) that possess the ability to displace the existing market, industry, or technology.
  2. Identify target market and key customers. Who are the primary beneficiaries of your products or service offerings? Your key customers are those who keep you in business, increase profits, and are impacted by your operations.
  3. Identify what their core products or services are. Assess what core problem their products solve for key customers and what key features of their solution support this.
  4. Assess what the competitors' key differentiators are. There are many differentiators that an organization can have, examples include product, brand, price, service, or channel.
  5. Identify what the organization’s value proposition is. Why do customers come to them specifically? Leverage insights from the key differentiators to derive this.
  6. Finally, assess how your organization derives value relative to your competitors.

Input

  • Market Assessment

Output

  • Key Incumbents and Disruptors

Materials

  • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

Participants

  • Executive Team

Step 1.3

Value-chain prioritization

Activities

  • Identify and prioritize value chains for innovation.

Identify top value chains to be transformed

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Identify and prioritize how your organization currently delivers value today and identify value chains to be transformed.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

Prioritized Value Chains

Determine what value the organization creates

Identify areas for innovation.

Value streams and value chains connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the market place by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment an organization operates within.

Different types of value your organization creates

This an example of a value chain which a school would use to analyze how their organization creates value. The value streams listed include: Recruitment; Admission; Student Enrolment; Instruction& Research; Graduation; and Advancement. the Value chain for the Student enrolment stream is displayed. The value chain includes: Matriculation; Enrolment into a Program and; Unit enrolment.

Value Streams

A value stream refers to the specific set of activities an industry player undertakes to create and capture value for and from the end consumer.

Value Chains

A value chain is a ”string” of processes within a company that interrelate and work together to meet market demand. Examining the value chain of a company will reveal how it achieves competitive advantage.

Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify value streams

Begin with understanding your industry’s value streams

Value Streams

Recruitment

  • The promotion of the institution and the communication with prospective students is accommodated by the recruitment component.
  • Prospective students are categorized as domestic and international, undergraduate and graduate. Each having distinct processes.

Admission

  • Admission into the university involves processes distinct from recruitment. Student applications are processed and evaluated and the students are informed of the decision.
  • This component is also concerned with transfer students and the approval of transfer credits.

Student Enrolment

  • Student enrolment is concerned with matriculation when the student first enters the institution, and subsequent enrolment and scheduling of current students.
  • The component is also concerned with financial aid and the ownership of student records.

Instruction & Research

  • Instruction involves program development, instructional delivery and assessment, and the accreditation of courses of study.
  • The research component begins with establishing policy and degree fundamentals and concerns the research through to publication and impact assessment.

Graduation

  • Graduation is not only responsible for the ceremony but also the eligibility of the candidate for an award and the subsequent maintenance of transcripts.

Advancement

  • Alumni relations are the first responsibility of advancement. This involves the continual engagement with former students.
  • Fundraising is the second responsibility. This includes the solicitation and stewardship of gifts from alumni and other benefactors.

Value stream defined…

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities in the marketplace. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment in which an organization operates.

There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams.

  • Core value streams are mostly externally facing. They deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map.
  • Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.

An effective method for ensuring all value streams have been considered is to understand that there can be different end-value receivers.

Leverage your industry’s capability maps to identify value chains

Business Capability Map Defined

A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation, rather than how. Business capabilities:

  • Represent stable business functions.
  • Are unique and independent of each other.
  • Typically, will have a defined business outcome.

A capability map is a great starting point to identify value chains within an organization as it is a strong indicator of the processes involved to deliver on the value streams.

this image contains an example of a business capability map using the value streams identified earlier in this blueprint.

Info-Tech Insight

Leverage your industry reference architecture to define value streams and value chains.

Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify value streams

Prioritize value streams to be supported or enhanced

Use an evaluation criteria that considers both the human and business value generators that these streams provide.

two identical value streams are depicted. The right most value stream has Student Enrolment and Instruction Research highlighted in green. between the two streams, are two boxes. In these boxes is the following: Business Value: Profit; Enterprise Value; Brand value. Human Value: Faculty satisfaction; Student satisfaction; Community impact.

Info-Tech Insight

To produce maximum impact, focus on value streams that provide two-thirds of your enterprise value.

Business Value

Assess the value generators to the business, e.g. revenue dollars, enterprise value, cost or differentiation (competitiveness), etc.

Human Value

Assess the value generators to people, e.g. student/faculty satisfaction, well-being, and social cohesion.

Identify value chains for transformation

Value chains, pioneered by the academic Michael Porter, refer to the ”string” of processes within a company that interrelate and work together to meet market demand. An organization’s value chain is connected to the larger part of the value stream. This perspective of how value is generated encourages leaders to see each activity as a part of a series of steps required deliver value within the value stream and opens avenues to identify new opportunities for value generation.

this image depicts two sample value chains for the value streams: student enrolment and Instruction & Research. Each value chain has a stakeholder associated with it. This is the primary stakeholder that seeks to gain value from that value chain.

Prioritize value chains for transformation

Once we have identified the key value chains within each value stream element, evaluate the individual processes within the value chain to identify opportunities for transformation. Evaluate the value chain processes based on the level of pain experienced by a stakeholder to accomplish that task, and the financial impact that level of the process has on the organization.

this image depicts the same value chains as the image above, with a legend showing which steps have a financial impact, which steps have a high degree of risk, and which steps are prioritized for transformation. Matriculation and publishing are shown to have a financial impact. Research foundation is shown to have a high degree of risk, and enrollment into a program and conducting research are prioritized for transformation.

1.3 Value chain analysis

Objective: Determine how the organization creates value, and prioritize value chains for innovation.

  1. The first step of delivering value is defining how it will happen. Use the organization’s industry segment to start a discussion on how value is created for customers. Working back from the moment value is realized by the customer, consider the sequential steps required to deliver value in your industry segment.
  2. Define and validate the organization’s value stream. Write a short description of the value stream that includes a statement about the value provided and a clear start and end for the value stream.
  3. Prioritize the value streams based on an evaluation criteria that reflects business and human value generators to the organization.
  4. Identify value chains that are associated with each value stream. The value chains refer to a string of processes within the value stream element. Each value chain also captures a particular stakeholder that benefits from the value chain.
  5. Once we have identified the key value chains within each value stream element, evaluate the individual processes within the value chain and identify areas for transformation. Evaluate the value chain processes based on the level of pain or exposure to risk experienced by a stakeholder to accomplish that task and the financial impact that level of the process has on the organization.

Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify value streams and capability maps

Input

  • Market Assessment

Output

  • Key Incumbents and Disruptors

Materials

  • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

Participants

  • Executive Team

Phase 2

Identify a digitally enabled growth opportunity

  • Conduct horizon scan
  • Identify leapfrog idea
  • Conduct value chain impact analysis

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

Assess trends that are impacting your industry and identify strategic growth opportunities.

This phase involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes

Identify new growth opportunities and value chains impacted

Phase 2.1

Horizon scanning

Activities

  • Scan the internal and external environment for trends.

Info-Tech Insight

Systematically scan your environment to identify avenues or opportunities to skip one or several stages of technological development and stay ahead of disruption.

Identify a digitally enabled growth opportunity

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Scan the environment for external environment for megatrends, trends, and drivers. Prioritize trends and build a trends radar to keep track of trends within your environment.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

Growth opportunity

Horizon scanning

Understand how your industry is evolving.

Horizon scanning is a systematic analysis of detecting early signs of future changes or threats.

Horizon scanning involves scanning, analyzing, and communicating changes in an organization’s environment to prepare for potential threats and opportunities. Much of what we know about the future is based around the interactions and trajectory of macro trends, trends, and drivers. These form the foundations for future intelligence.

Macro Trends

A macro trend captures a large-scale transformative trend that could impact your addressable market.

Trends

A trend captures a business use case of the macro trend. Consider trends in relation to competitors in your industry.

Drivers

A driver is an underlying force causing the trend to occur. There can be multiple causal forces, or drivers, that influence a trend, and multiple trends can be influenced by the same causal force.

Identify signals of change in the present and their potential future impacts.

Identifying macro trends

A macro trend captures a large-scale transformative trend that could change the addressable market. Here are some examples of macro trends to consider when horizon scanning for your own organization:

Talent Availability

  • Decentralized workforce
  • Hybrid workforce
  • Diverse workforce
  • Skills gap
  • Digital workforce
  • Multigenerational workforce

Customer Expectations

  • Personalization
  • Digital experience
  • Data ownership
  • Transparency
  • Accessibility

Technological Landscape

  • AI & robotics
  • Virtual world
  • Ubiquitous connectivity,
  • Genomics
  • Materials (smart, nano, bio)

Regulatory System

  • Market control
  • Economic shifts
  • Digital regulation
  • Consumer protection
  • Global green

Supply Chain Continuity

  • Resource scarcity
  • Sustainability
  • Supply chain digitization
  • Circular supply chains
  • Agility

Identifying trends and drivers

A trend captures a business use case of a macro trend. Assessing trends can reduce some uncertainties about the future and highlight potential opportunities for your organization. A driver captures the internal or external forces that lead the trend to occur. Understanding and capturing drivers is important to understanding why these trends are occurring and the potential impacts to your value chains.

This image contains a flow chart, demonstrating the relationship between Macro trends, Trends, and Drivers. in this example, the macro trend is Accessibility. The Trends, or patterns of change, are an increase in demands for micro-credentials, and Preference for eLearning. The Drivers, or the why, are addressing skill gaps for increase in demand for micro-credentials, and Accommodating adult/working learners- for Preference for eLearning.

Leverage industry roundtables and trend reports to understand the art of the possible

Uncover important business and industry trends that can inform possibilities for technology innovation.

Explore trends in areas such as:

  • Machine Learning
  • Citizen Dev 2.0
  • Venture Architecture
  • Autonomous Organizations
  • Self-Sovereign Cloud
  • Digital Sustainability

Market research is critical in identifying factors external to your organization and identifying technology innovation that will provide a competitive edge. It’s important to evaluate the impact each trend or opportunity will have in your organization and market.

Visit Info-Tech’s Trends & Priorities Research Center

Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify your industry’s value streams

this image contains three screenshots from Rethinking Higher Education Report and 2021 Tech Trends Report

Images are from Info-Tech’s Rethinking Higher Education Report and 2021 Tech Trends Report

Example horizon scanning activity

Macro Trends Trends Drivers
Talent Availability Diversity Inclusive campus culture Systemic inequities
Hybrid workforce Online learning staff COVID-19 and access to physical institutions
Customer Expectations Digital experience eLearning for working learners Accommodate adult learners
Accessibility Micro-credentials for non-traditional students Addressing skills gap
Technological Landscape Artificial intelligence and robotics AI for personalized learning Hyper personalization
IoT IoT for monitoring equipment Asset tracking
Augmented reality Immersive education AR and VR Personalized experiences
Regulatory System Regulatory System Alternative funding for research Changes in federal funding
Global Green Environmental and sustainability education curricula Regulatory and policy changes
Supply Chain Continuity Circular supply chains Vendors recycling outdated technology Sustainability
Cloud-based solutions Cloud-based eLearning software Convenience and accessibility

Visit Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage Research to identify your industry’s value streams

Prioritize trends

Develop a cross-industry holistic view of trends.

Visualize emerging and prioritize action.

Moving from horizon scanning to action requires an evaluation process to determine which trends can lead to growth opportunities. First, we need to make a short list of trends to analyze. For your digital strategy, consider trends on the time horizon that are under 24 months. Next, we need to evaluate the shortlisted opportunities by a second set of criteria: relevance to your organization and impact on industry.

Timing

The estimated time to disruption this trend will have for your industry. Assess whether the trend will require significant developments to support its entry into the ecosystem.

Relevance

The relevance of the trend to your organization. Does the trend fulfil the vision or goals of the organization?

Impact

The degree of impact the trend will have on your industry. A trend with high impact will drive new business models, products, or services.

Prioritize trends to adopt into your organization

Prioritize trends based on timing, impact, and relevance.

Trend Timing
(S/M/L)
Impact
(1-5)
Relevance
( 1-5)
1. Micro-credentialing S 5 5
2. IoT-connected devices for personalized experience S 1 3
3. International partnerships with educational institutions M
4. Use of chatbots throughout enrollment process L
5. IoT for energy management of campus facilities L
6. Gamification of digital course content M
7. Flexible learning curricula S 4 3
Deprioritize trends
that have a time frame
to disruption of more
than 24 months.
this image contains a graph demonstrating the relationship between relevance (x axis) and Impact (Y axis).

2.1 Scanning the horizon

Objective: Generate trends

60 minutes

  • Start by selecting macro trends that are occurring in your environment using the five categories. These are the large-scale transformative trends that impact your addressable market. Macro trends have three key characteristics:
    • They span over a long period of time.
    • They impact all geographic regions.
    • They impact governments, individuals, and organizations.
  • Begin to break down these macro trends into trends. Trends should reflect the direction of a macro trend and capture the pattern in events. Consider trends that directly impact your organization.
  • Understand the drivers behind these trends. Why are they occurring? What is driving them? Understanding the drivers helps us understand the value they may generate.
  • Deprioritize trends that are expected to happen beyond 24 months.
  • Prioritize trends that have a high impact and relevance to the organization.
  • If you identify more than one trend, discuss with the group which trend you would like to pursue and limit it to one opportunity.

Input

  • Macro Trends
  • Trends

Output

  • Trends Prioritization

Materials

  • Digital Strategy Workbook

Participants

  • Executive Team

Step 2.2

Leapfrogging ideation

Activities

  • Identify leapfrog ideas.
  • Identify impact to value chain.

Info-Tech Insight

A systematic approach to leapfrog ideation is one of the most critical ways in which an organization can build the capacity for resilient innovation.

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Evaluate trend opportunities and determine the strategic opportunities they pose. You will also work towards identifying the impact the trend has on your value chain.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • Strategic growth opportunities
  • Value chain impact

Leapfrog into the future

Turn trends into growth opportunities.

To thrive in the digital age, organizations must innovate big, leverage internal creativity, and prepare for flexibility.

In this digital era, organizations are often playing catch up to a rapidly evolving technological landscape and following a strict linear approach to innovation. However, this linear catch-up approach does not help companies get ahead of competitors. Instead, organizations must identify avenues to skip one or several stages of technological development to leapfrog ahead of their competitors.

The best way to predict the future is to invent it. – Alan Kay

Leapfrogging takes place when an organization introduces disruptive innovation into the market and sidesteps competitors who are unable to mobilize to respond to the opportunities.

Case Study

Classroom of the Future

Higher Education: Barco’s Virtual Classroom at UCL

University College London (UCL), in the United Kingdom, selected Barco weConnect virtual classroom technology for its continuing professional development medical education offering. UCL uses the platform for synchronous teaching, where remote students can interact with a lecturer.

One of the main advantages of the system is that it enables direct interaction with students through polls, questions, and whiteboarding. The system also allows you to track student engagement in real time.

The system has also been leveraged for scientific research and publications. In their “Delphi” process, key opinion leaders were able to collaborate in an effective way to reach consensus on a subject matter. The processes that normally takes months were successfully completed in 48 hours (McCann, 2020).

Results

The system has been largely successful and has supported remote, real-time teaching, two-way engagement, engagement with international staff, and an overall enriched teaching experience.

Funnel trends into leapfrog ideas

Go from trend insights into ideas.

Brainstorm ways of generating leapfrog ideas from trend insights.

Dealing with trends is one of the most important tasks for innovation. It provides the basis of developing the future orientation of the organization. However, being aware of a trend is one thing, to develop strategies for response is another.

To identify the impact the trend has on the organization, consider the four areas of growth strategies for the organization:

  1. New Customers: Leverage the trend to target new customers for existing products or services.
  2. New Business Models: Adjust the business model to capture a change in how the organization delivers value.
  3. New Markets: Enter or create new markets by applying existing products or services to different problems.
  4. New Product or Service Offerings: Introduce new products or services to the existing market.
A funnel shaped image is depicted. At the top, at the entrance of the funnel, is the word Trend. At the bottom of the image, at the output of the funnel, is the word Opportunity.

From trend to leapfrog ideas

Trend New Customer New Market New Business Model New Product or Service
What trends pose a high-immediate impact to the organization? Target new customers for existing products or services Enter or create new markets by applying existing products or services to different problems Adjust the business model to capture a change in how the organization delivers value Introduce new products or services to the existing market
Micro-credentials for non-traditional students Target non-traditional learners/students - Online delivery Introduce mini MBA program

2.2 Identify and prioritize opportunities

60 minutes

  1. Gather the prioritized trend identified in the horizon scanning exercise (the trend identified to be “adopted” within the organization).
  2. Analyze each trend identified and assess whether the trend provides an opportunity for a new customers, new markets, new business models, or new products and services.

Input

  • “Adopt” Trends

Output

  • Trends to pursue
  • Breakdown of strategic opportunities that the trends pose

Materials

  • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

Participants

  • Executive Team

Step 2.3

Value chain impact

Activities

  • Identify impact to value chain.

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Evaluate trend opportunities and determine the strategic opportunities they pose. Prioritize the opportunities and identify impact to your value chain.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • Strategic growth opportunities

Value chain analysis

Identify implications of strategic growth opportunities to the value chains.

As we identify and prioritize the opportunities available to us, we need to assess their impacts on value chains. Does the opportunity directly impact an existing value chain? Or does it open us to the creation of a new value chain?

The value chain perspective allows an organization to identify how to best minimize or enhance impacts and generate value.
As we move from opportunity to impact, it is important to break down opportunities into the relevant pieces so we can see a holistic picture of the sources of differentiation.

this image depicts the value chain for the value stream, student enrolment.

2.3 Value chain impact

Objective: Identify impacts to the value chain from the opportunities identified.
60 minutes

  1. Once you have identified the opportunity, turn back to the value stream, and with the working group, identify the value stream impacted most by the opportunity. Leverage the human impact/business impact criteria to support the identification of the value stream to be impacted.
  2. Within the value stream, brainstorm what parts of the value chain will be impacted by the new opportunity. Or ask whether this new opportunity provides you with a new value chain to be created.
  3. If this opportunity will require a new value chain, identify what set of new processes or steps will be created to support this new entrant.
  4. Identify any critical value chains that will be impacted by the new opportunity. What areas of the value chain pose the greatest risk? And where can we estimate the financial revenue will be impacted the most?

Input

  • Opportunity

Output

  • Value chains impacted

Materials

  • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

Participants

  • Executive Team

Phase 3

Transform stakeholder journeys

  • Identify stakeholder personas and scenarios
  • Conduct journey map
  • Identify projects

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

Take the prioritized value chains and create a journey map to capture the end-to-end experience of a stakeholder.

Through a journey mapping exercise, you will identify opportunities to digitize parts of the journey. These opportunities will be broken down into functional initiatives to tackle in your strategy.

This phase involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes

  1. Stakeholder persona
  2. Stakeholder scenario
  3. Stakeholder journey map
  4. Opportunities

Step 3.1

Identify stakeholder persona and journey scenario

Activities

  • Identify stakeholder persona.
  • Identify stakeholder journey scenario.

Transform stakeholder journeys

This step will walk you through the following activities:

In this step, you with identify stakeholder personas and scenarios relating to the prioritized value chains.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • A taxonomy of critical stakeholder journeys.

Identify stakeholder persona and journey scenario

From value chain to journey scenario.

Stakeholder personas and scenarios help us build empathy towards our customers. It helps put us into the shoes of a stakeholder and relate to their experience to solve problems or understand how they experience the steps or processes required to accomplish a goal. A user persona is a valuable basis for stakeholder journey mapping.

A stakeholder scenario describes the situation the journey map addresses. Scenarios can be real (for existing products and services) or anticipated.

A stakeholder persona is a fictitious profile to represent a customer or a user segment. Creating this persona helps us understand who your customers really are and why they are using your service or product.

Learn more about applying design thinking methodologies

Identify stakeholder scenarios to map

For your digital strategy, leverage the existing and opportunity value chains identified in phase 1 and 2 for journey mapping.

Identify two existing value chains to be transformed.
In section 1, we identified existing value chains to be transformed. For example, your stakeholder persona is a member of the faculty (engineering), and the scenario is the curricula design process.
this image contains the value chains for instruction (engineering) and enrolment of engineering student. the instruction(engineering) value chain includes curricula research, curricula design, curricula delivery, and Assessment for the faculty-instructor. The enrolment of engineering student value chain includes matriculation, enrolment into a program, and unit enrolment for the student. In the instruction(engineering) value chain, curricula design is highlighted in blue. In the enrolment of engineering student value chain, Enrolment into a program is highlighted.
Identify one new value chain.
In section 2, we identified a new value chain. However, for a new opportunity, the scenario is more complex as it may capture many different areas of a value chain. Subsequently, a journey map for a new opportunity may require mapping all parts of the value chain.
this image contains an example of a value chain for micro-credentialing (mini online MBA)

Identify stakeholder persona

Who are you transforming for?

To define a stakeholder scenario, we need to understand who we are mapping for. In each value chain, we identified a stakeholder who gains value from that value chain. We now need to develop a stakeholder persona: a representation of the end user to gain a strong understanding of who they are, what they need, and their pains and gains.

One of the best ways to flesh out your stakeholder persona is to engage with the stakeholders directly or to gather the input of those who may engage with them within the organization.

For example, if we want to define a journey map for a student, we might want to gather the input of students or teaching faculty that have firsthand encounters with different student types and are able to define a common student type.

Info-Tech Insight

Run a survey to understand your end users and develop a stronger picture of who they are and what they are seeking to gain from your organization.

Example Stakeholder Persona

Name: Anne
Age: 35
Occupation: Engineering Faculty
Location: Toronto, Canada

Pains

What are their frustrations, fears, and anxieties?

  • Time restraints
  • Using new digital tools
  • Managing a class while incorporating individual learning
  • Varying levels within the same class
  • Unmotivated students

What do they need to do?

What do they want to get done? How will they know they are successful?

  • Design curricula in a hybrid mode without loss of quality of experience of in-classroom learning.

Gains

What are their wants, needs, hopes, and dreams?

  • Interactive content for students
  • Curriculum alignment
  • Ability to run a classroom lab (in hybrid format)
  • Self-paced and self-directed learning opportunities for students

(Adapted from Osterwalder, et al., 2014)

Define a journey statement for mapping

Now that we understand who we are mapping for, we need to define a journey statement to capture the stakeholder journey.
Leverage the following format to define the journey statement.
As a [stakeholder], I need to [prioritized value chain task], so that I can [desired result or overall goal].

this image contains the instruction(engineering) value chain shown above. next to it is a stakeholder journey statement, which states: As an engineering faculty member, I want to design my curricula in a hybrid mode of delivery so that I can simulate in-classroom experiences.

3.1 Identify stakeholder persona and journey scenario

Objective: Identify stakeholder persona and journey scenario statement for journey mapping exercise.

  1. Start by identifying who your stakeholder is. Give your stakeholder a demographic profile – capture a typical stakeholder for this value chain.
  2. Identify what the gains and pains are during this value chain and what the stakeholder is seeking to accomplish.
  3. Looking at the value chain, create a statement that captures the goals and needs of the stakeholder. Use the following format to create a statement:
    As a [stakeholder], I need to [prioritized value chain task], so that I can [desired result or overall goal].

Input

  • Prioritized Value Chains (existing and opportunity)

Output

  • Stakeholder Persona
  • Stakeholder Journey Statement

Materials

  • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)
  • Stakeholder Persona Canvas

Participants

  • Executive Team
  • Stakeholders (if possible)
  • Individual who works directly with stakeholders

Step 3.2

Map stakeholder journeys

Activities

  • Map stakeholder journeys.

Transform stakeholder journeys

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Prioritize the journeys by focusing on what matters most to the stakeholders and estimating the organizational effort to improve those experiences.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • Candidate journeys identified for redesign or build.

Leverage customer journey mapping to capture value chains to be transformed

Conduct a journey mapping exercise to identify opportunities for innovation or automation.

A journey-based approach helps an organization understand how a stakeholder moves through a process and interacts with the organization in the form of touch points, channels, and supporting characters. By identifying pain points in the journey and the activity types, we can identify opportunities for innovation and automation along the journey.

Embrace design thinking methodologies to elevate the stakeholder journey and to build a competitive advantage for your organization.

this image contains an example of the result of a journey mapping exercise. the main headings are Awareness, Consideration, Acquisition, Service and, Loyalty.

Internal vs. external stakeholder perspective

In journey mapping, we always start with the stakeholder's perspective, then eventually transition into what the organization does business-wise to deliver value to each stakeholder. It is important to keep in mind both perspectives while conducting a journey mapping exercise as there are often different roles, processes, and technologies associated with each of the journey steps.

Stakeholder Journey
(External Perspective)

  • Awareness
  • Consideration
  • Selecting
  • Negotiating
  • Approving

Business Processes
(Internal Perspective)

  • Preparation
  • Prospecting
  • Presentation
  • Closing
  • Follow-Up

Info-Tech Insight

Take the perspective of an end user, who interacts with your products and services, as it is different from the view of those inside the organization, who implement and provide those services.

Build a stakeholder journey map

A stakeholder journey map is a tool used to illustrate the user’s perceptions, emotions, and needs as they move through a process and interact with the organization in the form of touch points, channels, and supporting characters.

this image depicts an example of a stakeholder journey map, the headings in the map are: Journey Activity; Touch Points; Metrics; Nature of Activity; Key Moments & Pain Points; Opportunities

Stakeholder Journey Map: Journey Activity

The journey activity refers to the steps taken to accomplish a goal.

The journey activity comprises the steps or sequence of tasks the stakeholder takes to accomplish their goal. These steps reflect the high-level process your candidates perform to complete a task or solve a problem.

Stakeholder Journey Map: Touch Points

Touch points are the points of interaction between a stakeholder and the organization.

A touch point refers to any time a stakeholder interacts with your organization or brand. Consider three main points of interaction with the customer in the journey:

  • Before: How did they find out about you? How did they first contact you to start this journey? What channels or mediums were used?
    • Social media
    • Rating & reviews
    • Word of mouth
    • Advertising
  • During: How was the sale or service accomplished?
    • Website
    • Catalog
    • Promotions
    • Point of sale
    • Phone system
  • After: What happened after the sale or service?
    • Billing
    • Transactional emails
    • Marketing emails
    • Follow-ups
    • Thank-you emails

Stakeholder Journey Map: Nature of Activity

The nature of activity refers to the type of task the journey activity captures.

We categorize the activity type to identify opportunities for automation. There are four main types of task types, which in combination (as seen in the table below) capture a task or job to be automated.

Routine Non-Routine
Cognitive Routine Cognitive: repeatable tasks that rely on knowledge work, e.g. sales, administration
Prioritize for automation (2)
Non-Routine Cognitive: infrequent tasks that rely on knowledge work, e.g. driving, fraud detection
Prioritize for automation (3)
Non-Routine Cognitive: infrequent tasks that rely on knowledge work, e.g. driving, fraud detection Prioritize for automation (3) Routine Manual: repeatable tasks that rely on physical work, e.g. manufacturing, production
Prioritize for automation (1)
Non-Routine Manual: infrequent tasks that rely on physical work, e.g. food preparation
Not mature for automation

Info-Tech Insight

Where automation makes sense, routine manual activities should be transformed first, followed by routine cognitive activities. Non-routine cognitive activities are the final frontier.

Stakeholder Journey Map: Metrics

Metrics are a quantifiable measurement of a process, activity, or initiative.

Metrics are crucial to justify expenses and to estimate growth for capacity planning and resourcing. There are multiple benefits to identifying and implementing metrics in a journey map:

  • Metrics provide accurate indicators for accurate IT and business decisions.
  • Metrics help you identify stakeholder touch point efficiencies and problems and solve issues before they become more serious.
  • Active metrics tracking makes root cause analysis of issues much easier.

Example of journey mapping metrics: Cost, effort, turnaround time, throughput, net promoter score (NPS), satisfaction score

Stakeholder Journey Map: Key Moments & Pain Points

Key moments and pain points refer to the emotional status of a stakeholder at each stake of the customer journey.

The key moments are defining pieces or periods in a stakeholder's experience that create a critical turning point or memory.

The pain points are the critical problems that the stakeholder is facing during the journey or business continuity risks. Prioritize identifying pain points around key moments.

Info-Tech Insight

To identify key moments, look for moments that can dramatically influence the quality of the journey or end the journey prematurely. To improve the experience, analyze the hidden needs and how they are or aren’t being met.

Stakeholder Journey Map: Opportunities

An opportunity is an investment into people, process, or technology for the purposes of building or improving a business capability and accomplishing a specific organizational objective.

An opportunity refers to the initiatives or projects that should address a stakeholder pain. Opportunities should also produce a demonstrable financial impact – whether direct (e.g. cost reduction) or indirect (e.g. risk mitigation) – and be evaluated based on how technically difficult it will be to implement.

Customer

Create new or different experiences for customers

Workforce

Generate new organizational skills or new ways of working

Operations

Improve responsiveness and resilience of operations

Innovation

Develop different products or services

Example of stakeholder journey output: Higher Education

Stakeholder: A faculty member
Journey: As an engineering faculty member, I want to design my curricula in a hybrid mode of delivery so that I can simulate in-classroom experiences

Journey activity Understanding the needs of students Construct the course material Deliver course material Conduct assessments Upload grades into system
Touch Points
  • Research (primary or secondary)
  • Teaching and learning center
  • Training on tools
  • Office suite
  • Video tools
  • PowerPoint live
  • Chat (live)
  • Forum (FAQ
  • Online assessment tool
  • ERP
  • LMS
Nature of Activity Non-routine cognitive Non-routine cognitive Non-routine cognitive Routine cognitive Routine Manual
Metrics
  • Time to completion
  • Time to completion
  • Student satisfaction
  • Student satisfaction
  • Student scores
Ken Moments & Pain Points Lack of centralized repository for research knowledge
  • Too many tools to use
  • Lack of Wi-Fi connectivity for students
  • Loss of social aspects
  • Adjusting to new forms of assessments
No existing critical pain points; process already automated
Opportunities
  • Centralized repository for research knowledge
  • Rationalize course creation tool set
  • Connectivity self-assessment/checklist
  • Forums for students
  • Implement an online proctoring tool

3.2 Stakeholder journey mapping

Objective: Conduct journey mapping exercise for existing value chains and for opportunities.

  1. Gather the working group and, with the journey mapping workbook, begin to map out the journey scenario statements identified in the value chain analysis. In total, there should be three journey maps:
    • Two for the existing value chains. Map out the specific point in the value chain that is to be transformed.
    • One for the opportunity value chain. Map out all parts of the value chain to be impacted by the new opportunity.
  2. Start with the journey activity and map out the steps involved to accomplish the goal of the stakeholder.
  3. Identify the touch points involved in the value chain.
  4. Categorize the nature of the activity in the journey activity.
  5. Identify metrics for the journey. How can we measure the success of the journey?
  6. Identify pain points and opportunities in parallel with one another.

Input

  • Value Chain Analysis
  • Stakeholder Personas
  • Journey Mapping Scenario

Output

  • Journey Map

Materials

  • Digital Strategy Workbook, Stakeholder Journey tab

Participants

  • Executives
  • Individuals in the organization that have a direct interaction with the stakeholders

Info-Tech Insight

Aim to build out 90% of the stakeholder journey map with the working team; validate the last 10% with the stakeholder themselves.

Step 3.3

Prioritize opportunities

Activities

  • Prioritize opportunities.

Transform stakeholder journeys

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Prioritize the opportunities that arose from the stakeholder journey mapping exercise.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

Prioritized opportunities

Prioritization of opportunities

Leverage design-thinking methods to prioritize opportunities.

As there may be many opportunities arising from the journey map, we need to prioritize ideas to identify which ones we can tackle first – or at all. Leverage IDEO’s design-thinking “three lenses of innovation” to support prioritization:

  • Feasibility: Do you currently have the capabilities to deliver on this opportunity? Do we have the right partners, resources, or technology?
  • Desirability: Is this a solution the stakeholder needs? Does it solve a known pain point?
  • Viability: Does this initiative have an impact on the financial revenue of the organization? Is it a profitable solution that will support the business model? Will this opportunity require a complex cost structure?
Opportunities Feasibility
(L/M/H)
Desirability
(L/M/H)
Viability
(L/M/H)
Centralized repository for research knowledge H H H
Rationalize course creation tool set H H H
Connectivity self-assessment/ checklist H M H
Forums for students M H H
Exam preparation (e.g. education or practice exams) H H H

3.3 Prioritization of opportunities

Objective: Prioritize opportunities for creating a roadmap.

  1. Gather the opportunities identified in the journey mapping exercise
  2. Assess the opportunities based on IDEO’s three lenses of innovation:
    • Feasibility: Do you currently have the capabilities to deliver on this opportunity? Do we have the right partners, resources, or technology?
    • Viability: Does this initiative have an impact on the financial revenue of the organization? Is it a profitable solution that will support the business model? Will this opportunity require a complex cost structure?
    • Desirability: Is this a solution the stakeholder needs? Does it solve a known pain point?
  3. Opportunities that score high in all three areas are prioritized for the roadmap.

Input

  • Opportunities From Journey Map

Output

  • Prioritized Opportunities

Materials

  • Digital Strategy Workbook

Participants

  • Executives

Step 3.4

Define digital goals

Activities

Transform stakeholder journeys

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Define a digital goal as it relates to the prioritized opportunities and the stakeholder journey map.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

Digital goals

Define digital goals

What digital goals can be derived from the stakeholder journey?

With the prioritized set of opportunities for each stakeholder journey, take a step back and assess what the sum of these opportunities mean for the journey. What is the overall goal or objective of these opportunities? How do these opportunities change or facilitate the journey experience? From here, identify a single goal statement for each stakeholder journey.

Stakeholder Scenario Prioritized Opportunities Goal
Faculty (Engineering) As a faculty (Engineering), I want to prepare and teach my course in a hybrid mode of delivery Centralized repository for research knowledge
Rationalized course creation tool set
Support hybrid course curricula development through value-driven toolsets and centralized knowledge

3.4 Define digital goals

Objective: Identify digital goals derived from the journey statements.

  1. With the prioritized set of opportunities for each stakeholder journey (the two existing journeys and one opportunity journey) take a step back and assess what the sum of these opportunities means for each journey.
    • What is the overall goal or objective of these opportunities?
    • How do these opportunities change or facilitate the journey experience?
  2. From here, identify a single goal for each stakeholder journey.

Input

  • Opportunities From Journey Map
  • Stakeholder Persona

Output

  • Digital Goals

Materials

  • Prioritization Matrix

Participants

  • Executives

Step 3.5

Breakdown opportunities into series of initiatives

Activities

  • Identify initiatives from the opportunities.

Transform stakeholder journeys

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Identify people, process, and technology initiatives for the opportunities identified.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • People, process, and technology initiatives

Break down opportunities into a series of initiatives

Brainstorm initiatives for each high-priority opportunity using the framework below. Describe each initiative as a plan or action to take to solve the problem.

Opportunity → Initiatives:

People: What initiatives are required to manage people, data, and other organizational factors that are impacted by this opportunity?

Process: What processes must be created, changed, or removed based on the data?

Technology: What systems are required to support this opportunity?

Break down opportunities into a series of initiatives

Initiatives
Centralized repository for research knowledge Technology Acquire and implement knowledge management application
People Train researchers on functionality
Process Periodically review and validate data entries into repository
Initiatives
Rationalize course creation toolset Technology Retire duplicate or under-used tools
People Provide training on tool types and align to user needs
Process Catalog software applications and tools across the organization
Identify under-used or duplicate tools/applications

Info-Tech Insight

Ruthlessly evaluate if a initiative should stand alone or if it can be rolled up with another. Fewer initiatives or opportunities increases focus and alignment, allowing for better communication.

3.5 Break down opportunities into initiatives

Objective: Break down opportunities into people, process, and technology initiatives.

  1. Split into groups and identify initiatives required to deliver on each opportunity. Document each initiative on sticky notes.
  2. Have each team answer the following questions to identify initiatives for the prioritized opportunities:
    • People: What initiatives are required to manage people, data, and other organizational factors that are impacted by this opportunity?
    • Process: What processes must be created, changed, or removed based on the data?
    • Technology: What systems are required to support this opportunity?
  3. Document findings in the Digital Strategy Workbook.

Input

  • Opportunities

Output

  • Opportunity initiatives categorized by people, process and technology

Materials

  • Digital Strategy Workbook

Participants

  • Executive team

Phase 4

Build a digital transformation roadmap

  • Detail initiatives
  • Build a unified roadmap roadmap

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

Build a digital transformation roadmap that captures people, process, and technology initiatives.

This phase involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes

  • Digital transformation roadmap

Step 4.1

Detail initiatives

Activities

  • Detail initiatives.

Build a digital transformation roadmap

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Detail initiatives for each priority initiative on your horizon.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • A roadmap for your digital business strategy.

Create initiative profiles for each high-priority initiative on your strategy

this image contains a screenshot of an example initiative profile

Step 4.2

Build a roadmap

Activities

  • Create a roadmap of initiatives.

Build a digital transformation roadmap

Info-Tech Insight

A roadmap that balances growth opportunities with business resilience will transform your organization for long-term success in the digital economy.

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Identify timing of initiatives and build a Gantt chart roadmap.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • A roadmap for your digital transformation and the journey canvases for each of the prioritized journeys.

Build a roadmap to visualize your key initiative plan

Visual representations of data are more compelling than text alone.

Develop a high-level document that travels with the initiative from inception through executive inquiry, project management, and finally execution.

A initiative needs to be discrete: able to be conceptualized and discussed as an independent item. Each initiative must have three characteristics:

  • Specific outcome: Describe an explicit change in the people, processes, or technology of the enterprise.
  • Target end date: When the described outcome will be in effect.
  • Owner: Who on the IT team is responsible for executing on the initiative.
this image contains screenshots of a sample roadmap for supporting hybrid course curricula development through value-driven toolsets and centralized knowledge.

4.2 Build your roadmap (30 minutes)

  1. For the Gantt chart:
    • Input the Roadmap Start Year date.
    • Change the months and year in the Gantt chart to reflect the same roadmap start year.
    • Populate the planned start and planned end date for the pre-populated list of high-priority initiatives in each category (people, process, and technology).

Input

  • Initiatives
  • Initiative start & end dates
  • Initiative category

Output

  • Digital strategy roadmap visual

Materials

  • Digital Strategy Workbook

Participants

  • Senior Executive

Learn more about project portfolio management strategy

Step 4.3

Create a refresh strategy

Activities

  • Refresh your strategy.

Build a digital transformation roadmap

Info-Tech Insight

A digital strategy is a design process, it must be revisited to pressure test and account for changes in the external environment.

This step will walk you through the following activities:

Detail a refresh strategy.

This step involves the following participants:

A cross-functional cohort across levels in the organization.

Outcomes of this step

  • Refresh strategy

Create a refresh strategy

It is important to dedicate time to your strategy throughout the year. Create a refresh plan to assess for the changing business context and its impact on the digital business strategy. Make sure the regular planning cycle is not the primary trigger for strategy review. Put a process in place to review the strategy and make your organization proactive. Start by examining the changes to the business context and how the effect would trickle downwards. It’s typical for organizations to build a refresh strategy around budget season and hold planning and touch points to accommodate budget approval time.
Example:

this image contains an example of a refresh strategy.

4.3 Create a refresh strategy (30 minutes)

  1. Work with the digital strategy creation team to identify the time frequencies the organization should consider to refresh the digital business strategy. Time frequencies can also be events that trigger a review (i.e. changing business goals). Record the different time frequencies in the Refresh of the Digital Business Strategy slide of the section.
  2. Discuss with the team the different audience members for each time frequency and the scope of the refresh. The scope represents what areas of the digital business strategy need to be re-examined and possibly changed.

Example:

Frequency Audience Scope Date
Annually Executive Leadership Resurvey, review/ validate, update schedule Pre-budget
Touch Point Executive Leadership Status update, risks/ constraints, priorities Oct 2021
Every Year (Re-build) Executive Leadership Full planning Jan 2022

Input

  • Digital Business Strategy

Output

  • Refresh Strategy

Materials

  • Digital Business Strategy Presentation Template
  • Collaboration/ Brainstorming Tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

Participants

  • Executive Leaders

Related Info-Tech Research

Design a Customer-Centric Digital Operating Model

Design a Customer-Centric Digital Operating Model

Establish a new way of working to deliver value on your digital transformation initiatives.

Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

Drive project throughput by throttling resource capacity.

Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

Innovation needs design thinking.

Digital Maturity Improvement Service

Digital Maturity Improvement Service

Prepare your organization for digital transformation – or risk falling behind.

Research Contributors and Experts

Kenneth McGee

this is a picture of Research Fellow, Kenneth McGee

Research Fellow
Info-Tech Research Group

Kenneth McGee is a Research Fellow within the CIO practice at Info-Tech Research Group and is focused on IT business and financial management issues, including IT Strategy, IT Budgets and Cost Management, Mergers & Acquisitions (M&A), and Digital Transformation. He also has extensive experience developing radical IT cost reduction and return-to-growth initiatives during and following financial recessions.

Ken works with CIOs and IT leaders to help establish twenty-first-century IT organizational charters, structures, and responsibilities. Activities include IT organizational design, IT budget creation, chargeback, IT strategy formulation, and determining the business value derived from IT solutions. Ken’s research has specialized in conducting interviews with CEOs of some of the world’s largest corporations. He has also interviewed a US Cabinet member and IT executives at the White

House. He has been a frequent keynote speaker at industry conventions, client sales kick-off meetings, and IT offsite planning sessions.

Ken obtained a BA in Cultural Anthropology from Dowling College, Oakdale, NY, and has pursued graduate studies at Polytechnic Institute (now part of NYU University). He has been an adjunct instructor at State University of New York, Westchester Community College.

Jack Hakimian

this is a picture of Vice President of the Info-Tech Research Group, Jack Hakimian

Vice President
Info-Tech Research Group

Jack has more than 25 years of technology and management consulting experience. He has served multi-billion dollar organizations in multiple industries including Financial Services and Telecommunications. Jack also served a number of large public sector institutions.

Prior to joining the Info-Tech Research Group, he worked for leading consulting players such as Accenture, Deloitte, EY, and IBM.

Jack led digital business strategy engagements as well as corporate strategy and M&A advisory services for clients across North America, Europe, the Middle East, and Africa. He is a seasoned technology consultant who has developed IT strategies and technology roadmaps, led large business transformations, established data governance programs, and managed the deployment of mission-critical CRM and ERP applications.

He is a frequent speaker and panelist at technology and innovation conferences and events and holds a Master’s degree in Computer Engineering as well as an MBA from the ESCP-EAP European School of Management.

Bibliography

Abrams, Karin von. “Global Ecommerce Forecast 2021.” eMarketer, Insider Intelligence, 7 July 2021. Web.

Christenson, Clayton. The Innovator's Dilemma: When New Technologies Cause Great Firms to Fail. Harvard Business School, 1997. Book.

Drucker, Peter F., and Joseph A. Maciariello. Innovation and Entrepreneurship. Routledge, 2015.

Eagar, Rick, David Boulton, and Camille Demyttenaere. “The Trends in Megatrends.” Arthur D Little, Prism, no. 2, 2014. Web.

Enright, Sara, and Allison Taylor. “The Future of Stakeholder Engagement.” The Business of a Better World, October 2016. Web.

Hatem, Louise, Daniel Ker, and John Mitchell. “A roadmap toward a common framework for measuring the digital economy.” Report for the G20 Digital Economy Task Force, OECD, 2020. Web.

Kemp, Simon. “Digital 2021 April Statshot Report.” DataReportal, Global Digital Insights, 21 Apr. 2021. Web.

Larson, Chris. “Disruptive Innovation Theory: 4 Key Concepts.” Business Insights, Harvard Business School, HBS Online, 15 Nov. 2016. Web.

McCann, Leah. “Barco's Virtual Classroom at UCL: A Case Study for the Future of All University Classrooms?” rAVe, 2 July 2020. Web.

Mochari, Ilan. “The Startup Buzzword Almost Everyone Uses Incorrectly.” Inc., 19 Nov. 2015. Web.

Osterwalder, Alexander, et al. Value Proposition Design. Wiley, 2014.

Reed, Laura. “Artificial Intelligence: Is Your Job at Risk?” Science Node, 9 August 2017.

Rodeck, David. “Alphabet Soup: Understanding the Shape of a Covid-19 Recession.” Forbes, 8 June 2020. Web.

Tapscott, Don. Wikinomics. Atlantic Books, 2014.

Taylor, Paul. “Don't Be A Dodo: Adapt to the Digital Economy.” Forbes, 27 Aug. 2015. Web.

The Business Research Company. "Wholesale Global Market Report 2021: COVID-19 Impact and Recovery to 2030." Research and Markets, January 2021. Press Release.

“Topic 1: Megatrends and Trends.” BeFore, 11 October 2018.

“Updated Digital Economy Estimates – June 2021.” Bureau of Economic Analysis, June 2021. Web.

Williamson, J. N. The Leader Manager. John Wiley & Sons, 1984.

Establish Effective Security Governance & Management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}380|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $63,532 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
  • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
  • The security team is unsure of governance needs and how to manage them.
  • There is a lack of alignment between key stakeholder groups
  • There are misunderstandings related to the role of policy and process.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Good governance stems from a deep understanding of how stakeholder groups interact with each other and their respective accountabilities and responsibilities. Without these things, organizational functions tend to interfere with each other, blurring the lines between governance and management and promoting ad–hoc decision making that undermines governance.

Impact and Result

  • The first phase of this project will help you establish or refine your security governance and management by determining the accountabilities, responsibilities, and key interactions of your stake holder groups.
  • In phase two, the project will guide you through the implementation of essential governance processes: setting up a steering committee, determining risk appetite, and developing a policy exception-handling process.

Establish Effective Security Governance & Management Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Establish Effective Security Governance and Management Deck – A step-by-step guide to help you establish or refine the governance model for your security program.

This storyboard will take you through the steps to develop a security governance and management model and implement essential governance processes.

  • Establish Effective Security Governance & Management – Phases 1-2

2. Design Your Governance Model – A security governance and management model to track accountabilities, responsibilities, stakeholder interactions, and the implementation of key governance processes.

This tool will help you determine governance and management accountabilities and responsibilities and use them to build a visual governance and management model.

  • Security Governance Model Templates (Visio)
  • Security Governance Model Templates (PDF)
  • Security Governance Model Tool

3. Organizational Structure Template – A tool to address structural issues that may affect your new governance and management model.

This template will help you to implement or revise your organizational structure.

  • Security Governance Organizational Structure Template

4. Information Security Steering Committee Charter & RACI – Templates to formalize the role of your steering committee and the oversight it will provide.

These templates will help you determine the role a steering committee will play in your governance and management model.

  • Information Security Steering Committee Charter
  • Information Security Steering Committee RACI Chart

5. Security Policy Lifecycle Template – A template to help you model your policy lifecycle.

Once this governing document is customized, ensure the appropriate security policies are developed as well.

  • Security Policy Lifecycle Template

6. Security Policy Exception Approval Process Templates – Templates to establish an approval process for policy exceptions and bolster policy governance and risk management.

These templates will serve as the foundation of your security policy exception approval processes.

  • Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow (Visio)
  • Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow (PDF)
  • Policy Exception Tracker
  • Information Security Policy Exception Request Form

Infographic

Further reading

Establish Effective Security Governance & Management

The key is in stakeholder interactions, not policy and process.

Analyst Perspective

It's about stakeholder interactions, not policy and process.

Many security leaders complain about a lack of governance and management in their organizations. They have policies and processes but find neither have had the expected impact and that the organization is teetering on the edge of lawlessness, with stakeholder groups operating in ways that interfere with each other (usually due to poorly defined accountabilities).

Among the most common examples is security's relationship to the business. When these groups don't align, they tend to see each other as adversaries and make decisions in line with their respective positions: security endorses one standard, the business adopts another.

The consequences of this are vast. Such an organization is effectively opposed to itself. No wonder policy and process have not resolved the issue.

At a practical level, good governance stems from understanding how different stakeholder groups interact, providing inputs and outputs to each other and modeling who is accountable for what. But this implied accountability model needs to be formalized (perhaps even modified) before governance can help all stakeholder groups operate as strategic partners with clearly defined roles, responsibilities, and decision-making power. Only when policies and processes reflect this will they serve as effective tools to support governance.

Logan Rohde, Senior Research Analyst, Security & Privacy

Logan Rohde
Senior Research Analyst, Security & Privacy
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
Ineffective governance and management processes, if they are adopted at all, can lead to:
  • An organization unsure of governance needs and how to manage them.
  • A lack of alignment between key stakeholder groups.
  • Misunderstandings related to the role of policy and process.
Most governance and management initiatives stumble because they do not address governance as a set of interactions and influences that stakeholders have with and over each other, seeing it instead as policy, process, and risk management. Challenges include:
  • Senior management disinterest
  • Stakeholders operating in silos
  • Separating governance from management
You will be able to establish a robust governance model to support the current and future state of your organization by accounting for these three essential parts:
  1. Determine governance accountabilities.
  2. Define management responsibilities.
  3. Model stakeholders' interactions, inputs, and outputs as part of business and security operations.

Info-Tech Insight
Good governance stems from a deep understanding of how stakeholder groups interact with each other and their respective accountabilities and responsibilities. Without these things, organizational functions tend to interfere with each other, blurring the lines between governance and management and promoting ad hoc decision making that undermines governance.

Your challenge

This research is designed to help organizations who need to:

  • Establish security governance from scratch.
  • Improve security governance despite a lack of cooperation from the business.
  • Determine the accountabilities and responsibilities of each stakeholder group.

This blueprint will solve the above challenges by helping you model your organization's governance structure and implement processes to support the essential governance areas: policy, risk, and performance metrics.

Percentage of organizations that have yet to fully advance to a maturity-based approach to security

70%

Source: McKinsey, 2021

Common obstacles

These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

  • The business does not wish to be governed and does not seek to align with security on the basis of risk.
  • Various stakeholder groups essentially govern themselves, causing business functions to interfere with each other.
  • Security teams struggle to differentiate between governance and management and the purpose of each.

Early adopter infrastructure

63%
Security leaders not reporting to the board about risk or incident detection and prevention.
Source: LogRhythm, 2021

46%
Those who report that senior leadership is confident cybersecurity leaders understand business goals.
Source: LogRhythm, 2021

Governance isn't just policy and process

Governance is often mistaken for an organization's formalized policies and processes. While both are important governance supports, they do not provide governance in and of themselves.

For governance to work well, an organization needs to understand how stakeholder groups interact with each other. What inputs and outputs do they provide? Who is accountable? Who is responsible? These are the questions one needs to ask before designing a governance structure. Failing to account for any of these three elements tends to result in overlap, inefficiency, and a lack of accountability, creating flawed governance.

Separate governance from management

Oversight versus operations

  • COBIT emphasizes the importance of separating governance from management. These are complementary functions, but they refer to different parts of organizational operation.
  • Governance provides a decision-making apparatus based on predetermined requirements to ensure smooth operations. It is used to provide oversight and direction and hinges on established accountabilities
  • Simply put, governance refers to what an organization is and is not willing to permit in day-to-day operations, and it tends to make its presence known via the key areas of risk appetite, formal policy and process, and exception handling.
    • Note: These key areas do not provide governance in and of themselves. Rather, governance emerges in accordance with the decisions an organization has made regarding these areas. Sometimes, however, these "decisions" have not been formally or consciously made and the current state of the organization's operations becomes the default - even when it is not working well.
  • Management, by contrast, is concerned with executing business processes in accordance with the governance model, essentially, governance provides guidance for how to make decisions during daily management.

"Information security governance is the guiding hand that organizes and directs risk mitigation efforts into a business-aligned strategy for the entire organization."

Steve Durbin,
Chief Executive,
Information Security Forum, Forbes, 2023

Models for governance and management

Info-Tech's Governance and Management research uses the logic of COBIT's governance and management framework but distills this guidance into a practical, easy-to-implement series of steps, moving beyond the rudimentary logic of COBIT to provide an actionable and personalized governance model.

Governance Cycle

Management Cycle

Clear accountabilities and responsibilities

Complementary frameworks to simplify governance and management

The distinction that COBIT draws between governance and management is roughly equivalent to that of accountability and responsibility, as seen in the RACI* model.

There can be several stakeholders responsible for something, but only one party can be accountable.

Use this guidance to help determine the accountabilities and responsibilities of your governance and management model.

*Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed

COBIT RACI chart

Security governance framework

A security governance framework is a system that will design structures, processes, accountability definitions, and membership assignments that lead the security department toward optimal results for the business.

Governance is performed in three ways:

1 Evaluate 2 Direct 3 Monitor
For governance to be effective it must account for stakeholder interests and business needs. Determining what these are is the vital first step. Governance is used to determine how things should be done within an organization. It sets standards and provides oversight so decisions can be made during day-to-day management. Governance needs change and inefficiencies need to be revised. Therefore, monitoring key performance indicators is an essential step to course correct as organizational needs evolve.

"Governance specifies the accountability framework and provides oversight to ensure that risks are adequately mitigated, while management ensures that controls are implemented to mitigate risks. Management recommends security strategies. Governance ensures that security strategies are aligned with business objectives and consistent with regulations."
- EDUCAUSE

Establish Effective Security Governance & Management

SMART metrics

Suggested targets to measure success

Specific

Measurable

Achievable

Relevant

Time-Bound

Examples
Security's risk analyses will be included as part of the business decision-making process within three months after completing the governance initiative.
Increase rate of security risk analysis using risk appetite within three months of project completion.
Have stakeholder engagement supply input into security risk-management decisions within three months of completing phase one of blueprint.
Reduce time to approve policy exceptions by 25%.
Reduce security risk related to policy non-compliance by 50% within one year.
Develop five KPIs to measure progress of governance and management within three months of completing blueprint.

Info-Tech's methodology for security governance and management

1. Design Your Governance Model 2. Implement Essential Governance Processes
Phase Steps
  1. Evaluate
  2. Direct
  3. Monitor
  1. Implement Oversight
  2. Set Risk Appetite
  3. Implement Policy Lifecycle
Phase Outcomes
  • Defined governance accountabilities
  • Defined management responsibilities
  • Record of key stakeholder interactions
  • Visual governance model
  • Key performance indicators (KPIs)
  • Established steering committee
  • Qualitative risk-appetite statements
  • Policy lifecycle
  • Policy exceptions-handling process

Governance starts with mapping stakeholder inputs, outputs, and throughputs

The key is in stakeholder interactions, not policy and process
Good governance stems from a deep understanding of how stakeholder groups interact with each other and their respective accountabilities and responsibilities. Without these things, organizational functions tend to interfere with each other, blurring the lines between governance and management and promoting ad hoc decision making that undermines governance.

Policy, process, and org. charts support governance but do not produce it on their own
To be effective, these things need to be developed with the accountabilities and influence of the organizational functions that produce them.

A lack of business alignment does not mean you're doomed to fail
While the highest levels of governance maturity depend on strong security-business alignment, there are still tactics one can use to improve governance.

All organizations have governance
Sometimes it is poorly defined, ineffective, and occurs in the same place as management, but it exists at some level, acting as the decision-making apparatus for an organization (i.e. what can and cannot occur).

Risk tolerances are variable across lines of business
This can lead to misalignments between security and the business, as each may have their own tolerance for particular risks. The remedy is to understand the risk appetite of the business and allow this to inform security risk management decisions.

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

Security Governance Model Tool

Security Governance Organizational Structure Template

Information Security Steering Committee Charter & RACI

Policy Exceptions-Handling Workflow

Policy Exception Tracker and Request Form

Key deliverable:

Security Governance Model

By the end of this blueprint, you will have created a personalized governance model to map your stakeholders' accountabilities, responsibilities, and key interactions.

Blueprint benefits

IT Benefits Business Benefits
  • Correct any overlapping and mismanaged security processes by assigning accountabilities and responsibilities to each stakeholder group.
  • Improve efficiency and effectiveness of the security program by separating governance from management.
  • Determine necessary inputs and outputs from stakeholder interactions to ensure the governance model functions as intended.
  • Improved support of business goals through security-business alignment.
  • Better risk management by defining risk appetite with security.
  • Increased stakeholder satisfaction via a governance model designed to meet their needs.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
"Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

Guided Implementation

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

Phase 1 Phase 2
Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges. Call #2: Determine governance requirements.
Call #3: Review governance model.
Call #4: Determine KPIs.
Call #5: Stand up steering committee.
Call #6: Set risk appetite.
Call #7: Establish policy lifecycle.
Call #8: Revise exception-handing process.

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

A typical GI is 4 to 8 calls over the course of 2 to 3 months.

Workshop Overview

Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
Activities Evaluate Direct Monitor Implement Essential Governance Processes Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)
1.1 Prioritize governance accountabilities
1.2 Prioritize management responsibilities
1.3 Evaluate organizational structure
2.1 Align with business
2.2 Build security governance and management model
2.3 Visualize security governance and management model
3.1 Develop governance and management KPIs 4.1 Draft steering committee charter
4.2 Complete steering committee RACI
4.3 Draft qualitative risk statements
4.4 Define policy management lifecycle
4.5 Establish policy exception approval process
5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps
Deliverables
  1. Prioritized list of accountabilities and responsibilities
  2. Revised organizational structure
  1. Security governance and management model
  1. Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool
  2. KPI Development Worksheet
  1. Steering committee charter and RACI
  2. Risk-appetite statements
  3. Policy management lifecycle
  4. Policy exception approval process

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Customize your journey

The security governance and management blueprint pairs well with security design and security strategy.

  • The governance and management model you create in this blueprint will inform efforts to improve security, like revisiting security program design and your security strategy.
  • Work with your member services director, executive advisor, or technical counselor to scope the journey you need. They will work with you to align the subject matter experts to support your roadmap and workshops.

Workshop Day 1 and Day 2
Security Governance and Management

Workshop Day 3 and Day 4
Security Strategy Gap Analysis or Security Program Design Factors

Phase 1

Design Your Governance Model

Phase 1
1.1 Evaluate
1.2 Direct
1.3 Monitor

Phase 2
2.1 Implement Oversight
2.2 Set Risk Appetite
2.3 Implement Policy lifecycle

Establish Security Governance & Management

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Prioritize governance accountabilities
  • Prioritize management responsibilities
  • Evaluate current organizational structure
  • Align with the business
  • Build security governance and management model
  • Finalize governance and management model
  • Develop governance and management KPIs

This phase involves the following participants:

  • CISO
  • CIO
  • Business representative

Step 1.1

Evaluate

Activities
1.1.1 Prioritize governance accountabilities
1.1.2 Prioritize management responsibilities
1.1.3 Evaluate current organizational structure

This step involves the following participants:

  • CISO
  • CIO
  • Business representative

Outcomes of this step

  • Defined governance accountabilities
  • Defined management responsibilities

Design Your Governance Model

Step 1.1 > Step 1.2 > Step 1.3

Evaluate: Getting started

Element Questions
Compliance What voluntary or mandatory standards must be represented in my governance model?
Legal What laws are the organization accountable to? Who is the accountable party?
Business needs What does the business need to operate? What sort of informational or operational flows need to be accounted for?
Culture How does the business operate? Are departments siloed or cooperative? Where does security fit in?
Decision-making process How are decisions made? Who is involved? What information needs to be available to do so?
Willingness to be governed Is the organization adverse to formal governance mechanisms? Are there any opportunities to improve alignment with the business?
Relevant trends Are there recent developments (e.g. new privacy laws) that are likely to affect the organization in the future? Will this complicate or simplify governance modeling efforts?
Stakeholder interests Who are the internal and external stakeholders that need to be represented in the governance model?

The above is a summary of COBIT 2019 EDM01.01 Evaluate the governance system, along with Info-Tech-recommended questions to contextualize each element for your organization.

1.1.1 Prioritize governance accountabilities

1-2 hours

Using the example on the next slide, complete the following steps.

  1. Download Info-Tech's Security Governance Model Tool using the link below and customize the stakeholder groups on tab 1 to reflect the makeup of your organization.
  2. Using the previous slide as a guide, evaluate your organization's internal and external pressures and discuss their possible impacts your governance and management model.
  3. Complete tab 2, Governance Prioritization, indicating your response to each prompt using the drop-down menus. The tool will score your responses and provide you with a prioritized list of governance accountabilities based on greatest need on tab 4, Governance Model Builder.
  4. Review the list and make any desired modifications to the prompts on tab 2 and then move on to Activity 1.1.2. (We will return to tab 4 in Step 2.1.) Remember to evaluate the results against the internal/external pressure analysis to ensure these details are reflected.

Download the Security Governance Model Tool

Input Output
  • List of governance pressures
  • Prioritized list of governance accountabilities
  • Materials Participants
    • Security Governance Model Tool
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Security Operations
    • Business representative (optional)

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool

    Tabs 2 and 3

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool

    1.1.2 Prioritize management responsibilities

    1 hours

    Using the examples on the previous slide, complete the following steps.

    1. Complete tab 3, Management Prioritization, indicating your response to each prompt using the drop-down menus. The tool will score your responses and provide you with a prioritized list of governance accountabilities based on greatest need on tab 4, Governance Model Builder.
    2. Review the list and make any desired modifications to the prompts on tab 3 and then move on to Activity 1.1.3. (We will return to tab 4 in Step 2.1.) Remember to evaluate the results against the internal/external pressure analysis to ensure these details are reflected.

    Download Security Governance Model Tool

    InputOutput
    • Pressure analysis
    • Prioritized list of management responsibilities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Governance Model Tool
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative (optional)

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool

    Tab 4

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool Tab 4

    1.1.3 Evaluate current organizational structure

    1-3 hours

    1. Download and modify Info-Tech's Security Governance Organizational Structure Template to reflect the reporting structure at your organization. If such a document already exists, simply review it and move on to the next step below.
    2. Determine if the current organizational structure will negatively affect your ability to pursue the items in your prioritized lists from governance accountabilities and management responsibilities (e.g. conflicts of interest related to oversight or reporting), and discuss the feasibility of changing the current governance structure.
    3. Record these recommended changes and any other key points you'd like the business or other stakeholders to be aware of. We'll use this information in the business alignment exercise in Step 2.1

    Download the Security Governance Organizational Structure Template

    Input Output
    • Prioritized lists of governance accountabilities and management responsibilities
    • Updated organizational structure
    Materials Participants
    • Security Governance Organizational Structure Template
    • CISO

    Info-Tech resources

    Locate structural problems in advance

    • If you do not already have a diagram of your organization's reporting structure, use this template to create one. Examples are provided for high, medium, and low maturity.
    • The existing reporting structure will likely affect the governance model you create, as it may not be feasible to assign certain governance accountabilities and management responsibilities to certain stakeholders.
      • For example, it may make sense for the head of security to approve the security budget, but if they report to a CIO with greater authority that accountability will likely have to sit with the CIO instead.

    Download the Security Governance Organizational Structure Template

    Security Governance Organizational Structure

    Step 1.2

    Direct

    Activities
    1.2.1 Align with the business
    1.2.2 Build security governance and management model
    1.2.3 Finalize governance and management model

    This step involves the following participants:

    CISO

    CIO

    Business representative

    Outcomes of this step

    • Record of key stakeholder interactions
    • Visual governance model

    Design Your Governance Model

    Step 1.1 > Step 1.2 > Step 1.3

    Direct: Getting started

    Element Questions
    Business alignment Do we have a full understanding of the business's approach to risk and security's role to support business objectives?
    Organizational security process How well do our current processes work? Are we missing any key processes?
    Steering committee Will we use a dedicated steering committee to oversee security governance, or will another stakeholder assume this role?
    Security awareness Does the organization have a strong security culture? Does an effort need to be made to educate stakeholder groups on the role of security in the organization?
    Roles and responsibilities Does the organization use RACI charts or another system to define roles and document duties?
    Communication flows Do we have a good understanding of how information flows between stakeholder groups? Are there any gaps that need to be addressed (e.g. regular board reporting)?

    The above is a summary of COBIT 2019 EDM01.02 Direct the governance system, along with Info-Tech-recommended questions to contextualize each element for your organization.

    Embed security governance within enterprise governance

    Design structures, processes, authority definitions, and steering committee assignments to drive optimal business results.

    Embed security governance within enterprise governance

    1.2.1 Align with the business

    1-3 hours

    1. Request a meeting with the business to present your findings from the previous activities in Step 1.1. As you prepare for the meeting, remember to following points:
    • The goal here is to align, not to command. You want the business to see the security team as a strategic ally that supports the pursuit of business goals.
    • Make recommendations and explain any security risks associated with the direction the business wants to take, but the goal is not to strongarm the business into adopting your perspective.
    • Above all, listen to the business to learn more about how they relate to governance and what their priorities are. This will help you adapt your governance model to better support business needs.

    Info-Tech Insight
    A lack of business participation does not mean your governance initiative is doomed. From this lack, we can still infer their attitudes toward security governance, and we can account for this in our governance model. This may limit the maturity your program can reach, but it doesn't prevent improvements from being made to your current security governance.

    InputOutput
    • Prioritized lists of governance accountabilities and management responsibilities
    • Current organizational structure
    • List of recommendations or proposed changes
    • Security governance and management target state definition
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Means to capture key points of the conversation (e.g. notebook, recorded meeting)
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative

    1.2.2 Build security governance and management model

    1-2 hours

    Using the example on the next slide, complete the following steps:

    1. On tab 4, review the prioritized lists for governance accountabilities and management responsibilities and begin assigning them to the appropriate stakeholder groups.
    • Remember: Responsibilities can be assigned to up to four stakeholders, but there can be only one party listed as accountable.
  • Use the drop-down menus to record any interactions that occur between the groups (e.g. repots to, appoints, approves, oversees).
    • Documenting these interactions will help you ensure your governance program accounts for inputs and outputs that are required by, or that otherwise affect, your various stakeholder groups.

    Note: You may wish to review Info-Tech's governance model templates before completing this activity to get an idea of what you'll be working toward in this step. See slides 37-38.

    Download Security Governance Model Tool

    InputOutput
    • Prioritized lists of governance accountabilities and management responsibilities
    • Target state from business alignment exercise
    • Summary of governance model
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Governance Model Tool
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative (optional)

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool

    Tab 5

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool Tab 5

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool continued

    Tab 6

    Security Governance and Management Model Tool Tab 6

    1.2.3 Visualize your security governance and management model

    1-2 hours

    1. Download the Security Governance Model Templates using the link below and determine which of the three example models most closely resembles your own.
    2. Once you have chosen an example to work from, begin customizing it to reflect the governance model completed in Activity 1.2.2. See next slide for example.

    Note: You do not have to use these templates. If you prefer, you can use them as inspiration and design your own model.

    Download Security Governance Model Templates

    InputOutput
    • Results of Activity 2.1.2
    • Security governance and management model diagram
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Governance Model Templates
    • CISO

    Customize the template

    Customize the template

    Step 1.3

    Monitor

    Activities
    1.3.1 Develop governance and management KPIs

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Security team
    • Business representative

    Outcomes of this step

    Key performance indicators

    Design Your Governance Model

    Step 1.1 > Step 1.2 > Step 1.3

    Monitor: Getting started

    Element Questions
    Metrics Does the organization have a well-developed metrics program or will this need to be taken up as a separate effort? Have we considered what outcomes we are hoping to see as a result of implementing a new governance and management model?
    Existing and emerging threats What has changed or is likely to change in the future that may destabilize our governance program? What do we need to do to mitigate any security risks to our organizational governance and management?

    The above is a summary of COBIT 2019 EDM01.03 Monitor the governance system, along with Info-Tech-recommended questions to contextualize each element for your organization.

    1.3.1 Develop governance and management KPIs

    1-2 hours

    This activity is meant to provide a starting point for key governance metrics. To develop a comprehensive metrics program, see Info-Tech's Build a Security Metrics Program to Drive Maturity blueprint.

    1. Create a list of four to six outcomes you'd like to see as the result of your new governance model. Be as specific as you can; the better defied the outcome, the easier it will be to determine suitable KPI.
    2. For each desired outcome, determine what would best indicate that progress is being made toward that state.
    • Desired outcome: security team is consulted before critical business decisions are made.
    • Success criteria: the business evaluates Security's recommendations before starting new projects
    • Possible KPI: % of critical business decisions made with security consultation
    • See next slide for additional examples

    Note: Try to phrase each KPI using percents, which helps to add context to the metric and will make it easier to explain when reporting metrics in the future.

    Input Output
    • List of desired outcomes after new governance model implemented
    • Set of key performance indicators
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Security team
    • Business representative (optional)

    Example KPIs

    Desired Outcome Success Criteria Possible KPI
    Security team is consulted before critical business decisions are made The business evaluates Security's recommendations before starting new projects % of critical business decisions with Security consultation
    Greater alignment over risk appetite The business does not take on initiatives with excessive security risks % of incidents stemming from not following Security's risk management recommendations
    Reduced number of policy exceptions Policy exceptions are only granted when a clear need is present and a formal process is followed % of incidents stemming from policy exceptions
    Improved policy adherence Policies are understood and followed throughout the organization % of incidents stemming from policy violations

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Improved business alignment
    2. Developing formal process to manage security risks
    3. Separating governance from management
    Metric Current Goal
    % of critical business decisions with Security consultation 20% 100%
    % of incidents stemming from not following Security's risk management recommendations 65% 0%
    % of incidents stemming from policy exceptions 35% 5%
    % of incidents stemming from policy violations 40% 5%
    % of ad hoc decisions made (i.e. not accounted for by governance model 85% 5%
    % of accepted security risks evaluated against risk appetite 50% 100%
    % of deferred steering committee decisions (i.e. decisions not made ASAP after issue arises) 50% 5%
    % of policies approved within target window (e.g. 1 month) 20% 100%

    Phase 2

    Implement Essential Governance Processes

    Phase 1
    1.1 Evaluate
    1.2 Direct
    1.3 Monitor

    Phase 2
    2.1 Implement Oversight
    2.2 Set Risk Appetite
    2.3 Implement Policy Lifecycle

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Draft Steering Committee Charter
    • Complete Steering Committee RACI
    • Draft qualitative risk statements
    • Model policy lifecycle
    • Establish exceptions-handling process

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CRO
    • CIO
    • HR
    • Internal Audit
    • Business representative
    • Legal

    Establish Security Governance & Management

    Step 2.1

    Implement Oversight

    Activities
    2.1.1 Draft steering committee charter
    2.1.2 Complete steering committee RACI

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CRO
    • CIO
    • HR
    • Internal Audit
    • Business representative
    • Legal

    Outcomes of this step

    Steering Committee Charter and RACI

    Implement Essential Governance Processes

    Step 2.1 > Step 2.2 > Step 2.3

    2.1.1 Draft steering committee charter

    1-3 hours

    This activity is meant to provide a starting point for your steering committee. If a more comprehensive approach is desired, see Info-Tech's Improve Security Governance With a Security Steering Committee blueprint.

    1. Download the template using the link below and review the various sections of the document
    2. Review slides 50-51 to help determine the scope of your steering committee's role. Discuss with other stakeholder groups, as necessary, to determine the steering committee's duties, how often the group will meet, and what the regular meeting agenda will be.
    3. Customize the template to suit your organization's needs.

    Download Information Security Steering Committee Charter

    Input Output
    • N/A
    • Steering Committee
    Materials Participants
    • Information Security Steering Committee Charter Template
    • CISO
    • CRO
    • CIO
    • HR
    • Internal Audit
    • Business representative
    • Legal

    Steering committee membership

    Representation is key, but don't try to please everyone

    • For your steering committee to be effective, it should include representatives from across the organization. However, it is important not to overextend committee membership, which can interfere with decision making.
    • Participants should be selected based on the identified responsibilities of the security steering committee, and the number of people should be appropriate to the size and complexity of the organization.

    Example steering committee

    CISO
    CRO
    Internal Audit
    CIO
    Business Leaders
    HR
    Legal

    Download Information Security Steering Committee Charter

    Typical steering committee duties

    Strategic Oversight Policy Governance
    • Provide oversight and ensure alignment between information security governance and company objectives.
    • Assess the adequacy of resources and funding to sustain and advance successful security programs and practices for identifying, assessing, and mitigating cybersecurity risks across all business functions.
    • Review control audit reports and resulting remediation plans to ensure business alignment
    • Review the company's cyber insurance policies to ensure appropriate coverage.
    • Provide recommendations, based on security best practices, for significant technology investments.
    • Review policy-exception requests to determine if potential security risks can be accepted or if a workaround exists.
    • Assess the ramifications of updates to policies and standards.
    • Establish standards and procedures for escalating significant security incidents to the board, other steering committees, government agencies, and law enforcement, as appropriate.

    Typical steering committee duties

    Risk Governance Monitoring and Reporting
    • Review and approve the company's information risk governance structure.
    • Assess the company's high-risk information assets and coordinate planning to address information privacy and security needs.
    • Provide input to executive management regarding the enterprise's information security risk tolerance.
    • Review the company's cyber-response preparedness, incident response plans, and disaster recovery capabilities as applicable to the organization's information security strategy.
    • Promote an open discussion regarding information risk and integrate information risk management into the enterprise's objectives.
    • Receive periodic reports and coordinate with management on the metrics used to measure, monitor, and manage cyber risks posed to the company and to review periodic reports on selected security risk topics as the committee deems appropriate.
    • Monitor and evaluate the quality and effectiveness of the company's technology security, capabilities for disaster recovery, data protection, cyber threat detection, and cyber incident response, and management of technology-related compliance risks.

    2.1.2 Complete steering committee RACI

    1-3 hours

    1. Download the RACI template and review the membership roles. Customize the template to match the makeup of your steering committee.
    2. Read through each task in the left-hand column and determine who will be involved:
    • R - responsible: the person doing the action (can be multiple)
    • A - accountable: the owner of the task, usually a department head who delegates the execution of the task (only assigned to one stakeholder)
    • C - consulted: stakeholders that offer some kind of guidance, advice, or recommendation (can be multiple)
    • I - Informed: stakeholders that receive status updates about the task (can be multiple)

    Note: All tasks must have accountability and responsibility assigned (sometimes a single stakeholder is accountable and responsible). However, not all tasks will have someone consulted or informed.

    Download Information Security Steering Committee RACI Chart

    InputOutput
    • N/A
    • Defined roles and responsibilities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • RACI Chart
    • CISO
    • CRO
    • CIO
    • HR
    • Internal Audit
    • Business representative
    • Legal

    Step 2.2

    Set Risk Appetite

    Activities
    2.2.1 Draft qualitative risk statements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative

    Outcomes of this step

    Qualitative risk appetite

    Implement Essential Governance Processes

    Step 2.1 > Step 2.2 > Step 2.3

    Know your appetite for risk

    What is an organizational risk appetite?

    Setting risk appetite is a key governance function, as it structures how your organization will deal with the risks it will inevitably face - when they can be accepted, when they need to be mitigated, and when they must be rejected entirely.

    It is important to note that risk appetite and risk tolerance are not the same. Risk appetite refers to the amount of risk the organization is willing to accept as part of doing business, whereas risk tolerance has more to do with individual risks affecting one or more lines of business that exceed that appetite. Such risks are often tolerated as individual cases that can be mitigated to an acceptable level of risk even though it exceeds the risk-appetite threshold.

    Chart Risk Appetite

    2.1.2 Draft qualitative risk-appetite statements

    1-3 hours

    This activity is meant to provide a starting point for risk governance. To develop a comprehensive risk-management program, see Info-Tech's Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program blueprint.

    1. Draft statements that express your attitudes toward the kinds of risks your organization faces. The point is to set boundaries to better understand when risk mitigation may be necessary.
    2. Examples:
    • We will not accept risks that may cause us to violate SLAs.
    • We will avoid risks that may prevent the organization from operating normally.
    • We will not accept risks that may result in exposure of confidential information.
    • We will not accept risks that may cause significant brand damage.
    • We will not accept risks that pose undue risk to human life or safety.
    InputOutput
    • Definitions for high, medium, low impact and frequency
    • Set of qualitative risk-appetite statements
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • CISO
    • CIO
    • Business representative

    Step 2.3

    Implement Policy Lifecycle

    Activities
    2.3.1 Model your policy lifecycle
    2.3.2 Establish exception-approval process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    Policy lifecycle

    Exceptions-handling process

    Implement Essential Governance Processes

    Step 2.1 > Step 2.2 > Step 2.3

    2.3.1 Model your policy lifecycle

    1-3 hours

    This activity is meant to provide a starting point for policy governance. To develop a comprehensive policy-management program, see Info-Tech's Develop and Deploy Security Policies blueprint.

    1. Review the sections within the Security Policy Lifecycle Template and delete any sections or subsections that do not apply to your organization.
    2. As necessary, modify the lifecycle and receive approved sign-off by your organization's leadership.
    3. Solicit feedback from stakeholders, specifically, IT department management and business stakeholders.

    Download the Security Policy Lifecycle Template

    InputOutput
    • N/A
    • Policy lifecycle
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Policy Lifecycle Template
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Develop the security policy lifecycle

    The security policy lifecycle is an integral component of the security policy program and adds value by:

    • Setting out a roadmap to define needs, develop required documentation, and implement, communicate, and measure your policy program.
    • Defining roles and responsibilities for the security policy suite.
    • Aligning the business goals, security program goals, and policy objectives.

    Security Policy Lifecycle

    Diagram inspired by: ComplianceBridge, 2021

    2.3.2 Establish exception-approval process

    1-3 hours

    1. Download the Security Policy Exception Approval Template and customize it to match your exception-handling process. Be sure to account for the recommendations on the next slide.
    2. Use the Policy Exception Tracker to record and monitor granted exceptions.

    Download the Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow

    Download the Security Policy Exception Tracker

    Input Output
    • Answers to questions provided
    • Exception-handling process
    Materials Participants
    • Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow
    • Security Policy Exception Tracker
    • CISO
    • CIO

    Determine criteria to grant policy exception

    A key part of security risk and policy governance

    • Not all policies can be complied with all the time. As technology and business needs change, sometimes exceptions must be granted for operations to continue smoothly.
    • Exceptions can be either short or long term.
      • Short-term exceptions are often granted until a particular security gap can be closed, such as allowing staff to temporarily use new laptops that have yet to receive a required VPN for remote access.
      • Long-term exceptions usually occur when closing the gap entirely is not feasible. For example, a legacy system may be unable to meet evolving security standards, but there is no room in the budget to replace it.
    • Having a formal approval process for exceptions and a record of granted exceptions will help you to stay on top of security risk governance.

    Before granting an exception:

    1. Assess security risks associated with doing so: are they acceptable?
    2. Look for another way to resolve the issue: is a suitable workaround possible?
    3. Evaluate mitigating controls: is it possible to provide an equivalent level of security via other means?
    4. Assign risk ownership: who will be accountable if an incident arises from the exception?
    5. Determine appeals process: when disagreements arise, how will the final decision be made?

    Sources: University of Virginia; CIS

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You have now established a formal governance model for your organization - congratulations! Building this model and determining stakeholders' accountabilities and responsibilities is a big step.

    Remember to continue to use the evaluate-direct-monitor framework to make sure your governance model evolves as organizational governance matures and priorities shift.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Build Governance Model
    Build a customized security governance model for your organization.

    Develop policy lifecycle
    Develop a policy lifecycle and exceptions-handling process.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Design a Business-Focused Security Program

    Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program

    Research contributors and experts

    Michelle Tran, Consulting Industry

    Michelle Tran
    Consulting Industry

    One anonymous contributor

    Bibliography

    Durbin, Steve. "Achieving The Five Levels Of Information Security Governance." Forbes, 4 Apr. 2023. Accessed 4 Apr. 2023.

    Eiden, Kevin, et al. "Organizational Cyber Maturity: A Survey of Industries." McKinsey & Company, 4 Aug. 2021. Accessed 25 Apr. 2023.

    "Information Security Exception Policy." Center for Internet Security, 2020. Accessed 14 Apr. 2023.

    "Information Security Governance." EDUCAUSE, n.d. Accessed 27 Apr. 2023.

    ISACA. COBIT 2019 Framework: Governance and Management Objectives. GF Books, 2018.

    Policies & Procedures Team. "Your Policy for Policies: Creating a Policy Management Framework." ComplianceBridge, 30 Apr. 2021. Accessed 27 Apr. 2023.

    "Security and the C-Suite: Making Security Priorities Business Priorities." LogRhythm, Feb. 2021. Accessed 25 Apr 2023.

    University of Virginia. "Policy, Standards, and Procedures Exceptions Process." Information Security at UVA, 1 Jun. 2022. Accessed 14 Apr. 2023

    Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}445|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $61,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • Low sponsor commitment on projects.
    • Poor quality on completed projects.
    • Little to no visibility into the project portfolio.
    • Organization does not operationalize change .
    • Analyzing, fixing, and redeploying is a constant struggle. Even when projects are done well, they fail to deliver the intended outcomes and benefits.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Stop applying a one-size-fits-all-projects approach to governance.
    • Engage the sponsor by shifting the accountability to the business so they can get the most out of the project.
    • Do not limit the gating process to project management – expand to portfolio management.

    Impact and Result

    • Increase Project Throughput: Do more projects by ensuring the right projects and right amount of projects are approved and executed.
    • Validate Project Quality: Ensure issues are uncovered and resolved with standard check points in the project.
    • Increase Reporting and Visibility: Easily compare progress of projects across the portfolio and report outcomes to leadership.
    • Reduce Resource Waste: Terminate low-value projects early and assign the right resources to approved projects.
    • Achieve Intended Project Outcomes: Keep the sponsor engaged throughout the gating process to achieve desired outcomes.

    Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should design a right-sized project gating process, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Lay the groundwork for tailored project gating

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Understand the role of gating and why we need it.
  • Determine what projects will follow the gating process and how to classify them.
  • Establish the role of the project sponsor throughout the entire project lifecycle.
    • Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process – Phase 1: Lay the Groundwork for Tailored Project Gating
    • Project Intake Classification Matrix
    • Project Sponsor Role Description Template

    2. Establish level 1 project gating

    This phase will help you customize Level 1 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    • Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process – Phase 2: Establish Level 1 Project Gating
    • Project Gating Strategic Template

    3. Establish level 2 project gating

    This phase will help you customize Level 2 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    • Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process – Phase 3: Establish Level 2 Project Gating

    4. Establish level 3 project gating

    This phase will help you customize Level 3 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities. It will also help you determine next steps and milestones for the adoption of the new process.

    • Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process – Phase 4: Establish Level 3 Project Gating
    • Project Gating Reference Document
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay the Groundwork for Tailored Project Gating

    The Purpose

    Understand the role of gating and why we need it.

    Determine what projects will follow the gating process and how to classify them.

    Establish the role of the project sponsor throughout the entire project lifecycle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Get stakeholder buy-in for the process.

    Ensure there is a standard leveling process to determine size, risk, and complexity of requests.

    Engage the project sponsor throughout the portfolio and project processes.

    Activities

    1.1 Project Gating Review

    1.2 Establish appropriate project levels

    1.3 Define the role of the project sponsor

    Outputs

    Project Intake Classification Matrix

    Project Sponsor Role Description Template

    2 Establish Level 1 Project Gating

    The Purpose

    This phase will help you customize Level 1 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a lightweight project gating process for small projects.

    Activities

    2.1 Review level 1 project gating process

    2.2 Determine what gates should be part of your custom level 1 gating process

    2.3 Establish required artifacts for each gate

    2.4 Define the stakeholder’s roles and responsibilities at each gate

    Outputs

    Documented outputs in the Project Gating Strategic Template

    3 Establish Level 2 Project Gating

    The Purpose

    This phase will help you customize Level 2 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a heavier project gating process for medium projects.

    Activities

    3.1 Review level 2 project gating process

    3.2 Determine what gates should be part of your custom level 2 gating process

    3.3 Establish required artifacts for each gate

    3.4 Define the stakeholder’s roles and responsibilities at each gate

    Outputs

    4 Establish Level 3 Project Gating

    The Purpose

    This phase will help you customize Level 3 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    Come up with a roadmap for the adoption of the new project gating process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a comprehensive project gating process for large projects.

    Activities

    4.1 Review level 3 project gating process

    4.2 Determine what gates should be part of your custom level 3 gating process

    4.3 Establish required artifacts for each gate

    4.4 Define the stakeholder’s roles and responsibilities at each gate

    4.5 Determine next steps and milestones for process adoption

    Outputs

    Documented outputs in the Project Gating Strategic Template

    Documented Project Gating Reference Document for all stakeholders

    IT Service Management Selection Guide

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}488|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $29,187 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Your ITSM solution that was once good enough is no longer adequate for a rapidly evolving services culture.
    • Processes and data are disconnected with multiple workarounds and don’t allow the operations team to mature processes.
    • The workarounds, disparate systems, and integrations you’ve implemented to solve IT operations issues are no longer adequate.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Accessing funding for IT solutions can be challenging when the solution isn’t obviously aligned to the business need.
    • To maximize value and stakeholder satisfaction, determine use cases early, engage the right stakeholders, and define success.
    • Choosing a solution for a single purpose and then expanding it to cover other use cases can be a very effective use of technology dollars. However, spending the time up front to determine which use cases should be included and which will need a separate best-of-breed solution will make the best use of your investment.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a business case that defines use cases and requirements.
    • Shorten the list of viable vendors by matching vendors to use cases.
    • Determine which features are most important to reach your goals and select the best-matched vendor.

    IT Service Management Selection Guide Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how Info-Tech’s methodology will provide a quick solution to selecting ITSM vendors and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a business case

    Create a light business case to gain buy-in and define goals, milestones, and use cases.

    • IT Service Management Business Case Template

    2. Define requirements

    Create your list of requirements and shortlist vendors.

    • The ITSM Vendor Evaluation Workbook
    [infographic]

    Migrate to Office 365 Now

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}292|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,928 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications
    • As Microsoft continues to push Office 365, the transition to Office 365 has likely already been decided, but uncertainty surrounds the starting point and the best path forward.
    • The lack of a clear migration process that considers all the relevant risks and opportunities creates significant ambiguity around an Office 365 migration.
    • As organizations migrate to Office 365, the change in Office’s licensing structure presents obscurity in spending that could cost the business tens of thousands of unnecessary dollars spent if not approached strategically.
    • The fear of overlooking risks regarding the cloud, data, and existing infrastructure threatens to place IT in a position of project paralysis.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Many businesses are opting for a one-size-fits-all licensing strategy. Without selecting licensing to suit actual user needs, you will oversupply users and overspend on licensing.
    • Jumping into an Office 365 migration project without careful thought of the risks of a cloud migration will lead to project halt and interruption. Intentionally plan in order to expose risk to develop project foresight for a smooth migration.
    • A migration to Office 365 represents a significant change in the way users interact with Office. Be careful not to forget about the user as you take on the project. Engage the users consistently for a smooth transition.

    Impact and Result

    • Start by evaluating the business, users, and infrastructure requirements to ensure that all needs are clearly defined and the best fit-for-purpose migration plan can be decided on.
    • Assess the underlying risk associated with a migration to the cloud and build mitigation strategies to counter risk or impending issues and identify project interruptions before they happen.
    • Build a roadmap through a logical step-by-step process to outline major milestones and develop a communication plan to engage users throughout the migration. Demonstrate IT’s due diligence by relaying the project findings and results back to the business using Info-Tech’s Office 365 migration plan.

    Migrate to Office 365 Now Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should migrate to Office 365 now, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Evaluate requirements and licensing

    Evaluate the business, user, and infrastructure requirements to ensure that all needs are clearly defined and the best fit-for-purpose migration plan can be decided on.

    • Migrate to Office 365 Now – Phase 1: Evaluate Requirements and Licensing
    • Office 365 Migration Plan Report
    • Office 365 Migration Workbook

    2. Mitigate key risks of the cloud

    Expose key cloud risks across five major areas and build mitigation strategies to counter risk and gain foresight for migration.

    • Migrate to Office 365 Now – Phase 2: Mitigate Key Risks of the Cloud

    3. Build the roadmap

    Outline major milestones of migration and build the communication plan to transition users smoothly. Complete the Office 365 migration plan report to present to business stakeholders.

    • Migrate to Office 365 Now – Phase 3: Build the Roadmap
    • End-User Engagement Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Migrate to Office 365 Now

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Evaluate Office 365 License Needs

    The Purpose

    Review corporate and project goals.

    Review and prioritize relevant services and applications to shape the migration path.

    Review Office 365 license models.

    Profile end users to rightsize licensing.

    Estimate dollar impact of new licensing model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Corporate goals for Office 365.

    Prioritized migration path of applications.

    Decision on user licensing structure.

    Projected cost of licensing.

    Activities

    1.1 Outline corporate and project goals to paint the starting line.

    1.2 Review and prioritize services.

    1.3 Rightsize licensing.

    Outputs

    Clear goals and metrics for migration

    Prioritized list of applications

    Effective licensing structure

    2 Assess Value, Readiness, and Risks

    The Purpose

    Conduct value and readiness assessment of current on-premises services.

    Identify and evaluate risks and challenges.

    Assess IT’s readiness to own and manage Office 365.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completed value and readiness assessment.

    Current targets for service and deployment models.

    List of perceived risks according to five major risk areas.

    Assessed IT’s readiness to own and manage Office 365.

    Established go/caution/stop for elected Office 365 services.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess value and readiness.

    2.2 Identify key risks.

    2.3 Identify changes in IT skills and roles.

    Outputs

    Cloud service appropriateness assessment

    Completed risk register

    Reorganization of IT roles

    3 Mitigate Risks

    The Purpose

    Review Office 365 risks and discuss mitigation strategies.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completed risks and mitigation strategies report.

    Activities

    3.1 Build mitigation strategies.

    3.2 Identify key service requests.

    3.3 Build workflows.

    Outputs

    Defined roles and responsibilities

    Assigned decision rights

    List of staffing gaps

    4 Build the Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build a timeline of major milestones.

    Plan and prioritize projects to bridge gaps.

    Build a communication plan.

    Review Office 365 strategy and roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Milestone roadmap.

    Critical path of milestone actions.

    Communication plan.

    Executive report.

    Activities

    4.1 Outline major milestones.

    4.2 Finalize roadmap.

    4.3 Build and refine the communication plan.

    Outputs

    Roadmap plotted projects, decisions, mitigations, and user engagements

    Finalized roadmap across timeline

    Communication and training plan

    Get Started With IT Project Portfolio Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}443|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $7,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 46 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • Most companies are struggling to get their project work done. This is due in part to the fact that many prescribed remedies are confusing, disruptive, costly, or ineffective.
    • While struggling to find a solution, within the organization, project requests never stop and all projects continue to all be treated the same. Resources are requested for multiple projects without any visibility into their project capacity. Projects lack proper handoffs from closure to ongoing operational work. And the benefits are never tracked.
    • If you have too many projects, limited resources, ineffective communications, or low post-project adoption, keep reading. Perhaps you should spend a bit more on project, portfolio, and organizational change management.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Successful project outcomes are not built by rigorous project processes: Projects may be the problem, but project management rigor is not the solution.
    • Don’t fall into the common trap of thinking high-rigor project management should be every organization’s end goal.
    • Instead, understand that it is better to spend time assessing the portfolio to determine what projects should be prioritized.

    Impact and Result

    Begin by establishing a few foundational practices that will work to drive project throughput.

    • Capacity Estimation: Understand what your capacity is to do projects by determining how much time is allocated to doing other things.
    • Book of Record: Establish a basic but sustainable book of record so there is an official list of projects in flight and those waiting in a backlog or funnel.
    • Simple Project Management Processes: Align the rigor of your project management process with what is required, not what is prescribed by the PMP designation.
    • Impact Assessment: Address the impact of change at the beginning of the project and prepare stakeholders with the right level of communication.

    Get Started With IT Project Portfolio Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Begin by establishing a few foundational practices that will work to drive project throughput. Most project management problems are resolved with portfolio level solutions. This blueprint will address the eco-system of project, portfolio, and organizational change management.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Project portfolio management

    Estimate project capacity, determine what needs to be tracked on an ongoing basis, and determine what criteria is necessary for prioritizing projects.

    • Project Portfolio Supply-Demand Analysis Tool
    • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool
    • Project Portfolio Book of Record

    2. Project management

    Develop a process to inform the portfolio of the project status, create a plan that can be maintained throughout the project lifecycle, and manage the scope through a change request process.

    • Light Project Change Request Form Template

    3. Organizational change management

    Perform a change impact assessment and identify the obvious and non-obvious stakeholders to develop a message canvas accordingly.

    • Organizational Change Management Triage Tool

    4. Develop an action plan

    Develop a roadmap for how to move from the current state to the target state.

    • PPM Wireframe
    • Project Portfolio Management Foundations Stakeholder Communication Deck
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Get Started With IT Project Portfolio Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Project Portfolio Management

    The Purpose

    Establish the current state of the portfolio.

    Organize the portfolio requirements.

    Determine how projects are prioritized.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand project capacity supply-demand.

    Build a portfolio book of record.

    Create a project value scorecard.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct capacity supply-demand estimation.

    1.2 Determine requirements for portfolio book of record.

    1.3 Develop project value criteria.

    Outputs

    Clear project capacity

    Draft portfolio book of record

    Project value scorecard

    2 Project Management

    The Purpose

    Feed the portfolio with the project status.

    Plan the project work with a sustainable level of granularity.

    Manage the project as conditions change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a process to inform the portfolio of the project status.

    Create a plan that can be maintained throughout the project lifecycle and manage the scope through a change request process.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine necessary reporting metrics.

    2.2 Create a work structure breakdown.

    2.3 Document your project change request process.

    Outputs

    Feed the portfolio with the project status

    Plan the project work with a sustainable level of granularity

    Manage the project as conditions change

    3 Organizational Change Management

    The Purpose

    Discuss change accountability.

    Complete a change impact assessment.

    Create a communication plan for stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Complete a change impact assessment.

    Identify the obvious and non-obvious stakeholders and develop a message canvas accordingly.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss change accountability.

    3.2 Complete a change impact assessment.

    3.3 Create a communication plan for stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Assign accountability for the change

    Assess the change impact

    Communicate the change

    4 Develop an Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Summarize current state.

    Determine target state.

    Create a roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a roadmap for how to move from the current state to the target state.

    Activities

    4.1 Summarize current state and target state.

    4.2 Create a roadmap.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder Communication Deck

    MS Project Wireframe

    Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}205|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
    • Understanding the impact of the machine learning/AI component that is built into most of the enterprise products and tools and its role in the implementation of the solution.
    • Understanding the most important aspects that the organization needs to consider while planning the implementation of the AI-powered product.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations are faced with multiple challenges trying to adopt AI solutions. Challenges include data issues, ethics and compliance considerations, business process challenges, and misaligned leadership goals.
    • When choosing the right product to meet business needs, organizations need to know what questions to ask vendors to ensure they fully understand the implications of buying an AI/ML product.
    • To guarantee the success of your off-the-shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers value, you must start with a clear definition of the business case and an understanding of your data.

    Impact and Result

    To guarantee success of the off-the-shelf AI implementation and deliver value, in addition to formulating a clear definition of the business case and understanding of data, organizations should also:

    • Know what questions to ask vendors while evaluating AI-powered products.
    • Measure the impact of the project on business and IT processes.

    Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI Deck – A step-by-step approach that will help guarantee the success of your Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers business value

    Use this practical and actionable framework that will guide you through the planning of your Off-the-Shelf AI product implementation.

    • Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI Storyboard

    2. Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis – A tool that will guide the analysis and planning of the implementation

    Use this analysis tool to ensure the success of the implementation.

    • Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Drive Business Value With Off-the-Shelf AI

    A practical guide to ensure return on your Off-the-Shelf AI investment

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Understanding the impact of the machine learning/AI component that is built into most of the enterprise products and tools and its role in the implementation of the solution.
    • What are the most important aspects that organizations needs to consider while planning the implementation of the AI-powered product?
    Common Obstacles
    • Organizations are faced with multiple challenges trying to adopt an AI solution. Challenges include data issues, ethics and compliance considerations, business process challenges, and misaligned leadership goals.
    • When choosing the right product to meet business needs, organizations need to know what questions to ask vendors to ensure they fully understand the implications of buying an AI/ML product.
    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach includes a framework that will guide organizations through the process of the Off-the-Shelf AI product selection.

    To guarantee success of the Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and deliver value, organization should start with clear definition of the business case and an understanding of data.

    Other steps include:

    • Knowing what questions to ask vendors to evaluate AI-powered products.
    • Measuring the impact of the project on your business and IT processes.
    • Assessing impact on the organization and ensure team readiness.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To guarantee the success of your Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers value, you must start with a clear definition of the business case and an understanding of your data.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Getting value out of AI and machine learning investments

    92.1%

    of companies say they are achieving returns on their data and AI investments

    91.7%

    said they were increasing investments in data and AI

    26.0%

    of companies have AI systems in widespread production
    However, CIO Magazine identified nine main hurdles to AI adoption based on the survey results:
    • Data issues
    • Business process challenges
    • Implementation challenges and skill shortages
    • Costs of tools and development
    • Misaligned leadership goals
    • Measuring and proving business value
    • Legal and regulatory risks
    • Cybersecurity
    • Ethics
    • (Source: CIO, 2019)
    “Data and AI initiatives are becoming well established, investments are paying off, and companies are getting more economic value from AI.” (Source: NewVantage, 2022.)

    67% of companies are currently using machine learning, and 97% are using or planning to use it in the next year.” (Source: Deloitte, 2020)

    AI vs. ML

    Machine learning systems learn from experience and without explicit instructions. They learn patterns from data then analyze and make predictions based on past behavior and the patterns learned.

    Artificial intelligence is a combination of technologies and can include machine learning. AI systems perform tasks mimicking human intelligence such as learning from experience and problem solving. Most importantly, AI is making its own decisions without human intervention.

    The AI system can make assumptions, test these assumptions, and learn from the results.

    (Level of decision making required increases from left to right)
    Statistical Reasoning
    Infer relationships between variables

    Statistical models are designed to find relationships between variables and the significance of those relationships.

    Machine Learning:
    Making accurate predictions

    Machine learning is a subset of AI that discovers patterns from data without being explicitly programmed to do so.

    Artificial Intelligence
    Dynamic adaptation to novelty

    AI systems choose the optimal combination of methods to solve a problem. They make assumptions, reassess the model, and reevaluate the data.

    “Machine learning is the study of computer algorithms that improve automatically through experience.” (Tom Mitchell, 1997)

    “At its simplest form, artificial intelligence is a field, which combines computer science and robust datasets, to enable problem-solving.” (IBM, “What is artificial intelligence?”)

    Types of Off-the-Shelf AI products and solutions

    ML/AI-Powered Products Off-the-Shelf Pre-built and Pre-trained AI/ML Models
    • AI/ML capabilities built into the product and might require training as part of the implementation.
    • Off-the-Shelf ML/AI Models, pre-built, pre-trained, and pre-optimized for a particular task. For example, language models or image recognition models that can be used to speed up and simplify ML/AI systems development.
    Examples of OTS tools/products: Examples of OTS models:

    The data inputs for these models are defined, the developer has to conform to the provided schema, and the data outputs are usually fixed due to the particular task the OTS model is built to solve.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight:

    To guarantee the success of your Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers value, you must start with a clear definition of the business case and an understanding of your data.

    Business Goals

    Question the value that AI adds to the tool you are evaluating. Don’t go after the tool simply because it has an AI label attached to it. AI/ML capabilities might add little value but increase implementation complexity. Define the problem you are solving and document business requirements for the tool or a model.

    Data

    Know your data. Determine data requirements to:

    • Train the model during the implementation and development.
    • Run the model in production.

    People/Skills

    Define the skills required for the implementation and assemble the team that will support the project from requirements to deployment and support, through its entire lifecycle. Don’t forget about production support and maintenance.

    Choosing an AI-Powered Tool

    No need to reinvent the wheel and build a product you can buy, but be prepared to work around tool limitations, and make sure you understand the data and the model the tool is built on.

    Choosing an AI/ML Model

    Using Off-the-Shelf-AI models enables an agile approach to system development. Faster POC and validation of ideas and approaches, but the model might not be customizable for your requirements.

    Guaranteeing Off-the-Shelf AI Implementation Success

    Info-Tech Insight

    To guarantee the success of your Off-the-Shelf AI implementation and ensure it delivers value, you must start with a clear definition of the business case and an understanding of your data.

    Why do you need AI in your toolset?
    Business Goals

    Clearly defined problem statement and business requirements for the tool or a model will help you select the right solution that will deliver business value even if it does not have all the latest bells and whistles.

    Small chevron pointing right.
    Do you know the data required for implementation?
    Data

    Expected business outcome defines data requirements for implementation. Do you have the right data required to train and run the model?

    Large chevron pointing right.
    Is your organization ready for AI?
    People/Team/ Skills

    New skills and expertise are required through all phases of the implementation: design, build, deployment, support, and maintenance, as well as post-production support, scaling, and adoption.

    Data Architecture/ Infrastructure

    New tool or model will impact your cloud and integration strategy. It will have to integrate with the existing infrastructure, in the cloud or on prem.

    Large chevron pointing right.
    What questions do you need to ask when choosing the solution?
    Product/ Tool or Model Selection

    Do you know what model powers the AI tool? What data was used to train the tool and what data is required to run it? Ask the right questions.

    Small chevron pointing right.
    Are you measuring impact on your processes?
    Business and IT Processes

    Business processes need to be defined or updated to incorporate the output of the tool back into the business processes to deliver value.

    IT governance and support processes need to accommodate the new AI-powered tool.

    Small chevron pointing right.
    Realize and measure business value of your AI investment
    Value

    Do you have a clear understanding of the value that AI will bring to your organization?Optimization?Increased revenue?Operational efficiency?

    Introduction of Off-the-Shelf AI Requires a Strategic Approach

    Business Goals and Value Data People/Team/ Skills Infrastructure Business and IT Processes
    AI/ML–powered tools
    • Define a business problem that can be solved with either an AI-powered tool or an AI/ML pre-built model that will become part of the solution.
    • Define expectations and assumptions around the value that AI can bring.
    • Document business requirements for the tool or model.
    • Define the scope for a prototype or POC.
    • Define data requirements.
    • Define data required for implementation.
    • Determine if the required data can be acquired or captured/generated.
    • Document internal and external sources of data.
    • Validate data quality (define requirements and criteria for data quality).
    • Define where and how the data is stored and will be stored. Does it have to be moved or consolidated?
    • Define all stakeholders involved in the implementation and support.
    • Define skills and expertise required through all phases of the implementation: design, build, deployment, support, and maintenance.
    • Define skills and expertise required to grow AI practice and achieve the next level of adoption, scaling, and development of the tool or model POC.
    • Define infrastructure requirements for either Cloud, Software-as-a-Service, or on-prem deployment of a tool or model.
    • Define how the tool is integrated with existing systems and into existing infrastructure.
    • Determine the cost to deploy and run the tool/model.
    • Define processes that need to be updated to accommodate new functionality.
    • Define how the outcome of the tool or a model (e.g. predictions) are incorporated back into the business processes.
    • Define new business and IT processes that need to be defined around the tool (e.g. chatbot maintenance; analysis of the data generated by the tool).
    Off-the-shelf AI/ML pre-built models
    • Define the business metrics and KPIs to measure success of the implementation against.
    • Determine if there are requirements for a specific data format required for the tool or a model.
    • Determine if there is a need to classify/label the data (supervised learning).
    • Define privacy and security requirements.
    • Define requirements for employee training. This can be vendor training for a tool or platform training in the case of a pre-built model or service.
    • Define if ML/AI expertise is required.
    • Is the organization ready for ML/AI? Conduct an AI literacy survey and understand team’s concerns, fears, and misconceptions and address them.
    • Define requirements for:
      • Data migration.
      • Security.
      • AI/ML pipeline deployment and maintenance.
    • Define requirements for operation and maintenance of the tool or model.
    • Confirm infrastructure readiness.
    • How AI and its output will be used across the organization.

    Define Business Goals and Objectives

    Why do you need AI in your toolset? What value will AI deliver? Have a clear understanding of business benefits and the value AI delivers through the tool.

    • Define a business problem that can be solved with either an AI-powered tool or AI/ML pre-built model.
    • Define expectations and assumptions around the value that AI can bring.
    • Document business requirements for a tool or model.
    • Start with the POC or a prototype to test assumptions, architecture, and components of the solution.
    • Define business metrics and KPIs to measure success of the implementation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Question the value that AI adds to the tool you are evaluating. Don’t go after the tool simply because it has an AI label attached to it. AI/ML capabilities might add little value but increase implementation complexity. Define the problem you are solving and document business requirements for the tool or a model.

    Venn diagram of 'Applied Artificial Intelligence (AAI)' with a larger circle at the top, 'Machine Learning (ML)', and three smaller ovals intersecting, 'Computer Vision', 'Natural Language Processing (NLP)', and 'Robotic Process Automation (RPA)'.

    AAI solutions and technologies are helping organizations make faster decisions and predict future outcomes such as:

    • Business process automation
    • Intelligent integration
    • Intelligent insights
    • Operational efficiency improvement
    • Increase revenue
    • Improvement of existing products and services
    • Product and process innovation

    1. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool to define business drivers and document business requirements

    2-3 hours
    Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Business Drivers tab, a table with columns 'AI/ML Tool or Model', 'Use Case', 'Business problem / goal for AI/ML use case', 'Description', 'Business Owner (Primary Stakeholder)', 'Priority', 'Stakeholder Groups Impacted', 'Requirements Defined? Yes/No', 'Related Data Domains', and 'KPIs'. Use the Business Drivers tab to document:
    • Business objectives of the initiative that might drive the AI/ML use case.
    • The business owner or primary stakeholder who will help to define business value and requirements.
    • All stakeholders who will be involved or impacted.
    • KPIs that will be used to assess the success of the POC.
    • Data required for the implementation.
    • Use the Business Requirements tab to document high-level requirements for a tool or model.
    • These requirements will be used while defining criteria for a tool selection and to validate if the tool or model meets your business goals.
    • You can use either traditional BRD format or a user story to document requirements.
    Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Business Requirements tab, a table with columns 'Requirement ID', 'Requirement Description / user story', 'Requirement Category', 'Stakeholder / User Role', 'Requirement Priority', and 'Complexity (point estimates)'.

    Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

    1. Define business drivers and document business requirements

    Input

    • Strategic plan of the organization
    • Data strategy that defines target data capabilities required to support enterprise strategic goals
    • Roadmap of business and data initiatives to support target state of data capabilities

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business use cases where an AI-powered tool or AI/ML can deliver business value
    • List of high-level requirements for the selected use case

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Off-the-Shelf-AI Analysis Tool, “Business Drivers” and “Business Requirements” tabs

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior business and IT stakeholders
    • Data owner(s)
    • Data steward(s)
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Data Architect
    • Data scientist/Data analyst

    Understand data required for implementation

    Do you have the right data to implement and run the AI-powered tool or AI/ML model?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Know your data. Determine data requirements to:

    • Train the model during the implementation and development, and
    • Run the model in production
    AvailabilityArrow pointing rightQualityArrow pointing rightPreparationArrow pointing rightBias, Privacy, SecurityArrow pointing rightData Architecture
    • Define what data is required for implementation, e.g. customer data, financial data, product sentiment.
    • If the data is not available, can it be acquired, gathered, or generated?
    • Define the volume of data required for implementation and production.
    • If the model has to be trained, do you have the data required for training (e.g. dictionary of terms)? Can it be created, gathered, or acquired?
    • Document internal and external sources of data.
    • Evaluate data quality for all data sources based on the requirements and criteria defined in the previous step.
    • For datasets with data quality issues, determine if the data issues can be resolved (e.g. missing values are inferred). If not, can this issue be resolved by using other data sources?
    • Engage a Data Governance organization to address any data quality concerns.
    • Determine if there are requirements for a specific data format required for the tool or model.
    • Determine if there is a need to classify/label or tag the data. What are the metadata requirements?
    • Define whether or not the implementation team needs to aggregate or transform the data before it can be used.
    • Define privacy requirements, as these might affect the availability of the data for ML/AI.
    • Define data bias concerns and considerations. Do you have datasheets for datasets that will be used in this project? What datasets cannot be used to prevent bias?
    • What are the security requirements and how will they affect data storage, product selection, and infrastructure requirements for the tool and overall solution?
    • Define where and how the data is currently stored and will be stored.
    • Does it have to be migrated or consolidated? Does it have to be moved to the cloud or between systems?
    • Is a data lake or data warehouse a requirement for this implementation as defined by the solution architecture?

    2. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool to document data requirements

    2-3 hours

    Use the Data tab to document the following for each data source or dataset:
    • Data Domain – e.g. Customer data
    • Data Concept – e.g. Customer
    • Data Internally Accessible – Identify datasets that are required for the implementation even if the data might not be available internally. Work on determining if the data ca be acquired externally or collected internally.
    • Source System – define the primary source system for the data, e.g. Salesforce
    • Target System (if applicable) – Define if the data needs to be migrated/transferred. For example, you might use a datalake or data warehouse for the AI/ML solution or migrate data to the cloud.
    • Classification/Taxonomy/Ontology
    • Data Steward
    • Data Owner
    • Data Quality – Data quality indicator
    • Refresh Rate – Frequency of data refresh. Indicate if the data can be accessed in real time or near-real time

    Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Data tab, a spreadsheet table with the columns listed to the left and below.
    • Retention – Retention policy requirements
    • Compliance Requirements – Define if data has to comply with any of the regulatory requirements, e.g. GDPR
    • Privacy, Bias, and Ethics Considerations – Privacy Act, PIPEDA, etc. Identify if the dataset contains sensitive information that should be excluded from the model, such as gender, age, race etc. Indicate fairness metrics, if applicable.

    Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

    2. Document data requirements

    Input

    • Documented business use cases from Step 1.
    • High-level business requirements from Step 1.
    • Data catalog, data dictionaries, business glossary
    • Data flows and data architecture

    Output

    • High-level data requirements
    • List of data sources and datasets that can be used for the implementation
    • Datasets that need to be collected or acquired externally

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “Data” tab

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Business and IT stakeholders
    • Data owner(s)
    • Data steward(s)
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Data Architect
    • Data scientist/Data analyst

    Is Your Organization Ready for AI?

    Assess organizational readiness and define stakeholders impacted by the implementation. Build the team with the right skillset to drive the solution.

    • Implementation of the AI/ML-powered Off-the-Shelf Tool or an AI/ML model will require a team with a combination of skills through all phases of the project, from design of the solution to build, production, deployment, and support.
    • Document the skillsets required and determine the skills gap. Before you start hiring, depending on the role, you might find talent within the organization to join the implementation team with little to no training.
    • AI/ML resources that may be needed on your team driving AI implementation (you might consider bringing part-time resources to fill the gaps or use vendor developers) are:
      • Data Scientist
      • Machine Learning Engineer
      • Data Engineer
      • Data Architect
      • AI/ML Ops engineer
    • Define training requirements. Consider vendor training for a tool or platform.
    • Plan for future scaling and the growing of the solution and AI practice. Assess the need to apply AI in other business areas. Work with the team to analyze use cases and prioritize AI initiatives. As the practice grows, grow your team expertise.
    • Identify the stakeholders who will be affected by the AI implementation.
    • Work with them to understand and address any concerns, fears, or misconceptions around the role of AI and the consequences of bringing AI into the organization.
    • Develop a communication and change management plan to educate everyone within the organization on the application and benefits of using AI and machine learning.

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Define the skills required for the implementation and assemble the team that will support the project through its entire lifecycle. Don’t forget about production, support, and maintenance.

    3. Build your implementation team

    1-2 hours

    Input: Solution conceptual design, Current resource availability

    Output: Roles required for the implementation of the solution, Resources gap analysis, Training and hiring plan

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “People and Team” tab

    Participants: Project lead, HR, Enterprise Architect

    1. Review your solution conceptual design and define implementation team roles.
    2. Document requirements for each role.
    3. Review current org chart and job descriptions and identify skillset gaps. Draft an action plan to fill in the roles.
    4. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's People and Team tab to document team roles for the entire implementation, including design, build/implement, deployment, support and maintenance, and future development.

    Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's People and Team tab, a table with columns 'Design', 'Implement', 'Deployment', 'Support and Maintenance', and 'Future Development'.

    Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

    Cloud, SaaS or On Prem – what are my options and what is the impact?

    Depending on the architecture of the solution, define the impact on the current infrastructure, including system integration, AI/ML pipeline deployment, maintenance, and data storage

    • Data Architecture: use the current data architecture to design the architecture for an AI-powered solution. Assess changes to the data architecture with the introduction of a new tool to make sure it is scalable enough to support the change.
    • Define infrastructure requirements for either Cloud, Software-as-a-Service, or on-prem deployment of a tool or model.
    • Define how the tool will be integrated with existing systems and into existing infrastructure.
    • Define requirements for:
      • Data migration and data storage
      • Security
      • AI/ML pipeline deployment, production monitoring, and maintenance
    • Define requirements for operation and maintenance of the tool or model.
    • Work with your infrastructure architect and vendor to determine the cost of deploying and running the tool/model.
    • Make a decision on the preferred architecture of the system and confirm infrastructure readiness.

    Download the Create an Architecture for AI blueprint

    4. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool to document infrastructure decisions

    2-3 hours

    Input: Solution conceptual design

    Output: Infrastructure requirements, Infrastructure readiness assessment

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “Infrastructure” tab

    Participants: Infrastructure Architect, Solution Architect, Enterprise Architect, Data Architect, ML/AI Ops Engineer

    1. Work with Infrastructure, Data, Solution, and Enterprise Architects to define your conceptual solution architecture.
    2. Define integration and storage requirements.
    3. Document security requirements for the solution in general and the data specifically.
    4. Define MLOps requirements and tools required for ML/AI pipeline deployment and production monitoring.
    5. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Infrastructure tab to document requirements and decisions around Data and Infrastructure Architecture.

    Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Infrastructure tab, a table with columns 'Cloud, SaaS or On-Prem', 'Data Migration Requirements', 'Data Storage Requirements', 'Security Requirements', 'Integrations Required', and 'AI/ML Pipeline Deployment and Maintenance Requirements'.

    Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

    What questions do you need to ask vendors when choosing the solution?

    Take advantage of Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework (RASF) to guide tool selection, but ask vendors the right questions to understand implications of having AI/ML built into the tool or a model

    Data Model Implementation and Integration Deployment Security and Compliance
    • What data (attributes) were used to train the model?
    • Do you have datasheets for the data used?
    • How was data bias mitigated?
    • What are the data labeling/classification requirements for training the model?
    • What data is required for production? E.g. volume; type of data, etc.
    • Were there any open-source libraries used in the model? If yes, how were vulnerabilities and security concerns addressed?
    • What algorithms are implemented in the tool/model?
    • Can model parameters be configured?
    • What is model accuracy?
    • Level of customization required for the implementation to meet our requirements.
    • Does the model require training? If yes, can you provide details? Can you estimate the effort required?
    • Integration capabilities and requirements.
    • Data migration requirements for tool operation and development.
    • Administrator console – is this functionality available?
    • Implementation timeframe.
    • Is the model or tool deployable on premises or in the cloud? Do you support hybrid cloud and multi-cloud deployment?
    • What cloud platforms are your product/model integrated with (AWS, Azure, GCP)?
    • What are the infrastructure requirements?
    • Is the model containerized/ scalable?
    • What product support and product updates are available?
    • Regulatory compliance (GDPR, PIPEDA, HIPAA, PCI DSS, CCPA, SOX, etc.)?
    • How are data security risks addressed?

    Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “Vendor Questionnaire” tab to track vendor responses to these questions.

    Are you measuring impact on your processes?

    Make sure that you understand the impact of the new technology on the existing business and IT processes.

    And make sure your business processes are ready to take advantage of the benefits and new capabilities enabled by AI/ML.

    Process automation, optimization, and improvement enabled by the technology and AI/ML-powered tools allow organizations to reduce manual work, streamline existing business processes, improve customer satisfaction, and get critical insights to assist decision making.

    To take full advantage of the benefits and new capabilities enabled by the technology, make sure that business and IT processes reflect these changes:

    • Processes that need to be updated.
    • How the outcome of the tool or a model (e.g. predictions) is incorporated into the existing business processes and the processes that will monitor the accuracy of the outcome and monitor performance of the tool or model.
    • New business and IT processes that need to be defined for the tool (e.g. chatbot maintenance, analysis of the data generated by the tool, etc.).

    5. Document the Impact on Business and IT Processes

    2-3 hours

    Input: Solution design, Existing business and IT processes

    Output: Documented updates to the existing processes, Documented new business and IT processes

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool, “Business and IT Processes” tab

    Participants: Project lead, Business stakeholders, Business analyst

    1. Review current business processes affected by the implementation of the AI/ML- powered tool or model. Define the changes that need to be made. The changes might include simplification of the process due to automation of some of the steps. Some processes will need to be redesigned and some processes might become obsolete.
    2. Document high-level steps for any new processes that need to be defined around the AI/ML-powered tool. An example of such a process would be defining new IT and business processes to support a new chatbot.
    3. Use Info-Tech’s Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Business and IT Processes tab, to document process changes.

    Screenshot of the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool's Business and IT Processes tab, a table with columns 'Existing business process affected', 'New business process', 'Stakeholders involved', 'Changes to be made', and 'New Process High-Level Steps'.

    Download the Off-the-Shelf AI Analysis Tool

    AI-powered Tools – Considerations

    PROS:
    • Enhanced functionality, allows the power of AI without specialized skills (e.g., Mathematica – recognizing patterns in data).
    • Might be a cheaper option compared to building a solution in-house (chatbot, for ex.).

    Info-Tech Insight:

    No need to reinvent the wheel and build the product you can buy, but be prepared to work around tool limitations, and make sure you understand the data and the model the tool is built on.

    CONS:
    • Dependency on the service provider.
    • The tool might not meet all the business requirements without customization.
    • Bias can be built into the tool:
      • Work with the vendor to understand what data was used to train the model.
      • From the perspective of ethics and bias, learn what model is implemented in the tool and what data attributes the model uses.

    Pre-built/pre-trained models – what to keep in mind when choosing

    PROS:
    • Lower cost and less time to development compared to creating and training models from scratch (e.g. using image recognition models or pre-trained language models like BERT).
    • If the pre-trained and optimized model perfectly fits your needs, the model accuracy might be high and sufficient for your scenario.
    • Off-the-Shelf AI models are useful for creating prototypes or POCs, for testing a hypothesis, and for validating ideas and requirements.
    • Usage of Off-the-Shelf models shortens the development cycle and reduces investment risks.
    • Language models are particularly useful if you don’t have data to train your own model (a “small data” scenario).
    • Infrastructure and model training cost reduction.
    CONS:
    • Might be a challenge to deploy and maintain the system in production.
    • Lack of flexibility: you might not be able to configure input or output parameters to your requirements. For example, a pre-built sentiment analysis model might return four values (“positive,” “negative,” “neutral,” and “mixed”), but your solution will require only two or three values.
    • Might be a challenge to comply with security and privacy requirements.
    • Compliance with privacy and fairness requirements and considerations: what data was used to pretrain the model?
    • If open-source libraries were used to create the model, how will vulnerabilities, risks, and security concerns be addressed?

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Using Off-the-Shelf AI models enables an agile approach to system development – faster POC and validation of ideas and approaches, but the model might not be customizable for your requirements.

    Metrics

    Metrics and KPIs for this project will depend on the business goals and objectives that you will identify in Step 1 of the tool selection process.

    Metrics might include:

    • Reduction of time spent on a specific business process. If the tool is used to automate certain steps of a business process, this metric will measure how much time was saved, in minutes/hours, compared to the process time before the introduction of the tool.
    • Accuracy of prediction. This metric would measure the accuracy of estimations or predictions compared to the same estimations done before the implementation of the tool. It can be measured by generating the same prediction or estimation using the AI-powered tool or using any methods used before the introduction of the tool and comparing the results.
    • Accuracy of the search results. If the AI-powered tool is a search engine, compare a) how much time it would take a user to find an article or a piece of content they were searching for using new tool vs. previous techniques, b) how many steps it took the user to locate the required article in the search results, and c) the location of the correct piece of content in the search result list (at the top of the search result list or on the tenth page).
    • Time spent on manual tasks and activities. This metric will measure how much time, in minutes/hours, is spent by the employees or users on manual tasks if the tool automates some of these tasks.
    • Reduction of business process steps (if the steps are being automated). To derive this metric, create a map of the business process before the introduction of the AI-powered tool and after, and determine if the tool helped to simplify the process by reducing the number of process steps.

    Bibliography

    Adryan, Boris. “Is it all machine learning?” Badryan, Oct. 20, 2015. Accessed Feb. 2022.

    “AI-Powered Data Management Platform.” Informatica, N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

    Amazon Rekognition. “Automate your image and video analysis with machine learning.” AWS. N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

    “Artificial Intelligence (AI).” IBM Cloud Education, 3 June 2020. Accessed Feb 2022.

    “Artificial intelligence (AI) vs machine learning (ML).” Microsoft Azure Documentation. Accessed Feb. 2022.

    “Avante Garde in the Realm of AI” SearchUnify Cognitive Platform. Accessed Feb 2022.

    “Azure Cognitive Services.” Microsoft. N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

    “Becoming an AI-fueled organization. State of AI in the enterprise, 4th edition,” Deloitte, 2020. Accessed Feb. 2022.

    “Coveo Predictive Search.” Coveo, N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

    ”Data and AI Leadership. Executive Survey 2022. Executive Summary of Findings.” NewVantage Partners. Accessed Feb 2022.

    “Einstein Discovery in Tableau.” Tableau, N.d. Accessed Feb 2022.

    Korolov, Maria. “9 biggest hurdles to AI adoption.” CIO, Feb 26, 2019. Accessed Feb 2022.

    Meel, Vidushi. “What Is Deep Learning? An Easy to Understand Guide.” visio.ai. Accessed Feb. 2022.

    Mitchell, Tom. “Machine Learning,” McGraw Hill, 1997.

    Stewart, Matthew. “The Actual Difference Between Statistics and Machine Learning.” Towards Data Science, Mar 24, 2019. Accessed Feb 2022.

    “Sentiment analysis with Cognitive Services.” Microsoft Azure Documentation. Accessed February 2022.

    “Three Principles for Designing ML-Powered Products.” Spotify Blog. Oct 2019, Accessed Feb 2022.

    “Video Intelligence API.” Google Cloud Platform. N.d. Accessed Feb 2022

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}150|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,991 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 32 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Your organization wants to implement (or revamp existing) software delivery metrics to monitor performance as well as achieve its goals.
    • You know that metrics can be a powerful tool for managing team behavior.
    • You also know that all metrics are prone to misuse and mismanagement, which can lead to unintended consequences that will harm your organization.
    • You need an approach for selecting and using effective software development lifecycle (SDLC) metrics that will help your organization to achieve its goals while minimizing the risk of unintended consequences.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Metrics are powerful, dangerous, and often mismanaged, particularly when they are tied to reward or punishment. To use SDLC metrics effectively, know the dangers, understand good practices, and then follow Info-Tech‘s TAG (team-oriented, adaptive, and goal-focused) approach to minimize risk and maximize impact.

    Impact and Result

    • Begin by understanding the risks of metrics.
    • Then understand good practices associated with metrics use.
    • Lastly, follow Info-Tech’s TAG approach to select and use SDLC metrics effectively.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Understand both the dangers and good practices related to metrics, along with Info-Tech’s TAG approach to the selection and use of SDLC metrics.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the dangers of metrics

    Explore the significant risks associated with metrics selection so that you can avoid them.

    • Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively – Phase 1: Understand the Risks of Metrics

    2. Know good practices related to metrics

    Learn about good practices related to metrics and how to apply them in your organization, then identify your team’s business-aligned goals to be used in SDLC metric selection.

    • Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively – Phase 2: Know Good Practices Related to Metrics
    • SDLC Metrics Evaluation and Selection Tool

    3. Rank and select effective SDLC metrics for your team

    Follow Info-Tech’s TAG approach to selecting effective SDLC metrics for your team, create a communication deck to inform your organization about your selected SDLC metrics, and plan to review and revise these metrics over time.

    • Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively – Phase 3: Rank and Select Effective SDLC Metrics for Your Team
    • SDLC Metrics Rollout and Communication Deck
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand the Dangers of Metrics

    The Purpose

    Learn that metrics are often misused and mismanaged.

    Understand the four risk areas associated with metrics: Productivity loss Gaming behavior Ambivalence Unintended consequences

    Productivity loss

    Gaming behavior

    Ambivalence

    Unintended consequences

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An appreciation of the dangers associated with metrics.

    An understanding of the need to select and manage SDLC metrics carefully to avoid the associated risks.

    Development of critical thinking skills related to metric selection and use.

    Activities

    1.1 Examine the dangers associated with metric use.

    1.2 Share real-life examples of poor metrics and their impact.

    1.3 Practice identifying and mitigating metrics-related risk.

    Outputs

    Establish understanding and appreciation of metrics-related risks.

    Solidify understanding of metrics-related risks and their impact on an organization.

    Develop the skills needed to critically analyze a potential metric and reduce associated risk.

    2 Understand Good Practices Related to Metrics

    The Purpose

    Develop an understanding of good practices related to metric selection and use.

    Introduce Info-Tech’s TAG approach to metric selection and use.

    Identify your team’s business-aligned goals for SDLC metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of good practices for metric selection and use.

    Document your team’s prioritized business-aligned goals.

    Activities

    2.1 Examine good practices and introduce Info-Tech’s TAG approach.

    2.2 Identify and prioritize your team’s business-aligned goals.

    Outputs

    Understanding of Info-Tech’s TAG approach.

    Prioritized team goals (aligned to the business) that will inform your SDLC metric selection.

    3 Rank and Select Your SDLC Metrics

    The Purpose

    Apply Info-Tech’s TAG approach to rank and select your team’s SDLC metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identification of potential SDLC metrics for use by your team.

    Collaborative scoring/ranking of potential SDLC metrics based on their specific pros and cons.

    Finalize list of SDLC metrics that will support goals and minimize risk while maximizing impact.

    Activities

    3.1 Select your list of potential SDLC metrics.

    3.2 Score each potential metric’s pros and cons against objectives using a five-point scale.

    3.3 Collaboratively select your team’s first set of SDLC metrics.

    Outputs

    A list of potential SDLC metrics to be scored.

    A ranked list of potential SDLC metrics.

    Your team’s first set of goal-aligned SDLC metrics.

    4 Create a Communication and Rollout Plan

    The Purpose

    Develop a rollout plan for your SDLC metrics.

    Develop a communication plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    SDLC metrics.

    A plan to review and adjust your SDLC metrics periodically in the future.

    Communication material to be shared with the organization.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify rollout dates and responsible individuals for each SDLC metric.

    4.2 Identify your next SDLC metric review cycle.

    4.3 Create a communication deck.

    Outputs

    SDLC metrics rollout plan

    SDLC metrics review plan

    SDLC metrics communication deck

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}174|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,989 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Your organization is realizing benefits from adopting Agile principles and practices in pockets of your organization.
    • You are starting to investigate opportunities to extend Agile beyond these pilot implementations into other areas of the organization. You are looking for a coordinated approach aligned to business priorities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Not all lessons from a pilot project are transferable. Pilot processes are tailored to a specific project’s scope, team, and tools, and they may not account for the diverse attributes in your organization.
    • Control may be necessary for coordination. More moving parts means enforcing consistent cadences, reporting, and communication is a must if teams are not disciplined or lack good governance.
    • Scale Agile in departments tolerable to change. Incrementally roll Agile out in departments where its principles are accepted (e.g. a culture of continuous improvement, embracing failures as lessons).

    Impact and Result

    • Complete an Agile capability assessment of your pilot functional group to gauge anticipated Agile benefits. Identify the business objectives and the group drivers that are motivating a scaled Agile implementation.
    • Understand the challenges that you may face when scaling Agile. Investigate the root causes of inefficiencies that can derail your scaling initiatives.
    • Brainstorm solutions to your scaling challenges and envision a target state for your growing Agile environment. Your target state will discover new opportunities to drive more business value and eliminate current activities driving down productivity.
    • Coordinate the implementation and execution of scaling Agile initiatives with a Scaling Agile Playbook. This organic and collaborative document will lay out the process, roles, goals, and objectives needed to successfully manage your Agile environment.

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should scale up Agile, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Gauge readiness to scale up Agile

    Evaluate the readiness of the pilot functional group and Agile development processes to adopt scaled Agile practices.

    • Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile – Phase 1: Gauge Readiness to Scale Up Agile
    • Scaling Agile Playbook Template
    • Scrum Development Process Template

    2. Define scaled Agile target state

    Alleviate scaling issues and risks and introduce new opportunities to enhance business value delivery with Agile practices.

    • Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile – Phase 2: Define Scaled Agile Target State

    3. Create implementation plan

    Roll out scaling Agile initiatives in a gradual, iterative approach and define the right metrics to demonstrate success.

    • Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile – Phase 3: Create Implementation Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Gauge Your Readiness to Scale Up Agile

    The Purpose

    Identify the business objectives and functional group drivers for adopting Agile practices to gauge the fit of scaling Agile.

    Select the pilot project to demonstrate the value of scaling Agile.

    Review and evaluate your current Agile development process and functional group structure.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the notable business and functional group gaps that can derail the scaling of Agile.

    Selection of a pilot program that will be used to gather metrics to continuously improve implementation and obtain buy-in for wider rollout.

    Realization of the root causes behind functional group and process issues in the current Agile implementation.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess your pilot functional group

    Outputs

    Fit assessment of functional group to pilot Agile scaling

    Selection of pilot program

    List of critical success factors

    2 Define Your Scaled Agile Target State

    The Purpose

    Think of solutions to address the root causes of current communication and process issues that can derail scaling initiatives.

    Brainstorm opportunities to enhance the delivery of business value to customers.

    Generate a target state for your scaled Agile implementation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined Agile capabilities and services of your functional group.

    Optimized functional group team structure, development process, and program framework to support scaled Agile in your context.

    Identification and accommodation of the risks associated with implementing and executing Agile capabilities.

    Activities

    2.1 Define Agile capabilities at scale

    2.2 Build your scaled Agile target state

    Outputs

    Solutions to scaling issues and opportunities to deliver more business value

    Agile capability map

    Functional group team structure, Agile development process and program framework optimized to support scaled Agile

    Risk assessment of scaling Agile initiatives

    3 Create Your Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    List metrics to gauge the success of your scaling Agile implementation.

    Define the initiatives to scale Agile in your organization and to prepare for a wider rollout.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Strategic selection of the right metrics to demonstrate the value of scaling Agile initiatives.

    Scaling Agile implementation roadmap based on current resource capacities, task complexities, and business priorities.

    Activities

    3.1 Create your implementation plan

    Outputs

    List of metrics to gauge scaling Agile success

    Scaling Agile implementation roadmap

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}264|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $79,249 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 28 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations
    • There is an onslaught of security data – generating information in different formats, storing it in different places, and forwarding it to different locations.
    • The organization lacks a dedicated enterprise security team. There is limited resourcing available to begin or mature a security operations center.
    • Many organizations are developing ad hoc security capabilities that result in operational inefficiencies, the misalignment of resources, and the misuse of security technology investments.
    • It is difficult to communicate the value of a security operations program when trying to secure organizational buy-in to gain the appropriate resourcing.
    • There is limited communication between security functions due to a centralized security operations organizational structure.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
    2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives.
    3. If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Impact and Result

    • A unified security operations process actively transforms security events and threat information into actionable intelligence, driving security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes, addressing the increasing sophistication of cyberthreats, and guiding continuous improvement.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a flexible and systematic security operations program relevant to your organization.

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should enhance your security operations program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess your current state

    Assess current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.

    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 1: Assess Operational Requirements
    • Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Develop maturity initiatives

    Design your optimized state of operations.

    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 2: Develop Maturity Initiatives
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool

    3. Define operational interdependencies

    Identify opportunities for collaboration within your security program.

    • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 3: Define Operational Interdependencies
    • Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan
    • Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template
    • Security Operations Collaboration Plan
    • Security Operations Metrics Summary Document
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Operational Requirements

    The Purpose

    Determine current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities, operational inefficiencies, and opportunities for improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine why you need a sound security operations program.

    Understand Info-Tech’s threat collaboration environment.

    Evaluate your current security operation’s functions and capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the benefits of refining your security operations program.

    1.2 Gauge your current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.

    Outputs

    Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool

    2 Develop Maturity Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Begin developing and prioritizing gap initiatives in order to achieve the optimal state of operations.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish your goals, obligations, scope, and boundaries.

    Assess your current state and define a target state.

    Develop and prioritize gap initiatives.

    Define the cost, effort, alignment, and security benefits of each initiative.

    Develop a security strategy operational roadmap.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your current security goals, obligations, and scope.

    2.2 Design your ideal target state.

    2.3 Prioritize gap initiatives.

    Outputs

    Information Security Strategy Requirements Gathering Tool

    Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool

    3 Define Operational Interdependencies

    The Purpose

    Identify opportunities for collaboration.

    Formalize your operational process flows.

    Develop a comprehensive and actionable measurement program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the current security operations process flow.

    Define the security operations stakeholders and their respective deliverables.

    Formalize an internal information-sharing and collaboration plan.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify opportunities for collaboration.

    3.2 Formalize a security operations collaboration plan.

    3.3 Define operational roles and responsibilities.

    3.4 Develop a comprehensive measurement program.

    Outputs

    Security Operations RACI & Program Plan Tool

    Security Operations Collaboration Plan

    Security Operations Cadence Schedule Template

    Security Operations Metrics Summary

    Further reading

    INFO-TECH RESEARCH GROUP

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    Transition from a security operations center to a threat collaboration environment.

    Info-Tech Research Group, Inc. is a global leader in providing IT research and advice. Info-Tech’s products and services combine actionable insight and relevant advice with ready-to-use tools and templates that cover the full spectrum of IT concerns.
    © 1997-2017 Info-Tech Research Group Inc.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    “A reactive security operations program is no longer an option. The increasing sophistication of threats demands a streamlined yet adaptable mitigation and remediation process. Protect your assets by preparing for the inevitable; unify your prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts and provide assurance to your stakeholders that you are making information security a top priority.”

    Phot of Edward Gray, Consulting Analyst, Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Edward Gray,
    Consulting Analyst, Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group



    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • Chief Information Officer (CIO)
    • Chief Information Security Officer (CISO)
    • Chief Operating Officer (COO)
    • Security / IT Management
    • Security Operations Director / Security Operations Center (SOC)
    • Network Operations Director / Network Operations Center (NOC)
    • Systems Administrator
    • Threat Intelligence Staff
    • Security Operations Staff
    • Security Incident Responders
    • Vulnerability Management Staff
    • Patch Management
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Enhance your security program by implementing and streamlining next-generation security operations processes.
    • Increase organizational situational awareness through active collaboration between core threat teams, enriching internal security events with external threat intelligence and enhancing security controls.
    • Develop a comprehensive threat analysis and dissemination process: align people, process, and technology to scale security to threats.
    • Identify the appropriate technological and infrastructure-based sourcing decisions.
    • Design a step-by-step security operations implementation process.
    • Pursue continuous improvement: build a measurement program that actively evaluates program effectiveness.
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Board / Chief Executive Officer
    • Information Owners (Business Directors/VP)
    • Security Governance and Risk Management
    • Fraud Operations
    • Human Resources
    • Legal and Public Relations
    This Research Will Help Them
    • Aid decision making by staying abreast of cyberthreats that could impact the business.
    • Increase visibility into the organization’s threat landscape to identify likely targets or identify exposed vulnerabilities.
    • Ensure the business is compliant with regularity, legal, and/or compliance requirements.
    • Understand the value and return on investment of security operations offerings.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Current security practices are disjointed, operating independently with a wide variety of processes and tools to conduct incident response, network defense, and threat analysis. These disparate mitigations leave organizations vulnerable to the increasing number of malicious events.
    • Threat management has become resource intensive, requiring continuous monitoring, collection, and analysis of massive volumes of security event data, while juggling business, compliance, and consumer obligations.

    Complication

    • There is an onslaught of security data – generating information in different formats, storing it in different places, and forwarding it to different locations.
    • The organization lacks a dedicated enterprise security team. There is limited resourcing available to begin or mature a security operations center.
    • Many organizations are developing ad hoc security capabilities that result in operational inefficiencies, the misalignment of resources, and the misuse of their security technology investments.
    • It is difficult to communicate the value of a security operations program when trying to secure organizational buy-in to gain the appropriate resourcing.
    • There is limited communication between security functions due to a centralized security operations organizational structure.

    Resolution

    • A unified security operations process actively transforms security events and threat information into actionable intelligence, driving security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes, addressing the increasing sophistication of cyberthreats, and guiding continuous improvement.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a flexible and systematic security operations program relevant to your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
    2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives.
    3. If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Data breaches are resulting in major costs across industries

    Horizontal bar chart of 'Per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies', with the highest cost attributed to 'Health', 'Pharmaceutical', 'Financial', 'Energy', and 'Transportation'.

    Average data breach costs per compromised record hit an all-time high of $217 (in 2015); $74 is direct cost (e.g. legal fees, technology investment) and $143 is indirect cost (e.g. abnormal customer churn). (Source: Ponemon Institute, “2015 Cost of Data Breach Study: United States”)

    '% of systems impacted by a data breach', '1% No Impact', '19% 1-10% impacted', '41% 11-30% impacted', '24% 31-50% impacted', '15% more than 50% impacted
    Divider line.
    '% of customers lost from a data breach', '61% Lost <20%', '21% Lost 20-40%', '8% Lost 40-60%', '6% Lost 60-80%', '4% Lost 80-100%'.
    Divider line.
    '% of business opportunity lost from a data breach', '58% Lost <20%', '25% Lost 20-40%', '9% Lost, 40-60%', '5% Lost 60-80%', '4% Lost 80-100%'.
    (Source: The Network, “ Cisco 2017 Security Capabilities Benchmark Study”)

    Persistent issues

    • Organizational barriers separating prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
      Siloed operations limit collaboration and internal knowledge sharing.
    • Lack of knowledgeable security staff.
      Human capital is transferrable between roles and functions and must be cross-trained to wear multiple hats.
    • Failure to evaluate and improve security operations.
      The effectiveness of operations must be frequently measured and (re)assessed through an iterative system of continuous improvement.
    • Lack of standardization.
      Pre-established use cases and policies outlining tier-1 operational efforts will eliminate ad hoc remediation efforts and streamline operations.
    • Failure to acknowledge the auditor as a customer.
      Many compliance and regulatory obligations require organizations to have comprehensive documentation of their security operations practices.

    60% Of organizations say security operation teams have little understanding of each other’s requirements.

    40% Of executives report that poor coordination leads to excessive labor and IT operational costs.

    38-100% Increase in efficiency after closing operational gaps with collaboration.
    (Source: Forbes, “The Game Plan for Closing the SecOps Gap”)

    The solution

    Bar chart of the 'Benefits of Internal Collaboration' with 'Increased Operational Efficiency' and 'Increased Problem Solving' having the highest percentage.

    “Empower a few administrators with the best information to enable fast, automated responses.”
    – Ismael Valenzuela, IR/Forensics Technical Practice Manager, Foundstone® Services, Intel Security)

    Insufficient security personnel resourcing has been identified as the most prevalent challenge in security operations…

    When an emergency security incident strikes, weak collaboration and poor coordination among critical business functions will magnify inefficiencies in the incident response (IR) process, impacting the organization’s ability to minimize damage and downtime.

    The solution: optimize your SOC. Info-Tech has seen SOCs with five analysts outperform SOCs with 25 analysts through tools and process optimization.

    Sources:
    Ponemon. "2016 State of Cybersecurity in Small & Medium-Sized Businesses (SMB).”
    Syngress. Designing and Building a Security Operations Center.

    Maintain a holistic security operations program

    Legacy security operations centers (SOCs) fail to address gaps between data sources, network controls, and human capital. There is limited visibility and collaboration between departments, resulting in siloed decisions that do not support the best interests of the organization.
    Venn diagram of 'Next-Gen Security Operations' with four intersecting circles: 'Prevent', 'Detect', 'Analyze', and 'Respond'.

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address cyberthreats affecting the organization’s brand, business operations, and technology infrastructure on a daily basis.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Diligent patching and vulnerability management, endpoint protection, and strong human-centric security (amongst other tactics) are essential. Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs
    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape. Respond: Organizations can’t rely on an ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook in order to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Info-Tech’s security operations blueprint ties together various initiatives

    Stock image 1.

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

    Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    Deliverables
    • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
    • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
    • Penetration Test RFP Template
    • Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template
    Stock image 2.

    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

    Threat Intelligence
    Threat intelligence addresses the collection, analysis, and dissemination of external threat data. Analysts act as liaisons to their peers, publishing actionable threat alerts, reports, and briefings. Threat intelligence proactively monitors and identifies whether threat indicators are impacting your organization.
    • Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Threat Intelligence RACI Tool
    • Management Plan Template
    • Threat Intelligence Policy Template
    • Alert Template
    • Alert and Briefing Cadence Schedule
    Stock image 3.

    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

    Operations
    Security operations include the real-time monitoring and analysis of events based on the correlation of internal and external data sources. This also includes incident escalation based on impact. Analysts are constantly tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds to further help identify which indicators are most impactful during the analysis phase of operations.
    • Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Event Prioritization Tool
    • Efficiency Calculator
    • SecOps Policy Template
    • In-House vs. Outsourcing Decision-Making Tool
    • SecOps RACI Tool
    • TCO & ROI Comparison Calculator
    Stock image 4.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Incident Response
    Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities. IR teams coordinate root-cause analysis and incident gathering while facilitating post-incident lessons learned. Incident response can provide valuable threat data that ties specific indicators to threat actors or campaigns.
    • Incident Management Policy
    • Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Incident Management Plan
    • Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Various Incident Management Runbooks

    This blueprint will…

    …better protect your organization with an interdependent and collaborative security operations program.

    Phase 01

    Assess your operational requirements.

    Phase 02

    Optimize and further mature your security operations processes

    Phase 3a

    Develop the process flow and specific interaction points between functions

    Phase 3b

    Test your current capabilities with a table top exercise
    Briefly assess your current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.
    Highlight operational weak spots that should be addressed before progressing.
    Develop a prioritized list of security-focused operational initiatives.
    Conduct a holistic analysis of your operational capabilities.
    Define the operational interaction points between security-focused operational departments.
    Document the results in comprehensive operational interaction agreement.
    Test your operational processes with Info-Tech’s security operations table-top exercise.

    Info-Tech integrates several best practices to create a best-of-breed security framework

    Legend for the 'Information Security Framework' identifying blue best practices as 'In Scope' and white best practices as 'Out of Scope'. Info-Tech's 'Information Security Framework' of best practices with two main categories 'Governance' and 'Management', each with subcategories such as 'Context & Leadership' and 'Prevention', each with a group of best practices color-coded to the associated legend identifying them as 'In Scope' or 'Out of Scope'.

    Benefits of a collaborative and integrated operations program

    Effective security operations management will help you do the following:

    • Improve efficacy
      Develop structured processes to automate activities and increase process consistency across the security program. Expose operational weak points and transition teams from firefighting to an innovator role.
    • Improve threat protection
      Enhance network controls through the hardening of perimeter defenses, an intelligence-driven analysis process, and a streamlined incident remediation process.
    • Improve visibility and information sharing
      Promote both internal and external information sharing to enable good decision making.
    • Create and clarify accountability and responsibility
      Security operations management practices will set a clear level of accountability throughout the security program and ensure role responsibility for all tasks and processes involved in service delivery.
    • Control security costs
      Security operations management is concerned with delivering promised services in the most efficient way possible. Good security operations management practices will provide insight into current costs across the organization and present opportunities for cost savings.
    • Identify opportunities for continuous improvement
      Increased visibility into current performance levels and the ability to accurately identify opportunities for continuous improvement.

    Impact

    Short term:

    • Streamlined security operations program development process.
    • Completed comprehensive list of operational gaps and initiatives.
    • Formalized and structured implementation process.
    • Standardized operational use cases that predefine necessary operational protocol.

    Long term:

    • Enhanced visibility into immediate threat environment.
    • Improved effectiveness of internal defensive controls.
    • Increased operational collaboration between prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
    • Enhanced security pressure posture.
    • Improved communication with executives about relevant security risks to the business.

    Understand the cost of not having a suitable security operations program

    A practical approach, justifying the value of security operations, is to identify the assets at risk and calculate the cost to the company should the information assets be compromised (i.e. assess the damage an attacker could do to the business).

    Cost Structure Cost Estimation ($) for SMB
    (Small and medium-sized business)
    Cost Estimation ($) for LE
    (Large enterprise)
    Security controls Technology investment: software, hardware, facility, maintenance, etc.
    Cost of process implementation: incident response, CMBD, problem management, etc.
    Cost of resource: salary, training, recruiting, etc.
    $0-300K/year $200K-2M/year
    Security incidents
    (if no security control is in place)
    Explicit cost:
    1. Incident response cost:
      • Remediation costs
      • Productivity: (number of employees impacted) × (hours out) × (burdened hourly rate)
      • Extra professional services
      • Equipment rental, travel expenses, etc.
      • Compliance fine
      • Cost of notifying clients
    2. Revenue loss: direct loss, the impact of permanent loss of data, lost future revenues
    3. Financial performance: credit rating, stock price
      Hidden cost:
      • Reputation, customer loyalty, etc.
    $15K-650K/year $270K-11M/year

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities
    • Kick-off and introductions.
    • High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.
    • Activity: Define workshop objectives and current state of knowledge.
    • Understand the threat collaboration environment.
    • Understand the benefits of an optimized security operations.
    • Activity: Review preliminary maturity level.
    • Activity: Assess current people, processes, and technology capabilities.
    • Activity: Assess workflow capabilities.
    • Activity: Begin deep-dive into maturity assessment tool.
    • Discuss strategies to enhance the analysis process (ticketing, automation, visualization, use cases, etc.).
    • Activity: Design ideal target state.
    • Activity: Identify security gaps.
    • Build initiatives to bridge the gaps.
    • Activity: Estimate the resources needed.
    • Activity: Prioritize gap initiatives.
    • Activity: Develop dashboarding and visualization metrics.
    • Activity: Plan for a transition with the security roadmap and action plan.
    • Activity: Define and assign tier 1, 2 & 3 SOC roles and responsibilities.
    • Activity: Assign roles and responsibilities for each security operations initiative.
    • Activity: Develop a comprehensive measurement program.
    • Activity: Develop specific runbooks for your top-priority incidents (e.g. ransomware).
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Activity:Conduct attack campaign simulation.
    • Finalize main deliverables.
    • Schedule feedback call.
    Deliverables
    1. Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool
    1. Target State and Gap Analysis (Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool)
    1. Security Operations Role & Process Design
    2. Security Operations RACI Chart
    3. Security Operations Metrics Summary
    4. Security Operations Phishing Process Runbook
    5. Attack Campaign Simulation PowerPoint

    All Final Deliverables

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    PHASE 1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    3

    Define Interdependencies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine why you need a sound security operations program.
    • Understand Info-Tech’s threat collaboration environment.
    • Evaluate your current security operation’s functions and capabilities.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A defined scope and motive for completing this project.
    • Insight into your current security operations capabilities.
    • A prioritized list of security operations initiatives based on maturity level.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.

    Warm-up exercise: Why build a security operations program?

    Estimated time to completion: 30 minutes

    Discussion: Why are we pursuing this project?

    What are the objectives for optimizing and developing sound security operations?

    Stakeholders Required:

    • Key business executives
    • IT leaders
    • Security operations team members

    Resources Required

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Dry-erase markers
    1. Briefly define the scope of security operations
      What people, processes, and technology fall within the security operations umbrella?
    2. Brainstorm the implications of not acting
      What does the status quo have in store? What are the potential risks?
    3. Define the goals of the project
      Clarify from the outset: what exactly do you want to accomplish from this project?
    4. Prioritize all brainstormed goals
      Classify the goals based on relevant prioritization criteria, e.g. urgency, impact, cost.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Don’t develop a security operations program with the objective of zero incidents. This reliance on prevention results in over-engineered security solutions that cost more than the assets being protected.

    Decentralizing the SOC: Security as a function

    Before you begin, remember that no two security operation programs are the same. While the end goal may be similar, the threat landscape, risk tolerance, and organizational requirements will differ from any other SOC. Determine what your DNA looks like before you begin to protect it.

    Security operations must provide several fundamental functions:
    • Real-time monitoring, detecting, and triaging of data from both internal and external sources.
    • In-depth analysis of indicators and incidents, leveraging malware analysis, correlation and rule tweaking, and forensics and eDiscovery techniques.
    • Network/host scanning and vulnerability patch management.
    • Incident response, remediation, and reporting. Security operations must disseminate appropriate information/intelligence to relevant stakeholders.
    • Comprehensive logging and ticketing capabilities that document and communicate events throughout the threat collaboration environment.
    • Tuning and tweaking of technologies to ingest collected data and enhance the analysis process.
    • Enhance overall organizational situational awareness by reporting on security trends, escalating incidents, and sharing adversary tools, tactics, and procedures.
    Venn diagram of 'Security Operations' with four intersecting circles: 'Prevent', 'Detect', 'Analyze', and 'Respond'.
    At its core, a security operations program is responsible for the prevention, detection, analysis, and response of security events.

    Optimized security operations can seamlessly integrate threat and incident management processes with monitoring and compliance workflows and resources. This integration unlocks efficiency.

    Understand the levels of security operations

    Take the time to map out what you need and where you should go. Security operations has to be more than just monitoring events – there must be a structured program.

    Foundational Arrow with a plus sign pointing right. Operational Arrow with a plus sign pointing right. Strategic
    • Intrusion Detection Management
    • Active Device and Event Monitoring
    • Log Collection and Retention
    • Reporting and Escalation Management
    • Incident Management
    • Audit Compliance
    • Vendor Management
    • Ticketing Processes
    • Packet Capture and Analysis
    • SIEM
    • Firewall
    • Antivirus
    • Patch Management
    • Event Analysis and Incident Triage
    • Security Log Management
    • Vulnerability Management
    • Host Hardening
    • Static Malware Analysis
    • Identity and Access Management
    • Change Management
    • Endpoint Management
    • Business Continuity Management
    • Encryption Management
    • Cloud Security (if applicable)
    • SIEM with Defined Use Cases
    • Big Data Security Analytics
    • Threat Intelligence
    • Network Flow Analysis
    • VPN Anomaly Detection
    • Dynamic Malware Analysis
    • Use-Case Management
    • Feedback and Continuous Improvement Management
    • Visualization and Dashboarding
    • Knowledge Portal Ticket Documentation
    • Advanced Threat Hunting
    • Control and Process Automation
    • eDiscovery and Forensics
    • Risk Management
    ——Security Operations Capabilities—–›

    Understand security operations: Establish a unified threat collaboration environment

    Stock image 1.

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address threats impacting the organization’s brand, operations, and technology infrastructure.
    • Managing incident escalation and response.
    • Coordinating root-cause analysis and incident gathering.
    • Facilitating post-incident lessons learned.
    • Managing system patching and risk acceptance.
    • Conducting vulnerability assessment and penetration testing.
    • Monitoring in real-time and triaging of events.
    • Escalating events to incident management team.
    • Tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds.
    • Gathering and analyzing external threat data.
    • Liaising with peers, industry, and government.
    • Publishing threat alerts, reports, and briefings.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Ensure that information flows freely throughout the threat collaboration environment – each function should serve to feed and enhance the next.

    Stock image 2.

    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

    Stock image 3.

    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

    Stock image 4.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    The threat collaboration environment is comprised of three core elements

    Info-Tech Insight

    The value of a SOC can be achieved with fewer prerequisites than you think. While it is difficult to cut back on process and technology requirements, human capital is transferrable between roles and functions and can be cross-trained to satisfy operational gaps.

    Three hexes fitting together with the words 'People', 'Process', and 'Technology'. People. Effective human capital is fundamental to establishing an efficient security operations program, and if enabled correctly, can be the driving factor behind successful process optimization. Ensure you address several critical human capital components:
    • Who is responsible for each respective threat collaboration environment function?
    • What are the required operational roles, responsibilities, and competencies for each employee?
    • Are there formalized training procedures to onboard new employees?
    • Is there an established knowledge transfer and management program?
    Processes. Formal and informal mechanisms that bridge security throughout the collaboration environment and organization at large. Ask yourself:
    • Are there defined runbooks that clearly outline critical operational procedures and guidelines?
    • Is there a defined escalation protocol to transfer knowledge and share threats internally?
    • Is there a defined reporting procedure to share intelligence externally?
    • Are there formal and accessible policies for each respective security operations function?
    • Is there a defined measurement program to report on the performance of security operations?
    • Is there a continuous improvement program in place for all security operations functions?
    • Is there a defined operational vendor management program?
    Technology. The composition of all infrastructure, systems, controls, and tools that enable processes and people to operate and collaborate more efficiently. Determine:
    • Are the appropriate controls implemented to effectively prevent, detect, analyze, and remediate threats? Is each control documented with an assigned asset owner?
    • Can a solution integrate with existing controls? If so, to what extent?
    • Is there a centralized log aggregation tool such as a SIEM?
    • What is the operational cost to effectively manage each control?
    • Is the control the most up-to-date version? Have the most recent patches and configuration changes been applied? Can it be consolidated with or replaced by another control?

    Conduct a preliminary maturity assessment before tackling this project

    Stock image 1.

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment

    At a high level, assess your organization’s operational maturity in each of the threat collaboration environment functions. Determine whether the foundational processes exist in order to mature and streamline your security operations.

    Stock image 2.

    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

    Stock image 3.

    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

    Stock image 4.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Assess the current maturity of your security operations program

    Prioritize the component most important to the development of your security operations program.

    Screenshot of a table from the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment presenting the 'Impact Sub-Weightings' of 'People', 'Process', 'Technology', and 'Policy'.
    Screenshot of a table from the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment assessing the 'Current State' and 'Target State' of different 'Security Capabilities'.
    Each “security capability” covers a component of the overarching “security function.” Assign a current and target maturity score to each respective security capability. (Note: The CMMI maturity scores are further explained on the following slide.) Document any/all comments for future Info-Tech analyst discussions.

    Assign each security capability a reflective and desired maturity score.

    Your current and target state maturity will be determined using the capability maturity model integration (CMMI) scale. Ensure that all participants understand the 1-5 scale.
    Two-way vertical arrow colored blue at the top and green at the bottom. Ad Hoc
    1 Arrow pointing right. Initial/Ad Hoc: Activity is not well defined and is ad hoc, e.g. no formal roles or responsibilities exist, de facto standards are followed on an individual-by-individual basis.
    2 Arrow pointing right. Developing: Activity is established and there is moderate adherence to its execution, e.g. while no formal policies have been documented, content management is occurring implicitly or on an individual-by-individual basis.
    3 Arrow pointing right. Defined: Activity is formally established, documented, repeatable, and integrated with other phases of the process, e.g. roles and responsibilities have been defined and documented in an accessible policy, however, metrics are not actively monitored and managed.
    4 Arrow pointing right. Managed and Measurable: Activity execution is tracked by gathering qualitative and quantitative feedback, e.g. metrics have been established to monitor the effectiveness of tier-1 SOC analysts.
    5 Arrow pointing right. Optimized: Qualitative and quantitative feedback is used to continually improve the execution of the activity, e.g. the organization is an industry leader in the respective field; research and development efforts are allocated in order to continuously explore more efficient methods of accomplishing the task at hand.
    Optimized

    Notes: Info-Tech seldom sees a client achieve a CMMI score of 4 or 5. To achieve a state of optimization there must be a subsequent trade-off elsewhere. As such, we recommend that organizations strive for a CMMI score of 3 or 4.

    Ensure that your threat collaboration environment is of a sufficient maturity before progressing

    Example report card from the maturity assessment. Functions are color-coded green, yellow, and red. Review the report cards for each of the respective threat collaboration environment functions.
    • A green function indicates that you have exceeded the operational requirements to proceed with the security operations initiative.
    • A yellow function indicates that your maturity score is below the recommended threshold; Info-Tech advises revisiting the attached blueprint. In the instance of a one-off case, the client can proceed with this security operations initiative.
    • A red function indicates that your maturity score is well below the recommended threshold; Info-Tech strongly advises to not proceed with the security operations initiative. Revisit the recommended blueprint and further mature the specific function.

    Are you ready to move on to the next phase?

    Self-Assessment Questions

    • Have you clearly defined the rationale for refining your security operations program?
    • Have you clearly defined and prioritized the goals and outcomes of optimizing your security operations program?
    • Have you assessed your respective people, process, and technological capabilities?
    • Have you completed the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool?
    • Were all threat collaboration environment functions of a sufficient maturity level?

    If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to move on to Phase 2: Develop Maturity Initiatives

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    PHASE 2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    3

    Define Interdependencies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish your goals, obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    • Assess your current state and define a target state.
    • Develop and prioritize gap initiatives.
    • Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit of each initiative.
    • Develop a security strategy operational roadmap.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A formalized understanding of your business, customer, and regulatory obligations.
    • A comprehensive current and target state assessment.
    • A succinct and consolidated list of gap initiatives that will collectively achieve your target state.
    • A formally documented set of estimated priority variables (cost, effort, business alignment).
    • A fully prioritized security roadmap that is in alignment with business goals and informed by the organization’s needs and limitations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives

    Align your security operations program with corporate goals and obligations

    A common challenge for security leaders is learning to express their initiatives in terms that are meaningful to business executives.

    Frame the importance of your security operations program to
    align with that of the decision makers’ over-arching strategy.

    Oftentimes resourcing and funding is dependent on the
    alignment of security initiatives to business objectives.

    Corporate goals and objectives can be categorized into three major buckets:
    1. BUSINESS OBLIGATIONS
      The primary goals and functions of the organization at large. Examples include customer retention, growth, innovation, customer experience, etc.
    2. CONSUMER OBLIGATIONS
      The needs and demands of internal and external stakeholders. Examples include ease of use (external), data protection (external), offsite access (internal), etc.
    3. COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS
      The requirements of the organization to comply with mandatory and/or voluntary standards. Examples include HIPAA, PIPEDA, ISO 27001, etc.
    *Do not approach the above list with a security mindset – take a business perspective and align your security efforts accordingly.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Developing a security operations strategy is a proactive activity that enables you to get in front of any upcoming business projects or industry trends rather than having to respond reactively later on. Consider as many foreseeable variables as possible!

    Determine your security operations program scope and boundaries

    It is important to define all security-related areas of responsibility. Upon completion you should clearly understand what you are trying to secure.

    Ask yourself:
    Where does the onus of responsibility stop?

    The organizational scope and boundaries and can be categorized into four major buckets:
    1. PHYSICAL SCOPE
      The physical locations that the security operations program is responsible for. Examples include office locations, remote access, clients/vendors, etc.
    2. IT SYSTEMS
      The network systems that must be protected by the security operations program. Examples include fully owned systems, IaaS, PaaS, remotely hosted SaaS, etc.
    3. ORGANIZATIONAL SCOPE
      The business units, departments, or divisions that will be affected by the security operations program. Examples include user groups, departments, subsidiaries, etc.
    4. DATA SCOPE
      The data types that the business handles and the privacy/criticality level of each. Examples include top secret, confidential, private, public, etc.

    This also includes what is not within scope. For some outsourced services or locations you may not be responsible for security. For some business departments you may not have control of security processes. Ensure that it is made explicit at the outset, what will be included and what will be excluded from security considerations.

    Reference Info-Tech’s security strategy: goals, obligations, and scope activities

    Explicitly understanding how security aligns with the core business mission is critical for having a strategic plan and fulfilling the role of business enabler.

    Download and complete the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication. If previously completed, take the time to review your results.

    GOALS and OBLIGATIONS
    Proceed through each slide and brainstorm the ways that security operations supports business, customer, and compliance needs.

    Goals & Obligations
    Screenshots of slides from the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication.

    PROGRAM SCOPE & BOUNDARIES
    Assess your current organizational environment. Document current IT systems, critical data, physical environments, and departmental divisions.

    If a well-defined corporate strategy does not exist, these questions can help pinpoint objectives:

    • What is the message being delivered by the CEO?
    • What are the main themes of investments and projects?
    • What are the senior leaders measured on?
    Program Scope & Boundaries
    Screenshots of slides from the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication.

    INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITY

    For more information on how to complete the goals & obligations activity please reference Section 1.3 of Info-Tech’s Build an Information Security Strategy blueprint.

    Complete the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    On tab 1. Goals and Obligations:
    • Document all business, customer, and compliance obligations. Ensure that each item is reflective of the over-arching business strategy and is not security focused.
    • In the second column, identify the corresponding security initiative that supports the obligation.
    Screenshot from tab 1 of Info-Tech's Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. Columns are 'Business obligations', 'Security obligations to support the business (optional)', and 'Notes'.
    On tab 2. Scope and Boundaries:
    • Record all details for what is in and out of scope from physical, IT, organizational, and data perspectives.
    • Complete the affiliated columns for a comprehensive scope assessment.
    • As a discussion guide, refer to the considerations slides prior to this in phase 1.3.
    Screenshot from tab 2 of Info-Tech's Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. Title is 'Physical Scope', Columns are 'Environment Name', 'Highest data criticality here', 'Is this in scope of the security strategy?', 'Are we accountable for security here?', and 'Notes'.
    For the purpose of this security operations initiative please IGNORE the risk tolerance activities on tab 3.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    A common challenge for security leaders is expressing their initiatives in terms that are meaningful to business executives. This exercise helps make explicit the link between what the business cares about and what security is trying to do.

    Conduct a comprehensive security operations maturity assessment

    The following slides will walk you through the process below.

    Define your current and target state

    Self-assess your current security operations capabilities and determine your intended state.

    Create your gap initiatives

    Determine the operational processes that must be completed in order to achieve the target state.

    Prioritize your initiatives

    Define your prioritization criteria (cost, effort, alignment, security benefit) based on your organization

    Build a Gantt chart for your upcoming initiatives
    The final output will be a Gantt to action your prioritized initiatives

    Info-Tech Insight

    Progressive improvements provide the most value to IT and your organization. Leaping from pre-foundation to complete optimization is an ineffective goal. Systematic improvements to your security performance delivers value to your organization, each step along the way.

    Optimize your security operations workflow

    Info-Tech consulted various industry experts and consolidated their optimization advice.

    Dashboards: Centralized visibility, threat analytics, and orchestration enable faster threat detection with fewer resources.

    Adding more controls to a network never increases resiliency. Identify technological overlaps and eliminate unnecessary costs.

    Automation: There is shortfall in human capital in contrast to the required tools and processes. Automate the more trivial processes.

    SOCs with 900 employees are just as efficient as those with 35-40. There is an evident tipping point in marginal value.

    There are no plug-and-play technological solutions – each is accompanied by a growing pain and an affiliated human capital cost.

    Planning: Narrow the scope of operations to focus on protecting assets of value.

    Cross-train employees throughout different silos. Enable them to wear multiple hats.

    Practice: None of the processes happen in a vacuum. Make the most of tabletop exercises and other training exercises.

    Define appropriate use cases and explicitly state threat escalation protocol. Focus on automating the tier-1 analyst role.

    Self-assess your current-state capabilities and determine the appropriate target state

    1. Review:
    The heading in blue is the security domain, light blue is the subdomain and white is the specific control.
    2. Determine and Record:
    Ask participants to identify your organization’s current maturity level for each control. Next, determine a target maturity level that meets the requirements of the area (requirements should reflect the goals and obligations defined earlier).
    3.
    In small groups, have participants answer “what is required to achieve the target state?” Not all current/target state gaps will require additional description, explanation, or an associated imitative. You can generate one initiative that may apply to multiple line items.

    Screenshot of a table for assessing the current and target states of capabilities.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When customizing your gap initiatives consider your organizational requirements and scope while remaining realistic. Below is an example of lofty vs. realistic initiatives:
    Lofty: Perform thorough, manual security analysis. Realistic: Leverage our SIEM platform to perform more automated security analysis through the use of log information.

    Consolidate related gap initiatives to simplify and streamline your roadmap

    Identify areas of commonality between gap initiative in order to effectively and efficiently implement your new initiatives.

    Steps:
    1. After reviewing and documenting initiatives for each security control, begin sorting controls by commonality, where resources can be shared, or similar end goals and actions. Begin by copying all initiatives from tab 2. Current State Assessment into tab 5. Initiative List of the Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool and then consolidating them.
    2. Initiatives Consolidated Initiatives
      Document data classification and handling in AUP —› Document data classification and handling in AUP Keep urgent or exceptional initiatives separate so they can be addressed appropriately.
      Document removable media in AUP —› Define and document an Acceptable Use Policy Other similar or related initiatives can be consolidated into one item.
      Document BYOD and mobile devices in AUP —›
      Document company assets in Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) —›

    3. Review grouped initiatives and identify specific initiatives should be broken out and defined separately.
    4. Record your consolidated gap initiatives in the Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool, tab 6. Initiative Prioritization.

    Understand your organizational maturity gap

    After inputting your current and target scores and defining your gap initiatives in tab 2, review tab 3. Current Maturity and tab 4. Maturity Gap in Info-Tech’s Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool.

    Automatically built charts and tables provide a clear visualization of your current maturity.

    Presenting these figures to stakeholders and management can help visually draw attention to high-priority areas and contextualize the gap initiatives for which you will be seeking support.

    Screenshot of tabs 3 and 4 from Info-Tech's Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool. Bar charts titled 'Planning and Direction', 'Vulnerability Management', 'Threat Intelligence', and 'Security Maturity Level Gap Analysis'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Communicate the value of future security projects to stakeholders by copying relevant charts and tables into an executive stakeholder communication presentation (ask an Info-Tech representative for further information).

    Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit

    Define low, medium, and high resource allocation, and other variables for your gap initiatives in the Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool. These variables include:
    1. Define initial cost. One-time, upfront capital investments. The low cut-off would be a project that can be approved with little to no oversight. Whereas the high cut-off would be a project that requires a major approval or a formal capital investment request. Initial cost covers items such as appliance cost, installation, project based consulting fees, etc.
    2. Define ongoing cost. This includes any annually recurring operating expenses that are new budgetary costs, e.g. licensing or rental costs. Do not account for FTE employee costs. Generally speaking you can take 20-25% of initial cost as ongoing cost for maintenance and service.
    3. Define initial staffing in hours. This is total time in hours required to complete a project. Note: It is not total elapsed time, but dedicated time. Consider time required to research, document, implement, review, set up, fine tune, etc. Consider all staff hours required (2 staff at 8 hours means 16 hours total).
    4. Define ongoing staffing in hours. This is the ongoing average hours per week required to support that initiative. This covers all operations, maintenance, review, and support for the initiative. Some initiatives will have a week time commitment (e.g. perform a vulnerability scan using our tool once a week) versus others that may have monthly, quarterly, or annual time commitments that need to averaged out per week (e.g. perform annual security review requiring 0.4 hours/week (20 hours total based on 50 working weeks per year).
    Table relating the four definitions on the left, 'Initial Cost', 'Ongoing Cost (annual)', 'Initial Staffing in Hours', and 'Ongoing Staffing in Hours/Week'. Each row header is a definition and has four sub-rows 'High', 'Medium', 'Low', and 'Zero'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When considering these parameters, aim to use already existing resource allocations.

    For example, if there is a dollar value that would require you to seek approval for an expense, this might be the difference between a medium and a high cost category.

    Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit

    1. Define Alignment with Business. This variable is meant to capture how well the gap initiative aligns with organizational goals and objectives. For example, something with high alignment usually can be tied to a specific organization initiative and will receive senior management support. You can either:
      • Set low, medium, and high based on levels of support the organization will provide (e.g. High – senior management support, Medium – VP/business unit head support, IT support only)
      • Attribute specific corporate goals or initiatives to the gap initiative (e.g. High – directly supports a customer requirement/key contract requirement; Medium – indirectly support customer requirement/key contract OR enables remote workforce; Low – security best practice).
    2. Define Security Benefit. This variable is meant to capture the relative security benefit or risk reduction being provided by the gap initiative. This can be represented through a variety of factors, such as:
      • Reduces compliance or regulatory risk by meeting a control requirement
      • Reduces availability and operational risk
      • Implements a non-existent control
      • Secures high-criticality data
      • Secures at-risk end users
    Table relating the two definitions on the left, 'Alignment with Business', and 'Security Benefit'. Each row header is a definition and has three sub-rows 'High', 'Medium', and 'Low'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Make sure you consider the value of AND/OR. For either alignment with business or security benefit, the use of AND/OR can become useful thresholds to rank similar importance but different value initiatives.

    Example: with alignment with business, an initiative can indirectly support a key compliance requirement OR meet a key corporate goal.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You cannot do everything – and you probably wouldn’t want to. Make educated decisions about which projects are most important and why.

    Apply your variable criteria to your initiatives

    Identify easy-win tasks and high-value projects worth fighting for.
    Categorize the Initiative
    Select the gap initiative type from the down list. Each category (Must, Should, Could, and Won’t) is considered to be an “execution wave.” There is also a specific order of operations within each wave. Based on dependencies and order of importance, you will execute on some “must-do” items before others.
    Assign Criteria
    For each gap initiative, evaluate it based on your previously defined parameters for each variable.
    • Cost – initial and ongoing
    • Staffing – initial and ongoing
    • Alignment with business
    • Security benefit
    Overall Cost/Effort Rating
    An automatically generated score between 0 and 12. The higher the score attached to the initiative, the more effort required. The must-do, low-scoring items are quick wins and must be prioritized first.
    Screenshot of a table from Info-Tech's Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool with all of the previous table row headers as column headers.

    A financial services organization defined its target security state and created an execution plan

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Financial Services | Source: Info-Tech Research Group
    Framework Components
    Security Domains & Accompanied Initiatives
    (A portion of completed domains and initiatives)
    CSC began by creating over 100 gap initiatives across Info-Tech’s seven security domains.
    Current-State Assessment Context & Leadership Compliance, Audit & Review Security Prevention
    Gap Initiatives Created 12
    Initiatives
    14
    Initiatives
    45
    Initiatives
    Gap Initiative Prioritization
    Planned Initiative(s)* Initial Cost Ongoing Cost Initial Staffing Ongoing Staffing
    Document Charter Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Low - ‹1d Low - ‹2 Hour
    Document RACI Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Low - ‹1d Low - ‹2 Hour
    Expand IR processes Medium - $5K-$50K Low - ‹$1K High - ›2w Low - ‹2 Hour
    Investigate Threat Intel Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Medium - 1-10d Low - ‹2 Hour
    CSC’s defined low, medium, and high for cost and staffing are specific to the organization.

    CSC then consolidated its initiatives to create less than 60 concise tasks.

    *Initiatives and variables have been changed or modified to maintain anonymity

    Review your prioritized security roadmap

    Review the final Gantt chart to review the expected start and end dates for your security initiatives as part of your roadmap.

    In the Gantt chart, go through each wave in sequence and determine the planned start date and planned duration for each gap initiative. As you populate the planned start dates, take into consideration the resource constraints or dependencies for each project. Go back and revise the granular execution wave to resolve any conflicts you find.

    Screenshot of a 'Gantt Chart for Initiatives', a table with planned and actual start times and durations for each initiative, and beside it a roadmap with the dates from the Gantt chart plugged in.
    Review considerations
    • Does this roadmap make sense for our organization?
    • Do we focus too much on one quarter over others?
    • Will the business be going through any significant changes during the upcoming years that will directly impact this project?
    This is a living management document
    • You can use the same process on a per-case basis to decide where this new project falls in the priority list, and then add it to your Gantt chart.
    • As you make progress, check items off of the list, and periodically use this chart to retroactively update your progress towards achieving your overall target state.

    Consult an Info-Tech Analyst

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    Onsite workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If a Guided Implementation isn’t enough, we offer low-cost onsite delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to successfully complete your project.
    Photo of TJ Minichillo, Senior Director – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. TJ Minichillo
    Senior Director – Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Edward Gray, Consulting Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. Edward Gray
    Consulting Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Celine Gravelines, Research Manager – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. Celine Gravelines
    Research Manager – Security, Risk & Compliance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    If you are not communicating, then you are not secure.

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email workshops@infotech.com for more information.

    Are you ready to move on to the next phase?

    Self-Assessment Questions

    • Have you identified your organization’s corporate goals along with your obligations?
    • Have you defined the scope and boundaries of your security program?
    • Have you determined your organization’s risk tolerance level?
    • Have you considered threat types your organization may face?
    • Are the above answers documented in the Security Requirements Gathering Tool?
    • Have you defined your maturity for both your current and target state?
    • Do you have clearly defined initiatives that would bridge the gap between your current and target state?
    • Are each of the initiatives independent, specific, and relevant to the associated control?
    • Have you indicated any dependencies between your initiatives?
    • Have you consolidated your gap initiatives?
    • Have you defined the parameters for each of the prioritization variables (cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit)?
    • Have you applied prioritization parameters to each consolidated initiative?
    • Have you recorded your final prioritized roadmap in the Gantt chart tab?
    • Have you reviewed your final Gantt chart to ensure it aligns to your security requirements?

    If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to move on to Phase 3: Define Operational Interdependencies

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    PHASE 3

    Define Operational Interdependencies

    1

    Assess Operational Requirements

    2

    Develop Maturity Initiatives

    3

    Define Interdependencies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the current security operations process flow.
    • Define the security operations stakeholders and their respective deliverables.
    • Formalize an internal information sharing and collaboration plan.

    Outcomes of this step

    • A formalized security operations interaction agreement.
    • A security operations service and product catalog.
    • A structured operations collection plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Tie everything together with collaboration

    If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Define Strategic Needs and Requirements Participate in Information Sharing Communicate Clearly
    • Establish a channel to communicate management needs and requirements and define important workflow activities. Focus on operationalizing those components.
    • Establish a feedback loop to ensure your actions satisfied management’s criteria.
    • Consolidate critical security data within a centralized portal that is accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment, reducing the human capital resources required to manage that data.
    • Participate in external information sharing groups such as ISACs. Intelligence collaboration allows organizations to band together to decrease risk and protect one another from threat actors.
    • Disseminate relevant information in clear and succinct alerts, reports, or briefings.
    • Security operations analysts must be able to translate important technical security issues and provide in-depth strategic insights.
    • Define your audience before presenting information; various stakeholders will interpret information differently. You must present it in a format that appeals to their interests.
    • Be transparent in your communications. Holding back information will only serve to alienate groups and hinder critical business decisions.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Simple collaborative activities, such as a biweekly meeting, can unite prevention, detection, analysis, and response teams to help prevent siloed decision making.

    Understand the security operations process flow

    Process standardization and automation is critical to the effectiveness of security operations.

    Process flow for security operations with column headers 'Monitoring', 'Preliminary Analysis (Tier 1)', 'Triage', 'Investigation & Analysis (Tier 2)', 'Response', and 'Advanced Threat Detection (Tier 3)'. All processes begin with elements in the 'Monitoring' column and end up at 'Visualization & Dashboarding'.

    Document your security operations’ capabilities and tasks

    Table of capabilities and tasks for security operations.
    Document your security operations’ functional capabilities and operational tasks to satisfy each capability. What resources will you leverage to complete the specific task/capability? Identify your internal and external collection sources to satisfy the individual requirement. Identify the affiliated product, service, or output generated from the task/capability. Determine your escalation protocol. Who are the stakeholders you will be sharing this information with?
    Capabilities

    The major responsibilities of a specific function. These are the high-level processes that are expected to be completed by the affiliated employees and/or stakeholders.

    Tasks

    The specific and granular tasks that need to be completed in order to satisfy a portion of or the entire capability.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

    Convert your results into actionable process flowcharts

    Map each functional task or capability into a visual process-flow diagram.

    • The title should reflect the respective capability and product output.
    • List all involved stakeholders (inputs and threat escalation protocol) along the left side.
    • Ensure all relevant security control inputs are documented within the body of the process-flow diagram.
    • Map out the respective processes in order to achieve the desired outcome.
    • Segment each process within its own icon and tie that back to the respective input.
    Example of a process flow made with sticky notes.

    Title: Output #1 Example of a process flow diagram with columns 'Stakeholders', 'Input Processes', 'Output Processes', and 'Threat Escalation Protocol'. Processes are mapped by which stakeholder and column they fall to.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

    Formalize the opportunities for collaboration within your security operations program

    Security Operations Collaboration Plan

    Security operations provides a single pane of glass through which the threat collaboration environment can manage its operations.

    How to customize

    The security operations interaction agreement identifies opportunities for optimization through collaboration and cross-training. The document is composed of several components:

    • Security operations program scope and objectives
    • Operational capabilities and outputs on a per function basis
    • A needs and requirements collection plan
    • Escalation protocol and respective information-sharing guidance (i.e. a detailed cadence schedule)
    • A security operations RACI chart
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Collaboration Plan.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Understand the operational cut-off points. While collaboration is encouraged, understand when the onus shifts to the rest of the threat collaboration environment.

    Assign responsibilities for the threat management process

    Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan

    Formally documenting roles and responsibilities helps to hold those accountable and creates awareness as to everyone’s involvement in various tasks.

    How to customize
    • Customize the header fields with applicable stakeholders.
    • Identify stakeholders that are:
      • Responsible: The person(s) who does the work to accomplish the activity; they have been tasked with completing the activity and/or getting a decision made.
      • Accountable: The person(s) who is accountable for the completion of the activity. Ideally, this is a single person and is often an executive or program sponsor.
      • Consulted: The person(s) who provides information. This is usually several people, typically called subject matter experts (SMEs).
      • Informed: The person(s) who is updated on progress. These are resources that are affected by the outcome of the activities and need to be kept up to date.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Collaboration Plan.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

    Identify security operations consumers and their respective needs and requirements

    Ensure your security operations program is constantly working toward satisfying a consumer need or requirement.

    Internal Consumers External Consumers
    • Business Executives & Management (CIO, CISO, COO):
      • Inform business decisions regarding threats and their association with future financial risk, reputational risk, and continuity of operations.
    • Human Resources:
      • Security operations must directly work with HR to enforce tight device controls, develop processes, and set expectations.
    • Legal:
      • Security operations is responsible to notify the legal department of data breaches and the appropriate course of action.
    • Audit and Compliance:
      • Work with the auditing department to define additional audits or controls that must be measured.
    • Public Relations/Marketing Employees:
      • Employees must be educated on prevalent threats and how to avoid or mitigate them.

    Note: Your organization might not be the final target, but it could be a primary path for attackers. If you exist as a third-party partner to another organization, your responsibility in your technology ecosystem extends beyond your own product or service offerings.

    • Third-Party Contractors:
      • Identify relevant threats across industries – security operations is responsible for protecting more than just itself.
    • Commercial Vendors:
      • Identify commercial vendors of control failures and opportunities for operational improvement.
    • Suppliers:
      • Provide or maintain a certain level of security delivery.
      • Meet the same level of security that is expected of business units.
    • All End Users:
      • Be notified of any data breaches and potential violations of privacy.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    “In order to support a healthy constituency, network operations and security operations should be viewed as equal partners, rather than one subordinate to the other.” (Mitre world-class CISO)

    Define the stakeholders, their respective outputs, and the underlying need

    Security Operations Program Service & Product Catalog

    Create an informal security operations program service and product catalog. Work your way backwards – map each deliverable to the respective stakeholders and functions.

    Action/Output Arrow pointing right. Frequency Arrow pointing right. Stakeholders/Function
    Document the key services and outputs produced by the security operations program. For example:
    • Real-time monitoring
    • Event analysis and incident coordination
    • Malware analysis
    • External information sharing
    • Published alerts, reports, and briefings
    • Metrics
    Define the frequency for which each deliverable or service is produced or conducted. Leverage this activity to establish a state of accountability within your threat collaboration environment. Identify the stakeholders or groups affiliated with each output. Remember to include potential MSSPs.
    • Vulnerability Management
    • Threat Intelligence
    • Tier 1, 2, and 3 Analysts
    • Incident Response
    • MSSP
    • Network Operations
    Remember to include any target-state outputs or services identified in the maturity assessment. Use this exercise as an opportunity to organize your security operations outputs and services.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Develop a central web/knowledge portal that is easily accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment.

    Internal information sharing helps to focus operational efforts

    Organizations must share information internally and through secure external information sharing and analysis centers (ISACs).

    Ensure information is shared in a format that relates to the particular end user. Internal consumers fall into two categories:

    • Strategic Users — Intelligence enables strategic stakeholders to better understand security trends, minimize risk, and make more educated and informed decisions. The strategic intelligence user often lacks technical security knowledge; bridge the communication gap between security and non-technical decision makers by clearly communicating the underlying value and benefits.
    • Operational Users — Operational users integrate information and indicators directly into their daily operations and as a result have more in-depth knowledge of the technical terms. Reports help to identify escalated alerts that are part of a bigger campaign, provide attribution and context to attacks, identify systems that have been compromised, block malicious URLs or malware signatures in firewalls, IDPS systems, and other gateway products, identify patches, reduce the number of incidents, etc.
    Collaboration includes the exchange of:
    • Contextualized threat indicators, threat actors, TTPs, and campaigns.
    • Attribution of the attack, motives of the attacker, victim profiles, and frequent exploits.
    • Defensive and mitigation strategies.
    • Best-practice incident response procedures.
    • Technical tools to help normalize threat intelligence formats or decode malicious network traffic.
    Collaboration can be achieved through:
    • Manual unstructured exchanges such as alerts, reports, briefings, knowledge portals, or emails.
    • Automated centralized platforms that allow users to privately upload, aggregate, and vet threat intelligence. Current players include commercial, government, and open-source information-sharing and analysis centers.
    Isolation prevents businesses from learning from each others’ mistakes and/or successes.

    Define the routine of your security operations program in a detailed cadence schedule

    Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template

    Design your meetings around your security operations program’s outputs and capabilities

    How to customize

    Don’t operate in a silo. Formalize a cadence schedule to develop a state of accountability, share information across the organization, and discuss relevant trends. A detailed cadence schedule should include the following:

    • Activity, output, or topic being discussed.
    • Participants and stakeholders involved.
    • Value and purpose of meeting.
    • Duration and frequency of each meeting.
    • Investment per participant per meeting.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Schedule regular meetings composed of key members from different working groups to discuss concerns, share goals, and communicate operational processes pertaining to their specific roles.

    Apply a strategic lens to your security operations program

    Frame the importance of optimizing the security operations program to align with that of the decision makers’ overarching strategy.

    Strategies
    1. Bridge the communication gap between security and non-technical decision makers. Communicate concisely in business-friendly terms.
    2. Quantify the ROI for the given project.
    3. Educate stakeholders – if stakeholders do not understand what a security operations program encompasses, it will be hard for them to champion the initiative.
    4. Communicate the implications, value, and benefits of a security operations program.
    5. Frame the opportunity as a competitive advantage, e.g. proactive security measures as a client acquisition strategy.
    6. Address the increasing prevalence of threat actors. Use objective data to demonstrate the impact, e.g. through case studies, recent media headlines, or statistics.

    Defensive Strategy diagram with columns 'Adversaries', 'Defenses', 'Assets', and priority level.
    (Source: iSIGHT, “ Definitive Guide to Threat Intelligence”)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Refrain from using scare tactics such as fear, uncertainty, and doubt (FUD). While this may be a short-term solution, it limits the longevity of your operations as senior management is not truly invested in the initiative.

    Example: Align your strategic needs with that of management.

    Identify assets of value, current weak security measures, and potential adversaries. Demonstrate how an optimized security operations program can mitigate those threats.

    Develop a comprehensive measurement program to evaluate the effectiveness of your security operations

    There are three types of metrics pertaining to security operations:

    1) Operations-focused

    Operations-focused metrics are typically communicated through a centralized visualization such as a dashboard. These metrics guide operational efforts, identifying operational and control weak points while ensuring the appropriate actions are taken to fix them.

    Examples include, but are not limited to:

    • Ticketing metrics (e.g. average ticket resolution rate, ticketing status, number of tickets per queue/analyst).
    • False positive percentage per control.
    • Incident response metrics (e.g. mean time to recovery).
    • CVSS scores per vulnerability.

    2) Business-focused

    The evaluation of operational success from a business perspective.

    Example metrics include:

    • Return on investment.
    • Total cost of ownership (can be segregated by function: prevent, detect, analyze, and respond).
    • Saved costs from mitigated breaches.
    • Security operations budget as a percentage of the IT budget.

    3) Initiative-focused

    The measurement of security operations project progress. These are frequently represented as time, resource, or cost-based metrics.

    Note: Remember to measure end-user feedback. Asking stakeholders about their current expectations via a formal survey is the most effective way to kick-start the continuous improvement process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Operational metrics have limited value beyond security operations – when communicating to management, focus on metrics that are actionable from a business perspective.

    Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations Metrics Summary Document.Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Metrics Summary Document.

    Identify the triggers for continual improvement

    Continual Improvement

    • Audits: Check for performance requirements in order to pass major audits.
    • Assessments: Variances in efficiency or effectiveness of metrics when compared to the industry standard.
    • Process maturity: Opportunity to increase efficiency of services and processes.
    • Management reviews: Routine reviews that reveal gaps.
    • Technology advances: For example, new security architecture/controls have been released.
    • Regulations: Compliance to new or changed regulations.
    • New staff or technology: Disruptive technology or new skills that allow for improvement.

    Conduct tabletop exercises with Info-Tech’s onsite workshop

    Assess your security operations capabilities

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Security Operations Tabletop Exercise to guide simulations to validate your operational procedures.

    How to customize
    • Use the templates to document actions and actors.
    • For each new injection, spend three minutes discussing the response as a group. Then spend two minutes documenting each role’s contribution to the response. After the time limit, proceed to the following injection scenario.
    • Review the responses only after completing the entire exercise.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Tabletop Exercise.

    This tabletop exercise is available through an onsite workshop as we can help establish and design a tabletop capability for your organization.

    Are you ready to implement your security operations program?

    Self-Assessment Questions

    • Is there a formalized security operations collaboration plan?
    • Are all key stakeholders documented and acknowledged?
    • Have you defined your strategic needs and requirements in a formalized collection plan?
    • Is there an established channel for management to communicate needs and requirements to the security operation leaders?
    • Are all program outputs documented and communicated?
    • Is there an accessible, centralized portal or dashboard that actively aggregates and communicates key information?
    • Is there a formalized threat escalation protocol in order to facilitate both internal and external information sharing?
    • Does your organization actively participate in external information sharing through the use of ISACs?
    • Does your organization actively produce reports, alerts, products, etc. that feed into and influence the output of other functions’ operations?
    • Have you assigned program responsibilities in a detailed RACI chart?
    • Is there a structured cadence schedule for key stakeholders to actively communicate and share information?
    • Have you developed a structured measurement program on a per function basis?
    • Now that you have constructed your ideal security operations program strategy, revisit the question “Are you answering all of your objectives?”

    If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to implement your security operations program.

    Summary

    Insights

    1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
    2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives
    3. If you are not communicating, then you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

    Best Practices

    • Have a structured plan of attack. Define your unique threat landscape, as well as business, regulatory, and consumer obligations.
    • Foster both internal and external collaboration.
    • Understand the operational cut-off points. While collaboration is encouraged, understand when the onus shifts to the rest of the threat collaboration environment.
    • Do not bite off more than you can chew. Identify current people, processes, and technologies that satisfy immediate problems and enable future expansion.
    • Leverage threat intelligence to create a predictive and proactive security operations analysis process.
    • Formalize escalation procedures with logic and incident management flow.
    • Don’t develop a security operations program with the objective of zero incidents. This reliance on prevention results in over-engineered security solutions that cost more than the assets being protected.
    • Ensure that information flows freely throughout the threat collaboration environment – each function should serve to feed and enhance the next.
    • Develop a central web/knowledge portal that is easily accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment
    Protect your organization with an interdependent and collaborative security operations program.

    Bibliography

    “2016 State of Cybersecurity in Small & Medium-Sized Businesses (SMB).” Ponemon Institute, June 2016. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Ahmad, Shakeel et al. “10 Tips to Improve Your Security Incident Readiness and Response.” RSA, n.d. Web. 12 Nov. 2016.

    Anderson, Brandie. “ Building, Maturing & Rocking a Security Operations Center.” Hewlett Packard, n.d. Web. 4 Nov. 2016.

    Barnum, Sean. “Standardizing cyber threat intelligence information with the structured threat information expression.” STIX, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    Bidou, Renaud. “Security Operation Center Concepts & Implementation.” IV2-Technologies, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    Bradley, Susan. “Cyber threat intelligence summit.” SANS Institute InfoSec Reading Room, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Building a Security Operations Center.” DEF CON Communications, Inc., 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    “Building a Successful Security Operations Center.” ArcSight, 2015. Web. 21 Nov. 2016.

    “Building an Intelligence-Driven Security Operations Center.” RSA, June 2014. Web. 25 Nov. 2016.

    Caltagirone, Sergio, Andrew Pendergast, and Christopher Betz. “Diamond Model of Intrusion Analysis,” Center for Cyber Threat Intelligence and Threat Research, 5 July 2013. Web. 25 Aug. 2016.

    “Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report: Chief Security Officers Reveal True Cost of Breaches and the Actions Organizations Are Taking.” The Network. Cisco, 31 Jan. 2017. Web. 11 Nov. 2017.

    “CITP Training and Education.” Carnegie Mellon University, 2015. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Creating and Maintaining a SOC.” Intel Security, n.d. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    “Cyber Defense.” Mandiant, 2015. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    “Cyber Security Operations Center (CSOC).” Northrop Grumman, 2014. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Danyliw, Roman. “Observations of Successful Cyber Security Operations.” Carnegie Mellon, 12 Dec. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “Designing and Building Security Operations Center.” SearchSecurity. TechTarget, Mar. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    EY. “Managed SOC.” EY, 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Fishbach, Nicholas. “How to Build and Run a Security Operations Center.” Securite.org, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “Framework for improving critical infrastructure cybersecurity.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 12 Feb. 2014. Web.

    Friedman, John, and Mark Bouchard. “Definitive Guide to Cyber Threat Intelligence.” iSIGHT, 2015. Web. 1 June 2015.

    Goldfarb, Joshua. “The Security Operations Hierarchy of Needs.” Securityweek.com, 10 Sept. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “How Collaboration Can Optimize Security Operations.” Intel, n.d. Web. 2 Nov. 2016.

    Hslatman. “Awesome threat intelligence.” GitHub, 16 Aug. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Implementation Framework – Collection Management.” Carnegie Mellon University, 2015. Web.

    “Implementation Framework – Cyber Threat Prioritization.” Carnegie Mellon University, 03 Oct. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Intelligent Security Operations Center.” IBM, 25 Feb. 2015. Web. 15 Nov. 2016.

    Joshi Follow , Abhishek. “Best Practices for Security Operations Center.” LinkedIn, 01 Nov. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Joshi. “Best Practices for a Security Operations Center.” Cybrary, 18 Sept. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Kelley, Diana and Ron Moritz. “Best Practices for Building a Security Operations Center.” Information Security Today, 2006. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Killcrece, Georgia, Klaus-Peter Kossakowski, Robin Ruefle, and Mark Zajicek. ”Organizational Models for Computer Security Incident Response Teams (CSIRTs).” Carnegie Mellon Software Engineering Institute, Dec. 2003. Carnegie Mellon. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Kindervag , John. “SOC 2.0: Three Key Steps toward the Next-generation Security Operations Center.” SearchSecurity. TechTarget, Dec. 2010. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Kvochko, Elena. “Designing the Next Generation Cyber Security Operations Center.” Forbes Magazine, 14 Mar. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Lambert, P. “ Security Operations Center: Not Just for Huge Enterprises.” TechRepublic, 31 Jan. 2013. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Lecky, M. and D. Millier. “Re-Thinking Security Operations.” SecTor Security Education Conference. Toronto, 2014.

    Lee, Michael. “Three Elements That Every Advanced Security Operations Center Needs.” CSO | The Resource for Data Security Executives, n.d. Web. 16 Nov. 2016.

    Linch, David and Jason Bergstrom. “Building a Culture of Continuous Improvement in an Age of Disruption.” Deloitte LLP, 2014.

    Lynch, Steve. “Security Operations Center.” InfoSec Institute, 14 May 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Macgregor, Rob. “Diamonds or chains – cyber security updates.” PwC, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Make Your Security Operations Center (SOC) More Efficient.” Making Your Data Center Energy Efficient (2011): 213-48. Intel Security. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    Makryllos, Gordon. “The Six Pillars of Security Operations.” CSO | The Resource for Data Security Executives, n.d. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Marchany, R. “ Building a Security Operations Center.” Virginia Tech, 2015. Web. 8 Nov. 2016.

    Marty, Raffael. “Dashboards in the Security Operations Center (SOC).” Security Bloggers Network, 15 Jan. 2016. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Minu, Adolphus. “Discovering the Value of Knowledge Portal.” IBM, n.d. Web. 1 Nov. 2016.

    Muniz, J., G. McIntyre, and N. AlFardan. “Introduction to Security Operations and the SOC.” Security Operations Center: Building, Operating, and Maintaining your SOC. Cisco Press, 29 Oct. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Muniz, Joseph and Gary McIntyre. “ Security Operations Center.” Cisco, Nov. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Muniz, Joseph. “5 Steps to Building and Operating an Effective Security Operations Center (SOC).” Cisco, 15 Dec. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Nathans, David. Designing and Building a Security Operations Center. Syngress, 2015. Print.

    National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-61 Revision 2: Computer Security Incident Handling Guide.” 2012. Web.

    National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-83 Revision 1.” 2013. Web.

    National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-86: Guide to Integrating Forensic Techniques into Incident Response.” 2006. Web.

    F5 Networks. “F5 Security Operations Center.” F5 Networks, 2014. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    “Next Generation Security Operations Center.” DTS Solution, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “Optimizing Security Operations.” Intel, 2015. Web. 4 Nov. 2016.

    Paganini, Pierluigi. “What Is a SOC ( Security Operations Center)?” Security Affairs, 24 May 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Ponemon Institute LLC. “Cyber Security Incident Response: Are we as prepared as we think?” Ponemon, 2014. Web.

    Ponemon Institute LLC. “The Importance of Cyber Threat Intelligence to a Strong Security Posture.” Ponemon, Mar. 2015. Web. 17 Aug. 2016.

    Poputa-Clean, Paul. “Automated defense – using threat intelligence to augment.” SANS Institute InfoSec Reading Room, 15 Jan. 2015. Web.

    Quintagroup. “Knowledge Management Portal Solution.” Quintagroup, n.d. Web.

    Rasche, G. “Guidelines for Planning an Integrated Security Operations Center.” EPRI, Dec. 2013. Web. 25 Nov. 2016.

    Rehman, R. “What It Really Takes to Stand up a SOC.” Rafeeq Rehman – Personal Blog, 27 Aug. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    Rothke, Ben. “Designing and Building Security Operations Center.” RSA Conference, 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Ruks, Martyn and David Chismon. “Threat Intelligence: Collecting, Analysing, Evaluating.” MWR Infosecurity, 2015. Web. 24 Aug. 2016.

    Sadamatsu, Takayoshi. “Practice within Fujitsu of Security Operations Center.” Fujitsu, July 2016. Web. 15 Nov. 2016.

    Sanders, Chris. “Three Useful SOC Dashboards.” Chris Sanders, 24 Oct. 2016. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    SANS Institute. “Incident Handler's Handbook.” 2011. Web.

    Schilling, Jeff. “5 Pitfalls to Avoid When Running Your SOC.” Dark Reading, 18 Dec. 2014. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    Schinagl, Stef, Keith Schoon, and Ronald Paans. “A Framework for Designing a Security Operations Centre (SOC).” 2015 48th Hawaii International Conference on System Sciences. Computer.org, 2015. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “Security – Next Gen SOC or SOF.” InfoSecAlways.com, 31 Dec. 2013. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

    “Security Operations Center Dashboard.” Enterprise Dashboard Digest, n.d. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “Security Operations Center Optimization Services.” AT&T, 2015. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    “Security Operations Centers — Helping You Get Ahead of Cybercrime Contents.” EY, 2014. Web. 6 Nov. 2016.

    Sheikh, Shah. “DTS Solution - Building a SOC (Security Operations Center).” LinkedIn, 4 May 2013. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    Soto, Carlos. “ Security Operations Center (SOC) 101.” Tom's IT Pro, 28 Oct. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

    “Standardizing and Automating Security Operations.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 3 Sept. 2006. Web.

    “Strategy Considerations for Building a Security Operations Center.” IBM, Dec. 2013. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    “Summary of Key Findings.” Carnegie Mellon University, 03 Oct. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

    “Sustainable Security Operations.” Intel, 2016. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

    “The Cost of Malware Containment.” Ponemon Institute, Jan. 2015. Web.

    “The Game Plan for Closing the SecOps Gap.” BMC. Forbes Magazine, Jan. 2016. Web. 10 Jan. 2017.

    Veerappa Srinivas, Babu. “Security Operations Centre (SOC) in a Utility Organization.” GIAC, 17 Sept. 2014. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    Wang, John. “Anatomy of a Security Operations Center.” NASA, 2015. Web. 2 Nov. 2016.

    Weiss, Errol. “Statement for the Record.” House Financial Services Committee, 1 June 2012. Web. 12 Nov. 2016.

    Wilson, Tim. “SOC 2.0: A Crystal-Ball Glimpse of the Next-Generation Security Operations Center.” Dark Reading, 22 Nov. 2010. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

    Zimmerman, Carson. “Ten Strategies of a World-Class Cybersecurity Operations Center.” Mitre, 2014. Web. 24 Aug. 2016.

    Implement Lean Management Practices That Work

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}116|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement
    • Service delivery teams do not measure, or have difficulty demonstrating, the value they provide.
    • There is a lack of continuous improvement.
    • There is low morale within the IT teams leading to low productivity.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Create a problem-solving culture. Frequent problem solving is the differentiator between sustaining Lean or falling back to old management methods.
    • Commit to employee growth. Empower teams to problem solve and multiply your organizational effectiveness.

    Impact and Result

    • Apply Lean management principles to IT to create alignment and transparency and drive continuous improvement and customer value.
    • Implement huddles and visual management.
    • Build team capabilities.
    • Focus on customer value.
    • Use metrics and data to make better decisions.
    • Systematically solve problems and improve performance.
    • Develop an operating rhythm to promote adherence to Lean.

    Implement Lean Management Practices That Work Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how a Lean management system can help you increase transparency, demonstrate value, engage your teams and customers, continuously improve, and create alignment.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand Lean concepts

    Understand what a Lean management system is, review Lean philosophies, and examine simple Lean tools and activities.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 1: Understand Lean Concepts
    • Lean Management Education Deck

    2. Determine the scope of your implementation

    Understand the implications of the scope of your Lean management program.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 2: Determine the Scope of Your Implementation
    • Lean Management Scoping Tool

    3. Design huddle board

    Examine the sections and content to include in your huddle board design.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 3: Design Huddle Board
    • Lean Management Huddle Board Template

    4. Design Leader Standard Work and operating rhythm

    Determine the actions required by leaders and the operating rhythm.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 4: Design Leader Standard Work and Operating Rhythm
    • Leader Standard Work Tracking Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement Lean Management Practices That Work

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Lean Concepts

    The Purpose

    Understand Lean management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a common understanding of Lean management, the Lean management thought model, Lean philosophies, huddles, visual management, team growth, and voice of customer.

    Activities

    1.1 Define Lean management in your organization.

    1.2 Create training materials.

    Outputs

    Lean management definition

    Customized training materials

    2 Understand Lean Concepts (Continued) and Determine Scope

    The Purpose

    Understand Lean management.

    Determine the scope of your program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand metrics and performance review.

    Understand problem identification and continuous improvement.

    Understand Kanban.

    Understand Leader Standard Work.

    Define the scope of the Lean management program.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop example operational metrics

    2.2 Simulate problem section.

    2.3 Simulate Kanban.

    2.4 Build scoping tool.

    Outputs

    Understand how to use operational metrics

    Understand problem identification

    Understand Kanban/daily tasks section

    Defined scope for your program

    3 Huddle Board Design and Huddle Facilitation Coaching

    The Purpose

    Design the sections and content for your huddle board.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Initial huddle board design.

    Activities

    3.1 Design and build each section in your huddle board.

    3.2 Simulate coaching conversations.

    Outputs

    Initial huddle board design

    Understanding of how to conduct a huddle

    4 Design and Build Leader Standard Work

    The Purpose

    Design your Leader Standard Work activities.

    Develop a schedule for executing Leader Standard Work.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Standard activities identified and documented.

    Sample schedule developed.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify standard activities for leaders.

    4.2 Develop a schedule for executing Leader Standard Work.

    Outputs

    Leader Standard Work activities documented

    Initial schedule for Leader Standard Work activities

    Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}274|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $62,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture Domains
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-domains
    • A mature EA function is increasingly becoming an organizational priority to drive innovation, provide insight, and define digital capabilities.
    • Proliferation of digital technology has increased complexity, straining the EA function to deliver insights.
    • An EA tool increases the efficiency with which the EA function can deliver insights, but a large number of organizations have not a selected an EA tool that suits their needs.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • EA tool value largely comes from tying organizational context and requirements to the selection process.
    • Organizations that have selected an EA tool often fail to have it adopted and show its true value. To ensure successful adoption and value delivery, the EA tool selection process must account for the needs of business stakeholders and tool users.

    Impact and Result

    • Link the need for the EA tool to your organization’s EA value proposition. The connection enables the EA tool to address the future needs of stakeholders and the design style of the EA team.
    • Use Info-Tech’s EA Solution Recommendation Tool to create a shortlist of EA tools that is suited to the preferences of the organization.
    • Gather additional information on the shortlist of EA tool vendors to narrow down the selection using the EA Tool Request for Information Template.

    Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should procure an EA tool in the digital age, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Executive Brief
    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phases 1-3

    1. Make the case

    Decide if an EA tool is needed in your organization and define the requirements of EA tool users.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 1: Make the Case
    • EA Value Proposition Template
    • EA Tool User Requirements Template

    2. Shortlist EA tools

    Determine your organization’s preferences in terms of product capabilities and vendor characteristics.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 2: Shortlist EA Tools
    • EA Solution Recommendation Tool

    3. Select and communicate the process

    Gather information on shortlisted vendors and make your final decision.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 3: Select and Communicate the Process
    • EA Tool Request for Information Template
    • EA Tool Demo Script Template
    • Request for Proposal (RFP) Template
    • EA Tool Selection Process Template
    [infographic]

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}316|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $105,346 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being re-victimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Impact and Result

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop and implement a security incident management program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare

    Equip your organization for incident response with formal documentation of policies and processes.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 1: Prepare
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Management Charter Template
    • Security Incident Management Policy Template
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool

    2. Operate

    Act with efficiency and effectiveness as new incidents are handled.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 2: Operate
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Credential Compromise
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Distributed Denial of Service
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malicious Email
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Ransomware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Data Breach
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (PDF)
    • Data Breach Reporting Requirements Summary
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Third-Party Incident
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Blank Template

    3. Maintain and optimize

    Manage and improve the incident management process by tracking metrics, testing capabilities, and leveraging best practices.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 3: Maintain and Optimize
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Root-Cause Analysis Template
    • Security Incident Report Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare Your Incident Response Program

    The Purpose

    Understand the purpose of incident response.

    Formalize the program.

    Identify key players and escalation points.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common understanding of the importance of incident response.

    Various business units becoming aware of their roles in the incident management program.

    Formalized documentation.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess the current process, obligations, scope, and boundaries of the incident management program.

    1.2 Identify key players for the response team and for escalation points.

    1.3 Formalize documentation.

    1.4 Prioritize incidents requiring preparation.

    Outputs

    Understanding of the incident landscape

    An identified incident response team

    A security incident management charter

    A security incident management policy

    A list of top-priority incidents

    A general security incident management plan

    A security incident response RACI chart

    2 Develop Incident-Specific Runbooks

    The Purpose

    Document the clear response procedures for top-priority incidents.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    As incidents occur, clear response procedures are documented for efficient and effective recovery.

    Activities

    2.1 For each top-priority incident, document the workflow from detection through analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident analysis.

    Outputs

    Up to five incident-specific runbooks

    3 Maintain and Optimize the Program

    The Purpose

    Ensure the response procedures are realistic and effective.

    Identify key metrics to measure the success of the program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Real-time run-through of security incidents to ensure roles and responsibilities are known.

    Understanding of how to measure the success of the program.

    Activities

    3.1 Limited scope tabletop exercise.

    3.2 Discuss key metrics.

    Outputs

    Completed tabletop exercise

    Key success metrics identified

    Further reading

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Create a scalable incident response program without breaking the bank.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Security incidents are going to happen whether you’re prepared or not. Ransomware and data breaches are just a few top-of-mind threats that all organizations deal with. Taking time upfront to formalize response plans can save you significantly more time and effort down the road. When an incident strikes, don’t waste time deciding how to remediate. Rather, proactively identify your response team, optimize your response procedures, and track metrics so you can be prepared to jump to action.

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Picture of Céline Gravelines

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For

    • A CISO who is dealing with the following:
      • Inefficient use of time and money when retroactively responding to incidents, negatively affecting business revenue and workflow.
      • Resistance from management to adequately develop a formal incident response plan.
      • Lack of closure of incidents, resulting in being re-victimized by the same vector.

    This Research Will Help You

    • Develop a consistent, scalable, and usable incident response program that is not resource intensive.
    • Track and communicate incident response in a formal manner.
    • Reduce the overall impact of incidents over time.
    • Learn from past incidents to improve future response processes.

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • Business stakeholders who are responsible for the following:
    • Improving workflow and managing operations in the event of security incidents to reduce any adverse business impacts.
    • Ensuring that incident response compliance requirements are being adhered to.

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Efficiently allocate resources to improve incident response in terms of incident frequency, response time, and cost.
    • Effectively communicate expectations and responsibilities to users.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Security incidents are inevitable, but how they’re dealt with can make or break an organization. Poor incident response negatively affects business practices, including workflow, revenue generation, and public image.
    • The incident response of most organizations is ad hoc at best. A formal management plan is rarely developed or adhered to, resulting in ineffective firefighting responses and inefficient allocation of resources.

    Complication

    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being revictimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Resolution

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Data breaches are resulting in major costs across industries

    Per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies (measured in USD)

    This is a bar graph showing the per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies(measured in USD). the companies are, in decreasing order of cost: Health; Financial; Services; Pharmaceutical; Technology; Energy; Education; Industrial; Entertainment; Consumer; Media; Transportation; Hospitality; Retail; Research; Public

    Average data breach costs per compromised record hit an all-time high of $148 (in 2018).
    (Source: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study)”

    % of systems impacted by a data breach
    1%
    No Impact
    19%
    1-10% impacted
    41%
    11-30% impacted
    24%
    31-50% impacted
    15%
    > 50% impacted
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    61% Lost
    < 20%
    21% Lost 20-40% 8% Lost
    40-60%
    6% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    58% Lost
    <20%
    25% Lost
    20-40%
    9% Lost
    40-60%
    5% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%

    Source: Cisco, “Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report”

    Defining what is security incident management

    IT Incident

    Any event not a part of the standard operation of a service which causes, or may cause, the interruption to, or a reduction in, the quality of that service.

    Security Event:

    A security event is anything that happens that could potentially have information security implications.

    • A spam email is a security event because it may contain links to malware.
    • Organizations may be hit with thousands or perhaps millions of identifiable security events each day.
    • These are typically handled by automated tools or are simply logged.

    Security Incident:

    A security incident is a security event that results in damage such as lost data.

    • Incidents can also include events that don't involve damage but are viable risks.
    • For example, an employee clicking on a link in a spam email that made it through filters may be viewed as an incident.

    It’s not a matter of if you have a security incident, but when

    The increasing complexity and prevalence of threats have finally caught the attention of corporate leaders. Prepare for the inevitable with an incident response program.

    1. A formalized incident response program reduced the average cost of a data breach (per capita) from $148 to $134, while third-party involvement increased costs by $13.40.
    2. US organizations lost an average of $7.91 million per data breach as a result of increased customer attrition and diminished goodwill. Canada and the UK follow suit at $1.57 and $1.39 million, respectively.
    3. 73% of breaches are perpetrated by outsiders, 50% are the work of criminal groups, and 28% involve internal actors.
    4. 55% of companies have to manage fallout, such as reputational damage after a data breach.
    5. The average cost of a data breach increases by $1 million if left undetected for > 100 days.

    (Sources: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study”; Verizon, “2017 Data Breach Investigations Report”; Cisco, “Cisco 2018 Annual Cybersecurity Report”)

    Threat Actor Examples

    The proliferation of hacking techniques and commoditization of hacking tools has enabled more people to become threat actors. Examples include:
    • Organized Crime Groups
    • Lone Cyber Criminals
    • Competitors
    • Nation States
    • Hacktivists
    • Terrorists
    • Former Employees
    • Domestic Intelligence Services
    • Current Employees (malicious and accidental)

    Benefits of an incident management program

    Effective incident management will help you do the following:

    Improve efficacy
    Develop structured processes to increase process consistency across the incident response team and the program as a whole. Expose operational weak points and transition teams from firefighting to innovating.

    Improve threat detection, prevention, analysis, and response
    Enhance your pressure posture through a structured and intelligence-driven incident handling and remediation framework.

    Improve visibility and information sharing
    Promote both internal and external information sharing to enable good decision making.

    Create and clarify accountability and responsibility
    Establish a clear level of accountability throughout the incident response program, and ensure role responsibility for all tasks and processes involved in service delivery.

    Control security costs
    Effective incident management operations will provide visibility into your remediation processes, enabling cost savings from misdiagnosed issues and incident reduction.

    Identify opportunities for continuous improvement
    Increase visibility into current performance levels and accurately identify opportunities for continuous improvement with a holistic measurement program.

    Impact

    Short term:
    • Streamlined security incident management program.
    • Formalized and structured response process.
    • Comprehensive list of operational gaps and initiatives.
    • Detailed response runbooks that predefine necessary operational protocol.
    • Compliance and audit adherence.
    Long term:
    • Reduced incident costs and remediation time.
    • Increased operational collaboration between prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
    • Enhanced security pressure posture.
    • Improved communication with executives about relevant security risks to the business.
    • Preserved reputation and brand equity.

    Incident management is essential for organizations of any size

    Your incidents may differ, but a standard response ensures practical security.

    Certain regulations and laws require incident response to be a mandatory process in organizations.

    Compliance Standard Examples Description
    Federal Information Security Modernization Act (FISMA)
    • Organizations must have “procedures for detecting, reporting, and responding to security incidents” (2002).
    • They must also “inform operators of agency information systems about current and potential information security threats and vulnerabilities.”
    Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
    • “Organizations must: (i) establish an operational incident handling capability for organizational information systems that includes adequate preparation, detection, analysis, containment, recovery, and user response activities.”
    Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS v3)
    • 12.5.3: “Establish, document, and distribute security incident response and escalation procedures to ensure timely and effective handling of all situations.”
    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
    • 164.308: Response and Reporting – “Identify and respond to suspected or known security incidents; mitigate, to the extent practicable, harmful effects of security incidents that are known to the covered entity; and document security incidents and their outcomes.”

    Security incident management is applicable to all verticals

    Examples:
    • Finance
    • Insurance
    • Healthcare
    • Public administration
    • Education services
    • Professional services
    • Scientific and technical services

    Maintain a holistic security operations program

    Legacy security operations centers (SOCs) fail to address gaps between data sources, network controls, and human capital. There is limited visibility and collaboration between departments, resulting in siloed decisions that do not support the best interests of the organization.

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address cyberthreats affecting the organization’s brand, business operation, and technology infrastructure on a daily basis.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Diligent patching and vulnerability management, endpoint protection, and strong human-centric security (amongst other tactics) are essential. Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it, and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs.
    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape. Respond: Organizations can’t rely on an ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Info-Tech’s incident response blueprint is one of four security operations initiatives

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
    • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
    • Penetration Test RFP Template
    • Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template
    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Threat Intelligence Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Threat Intelligence RACI Tool
    • Threat Intelligence Management Plan Template
    • Threat Intelligence Policy Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert and Briefing Cadence Schedule Template
    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes Operations
    Security operations include the real-time monitoring and analysis of events based on the correlation of internal and external data sources. This also includes incident escalation based on impact. These analysts are constantly tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds to further help identify which indicators are most impactful during the analysis phase of operations.
    • Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Operations Event Prioritization Tool
    • Security Operations Efficiency Calculator
    • Security Operations Policy
    • In-House vs. Outsourcing Decision-Making Tool
    • Seccrimewareurity Operations RACI Tool
    • Security Operations TCO & ROI Comparison Calculator
    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Incident Response (IR)
    Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities. Incident response teams coordinate root cause and incident gathering while facilitating post-incident lessons learned. Incident response can provide valuable threat data that ties specific indicators to threat actors or campaigns.
    Security Incident Management Policy
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Various Incident Management Runbooks

    Understand how incident response ties into related processes

    Info-Tech Resources:
    Business Continuity Plan Develop a Business Continuity Plan
    Disaster Recovery Plan Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    Security Incident Management Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program
    Incident Management Incident and Problem Management
    Service Desk Standardize the Service Desk

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – project overview

    1. Prepare 2. Operate 3. Maintain and Optimize
    Best-Practice Toolkit 1.1 Establish the Drivers, Challenges, and Benefits.

    1.2 Examine the Security Incident Landscape and Trends.

    1.3 Understand Your Security Obligations, Scope, and Boundaries.

    1.4 Gauge Your Current Process to Identify Gaps.

    1.5 Formalize the Security Incident Management Charter.

    1.6 Identify Key Players and Develop a Call Escalation Tree.

    1.7 Develop a Security Incident Management Policy.

    2.1 Understand the Incident Response Framework.

    2.2 Understand the Purpose of Runbooks.

    2.3 Prioritize the Development of Incident-Specific Runbooks.

    2.4 Develop Top-Priority Runbooks.

    2.5 Fill Out the Root-Cause Analysis Template.

    2.6 Customize the Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool to Standardize Useful Questions for Lessons-Learned Meetings.

    2.7 Complete the Security Incident Report Template.

    3.1 Conduct Tabletop Exercises.

    3.2 Initialize a Security Incident Management Metrics Program.

    3.3 Leverage Best Practices for Continuous Improvement.

    Guided Implementations Understand the incident response process, and define your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.

    Formalize the incident management charter, RACI, and incident management policy.
    Use the framework to develop a general incident management plan.

    Prioritize and develop top-priority runbooks.
    Develop and facilitate tabletop exercises.

    Create an incident management metrics program, and assess the success of the incident management program.
    Onsite Workshop Module 1:
    Prepare for Incident Response
    Module 2:
    Handle Incidents
    Module 3:
    Review and Communicate Security Incidents
    Phase 1 Outcome:
  • Formalized stakeholder support
  • Security Incident Management Policy
  • Security Incident Management Charter
  • Call Escalation Tree
  • Phase 2 Outcome:
    • A generalized incident management plan
    • A prioritized list of incidents
    • Detailed runbooks for top-priority incidents
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • A formalized tracking system for benchmarking security incident metrics.
    • Recommendations for optimizing your security incident management processes.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities
    • Kick off and introductions.
    • High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.
    • Understand the benefits of security incident response management.
    • Formalize stakeholder support.
    • Assess your current process, obligations, and scope.
    • Develop RACI chart.
    • Define impact and scope.
    • Identify key players for the threat escalation protocol.
    • Develop a security incident response policy.
    • Develop a general security incident response plan.
    • Prioritize incident-specific runbook development.
    • Understand the incident response process.
    • Develop general and incident-specific call escalation trees.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your top-priority incidents (e.g. ransomware).
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your next top-priority incidents:
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Determine key metrics to track and report.
    • Develop post-incident activity documentation.
    • Understand best practices for both internal and external communication.
    • Finalize key deliverables created during the workshop.
    • Present the security incident response program to key stakeholders.
    • Workshop executive presentation and debrief.
    • Finalize main deliverables.
    • Schedule subsequent Analyst Calls.
    • Schedule feedback call.
    Deliverables
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Security Incident Management Policy
    • General incident management plan
    • Security Incident Management Runbook
    • Development prioritization
    • Prioritized list of runbooks
    • Understanding of incident handling process
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Post-Incident Report Analysis Template
    • Root Cause Analysis Template
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Communication plans
    • Workshop summary documentation
  • All final deliverables
  • Measured value for Guided Implementations

    Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice – it also results in significant cost savings.

    GI Purpose Measured Value
    Section 1: Prepare

    Understand the need for an incident response program.
    Develop your incident response policy and plan.
    Develop classifications around incidents.
    Establish your program implementation roadmap.

    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates: 2 FTEs*2 days*$80,000/year = $1,280
    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates:
    2 FTEs*5 days*$80,000/year = $3,200

    Section 2: Operate

    Prioritize runbooks and develop the processes to create your own incident response program:

  • Detect
  • Analyze
  • Contain
  • Eradicate
  • Recover
  • Post-Incident Activity
  • Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    4 FTEs*10 days*$80,000/year = $12,800 (if done internally)

    Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    1 consultant*15 days*$2,000/day = $30,000 (if done by third party)
    Section 3: Maintain and Optimize Develop methods of proper reporting and create templates for communicating incident response to key parties. Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance, templates, and tabletop exercises:
    2 FTEs*3 days*$80,000/year = $1,920
    Total Costs To just get an incident response program off the ground. $49,200

    Insurance company put incident response aside; executives were unhappy

    Organization implemented ITIL, but formal program design became less of a priority and turned more ad hoc.

    Situation

    • Ad hoc processes created management dissatisfaction around the organization’s ineffective responses to data breaches.
    • Because of the lack of formal process, an entirely new security team needed to be developed, costing people their positions.

    Challenges

    • Lack of criteria to categorize and classify security incidents.
    • Need to overhaul the long-standing but ineffective program means attempting to change mindsets, which can be time consuming.
    • Help desk is not very knowledgeable on security.
    • New incident response program needs to be in alignment with data classification policy and business continuity.
    • Lack of integration with MSSP’s ticketing system.

    Next steps:

    • Need to get stakeholder buy-in for a new program.
    • Begin to establish classification/reporting procedures.

    Follow this case study to Phase 1

    Phase 1

    Prepare

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Phase 1: Prepare

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
    Prepare Operate Optimize

    This phase walks you through the following activities:

    1.1 Establish the drivers, challenges, and benefits.
    1.2 Examine the security incident landscape and trends.
    1.3 Understand your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    1.4 Gauge your current process to identify gaps.
    1.5 Formalize a security incident management charter.
    1.6 Identify key players and develop a call escalation tree.
    1.7 Develop a security incident management policy.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Security team
    • IT staff
    • Business leaders

    Outcomes of this phase

    • Formalized stakeholder support.
    • Security incident management policy.
    • Security incident management charter.
    • Call escalation tree.

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prepare for Incident Response
    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 Weeks
    Step 1.1-1.3 Understand Incident Response Step 1.4-1.7 Begin Developing Your Program
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
  • Discuss your current incident management status.
  • Review findings with analyst:
  • Review documents.
  • Then complete these activities…
    • Establish your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    • Identify the drivers, challenges, and benefits of formalized incident response.
    • Review any existing documentation.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Discuss further incident response requirements.
    • Identify key players for escalation and notifications.
    • Develop the policy.
    • Develop the plan.

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Policy
    Security Incident Management Plan
    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    Ready-made incident response solutions often contain too much coverage: too many irrelevant cases that are not applicable to the organization are accounted for, making it difficult to sift through all the incidents to find the ones you care about. Develop specific incident use cases that correspond with relevant incidents to quickly identify the response process and eliminate ambiguity when handled by different individuals.

    Ice breaker: What is a security incident for your organization?

    1.1 Whiteboard Exercise – 60 minutes

    How do you classify various incident types between service desk, IT/infrastructure, and security?

    • Populate sticky notes with various incidents and assign them to the appropriate team.
      • Who owns the remediation? When are other groups involved? What is the triage/escalation process?
      • What other groups need to be notified (e.g. cyber insurance, Legal, HR, PR)?
      • Are there dependencies among incidents?
      • What are we covering in the scope of this project?

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}359|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $123,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • People don’t understand the value of governance, seeing it as a hindrance to productivity and efficiency.
    • Governance is delegated to people and practices that don’t have the ability or authority to make these decisions.
    • Decisions are made within committees that don’t meet frequently enough to support business velocity.
    • It is difficult to allocate time and resources to build or execute governance effectively.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT governance applies not just to the IT department but to all uses of information and technology.
    • IT governance works against you if it no longer aligns with or supports your organizational direction, goals, and work practices.
    • Governance doesn’t have to be bureaucratic or control based.
    • Your governance model should be able to adapt to changes in the organization’s strategy and goals, your industry, and your ways of working.
    • Governance can be embedded and automated into your practices.

    Impact and Result

    • You will produce more value from IT by developing a governance framework optimized for your current needs and context, with the ability to adapt as your needs shift.
    • You will create the foundation and ability to delegate and empower governance to enable agile delivery.
    • You will identify areas where governance does not require manual oversight and can be embedded into the way you work.

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make Your IT Governance Adaptable Deck – A document that walks you through how to design and implement governance that fits the context of your organization and can adapt to change.

    Our dynamic, flexible, and embedded approach to governance will help drive organizational success. The three-phase methodology will help you identify your governance needs, select and refine your governance model, and embed and automate governance decisions.

    • Make Your IT Governance Adaptable – Phases 1-3

    2. Adaptive and Controlled Governance Model Templates and Workbook – Documents that gather context information about your organization to identify the best approach for governance.

    Use these templates and workbook to identify the criteria and design factors for your organization and the design triggers to maintain fit. Upon completion this will be your new governance framework model.

    • Controlled Governance Models Template
    • IT Governance Program Overview
    • Governance Workbook

    3. Implementation Plan and Workbook – Tools that help you build and finalize your approach to implement your new or revised governance model.

    Upon completion you will have a finalized implementation plan and a visual roadmap.

    • Governance Implementation Plan
    • Governance Roadmap Workbook

    4. Governance Committee Charter Templates – Base charters that can be adapted for communication.

    Customize these templates to create the committee charters or terms of reference for the committees developed in your governance model.

    • IT PMO Committee Charter
    • IT Risk Committee Charter for Controlled Governance
    • IT Steering Committee Charter for Controlled Governance
    • Program Governance Committee Charter
    • Architecture Review Board Charter
    • Data Governance Committee Charter
    • Digital Governance Committee Charter

    5. Governance Automation Criteria Checklist and Worksheet – Tools that help you determine which governance decisions can be automated and work through the required logic and rules.

    The checklist is a starting point for confirming which activities and decisions should be considered for automation or embedding. Use the worksheet to develop decision logic by defining the steps and information inputs involved in making decisions.

    • Governance Automation Criteria Checklist
    • Governance Automation Worksheet

    Infographic

    Workshop: Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Develop Your Guiding Star

    The Purpose

    Establish the context for your governance model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Core understanding of the context that will enable us to build an optimal model

    Activities

    1.1 Confirm mission, vision, and goals.

    1.2 Define scope and principles.

    1.3 Adjust for culture and finalize context.

    Outputs

    Governance principles

    Governance context and goals

    2 Define the Governance Model

    The Purpose

    To select and adapt a governance model based on your context.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A selected and optimized governance model

    Activities

    2.1 Select and refine governance model.

    2.2 Confirm and adjust the structure.

    2.3 Review and adapt governance responsibilities and activities.

    2.4 Validate governance mandates and membership.

    Outputs

    IT governance model and adjustment triggers

    IT governance structure, responsibilities, membership, and cadence

    Governance committee charters

    3 Build Governance Process and Policy

    The Purpose

    Refine your governance practices and associate policies properly.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A completed governance model that can be implemented with clear update triggers and review timing

    Policy alignment with the right levels of authority

    Activities

    3.1 Update your governance process.

    3.2 Align policies to mandate.

    3.3 Adjust and confirm your model.

    3.4 Identify and document update triggers and embed into review cycle.

    Outputs

    IT governance process and information flow

    IT governance policies

    Finalized governance model

    4 Embed and Automate Governance

    The Purpose

    Identify options to automate and embed governance activities and decisions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Simply more consistent governance activities and automate them to enhance speed and support governance delegation and empowerment

    Activities

    4.1 Identify decisions and standards that can be automated. Develop decision logic.

    4.2 Plan verification and validation approach.

    4.3 Build implementation plan.

    4.4 Develop communication strategy and messaging.

    Outputs

    Selected automation options, decision logic, and business rules

    Implementation and communication plan

    Further reading

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Table of Contents

    4 Analyst Perspective

    5 Executive Summary

    13 Governance Stages

    14 Info-Tech’s IT Governance Thought Model

    19 Info-Tech’s Approach

    23 Insight Summary

    30 Phase 1: Identify Your Governance Needs

    54 Phase 2: Select and Refine Your Governance Model

    76 Phase 3: Embed and Automate

    94 Summary of Accomplishment

    95 Additional Support

    97 Contributors

    98 Bibliography

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Governance will always be part of the fabric of your organization. Make it adaptable so it doesn’t constrain your success.

    Photo of Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Far too often, the purpose of information and technology (I&T) governance is misunderstood. Instead of being seen as a way to align the organization’s vision to its investment in information and technology, it has become so synonymous with compliance and control that even mentioning the word “governance” elicits a negative reaction.

    Success in modern digital organizations depends on their ability to adjust for velocity and uncertainty, requiring a dynamic and responsive approach to governance – one that is embedded and automated in your organization to enable new ways of working, innovation, and change.

    Evolutionary theory describes adaptability as the way an organism adjusts to fit a new environment, or changes to its existing environment, to survive. Applied to organizations, adaptable governance is critical to the ability to survive and succeed.

    If your governance doesn’t adjust to enable your changing business environment and customer needs, it will quickly become misaligned with your goals and drive you to failure.

    It is critical that people build an approach to governance that is effective and relevant today while building in adaptability to keep it relevant tomorrow.

    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • People don’t understand the value of governance, seeing it as a hindrance to productivity and efficiency.
    • Governance is delegated to people and practices that don’t have the ability or authority to make decisions.
    • Decisions are made within committees that don’t meet frequently enough to support business velocity.
    • It is difficult to allocate time and resources to build or execute governance effectively

    Common Obstacles

    • You are unable to clearly communicate how governance adds value to your organization.
    • Your IT governance approach no longer aligns with or supports your organizational direction, goals, and work practices.
    • Governance is seen and performed as a bureaucratic control-based exercise.
    • Governance activities are not transparent.
    • The governance committee gets too deeply involved with project deep dives and daily management, derailing its effectiveness and ability to produce value.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Use Info-Tech’s IT governance models to identify a base model similar to the way you are organized. Confirm your current and future placement in governance execution.
    • Adjust the model based on industry needs, your principles, regulatory requirements, and your future direction.
    • Identify where to embed or automate decision making and compliance and what is required to do so effectively.
    • Implement your governance model for success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT governance must be embedded and automated, where possible, to effectively meet the needs and velocity of digital organizations and modern practices and to drive success and value.

    What is governance?

    IT governance is a critical and embedded practice that ensures that information and technology investments, risks, and resources are aligned in the best interests of the organization and produce business value.

    Effective governance ensures that the right technology investments are made at the right time to support and enable your organization’s mission, vision, and goals.

    5 KEY OUTCOMES OF GOOD GOVERNANCE

    STRATEGIC ALIGNMENT

    Technology investments and portfolios are aligned with the organization's strategic objectives.

    RISK OPTIMIZATION

    Organizational risks are understood and addressed to minimize impact and optimize opportunities.

    VALUE DELIVERY

    IT investments and initiatives deliver their expected benefits.

    RESOURCE OPTIMIZATION

    Resources (people, finances, time) are appropriately allocated across the organization to optimal organizational benefit.

    PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT

    The performance of technology investments is monitored and used to determine future courses of action and to confirm achievement of success.

    ‹–EVALUATE–DIRECT–MONITOR–›

    Why is this necessary?

    • Governance is not simply a committee or an activity that you perform at a specific point in time; it is a critical and continuously active practice that drives the success of your organization. It is part of your organization’s DNA and is just as unique, with some attributes common to all (IT governance elements), some specific to your family (industry refinements), and some specific to you (individual organization).
    • Your approach to governance needs to change over time in order to remain relevant and continue to enable value and success, but organizations rarely want to change governance once it’s in place.
    • To meet the speed and flow of practices like Lean, DevOps, and Agile, your IT governance needs to be done differently and become embedded into the way your organization works. You must adjust your governance model based on key moments of change – organizational triggers – to maintain the effectiveness of your model.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Build an optimal model quickly and implement the core elements using an iterative approach to ensure the changes provide the most value.

    The Technology Value Trinity

    Delivery of Business Value & Strategic Needs

    • DIGITAL & TECHNOLOGY STRATEGY
      The identification of objectives and initiatives necessary to achieve business goals.
    • IT OPERATING MODEL
      The model for how IT is organized to deliver on business needs and strategies.
    • INFORMATION & TECHNOLOGY GOVERNANCE
      The governance to ensure the organization and its customers get maximum value from the use of information and technology.

    All three elements of the Technology Value Trinity work in harmony to deliver business value and meet strategic needs. As one changes, the others need to change as well.

    • Digital and IT Strategy tells you what you need to achieve to be successful.
    • IT Operating Model and Organizational Design is the alignment of resources to deliver on your strategy and priorities.
    • Information & Technology Governance is the confirmation that IT’s goals and strategy align with the business’ strategy. It is the mechanism by which you continuously prioritize work to ensure that what you deliver is in line with the strategy. This oversight involves evaluating, directing, and monitoring the delivery of outcomes to ensure that the use of resources results in achieving the organization’s goals.

    Too often strategy, operating model and organizational design, and governance are considered separate practices. As a result, “strategic documents” end up being wish lists, and projects continue to be prioritized based on who shouts the loudest rather than on what is in the best interest of the organization.

    Where information & technology governance fits within an organization

    An infographic illustrating where Governance fits within an organization. The main section is titled 'Enterprise Governance and Strategy' and contains 'Value Outcomes', 'Mission and Vision', 'Goals and Objectives', and 'Guiding Principles'. These all feed into the highlighted 'Information & Technology Governance', which then contributes to 'IT Strategy', which lies outside the main section.

    I&T governance hasn’t achieved its purpose

    Governance is the means by which IT ensures that information and technology delivery and spend is aligned to business goals and delivers business outcomes. However, most CEOs continue to perceive IT as being poorly aligned to the business’ strategic goals, which indicates that governance is not implemented or executed properly.

    For I&T governance to be effective you need a clear understanding of the things that drive your organization and its success. This understanding becomes your guiding star, which is critical for effective governance. It also requires participation by all parts of the organization, not just IT.

    Info-Tech CIO/CEO Alignment Diagnostics (N=124)

    43% of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.

    60% of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals.

    80% of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.

    30% of business stakeholders are supporters (N=32,536) of their IT departments

    Common causes of poor governance

    Key causes of poor or misaligned governance

    1. Governance and its value to your organization is not well understood, often being confused or integrated with more granular management activities.
    2. Business executives fail to understand that IT governance is a function of the business and not the IT department.
    3. Poor past experiences have made “governance” a bad word in the organization. People see it as a constraint and barrier that must be circumvented to get work done.
    4. There is misalignment between accountability and authority throughout the organization, and the wrong people are involved in governance practices.
    5. There is an unwillingness to change a governance approach that has served the organization well in the past, leading to challenges when the organization starts to change practices and speed of delivery.
    6. There is a lack of data and data-related capabilities required to support good decision making and the automation of governance decisions.
    7. The goals and strategy of the organization are not known or understood, leaving nothing for IT governance to orient around.

    Key symptoms of ineffective governance committees

    1. No actions or decisions are generated. The committee produces no value and makes no decisions after it meets. The lack of value output makes the usefulness of the committee questionable.
    2. Resources are overallocated. There is a lack of clear understanding of capacity and value in work to be done, leading to consistent underestimation of required resources and poor resource allocation.
    3. Decisions are changed outside of committee. Decisions made or initiatives approved by the committee are later changed when the proper decision makers are involved or the right information becomes available.
    4. Governance decisions conflict with organizational direction. This shows an obvious lack of alignment and behavioral disconnect that work against organizational success. It is often due to not accounting for where power really exists within the structure.
    5. Consistently poor outcomes are produced from governance direction. Committee members’ lack of business acumen, relevant data, or understanding of organizational goals results in decisions that fail to drive successful measured outcomes.

    Mature your governance by transitioning from ad hoc to automated

    Organizations should look to progress in their governance stages. Ad hoc and controlled governance practices tend to be more rigid, making these a poor fit for organizations requiring higher velocity delivery or using more agile and adaptive practices.

    The goal as you progress through these stages is to delegate governance and empower teams based on your fit and culture, enabling teams where needed to make optimal decisions in real time, ensuring that they are aligned with the best interests of the organization.

    Automate governance for optimal velocity while mitigating risks and driving value.

    This puts your organization in the best position to be adaptive, able to react effectively to volatility and uncertainty.

    A graph illustrating the transition from Ad Hoc to Automated. The y-axis is 'Process Integration' and x-axis is 'Trust & Empowerment'. 'Ad Hoc: Inconsistent Decision Making' lies close to the origin, ranking low on both axes' values. 'Controlled: Authoritarian, Highly Structured' ranks slightly higher on both axes. 'Agile: Distributed & Empowered' ranks 2nd highest on both axes. 'Automated: High Velocity, Embedded & Flexible' ranks highest on both axes.

    Stages of governance

    Adaptive
    Data-Centric


    ˆ


    ˆ


    ˆ


    ˆ


    ˆ
    Traditional
    (People- and Document-Centric)

    4

    Automated Governance
    • Entrenched into organizational processes and product/service design
    • Empowered and fully delegated to maintain fit and drive organizational success and survival

    3

    Agile Governance
    • Flexible enough to support different needs in the organization and respond quickly to change
    • Driven by principles and delegated throughout the company

    2

    Controlled Governance
    • Focused on compliance and hierarchy-based authority
    • Levels of authority defined and often driven by regulatory requirements

    1

    Ad Hoc Governance
    • Not well defined or understood within the organization
    • Occurs out of necessity but often not done by the right people or bodies

    Make Governance Adaptable and Automated to Drive Success and Value

    Governance adaptiveness ensures the success of digital organizations and modern practice implementation.

    THE PROBLEM

    • The wrong people are making decisions.
    • Organizations don't understand what governance is or why it's done.
    • Governance scope and design is a bad fit, damaging the organization.
    • People think governance is optional.

    THE SOLUTION

    ESTABLISH YOUR GUIDING PRINCIPLES

    Define and establish the guiding principle that drive your organization toward success.

    • Mission & Vision
    • Business Goals & Success Criteria
    • Operating Model & Work Practices
    • Governance Scope
    • Principles
    SELECT AND REFINE YOUR MODEL

    Use Info-Tech's IT Governance Models to identify a base model similar to the way you are organized. Confirm your current and future placement in governance execution.

    IDENTIFY MODEL UPDATE TRIGGERS

    Adjust the model based on industry needs, your principles, regulatory requirements, and future direction.

    • Principles
      Select principles that allow the organization to be adaptive while still ensuring the governance continues to stay on course with pursuing its guiding star.
    • Responsibilities
      Decide on the governance responsibilities related to Oversight Level, Strategic Alignment, Value Delivery, Risk Optimization, Resource Optimization, and Performance Management.
    • Structure
      Determine at which structured level governance is appropriate: Enterprise, Strategic, Tactical, or Operational.
    • Processes
      Establish processes that will enable governance to occur such as: Embed the processes required for successful governance.
    • Membership
      Identify the Responsibility & Accountability of those who should be involved in governance processes, policies, guidelines, and responsibilities.
    • Policies
      Confirm any governing policies that need to be adhered to and considered to manage risk.
    DETERMINE AUTOMATION OPTIONS AND DECISION RULES

    Identify where to embed or automate decision making and compliance and what is required to do so effectively.

    STAGES OF GOVERNANCE

      Traditional (People- and document-centric)
    1. AD HOC GOVERNANCE
      Governance that is not well defined or understood within the organization. It occurs out of necessity but often not by the right people or bodies.
    2. CONTROLLED GOVERNANCE
      Governance focused on compliance and hierarchy-based, authority-driven control of decisions. Levels of Authority are defined and often driven by regulatory requirements.
    3. Adaptive (Data Centric)
    4. AGILE GOVERNANCE
      Governance that is flexible to support different needs and quick responses in the organization. Driven by principles and delegated throughout the company.
    5. AUTOMATED GOVERNANCE
      Governance that is entrenched and automated into the organizational processes and product/service design. Empowered and fully delegated governance to maintain fit and drive organizational success and survival.

    KEY INSIGHT

    Governance must actively adapt to changes in your organization, environment, and practices or it will drive you to failure.

    Developing governance principles

    Governance principles support the move from controlled to automated governance by providing guardrails that guide your decisions. They provide the ethical boundaries and cultural perspectives that contextualize your decisions and keep you in line with organizational values. Determining principles are global in nature.

    CONTROLLED CHANGE ACTIONS AND RATIONALE AUTOMATED
    Disentangle governance and management Move from governance focused on evaluating, directing, and monitoring strategic decisions around information and technology toward defining and automating rules and principles for decision making into processes and practices, empowering the organization and driving adaptiveness. Delegate and empower
    Govern toward value Move from identifying the organization’s mission, goals, and key drivers toward orienting IT to align with those value outcomes and embedding value outcomes into design and delivery practices. Deliver to defined outcomes
    Make risk-informed decisions Move from governance bodies using risk information to manually make informed decisions based on their defined risk tolerance toward having risk information and attestation baked into decision making across all aspects and layers of the IT organization – from design to sustainment. Embed risk decision making into processes and practices
    Measure to drive improvement Move from static lagging metrics that validate that the work being done is meeting the organization’s needs and guide future decision making toward automated governance with more transparency driven by data-based decision making and real-time data insights. Trust through real-time reporting
    Enforce standards and behavior Move from enforcing standards and behavior and managing exceptions to ensure that there are consistent outcomes and quality toward automating standards and behavioral policies and embedding adherence and changes in behavior into the organization’s natural way of working. Automate standards through automated decision rules, verification, and validation

    Find your guiding star

    MISSION AND VISION –› GOALS AND OBJECTIVES –› GUIDING PRINCIPLES –›

    VALUE

    Why your organization exists and what value it aims to provide. The purpose you build a strategy to achieve. What your organization needs be successful at to fulfill its mission. Key propositions and guardrails that define and guide expected organizational behavior and beliefs.

    Your mission and vision define your goals and objectives. These are reinforced by your guiding principles, including ethical considerations, your culture, and expected behaviors. They provide the boundaries and guardrails for enabling adaptive governance, ensuring you continue to move in the right direction for organizational success.

    To paraphrase Lewis Carroll, “If you don't know where you want to get to, it doesn't much matter which way you go.” Once you know what matters, where value resides, and which considerations are necessary to make decisions, you have consistent directional alignment that allows you to delegate empowered governance throughout the organization, taking you to the places you want to go.

    Understand governance versus management

    Don’t blur the lines between governance and management; each has a unique role to play. Confusing them results in wasted time and confusion around ownership.

    Governance

    I&T governance defines WHAT should be done and sets direction through prioritization and decision making, monitoring overall IT performance.

    Governance aligns with the mission and vision of the organization to guide IT.

    A cycle of processes split into two halves, 'Governance Processes' and 'Management Processes'. Beginning on the Management side, the processes are 'Plan', 'Build', 'Run', 'Monitor', then to the Governance side, 'Evaluate', 'Direct', 'Monitor', and back to the beginning.

    Management

    Management focuses on HOW to do things to achieve the WHAT. It is responsible for executing on, operating, and monitoring activities as determined by I&T governance.

    Management makes decisions for implementation based on governance direction.

    Data is critical to automating governance

    Documents and subjective/non-transparent decisions do not create sufficient structure to allow for the true automation of governance. Data related to decisions and aggregated risk allow you to define decision logic and rules and algorithmically embed them into your organization.

    People- and Document-Centric

    Governance drives activities through specific actors (individuals/committees) and unstructured data in processes and documents that are manually executed, assessed, and revised. There are often constraints caused by gaps or lack of adequate and integrated information in support of good decisions.

    Data-Centric

    Governance actors provide principles, parameters, and decision logic that enable the creation of code, rulesets, and algorithms that leverage organizational data. Attestation is automatic – validated and managed within the process, product, or service.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Define your context and build your model

    ESTABLISH YOUR GUIDING PRINCIPLES

    Define and establish the guiding principle that drive your organization toward success.

    • Mission & Vision
    • Business Goals & Success Criteria
    • Operating Model & Work Practices
    • Governance Scope
    • Principles
    SELECT AND REFINE YOUR MODEL

    Use Info-Tech's IT Governance Models to identify a base model similar to the way you are organized. Confirm your current and future placement in governance execution.

    MODEL UPDATE TRIGGERS

    Adjust the model based on industry needs, your principles, regulatory requirements, and future direction.

    • Principles
      Select principles that allow the organization to be adaptive while still ensuring the governance continues to stay on course with pursuing its guiding star.
    • Responsibilities
      Decide on the governance responsibilities related to Oversight Level, Strategic Alignment, Value Delivery, Risk Optimization, Resource Optimization, and Performance Management.
    • Structure
      Determine at which structured level governance is appropriate: Enterprise, Strategic, Tactical, or Operational.
    • Processes
      Establish processes that will enable governance to occur such as: Embed the processes required for successful governance.
    • Membership
      Identify the Responsibility & Accountability of those who should be involved in governance processes, policies, guidelines, and responsibilities.
    • Policies
      Confirm any governing policies that need to be adhered to and considered to manage risk.
    AUTOMATION OPTIONS AND DECISION RULES

    Identify where to embed or automate decision making and compliance and what is required to do so effectively.

    The Info-Tech Difference

    Define your context and build your model

    1. Quickly identify the organizational needs driving governance and your guiding star.
    2. Select and refine a base governance model based on our templates.
    3. Define and document the key changes in your organization that will trigger a need to update or revise your governance.
    4. Determine where you might be able to automate aspects of your governance.
    5. Design your decision rules where appropriate to support automated and adaptive governance.

    How to use this research

    Where are you in your governance optimization journey?

    MY GOVERNANCE IS AD HOC AND WE’RE STARTING FROM SCRATCH I NEED TO BUILD A NEW GOVERNANCE STRUCTURE OUR GOVERNANCE APPROACH IS INEFFECTIVE AND NEEDS IMPROVEMENT I NEED TO LOOK AT OPTIONS FOR AUTOMATING GOVERNANCE PRACTICES
    Step 1.1: Define Your Governance Context Step 1.2: Structure Your IT Governance Phase 2: Select and Refine Your Model Phase 3: Embed and Automate

    IT governance is about ensuring that the investment decisions made around information and technology drive the optimal organizational value, not about governing the IT department.

    In this section we will clarify your organizational context for governance and define your guiding star to orient your governance design and inform your structure.

    There is no need to start from scratch! Start with Info-Tech’s best-practice IT governance models and customize them based on your organizational context.

    The research in this section will help you to select the right base model to work from and provide guidance on how to refine it.

    Governance practices eventually stop being a good fit for a changing organization, and things that worked before become bottlenecks.

    Governing roles and committees don’t adjust well, don’t have consistent practices, and lack the right information to make good decisions.

    The research in this section will help you improve and realign your governance practices.

    Once your governance is controlled and optimized you are ready to investigate opportunities to automate.

    This phase of the blueprint will help you determine where it’s feasible to automate and embed governance, understand key governance automation practices, and develop governing business rules to move your journey forward.

    Related Research:

    If you are looking for details on specific associated practices, please see our related research:

    1. I need to establish data governance.
    2. I need to manage my project portfolio, from intake to confirmation of value.
    3. I need better risk information to support decision making.
    4. I need to ensure I am getting the expected outcomes and benefits from IT spend.
    5. I need to prioritize my product backlog or service portfolio.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for building and embedding adaptive governance

    1. Identify Your Governance Needs 2. Select and Refine Your Governance Model 3. Embed and Automate
    Phase Steps
    1. Confirm Mission, Vision, and Goals
    2. Define Scope and Principles
    3. Adjust for Culture and Finalize Context
    1. Select and Refine Your Governance Model
    2. Identify and Document Your Governance Triggers
    3. Build Your Implementation Plan
    1. Identify Decisions to Embed and Automate
    2. Plan Validation and Verification
    3. Update Implementation Plan
    Phase Outcomes
    • Governance context, guiding star, and principles
    • Completed governance model with associated decisions and policies
    • Implementation plan
    • List of automation options
    • Decision logic, rules, and rulesets
    • Validation and verification approach
    • Finalized implementation plan

    Insight summary

    Value

    To remain valuable, I&T governance must actively adapt to changes in your organization, environment, and practices, or it will drive you to failure instead of success.

    Focus

    I&T governance does not focus on the IT department. Rather, its intent is to ensure your organization makes sound decisions around investment in and use of information and technology.

    Maturity

    Your governance approach progresses in stages from ad hoc to automated as your organization matures. Your stage depends on your organizational needs and ways of working.

    Good governance

    Good governance does not equate to control and does not stifle innovation.

    Automation

    Automating governance must be done in stages, based on your capabilities, level of maturity, and amount of usable data.

    Strategy

    Establish the least amount of governance required to allow you to achieve your goals.

    Guiding star

    If you don’t establish a guiding star to align the different stakeholders in your organization, governance practices will create conflict and confusion.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key Deliverable:
    Governance Framework Model

    The governance framework model provides the design of your new governance model and the organizational context to retain stakeholder alignment and organizational satisfaction with governance.

    The model includes the structures, practices, and responsibilities to drive effective governance in your organization.

    Sample of the key blueprint deliverable 'Governance Framework Model'.

    Governance Implementation Plan

    This roadmap lays out the changes required to implement the governance model, the cultural items that need to be addressed, and anticipated timing.

    Sample of the blueprint deliverable 'Governance Implementation Plan'.

    Governance Committee Charters

    Develop a detail governance charter or term of reference for each governing body. Outline the mandate, responsibilities, membership, process, and associated policies for each.

    Sample of the blueprint deliverable 'Governance Committee Charters'.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Stronger, traceable alignment of IT decisions and initiatives to business needs.
    • Improved ability for IT to meet the changing demands and velocity of the business.
    • Better support and enablement of innovation – removing constraints and barriers.
    • Optimized governance that supports and enables modern work practices.
    • Increased value generation from IT initiatives and optimal use of IT resources.
    • Designed adaptability to ensure you remain in alignment as your business and IT environments change.

    Business Benefits

    • Clear transparent focus of IT initiatives on generating strategic business value.
    • Improved ability to measure the value and contribution of IT to business goals.
    • Alignment and integration of business/IT strategy.
    • Optimized development and use of IT capabilities to meet business needs.
    • Improved integration with corporate/enterprise governance.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY Manufacturing
    SOURCE Info-Tech analyst experience

    Improving the governance approach and delegating decision making to support a change in business operation

    Challenge

    The large, multi-national organization has locations across the world but has two primary headquarters, in Europe and the United States.

    Market shifts drove an organizational shift in strategy, leading to a change in operating models, a product focus, and new work approaches across the organization.

    Much of the implementation and execution was done in isolation, and effectiveness was slowed by poor integration and conflicting activities that worked against each other.

    The product owner role was not well defined.

    Solution

    After reviewing the organization’s challenges and governance approach, we redefined and realigned its organizational and regional goals and identified outcomes that needed to be driven into their strategies.

    We also reviewed their span of control and integration requirements and properly defined decisions that could be made regionally versus globally, so that decisions could be made to support new work practices.

    We defined the product and service owner roles and the decisions each needed to make.

    Results

    We saw an improvement in the alignment of organizational activities and the right people and bodies making decisions.

    Work and practices were aimed at the same key outcomes and alignment between teams toward organizational goal improved.

    Within one year, the success rate of the organization’s initiatives increased by 22%, and the percentage of product-related decisions made by product owners increased by 50%.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 5 and 8 calls over the course of 2 to 3 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Phase 1: Identify Your Governance Needs

    • Call #1: Confirm your organization’s mission and vision and review your strategy and goals.
    • Call #2: Identify considerations and governance needs. Develop your guiding star and governing principles.
    • Phase 2: Select and Refine Your Model

    • Call #3: Select your base model and optimize it to meet your governance needs.
    • Call #4: Define your adjustment triggers and develop your implementation plan.
    • Phase 3: Embed and Automate

    • Call #5: Identify decisions and standards you can automate and where to embed them.
    • Call #6: Confirm levels of authority and data requirements. Establish your approach and update the implementation plan.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889

    Session 1 Session 2 Session 3 Session 4 Session 5
    Activities
    Develop Your Guiding Star

    1.1 Confirm mission, vision, and goals

    1.2 Define scope and principles

    1.3 Adjust for culture and finalize context

    Define the Governance Model

    2.1 Select and refine governance model

    2.2 Confirm and adjust the structure

    2.3 Review and adapt governance responsibilities and activities

    2.4 Validate governance mandates and membership

    Build Governance Process and Policy

    3.1 Update your governance process

    3.2 Align policies to mandate

    3.3 Adjust and confirm your governance model

    3.4 Identify and document your update triggers

    3.5 Embed triggers into review cycle

    Embed and Automate Governance

    4.1 Identify decisions and standards to automate

    4.2 Plan verification and validation approach

    4.3 Build implementation plan

    4.4 Develop communication strategy and messaging

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up

    5.1 Complete in-progress outputs from previous four sessions

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop outputs and to discuss next steps

    Outcomes
    1. Governance context and goals
    2. Governance principles
    1. IT governance model and adjustment triggers
    2. IT governance structure, responsibilities, membership, and cadence
    3. Governance committee charters
    1. IT governance process and information flow
    2. IT governance policies
    3. Finalized governance model
    1. Selected automation options, decision logic, and business rules
    2. Implementation and communication plan
    1. Governance context and principles
    2. Finalized governance model and charters
    3. Finalized implementation plan

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Phase 1

    Identify your Governance Needs

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Define Your Guiding Star
    • 1.2 Define Scope and Principles
    • 1.3 Adjust for Culture and Finalize Context

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Choose and Adapt Your Model
    • 2.2. Identify and Document Your Governance Triggers
    • 2.3 Build Your Implementation Approach

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Identify Decisions to Embed and Automate
    • 3.2 Plan Validation and Verification
    • 3.3 Update Implementation Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify the organization’s goals, mission, and vision that will guide governance.

    Define the scope of your governance model and the principles that will guide how it works.

    Account for organizational attitudes, behaviors, and culture related to governance and finalize your context.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Governance leads

    Step 1.1

    Define Your Guiding Star

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Document and interpret your strategy, mission, and vision
    • 1.1.2 Document and interpret the business and IT goals and outcomes
    • 1.1.3 Identify your operating model and work processes

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Review your business and IT strategy, mission, and vision to ensure understanding of organizational direction.

    Identify the business and IT goals that governance needs to align.

    Confirm your operating model and any work practices that need to be accounted for in your model.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Governance leads

    Outcomes of this step

    Identified guiding star outcomes to align governance outcomes with

    Defined operating model type and work style that impact governance design

    Identify Your Governance Needs

    Step 1.1 – Define your Guiding Star Step 1.2 – Define Scope and Principles Step 1.3 – Adjust for Culture and Finalize Context

    Govern by intent

    Find the balance for your designed governance approach

    Organic governance occurs during the formation of an organization and shifts with challenges, but it is rarely transparent and understood. It changes your culture in uncontrolled ways. Intentional governance is triggered by changes in organizational needs, working approaches, goals, and structures. It is deliberate and changes your culture to enable success.
    Stock photo of a weight scale.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your approach to governance needs to be designed, even if your execution of governance is adaptable and delegated.

    What is your guiding star?

    Your guiding star is a combination of your organization’s mission, vision, and strategy and the goals that have been defined to meet them.

    It provides you with a consistent focal point around which I&T-related activities and projects orbit, like planets around a star.

    It generates the gravity that governance uses to keep things from straying too far away from the goal of achieving relevant value.

    1. Mission & Vision
    2. Business Goals & Success Criteria
    3. Operating Model & Work Practices
    4. Governance Scope
    5. Principles

    1.1.1 Document and interpret your strategy, mission, and vision

    30 minutes

    Input: Business strategy, IT strategy, Mission and vision statements

    Output: Updated Governance Workbook, Documented strategic outcomes and organizational aims that governance needs to achieve

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Governance Workbook

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Gather your available business, digital, and IT strategy, mission, and vision information and document everything in your Governance Workbook. It’s ok if you don’t have all of it.
    2. Review and your mission and vision as a group. Discuss and document key points, including:
      • Which activities do you perform as an organization that embody your vision?
      • What key decisions and behaviors are required to ensure that your mission and vision are achievable?
      • What do you require from leadership to enable you to govern effectively?
      • What are the implications of the mission and vision on how the organization needs to work? What are the implications on decisions around opportunities and risks?

    Download the Governance Workbook

    1.1.2 Document and interpret the business and IT goals and outcomes

    60 minutes

    Input: Business strategy, Business and IT goals and related initiatives

    Output: Required success outcomes for goals, Links between IT and business goals that governance needs to align

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Document the business and IT goals that have been created to achieve the mission and vision.
    2. Discuss if there are any gaps between the goals and the mission and vision. Ask yourself – if we accomplish these goals will we have successfully achieved the mission?
    3. For each goal, define what successful achievement of the goal looks like. Starting with one goal or objective, ask:
      • How would I know I am on the right path and how will I know I have gotten there?
      • How would I know if I am not on the right path and what does a bad result look like?
    4. Document your success criteria.
    5. Brainstorm some examples of decisions that support or constrain the achievement of your goals.
    6. Repeat this exercise for your remaining goals.
    7. As a group, map IT goals to business goals.

    What is your operating model and why is it important?

    An IT operating model is a visual representation of the way your IT organization needs to be designed and the capabilities it requires to deliver on the business mission, strategic objectives, and technological ambitions.

    The model is critical in the optimization and alignment of the IT organization’s structure in order to deliver the capabilities required to achieve business goals. It is a key determinant of how governance needs to be designed and where it is implemented.

    Little visualizations of different operating models: 'Centralized', 'Decentralized', and 'Hybrid'.

    1.1.3 Identify your operating model and work practices

    60 minutes

    Input: Organizational structure, Operating model (if available)

    Output: Confirmed operating approach, Defined work practices

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Identify the way your organization functions:
      • How do we currently operate? Are we centralized, decentralized or a hybrid? Are we focused on delivering products and services? Do we provide service ourselves or do we use vendors for delivery?
      • Can we achieve our mission, goals, and strategies, if we continue to operate this way? What would we have to change in how we operate to be successful in the future?
    2. Identify your governance needs. Do we need to be more structured or more flexible to support our future ways of working?
      • If you operate in a more traditional way, consider whether you are implementing or moving toward more modern practices (e.g. Agile, DevOps, enterprise service management). Do you need to make more frequent but lower-risk decisions?
      • Is your organization ready to delegate governance culturally and in terms of business understanding? Is there enough available information to support adaptive decisions and actions?
    3. Document your operating style, expected changes in work style, and cultural readiness. You will need to consider the implications on design.

    Step 1.2

    Define Scope and Principles

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Determine the proper scope for your governance
    • 1.2.2 Confirm your determining governing principles
    • 1.2.3 Develop your specific governing principles

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify what is included and excluded within the scope of your governance.

    Develop the determining and specific principles that provide guardrails for governance activities and decisions.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Governance leads

    Outcomes of this step

    Documented governance scope and principles to apply

    Identify Your Governance Needs

    Step 1.1 – Define your Guiding Star Step 1.2 – Define Scope and Principles Step 1.3 – Adjust for Culture and Finalize Context

    Define the context for governance

    Based on the goals and principles you defined and the operating model you selected, confirm where oversight will be necessary and at what level. Focus on the necessity to expedite and clear barriers to the achievement of goals and on the ownership of risks and compliance. Some key considerations:

    • Where in the organization will you need to decide on work that needs to be done?
    • What type of work will you need to do?
    • In what areas could there be conflicts in prioritization/resource allocation to address?
    • Who is accountable for risks to the organization and its objectives?
    • Where are your regional or business-unit-specific concerns that require focused local attention?
    • Are we using more agile, rapid delivery methods to produce work?

    Understand your governance scope

    Your governance scope helps you define the boundaries of what your governance model and practices will cover. This includes key characteristics of your organization that impact what governance needs to address.

    Sample Considerations

    • Organizational Span
      • The geographical area the organization operates within. Regional laws and requirements will affect governance delegation and standards/policy development.
    • Level of Regulation
      • Higher levels of regulation create more standards and controls for risk and compliance, impacting how authority can be delegated or automated.
    • Sourcing Model
      • Changing technology sourcing introduces additional vendor governance requirements and may impact compliance and audit.
    • Risk Posture
      • The appetite for risk organizationally, and in pockets, impacts the level of uncertainty you are willing to work within and impact decision-making authority positioning.
    • Size
      • The size of your organization impacts the approach to governance, practice implementation, and delegation of authority.
    • What Is Working Today?
      • Which elements of your current governance approach should be retained, and what are the biggest pain points that need to be addressed?
    (Source: COBIT 2019)

    1.2.1 Determine the proper scope for your governance

    60 minutes

    Input: Context information from Activity 1.1, Scoping areas

    Output: Defined scope and span of control

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Determine the scope/span of control required for your governance by:
      • Reviewing your key IT capabilities. Identify the ones where the responsibilities and decisions require oversight to ensure they meet the needs of the organization.
      • Identify what works well or poorly in your current governance approach.
      • Discuss and document the level and type of knowledge and business understanding required.
      • Identify and document any regulations, standards, or laws that apply to your organization/industry and how broadly they have to be applied.
      • Identify the organization’s risk appetite, where known, and areas where acceptable thresholds of risk have been defined. Where are key risk and opportunity decisions made? Who owns risk in your organization?
      • Identify and document the perceived role of the IT group in your organization (e.g. support, innovator, partner) and sourcing model (e.g. insource, outsource).
      • Is there sufficient information and data available in your organization to support effective decision making?

    How should your governance be structured?

    Organizations often have too many governance bodies, creating friction without value. Where that isn’t the case, the bodies are often inefficient, with gaps or overlaps in accountability and authority. Structure your governance to optimize its effectiveness, designing with the intent to have the fewest number of governing bodies to be effective, but no less than is necessary.

    Start with your operating model.

    • Understand what’s different about your governance based on whether your organization in centralized, distributed, or a different model (e.g. hybrid, product).
    • Identify and include governance structures that are mandatory due to regulation or industry.
    • Based on your context, identify how many of your governance activities should be performed together.

    Determine whether your governance should be controlled or adaptive.

    • Do you have the capability to distribute governance and is your organization empowered enough culturally?
    • Do you have sufficient standards and data to leverage? Do you have the tools and capabilities?
    • Identify governance structures that are required due to regulation or industry.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your approach to governance needs to be designed and structured, even if your execution of governance is adaptable and delegated.

    Identify and Refine your Principles

    Confirm your defining principles based on your selection of controlled or adaptive governance. Create specific principles to clarify boundaries or provide specific guidance for teams within the organization.

    Controlled Adaptive
    Disentangle governance and management Delegate and empower
    Govern toward value Deliver to defined outcomes
    Make risk-informed decisions Embed risk into decision making
    Measure to drive improvement Trust though real-time reporting
    Enforce standards and behavior Automate decision making though established standards

    Determining Principle: Delegate and empower.

    Specific Principle: Decisions should be made at the lowest reasonable level of the organization with clarity.

    Rationale: To govern effectively with the velocity required to address business needs, governance needs to be executed deeper into the organization and organizational goals need to be clearly understood everywhere.

    Implication: Decision making needs to be delegated throughout the organization, so information and data requirements need to be identified, decision-making approach and principles need to be shared, and authority needs to be delegated clearly.

    1.2.2 Confirm your determining governance principles

    30-45 minutes

    Input: Governance Framework Model– Governance Principles

    Output: Governance workbook - Finalized list of determining principles

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Governance Workbook

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Review the IT governance principles in your Governance Workbook.
    2. Within your IT senior leadership team (or IT governance working group) assign one or two principles to teams of two to three participants. Have each team identify what this would mean for your organization. Answering the questions:
      • In what ways do our current governance practices support this?
      • What are some examples of changes that would need to be made to make this a reality?
      • How would applying this principle improve your governance?
    3. Have each team present their results and compile the findings and implications in the Governance Workbook to use for future communication of the change.

    Specific governing principles

    Specific governing principles are refined principles derived from a determining principle, when additional specificity and detail is necessary. It allows you to define an approach for specific behaviors and activities. Multiple specific principles may underpin the determining one.

    A visualization of a staircase with stairs labelled, bottom to top, 'Determining Principle', 'Rationale', 'Implications', 'Specific Principles'.

    Specific Principles – Related principles that may be required to ensure the implications of the determining principal are addressed within the organization. They may be specific to individual areas and may be addressed in policies.

    Implications – The implications of this principle on the organization, specific to how and where governance is executed and the level of information and authority that would be necessary.

    Rationale – The reason(s) driving the determining principle.

    Determining Principle – A core overarching principle – a defining aspect of your governance model.

    1.2.3 Develop your specific governing principles

    30 minutes

    Input: Updated determining principles

    Output: List of specific principles linked to determining principles

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Governance Workbook

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Confirm the determining principles for your governance model based on your previous discussions.
    2. Identify where to apply the principles. This is based on:
      1. Your governance scope (how much is within your span of control)
      2. The amount of data you have available
      3. Your cultural readiness for delegation
    3. Create specific principles to support the determining principles:
      1. Document the rationale driving the determining principles.
      2. Identify the implications.
      3. Create specific principles that will support the success in achieving the goals of each determining principle.
    4. Document all information on the “Governance guiding star” slide in the Governance Workbook.

    Download the Governance Workbook

    Step 1.3

    Adjust for Culture and Finalize Context

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Identify and address the impact of attitude, behavior, and culture
    • 1.3.2 Finalize your context

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify your organizational attitude, behavior, and culture related to governance.

    Identify positives that can be leveraged and develop means to address negatives.

    Finalize the context that your model will leverage and align to.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Governance leads

    Outcomes of this step

    Downloaded tool ready to select the base governance model for your organization

    Identify Your Governance Needs

    Step 1.1 – Define your Guiding Star Step 1.2 – Define Scope and Principles Step 1.3 – Adjust for Culture and Finalize Context

    Understanding attitude, behavior, and culture

    A

    ttitude

    What people think and feel. It can be seen in their demeanor and how they react to change initiatives, colleagues, and users. This manifests in the belief that governance is a constraint that needs to be avoided or ignored – often with unintended consequences.

    A stock photo of a lightbulb over a person's head and a blackboard behind them reading 'New Mindset - data-verified= New Results'.">

    Any form of organizational change involves adjusting people’s attitudes to create buy-in and commitment.

    You need to identify and address attitudes that can lead to negative behaviors and actions or that are counter-productive.

    Understanding attitude, behavior, and culture

    B

    ehavior

    What people do. This is influenced by attitude and the culture of the organization. In governance, this manifests as people’s willingness to be governed, who pushes back, and who tries to bypass it.

    A stock photo of someone walking up a set of stairs into the distant sunlight.

    To implement change within IT, especially at a tactical and strategic level, organizational behavior needs to change.

    This is relevant because people gravitate toward stability and will resist change in an active or passive way unless you can sell the need, value, and benefit of changing their behavior and way of working.

    Understanding attitude, behavior, and culture

    C

    ulture

    The accepted and understood ways of working in an organization. The values and standards that people find normal and what would be tacitly identified to new resources. In governance terms, this is how decisions are really made and where responsibility really exists rather than what is identified formally.

    A stock photo of a compass pointing to 'VALUES'.

    The impact of the organizational or corporate “attitude” on employee behavior and attitude is often not fully understood.

    Culture is an invisible element, which makes it difficult to identify, but it has a strong impact and must be addressed to successfully embed governance models. In the case of automating governance, cultural readiness for automation is a critical success factor.

    1.3.1 Identify and address the impact of attitude, behavior, and culture

    45 minutes

    Input: Senior leadership knowledge

    Output: Updated Governance Workbook

    Materials: Governance Workbook

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Break into three groups. Each group will discuss and document the positive and negative aspects of one of attitude, behavior, or culture related to governance in your organization.
    2. Each group will present and explain their list to the group.
    3. Add any additional suggestions in each area that are identified by the other groups.
    4. Identify the positive elements of attitude, behavior, and culture that would help with changing or implementing your updated governance model.
    5. Identify any challenges that will need to be addressed for the change to be successful.
    6. As a group, brainstorm some mitigations or solutions to these challenges. Document them in the Governance Workbook to be incorporated into the implementation plan.

    Download the Governance Workbook

    Attitude, behavior, and culture

    Evaluate the organization across the three contexts. The positive items represent opportunities for leveraging these characteristics with the implementation of the governance model, while the negative items must be considered and/or mitigated.

    Attitude Behavior Culture
    Positive
    Negative
    Mitigation

    1.3.2 Finalize your governance context

    30 minutes

    Input: Documented governance principles and scope from previous exercises

    Output: Finalized governance context in the Governance Workbook

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Governance Workbook

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Use the information that has been gathered throughout this section to update and finalize your IT governance context.
    2. Document it in your Governance Workbook.

    Download the Governance Workbook

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Phase 2

    Select and Refine Your Governance Model

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Define Your Guiding Star
    • 1.2 Define Scope and Principles
    • 1.3 Adjust for Culture and Finalize Context

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Choose and Adapt Your Model
    • 2.2. Identify and Document Your Governance Triggers
    • 2.3 Build Your Implementation Approach

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Identify Decisions to Embed and Automate
    • 3.2 Plan Validation and Verification
    • 3.3 Update Implementation Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Select a base governance model and refine it to suit your organization.

    Identify scenarios and changes that will trigger updates to your governance model.

    Build your implementation plan.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Governance resources

    Step 2.1

    Choose and Adapt Your Model

    Activities
    • 2.1.1 Choose your base governance model
    • 2.1.2 Confirm and adjust the structure of your model
    • 2.1.3 Define the governance responsibilities
    • 2.1.4 Validate the governance mandates and membership
    • 2.1.5 Update your committee processes
    • 2.1.6 Adjust your associated policies
    • 2.1.7 Adjust and confirm your governance model

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Review and selecting your base governance model.

    Adjust the structure, responsibilities, policies, mandate, and membership to best support your organization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Governance leads

    Outcomes of this step

    Downloaded tool ready to select the base governance model for your organization

    Select and Refine Your Governance Model

    Step 2.1 – Choose and Adapt Your Model Step 2.2 – Identify and Document Your Governance Triggers Step 2.3 – Build Implementation Approach

    Your governance framework has six key components

    GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK

    • GUIDELINES
      The key behavioral factors that ground your governance framework
    • MEMBERSHIP
      Formalization of who has authority and accountability to make specific governance decisions
    • RESPONSIBILITIES
      The definition of which decisions and outcomes your governance structure and each governance body is accountable for
    • STRUCTURE
      Which governance bodies and roles are in place to articulate where decisions are made in the organization
    • PROCESS
      Identification of the how your governance will be executed, how decisions are made, and the inputs, outputs, and connections to related processes
    • POLICY
      Set of principles established to address risk and drive expected and required behavior

    4 layers of governance bodies

    There are traditionally 4 layers of governance in an enterprise, and organizations have governing bodies or individuals at each level

    RESPONSIBILITIES AND TYPICAL MEMBERSHIP
    ENTERPRISE Defines organizational goals. Directs or regulates the performance and behavior of the enterprise, ensuring it has the structure and capabilities to achieve its goals.

    Membership: Business executives, Board

    STRATEGIC Ensures IT initiatives, products, and services are aligned to organizational goals and strategy and provide expected value. Ensure adherence to key principles.

    Membership: Business executives, CIO, CDO

    TACTICAL Ensures key activities and planning are in place to execute strategic initiatives.

    Membership: Authorized division leadership, related IT leadership

    OPERATIONAL Ensures effective execution of day-to-day functions and practices to meet their key objectives.

    Membership: Service/product owners, process owners, architecture leadership, directors, managers

    2.1.1 Choose your base governance model

    30 minutes

    Input: Governance models templates

    Output: Selected governance model

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Download Info-Tech’s base governance models (Controlled Governance Models Template and IT Governance Program Overview) and review them to find a template that most closely matches your context from Phase 1. You can start with a centralized, decentralized, or product/service hybrid IT organization. Remove unneeded models.
    2. If you do not have documented governance today, start with a controlled model as your foundation. Continue working through this phase if you have a documented governance framework you wish to optimize using our best practices or move to Phase 3 if you are looking to automate or embed your governance activities.

    Controlled Governance Models Template

    Adaptive Governance Models Template

    2.1.2 Confirm and adjust the structure of your model

    30-45 minutes

    Input: Selected base governance model, Governance context/scope

    Output: Updated governance bodies and relationships

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Validate your selected governance body structural model.
      • Are there any governing bodies you must maintain that should replace the ones listed? In part or in full?
      • Are there any missing bodies? Look at alternative committees for examples.
      • Document the adjustments.
    2. Are there any governing bodies that are not required?
      • Based on your size and needs, can they be done within one committee?
      • Is the capability or data not in place to perform the work?
      • Document the required changes.

    There are five key areas of governance responsibility

    A cyclical visualization of the five keys areas of governance responsibility, 'Strategic Alignment', 'Value Delivery', 'Risk Management', 'Resource Management', and 'Performance Measurement'.

    STRATEGIC ALIGNMENT
    Ensures that technology investments and portfolios are aligned with the organization’s needs.

    VALUE DELIVERY
    Reviews the outcomes of technology investments and portfolios to ensure benefits realization.

    RISK MANAGEMENT
    Defines and owns the risk thresholds and register to ensure that decisions made are in line with the posture of the organization.

    RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
    Ensures that people, financial knowledge, and technology resources are appropriately allocated across the organization.

    PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
    Monitors and directs the performance or technology investments to determine corrective actions and understand successes.

    2.1.3 Define the governance responsibilities

    Ensure you have the right responsibilities in the right place

    45-60 minutes

    Input: Selected governance base model, Governance context

    Output: Updated responsibilities and activities, Updated activities for selected governance bodies, New or removed governing bodies

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Based on your context and model, review the responsibilities identified for each committee and confirm that they align with the mandate and the stated outcome.
    2. Identify and highlight any responsibilities and activities that would not be involved in informing and enabling the mandate of the committee.
    3. Adjust the wording of confirmed responsibilities and activities to reflect your organizational language.
    4. Review each highlighted “bad fit” activity and move it to a committee whose mandate it would support or remove it if it’s not performed in your organization.
    5. If an additional committee is required, define the mandate and scope, then include any additional responsibilities that might have been a bad fit elsewhere

    2.1.4 Validate the governance mandates and membership

    30 minutes

    Input: Selected governance base model, Updated structure and responsibilities

    Output: Adjusted mandates and refined committee membership

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Review the mandate and membership slides in your selected governance model.
    2. Adjust the mandate to ensure that it aligns to and conveys:
      1. The outcome that the committee is meant to generate for the organization.
      2. Its scope/span of control.
    3. Discuss the type of information members would require for the committee to be successful in achieving its mandate.
    4. Document the member knowledge requirement in the mandate slide of the model template.

    Determine the right membership for your governance

    One of the biggest benefits of governance committees is the perspective provided by people from various parts of the organization, which helps to ensure technology investments are aligned with strategic goals. However, having too many people – or the wrong people – involved prevents the committee from being effective. Avoid this by following these principles.

    Three principles for selecting committee membership

    1. Determine membership based on responsibilities and required knowledge.
      Organizations often make the mistake of creating committees and selecting members before defining what they will do. This results in poor governance because members don’t have the knowledge required to make decisions. Define the mandate of the committee to determine which members are the right fit.
    2. Ensure members are accountable and authorized to make the decisions.
      Effective governance requires the members to have the authority and accountability to make decisions. This ensures meetings achieve their outcome and produce value, which improves the committee’s chances of survival.
    3. Select leaders who see the big picture.
      Often committee decisions and responsibilities become tangled in the web of organizational politics. Include people, often C-level, whose attendance is critical and who have the requisite knowledge, mindset, and understanding to put business needs ahead of their own.

    2.1.5 Update your committee processes

    20 minutes

    Input: Selected governance base model, Updated structure and responsibilities

    Output: Updated committee processes

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Review the committee details based on the changes you have made in goals, mandate, and responsibilities.
    2. Identify and document changes required to the committee outputs (outcomes) and adjust the consumer of the outputs to match.
    3. Review the high-level process steps required to get to the modified output. Add required activities or remove unnecessary ones. Review the process flow. Does it make sense? Are there unnecessary steps?
    4. Review and update inputs required for the process steps and update the information/data sources.
    5. Adjust the detailed process steps to reflect the work that needs to be done to support each high-level process step that changed.

    2.1.6 Adjust your associated policies

    20 minutes

    Input: Selected governance base model, Updated structure and responsibilities

    Output: Adjusted mandates and refined committee membership

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Review the policies associated with the governing bodies in your base model. Identify the policies that apply to your organization, those that are missing, and those that are not necessary.
    2. Confirm the policies that you require.
    3. Make sure the policies and policy purposes (or risks and related behaviors the policy addresses) are matched to the governance committee that has responsibilities in that area. Move policies to the right committee.

    2.1.7 Adjust and confirm your governance model

    1. Confirm the adjustment of governance bodies, structure, and input/output linkages.
    2. Confirm revisions to decisions and responsibilities.
    3. Confirm policy and regulation/standards associations.
    4. Select related governance committee charters from the provided set and revise the charters to reflect the elements defined in your updated model.
    5. Finalize your governance model.

    Samples of slides related to adjusting and confirming governance models in the Governance Workbook.

    Step 2.2

    Identify and Document Your Governance Triggers

    Activities
    • 2.2.1 Identify and document update triggers
    • 2.2.2 Embed triggers into the review cycle

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify scenarios that will create a need to review or change your governance model.

    Update your review/update approach to receiving trigger notifications.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Governance leads

    Outcomes of this step

    Downloaded tool ready to select the base governance model for your organization

    Select and Refine Your Governance Model

    Step 2.1 – Choose and Adapt Your Model Step 2.2 – Identify and Document Your Governance Triggers Step 2.3 – Build Implementation Approach

    What are governance triggers

    Governance triggers are organizational or environmental changes within or around an organization that are inflection points that start the review and revision of governance models to maintain their fit with the organization. This is the key to adaptive governance design.

    A target with five arrows sticking out of the bullseye, 'Operating Model', 'Business Strategy', 'Mandate Change', 'Management Practices', and 'Digital Transformation'.

    2.2.1 Identify and document update triggers

    30 minutes

    Input: Governance Workbook

    Output: Updated workbook with defined and documented governance triggers, points of origin, and integration

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Open the Governance Workbook to the “Triggers” slides.
    2. Review the list of governance triggers. Retain the ones that apply to your organization, remove those you feel are unnecessary, and add any change scenarios you feel should be included.
    3. Identify where you would receive notifications of these changes and the related processes or activities that would generate these notifications, if applicable.
    4. Document any points of integration required between governance processes and the source process. Highlight any where the integration is not currently in place.

    Sample of the 'Triggers' slide in the Governance Workbook.

    2.2.2 Embed triggers into the review cycle

    30 minutes

    Input: Governance model

    Output: Review cycle update

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Identify which triggers impact the entire governance model and which impact specific committees.
    2. Add an activity for triggered review of the impacted governance model into your governance committee process.

    Step 2.3

    Build Your Implementation Approach

    Activities
    • 2.3.1 Identify and document your implementation plan
    • 2.3.2 Build your roadmap
    • 2.3.3 Build your sunshine diagram

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Transfer changes to the Governance Implementation Plan Template.

    Determine the timing for the implementation phases.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Governance process owner

    Outcomes of this step

    Implementation plan for adaptive governance framework model

    Select and Refine Your Governance Model
    Step 2.1 – Choose and Adapt Your Model Step 2.2 – Identify and Document Your Governance Triggers Step 2.3 – Build Implementation Approach

    2.3.1 Identify and document your implementation plan

    60 minutes

    Input: Governance model, Guiding principles, Update triggers, Cultural factors and mitigations

    Output: Implementation roadmap

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. As a group, discuss the changes required to implement the governance model, the cultural items that need to be addressed, and the anticipated timing.
    2. Document the implementation activities and consolidate them into groupings/themes based on similarities or shared outcomes.
    3. Name the grouped themes for clarity and identify key dependencies between activities in each area and across themes.
    4. Identify and document your approach (e.g. continuous, phased) and high-level timeline for implementation.
    5. Document the themes and initiatives in the Governance Implementation Plan.

    Download the Governance Implementation Plan

    Illustrate the implementation plan using roadmaps

    Info-Tech recommends two different methods to roadmap the initiatives in your Governance Implementation Plan.

    Gantt Chart
    Sample of a Gantt Chart.

    This type of roadmap depicts themes, related initiatives, the associated goals, and exact start and end dates for each initiative. This diagram is useful for outlining a larger number of activities and initiatives and has an easily digestible and repeatable format.

    Sunshine Diagram
    Sample of a Sunshine Diagram.

    This type of roadmap depicts themes and their associated initiatives. The start and end dates for the initiatives are approximated based on years or phases. This diagram is useful for highlighting key initiatives on one page.

    2.3.2 Build your roadmap

    30 minutes

    Input: Governance themes and initiatives

    Output: roadmap visual

    Materials: Governance Roadmap Workbook, Governance Workbook

    Participants: CIO, IT senior leadership

    1. Open the Governance Implementation Plan and review themes and initiatives.
    2. Open the Governance Roadmap Workbook.
    3. Discuss whether the implementation roadmap should be developed as a Gantt chart, a sunshine diagram, or both.
      For the Gantt chart:
      • Input the roadmap start year and date.
      • Change the months and year in the Gantt chart to reflect the same roadmap start year.
      • Input and populate the planned start and end dates for the list of high-priority initiatives.

    Develop your Gantt chart in the Governance Roadmap Workbook

    2.3.3 Build your sunshine diagram

    30 minutes

    Input: Governance themes and initiatives

    Output: Sunshine diagram visual

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Governance Implementation Plan

    Participants: CIO, IT senior leadership

    1. Review your list of themes and initiatives.
    2. Build a model with “rays” radiating out from a central theme or objective.
    3. Using curved arcs, break the grid into timeline periods or phases.
    4. Complete your sunshine diagram in the Governance Implementation Plan.

    Customize your sunshine diagram in the Governance Implementation Plan

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Phase 3

    Embed and Automate

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Define Your Guiding Star
    • 1.2 Define Scope and Principles
    • 1.3 Adjust for Culture and Finalize Context

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Choose and Adapt Your Model
    • 2.2. Identify and Document Your Governance Triggers
    • 2.3 Build Your Implementation Approach

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Identify Decisions to Embed and Automate
    • 3.2 Plan Validation and Verification
    • 3.3 Update Implementation Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify which decisions you are ready to automate.

    Identify standards and policies that can be embedded and automated.

    Identify integration points.

    Confirm data requirements to enable success.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT senior leadership
    • Governance process owner
    • Product and service owners
    • Policy owners

    Step 3.1

    Identify Decisions to Embed and Automate

    Activities
    • 3.1.1 Review governance decisions and standards and the required level of authority
    • 3.1.2 Build your decision logic
    • 3.1.3 identify constraints and mitigation approaches
    • 3.1.4 Develop decision rules and principles

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify your key decisions.

    Develop your decision logic.

    Confirm decisions that could be automated.

    Identify and address constraints.

    Develop decision rules and principles.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT senior leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    Developed decision rules, rulesets, and principles that can be leveraged to automate governance

    Defined integration points

    Embed and Automate

    Step 3.1 – Identify Decisions to Embed and Automate Step 3.2 – Plan Validation and Verification Step 3.3 – Update Implementation Plan

    What is decision automation?

    Decision automation is the codifying of rules that connect the logic of how decisions are made with the data required to make those decisions. This is then embedded and automated into processes and the design of products and services.

    • It is well suited to governance where the same types of decisions are made on a recurring basis, using the same set of data. It requires clean, high-quality data to be effective.
    • Improvements in artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning (ML) have allowed the creation of scenarios where a hybrid of rules and learning can improve decision outcomes.

    Key Considerations

    • Data Availability
    • Legality
    • Contingencies
    • Decision Transparency
    • Data Quality
    • Auditability

    How complexity impacts decisions

    Decision complexity impacts the type of rule(s) you create and the amount of data required. It also helps define where or if decisions can be automated.

    1. SIMPLE
      Known and repeatable with consistent and familiar outcomes – structured, causal, and easy to standardize and automate.
    2. COMPLICATED
      Less known and outcomes are not consistently repeatable. Expertise can drive standards and guidelines that can be used to automate decisions.
    3. COMPLEX
      Unknown and new, highly uncertain in terms of outcomes, impact, and data. Requires more exploration and data. Difficult to automate but can be built into the design of products and services.
    4. CHAOTIC
      Unstructured and unknown situation. Requires adaptive and immediate action without active data – requires retained human governance
    5. (Based on Dave Snowden’s Cynefin framework)

    Governance Automation Criteria Checklist

    The Governance Automation Criteria Checklist provides a view of key considerations for determining whether a governing activity or decision is a good candidate for automation.

    The criteria identify key qualifiers/disqualifiers to make it easier to identify eligibility.

    Sample of the Governance Automation Criteria Checklist.

    Download the Governance Automation Criteria Checklist

    Governance Automation Worksheet

    Sample of the Governance Automation Worksheet.

    The Governance Automation Worksheet provides a way to document your governance and systematically identify information about the decisions to help determine if automation is possible.

    From there, decision rules, logic, and rulesets can be designed in support of building a structure flow to allow for automation.

    Download the Governance Automation Worksheet

    3.1.1 Review governance decisions and standards and the required level of authority

    30 minutes

    Input: Automation Criteria Checklist, Governance Automation Worksheet, Updated governance model

    Output: Documented decisions and related authority, Selected options for automation, Updated Governance Automation Worksheet

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Governance Automation Worksheet

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Identify the decisions that are made within each committee in your updated governance model and document them in the Governance Automation Worksheet.
    2. Confirm the level of authority required to make each decision.
    3. Review the automation checklist to confirm whether each decision is positioned well for automation.
    4. Select and document the decisions that are the strongest options for automation/embedding and document them in the Governance Automation Worksheet.

    What are decision rules?

    Decision rules provide specific instructions and constraints that must be considered in making decisions and are critical for automating governance.

    They provide the logical path to assess governance inputs to make effective decisions with positive business outputs.

    Inputs would include key information such as known risks, your defined prioritization matrix, portfolio value scoring, and compliance controls.

    Individual rules can be leveraged in different places.

    Some decision rule types are listed here.

    1. Statement Rules
      Natural expression of logical progression, written through logical elements
    2. Decision Tree Rules
      Decision tree with two axes that overlap to generate a decision
    3. Sequential Rules
      A sequence of decisions that move from one step to the next
    4. Expression Rule
      A particular set of rules triggered by a particular rule condition being met
    5. Truth table rules
      Combines many decision factors into one place; produces different outputs

    What are decision rulesets

    Rulesets are created to make complex decisions. Individual rule types are combined to create rulesets that are applied together to generate effective decisions. One rule will provide contextual information required for additional rules to execute in a Rule-Result-Rule-Result-Rule-Decision flow.

    A visualization of two separate rulesets made up of the decision rules on the previous slide. 'Ruleset 1' contains '1) Statement Rules', '2) Decision Tree Rules', and 5) Truth Table Rules'. 'Ruleset 2' contains '3) Sequential Rules' and '4) Expression Rule'.

    3.1.2 Build your decision logic

    30 minutes

    Input: Governance Automation Worksheet

    Output: Documented decision logic to support selected decision types and data requirements

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. For each selected decision, identify the principles that drive the considerations around the decision.
    2. For each decision, develop the decision logic by defining the steps and information inputs involved in making the decision and documenting the flow from beginning to end.
    3. Determine whether this is one specific decision or a combination of different decisions (in sequence or based on decisions).
    4. Name your decision rule.

    Sample of the Governance Automation Worksheet.

    3.1.3 Identify constraints and mitigation approaches

    60 minutes
    1. Document constraints to automation of decisions related to:
      • Availability of decision automation tools
      • Decision authority change requirements
      • Data constraints
      • Knowledge requirements
      • Process adjustment requirements
      • Product/service design levels
    2. Brainstorm and identify approaches to mitigate constraints and score based on likelihood of success.
    3. Identify mitigation owners and initial timeline expectations.
    4. Document the constraints and mitigations in the Governance Workbook on the constraints and mitigations slide.

    Sample of the 'Constraints and mitigations' slide of the 'Governance Workbook'.

    3.1.4 Develop decision rules and principles

    1.5-2 hours

    Input: Governance Automation Worksheet

    Output: Defined decision integration points, Confirmed data availability sets, Decision rules, rulesets, and principles with control indicators

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Governance Automation Worksheet

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Review the decision logic for those decisions that you have confirmed for automation. Identify the processes where the decision should be executed.
    2. Associate each decision with specific process steps or stages or how it would be included in software/product design.
    3. For each selected decision, identify the availability of data required to support the decision logic and the level of complexity and apply governing principles.
    4. Create the decision rules and identify data gaps.
    5. Define the decision flow and create rulesets as needed.
    6. Confirm automation requirements and define control indicators.

    Step 3.2

    Plan Validation and Verification

    Activities
    • 3.2.1 Define verification approach for embedded and automated governance
    • 3.2.2 Define validation approach for embedded and automated governance

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Define how decision outcomes will be measured.

    Determine how the effectiveness of automated governance will be reported.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT senior leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    Tested and verified automation of decisions

    Embed and Automate

    Step 3.1 – Identify Decisions to Embed and Automate Step 3.2 – Plan Validation and Verification Step 3.3 – Update Implementation Plan

    Decision rule relationship through to verification

    1. Rules

    Focus on clear decision logic

    Often represented in simple statement types and supported by data:

    IF – THEN

    IF – AND – THEN

    IF – AND NOT – THEN

    2. Rulesets

    Aggregate rules for more complex decisions

    Integrated flows between different required rules:
    Rule 1:
    (Output 1) – Rule 2
    (Output 2) – Rule 6
    Rule 6: (Output 1) – Rule 7
    3. Rule Attestation

    Verify success of automated decisions

    Attestation of embedded and automated rules with key control indicators embedded within process and products.

    Principles embedded into automated software controls.

    3.2.1 Define verification approach for embedded and automated governance

    60 minutes

    Input: Governance rules and rulesets as defined in the Governance Automation Worksheet, Defined decision outcomes

    Output: A defined measurement of effective decision outcomes, Approach to automate and/or report the effectiveness of automated governance

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    Verify

    1. Confirm expected outcome of rules.
    2. Select a sampling of new required decisions or recently performed decisions related to areas of automation.
    3. Run the decisions through the decision rules or rule groupings that were developed and compare to parallel decisions made using the traditional approach. (These must be segregated activities.)
    4. Review the outcome of the rules and adjust based on the output. Identify areas of adjustment. Confirm that the automation meets your requirements.

    3.2.2 Define validation approach for embedded and automated governance

    60 minutes

    Input: Governance rules and rulesets as defined in the Governance Automation Worksheet, Defined decision outcomes

    Output: Defined assurance and attestation requirements, Key control indicators that can be automated

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    Validate

    1. Develop an approach to measure automated decisions. Align success criteria to current governance KPIs and metrics.
    2. If no such metrics exist, define expected outcome. Define key risk indicators based on the expected points of automation.
    3. Establish quality assurance checkpoints within the delivery lifecycles to adjust for variance.
    4. Create triggers back to rule owners to drive changes and improvements to rules and rule groupings.

    Step 3.3

    Update Implementation Plan

    Activities
    • 3.3.1 Finalize the implementation plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Review implications and mitigations to make sure all have been considered.

    Finalize the implementation plan and roadmap.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    Completed Governance implementation plan and roadmap

    Embed and Automate

    Step 3.1 – Identify Decisions to Embed and Automate Step 3.2 – Plan Validation and Verification Step 3.3 – Update Implementation Plan

    3.3.1 Finalize the implementation plan

    30 minutes

    Input: Governance workbook, Updated governance model, Draft implementation plan and roadmap

    Output: Finalized implementation plan and roadmap

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Governance Implementation Plan

    Participants: IT senior leadership

    1. Document automation activities within phases in a governance automation theme in the Governance Implementation Plan.
    2. Review timelines in the implementation plan and where automation fits within the roadmap.
    3. Updated the implementation plan and roadmap.

    Governance Implementation Plan

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Through this project we have:

    • Improved your governance model to ensure a better fit for your organization, while creating adaptivity for the future.
    • Ensured your governance operates as an enabler of success with the proper bodies and levels of authority established.
    • Established triggers to ensure your governance model is actively adjusted to maintain its fit.
    • Developed a plan to embed and automate governance.
    • Created decision rules and principles and identified where to embed them within your practices.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Photo of Valence Howden.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results

    Avoid bureaucracy and achieve alignment with a minimalist approach. Align with your organizational context.

    Establish Data Governance

    Establish data trust and accountability with strong governance.

    Maximize Business Value From IT Through Benefits Realization

    Embed value and alignment confirmation into your governance to ensure you optimize IT value achievement for resource spend.

    Build a Better Product Owner

    Strengthen the product/service owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Sidney Hodgson, Senior Director, Industry, Info-Tech Research Group. Sidney Hodgson
    Senior Director, Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group
    • Sidney has over 30 years of experience in IT leadership roles as CIO of three organizations in Canada and the US as well as international consulting experience in the US and Asia.
    • Sid has a breadth of knowledge in IT governance, project management, strategic and operational planning, enterprise architecture, business process re-engineering, IT cost reduction, and IT turnaround management.
    Photo of David Tomljenovic, Principal Research Advisor, Industry, Info-Tech Research Group. David Tomljenovic
    Principal Research Advisor, Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group
    • David brings extensive experience from the Financial Services sector, having worked 25 years on Bay Street. Most recently he was a Corporate Finance and Strategy Advisor for Infiniti Labs (Toronto/Hong Kong), Automotive, and Smart City Accelerator, where he provided financial and mergers & acquisitions advisory services to accelerator participants with a focus on early-stage fundraising activities.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Cole Cioran, Practice Lead, Applications and Agile Development, Info-Tech Research Group. Cole Cioran
    Practice Lead, Applications and Agile Development
    Info-Tech Research Group
    • Over the past 25 years, Cole has developed software; designed data, infrastructure, and software solutions; defined systems and enterprise architectures; delivered enterprise-wide programs; and managed software development, infrastructure, and business systems analysis practices.
    Photo of Crystal Singh, Research Director, Applications – Data and Information Management, Info-Tech Research Group. Crystal Singh
    Research Director, Applications – Data and Information Management
    Info-Tech Research Group
    • Crystal brings a diverse and global perspective to her role, drawing from her professional experiences in various industries and locations. Prior to joining Info-Tech, Crystal led the Enterprise Data Services function at Rogers Communications, one of Canada’s leading telecommunications companies.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead, CIO, Info-Tech Research Group. Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead, CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    • Carlene covers key topics in organization and leadership and specializes in governance, organizational design, relationship management, and human capital development. She led the development of Info-Tech’s Organization and Leadership practice.
    Photo of Denis Goulet, Senior Workshop Director, Info-Tech Research Group. Denis Goulet
    Senior Workshop Director
    Info-Tech Research Group
    • Denis is a transformational leader and experienced strategist who focuses on helping clients communicate, relate, and adapt for success. Having developed Governance Model and IT strategies in organizations ranging from small to billion-dollar multi-nationals, he firmly believes in a collaborative value-driven approach to work.

    Bibliography

    “2020 State of Data Governance and Automation Report.” Erwin.com, 28 Jan. 2020. Web.

    “Adaptive IT Governance.” Google search, 15 Nov. 2020.

    “Adaptive IT Governance Framework.” CIO Index, 3 Nov. 2011. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    “Agile Governance Made Easy.” Agilist, n.d. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    “Automating Governance — Our Work.” Humanising Machine Intelligence, n.d. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    “Automation – Decisions.” IBM, 2020. Accessed 15 Oct. 2020.

    Chang, Charlotte. “Accelerating Agile through effective governance.” Medium, 22 Sept. 2020. Web.

    “COBIT 5: Enabling Processes.” ISACA, 2012. Web. Oct. 2016.

    COBIT 2019. ISACA, Dec. 2018. Web.

    Curtis, Blake. “The Value of IT Governance.” ISACA, 29 June 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    De Smet, Aaron. “Three Keys to Faster, Better Decisions.” McKinsey & Company, 1 May 2019. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    “Decision Rules and Decision Analysis.” Navex Global, 2020. Web.

    “Decisions Automation with Business Rules Management Solution.” Sumerge, 4 Feb. 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    “DevGovOps – Key factors for IT governance for enterprises in a DevOps world.” Capgemini, 27 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Eisenstein, Lena. “IT Governance Checklist.” BoardEffect, 19 Feb. 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    “Establishing Effective IT and Data Governance.” Chartered Professional Accountants Canada, n.d. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Gandzeichuk, Ilya. “Augmented Analytics: From Decision Support To Intelligent Decision-Making.” Forbes, 8 Jan. 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Georgescu, Vlad. “What Is IT Governance? Understanding From First Principles.” Plutora, 18 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Goodwin, Bill. “IT Governance in the Era of Shadow IT.” ComputerWeekly, 5 Aug. 2014. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    “Governance of IT, OT and IOT.” ISACA Journal, 2019. Web.

    Gritsenko, Daria, and Matthew Wood. “Algorithmic Governance: A Modes of Governance Approach.” Regulation & Governance, 10 Nov. 2020. Web.

    Hansert, Philipp. “Adaptive IT Governance with Clausmark’s Bee4IT.” Bee360, 25 Oct. 2019. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Havelock, Kylie. “What Does Good Product Governance Look Like?” Medium. 8 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Haven, Dolf van der. “Governance of IT with ISO 38500 - A More Detailed View” LinkedIn article, 24 Oct. 2016. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Hong, Sounman, and Sanghyun Lee. “Adaptive Governance and Decentralization: Evidence from Regulation of the Sharing Economy in Multi-Level Governance.” Government Information Quarterly, vol. 35, no. 2, April 2018, pp. 299–305. Web.

    ISACA. “Monthly Seminar & Networking Dinner: CIO Dashboard.” Cvent, Feb. 2012. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    ISO/IEC 38500, ISO, 2018 and ongoing.

    “IT Governance.” Kenway Consulting, n.d. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    “IT Governance in the Age of COVID 19.” Union of Arab Banks Webinar, 19-21 Oct. 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Jaffe, Dennis T. “Introducing the Seven Pillars of Governance.” Triple Pundit, 15 Nov. 2011. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Janssen, Marijn, and Haiko van der Voort. “Agile and Adaptive Governance in Crisis Response: Lessons from the COVID-19 Pandemic.” International Journal of Information Management, vol. 55, December 2020. Web.

    Jodya, Tiffany. “Automating Enterprise Governance within Delivery Pipelines.” Harness.io, 14 May 2020. Web.

    Kumar, Sarvesh. “AI-Based Decision-Making Automation.” Singular Intelligence, 17 June 2019. Web.

    “Lean IT Governance.” Disciplined Agile, n.d. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Lerner, Mark. “Government Tech Projects Fail by Default. It Doesn’t Have to Be This Way.” Belfer Center for Science and International Affairs, 21 Oct. 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Levstek, Aleš, Tomaž Hovelja, and Andreja Pucihar. “IT Governance Mechanisms and Contingency Factors: Towards an Adaptive IT Governance Model.” Organizacija, vol. 51, no. 4, Nov. 2018. Web.

    Maccani, Giovanni, et al. “An Emerging Typology of IT Governance Structural Mechanisms in Smart Cities.” Government Information Quarterly, vol. 37, no. 4, Oct. 2020. Web.

    Magowan, Kirstie. “IT Governance vs IT Management: Mastering the Differences.” BMC Blogs, 18 May 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Mazmanian, Adam. “Is It Time to Rethink IT Governance? ” Washington Technology, 26 Oct. 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Mukherjee, Jayanto. “6 Components of an Automation (DevOps) Governance Model.” Sogeti, n.d. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Ng, Cindy. “The Difference Between Data Governance and IT Governance.” Inside Out Security, updated 17 June 2020. Web.

    Pearson, Garry. “Agile or Adaptive Governance Required?” Taking Care of the Present (blog), 30 Oct. 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Peregrine, Michael, et al. “The Long-Term Impact of the Pandemic on Corporate Governance.” Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, 16 July 2020. Web.

    Raymond, Louis, et al. “Determinants and Outcomes of IT Governance in Manufacturing SMEs: A Strategic IT Management Perspective.” International Journal of Accounting Information Systems, vol. 35, December 2019. Web.

    Rentrop, Christopher. “Adaptive IT Governance – Foundation of a Successful Digitalization.” Business IT Cooperation Coordination Controlling (blog). May 2, 2018. Web.

    Schultz, Lisen, et al. “Adaptive Governance, Ecosystem Management, and Natural Capital.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, vol. 112, no. 24, 2015, pp. 7369–74. Web.

    Selig, Gad J. Implementing IT Governance: A Practical Guide to Global Best Practices in IT Management. Van Haren Publishing, 2008. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Sharma, Chiatan. “Rule Governance for Enterprise-Wide Adoption of Business Rules: Why Does a BRMS Implementation Need a Governance Framework?” Business Rules Journal, vol. 13, no. 4, April 2012. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Smallwood, Robert. “Information Governance, IT Governance, Data Governance – What’s the Difference?” The Data Administration Newsletter, 3 June 2020. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Snowden, Dave. "Cynefin – weaving sense-making into the fabric of our world", Cognitive Edge, 20 October 2020.

    “The Place of IT Governance in the Enterprise Governance.” Institut de la Gouvernance des Systemes d’Information, 2005. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    Thomas, Mark. “Demystifying IT Governance Roles in a Dynamic Business Environment.” APMG International, 29 Oct. 2020. Webinar. Accessed 15 Nov. 2020.

    “The Four Pillars of Governance Best Practice.” The Institute of Directors in New Zealand, 4 Nov. 2019. Web.

    Wang, Cancan, Rony Medaglia, and Lei Zheng. “Towards a Typology of Adaptive Governance in the Digital Government Context: The Role of Decision-Making and Accountability.” Government Information Quarterly, vol. 35, no. 2, April 2018, pp. 306–22.

    Westland, Jason. “IT Governance: Definitions, Frameworks and Planning.” ProjectManager.com, 17 Dec. 2019. Web.

    Wilkin, Carla L., and Jon Riddett. “IT Governance Challenges in a Large Not-for-Profit Healthcare Organization: The Role of Intranets.” Electronic Commerce Research vol. 9, no. 4, 2009, pp. 351-74. Web.

    Zalnieriute, Monika, et al. “The Rule of Law and Automation of Government Decision Making.” Modern Law Review, 25 Feb. 2019. Web.

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}157|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,359 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • In today’s world, business agility is essential to stay competitive. Quick responses to business needs through efficient development and deployment practices is critical for business value delivery.
    • A mature solution architecture practice is the basic necessity for a business to have technical agility.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Don’t architect for normal situations. That is a shallow approach and leads to decisions that may seem “right” but will not be able to stand up to system elasticity needs.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the different parts of a continuous security architecture framework and how they may apply to your decisions.
    • Develop a solution architecture for upcoming work (or if there is a desire to reduce tech debt).

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Solution Architecture Practices Deck – A deck to help you develop an approach for or validate existing solution architecture capability.

    Translate stakeholder objectives into architecture requirements, solutions, and changes. Incorporate architecture quality attributes in decisions to increase your architecture’s life. Evaluate your solution architecture from multiple views to obtain a holistic perspective of the range of issues, risks, and opportunities.

    • Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices – Phases 1-3

    2. Solution Architecture Template – A template to record the results from the exercises to help you define, detail, and make real your digital product vision.

    Identify and detail the value maps that support the business, and discover the architectural quality attribute that is most important for the value maps. Brainstorm solutions for design decisions for data, security, scalability, and performance.

    • Solution Architecture Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Vision and Value Maps

    The Purpose

    Document a vision statement for the solution architecture practice (in general) and/or a specific vision statement, if using a single project as an example.

    Document business architecture and capabilities.

    Decompose capabilities into use cases.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Provide a great foundation for an actionable vision and goals that people can align to.

    Develop a collaborative understanding of business capabilities.

    Develop a collaborative understanding of use cases and personas that are relevant for the business.

    Activities

    1.1 Develop vision statement.

    1.2 Document list of value stream maps and their associated use cases.

    1.3 Document architectural quality attributes needed for use cases using SRME.

    Outputs

    Solution Architecture Template with sections filled out for vision statement canvas and value maps

    2 Continue Vision and Value Maps, Begin Phase 2

    The Purpose

    Map value stream to required architectural attributes.

    Prioritize architecture decisions.

    Discuss and document data architecture.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of architectural attributes needed for value streams.

    Conceptual understanding of data architecture.

    Activities

    2.1 Map value stream to required architectural attributes.

    2.2 Prioritize architecture decisions.

    2.3 Discuss and document data architecture.

    Outputs

    Solution Architecture Template with sections filled out for value stream and architecture attribute mapping; a prioritized list of architecture design decisions; and data architecture

    3 Continue Phase 2, Begin Phase 3

    The Purpose

    Discuss security and threat assessment.

    Discuss resolutions to threats via security architecture decisions.

    Discuss system’s scalability needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Decisions for security architecture.

    Decisions for scalability architecture.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss security and threat assessment.

    3.2 Discuss resolutions to threats via security architecture decisions.

    3.3 Discuss system’s scalability needs.

    Outputs

    Solution Architecture Template with sections filled out for security architecture and scalability design

    4 Continue Phase 3, Start and Finish Phase 4

    The Purpose

    Discuss performance architecture.

    Compile all the architectural decisions into a solutions architecture list.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A complete solution architecture.

    A set of principles that will form the foundation of solution architecture practices.

    Activities

    4.1 Discuss performance architecture.

    4.2 Compile all the architectural decisions into a solutions architecture list.

    Outputs

    Solution Architecture Template with sections filled out for performance and a complete solution architecture

    Further reading

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practice

    Ensure your software systems solution is architected to reflect stakeholders’ short- and long-term needs.

    Analyst Perspective

    Application architecture is a critical foundation for supporting the growth and evolution of application systems. However, the business is willing to exchange the extension of the architecture’s life with quality best practices for the quick delivery of new or enhanced application functionalities. This trade-off may generate immediate benefits to stakeholders, but it will come with high maintenance and upgrade costs in the future, rendering your system legacy early.

    Technical teams know the importance of implementing quality attributes into architecture but are unable to gain approval for the investments. Overcoming this challenge requires a focus of architectural enhancements on specific problem areas with significant business visibility. Then, demonstrate how quality solutions are vital enablers for supporting valuable application functionalities by tracing these solutions to stakeholder objectives and conducting business and technical risk and impact assessments through multiple business and technical perspectives.

    this is a picture of Andrew Kum-Seun

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Research Manager, Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture

    Ensure your software systems solution is architected to reflect stakeholders’ short- and long-term needs.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Most organizations have some form of solution architecture; however, it may not accurately and sufficiently support the current and rapidly changing business and technical environments.
    • To enable quick delivery, applications are built and integrated haphazardly, typically omitting architecture quality practices.

    Common Obstacles

    • Failing to involve development and stakeholder perspectives in design can lead to short-lived architecture and critical development, testing, and deployment constraints and risks being omitted.
    • Architects are experiencing little traction implementing solutions to improve architecture quality due to the challenge of tracing these solutions back to the right stakeholder objectives.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Translate stakeholder objectives into architecture requirements, solutions, and changes. Incorporate architecture quality attributes in decisions to increase your architecture’s life.
    • Evaluate your solution architecture from multiple views to obtain a holistic perspective of the range of issues, risks, and opportunities.
    • Regularly review and recalibrate your solution architecture so that it accurately reflects and supports current stakeholder needs and technical environments.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Well-received applications can have poor architectural qualities. Functional needs often take precedence over quality architecture. Quality must be baked into design, execution, and decision-making practices to ensure the right tradeoffs are made.

    A badly designed solution architecture is the root of all technical evils

    A well-thought-through and strategically designed solution architecture is essential for the long-term success of any software system, and by extension, the organization because:

    1. It will help achieve quality attribute requirements (security, scalability, performance, usability, resiliency, etc.) for a software system.
    2. It can define and refine architectural guiding principles. A solution architecture is not only important for today but also a vision for the future of the system’s ability to react positively to changing business needs.
    3. It can help build usable (and reusable) services. In a fast-moving environment, the convenience of having pre-made plug-and-play architectural objects reduces the risk incurred from knee-jerk reactions in response to unexpected demands.
    4. It can be used to create a roadmap to an IT future state. Architectural concerns support transition planning activities that can lead to the successful implementation of a strategic IT plan.

    Demand for quick delivery makes teams omit architectural best practices, increasing downstream risks

    In its need for speed, a business often doesn’t see the value in making sure architecture is maintainable, reusable, and scalable. This demand leads to an organizational desire for development practices and the procurement of vendors that favor time-to-market over long-term maintainability. Unfortunately, technical teams are pushed to omit design quality and validation best practices.

    What are the business impacts of omitting architecture design practices?

    Poor quality application architecture impedes business growth opportunities, exposes enterprise systems to risks, and consumes precious IT budgets in maintenance that could otherwise be used for innovation and new projects.

    Previous estimations indicate that roughly 50% of security problems are the result of software design. […] Flaws in the architecture of a software system can have a greater impact on various security concerns in the system, and as a result, give more space and flexibility for malicious users.(Source: IEEE Software)

    Errors in software requirements and software design documents are more frequent than errors in the source code itself according to Computer Finance Magazine. Defects introduced during the requirements and design phase are not only more probable but also more severe and more difficult to remove. (Source: iSixSigma)

    Design a solution architecture that can be successful within the constraints and complexities set before you

    APPLICATION ARCHITECTURE…

    … describes the dependencies, structures, constraints, standards, and development guidelines to successfully deliver functional and long-living applications. This artifact lays the foundation to discuss the enhancement of the use and operations of your systems considering existing complexities.

    Good architecture design practices can give you a number of benefits:

    Lowers maintenance costs by revealing key issues and risks early. The Systems Sciences Institute at IBM has reported that the cost to fix an error found after product release was 4 to 5 times as much as one uncovered during design.(iSixSigma)

    Supports the design and implementation activities by providing key insights for project scheduling, work allocation, cost analysis, risk management, and skills development.(IBM: developerWorks)

    Eliminates unnecessary creativity and activities on the part of designers and implementers, which is achieved by imposing the necessary constraints on what they can do and making it clear that deviation from constraints can break the architecture.(IBM: developerWorks)

    Use Info-Tech’s Continuous Solution Architecture (CSA) Framework for designing adaptable systems

    Solution architecture is not a one-size-fits-all conversation. There are many design considerations and trade-offs to keep in mind as a product or services solution is conceptualized, evaluated, tested, and confirmed. The following is a list of good practices that should inform most architecture design decisions.

    Principle 1: Design your solution to have at least two of everything.

    Principle 2: Include a “kill switch” in your fault-isolation design. You should be able to turn off everything you release.

    Principle 3: If it can be monitored, it should be. Use server and audit logs where possible.

    Principle 4: Asynchronous is better than synchronous. Asynchronous design is more complex but worth the processing efficiency it introduces.

    Principle 5: Stateless over stateful: State data should only be used if necessary.

    Principle 6: Go horizonal (scale out) over vertical (scale up).

    Principle 7: Good architecture comes in small packages.

    Principle 8: Practice just-in-time architecture. Delay finalizing an approach for as long as you can.

    Principle 9: X-ilities over features. Quality of an architecture is the foundation over which features exist. A weak foundation can never be obfuscated through shiny features.

    Principle 10: Architect for products not projects. A product is an ongoing concern, while a project is short lived and therefore only focused on what is. A product mindset forces architects to think about what can or should be.

    Principle 11: Design for rollback: When all else fails, you should be able to stand up the previous best state of the system.

    Principle 12: Test the solution architecture like you test your solution’s features.

    CSA should be used for every step in designing a solution’s architecture

    Solution architecture is a technical response to a business need, and like all complex evolutionary systems, must adapt its design for changing circumstances.

    The triggers for changes to existing solution architectures can come from, at least, three sources:

    1. Changing business goals
    2. Existing backlog of technical debt
    3. Solution architecture roadmap

    A solution’s architecture is cross-cutting and multi-dimensional and at the minimum includes:

    • Product Portfolio Strategy
    • Application Architecture
    • Data Architecture
    • Information Architecture
    • Operational Architecture

    along with several qualitative attributes (also called non-functional requirements).

    This image contains a chart which demonstrates the relationship between changing hanging business goals, Existing backlog of technical debt, Solution architecture roadmap, and Product Portfolio Strategy, Application Architecture, Data Architecture, Information Architecture and, Operational Architecture

    Related Research: Product Portfolio Strategy

    Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value

    • Define an organizing principle that will structure your projects and applications in a way that matters to your stakeholders.
    • Bridge application and project portfolio data using the organizing principle that matters to communicate with stakeholders across the organization.
    • Create a dashboard that brings together the benefits of both project and application portfolio management to improve visibility and decision making.

    Deliver on Your Digital Portfolio Vision

    • Recognize that a vision is only as good as the data that backs it up. Lay out a comprehensive backlog with quality built in that can be effectively communicated and understood through roadmaps.
    • Your intent is only a dream if it cannot be implemented ; define what goes into a release plan via the release canvas.
    • Define a communication approach that lets everyone know where you are heading.

    Related Research: Data, Information & Integration Architecture

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    • Have a framework in place to identify the appropriate solution for the challenge at hand. Our three-phase practical approach will help you build a custom and modernized data architecture.
    • Identify and prioritize the business drivers in which data architecture changes would create the largest overall benefit and determine the corresponding data architecture tiers that need to be addressed.
    • Discover the best-practice trends, measure your current state, and define the targets for your data architecture tactics.
    • Build a cohesive and personalized roadmap for restructuring your data architecture. Manage your decisions and resulting changes.

    Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics

    • Understand your high-level business capabilities and interactions across them – your data repositories and flows should be just a digital reflection thereof.
    • Divide your data world in logical verticals overlaid with various speed data progression lanes, i.e. build your data pipeline – and conquer it one segment at a time.
    • Use the most appropriate database design pattern for a given phase/component in your data pipeline progression.

    Related Research:Operational Architecture

    Optimize Application Release Management

    • Acquire release management ownership. Ensure there is appropriate accountability for the speed and quality of the releases passing through the entire pipeline.
    • A release manager has oversight over the entire release process and facilitates the necessary communication between business stakeholders and various IT roles.
    • Instill holistic thinking. Release management includes all steps required to push release and change requests to production along with the hand-off to Operations and Support. Increase the transparency and visibility of the entire pipeline to ensure local optimizations do not generate bottlenecks in other areas.
    • Standardize and lay a strong release management foundation. Optimize the key areas where you are experiencing the most pain and continually improve.

    Build Your Infrastructure Roadmap

    • Increased communication. More information being shared to more people who need it.
    • Better planning. More accurate information being shared.
    • Reduced lead times. Less due diligence or discovery work required as part of project implementations.
    • Faster delivery times. Less low-value work, freeing up more time for project work.

    Related Research:Security Architecture

    Identify Opportunities to Mature the Security Architecture

    • A right-sized security architecture can be created by assessing the complexity of the IT department, the operations currently underway for security, and the perceived value of a security architecture within the organization. This will bring about a deeper understanding of the organizational infrastructure.
    • Developing a security architecture should also result in a list of opportunities (i.e. initiatives) that an organization can integrate into a roadmap. These initiatives will seek to improve security operations and strengthen the IT department’s understanding of security’s role within the organization.
    • A better understanding of the infrastructure will help to save time on determining the correct technologies required from vendors, and therefore, cut down on the amount of vendor noise.
    • Creating a defensible roadmap will assist with justifying future security spend.

    Key deliverable:

    Solution Architecture Template
    Record the results from the exercises to help you define, detail, and make real your digital product vision.

    Blueprint Deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    This image contains screenshots of the deliverables which will be discussed later in this blueprint

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.

    Guided Implementation

    Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track

    Workshop

    We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place

    Consulting

    Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. we need assistance through the entirety of this project.

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
    Exercises
    1. Articulate an architectural vision
    2. Develop dynamic value stream maps
    1. Create a conceptual map between the value stream, use case, and required architectural attribute
    2. Create a prioritized list of architectural attributes
    3. Develop a data architecture that supports transactional and analytical needs
    1. Document security architecture risks and mitigations
    2. Document scalability architecture
    1. Document performance-enhancing architecture
    2. Bring it all together
    Outcomes
    1. Architecture vision
    2. Dynamic value stream maps (including user stories/personas)
    1. List of required architectural attributes
    2. Architectural attributes prioritized
    3. Data architecture design decisions
    1. Security threat and risk analysis
    2. Security design decisions
    3. Scalability design decisions
    1. Performance design decisions
    2. Finalized decisions

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.
    This GI is between 8 to 10 calls over the course of approximately four to six months.

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 2
    Call #1:
    Articulate an architectural vision.
    Call #4:
    Continue discussion on value stream mapping and related use cases.
    Call #6:
    Document security design decisions.
    Call #2:
    Discuss value stream mapping and related use cases.
    Call #5:
    • Map the value streams to required architectural attribute.
    • Create a prioritized list of architectural attributes.
    Call #7:
    • Document scalability design decisions.
    • Document performance design decisions.
    Call #3:
    Continue discussion on value stream mapping and related use cases.
    Call #8:
    Bring it all together.

    Phase 1: Visions and Value Maps

    Phase 1

    1.1 Articulate an Architectural Vision
    1.2 Develop Dynamic Value Stream Maps
    1.3 Map Value Streams, Use Cases, and Required Architectural Attributes
    1.4 Create a Prioritized List of Architectural Attributes

    Phase 2

    2.1 Develop a Data Architecture That Supports Transactional and Analytical Needs
    2.2 Document Security Architecture Risks and Mitigations

    Phase 3

    3.1 Document Scalability Architecture
    3.2 Document Performance Enhancing Architecture
    3.3 Combine the Different Architecture Design Decisions Into a Unified Solution Architecture

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine a vision for architecture outcomes
    • Draw dynamic value stream maps
    • Derive architectural design decisions
    • Prioritize design decisions

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practice

    Let’s get this straight: You need an architectural vision

    If you start off by saying I want to architect a system, you’ve already lost. Remember what a vision is for!

    An architectural vision...

    … is your North Star

    Your product vision serves as the single fixed point for product development and delivery.

    … aligns stakeholders

    It gets everyone on the same page.

    … helps focus on meaningful work

    There is no pride in being a rudderless ship. It can also be very expensive.

    And eventually...

    … kick-starts your strategy

    We know where to go, we know who to bring along, and we know the steps to get there. Let’s plan this out.

    An architectural vision is multi-dimensional

    Who is the target customer (or customers)?

    What is the key benefit a customer can get from using our service or product?

    Why should they be engaged with you?

    What makes our service or product better than our competitors?

    (Adapted from Crossing the Chasm)

    Info-Tech Insight

    It doesn’t matter if you are delivering value to internal or external stakeholders, you need a product vision to ensure everyone understands the “why.”

    Use a canvas as the dashboard for your architecture

    The solution architecture canvas provides a single dashboard to quickly define and communicate the most important information about the vision. A canvas is an effective tool for aligning teams and providing an executive summary view.

    This image contains a sample canvas for you to use as the dashboard for your architecture. The sections are: Solution Name, Tracking Info, Vision, Business Goals, Metrics, Personas, and Stakeholders.

    Leverage the solution architecture canvas to state and inform your architecture vision

    This image contains the sample canvas from the previous section, with annotations explaining what to do for each of the headings.

    1.1 Craft a vision statement for your solution’s architecture

    1. Use the product canvas template provided for articulating your solution’s architecture.

    *If needed, remove or add additional data points to fit your purposes.

    There are different statement templates available to help form your product vision statements. Some include:

    • For [our target customer], who [customer’s need], the [product] is a [product category or description] that [unique benefits and selling points]. Unlike [competitors or current methods], our product [main differentiators].
    • We believe (in) a [noun: world, time, state, etc.] where [persona] can [verb: do, make, offer, etc.], for/by/with [benefit/goal].
    • To [verb: empower, unlock, enable, create, etc.] [persona] to [benefit, goal, future state].
    • Our vision is to [verb: build, design, provide] the [goal, future state] to [verb: help, enable, make it easier to...] [persona].

    (Adapted from Crossing the Chasm)

    Download the Solution Architecture Template and document your vision statement.

    Input

    • Business Goals
    • Product Portfolio Vision

    Output

    • Solution Architecture Vision

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Solution Architecture Canvas: Refine your vision statement

    This image contains a screenshot of the canvas from earlier in the blueprint, with only the annotation for Solution Name: Vision, unique value proposition, elevator pitch, or positioning statement.

    Understand your value streams before determining your solution’s architecture

    Business Strategy

    Sets and communicates the direction of the entire organization.

    Value Stream

    Segments, groups, and creates a coherent narrative as to how an organization creates value.

    Business Capability Map

    Decomposes an organization into its component parts to establish a common language across the organization.

    Execution

    Implements the business strategy through capability building or improvement projects.

    Identify your organization’s goals and define the value streams that support them

    Goal

    Revenue Growth

    Value Streams

    Stream 1- Product Purchase
    Stream 2- Customer Acquisition
    stream 3- Product Financing

    There are many techniques that help with constructing value streams and their capabilities.

    Domain-driven design is a technique that can be used for hypothesizing the value maps, their capabilities, and associated solution architecture.

    Read more about domain-driven design here.

    Value streams can be external (deliver value to customers) or internal (support operations)

      External Perspective

    1. Core value streams are mostly externally facing: they deliver value to either an external/internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map.
    • E.g. customer acquisition, product purchase, product delivery

    Internal Perspective

  • Support value streams are internally facing: they provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.
    • E.g. employee recruitment to retirement

    Key Questions to Ask While Evaluating Value Streams

    • Who are your customers?
    • What benefits do we deliver to them?
    • How do we deliver those benefits?
    • How does the customer receive the benefits?
    This image contains an example of value streams. The main headings are: Customer Acquisitions, Product Purchase, Product Delivery, Confirm Order, Product Financing, and Product Release.

    Value streams highlight the what, not the how

    Value chains set a high-level context, but architectural decisions still need to be made to deal with the dynamism of user interaction and their subsequent expectations. User stories (and/or use cases) and themes are great tools for developing such decisions.

    Product Delivery

    1. Order Confirmation
    2. Order Dispatching
    3. Warehouse Management
    4. Fill Order
    5. Ship Order
    6. Deliver Order

    Use Case and User Story Theme: Confirm Order

    This image shows the relationship between confirming the customer's order online, and the Online Buyer, the Online Catalog, the Integrated Payment, and the Inventory Lookup.

    The use case Confirming Customer’s Online Order has four actors:

    1. An Online Buyer who should be provided with a catalog of products to purchase from.
    2. An Online Catalog that is invoked to display its contents on demand.
    3. An Integrated Payment system for accepting an online form of payment (credit card, Bitcoins, etc.) in a secure transaction.
    4. An Inventory Lookup module that confirms there is stock available to satisfy the Online Buyer’s order.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each use case theme links back to a feature(s) in the product backlog.

    Related Research

    Deliver on Your Digital Portfolio Vision

    • Recognize that a vision is only as good as the data that backs it up. Lay out a comprehensive backlog with quality built in that can be effectively communicated and understood through roadmaps.
    • Your intent is only a dream if it cannot be implemented – define what goes into a release plan via the release canvas.
    • Define a communication approach that lets everyone know where you are heading.

    Document Your Business Architecture

    • Recognize the opportunity for architecture work, analyze the current and target states of your business strategy, and identify and engage the right stakeholders.
    • Model the business in the form of architectural blueprints.
    • Apply business architecture techniques such as strategy maps, value streams, and business capability maps to design usable and accurate blueprints of the business.
    • Drive business architecture forward to promote real value to the organization.
    • Assess your current projects to determine if you are investing in the right capabilities. Conduct business capability assessments to identify opportunities and to prioritize projects.

    1.2 Document dynamic value stream maps

    1. Create value stream maps that support your business objectives.
    • The value stream maps could belong to existing or new business objectives.
  • For each value stream map:
    • Determine use case(s), the actors, and their expected activity.

    *Refer to the next slide for an example of a dynamic value stream map.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documentation of dynamic value stream map

    Input

    • Business Goals
    • Some or All Existing Business Processes
    • Some or All Proposed New Business Processes

    Output

    • Dynamic Value Stream Maps for Multiple Use Roles and Use Cases

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect

    Example: Dynamic value stream map

    Loan Provision*

    *Value Stream Name: Usually has the same name as the capability it illustrates.

    Loan Application**; Disbursement of Fund**; Risk Management**; Service Accounts**

    **Value Stream Components: Specific functions that support the successful delivery of a value stream.

    Disbursement of Funds

    This image shows the relationship between depositing the load into the applicant's bank account, and the Applicant's bank, the Loan Applicant, and the Loan Supplier.

    Style #1:

    The use case Disbursement of Funds has three actors:

    1. A Loan Applicant who applied for a loan and got approved for one.
    2. A Loan Supplier who is the source for the funds.
    3. The Applicant’s Bank that has an account into which the funds are deposited.

    Style # 2:

    Loan Provision: Disbursement of Funds
    Use Case Actors Expectation
    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account
    1. Loan Applicant
    2. Loan Supplier
    3. Applicant’s Bank
    1. Should be able to see deposit in bank account
    2. Deposit funds into account
    3. Accept funds into account

    Mid-Phase 1 Checkpoint

    By now, the following items are ideally completed:

    • Mid-Phase 1 Checkpoint

    Start with an investigation of your architecture’s qualitative needs

    Quality attributes can be viewed as the -ilities (e.g. scalability, usability, reliability) that a software system needs to provide. A system not meeting any of its quality attribute requirements will likely not function as required. Examples of quality attributes are:

    1. Slow system response time
    2. Security breaches that result in loss of personal data
    3. A product feature upgrade that is not compatible with previous versions
    Examples of Qualitative Attributes
    Performance Compatibility Usability Reliability Security Maintainability
    • Response Time
    • Resource Utilization
    • System Capacity
    • Interoperability
    • Accessibility
    • User Interface
    • Intuitiveness
    • Availability
    • Fault Tolerance
    • Recoverability
    • Integrity
    • Non-Repudiation
    • Modularity
    • Reusability
    • Modifiability
    • Testability

    Focus on quality attributes that are architecturally significant.

    • Not every system requires every quality attribute.
    • Pay attention to those attributes without which the solution will not be able to satisfy a user’s abstract* expectation.
    • This set can be considered Architecturally Significant Requirements (ASR). ASR concern scenarios have the most impact on the architecture of the software system.
    • ASR are fundamental needs of the system and changing them in the future can be a costly and difficult exercise.

    *Abstract since attributes like performance and reliability are not directly measurable by a user.

    Stimulus Response Measurement Environmental Context

    For applicable use cases: (*Adapted from S Carnegie Mellon University, 2000)

    1. Determine the Stimulus (temporal, external, or internal) that puts stress on the system. For example, a VPN-accessed hospital management system is used for nurses to login at 8am every weekday.
    2. Describe how the system should Respond to the stimulus. For example, the hospital management system should complete a nurse login under 10ms on initiation of the HTTPS request.
    3. Set a Measurement criteria for determining the success of the response to the stimulus. For example, the system should be able to successfully respond to 98% of the HTTPS requests the first time.
    4. Note the environmental context under which the stimulus occurs, including any unusual conditions in effect.
    • The hospital management system needs to respond in under 10ms under typical load or peak load?
    • What is the time variance of peak loads, for example, an e-commerce system during a Black Friday sale?
    • How big is the peak load?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Three out of four is bad. Don’t architect for normal situations because the solution will be fragile and prone to catastrophic failure under unexpected events.
    Read article: Retail sites crash under weight of online Black Friday shoppers.

    Discover and evaluate the qualitative attributes needed for use cases or user stories

    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account

    Assume analysis is being done for a to-be developed system.

    User Loan Applicant
    Expectations On login to the web system, should be able to see accurate bank balance after loan funds are deposited.
    User signs into the online portal and opens their account balance page.
    Expected Response From System System creates a connection to the data source and renders it on the screen in under 10ms.
    Measurement Under Normal Loads:
    • Response in 10ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Under Peak Loads:
    • Response in 15ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Quality Attribute Required Required Attribute # 1: Performance
    • Design Decision: Reduce latency by placing authorization components closer to user’s location.
    Required Attribute # 2: Data Reliability
    • Design Decision: Use event-driven ETL pipelines.
    Required Attribute # 3: Scalability
    • Design Decision: Following Principle # 4 of the CSA (JIT Architecture), delay decision until necessary.

    Use cases developed in Phase 1.2 should be used here. (Adapted from the ATAM Utility Tree Method for Quality Attribute Engineering)

    Reduce technical debt while you are at it

    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account

    Assume analysis is being done for a to-be developed system.

    UserLoan Applicant
    ExpectationsOn login to the web system, should be able to see accurate bank balance after loan funds are deposited.
    User signs into the online portal and opens their account balance page.
    Expected Response From SystemSystem creates a connection to the data source and renders it on the screen in under 10ms.
    MeasurementUnder Normal Loads:
    • Response in 10ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Under Peak Loads:
    • Response in 15ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Quality Attribute RequiredRequired Attribute # 1: Performance
    • Design Decision: Reduce latency by placing authorization components closer to user’s location.

    Required Attribute # 2: Data Reliability

    • Expected is 15ms or less under peak loads, but average latency is 21ms.
    • Design Decision: Use event-driven ETL pipelines.

    Required Attribute # 3: Scalability

    • Data should not be stale and should sync instantaneously, but in some zip codes data synchronization is taking 8 hours.
    • Design Decision: Investigate integrations and flows across application, database, and infrastructure. (Note: A dedicated section for discussing scalability is presented in Phase 2.)

    1.3 Create a conceptual map between the value streams, use cases, and required architectural attributes

    1. For selected use cases completed in Phase 1.2:
    • Map the value stream to its associated use cases.
    • For each use case, list the required architectural quality attributes.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for mapping value stream components to their required architectural attribute.

    Input

    • Use Cases
    • User Roles
    • Stimulus to System
    • Response From System
    • Response Measurement

    Output

    • List of Architectural Quality Attributes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Example for Phase 1.3

    Loan Provision

    Loan Application → Disbursement of Funds → Risk Management → Service Accounts

    Value Stream Component Use Case Required Architectural Attribute
    Loan Application UC1: Submit Loan Application
    UC2: Review Loan Application
    UC3: Approve Loan Application
    UCn: ……..
    UC1: Resilience, Data Reliability
    UC2: Data Reliability
    UC3: Scalability, Security, Performance
    UCn: …..
    Disbursement of Funds UC1: Deposit Funds Into Applicant’s Bank Account
    UCn: ……..
    UC1: Performance, Scalability, Data Reliability
    Risk Management ….. …..
    Service Accounts ….. …..

    1.2 Document dynamic value stream maps

    1. Create value stream maps that support your business objectives.
    • The value stream maps could belong to existing or new business objectives.
  • For each value stream map:
    • Determine use case(s), the actors, and their expected activity.

    *Refer to the next slide for an example of a dynamic value stream map.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documentation of dynamic value stream map

    Input

    • Business Goals
    • Some or All Existing Business Processes
    • Some or All Proposed New Business Processes

    Output

    • Dynamic Value Stream Maps for Multiple Use Roles and Use Cases

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect

    Example: Dynamic value stream map

    Loan Provision*

    *Value Stream Name: Usually has the same name as the capability it illustrates.

    Loan Application**; Disbursement of Fund**; Risk Management**; Service Accounts**

    **Value Stream Components: Specific functions that support the successful delivery of a value stream.

    Disbursement of Funds

    This image shows the relationship between depositing the load into the applicant's bank account, and the Applicant's bank, the Loan Applicant, and the Loan Supplier.

    Style #1:

    The use case Disbursement of Funds has three actors:

    1. A Loan Applicant who applied for a loan and got approved for one.
    2. A Loan Supplier who is the source for the funds.
    3. The Applicant’s Bank that has an account into which the funds are deposited.

    Style # 2:

    Loan Provision: Disbursement of Funds
    Use Case Actors Expectation
    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account
    1. Loan Applicant
    2. Loan Supplier
    3. Applicant’s Bank
    1. Should be able to see deposit in bank account
    2. Deposit funds into account
    3. Accept funds into account

    Mid-Phase 1 Checkpoint

    By now, the following items are ideally completed:

    • Mid-Phase 1 Checkpoint

    Start with an investigation of your architecture’s qualitative needs

    Quality attributes can be viewed as the -ilities (e.g. scalability, usability, reliability) that a software system needs to provide. A system not meeting any of its quality attribute requirements will likely not function as required. Examples of quality attributes are:

    1. Slow system response time
    2. Security breaches that result in loss of personal data
    3. A product feature upgrade that is not compatible with previous versions
    Examples of Qualitative Attributes
    Performance Compatibility Usability Reliability Security Maintainability
    • Response Time
    • Resource Utilization
    • System Capacity
    • Interoperability
    • Accessibility
    • User Interface
    • Intuitiveness
    • Availability
    • Fault Tolerance
    • Recoverability
    • Integrity
    • Non-Repudiation
    • Modularity
    • Reusability
    • Modifiability
    • Testability

    Focus on quality attributes that are architecturally significant.

    • Not every system requires every quality attribute.
    • Pay attention to those attributes without which the solution will not be able to satisfy a user’s abstract* expectation.
    • This set can be considered Architecturally Significant Requirements (ASR). ASR concern scenarios have the most impact on the architecture of the software system.
    • ASR are fundamental needs of the system and changing them in the future can be a costly and difficult exercise.

    *Abstract since attributes like performance and reliability are not directly measurable by a user.

    Stimulus Response Measurement Environmental Context

    For applicable use cases: (*Adapted from S Carnegie Mellon University, 2000)

    1. Determine the Stimulus (temporal, external, or internal) that puts stress on the system. For example, a VPN-accessed hospital management system is used for nurses to login at 8am every weekday.
    2. Describe how the system should Respond to the stimulus. For example, the hospital management system should complete a nurse login under 10ms on initiation of the HTTPS request.
    3. Set a Measurement criteria for determining the success of the response to the stimulus. For example, the system should be able to successfully respond to 98% of the HTTPS requests the first time.
    4. Note the environmental context under which the stimulus occurs, including any unusual conditions in effect.
    • The hospital management system needs to respond in under 10ms under typical load or peak load?
    • What is the time variance of peak loads, for example, an e-commerce system during a Black Friday sale?
    • How big is the peak load?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Three out of four is bad. Don’t architect for normal situations because the solution will be fragile and prone to catastrophic failure under unexpected events.
    Read article: Retail sites crash under weight of online Black Friday shoppers.

    Discover and evaluate the qualitative attributes needed for use cases or user stories

    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account

    Assume analysis is being done for a to-be developed system.

    User Loan Applicant
    Expectations On login to the web system, should be able to see accurate bank balance after loan funds are deposited.
    User signs into the online portal and opens their account balance page.
    Expected Response From System System creates a connection to the data source and renders it on the screen in under 10ms.
    Measurement Under Normal Loads:
    • Response in 10ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Under Peak Loads:
    • Response in 15ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Quality Attribute Required Required Attribute # 1: Performance
    • Design Decision: Reduce latency by placing authorization components closer to user’s location.
    Required Attribute # 2: Data Reliability
    • Design Decision: Use event-driven ETL pipelines.
    Required Attribute # 3: Scalability
    • Design Decision: Following Principle # 4 of the CSA (JIT Architecture), delay decision until necessary.

    Use cases developed in Phase 1.2 should be used here. (Adapted from the ATAM Utility Tree Method for Quality Attribute Engineering)

    Reduce technical debt while you are at it

    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account

    Assume analysis is being done for a to-be developed system.

    UserLoan Applicant
    ExpectationsOn login to the web system, should be able to see accurate bank balance after loan funds are deposited.
    User signs into the online portal and opens their account balance page.
    Expected Response From SystemSystem creates a connection to the data source and renders it on the screen in under 10ms.
    MeasurementUnder Normal Loads:
    • Response in 10ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Under Peak Loads:
    • Response in 15ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Quality Attribute RequiredRequired Attribute # 1: Performance
    • Design Decision: Reduce latency by placing authorization components closer to user’s location.

    Required Attribute # 2: Data Reliability

    • Expected is 15ms or less under peak loads, but average latency is 21ms.
    • Design Decision: Use event-driven ETL pipelines.

    Required Attribute # 3: Scalability

    • Data should not be stale and should sync instantaneously, but in some zip codes data synchronization is taking 8 hours.
    • Design Decision: Investigate integrations and flows across application, database, and infrastructure. (Note: A dedicated section for discussing scalability is presented in Phase 2.)

    1.3 Create a conceptual map between the value streams, use cases, and required architectural attributes

    1. For selected use cases completed in Phase 1.2:
    • Map the value stream to its associated use cases.
    • For each use case, list the required architectural quality attributes.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for mapping value stream components to their required architectural attribute.

    Input

    • Use Cases
    • User Roles
    • Stimulus to System
    • Response From System
    • Response Measurement

    Output

    • List of Architectural Quality Attributes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Prioritize architectural quality attributes to ensure a right-engineered solution

    Trade-offs are inherent in solution architecture. Scaling systems may impact performance and weaken security, while fault-tolerance and redundancy may improve availability but at higher than desired costs. In the end, the best solution is not always perfect, but balanced and right-engineered (versus over- or under-engineered).

    Loan Provision

    Loan Application → Disbursement of Funds → Risk Management → Service Accounts

    1. Map architecture attributes against the value stream components.
    • Use individual use cases to determine which attributes are needed for a value stream component.
    This image contains a screenshot of the table showing the importance of scalability, resiliance, performance, security, and data reliability for loan application, disbursement of funds, risk management, and service accounts.

    In our example, the prioritized list of architectural attributes are:

    • Security (4 votes for Very Important)
    • Data Reliability (2 votes for Very Important)
    • Scalability (1 vote for Very Important and 1 vote for Fairly Important) and finally
    • Resilience (1 vote for Very Important, 0 votes for Fairly Important and 1 vote for Mildly Important)
    • Performance (0 votes for Very Important, 2 votes for Fairly Important)

    1.4 Create a prioritized list of architectural attributes (from 1.3)

    1. Using the tabular structure shown on the previous slide:
    • Map each value stream component against architectural quality attributes.
    • For each mapping, indicate its importance using the green, blue, and yellow color scheme.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template and document the list of architectural attributes by priority.

    Input

    • List of Architectural Attributes From 1.3

    Output

    • Prioritized List of Architectural Attributes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    End of Phase 1

    At the end of this Phase, you should have completed the following activities:

    • Documented a set of dynamic value stream maps along with selected use cases.
    • Using the SRME framework, identified quality attributes for the system under investigation.
    • Prioritized quality attributes for system use cases.

    Phase 2: Multi-Purpose Data and Security Architecture

    Phase 1

    1.1 Articulate an Architectural Vision
    1.2 Develop Dynamic Value Stream Maps
    1.3 Map Value Streams, Use Cases, and Required Architectural Attributes
    1.4 Create a Prioritized List of Architectural Attributes

    Phase 2

    2.1 Develop a Data Architecture That Supports Transactional and Analytical Needs
    2.2 Document Security Architecture Risks and Mitigations

    Phase 3

    3.1 Document Scalability Architecture
    3.2 Document Performance Enhancing Architecture
    3.3 Combine the Different Architecture Design Decisions Into a Unified Solution Architecture

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the scalability, performance, resilience, and security needs of the business.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practice

    Fragmented data environments need something to sew them together

    • A full 93% of enterprises have a multi-cloud strategy, with 87% having a hybrid-cloud environment in place.
    • On average, companies have data stored in 2.2 public and 2.2 private clouds as well as in various on-premises data repositories.
    This image contains a breakdown of the cloud infrastructure, including single cloud versus multi-cloud.

    Source: Flexera

    In addition, companies are faced with:

    • Access and integration challenges (Who is sending the data? Who is getting it? Can we trust them?)
    • Data format challenges as data may differ for each consumer and sender of data
    • Infrastructure challenges as data repositories/processors are spread out over public and private clouds, are on premises, or in multi-cloud and hybrid ecosystems
    • Structured vs. unstructured data

    A robust and reliable integrated data architecture is essential for any organization that aspires to be relevant and impactful in its industry.

    Data’s context and influence on a solution’s architecture cannot be overestimated

    Data used to be the new oil. Now it’s the life force of any organization that has serious aspirations of providing profit-generating products and services to customers. Architectural decisions about managing data have a significant impact on the sustainability of a software system as well as on quality attributes such as security, scalability, performance, and availability.

    Storage and Processing go hand in hand and are the mainstay of any data architecture. Due to their central position of importance, an architecture decision for storage and processing must be well thought through or they become the bottleneck in an otherwise sound system.

    Ingestion refers to a system’s ability to accept data as an input from heterogenous sources, in different formats, and at different intervals.

    Dissemination is the set of architectural design decisions that make a system’s data accessible to external consumers. Major concerns involve security for the data in motion, authorization, data format, concurrent requests for data, etc.

    Orchestration takes care of ensuring data is current and reliable, especially for systems that are decentralized and distributed.

    Data architecture requires alignment with a hybrid data management plan

    Most companies have a combination of data. They have data they own using on-premises data sources and on the cloud. Hybrid data management also includes external data, such as social network feeds, financial data, and legal information amongst many others.

    Data integration architectures have typically been put in one of two major integration patterns:

    Application to Application Integration (or “speed matters”) Analytical Data Integrations (or “send it to me when its all done”)
    • This domain is concerned with ensuring communication between processes.
    • Examples include patterns such as Service-Oriented Architecture, REST, Event Hubs and Enterprise Service Buses.
    • This domain is focused on integrating data from transactional processes towards enterprise business intelligence. It supports activities that require well-managed data to generate evidence-based insights.
    • Examples of this pattern are ELT, enterprise data warehouses, and data marts.

    Sidebar

    Difference between real-time, batch, and streaming data movements

    Real-Time

    • Reacts to data in seconds or even quicker.
    • Real-time systems are hard to implement.

    Batch

    • Batch processing deals with a large volume of data all at once and data-related jobs are typically completed simultaneously in non-stop, sequential order.
    • Batch processing is an efficient and low-cost means of data processing.
    • Execution of batch processing jobs can be controlled manually, providing further control over how the system treats its data assets.
    • Batch processing is only useful if there are no requirements for data to be fresh and current. Real-time systems are suited to processing data that requires these attributes.

    Streaming

    • Stream processing allows almost instantaneous analysis of data as it streams from one device to another.
    • Since data is analyzed quickly, storage may not be a concern (since only computed data is stored while raw data can be dispersed).
    • Streaming requires the flow of data into the system to equal the flow of data computing, otherwise issues of data storage and performance can rise.

    Modern data ingestion and dissemination frameworks keep core data assets current and accessible

    Data ingestion and dissemination frameworks are critical for keeping enterprise data current and relevant.

    Data ingestion/dissemination frameworks capture/share data from/to multiple data sources.

    Factors to consider when designing a data ingestion/dissemination architecture

    What is the mode for data movement?

    • The mode for data movement is directly influenced by the size of data being moved and the downstream requirements for data currency.
    • Data can move in real-time, as a batch, or as a stream.

    What is the ingestion/dissemination architecture deployment strategy?

    • Outside of critical security concerns, hosting on the cloud vs. on premises leads to a lower total cost of ownership (TCO) and a higher return on investment (ROI).

    How many different and disparate data sources are sending/receiving data?

    • Stability comes if there is a good idea about the data sources/recipient and their requirements.

    What are the different formats flowing through?

    • Is the data in the form of data blocks? Is it structured, semi-unstructured, or unstructured?

    What are expected performance SLAs as data flow rate changes?

    • Data change rate is defined as the size of changes occurring every hour. It helps in selecting the appropriate tool for data movement.
    • Performance is a derivative of latency and throughput, and therefore, data on a cloud is going to have higher latency and lower throughput then if it is kept on premises.
    • What is the transfer data size? Are there any file compression and/or file splits applied on the data? What is the average and maximum size of a block object per ingestion/dissemination operation?

    What are the security requirements for the data being stored?

    • The ingestion/dissemination framework should be able to work through a secure tunnel to collect/share data if needed.

    Sensible storage and processing strategy can improve performance and scalability and be cost-effective

    The range of options for data storage is staggering...

    … but that’s a good thing because the range of data formats that organizations must deal with is also richer than in the past.

    Different strokes for different workloads.

    The data processing tool to use may depend upon the workloads the system has to manage.

    Expanding upon the Risk Management use case (as part of the Loan Provision Capability), one of the outputs for risk assessment is a report that conducts a statistical analysis of customer profiles and separates those that are possibly risky. The data for this report is spread out across different data systems and will need to be collected in a master data management storage location. The business and data architecture team have discussed three critical system needs, noted below:

    Data Management Requirements for Risk Management Reporting Data Design Decision
    Needs to query millions of relational records quickly
    • Strong indexing
    • Strong caching
    • Message queue
    Needs a storage space for later retrieval of relational data
    • Data storage that scales as needed
    Needs turnkey geo-replication mechanism with document retrieval in milliseconds
    • Add NoSQL with geo-replication and quick document access

    Keep every core data source on the same page through orchestration

    Data orchestration, at its simplest, is the combination of data integration, data processing, and data concurrency management.

    Data pipeline orchestration is a cross-cutting process that manages the dependencies between your data integration tasks and scheduled data jobs.

    A task or application may periodically fail, and therefore, as a part of our data architecture strategy, there must be provisions for scheduling, rescheduling, replaying, monitoring, retrying, and debugging the entire data pipeline in a holistic way.

    Some of the functionality provided by orchestration frameworks are:

    • Job scheduling
    • Job parametrization
    • SLAs tracking, alerting, and notification
    • Dependency management
    • Error management and retries
    • History and audit
    • Data storage for metadata
    • Log aggregation
    Data Orchestration Has Three Stages
    Organize Transform Publicize
    Organizations may have legacy data that needs to be combined with new data. It’s important for the orchestration tool to understand the data it deals with. Transform the data from different sources into one standard type. Make transformed data easily accessible to stakeholders.

    2.1 Discuss and document data architecture decisions

    1. Using the value maps and associated use cases from Phase 1, determine the data system quality attributes.
    2. Use the sample tabular layout on the next slide or develop one of your own.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documenting data architecture decisions.

    Input

    • Value Maps and Use Cases

    Output

    • Initial Set of Data Design Decisions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Example: Data Architecture

    Data Management Requirements for Risk Management Reporting Data Design Decision
    Needs to query millions of relational records quickly
    • Strong indexing
    • Strong caching
    • Message queue
    Needs a storage space for later retrieval of relational data
    • Data storage that scales as needed
    Needs turnkey geo-replication mechanism with document retrieval in milliseconds
    • Add NoSQL with geo-replication and quick document access

    There is no free lunch when making the most sensible security architecture decision; tradeoffs are a necessity

    Ensuring that any real system is secure is a complex process involving tradeoffs against other important quality attributes (such as performance and usability). When architecting a system, we must understand:

    • Its security needs.
    • Its security threat landscape.
    • Known mitigations for those threats to ensure that we create a system with sound security fundamentals.

    The first thing to do when determining security architecture is to conduct a threat and risk assessment (TRA).

    This image contains a sample threat and risk assessment. The steps are Understand: Until we thoroughly understand what we are building, we cannot secure it. Structure what you are building, including: System boundary, System structure, Databases, Deployment platform; Analyze: Use techniques like STRIDE and attack trees to analyze what can go wrong and what security problems this will cause; Mitigate: The security technologies to use, to mitigate your concerns, are discussed here. Decisions about using single sign-on (SSO) or role-based access control (RBAC), encryption, digital signatures, or JWT tokens are made. An important part of this step is to consider tradeoffs when implementing security mechanisms; validate: Validation can be done by experimenting with proposed mitigations, peer discussion, or expert interviews.

    Related Research

    Optimize Security Mitigation Effectiveness Using STRIDE

    • Have a clear picture of:
      • Critical data and data flows
      • Organizational threat exposure
      • Security countermeasure deployment and coverage
    • Understand which threats are appropriately mitigated and which are not.
    • Generate a list of initiatives to close security gaps.
    • Create a quantified risk and security model to reassess program and track improvement.
    • Develop measurable information to present to stakeholders.

    The 3A’s of strong security: authentication, authorization, and auditing

    Authentication

    Authentication mechanisms help systems verify that a user is who they claim to be.

    Examples of authentication mechanisms are:

    • Two-Factor Authentication
    • Single Sign-On
    • Multi-Factor Authentication
    • JWT Over OAUTH

    Authorization

    Authorization helps systems limit access to allowed features, once a user has been authenticated.

    Examples of authentication mechanisms are:

    • RBAC
    • Certificate Based
    • Token Based

    Auditing

    Securely recording security events through auditing proves that our security mechanisms are working as intended.

    Auditing is a function where security teams must collaborate with software engineers early and often to ensure the right kind of audit logs are being captured and recorded.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Defects in your application software can compromise privacy and integrity even if cryptographic controls are in place. A security architecture made after thorough TRA does not override security risk introduced due to irresponsible software design.

    Examples of threat and risk assessments using STRIDE and attack trees

    STRIDE is a threat modeling framework and is composed of:

    • Spoofing or impersonation of someone other than oneself
    • Tampering with data and destroying its integrity
    • Repudiation by bypassing system identity controls
    • Information disclosure to unauthorized persons
    • Denial of service that prevents system or parts of it from being used
    • Elevation of privilege so that attackers get rights they should not have
    Example of using STRIDE for a TRA on a solution using a payment system This image contains a sample attack tree.
    Spoofing PayPal Bad actor can send fraudulent payment request for obtaining funds.
    Tampering PayPal Bad actor accesses data base and can resend fraudulent payment request for obtaining funds.
    Repudiation PayPal Customer claims, incorrectly, their account made a payment they did not authorize.
    Disclosure PayPal Private service database has details leaked and made public.
    Denial of Service PayPal Service is made to slow down through creating a load on the network, causing massive build up of requests
    Elevation of Privilege PayPal Bad actor attempts to enter someone else’s account by entering incorrect password a number of times.

    2.2 Document security architecture risks and mitigations

    1. Using STRIDE, attack tree, or any other framework of choice:
    • Conduct a TRA for use cases identified in Phase 1.2
  • For each threat identified through the TRA, think through the implications of using authentication, authorization, and auditing as a security mechanism.
  • Download the Solution Architecture Template for documenting data architecture decisions.

    Input

    • Dynamic Value Stream Maps

    Output

    • Security Architecture Risks and Mitigations

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Security Team
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect

    Examples of threat and risk assessments using STRIDE

    Example of using STRIDE for a TRA on a solution using a payment system
    Threat System Component Description Quality Attribute Impacted Resolution
    Spoofing PayPal Bad actor can send fraudulent payment request for obtaining funds. Confidentiality Authorization
    Tampering PayPal Bad actor accesses data base and can resend fraudulent payment request for obtaining funds. Integrity Authorization
    Repudiation PayPal Customer claims, incorrectly, their account made a payment they did not authorize. Integrity Authentication and Logging
    Disclosure PayPal Private service database has details leaked and made public. Confidentiality Authorization
    Denial of Service PayPal Service is made to slow down through creating a load on the network, causing massive build up of requests Availability N/A
    Elevation of Privilege PayPal Bad actor attempts to enter someone else’s account by entering incorrect password a number of times. Confidentiality, Integrity, and Availability Authorization

    Phase 3: Upgrade Your System’s Availability

    Phase 1

    1.1 Articulate an Architectural Vision
    1.2 Develop Dynamic Value Stream Maps
    1.3 Map Value Streams, Use Cases, and Required Architectural Attributes
    1.4 Create a Prioritized List of Architectural Attributes

    Phase 2

    2.1 Develop a Data Architecture That Supports Transactional and Analytical Needs
    2.2 Document Security Architecture Risks and Mitigations

    Phase 3

    3.1 Document Scalability Architecture
    3.2 Document Performance Enhancing Architecture
    3.3 Combine the Different Architecture Design Decisions Into a Unified Solution Architecture

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Examine architecture for scalable and performant system designs
    • Integrate all design decisions made so far into a solution design decision log

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practice

    In a cloud-inspired system architecture, scalability takes center stage as an architectural concern

    Scale and scope of workloads are more important now than they were, perhaps, a decade and half back. Architects realize that scalability is not an afterthought. Not dealing with it at the outset can have serious consequences should an application workload suddenly exceed expectations.

    Scalability is …

    … the ability of a system to handle varying workloads by either increasing or decreasing the computing resources of the system.

    An increased workload could include:

    • Higher transaction volumes
    • A greater number of users

    Architecting for scalability is …

    … not easy since organizations may not be able to accurately judge, outside of known circumstances, when and why workloads may unexpectedly increase.

    A scalable architecture should be planned at the:

    • Application Level
    • Infrastructure Level
    • Database Level

    The right amount and kind of scalability is …

    … balancing the demands of the system with the supply of attributes.

    If demand from system > supply from system:

    • Services and products are not useable and deny value to customers.

    If supply from system > demand from system:

    • Excess resources have been paid for that are not being used.

    When discussing the scalability needs of a system, investigate the following, at a minimum:

    • In case workloads increase due to higher transaction volumes, will the system be able to cope with the additional stress?
    • In situations where workloads increase, will the system be able to support the additional stress without any major modifications being made to the system?
    • Is the cost associated with handling the increased workloads reasonable for the benefit it provides to the business?
    • Assuming the system doesn’t scale, is there any mechanism for graceful degradation?

    Use evidence-based decision making to ensure a cost-effective yet appropriate scaling strategy

    The best input for an effective scaling strategy is previously gathered traffic data mapped to specific circumstances.

    In some cases, either due to lack of monitoring or the business not being sure of its needs, scalability requirements are hard to determine. In such cases, use stated tactical business objectives to design for scalability. For example, the business might state its desire to achieve a target revenue goal. To accommodate this, a certain number of transactions would need to be conducted, assuming a particular conversion rate.

    Scaling strategies can be based on Vertical or Horizontal expansion of resources.
    Pros Cons
    Vertical
    Scale up through use of more powerful but limited number of resources
    • May not require frequent upgrades.
    • Since data is managed through a limited number of resources, it is easier to share and keep current.
    • Costly upfront.
    • Application, database, and infrastructure may not be able to make optimal use of extra processing power.
    • As the new, more powerful resource is provisioned, systems may experience downtime.
    • Lacks redundancy due to limited points of failure.
    • Performance is constrained by the upper limits of the infrastructure involved.
    Horizontal
    Scale out through use of similarly powered but larger quantity of resources
    • Cost-effective upfront.
    • System downtime is minimal, when scaling is being performed.
    • More redundance and fault-tolerance is possible since there are many nodes involved, and therefore, can replace failed nodes.
    • Performance can scale out as more nodes are added.
    • Upgrades may occur more often than in vertical scaling.
    • Increases machine footprints and administrative costs over time.
    • Data may be partitioned on multiple nodes, leading to administrative and data currency challenges.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • Scalability is the one attribute that sparks a lot of trade-off discussions. Scalable solutions may have to compromise on performance, cost, and data reliability.
    • Horizontal scalability is mostly always preferable over vertical scalability.

    Sidebar

    The many flavors of horizontal scaling

    Traffic Shard-ing

    Through this mechanism, incoming traffic is partitioned around a characteristic of the workload flowing in. Examples of partitioning characteristics are user groups, geo-location, and transaction type.

    Beware of:

    • Lack of data currency across shards.

    Copy and Paste

    As the name suggests, clone the compute resources along with the underlying databases. The systems will use a load balancer as the first point of contact between itself and the workload flowing in.

    Beware of:

    • Though this is a highly scalable model, it does introduce risks related to data currency across all databases.
    • In case master database writes are frequent, it could become a bottleneck for the entire system.

    Productization Through Containers

    This involves breaking up the system into specific functions and services and bundling their business rules/databases into deployable containers.

    Beware of:

    • Too many containers introduce the need to orchestrate the distributed architecture that results from a service-oriented approach.

    Start a scalability overview with a look at the database(s)

    To know where to go, you must know where you are. Before introducing architectural changes to database designs, use the right metrics to get an insight into the root cause of the problem(s).

    In a nutshell, the purpose of scaling solutions is to have the technology stack do less work for the most requested services/features or be able to effectively distribute the additional workload across multiple resources.

    For databases, to ensure this happens, consider these techniques:

    • Reuse data through caching on the server and/or the client. This eliminates the need for looking up already accessed data. Examples of caching are:
      • In-memory caching of data
      • Caching database queries
    • Implement good data retrieval techniques like indexes.
    • Divide labor at the database level.
      • Through setting up primary-secondary distribution of data. In such a setup, the primary node is involved in writing data to itself and passes on requests to secondary nodes for fulfillment.
      • Through setting up database shards (either horizontally or vertically).
        • In a horizontal shard, a data table is broken into smaller pieces with the same data model but unique data in it. The sum total of the shared databases contains all the data in the primary data table.
        • In a vertical shard, a data table is broken into smaller pieces, but each piece may have a subset of the data columns. The data’s corresponding columns are put into the table where the column resides.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A non-scalable architecture has more than just technology-related ramifications. Hoping that load balancers or cloud services will manage scalability-related issues is bound to have economic impacts as well.

    Sidebar

    Caching Options

    CSA PRINCIPLE 5 applies to any decision that supports system scalability.
    “X-ilities Over Features”

    Database Caching
    Fetches and stores result of database queries in memory. Subsequent requests to the database for the same queries will investigate the cache before making a connection with the database.
    Tools like Memcached or Redis are used for database caching.

    Precompute Database Caching
    Unlike database caching, this style of caching precomputes results of queries that are popular and frequently used. For example, a database trigger could execute several predetermined queries and have them ready for consumption. The precomputed results may be stored in a database cache.

    Application Object Caching
    Stores computed results in a cache for later retrieval. For data sources, which are not changing frequently and are part of a computation output, application caching will remove the need to connect with a database.

    Proxy Caching
    Caches retrieved web pages on a proxy server and makes them available for the next time the page is requested.

    The intra- and inter-process communication of the systems middle tier can become a bottleneck

    To synchronize or not to synchronize?

    A synchronous request (doing one thing at a time) means that code execution will wait for the request to be responded to before continuing.

    • A synchronous request is a blocking event and until it is completed, all following requests will have to wait for getting their responses.
    • An increasing workload on a synchronous system may impact performance.
    • Synchronous interactions are less costly in terms of design, implementation, and maintenance.
    • Scaling options include:
    1. Vertical scale up
    2. Horizontal scale out of application servers behind a load balancer and a caching technique (to minimize data retrieval roundtrips)
    3. Horizonal scale out of database servers with data partitioning and/or data caching technique

    Use synchronous requests when…

    • Each request to a system sets the necessary precondition for a following request.
    • Data reliability is important, especially in real-time systems.
    • System flows are simple.
    • Tasks that are typically time consuming, such as I/O, data access, pre-loading of assets, are completed quickly.

    Asynchronous requests (doing many things at the same time) do not block the system they are targeting.

    • It is a “fire and forget” mechanism.
    • Execution on a server/processor is triggered by the request, however, additional technical components (callbacks) for checking the state of the execution must be designed and implemented.
    • Asynchronous interactions require additional time to be spent on implementation and testing.
    • With asynchronous interactions, there is no guarantee the request initiated any processing until the callbacks check the status of the executed thread.

    Use asynchronous requests when…

    • Tasks are independent in nature and don’t require inter-task communication.
    • Systems flows need to be efficient.
    • The system is using event-driven techniques for processing.
    • Many I/O tasks are involved.
    • The tasks are long running.

    Sidebar

    Other architectural tactics for inter-process communication

    STATELESS SERVICES VERSUS STATEFUL SERVICES
    • Does not require any additional data, apart from the bits sent through with the request.
    • Without implementing a caching solution, it is impossible to access the previous data trail for a transaction session.
    • In addition to the data sent through with the request, require previous data sent to complete processing.
    • Requires server memory to store the additional state data. With increasing workloads, this could start impacting the server’s performance.
    It is generally accepted that stateless services are better for system scalability, especially if vertical scaling is costly and there is expectation that workloads will increase.
    MICROSERVICES VERSUS SERVERLESS FUNCTIONS
    • Services are designed as small units of code with a single responsibility and are available on demand.
    • A microservices architecture is easily scaled horizontally by adding a load balancer and a caching mechanism.
    • Like microservices, these are small pieces of code designed to fulfill a single purpose.
    • Are provided only through cloud vendors, and therefore, there is no need to worry about provisioning of infrastructure as needs increase.
    • Stateless by design but the life cycle of a serverless function is vendor controlled.
    Serverless function is an evolving technology and tightly controlled by the vendor. As and when vendors make changes to their serverless products, your own systems may need to be modified to make the best use of these upgrades.

    A team that does not measure their system’s scalability is a team bound to get a 5xx HTTP response code

    A critical aspect of any system is its ability to monitor and report on its operational outcomes.

    • Using the principle of continuous testing, every time an architectural change is introduced, a thorough load and stress testing cycle should be executed.
    • Effective logging and use of insightful metrics helps system design teams make data-driven decisions.
    • Using principle of site reliability engineering and predictive analytics, teams can be prepared for any unplanned exaggerated stimulus on the system and proactively set up remedial steps.

    Any system, however well architected, will break one day. Strategically place kill-switches to counter any failures and thoroughly test their functioning before releasing to production.

    • Using Principles 2 and 9 of the CSA, (include kill-switches and architect for x-ilities over features), introduce tactics at the code and higher levels that can be used to put a system in its previous best state in case of failure.
    • Examples of such tactics are:
      • Feature flags for turning on/off code modules that impact x-ilities.
      • Implement design patterns like throttling, autoscaling, and circuit breaking.
      • Writing extensive log messages that bubble up as exceptions/error handling from the code base. *Logging can be a performance drag. Use with caution as even logging code is still code that needs CPU and data storage.

    Performance is a system’s ability to satisfy time-bound expectations

    Performance can also be defined as the ability for a system to achieve its timing requirements, using available resources, under expected full-peak load:

    (International Organization for Standardization, 2011)

    • Performance and scalability are two peas in a pod. They are related to each other but are distinct attributes. Where scalability refers to the ability of a system to initiate multiple simultaneous processes, performance is the system’s ability to complete the processes within a mandated average time period.
    • Degrading performance is one of the first red flags about a system’s ability to scale up to workload demands.
    • Mitigation tactics for performance are very similar to the tactics for scalability.

    System performance needs to be monitored and measured consistently.

    Measurement Category 1: System performance in terms of end-user experience during different load scenarios.

    • Response time/latency: Length of time it takes for an interaction with the system to complete.
    • Turnaround time: Time taken to complete a batch of tasks.
    • Throughput: Amount of workload a system is capable of handling in a unit time period.

    Measurement Category 2: System performance in terms of load managed by computational resources.

    • Resource utilization: The average usage of a resource (like CPU) over a period. Peaks and troughs indicate excess vs. normal load times.
    • Number of concurrent connections: Simultaneous user requests that a resource like a server can successfully deal with at once.
    • Queue time: The turnaround time for a specific interaction or category of interactions to complete.

    Architectural tactics for performance management are the same as those used for system scalability

    Application Layer

    • Using a balanced approach that combines CSA Principle 7 (Good architecture comes in small packages) and Principle 10 (Architect for products, not projects), a microservices architecture based on domain-driven design helps process performance. Microservices use lightweight HTTP protocols and have loose coupling, adding a degree of resilience to the system as well. *An overly-engineered microservices architecture can become an orchestration challenge.
    • The code design must follow standards that support performance. Example of standards is SOLID*.
    • Serverless architectures can run application code from anywhere – for example, from edge servers close to an end user – thereby reducing latency.

    Database Layer

    • Using the right database technologies for persistence. Relational databases have implicit performance bottlenecks (which get exaggerated as data size grows along with indexes), and document store database technologies (key-value or wide-column) can improve performance in high-read environments.
    • Data sources, especially those that are frequently accessed, should ideally be located close to the application servers. Hybrid infrastructures (cloud and on premises mixed) can lead to latency when a cloud-application is accessing on-premises data.
    • Using a data partitioning strategy, especially in a domain-driven design architecture, can improve the performance of a system.

    Performance modeling and continuous testing makes the SRE a happy engineer

    Performance modeling and testing helps architecture teams predict performance risks as the solution is being developed.
    (CSA Principle 12: Test the solution architecture like you test your solution’s features)

    Create a model for your system’s hypothetical performance testing by breaking an end-to-end process or use case into its components. *Use the SIPOC framework for decomposition.

    This image contains an example of modeled performance, showing the latency in the data flowing from different data sources to the processing of the data.

    In the hypothetical example of modeled performance above:

    • The longest period of latency is 15ms.
    • The processing of data takes 30ms, while the baseline was established at 25ms.
    • Average latency in sending back user responses is 21ms – 13ms slower than expected.

    The model helps architects:

    • Get evidence for their assumptions
    • Quantitatively isolate bottlenecks at a granular level

    Model the performance flow once but test it periodically

    Performance testing measures the performance of a software system under normal and abnormal loads.

    Performance testing process should be fully integrated with software development activities and as automated as possible. In a fast-moving Agile environment, teams should attempt to:

    • Shift-left performance testing activities.
    • Use performance testing to pinpoint performance bottlenecks.
    • Take corrective action, as quickly as possible.

    Performance testing techniques

    • Normal load testing: Verifies the system’s behavior under the expected normal load to ensure that its performance requirements are met. Load testing can be used to measure response time, responsiveness, turnaround time, and throughput.
    • Expected maximum load testing: Like the normal load testing process, ensures system meets its performance requirements under expected maximum load.
    • Stress testing: Evaluates system behavior when processing loads beyond the expected maximum.

    *In a real production scenario, a combination of these tests are executed on a regular basis to monitor the performance of the system over a given period.

    3.1-3.2 Discuss and document initial decisions made for architecture scalability and performance

    1. Use the outcomes from either or both Phases 1.3 and 1.4.
    • For each value stream component, list the architecture decisions taken to ensure scalability and performance at client-facing and/or business-rule layers.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documenting data architecture decisions.

    Input

    • Output From Phase 1.3 and/or From Phase 1.4

    Output

    • Initial Set of Design Decisions Made for System Scalability and Performance

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Example: Architecture decisions for scalability and performance

    Value Stream Component Design Decision for User Interface Layer Design Decisions for Middle Processing Layer
    Loan Application Scalability: N/A
    Resilience: Include circuit breaker design in both mobile app and responsive websites.
    Performance: Cache data client.
    Scalability: Scale vertically (up) since loan application processing is very compute intensive.
    Resilience: Set up fail-over replica.
    Performance: Keep servers in the same geo-area.
    Disbursement of Funds *Does not have a user interface Scalability: Scale horizontal when traffic reaches X requests/second.
    Resilience: Create microservices using domain-driven design; include circuit breakers.
    Performance: Set up application cache; synchronous communication since order of data input is important.
    …. …. ….

    3.3 Combine the different architecture design decisions into a unified solution architecture

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documenting data architecture decisions.

    Input

    • Output From Phase 1.3 and/or From Phase 1.4
    • Output From Phase 2.1
    • Output From Phase 2.2
    • Output From 3.1 and 3.2

    Output

    • List of Design Decisions for the Solution

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Putting it all together is the bow that finally ties this gift

    This blueprint covered the domains tagged with the yellow star.

    This image contains a screenshot of the solution architecture framework found earlier in this blueprint, with stars next to Data Architecture, Security, Performance, and Stability.

    TRADEOFF ALERT

    The right design decision is never the same for all perspectives. Along with varying opinions, comes the “at odds with each other set” of needs (scalability vs. performance, or access vs. security).

    An evidence-based decision-making approach using a domain-driven design strategy is a good mix of techniques for creating the best (right?) solution architecture.

    This image contains a screenshot of a table that summarizes the themes discussed in this blueprint.

    Summary of accomplishment

    • Gained understanding and clarification of the stakeholder objectives placed on your application architecture.
    • Completed detailed use cases and persona-driven scenario analysis and their architectural needs through SRME.
    • Created a set of design decisions for data, security, scalability, and performance.
    • Merged the different architecture domains dealt with in this blueprint to create a holistic view.

    Bibliography

    Ambysoft Inc. “UML 2 Sequence Diagrams: An Agile Introduction.” Agile Modeling, n.d. Web.

    Bass, Len, Paul Clements, and Rick Kazman. Software Architecture in Practices: Third Edition. Pearson Education, Inc. 2003.

    Eeles, Peter. “The benefits of software architecting.” IBM: developerWorks, 15 May 2006. Web.

    Flexera 2020 State of the Cloud Report. Flexera, 2020. Web. 19 October 2021.

    Furdik, Karol, Gabriel Lukac, Tomas Sabol, and Peter Kostelnik. “The Network Architecture Designed for an Adaptable IoT-based Smart Office Solution.” International Journal of Computer Networks and Communications Security, November 2013. Web.

    Ganzinger, Matthias, and Petra Knaup. “Requirements for data integration platforms in biomedical research networks: a reference model.” PeerJ, 5 February 2015. (https://peerj.com/articles/755/).

    Garlan, David, and Mary Shaw. An Introduction to Software Architecture. CMU-CS-94-166, School of Computer Science Carnegie Mellon University, January 1994.

    Gupta, Arun. “Microservice Design Patterns.” Java Code Geeks, 14 April 2015. Web.

    How, Matt. The Modern Data Warehouse in Azure. O’Reilly, 2020.

    ISO/IEC 17788:2014: Information technology – Cloud computing, International Organization for Standardization, October 2014. Web.

    ISO/IEC 18384-1:2016: Information technology – Reference Architecture for Service Oriented Architecture (SOA RA), International Organization for Standardization, June 2016. Web.

    ISO/IEC 25010:2011(en) Systems and software engineering — Systems and software Quality Requirements and Evaluation (SQuaRE) — System and software quality models. International Organization for Standardization, March 2011. Web.

    Kazman, R., M. Klein, and P. Clements. ATAM: Method for Architecture Evaluation. S Carnegie Mellon University, August 2000. Web.

    Microsoft Developer Network. “Chapter 16: Quality Attributes.” Microsoft Application Architecture Guide. 2nd Ed., 13 January 2010. Web.

    Microsoft Developer Network. “Chapter 2: Key Principles of Software Architecture.” Microsoft Application Architecture Guide. 2nd Ed., 13 January 2010. Web.

    Microsoft Developer Network. “Chapter 3: Architectural Patterns and Styles.” Microsoft Application Architecture Guide. 2nd Ed., 14 January 2010. Web.

    Microsoft Developer Network. “Chapter 5: Layered Application Guidelines.” Microsoft Application Architecture Guide. 2nd Ed., 13 January 2010. Web.

    Mirakhorli, Mehdi. “Common Architecture Weakness Enumeration (CAWE).” IEEE Software, 2016. Web.

    Moore, G. A. Crossing the Chasm, 3rd Edition: Marketing and Selling Disruptive Products to Mainstream Customers (Collins Business Essentials) (3rd ed.). Harper Business, 2014.

    OASIS. “Oasis SOA Reference Model (SOA RM) TC.” OASIS Open, n.d. Web.

    Soni, Mukesh. “Defect Prevention: Reducing Costs and Enhancing Quality.” iSixSigma, n.d. Web.

    The Open Group. TOGAF 8.1.1 Online, Part IV: Resource Base, Developing Architecture Views. TOGAF, 2006. Web.

    The Open Group. Welcome to the TOGAF® Standard, Version 9.2, a standard of The Open Group. TOGAF, 2018. Web.

    Watts, S. “The importance of solid design principles.” BMC Blogs, 15 June 2020. 19 October 2021.

    Young, Charles. “Hexagonal Architecture–The Great Reconciler?” Geeks with Blogs, 20 Dec 2014. Web.

    APPENDIX A

    Techniques to enhance application architecture.

    Consider the numerous solutions to address architecture issues or how they will impact your application architecture

    Many solutions exist for improving the layers of the application stack that may address architecture issues or impact your current architecture. Solutions range from capability changes to full stack replacement.

    Method Description Potential Benefits Risks Related Blueprints
    Business Capabilities:
    Enablement and enhancement
    • Introduce new business capabilities by leveraging unused application functionalities or consolidate redundant business capabilities.
    • Increase value delivery to stakeholders.
    • Lower IT costs through elimination of applications.
    • Increased use of an application could overload current infrastructure.
    • IT cannot authorize business capability changes.
    Use Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture blueprint to gain better understanding of business and IT alignment.
    Removal
    • Remove existing business capabilities that don’t contribute value to the business.
    • Lower operational costs through elimination of unused and irrelevant capabilities.
    • Business capabilities may be seen as relevant or critical by different stakeholder groups.
    • IT cannot authorize business capability changes.
    Use Info-Tech’s Build an Application Rationalization Framework to rationalize your application portfolio.
    Business Process:
    Process integration and consolidation
    • Combine multiple business processes into a single process.
    • Improved utilization of applications in each step of the process.
    • Reduce business costs through efficient business processes.
    • Minimize number of applications required to execute a single process.
    • Significant business disruption if an application goes down and is the primary support for business processes.
    • Organizational pushback if process integration involves multiple business groups.
    Business Process (continued):
    Process automation
    • Automate manual business processing tasks.
    • Reduce manual processing errors.
    • Improve speed of delivery.
    • Significant costs to implement automation.
    • Automation payoffs are not immediate.
    Lean business processes
    • Eliminate redundant steps.
    • Streamline existing processes by focusing on value-driven steps.
    • Improve efficiency of business process through removal of wasteful steps.
    • Increase value delivered at the end of the process.
    • Stakeholder pushback from consistently changing processes.
    • Investment from business is required to fit documentation to the process.
    Outsource the process
    • Outsource a portion of or the entire business process to a third party.
    • Leverage unavailable resources and skills to execute the business process.
    • Loss of control over process.
    • Can be costly to bring the process back into the business if desired in the future.
    Business Process (continued):
    Standardization
    • Implement standards for business processes to improve uniformity and reusability.
    • Consistently apply the same process across multiple business units.
    • Transparency of what is expected from the process.
    • Improve predictability of process execution.
    • Process bottlenecks may occur if a single group is required to sign off on deliverables.
    • Lack of enforcement and maintenance of standards can lead to chaos if left unchecked.
    User Interface:
    Improve user experience (UX)
    • Eliminate end-user emotional, mechanical, and functional friction by improving the experience of using the application.
    • UX encompasses both the interface and the user’s behavior.
    • Increase satisfaction and adoption rate from end users.
    • Increase brand awareness and user retention.
    • UX optimizations are only focused on a few user personas.
    • Current development processes do not accommodate UX assessments
    Code:
    Update coding language
    Translate legacy code into modern coding language.
    • Coding errors in modern languages can have lesser impact on the business processes they support.
    • Modern languages tend to have larger pools of coders to hire.
    • Increase availability of tools to support modern languages.
    • Coding language changes can create incompatibilities with existing infrastructure.
    • Existing coding translation tools do not offer 100% guarantee of legacy function retention.
    Code (continued):
    Open source code
    • Download pre-built code freely available in open source communities.
    • Code is rapidly evolving in the community to meet current business needs.
    • Avoid vendor lock-in from proprietary software
    • Community rules may require divulgence of work done with open source code.
    • Support is primarily provided through community, which may not address specific concerns.
    Update the development toolchain
    • Acquire new or optimize development tools with increased testing, build, and deployment capabilities.
    • Increase developer productivity.
    • Increase speed of delivery and test coverage with automation.
    • Drastic IT overhauls required to implement new tools such as code conversion, data migration, and development process revisions.
    Update source code management
    • Optimize source code management to improve coding governance, versioning, and development collaboration.
    • Ability to easily roll back to previous build versions and promote code to other environments.
    • Enable multi-user development capabilities.
    • Improve conflict management.
    • Some source code management tools cannot support legacy code.
    • Source code management tools may be incompatible with existing development toolchain.
    Data:
    Outsource extraction
    • Outsource your data analysis and extraction to a third party.
    • Lower costs to extract and mine data.
    • Leverage unavailable resources and skills to translate mined data to a usable form.
    • Data security risks associated with off-location storage.
    • Data access and control risks associated with a third party.
    Update data structure
    • Update your data elements, types (e.g. transactional, big data), and formats (e.g. table columns).
    • Standardize on a common data definition throughout the entire organization.
    • Ease data cleansing, mining, analysis, extraction, and management activities.
    • New data structures may be incompatible with other applications.
    • Implementing data management improvements may be costly and difficult to acquire stakeholder buy-in.
    Update data mining and data warehousing tools
    • Optimize how data is extracted and stored.
    • Increase the speed and reliability of the data mined.
    • Perform complex analysis with modern data mining and data warehousing tools.
    • Data warehouses are regularly updated with the latest data.
    • Updating data mining and warehousing tools may create incompatibilities with existing infrastructure and data sets.
    Integration:
    Move from point-to-point to enterprise service bus (ESB)
    • Change your application integration approach from point-to-point to an ESB.
    • Increase the scalability of enterprise services by exposing applications to a centralized middleware.
    • Reduce the number of integration tests to complete with an ESB.
    • Single point of failure can cripple the entire system.
    • Security threats arising from centralized communication node.
    Leverage API integration
    • Leverage application programming interfaces (APIs) to integrate applications.
    • Quicker and more frequent transfers of lightweight data compared to extract, load, transfer (ETL) practices.
    • Increase integration opportunities with other modern applications and infrastructure (including mobile devices).
    • APIs are not as efficient as ETL when handling large data sets.
    • Changing APIs can break compatibility between applications if not versioned properly.

    Find Value With Cloud Asset Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}61|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Asset Management
    • Parent Category Link: /asset-management
    • Spending on cloud platforms and software-as-a-service (SaaS) is growing, and with spending comes waste.
    • The barriers are drastically lower for purchasing SaaS and cloud services as compared to traditional IT components.
    • Skills gap: IT asset managers tend not to have the skills to optimize spending on cloud platforms.
    • New space, new tools: The IT asset management market space is still developing cloud asset management and SaaS management capabilities. Practitioners must rely on cloud optimization tools in the meantime.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT asset managers are uniquely suited to provide value here. They already optimize costs and manage assets.
    • Scope creep is a killer. Focus first on your highest value, highest risk cloud instances.
    • Don’t completely centralize. Central oversight is powerful, but outsource some responsibility to the business.

    Impact and Result

    • Introduce governance: Work with developers, power business users, and infrastructure groups to define a governance approach to cloud assets and to SaaS.
    • Standardize high-impact, low-effort cloud services: Focus your efforts where they will have the most value and in places where you can provide early value.
    • Update your processes: Ensure that your asset registers and your configuration management database is up to date when cloud assets are provisioned and quiesced.

    Find Value With Cloud Asset Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement IT asset management for cloud instances and SaaS, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define cloud asset management

    Define when a cloud instance is an asset, and what it means for the asset to be managed.

    • Find Value With Cloud Asset Management – Phase 1: Define Cloud Asset Management
    • Cloud Asset Management Standard Operating Procedures
    • Cloud Instance Provisioning Standards Checklist

    2. Build cloud asset management practices

    Develop an approach to auditing and optimizing cloud assets.

    • Find Value With Cloud Asset Management – Phase 2: Build Cloud Asset Management Practices
    • Cloud Asset Management Policy
    • Monthly Cloud Asset Optimization Checklist
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool
    [infographic]

    Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}412|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Senior leadership is asking difficult questions about the organization’s dependency on third-party cloud services and the risk that poses.
    • IT leaders have limited control over third-party incidents and that includes cloud services. Yet they are on the hot seat when cloud services go down.
    • While vendors have swooped in to provide resilience options for the more-common SaaS solutions, it is not the case for all cloud services.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • No control over the software does not mean no recovery options. Solutions range from designing an IT workaround using alternate technologies to pre-defined third-party service continuity options (e.g. see options for O365) to business workarounds.
    • Even where there is limited control, you can at least define an incident response plan to streamline notification, assessment, and implementation of workarounds. Leadership wants more options than simply waiting for the service to come back online.
    • At a minimum, IT’s responsibility is to identify and communicate risk to senior leadership. That starts with a vendor review to identify SLA issues and overall resilience gaps.

    Impact and Result

    • Follow a structured process to assess cloud resilience risk.
    • Identify opportunities to mitigate risk – at the very least, ensure critical data is protected.
    • Summarize cloud services risk, mitigation options, and incident response for senior leadership.

    Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss – Step-by-step guide to assess risk, identify risk mitigation options, and create an incident response plan.

    Even where there is limited control, you can define an incident response plan to streamline notification, assessment, and implementation of workarounds.

    • Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss Storyboard

    2. Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review – Review your key cloud vendors’ SLAs, incident preparedness, and data protection strategy.

    At a minimum, IT’s responsibility is to identify and communicate risk to senior leadership. That starts with a vendor review to identify SLA and overall resilience gaps.

    • Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool

    3. SaaS Incident Response Workflows – Use these examples to guide your efforts to create cloud incident response workflows.

    The examples illustrate different approaches to incident response depending on the criticality of the service and options available.

    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows (Visio)
    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows (PDF)

    4. Cloud Services Resilience Summary – Use this template to capture your results.

    Summarize cloud services risk, mitigation options, and incident response for senior leadership.

    • Cloud Services Resilience Summary
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss

    Resilience and disaster recovery in an increasingly Cloudy and SaaSy world.

    Analyst Perspective

    If you think cloud means you don’t need a response plan, then get your resume ready.

    Frank Trovato

    Most organizations are now recognizing that they can’t ignore the risk of a cloud outage or data loss, and the challenge is “what can I do about it?” since there is limited control.

    If you still think “it’s in the cloud, so I don’t need to worry about it,” then get your resume ready. When O365 goes down, your executives are calling IT, not Microsoft, for an answer of what’s being done and what can they do in the meantime to get the business up and running again.

    The key is to recognize what you can control and what actions you can take to evaluate and mitigate risk. At a minimum, you can ensure senior leadership is aware of the risk and define a plan for how you will respond to an incident, even if that is limited to monitoring and communicating status.

    Often you can do more, including defining IT workarounds, backing up your SaaS data for additional protection, and using business process workarounds to bridge the gap, as illustrated in the case studies in this blueprint.

    Frank Trovato
    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Use this blueprint to expand your DRP and BCP to account for cloud services

    As more applications are migrated to cloud-based services, disaster recovery (DR) and business continuity plans (BCP) must include an understanding of cloud risks and actions to mitigate those risks. This includes evaluating vendor and service reliability and resilience, security measures, data protection capabilities, and technology and business workarounds if there is a cloud outage or incident.

    Use the risk assessments and cloud service incident response plans developed through this blueprint to supplement your DRP and BCP as well as further inform your crisis management plans (e.g. account for cloud risks in your crisis communication planning).

    Overall Business Continuity Plan

    IT Disaster Recovery Plan

    A plan to restore IT application and infrastructure services following a disruption.

    Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Planning blueprint provides a methodology for creating the IT DRP. Leverage this blueprint to validate and provide inputs for your IT DRP.

    BCP for Each Business Unit

    A set of plans to resume business processes for each business unit.

    Info-Tech’s Develop a Business Continuity Plan blueprint provides a methodology for creating business unit BCPs as part of an overall BCP for the organization.

    Crisis Management Plan

    A plan to manage a wide range of crises, from health and safety incidents to business disruptions to reputational damage.

    Info-Tech’s Implement Crisis Management Best Practices blueprint provides a framework for planning a response to any crisis, from health and safety incidents to reputational damage.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Senior leadership is asking difficult questions about the organization’s dependency on third-party cloud services and the risk that poses.
    • Migrating to cloud services transfers much of the responsibility for day-to-day platform maintenance but not accountability for resilience.
    • IT leaders are often responsible for not just the organization’s IT DRP but also BCP and other elements of overall resilience. Cloud risk adds another element IT leaders need to consider.
    • IT leaders have limited control over third-party incidents and that includes cloud services. With SaaS services in particular, recovery or continuity options may be limited.
    • While vendors have swooped in to provide resilience options for the more common SaaS solutions, that is not the case for all cloud services.
    • Part of the solution is defining business process workarounds and that depends on cooperation from business leaders.
    • At a minimum, IT’s responsibility is to identify and communicate risk to senior leadership. That starts with a vendor review to identify SLA and overall resilience gaps.
    • Adapt how you approach downtime and data loss risk, particularly for SaaS solutions where there is limited or no control over the system.
    • Even where there is limited control, you can define an incident response plan to streamline notification, assessment, and implementation of workarounds. Leadership wants more options than simply waiting for the service to come back online.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Asking vendors about their DRP, BCP, and overall resilience has become commonplace. Expect your vendors to provide answers so you can assess risk. Furthermore, your vendor may have additional offerings to increase resilience or recommendations for third parties who can further assist your goals of improving cloud service resilience.

    Key deliverable

    Cloud Services Resilience Summary

    Provide leadership with a summary of cloud risk, downtime workarounds implemented, and additional data protection.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Services Resilience Summary.

    Additional tools and templates in this blueprint

    Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool

    Use this tool to gather vendor input, evaluate vendor SLAs and overall resilience, and track your own risk mitigation efforts.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool.

    SaaS Incident Response Workflows

    Use the examples in this document as a model to develop your own incident response workflows for cloud outages or data loss.

    The image contains a screenshot of the SaaS Incident Response Workflows.

    This blueprint will step you through the following actions to evaluate and mitigate cloud services risk

    1. Assess your cloud risk
    • Review your cloud services to determine potential impact of downtime/data loss, vendor SLA gaps, and vendor’s current resilience.
  • Identify options to mitigate risk
    • Explore your cloud vendor’s resilience offerings, third-party solutions, DIY recovery options, and business workarounds.
  • Create an incident response plan
    • Document your cloud risk mitigation strategy and incident response plan, which might include a failover strategy, data protection, and/or business continuity.

    Cloud Risk Mitigation

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Assess risk

    Phase 1: Assess your cloud risk

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Assess your cloud risk

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Cloud does not guarantee uptime

    Public cloud services (e.g. Azure, GCP, AWS) and popular SaaS solutions experience downtime every year.

    A few cloud outage examples:

    • Microsoft Azure AD outage, March 15, 2022:
      Many users could not log into O365, Dynamics, or the Azure Portal.
      Cause: software change.
    • Three AWS outages in December 2021: December 7 (Netflix and others impacted), December 15 (Duo, Zoom, Slack, others), December 20 (Slack, Epic Games, others). Cause: network issues, power outage.
    • Salesforce outage, May 12, 2022: Users could not access the Lightning platform. Cause: expired certificate.

    Cloud availability

    • Migrating to cloud services can improve availability, as they typically offer more resilience than most organizations can afford to implement themselves.
    • However, having multiple data centers, zones, and regions doesn’t prevent all outages, as we see every year with even the largest cloud vendors.

    DR challenges for IaaS, PaaS, and cloud-native

    While there are limits to what you control, often traditional “failover” DR strategy can apply.

    High-level challenges and resilience options:

    • IaaS: No control over the hardware, but you can failover to another region. This is fairly similar to traditional DR.
    • PaaS: No control over the software platform (e.g. SQL server as a service), but you can back up your data and explore vendor options to replicate your environment.
    • Cloud-native applications: As with PaaS, you can back up your data and explore vendor options to replicate your environment.

    Plan for resilience

    • Include DR requirements when designing cloud service implementation. For example, for IaaS solutions, identify what data would need to be replicated and what services may need to be “always on” (e.g. database services where high-availability is demanded).
    • Similarly, for PaaS and cloud-native solutions, consult your vendor regarding options to build in resilience options (e.g. ability to failover to another environment).

    DR challenges for SaaS solutions

    SaaS is the biggest challenge because you have no control over any part of the base application stack.

    High-level challenges and resilience options:

    • No control over the hardware (or the facility, maintenance processes, and so on).
    • No control over the base application (control is limited to configuration settings and add-on customizations or integrations).
    • Options to back up your data will depend on the service.

    Note: The rest of this blueprint is focused primarily on SaaS resilience due to the challenges listed here. For other cloud services, leverage traditional DR strategies and vendor management to mitigate risk (as summarized on the previous slides).

    Focus on what you can control

    • For SaaS solutions in particular, you must toss out traditional DR. If Salesforce has an outage, you won’t be involved in recovering the system.
    • Instead, DR for SaaS needs to focus on improving resilience where you do have control and implementing business workarounds to bridge the gap.

    Evaluate your cloud services to clarify your specific risks

    Time and money is limited, so focus first on cloud services that are most critical and evaluate the vendors’ SLA and existing resilience capabilities.

    The activities on the next two slides will evaluate risk through two approaches:

    Activity 1: Estimate potential impact of downtime and data loss to quantify the risk and determine which cloud services are most critical and need to be prioritized. This is done through a business impact analysis that assesses:

    • Impact on revenue or costs (if applicable).
    • Impact on reputation (e.g. customer impact).
    • Impact on regulatory compliance and health and safety (if applicable).

    Activity 2: Review the vendor to identify risks and gaps. Specifically, evaluate the following:

    • Incident Management SLAs (e.g. does the SLA include RTO/RPO commitments? Do they meet your requirements?)
    • Incident Response Preparedness (e.g. does the vendor have a DRP, BCP, and security incident response plan?)
    • Data Protection (e.g. does their backup strategy and data security meet your standards?)

    Activity 1: Quantify potential impact and prioritize cloud services using a business impact analysis (BIA)

    1-3 hours

    1. Download the latest version of our DRP BIA: DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool. The tool includes instructions.
    2. Include the cloud services you want to assess in the list of applications/systems (see the tool excerpt below), and follow the BIA methodology outlined in the Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan blueprint.
    3. Use the results to quantify potential impact and prioritize your efforts on the most-critical cloud services.

    The image contains a screenshot of the DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool.

    Materials
    • DRP BIA Tool
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff who can provide a well-rounded perspective on potential impact. They will create the first draft of the BIA.
    • Review the draft BIA with relevant business leaders to refine and validate the results.

    Activity 2: Review your key cloud vendors’ SLAs, incident preparedness, and data protection strategy

    1-3 hours

    Use the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool as follows:

    1. Send the Vendor Questionnaire tab to your cloud vendors to gather input, and review your existing agreements.
    2. Copy the vendor responses into the tool (see the instructions in the tool) and evaluate. See the example excerpt below.
    3. Identify action items to clarify gaps or address risks. Some action items might not be defined yet and will need to wait until you have had a chance to further explore risk mitigation options.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool.

    Materials
    • Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.

    Phase 2: Identify options to mitigate risk

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Assess your cloud risk

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Consult your vendor to identify options to improve resilience, as a starting point

    Your vendor might also be able to suggest third parties that offer additional support, backup, or service continuity options.

    • The Vendor Questionnaire tab in the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool includes a section at the bottom where your vendor can name additional options to improve resilience (e.g. premium support packages, potentially their own DR services).
    • If your vendor has not completed that part of the questionnaire, meet with them to discuss this. Asking service vendors about resilience has become commonplace, so they should be prepared to answer questions about their own offerings and potentially can name trusted third-party vendors who can further assist you.
    • Leverage Info-Tech’s advisory services to evaluate options outlined by your vendor and potential third-party options (e.g. enterprise backup solutions that support backing up SaaS data).

    Some SaaS solutions have plenty of resilience options; others not so much

    • The pervasiveness of O365 has led vendors to close the service continuity gap, with options to send and receive email during an outage and back up your data.
    • With many SaaS solutions, there isn’t going to be a third-party service continuity option, but you might still be able to at least back up your data and implement business process workarounds to close the service gap.

    Example SaaS risk and mitigation: O365

    Risk

    • Several outages every year (e.g. MS Teams July 20, 2022).
    • SLA exceptions include “Scheduled Downtime,” which can occur with just five days’ notice.
    • The Recycling Bin is your data backup, depending on your setup.

    Options to mitigate risk (not an exhaustive list):

    • Third-party solutions for email service continuity.
    • Several backup vendors (e.g. Veeam, Rubrik) can protect most of your O365 suite.
    • Business continuity workarounds leveraging synced OneDrive, SharePoint, and Outlook (access to calendar invites).

    Example SaaS risk and mitigation: Salesforce

    Risk

    • Downtime has been infrequent, but Salesforce did have a major outage in May 2021 (DNS issue) and May 2022 (expired certificate).
    • At the time of this writing, the Main Services Agreement does not commit to a specific uptime value and specifies the usual exclusions.
    • Similarly, there are limited commitments regarding data protection.

    Options to mitigate risk (not an exhaustive list):

    • Salesforce provides a backup and restore service offering.
    • In addition, some third-party vendors support backing up Salesforce data for additional protection against data corruption or data loss.
    • Business continuity workarounds can further reduce the impact of downtime (e.g. record updates in MS Word and leverage Outlook for contact info until Salesforce is recovered).

    Establish a baseline standard for risk mitigation, regardless of cloud service

    At a minimum, set a goal to review vendor risk at least annually, define standard processes for monitoring outages, and review options to back up your SaaS data.

    Example baseline standard for cloud risk mitigation

    • Review vendor risk at least annually. This includes reviewing SLAs, vendor’s incident preparedness (e.g. do they have a current DRP, BCP, and Security IRP?), and the vendor’s data protection strategy.
    • Incident response plans must include, at a minimum, steps to monitor vendor outage and communicate status to relevant stakeholders. Where possible, business process workarounds are defined to bridge the service gap.
    • For critical data (based on your BIA and an evaluation of risk), maintain your own backups of SaaS data for additional protection.

    Embed risk mitigation standards into existing IT operations

    • Include specific SLA requirements, including incident management processes, in your RFP process and annual vendor review.
    • Define cloud incident response in your incident management procedures.
    • Include cloud data considerations in your backup strategy reviews.

    Phase 3: Create an incident response plan

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Assess your cloud risk

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Activity 1: Review the example incident response workflows and case studies as a starting point

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the SaaS Incident Response Workflows examples. The examples illustrate different approaches to incident response depending on the criticality of the service and options available.
    2. Review the case studies on the next few slides, which further illustrate the resilience and incident response solutions implemented.
    3. Note the key elements:
    • Detection
    • Assessment
    • Monitoring status / contacting the vendor
    • Communication with key stakeholders
    • Invoking workarounds, if applicable

    Example SaaS Incident Response Workflow Excerpt

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of the SaaS Incident Response Workflow Excerpt.
    Materials
    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows examples
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.
    • Relevant business process owners to provide input and define business workarounds, where applicable.

    Case Study 1: Recovery plan for critical fundraising event

    If either critical SaaS dependency fails, the following plan is executed:

    1. Donors are redirected to a predefined alternate donation page hosted by a different service. The alternate page connects to the backup payment processing service (with predefined integrations).
    2. Marketing communications support the redirect.
    3. While the backup solution doesn’t gather as much data, the payment details provide enough information to follow up with donors where necessary.

    Criticality justified a failover option

    The Annual Day of Giving generates over 50% of fundraising for the year. It’s critically dependent on two SaaS solutions that host the donation page and payment processing.

    To mitigate the risk, the organization implemented the ability to failover to an alternate “environment” – much like a traditional DR solution – supported by workarounds to manage data collection.

    Case Study 2: Protecting customer data

    Daily exports from a SaaS-hosted donations site reduce potential data loss:

    1. Daily exports to a CRM support donor profile updates and follow-ups (tax receipts, thank-you letters, etc.).
    2. The exports also mitigate the risk of data loss due to an incident with the SaaS-hosted donation site.
    3. This company is exploring more-frequent exports to further reduce the risk of data loss.

    Protecting your data gives you options

    For critical data, do you want to rely solely on the vendor’s default backup strategy?

    If your SaaS vendor is hit by ransomware or if their backup frequency doesn’t meet your needs, having your own data backup gives you options.

    It can also support business process workarounds that need to access that data while waiting for SaaS recovery.

    Case Study 3: Recovery plan for payroll

    To enable a more accurate payroll workaround, the following is done:

    1. After each payroll run, export the payroll data from the SaaS solution to a secure location.
    2. If there is a SaaS outage when payroll must be submitted, the exported data can be modified and converted to an ACH file.
    3. The ACH file is submitted to the bank, which has preapproved this workaround.

    BCP can bridge the gap

    When leadership looks to IT to mitigate cloud risk, include BCP in the discussion.

    Payroll is a good example where the best recovery option might be a business continuity workaround.

    IT often still has a role in business continuity workarounds, as in this case study: specifically, providing a solution to modify and convert the payroll data to an ACH file.

    Activity 2: Run tabletop planning exercises as a starting point to build your incident response plan

    1-3 hours

    1. Follow the tabletop planning instructions provided in the Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan blueprint.
    2. Run the exercise for each cloud service. Keep the scenario generic at first (e.g. cloud service is down with no reported root cause) so you can focus on your response. Capture response steps and gaps.
    3. Add complexity in subsequent exercises (e.g. data loss plus downtime), and use that to expand and refine the workflow as needed.
    4. Use the resulting workflows as the core piece of your incident response plan.
    5. Supplement the workflow with relevant checklists or procedures. At this point you can choose to incorporate this into your DRP or BCP or maintain these documents as supplements to those plans.
      See the DRP Case Study and BCP Case Study for an example of DRP-BCP documentation.

    Example tabletop planning results excerpt with gaps identified

    The image contains an example tabletop planning results excerpt with gaps identified.

    Materials
    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows examples
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.
    • Review results with relevant business process owners to provide input and define business workarounds where applicable.

    Activity 3: Summarize cloud services resilience to inform senior leadership of current risks and mitigation efforts

    1-3 hours

    1. Use the Cloud Services Resilience Summary example as a template to capture the following:
    • The results of your vendor review (i.e. incident management SLAs, incident response preparedness, data protections strategy).
    • The current state of your downtime workarounds and additional data loss protection.
    • Your baseline standard for cloud services risk mitigation.
    • Summary of resilience, risks, workarounds, and data loss protection for each individual cloud service that you have reviewed.
  • Present the results to senior leadership to:
    • Highlight risks to inform business decisions to mitigate or accept those risks.
    • Summarize actions already taken to mitigate risks.
    • Communicate next steps (e.g. action items to address remaining risks).

    Cloud Services Resilience Summary – Table of Contents

    The image contains a screenshot of Cloud Services Resilience Summary – Table of Contents.
    Materials
    • Cloud Services Resilience Summary
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.
    • Review results with relevant business process owners to provide input and define business workarounds where applicable.

    Summary: For cloud services, after evaluating risk, IT must adapt how they approach risk mitigation

    1. Identify failover options where possible
    • A failover strategy is possible for many cloud services (e.g. IaaS replication to another region, or failing over SaaS to an alternate solution as in case study 1).
  • At least protect your data
    • Explore supplementary backup options to protect against ransomware, data corruption, or data loss and support business continuity workarounds (see case study 2).
  • Leverage BCP to close the gap
    • This doesn’t absolve IT of its role in mitigating cloud incident risk, but business process workarounds can bridge the gap where IT options are limited (see case study 3).

    Related Info-Tech Research

    IT DRP Maturity Assessment

    Get an objective assessment of your DRP program and recommendations for improvement.

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan

    Close the gap between your DR capabilities and service continuity requirements.

    Develop a Business Continuity Plan

    Streamline the traditional approach to make BCP development manageable and repeatable.

    Implement Crisis Management Best Practices

    Don’t be another example of what not to do. Implement an effective crisis response plan to minimize the impact on business continuity, reputation, and profitability.

    Asset Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}1|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}1|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}1|upsells{/j2store}
    • Download01-Title: Asset Management Executive Brief
    • Download-01: Visit Link
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $16,518
    • member rating average days saved: 19
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Asset management has a clear impact on the financials of your company. Clear insights are essential to keep your spending at the right level.

    Asset Management

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}426|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
    • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
    • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive Azure bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
    • Often there are no consequences for overarchitecting or overspending on Azure.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their Azure spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

    Impact and Result

    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish visibility.
    • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a cost accountability framework

    Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

    • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
    • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
    • Cloud Cost Management Policy
    • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

    2. Establish visibility

    Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

    • Service Cost Cheat Sheet for Azure

    3. Define processes and procedures

    Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define process for right-sizing, and define process for purchasing commitment discounts.

    • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
    • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

    4. Build an implementation plan

    Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

    • Cloud Cost Management Task List
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build a Cost Accountability Framework

    The Purpose

    Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles & responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current state

    1.2 Determine cloud cost model

    1.3 Define roles & responsibilities

    Outputs

    Cloud cost management capability assessment

    Cloud cost model

    Roles & responsibilities

    2 Establish Visibility

    The Purpose

    Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop architectural patterns

    2.2 Define dashboards and reports

    2.3 Define account structure

    2.4 Document tagging requirements

    Outputs

    Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

    Dashboards and reports

    Account structure

    Tagging scheme

    3 Define Processes & Procedures

    The Purpose

    Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved capability of reducing costs.

    Documented processes & procedures for continuous improvement.

    Activities

    3.1 Establish governance for tagging

    3.2 Establish governance for costs

    3.3 Define right-sizing process

    3.4 Define purchasing process

    3.5 Define notification and alerts

    Outputs

    Tagging policy

    Cost control policy

    Right-sizing process

    Commitment purchasing process

    Notifications and alerts

    4 Build an Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Document next steps to implement & improve cloud cost management program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

    Activities

    4.1 Document process interaction changes

    4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

    4.3 Build implementation roadmap

    4.4 Build communication plan

    Outputs

    Changes to process interactions

    Cloud cost program KPIs

    Implementation roadmap

    Communication plan

    Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}164|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development

    Your organization is looking to invest in new software or a tool to solve key business and IT problems. They see open source as a viable option given the advertised opportunities and the popularity of many open-source projects, but they have concerns:

    • Despite the longevity and broad adoption of open-source software, stakeholders are hesitant about its long-term viability and the costs of ongoing support.
    • A clear direction and strategy are needed to align the expected value of open source to your stakeholders’ priorities and gain the funding required to select, implement, and support open-source software.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Position open source in the same light as commercial software. The continuous improvement and evolution of popular open-source software and communities have established a reputation for reliability in the industry.
    • Consider open source as another form of outsource development. Open source is externally developed software where the code is accessible and customizable. Code quality may not align to your organization’s standards, which can require extensive testing and optimization.
    • Treat open source as any internally developed solution. Configurations, integrations, customizations, and orchestrations of open-source software are often done at the code level. While some community support is provided, most of the heavy lifting is done by the applications team.

    Impact and Result

    • Outline the value you expect to gain. Discuss current business and IT priorities, use cases, and value opportunities to determine what to expect from open-source versus commercial software.
    • Define your open-source selection criteria. Clarify the driving factors in your evaluation of open-source and commercial software using your existing IT procurement practices as a starting point.
    • Assess the readiness of your team. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of open-source software.

    Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software Storyboard – A guide to learn the fit, value, and considerations of open-source software.

    This research walks you through the misconceptions about open source, factors to consider in its selection, and initiatives to prepare your teams for its adoption.

    • Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software Storyboard

    2. Open-Source Readiness Assessment – A tool to help you evaluate your readiness to embrace open-source software in your environment.

    Use this tool to identify key gaps in the people, processes, and technologies needed to support open source in your organization. It also contains a canvas to facilitate discussions about expectations with your stakeholders and applications teams.

    • Open-Source Readiness Assessment
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software

    Begin to understand what is required to embrace open-source software in your organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    With great empowerment comes great responsibilities.

    Open-source software promotes enticing technology and functional opportunities to any organization looking to modernize without the headaches of traditional licensing. Many organizations see the value of open source in its ability to foster innovation, be flexible to various use cases and system configurations, and give complete control to the teams who are using and managing it.

    However, open source is not free. While the software is freely and easily accessible, its use and sharing are bound by its licenses, and its implementation requires technical expertise and infrastructure investments. Your organization must be motivated and capable of taking on the various services traditionally provided and managed by the vendor.

    Photo of Andrew Kum-Seun

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Research Director,
    Application Delivery and Application Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your organization is looking to invest in new software or a tool to solve key business and IT problems. They see open source as a viable option because of the advertised opportunities and the popularity of many open-source projects.

    Despite the longevity and the broad adoption of open-source software, stakeholders are hesitant about its adoption, its long-term viability, and the costs of ongoing support.

    A clear direction and strategy is needed to align the expected value of open source to your stakeholders’ priorities and gain the funding required to select, implement, and support open-source software.

    Common Obstacles

    Your stakeholders’ fears, uncertainties, and doubts about open source may be driven by misinterpretation or outdated information. This hesitancy can persist despite some projects being active longer than their proprietary counterparts.

    Certain software features, support capabilities, and costs are commonly overlooked when selecting open-source software because they are often assumed in the licensing and service costs of commercial software.

    Open-source software is often technically complicated and requires specific skill sets and knowledge. Unfortunately, current software delivery capability gaps impede successful adoption and scaling of open-source software.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Outline the value you expect to gain. Discuss current business and IT priorities, use cases, and value opportunities to determine what to expect from open-source versus commercial software.

    Define your open-source selection criteria. Clarify the driving factors in your evaluation of open-source and commercial software using your existing IT procurement practices as a starting point.

    Assess the readiness of your team. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of open-source software.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching Info-Tech Insight

    Open source is as much about an investment in people as it is about technology. It empowers applications teams to take greater control over their technology and customize it as they see fit. However, teams need the time and funding to conduct the necessary training, management, and ongoing community engagement that open-source software and its licenses require.

    • Position open source in the same light as commercial software.
      The continuous improvement and evolution of popular open-source software and communities have established a trusting and reliable reputation in the industry. Open-source software quality and community support can rival similar vendor capabilities given the community’s maturity and contributions in the technology.
    • Consider open source another form of outsource development.
      Open source is externally developed software where the code is accessible and customizable. Code quality may not align to your organization’s standards, which can require extensive testing and optimization. A thorough analysis of change logs, code repositories, contributors, and the community is recommended – much to the same degree as one would do with prospective outsourcing partners.
    • Treat open source as any internally developed solution.
      Configurations, integrations, customizations, and orchestrations of open-source software are often done at the code level. While some community support is provided, most of the heavy lifting is done by the applications team. Teams must be properly resourced, upskilled, and equipped to meet this requirement. Otherwise, third-party partners are needed.

    What is open source?

    According to Synopsys, “Open source software (OSS) is software that is distributed with its source code, making it available for use, modification, and distribution with its original rights. … Programmers who have access to source code can change a program by adding to it, changing it, or fixing parts of it that aren’t working properly. OSS typically includes a license that allows programmers to modify the software to best fit their needs and control how the software can be distributed.”

    What are the popular use cases?

    1. Programming languages and frameworks
    2. Databases and data technologies
    3. Operating systems
    4. Git public repos
    5. Frameworks and tools for AI/ML/DL
    6. CI/CD tooling
    7. Cloud-related tools
    8. Security tools
    9. Container technology
    10. Networking

    Source: OpenLogic, 2022

    Common Attributes of All Open-Source Software

    • Publicly shared repository that anyone can access to use the solution and contribute changes to the design and functionality of the project.
    • A community that is an open forum to share ideas and solution enhancements, discuss project direction and vision, and seek support from peers.
    • Project governance that sets out guidelines, rules, and requirements to participate and contribute to the project.
    • Distribution license that defines the terms of how a solution can be used, assessed, modified, and distributed.

    Take the first steps to embrace open-source software

    Begin to understand what is required to embrace open-source software in your organization.

    A diagram of open-source community.

    State the Value of Open Source: Discuss current business and IT priorities, use cases, and value opportunities to determine what to expect from open-source versus commercial software.

    Select Your Open-Source Software: Clarify the driving factors in your evaluation of open-source and commercial software using your existing IT procurement practices as a starting point.

    Prepare for Open Source: Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of open-source software.

    Step 1.1: State the Value of Open Source

    Diagram of step 1.1

    Activities

    1.1.1 Outline the value you expect to gain from open-source software

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications team
    • Product owner

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Value proposition for open source
    • Potential open-source use cases

    Use a canvas to frame your open-source evaluation

    A photo of open-source canvas

    This canvas is intended to provide a single pane of glass to start collecting your thoughts and framing your future conversations on open-source software selection and adoption.

    Record the results in the “Open-Source Canvas” tab in the Open-Source Readiness Assessment.

    Open source presents unique software and tooling opportunities

    Innovation

    Many leading-edge and bleeding-edge technologies are collaborated and innovated in open-source projects, especially in areas that are beyond the vision and scope of vendor products and priorities.

    Niche Solutions

    Open-source projects are focused. They are designed and built to solve specific business and technology problems.

    Flexible & Customizable

    All aspects of the open-source software are customizable, including source code and integrations. They can be used to extend, complement, or replace internally developed code. Licenses define how open-source code should be and must be used, productized, and modified.

    Brand & Recognition

    Open-source communities encourage contribution and collaboration among their members to add functionality and improve quality and adoption.

    Cost

    Open-source software is accessible to everyone, free of charge. Communities do not need be consulted prior to acquisition, but the software’s use, configurations, and modifications may be restricted by its license.

    However, myths continue to challenge adoption

    • Open source is less secure or poorer quality than proprietary solutions.
    • Open source is free from risk of intellectual property (IP) infringement.
    • Open source is cheaper than proprietary solutions.

    What are the top perceived barriers to using enterprise open source?

    • Concerns about the level of support
    • Compatibility concerns
    • Concerns about inherent security of the code
    • Lack of internal skills to manage and support it

    Source: Red Hat, 2022

    Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}283|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Mobile Development
    • Parent Category Link: /mobile-development
    • CEOs see mobile for employees as their top mandate for upcoming technology innovation initiatives, making security a key competency for development.
    • Unsecure mobile applications can cause your employees to question the mobile applications’ integrity for handling sensitive data, limiting uptake.
    • Secure mobile development tends to be an afterthought, where vulnerabilities are tested for post-production rather than during the build process.
    • Developers lack the expertise, processes, and proper tools to effectively enhance applications for mobile security.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations currently react to security issues. Info-Tech recommends a proactive approach to ensure a secure software development life cycle (SSDLC) end-to-end.
    • Organizations currently lack the secure development practices to provide highly secure mobile applications that end users can trust.
    • Enable your developers with five key secure development techniques from Info-Tech’s development toolkit.

    Impact and Result

    • Embed secure development techniques into your SDLC.
    • Create a repeatable process for your developers to continually evaluate and optimize mobile application security for new threats and corresponding mitigation steps.
    • Build capabilities within your team based on Info-Tech’s framework by supporting ongoing security improvements through monitoring and metric analysis.

    Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt secure development techniques for mobile application development, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess secure mobile development processes

    Determine the current security landscape of mobile application development.

    • Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications – Phase 1: Assess Secure Mobile Development Practices
    • Systems Architecture Template
    • Mobile Application High-Level Design Requirements Template

    2. Implement and test secure mobile techniques

    Incorporate the various secure development techniques into current development practices.

    • Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications – Phase 2: Implement and Test Secure Mobile Techniques

    3. Monitor and support secure mobile applications

    Create a roadmap for mobile optimization initiatives.

    • Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications – Phase 3: Monitor and Support Secure Mobile Applications
    • Mobile Optimization Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Your Secure Mobile Development Practices

    The Purpose

    Identification of the triggers of your secure mobile development initiatives.

    Assessment of the security vulnerabilities in your mobile applications from an end-user perspective.

    Identification of the execution of your mobile environment.

    Assessment of the mobile threats and vulnerabilities to your systems architecture.

    Prioritization of your mobile threats.

    Creation of your risk register.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Key opportunity areas where a secure development optimization initiative can provide tangible benefits.

    Identification of security requirements.

    Prioritized list of security threats.

    Initial mobile security risk register created. 

    Activities

    1.1 Establish the triggers of your secure mobile development initiatives.

    1.2 Assess the security vulnerabilities in your mobile applications from an end-user perspective.

    1.3 Understand the execution of your mobile environment with a systems architecture.

    1.4 Assess the mobile threats and vulnerabilities to your systems architecture.

    1.5 Prioritize your mobile threats.

    1.6 Begin building your risk register.

    Outputs

    Mobile Application High-Level Design Requirements Document

    Systems Architecture Diagram

    2 Implement and Test Your Secure Mobile Techniques

    The Purpose

    Discovery of secure development techniques to apply to current development practices.

    Discovery of new user stories from applying secure development techniques.

    Discovery of new test cases from applying secure development techniques.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Areas within your code that can be optimized for improving mobile application security.

    New user stories created in relation to mitigation steps.

    New test cases created in relation to mitigation steps.

    Activities

    2.1 Gauge the state of your secure mobile development practices.

    2.2 Identify the appropriate techniques to fill gaps.

    2.3 Develop user stories from security development gaps identified.

    2.4 Develop test cases from user story gaps identified.

    Outputs

    Mobile Application High-Level Design Requirements Document

    3 Monitor and Support Your Secure Mobile Applications

    The Purpose

    Identification of key metrics used to measure mobile application security issues.

    Identification of secure mobile application and development process optimization initiatives.

    Identification of enablers and blockers of your mobile security optimization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Metrics for measuring application security.

    Modified triaging process for addressing security issues.

    Initiatives for development optimization.

    Enablers and blockers identified for mobile security optimization initiatives.

    Process for developing your mobile optimization roadmap.

    Activities

    3.1 List the metrics that would be gathered to assess the success of your mobile security optimization.

    3.2 Adjust and modify your triaging process to enhance handling of security issues.

    3.3 Brainstorm secure mobile application and development process optimization initiatives.

    3.4 Identify the enablers and blockers of your mobile security optimization.

    3.5 Define your mobile security optimization roadmap.

    Outputs

    Mobile Optimization Roadmap

    Build a Data Classification MVP for M365

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}67|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications
    • Resources are the primary obstacle to getting a foot hold in O365 governance, whether it is funding or FTE resources.
    • Data is segmented and is difficult to analyze when you can’t see it or manage the relationships between sources.
    • Organizations expect results early and quickly and a common obstacle is that building a proper data classification framework can take more than two years and the business can't wait that long.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Data classification is the lynchpin to ANY effective governance of O/M365 and your objective is to navigate through this easily and effectively and build a robust, secure, and viable governance model.
    • Start your journey by identifying what and where your data is and how much data you have. You need to understand what sensitive data you have and where it is stored before you can protect it or govern that data.
    • Ensure there is a high-level leader who is the champion of the governance objective.

    Impact and Result

    • Using least complex sensitivity labels in your classification are your building blocks to compliance and security in your data management schema; they are your foundational steps.

    Build a Data Classification MVP for M365 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Data Classification MVP for M365 Deck – A guide for how to build a minimum-viable product for data classification that end users will actually use.

    Discover where your data resides, what governance helps you do, and what types of data you're classifying. Then build your data and security protection baselines for your retention policy, sensitivity labels, workload containers, and both forced and unforced policies.

    • Build a Data Classification MVP for M365 Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Build a Data Classification MVP for M365

    Kickstart your governance with data classification users will actually use!

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech Insight

    • Creating an MVP gets you started in data governance
      Information protection and governance are not something you do once and then you are done. It is a constant process where you start with the basics (a minimum-viable product or MVP) and enhance your schema over time. The objective of the MVP is reducing obstacles to establishing an initial governance position, and then enabling rapid development of the solution to address a variety of real risks, including data loss prevention (DLP), data retention, legal holds, and data labeling.
    • Define your information and protection strategy
      The initial strategy is to start looking across your organization and identifying your customer data, regulatory data, and sensitive information. To have a successful data protection strategy you will include lifecycle management, risk management, data protection policies, and DLP. All key stakeholders need to be kept in the loop. Ensure you keep track of all available data and conduct a risk analysis early. Remember, data is your highest valued intangible asset.
    • Planning and resourcing are central to getting started on MVP
      A governance plan and governance decisions are your initial focus. Create a team of stakeholders that include IT and business leaders (including Legal, Finance, HR, and Risk), and ensure there is a top-level leader who is the champion of the governance objective, which is to ensure your data is safe, secure, and not prone to leakage or theft, and maintain confidentiality where it is warranted.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Today, the amount of data companies are gathering is growing at an explosive rate. New tools are enabling unforeseen channels and ways of collaborating.
    • Combined with increased regulatory oversight and reporting obligations, this makes the discovery and management of data a massive undertaking. IT can’t find and protect the data when the business has difficulty defining its data.
    • The challenge is to build a framework that can easily categorize and classify data yet allows for sufficient regulatory compliance and granularity to be useful. Also, to do it now because tomorrow is too late.
    Common Obstacles

    Data governance has several obstacles that impact a successful launch, especially if governing M365 is not a planned strategy. Below are some of the more common obstacles:

    • Resources are the primary obstacle to starting O365 governance, whether it is funding or people.
    • Data is segmented and is difficult to analyze when you can’t see it or manage the relationships between sources.
    • Organizations expect results early and quickly and a common obstacle is that building a "proper data classification framework” is a 2+ year project and the business can't wait that long.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Start with the basics: build a minimum-viable product (MVP) to get started on the path to sustainable governance.
    • Identify what and where your data resides, how much data you have, and understand what sensitive data needs to be protected.
    • Create your team of stakeholders, including Legal, records managers, and privacy officers. Remember, they own the data and should manage it.
    • Categorization comes before classification, and discovery comes before categorization. Use easy-to-understand terms like high, medium, or low risk.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data classification is the lynchpin to any effective governance of O/M365 and your objective is to navigate through this easily and effectively and build a robust, secure, and viable governance model. Start your journey by identifying what and where your data is and how much data do you have. You need to understand what sensitive data you have and where it is stored before you can protect or govern it. Ensure there is a high-level leader who is the champion of the governance objectives. Data classification fulfills the governance objectives of risk mitigation, governance and compliance, efficiency and optimization, and analytics.

    Questions you need to ask

    Four key questions to kick off your MVP.

    1

    Know Your Data

    Do you know where your critical and sensitive data resides and what is being done with it?

    Trying to understand where your information is can be a significant project.

    2

    Protect Your Data

    Do you have control of your data as it traverses across the organization and externally to partners?

    You want to protect information wherever it goes through encryption, etc.

    3

    Prevent Data Loss

    Are you able to detect unsafe activities that prevent sharing of sensitive information?

    Data loss prevention (DLP) is the practice of detecting and preventing data breaches, exfiltration, or unwanted destruction of sensitive data.

    4

    Govern Your Data

    Are you using multiple solutions (or any) to classify, label, and protect sensitive data?

    Many organizations use more than one solution to protect and govern their data, making it difficult to determine if there are any coverage gaps.

    Classification tiers

    Build your schema.

    Pyramid visualization for classification tiers. The top represents 'Simplicity', and the bottom 'Complexity' with the length of the sides at each level representing the '# of policies' and '# of labels'. At the top level is 'MVP (Minimum-Viable Product) - Confidential, Internal (Subcategory: Personal), Public'. At the middle level is 'Regulated - Highly Confidential, Confidential, Sensitive, General, Internal, Restricted, Personal, Sub-Private, Public'. And a the bottom level is 'Government (DOD) - Top Secret (TS), Secret, Confidential, Restricted, Official, Unclassified, Clearance'

    Info-Tech Insight

    Deciding on how granular you go into data classification will chiefly be governed by what industry you are in and your regulatory obligations – the more highly regulated your industry, the more classification levels you will be mandated to enforce. The more complexity you introduce into your organization, the more operational overhead both in cost and resources you will have to endure and build.

    Microsoft MIP Topology

    Microsoft Information Protection (MIP), which is Microsoft’s Data Classification Services, is the key to achieving your governance goals. Without an MVP, data classification will be overwhelming; simplifying is the first step in achieving governance.

    A diagram of multiple offerings all connected to 'MIP Data Classification Service'. Circled is 'Sensitivity Labels' with an arrow pointing back to 'MIP' at the center.
    (Source: Microsoft, “Microsoft Purview compliance portal”)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Using least-complex sensitivity labels in your classification are your building blocks to compliance and security in your data management schema; they are your foundational steps.

    MVP RACI Chart

    Data governance is a "takes a whole village" kind of effort.

    Clarify who is expected to do what with a RACI chart.

    End User M365 Administrator Security/ Compliance Data Owner
    Define classification divisions R A
    Appy classification label to data – at point of creation A R
    Apply classification label to data – legacy items R A
    Map classification divisions to relevant policies R A
    Define governance objectives R A
    Backup R A
    Retention R A
    Establish minimum baseline A R

    What and where your data resides

    Data types that require classification.

    Logos for 'Microsoft', 'Office 365', and icons for each program included in that package.
    M365 Workload Containers
    Icon for MS Exchange. Icon for MS SharePoint.Icon for MS Teams. Icon for MS OneDrive. Icon for MS Project Online.
    Email
    • Attachments
    Site Collections, Sites Sites Project Databases
    Contacts Teams and Group Site Collections, Sites Libraries and Lists Sites
    Metadata Libraries and Lists Documents
    • Versions
    Libraries and Lists
    Teams Conversations Documents
    • Versions
    Metadata Documents
    • Versions
    Teams Chats Metadata Permissions
    • Internal Sharing
    • External Sharing
    Metadata
    Permissions
    • Internal Sharing
    • External Sharing
    Files Shared via Teams Chats Permissions
    • Internal Sharing
    • External Sharing

    Info-Tech Insight

    Knowing where your data resides will ensure you do not miss any applicable data that needs to be classified. These are examples of the workload containers; you may have others.

    Discover and classify on- premises files using AIP

    AIP helps you manage sensitive data prior to migrating to Office 365:
    • Use discover mode to identify and report on files containing sensitive data.
    • Use enforce mode to automatically classify, label, and protect files with sensitive data.
    Can be configured to scan:
    • SMB files
    • SharePoint Server 2016, 2013
    Stock image of a laptop uploading to the cloud with a padlock and key in front of it.
    • Map your network and find over-exposed file shares.
    • Protect files using MIP encryption.
    • Inspect the content in file repositories and discover sensitive information.
    • Classify and label file per MIP policy.
    Azure Information Protection scanner helps discover, classify, label, and protect sensitive information in on-premises file servers. You can run the scanner and get immediate insight into risks with on-premises data. Discover mode helps you identify and report on files containing sensitive data (Microsoft Inside Track and CIAOPS, 2022). Enforce mode automatically classifies, labels, and protects files with sensitive data.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Any asset deployed to the cloud must have approved data classification. Enforcing this policy is a must to control your data.

    Understanding governance

    Microsoft Information Governance

    Information Governance
    • Retention policies for workloads
    • Inactive and archive mailboxes

    Arrow pointing down-right

    Records Management
    • Retention labels for items
    • Disposition review

    Arrow pointing down-left

    Retention and Deletion

    ‹——— Connectors for Third-Party Data ———›

    Information governance manages your content lifecycle using solutions to import, store, and classify business-critical data so you can keep what you need and delete what you do not. Backup should not be used as a retention methodology since information governance is managed as a “living entity” and backup is a stored information block that is “suspended in time.” Records management uses intelligent classification to automate and simplify the retention schedule for regulatory, legal, and business-critical records in your organization. It is for that discrete set of content that needs to be immutable.
    (Source: Microsoft, “Microsoft Purview compliance portal”)

    Retention and backup policy decision

    Retention is not backup.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Retention is not backup. Retention means something different: “the content must be available for discovery and legal document production while being able to defend its provenance, chain of custody, and its deletion or destruction” (AvePoint Blog, 2021).

    Microsoft Responsibility (Microsoft Protection) Weeks to Months Customer Responsibility (DLP, Backup, Retention Policy) Months to Years
    Loss of service due to natural disaster or data center outage Loss of data due to departing employees or deactivated accounts
    Loss of service due to hardware or infrastructure failure Loss of data due to malicious insiders or hackers deleting content
    Short-term (30 days) user error with recycle bin/ version history (including OneDrive “File Restore”) Loss of data due to malware or ransomware
    Short-term (14 days) administrative error with soft- delete for groups, mailboxes, or service-led rollback Recovery from prolonged outages
    Long-term accidental deletion coverage with selective rollback

    Understand retention policy

    What are retention policies used for? Why you need them as part of your MVP?

    Do not confuse retention labels and policies with backup.

    Remember: “retention [policies are] auto-applied whereas retention label policies are only applied if the content is tagged with the associated retention label” (AvePoint Blog, 2021).

    E-discovery tool retention policies are not turned on automatically.

    Retention policies are not a backup tool – when you activate this feature you are unable to delete anyone.

    “Data retention policy tools enable a business to:

    • “Decide proactively whether to retain content, delete content, or retain and then delete the content when needed.
    • “Apply a policy to all content or just content meeting certain conditions, such as items with specific keywords or specific types of sensitive information.
    • “Apply a single policy to the entire organization or specific locations or users.
    • “Maintain discoverability of content for lawyers and auditors, while protecting it from change or access by other users. […] ‘Retention Policies’ are different than ‘Retention Label Policies’ – they do the same thing – but a retention policy is auto-applied, whereas retention label policies are only applied if the content is tagged with the associated retention label.

    “It is also important to remember that ‘Retention Label Policies’ do not move a copy of the content to the ‘Preservation Holds’ folder until the content under policy is changed next.” (Source: AvePoint Blog, 2021)

    Definitions

    Data classification is a focused term used in the fields of cybersecurity and information governance to describe the process of identifying, categorizing, and protecting content according to its sensitivity or impact level. In its most basic form, data classification is a means of protecting your data from unauthorized disclosure, alteration, or destruction based on how sensitive or impactful it is.

    Once data is classified, you can then create policies; sensitive data types, trainable classifiers, and sensitivity labels function as inputs to policies. Policies define behaviors, like if there will be a default label, if labeling is mandatory, what locations the label will be applied to, and under what conditions. A policy is created when you configure Microsoft 365 to publish or automatically apply sensitive information types, trainable classifiers, or labels.

    Sensitivity label policies show one or more labels to Office apps (like Outlook and Word), SharePoint sites, and Office 365 groups. Once published, users can apply the labels to protect their content.

    Data loss prevention (DLP) policies help identify and protect your organization's sensitive info (Microsoft Docs, April 2022). For example, you can set up policies to help make sure information in email and documents is not shared with the wrong people. DLP policies can use sensitive information types and retention labels to identify content containing information that might need protection.

    Retention policies and retention label policies help you keep what you want and get rid of what you do not. They also play a significant role in records management.

    Data examples for MVP classification

    • Examples of the type of data you consider to be Confidential, Internal, or Public.
    • This will help you determine what to classify and where it is.
    Internal Personal, Employment, and Job Performance Data
    • Social Security Number
    • Date of birth
    • Marital status
    • Job application data
    • Mailing address
    • Resume
    • Background checks
    • Interview notes
    • Employment contract
    • Pay rate
    • Bonuses
    • Benefits
    • Performance reviews
    • Disciplinary notes or warnings
    Confidential Information
    • Business and marketing plans
    • Company initiatives
    • Customer information and lists
    • Information relating to intellectual property
    • Invention or patent
    • Research data
    • Passwords and IT-related information
    • Information received from third parties
    • Company financial account information
    • Social Security Number
    • Payroll and personnel records
    • Health information
    • Self-restricted personal data
    • Credit card information
    Internal Data
    • Sales data
    • Website data
    • Customer information
    • Job application data
    • Financial data
    • Marketing data
    • Resource data
    Public Data
    • Press releases
    • Job descriptions
    • Marketing material intended for general public
    • Research publications

    New container sensitivity labels (MIP)

    New container sensitivity labels

    Public Private
    Privacy
    1. Membership to group is open; anyone can join
    2. “Everyone except external guest” ACL onsite; content available in search to all tenants
    1. Only owner can add members
    2. No access beyond the group membership until someone shares it or changes permissions
    Allowed Not Allowed
    External guest policy
    1. Membership to group is open; anyone can join
    2. “Everyone except external guest” ACL onsite; content available in search to all tenants
    1. Only owner can add members
    2. No access beyond the group membership until someone shares it or changes permissions

    What users will see when they create or label a Team/Group/Site

    Table of what users will see when they create or label a team/group/site highlighting 'External guest policy' and 'Privacy policy options' as referenced above.
    (Source: Microsoft, “Microsoft Purview compliance portal”)

    Info-Tech Insights

    Why you need sensitivity container labels:
    • Manage privacy of Teams Sites and M365 Groups
    • Manage external user access to SPO sites and teams
    • Manage external sharing from SPO sites
    • Manage access from unmanaged devices

    Data protection and security baselines

    Data Protection Baseline

    “Microsoft provides a default assessment in Compliance Manager for the Microsoft 365 data protection baseline" (Microsoft Docs, June 2022). This baseline assessment has a set of controls for key regulations and standards for data protection and general data governance. This baseline draws elements primarily from NIST CSF (National Institute of Standards and Technology Cybersecurity Framework) and ISO (International Organization for Standardization) as well as from FedRAMP (Federal Risk and Authorization Management Program) and GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation of the European Union).

    Security Baseline

    The final stage in M365 governance is security. You need to implement a governance policy that clearly defines storage locations for certain types of data and who has permission to access it. You need to record and track who accesses content and how they share it externally. “Part of your process should involve monitoring unusual external sharing to ensure staff only share documents that they are allowed to” (Rencore, 2021).

    Info-Tech Insights

    • Controls are already in place to set data protection policy. This assists in the MVP activities.
    • Finally, you need to set your security baseline to ensure proper permissions are in place.

    Prerequisite baseline

    Icon of crosshairs.
    Security

    MFA or SSO to access from anywhere, any device

    Banned password list

    BYOD sync with corporate network

    Icon of a group.
    Users

    Sign out inactive users automatically

    Enable guest users

    External sharing

    Block client forwarding rules

    Icon of a database.
    Resources

    Account lockout threshold

    OneDrive

    SharePoint

    Icon of gears.
    Controls

    Sensitivity labels, retention labels and policies, DLP

    Mobile application management policy

    Building baselines

    Sensitivity Profiles: Public, Internal, Confidential; Subcategory: Highly Confidential

    Microsoft 365 Collaboration Protection Profiles

    Sensitivity Public External Collaboration Internal Highly Confidential
    Description Data that is specifically prepared for public consumption Not approved for public consumption, but OK for external collaboration External collaboration highly discouraged and must be justified Data of the highest sensitivity: avoid oversharing, internal collaboration only
    Label details
    • No content marking
    • No encryption
    • Public site
    • External collaboration allowed
    • Unmanaged devices: allow full access
    • No content marking
    • No encryption
    • Private site
    • External collaboration allowed
    • Unmanaged devices: allow full access
    • Content marking
    • Encryption
    • Private site
    • External collaboration allowed but monitored
    • Unmanaged devices: limited web access
    • Content marking
    • Encryption
    • Private site
    • External collaboration disabled
    • Unmanaged devices: block access
    Teams or Site details Public Team or Site open discovery, guests are allowed Private Team or Site members are invited, guests are allowed Private Team or Site members are invited, guests are not allowed
    DLP None Warn Block

    Please Note: Global/Compliance Admins go to the 365 Groups platform, the compliance center (Purview), and Teams services (Source: Microsoft Documentation, “Microsoft Purview compliance documentation”)

    Info-Tech Insights

    • Building baseline profiles will be a part of your MVP. You will understand what type of information you are addressing and label it accordingly.
    • Sensitivity labels are a way to classify your organization's data in a way that specifies how sensitive the data is. This helps you decrease risks in sharing information that shouldn't be accessible to anyone outside your organization or department. Applying sensitivity labels allows you to protect all your data easily.

    MVP activities

    PRIMARY
    ACTIVITIES
    Define Your Governance
    The objective of the MVP is reducing barriers to establishing an initial governance position, and then enabling rapid progression of the solution to address a variety of tangible risks, including DLP, data retention, legal holds, and labeling.
    Decide on your classification labels early.

    CATEGORIZATION





    CLASSIFICATION

    MVP
    Data Discovery and Management
    AIP (Azure Information Protection) scanner helps discover, classify, label, and protect sensitive information in on-premises file servers. You can run the scanner and get immediate insight into risks with on-premises data.
    Baseline Setup
    Building baseline profiles will be a part of your MVP. You will understand what type of information you are addressing and label it accordingly. Microsoft provides a default assessment in Compliance Manager for the Microsoft 365 data protection baseline.
    Default M365 settings
    Microsoft provides a default assessment in Compliance Manager for the Microsoft 365 data protection baseline. This baseline assessment has a set of controls for key regulations and standards for data protection and general data governance.
    SUPPORT
    ACTIVITIES
    Retention Policy
    Retention policy is auto-applied. Decide whether to retain content, delete content, or retain and then delete the content.
    Sensitivity Labels
    Automatically enforce policies on groups through labels; classify groups.
    Workload Containers
    M365: SharePoint, Teams, OneDrive, and Exchange, where your data is stored for labels and policies.
    Unforced Policies
    Written policies that are not enforceable by controls in Compliance Manager such as acceptable use policy.
    Forced Policies
    Restrict sharing controls to outside organizations. Enforce prefix or suffix to group or team names.

    ACME Company MVP for M/O365

    PRIMARY
    ACTIVITIES
    Define Your Governance


    Focus on ability to use legal hold and GDPR compliance.

    CATEGORIZATION





    CLASSIFICATION

    MVP
    Data Discovery and Management


    Three classification levels (public, internal, confidential), which are applied by the user when data is created. Same three levels are used for AIP to scan legacy sources.

    Baseline Setup


    All data must at least be classified before it is uploaded to an M/O365 cloud service.

    Default M365 settings


    Turn on templates 1 8 the letter q and the number z

    SUPPORT
    ACTIVITIES
    Retention Policy


    Retention policy is auto-applied. Decide whether to retain content, delete content, or retain and then delete the content.

    Sensitivity Labels


    Automatically enforce policies on groups through labels; classify groups.

    Workload Containers


    M365: SharePoint, Teams, OneDrive, and Exchange, where your data is stored for labels and policies.

    Unforced Policies


    Written policies that are not enforceable by controls in Compliance Manager such as acceptable use policy.

    Forced Policies


    Restrict sharing controls to outside organizations. Enforce prefix or suffix to group or team names.

    Related Blueprints

    Govern Office 365

    Office 365 is as difficult to wrangle as it is valuable. Leverage best practices to produce governance outcomes aligned with your goals.

    Map your organizational goals to the administration features available in the Office 365 console. Your governance should reflect your requirements.

    Migrate to Office 365 Now

    Jumping into an Office 365 migration project without careful thought of the risks of a cloud migration will lead to project halt and interruption. Intentionally plan in order to expose risk and to develop project foresight for a smooth migration.

    Microsoft Teams Cookbook

    Remote work calls for leveraging your Office 365 license to use Microsoft Teams – but IT is unsure about best practices for governance and permissions. Moreover, IT has few resources to help train end users with Teams best practices

    IT Governance, Risk & Compliance

    Several blueprints are available on a broader topic of governance, from Make Your IT Governance Adaptable to Improve IT Governance to Drive Business Results and Build an IT Risk Management Program.

    Bibliography

    “Best practices for sharing files and folders with unauthenticated users.” Microsoft Build, 28 April 2022. Accessed 2 April 2022.

    “Build and manage assessments in Compliance Manager.” Microsoft Docs, 15 June 2022. Web.

    “Building a modern workplace with Microsoft 365.” Microsoft Inside Track, n.d. Web.

    Crane, Robert. “June 2020 Microsoft 365 Need to Know Webinar.” CIAOPS, SlideShare, 26 June 2020. Web.

    “Data Classification: Overview, Types, and Examples.” Simplilearn, 27 Dec. 2021. Accessed 11 April 2022.

    “Data loss prevention in Exchange Online.” Microsoft Docs, 19 April 2022. Web.

    Davies, Nahla. “5 Common Data Governance Challenges (and How to Overcome Them).” Dataversity. 25 October 2021. Accessed 5 April 2022.

    “Default labels and policies to protect your data.” Microsoft Build, April 2022. Accessed 3 April 2022.

    M., Peter. "Guide: The difference between Microsoft Backup and Retention." AvePoint Blog, 9 Oct. 2021. Accessed 4 April 2022.

    Meyer, Guillaume. “Sensitivity Labels: What They Are, Why You Need Them, and How to Apply Them.” nBold, 6 October 2021. Accessed 2 April 2022.

    “Microsoft 365 guidance for security & compliance.” Microsoft, 27 April 2022. Accessed 28 April 2022.

    “Microsoft Purview compliance portal.” Microsoft, 19 April 2022. Accessed 22 April 2022.

    “Microsoft Purview compliance documentation.” Microsoft, n.d. Accessed 22 April 2022.

    “Microsoft Trust Center: Products and services that run on trust.” Microsoft, 2022. Accessed 3 April 2022.

    “Protect your sensitive data with Microsoft Purview.” Microsoft Build, April 2022. Accessed 3 April 2022.

    Zimmergren, Tobias. “4 steps to successful cloud governance in Office 365.” Rencore, 9 Sept. 2021. Accessed 5 April 2022.

    Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}573|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Attract & Select
    • Parent Category Link: /attract-and-select

    Tech layoffs have been making the news over the past year, with thousands of Big Tech employees having been laid off. After years of record low unemployment in IT, many leaders are looking to take advantage of these layoffs to fill their talent gaps.

    However, IT leaders need to determine their response – wait and see the impact of the recession on budgets and candidate expectations, or dive in and secure great talent to execute today on strategic needs. This research is designed to help those IT leaders who are looking to take advantage employee effective talents to secure talent.

    • With the impact of the economic slowdown still unknown, the first question IT leaders need to ask is whether now is the time to act.
    • Even with these layoffs, IT unemployment rates are at record lows, with many organizations continuing to struggle to attract talent. While these layoffs have opened a window, IT leaders need to act quickly to secure great talent.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The “where has the talent gone?” puzzle has been solved. Many tech firms over-hired and were able to outcompete everyone, but it wasn’t sustainable. This correction won’t impact unemployment numbers in the short term – the job force is just in flux right now.

    Impact and Result

    This research is designed to help IT leaders understand the talent market and to provide winning tactics to those looking to take advantage of the layoffs to fill their hiring needs.

    Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs Storyboard – A snapshot of the current talent market in IT and quick tactics IT leaders can employ to improve their hiring process to find and attract tech talent.

    Straightforward tactics you can execute to successfully recruit IT staff impacted by layoffs.

    • Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs Storyboard

    2. IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool – Use this tool to document the current and future talent acquisition process.

    To hire efficiently, create a clear, consistent talent acquisition process. The IT Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool will help to:

  • Map out the current talent acquisition workflow
  • Identify areas of opportunity and potential gaps in the current process
    • IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs

    Simple tactics to secure the right talent in times of economic uncertainty.

    Why are the layoffs making the news?

    After three years of record low unemployment rates in IT and organizations struggling to hire IT talent into their organization, the window appears to be opening with tens of thousands layoffs from Big Tech employers.

    Big brand organizations such as Microsoft, Alphabet, Amazon, Twitter, Netflix, and Meta have been hitting major newswires, but these layoffs aren't exclusive to the big names. We've also seen smaller high-growth tech organizations following suit. In fact, in 2022, it's estimated that there were more than 160,997 layoffs across over 1,045 tech organizations. This trend has continued into 2023. By mid-February 2023, there were already 108,754 employees laid off at 385 tech companies (Layoffs.fyi).(1)

    While some of these layoffs have been openly connected to economic slowdown, others are pointing to the layoffs being a correction for over-hiring during the pandemic. It is also important to note that many of these workers were not IT employees, as these organizations also saw cuts across other areas of the business such as sales, marketing, recruitment, and operations.

    (1)This global database is constantly being updated, and these numbers are changing on an ongoing basis. For up-to-date statistics, see https://layoffs.fyi

    While tech layoffs have been making the news, so far many of these layoffs have been a correction to over-hiring, with most employees laid off finding work, if they want it, within three months.

    IT leaders need to determine their response – wait and see the impact of the recession on budgets and candidate expectations or dive in and secure great talent to execute today on strategic needs.

    This research is designed to help IT leaders understand the talent market and provide winning strategies to those looking to take advantage of the layoffs to fill their hiring needs.

    Three key drivers for Big Tech layoffs

    Economic uncertainty

    Globally, economists are predicting an economic slowdown, though there is not a consistent prediction on the impact. We have seen an increase in interest rates and inflation, as well as reduced investment budgets.

    Over-hiring during the pandemic

    High growth and demand for digital technologies and services during the early pandemic led to over-hiring in the tech industry. Many organizations overestimated the future demand and had to rebalance staffing as a result.

    New automation investments

    Many tech organizations that have conducted layoffs are still in a growth mindset. This is demonstrated though new tech investments by these companies in products like chatbots and RPA to semi-automate processes to reduce the need for certain roles.

    Despite layoffs, the labor market remains competitive

    There were at least 160,997 layoffs from more than 1,045 tech companies last year (2022). (Layoffs.fyi reported as of Feb 21/2023)

    But just because Big Tech is laying people off doesn't mean the IT job market has cooled.

    Between January and October 2022 technology- focused job postings rose 25% compared to the same period in 2021, and there were more than 375,000 tech jobs posted in October of 2022.
    (Dice: Tech Jobs Report.)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The "where has the talent gone?" puzzle has been solved. Many tech firms over-hired and were able to outcompete everyone, but it wasn't sustainable. This correction won't impact unemployment numbers in the short term – the job force is just in flux right now.

    So far, many of the layoffs have been a market correction

    Tech Layoffs Since COVID-19

    This is an image of a combo line graph plotting the number of tech layoffs from Q1 2020 to Q4 2022.

    Source: Layoffs.fyi - Tech Layoff Tracker and Startup Layoff Lists

    Tech Companies Layoffs vs. Early Pandemic Hiring # of People

    This is an image of a bar graph plotting Tech Companies Layoffs vs. Early Pandemic Hiring # of People

    Source: Yahoo Finance. Q4 '19 to Q3 '22

    Tech Layoffs between 2020 Q3- 2022 Q1 remained very low across the sector. In fact, outside of the initial increase at the start of the pandemic, layoffs have remained at historic low levels of around 1% (HBR, 2023). While the layoffs look significant in isolation, when you compare these numbers to pandemic hiring and growth for these organizations, the figures are relatively small.

    The first question IT leaders need to ask is whether now is the time to act

    The big gamble many CIOs face is whether to strike now to secure talent or to wait to better understand the impact of the recession. While two-thirds of IT professionals are still expecting their budgets to increase in 2023, CIOs must account for the impact of inflation and the recession on their IT budgets and staffing decisions (see Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program).

    Ultimately, while unemployment is low today, it's common to see unemployment numbers drop right before a recession. If that is the case, then we will see more talent entering the market, possibly at more competitive salaries. But organizations that wait to hire risk not having the staff they need to execute on their strategy and finding themselves in a hiring freeze. CIOs need to decide on how to approach the economic uncertainty and where to place their bets.

    Looking ahead to 2023, how do you anticipate your IT spending will change compared to spending in 2022?

    This is an image of anticipated changes to IT spending compared to 2022 for the following categories: Decrease of more than 30%; Decrease between 16-30%; Decrease between 6-15%; Decrease between 1-5%; No Change; Increase between 1-5%; Increase between 6-15%; Increase between 16-30%; Increase of more than 30%

    Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Organizations ready to take advantage will need to act fast when layoffs happen

    Organizations looking to fill hiring needs or grow their IT/digital organization will need to be strategic and efficient when it comes to recruitment. Regardless of the number of layoffs, it continues to be an employee market when it comes to IT roles.

    While it is likely that the recession will impact unemployment rates, so far, the market remains hot, and the number of open roles continues to grow. This means that organizations that want to take advantage need to act quickly when news hits.

    Leaders not only need to compete with other organizations for talent, but the other challenge hiring organizations will need to compete with is that many in tech received generous severance packages and will be considering taking time off. To take advantage, leaders need to establish a plan and a clear employee value proposition to entice these highly skilled workers to get off the bench.

    Why you need to act fast:

    • Unemployment rates remain low:
      • Tech unemployment's rates in the US dropped to 1.5% in January 2023 (CompTIA), compared to overall unemployment which is at 3.4% in the US as of January 2023 (Yahoo Finance). While the layoffs look significant, we can see that many workers have been rehired into the labor market.
    • Long time-to-hire results in lost candidates:
      • According to Info-Tech's IT Talent Trend Report, 58% of IT leaders report time-to-hire is longer than two months. This timing increases for tech roles which require unique skills or higher seniority. IT leaders who can increase the timeline for their requirement process are much more likely to be able to take advantage of tech layoffs.

    IT must take a leading role in IT recruitment to take advantage of layoffs

    A personal connection is the differentiator when it comes to talent acquisition

    There is a statistically significant relationship between IT leadership involvement in talent acquisition and the effectiveness of this process in the IT department. The more involved they are, the higher the effectiveness.(1)

    More IT leadership involvement

    An image of two upward facing arrows. The left arrow is faded purple, and the right arrow is dark purple.

    Higher recruitment effectiveness

    Involved leaders see shorter times to hire

    There is a statistically significant relationship between IT leadership involvement in the talent acquisition process and time to fill vacant positions. The more involved they are, the shorter the time to hire.(2)

    Involved leaders are an integral part of effective IT departments

    There is a statistically significant relationship between IT leadership involvement in talent acquisition and overall IT department effectiveness. Those that are more involved have higher levels of effectiveness.(3)

    Increased IT Leadership in Recruitment Is Directly Correlated to Recruitment Effectiveness.

    This is an image of a combo bar graph plotting Overall Effectiveness for IT leadership involvement in recruitment.

    Focus your layoff recruitment strategy on critical and strategic roles

    If you are ready to take advantage of tech layoffs, focus hiring on critical and strategic roles, rather than your operational backfills. Roles related to security, cloud migration, data and analytics, and digital transformation are more likely to be shielded from budget cuts and are logical areas to focus on when looking to recruit from Big Tech organizations.

    Additionally, within the IT talent market, scarcity is focused in areas with specialized skill sets, such as security and architecture, which are dynamic and evolving faster than other skill sets. When looking to recruit in these areas, it's critical that you have a targeted recruitment approach; this is why tech layoffs represent a strong opportunity to secure talent in these specialized areas.

    ROLES DIFFICULT TO FILL

    An image of a bar graph plotting roles by difficulty to fill.

    Info-Tech Talent Trends 2022 Survey

    Four quick tactics to take advantage of Big Tech layoffs

    TALENT ACQUISITION PROCESS TO TAKE ADVANTAGE OF LAYOFFS

    This is an image of the talent acquisition process to take advantage of layoffs. It involves the following four steps: 1 Prepare organization and job ads for recruitment.  2 Actively track and scan for layoff activity.  3 Prioritize and screen candidates using salary benchmarks and keywords.  4 Eliminate all unnecessary hiring process steps.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: IT job ad review.

    Call #4: Identify screening and sourcing opportunities.

    Call #5: Review your IT talent acquisition process.

    Call #3: Employee value proposition review.

    Call #7: Refine your talent acquisition process.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Tactics to take advantage of tech layoffs

    Activities

    1.1 Spot check your employee value proposition
    1.2 Update job advertisements
    1.3 Document your talent acquisition process
    1.4 Refine your talent acquisition process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • IT hiring manager
    • Human resources
    • Marketing/public relations

    Outcomes of this step

    Streamlined talent acquisition process tailored to take advantage of tech layoffs.

    This is an image of the talent acquisition process to take advantage of layoffs. It involves the following fo steps: 1 Prepare organization and job ads for recrtment.  2 Actively track and scan for layoff aivity.  3 Prioritize and screen candidates using salary benchmarks and kwords.  4 Eliminate all unnecessary hiring process steps.

    Requisition: update job ads and secure approval to hire

    Critical steps:

    1. Ensure you have secured budget and hiring approval.
    2. Identify an IT recruitment partner within the IT organization who will be accountable for working with HR throughout the process and who will actively track and scan for recruitment opportunities.
    3. Update your IT job descriptions.
    4. Spot check your employee value proposition (EVP) to appeal to targeted candidates (Exercise 1.1).
    5. Write employee job ads for relevant skills and minimum viable experience (Exercise 1.2).
    6. Work with HR to develop your candidate outreach messages – ensure that your outreach is empathetic, aligns with your EVP, and focuses on welcoming them to apply to a role.

    The approval process to activate a requisition can be one of the longest stages in the talent acquisition process. Ensure all your roles are up to date and approved so you can trigger outreach as soon as news hits; otherwise, you'll be late before you've even begun.

    Your employee value proposition (EVP) is a key tool for attracting and retaining talent

    Any updates to your EVP need to be a genuine reflection of the employee experience at your organization – and should resonate internally and externally.

    Internal (retention) perspective: These characteristics help to retain new and existing talent by ensuring that new hires' expectations are met and that the EVP is experienced throughout the organization.

    External (attraction) perspective: These characteristics help to attract talent and are targeted so the right candidates are motivated to join, while those who aren't a good fit will self-select out.

    McLean & Company's Employee Value Proposition Framework

    This is an image of McLean & Company's Employee Value Proposition Framework.  It is divided into Retain and Attract.  under Retain, are the following three headings: Aligned; Accurate; Aspirational.  Under Attract are: Compelling; Clear; Comprehensive.

    Source: McLean & Company

    1.1 Spot check your EVP

    1-3 hours

    1. Review your existing IT employee value proposition. If you do not have an EVP, see Info-Tech's comprehensive research Improve the IT Recruitment Process to draft a new EVP.
    2. Invite a representative group of employees to participate in a working group to improve your employee value proposition. Ask each participant to brainstorm the top five things they value most about working at the organization.
    3. Consider the following categories: work environment, career advancement, benefits, and ESG and diversity impact. Brainstorm as a group if there is anything unique your organization offers with regard to these categories.
    4. Compare your notes to your existing EVP, identify up to four key statements to focus on for the EVP, ensuring that your EVP speaks to at least one of the categories above. Remove any statements that no longer speak to who you are as an organization or what you offer.

    Input

    • Existing employee value proposition
    • Employee Engagement Surveys (If Available)

    Output

    • Updated employee value proposition

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Job ad template

    Participants

    • Representative group of internal employees.
    • HR
    • Marketing/PR (if possible)

    Four critical factors considered by today's job seeker

    1. Be specific about remote work policies: Include verbiage about whether there is an option to work hybrid or remote. 81% of job seekers stated that whether a job is remote, hybrid, or in-person was a top factor in whether they'd accept an offer (Benefits Canada, 2022).
    2. Career advancement and stability: "37% of Gen Z employees and 25% of millennial employees are currently looking for a job that offers career progression transparency — or, in other words, a job with clear opportunities for growth. This is significantly higher than our findings for older generations Gen X (18%) and baby boomers (7%)," (Lattice, 2021).
    3. Unique benefits: Consider your unique benefits – it's not the Big Tech "fun perks" like slides and ping pong that drive interest. Employees are increasingly looking for roles with long-term benefits programs. 90% of job seekers consider higher pension contributions to be a key factor, and 85% are considering bonuses/profit sharing" (Benefits Canada, 2022). Candidates may accept lower total compensation in exchange for flexibility, culture, work/life balance that was lacking in the start-up scene or the mega-vendors' fast-paced world.
    4. ESG and diversity impact: Include details of how the candidate will make a societal impact through their role, and how the company is acting on climate and sustainability. "Nearly two in five [Gen Z's and millennials] say they have rejected a job or assignment because it did not align with their values," (Deloitte Global, 2022).

    Update or establish job ads for candidate outreach

    Take the time up front to update your IT job descriptions and to write effective job advertisements. A job advertisement is an external-facing document that advertises a position with the intent of attracting job applicants. It contains key elements from the job description as well as information on the organization and its EVP. A job description informs a job ad, it doesn't replace it.
    When updating job descriptions and job ads, it's critical that your requirements are an accurate representation of what you need in the position. For the job ads especially, focus on the minimum requirements for the role, highlight your employee value proposition, and ensure that they are using inclusive language.
    Don't be lulled into using a job description as a posting when there's a time crunch to fill a position – use your preparation time to complete this key step.

    Three tips to consider when building a job ad

    Include the minimum desired requirements

    Include the required skills, responsibilities, and certifications required. Instead of looking for a unicorn, look for what you need and a demonstrated ability to learn. 70% of business executives say they are getting creative about sourcing for skills rather than just considering job experience (Deloitte Insights, 2022).

    Strategically include certifications

    When including certifications, ensure you have validated the process to be certified – i.e. if you are hiring for a role with 3-5 years' experience, ensure that the certification does not take 5-10 years of experience be eligible.

    Use inclusive language

    Consider having a review group within your IT organization to ensure the language is inclusive, that the responsibilities don't read as overly complex, and that it is an accurate representation of the organization's culture.

    1.2 Update or build job ads

    1-3 hours

    1. Begin with a copy of the job ad you are looking to fill, if you haven't begun to draft the role, start with Info-Tech's Job Description Library and Info-Tech's Job Ad Template.
    2. Review the job accountabilities, rank each responsibility based on its importance and volume of work. Determine if there are any responsibilities that are uncommon to be executed by the role and remove unnecessary responsibilities.
    3. For each of the job accountabilities, identify if there is a level of experience, knowledge or competency that would be the minimum bar for a candidate. Remove technical skills, specific technologies, and competencies that aren't directly relevant to the role, responsibilities or values.
    4. Review the education and requirements, and ensure that any certification or educational background is truly needed or suggested.
    5. Use the checklist on the following tab to review and update your job ad.

    Input

    • Job description
    • Employee value proposition
    • Job ad template

    Output

    • Completed job ad

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Web share

    Participants

    • Representative group of internal employees.
    • HR
    • Marketing/PR (if possible)

    1.2 Job ad checklist:

    A job ad needs to be two things: effective and inclusive.

    Effective

    The job ad does include:

    The organization's logo.
    Description of the organization.
    Information about benefits.
    A link to the organization's website and social media platforms.
    Steps in the application process and what candidates can expect.

    The job ad:

    Paints an accurate picture of key aspects of the role.
    Tells a story to show potential candidates how the role and organization will fit into their career path (outlines potential career paths, growth opportunities, training, etc.).
    Does not contain too many details and tasks that would overwhelm applicants.
    Highlights the employer brand in a manner that conveys the EVP and markets the organization to attract potential applicants.
    Includes creative design or formatting to make the ad stand out.
    The job ad speaks to the audience by using targeted language (e.g. using creative language when recruiting for a creative role).
    The job ad has been reviewed by HR, Marketing, PR.

    Inclusive

    The job ad does NOT include:

    Industry jargon or abbreviations that are not spelled out.
    Personality characteristics and unnecessary adjectives that would deter qualified candidates (e.g. extroverted, aggressive, competitive).
    A list of specific academic disciplines or schools, GPA requirements, or inflated degree requirements.

    The job ad:

    Uses gender-neutral language and does not contain terms that indicate traits that are typically associated with a specific gender.
    Can be viewed and applications can be completed on mobile devices.
    Focuses on results, day-to-day requirements, competencies, and transferrable skills.
    Includes design that is accessible (e.g. alternative text is provided for images, clear posting structure with headings, color is not used to convey information).

    Sourcing: Set up news trackers and review layoff source lists

    • Set up news and social media trackers to track layoff updates, and ensure you have an IT staff member on standby to complete a more detailed opportunity analysis when layoffs happen.
    • Use layoff source lists such as Layoffs.fyi to actively track organizations that have laid people off, noting the industry, location, and numbers in order to identify potential candidates. Limit your future analysis to locations that would be geographically possible to hire from.
    • Review open-source lists of laid-off employees to quickly identify potential candidates for your organization.
    • Many organizations that have completed layoffs have established outplacement programs to help laid-off staff find new roles. Set a plan in motion with HR to reach out to organizations once a layoff has occurred to understand their layoff support program.

    The key to successful sourcing is for IT to take an active role in identifying which organizations impacted by layoffs would be a good fit, and to quickly respond by searching open-source lists and LinkedIn to reach out potential candidates.

    Consider leveraging open-source lists

    Layoffs.fyi has been tracking and reporting on layoffs since the start of COVID-19. While they are not an official source of information, the site has more than a million views per month and is a strong starting point for IT leaders looking to source candidates from tech layoffs beyond the big organizations that are making the news.

    The site offers a view of companies with layoffs by location, industry, and the source of the info. Additionally, it often lists the names and contact information of laid-off employees, which you can leverage to start your deeper LinkedIn outreach or candidate screening.

    This is an image of two screenshots of open source lists from Layoffs.fyi

    Screenshots from Layoffs.fyi.

    Screening: Prioritize by considering salary benchmarks and keywords

    • Determine a set of consistent pre-screening questions to leverage while screening candidates, which every candidate must answer, including knockout questions.
    • Prioritize by going for salary ranges you can afford: It is important to be aware of what companies are paying within the tech arena, so you know if your salary bands are within a competitive range.
    • Pre-screen resumes using appropriate keywords that are critical for the role, and widen the terms if you do not have enough candidates. Given the pool you are looking to recruit from, consider removing criteria specifically related to education or certifications; instead, prioritize skills and on-the-job experience.

    Screening is one of the most time-consuming stages of the TA process. For each open position, it can take 23 hours to screen resumes (Toolbox, 2021). In fact, 52% of TA leaders believe that screening candidates from a large pool of applicants is the hardest part of recruitment (Ideal, 2021).

    Compensation comparison reports

    Keep in mind that the market may be shifting rapidly as layoffs proliferate, so what the data shows, particularly on free-to-use sites with little data-checking, may not be current and may be overstated. Info-Tech does not provide salary analysis; however, there are publicly available reports and online websites with self-reported data.

    This list contains several market data sources for the tech industry, which may be a good starting point for comparison. Info-Tech is not affiliated with or endorsing any of these market data sources.

    Aon Global Cyber Security Compensation and Talent Survey
    Aon – Radford Surveys Radford Global Technology Survey
    Culpepper Comprehensive Compensation Survey Solution for Technology-Focused Companies
    Modis 2022 IT Compensation Guide
    Motion Recruitment 2023 Tech Salary Guide
    Mondo 2022 Salary Guide for roles & jobs across the technology, creative & digital marketing industries.
    Willis Towers Watson Willis Towers Watson Data Services - Artificial Intelligence and Digital Talent
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Artificial Intelligence and Digital Talent Survey Report - Canada
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Artificial Intelligence and Digital Talent Survey Report - U.S.
    Michael Page Salary Guide 2022 for the Greater Toronto Area Technology Industry
    Willis Towers Watson Willis Towers Watson Data Services - Tech, Media, and Gaming
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Executive Survey Report - Canada
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Middle Management, Professional and Support Survey Report - Canada
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Executive Survey Report - U.S.
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Middle Management, Professional and Support Survey Report - U.S.

    Work with your HR partner to streamline your talent acquisition process

    A slow talent acquisition process presents multiple risks to your ability to recruit. Candidates are likely having multiple hiring conversations, and you could lose a good candidate just by being slower than another organization. Additionally, long hiring processes are also an indicator of a high level of bureaucracy in an organization, which may turn off tech candidates who are used to faster-paced decision making.

    Reducing your time-to-hire needs to be a strategic priority, and companies that manage to do this are reaping the benefits: There is a statistically significant relationship between time to fill vacant positions and overall IT department effectiveness. The shorter the time to fill a position, the higher the effectiveness (Bika, 2019).

    Key Considerations for Optimizing your Talent Acquisition Process

    Key Considerations for Optimizing your Talent Acquisition Process

    Review the end-to-end experience

    50%

    of job seekers surveyed had "declined a job offer due to poor [candidate] experience," (Echevarria, 2020).

    Reduce the time to hire

    55%

    "of candidates believe that it should take one to two weeks from the first interview to being offered the job," (Duszyński, 2021).

    Be clear on Timelines

    83%

    "of candidates say it would greatly improve the overall experience if employers provided a clear timeline of the hiring process," (Miller, n.d.).

    Time to hire: Identify solutions to drive efficient hiring

    1. Document all steps between screening and hiring and remove any unnecessary steps.
    2. Create clearly defined interview guides to ensure consistent questioning by interviewers.
    3. Enable hiring managers to schedule their own interviews.
    4. Determine who needs to approve an offer. Streamline the number of approvals, if possible.
    5. Eliminate unnecessary background checks. Many companies have eliminated reference checks, for example, after determining that it was it was not adding value to their decision.
    6. Identify and track key metrics across your talent acquisition process.

    It is critical to partner with your HR department on optimizing this process, as they are typically the process owners and will have deep knowledge of the rationale for decisions. Together, you can identify some opportunities to streamline the process and improve the time to hire.

    4.1 Document your TA process

    1-3 hours

    1. If you have a documented talent acquisition process, begin with that; if not, open the IT Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool and map the stages of the talent acquisition process with your HR leader. Stages are the top level in the process (e.g. requisition, sourcing, screening).
    2. Identify all the stakeholders involved in IT talent acquisition and document these in the tool.
    3. Next, identify the steps required for each stage. These are more detailed actions that together will complete the stage (e.g. enter requisition into ATS, intake meeting). Ask subject matter experts to add steps to their portion of the process and document these in the cells.
    4. For each step in the stage, record the time required and the number of people who are involved.

    Input

    • Existing talent acquisition (TA) process document
    • Any TA process metrics
    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool

    Output

    • Documented TA process

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • HR
    • IT leaders
    • Hiring manager

    Download the IT Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool

    Example of steps in each stage of the TA process

    Activities

    Requisition

    Source

    Screen

    Interview & Assess

    Offer

    Background Check

    Vacancy identified Posted on website Resumes screened in system Interviews scheduled Offer letter drafted Reference checks conducted
    Requisition submitted Posted on job boards Resume screened by recruited First round interviews Offer letter sent Medical checks conducted
    Requisition approved Identification of layoff sources Resumed reviewed by hiring manager Assessment Negotiations Other background checks conducted
    Job description updated Review layoff source lists Screening calls Second round interview First date confirmed
    Job ad updated Screening questions developed Candidates selected
    Intake meeting

    4.2 Refine your TA process

    1-3 hours

    1. Collectively identify any:
      1. Inconsistent applications: Activities that are done differently by different participants.
      2. Bottlenecks: A place in the process where activity is constrained and holds up next steps.
      3. Errors: When a mistake occurs requiring extra time, resources, or rework.
      4. Lack of value: An activity that adds little to no value (often a legacy activity).
    2. Work with HR to identify any proposed solutions to improve consistency, reduce bottlenecks, errors, or eliminate steps that lack value. Document your proposed solutions in tab 3 of the IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool.
    3. Identify any new steps needed that would drive greater efficiency, including the tactics suggested in this research. Document any proposed solutions in tab 3.
    4. For each proposed solution, evaluate the general level of effort and impact required to move forward with that solution and select the appropriate classification from the drop-down.
    5. Determine if you will move forward with the proposed solution at this time. Update the TA workflow with your decisions.

    Input

    • Existing talent acquisition (TA) process document
    • Any TA process metrics
    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool

    Output

    • Documented TA process

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • HR
    • IT leaders
    • Hiring manager

    Use Info-Tech's IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool to document current challenges & target solutions.

    Map your process and identify opportunities to streamline

    This is an image of the talent aquisitions workflow page from Info-Tech's Map your process and identify opportunities to streamline

    Brainstorm and select solutions to improve your process

    This is an image of the Effort Analysis page from Info-Tech's Brainstorm and select solutions to improve your process

    Key considerations when optimizing your process

    • Put yourself in each stakeholder's shoes (candidate, HR, hiring manager). Think through what they need from the process.
    • Challenge assumptions and norms. It can be tempting to get caught up in "how we do it today." Think beyond how it is today.
    • Question timing of activities and events. Identify if they are occurring when they need to.
    • Rebalance work to align with priorities. Identify if work can be redistributed or condensed to use time more efficiently.
    • Distinguish when consistency will add value and when there should be process flexibility.
    • Question the value. For each activity, ask "What value does this activity add?"

    Select metrics to measure Talent Acquisition process improvement

    METRICS INFORMATION
    Metric Definition Calculation
    Average applicants per posting The average number of applicants received per post. Number of applications / Number of postings
    Average number of interviews for open job positions Average number of interviews for open job positions. Total number of interviews / Total number of open job positions
    Average external time to fill Average number of calendar days from when the requisition is issued to when a candidate accepts the position from outside the organization. External days to fill / External candidates
    Pipeline throughput Percentage of candidates advancing through to the next stage. (Number of candidates in chosen stage / Number of candidates in preceding stage) * 100
    External offer acceptance rate Percentage of job offers extended to external candidates that were accepted. (Number of job offers that are accepted / Number of job offers extended) * 100
    Percentage of target group hired The percentage of a target group that was hired. Number of FTE hired / Target number of FTE to be hired
    Average time to hire Average number of calendar days between first contact with the candidate and when they accept the offer. Sum of number of days between first contact and offer acceptance / External candidates
    Quality of hire Percentage of new hires achieving a satisfactory appraisal at their first assessment. New hires who achieve a satisfactory rating at their first appraisal / Total number of new hires
    Vacancy rate Percentage of positions being actively recruited for at the end of the reporting period. Count of vacant positions / (Headcount + Vacant positions)

    Bibliography

    "81% of Employees Factoring Hybrid Work Into Job Search: Survey." BenefitsCanada.com, 16 June 2022.
    Andre, Louie. "40 Notable Candidate Experience Statistics: 2023 Job Application Trends & Challenges." Financesonline.Com, 15 Mar. 2023.
    Bika, Nikoletta. "Key Hiring Metrics: Useful Benchmarks for Tech Roles." Recruiting Resources: How to Recruit and Hire Better, 10 Jan. 2019.
    "Bureau of Labor Statistics Labor Market Revisions Contribute to Conflicting Signals in Latest Tech Employment Data, CompTIA Analysis Finds." CompTIA, 3 Feb. 2023. Press release.
    Byrnes, Amy. "ICIMS Insights Workforce Report: Time to Press the Reset Button?" ICIMS | The Leading Cloud Recruiting Software, 1 Dec. 2022.
    Cantrell, Sue, et al. "The Skills-Based Organization: A New Operating Model for Work and the Workforce." Deloitte Insights, 8 Sept. 2022.
    deBara, Deanna. "Top Findings from Lattice's Career Progression Survey." Lattice, 13 Sept. 2021. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Duszyński, Maciej. "Candidate Experience Statistics (Survey of 1,000+ Americans)." Zety, 14 Oct. 2019.
    Duszyński, Maciej. "Candidate Experience Statistics." Zety, 2021.
    Echevarria, Desiree. "2020 Candidate Experience Report." Career Plug, 17 Mar. 2021.
    Ghosh, Prarthana. "Candidate Screening and Selection Process: The Complete Guide for 2021." Spiceworks, 26 Feb. 2021. Accessed 22 Jun. 2021
    "Introduction - Dice Tech Job Report: Tech Hiring Trends by Location, Industry, Role and Skill." Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Lee, Roger. "Tech Layoff Tracker and Startup Layoff Lists." Layoffs.fyi. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Miller, Kandace. "Candidate Experience And Engagement Metrics You Should Be Tracking." ConveyIQ, n.d. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Min, Ji-A. "Resume Screening: A How-To Guide for Recruiters." Ideal, 15 Mar. 2021. Web.
    Palmeri, Shelby. "2023 Candidate Experience Research: Strategies for Recruiting." CareerPlug, 6 Feb. 2023.
    Semenova, Alexandra. "Jobs Report: U.S. Economy Adds 517,000 Jobs in January, Unemployment Rate Falls to 3.4% as Labor Market Stuns." Yahoo!Finance, 3 Feb. 2023.
    Sozzi, Brian. "Big Tech Layoffs: What Companies Such as Amazon and Meta Have in Common." Yahoo!News, 6 Feb. 2023.
    Tarki, Atta. "Despite Layoffs, It's Still a Workers' Labor Market." Harvard Business Review, 30 Jan. 2023.
    The Deloitte Global 2022 Gen Z and Millennial Survey. Deloitte Global, 2022. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    "Uncover the Employee Value Proposition." McLean & Company, 21 Jun. 2022. Accessed 22 Feb. 2023.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}331|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $111,064 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 33 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Project Management Office
    • Parent Category Link: /project-management-office
    • As an IT leader, you oversee a project environment in which the organizational demand for new products, services, and enhancements far outweighs IT’s resource capacity to adequately deliver on everything.
    • As a result, project throughput suffers. IT starts a lot of projects, but has constant difficulties delivering the bulk of them on time, on budget, in scope, and of high quality. What’s more, many of the projects that consume IT’s time are of questionable value to the business.
    • You need a project portfolio management (PPM) strategy to help bring order to IT’s project activity. With the right PPM strategy, you can ensure that you’re driving the throughput of the best projects and maximizing stakeholder satisfaction with IT.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT leaders commonly conflate PPM and project management, falsely believing that they already have a PPM strategy via their project management playbook. While the tactical focus of project management can help ensure that individual projects are effectively planned, executed, and closed, it is no supplement for the insight into “the big picture” that a PPM strategy can provide.
    • Many organizations falter at PPM by mistaking a set of processes for a strategy. While processes are no doubt important, without an end in mind – such as that provided by a deliberate strategy – they inevitably devolve into inertia or confusion.
    • Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a PPM strategy. Without it, any efforts to reconcile supply and demand, and improve the strategic value of IT’s project activity, could be quashed by irresponsible, non-compliant stakeholders.

    Impact and Result

    • Manage the portfolio as more than just the sum of its parts. Create a coherent strategy to maximize the sum of values that projects deliver as a whole – as a project portfolio, rather than a collection of individual projects.
    • Get to value early. Info-Tech’s methodology tackles one of PPM’s most pressing challenges upfront by helping you to articulate a strategy and get executive buy-in for it before you define your process goals. When senior management understands why a PPM strategy is necessary and of value to them, the path to implementation is much more stable.
    • Create PPM processes you can sustain. Translate your PPM strategy into specific, tangible near-term and long-term goals, which are realized through a suite of project portfolio management processes tailored to your organization and its culture.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a project portfolio management strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Executive Brief
    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phases 1-3

    1. Get executive buy-in for your PPM strategy

    Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization and get executive buy-in before you start to set PPM process goals.

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 1: Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy
    • PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template
    • PPM Strategy-Process Goals Translation Matrix Template

    2. Align PPM processes to your strategic goals

    Use the advice and tools in this phase to align the PPM processes that make up the infrastructure around projects with your new PPM strategy.

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 2: Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool

    3. Complete your PPM strategic plan

    Refine your PPM strategic plan with inputs from the previous phases by adding a cost-benefit analysis and PPM tool recommendation.

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 3: Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan
    • Project Portfolio Analyst / PMO Analyst
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy

    The Purpose

    Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization and ensure executive buy-in.

    Set process goals to address PPM strategic expectations and steer the PPM strategic plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A right-sized PPM strategy complete with executive buy-in for it.

    A prioritized list of PPM process goals.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess leadership mandate.

    1.2 Determine potential resource capacity.

    1.3 Create a project inventory.

    1.4 Prepare to communicate your PPM strategy to key stakeholders.

    1.5 Translate each strategic goal into process goals.

    1.6 Set metrics and preliminary targets for PPM process goals.

    Outputs

    Choice of PPM strategy and the leadership mandate

    Analysis of current project capacity

    Analysis of current project demand

    PPM Strategic Plan – Executive Brief

    PPM strategy-aligned process goals

    Metrics and long-term targets for PPM process goals

    2 Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals

    The Purpose

    Examine your current-state PPM processes and create a high-level description of the target-state process for each of the five PPM processes within Info-Tech’s PPM framework.

    Build a sound business case for implementing the new PPM strategy by documenting roles and responsibilities for key PPM activities as well as the time costs associated with them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Near-term and long-term goals as well as an organizationally specific wireframe for your PPM processes.

    Time cost assumptions for your proposed processes to ensure sustainability.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop and refine the project intake, prioritization, and approval process.

    2.2 Develop and refine the resource management process.

    2.3 Develop and refine the portfolio reporting process.

    2.4 Develop and refine the project closure process

    2.5 Develop and refine the benefits realization process.

    Outputs

    Process capability level

    Current-state PPM process description

    Retrospective examination of the current-state PPM process

    Action items to achieve the target states

    Time cost of the process at current and target states

    3 Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan

    The Purpose

    Perform a PPM tool analysis in order to determine the right tool to support your processes.

    Estimate the total cost-in-use of managing the project portfolio, as well as the estimated benefits of an optimized PPM strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A right-sized tool selection to help support your PPM strategy.

    A PPM strategy cost-benefit analysis.

    Activities

    3.1 Right-size the PPM tools for your processes.

    3.2 Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of implementing the new PPM strategy.

    3.3 Define roles and responsibilities for the new processes.

    3.4 Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive plan.

    Outputs

    Recommendation for a PPM tool

    Cost-benefit analysis

    Roles and responsibilities matrix for each PPM process

    An implementation timeline for your PPM strategy

    Further reading

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Drive IT project throughput by throttling resource capacity.

    Analyst Perspective

    “Tactics without strategy is the noise before defeat.” – Sun Tzŭ

    "Organizations typically come to project portfolio management (PPM) with at least one of two misconceptions: (1) that PPM is synonymous with project management and (2) that a collection of PPM processes constitutes a PPM strategy.

    Both foundations are faulty: project management and PPM are separate disciplines with distinct goals and processes, and a set of processes do not comprise a strategy – they should flow from a strategy, not precede one. When built upon these foundations, the benefits of PPM go unrealized, as the means (i.e. project and portfolio processes) commonly eclipse the ends of a PPM strategy – e.g. a portfolio better aligned with business goals, improved project throughput, increased stakeholder satisfaction, and so on.

    Start with the end in mind: articulate a PPM strategy that is truly project portfolio in nature, i.e. focused on the whole portfolio and not just the individual parts. Then, let your PPM strategy guide your process goals and help to drive successful outcomes, project after project." (Barry Cousins, Senior Director of Research, PMO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIOs who want to maximize IT’s fulfillment of both business strategic goals and operational needs.
    • CIOs who want to better manage the business and project sponsors’ expectations and satisfaction.
    • CIOs, PMO directors, and portfolio managers who want a strategy to set the best projects for the highest chance of success.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Get C-level buy-in on a strategy for managing the project portfolio and clarify their expectations on how it should be managed.
    • Draft strategy-aligned, high-level project portfolio management process description.
    • Put together a strategic plan for improving PPM processes to reclaim wasted project capacity and increase business satisfaction of IT.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Steering committee and C-suite management who want to maximize IT’s value to business.
    • Project sponsors who seek clarity and fairness on pushing their projects through a myriad of priorities and objectives.
    • CIOs, PMO directors, and portfolio managers who want to enable data-driven decisions from the portfolio owners.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Optimize IT’s added value to the business through project delivery.
    • Provide clarity on how IT’s project portfolio should be managed and the expectations for its management.
    • Improve project portfolio visibility by making trustworthy project portfolio data available, with which to steer the portfolio.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • As CIO, there are too many projects and not enough resource capacity to deliver projects on time, on budget, and in scope with high quality.
    • Prioritizing projects against one another is difficult in the face of conflicting priorities and agenda; therefore, projects with dubious value/benefits consume resource capacity.

    Complication

    • Not all IT projects carry a direct value to business; IT is accountable for keeping the lights on and it consumes a significant amount of resources.
    • Business and project sponsors approve projects without considering the scarcity of resource capacity and are frustrated when the projects fail to deliver or linger in the backlog.

    Resolution

    • Create a coherent strategy to maximize the total value that projects deliver as a whole portfolio, rather than a collection of individual projects.
    • Ensure that the steering committee or senior executive layer buys into the strategy by helping them understand why the said strategy is necessary, and more importantly, why the strategy is valuable to them.
    • Translate the strategic expectations to specific, tangible goals, which are realized through a suite of project portfolio management processes tailored to your organization and its culture.
    • Putting into place people, processes, and tools that are sustainable and manageable, plus a communication strategy to maintain the stakeholder buy-in.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Time is money; therefore, the portfolio manager is an accountant of time. It is the portfolio manager’s responsibility to provide the project portfolio owners with reliable data and close the loop on portfolio decisions.
    2. Business satisfaction is driven by delivering projects that align to and maximize business value. Use Info-Tech’s method for developing a PPM strategy and synchronize its definition of “best projects” with yours.

    Projects that deliver on strategic goals of the business is the #1 driver of business satisfaction for IT

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey (N=21,367) has identified a direct correlation between IT project success and overall business satisfaction with IT.

    Comparative rankings of IT services in two columns 'Reported Importance' and 'Actual Importance' with arrows showing where each service moved to in the 'Actual Importance' ranking. The highlighted move is 'Projects' from number 10 in 'Reported' to number 1 in 'Actual'. 'Reported' rankings from 1 to 12 are 'Network Infrastructure', 'Service Desk', 'Business Applications', 'Data Quality', Devices', 'Analytical Capability', 'Client-Facing Technology', 'Work Orders', 'Innovation Leadership', 'Projects', 'IT Policies', and 'Requirements Gathering'. 'Actual' rankings from 1 to 12 are 'Projects', 'Work Orders', 'Innovation Leadership', 'Business Applications', 'Requirements Gathering', 'Service Desk', 'Client-Facing Technology', 'Network Infrastructure', 'Analytical Capability', 'Data Quality', 'IT Policies', and 'Devices'.

    Reported Importance: Initially, when CIOs were asked to rank the importance of IT services, respondents ranked “projects” low on the list – 10 out of a possible 12.

    Actual Importance: Despite this low “reported importance,” of those organizations that were “satisfied” to “fully satisfied” with IT, the service that had the strongest correlation to high business satisfaction was “projects,” i.e. IT’s ability to help plan, support, and execute projects and initiatives that help the business achieve its strategic goals.

    On average, executives perceive IT as being poorly aligned with business strategy

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey data highlights the importance of IT projects in supporting the business achieve its strategic goals. However, Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (N=124) data indicates that CEOs perceive IT to be poorly aligned to business’ strategic goals:

    • 43% of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.
    • 60% of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals.
    • 80% of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.
    • 30% of business stakeholders* are supporters of their IT departments.
    • (Source: Info-Tech CIO/CEO Alignment Diagnostics, * N=32,536)

    Efforts to deliver on projects are largely hampered by causes of project failure outside a project manager’s control

    The most recent data from the Project Management Institute (PMI) shows that more projects are meeting their original goals and business intent and less projects are being deemed failures. However, at the same time, more projects are experiencing scope creep. Scope creeps result in schedule and cost overrun, which result in dissatisfied project sponsors, stakeholders, and project workers.

    Graph of data from Project Management Institute comparing projects from 2015 to 2017 that 'Met original goals/business intent', 'Experienced scope creep', and were 'Deemed failures'. Projects from the first two categories went up in 2017, while projects that were deemed failures went down.

    Meanwhile, the primary causes of project failures remain largely unchanged. Interestingly, most of these primary causes can be traced to sources outside of a project manager’s control, either entirely or in part. As a result, project management tactics and processes are limited in adequately addressing them.

    Relative rank

    Primary cause of project failure

    2015

    2016

    2017

    Trend

    Change in organization's priorities 1st 1st 1st Stable
    Inaccurate requirements gathering 2nd 3rd 2nd Stable
    Change in project objectives 3rd 2nd 3rd Stable
    Inadequate vision/goal for project 6th 5th 4th Rising
    Inadequate/poor communication 5th 7th 5th Stable
    Poor change management 11th 9th 6th Rising
    (Source: Project Management Institute, Pulse of the Profession, 2015-2017)

    Project portfolio management (PPM) can improve business alignment of projects and reduce chance of project failure

    PPM is about “doing the right things.”

    The PMI describes PPM as:

    Interrelated organizational processes by which an organization evaluates, selects, prioritizes, and allocates its limited internal resources to best accomplish organizational strategies consistent with its vision, mission, and values. (PMI, Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed.)

    Selecting and prioritizing projects with the strongest alignment to business strategy goals and ensuring that resources are properly allocated to deliver them, enable IT to:

    1. Improve business satisfaction and their perception of IT’s alignment with the business.
    2. Better engage the business and the project customers.
    3. Minimize the risk of project failure due to changing organizational/ project vision, goals, and objectives.

    "In today’s competitive business environment, a portfolio management process improves the linkage between corporate strategy and the selection of the ‘right’ projects for investment. It also provides focus, helping to ensure the most efficient and effective use of available resources." (Lou Pack, PMP, Senior VP, ICF International (PMI, 2015))

    PPM is a common area of shortcomings for IT, with much room for improvement

    Info-Tech’s IT Management & Governance Survey (N=879) shows that PPM tends to be regarded as neither an effective nor an important process amongst IT organizations.

    Two deviation from median charts highlighting Portfolio Management's ranking compared to other IT processes in 'Effectiveness scores' and 'Importance scores'. PPM ranks 37th out of 45 in Effectiveness and 33rd out of 45 in Importance.

    55% ... of IT organizations believe that their PPM processes are neither effective nor important.

    21% ... of IT organizations reported having no one responsible or accountable for PPM.

    62% ... of projects in organizations effective in PPM met/exceeded the expected ROI (PMI, 2015).

    In addition to PPM’s benefits, improving PPM processes presents an opportunity for getting ahead of the curve in the industry.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for developing a PPM strategy delivers extraordinary value, fast

    Our methodology is designed to tackle your hardest challenge first to deliver the highest-value part of the deliverable. For developing a PPM strategy, the biggest challenge is to get the buy-in of the executive layer.

    "Without senior management participation, PPM doesn’t work, and the organization is likely to end up with, or return to, a squeaky-wheel-gets-the-grease mindset for all those involved." (Mark Price Perry, Business Driven Project Portfolio Management)

    In the first step of the blueprint, you will be guided through the following steps:

    1. Choose the right PPM strategy: driven by the executives, supported by management.
    2. Objectively assess your current project portfolio with minimal effort to build a case for the PPM strategy.
    3. Engage the executive layer to get the critical prerequisite of a PPM strategy: their buy-in.

    A PPM strategic plan is the end deliverable of this blueprint. In the first step, download the pre-filled template with content that represents the most common case. Then, throughout the blueprint, customize with your data.

    Use this blueprint to develop, or refine, a PPM strategy that works for your organization

    Get buy-in for PPM strategy from decision makers.

    Buy-in from the owners of project portfolio (Steering Committee, C-suite management, etc.) is a critical prerequisite for any PPM strategy. This blueprint will give you the tools and templates to help you make your case and win the buy-in of portfolio owners.

    Connect strategic expectations to PPM process goals.

    This blueprint offers a methodology to translate the broad aim of PPM to practical, tactical goals of the five core PPM processes, as well as how to measure the results. Our methodology is supported with industry-leading frameworks, best practices, and our insider research.

    Develop your PPM processes.

    This blueprint takes you through a series of steps to translate the process goals into a high-level process description, as well as a business case and a roadmap for implementing the new PPM processes.

    Refine your PPM processes.

    Our methodology is also equally as applicable for making your existing PPM processes better, and help you draft a roadmap for improvement with well-defined goals, roles, and responsibilities.

    Info-Tech’s PPM model consists of five core processes

    There are five core processes in Info-Tech’s thought model for PPM.

    Info-Tech's Process Model detailing the steps and their importance in project portfolio management. Step 3: 'Status and Progress Reporting' sits above the others as a process of importance throughout the model. In the 'Intake' phase of the model are Step 1: 'Intake, Approval, and Prioritization' and Step 2: 'Resource Management'. In the 'Execution' phase is 'Project Management', the main highlighted section, and a part of Step 3, the overarching 'Status and Progress Reporting'. In the 'Closure' phase of the model are Step 4: 'Project Closure' and Step 5: 'Benefits Tracking'.

    These processes create an infrastructure around projects, which aims to enable:

    1. Initiation of the “best” projects with the right resources and project information.
    2. Timely and trustworthy reporting to facilitate the flow of information for better decision making.
    3. Proper closure of projects, releasing resources, and managing benefits realization.

    PPM has many moving pieces. To ensure that all of these processes work in harmony, you need a PPM strategy.

    De-couple project management from PPM to break down complexity and create flexibility

    Tailor project management (PM) processes to fit your projects.

    Info-Tech’s PPM thought model enables you to manage your project portfolio independent of your PM methodology or capability. Projects interact with PPM via:

    • A project charter that authorizes the use of resources and defines project benefits.
    • Status reports that feed up-to-date, trustworthy data to your project portfolio.
    • Acceptance of deliverables that enable proper project closure and benefits reporting.

    Info-Tech’s PPM strategy is applicable whether you use Agile, waterfall, or anything in between for PM.

    The process model from the previous page but with project management processes overlaid. The 'Intake' phase is covered by 'Project Charter'. The 'Execution' phase, or 'Project Management' is covered by 'Status report'. The 'Closure' phase is covered by 'Deliverable Acceptance'.

    Learn about project management approach for small projects in Info-Tech’s Tailor PM Processes to Fit Your Projects blueprint.

    Sample of the Info-Tech blueprint 'Tailor PM Processes to Fit Your Projects'.

    Info-Tech’s approach to PPM is informed by industry best practices and rooted in practical insider research

    Info-Tech uses PMI and ISACA frameworks for areas of this research.

    Logo for 'Project Management Institute (PMI)'.' Logo for 'COBIT 5 an ISACA Framework'.
    PMI’s Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed. is the leading industry framework, proving project portfolio management best practices and process guidelines. COBIT 5 is the leading framework for the governance and management of enterprise IT.

    In addition to industry-leading frameworks, our best-practice approach is enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

    Logo for 'Info-Tech Research Group'.

    33,000+ Our peer network of over 33,000 happy clients proves the effectiveness of our research.

    1000+ Our team conducts 1,000+ hours of primary and secondary research to ensure that our approach is enhanced by best practices.

    Re-position IT as the “facilitator of business projects” for PPM success

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Construction
    Source: Info-Tech Client

    Chaos in the project portfolio

    At first, there were no less than 14 teams of developers, each with their own methodologies and processes. Changes to projects were not managed. Only 35% of the projects were completed on time.

    Business drives, IT facilitates

    Anyone had the right to ask for something; however, converting ideas to a formal project demand required senior leadership within a business division getting on board with the idea.

    The CIO and senior leadership decided that projects, previously assigned to IT, were to be owned and driven by the business, as the projects are undertaken to serve its needs and rarely IT’s own. The rest of the organization understood that the business, not IT, was accountable for prioritizing project work: IT was re-positioned as a facilitator of business projects. While it was a long process, the result speaks for itself: 75% of projects were now being completed on time.

    Balancing the target mix of the project portfolio

    What about maintaining and feeding the IT infrastructure? The CIO reserved 40% of IT project capacity for “keeping the lights on,” and 20% for reactive, unplanned activities, with an aim to lower this percentage. With the rest of the time, IT facilitated business projects

    Three key drivers of project priority

    1. Does the project meet the overall company goals and objectives?
      “If they don't, we must ask why we are bothering with it.”
    2. Does the project address a regulatory or compliance need?
      “Half of our business is heavily regulated. We must focus on it.”
    3. Are there significant savings to be had?
      “Not soft; hard savings. Can we demonstrate that, after implementing this, can we see good hard results? And, can we measure it?”

    "Projects are dumped on IT, and the business abdicates responsibility. Flip that over, and say ‘that's your project’ and ‘how can we help you?’"

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Develop a PPM strategy – project overview

    1. Get executive buy-in for your PPM strategy

    2. Align PPM processes to your strategic goals

    3. Complete your PPM strategic plan

    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization

    1.2 Translate PPM strategy expectations to specific process goals

    2.1 Develop and refine project intake, prioritization, and resource management processes

    2.2 Develop and refine portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization processes

    3.1 Select a right-sized PPM solution for supporting your new processes

    3.2 Finalize customizing your PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Guided Implementations

    • Scoping call: discuss current state of PPM and review strategy options.
    • How to wireframe realistic process goals, rooted in your PPM strategic expectations, that will be sustained by the organization.
    • Examine your current-state PPM process and create a high-level description of the target-state process for each of the five PPM processes (1-2 calls per each process).
    • Assess your PPM tool requirements to help support your processes.
    • Determine the costs and potential benefits of your PPM practice.
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Set strategic expectations and realistic goals for the PPM strategy
    Module 2:
    Develop and refine strategy-aligned PPM processes
    Module 3:
    Compose your PPM strategic plan
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Analysis of the current state of PPM
    • Strategy-aligned goals and metrics for PPM processes
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • PPM capability levels
    • High-level descriptions of near- and long-term target state
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • PPM tool recommendations
    • Cost-benefit analysis
    • Customized PPM strategic plan

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1

    Workshop Day 2

    Workshop Day 3

    Workshop Day 4

    Workshop Day 5

    Get leadership buy-in for PPM strategy Set PPM process goals and metrics with strategic expectations Develop and Refine PPM processes Develop and Refine PPM processes Complete the PPM strategic plan

    Activities

    • 1.1 Assess leadership mandate.
    • 1.2 Determine potential resource capacity.
    • 1.3 Create a project inventory.
    • 1.4 Communicate your PPM strategy to key stakeholders.
    • 2.1 Translate each strategic goal into process goals.
    • 2.2 Set metrics and preliminary targets for PPM process goals.
    • 3.1 Develop and refine the project intake, prioritization, and approval process.
    • 3.2 Develop and refine the resource management process.
    • 4.1 Develop and refine the portfolio reporting process.
    • 4.2 Develop and refine the project closure process.
    • 4.3 Develop and refine the benefits realization process.
    • 5.1 Right-size the PPM tools for your processes.
    • 5.2 Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of implementing the new PPM strategy.
    • 5.3 Define roles and responsibilities for the new processes.

    Deliverables

    1. Choice of PPM strategy and the leadership mandate
    2. Analysis of current project capacity
    3. Analysis of current project demand
    4. PPM Strategic Plan – Executive Brief
    1. PPM strategy-aligned process goals
    2. Metrics and long-term targets for PPM process goals
      For each of the five PPM processes:
    1. Process capability level
    2. Current-state PPM process description
    3. Retrospective examination of the current-state PPM process
    4. Action items to achieve the target states
    5. Time cost of the process at current and target states
    1. Recommendation for a PPM tool
    2. Cost-benefit analysis
    3. Roles and responsibilities matrix for each PPM process

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    PHASE 1

    Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Get executive buy-in for your PPM strategy

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 1.1: Choose the right PPM strategy Step 1.2: Translate strategic expectations to process goals
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Scoping call to discuss the current state of PPM and review strategy options.
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Discuss how to wireframe realistic process goals, rooted in your PPM strategic expectations, that will be sustained by the organization.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Execute a leadership mandate survey.
    • Perform a high-level supply/demand analysis.
    • Prepare an executive presentation to get strategy buy-in.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Develop realistic process goals based in your PPM strategic expectations.
    • Set metrics and preliminary targets for your high-priority PPM process goals.
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix

    Phase 1 Results & Insights

    • Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a top-down PPM strategy. Ensure your executives are onboard before proceeding to implement your PPM strategy.

    Prepare to get to value early with step 1.1 of this blueprint

    The first step of this blueprint will help you define your PPM strategy and get executive buy-in for it using section one of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Where traditional models of consulting can take considerable amounts of time before delivering value to clients, Info-Tech’s methodology for developing a PPM strategy gets you to value fast.

    In the first step of this blueprint, you will define your PPM strategy and prepare an executive presentation to get buy-in for the strategy. The presentation can be prepared in just a few hours.

    • The activities in step 1.1 of this blueprint will help you customize the slides in section 1 of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    • Section one of the Template will then serve as your presentation document.

    Once you have received buy-in for your PPM strategy, the remainder of this blueprint will help you customize section 2 of the Template.

    • Section 2 of the Template will communicate:
      • Your processes and process goals.
      • Your near-term and long-term action items for implementing the strategy.
      • Your PPM tool requirements.
      • The costs and benefits of your PPM strategy.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Sample of Info-Tech's 'PPM Strategic Plan Template.'

    Step 1.1: Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2
    Choose the right PPM strategy Translate strategy into process goals Define intake & resource mgmt. processes Define reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processes Select a right-sized PPM solution Finalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Perform a leadership mandate survey.
    • Choose your PPM strategy.
    • Calculate your resource capacity for projects.
    • Determine overall organizational demand for projects.
    • Prepare an executive presentation of the PPM strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • A PPM strategy
    • A resource supply/project demand analysis
    • An executive brief presentation
    • Executive buy-in for the PPM strategy

    “Too many projects, not enough resources” is the reality of most IT environments

    In today’s organizations, the desires of business units for new products and enhancements, and the appetites of senior leadership to approve more and more projects for those products and services, far outstrips IT’s ability to realistically deliver on everything.

    The vast majority of IT departments lack the resourcing to meet project demand – especially given the fact that day-to-day operational demands frequently trump project work.

    As a result, project throughput suffers – and with it, IT's reputation within the organization.

    A visualization of 'Project Demand' versus 'Resource supply' utilizing courtroom scales with numerous project titles weighing down the 'Project Demand' side and silhouettes of three little people raised aloft on the 'Resource supply' side.

    In these environments, a PPM strategy is required.

    A PPM strategy should enable executive decision makers to make sense of the excess of demand and give IT the ability to prioritize those projects that are of the most strategic value to the business.

    With the right PPM strategy, IT can improve project outcomes across its portfolio and drive business value – all while improving the workloads of IT project staff.

    Info-Tech has two PPM strategy options that you can start to deploy today

    This step will help you choose the most suitable option, depending on your project pain points and current level of executive engagement in actively steering the portfolio.

    Option A:
    Top-Down, Executive Driven Strategy

    Option B:
    Bottom-Up, Project Manager Driven Strategy

    Goals of this approach:
    • This approach is intended to assist decision makers in their job: choosing the right projects, committing to timelines for those projects, and monitoring/directing their progress.
    Goals of this approach:
    • This approach is primarily intended to ensure that projects are well managed in a standardized manner in order to provide project managers with clear direction.
    Who this approach is for:
    • IT departments looking to improve alignment of project demand and resource capacity.
    • IT departments wanting to prioritize strategically valuable work.
    • IT departments with sufficient executive backing and engagement with the portfolio.
    Who this approach is for:
    • IT departments that would not the get support for a top-down approach due to a disengaged executive layer.
    • IT departments that already have a top-down PPM strategy and feel they are sufficiently resourced to confront project demand.

    Each of these strategy options is driven by a set of specific strategic expectations to help communicate your PPM goals. See the following slides for an articulation of each strategy option.

    A top-down, executive driven strategy is the optimal route, putting leadership in a position to best conduct the portfolio

    Option A: Top-Down, Executive Driven Strategy

    Strategic Expectations:

    • Project Throughput: Maximize throughput of the best projects.
    • Portfolio Visibility: Ensure visibility of current and pending projects.
    • Portfolio Responsiveness: Make the portfolio responsive to executive steering when new projects and changing priorities need rapid action.
    • Resource Utilization: Minimize resource waste and optimize the alignment of skills to assignments.
    • Benefits Realization: Clarify accountability for post-project benefits attainment for each project, and facilitate the process of tracking/reporting those benefits.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Serve the executive with insight before you impede the projects with governance. This strategy option is where Info-Tech sees the most PPM success. A strategy focused at improving decision making at the executive layer will both improve project outcomes and help alleviate project workloads.

    A bottom-up strategy can help project managers and teams succeed where insight into the big picture is lacking

    Option B: Bottom-Up, Project Manager Driven Strategy

    Strategic Expectations:

    • Project Management Governance: All projects consuming IT resources will be continually validated in terms of best-practice process compliance.
    • Project Risk Management: Identify risks and related mitigation approaches for all high-risk areas.
    • Stakeholder Management: Ensure that project stakeholders are identified and involved.
    • Project Manager Resourcing: Provide project managers as needed.
    • Project-Level Visibility: Provide access to the details of project management processes (planning and progress) as needed.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Right-size governance to maximize success. Project management and governance success don’t necessarily equal project success. Project management processes should be a means to an end (i.e. successful project outcomes), and not an end in themselves. Ensure the ends justify the means.

    Most recurring project challenges require a top-down portfolio management approach

    While project management is a key ingredient to project success, tying to solve endemic project problems with project management alone won’t improve results over the long term.

    Why Top-Down is a better starting point than Bottom-Up.

    The most common IT project problems – schedule and budget overruns, scope creep, and poor quality – can ultimately, in the vast majority of cases, be traced back to bad decisions made at the portfolio level:

    • The wrong projects get greenlighted.
    • Shifting leadership priorities and operational demands make project plans and estimated delivery dates obsolete from the start.
    • Too many projects get approved when there are not enough resources to effectively work on them all.

    No amount of project management rigor can help alleviate these common root causes of project failure.

    With a top-down PPM strategy, however, you can make sure that leadership is informed and engaged in making the right project decisions and that project managers and teams are situated for success.

    "There is nothing so useless as doing efficiently that which should not be done at all." (Peter Drucker (quoted in Lessing))

    Info-Tech Insight

    Get Strategic About Project Success.

    The difference between project management and project portfolio management comes down to doing things right vs. doing the right things. Both are important, no doubt; but doing the wrong things well doesn’t provide much value to the business in the long run.

    Get insight into the big picture with a top-down strategy before imposing more administrative overhead on project managers and leads.

    Perform a leadership mandate assessment to gauge executive needs and expectations

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.1 – 15 to 30 minutes (prep time) 10 to 20 minutes (execution time)

    INPUT: Leadership expectations for portfolio and project management.

    OUTPUT: Leadership mandate bar chart

    Materials: Tab 6 of Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent), PPM strategy sponsor(s), CIO and other members of senior management

    Before choosing your strategy option, survey the organization’s leadership to assess what they’re expecting from the PPM strategy.

    Use the “Leadership Mandate Survey” (located on tab 6 of Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator) to assess the degree to which your leadership expects the PPM strategy to provide outcomes across the following capabilities: portfolio reporting, project governance, and project management.

    • Deploy the 12-question survey via individual one-on-one meetings or group working sessions with your boss (the PPM strategy sponsor) as well as with the CIO and other senior managers from within IT and the business.
      • If you cannot connect with the executive layer for this survey, do your best to estimate their responses to complete the survey.
    • The survey should help distinguish if executives are looking for portfolio management or project management. It should be one input that informs your choice of strategy option A or B.
      • If leadership is looking primarily for project management, you should proceed to Info-Tech’s Tailor Project Management Processes that Fit Your Projects blueprint.

    Refer to the next slide for assistance analyzing the outputs in tab 6 and using them to inform your choice of strategy.

    How to make use of the results of the leadership survey

    Two possible result scenarios of the leadership survey. There are two bar graphs titled 'Leadership Mandate', each with an explanation of the scenario they belong to. In Scenario 1, the 'Leadership Mandate' graph has a descending trend with 'Portfolio Reporting' at the highest level, 'Project Governance' in the middle, and 'Project Management' at the lowest level. 'A result like this, with a higher portfolio reporting score, shows a higher need for a top-down approach and demonstrates well-balanced expectations for a PPM strategy from the leadership. There is greater emphasis put on the portfolio than there is project governance or project management.' In Scenario 2, the 'Leadership Mandate' graph has an ascending trend with 'Portfolio Reporting' at the lowest level, 'Project Governance' in the middle, and 'Project Management' at the highest level. 'If your graph looks like this, your executive leadership has placed greater importance on project governance and management. Completing a top-down PPM strategy may not meet their expectations at this time. In this situation, a bottom-up approach may be more applicable.'

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Insert screenshots of the survey and the bar graph from tab 6 of the PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator onto slides 7 and 8, “PPM Strategy Leadership Mandate,” of the PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Proceed with the right PPM strategy for your organization

    Based upon the results of the “Leadership Mandate Survey,” and your assessment of each strategy option as described in the previous slides, choose the strategy option that is right for your IT department/PMO at this time.

    "Without a strategic methodology, project portfolio planning is frustrating and has little chance of achieving exceptional business success." (G Wahl (quoted in Merkhofer))

    Option A:

    Those proceeding with Option A should continue with remainder of this blueprint. Update your strategy statement on slide 3 of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to reflect your choice

    Option B:

    Those proceeding with Option B should exit this blueprint and refer to Info-Tech’s Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects blueprint to help define a project management standard operating procedure.

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. If you’re proceeding with Option A, update slide 4, “Project Portfolio Management Strategy,” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to reflect your choice of PPM strategy. If you’re proceeding with Option B, you may want to include your strategy statement in your Project Management SOP Template.

    The success of your top-down strategy will hinge on the quality of your capacity awareness and resource utilization

    A PPM strategy should facilitate alignment between project demand with resource supply. Use Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator as a step towards this alignment.

    Info-Tech’s research shows that the ability to provide a centralized view of IT’s capacity for projects is one of the top PPM capabilities that contributes to overall project success.

    Accurate and reliable forecasts into IT’s capacity, coupled with an engaged executive layer making project approval and prioritization decisions based upon that capacity data, is the hallmark of an effective top-down PPM strategy.

    • Use Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator to help improve visibility (and with it, organizational understanding) into project demand and IT resource supply.
    • The Calculator will help you determine IT’s actual capacity for projects and analyze organizational demand by taking an inventory of active and backlog projects.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator.

    Sample of Into-Tech's PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Where does the time go? The portfolio manager (or equivalent) should function as the accounting department for time, showing what’s available in IT’s human resources budget for projects and providing ongoing visibility into how that budget of time is being spent.

    Establish the total resource capacity of your portfolio

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 – 30 to 60 minutes

    INPUT: Staff resource types, Average work week, Estimated allocations

    OUTPUT: Breakdown of annual portfolio HR spend, Capacity pie chart

    Materials: PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator, tab 3

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent), Resource and/or project managers

    Use tab 3 of the calculator to determine your actual HR portfolio budget for projects, relative to the organization’s non-project demands.

    • Tab 3 analyzes your resource supply asks you to consider how your staff spend their time weekly across four categories: out of office time, administrative time (e.g. meetings, training, checking email), keep-the-lights-on time (i.e. support and maintenance), and project time.
    • The screenshot below walks you through columns B to E of tab 3, which help calculate your potential capacity. This activity will continue on the next slide, where we will determine your realized capacity for project work from this potential capacity.
    Screenshot of tab 3 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. It has 4 columns, 'Resource Type', '# People', 'Hours / Week', and 'Hours / Year', which are referred to in notes as columns B through E respectively. The note on 'Resource Type' reads '1. Compile a list of each of the roles within your department in column B'. The note on '# People' reads '2. In column C, provide the number of staff currently performing each role'. The note on 'Hours / Week' reads '3. In column D, provide a baseline for the number of hours in a typical work week for each role'. The note on 'Hours / Year' reads '4. Column E will auto-populate based on E and D. The total at the bottom of column E (row 26) constitutes your department’s total capacity'.

    Determine the project/non-project ratio for each role

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 (continued)

    The previous slide walked you through columns B to E of tab 3. This slide walks you through columns F to J, which ask you to consider how your potential capacity is spent.

    Screenshot of tab 3 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. It has 6 columns, 'Hours / Year', 'Absence', 'Working Time / Year', 'Admin', 'KTLO', and 'Project Work', which, starting at 'Absence', are referred to in notes as columns F through J respectively. The note on 'Absence' reads '5. Enter the percentage of your total time across each role that is unavailable due to foreseeable out-of-office time (vacation, sick time, etc.) in column F. Industry standard runs anywhere from 12% to 16%, depending on your industry and geographical region'. The note on 'Working Time / Year' reads '6. Column G will auto-calculate to show your overall net capacity after out-of-office percentages have been taken off the top. These totals constitute your working time for the year'. The note on 'Admin' and 'KTLO' reads '6. Column G will auto-calculate to show your overall net capacity after out-of-office percentages have been taken off the top. These totals constitute your working time for the year'. The note on 'Project Work' reads '8. The project percentage in column J will auto-calculate based upon what’s leftover after your non-project working time allocations in columns H and I have been subtracted'.

    Review your annual portfolio capacity for projects

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 (continued)

    The previous slides walked you through the inputs for tab “3. Project Capacity.” This slide walks you through the outputs of the tab.

    Based upon the inputs from columns B to J, the rest of tab 3 analyzes how IT available time is spent across the time categories, highlighting how much of IT’s capacity is actually available for projects after admin work, support and maintenance work, and absences have been taken into account.

    A table and pie chart of output data from Tab 3 of the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. Pie segments are labelled 'Admin', 'Absence', 'Project Capacity', and 'Keep The Lights On'.

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Update slide 10, “Current Project Capacity,” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to include the outputs from tab 3 of the Calculator.

    Create an inventory of active and backlog projects to help gauge overall project demand

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.3 – 15 to 30 minutes

    INPUT: Number of active and backlog projects across different sizes

    OUTPUT: Total project demand in estimated hours of work effort

    Materials: PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator, tab 4

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent), Project managers

    Where tab 3 of the Calculator gave you visibility into your overall resource supply for projects, tab 4 will help you establish insight into the demand side.

    • Before starting on tab 4, be sure to enter the required project size data on the set-up tab.
    • Using a list of current active projects, categorize the items on the list by size: small, medium, large, and extra large. Enter the number of projects in each category of project in column C of tab 4.
    • Using a list of on-hold projects, or projects that have been approved but not started, categorize the list by size and enter the number of projects in each category in column D.
    • In column E, estimate the number of new requests and projects across each size that you anticipate being added to the portfolio/backlog in the next 12 months. Use historical data from the past 12 to 24 months to inform your estimates.
    • In column F, estimate the number of projects that you anticipate being completed in each size category in the next 12 months. Take the current state of active projects into account as you make your estimates, as well as throughput data from the previous 12 to 24 months.
    Screenshot of tab 4 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. It has 5 columns labelled 'Project Types' with values Small to Extra-Large, 'Number of active projects currently in the portfolio', 'Number of projects currently in the portfolio backlog', 'Number of new requests anticipated to be added to the portfolio/backlog in the next 12 months', and 'Number of projects expected to be delivered within the next 12 months'.

    Make supply and demand part of the conversation as you get buy-in for your top-down strategy

    Tab 5 of the Calculator is an output tab, visualizing the alignment (or lack thereof) of project demand and resource supply.

    Once tabs 3 and 4 are complete, use tab 5 to analyze the supply/demand data to help build your case for a top-down PPM strategy and get buy-in for it.

    Screenshots of Tab 5 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. A bar chart obscures a table with the note 'The bar chart shows your estimated total project demand in person hours (in black) relative to your estimated total resource capacity for projects (in green)'. Notes on the table are 'The table below the bar chart shows your estimated annual project throughput rate (based upon the number of projects you estimated you would complete this year) as well as the rate at which portfolio demand will grow (based upon the number of new requests and projects you estimated for the next 12 months)' and 'If the “Total Estimated Project Demand (in hours) in 12 Months Time” number is more than your current demand levels, then you have a supply-demand problem that your PPM strategy will need to address'.

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Update slides 11 and 12, “Current Project Demand,” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to include the outputs from tabs 4 and 5 of the Calculator.

    Recommended: Complete Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard to measure your resource utilization

    Associated Activity icon Contact your rep or call 1-888-670-8889

    This step is highly recommended but not required. Call 1-888-670-8889 to inquire about or request the PPM Diagnostics.

    Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic provides a comprehensive view of your portfolio management strengths and weaknesses, including project portfolio management, project management, customer management, and resource utilization.

    Screenshots of Info-Tech's PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic with a pie chart obscuring a table/key. The attached note reads 'In particular, the analysis of resource utilization in the PPM Current State Scorecard report, will help to complement the supply/demand analysis in the previous slides. The diagnostic will help you to analyze how, within that percentage of your overall capacity that is available for project work, your staff productively utilizes this time to successfully complete project tasks and how much of this time is lost within Info-Tech’s categories of resource waste.'

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Update slides 14 and 15, “Current State Resource Utilization” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to include the resource utilization outputs from your PPM Current State Scorecard.

    Finalize section one of the PPM Strategic Plan Template and prepare to communicate your strategy

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.4 – 10 to 30 minutes

    INPUT: The previous activities from this step

    OUTPUT: An presentation communication your PPM strategy

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template, section 1

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent)

    By now, you should be ready to complete section one of the PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    The purpose of this section of the Template is to capture the outputs of this step and use them to communicate the value of a top-down PPM strategy and to get buy-in for this strategy from senior management before you move forward to develop your PPM processes in the subsequent phases of this blueprint.

    • Within section one, update any of the text that is (in grey) to reflect the specifics of your organization – i.e. the name of your organization and department – and the specific outcomes of step 1.2 activities. In addition, replace the placeholders for a company logo with the logo of your company.
    • Replace the tool screenshots with the outputs from your version of the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator.
    • Proofread all of the text to ensure the content accurately reflects your outcomes. Edit the content as needed to more accurately reflect your outcomes.
    • Determine the audience for the presentation of your PPM strategy and make a logistical arrangement. Include PPM strategy sponsors, senior management from within IT and the business, and other important stakeholders.

    Get executive buy-in for your top-down PPM strategy

    Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a top-down PPM strategy. Ensure your executives are on board before preceding.

    You’re now ready to communicate your PPM strategy to your leadership team and other stakeholders.

    It is essential that you get preliminary buy-in for this strategy from the executive layer before you move forward to develop your PPM processes in the subsequent phases of this blueprint. Lack of executive engagement is one of the top barriers to PPM strategy success.

    • If you have gone through the preceding activities in this step, section one of your PPM Strategic Plan Template should now be ready to present.
    • As explained in 1.1.4, you should present this section to an audience of PPM strategy sponsors, C-suite executives, and other members of the senior management team.
    • Allow at least 60 minutes for the presentation – around 20 minutes to deliver the slide presentation and 40 minutes for discussion.
    • If you get sufficient buy-in by the end of the presentation, proceed to the next step of this blueprint. If buy-in is lacking, now might not be the right time for a top-down PPM strategy. Think about adopting a bottom-up approach until leadership is more engaged in the portfolio.

    "Gaining executive sponsorship early is key…It is important for the executives in your organization to understand that the PPM initiatives and the PMO organization are there to support (but never hinder) executive decision making." (KeyedIn Projects)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Engage(d) sponsorship. According to Prosci, the top factor in contributing to the success of a change initiative is active and visible executive sponsorship. Use this meeting to communicate to your sponsor(s) the importance of their involvement in championing the PPM strategy.

    A PPM strategic plan elevates PMO’s status to a business strategic partner

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    The PMO operated in a way that is, in their self-assessment, reactive; project requests and capacity were not effectively managed. Perhaps due to this, the leadership team was not always visible, or regularly available, to PM leaders. This, in turn, complicated efforts to effectively manage their projects.

    Solution

    Establishing a simple prioritization methodology enabled the senior leadership to engage and effectively steer the project portfolio by strategic importance. The criteria and tool also gave the business units a clear understanding to promote the strategic value of each of their project requests.

    Results

    PM leaders now have the support and confidence of the senior leadership team to both proactively manage and deliver on strategic projects. This new prioritization model brought the PM Leader and senior leadership team in direct access with each other.

    "By implementing this new project intake and prioritization framework, we drastically improved our ability to predict, meet, and manage project requests and unit workload. We adopted a client-focused and client-centric approach that enabled all project participants to see their role and value in successful project delivery. We created methodologies that were easy to follow from the client participation perspective, but also as PM leaders, provided us with the metrics, planning, and proactive tools to meet and anticipate client project demand. The response from our clients was extremely positive, encouraging, and appreciative."

    Step 1.2: Translate PPM strategic expectations to process goals

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine process goals based upon your PPM strategy.
    • Set metrics and preliminary targets for your PPM processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Steering Committee
    • Business Unit Leaders
    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder-prioritized PPM process goals
    • Metrics and targets for high-priority process goals

    Use the PPM strategy to set the direction for PPM processes that make up the infrastructure around projects

    PPM strategy enables you to answer any and all of these questions in a way that is consistent, cohesive, and aligned with one another.

    Info-Tech's PPM Process Model from earlier with notes overlaid asking a series of questions. The questions for '1. Intake, Approval, and Prioritization' are 'Who can request a project? How do you request a project? Who decides what to fund? What is the target investment mix? How will they decide?' The questions for '2. Resource Management' are 'Who assigns the resources? Who feeds the data on resources? How do we make sure it’s valid? How do we handle contingencies when projects are late, or if availability changes?' The questions for '3. Status and Progress Reporting' are 'What project information that should be reported? Who reports on project status? When? How?' The questions between 'Project Management' and '4. Project Closure' are 'Who declares that a project is done? Who validates it? Who is this reported to? Who terminates low-value projects? How will they decide?' The questions for '5. Benefits Tracking' are 'How do we validate the project benefits from the original business case? How do we track the benefits? Who reports it? When?'

    Set process goals to address PPM strategic expectations and steer the PPM strategic plan

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.1 – 2 hours

    INPUT: PPM strategy & expectations, Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Prioritized list of strategy-aligned PPM process goals

    Materials: PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix

    Participants: CIO, Steering Committee, Business Unit Leaders, PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    This activity is designed for key departmental stakeholders to articulate how PPM processes should be developed or refined to meet the PPM strategic expectations.

    Participation of the key departmental stakeholders in this exercise is critical, e.g. CIO, Steering Committee, business unit leaders.

    Strategic Expectations x Processes = Process goals aligned to strategy
    Throughput Project Intake, Approval, & Prioritization
    Visibility Resource Management
    Responsiveness Status & Progress Reporting
    Resource Utilization Project Closure
    Benefits Benefits Realization

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy-Process Goals Translation Matrix Template.

    Use Info-Tech’s Translation Matrix to systematically articulate strategy-aligned PPM process goals

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.1 – PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix, tab 2

    Formula: To answer “[question]” in a way that we can [strategic expectation], it will be important to [process goal].

    Example 1:
    To answer the question “who can request a project, and how?” in a way that we can maximize the throughput of the best projects, it will be important to standardize the project request process.

    Example 2:
    To answer the question “how will they decide what to fund?” in a way that we can maximize the throughput of the best projects, it will be important to reach a consensus on project prioritization criteria.

    Example 3:
    To answer the question “how will we track the projected benefits?” in a way that we can maximize the throughput of the best projects, it will be important to double-check the validity of benefits before projects are approved.

    Screenshot of Tab 2 in Info-Tech's PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix tool. There is a table with notes overlaid 'Enter the process goals in the appropriate question–strategic expectation slot' and 'Assign a priority, from the most important (1) to the least important (5)'.

    Set metrics and preliminary targets for your high-priority PPM process goals

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.2 – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Prioritized list of strategy-aligned PPM process goals, Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Metrics and targets for high-priority PPM process goals

    Materials: PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix

    Participants: CIO, Steering Committee, Business Unit Leaders, PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Your highest-priority process goals and their corresponding strategy expectations are displayed in tab 3 of the PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix template (example below).

    Through a group discussion, document what will be measured to decide the achievement of each process goal, as well as your current estimate and the long-term target. If necessary, adjust the approximate target duration.

    Screenshot of Tab 3 in Info-Tech's PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix tool. There is a table with 6 columns 'PPM Process', 'High-priority Process Goals', 'Strategy Expectation', 'How will you measure success?', 'Current Estimate', and 'Long-Term Target'; they are referred to in notes as columns B through G respectively. Overlaid notes are 'Columns C and D will auto-populate based upon your inputs from tab 2. The five PPM process areas are arranged vertically in column B and your top-five process goals from each area appear in column C.' 'Use column E to brainstorm how you might measure the success of each process goal at your organization. These can be tentative for now and refined over time.' 'Determine current metrics for each process goals and long-term target metrics in columns F and G.'

    Project-client-centered approach to PPM process design improves client satisfaction and team confidence

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    Reactive instead of proactive

    "We had no effective means of tracking project intake requests vs. capacity. We struggled using ad hoc processes and methods which worked to meet immediate needs, but we quickly realized that they were ineffective in tracking critical project metrics, key performance indicators (KPIs), or performance measures...In short, we were being reactive, instead of proactive."

    The result was a disorganized portfolio that led to low client satisfaction and team morale.

    Solution

    Examine processes “through the eyes of the client”

    With the guiding principle of “through the eyes of the client,” PPM processes and tools were developed to formalize project intake, prioritization, and capacity planning. All touchpoints between client and PPM processes were identified, and practices for managing client expectations were put in place. A client satisfaction survey was formulated as part of the post-project assessment and review.

    Results

    Client-centered processes improved client satisfaction and team confidence

    People, processes, and tools are now aligned to support client demand, manage client expectations, measure project KPIs, and perform post-project analysis. A standard for client satisfaction metrics was put in place. The overwhelmingly positive feedback has increased team confidence in their ability to deliver quality efforts.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of activity 1.1.2 'Determine your actual resource capacity for projects'. Determine your actual resource capacity for projects

    Work with Info-Tech analysts to define your project vs. non-project ratio to help define how much of your overall resource capacity is actual available for projects.

    Sample of activity 1.2.1 'Set realistic PPM process goals'. Set realistic PPM process goals

    Leverage Info-Tech facilitators to help walk you through our PPM framework and define achievable process goals that are rooted in your current PPM maturity levels and organizational culture.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    PHASE 2

    Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Align PPM processes to your strategic goals

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2-4 weeks
    Step 2.1: Develop intake & resource mgmt. processes Step 2.2: Define reporting, closure, & benefits processes
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Assess your current intake, prioritization, and resource management processes and wireframe a sustainable target state for each capability.
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Analyze your current portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization processes and wireframe a sustainable target state for each capability.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Set near-term and long-term goals.
    • Draft high-level steps within your target-state processes.
    • Document your process steps and roles and responsibilities.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Set near-term and long-term goals.
    • Draft high-level steps within your target-state processes.
    • Document your process steps and roles and responsibilities.
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Phase 2 Results & Insights

    • The means of project and portfolio management (i.e. processes) shouldn’t eclipse the ends – strategic goals. Root your process in your PPM strategic goals to realize PPM benefits (e.g. optimized portfolio value, improved project throughput, increased stakeholder satisfaction).

    Read first: Overview of the methodology for articulating new strategy-aligned PPM processes

    In the previous step of the blueprint, key department stakeholders established the PPM process goals, metrics, and targets in a way that aligns with the overall PPM strategy. In this phase, we draft a high-level description of the five PPM processes that reflect those goals using the following methodology:

    Methodology at a glance

    1. Articulate the current state of the process.
    2. Examine the process against the strategy-aligned goals.
    3. Create short- and long-term action items to refine the current process and meet the strategy-aligned targets.
    4. Develop a high-level target-state description of the PPM process.
    5. Estimate costs-in-use of the target-state process.

    Out-of-scope topics

    • Draft a detailed target-state description of the PPM process. Avoid falling into the “analysis paralysis” trap and keep the discussion focused on the overall PPM strategy.
    • PPM tools to support the process. This discussion will take place in the next phase of the blueprint.

    INPUT

    –›

    PROCESS

    –›

    OUTPUT

    • Strategy-aligned process goals, metrics, and targets (Activity 1.2.1)
    • Knowledge of current process
    • Knowledge of organizational culture and structure
    • Capability level assessment
    • Table-top design planning activity
    • Start-stop-continue retrospective
    • High-level description of the target state
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • High-level descriptions of current and target states
    • Short- and long-term action items for improving the process
    • Cost-in-use of the current- and target-state processes

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Build a sound business case for implementing the new PPM strategy with realistic costs and benefits of managing your project portfolio.

    Time spent on managing the project portfolio is an investment. Like any other business endeavors, the benefits must outweigh the costs to be worth doing.

    As you draft a high-level description of the PPM processes in this phase of the blueprint, use Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool to track the estimate the cost-in-use of the process. In the next phase, this information will be inform a cost-benefit analysis, which will be used to support your plan to implement the PPM strategy.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Screenshots of Info-Tech's PPM Strategy Development Tool including a Cost-Benefit Analysis with tables and graphs.

    Step 2.1: Develop and refine project intake, prioritization, and resource management processes

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine your process maturity.
    • Benchmark current processes against strategy-aligned goals.
    • Set near- and long-term action items.
    • Draft a high-level description of your target state.
    • Document your new processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A definition of current and target state maturity levels for intake, prioritization, and resource management
    • Near-term and long-term process goals for intake, prioritization, and resource management
    • A high-level wireframe for your intake, prioritization, and resource management process steps

    Project intake, prioritization, and approval: Get projects with the highest value done first

    Give your organization the voice to say “no” (or “not yet”) to new projects.

    Questions

    • Who can request a project?
    • How do you request a project?
    • Who decides what to fund?
    • What is the target investment mix?
    • How will they decide?

    Benefits

    • Maximize value of time spent on project work by aligning projects with priorities and stakeholder needs.
    • Finish the projects you start by improving alignment of intake and prioritization with resource capacity.
    • Improve stakeholder satisfaction by managing expectations with consistent, streamlined processes.

    Challenges

    • Stakeholders who benefit from political or ad hoc prioritization processes will resist or circumvent formal intake processes.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient awareness of resource capacity necessary to align intake with availability.

    A graph highlighting the sweet spot of project intake decision making. The vertical axis is 'Rigor and Effort' increasing upward, and the horizontal axis is 'Quality and Effectiveness of Decisions' increasing to the right. The trend line starts at 'Gut Feel' with low 'Rigor and Effort', and gradually curves upward to 'Analysis Paralysis' at the top. A note with an arrow pointing to a midway point in the line reads 'The sweet spot changes between situations and types of decisions'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This process aims to control the project demand. A balance between rigor and flexibility is critical in order to avoid the “analysis paralysis” as much as the “gut feel” approach.

    Funnel project requests into a triage system for project intake

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for managing project intake.

    1. Requestor fills out form and submits the request into the funnel.
    2. Requests are triaged into the proper queue.
      1. Divert non-project request.
      2. Quickly assess value and urgency.
      3. Assign specialist to follow up on request.
      4. Inform the requestor.
    3. Business analyst starts to gather preliminary requirements.
      1. Follow up with sponsors to validate and define scope.
      2. Estimate size and determine project management rigor required.
      3. Start to develop an initial business case.
    4. Requestor is given realistic expectations for approval process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An excess number of intake channels is the tell-tale sign of a project portfolio in distress. The PMO needs to exercise and enforce discipline on stakeholders. PMO should demand proper documentation and diligence from stakeholders before proceeding with requests.

    Maintain reliable resourcing data with a recurrent project intake, prioritization, and approval practice

    Info-Tech recommends following a five-step process for managing project intake, prioritization, and approval.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's five-step process for managing project intake. There are four groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Business Analysts', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Collect project requests' which involves 'Resources'. Step 2 is 'Screen project requests' which involves 'Business Analysts' and 'PMO'. A part of the step that may be applicable to some organizations is 'Concept approval' involving 'Governance Layer'. Step 3 is 'Develop business case' which involves 'Business Analysts' and 'PMO'. A part of the step that may be applicable to some organizations is 'Get a project sponsor' involving 'Governance Layer'. Step 4 is 'Prioritize project' which involves 'Business Analysts' and 'PMO'. Step 5 is 'Approve (greenlight) project' which involves 'Business Analysts', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer', with an attached note that reads 'Ensure that up-to-date project portfolio information is available (project status, resource forecast, etc.)'. All of these steps lead to 'Initiate project, commit resources, etc.'

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Approval” can be a dangerous word in project and portfolio management. Use it carefully. Clarify precisely what is being “approved” at each step in the process, what is required to pass each gate, and how long the process will take.

    Determine your project intake, prioritization, and approval process maturity

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Project intake, prioritization, and approval capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the project intake, prioritization, and approval process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: Optimized We have effective intake processes with right-sized administrative overhead. Work is continuously prioritized to keep up with emerging challenges and opportunities.
    Capability Level 4: Aligned We have very strong intake processes. Project approvals are based on business cases and aligned with future resource capacity.
    Capability Level 3: Engaged Processes are in place to track project requests and follow up on them. Priorities are periodically re-evaluated, based largely on the best judgment of one or several executives.
    Capability Level 2: Defined Some processes are in place, but there is no capacity to say no to new projects. There is a backlog, but little or no method for grooming it.
    Capability Level 1: Unmanaged Our organization has no formal intake processes in place. Most work is done reactively, with little ability to prioritize project work proactively.

    Benchmark the current project intake, prioritization, and approval process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the intake, prioritization, and approval process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Simplify business cases
    • Send emails to requestor to manage expectations
    • Accept verbal project requests
    • Approve “pet projects”
    • Monthly prioritization meetings
    • Evaluate prioritization criteria

    Set near- and long-term action items for the project intake, prioritization, and approval process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Limit the number of channels available to request new projects.
    • Revise the intake form.
    • Establish a regular triage process.
    For example:
    • Establish a comprehensive scorecard and business case scoring process at the steering committee level.
    • Limit the rate of approval to be aligned with resource capacity.

    Review and customize slide 23, “Project intake, prioritization, and approval: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the intake, prioritization, and approval process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: project intake, prioritization, and approval
      Collect project requests –› Screen requests –› Develop business case –› Prioritize project –› Approve project

    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      Input What information do you need to perform the work?
      Output What artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/Timing How often, and when, will the work be performed?
      Responsibility Who will perform the work?
      Accountability Who will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?

    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool; see next slide for instructions.

    Use the PPM Strategy Development Tool to track the time cost of the process

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.1 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 3: Costing Assumptions

    Record the time cost of each high-level process task from Activity 2.1.1d.

    Screenshot of tab 3 from Info-Tech's PPM Strategy Development Tool with notes overlaid. Columns are 'ID', 'Task Description', 'Who does the task?', a super-column titled 'Current State' which includes 'How many times per year?', 'How many people?', and 'For how long?', a super-column titled 'Near-Term Target State' with the same three sub columns, and a super-column titled 'Long-Term Target State' with the same three sub columns. Notes for 'Who does the task?' read 'Choose executive, management or resource' and 'If task is done by more than one party, duplicate the task'. Notes for the 3 recurring sub columns are 'Estimate how many times in a year the task is performed (e.g. 120 project requests per year)', 'Indicate the number of people needed to perform the task each time', 'Estimate the average work-hours for the task… either in minutes or in hours', 'If a task is not applicable to a state (e.g. currently PMO does not screen project requests), leave the row blank', and 'For meetings, remember to indicate the number of people'.

    Document the high-level description for the new intake, prioritization, and approval process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new project intake, prioritization, and approval process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic document, for example:

    • Updated prioritization scorecard.
    • Roles and responsibility matrix, identifying consulted and informed parties.

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Optimize Project Intake, Prioritization, and Approval blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 24, “Project intake, prioritization, and approval: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Clarity in project prioritization process leads to enterprise-wide buy-in

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    "Our challenge from the start was to better understand the strategic perspective and priorities of our client departments.

    In addition, much of the work requested was not aligned to corporate goals and efforts, and seemed to be contradictory, redundant, and lacking strategic focus."

    Complicating this challenge was the fact that work requests were being received via all means of communication, which made the monitoring and controlling of requests more difficult.

    Solution

    Client departments were consulted to improve the understanding of their strategic goals and priorities. Based on the consultation:

    • A new, enterprise-wide project prioritization criteria was developed.
    • Priority of project requests from all business areas are evaluated on a quarterly basis.
    • A prioritized list of projects are made available to the senior leadership team.

    Results

    "By creating and implementing a tool for departments to prioritize strategic efforts, we helped them consider the important overall project criteria and measure them uniformly, across all anticipated projects. This set a standard of assessment, prioritization, and ranking, which helped departments clearly see which efforts were supportive and matched their strategic goals."

    Resource management process ensures that projects get the resources they need

    Reclaim project capacity: properly allocate project work and establish more stable project timelines.

    Questions

    • Who assigns the resources?
    • Who feeds the data on resources?
    • How do we make sure it’s valid?
    • How do we handle contingencies when projects are late, or if availability changes?

    Benefits

    • Ensure that approved projects can be completed by aligning intake with real project capacity.
    • Reduce over-allocation of resources by allocating based on their proportion of project vs. non-project work.
    • Forecast future resource requirements by maintaining accurate resource capacity data.

    Challenges

    • Time tracking can be difficult when project workers balance project work with “keep the lights on” activities and other administrative work.
    • Continuous partial attention, interruptions, and distractions are a part of today’s reality that makes it very difficult to maximize productivity.
    A see-saw balancing 'Resource availability' on one side and 'Ongoing projects, Operational work, Administrative work, and Resource absence' on the other side.

    Maintain reliable resourcing data with a recurrent resource management practice

    Info-Tech recommends following a five-step process for resource management.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's five-step process for resource management. There are five groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Collect resource availability' which involves 'Resources' and 'Resource Managers'. Step 2 is 'Collect resource demand' which involves 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'. Step 3 is 'Identify need for reconciliation' which involves 'PMO'. Step 4 is 'Resolve conflicts and smoothen resource allocations' which involves 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'. Step 5 is 'Report resource allocations and forecast' which involves all groups, with an attached note that reads 'Ensure that up-to-date information is available for project approval, portfolio reporting, closure, etc.'

    Info-Tech Insight

    This process aims to control the resource supply to meet the demand – project and non-project alike. Coordinate this process with the intake, approval, and prioritization process.

    Determine your resource management process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Resource management capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the resource management process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedOur organization has an accurate picture of project versus non-project work loads and allocates resources accordingly. We periodically reclaim lost capacity through organizational and behavioral change.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedWe have an accurate picture of how much time is spent on project versus non-project work. We allocate resources to these projects accordingly. We are checking in on project progress bi-weekly.
    Capability Level 3: PixelatedWe are allocating resources to projects and tracking progress monthly. We have a rough estimate of how much time is spent on project versus non-project work.
    Capability Level 2: OpaqueWe match resources teams to projects and check in annually, but we do not forecast future resource needs or track project versus non-project work.
    Capability Level 1: UnmanagedOur organization expects projects to be finished, but there is no process in place for allocating resources or tracking project progress.

    Benchmark the current resource management process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the resource management process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Collect project actuals
    • Make enhancements to the PPM tool in use
    • Over allocating resources
    • “Around the room” reporting at monthly meeting
    • Send project updates before resource management meetings

    Set near- and long-term action items for the resource management process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Determine the percentage of project vs. non-project work through implementation of a weekly survey.
    For example:
    • Reduce resource waste to 6%.
    • Forecast resource requirements monthly.
    • Implement a mid-market PPM tool.

    Review and customize slide 26, “Resource management: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the resource management process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: resource management
      Collect resource availability –› Collect resource demand –› Identify need for reconciliation –› Resolve conflicts and over-allocation –› Update resource forecast


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      Input What information do you need to perform the work?
      Output What artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/Timing How often, and when, will the work be performed?
      Responsibility Who will perform the work?
      Accountability Who will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?


    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new resource management process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new resource management process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Resource management meeting agenda template
    • Roles and responsibility matrix, identifying consulted and informed parties

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Develop a Resource Management for the New Reality blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 27, “Resource management: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Step 2.2: Develop and refine portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization processes

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine your process maturity.
    • Benchmark current processes against strategy-aligned goals.
    • Set near- and long-term action items.
    • Draft a high-level description of your target state.
    • Document your new processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A definition of current and target state maturity levels for portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization
    • Near-term and long-term process goals for portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization
    • A high-level wireframe for your portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization process steps

    Portfolio reporting process makes trustworthy data accessible for informing decisions

    Giving stakeholders the ability to make informed decisions is the most important function of managing the project portfolio.

    Questions

    • What project information should be reported?
    • Who reports on project status?
    • When and how do we report on the status of the project portfolio?

    Benefits

    • Reporting is the linchpin of any successful PPM strategy.
    • Timely and accurate status reports enable decision makers to address issues risks and issues before they create bigger problems.
    • Executive visibility can be achieved with or without a commercial tool using spreadsheets, a content management system such as SharePoint, or a combination of tools you already have.

    Challenges

    • Trying to increase detailed visibility too fast leads to difficulty gathering and maintaining data. As a result, reporting is rarely accurate and people quickly lose trust in the portfolio.
    • If you are planning to adopt a commercial tool, Info-Tech strongly recommends validating your organization’s ability to maintain a consistent reporting process using simple tools before investing in a more sophisticated system.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you can only do one thing, establish frequently current reporting on project status. Reporting doesn’t have to be detailed or precise, as long as it’s accurate.

    Maintain reliable portfolio status data with a recurrent status and progress reporting practice

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for portfolio status and progress reporting.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's four-step process for portfolio status and progress reporting. There are four groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Create project status reports' which involves 'Resources' and 'Project Managers'. Step 2 is 'Create a project portfolio status report' which involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO', with a note that reads 'Ensure that up-to-date information is available for project approval, resource management, closure, etc.' Step 3 is 'Report on project portfolio status' which involves 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'. Step 4 is 'Act on portfolio steering decisions' which involves 'Resources', 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'.

    Start by establishing a regular reporting cadence with lightweight project status KPIs:

    Red Issue or risk that requires intervention For projects that are red or yellow, high-level status reports should be elaborated on with additional comments on budget, estimated hours/days until completion, etc.
    Yellow Issue or risk that stakeholders should be aware of
    Green No significant risks or issues

    Determine your resource management process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Portfolio reporting capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    Kick-off the discussion about the portfolio reporting process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedWith the right tools, we can ensure that all projects are planned and maintained at a detailed task level with high-quality estimates, and that actual task progress is updated at least weekly.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedWe have the skills, knowledge, and resources needed to prepare a detailed cost-benefit analysis for all proposed projects. We track the progress throughout project execution.
    Capability Level 3: InterventionWith the right tools, we can ensure that project issues and risks are identified and addressed on a regular basis (e.g. at least monthly) for all projects.
    Capability Level 2: OversightWith the right tools, we can ensure that project status updates are revised on a regular basis (e.g. at least monthly) for all ongoing projects.
    Capability Level 1: ReactiveProject managers escalate issues directly with their direct supervisor or project sponsor because there is no formal PPM practice.

    Benchmark the current portfolio reporting process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the portfolio reporting process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Report on lightweight KPIs
    • Standardize the status reports
    • Project managers waiting too long before declaring a red status
    • Produce weekly project portfolio-wide report for senior leadership

    Set near- and long-term action items for the portfolio reporting process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Establish a reporting process that can be consistently maintained using lightweight KPIs.
    • Provide a simple dashboard that stakeholders can use to see their project status reports at a high level.
    For example:
    • Adopt a commercial tool for maintaining consistent status reports.
    • Support the tool with training and a mandate of adoption among all users.

    Review and customize slide 29, “Portfolio reporting: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the portfolio reporting process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: portfolio reporting
      Create project status reports –› Create a project portfolio status report –› Report on project portfolio status –› Act on portfolio steering decisions


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      InputWhat information do you need to perform the work?
      OutputWhat artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/TimingHow often, and when, will the work be performed?
      ResponsibilityWho will perform the work?
      AccountabilityWho will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?

    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new portfolio reporting process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new portfolio reporting process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Updated project status report template with new KPIs.
    • Documentation of requirements for improved PPM dashboards and reports.

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 30, “Portfolio reporting: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Streamlined status reporting improves portfolio visibility for executives, enabling data-driven steering of the portfolio

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    The client had no effective real-time reporting in place to summarize their work efforts. In addition, the client struggled with managing existing resources against the ability to deliver on the requested project workload.

    Existing project reporting processes were manually intensive and lacked mature reporting capabilities.

    Solution

    Through a short and effective engagement, IAG conducted surveys and facilitated interviews to identify the information needed by each stakeholder. From this analysis and industry best practices, IAG developed scorecards, dashboards, and project summary reports tailored to the needs of each stakeholder group. This integrated reporting tool was then made available on a central portal for PPM stakeholders.

    Results

    Stakeholders can access project scorecard and dashboard reports that are available at any given time.

    Resource reporting enabled the PMO to better balance client demand with available project capacity and forecast any upcoming deficiencies in resourcing that affect project delivery.

    Project closure at the portfolio level controls throughput and responsiveness of the portfolio

    Take control over projects that linger on, projects that don’t provide value, and projects that do not align with changing organizational priority.

    Questions

    • Who declares that a project is done?
    • Who validates it?
    • Who is this reported to?
    • Who terminates low-value projects?
    • How will they decide that a project is too low value to continue?

    Benefits

    • Minimize post-implementation problems by ensuring clean handoffs, with clear responsibilities for ongoing support and maintenance.
    • Drive continuous improvement by capturing and applying lessons learned.
    • Increase the project portfolio’s responsiveness to change by responding to emerging opportunities and challenges.

    Challenges

    • Completion criteria and “definition of done” need to be well defined and done so at project initiation.
    • Scope changes need to be managed and documented throughout the project.
    • Portfolio responsiveness requires deep cultural changes that will be met with confusion and resistance from some stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Although “change in organizational priority” is the most frequently cited cause of project failure (PMI Pulse of Profession, 2017), closing projects that don’t align with organizational priority ought to be a key PPM goal. Therefore, don’t think of it as project failure; instead, think of it as PPM success.

    Maintain the health of the project portfolio with a repeatable project closure process

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for project closure.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's four-step process for project closure. There are five groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first steps are 'Complete project' which involves 'Project Managers', and 'Terminate low value projects' which involves 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'. Step 2 is 'Validate project closure' which involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO', with a note that reads 'This includes facilitating the project sponsor sign-off, accepting and archiving lessons learned documents, etc.' The third steps are 'Conduct post-project work' which involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO', and 'Update resource availability' which includes 'Resource Managers'. Step 4 is 'Conduct post-implementation review' which involves all groups.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Post-implementation review checks which benefits (including those set out in the business case) have been achieved and identifies opportunities for further improvement. Without it, it can be difficult to demonstrate that investment in a project was worthwhile.

    Determine your project closure process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Project closure capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the project closure process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedProject closure is centrally managed and supports post-project benefits tracking.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedProject closure is centrally managed at the portfolio level to ensure completion/acceptance criteria are satisfied.
    Capability Level 3: EngagedProject closure is confirmed at the portfolio level, but with minimal enforcement of satisfaction of completion/acceptance criteria.
    Capability Level 2: EncouragedProject managers often follow handoff and closure procedures, but project closure is not confirmed or governed at the portfolio level.
    Capability Level 1: UnmanagedProject closure is not governed at either the project or portfolio level.

    Benchmark the current project closure process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the project closure process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Conduct reprioritization of projects at a regular cadence
    • Prune projects every year
    • Waive post-implementation review for time-constrained projects
    • Collect project post-mortem reports and curate in PMO SharePoint

    Set near- and long-term action items for the project closure process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Begin establishing project closure criteria in the project initiation process.
    • Manage and document scope changes throughout the project.
    For example:
    • Institute a formal process to ensure that all projects are closed at the portfolio level and properly handed off to support and maintenance teams.

    Review and customize slide 32, “Project closure: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the project closure process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: project closure
      Complete or terminate projects –› Validate project closure –› Conduct post-project work –› Conduct post-implementation review


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      Input What information do you need to perform the work?
      Output What artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/Timing How often, and when, will the work be performed?
      Responsibility Who will perform the work?
      Accountability Who will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?


    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new project closure process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new project closure process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Updated project closure checklist.
    • Project value review meeting process document.
    • Post-implementation review process document.

    Info-Tech has several research notes that elaborate on aspects of project closure. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s research notes on project closure:

    • The Importance of Conducting a Post Implementation Review
    • Five Key Steps to Mastering Project Closure
    • ‘Governance’ Will Kill Your Projects

    Review and customize slide 33, “Project closure: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Validate the time and effort spent on projects with a benefits realization process

    Maximizing benefits from projects is the primary goal of PPM. Tracking and reporting on benefits post-project closes the loop on benefits.

    Questions

    • How do validate the project benefits from the original business case?
    • How do we track the benefits?
    • Who reports it? When?

    Benefits

    • Maximize benefits realization by identifying and addressing unforeseen issues or limitations to success.
    • Improve project approval and prioritization by improving validity of the business case definition process.

    Challenges

    • Project sponsors need to be willing to invest time – months and years post-project completion – to validate benefits realization.
    • Portfolio management needs to proactively work with sponsors to facilitate benefits tracking.
    • Business cases need to be well developed and documented to reflect real anticipated benefits.

    Too many projects fail to achieve the originally proposed benefits, and too few organizations are able to identify and address the root causes of those shortfalls.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In reality, benefits realization process extends across the entire project life cycle: during intake, during the execution of the project, and after project completion. Be mindful of this extended scope when you discuss benefits realization in the following activity.

    Keep project benefits front and center with a repeatable benefits realization process

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for benefits realization.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's four-step process for benefits realization. There are four groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Business Analysts', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Quantify and validate benefits in business case' which happens 'Before Project' and involves 'Business Analysts' and 'Project Managers'. Step 2 is 'Update projected project benefits' which happens 'During Project' and involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'. Step 3 is 'Hand-off benefits realization ownership' which happens at the end of project and involves 'Project Managers', 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'. Step 4 is 'Monitor and report on benefits' which happens 'After Project' and involves 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    At the heart of benefits realization is accountability: who is held accountable for projects that don’t realize the benefits and how? Without the buy-in from the entire executive layer team, addressing this issue is very difficult.

    Determine your benefits realization process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: benefits realization capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the benefits realization process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedProject sponsors and key stakeholders are accountable for stated project benefits before, during and after the project. There is a process to maximize the realization of project benefits.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedProject benefits are forecasted and taken into account for approval, updated when changes are made to the project, and monitored/reported after projects are completed.
    Capability Level 3: EngagedProject benefits are forecasted and taken into account for approval, and there is a loosely defined process to report on benefits realization.
    Capability Level 2: DefinedProject benefits are forecasted and taken into account for approval, but there is no process to monitor whether the said benefits are realized.
    Capability Level 1: UnmanagedProjects are approved and initiated without discussing benefits.

    Benchmark the current benefits realization process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the benefits realization process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    StartStopContinue
    • Require “hard monetary value” in business benefits
    • Send project updates before resource management meetings

    Set near- and long-term action items for the benefits realization process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Create an “orientation for project sponsors” document.
    • Encourage project managers to re-validate project benefits on an ongoing basis and report any deviation.
    For example:
    • Recruit the finance department’s help in benefits tracking.
    • Require Finance’s sign-off on project benefits in business cases during intake.

    Review and customize slide 35, “Benefits realization: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the benefits realization process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: benefits realization
      Validate benefits in business case –› Update project benefits during execution –› Hand-off benefits ownership –› Monitor and report on benefits


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      InputWhat information do you need to perform the work?
      OutputWhat artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/TimingHow often, and when, will the work be performed?
      ResponsibilityWho will perform the work?
      AccountabilityWho will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?

    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new benefits realization process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new benefits realization process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Updated business plan templates.
    • Communication plan for project sponsors.

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Establish the Benefits Realization Process blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 36, “Benefits realization: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of activity 2.1.1 'Align your project intake, prioritization, and approval process to the PPM strategy'. Align your project intake, prioritization, and approval process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Sample of activity 2.1.2 'Align your resource management process to the PPM strategy'. Align your resource management process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Sample of activity 2.2.1 'Align your portfolio reporting process to the PPM strategy'.Align your portfolio reporting process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Sample of activity 2.2.2 'Align your project closure process to the PPM strategy'.Align your project closure process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Sample of activity 2.2.3 'Align your benefits realization process to the PPM strategy'.Align your benefits realization process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    PHASE 3

    Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Complete your PPM strategic plan

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 3.1: Select a right-sized PPM solutionStep 3.2: Finalize your PPM Strategic Plan Template
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Assess your PPM tool requirements to help support your processes.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Determine the costs and potential benefits of your PPM strategy.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Determine the functionality requirements of the PPM solution.
    • Estimate your PPM tool budget.
    • Review the tool assessment.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Estimate the total cost-in-use of managing the project portfolio.
    • Estimate the benefits of the PPM strategy.
    • Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive implementation plan.
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Phase 3 Insight:

    • Approach PPM as an evolving discipline that requires adaptability and long-term organizational change. Near-term process improvements should create stakeholder desire for better portfolio visibility and agility over the long term.

    Step 3.1: Select a right-sized PPM solution for supporting your new processes

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine the functionality requirements of a PPM solution in the near and long terms.
    • Estimate your PPM tool budget.
    • Review tool assessment.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of functional requirements for a PPM solution
    • An estimate budget and cost for supporting a PPM tool in the near and long terms
    • PPM tool requirements for the near and long terms

    Right-size your PPM solution/tool to fit your PPM processes

    Avoid a common pitfall: the disconnect between PPM processes and PPM tools.

    PPM tools act as both a receptacle for portfolio data generated by your processes and a source of portfolio data to drive your processes forward. Therefore, choosing a suitable PPM tool is critical to the success of your PPM strategy:

    • PPM tool inputs must match the type, level of detail, and amount of portfolio data generated by your PPM processes.
    • PPM tool outputs must be useful, insightful, easy to access, and easy to understand for people who engage in your PPM processes.

    User adoption is an often cited cause of failed PPM tool implementation:

    "The biggest problem is getting the team to work with the tool. We need to make sure that we’re not wasting time delving too far down into the tool, yet putting enough information to get useful information back." (IT Director, Financial Services)

    This final step of the blueprint will discuss the choice of PPM tools to ensure the success of PPM strategy by avoiding the process-tool disconnect.

    Common pitfalls for PPM tools

    • Purchasing and implementing a PPM tool before the process is defined and accepted.
    • Poor expectation setting: inability of tools to perform the necessary analysis.
    • Underleveraged: low user/process adoption.
    • Poor integration with the corporate finance function.
    • (WGroup, 2017)

    Leverage PPM tools to get the information you need

    An optimized PPM solution is the vehicle that provides decision makers with four key pieces of information they require when making decisions for your project portfolio:

    • Historical Insight – inform decision makers about how much time and resources have been spent to date, and benchmark the accuracy of prior project estimates and resource allocations.
    • Forecasting – provide a trustworthy estimate of demand on resources and current projects.
    • Portfolio Analytics – analyze portfolio data and generate easy-to-consume reports that provide answers to questions such as:
      • How big is our overall portfolio?
      • How much money/resource time is available?
      • How efficiently are we using our resources?
    • Project Visibility – provide a trustworthy report on the status of current projects and the resources working on them.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Without the proper information, decision makers are driving blind and are forced to make gut feel decisions as opposed to data-informed decisions. Implement a PPM solution to allocate projects properly and ensure time and money don’t vanish without being accounted for.

    Commercial PPM tools have more functionality but are more costly, complex, and difficult to adopt

    • Granular timesheet management
    • Workflow and team collaboration
    • Robust data and application integration
    • Advanced what-if planning
    • Mobile usability
    A map comparing commercial PPM tools by 'Functionality', 'Cost', and 'Difficulty to implement/adopt'. 'Functionality' and 'Difficulty to implement/adopt' share an axis and can be assumed to have a linear relationship. 'Spreadsheets' are low functionality and low cost. 'Google Sites' are low to middling functionality and low cost. 'SharePoint' is middling functionality with a slightly higher cost. The next three start at middling cost and above-average functionality and trend higher in both categories: 'Commercial Entry-Level PPM', 'Commercial Mid-Market PPM', and 'Commercial Enterprise PPM'.
    • Business case scoring and prioritization
    • Multi-user reporting and request portal
    • High-level resource management
    • Project status, cost, and risk tracking

    "Price tags [for PPM tools] vary considerably. Expensive products don't always provide more capability. Inexpensive products are generally low cost for good reason." (Merkhofer)

    Your PPM tool options are not limited to commercial offerings

    Despite the rapid growth in the commercial PPM tool market today, homegrown approaches like spreadsheets and intranet sites continue to be used as PPM tools.

    Kinds of PPM solutions used by Info-Tech clients

    A pie chart visualizing the kinds of PPM solutions that are used by Info-Tech clients. There are three sections, the largest of which is 'Spreadsheet-based, 46%', then 'Commercial, 33%', then 'No solution, 21%'. (Source: Info-Tech Research Group (2016), N=433)

    Category

    Characteristics

    PPM maturity

    Enterprise tool
    • Higher professional services requirements for enterprise deployment
    • Larger reference customers
    High
    Mid-market tool
    • Lower expectation of professional services engaged in initial deployment contract
    • Fewer globally recognizable reference clients
    • Faster deployments
    High
    Entry-level tool
    • Lower cost than mid-market & enterprise PPM tools
    • Limited configurability, reporting, and resource management functionalities
    • Compelling solutions to the organizations that wants to get a fast start to a trial deployment
    Intermediate
    Spreadsheet based
    • Little/no up-front cost, highly customizable to suit your organization’s needs
    • Varying degrees of sophistication
    • Few people in the organization may understand the logic behind the tool; knowledge may not be easily transferrable
    Intermediate Low

    Determine the functional requirements of the PPM solution

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.1 – 20 minutes

    INPUT: PPM strategic plan

    OUTPUT: Modified PPM strategic plan with a proposed choice of PPM tool

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, IT Managers

    Use the Tool Assessment tab (tab 4) of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool to rate and analyze functional requirements of your PPM solution.

    • Review the list of PPM features provided on column B of tab 4. You can add any desired features not listed.
    • Rate your near-term and long-term feature requirements using the drop-down menus in columns C and D. Your selections here will inform the tool selection bubble chart to the right of the features list.

    Screenshot showing the features list on tab 4 of the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Estimate your PPM tool budget

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.2 – 20 minutes

    INPUT: PPM strategic plan

    OUTPUT: Modified PPM strategic plan with a proposed choice of PPM tool

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: CIO, PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, IT Managers

    Enter the PPM tool budget information on the Tool Assessment tab of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    • As a starting point, it can help to know that low-priced PPM tools cost around $1,000 per user per year. High-priced PPM tools cost around $3,000 per user per year.
    • Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)-based pricing for PPM solutions is increasingly popular. If you plan to purchase perpetual licensing, divide the total implementation and licensing cost by three years to be comparable with a three-year SaaS total cost of ownership analysis.

    Screenshot showing the tool assessment from the PPM Strategy Development Tool with 'Near-Term' and 'Long-Term' budget columns. Notes include 'Enter the number of fully licensed PPM users you expect to provision for and your estimated annual budget for a PPM tool', 'The tool assessment automatically calculates your annual budget per user, which is reflected in the bubble chart analysis (see next slide)'.

    Review the tool assessment graphic

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.3 – 20 minutes

    The map comparing commercial PPM tools from before, this time overlaid with 'Near-Term' and 'Long-Term' budgets as coloured circles. The vertical axis is 'Functionality Rating' and the horizontal axis is now 'Annual Cost/Budget per User'. 'Spreadsheets' are low functionality and low cost. 'Google Sites' are low to middling functionality and low cost. 'SharePoint' is middling functionality with a slightly higher cost. The 'Near-Term' budget circle covers those three tools. The next three start at middling cost and above-average functionality and trend higher in both categories: 'Commercial Entry-Level PPM', 'Commercial Mid-Market PPM', and 'Commercial Enterprise PPM'. The 'Long-Term' budget circle covers 'Commercial Mid-Market PPM'.

    If you are in one of the non-covered areas, consider revisiting your functional requirements and PPM strategy. You may need to lessen your expectations to be able to stay within your budget, or find a way to get more money.

    Keep in mind that the long-term goal can be to work towards a commercial tool, while the short-term goal would be to be able to maintain your portfolio in a simple spreadsheet first.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you choose a commercial solution, you will need to gain executive buy-in in order to implement the tool; proceed to near-term and long-term plans to get the ball rolling on this decision.

    Review and customize slide 37, “Tools for PPM: proposed near- and long-term solutions,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Grow your own, or select and implement, a PPM solution with Info-Tech

    Whether you choose spreadsheet-based or commercially available PPM solutions, use Info-Tech’s research for scoping, designing, and implementing them.

    Info-Tech’s Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint will help you implement a highly evolved spreadsheet-based PPM solution. It features the Portfolio Manager 2017, a Microsoft Excel-based workbook that leverages its business intelligence features to provide a basis for implementing a scalable, highly customizable PPM tool with useful and easy-to-manipulate analytics.

    Read Info-Tech’s Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint.

    Info-Tech’s Select and Implement a PPM Solution blueprint is part of our Vendor Landscape research. Make sense of the diversity of PPM solutions available in today’s market, and choose the most appropriate solutions for your organization’s size and level of PPM maturity.

    Read Info-Tech’s Select and Implement a PPM Solution blueprint.

    A right-sized PPM strategy leads to a right-sized portfolio management tool based on Info-Tech’s template

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Energy
    Source: Info-Tech Client

    “The approach makes it easy to run the portfolio without taking time away from the project themselves.” (IT Manager, Energy Resources Firm)

    Situation

    • A small IT department struggled with balancing project work with ongoing operational management and support work.
    • The department includes experienced and successful project managers and a mature, skilled team.
    • However, the nature of the department’s role has evolved to the point where the project and operational work demands have exceeded the available time.
    • Prioritization needed to become more centralized and formalized while management control of the work assignments became increasingly decentralized.

    Complication

    • Agile projects offer clear advantages by lightening the requirement for proactive planning. However, getting the staff to adapt would be challenging because of the overall workload and competing priorities.
    • Some of the team’s time needed to be carefully tracked and reported for time & materials-based billing, but the time sheet system was unsuited to their portfolio management needs.
    • Commercial PPM systems were ruled out because strict task management seemed unlikely to gain adoption.

    Resolution

    • The team deployed Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Workbook, based on a Microsoft Excel template, and the Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint.
    • For the first time, executive leadership was given a 12-month forecast of resource capacity based on existing and pending project commitments. The data behind the capacity forecast was based on allocating people to projects with a percentage of their time for each calendar month.
    • The data behind the forecast is high level but easily maintainable.

    Step 3.2: Finalize customizing your PPM Strategic Plan Template

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine the costs of support your PPM strategic plan.
    • Estimate some of the benefits of your PPM strategic plan.
    • Perform a cost-benefit analysis.
    • Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive plan.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • A cost/benefit analyst
    • An implementation action plan
    • A finalized PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Estimate the total cost-in-use of managing the project portfolio

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.1 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 5: Costing Summary

    The time cost of PPM processes (tab 3) and PPM tool costs (tab 4) are summarized in this tab. Enter additional data to estimate the total PPM cost-in-use: the setup information and the current cost of PPM software tools.

    Screenshot of the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 5: Costing Summary. Notes include 'If unknown, the overall HR budget of your project portfolio can be estimated as: (# FTEs) * (fully-loaded FTE cost per hour) * 1800', 'This is your total PPM cost-in-use'.

    Estimate the benefits of managing the project portfolio

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.2 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 6: Benefits Assumptions

    The benefits of PPM processes are estimated by projecting the sources of waste on your resource capacity.

    1. Estimate the current extent of waste on your resource capacity. If you have completed Info-Tech’s PPM Current Score Scorecard, enter the data from the report.
    2. Screenshot of a Waste Assessment pie chart from the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 6: Benefits Assumptions.
    3. Given your near- and long-term action items for improving PPM processes, estimate how each source of waste on your resource capacity will change.
    4. Screenshot of a Waste Assessment table titled 'These inputs represent the percentage of your overall portfolio budget that is wasted in each scenario' from the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 6: Benefits Assumptions.

    Review the cost-benefit analysis results and update the PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.3 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 7: Conclusion Screenshot of a 'PPM Strategy Cost-Benefit Analysis' from the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 7: Conclusion. It has tables on top and bar charts underneath.

    This tab summarizes the costs and benefits of your PPM strategic plan.

    • Costs are estimated from wasted project capacity and time spent on PPM process work.
    • Benefits are estimated from the project capacity to be reclaimed as a result of improvements in PPM.
    • Return on investment is calculated by dividing the value of project capacity to be reclaimed by investment in PPM in addition to the current-state cost.

    Capture this summary in your PPM strategic plan.

    Customize slides 40 and 41, “Return on PPM investment,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Determine who will be responsible for coordinating the flow, collection, and reporting of portfolio data

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.3 – Project Portfolio/PMO Analyst Job Description

    You will need to determine responsibilities and accountabilities for portfolio management functions within your team.

    If you do not have a clearly identifiable portfolio manager at this time, you will need to clarify who will wear which hats in terms of facilitating intake and prioritization, high-level capacity awareness, and portfolio reporting.

    • Use Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template to help clarify some of the required responsibilities to support your PPM strategy.
      • If you need to bring in an additional staff member to help support the strategy, you can customize the job description template to help advertise the position. Simply edit the text in grey within the template.
    • If you have other PPM tasks that you need to define responsibilities for, you can use the RASCI chart on the final tab of the PPM Strategy Develop Tool.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template.

    Sample of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template.

    Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive plan

    Associated Activity icon 3.2.4 – 30 minutes

    INPUT: Near-term action items

    OUTPUT: Near-term action plan

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Collect the near-term action items for each of the five PPM processes and arrange them into a table that outlines the near-term action plan. Once it is compiled, adjust the timeline and responsibility so that the plan is coherent and realistic as a whole.

    Example:

    Outcome

    Action required

    Timeline

    Responsibility

    Determine the percentage distribution of project vs. non-project work Run a time audit survey with all project resources 2 weeks Resource managers
    Test a simple dashboard for project status Pilot Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager 2017 workbook 2 weeks PMO Director

    "There is a huge risk of taking on too much too soon, especially with the introduction of specific tools and tool sets. There is also an element of risk involved that can lead to failure and disappointment with PPM if these tools are not properly introduced and supported." (Jim Carse, Director of the Portfolio Office, Queen’s University)

    Review and customize slide 43, “Summary of near-term action plan,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Finalize and publish your PPM strategic plan

    Table of Contents

    Read over the document to ensure its completeness and consistency.

    At this point, you have a PPM strategic plan that is actionable and realistic, which addresses the goals set by the senior leadership.

    The executive brief establishes the need for PPM strategy, the goals and metrics are set by members of the senior leadership that gave the initial buy-in, and the target states of PPM processes that meet those goals are described. Finally, the costs and benefits of the improved PPM practice are laid out in a way that can be validated.

    The next step for your PPM strategy is to use this document as a foundation for implementing and operationalizing the target-state PPM processes.

    Review and publish the document for your executive layer and key project stakeholders. Solicit their feedback.

    Info-Tech has a library of blueprints that will guide you through each of the five processes. Contact your Info-Tech account manager or Info-Tech analyst to get started.

    • Project Portfolio Management Strategy
      • Strategic Expectations
      • Overview
    • Leadership Mandate
    • Project Demand and Resource Supply
    • The Current State of Resource Utilization
    • PPM Processes
      • Project intake, prioritization, and approval
      • Resource management
      • Portfolio reporting
      • Project closure
      • Benefits realization
      • Tools for PPM
    • The Economic Impact of PPM
    • PPM Strategy Next Steps

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of activity 3.1 'Scope the right-sized PPM solution for your PPM strategy'. Scope the right-sized PPM solution for your PPM strategy

    Use the PPM Strategy Development Tool to quickly determine our near- and long-term recommendation for your PPM solution.

    Sample of activity 3.2 'Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of your PPM strategic plan'. Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of your PPM strategic plan

    Using the time cost estimates of each process and the requirement for a PPM tool, Info-Tech helps you quantify the overhead costs of PPM and estimate the monetary benefits of reclaimed project capacity for your project portfolio.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    • Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a top-down PPM strategy. Ensure your executives are on board before preceding to implement your PPM strategy.

    Insight 2

    • The means of project and portfolio management (i.e. processes) shouldn’t eclipse the ends – strategic goals. Root your process in your PPM strategic goals to realize PPM benefits (e.g. optimized portfolio value, improved project throughput, increased stakeholder satisfaction).

    Insight 3

    • Without the proper information, decision makers are driving blind and are forced to make gut-feel decisions as opposed to data-informed decisions. Implement a PPM solution to allocate projects properly and ensure time and money don’t vanish without being accounted for.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Info-Tech’s thought model on PPM processes that create an infrastructure around projects
    • Your current state of project portfolio: project capacity vs. project demand
    • Importance of gaining executive buy-in for installing the PPM practice

    Processes Optimized

    • Project intake, prioritization, and approval process
    • Resource management process
    • Portfolio reporting process
    • Project closure process
    • Benefits realization process

    Deliverables Completed

    • Choice of PPM strategy and the leadership mandate
    • Analysis of current project capacity and demand
    • PPM process goals and metrics, aligned to meet PPM strategic expectations
    • PPM process capability levels
    • Retrospective examination of current state, near/long-term action items for improvement, and high-level descriptions of the five PPM processes
    • Recommendation of PPM tools to support the processes
    • Estimate of PPM overhead costs
    • Cost-benefit analysis of PPM practice
    • PPM strategic plan

    Related Info-Tech Research

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy
    • Grow Your Own PPM Solution
    • Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization
    • Develop a Resource Management Strategy for the New Reality
    • Manage a Minimum-Viable PMO
    • Establish the Benefits Realization Process
    • Manage an Agile Portfolio
    • Establish the Benefits Realization Process
    • Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program
      The Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program is a low-effort, high-impact program designed to help project owners assess and improve their PPM practices. Gather and report on all aspects of your PPM environment in order to understand where you stand and how you can improve.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Kiron D. Bondale PMP, PMI-RMP, CDAP, CDAI, Senior Project Portfolio Management Professional Kiron D. Bondale PMP, PMI-RMP, CDAP, CDAI
    Senior Project Portfolio Management Professional

    Kiron has worked in the project management domain for more than fifteen years managing multiple projects, leading Project Management Offices (PMO) and providing project portfolio management consulting services to over a hundred clients across multiple industries. He has been an active member of the Project Management Institute (PMI) since 1999 and served as a volunteer director on the Board of the PMI Lakeshore Chapter for six years. Kiron has published articles on project and project portfolio management in multiple journals and has delivered over a hundred webinar presentations on a variety of PPM and PM topics and has presented at multiple industry conferences. Since 2009, Kiron has been blogging on a weekly basis on project management topics and responds to questions daily in the LinkedIn PMI Project, Program and Portfolio Management discussion group.

    Photo of Shaun Cahill, Project Manager, Queen’s University Shaun Cahill, Project Manager &
    Jim Carse, Director of the Project Portfolio Office
    Queen’s University

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Amy Fowler Stadler, Managing Partner, Lewis Fowler Amy Fowler Stadler, Managing Partner
    Lewis Fowler

    Amy has more than 20 years of experience in business and technology, most recently owning her own management consulting firm since 2002, focused on business transformation, technology enablement, and operational improvement. Prior to that, she was at CenturyLink (formerly Qwest) as an IT Director, Perot Systems in various roles, and Information Handling Services, Inc. as a Software Development Product Manager.

    Amy holds a bachelor’s degree in Computer Science with a minor in Business Communications and is also a 2015 Hall of Fame inductee to Illinois State University College of Applied Science and Technology.

    Photo of Rick Morris, President, R2 Consulting LLC Rick Morris, President
    R2 Consulting LLC

    Rick A. Morris, PMP, is a certified Scrum Agile Master, Human Behavior Consultant, best-selling author, mentor, and evangelist for project management. Rick is an accomplished project manager and public speaker. His appetite for knowledge and passion for the profession makes him an internationally sought after speaker delivering keynote presentations for large conferences and PMI events around the world. He holds the PMP (Project Management Professional), MPM (Masters of Project Management), Scrum Agile Master, OPM3, Six Sigma Green Belt, MCITP, MCTS, MCSE, TQM, ATM-S, ITIL, and ISO certifications, and is a John Maxwell Certified Speaker, Mentor, and Coach. Rick is the Owner of R2 Consulting, LLC and has worked for organizations such as GE, Xerox, and CA, and has consulted with numerous clients in a wide variety of industries including financial services, entertainment, construction, non-profit, hospitality, pharmaceutical, retail, and manufacturing.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Terry Lee Ricci PgMP, PfMP, PMP, PPM Practice Lead, IAG Consulting Terry Lee Ricci PgMP, PfMP, PMP, PPM Practice Lead
    IAG Consulting

    Terry is passionate and highly skilled at PMO transformation, developing high-performing teams that sustain long-term business results. Terry has a reputation built upon integrity, resourcefulness, and respect. She has the vision to implement long and short-term strategies, meeting both current and evolving business needs.

    Change Management/Business transformation: Terry has extensive background in PMO strategy development aligned to corporate goals. Many years in the PMO organization integration/transformation building or overhauling programs and processes.

    Governance: Terry loves to monitor and measure performance and outcomes and uses her collaborative style to successfully bring simplicity to complexity (technology – people – process). Performance optimization results are easy to use and clearly define who is doing what across functions. End results consistently align to business strategy while mitigating risks effectively.

    Comprehensive: A “through the ranks” executive with a comprehensive understanding of PMO operations, high-performance teams, and the respective business units they support.

    Photo of Alana Ruckstuhl MSc, IT Project Officer, Federal Economic Development Agency for Southern Ontario Alana Ruckstuhl MSc, IT Project Officer
    Federal Economic Development Agency for Southern Ontario

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Jay Wardle, Director of the PMO, Red Wing Shoes Co. Jay Wardle, Director of the PMO
    Red Wing Shoes Co.
    Photo of Bob White, Vice President/Chief Information Officer, ALM Holding Company Bob White, Vice President/Chief Information Officer
    ALM Holding Company

    As vice president and chief information officer for ALM Holding Company, Bob White directs all technology activity and support for three main verticals: road construction, energy management, and delivery and transportation. He has been with ALM Holding Company for one and a half years, focusing on PPM process improvement, cybersecurity initiatives, and IT service management.

    Prior to joining ALM, Bob was executive vice president/chief information officer at Ashley Furniture Industries, Inc. where he led the strategic direction, implementation, and management of information technology throughout the company’s global operations. Bob has also held VP/CIO positions at the Stride Rite Corporation and Timex Corporation.

    Bob holds a Master’s degree in Operations Management from the University of Arkansas and a Bachelor of Science degree in Industrial Engineering from Southern Illinois University.

    Bibliography

    Bersin, Josh. “Time to Scrap Performance Appraisals?” Forbes Magazine, 5 June 2013. Web. 30 Oct 2013.

    Cheese, Peter et al. “Creating an Agile Organization.” Accenture, Oct. 2009. Web. Nov. 2013.

    Croxon, Bruce et al. “Dinner Series: Performance Management with Bruce Croxon from CBC's 'Dragon's Den'” HRPA Toronto Chapter. Sheraton Hotel, Toronto, ON. 12 Nov. 2013. Panel discussion.

    Culbert, Samuel. “10 Reasons to Get Rid of Performance Reviews.” Huffington Post Business, 18 Dec. 2012. Web. 28 Oct. 2013.

    Denning, Steve. “The Case Against Agile: Ten Perennial Management Objections.” Forbes Magazine, 17 Apr. 2012. Web. Nov. 2013.

    Estis, Ryan. “Blowing up the Performance Review: Interview with Adobe’s Donna Morris.” Ryan Estis & Associates, 17 June 2013. Web. Oct. 2013.

    Gallup, Inc. “Gallup Study: Engaged Employees Inspire Company Innovation.” Gallup Management Journal, 12 Oct. 2006. Web. 12 Jan 2012.

    Gartside, David et al. “Trends Reshaping the Future of HR.” Accenture, 2013. Web. 5 Nov. 2013.

    KeyedIn Solutions. “Why PPM and PMOs Fail.” KeyedIn Projects, 2013. Ebook.

    Lessing, Lawrence. Free Culture. Lulu Press Inc.: 30 July 2016.

    Merkhofer, Lee. “Keys to Implementing Project Portfolio Management.” Lee Merkhofer Consulting, 2017.

    Perry, Mark Price. Business Driven Project Portfolio Management. J Ross Pub: 17 May 2011.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2015: Capturing the Value of Project Management.” PMI, Feb. 2015. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2016: The High Cost of Low Performance.” PMI, 2016. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2017: Success Rates Rise.” PMI, 2017. Web.

    Project Management Institute. The Standard for Portfolio Management – Third Edition. PMI: 1 Dec. 2012.

    WGroup. “Common Pitfalls in Project Portfolio Management – Part 2.” WGroup, 24 Jan. 2017. Web.

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}486|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $9,246 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Selecting the Wrong Resources: You need ITSM technology and process experts, because this is not just a technology project, but also a process improvement opportunity.
    • Over-Reliance on the Vendor to Optimize Your Tool: Yes, the vendor will typically install and set up the tool, but they will not fix your processes for you.
    • Not Preparing for Data Migration: Data migration is complex. You need to determine what data to migrate, if any, and how that data will be mapped to the new environment.
    • Insufficient IT and End-User Training: A link to the ITSM tool manual is not enough. Staff and users need training on how your processes will be executed in the new tool.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Start with the assumption you don’t need to migrate old data.
    • ITSM tools are designed to support ITIL best practices.
    • Implement your new tool in stages to manage scope.

    Impact and Result

    • Ability to plan and scope the project to avoid or reduce last-minute chaos.
    • Opportunity to review and optimize processes as part of the ITSM tool implementation project.
    • Improved project management, and therefore, better cost and effort estimates, by identifying required tasks upfront.

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan Deck – An implementation guide that walks you through the steps to ensure the tool delivers business value.

    There may be hundreds of parameters to define and decisions to make, so identifying the full list of tasks early is critical for the success of the implementation project.

    • Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan – Phases 1-3

    2. ITSM Tool Project Charter Template – A charter to document your project scope, milestones, stakeholders, risks etc. to kick-off and manage your project.

    This project charter document summarizes the Project Overview (Description, background, drivers, and objectives), Governance and Management (Project stakeholders/roles, budget, and dependencies), and Risk, Assumptions, and Constraints (Known and potential risks and mitigation strategy).

    • ITSM Tool Implementation Project Charter Template

    3. ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist – A tool to help identify the most common decisions you will need to make and prepare for your implementation project.

    The checklists in this tool identify the most common decisions and preparation you will need to make to support the implementation for the ITSM modules that we recommend are set up first: incident management and service requests; change management; and asset management. Use these checklists as a model to follow for any additional ITSM modules you plan to implement, and refer to Info-Tech's blueprints for each service management topic for additional guidance.

    • ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    4. ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template – A tool to help prioritize and prepare for tool rollout plan.

    This deployment plan documents the strategy and decisions made for making the transition to the new ITSM tool, and the details to execute the cutover to a live environment, including how, when, where.

    • ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    5. ITSM Tool Training Schedule – Use the tool to create your new tool training roadmap.

    This template is a guide for creating a training and communication plan as part of the implementation project for your ITSM tool. Use the template to document and plan the communications and training needs prior to deployment of the new tool.

    • ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

    Plan ahead with a step-by-step approach to ensure the tool delivers business value.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst perspective

    Take control of the wheel or you might end up in a ditch.

    The image contains a picture of Frank Trovato.

    An ITSM tool implementation is a complex project with direct impact on IT’s ability to support the business. With that level of risk, you need to take control early on.

    Yes, your vendor will support or execute the technical implementation, but they depend on you to tell them how to configure ITSM parameters and workflows that affect user interface, the ability to manage incidents, and governance over assets and IT changes.

    If you leave the configuration completely to the vendor, at best you might get the same setup as in your old tool (and not realize the benefits that leadership is expecting). At worst you end up with default values that don’t fit your process needs, i.e., confusion and not realizing expected benefits.

    A successful implementation requires early planning from a wide range of resources including ITSM tool experts (supported by the vendor), process experts, and a project manager to methodically step through the hundreds of parameters you will need to define before implementation.

    Frank Trovato
    Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Leadership has invested significantly in a new ITSM tool and expects to see the benefits they were promised by the vendor and the procurement team.

    The ITSM project team needs to balance leadership expectations with the direct impact this project will have on IT staff and end users.

    Implementing an ITSM tool is a large project that is often highly complex in part because it requires input from a wide range of stakeholders: IT staff, end users, senior management, and vendors.

    A new ITSM tool will change how IT staff work and how users are serviced, and change is always difficult.

    Finally, implementing the new tool requires a migration from an existing tool without a pause in IT service availability. Incidents don’t take a week off while you execute the final product rollout.

    There may be hundreds of parameters to define and decisions to make, so identifying the full list of tasks early is critical to:

    • Identify the necessary stakeholders to provide input into implementation decisions.
    • Properly define scope and timelines.
    • Take advantage of the opportunity to review and improve processes as part of defining what will need to be configured in the new ITSM tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As with any large project, a key step is tackling it one bite at a time – but also understanding the size of the whole meal. This is where organizations often fail with ITSM implementations: not understanding upfront the volume of work required for a successful implementation.

    Your Challenge

    Organizations implementing a new ITSM tool often face these pitfalls:

    • Selecting the Wrong Resources: You need ITSM technology and process experts, because this is not just a technology project but also a process improvement opportunity. You will need to configure ITSM parameters and workflows in the new tool – which directly affects processes. Take advantage of that opportunity to fix pain points. For example, if your existing ticket categories are not effective, implement a better categorization scheme rather than just configure the same old, ineffective scheme.
    • Over-Reliance on the Vendor to Optimize Your Tool: Yes, the vendor will typically install and set up the tool but they will not fix your processes for you. On installation day, if you are not prepared with the categories, ticket templates, and so on that you wish to configure, your vendor will just go with the default or migrate your old parameters from your old ITSM tool.
    • Not Preparing for Data Migration: Data migration is complex. You need to determine what data to migrate, if any, and how that data will be mapped to the new environment. That takes planning and must be defined well before the vendor is ready to implement your tool.
    • Insufficient IT and End-User Training: A link to the ITSM tool manual is not enough. Staff and users need training on how your processes will be executed in the new tool.

    A survey of implementation challenges for ServiceNow’s customers

    26% Resistance to change

    43% Lacked a clear roadmap

    38% Planning for resources

    Source: Acorio, 2019

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Divide the implementation project into controllable phases for an effective implementation.

    Plan

    Define the scope of your project, identify and get buy-in from your stakeholders, and establish a timeframe for the implementation.

    Design & Build

    Identify existing process challenges and design workflows and ticket management to improve processes. Make decisions on data migrations and integrations for your new tool.

    Deploy & Train

    Create a rollout plan and communicate changes and improvements to users. Plan for the new tool deployment and monitor your solution.

    STOP: Use this blueprint after you have selected an ITSM solution

    Leverage our SoftwareReviews service and related blueprints to assist with ITSM tool selection, and then use this blueprint to plan the implementation.

    1. Evaluate solutions

    2. Select and purchase

    3. Implement (use this blueprint)

    Use our SoftwareReviews resources to evaluate solutions and vendors based on criteria such as features and customer service. Below are links to our ITSM software reviews:

    Use the following resources to help you make the case for funding and execute the purchase process:

    Your ITSM vendor or systems integrator will lead the technical implementation (e.g. software install and integration).

    As a result, your implementation plan needs to focus on preparing the information needed for implementation (e.g. ticket categories, workflow requirements) and organizational change management.

    This blueprint provides a methodology, checklist, and supporting templates to prepare for the implementation.

    Info-Tech’s methodology to build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

    1. Identify Scope, Stakeholders, and Preliminary Timeline

    2. Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    3. Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Document define scope

    1.2 Define roles and responsibilities

    1.3 Identify preliminary timeline

    2.1 Review your existing solution and challenges

    2.2 Plan ticket management and workflow implementation

    2.3 Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations

    2.4 Plan the module rollout

    3.1 Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)

    3.2 Create a training plan

    3.3 Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    Phase Outcomes

    • RACI chart outlining high-level accountability and responsibilities for the project
    • Documenting timeline and team for the implementation project
    • ITSM tool implementation checklist
    • Strategy and identified opportunities to implement incident and service request modules
    • Documented communications and targeted training plan
    • Completed rollout plan and prepared to monitor your success metrics

    Insight summary

    Start with the assumption you don’t need to migrate old data

    ITSM tools are designed to support ITIL best practices

    Implement your new tool in stages to manage scope

    We all love data. We love being able to run reports showing trends, measuring changes over time, and highlighting pain points – but is your data from five years ago relevant to those assessments? Can you get by with just migrating open tickets and perhaps just the last year of critical tickets?

    Be ruthless in deciding what really needs to be in your active system to support incident matching, troubleshooting, or ongoing reporting.

    If you can’t make a strong case, don’t waste your time on old data. Remember, you can still save an exported copy or report of your old data if the need arises to search historical records.

    For organizations lacking process maturity, the tool’s default settings will often provide a good starting point. For example, a good ITSM tool will typically already be configured to follow best practices such as:

    • Separating incidents from service requests
    • Assigning resolution codes to solved tickets
    • Enabling routing based on categories

    Within those defaults, you will still need to decide your specific parameters – e.g. what your categories and resolution codes should be – so don’t blindly follow default settings but use them as a starting point.

    Start with the incident management and service requests modules. Those are typically the core of IT service management operations, so that should help realize benefits from the new tool sooner. In addition, incident management and service requests processes will support other ITSM processes such as asset management and problem management.

    Once those modules are implemented successfully (from a technology and process perspective), then start to implement your next core module (e.g. asset or change management), and continue to build from there.

    Blueprint deliverables

    This blueprint includes tools and templates to help you accomplish your goals:

    ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    Identify the most common decisions you will need to make and prepare for your implementation project.

    ITSM Tool Project Charter Template

    Review and edit the template to suit your project requirements

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Project Charter Template.
    The image contains screenshots of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist.

    ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    Prioritize and prepare tool rollout plan

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template.

    ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    Use the checklist to create your new tool training roadmap

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Training Schedule.

    Blueprint benefits

    Benefits for IT

    Benefits for the business

    • Checklists and templates to support a smoother transition to the new ITSM tool.
    • Opportunity to review and optimize processes as part of the ITSM tool implementation project. A new tool with the same old processes will not achieve expected benefits.
    • Ability to plan and scope the project to avoid or reduce last-minute chaos.
    • Better planning means better results – specifically, ensuring that the implementation takes into account targeted business benefits.
    • Improved project management, and therefore better cost and effort estimates, by identifying required tasks upfront. This also provides the opportunity to re-scope or adjust timelines based on estimated effort.
    • Higher end-user satisfaction by executing a well-organized ITSM tool implementation.

    Measured value from using this blueprint

    Use this guide as an example to calculate your total cost savings from the ITSM tool implementation project.

    Phase 1

    Identify Scope, Stakeholders, and Preliminary Timeline

    Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to define scope and plan your project

    E.g. 2 FTEs * 6 days * $80,000/year = $4,000/-

    Phase 2

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to build your solution strategy and determine configurations

    E.g. 2 FTEs * 8 days * $80,000/year = $5,400/-

    Phase 3

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to establish an effective communications roadmap and deploy tool

    E.g. 2 FTEs * 6 days * $80,000/year = $4,000/-

    Total Savings

    Total Savings

    Phase 1 + Phase 2 + Phase 3 = $13,400

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Define scope, roles, responsibilities and timeline.

    Call #2: Review your existing solution and challenges.

    Call #3: Plan ticket management and workflow implementation.

    Call #4: Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations.

    Call #5: Plan the module rollout.

    Call #6: Create a communication plan.

    Call #7: Create a training plan.

    Call #8: Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    1. Define scope
    2. Define roles and responsibilities
    3. Identify preliminary timeline

    Step 1.1

    Define scope

    Activities

    1.1.1

    Use the Project Charter Template to capture project parameters

    1.1.2

    Leverage the Implementation Checklist to guide your preparation

    1.1.3

    Review goals that drove the ITSM tool purchase

    1.1.4

    Interview ITSM staff to identify current tool challenges and support organizational change management

    1.1.5

    Identify the modules and features you will plan to implement

    1.1.6

    Determine if data migration is required

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define the scope of the implementation project
    • Establish the future processes and functionalities the tool will support

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director/Manager
    • Service Manager
    • Project Manager and the project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Specifying the implementation project
    • Identifying the business units that are needed to support the project
    • Defining the ongoing and future service management processes the tool will support

    1.1.1 Use the Project Charter Template to capture scope, stakeholders, and timeline as outlined in Phase 1

    Follow the instructions in Phase 1 (step 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3) to gather information needed to create a project charter to define project parameters.

    Specific subsections are listed below and described in more detail in the remainder of this phase.

    1. Project Overview: Includes deliverables, scope, milestones, and success metrics.
    2. Governance and Management: Includes roles, responsibilities, and resource requirements.
    3. Project Risks, Assumptions, and Constraints: Includes risks and mitigation strategies as well as any assumptions and constraints.
    4. Project Sign-Off: Includes IT and executive sign-off (if required).

    The image contains a screenshot of the Project Charter Template.

    Download the ITSM Tool Implementation Project Charter Template

    1.1.2 Leverage the Implementation Checklist to guide your preparation

    The checklist tabs align to each phase of this blueprint.

    • Phase 1 (Tab 1) – Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline
    • Phase 2 (Tab 2) – Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules
    • Phase 3 (Tabs 3+4) – Prepare to Implement Additional ITSM Modules (e.g. Change Management)
    • Phase 4 (deployment section in each tab) – Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    The image contains screenshots from the Implementation Checklist.

    Download the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    1.1.3 Review goals that drove the ITSM tool purchase

    Identify the triggers for the selection and implementation of your new ITSM tool.

    Whether this is your first ITSM tool or a replacement for your old tool, the project was likely triggered by pain points that must be addressed by the new tool to improve your service desk. Having a clear understanding of these pain points throughout the implementation of your new tool will help to prevent them from reoccurring.

    Common ITSM pain points include:

    1. Poor communication with end users on ticket status.
    2. Lack of SLA automation to escalate issues to the appropriate channels.
    3. Poor self-service options for end users to perform simple requests on their own.
    4. Undeveloped knowledgebase for users to find answers to common issues.
    5. Lack of reporting or mistrust in reporting data.
    6. Lack of automation, including ticket templates.
    7. Overcomplicated ticket categories resulting in categories being misused.
    8. Overconfiguration prevents future upgrades.
    9. Lack of integration with other tools.

    If you haven't already selected an ITSM tool, leverage the IT Service Management Selection Guide to select the right tool.

    Download the IT Service Management Selection Guide

    1.1.4 Plan to interview staff to support organizational change management

    Identify challenges with the existing tool and processes as well as potential objections to the new tool.

    Incorporate this feedback in the implementation to drive buy-in and a successful rollout.

    Implementing a new ITSM tool will force changes in how IT staff do their work:

    • At a minimum, it means learning a new interface.
    • It could also mean leveraging features that improve IT operations but could change the process or tasks for the staff.
    • Their input on the current tool and process challenges can be critical for the project.
    • Solving at least some of their challenges can help bring them onboard to use this tool properly and follow associated process changes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep management in the loop through every stage of the implementation process. They are the ones who are paying for the software, so they need to be informed throughout implementation and feel that their needs and feedback are being heard to prevent pushback further into the implementation.

    1.1.5 Identify the modules and features you will plan to implement

    Consider these factors when deciding what modules and features you want to implement:

    • Specific ITSM modules based on the recommended order and any unique business requirements
    • Key features that drove the tool purchase and address key issues
    • High-level process changes needed to address challenges and realize expected benefits from the new ITSM tool (e.g. if a key goal was automated ticket routing based on categories, then the project needs to include developing a good categorization scheme)

    Recommended order for implementation:

    1. Incident Management and Service Request
    2. This is the core of service management and typically has the highest impact on the organization. Include knowledgebase development as part of this implementation.

    3. Change Management
    4. A foundational component of service management, it allows organizations to minimize disruptions to IT services when making changes to services and critical systems.

    5. Asset Management
    6. A foundational component of service management, it allows organizations to track their assets’ locations, how they are used, and when changes are made to them.

    1.1.6 Determine if data migration is required

    If you are switching from a previous ITSM tool, carefully weigh the pros and cons as well as the necessity of migrating historical transactional data before deciding to import it into the new tool.

    Importing your old transactional data will allow you to track metrics over time, which can be valuable for data analysis and reporting purposes.

    However, ask yourself what the true value of your data is before you import it.

    You will not get value out of migrating the old data if:

    • You have incomplete or inaccurate data (a high percentage of incidents did not have tickets created in the old system).
    • The categorization of your old tickets was not useful or was used inconsistently.
    • You plan on changing the ticket categorization in the new system.

    “Don’t debate whether you can import your old data until you’ve made sure that you should.”

    – Barry Cousins, Practice Lead at Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you decide to migrate your data, keep in mind that it can be a complex process and proper time should be budgeted for planning, structuring the data, and importing and testing it.

    Step 1.2

    Define roles and responsibilities

    Activities

    1.2.1

    Key internal roles and responsibilities

    1.2.2

    Key external roles and responsibilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director/Manager
    • Service Manager
    • Project Manager and the project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Decision on whether to hire professional services for the implementation
    • Clearly defined roles and responsibilities for the project

    1.2.1 Identify key internal roles and responsibilities

    Review the tasks outlined in the Implementation Checklist to help you identify appropriate roles and specific staff that will be needed to execute this project.

    Project Role

    Description

    RACI

    Assigned To

    Executive Sponsor

    Liaison with the executive team (the CIO would be a good candidate for this role).

    Accountable for project completion.

    Approves resource allocation and funding.

    A, C

    Name(s)

    Project Manager

    Manages the project schedule, tasks, and budget.

    May act as a liaison between executives and the project-level team.

    R

    Name(s)

    Product Owner

    Liaison with the vendor.

    SME for the new tool.

    Provides input to tool configuration decisions.

    Manages the tool post-implementation.

    R

    Name(s)

    Process Owners

    Define current processes.

    Provide input to identifying current-state process challenges to address and potential changes as part of the new tool implementation.

    R

    Name(s)

    Service Desk Manager

    Provides input to tool configuration decisions.

    Manages and trains service desk agents to use new tool and processes.

    R

    Name(s)

    ITSM Tool Core Users (e.g. Service Desk Technicians)

    Provide input to identifying current-state process challenges to address.

    Provide input to tool configuration decisions.

    C

    Name(s)

    RACI = Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed

    Assign individuals to roles through each step of the implementation project in the governance and management chart in the Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    1.2.2 Key external roles and responsibilities

    Determine whether you will engage professional services for the implementation.

    There are three main ways to implement your ITSM tool

    Implemented in-house by own staff

    Implemented using a combination of your own staff and your ITSM tool vendor

    Implemented by professional services and your ITSM tool vendor

    DIY Implementation

    Adopting a DIY implementation approach can save money but could draw out your implementation timeline and increase the likelihood of errors. Carefully consider your integration environment to determine your resourcing capabilities and maturity.

    Vendor Implementation

    In most cases, your vendor will support or execute the technical implementation based on your requirements. Use this blueprint to help you define those requirements.

    Professional Services

    Opting for professional services may result in a shorter implementation period and fewer errors but may also deny your IT staff the opportunity to develop the skills necessary to maintain and configure the solution in the future.

    Clarify the role of the professional services vendor before acquiring their services to make sure your expectations are aligned. For example, are you hiring the vendor for tool installation, tool configuration, or tool customization or for training your end users?

    Step 1.3

    Identify preliminary timeline

    Activities

    1.3.1

    Identify preliminary internal target dates

    1.3.2

    Identify target dates for vendor involvement

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director/Manager
    • Service Manager
    • Project Manager and the project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Specifying the target dates for the implementation project

    1.3.1 Identify preliminary internal target dates

    Identify high-level start and end dates based on the following:

    • Existing process maturity
    • Process changes required (to address process issues or to realize targeted benefits from the new tool)
    • Data migration requirements (if any)
    • Information to prepare for the implementation (review the Checklist Tool)
    • Vendor availability to support implementation
    • Executive mandates that have established specific milestone dates

    Create an initial project schedule:

    • Review the remaining phases of this blueprint for more details on the implementation planning steps.
    • Review and update the Checklist Tool to suit your implementation goals and requirements.
    • Assign task owners and target dates in the Checklist Tool.

    Note: This is a preliminary schedule. Monitor progress as well as requirement changes, and adjust the scope or schedule as needed.

    Update the columns in the Checklist Tool to plan and keep track of your implementation project.

    1.3.2 Identify target dates for vendor involvement

    Plan when you'll be ready for the vendor and identify the key points for when the vendor will come in.

    Are dates already scheduled for tool installation/configuration/customization?

    If yes:

    • Clarify vendor expectations for those target dates (i.e. what do you have to have prepared in advance?).
    • Determine options to adjust dates if needed.

    If no:

    • Defer scheduling until you have reviewed and updated the Implementation Checklist. The checklist will help you determine your readiness for vendor involvement.

    Consider if the vendor will implement the ITSM tool in one go or if they will help setup the tool in stages. Keep in mind that ITSM implementation projects typically take anywhere from 9 weeks to 16 months and plan accordingly depending on the maturity of your processes and the modules and features you plan to implement.

    Use your internal target dates to estimate when you'll be ready for the vendor to set up the tool and implement the setting that you've defined.

    Phase 2

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    • Review your existing solution and challenges
    • Plan ticket management and workflow implementation
    • Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations
    • Plan the module rollout

    Additional Info-Tech Research

    The Implementation Checklist Tool summarizes what you need to prepare for the implementation. If you need more assistance with developing the underlying ITSM processes, use the tools, templates, and guidance in these blueprints.

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Build core elements of service desk operations, including incident management and service request workflows, ticket categorization schemes, and ticket prioritization rules.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    Implement tools such as an improved knowledgebase and self-service portal to enable lower tier support staff and end users to resolve incidents or fulfill service requests.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Develop a critical incident management workflow and create standard operating procedures for problem management.

    Step 2.1

    Review your existing solution and challenges

    Activities

    2.1.1

    Configure, don’t customize, your solution to minimize risk

    2.1.2

    Review your existing process and solution challenges for opportunities for improvement

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    2.1.1 Configure your tool, don’t customize it

    Your tool may require at least some basic configurations to align with your processes, but in most cases customization of the tool is not recommended.

    Configuration

    Customization

    • Creating settings and recording reference data in the tool within the normal functionality of the tool.
    • Does not require changes to source code.

    Documentation of configurations is key.

    Failure to document configurations and the reasons for specific configurations will lead to:

    • Difficulty diagnosing incidents and problems.
    • Difficulty reconstructing the tool in the case of disaster recovery.
    • One administrator having all of the knowledge of configurations and taking it with them if they leave the organization.
    • Configurations that become useless in the future are maintained and lead to unnecessary work if documentation is not regularly reviewed.
    • Extending the functionality of the tool beyond what it was originally intended to do.
    • Requires manual changes to source code.

    Carefully consider whether a customization is necessary.

    • Over-customization of your ITSM tool code may lock you into your current version of the software by preventing future patches and upgrades, leaving you with outdated software.
    • Over-customization becomes particularly risky when your ITSM solution is integrated with other tools, as a loss in functionality of your ITSM tool resulting from over-customization may cause disruptions across the business.
    • If your selected ITSM solution doesn’t do something you think you need it to do, carefully evaluate whether you really need that customization and if the trade-off of potentially limiting future innovation is worth it.

    Case Study

    Consider the consequences of over-customizing your solution.

    INDUSTRY: Education

    SOURCE: IT Director

    Situation

    Challenge

    Resolution

    A few years ago, the service management office at the university decided to switch ITSM tools, from Computer Associates to ServiceNow.

    They wanted the new tool to behave similarly to what they had previously, so they made a lot of customized code changes to ServiceNow during implementation.

    As a result of the customizations, much of the functionality of the tool was restricted, and the upgrades were not compatible with the solution.

    The external consultants who performed the customizations and backend work did not document their changes, leaving the service management team without an understanding of why they did what they did.

    The service management team is working with ServiceNow to slowly unravel the custom code to try to get the solution back to having out-of-the-box functionality, with the ability to be upgraded.

    It has been challenging to do this work without disrupting the functionality of the tool.

    Over-customization led to the organization paying for features they couldn’t use and spending more time and resources down the road to try to reverse the changes.

    2.1.2 Review your existing process to identify opportunities for improvement

    Documenting your existing processes is an effective method for also reviewing those processes and identifying inefficiencies. Take advantage of this project to fix your process issues.

    1. Document your existing workflows for incident management and service requests.
    2. Review your workflows to identify opportunities to optimize through process refinement (e.g. clarifying escalation guidelines) or by leveraging features in your new ITSM tool (e.g. improved workflow automation).
    3. Similarly, review the challenges identified through stakeholder interviews: is there an opportunity address those challenges through process changes or leveraging your new ITSM tool?
    4. Address those challenge and issues as you execute the tasks outlined in the Implementation Checklist Tool. For example, if inconsistent ticket routing was identified as a challenge due to a vague categorization scheme, that’s a driver to review and update your scheme rather than just carry forward your existing scheme.

    Regardless of your existing ITSM maturity, this is an opportunity to review and optimize existing processes. Even the most-mature organizations can typically find an area to improve.

    Case Study

    Reviewing and defining processes before the implementation can be a project in itself.

    INDUSTRY: Defense

    SOURCE: Anonymous

    Situation

    Challenge

    Resolution

    The organization was switching to a new ITSM tool. To prepare for the implementation, they gathered stakeholders, held steering committee meetings, and broke down key processes, teams, and owners before even meeting with the larger group.

    They used a software tool called InDesign to visibly map service requests and incidents and determine who owned each process and where the handoffs were.

    The service catalog also needed to be built out as they were performing certain services that didn’t relate to anything in the catalog.

    The goal for the implementation was to have it completed within a year, but it ended up going over, taking 15 to 16 months to complete.

    Most of the time was spent identifying processes upfront before configuring the tool. There were difficulties defining processes as well as agreeing on who owned a process or service.

    There were also difficulties agreeing upon who the valid stakeholders were for processes, as groups were siloed.

    The major obstacles to implementation were therefore people and process, not the product.

    New processes were introduced, and boundaries were placed around processes that were being done in the past that weren’t necessary.

    Once the groups were able to agree upon process owners, the tool configuration and implementation itself did not pose any major difficulties.

    After the implementation, the tool was continually improved and sharpened to adapt to processes.

    Step 2.2

    Plan ticket management and workflow implementation

    Activities

    2.2.1

    Define ticket classification values

    2.2.2

    Define ticket templates for common incident types and service requests

    2.2.3

    Plan your ticket intake channels

    2.2.4

    Design a self-service portal

    2.2.5

    Plan your knowledgebase implementation in the new tool

    2.2.6

    Design your ticket status notification processes and templates

    2.2.7

    Identify required user accounts, access levels, and skills/ service groups

    2.2.8

    Review and update your workflows and escalation rules

    2.2.9

    Identify desired reporting and relevant metrics to track

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    Outcomes of this step

    Tool is designed and configured to support service desk processes and organization needs.

    Checklist overview

    The ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist will help you estimate resources required to support demand, based on your ticket volume.

    TAB 2

    TAB 3

    TAB 4

    Incident and Service Modules Checklist

    Change Management Modules

    Asset Management Modules

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 2. The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 3. The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 4.

    How to follow this section:

    The following slides contain a table that explains why each task in the module matters and what needs to be considered. Complete the checklist modules referring to this section.

    2.2.1 Define ticket classification values

    Ticket classification improves reporting, workflow automation, and problem identification.

    Review your existing ticket classification values to identify what to carry forward, drop, or change. For example, if your categorization scheme has become too complex, this is your opportunity to fix it; don’t perpetuate ineffective classification in the new tool.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Ticket Types (e.g. incident, service request, change)

    In particular, separating incidents from service requests supports appropriate ticket prioritization and resourcing; for example, an incident typically should be prioritized, and service requests can be scheduled.

    Categories (e.g. network, servers)

    An effective categorization scheme can help identify ticket assignment and escalation (e.g. network tickets would be escalated to the network team), and potentially automate ticket routing.

    Resolution Codes

    Indicates how the ticket was resolved (e.g. configuration change). Supports another layer of trends reporting and data to support problem identification.

    Status Values

    Shows what status the ticket is currently in (e.g. if the ticket has been opened or assigned to an agent, if it is in progress or has been resolved).

    2.2.2 Define ticket templates for common incident types and service requests

    Ticket templates are the backbone of automation. A common complaint is that tickets take too much time. However, a little planning can reduce the time it takes to create a ticket to less than a minute.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify common recurring tickets that would be good candidates for using ticket templates (e.g. common service requests and incidents).

    Some common recurring tickets such as password reset, new laptop, and login requests would be great candidates to create ticket templates for. Building a deck of standard rules to follow for common tickets saves time and reduces the number of tickets generated.

    Design ticket templates and workflows for common tickets (e.g. fields to auto-populate as well as routing and secondary tickets for onboarding requests).

    Differentiating between recurring ticket types and building pre-defined templates not just saves time but can also have major impact on how service is delivered as this will also help separate tickets. Creating these templates beforehand will also let you communicate effectively with the users at a time when all hands need to be on deck.

    2.2.3 Plan your ticket intake channels

    Consider possible ticket intake channels and evaluate their relevance to your organization.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Decide on ticket intake channels (e.g. phone, email, portal, walk-ups).

    Each standard intake channel serves its own purposes and can be extremely valuable under different circumstances. For example, walk-ins may be inefficient but necessary for critical incidents.

    If using email, identify/create the email account and appropriate permissions.

    Email works well if it automatically creates a ticket in your ticketing system, but users often don’t provide enough information in unstructured emails. Use required fields and ticket templates to ensure the ticket is properly categorized.

    If using phone, identify/create the phone number and appropriate integrations.

    Maintain the phone for users from other locations and for critical incidents but encourage users who call in to submit a ticket through the portal.

    If using a portal, determine if you will leverage the tool's portal or an existing portal.

    The web portal is the most efficient intake method, but ensure it is user friendly before promoting it.

    If using chat, determine whether you will use the tool's chat or an existing chat mechanism and whether integrations are needed.

    Another way to improve support experience for your customers is through live chat. This gives your customers an easy way to reach you at the exact moment they have questions or issues they can't fix.

    2.2.4 Design a self-service portal

    Map your processes to the tool by defining your ticket input, categories, escalations, and workflows.

    Don’t forget about the client-facing side of the solution. It is important to build a self-serve portal that has an easy-to-use interface where the user can easily find the category for the help they’re looking for. It is also necessary to educate the users on where to find the portal or how to access it.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify components to include (e.g. service request, incident, knowledgebase).

    Identify the categories you want the users to be able to access in the portal. Finding the right balance of components to include is very important to make it easy for your users to find all the relevant information they are looking for. This could mean fewer tickets.

    Plan the input form for service requests and incidents (e.g. mandatory fields, optional fields, drop-down lists).

    Having relevant and specific fields helps to narrow down your user’s issues and provides more information on how to allocate these tasks among the service desk resources and reduce time to further investigate the issues.

    If service catalog will be attached to the ITSM tool, define routing and workflows; if there is no existing service catalog, start a separate project to define it (e.g. services, SLAs).

    A centrally defined guide enables a uniform quality in service and clarifies the responsible tier for the ticket. Identify services that will be included in the catalog, and if the information is attached to the ITSM tool, plan for how will the routing and workflows be structured.

    Plan design requirements (e.g. company branding).

    Ensure that the portal is aligned with the company’s theme and access format. Work with the vendor to customize the branding on the tool, design requirements, images.

    2.2.5 Plan your knowledgebase (KB) implementation in the new tool

    Evaluate how onerous KB migration will be for you. Is this an opportunity to improve how the KB is organized?

    Task

    Why this matters

    Define knowledgebase categories and structure.

    Establishing knowledgebase structures or having them separated into categories makes it easy for your clients to find them (e.g. do they align with ticket categories?).

    Identify existing knowledgebase articles to add to the new tool.

    Review existing knowledgebase articles at a high level (e.g. Do you carry forward all existing articles? Take an opportunity to retire old articles?).

    Define knowledgebase article templates.

    Having standardized templates makes it an easy read and will increase its usage (e.g. all knowledgebase articles for recurring incidents will follow the same template).

    Build knowledgebase article creation, usage, and revision workflows.

    Decide how new knowledgebase articles will be built and added to the tool, how it will be accessed and used, and also any steps necessary to update the articles.

    Plan a knowledgebase feedback system.

    For example, include a comments section, like buttons, and who will get notified about feedback.

    2.2.6 Design your ticket status notification processes and templates

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify triggers for status notifications. Balance the need for keeping users informed versus notifications being treated as spam.

    Identify when and where the users are informed to make sure you are not under or over communicating with them. Status notifications and alerts are a great way to set or reset expectations to your users on the delivery or resolution on their tickets. For example, auto-response for a new ticket, or status updates to users when the ticket is assigned, solved, and closed.

    If using email notifications, design email templates for each type of notification.

    Creating notification templates is a great way to provide standardized service to your clients and it saves time when a ticket is raised. For example, email templates for new ticket, ticket updated, or ticket closed.

    Plan how you will enable users to validate the ticket or resolve request without causing the ticket to reopen.

    For example, in the ticket solved template, provide a link to close the ticket, and ask the user to reply only if they wish to re-open the ticket (i.e. if it's not resolved). May require consulting with the ITSM tool vendor.

    Decide if customer satisfaction surveys will be sent to end users after their ticket has been closed.

    Discuss if this data would be useful to you if captured to improve/modify your service.

    If customer satisfaction surveys will be used, design the survey.

    Discuss what data would be useful to you if captured and create survey questionnaires to capture that data from your clients. For example, how many questions, types of questions, whether sent for every ticket or randomly.

    2.2.7 Identify required user accounts, access levels, and skills/service groups

    Task

    Why this matters

    Define Tier 1, 2, and 3 roles and their associated access levels.

    Having pre-established roles for different tiers and teams is a great way to boost accountability and also helps identify training requirements for each tier. For example, knowledgebase training for tier 1 & 2, reporting/analytics for IT manager.

    Identify skill groups or support teams.

    Establishing accountability for all the support practices in the service desk is important for the tickets to be effectively distributed among the functional individuals and teams. Identifying the responsibilities of groups help execute shift-left strategy.

    Identify required email permissions for each role.

    For example, define which roles get permissions to include status updates or other ticket information in their emails or to support automated notifications and other integrations with email.

    Determine how you will import users into the new tool.

    Identify the best way to migrate your users to the new tool whether it be by importing from Active Directory or the old ITSM tool, etc.

    2.2.8 Review and update your workflows and escalation rules

    Task

    Why this matters

    Document your future-state incident and service request workflows that will incorporate the above planning as well as improvements supported by the new tool.

    Document your workflows and review it to make sure it’s accurate and also to help you with communicating process expectations to all the stakeholders.

    Review the future-state workflows.

    This helps you validate that the planned changes meet your goals and identify any additional required changes.

    Update ticket classification values, templates, and ticket intake as needed based on the future-state workflows.

    Documenting your process might uncover additional requirements for classification, templates, etc. Ensure that the classification templates and related parameters align with the workflows.

    Identify opportunities to further automate workflows by leveraging the new tool.

    The process of reviewing the workflows often helps identify manual processes, labor intensive processes, very repetitive processes, etc. These can be opportunities to further automate your processes.

    2.2.9 Identify desired reporting and relevant metrics to track

    Documentation of key metrics of service desk performance and end-user satisfaction that you wish to improve through the new solution is key to evaluate the success of your implementation.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Define the metrics you will track in the new ITSM tool.

    It is critical to ensure that your tool will be able to track necessary metrics on KPIs from the start and that this data is accurate and reliable so that reporting will be relevant and meaningful to the business. Whether you use your own tool for tracking metrics or an external tool, ensure that you can get the internal data you need from the ITSM tool. This may include measures of Productivity (e.g. time to respond, time to resolve), Service (e.g. incident backlog, customer satisfaction), and Proactiveness (e.g. number of knowledgebase articles per week).

    Determine what reports you want to generate from data collected through the tool.

    It’s not enough to simply set up metrics, you have to actually use the information. Reports should be analyzed regularly and used to manage costs and productivity, improve services, and identify issues. Ensure that your service desk team contributes to the usefulness of reporting by following processes such as creating tickets for every incident and request, categorizing it properly, and closing it after it’s resolved with the proper resolution code.

    Identify the information and metrics to include in the ITSM tool's dashboards.

    A dashboard helps drive accountability across the team through greater visibility. Decide what will be reported on the dashboard. For example, average time to resolution, number of open tickets with subtotals for each priority, problem ticket aging.

    Step 2.3

    Plan data migration and integrations

    Activities

    2.3.1

    Create a data migration and archiving plan

    2.3.2

    Identify and plan required integrations

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    Outcomes of this step

    • Decisions made around data migration, integrations, automation, and reporting.
    • ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    2.3.1 Create a data migration and archiving plan

    Task

    Why this matters

    Document your future-state incident and service request workflows that will incorporate the above planning as well as improvements supported by the new tool.

    Document your workflows and review them to make sure they’re accurate and also to help you with communicating process expectations to all the stakeholders.

    Review the future-state workflows.

    This helps you validate that the planned changes meet your goals and identify any additional required changes.

    Update ticket classification values, templates, and ticket intake as needed based on the future-state workflows.

    Documenting your process might uncover additional requirements for classification, templates, etc. Ensure that the classification templates and related parameters align with the workflows.

    Identify opportunities to further automate workflows leveraging the new tool.

    The process of reviewing the workflows often helps identify manual processes, labor-intensive processes, very repetitive processes, etc. These can be opportunities to further automate your processes.

    2.3.2 Identify and plan required integrations

    Consider and plan for any necessary integrations with other systems.

    A major component of the implementation that should be carefully considered throughout is if and how to integrate your ITSM tool with other applications in the environment.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify the systems you need to integrate with your ITSM tool (e.g. asset discovery tools, reporting systems).

    Regardless of whether your solution will be configured and installed on-premises or as a SaaS, you need to consider the underlying technology to determine how you will integrate it with other tools where necessary.

    Businesses may need to integrate their ITSM tool with other systems including asset management, network monitoring, and reporting systems to make the organization more efficient.

    Determine how data will flow between systems.

    Carefully evaluate the purpose of each integration. Clients often want their ITSM tool to be integrated with all of the available data in another application when they only need a subset of that data to be integrated.

    Consider not only which systems you need to integrate with your ITSM tool but also who the owners of those systems are and which way the data needs to flow.

    Plan the development, configuration, and testing of integrations.

    As with other aspects of the implementation, configure and test the integrations before going live with the tool.

    Step 2.4

    Plan the module rollout

    Activities

    2.4.1

    Repeat the methodology for additional ITSM modules, using the Checklists as a guide

    2.4.2

    Leverage these blueprints to help you implement change and asset management modules

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    Outcomes of this step

    Identify and plan for additional modules and features to be implemented

    2.4.1 Repeat the methodology for additional ITSM modules, using the Checklists as a guide

    The preparation completed in Phase 1 and 2 to this point provide a foundation for additional ITSM modules.

    This blueprint starts with the incident management and service request modules as those are typically implemented first since they are the most impactful to day-to-day IT service management.

    In addition, the methodology outlined in Phase 1 and 2 to this point provides a model to follow for additional ITSM modules:

    • If you did not already account for additional modules in Phase 1, then repeat the steps in Phase 1 to define scope, stakeholders, and timeline.
    • The Implementation Checklist Tool provides tabs for Change Management and Asset Management to outline the specific details for those topic areas, but they follow the same high-level steps as Phase 2 (e.g. review existing processes, design relevant workflows).
    • If you are planning to implement other modules (e.g. Problem Management), create additional tabs in the Implementation Checklist Tool as needed, using the existing tabs as a base.
    The image contains screenshots of the ITSM checklists.

    2.4.2 Leverage these blueprints to help you implement change and asset management modules

    The Implementation Checklist Tool summarizes what you need to prepare for the implementation. If you need more assistance with developing the underlying ITSM processes, use the tools, templates, and guidance in the blueprints below.

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Define change management workflows, key roles, and supporting elements such as request-for-change forms based on best practices.

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    Create an SOP and associated process workflows to streamline and standardize hardware asset management.

    Implement Software Asset Management

    Build on a strong hardware asset management program to also properly track and manage software assets. This includes managing software licensing, finding opportunities to reduce costs, and improving your software audit readiness.

    Phase 3

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    1. Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)
    2. Create a training plan
    3. Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    Use the template to document and plan the communications and training needs prior to deployment of the new tool.

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Training Schedule.

    Use the deployment plan template to document the strategy and decisions made for making the transition to the new ITSM tool.

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template.

    Download the ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    Download the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    Step 3.1

    Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)

    Activities

    3.1.1

    Ensure there is strong communication from management throughout the implementation and deployment

    3.1.2

    Base your communications timeline on a classic change curve to accommodate natural resistance

    3.1.3

    Communicate new processes with business leaders and end users to improve positive customer feedback

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. CIO/IT Director
    2. IT Manager
    3. Service Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    Plan for communicating the change with business executives, service desk agents, and end users.

    3.1.1 Ensure there is strong communication from management throughout the implementation and deployment

    A common contributing factor for unsuccessful implementation is a lack of communication around training, transitioning, and deploying the new tool.

    Common Pitfall:

    Organizational communication and change management should have been ongoing and tightly monitored throughout the project. However, cut-over is a time in which critical communication regarding deployment and proper user training can be derailed when last-minute preparations take priority. Not only will general user frustration increase, but unintended process workarounds will emerge, eroding system effectiveness.

    Mitigating Actions:

    Deliver training for end users that will be engaged in testing. For all other users, deliver training prior to go-live to avoid the risk of training too early (where materials may not be ready or users are likely to forget what was learned). If possible, host quick refresher training a week or two prior to go-live.

    Aim to communicate the upcoming go-live. The purpose of communication here is to reiterate expectations, complexities, and ramifications on business going forward. Alleviate performance anxiety by clearly stating that temporary drops in productivity are to be expected and that there will be appropriate assistance throughout the transition period.

    Transition: Have the project/program manager remain on the project team for some time after deployment to oversee and assure smooth transition for the organization.

    Complete training: Have a clear plan for training those users that were missed in the first round of training as well as a plan for ongoing training for those that require refresher training, for new joiners to your organization, and for any training requirements that result from subsequent upgrades.

    3.1.2 Base your communications timeline on a classic change curve

    It’s important to communicate the change ahead of the implementation, but also to reinforce that communication after implementation to recover from any resistance that occurs through the implementation itself.

    Stages in a typical change curve:

    1. Change is announced. Some people are skeptical and resistant, but others are enthusiastic. Most people are fence sitters; if they trust senior leadership, they will give the benefit of the doubt and expect change to be good.
    2. Positive sentiment declines as implementation approaches. Training and other disruptions take people’s time and energy away from their work. Project setbacks and delays take credibility away from project leaders and seem to validate the efforts of saboteurs and skeptics.
    3. Overall sentiment begins to improve as people adjust and see real progress made. Ideally, early successes or quick wins neutralize saboteurs and convert skeptics. At the very least, people will begin to accept and adapt to new realities.
    4. If the project is successful and communication is reinforced after implementation, sentiment will peak and level out over time as people move on to other projects.

    The image contains a diagram of a change curve.

    1. Honeymoon of “Uninformed Optimism”: Tentative support and enthusiasm for change before people have really felt or understood what it involves.
    2. Backlash of “Informed Pessimism” (leading to “Valley of Despair”): People realize they’ve overestimated the benefits (or how soon they’ll be achieved) and underestimated the difficulty of change.
    3. Valley of Despair and beginning of “Hopeful Realism”: Sentiment bottoms out and people begin to accept the difficulty (or inevitability) of change.
    4. Bounce of “Informed Optimism”: More optimism and support when people begin to see bright spots and early successes.
    5. Contentment of “Completion”: Change has been successfully adopted and benefits are being realized.

    3.1.3 Communicate new processes

    1. Communicate with business unit leaders and users:
    • Focus on the benefits for end users to encourage buy-in for the change.
    • Include preliminary instructions with a date for training sessions.
  • Train users:
    • Teach users how to contact the service desk and submit a ticket.
    • Set expectations for IT’s response.
    • Record all your training sessions so it can used for recursive training.
  • Enforce:
    • IT must point users toward the new process, but ad hoc requests should still be expected at first. Deal with these politely but encourage all employees to use the new service desk ticketing process, if applicable.
  • Measure success:
    • Continue to adjust communications if processes aren’t being followed to ensure SLAs can be met and improved.

    “Communicate with your end users in phase 1 to let them know what will be changing, get feedback and buy-in, and inform them that training will be happening, then ensure you train them once the tool is installed. A lot of times we’ll get our tool set up but people don’t know how to use it."

    – Director of ITSM Tools

    Info-Tech Insight

    If there is a new process for ticket input, consider using a reward system for users who submit a ticket through the proper channel ;(e.g. email or self-serve portal) instead of their old method (e.g. phone). However, if a significant cultural change is required, don’t expect it to happen right away.

    Step 3.2

    Create a training plan

    Activities

    3.2.1

    Target training session(s) to the specific needs of your service desk, service groups, IT managers

    3.3.1

    Provide training (tool/portal and process changes)

    3.4.1

    Choose an appropriate training delivery method that will focus on both process and tool

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Training modules for different users of the tool.
    • Assignment of training modules to users and schedule for completion.

    3.2.1 Target training session(s) to the specific needs of your service desk and IT staff

    Create targeted role-based training programs for your service desk analysts; they care about the portion of the solution they are responsible for, not the functionality that is irrelevant to their job.

    Create and execute a role-based training program by conducting training sessions for targeted groups of users, training them on the functions they require to perform their jobs.

    Use a table like this one to help identify which roles should be trained on which tasks within the ITSM tool.

    The image contains a table as an example of identifying which roles should be trained within the ITSM tool.

    The need for targeted training:

    • IT personnel may challenge the need for training. They may feel they don’t require training on the use of tools or that they don’t have time to dedicate to training when there is so much work to be done.
    • Providing targeted training focused on only the functions of the solution that each tier is responsible for can help to overcome that resistance.
    • Targeted training may include basic training for level 1 technicians and more advanced in-depth training for administrators, power users, or level 2/3 technicians.

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Properly trained users promote adoption and improve results. Always keep training materials updated and available. New employees, new software integration, and internal promotions create opportunities for training employees to align the ITSM tool with their roles and responsibilities.

    3.2.2 Provide training

    Training must take place before deployment to ensure that both your service desk agents and end users will use the tool in the way it was intended and improve end-user satisfaction.

    • Implementing a new ITSM tool will likely bring with it at least some degree of organizational and cultural change. It’s important to manage that change through proper training. Your training needs will vary depending on the maturity of the organization and the amount of cultural and process change being implemented.
    • If this is your first ITSM solution with many new changes for staff to take on board, it will be important to dedicate training time not only before deployment but also several months after the initial installation, to allow staff to gain more experience with the new tool and processes and formulate questions they may not think to ask during implementation.
    • A training plan should take into account not only training needs for the implementation project but also any ongoing training requirements that may be required. This may include:
      • Training for new personnel.
      • Training on any changes to the tool.
      • Training on any new processes the tool will support.
    • Better agent training will lead to better performance and improved end-user satisfaction.

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate training hours and first contact resolution.

    The blue graph line charts new-agent training hours against first contact resolution and the orange graph line charts the trendline for the dataset.

    Source: MetricNet, 2012

    3.2.3 Choose an appropriate training delivery method

    Training should include use cases that focus on not only how the tool’s interface works but also how the tool should be used to support process activities.

    1. Training through use cases highlights how the tool will support the user in role-based tasks.
    2. If new processes are being introduced along with the tool, training should cover both in an integrated way.
    3. Team leadership and management commitment ensures that all agents take their training seriously and are prepared for all use cases by the deployment date.

    Trainer-led sessions:

    Self-taught sessions:

    • May take the form of onsite or video training.
    • Vendor may train administrators or managers, who will later train remaining staff.
    • Allows for interaction with the trainer and greater opportunity to ask questions.
    • Difficult for large organizations with many users to be trained.
    • Delivered via computer-based training applications, typically through a web browser.
    • May include voice training sessions combined with exercises and quizzes.
    • More feasible for large, distributed organizations with less flexible schedules.

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Ensure that the training demonstrates not only how the tool should be used, but also the benefits it will provide your staff in terms of improved efficiency and productivity. Users who can clearly see the benefits the tool will provide for their daily work will accept the tool more readily and promote it across the organization.

    Step 3.3

    Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    Activities

    3.3.1

    Plan the transition from your old tool to ensure continual functionality

    3.3.2

    Choose a cut-over approach that works for you

    3.3.3

    Deploy the solution and any new processes simultaneously to ease the transition

    3.3.4

    Have a post-deployment support plan in place

    3.3.5

    Monitor success metrics defined in Phase 1

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    Deployment plan, including a plan for cut-over from the old tool (if applicable), release of the new tool, and post-deployment support and maintenance of the tool.

    3.3.1 Plan the transition from your old tool to ensure continual functionality

    If you will have a transitional period during which the current tool will be used alongside the new tool, develop a clear plan for the transition to ensure continued service for your end users.

    • If there will be an interim period during which only some aspects of the new ITSM tool are functional, you will need to determine how the new system and old systems will work together for that period of time. This may require creating interfaces as well as providing user documentation and/or SOPs on how the business processes will operate during the interim period.
    • Cut-over is the period during which the changeover to the new system occurs. Cut-over activities need to be tightly choreographed for a successful deployment. If improperly planned, chaos may erupt when unforeseen issues are encountered during deployment, the deployment may be jeopardized, and the organization may encounter costly interruptions to its daily operations.
    • Many organizations may leave any open tickets in the old tool until they are closed, which requires that tool run alongside the new tool for a transitional period. In this case, it is necessary to create guidelines around how long the open tickets will remain in the old system and ensure there is clear communication around these processes.

    Be prepared for the transition:

    1. Create a robust cut-over plan that includes when the old tool will be decommissioned, what activities are necessary during the cut-over, and what the contingency plan is in case of unforeseen issues.
    2. Plan for and perform mock cut-overs to establish the timeline and dependencies for all steps that need to be performed to successfully complete the changeover. Do this to avoid any surprises or delays during the true cut-over period.
    3. Establish cut-over logistics: Create a schedule for resources to work in shifts to avoid burn-out during cut-over, which can lead to lapses in judgment and easily avoidable mistakes. Allocate dedicated workspaces for cut-over activities, e.g. “war rooms” for the triage of issues.

    3.3.2 Choose a cut-over approach that works for you

    Approaches and insights from three case studies

    Case Study #1

    Case Study #2

    Case Study #3

    On day one we started recording all new incidents in the new tool, and everything that was open in the old tool remained open for about one month. At that point we transferred over some open incidents but closed old incidents with the view that if anyone really wanted something done that hadn’t been yet, they could re-submit a ticket.

    – Brett Andrews,

    Managing Director at BAPTISM Consultancy

    It made sense for us to start fresh with the new system. We left all of the old tickets in the old system and started the new system with ticket #1. We only had about a dozen open tickets in the old system so we left them there and ran the two tools side by side until those were closed.

    – CIO, Publishing

    It depends on the client and the size of their service desk as well as the complexity of their data and whether they need their old data for reporting. If there are only a dozen open tickets, they can manually move those over easily, and decide whether they want to migrate their historical data for reporting purposes.

    – Scott Walling,

    Co-Founder at Monitor 24-7 Inc.

    3.3.3 Deploy the solution and any new processes simultaneously to ease the transition

    Follow a deployment plan for introducing new processes alongside the new tool to ensure changes to both process and technology are adopted simultaneously.

    If you’re introducing new processes alongside the new tool, it’s important to maintain the link between process and tool. Typically, the processes and tool should be deployed simultaneously unless there is a strong reason not to do so.

    Deployment can be done as a big-bang or phased approach. The decision to employ a phased deployment depends on the number and size of business units the tool will support, as well as the organization’s geography and infrastructure (deployment locations).

    Before deployment, conduct readiness assessments to understand whether:

    The people are ready to accept the new system (have received the proper training and communications and understand how their jobs will change when the switch is flipped).

    The technology is ready (test results are favorable, workarounds and a plan for closure have been identified for any open defects, and the system is performing as expected).

    The data is ready (data for final conversion has been cleansed, and all conversions have been rehearsed).

    The post-deployment support model is ready (infrastructure and technical support is in place, sites are ready, knowledge transfer has been conducted with the support organization, and end users understand procedures for escalation of issues).

    3.3.4 Have a post-deployment support plan in place

    Ensure that strong internal support for the project and tool will continue after deployment.

    The stabilization period after a new software deployment can last between three and nine months, during which there may be continued training needs and fine-tuning of processes. Internal support from project leaders within your organization will be critical to recover from any dip in operational efficiency and deliver the benefits of the tool.

    Consider the following to prepare better for your support plan:

    What are the roles and responsibilities for ongoing tool administration support?

    What level of support will exist to assist service desk staff after deployment?

    How much time will project team resources devote to tackling upcoming issues and assisting with ongoing support?

    Who will be responsible for ongoing training needs and documentation?

    If your organization is spread across multiple locations, what level of support/assistance will be available at each site?

    How will new code releases or system upgrades be managed and communicated?

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Deployment is only the first step in the system lifecycle. Full benefit realization from the tool requires ongoing investment and learning to be sustained. Unless processes and training are updated on an ongoing basis, benefits gained will start to decrease over time. If your service desk efficiency stagnates at the level it was at prior to implementation, the tool has failed to serve its objective.

    Establish ongoing tool maintenance, improvement structures, and processes

    People, processes, and organizations change over time, and your ITSM tool will need to change to meet expectations.

    Develop and execute a plan for the maintenance of the solution and its infrastructure components.

    Include periodic reviews against business needs and operational requirements (e.g. patches, upgrades, and risk and security requirements).

    For maintenance updates, use the change management process and assess how an activity will impact solution design, functionality, and business processes.

    For major changes that result in significant change in current designs, functionality, and/or business processes, follow the development process used for new systems.

    Ensure that maintenance activities are periodically analyzed for abnormal trends indicating underlying quality or performance problems, cost/benefit of major upgrade, or replacement in lieu of maintenance.

    Assign responsibility for ongoing maintenance. Hold regular meetings for the following activities:

    1. Inspect data and reports.
    2. Assess whether you’re meeting SLAs.
    3. Predict any upcoming changes that may impact ticket volume (e.g. a new operating system or security patch).
    4. Create new ticket templates for recurring or upcoming issues.
    5. Create new knowledgebase articles.
    6. Determine whether ticket categories are being used correctly.
    7. Ask team if there are any problems with the tool.

    3.3.5 Monitor success metrics defined in Project Charter

    Revisit your goals for the solution and assess if they are being met by evaluating current metrics. If your goals have not yet been met, re-evaluate how to ensure the tool will deliver value.

    Sample High-Level Goals:

    1. Improved service desk efficiency
    2. Improved end-user satisfaction
    3. Improved self-service options for end users
    4. Improved data and reporting capabilities

    Sample Metric Descriptions

    Baseline Metric

    Goal

    Current Metric

    Increased ticket input through email versus phone

    50% of tickets submitted through phone

    10% of tickets submit through phone

    Reduced ticket volume (through improved self-serve capabilities)

    1,500 tickets per month

    1,200 tickets per month

    Improved first call resolution (through increased efficiency and automation)

    50% FCR

    60% FCR

    Improved ability to meet SLAs (through automated escalations and prioritization)

    5 minutes to log a ticket

    1 minute to log a ticket

    Improved time to produce reports

    3 business days

    1 business day

    Improved end-user satisfaction

    60% satisfied with services

    75% satisfied

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Define change management workflows, key roles, and supporting elements such as request-for-change forms based on best practices.

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Build core elements of service desk operations, including incident management and service request workflows, ticket categorization schemes, and ticket prioritization rules.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    Implement tools such as an improved knowledgebase and self-service portal to enable lower tier support staff and end users to resolve incidents or fulfill service requests.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Develop a critical incident management workflow and create standard operating procedures for problem management.

    IT Service Management Selection Guide

    Identify the best-of-breed solution to make the most of your investment and engage the right stakeholders to define success.

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data

    Develop a framework to track metrics, clean data, and put your data to use for pre-defined timelines.

    Bibliography

    Adiga, Siddanth. “10 Reasons Why ITSM Implementations Fail.” Could Strategy, 6 May 2015. Web.

    Hastie, Shane, and Stéphane Wojewoda. “Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” InfoQ, 4 October 2015. Web.

    “How to Manage Change in the Implementation of an ITSM Software.” C2, 20 April 2015. Web.

    Lockwood, Meghan. “First Look: Annual ServiceNow Insight and Vision Executive Summary [eBook].” Acorio, 31 October 2019. Web.

    Mainville, David. “7 Steps to a Successful ITSM Tool Implementation.” Navvia, 2012. Web.

    Rae, Barclay. “Preparing for ITSM Tool Implementation.” Joe the IT Guy, 24 June 2015. Web.

    Rae, Barclay. “Successful ITSM Tool Implementation.” BrightTALK, 9 May 2013. Webcast.

    Rumburg, Jeffrey. “Metric of the Month: Agent Training Hours.” MetricNet, 2012. Web.

    Cybersecurity Priorities in Times of Pandemic

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}381|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations
    • Novel coronavirus 2019 (COVID-19) has thrown organizations around the globe into chaos as they attempt to continue operations while keeping employees safe.
    • IT needs to support business continuity – juggling available capacity and ensuring that services are available to end users – without clarity of duration, amid conditions that change daily, on a scale never seen before.
    • Security has never been more important than now. But…where to start? What are the top priorities? How do we support remote work while remaining secure?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There is intense pressure to enable employees to work remotely, as soon as possible. IT is scrambling to enable access, source equipment to stage, and deploy products to employees, many of whom are unfamiliar with working from home.
    • There is either too much security to allow people to be productive or too little security to ensure that the organization remains protected and secure.
    • These events are unprecedented, and no plan currently exists to sufficiently maintain a viable security posture during this interim new normal.

    Impact and Result

    • Don’t start from scratch. Leverage your current security framework, processes, and mechanisms but tailor them to accommodate the new way of remote working.
    • Address priority security items related to remote work capability and its implications in a logical sequence. Some security components may not be as time sensitive as others.
    • Remain diligent! Circumstances may have changed, but the importance of security has not. In fact, IT security is likely more important now than ever before.

    Cybersecurity Priorities in Times of Pandemic Research & Tools

    Start here – read our Cybersecurity Priorities research.

    Our recommendations and the accompanying checklist tool will help you quickly get a handle on supporting a remote workforce while maintaining security in your organization.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Cybersecurity Priorities in Times of Pandemic Storyboard
    • Cybersecurity Priorities Checklist Tool
    [infographic]

    Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}342|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • Data warehouse implementation is a costly and complex undertaking, and can end up not serving the business' needs appropriately.
    • Too heavy a focus on technology creates a data warehouse that isn’t sustainable and ends up with poor adoption.
    • Emerging data sources and technologies add complexity to how the appropriate data is made available to business users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A data warehouse is a project; but successful data warehousing is a program. An effective data warehouse requires planning beyond the technology implementation.
    • Governance, not technology needs to be the core support system for enabling a data warehouse program.
    • Understand business processes at the operational, tactical, and ad hoc levels to ensure a fit-for-purpose DW is built.

    Impact and Result

    • Leverage an approach that focuses on constructing a data warehouse foundation that is able to address a combination of operational, tactical, and ad hoc business needs.
    • Invest time and effort to put together pre-project governance to inform and provide guidance to your data warehouse implementation.
    • Develop “Rosetta Stone” views of your data assets to facilitate data modeling.
    • Select the most suitable architecture pattern to ensure the data warehouse is “built right” at the very beginning.

    Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why the data warehouse is becoming an important tool for driving business value, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare for the data warehouse foundation project

    Begin the data warehouse foundation by defining the project and governance teams, as well as reviewing supporting data management practices.

    • Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation – Phase 1: Prepare for the Data Warehouse Foundation Project
    • Data Warehouse Foundation Project Plan Template
    • Data Warehouse Work Breakdown Structure Template
    • Data (Warehouse) Architect
    • Data Integration Specialist
    • Business Intelligence Specialist
    • Director of Data Warehousing/Business Intelligence
    • Data Warehouse Program Charter Template
    • Data Warehouse Steering Committee Charter Template

    2. Establish the business drivers and data warehouse strategy

    Using the business activities as a guide, develop a data model, data architecture, and technology plan for a data warehouse foundation.

    • Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation – Phase 2: Establish the Business Drivers and Data Warehouse Strategy
    • Business Data Catalog
    • Data Classification Inventory Tool
    • Data Warehouse Architecture Planning Tool
    • Master Data Mapping Tool

    3. Plan for data warehouse governance

    Start developing a data warehouse program by defining how users will interact with the new data warehouse environment.

    • Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation – Phase 3: Plan for Data Warehouse Governance
    • Data Warehouse Standard Operating Procedures Template
    • Data Warehouse Service Level Agreement
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare for the Data Warehouse Foundation Project

    The Purpose

    Identify the members of the foundation project team.

    Define overarching statements and define success factors/risks.

    Outline basic project governance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined membership, roles, and responsibilities involved in the foundation project.

    Establishment of a steering committee as a starting point for the data warehouse program.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify foundation project team and create a RACI chart.

    1.2 Understand what a data warehouse can and cannot enable.

    1.3 Define critical success factors, key performance metrics, and project risks.

    1.4 Develop rough timelines for foundation project completion.

    1.5 Define the current and future states for key data management practices.

    Outputs

    Job Descriptions and RACI

    Data Warehouse Steering Committee Charter

    Data Warehouse Foundation Project Plan

    Work Breakdown Structure

    2 Establish the Business Drivers and Data Warehouse Strategy

    The Purpose

    Define the information needs of the business and its key processes.

    Create the components that will inform an appropriate data model.

    Design a data warehouse architecture model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear definition of business needs that will directly inform the data and architecture models.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the most fundamental needs of the business.

    2.2 Define the data warehouse vision, mission, purpose, and goals.

    2.3 Detail the most important operational, tactical, and ad hoc activities the data warehouse should support.

    2.4 Link the processes that will be central to the data warehouse foundation.

    2.5 Walk through the four-column model and business entity modeling as a starting point for data modeling.

    2.6 Create data models using the business data glossary and data classification.

    2.7 Identify master data elements to define dimensions.

    2.8 Design lookup tables based on reference data.

    2.9 Create a fit-for-purpose data warehousing model.

    Outputs

    Data Warehouse Program Charter

    Data Warehouse Vision and Mission

    Documentation of Business Processes

    Business Entity Map

    Business Data Glossary

    Data Classification Scheme

    Data Warehouse Architecture Model

    3 Plan for Data Warehouse Governance

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for governing your data warehouse efficiently and effectively.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documentation of current standard operating procedures.

    Identified members of a data warehouse center of excellence.

    Activities

    3.1 Develop a technology capability map to visualize your desired state.

    3.2 Establish a data warehouse center of excellence.

    3.3 Create a data warehouse foundation roadmap.

    3.4 Define data warehouse service level agreements.

    3.5 Create standard operating procedures.

    Outputs

    Technology Capability Map

    Project Roadmap

    Service Level Agreement

    Data Warehouse Standard Operating Procedure Workbook

    Establish a Foresight Capability

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}88|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • To be recognized and validated as a forward-thinking CIO, you must establish a structured approach to innovation that considers external trends as well as internal processes.
    • The CEO is expecting an investment in IT innovation to yield either cost reduction or revenue growth, but growth cannot happen without opportunity identification.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Technological innovation is disrupting business models – and it’s happening faster than organizations can react.
    • Smaller, more agile organizations have an advantage because they have less resources tied to existing operations and can move faster.

    Impact and Result

    • Be the disruptor, not the disrupted. This blueprint will help you plan proactively and identify opportunities before your competitors.
    • Strategic foresight gives you the tools you need to effectively process the signals in your environment, build an understanding of relevant trends, and turn this understanding into action.

    Establish a Foresight Capability Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to effectively apply strategic foresight, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Signal gathering

    Develop a better understanding of your external environment and build a database of signals.

    • Establish a Foresight Capability – Phase 1: Signal Gathering
    • Foresight Process Tool

    2. Trends and drivers

    Select and analyze trends to uncover drivers.

    • Establish a Foresight Capability – Phase 2: Trends and Drivers

    3. Scenario building

    Use trends and drivers to build plausible scenarios and brainstorm strategic initiatives.

    • Establish a Foresight Capability – Phase 3: Scenario Building

    4. Idea selection

    Apply the wind tunneling technique to assess strategic initiatives and determine which are most likely to succeed in the face of uncertainty.

    • Establish a Foresight Capability – Phase 4: Idea Selection
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish a Foresight Capability

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Pre-workshop – Gather Signals and Build a Repository

    The Purpose

    Note: this is preparation for the workshop and is not offered onsite.

    Gather relevant signals that will inform your organization about what is happening in the external competitive environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A better understanding of the competitive landscape.

    Activities

    1.1 Gather relevant signals.

    1.2 Store signals in a repository for quick and easy recall during the workshop.

    Outputs

    A set of signal items ready for analysis

    2 Identify Trends and Uncover Drivers

    The Purpose

    Uncover trends in your environment and assess their potential impact.

    Determine the causal forces behind relevant trends to inform strategic decisions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the underlying causal forces that are influencing a trend that is affecting your organization.

    Activities

    2.1 Cluster signals into trends.

    2.2 Analyze trend impact and select a key trend.

    2.3 Perform causal analysis.

    2.4 Select drivers.

    Outputs

    A collection of relevant trends with a key trend selected

    A set of drivers influencing the key trend with primary drivers selected

    3 Build Scenarios and Ideate

    The Purpose

    Leverage your understanding of trends and drivers to build plausible scenarios and apply them as a canvas for ideation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A set of potential responses or reactions to trends that are affecting your organization.

    Activities

    3.1 Build scenarios.

    3.2 Brainstorm potential strategic initiatives (ideation).

    Outputs

    Four plausible scenarios for ideation purposes

    A potential strategic initiative that addresses each scenario

    4 Apply Wind Tunneling and Select Ideas

    The Purpose

    Assess the various ideas based on which are most likely to succeed in the face of uncertainty.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An idea that you have tested in terms of risk and uncertainty.

    An idea that can be developed and pitched to the business or stored for later use. 

    Activities

    4.1 Assign probabilities to scenarios.

    4.2 Apply wind tunneling.

    4.3 Select ideas.

    4.4 Discuss next steps and prototyping.

    Outputs

    A strategic initiative (idea) that is ready to move into prototyping

    Microsoft Teams Cookbook

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}408|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $6,299 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 27 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity

    Remote work calls for leveraging your Office 365 license to use Microsoft Teams – but IT is unsure about best practices for governance and permissions. Moreover, IT has few resources to help train end users with Teams best practices.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Microsoft Teams is not a standalone app. Successful utilization of Teams occurs when conceived in the broader context of how it integrates with Office 365. Understanding how information flows between Teams, SharePoint Online, and OneDrive for Business, for instance, will aid governance with permissions, information storage, and file sharing.

    Impact and Result

    Use Info-Tech’s Microsoft Teams Cookbook to successfully implement and use Teams. This cookbook includes recipes for:

    • IT best practices concerning governance of the creation process and Teams rollout.
    • End-user best practices for Teams functionality and common use cases.

    Microsoft Teams Cookbook Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Learn critical insights for an effective Teams rollout.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Microsoft Teams Cookbook – Sections 1-2

    1. Teams for IT

    Understand best practices for governance of the Teams creation process and Teams rollout.

    • Microsoft Teams Cookbook – Section 1: Teams for IT

    2. Teams for end users

    Get end users on board with this series of how-tos and common use cases for Teams.

    • Microsoft Teams Cookbook – Section 2: Teams for End Users

    [infographic]

     

    Further reading

    Microsoft Teams Cookbook

    Recipes for best practices and use cases for Microsoft Teams.

    Table of contents

    Executive Brief

    Section 1: Teams for IT

    Section 2: Teams for End Users

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    Remote work calls for leveraging your Office 365 license to utilize Teams – but IT is unsure about best practices for governance and permissions.

    Without a framework or plan for governing the rollout of Teams, IT risks overlooking secure use of Teams, the phenomenon of “teams sprawl,” and not realizing how Teams integrates with Office 365 more broadly.

    Complication

    Teams needs to be rolled out quickly, but IT has few resources to help train end users with Teams best practices.

    With teams, channels, chats, meetings, and live events to choose from, end users may get frustrated with lack of guidance on how to use Teams’ many capabilities.

    Resolution

    Use Info-Tech’s Microsoft Teams Cookbook to successfully implement and utilize Teams. This cookbook includes recipes for:

    • IT best practices concerning governance of the creation process and Teams rollout.
    • End-user best practices for Teams functionality and common use cases.

    Key Insights

    Teams is not a standalone app

    Successful utilization of Teams occurs when conceived in the broader context of how it integrates with Office 365. Understanding how information flows between Teams, SharePoint Online, and OneDrive for Business, for instance, will aid governance with permissions, information storage, and file sharing.

    IT should paint the first picture for team creation

    No initial governance for team creation can lead to “teams sprawl.” While Teams was built to allow end users’ creativity to flow in creating teams and channels, this can create problems with a cluttered interface and keeping track of information. To prevent end-user dissatisfaction here, IT’s initial Teams rollout should offer a basic structure for end users to work with first, limiting early teams sprawl.

    The Teams admin center can only take you so far with permissions

    Knowing how Teams integrates with other Office 365 apps will help with rolling out sensitivity labels to protect important information being accidentally shared in Teams. Of course, technology only does so much – proper processes to train and hold people accountable for their actions with data sharing must be implemented, too.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy

    Don’t waste your time deploying yet another collaboration tool that won’t get used.

    Modernize Communication and Collaboration Infrastructure

    Your legacy telephony infrastructure is dragging you down – modern communications and collaboration technology will dramatically improve productivity.

    Migrate to Office 365 Now

    One small step to cloud, one big leap to Office 365. The key is to look before you leap.

    Section 1: Teams for IT

    Governance best practices and use cases for IT

    Section 1

    Teams for IT

    Section 2

    Teams for end users

    From determining prerequisites to engaging end users.

    IT fundamentals
    • Creation process
    • Teams rollout
    Use cases
    • Retain and search for legal/regulatory compliance
    • Add an external user to a team
    • Delete/archive a team

    Overview: Creation process

    IT needs to be prepared to manage other dependent services when rolling out Teams. See the figure below for how Teams integrates with these other Office 365 applications.

    A flow chart outlining how Teams integrates with other Office 365 applications. Along the side are different applications, from the top: 'Teams client', 'OneDrive for Business', 'Sharepoint Online', 'Planner (Tasks for Teams)', 'Exchange Online', and 'Stream'. Along the top are services of 'Teams client', 'Files', 'Teams', 'Chat', 'Meeting', and 'Calls'.

    Which Microsoft 365 license do I need to access Teams?

    • Microsoft 365 Business Essentials
    • Microsoft 365 Business Premium
    • Office 365 Enterprise, E1, E3, or E5
    • Office 365 Enterprise E4 (if purchased prior to its retirement)

    Please note: To appeal to the majority of Info-Tech’s members, this blueprint refers to Teams in the context of Office 365 Enterprise licenses.

    Assign admin roles

    You will already have at least one global administrator from setting up Office 365.

    Global administrators have almost unlimited access to settings and most of the data within the software, so Microsoft recommends having only two to four IT and business owners responsible for data and security.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Configure multifactor authentication for your dedicated Office 365 global administrator accounts and set up two-step verification.

    Once you have organized your global administrators, you can designate your other administrators with “just-enough” access for managing Teams. There are four administrator roles:

    Teams Service Administrator Manage the Teams service; manage and create Microsoft 365 groups.
    Teams Communications Administrator Manage calling and meetings features with Teams.
    Teams Communications Support Engineer Troubleshoot communications issues within Teams using the advanced troubleshooting toolset.
    Teams Communications Support Specialist Troubleshoot communications issues using Call Analytics.

    Prepare the network

    There are three prerequisites before Teams can be rolled out:

    • UDP ports 3478 through 3481 are opened.
    • You have a verified domain for Office 365.
    • Office 365 has been rolled out, including Exchange Online and SharePoint Online.

    Microsoft then recommends the following checklist to optimize your Teams utilization:

    • Optimize calls and performance using the Call Quality Dashboard.
    • Assess network requirements in the Network Planner in the Teams admin center.
    • Ensure all computers running Teams client can resolve external DNS queries.
    • Check adequate public IP addresses are assigned to the NAT pools to prevent port exhaustion.
    • Route to local or regional Microsoft data centers.
    • Whitelist all Office 365 URLs to move through security layers, especially IDS/IPS.
    • Split tunnel Teams traffic so it bypasses your organization’s VPN.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    For online support and walkthroughs, utilize Advisor for Teams. This assistant can be found in the Teams admin center.

    Team Creation

    You can create and manage Teams through the Teams PowerShell module and the Teams admin center. Only the global administrator and Teams service administrator have full administrative capabilities in this center.

    Governance over team creation intends to prevent “teams sprawl” – the phenomenon whereby end users create team upon team without guidance. This creates a disorganized interface, with issues over finding the correct team and sharing the right information.

    Prevent teams sprawl by painting the first picture for end users:

    1. Decide what kind of team grouping would best fit your organization: by department or by project.
    2. Start with a small number of teams before letting end users’ creativity take over. This will prevent initial death by notifications and support adoption.
    3. Add people or groups to these teams. Assign multiple owners for each team in case people move around at the start of rollout or someone leaves the organization.
    4. Each team has a general channel that cannot be removed. Use it for sharing an overview of the team’s goals, onboarding, and announcements.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    For smaller organizations that are project-driven, organize teams by projects. For larger organizations with established, siloed departments, organize by department; projects within departments can become channels.

    Integrations with SharePoint Online

    Teams does not integrate with SharePoint Server.

    Governance of Teams is important because of how tightly it integrates with other Office 365 apps, including SharePoint Online.

    A poor rollout of Teams will have ramifications in SharePoint. A good rollout will optimize these apps for the organization.

    Teams and SharePoint integrate in the following ways:

    • Each team created in Teams automatically generates a SharePoint team site behind it. All documents and chat shared through a team are stored in that team’s SharePoint document library.
    • As such, all files shared through Teams are subject to SharePoint permissions.
    • Existing SharePoint folders can be tied to a team without needing to create a new one.
    • If governance over resource sharing in Teams is poor, information can get lost, duplicated, or cluttered throughout both Teams and SharePoint.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    End users should be encouraged to integrate their teams and channels with existing SharePoint folders and, where no folder exists, to create one in SharePoint first before then attaching a team to it.

    Permissions

    Within the Teams admin center, the global or Teams service administrator can manage Teams policies.

    Typical Teams policies requiring governance include:

    • The extent end users can discover or create private teams or channels
    • Messaging policies
    • Third-party app use

    Chosen policies can be either applied globally or assigned to specific users.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    If organizations need to share sensitive information within the bounds of a certain group, private channels help protect this data. However, inviting users into that channel will enable them to see all shared history.

    External and guest access

    Within the security and compliance center, the global or Teams service administrator can set external and guest access.

    External access (federation) – turned on by default.

    • Lets you find, call, and chat with users in other domains. External users will have no access to the organization’s teams or team resources.

    Guest access – turned off by default.

    • Lets you add individual users with their own email address. You do this when you want external users to access teams and team resources. Approved guests will be added to the organization’s active directory.

    If guest access is enabled, it is subject to Azure AD and Office 365 licensing and service limits. Guests will have no access to the following, which cannot be changed:

    • OneDrive for Business
    • An organization’s calendar/meetings
    • PSTN
    • Organization’s hierarchical chart
    • The ability to create, revise, or browse a team
    • Upload files to one-on-one chat

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Within the security and compliance center, you can allow users to add sensitivity labels to their teams that can prevent external and guest access.

    Expiration and archiving

    To reduce the number of unused teams and channels, or delete information permanently, the global or Teams service administrator can implement an Office 365 group expiration and archiving policy through the Teams admin center.

    If a team has an expiration policy applied to it, the team owner will receive a notification for team renewal 30 days, 15 days, and 1 day before the expiry date. They can renew their team at any point within this time.

    • To prevent accidental deletion, auto-renewal is enabled for a team. If the team owner is unable to manually respond, any team that has one channel visit from a team member before expiry is automatically renewed.
    • A deleted Office 365 group is retained for 30 days and can be restored at any point within this time.

    Alternatively, teams and their channels (including private) can be archived. This will mean that all activity for the team ceases. However, you can still add, remove, and update roles of the members.

    Retention and data loss prevention

    Retention policies can be created and managed in the Microsoft 365 Compliance Center or the security and compliance center PowerShell cmdlets. This can be applied globally or to specific users.

    By default, information shared through Teams is retained forever.

    However, setting up retention policies ensures data is retained for a specified time regardless of what happens to that data within Teams (e.g. user deletes).

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    To prevent external or guest users accessing and deleting sensitive data, Teams is able to block this content when shared by internal users. Ensure this is configured appropriately in your organization:

    • For guest access in teams and channels
    • For external access in meetings and chat

    Please note the following limitations of Teams’ retention and data loss prevention:

    • Organization-wide retention policies will need to be manually inputted into Teams. This is because Teams requires a retention policy that is independent of other workloads.
    • As of May 2020, retention policies apply to all information in Teams except private channel messages. Files shared in private channels, though, are subject to retention policies.
    • Teams does not support advanced retention settings, such as a policy that pertains to specific keywords or sensitive information.
    • It will take three to seven days to permanently delete expired messages.

    Teams telephony

    Teams has built-in functionality to call any team member within the organization through VoIP.

    However, Teams does not automatically connect to the PSTN, meaning that calling or receiving calls from external users is not immediately possible.

    Bridging VoIP calls with the PSTN through Teams is available as an add-on that can be attached to an E3 license or as part of an E5 license.

    There are two options to enable this capability:

    • Enable Phone System. This allows for call control and PBX capabilities in Office 365.
    • Use direct routing. You can use an existing PSTN connection via a Session Border Controller that links with Teams (Amaxra).

    Steps to implement Teams telephony:

    1. Ensure Phone System and required (non-Microsoft-related) services are available in your country or region.
    2. Purchase and assign Phone System and Calling Plan licenses. If Calling Plans are not available in your country or region, Microsoft recommends using Direct Routing.
    3. Get phone numbers and/or service numbers. There are three ways to do this:
      • Get new numbers through the Teams admin center.
      • If you cannot get new numbers through the Teams admin center, you can request new numbers from Microsoft directly.
      • Port or transfer existing numbers. To do this, you need to send Microsoft a letter of authorization, giving them permission to request and transfer existing numbers on your behalf.
    4. To enable service numbers, including toll-free numbers, Microsoft recommends setting up Communications Credits for your Calling Plans and Audio Conferencing.

    Overview: Teams rollout

    1. From Skype (and Slack) to Teams
    2. Gain stakeholder purchase
    3. Employ a phased deployment
    4. Engage end users

    Skype for Business is being retired; Microsoft offers a range of transitions to Teams.

    Combine the best transition mode with Info-Tech’s adoption best practices to successfully onboard and socialize Teams.

    From Skype to Teams

    Skype for Business Online will be retired on July 31, 2021. Choose from the options below to see which transition mode is right for your organization.

    Skype for Business On-Premises will be retired in 2024. To upgrade to Teams, first configure hybrid connectivity to Skype for Business Online.

    Islands mode (default)

    • Skype for Business and Teams coexist while Teams is rolled out.
    • Recommended for phased rollouts or when Teams is ready to use for chat, calling, and meetings.
    • Interoperability is limited. Teams and Skype for Business only transfer information if an internal Teams user sends communications to an external Skype for Business user.

    Teams only mode (final)

    • All capabilities are enabled in Teams and Skype for Business is disabled.
    • Recommended when end users are ready to switch fully to Teams.
    • End users may retain Skype for Business to join meetings with non-upgraded or external parties. However, this communication is only initiated from the Skype for Business external user.

    Collaboration first mode

    • Skype for Business and Teams coexist, but only Teams’ collaboration capabilities are enabled. Teams communications capabilities are turned off.
    • Recommended to leverage Skype for Business communications yet utilize Teams for collaboration.

    Meetings first mode

    • Skype for Business and Teams coexist, but only Teams’ meetings capabilities are enabled.
    • Recommended for organizations that want to leverage their Skype for Business On-Premises’ Enterprise Voice capability but want to benefit from Teams’ meetings through VoIP.

    From Slack to Teams

    The more that’s left behind in Slack, the easier the transition. As a prerequisite, pull together the following information:

    • Usage statistics of Slack workspaces and channels
    • What apps end users utilize in Slack
    • What message history you want to export
    • A list of users whose Slack accounts can map on to required Microsoft accounts
    Test content migration

    Your Slack service plan will determine what you can and can’t migrate. By default, public channels content can be exported. However, private channels may not be exportable, and a third-party app is needed to migrate Direct Messages.

    Files migration

    Once you have set up your teams and channels in Teams, you can programmatically copy files from Slack into the target Teams channel.

    Apps migration

    Once you have a list of apps and their configurations used in Slack’s workspaces, you can search in Teams’ app store to see if they’re available for Teams.

    User identity migration

    Slack user identities may not map onto a Microsoft account. This will cause migration issues, such as problems with exporting text content posted by that user.

    Follow the migration steps to the right.

    Importantly, determine which Slack workspaces and channels should become teams and channels within Teams.

    Usage statistics from Slack can help pinpoint which workspaces and channels are redundant.

    This will help IT paint an ordered first picture for new Teams end users.

    1. Create teams and channels in Teams
    2. Copy files into Teams
    3. Install apps, configure Office 365 Connecters
    4. Import Slack history
    5. Disable Slack user accounts

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Avoid data-handling violations. Determine what privacy and compliance regulations (if any) apply to the handling, storage, and processing of data during this migration.

    Gain stakeholder purchase

    Change management is a challenging aspect of implementing a new collaboration tool. Creating a communication and adoption plan is crucial to achieving universal buy-in for Teams.

    To start, define SMART objectives and create a goals cascade.

    Specific Measurable Actionable Realistic Time Bound
    Make sure the objective is clear and detailed. Objectives are `measurable` if there are specific metrics assigned to measure success. Metrics should be objective. Objectives become actionable when specific initiatives designed to achieve the objective are identified. Objectives must be achievable given your current resources or known available resources. An objective without a timeline can be put off indefinitely. Furthermore, measuring success is challenging without a timeline.
    Who, what, where, why? How will you measure the extent to which the goal is met? What is the action-oriented verb? Is this within my capabilities? By when: deadline, frequency?

    Sample list of stakeholder-specific benefits from improving collaboration

    Stakeholder Driver Benefits
    Senior Leadership Resource optimization Increased transparency into IT operational costs.
    Better ability to forecast hardware, resourcing costs.
    All employees Increasing productivity Apps deployed faster.
    Issues fixed faster.
    Easier access to files.
    Able to work more easily offsite.
    LBU-HR, legal, finance Mitigating risk Better able to verify compliance with external regulations.
    Better understanding of IT risks.
    Service desk Resource optimization Able to resolve issues faster.
    Fewer issues stemming from updates.
    Tier 2 Increasing productivity Less time spent on routine maintenance.

    Use these activities to define what pain points stakeholders face and how Teams can directly mitigate those pain points.

    (Source: Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools (coming soon), Activities: 3.1C – 3.1D)

    Employ a phased deployment

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Deploy Teams over a series of phases. As such, if you are already using Skype for Business, choose one of the coexistence phases to start.

      1. Identify and pilot Teams with early adopters that will become your champions. These champions should be formally trained, be encouraged to help and train their colleagues, and be positively reinforced for their efforts.
      2. Iron out bugs identified with the pilot group and train middle management. Enterprise collaboration tool adoption is strongly correlated with leadership adoption.
        1. Top-level management
          Control and direct overall organization.
        2. Middle management
          Execute top-level management’s plans in accordance with organization’s norms.
        3. First-level management
          Execute day-to-day activities.
      3. Use Info-Tech’s one-pager marketing template to advertise the new tool to stakeholders. Highlight how the new tool addresses specific pain points. Address questions stemming from fear and uncertainty to avoid employees’ embarrassment or their rejection of the tool.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's one-pager marketing template.
    1. Extend the pilot to other departments and continue this process for the whole organization.

    (Source: Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools (coming soon), Tools:GANTT Chart and Marketing Materials, Activities: 3.2A – 3.2B)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Be in control of setting and maintaining expectations. Aligning expectations with reality and the needs of employees will lower onboarding resistance.

    Engage end users

    Short-term best practices

    Launch day:
    • Hold a “lunch and learn” targeted training session to walk end users through common use cases.
    • Open a booth or virtual session (through Teams!) and have tool representatives available to answer questions.
    • Create a game to get users exploring the new tool – from scavenger hunts to bingo.
    Launch week:
    • Offer incentives for using the tool and helping others, including small gift cards.
    • Publicize achievements if departments hit adoption milestones.

    Long-term best practices

    • Make available additional training past launch week. End users should keep learning new features to improve familiarity.
    • Distribute frequent training clips, slowly exposing end users to more complex ways of utilizing Teams.
    • Continue to positively reinforce and recognize those who use Teams well. This could be celebrating those that help others use the tool, how active certain users are, and attendance at learning events.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Microsoft has a range of training support that can be utilized. From instructor-led training to “Coffee in the Cloud” sessions, leverage all the support you can.

    Use case #1: Retain and search data for legal/regulatory compliance

    Scenario:

    Your organization requires you to retain data and documents for a certain period of time; however, after this period, your organization wishes to delete or archive the data instead of maintaining it indefinitely. Within the timeframe of the retention policy, the admin may be asked to retrieve information that has been requested through a legal channel.

    Purpose:
    • Maintain compliance with the legal and regulatory standards to which the organization is subject.
    Jobs:
    • Ensure the data is retained for the approved time period.
    • Ensure the policy applies to all relevant data and users.
    Solution: Retention Policies
    • Ensure that your organization has an Office 365 E3 or higher license.
    • Set the desired retention policy through the Security & Compliance Center or PowerShell by deciding which teams, channels, chats, and users the policies will apply to and what will happen once the retention period ends.
    • Ensure that matching retention policies are applied to SharePoint and OneDrive, since this is where files shared in Teams are stored.
    • Be aware that Teams retention policies cannot be applied to messages in private channels.
    Solution: e-Discovery
    • If legally necessary, place users or Teams on legal hold in order to retain data that would be otherwise deleted by your organization’s retention policies.
    • Perform e-discovery on Teams messages, files, and summaries of meetings and calls through the Security & Compliance Center.
    • See Microsoft’s chart on the next slide for what is e-discoverable.

    Content subject to e-discovery

    Content type eDiscoverable Notes
    Teams chat messages Yes Chat messages from chats where guest users are the only participants in a 1:1 or 1:N chat are not e-discoverable.
    Audio recordings No  
    Private channel messages Yes  
    Emojis, GIFs, stickers Yes  
    Code snippets No  
    Chat links Yes  
    Reactions (likes, hearts, etc) No  
    Edited messages Yes If the user is on hold, previous versions of edited messages are preserved.
    Inline images Yes  
    Tables Yes  
    Subject Yes  
    Quotes Yes Quoted content is searchable. However, search results don’t indicate that the content was quoted.
    Name of channel No  

    E-discovery does not capture audio messages and read receipts in MS Teams.

    Since files shared in private channels are stored separately from the rest of a team, follow Microsoft’s directions for how to include private channels in e-discovery. (Source: “Conduct an eDiscovery investigation of content in Microsoft Teams,” Microsoft, 2020.)

    Use case #2: Add external person to a team

    Scenario:

    A team in your organization needs to work in an ongoing way with someone external to the company. This user needs access to the relevant team’s work environment, but they should not be privy to the goings-on in the other parts of the organization.

    Jobs:

    This external person needs to be able to:

    • Attend meetings
    • Join calls
    • Chat with individual team members
    • View and collaborate on the team’s files
    Solution:
    • If necessary, set a data loss prevention policy to prevent your users from sharing certain types of information or files with external users present in your organization’s Teams chats and public channels.
    • Ensure that your Microsoft license includes DLP protection. However:
      • DLP cannot be applied to private channel messages.
      • DLP cannot block messages from external Skype for Business users nor external users who are not in “Teams only” mode.
    • Ensure that you have a team set up for the project that you wish the external user to join. The external user will be able to see all the channels in this team, unless you create a private channel they are restricted from.
    • Complete Microsoft’s “Guest Access Checklist” to enable guest access in Teams, if it isn’t already enabled.
    • As admin, give the external user guest access through the Teams admin center or Azure AD B2B collaboration. (If given permission, team owners can also add guests through the Teams client).
    • Decide whether to set a policy to monitor and audit external user activity.

    Use case #3: Delete/archive a team

    Scenario:

    In order to avoid teams sprawl, organizations may want IT to periodically delete or archive unused teams within the Teams client in order to improve the user interface.

    Alternately, if you are using a project-based approach to organizing Teams, you may wish to formalize a process to archive a team once the project is complete.

    Delete:
    • Determine if the team owner anticipates the team will need to be restored one day.
    • Ensure that deletion does not contradict the organization’s retention policy.
    • If not, proceed with deletion. Find the team in the Teams admin center and delete.
    • Restore a deleted team within 30 days of its initial deletion through PowerShell.
    Archive:
    • Determine if the team owner anticipates the team will need to be restored one day.
    • Find the relevant team in the Teams admin center and change its status to “Archived.”
    • Restore the archived team if the workspace becomes relevant once again.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Remind end users that they can hide teams or channels they do not wish to see in their Teams interface. Knowing a team can be hidden may impact a team owner’s decision to delete it.

    Section 2: Teams for End Users

    Best practices for utilizing teams, channels, chat, meetings, and live events

    Section 1

    Teams for IT

    Section 2

    Teams for end users

    From Teams how-tos to common use cases for end users.

    End user basics
    • Teams, channels, and chat
    • Meetings and live events
    Common use cases: Workspaces
    • WS#1: Departments
    • WS#2: A cross-functional committee
    • WS#3: An innovation day event
    • WS#4: A non-work-related social event
    • WS#5: A project team with a defined end time
    Common use cases: Meetings
    • M#1: Job interview with an external candidate
    • M#2: Quarterly board meeting
    • M#3: Weekly recurring team meeting
    • M#4: Morning stand-up/scrum
    • M#5: Phone call between two people

    Overview: Teams, channels, and chat

    Teams

    • Team: A workspace for a group of collaborative individuals.
      • Public channel: A focused area where all members of a team can meet, communicate, and share ideas and content.
      • Private channel: Like a public channel but restricted to a subset of team members, defined by channel owner.

    Chat

    • Chat: Two or more users collected into a common conversation thread.
    (Source: “Overview of teams and channels in Microsoft Teams,” Microsoft, 2020.)

    For any Microsoft Teams newcomer, the differences between teams, channels, and chat can be confusing.

    Use Microsoft’s figure (left) to see how these three mediums differ in their role and function.

    Best practices: Workspaces 1/2

      Team
    A workspace for a group of collaborative individuals.
    Public Channel
    A focused area where all members of a team can meet, communicate, and share ideas and content.
    Private Channel
    Like a public channel but restricted to a subset of team members, defined by channel owner.
    Group Chat
    Two or more users collected into a common conversation thread.
    Limits and Administrative Control
    Who can create? Default setting: All users in an organization can create a team

    Maximum 500,000 teams per tenant

    Any member of a team can create a public channel within the team

    Maximum 200 public channels per team

    Any member of a team can create a private channel and define its members

    Maximum 30 private channels per team

    Anyone
    Who can add members? Team owner(s); max 5,000 members per team N/A Channel owner(s) can add up to 250 members Anyone can bring new members into the chat (and decide if they can see the previous history) up to 100 members
    Who can delete? Team owner/admin can delete Any team member Channel owner(s) Anyone can leave a chat but cannot delete chat, but they are never effectively deleted
    Social Context
    Who can see it? Public teams are indexed and searchable

    Private teams are not indexed and are visible only to joined members

    All members of the team can see all public channels. Channels may be hidden from view for the purposes of cleaning up the UI. Individuals will only see private channels for which they have membership Only participants in the group chat can see the group chat
    Who can see the content? Team members can see any content that is not otherwise part of a private channel All team members All members of the private channel Only members of the group chat

    When does a Group Chat become a Channel?

    • When it’s appropriate for the conversation to have a gallery – an audience of members who may not be actively participating in the discussion.
    • When control over who joins the conversation needs to be centrally governed and not left up to anyone in the discussion.
    • When the discussion will persist over a longer time period.
    • When the number of participants approaches 100.

    When does a Channel become a Team?

    • When a team approaches 30 private channels, many of those private channels are likely candidates to become their own team.
    • When the channel membership needs to extend beyond the boundary of the team membership.

    Best practices: Workspaces 2/2

      Team
    A workspace for a group of collaborative individuals.
    Public Channel
    A focused area where all members of a team can meet, communicate, and share ideas and content.
    Private Channel
    Like a public channel but restricted to a subset of team members, defined by channel owner.
    Group Chat
    Two or more users collected into a common conversation thread.
    Data and Applications
    Where does the content live? SharePoint: Every team resides in its own SharePoint site SharePoint: Each team (public and private) has its own folder off the root of the SharePoint site’s repository SharePoint: Each team (public and private) has its own folder off the root of the SharePoint site’s repository OneDrive: Files that are shared in a chat are stored in the OneDrive folder of the original poster and shared to the other members
    How does the data persist or be retained? If a team expires/is deleted, its corresponding SharePoint site and those artifacts are also deleted Available for 21 days after deletion. Any member of the team can delete a public channel. The team owner and private channel owner can delete/restore a private channel Chats are never effectively deleted. They can be hidden to clean up the user interface.
    Video N/A Yes, select “Meet now” in channel below text entry box Yes, select “Meet now” in channel below text entry box Yes
    Phone calls N/A Yes, select “Meet now” in channel below text entry box Yes, select “Meet now” in channel below text entry box Yes
    Shared computer audio/screen N/A Yes, select “Meet now” in channel below text entry box Yes, select “Meet now” in channel below text entry box Yes
    File-sharing Within channels Yes. Frequently used/collaborated files can be turned into discrete tab. Yes. Frequently used/collaborated files can be turned into discrete tab. Yes
    Wikis Within channels Yes Yes No
    Whiteboarding No No No No

    When does a Team become a Channel?

    • When a team’s purpose for existing can logically be subsumed by another team that has a larger scope.

    When does a Channel become a Group Chat?

    • When a conversation within a channel between select users does not pertain to that channel’s scope (or any other existing channel), they should move the conversation to a group chat.
    • However, this is until that group chat desires to form a channel of its own.

    Create a new team

    Team owner: The person who creates the team. It is possible for the team owner to then invite other members of the team to become co-owners to distribute administrative responsibilities.

    Team members: People who have accepted their invitation to be a part of the team.

    NB: Your organization can control who has permission to set up a team. If you can’t set a up a team, contact your IT department.

    Screenshots detailing how to create a new team in Microsoft Teams, steps 1 to 3. Step 1: 'Click the <Teams data-verified= tab on the left-hand side of the app'. Step 2: 'At the bottom of the app, click '. Step 3: 'Under the banner , click '.">

    Create a new team

    Screenshot detailing how to create a new team in Microsoft Teams, the step 4 starting point with an arrow pointing to the 'Build a team from scratch' button.

    Decide from these two options:

    • Building a team from scratch, which will create a new group with no prior history imported (steps 4.1–4.3).
    • Creating a team from an existing group in Office 365, including an already existing team (steps 4.4–4.6).

    NB: You cannot create a team from an existing group if:

    • That group has 5,000 members or more.
    • That group is in Yammer.

    Screenshot detailing how to create a new team in Microsoft Teams, step 4.1. There are buttons for 'Private' and 'Public'.

    Decide if you want you new team from scratch to be private or public. If you set up a private team, any internal or external user you invite into the team will have access to all team history and files shared.

    Screenshot detailing how to create a new team in Microsoft Teams, step 4.2 and 4.3. 4.2 has a space to give your team a name and another for a description. 4.3 says 'Then click <Create data-verified='.">

    Create a new team

    Screenshot detailing how to create a new team in Microsoft Teams, the step 4 starting point with an arrow pointing to the 'Create from...' button.

    Decide from these two options:

    • Building a team from scratch, which will create a new group with no prior history imported (steps 4.1–4.3).
    • Creating a team from an existing group in Office 365, including an already existing team (steps 4.4–4.6).

    NB: You cannot create a team from an existing group if:

    • That group has 5,000 members or more.
    • That group is in Yammer.

    Screenshot detailing how to create a new team in Microsoft Teams, step 4.4. It reads 'Create a new team from something you already own' with a button for 'Team'.

    Configure your new team settings, including privacy, apps, tabs, and members.

    Screenshot detailing how to create a new team in Microsoft Teams, step 4.5 and 4.6. 4.5 has a space to give your team a name, a description, choose privacy settings, and what you'd like to include from the original team. 4.6 says 'Then click <Create data-verified='.">

    Add team members

    Remove team members

    Screenshot detailing how to add team members in Microsoft Teams, step 1.

    To add a team member, on the right-hand side of the team name, click “More options.”

    Then, from the drop-down menu, click “Add member.”

    Screenshot detailing how to remove team members in Microsoft Teams, step 1.

    Only team owners can remove a team member. To do so, on the right-hand side of the team name, click “More options.”

    Then, from the drop-down menu, click “Manage team.”

    Screenshot detailing how to add team members in Microsoft Teams, step 2.

    If you’re a team owner, you can then type a name or an email address to add another member to the team.

    If you’re a team member, typing a name or an email address will send a request to the team owner to consider adding the member.

    Screenshot detailing how to remove team members in Microsoft Teams, step 2.

    Under the “Members” tab, you’ll see a list of the members in the team. Click the “X” at the far right of the member’s name to remove them.

    Team owners can only be removed if they change their role to team member first.

    Create a new channel

    Screenshot detailing how to create a new channel in Microsoft Teams, step 1.

    On the right-hand side of the team name, click “More options.”

    Then, from the drop-down menu, click “Add channel.”

    Screenshot detailing how to create a new channel in Microsoft Teams, step 2.

    Name your channel, give a description, and set your channel’s privacy.

    Screenshot detailing how to create a new channel in Microsoft Teams, step 3.

    To manage subsequent permissions, on the right-hand side of the channel name, click “More options.”

    Then, from the drop-down menu, click “Manage channel.”

    Adding and removing members from channels:

    Only members in a team can see that team’s channels. Setting channel privacy as “standard” means that the channel can be accessed by anyone in a team. Unless privacy settings for a channel are set as “private” (from which the channel creator can choose who can be in that channel), there is no current way to remove members from channels.

    It will be up to the end user to decide which channels they want to hide.

    Link team/channel to SharePoint folder

    Screenshot detailing how to link a team or channel to a SharePoint folder in Microsoft Teams, steps 1, 2, and 3. Step 1: 'Along the top of the team/channel tab bar, click the “+” symbol'. Step 2: 'Select “Document Library” to link the team/channel to a SharePoint folder'. Step 3: 'Copy and paste the SharePoint URL for the desired folder, or search in “Relevant sites” if the folder can be found there'.

    Need to find the SharePoint URL?

    Screenshot detailing how to find the SharePoint URL in Microsoft Teams. 'Locate the folder in SharePoint and click <Show actions data-verified=', 'Click to access the folder's SharePoint URL.'">

    Hide/unhide teams

    Hide/unhide channels

    Screenshot detailing how to hide and unhide teams in Microsoft Teams, step 1.

    To hide a team, on the right-hand side of the team name, click “More options.”

    Then, from the drop-down menu, click “Hide.” Hidden teams are moved to the “hidden teams” menu at the bottom of your team list.

    Screenshot detailing how to hide and unhide channels in Microsoft Teams, step 1.

    To hide a channel, on the right-hand side of the channel name, click “More options.”

    Then, from the drop-down menu, click “Hide.” Hidden channels are moved to the “hidden channels” menu at the bottom of your channel list in that team.

    Screenshot detailing how to hide and unhide teams in Microsoft Teams, step 2. Screenshot of a button that says 'Hidden teams'.

    To unhide a team, click on the “hidden teams” menu. On the right-hand side of the team name, click “More options.”

    Then, from the drop-down menu, click “Show.”

    Screenshot detailing how to hide and unhide channels in Microsoft Teams, step 2.

    To unhide a channel, click on the “hidden channels” menu at the bottom of the team. This will produce a drop-down menu of all hidden channels in that team.

    Hover over the channel you want to unhide and click “Show.”

    Find/join teams

    Leave teams

    Screenshot detailing how to find and join teams in Microsoft Teams, step 1. Click the “Teams” tab on the left-hand side of the app. Screenshot detailing how to find and join teams in Microsoft Teams, step 2.

    At the bottom of the app, click “Join or create a team.” Teams will then suggest a range of teams that you might be looking for. You can join public teams immediately. You will have to request approval to join a private team.

    Screenshot detailing how to leave teams in Microsoft Teams.

    To leave a team, on the right-hand side of the team name, click “More options.”

    Then, from the drop-down menu, click “Leave the team.”

    NB: If the owner of a private team has switched off discoverability, you will have to contact that owner to join that team. Screenshot detailing how to find and join teams in Microsoft Teams, step 3. If you can’t immediately see the team, you have two options: either search for the team or enter that team’s code under the banner “Join a team with a code.” Can I find a channel?

    No. To join a channel, you need to first join the team that channel belongs to.

    Can I leave a channel?

    No. The most you can do is hide the channel. By default, if you join a team you will have access to all the channels within that team (unless a channel is private, in which case you’ll have to request access to that channel).

    Create a chat

    Screenshots detailing how to create a chat in Microsoft Teams, steps 1 to 5. Step 1:'Click the “Chat” tab on the left hand side of the app (or keyboard shortcut Ctrl+N)'. Step 2: 'Search the name of the person you want to chat with'. Step 3: 'You’re now ready to start the chat! You can also send a chat message while working in a separate channel by typing/chat into the search bar and entering the recipient’s name'. Step 4: 'For group chat, click the “Add people” button in the top right hand corner of the app to add other persons into the existing chat'. Step 5: 'You can then rename the group chat (if there are 3+ people) by clicking the “Name group chat” option to the right of the group chat members’ names'.

    Hide a chat

    Unhide a chat

    Screenshots detailing how to hide a chat in Microsoft Teams, steps 1 to 3. Step 1:'Click the “Chat” tab on the left-hand side of the app'. Step 2: 'Search the name of the chat or group chat that you want to hide'. Step 3: In either 'Single person chat options' or 'Group chat options' Click “More options.” Then click “Hide.”' To unhide a chat, search for the hidden person or name of the group chat in the search bar. Click “More options.” Then click “Unhide.” Screenshot detailing how to unhide a chat in Microsoft Teams.

    Leave a chat

    You can only leave group chats. To do so, click “More options.” Then click “Leave.” Screenshot detailing how to leave a chat in Microsoft Teams.

    Overview: Meetings and live events

    Teams Meetings: Real-time communication and collaboration between a group, limited to 250 people.

    Teams Live Events: designed for presentations and webinars to a large audience of up to 10,000 people, in which attendees watch rather than interact.

     

    Office 365 and Microsoft 365 Licenses

    I want to: F1 F3 E1 E3 E5 Audio conferencing add-on
    Join a Teams meeting No license required. Any email address can participate in a Teams meeting.
    Attend a Teams meeting with a dial-in phone number No license required. Any phone number can dial into a Teams meeting. (Meeting organizers need to have an Audio Conferencing add-on license to send an invite that includes dial-in conferencing.)
    Attend a Teams live event No license required. Any phone number can dial into a Teams live event.
    Create a Teams meeting for up to 250 attendees   One of these licensing plans
    Create a Teams meeting for up to 250 attendees with a dial-in phone number   One of these licensing plans + Audio Conferencing (Meeting organizers need to have an Audio Conferencing add-on license to send an invite that includes dial-in conferencing.)
    Create a Teams live event for up to 10,000 attendees     One of these licensing plans
    Dial out from a Teams meeting to add someone at their Call me at number   One of these licensing plans + Audio Conferencing (Meeting dial out to a Call me at number requires organizers to have an E5 or Audio Conference add-in license. A dial plan may also be needed.)

    Depending on the use case, end users will have to determine whether they need to hold a meeting or a live event.

    Use Microsoft’s table (left) to see what license your organization needs to perform meetings and live events.

    (Source: “Admin quick start – Meetings and live events in Microsoft Teams,” Microsoft, 2020.)

    Best practices: Meetings

      Ad Hoc Call
    Direct audio/video call
    Scheduled Meeting Live Event
    Limits and Administrative Control
    Who can create? Anyone Anyone Anyone, unless altered by admin (permission to create MS Stream events also required if external production tools are used).
    Who can add members? Anyone in the session. The meeting organizer can add new attendees to the meeting. The event creator (the “organizer”) sets attendee permissions and assigns event group roles (“producer” and “presenter”).
    Can external stakeholders attend? Yes, through email invite. However, collaboration tools are restricted. Yes, through email invite. However, collaboration tools are restricted. Public events: yes, through shared invite link.
    Org-wide event: yes, if guest/external access granted.
    Who can delete? Anyone can leave the session. There is no artifact to delete. The meeting organizer Any attendee can leave the session.
    The organizer can cancel the event.
    Maximum attendees 100 250 10,000 attendees and 10 active presenters/producers (250 presenters and producers can be present at the event).
    Social Context
    How does the request come in? Unscheduled.
    Notification of an incoming audio or video call.
    Scheduled.
    Meeting invite, populated in the calendar, at a scheduled time.
    Meeting only auto-populated in event group’s calendars. Organizer must circulate event invite link to attendees – for instance, by pasting link into an Outlook meeting invite.
    Available Functionality
    Screen-sharing Yes Yes Producers and Presenters (through Teams, no third-party app).
    Whiteboard No Yes Yes
    OneNote (for minutes) Yes (from a member’s OneDrive) Yes, part of the meeting construct. No. A Meeting Notes tab is available instead.
    Dedicated chat space Yes. Derived from a group chat. Meeting has its own chat room. The organizer can set up a moderated Q&A (not chat) when creating the event. Only Presenters and Producers can chat.
    Recording Yes Yes Yes. Event can last up to 4 hours.

    When should an Ad Hoc Call become a Scheduled Meeting?

    • When the participants need time to prepare content for the call.
    • When an answer is not required immediately.
    • When bringing a group of people together requires logistical organizing.

    When should a Scheduled Meeting become an Ad Hoc Call?

    • When the participants can meet on short notice.
    • When a topic under discussion requires creating alignment quickly.

    When should a Live Event be created?

    • When the expected attendance exceeds 250 people.
    • If the event does not require collaboration and is mostly a presenter conveying information.

    Create a scheduled meeting

    Screenshots detailing how to create a scheduled meeting in Microsoft Teams, steps 1 to 4. Step 1:'Click the “Calendar” tab on the left-hand side of the app'. Step 2: 'On the top-right of the app, click the drop-down menu for “+ New meeting” and then “Schedule meeting.”' Step 3: 'Fill in the meeting details. When inputting internal attendees, their names will drop down without needing their email. You will need to input email addresses for external attendees'. Step 4: 'To determine internal attendees’ availability, click “Scheduling assistant” on the top left. Then click “Save” to create the meeting'.

    Create an ad hoc meeting

    Screenshots detailing how to create an ad hoc meeting in Microsoft Teams, steps 1 to 4. Step 1:'Click the “Calendar” tab on the left-hand side of the app'. Step 2: 'Along the top-right, click “Meet now.”' Step 3: 'Name your meeting, choose your audio and video settings, and click “Join now.”'. Step 4: 'To determine internal attendees’ availability, click “Scheduling assistant” on the top left. Then click “Save” to create the meeting. You’ll then be prompted to fill in the meeting details. When inputting internal attendees, their names will drop down without needing their email. You will need to input email addresses for external attendees'.

    Tip: Use existing channels to host the chatrooms for your online meetings

    When you host a meeting online with Microsoft Teams, there will always be a chatroom associated with the meeting. While this is a great place for meeting participants to interact, there is one particular downside.

    Problem: The never-ending chat. Often the activity in these chatrooms can persist long after the meeting. The chatroom itself becomes, unofficially, a channel. When end users can’t keep up with the deluge of communication, the tools have failed them.

    Solution: Adding an existing channel to the meeting. This ensures that discussion activity is already hosted in the appropriate venue for the group, during and after the meeting. Furthermore, it provides non-attendees with a means to catch up on the discussion they have missed.

    In section two of this cookbook, we will often refer to this tactic.

    A screenshot detailing how to add an existing channel to a meeting in Microsoft Teams. 'Break the habit of online booking meetings in Outlook – use the Teams Calendar View instead! In order to make use of this function, the meeting must be setup in Microsoft Teams, not Microsoft Outlook. The option to assign a channel to the meeting will then be available to the meeting organizer.'

    Don’t have a channel for the chat session of your online meeting? Perhaps you should!

    If your meeting is with a group of individuals that will be collaborating frequently, they may need a workspace that persists beyond the meeting.

    Guests can still attend the meeting, but they can’t chat!

    If there are attendees in your meeting that do not have access to the channel you select to host the chat, they will not see the chat discussion nor have any ability to use this function.

    This may be appropriate in some cases – for example, a vendor providing a briefing as part of a regular team meeting.

    However, if there are attendees outside the channel membership that need to see the meeting chat, consider another channel or simply default to not assigning one.

    Meeting settings explained

    Show device settings. For settings concerning audio, video, and whether viewing is private.

    Show meeting notes. Use to take notes throughout the meeting. The notes will stay attached to this event.

    Show meeting details. Find meeting information for: a dial-in number, conference ID, and link to join.

    Enter full screen.

    Show background effects. Choose from a range of video backgrounds to hide/blur your location.

    Turn on the captions (preview). Turn on live speech-to-text captions.

    Keypad. For dialing a number within the meeting (when enabled as an add-on with E3 or as part of E5).

    Start recording. Recorded and saved using Microsoft Stream.

    End meeting.

    Turn off incoming video. To save network bandwidth, you can decline receiving attendee’s video.

    Click “More options” to access the meetings settings.

    Screen share. In the tool tray, select “Share” to share your screen. Select particular applications if you only want to share certain information; otherwise, you can share your whole desktop.

    System audio share. To share your device’s audio while screen sharing, checkbox the “Include system audio” option upon clicking “Share.”

    If you didn’t click that option at the start but now want to share audio during screen share, click the “Include systems audio” option in the tool tray along the top of the screen.

    Give/take control of screen share. To give control, click “Give control” in the tool tray along the top of the screen when sharing content. Choose from the drop-down who you would like to give control to. In the same spot, click “Take back control” when required.

    To request control, click “Request control” in the same space when viewing someone sharing their content. Click “Release control” once finished.

    Start whiteboarding

    1. You’ll first need to enable Microsoft Whiteboard in the Microsoft 365 admin center. Ask your relevant admin to do so if Whiteboard is not already enabled.
    2. Once enabled, click “Share” in a meeting. This feature only appears if you have 3+ participants in the meeting.
    3. Under the “Whiteboard” section in the bottom right, click “Microsoft Whiteboard.”
    4. Click the pen icons to the right of the screen to begin sketching.

    NB: Anonymous, federated, or guest users are currently not supported to start, view, or ink a whiteboard in a Teams meeting.

    Will the whiteboard session be recorded if the meeting is being recorded?

    No. However, the final whiteboard will be available to all meeting attendees after the meeting, under “Board Gallery” in the Microsoft Whiteboard app. Attendees can then continue to work on the whiteboard after the meeting has ended.

    Create a live event

    Screenshots detailing how to create a live event in Microsoft Teams, steps 1 to 3. Step 1: 'Click the “Calendar” tab on the left-hand side of the app'. Step 2: 'On the top right of the app, click the drop-down menu for “+ New meeting” and then “Live event.”' Step 3: 'You will be labeled the “Event organizer.” First, fill in the live event details on the left'. Screenshot detailing how to create a live event in Microsoft Teams, step 4.

    As the organizer, you can invite other people to the event who will be the “producers” or “presenters.”

    Producers: Control the live event stream, including being able to start and stop the event, share their own and others’ video, share desktop or window, and select layout.

    Presenters: Present audio, video, or a screen.

    Screenshot detailing how to create a live event in Microsoft Teams, step 5.

    Select who your audience will be for your live event from three options: specified people and groups, the organization, or the public with no sign-in required.

    Edit the setting for whether you want recording to be available for attendees.

    Then click “Schedule” to finish.

    Live event settings explained

    When you join the live event as a producer/presenter, nothing will be immediately broadcast. You’ll be in a pre-live state. Decide what content to share and in what order. Along the bottom of the screen, you can share your video and audio, share your screen, and mute incoming attendees.

    Once your content is ready to share along the bottom of the screen, add it to the screen on the left, in order of viewing. This is your queue – your “Pre-live” state. Then, click “Send now.”

    This content will now move to the right-hand screen, ready for broadcasting. Once you’re ready to broadcast, click “Start.” Your state will change from “Pre-live” to “Live.”

    Along the top right of the app will be a tools bar.

    Screenshot listing live events settings icons in Microsoft Teams. Beside the heart monitor icon is 'Monitor health and performance of network, devices, and media sharing'. Beside the notepad icon is 'Take meeting notes'. Beside the chatbox icon is 'Chat function'. Beside the two little people with a plus sign icon is 'Invite and show participants'. Beside the gear icon is 'Device settings'. Beside the small 'i' in a circle is 'Meeting details, including schedule, meeting link, and dial-in number'.

    Workspace #1: Departments

    Scenario: Most of your organization’s communication and collaboration occurs within its pre-existing departmental divisions.

    Conventional communication channels:

    • Oral communication: Employees work in proximity to each other and communicate in person, by phone, in department meetings
    • Email: Department-wide announcements
    • Memos: Typically posted/circulated in mailboxes

    Solution: Determine the best way to organize your organization’s departments in Teams based on its size and your requirements to keep information private between departments.

    Option A:

    • Create a team for the organization/division.
    • Create channels for each department. Remember that all members of a team can view all public channels created in that team and the default General channel.
    • Create private channels if you wish to have a channel that only select members of that team can see. Remember that private channels have some limitations in functionality.

    Option B:

    • Create a new team for each department.
    • Create channels within this team for projects or topics that are recurring workflows for the department members. Only department members can view the content of these channels.

    Option C:

    • Post departmental memos and announcements in the General channel.
    • Use “Meet now” in channels for ad hoc meetings. For regular department meetings, create a recurring Teams calendar event for the specific department channel (Option A) or the General channel (Option B). Remember that all members of a team can join a public channel meeting.

    Workspace #2: A cross-functional committee

    Scenario: Your organization has struck a committee composed of members from different departments. The rest of the organization should not have access to the work done in the committee.

    Purpose: To analyze a particular organizational challenge and produce a plan or report; to confidentially develop or carry out a series of processes that affect the whole organization.

    Jobs: Committee members must be able to:

    • Attend private meetings.
    • Share files confidentially.

    Solution:

    Ingredients:

    • Private team

    Construction:

    • Create a new private team for the cross-functional committee.
    • Add only committee members to the team.
    • Create channels based on the topics likely to be the focal point of the committee work.
    • Decide how you will use the mandatory General channel. If the committee is small and the work limited in scope, this channel may be the main communication space. If the committee is larger or the work more complex, use the General channel for announcements and move discussions to new topic-related channels.
    • Schedule recurring committee meetings in the Teams calendar. Add the relevant channel to the meeting invite to keep the meeting chat attached to this team and channel (as meeting organizer, put your name in the meeting invite notes, as the channel will show as the organizer in the Outlook invite).
    • Remember that all members of this team will have access to these meetings and be able to view that they are occurring.

    Workspace #3: An innovation day event

    Scenario: The organization holds a yearly innovation day event in which employees form small groups and work on a defined, short-term problem or project.

    Purpose: To develop innovative solutions and ideas.

    Jobs:

    • Convene small groups.
    • Work toward time-sensitive goals.
    • Communicate synchronously.
    • Share files.

    Solution:

    Ingredients:

    • Public team
    • Channel tabs
    • Whiteboard
    • Planner

    Construction:

    • Create a team for the innovation day event.
    • Add channels for each project working group.
    • Communicate to participants the schedule for the day and their assigned channel.
    • Use the General channel for announcements and instructions throughout the day. Ensure someone moderates the General channel for participants’ questions.
    • Pre-populate the channel tabs with files the participants need to work with. To add a scrum board, refer to M#4 (Morning stand-up/Scrum) in this slide deck.
    • For breakouts, instruct participants to use the “meet now” feature in their channel and how to use the Whiteboard during these meetings.
    • Arrange to have your IT admin archive the team after a certain point so the material is still viewable but not editable.

    Workspace #4: A non-work-related social event

    Scenario: Employees within the organization wish to organize social events around shared interests: board game clubs, book clubs, TV show discussion groups, trivia nights, etc.

    Purpose: To encourage cohesion among coworkers and boost morale.

    Jobs:

    • Schedule the event.
    • Invite participants.
    • Prepare the activity.
    • Host and moderate the discussion.

    Solution:

    Ingredients:

    • Public team
    • Private channels
    • Screen-sharing

    Construction:

    • Create a public team for the social event so that interested people can find and join it.
    • Example: Trivia Night
      • Schedule the event in the Teams calendar.
      • Publish the link to the Trivia Night team where other employees will see it.
      • Create private channels for each trivia team so they cannot see the other competitors’ discussions. Add yourself to each private channel so you can see their answers.
      • As the host, begin a meeting in the General channel. Pose the trivia questions live or present the questions on PowerPoint via screen-sharing.
      • Ask each team to post its answers to its private channel.
    • To avoid teams sprawl, ask your IT admin to set a deletion policy for the team, as long as this request does not contradict your organization’s policies on data retention. If the team becomes moribund, it can be set to auto-delete after a certain period of time.

    Workspace #5: A project team with a defined end time

    Scenario: Within a department/workplace team, employees are assigned to projects with defined end times, after which they will be assigned to a new project.

    Purpose: To complete project-based work that fulfills business needs.

    Jobs:

    • Oral communication with team members.
    • Synchronous and asynchronous work on project files.
    • The ability to attend scheduled meetings and ad hoc meetings.
    • The ability to access shared resources related to the project.

    Solution:

    If your working group already has its own team within Teams:

    • Create a new public or private channel for the project. Remember that some functionality is not available in private channels (such as Microsoft Planner).
    • Use the channel for the project team’s meetings (scheduled in Teams calendar or through Meet Now).
    • Add a tab that links to the team’s project folder in SharePoint.

    If your workplace team does not already have its own team in Teams:

    • Determine if there is a natural fit for this project as a new channel in an existing team. Remember that all team members will be able to see the channel if it is public and that all relevant project members need to belong to the Team to participate in the channel.
    • If necessary, create a new team for the project. Add the project members.
    • Create channels based on the type of work that comprises the project.
    • Use the channel for the project team’s meetings (scheduled in Teams calendar or through Meet Now)
    • Add a tab to link to the team’s project folder in SharePoint.

    Info-tech Best Practice

    Hide the channel after the project concludes to de-clutter your Teams user interface.

    Meeting #1: Job interview with external candidate

    Scenario: The organization must interview a slate of candidates to fill an open position.

    Purpose:

    • Select the most qualified candidate for the job.

    Jobs:

    • Create a meeting, ensuring the candidate and other attendees know when and where the meeting will happen.
    • Ensure the meeting is secure to protect confidential information.
    • Ensure the meeting is accessible, allowing the candidate to present themselves through audio and/or visual means.
    • Create a professional environment for the meeting to take place.
    • Engender a space for the candidate to share their CV, research, or other relevant file.
    • The interview must be transcribed and recorded.

    Solution:

    Ingredients:

    • Private Teams meeting
    • Screen-sharing
    • Microsoft Stream

    Construction:

    • Create a Teams meeting, inviting the candidate with their email, alongside other internal attendees. The Teams meeting invite will auto-generate a link to the meeting itself.
    • The host can control who joins the meeting through settings for the “lobby.”
    • Through the Teams meeting, the attendees will be able to use the voice and video chat functionality.
    • All attendees can opt to blur their backgrounds to maintain a professional online presence.
    • The candidate can share their screen, either specific applications or their whole desktop, during the Teams meeting.
    • A Teams meeting can be recorded and transcribed through Stream. After the meeting, the transcript can be searched, edited, and shared

    NB: The external candidate does not need the Teams application. Through the meeting invite, the external candidate will join via a web browser.

    Meeting #2: Quarterly board meeting

    Scenario: Every quarter, the organization holds its regular board meeting.

    Purpose: To discuss agenda items and determine the company’s future direction.

    Jobs:

    During meeting:
      • Attendance and minutes must be taken.
      • Votes must be recorded.
      • In-camera sessions must occur.
      • External experts must be included.
    After meeting:
    • Follow-up items must be assigned.
    • Reports must be submitted.

    Solution:

    Ingredients:

    • Teams calendar invite
    • Planner; Forms
    • Private channel
    • Microsoft Stream

    Construction:

    • Guest Invite: Invites can be sent to any non-domain-joined email address to join a private, invitation-only channel within the team controlled by the board chair.
    • SharePoint & Flow: Documents are emailed to the Team addresses, which kicks off an MS Flow routine to collect review notes.
    • Planner: Any board member can assign tasks to any employee.
    • Forms/Add-On: Chair puts down the form of the question and individual votes are tracked.
    • Teams cloud meeting recording: Recording available through Stream. Manual edits can be made to VTT caption file. Greater than acceptable transcription error rate.
    • Meeting Log: Real-time attendance is viewable but a point-in-time record needs admin access.

    NB: The external guests do not need the Teams application. Through the meeting invite, the guests will join via a web browser.

    Meeting #3: Weekly team meeting

    Scenario: A team meets for a weekly recurring meeting. The meeting is facilitated by the team lead (or manager) who addresses through agenda items and invites participation from the attendees.

    Purpose: The purpose of the meeting is to:

    • Share information verbally
    • Present content visually
    • Achieve consensus
    • Build team morale

    Jobs: The facilitator must:

    • Determine participants
    • Book room
    • Book meeting in calendar

    Solution:

    Ingredients:

    • Meeting Place: A channel in Microsoft Teams (must be public) where all members of the meeting make up the entirety of the audience.
    • Calendar Recurrence: A meeting is booked through Teams and appears in all participants’ Outlook calendar.
    • Collaboration Space: Participants join the meeting through video or audio and can share screens and contribute text, images, and links to the meeting chat.

    Construction:

    • Ensure your team already has a channel created for it. If not, create one in the appropriate team.
    • Create the meeting using the calendar view within Microsoft Teams:
      • Set the meeting’s name, attendees, time, and recurrence.
      • Add the team channel that serves as the most appropriate workplace for the meeting. (Any discussion in the meeting chat will be posted to this channel.)

    NB: Create the meeting in the Teams calendar, not Outlook, or you will not be able to add the Teams channel. As meeting organizer, put your name in the meeting invite notes, as the channel will show as the organizer in the Outlook invite.

    Meeting #4: Morning stand-up/scrum

    Scenario: Each morning, at 9am, members of the team meet online.

    Purpose: After some pleasantries, the team discusses what tasks they each plan to complete in the day.

    Jobs: The team leader (or scrum master) must:

    • Place all tasks on a scrum board, each represented by a sticky note denoting the task name and owner.
    • Move the sticky notes through the columns, adjusting assignments as needed.
    • Sort tasks into the following columns: “Not Started,” “In Progress,” and “Done.”

    Solution:

    Ingredients:

    • Meeting Place: A channel in Microsoft Teams (must be public) where all members of the meeting make up the entirety of the audience.
    • Scrum Board: A tab within that channel where a persistent scrum board has been created and is visible to all team members.

    Meeting Place Construction:

    • Create the meeting using the calendar view in Teams.
    • Set the meeting’s name, attendees, time, and work-week daily recurrence (see left).
    • Add the channel that is the most appropriate workplace for the meeting. Any meeting chat will be posted to this channel rather than a separate chat.

    Scrum Board Construction:

    • Add a tab to the channel using Microsoft Planner as the app. (You can use other task management apps such as Trello, but the identity integration of first-party Office 365 tools may be less hassle.)
    • Create a new (or import an existing) Plan to the channel. This will be used as the focal point.

    Meeting #5: Weekly team meeting

    Scenario: An audio-only conversation that could be a regularly scheduled event but is more often conducted on an ad-hoc basis.

    Purpose: To quickly share information, achieve consensus, or clarify misunderstandings.

    Jobs:

    • Dial recipient
    • See missed calls
    • Leave/check voicemail
    • Create speed-dial list
    • Conference call

    Solution:

    Ingredients:

    • Audio call begun through Teams chat.

    Construction:

    • Voice over IP calls between users in the same MS Teams tenant can begin in multiple ways:
      • A call can be initiated through any appearance of a user’s profile picture: hover over user’s profile photo in the Chat list and select the phone icon.
      • Enter your last chat with a user and click phone icon in upper-right corner.
      • Go to the Calls section and type the name in the “Make a call” text entry form.
    • Voicemail: Voicemail, missed calls, and call history are available in the Calls section.
    • Speed dial: Speed dial lists can be created in the Calls section.
    • Conference call: Other users can be added to an ongoing call.

    NB: Microsoft Teams can be configured to provide an organization’s telephony for external calls, but this requires an E5 license. Additional audio-conferencing licenses are required to call in to a Teams meeting over a phone.

    Bibliography 1/4

    Section 1: Teams for IT › Creation Process

    Overview: Creation process
    Assign admin roles
    Prepare the network
    Team creation
    Integrations with SharePoint Online
    Permissions

    Bibliography 2/4

    Section 1: Teams for IT › Creation Process (cont'd.)

    External and guest access
    Expiration and archiving
    Retention and data loss prevention
    Teams telephony

    Bibliography 3/4

    Section 1: Teams for IT › Teams Rollout

    From Skype to Teams
    From Slack to Teams
    Teams adoption

    Section 1: Teams for IT › Use Cases

    Bibliography 4/4

    Section 2: Teams for End Users › Teams, Channels, Chat

    Section 2: Teams for End Users › Meetings and Live Events

    Section 2: Teams for End Users › Use Cases

    Considerations to Optimize Container Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}499|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Center & Facilities Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /data-center-and-facilities-strategy

    Do you experience challenges with the following:

    • Equipping IT operations processes to manage containers.
    • Choosing the right container technology.
    • Optimizing your infrastructure strategy for containers.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Plan ahead to ensure your container strategy aligns with your infrastructure roadmap. Before deciding between bare metal and cloud, understand the different components of a container management solution and plan for current and future infrastructure services.
    • When selecting tools from multiple sources, it is important to understand what each tool should and should not meet. This holistic approach is necessary to avoid gaps and duplication of effort.

    Impact and Result

    Use the reference architecture to plan for the solution you need and want to deploy. Infrastructure planning and strategy optimizes the container image supply chain, uses your current infrastructure, and reduces costs for compute and image scan time.

    Considerations to Optimize Container Management Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Considerations to Optimize Container Management Deck – A document to guide you design your container strategy.

    A document that walks you through the components of a container management solution and helps align your business objectives with your current infrastructure services and plan for your future assets.

    • Considerations to Optimize Container Management Storyboard

    2. Container Reference Architecture – A best-of-breed template to help you build a clear, concise, and compelling strategy document for container management.

    Complete the reference architecture tool to strategize your container management.

    • Container Reference Architecture
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Considerations to Optimize Container Management

    Design a custom reference architecture that meets your requirements.

    Analyst Perspective

    Containers have become popular as enterprises use DevOps to develop and deploy applications faster. Containers require managed services because the sheer number of containers can become too complex for IT teams to handle. Orchestration platforms like Kubernetes can be complex, requiring management to automatically deploy container-based applications to operating systems and public clouds. IT operations staff need container management skills and training.

    Installing and setting up container orchestration tools can be laborious and error-prone. IT organizations must first implement the right infrastructure setup for containers by having a solid understanding of the scope and scale of containerization projects and developer requirements. IT administrators also need to know how parts of the existing infrastructure connect and communicate to maintain these relationships in a containerized environment. Containers can run on bare metal servers, virtual machines in the cloud, or hybrid configurations, depending on your IT needs

    Nitin Mukesh, Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations

    Nitin Mukesh
    Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach

    The container software market is constantly evolving. Organizations must consider many factors to choose the right container management software for their specific needs and fit their future plans.

    It's important to consider your organization's current and future infrastructure strategy and how it fits with your container management strategy. The container management platform you choose should be compatible with the existing network infrastructure and storage capabilities available to your organization.

    IT operations staff have not been thinking the same way as developers who have now been using an agile approach for some time. Container image builds are highly automated and have several dependencies including scheduling, testing, and deployment that the IT staff is not trained for or lack the ability to create anything more than a simple image.

    Use the reference architecture to plan for the solution you need and want to deploy. Infrastructure planning and strategy optimizes the container image supply chain and reduces costs for compute and image scan time.

    Plan ahead to ensure your container strategy aligns with your infrastructure roadmap. Before deciding between bare metal and cloud, understand the different components of a container management solution and plan for current and future infrastructure services.

    Your challenge

    Choosing the right container technology: IT is a rapidly changing and evolving market, with startups and seasoned technology vendors maintaining momentum in everything from container platforms to repositories to orchestration tools. The rapid evolution of container platform components such as orchestration, storage, networking, and system services such as load balancing has made the entire stack a moving target.

    However, waiting for the industry to be standardized can be a recipe for paralysis, and waiting too long to decide on solutions and approaches can put a company's IT operations in catch-up mode.

    Keeping containers secure: Security breaches in containers are almost identical to operating system level breaches in virtual machines in terms of potential application and system vulnerabilities. It is important for any DevOps team working on container and orchestration architecture and management to fully understand the potential vulnerabilities of the platforms they are using.

    Optimize your infrastructure strategy for containers: One of the challenges enterprise IT operations management teams face when it comes to containers is the need to rethink the underlying infrastructure to accommodate the technology. While you may not want to embrace the public cloud for your critical applications just yet, IT operations managers will need an on-premises infrastructure so that applications can scale up and down the same way as they are containerized.

    Common ways organizations use containers

    A Separation of responsibilities
    Containerization provides a clear separation of responsibilities as developers can focus on application logic and dependencies, while IT operations teams can focus on deployment and management instead of application details such as specific software versions and configurations.

    B Workload portability
    Containers can run almost anywhere: physical servers or on-premise data centers on virtual machines or developer machines, as well as public clouds on Linux, Windows, or Mac operating systems, greatly easing development and deployment.

    “Lift and shift” existing applications into a modern cloud architecture. Some organizations even use containers to migrate existing applications to more modern environments. While this approach provides some of the basic benefits of operating system virtualization, it does not provide all the benefits of a modular, container-based application architecture.

    C Application isolation
    Containers virtualize CPU, memory, storage, and network resources at the operating system level, providing developers with a logically isolated view of the operating system from other applications.

    Source: TechTarget, 2021

    What are containers and why should I containerize?

    A container is a partially isolated environment in which an application or parts of an application can run. You can use a single container to run anything from small microservices or software processes to larger applications. Inside the container are all the necessary executable, library, and configuration files. Containers do not contain operating system images. This makes them lighter and more portable with much less overhead. Large application deployments can deploy multiple containers into one or more container clusters (CapitalOne, 2020).

    Containers have the following advantages:

    • Reduce overhead costs: Because containers do not contain operating system images, they require fewer system resources than traditional or hardware virtual machine environments.
    • Enhanced portability: Applications running in containers can be easily deployed on a variety of operating systems and hardware platforms.
    • More consistent operations: DevOps teams know that applications in containers run the same no matter where they are deployed.
    • Efficiency improvement: Containers allow you to deploy, patch, or scale applications faster.
    • Develop better applications: Containers support Agile and DevOps efforts to accelerate development and production cycles.

    Source: CapitalOne, 2020

    Container on the cloud or on-premise?

    On-premises containers Public cloud-based containers

    Advantages:

    • Full control over your container environment.
    • Increased flexibility in networking and storage configurations.
    • Use any version of your chosen tool or container platform.
    • No need to worry about potential compliance issues with data stored in containers.
    • Full control over the host operating system and environment.

    Disadvantages:

    • Lack of easy scalability. This can be especially problematic if you're using containers because you want to be more agile from a DevOps perspective.
    • No turnkey container deployment solution. You must set up and maintain every component of the container stack yourself.

    Advantages:

    • Easy setup and management through platforms such as Amazon Elastic Container Service or Azure Container Service. These products require significant Docker expertise to use but require less installation and configuration than on-premise installations.
    • Integrates with other cloud-based tools for tasks such as monitoring.
    • Running containers in the cloud improves scalability by allowing you to add compute and storage resources as needed.

    Disadvantages:

    • You should almost certainly run containers on virtual machines. That can be a good thing for many people; however, you miss out on some of the potential benefits of running containers on bare metal servers, which can be easily done.
    • You lose control. To build a container stack, you must use the orchestrator provided by your cloud host or underlying operating system.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Start-ups and small businesses that don't typically need to be closely connected to hardware can easily move (or start) to the cloud. Large (e.g. enterprise-class) companies and companies that need to manage and control local hardware resources are more likely to prefer an on-premises infrastructure. For enterprises, on-premises container deployments can serve as a bridge to full public cloud deployments or hybrid private/public deployments. The answer to the question of public cloud versus on premises depends on the specific needs of your business.

    Container management

    From container labeling that identifies workloads and ownership to effective reporting that meets the needs of different stakeholders across the organization, it is important that organizations establish an effective framework for container management.

    Four key considerations for your container management strategy:

    01 Container Image Supply Chain
    How containers are built

    02 Container Infrastructure and Orchestration
    Where and how containers run together

    03 Container Runtime Security and Policy Enforcement
    How to make sure your containers only do what you want them to do

    04 Container Observability
    Runtime metrics and debugging

    To effectively understand container management solutions, it is useful to define the various components that make up a container management strategy.

    1: Container image supply chain

    To run a workload as a container, it must first be packaged into a container image. The image supply chain includes all libraries or components that make up a containerized application. This includes CI/CD tools to test and package code into container images, application security testing tools to check for vulnerabilities and logic errors, registries and mirroring tools for hosting container images, and attribution mechanisms such as image signatures for validating images in registries.

    Important functions of the supply chain include the ability to:

    • Scan container images in registries for security issues and policy compliance.
    • Verify in-use image hashes have been scanned and authorized.
    • Mirror images from public registries to isolate yourself from outages in these services.
    • Attributing images to the team that created them.

    Source: Rancher, 2022

    Info-Tech Insight
    It is important to consider disaster recovery for your image registry. As mentioned above, it is wise to isolate yourself from registry disruptions. However, external registry mirroring is only one part of the equation. You also want to make sure you have a high availability plan for your internal registry as well as proper backup and recovery processes. A highly available, fault-tolerant container management platform is not just a runtime environment.

    2: Container infrastructure and orchestration

    Orchestration tools

    Once you have a container image to run, you need a location to run it. That means both the computer the container runs on and the software that schedules it to run. If you're working with a few containers, you can make manual decisions about where to run container images, what to run with container images, and how best to manage storage and network connectivity. However, at scale, these kinds of decisions should be left to orchestration tools like Kubernetes, Swarm, or Mesos. These platforms can receive workload execution requests, determine where to run based on resource requirements and constraints, and then actually launch that workload on its target. And if a workload fails or resources are low, it can be restarted or moved as needed.

    Source: DevOpsCube, 2022

    Storage

    Storage is another important consideration. This includes both the storage used by the operating system and the storage used by the container itself. First, you need to consider the type of storage you actually need. Can I outsource my storage concerns to a cloud provider using something like Amazon Relational Database Service instead? If not, do you really need block storage (e.g. disk) or can an external object store like AWS S3 meet your needs? If your external object storage service can meet your performance and durability requirements as well as your governance and compliance needs, you're in luck. You may not have to worry about managing the container's persistent storage. Many external storage services can be provisioned on demand, support discrete snapshots, and some even allow dynamic scaling on demand.

    Networking

    Network connectivity inside and outside the containerized environment is also very important. For example, Kubernetes supports a variety of container networking interfaces (CNIs), each providing different functionality. Questions to consider here are whether you can set traffic control policies (and the OSI layer), how to handle encryption between workloads and between workloads and external entities, and how to manage traffic import for containerized workloads. The impact of these decisions also plays a role on performance.

    Backups

    Backups are still an important task in containerized environments, but the backup target is changing slightly. An immutable, read-only container file system can be recreated very easily from the original container image and does not need to be backed up. Backups or snapshots on permanent storage should still be considered. If you are using a cloud provider, you should also consider fault domain and geo-recovery scenarios depending on the provider's capabilities. For example, if you're using AWS, you can use S3 replication to ensure that EBS snapshots can be restored in another region in case of a full region outage.

    3: Container runtime security and policy enforcement

    Ensuring that containers run in a place that meets the resource requirements and constraints set for them is necessary, but not sufficient. It is equally important that your container management solution performs continuous validation and ensures that your workloads comply with all security and other policy requirements of your organization. Runtime security and policy enforcement tools include a function for detecting vulnerabilities in running containers, handling detected vulnerabilities, ensuring that workloads are not running with unnecessary or unintended privileges, and ensuring that only other workloads that need to be allowed can connect.

    One of the great benefits of (well implemented) containerized software is reducing the attackable surface of the application. But it doesn't completely remove it. This means you need to think about how to observe running applications to minimize security risks. Scanning as part of the build pipeline is not enough. This is because an image without vulnerabilities at build time can become a vulnerable container because new flaws are discovered in its code or support libraries. Instead, some modern tools focus on detecting unusual behavior at the system call level. As these types of tools mature, they can make a real difference to your workload’s security because they rely on actual observed behavior rather than up-to-date signature files.

    4: Container observability

    What’s going on in there?

    Finally, if your container images are being run somewhere by orchestration tools and well managed by security and policy enforcement tools, you need to know what your containers are doing and how well they are doing it. Orchestration tools will likely have their own logs and metrics, as will networking layers, and security and compliance checking tools; there is a lot to understand in a containerized environment. Container observability covers logging and metrics collection for both your workloads and the tools that run them.

    One very important element of observability is the importance of externalizing logs and metrics in a containerized environment. Containers come and go, and in many cases the nodes running on them also come and go, so relying on local storage is not recommended.

    The importance of a container management strategy

    A container management platform typically consists of a variety of tools from multiple sources. Some container management software vendors or container management services attempt to address all four key components of effective container management. However, many organizations already have tools that provide at least some of the features they need and don't want to waste existing licenses or make significant changes to their entire infrastructure just to run containers.

    When choosing tools from multiple sources, it's important to understand what needs each tool meets and what it doesn't. This holistic approach is necessary to avoid gaps and duplication of effort.

    For example, scanning an image as part of the build pipeline and then rescanning the image while the container is running is a waste of CPU cycles in the runtime environment. Similarly, using orchestration tools and separate host-based agents to aggregate logs or metrics can waste CPU cycles as well as storage and network resources.

    Planning a container management strategy

    1 DIY, Managed Services, or Packaged Products
    Developer satisfaction is important, but it's also wise to consider the team running the container management software. Migrating from bare metal or virtual machine-based deployment methodologies to containers can involve a significant learning curve, so it's a good idea to choose a tool that will help smooth this curve.
    2 Kubernetes
    In the world of container management, Kubernetes is fast becoming the de facto standard for container orchestration and scheduling. Most of the products that address the other aspects of container management discussed in this post (image supply chain, runtime security and policy enforcement, observability) integrate easily with Kubernetes. Kubernetes is open-source software and using it is possible if your team has the technical skills and the desire to implement it themselves. However, that doesn't mean you should automatically opt to build yourself.
    3 Managed Kubernetes
    Kubernetes is difficult to implement well. As a result, many solution providers offer packaged products or managed services to facilitate Kubernetes adoption. All major cloud providers now offer Kubernetes services that reduce the operational burden on your teams. Organizations that have invested heavily in the ecosystem of a particular cloud provider may find this route suitable. Other organizations may be able to find a fully managed service that provides container images and lets the service provider worry about running the images which, depending on the cost and capacity of the organization, may be the best option.
    4 Third-Party Orchestration Products
    A third approach is packaged products from providers that can be installed on the infrastructure (cloud or otherwise). These products can offer several potential advantages over DIY or cloud provider offerings, such as access to additional configuration options or cluster components, enhanced functionality, implementation assistance and training, post-installation product support, and reduced risk of cloud provider lock-in.

    Source: Kubernetes, 2022; Rancher, 2022

    Infrastructure considerations

    It's important to describe your organization’s current and future infrastructure strategy and how it fits into your container management strategy. It’s all basic for now, but if you plan to move to a virtual machine or cloud provider next year, your container management solution should be able to adapt to your environment now and in the future. Similarly, if you’ve already chosen a public cloud, you may want to make sure that the tool you choose supports some of the cloud options, but full compatibility may not be an important feature.

    Infrastructure considerations extend beyond computing. Choosing a container management platform should be compatible with the existing network infrastructure and storage capacity available to your organization. If you have existing policy enforcement, monitoring, and alerting tools, the ideal solution should be able to take advantage of them. Moving to containers can be a game changer for developers and operations teams, so continuing to use existing tools to reduce complexity where possible can save time and money.

    Leverage the reference architecture to guide your container management strategy

    Questions for support transition

    Using the examples as a guide, complete the tool to strategize your container management

    Download the Reference Architecture

    Bibliography

    Mell, Emily. “What is container management and why is it important?” TechTarget, April 2021.
    https://www.techtarget.com/searchitoperations/definition/container-management-software#:~:text=A%20container%20management%20ecosystem%20automates,operator%20to%20keep%20up%20with

    Conrad, John. “What is Container Orchestration?” CapitalOne, 24 August 2020.
    https://www.capitalone.com/tech/cloud/what-is-container-orchestration/?v=1673357442624

    Kubernetes. “Cluster Networking.” Kubernetes, 2022.
    https://kubernetes.io/docs/concepts/cluster-administration/networking/

    Rancher. “Comparing Kubernetes CNI Providers: Flannel, Calico, Canal, and Weave.” Rancher, 2022.
    https://www.suse.com/c/rancher_blog/comparing-kubernetes-cni-providers-flannel-calico-canal-and-weave/

    Wilson, Bob. “16 Best Container Orchestration Tools and Services.” DevopsCube, 5 January 2022.
    https://devopscube.com/docker-container-clustering-tools/

    Review Your Application Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}82|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Over 80% of CXOs experience frustration with IT’s failure to deliver business value.
    • Sixty percent of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals.
    • Sixty percent of IT professionals know there is an opportunity to run applications more efficiently, eliminating wasteful or low-value activities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations need to better align their application strategy with their business strategy as they proceed through tactical initiatives.
    • Application strategies provide guidance on how they will help the organization survive and thrive.

    Impact and Result

    Aligning your business with applications through your strategy will not only increase business satisfaction but also help to ensure you’re delivering applications that enable the organization’s goals.

    Review Your Application Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should have an application strategy and why you should use Info-Tech’s approach to review it. Learn how we can support you in completing this strategy and review.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review your strategy

    This review guide provides organizations with a detailed assessment of their application strategy, ensuring that the applications enable the business strategy so that the organization can be more effective.The assessment provides criteria and exercises to provide actionable outcomes.

    • Application Strategy Assessment Tool
    • Application Strategy Action Plan Report Template
    • Application Strategy Sample Action Plan Report
    [infographic]

    Build a Better Manager

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}603|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Train & Develop
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • Management skills training is needed, but organizations are struggling to provide training that makes a long-term difference in the skills managers actually use in their day to day.
    • Many training programs are ineffective because they offer the wrong content, deliver it in a way that is not memorable, and are not aligned with the IT department’s business objectives.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • More of the typical manager training is not enough to solve the problem of underprepared first-time IT managers.
    • You must overcome the key pitfalls of ineffective training to deliver training that is better than the norm.
    • Offer tailored training that focuses on skill building and is aligned with measurable business goals to make your manager training a tangible success.

    Impact and Result

    Use Info-Tech’s tactical, practical training materials to deliver training that is:

    • Specifically tailored to first-time IT managers.
    • Designed around practical application of new skills.
    • Aligned with your department’s business goals.

    Build a Better Manager Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Better Manager Capstone Deck – This deck will guide you through identifying the critical skills your managers need to succeed and planning out a training program tailored to your team and organization.

    This deck presents a behind-the-scenes explanation for the training materials, enabling a facilitator to deliver the training.

    • Build a Better Manager – Phases 1-3

    2. Facilitation Guides – These ready-to-deliver presentation decks span 8 modules. Each module covers a key management skill. The modules can be delivered independently or as a series.

    The modules are complete with presentation slides, speaker’s notes, and accompanying participant workbooks and provide everything you need to deliver the training to your team.

    • Accountability Facilitation Guide
    • Coaching and Feedback Facilitation Guide
    • Communicate Effectively Facilitation Guide
    • Manage Conflict Constructively Facilitation Guide
    • Your Role in Decision Making Facilitation Guide
    • Master Time Facilitation Guide
    • Performance Management Facilitation Guide
    • Your Role in the Organization Facilitation Guide

    3. Participant Workbooks and Supporting Materials – Each training module comes with a corresponding participant workbook to help trainees record insights and formulate individual skill development plans.

    Each workbook is tailored to the presentation slides in its corresponding facilitation guide. Some workbooks have additional materials, such as role play scenarios, to aid in practice. Every workbook comes with example entries to help participants make the most of their training.

    • Communicate Effectively Participant Workbook
    • Performance Management Participant Workbook
    • Coaching and Feedback Participant Workbook
    • Effective Feedback Training Role Play Scenarios
    • Your Role in the Organization Participant Workbook
    • Your Role in Decision Making Participant Workbook
    • Decision Making Case Study
    • Manage Conflict Constructively Participant Workbook
    • Conflict Resolution Role Play Scenarios
    • Master Time Participant Workbook
    • Accountability Participant Workbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Better Manager

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build a Better Manager

    The Purpose

    Attend training on the specific topics necessary for each individual management team.

    Each workshop consists of four days, one 3-hour training session per day. One module is delivered per day, selecting from the following pool of topics:

    Master Time

    Accountability

    Your Role in the Organization

    Your Role in Decision Making

    Manage Conflict Constructively

    Effective Communication

    Performance Management

    Coaching & Feedback

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Managers learn about best practices, practice their application, and formulate individual skill development plans.

    Activities

    1.1 Training on one topic per day, for four days (selected from a pool of eight possible topics)

    Outputs

    Completed workbook and action plan

    Further reading

    Build a Better Manager

    Support IT success with a solid management foundation.

    Analyst Perspective

    Training that delivers results.

    Jane Koupstova.

    Ninety-eight percent of managers say they need more training, but 93% of managers already receive some level of manager training. Unfortunately, the training typically provided, although copious, is not working. More of the same will never get you better outcomes.

    How many times have you sat through training that was so long, you had no hope of implementing half of it?

    How many times have you been taught best practices, with zero guidance on how to apply them?

    To truly support our managers, we need to rethink manager training. Move from fulfilling an HR mandate to providing truly trainee-centric instruction. Teach only the right skills – no fluff – and encourage and enable their application in the day to day.

    Jane Kouptsova
    Research Director, People & Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    IT departments often promote staff based on technical skill, resulting in new managers feeling unprepared for their new responsibilities in leading people.

    The success of your organization hinges on managers’ ability to lead their staff; by failing to equip new managers adequately, you are risking the productivity of your entire department.

    Despite the fact that $14 billion is spent annually on leadership training in the US alone (Freedman, 2016), only one in ten CIOs believe their department is very effective at leadership, culture, and values (Info-Tech, 2019).

    Training programs do not deliver results due to trainee overwhelm, ineffective skill development, and a lack of business alignment.

    Use Info-Tech’s tactical, practical approach to management training to deliver training that:

    • Is specifically tailored to first-time IT managers.
    • Is designed around practical application of new skills.
    • Is aligned with your department’s business goals.
    • Equips your new managers with essential skills and foundational competencies

    Info-Tech Insight

    When it comes to manager training, more is not more. Attending training is not equal to being trained. Even good information is useless when it doesn’t get applied. If your role hasn’t required you to use your training within 48 hours, you were not trained on the most relevant skills.

    Effective managers drive effective departments by engaging their teams

    The image contains a screenshot to demonstrate effective managers.

    Engaged teams are:

    • 52% more willing to innovate*
    • 70% more likely to be at the organization a year from now**
    • 57% more likely to exceed their role’s expectations**

    Engaged teams are driven by managers:

    • 70% of team-level engagement is accounted for by managers***
    *McLean & Company; N=3,395; **McLean & Company; N=5,902; ***Gallup, 2018

    Despite the criticality of their role, IT organizations are failing at supporting new managers

    87% of middle managers wish they had more training when they were first promoted

    98% of managers say they need more training

    Source: Grovo, 2016

    IT must take notice:

    IT as an industry tends to promote staff on the basis of technical skill. As a result, new managers find themselves suddenly out of their comfort zone, tasked with leading teams using management skills they have not been trained in and, more often than not, having to learn on the job. This is further complicated because many new IT managers must go from a position of team member to leader, which can be a very complex transition.

    The truth is, many organizations do try and provide some degree of manager training, it just is not effective

    99% of companies offer management training*

    93% of managers attend it*

    $14 billion spent annually in the US on leadership training**

    Fewer than one in ten CIOs believe their IT department is highly effective at leadership, culture, and values.

    The image contains a screenshot of a pie chart that demonstrates the effectiveness of the IT department at leadership, culture, and values.

    *Grovo, 2016; **Chief Executive, 2016
    Info-Tech’s Management & Governance Diagnostic, N=337 CIOs

    There are three key reasons why manager training fails

    1. Information Overload

    Seventy-five percent of managers report that their training was too long to remember or to apply in their day to day (Grovo, 2016). Trying to cover too much useful information results in overwhelm and does not deliver on key training objectives.

    2. Limited Implementation

    Thirty-three percent of managers find that their training had insufficient follow-up to help them apply it on the job (Grovo, 2016). Learning is only the beginning. The real results are obtained when learning is followed by practice, which turns new knowledge into reliable habits.

    3. Lack of departmental alignment

    Implementing training without a clear link to departmental and organizational objectives leaves you unable to clearly communicate its value, undermines your ability to secure buy-in from attendees and executives, and leaves you unable to verify that the training is actually improving departmental effectiveness.

    Overcome those common training pitfalls with tactical solutions

    MOVE FROM

    TO

    1. Information Overload

    Timely, tailored topics

    The more training managers attend, the less likely they are to apply any particular element of it. Combat trainee overwhelm by offering highly tactical, practical training that presents only the essential skills needed at the managers’ current stage of development.

    2. Limited Implementation

    Skills-focused framework

    Many training programs end when the last manager walks out of the last training session. Ensure managers apply their new knowledge in the months and years after the training by relying on a research-based framework that supports long-term skill building.

    3. Lack of Departmental Alignment

    Outcome-based measurement

    Setting organizational goals and accompanying metrics ahead of time enables you to communicate the value of the training to attendees and stakeholders, track whether the training is delivering a return on your investment, and course correct if necessary.

    This research combats common training challenges by focusing on building habits, not just learning ideas

    Manager training is only useful if the skills it builds are implemented in the day-to-day.

    Research supports three drivers of successful skill building from training:

    Habits

    Organizational Support

    The training modules include committing to implementing new skills on the job and scheduling opportunities for feedback.

    Learning Structure

    Training activities are customizable, flexible, and accompanied by continuous learning self-evaluation.

    Personal Commitment

    Info-Tech’s methodology builds in activities that foster accountability and an attitude of continuous improvement.

    Learning

    Info-Tech Insight

    When it comes to manager training, stop thinking about learning, and start thinking about practice. In difficult situations, we fall back on habits, not theoretical knowledge. If a manager is only as good as their habits, we need to support them in translating knowledge into practice.

    This research focuses on building good management habits to drive enterprise success

    Set up your first-time managers for success by leveraging Info-Tech’s training to focus on three key areas of management:

    • Managing people as a team
    • Managing people as individuals
    • Managing yourself as a developing leader

    Each of these areas:

    • Is immediately important for a first-time manager
    • Includes practical, tactical skills that can be implemented quickly
    • Translates to departmental and organizational benefits

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is no such thing as “effective management training.” Various topics will be effective at different times for different roles. Delivering only the highest-impact learning at strategic points in your leadership development program will ensure the learning is retained and translates to results.

    This blueprint covers foundational training in three key domains of effective management

    Effective Managers

    • Self
      • Conflict & Difficult Conversations
      • Your Role in the Organization
      • Your Role in Decisions
    • Team
      • Communication
      • Feedback & Coaching
      • Performance Management
    • People
      • Master Time
      • Delegate
      • Accountability

    Each topic corresponds to a module, which can be used individually or as a series in any order.

    Choose topics that resonate with your managers and relate directly to their day-to-day tasks. Training on topics that may be useful in the future, while interesting, is less likely to generate lasting skill development.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    This blueprint is not a replacement for formal leadership or management certification. It is designed as a practical, tactical, and foundational introduction to key management capabilities.

    Info-Tech’s training tools guide participants through successful skill building

    Practical facilitation guides equip you with the information, activities, and speaker’s notes necessary to deliver focused, tactical training to your management team.

    The participant’s workbook guides trainees through applying the three drivers of skill building to solidify their training into habits.

    Measure the effectiveness of your manager training with outcomes-focused metrics

    Linking manager training with measurable outcomes allows you to verify that the program is achieving the intended benefits, course correct as needed, and secure buy-in from stakeholders and participants by articulating and documenting value.

    Use the metrics suggested below to monitor your training program’s effectiveness at three key stages:

    Program Metric

    Calculation

    Program enrolment and attendance

    Attendance at each session / Total number enrolled in session

    First-time manager (FTM) turnover rate

    Turnover rate: Number of FTM departures / Total number of FTMs

    FTM turnover cost

    Number of departing FTMs this year * Cost of replacing an employee

    Manager Effectiveness Metric

    Calculation

    Engagement scores of FTM's direct reports

    Use Info-Tech's Employee Engagement surveys to monitor scores

    Departures as a result of poor management

    Number of times "manager relationships" is selected as a reason for leaving on an exit survey / Total number of departures

    Cost of departures due to poor management

    Number of times "manager relationships" is selected as a reason for leaving on an exit survey * Cost associated with replacing an employee

    Organizational Outcome Metric

    Calculation

    On-target delivery

    % projects completed on-target = (Projects successfully completed on time and on budget / Total number of projects started) * 100

    Business stakeholder satisfaction with IT

    Use Info-Tech’s business satisfaction surveys to monitor scores

    High-performer turnover rate

    Number of permanent, high-performing employee departures / Average number of permanent, high-performing employees

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Review selected modules and discuss training delivery.

    Call #3: Review training delivery, discuss lessons learned. Review long-term skill development plan.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series

    of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 1 to 3 calls over the course of several months, depending on training schedule.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4

    3-Hour Training Session

    3-Hour Training Session

    3-Hour Training Session

    3-Hour Training Session

    Activities

    Training on topic 1 (selected from a pool of 8 possible topics)

    Training on topic 2 (selected from a pool of 8 possible topics)

    Training on topic 3 (selected from a pool of 8 possible topics)

    Training on topic 4 (selected from a pool of 8 possible topics)

    Deliverables

    Completed workbook and action plan

    Completed workbook and action plan

    Completed workbook and action plan

    Completed workbook and action plan

    Pool of topics:

    • Master Time
    • Accountability
    • Your Role in the Organization
    • Your Role in Decision Making
    • Manage Conflict Constructively
    • Effective Communication
    • Performance Management
    • Coaching & Feedback

    Phase 1

    Prepare to facilitate training

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3
    • Select training topics
    • Customize the training facilitation guide for your organization
    • Deliver training modules
    • Confirm skill development action plan with trainees
    • Secure organizational support from trainees' supervisors

    Outcomes of this phase:

    • Training facilitation deck customized to organizational norms
    • Training workbook distributed to participants
    • Training dates and facilitator finalized

    1.1 Select training modules

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the module descriptions on the following slides.
    2. Identify modules that will address managers’ most pressing development needs.
      To help make this decision, consult the following:
      • Trainees’ development plans
      • Trainees’ supervisors
    Input Output
    • Module descriptions
    • Trainees’ development goals and needs
    • Prioritized list of training modules
    Materials Participants
    • Prioritized list of training modules
    • Training sponsor
    • Trainees’ supervisors

    Effective Communication

    Effective communication is the cornerstone of good management

    Effective communication can make or break your IT team’s effectiveness and engagement and a manager’s reputation in the organization. Effective stakeholder management and communication has a myriad of benefits – yet this is a key area where IT leaders continue to struggle.


    There are multiple ways in which you communicate with your staff. The tactics you will learn in this section will help you to:

    1. Understand communication styles. Every staff member has a predisposition in terms of how they give, receive, and digest information. To drive effective communication new managers need to understand the profiles of each of their team members and adjust their communicate style to suit.
    2. Understand what your team members want communicated to them and how. Communication is highly personal, and a good manager needs to clearly understand what their team wants to be informed about, their desired interactions, and when they need to be involved in decision making. They also must determine the appropriate channels for communication exchanges.
    3. Make meetings matter. Many new managers never receive training on what differentiates a good and bad meeting. Effective meetings have a myriad of benefits, but more often than not meetings are ineffective, wasting both the participants’ and organizer’s time. This training will help you to ensure that every team meeting drives a solid outcome and gets results.

    Benefits:

    • Better buy-in, understanding, and communication.
    • Improved IT reputation with the organization.
    • Improved team engagement.
    • Improved stakeholder satisfaction.
    • Better-quality decision making.
    • Improved transparency, trust, and credibility.
    • Less waste and rework.
    • Greater ability to secure support and execute the agenda.
    • More effective cooperation on activities, better quality information, and greater value from stakeholder input.
    • Better understanding of IT performance and contribution.

    Effective Communication

    Effective manager communication has a direct impact on employee engagement

    35% Of organizations say they have lost an employee due to poor internal communication (project.co, 2021).

    59% Of business leaders lose work time to mistakes caused by poor communication (Grammarly, 2022).

    $1.2 trillion Lost to US organizations as a result of poor communication (Grammarly, 2022).

    Effective Communication

    Effective communication is crucial to all parts of the business

    Operations

    Human Resources

    Finance

    Marketing

    Increases production by boosting revenue.

    Reduces the cost of litigation and increases revenue through productivity improvements.

    Reduces the cost of failing to comply with regulations.

    Increases attraction and retention of key talent.

    Effective Communication

    The Communicate Effectively Facilitation Guide covers the following topics:

    • Understand Communication Styles
    • Tailor Communication Methods to Activities
    • Make Meetings Matter

    Learning outcomes:

    Main goal: Become a better communicator across a variety of personal styles and work contexts.

    Key objectives:

    • Reaffirm why effective communication matters.
    • Work with people with different communication styles.
    • Communicate clearly and effectively within a team.
    • Make meetings more effective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    First-time IT managers face specific communication challenges that come with managing people for the first time: learning to communicate a greater variety of information to different kinds of people, in a variety of venues. Tailored training in these areas helps managers focus and fast-track critical skill development.

    Performance Management

    Meaningful performance measures drive employee engagement, which in turn drives business success

    Meaningful performance measures help employees understand the rationale behind business decisions, help managers guide their staff, and clarify expectations for employees. These factors are all strong predictors of team engagement:

    The image contains a screenshot to demonstrate the relationship and success between performance measures and employee engagement.

    Performance Management

    Clear performance measures benefit employees and the organization

    Talent Management Outcomes

    Organizational Outcomes

    Performance measure are key throughout the talent management process.

    Candidates:

    • Want to know how they will be assessed
    • Rely on measures to become productive as soon as possible

    Employees:

    • Benefit from training centered on measures that are aligned with business outcomes
    • Are rewarded, recognized, and compensated based on measurable guidelines

    Promotions and Evaluations:

    • Are more effective when informed by meaningful performance measures that align with what leadership believes is important

    Performance measures benefit the organization by:

    • Helping employees know the steps to take to improve their performance
    • Ensuring alignment between team objectives and organizational goals
    • Providing a standardized way to support decision making related to compensation, promotions, and succession planning
    • Reducing “gaming” of metrics, when properly structured, thereby reducing risk to the organization
    • Affording legal defensibility by providing an objective basis for decision making

    Performance Management

    The Performance Management Facilitation Guide covers the following topics:

    • Develop Meaningful Goals
    • Set Meaningful Metrics

    Learning outcomes:

    Main goal: Become proficient in setting, tracking, and communicating around performance management goals.

    Key objectives:

    • Understand the role of managers and employees in the performance management process.
    • Learn to set SMART, business-aligned goals for your team.
    • Learn to help employees set useful individual goals.
    • Learn to set meaningful, holistic metrics to track goal progression.
    • Understand the relationship between goals, metrics, and feedback.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Goal and metric development holds special significance for first-time IT managers because it now impacts not only their personal performance, but that of their employees and their team collectively. Training on these topics with a practical team- and employee-development approach is a focused way to build these skills.

    Coaching & Feedback

    Coaching and feedback are effective methods to influence employees and drive business outcomes

    COACHING is a conversation in which a manager asks an employee questions to guide them to solve problems themselves, instead of just telling them the answer.

    Coaching increases employee happiness, and decreases turnover.1

    Coaching promotes innovation.2

    Coaching increases employee engagement, effort and performance.3

    FEEDBACK is information about the past, given in the present, with the goal of influencing behavior or performance for the future. It includes information given for reinforcement and redirection.

    Honest feedback enhances team psychological safety.4

    Feedback increases employee engagement.5

    Feedback boosts feelings of autonomy and drives innovation.6

    1. Administrative Sciences, 2022
    2. International Review of Management and Marketing, 2020
    3. Current Psychology, 2021
    4. Quantum Workplace, 2021
    5. Issues and Perspectives in Business and Social Sciences, 2022
    6. Sustainability, 2021

    Coaching & Feedback

    The Coaching & Feedback Facilitation Guide covers the following topics:

    • The 4 A’s of Coaching
    • Effective Feedback

    Learning outcomes:

    Main goal: Get prepared to coach and offer feedback to your staff as appropriate.

    Key objectives:

    • Understand the difference between coaching and feedback and when to apply each one.
    • Learn the importance of a coaching mindset.
    • Learn effective coaching via the 4 A’s framework.
    • Understand the actions that make up feedback and the factors that make it successful.
    • Learn to deal with resistance to feedback.

    Info-Tech Insight

    First-time managers often shy away from giving coaching and feedback, stalling their team’s performance. A focused and practical approach to building these skills equips new managers with the tools and confidence to tackle these challenges as soon as they arise.

    Your Role in the Organization

    IT managers who understand the business context provide more value to the organization

    Managers who don’t understand the business cannot effect positive change. The greater understanding that IT managers have of business context, the more value they provide to the organization as seen by the positive relationship between IT’s understanding of business needs and the business’ perception of IT value.

    The image contains a screenshot of a scatter plot grid demonstrating business satisfaction with IT Understanding of Needs across Overall IT Value.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    Your Role in the Organization

    Knowing your stakeholders is key to understanding your role in the business and providing value to the organization

    To understand your role in the business, you need to know who your stakeholders are and what value you and your team provide to the organization. Knowing how you help each stakeholder meet their wants needs and goals means that you have the know-how to balance experience and outcome-based behaviors. This is the key to being an attentive leader.


    The tactics you will learn in this section will help you to:

    1. Know your stakeholders. There are five key stakeholders the majority of IT managers have: management, peers, direct reports, internal users, and external users or customers. Managers need to understand the goals, needs, and wants of each of these groups to successfully provide value to the organization.
    2. Understand the value you provide to each stakeholder. Stakeholder relationship management requires IT managers to exhibit drive and support behaviors based on the situation. By knowing how you drive and support each stakeholder, you understand how you provide value to the organization and support its mission, vision, and values.
    3. Communicate the value your team provides to the organization to your team. Employees need to understand the impact of their work. As an IT manager, you are responsible for communicating how your team provides value to the organization. Mission statements on how you provide value to each stakeholder is an easy way to clearly communicate purpose to your team.

    Benefits:

    • Faster and higher growth.
    • Improved team engagement.
    • Improved stakeholder satisfaction.
    • Better quality decision making.
    • More innovation and motivation to complete goals and tasks.
    • Greater ability to secure support and execute on goals and tasks.
    • More effective cooperation on activities, better quality information, and greater value from stakeholder input.
    • Better understanding of IT performance and contribution.

    Your Role in the Organization

    The Your Role in the Organization Facilitation Guide covers the following topics:

    • Know Your Stakeholders
    • Understand the Value You Provide to the Organization
    • Develop Learnings Into Habits

    Learning outcomes:

    Main goal: Understand how your role and the role of your team serves the business.

    Key objectives:

    • Learn who your stakeholders are.
    • Understand how you drive and support different stakeholder relationships.
    • Relate your team’s tasks back to the mission, vision, and values of the organization.
    • Create a mission statement for each stakeholder to bring back to your team.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Before training first-time IT managers, take some time as the facilitator to review how you will serve the wants and needs of those you are training and your stakeholders in the organization.

    Decision Making

    Bad decisions have tangible costs, so managers must be trained in how to make effective decisions

    To understand your role in the decision-making process, you need to know what is expected of you and you must understand what goes into making a good decision. The majority of managers report they have no trouble making decisions and that they are good decision makers, but the statistics say otherwise. This ease at decision making is due to being overly confident in their expertise and an inability to recognize their own ignorance.1


    The tactics you will learn in this section will help you to:

    1. Effectively communicate decisions. Often, first-time managers are either sharing their decision recommendations with their manager or they are communicating a decision down to their team. Managers need to understand how to have these conversations so their recommendations provide value to management and top-down decisions are successfully implemented.
    2. Provide valuable feedback on decisions. Evaluating decisions is just as critical as making decisions. If decisions aren’t reviewed, there is no data or feedback to discover why a decision was a success or failure. Having a plan in place before the decision is made facilitates the decision review process and makes it easier to provide valuable feedback.
    3. Avoid common decision-making mistakes. Heuristics and bias are common decision pitfalls even senior leaders are susceptible to. By learning what the common decision-making mistakes are and being able to recognize them when they appear in their decision-making process, first-time managers can improve their decision-making ability.

    20% Of respondents say their organizations excel at decision making (McKinsey, 2018).

    87% “Diverse teams are 87% better at making decisions” (Upskillist, 2022).

    86% of employees in leadership positions blame the lack of collaboration as the top reason for workplace failures (Upskillist, 2022).

    Decision Making

    A decision-making process is imperative, even though most managers don’t have a formal one

    1. Identify the Problem and Define Objectives
    2. Establish Decision Criteria
    3. Generate and Evaluate Alternatives
    4. Select an Alternative and Implement
    5. Evaluate the Decision

    Managers tend to rely on their own intuition which is often colored by heuristics and biases. By using a formal decision-making process, these pitfalls of intuition can be mitigated or avoided. This leads to better decisions.

    First-time managers are able to apply this framework when making decision recommendations to management to increase their likelihood of success, and having a process will improve their decisions throughout their career and the financial returns correlated with them.

    Decision Making

    Recognizing personal heuristics and bias in the decision-making process improves more than just decision results

    Employees are able to recognize bias in the workplace, even when management can’t. This affects everything from how involved they are in the decision-making process to their level of effort and productivity in implementing decisions. Without employee support, even good decisions are less likely to have positive results. Employees who perceive bias:

    Innovation

    • Hold back ideas and solutions
    • Intentionally fail to follow through on important projects and tasks

    Brand Reputation

    • Speak negatively about the company on social media
    • Do not refer open positions to qualified persons in their network

    Engagement

    • Feel alienated
    • Actively seek new employment
    • Say they are not proud to work for the company

    Decision Making

    The Decision Making Facilitation Guide covers the following topics:

    • Effectively Communicate Decisions
    • Provide Valuable Feedback on Decisions
    • Avoid Common Decision-Making Mistakes

    Learning outcomes:

    Main goal: Understand how to successfully perform your role in the decision process.

    Key objectives:

    • Understand the decision-making process and how to assess decisions.
    • Learn how to communicate with your manager regarding your decision recommendations.
    • Learn how to effectively communicate decisions to your team.
    • Understand how to avoid common decision-making errors.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Before training a decision-making framework, ensure it is in alignment with how decisions are made in your organization. Alternatively, make sure leadership is on board with making a change.

    Manage Conflict Constructively

    Enable leaders to resolve conflicts while minimizing costs

    If you are successful in your talent acquisition, you likely have a variety of personalities and diverse individuals within your IT organization and in the business, which means that conflict is inevitable. However, conflict does not have to be negative – it can take on many forms. The presence of conflict in an organization can actually be a very positive thing: the ability to freely express opinions and openly debate can lead to better, more strategic decisions being made.

    The effect that the conflict is having on individuals and the work environment will determine whether the conflict is positive or counterproductive.

    As a new manager you need to know how to manage potential negative outcomes of conflict by managing difficult conversations and understanding how to respond to conflict in the workplace.


    The tactics you will learn in this section will help you to:

    1. Apply strategies to prepare for and navigate through difficult conversations.
    2. Expand your comfort level when handling conflict, and engage in constructive conflict resolution approaches.

    Benefits:

    • Relieve stress for yourself and your co-workers.
    • Save yourself time and energy.
    • Positively impact relationships with your employees.
    • Improve your team dynamic.
    • Remove roadblocks to your work and get things done.
    • Save the organization money.
    • Improve performance.
    • Prevent negative issues from reoccurring.

    Manage Conflict Constructively

    Addressing difficult conversations is beneficial to you, your people, and the organization

    When you face a difficult conversation you…

    • Relieve stress on you and your co-workers.
    • Save yourself time and energy.
    • Positively impact relationships with your employees.
    • Improve your team dynamic.
    • Remove roadblocks to your work
    • Save the organization money.
    • Improve performance.
    • Prevent negative issues from reoccurring.

    40% Of employees who experience conflict report being less motivated as a result (Acas, 2021).

    30.6% Of employees report coming off as aggressive when trying to resolve a conflict
    (Niagara Institute, 2022).

    Manage Conflict Constructively

    The Manage Conflict Constructively Facilitation Guide covers the following topics:

    • Know Your Ideal Time Mix
    • Calendar Diligence
    • Effective Delegation
    • Limit Interruptions

    Learning outcomes:

    Main goal: Effectively manage your time and know which tasks are your priority and which tasks to delegate.

    Key objectives:

    • Understand common reasons for difficult conversations.
    • Learn Info-Tech’s six-step process to best to prepare for difficult conversations.
    • Follow best practices to approach difficult conversations.
    • Learn the five approaches to conflict management.
    • Practice conflict management skills.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Conflict does not have to be negative. The presence of conflict in an organization can actually be a very positive thing: the ability to freely express opinions and openly debate can lead to better, more strategic decisions being made.

    Master Time

    Effective leaders spend their time in specific ways

    How effective leaders average their time spent across the six key roles:

    Leaders with effective time management skills spend their time across six key manager roles: strategy, projects, management, operations, innovation, and personal. While there is no magic formula, providing more value to the business starts with little practices like:

    • Spending time with the right stakeholders and focusing on the right priorities.
    • Evaluating which meetings are important and productive.
    • Benchmarking yourself against your peers in the industry so you constantly learn from them and improve yourself.


    The keys to providing this value is time management and delegation. The tactics in this section will help first-time managers to:

    1. Discover your ideal time. By analyzing how you currently spend your time, you can see which roles you are under/over using and, using your job description and performance metrics, discover your ideal time mix.
    2. Practice calendar diligence. Time blocking is an effective way to use your time, see your week, and quickly understand what roles you are spending your time in. Scheduling priority tasks first gives insight into which tasks should be delegated.
    3. Effectively delegation. Clear expectations and knowing the strengths of your team are the cornerstone to effective delegation. By understanding the information you need to communicate and identifying the best person on your team to delegate to, tasks and goals will be successfully completed.
    4. Limit interruptions. By learning how to limit interruptions from your team and your manager, you are better able to control your time and make sure your tasks and goals get completed.

    Strategy

    23%

    Projects

    23%

    Management

    19%

    Operations

    19%

    Innovation

    13%

    Personal

    4%

    Source: Info-Tech, N=85

    Master Time

    Signs you struggle with time management

    Too many interruptions in a day to stay focused.

    Too busy to focus on strategic initiatives.

    Spending time on the wrong things.

    The image contains a screenshot of a bar graph that demonstrates struggle with time management.

    Master Time

    The Master Time Facilitation Guide covers the following topics:

    • Understand Communication Styles
    • Tailor Communication Methods to Activities
    • Make Meetings Matter

    Learning outcomes:

    Main goal: Become a better communicator across a variety of personal styles and work contexts.

    Key objectives:

    • Understand how you spend your time.
    • Learn how to use your calendar effectively.
    • Understand the actions to take to successfully delegate.
    • Learn how to successfully limit interruptions.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is a right and wrong way to manage your calendar as a first-time manager and it has nothing to do with your personal preference.

    Accountability

    Accountability creates organizational and team benefits

    Improves culture and innovation

    Improves individual performance

    Increases employee engagement

    Increases profitability

    Increases trust and productivity

    Enables employees to see how they contribute

    Increases ownership employees feel over their work and outcomes

    Enables employees to focus on activities that drive the business forward

    Source: Forbes, 2019

    Accountability

    Accountability increases employee empowerment

    Employee empowerment is the number one driver of employee engagement. The extent to which you can hold employees accountable for their own actions and decisions is closely related to how empowered they are and how empowered they feel; accountability and empowerment go hand in hand. To feel empowered, employees must understand what is expected of them, have input into decisions that affect their work, and have the tools they need to demonstrate their talents.

    The image contains a screenshot to demonstrate how accountability increases employee empowerment.

    Source: McLean & Company Engagement Database, 2018; N=71,794

    Accountability

    The Accountability Facilitation Guide covers the following topics:

    • Create Clarity and Transparency
    • Articulate Expectations and Evaluation
    • Help Your Team Remove Roadblocks
    • Clearly Introduce Accountability to Your Team

    Learning outcomes:

    Main goal: Create a personal accountability plan and learn how to hold yourself and your team accountable.

    Key objectives:

    • Understand why accountability matters.
    • Learn how to create clarity and transparency.
    • Understand how to successfully hold people accountable through clearly articulating expectations and evaluation.
    • Know how to remove roadblocks to accountability for your team.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Accountability is about focusing on the results of a task, rather than just completing the task. Create team accountability by keeping the team focused on the result and not “doing their jobs.” First-time managers need to clearly communicate expectations and evaluation to successfully develop team accountability.

    Use the Build a Better Manager Participant Workbooks to help participants set accountabilities and track their progress

    A key feature of this blueprint is built-in guidance on transferring your managers’ new knowledge into practical skills and habits they can fall back on when their job requires it.

    The Participant Workbooks, one for each module, are structured around the three key principles of learning transfer to help participants optimally structure their own learning:

    • Track your learning. This section guides participants through conducting self-assessments, setting learning goals, recording key insights, and brainstorming relapse-prevention strategies
    • Establish your personal commitment. This section helps participants record the actions they personally commit to taking to continually practice their new skills
    • Secure organizational support. This section guides participants in recording the steps they will take to seek out support from their supervisor and peers.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Build a Better Manager Participant Workbooks.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Participants should use this workbook throughout their training and continue to review it for at least three months after. Practical skills take an extended amount of time to solidify, and using the workbook for several months will ensure that participants stay on track with regular practice and check-ins.

    Set your trainees up for success by reviewing these training best practices

    Cultural alignment

    It is critical that the department leadership team understand and agree with the best practices being presented. Senior team leads should be comfortable coaching first-time managers in implementing the skills developed through the training. If there is any question about alignment with departmental culture or if senior team leads would benefit from a refresher course, conduct a training session for them as well.

    Structured training

    Ensure the facilitator takes a structured approach to the training. It is important to complete all the activities and record the outputs in the workbook where appropriate. The activities are structured to ensure participants successfully use the knowledge gained during the workshop to build practical skills.

    Attendees

    Who should attend the training? Although this training is designed for first-time IT managers, you may find it helpful to run the training for the entire management team as a refresher and to get everyone on the same page about best practices. It is also helpful for senior leadership to be aware of the training because the attendees may come to their supervisors with requests to discuss the material or coaching around it.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Participants should use this workbook throughout their training and continue to review it for at least three months after. Practical skills take an extended amount of time to solidify, and using the workbook for several months will ensure that participants stay on track with regular practice and check-ins.

    1.2 Customize the facilitation guides

    1-3 hours

    Prior to facilitating your first session, ensure you complete the following steps:

    1. Read through all the module content, including the speaker’s notes, to familiarize yourself with the material and ensure the tactics presented align with your department’s culture and established best practices.
    2. Customize the slides with a pencil icon with information relevant to your organization.
    3. Ensure you are comfortable with all material to be presented and are prepared to answer questions. If you require clarification on any of the material, book a call with your Info-Tech analyst for guidance.
    4. Ensure you do not delete or heavily customize the self-assessment activities and the activities in the Review and Action Plan section of the module. These activities are structured around a skill building framework and designed to aid your trainees in applying their new knowledge in their day to day. If you have any concerns about activities in these sections, book a call with your Info-Tech analyst for guidance.
    Input Output
    • List of selected modules
    • Customized facilitation guides
    Materials Participants
    • Facilitation guides from selected modules
    • Training facilitator

    1.3 Prepare to deliver training

    1-3 hours

    Complete these steps in preparation for delivering the training to your first-time managers:

    1. Select a facilitator.
      • The right person to facilitate the meeting depends on the dynamics within your department. Having a senior IT leader can lend additional weight to the training best practices but may not be feasible in a large department. In these cases, an HR partner or external third party can be asked to facilitate.
    2. Distribute the workbooks to attendees before the first training session.
      • Change the header on the workbook templates to your own organization’s, if desired.
      • Email the workbooks to attendees prior to the first session. There is no pre-work to be completed.
    Input Output
    • List of selected modules
    • Facilitator selected
    • Workbook distributed
    Materials Participants
    • Workbooks from selected modules
    • Training sponsor
    • Training facilitator

    Phase 2

    Deliver training

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3
    • Select training topics
    • Customize the training facilitation guide for your organization
    • Deliver training modules
    • Confirm skill development action plan with trainees
    • Secure organizational support from trainees' supervisors

    Outcomes of this phase:

    • Training delivered
    • Development goals set by attendees
    • Action plan created by attendees

    2.1 Deliver training

    3 hours

    When you are ready, deliver the training. Ensure you complete all activities and that participants record the outcomes in their workbooks.

    Tips for activity facilitation:

    • Encourage and support participation from everyone. And be sure no one on the team dismisses anyone’s thoughts or opinions – they present the opportunity for further discussion and deeper insight.
    • Debrief after each activity, outlining any lessons learned, action items, and next steps.
    • Encourage participants to record all outcomes, key insights, and action plans in their workbooks.
    Input Output
    • Facilitation guides and workbooks for selected modules
    • Training delivered
    • Workbooks completed
    Materials Participants
    • Facilitation guides and workbooks for selected modules
    • Training facilitator
    • Trainees

    Phase 3

    Enable long-term skill development

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3
    • Select training topics
    • Customize the training facilitation guide for your organization
    • Deliver training modules
    • Confirm skill development action plan with trainees
    • Secure organizational support from trainees' supervisors

    Outcomes of this phase:

    • Attendees reminded of action plan and personal commitment
    • Supervisors reminded of the need to support trainees' development

    3.1 Email trainees with action steps

    0.5 hours

    After the training, send an email to attendees thanking them for participating and summarizing key next steps for the group. Use the template below, or write your own:

    “Hi team,

    I want to thank you personally for attending the Communicate Effectively training module. Our group led some great discussion.

    A reminder that the next time you will reconvene as a group will be on [Date] to discuss your progress and challenges to date.

    Additionally, your manager is aware and supportive of the training program, so be sure to follow through on the commitments you’ve made to secure the support you need from them to build your new skills.

    I am always open for questions if you run into any challenges.

    Regards,

    [Your name]”

    InputOutput
    • The date of participants’ next discussion meeting
    • Attendees reminded of next meeting date and encouraged to follow through on action plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Training facilitator

    3.2 Secure support from trainees’ supervisors

    0.5 hours

    An important part of the training is securing organizational support, which includes support from your trainees’ supervisors. After the trainees have committed to some action items to seek support from their supervisors, it is important to express your support for this and remind the supervisors of their role in guiding your first-time managers. Use the template below, or write your own, to remind your trainees’ supervisors of this at the end of training (if you are going through all three modules in a short period of time, you may want to wait until the end of the entire training to send this email):

    “Hi team,

    We have just completed Info-Tech’s first-time manager training with our new manager team. The trainees will be seeking your support in developing their new skills. This could be in the form of coaching, feedback on their progress, reviewing their development plan, etc.

    Supervisor support is a crucial component of skill building, so I hope I can count on all of you to support our new managers in their learning. If you are not sure how to handle these requests, or would like a refresher of the material our trainees covered, please let me know.

    I am always open for questions if you run into any challenges.

    Regards,

    [Your name]”

    InputOutput
    • List of trainees’ direct supervisors
    • Supervisors reminded to support trainees’ skill practice
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Training facilitator

    Contributors

    Brad Armstrong

    Brad Armstrong, Senior Engineering Manager, Code42 Software

    I am a pragmatic engineering leader with a deep technical background, now focused on building great teams. I'm energized by difficult, high-impact problems at scale and with the cloud technologies and emerging architectures that we can use to solve them. But it's the power of people and organizations that ultimately lead to our success, and the complex challenge of bringing all that together is the work I find most rewarding.

    We thank the expert contributors who chose to keep their contributions anonymous.

    Bibliography

    360Solutions, LLC. “The High Cost of Poor Communication: How to Improve Productivity and Empower Employees Through Effective Communication.” 360Solutions, 2009. Web.

    Ali, M., B. Raza, W. Ali, and N. Imtaiz. Linking Managerial Coaching with Employees’ Innovative Work Behaviors through Affective Supervisory Commitment: Evidence from Pakistan. International Review of Management and Marketing, vol. 10, no. 4, 2020, pp. 11-16.

    Allen, Frederick E. “The Terrible Management Technique That Cost Microsoft Its Creativity.” Forbes.com, 3 July 2012. Web.

    Allen, Renee. “Generational Differences Chart.” West Midland Family Center, n.d. Web.

    American Management Association. “Leading the Four Generations at Work.” American Management Association, Sept. 2014. Web.

    Aminov, Iskandar, Aaron De Smet, Gregor Jost, and David Mendelsohn. “Decision making in the age of urgency.” McKinsey & Company, 30 April 2019. Web.

    AON Hewitt. “Aon Hewitt Study Reveals Strong Link Between Employee Engagement and Employee Perceptions of Total Rewards. Honest Leader Communication Also Influences Engagement.” PR Newswire, 8 April 2015. Web.

    Armstrong, Brad. “How to Fail as a New Engineering Manager.” Noteworthy - The Journal Blog, 19 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Asmus, Mary Jo. “Coaching vs. Feedback.” Aspire-CS, 9 Dec. 2009. Web.

    Baldwin, Timothy T., et al. “The State of Transfer of Training Research: Moving Toward More Consumer-Centric Inquiry.” Human Resource Development Quarterly, vol. 28, no. 1, March 2017, pp. 17-28. Crossref, doi:10.1002/hrdq.21278.

    Batista, Ed. “Building a Feedback-Rich Culture from the Middle.” Ed Batista, April 2015. Web.

    Bilalic, Merim, Peter McLeod, and Fernand Gobet. Specialization Effect and Its Influence on Memory and Problem Solving in Expert Chess Players. Wiley Online Journal, 23 July 2009, doi: https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1551-6709.2009.01030.x

    Blume, Brian D., et al. “Transfer of Training: A Meta-Analytic Review.” Journal of Management, vol. 36, no. 4, July 2010, pp. 1065-105. Crossref, doi:10.1177/0149206309352880.

    BOH Training Guide. Wild Wing, Jan. 2017. Web.

    Bosler, Shana. “9 Strategies to Create Psychological Safety at Work.” Quantum Workplace, 3 June 2021. Web.

    Building Communication Skills. ACQUIRE Project/EngenderHealth, n.d. Web.

    Bucaro, Frank C. “The real issue in conflict is never about things…” Frank Bucaro blog, 7 March 2014. Web.

    Burke, Lisa A., and Holly M. Hutchins. “Training Transfer: An Integrative Literature Review.” Human Resource Development Review, vol. 6, no. 3, Sept. 2007, pp. 263-96. Crossref, doi:10.1177/1534484307303035.

    Caprino, Kathy. “Separating Performance Management from Compensation: New Trend for Thriving Organizations.” Forbes, 13 Dec. 2016. Web.

    Caprino, Kathy. “Why the Annual Review Process Damages Employee Engagement.” Forbes, 1 March 2016. Web.

    Carpineanu, Silvana. “7 Mistakes You Might Be Making When Writing A Meeting Agenda.” Time Doctor, 12 January 2021. Web.

    Cecchi-Dimeglio, Paola. “How Gender Bias Corrupts Performance Reviews, and What to Do About It.” Harvard Business Review, 12 April 2017. Web.

    Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). “PESTLE Analysis.” Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development, 2010. Web.

    Chiaburu, Dan S., et al. “Social Support in the Workplace and Training Transfer: A Longitudinal Analysis: Social Support and Training Transfer.” International Journal of Selection and Assessment, vol. 18, no. 2, June 2010, pp. 187-200. Crossref, doi:10.1111/j.1468-2389.2010.00500.x.

    Christensen, Ulrik Juul. “How to Teach Employees Skills They Don’t Know They Lack.” Harvard Business Review, 29 Sept. 2017. Web.

    CIPD. “Rapid evidence assessment of the research literature on the effect of goal setting on workplace performance.” Charted Institute of Personnel and Development, Dec. 2016. Web.

    CIPD. Annual Survey Report: Learning & Development 2015. Charted Institute of Personnel and Development, 2015. Web.

    Communication and Organizational Skills: NPHW Training Manual. Population Health Research Institute (PHRI), 17 Sept. 2015. Web.

    Cookson, Phil. “It’s time to see performance management as a benefit, not a burden.” CIPD. 17 March 2017. Web.

    Communication Statistics 2021. Project.co, 2021. Web.

    Connors, Roger. “Why Accountability?” The Oz Principle, Partners In Leadership, 2014.

    Coutifaris, Constantinos G. V., and Adam M. Grant “Taking Your Team Behind the Curtain: The Effects of Leader Feedback-Sharing and Feedback-Seeking on Team Psychological Safety.” Organization Science, vol. 33,
    no. 4, 2021, pp. 1574-1598. https://doi.org/10.1287/orsc.2021.1498

    Coy, Charles. “Peer Feedback: 6 Tips for Successful Crowdsourcing.” Rework, 25 June 2014. Web.

    “CQ Learn What Really Matters.” CQ Evidence-Based Management Learning Platform, n.d. Web.

    Darwant, Sarah. Coaching Training Course Book. Elite Training, 2012. Web.

    De Smet, Aaron, et al. How Companies Manage the Front Line Today: McKinsey Survey Results. McKinsey, Feb. 2010. Web.

    DeNault, Charles. “Employee Coaching Survey Results: Important and Engaging.” Saba, 22 April 2015. Web.

    Dermol, Valerij, and Tomaž Čater. “The Influence of Training and Training Transfer Factors on Organisational Learning and Performance.” Personnel Review, vol. 42, no. 3, April 2013, pp. 324–48. Crossref, doi:10.1108/00483481311320435.

    dgdotto. “Fail to Plan, Plan to Fail.” visual.ly, 30 April 2013. Web.

    Duggan, Kris. “Why the Annual Performance Review is Going Extinct.” Fast Company, 20 Oct. 2015. Web.

    Duhigg, Charles. “What Google Learned From Its Quest to Build the Perfect Team.” The New York Times, 25 Feb. 2016. Web.

    Earley, P. Christopher, and Randall S. Peterson. “The Elusive Cultural Chameleon: Cultural Intelligence as a New Approach to Intercultural Training for the Global Manager.” Academy of Management Learning & Education, vol. 3, no. 1, March 2004, pp. 100-15. Crossref, doi:10.5465/amle.2004.12436826.

    Edmondson, Amy. “Psychological Safety and Learning Behavior in Work Teams.” Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 44, no. 2, June 1999, pp. 350-383. Web.

    “Effective Employee Communications Fosters Corporate Reputation.” The Harris Poll, 10 June 2015. Web.

    Eichenwald, Kurt. “How Microsoft Lost its Mojo: Steve Ballmer and Corporate American’s Most Spectacular Decline.” Vanity Fair, 24 July 2012. Web.

    Essential Supervisory Skills. University of Washington, 2016. Web.

    “Estimating the Costs of Workplace Conflict.” Acas, 11 May 2021. Web.

    Falcone, Paul. “Viewpoint: How to Redesign Your Performance Appraisal Template.” Society for Human Resource Management, 7 June 2017. Web.

    Fermin, Jeff. “Statistics On The Importance Of Employee Feedback.” Officevibe, 7 Oct. 2014. Web.

    Filipkowski, Jenna, et al. Building a Coaching Culture with Millennial Leaders. Human Capital Institute, 18 Sept. 2017. Web.

    First Time Manager Training to Help New Managers Develop Essential Skills. The Ken Blanchard Companies, n.d. Web.

    Fisher, Dan. Feedback vs. Coaching, What’s the Difference? Menemsha Group, 28 June 2018. Web.

    Freedman, Erica. “How to Build an Internal Leadership Development Program.” Chief Executive, 2016. Web.

    "Futureproof Your Organization with These 8 Manager Effectiveness Metrics.” Visier Inc., 8 Aug. 2017. Web.

    Gallo, Amy. “How to Manage Your Former Peers.” Harvard Business Review, Dec. 2012. Web.

    Gandhi, Vipula. “Want to Improve Productivity? Hire Better Managers.” Gallup, 3 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Gallup. State of the Global Workplace. 1st edition, Gallup Press, 2017. Web.

    Global Workplace Analytics. “Latest Telecommuting Statistics.” Global Workplace Analytics. Sept. 2013. Web.

    Goldsmith, Marshall. “Try Feedforward Instead of Feedback.” Leader to Leader Institute, 5 April 2011. Web.

    Goldsmith, Marshall. "11 Guidelines for Influencing Top Decision Makers." Marshall Goldsmith, n.d. Web.

    Goldsmith, Marshall. "I Know Less Than You Do – and It’s Okay!" Marshall Goldsmith, n.d. Web.

    Goldsmith, Marshall. "Is It Worth It to Add Value? Not Always." Marshall Goldsmith, n.d. Web.

    Goler, L., J. Gale, and A. Grant. “Let’s Not Kill Performance Evaluations Yet.” Harvard Business Review, Nov. 2016. Web.

    Good Manager, Bad Manager. Grovo, 2016. Web.

    Google People Operations. “Guide: Understand Team Effectiveness.” Google, n.d. Web.

    Google’s New Manager Student Workbook. re:Work with Google, n.d. Web.

    Google’s New Manager Training Facilitator Guide. re:Work with Google, n.d. Web.

    Gossen, Paul. A Coaching Culture Transformation ~ Case Study. Athena Training and Consulting, 1 April 2011. Web.

    Goudreau, Jenna. “How to Communicate in the New Multi-Generational Office.” Forbes Magazine, Feb. 2013. Web.

    Govaerts, Natalie, and Filip Dochy. “Disentangling the Role of the Supervisor in Transfer of Training.” Educational Research Review, vol. 12, June 2014, pp. 77-93. Crossref, doi:10.1016/j.edurev.2014.05.002.

    Grenchus, Gabrielle. “Keep employees engaged with clear priorities and crowdsourced recognition.” IBM thinkLeaders. 8 June 2015. Web.

    Grossman, Rebecca, and Eduardo Salas. “The Transfer of Training: What Really Matters: The Transfer of Training.” International Journal of Training and Development, vol. 15, no. 2, June 2011, pp. 103-20. Crossref, doi:10.1111/j.1468-2419.2011.00373.x.

    Grote, Dick. “3 Popular Goal-Setting Techniques Managers Should Avoid.” Harvard Business Review. 2 Jan. 2017. Web.

    Hall, John. “Why Accountability Is Vital To Your Company.” Forbes, 6 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Hancock, Bryan, et al. “The Fairness Factor in Performance Management.” McKinsey, 5 April 2018. Web.

    Harkins, Phil. “10 Leadership Techniques for Building High-Performing Teams.” Linkage Inc., 2014. Web.

    HCI. Building a Coaching Culture with Managers and Leaders. Human Capital Institute, 2016. Web.

    Heathfield, Susan M. “Tips to Create Successful Performance Appraisal Goals.” The Balance, Aug. 2016. Web.

    Hills, Jan. Brain-Savvy Business: 8 Principles From Neuroscience and How to Apply Them. Head Heart + Brain, 2016. Print.

    Hoffman, Mitchell, and Steven Tadelis. People Management Skills, Employee Attrition, and Manager Rewards: An Empirical Analysis. p. 96.

    “How to Create an Effective Feedback Culture.” eXplorance Inc. Feb. 2013. Web.

    “Importance of Performance Management Process & Best Practices To Optimize Monitoring Performance Work Reviews/Feedback and Goal Management.” SAP Success Factors, n.d. Web.

    Jacobson, Darcy. “How Bad Performance Management Killed Microsoft’s Edge.” Globoforce Blog, 5 July 2012. Web.

    Jaidev, Uma Pricilda, and Susan Chirayath. Pre-Training, During-Training and Post-Training Activities as Predictors of Transfer of Training. no. 4, 2012, p. 18.

    Jensen, Michael C. “Paying People to Lie: The Truth about the Budgeting Process.” European Financial Management, vol. 9, no. 3, 2003, pp. 379-406. Print.

    Kahneman, Daniel, and Ram Charan. HBR's 10 Must Reads on Making Smart Decisions. Harvard Business Review, 26 March 2013. Ebook.

    Kirkpatrick, J., and W. Kirkpatrick. “The Kirkpatrick Four Levels: A Fresh Look After 50 Years 1959-2009.” Kirkpatrickpartners.com, 2009. Web.

    Kirwan, Cyril. Improving Learning Transfer. Routledge, 2016.

    Kline, Theresa J.B., and Lorne M. Sulsky. “Measurement and Assessment Issues in Performance Appraisal.” Canadian Psychology, vol. 50, no. 3, 2009, pp. 161-171. Proquest. Web.

    Kowalski, Kyle. “Create a Daily Routine with Calendar Time Blocking (+ 7 Pro Tips).” Sloww, 29 May 2018. Web.

    Krentz, Susanna E., et al. ”Staying on Course with Strategic Metrics.” Healthcare Financial Management, vol. 60, no. 5, 2006, pp. 86-94. Proquest. Web.

    Kuligowski, Kiely. Tips for First-Time Managers. 15 Feb. 2019. Web.

    Laker, Dennis R., and Jimmy L. Powell. “The Differences between Hard and Soft Skills and Their Relative Impact on Training Transfer.” Human Resource Development Quarterly, vol. 22, no. 1, March 2011, pp. 111-22. Crossref, doi:10.1002/hrdq.20063.

    Lawrence, Paul. “Managerial coaching – A literature review.” International Journal of Evidence Based Coaching and Mentoring, vol. 15, no. 2, 2017, pp. 43-66. Web.

    Ledford, Gerald E. Jr., George Benson, and Edward E. Lawler III. “Cutting-Edge Performance Management.” WorldatWork Research, Aug. 2016. Web.

    Lee, W.R.; Choi, S.B.; Kang, S.-W. How Leaders’ Positive Feedback Influences Employees’ Innovative Behavior: The Mediating Role of Voice Behavior and Job Autonomy. Sustainability, vol. 13, no. 4, 2021, pp. 1901. https://doi.org/10.3390/su13041901

    Leopold, Till Alexander, Vesselina Ratcheva, and Saadia Zahidi. The Future of Jobs. World Economic Forum, 2016. Web.

    Levy, Dan. “How to Build a Culture That Embraces Feedback.” Inc. Magazine, March 2014. Web.

    Lighthouse Research & Advisory. “Insights from the CHRO Panel at Workhuman 2017.” Lighthouse Research & Advisory, June 2017. Web.

    Lipman, Victor. “For New Managers, Boundaries Matter (A Lot).” Forbes, 19 March 2018. Web.

    Lipman, Victor. “The Hardest Thing For New Managers.” Forbes, 1 June 2016. Web.

    Lipman, Victor. “The Move To New Manager May Be The Hardest Transition In Business.” Forbes, 2 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Lyons, Rich. “Feedback: You Need To Lead It.” Forbes, 10 July 2017. Web.

    “Managing Email Effectively.” MindTools, n.d. Web.

    Managing Performance Workbook. Trainer Bubble, 16 Feb. 2013. Web.

    Mayfield, Clifton, et al. “Psychological Collectivism and Team Effectiveness: Moderating Effects of Trust and Psychological Safety.” Journal of Organizational Culture, Communications and Conflict, vol. 20, no. 1, Jan. 2016, pp. 78-94. Web.

    McAlpin, Kevin and Hans Vaagenes. “Critical Decision Making.” Performance Coaching International. 17 Nov. 2017. Web.

    McCoy, Jim. “How to Align Employee Performance with Business Strategy.” Workforce Management, vol. 86, no. 12, 2007, pp. S5. Proquest. Web.

    “Measuring Time-To-Full Productivity.” FeverBee, n.d. Web.

    Meister, Jeanne. The 2020 Workplace: How Innovative Companies Attract, Develop, and Keep Tomorrow's Employees Today. HarperBusiness, 2010. Print.

    Meyer, Erin. “The Four Keys To Success With Virtual Teams.” Forbes Magazine, 19 Aug. 2010. Web.

    Morris, Donna. “Death to the Performance Review: How Adobe Reinvented Performance Management and Transformed Its Business.” WorldatWork, 2016, p. 10. Web.

    Myers-Briggs Company. “New Research: Time Spent on Workplace Conflict Has Doubled Since 2008.” Yahoo! Finance, 18 Oct. 2022. Web.

    Murdoch, Elisabeth. “Elisabeth Murdoch's MacTaggart lecture: full text.” The Guardian, 23 Aug. 2012. Web.

    NASA Governance and Strategic Management Handbook (NPD 1000.0B). NASA, June 2014. Web.

    NASA Space Flight Program and Project Management Handbook (NASA/SP-2014-3705). NASA, Sept. 2014. Web.

    New Manager Training: Management & Leadership Skills. Schulich School of Business, n.d. Web.

    O’Hanlon, Margaret. “It’s a Scandal! Manager Training Exposed! [Implementation Part 4].” Compensation Cafe, 16 Feb. 2012. Web.

    Ordonez, Lisa D., et al. “Goals Gone Wild: The Systematic Side Effects of Over-Prescribing Goal Setting.” Social Science Research Network. Harvard Business School, 11 Feb. 2009. Web.

    Paczka, Nina. “Meeting in the Workplace | 2023 Statistics.” LiveCareer, 25 July 2022. Web.

    Pavlou, Christina. “How to Calculate Employee Turnover Rate | Workable.” Recruiting Resources: How to Recruit and Hire Better, 13 July 2016. Web.

    Performance Management 101 Workbook. Halogen Software, 2015. Web.

    Personal Development and Review. Oxford Learning Institute, n.d. Web.

    Personal Development Plan. MindTools, 2014. Web.

    Porath, Christine, et al. “The Effects of Civility on Advice, Leadership, and Performance.” Journal of Applied Psychology, vol. 44, no. 5, Sept. 2015, pp. 1527-1541. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “PMI’s Pulse of The Profession: In-Depth Report.” PMI, May 2013. Web. June 2015.

    Quay, C. C., and A. Yusof. “The influence of employee participation, rewards and recognition, job security, and performance feedback on employee engagement.” Issues and Perspectives in Business and Social Sciences, vol. 2, no. 1, 2022, pp. 20. https://doi.org/10.33093/ipbss.2022.2.1.3

    Quinn, R. E., and J. Rohrbaugh. “A spatial model of effectiveness criteria: Towards a competing values approach to organizational analysis.” Management Science, vol. 29, 1983, pp. 363–377.

    Re:Work Guide: Develop and Support Managers. re:Work with Google, n.d. Web.

    Reardon, Kathleen Kelley. “7 Things to Say When a Conversation Turns Negative.” Harvard Business Review, 11 May 2016. Web.

    Reh, F. John. “Here Is a List of Mistakes New Managers Make and How to Avoid Them.” The Balance Careers, 30 Dec. 2018. Web.

    Richards, Leigh. “Why Is Employee Empowerment a Common Cornerstone of Organizational Development & Change Programs?” Houston Chronicle, Hearts Newspapers, LLC. 5 July 2013. Web.

    Robson, Fiona. Southwood School – A Case Study: Performance Management Systems. Society for Human Resource Management, 2009. Crossref, doi:10.4135/9781473959552.

    Rock, David, and Beth Jones. “Why More and More Companies are Ditching Performance Ratings.” Harvard Business Review, 8 Sept. 2015. Web.

    Rock, David. “SCARF: A Brain-Based Model for Collaborating With and Influencing Others.” NeuroLeadership Journal, 2008. Web..

    Romão, Soraia, Neuza Ribeiro, Daniel Roque Gomes, and Sharda Singh. “The Impact of Leaders’ Coaching Skills on Employees’ Happiness and Turnover Intention.” Administrative Sciences, vol. 12, no. 84, 2022. https://doi.org/10.3390/ admsci12030084

    Romero, Joseluis. “Yes - you can build a feedback culture.” Skills 2 Lead, Aug. 2014. Web.

    Runde, Craig E., and Tim A. Flanagan. “Conflict Competent Leadership.” Leader to Leader, Executive Forum, Winter 2008. PDF.

    Saks, Alan M., and Lisa A. Burke-Smalley. “Is Transfer of Training Related to Firm Performance?: Transfer and Firm Performance.” International Journal of Training and Development, vol. 18, no. 2, June 2014, pp. 104–15. Crossref, doi:10.1111/ijtd.12029.

    Saks, Alan M., et al. “The Transfer of Training: The Transfer of Training.” International Journal of Training and Development, vol. 18, no. 2, June 2014, pp. 81–83. Crossref, doi:10.1111/ijtd.12032.

    Salomonsen, Summer. Grovo’s First-Time Manager Microlearning® Program Will Help Your New Managers Thrive in 2018. Grovo, 2018. Web.

    Schwartz, Dan. “3 Topics Every New Manager Training Should Include.” Training Industry, 12 April 2017. Web.

    Scott, Dow, Tom McMullen, and Mark Royal. “Retention of Key Talent and the Role of Rewards.” WorldatWork, June 2012. Web.

    “Seeking Agility in Performance Management.” Human Resource Executive, 2016. Web.

    “Should You Always Involve Your Team in Decision Making?” Upskillist, 25 April 2022. Web.

    “SHRM Workplace Forecast.” The Top Workplace Trends According to HR Professionals, May 2013. Web.

    Singhal, Nikhyl. “Eight Tips for First Time Managers.” Medium, 20 Aug. 2017. Web.

    Singhania, Prakriti, et al. “2020 Global Marketing Trends.” Deloitte, 2019. Web.

    SMART Goals: A How to Guide. University of California, n.d. Web.

    Smith, Benson, and Tony Rutigliano. “Scrap Your Performance Appraisal System.” Gallup, 2002. Article.

    “State of the Modern Meeting 2015.” BlueJeans, Aug. 2015. Web.

    Sternberg, Larry, and Kim Turnage. “Why Make Managers A Strategic Priority?” Great Leadership, 12 Oct. 2017. Web.

    Sullivan, Dr. John. “Facebook’s Difference: A Unique Approach For Managing Employees.”TLNT, Sept. 2013. Web.

    Tal, David. “A 'Culture of Coaching' Is Your Company's Most Important Ingredient for Success.” Entrepreneur, 27 Sept. 2017. Web.

    Tenut, Jeff. “How Management Development Training Reduces Turnover.” DiscoverLink, 3 July 2018. Web.

    “The 5 Biggest Biases That Affect Decision-Making.” NeuroLeadership Institute, 2 August 2022. Web.

    “The Different Impact of Good and Bad Leadership.” Barna Group, 2015. Web.

    “The Engaged Workplace.” Gallup, 2017. Web.

    “The Individual Development Plan Guide.” Wildland Fire Leadership Development Program, April 2010, p. 15.

    The State of Business Communication. Grammarly, 2022. Web.

    Thomas, Kenneth. “Conflict and Conflict Management.” The Handbook of Industrial and Organizational Psychology, Rand McNally, 1976. In “The Five Conflict-Handling Modes.” The Myers Briggs Company, n.d. PDF.

    Thompson, Rachel. “What Is Stakeholder Management?” MindTools, n.d. Web.

    Tollet, Francoise. “Distracted? Learn how to (re)focus.” Business Digest, 12 July 2021. Podcast.

    Tonhauser, Cornelia, and Laura Buker. Determinants of Transfer of Training: A Comprehensive Literature Review, p. 40.

    Towers Watson. “Clear Direction in a Complex World: How Top Companies Create Clarity, Confidence and Community to Build Sustainable Performance.” Change and Communication ROI Study Report, 2011-2012. Web.

    Trudel, Natalie. “Improve Your Coaching Skills by Understanding the Psychology of Feedback.” TLNT, 12 July 2017. Web.

    “Understanding When to Give Feedback.” Harvard Business Review, Dec. 2014. Web.

    Vacassin, Daniel. “There are no 'good' performance management systems – there are just good line managers.” LinkedIn, 4 Oct. 2016. Web.

    van der Locht, Martijn, et al. “Getting the Most of Management Training: The Role of Identical Elements for Training Transfer.” Personnel Review, vol. 42, no. 4, May 2013, pp. 422–39. Crossref, doi:10.1108/PR-05-2011-0072.

    Vaughan, Liam. “Banks Find New Ways to Measure Staff.” Financial News, 10 Jan. 2011. Web.

    Watkins, Michael, et al. “Hit the Ground Running:Transitioning to New Leadership Roles.” IMD Business School, May 2014. Web.

    Whitney, Kelley. “Kimberly-Clark Corp.: Redesigning Performance Management.” Talent Management Magazine, vol. 2, no. 1, 2006. Web.

    “Whole Foods 2015 Report.” The Predictive Index, n.d. Web.

    “Whole Foods Market Reports Fourth Quarter and Fiscal Year 2016 Results.” Whole Foods, 2 Feb. 2016. Web.

    Wisniewski, Dan. “Here's why everybody hates meetings.” HR Morning, 14 Dec. 2012. Web.

    Woolum, Janet, and Brent Stockwell. Aligning Performance Measurement to Mission, Goals, and Strategy Workbook. Arizona State University, Jan. 2016. Web.

    Worall, Les, et al. The Quality of Working Life. Chartered Management Institute, 2016. Web.

    “Workplace Conflict Statistics: How We Approach Conflict at Work.” Niagara Institute, 11 Aug. 2022. Web.

    “You Waste a Lot of Time at Work Infographic.” Atlassian, 23 August 2012. Web.

    Zenger, Jack, and Joe Folkman. “Feedback: The Leadership Conundrum.” Talent Quarterly: The Feedback Issue, 2015. Web.

    Zuberbühler, P., et al. “Development and validation of the coaching-based leadership scale and its relationship with psychological capital, work engagement, and performance.” Current Psychology, vol. 42, no. 10, 2021, pp. 1-22.

    Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}203|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • The immaturity of the big data market means that organizations lack examples and best practices to follow, and they are often left trailblazing their own paths.
    • Experienced and knowledgeable big data professionals are limited and without creative resourcing; IT might struggle to fill big data positions.
    • The term NoSQL has become a catch-all phrase for big data technologies; however, the technologies falling under the umbrella of NoSQL are disparate and often misunderstood. Organizations are at risk of adopting incorrect technologies if they don’t take the time to learn the jargon.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • NoSQL plays a key role in the emergence of the big data market, but it has not made relational databases outdated. Successful big data strategies can be conducted using SQL, NoSQL, or a combination of the two.
    • Assign a Data Architect to oversee your initiative. Hire or dedicate someone who has the ability to develop both a short-term and long-term vision and that has hands-on experience with data management, mining and modeling. You will still need someone (like a database administrator) who understands the database, the schemas, and the structure.
    • Understand your data before you attempt to use it. Take a master data management approach to ensure there are rules and standards for managing your enterprise’s data, and take extra caution when integrating external sources.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess whether SQL, NoSQL, or a combination of both technologies will provide you with the appropriate capabilities to achieve your business objectives and gain value from your data.
    • Form a Big Data Team to bring together IT and the business in order to leave a successful initiative.
    • Conduct ongoing training with your personnel to ensure up-to-date skills and end-user understanding.
    • Frequently scan the big data market space to identify new technologies and opportunities to help optimize your big data strategy.

    Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a big data strategy

    Know where to start and where to focus attention in the implementation of a big data strategy.

    • Storyboard: Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

    2. Assess the appropriateness of big data technologies

    Decide the most correct tools to use in order to solve enterprise data management problems.

    • Big Data Diagnostic Tool

    3. Determine the TCO of a scale out implementation

    Compare the TCO of a SQL (scale up) with a NoSQL (scale out) deployment to determine whether NoSQL will save costs.

    • Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool
    [infographic]

    Master Your Security Incident Response Communications Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}321|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,339 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • When a significant security incident is discovered, usually very few details are known for certain. Nevertheless, the organization will need to say something to affected stakeholders.
    • Security incidents tend to be ongoing situations that last considerably longer than other types of crises, making communications a process rather than a one-time event.
    • Effective incident response communications require collaboration from: IT, Legal, PR, and HR – groups that often speak “different languages.”

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There’s no such thing as successful incident response communications; strive instead for effective communications. There will always be some fallout after a security incident, but it can be effectively mitigated through honesty, transparency, and accountability.
    • Effective external communications begin with effective internal communications. Security Incident Response Team members come from departments that don’t usually work closely with each other. This means they often have different ways of thinking and speaking about issues. Be sure they are familiar with each other before a crisis occurs.
    • You won’t save face by withholding embarrassing details. Lying only makes a bad situation worse, but coming clean and acknowledging shortcomings (and how you’ve fixed them) can go a long way towards restoring stakeholders’ trust.

    Impact and Result

    • Effective and efficient management of security incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities: communications must be integrated into each of these phases.
    • Understand that prior planning helps to take the guesswork out of incident response communications. By preparing for several different types of security incidents, the communications team will get used to working with each other, as well as learning what strategies are and are not effective. Remember, the communications team contains diverse members from various departments, and each may have different ideas about what information is important to release.

    Master Your Security Incident Response Communications Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement a security incident response communications plan, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Dive into communications planning

    This phase addresses the benefits and challenges of incident response communications and offers advice on how to assemble a communications team and develop a threat escalation protocol.

    • Master Your Security Incident Response Communications Program – Phase 1: Dive Into Communications Planning
    • Security Incident Management Plan

    2. Develop your communications plan

    This phase focuses on creating an internal and external communications plan, managing incident fallout, and conducting a post-incident review.

    • Master Your Security Incident Response Communications Program – Phase 2: Develop Your Communications Plan
    • Security Incident Response Interdepartmental Communications Template
    • Security Incident Communications Policy Template
    • Security Incident Communications Guidelines and Templates
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Tabletop Exercises Package
    [infographic]

    Create Stakeholder-Centric Architecture Governance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}583|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,099 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • Traditional enterprise architecture management (EAM) caters to only 10% – the IT people, and not to the remaining 90% of the organization.
    • EAM practices do not scale well with the agile way of working and are often perceived as "bottlenecks” or “restrictors of design freedom.”
    • The organization scale does not justify a full-fledged EAM with many committees, complex processes, and detailed EA artifacts.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Architecture is a competency, not a function. Project teams, including even business managers outside of IT, can assimilate “architectural thinking.”

    Impact and Result

    Increase business value through the dissemination of architectural thinking throughout the organization. Maturing your EAM practices beyond a certain point does not help.

    Create Stakeholder-Centric Architecture Governance Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Start here

    Improve benefits from your enterprise architecture efforts through the dissemination of architecture thinking throughout your organization.

    • Create Stakeholder-Centric Architecture Governance Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}184|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $41,674 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This is in contention with product-centric delivery practices. This form of delivery acknowledges the reality that solutions of all shapes and sizes deliver continual and evolving business value over their lifetime.
    • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
    • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Delivering products doesn’t mean you will stop delivering projects! Product-centric delivery is intended to address the misalignment between the long-term delivery of value that organizations demand and the nature of traditional project-focused environments.

    Impact and Result

    • We will help you build a proposal deck to make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.
    • You will build this proposal deck by answering key questions about product-centric delivery so you can identify:
      • A common definition of product.
      • How this form of delivery differs from traditional project-centric approaches.
      • Key challenges and benefits.
      • The capabilities needed to effectively own products and deliver value.
      • What you are asking of stakeholders.
      • A roadmap of how to get started.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make the Case for Product Delivery Deck – A guide to help align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    This project will help you define “product” for your organization, define your drivers and goals for moving to product delivery, understand the role of product ownership, lay out the case to your stakeholders, and communicate what comes next for your transition to product.

    • Make the Case for Product Delivery Storyboard

    2. Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template – A template to help you capture and detail your case for product delivery.

    Build a proposal deck to help make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.

    • Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template

    3. Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook – A tool to capture the results of exercises to build your case to change your product delivery method.

    This workbook is designed to capture the results of the exercises in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Storyboard. Each worksheet corresponds to an exercise in the storyboard. The workbook is also a living artifact that should be updated periodically as the needs of your team and organization change.

    • Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    Table of Contents

    Define product

    Define your drivers and goals

    Understand the role of product ownership

    Communicate what comes next

    Make the case to your stakeholders

    Appendix: Additional research

    Appendix: Product delivery strategy communication

    Appendix: Manage stakeholder influence

    Appendix: Product owner capability details

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Products are the lifeblood of an organization. They deliver the capabilities needed to deliver value to customers, internal users, and stakeholders.
    • Organizations are under pressure to align the value they provide with the organization’s goals and overall company vision.
    • You need to clearly convey the direction and strategy of your product portfolio to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.
    Common Obstacles
    • IT organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This is in contention with product-centric delivery.
    • Product delivery acknowledges the reality that solutions of all shapes and sizes deliver continual and evolving business value over their lifetime.
    • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
    • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Info-Tech will enable you to build a proposal deck to make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.
    • You will build this proposal deck by answering key questions about product-centric delivery so you can identify:
      • A common definition of product.
      • How this form of delivery differs from traditional project-centric approaches.
      • Key challenges and benefits.
      • The capabilities needed to effectively own products and deliver value.
      • What you are asking of stakeholders.
      • A roadmap of how to get started.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Delivering products doesn’t mean you will stop delivering projects! Product-centric delivery is intended to address the misalignment between the long-term delivery of value that organizations demand and the nature of traditional project-focused environments.

    Many executives perceive IT as being poorly aligned with business objectives

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey data highlights the importance of IT initiatives in supporting the business in achieving its strategic goals.

    However, Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (2021; N=58) data indicates that CEOs perceive IT to be poorly aligned to business’ strategic goals.

    Info-Tech CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, 2021 (N=58)

    40% Of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.

    34% Of business stakeholders are supporters of their IT departments (n=334).

    40% Of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Great technical solutions are not the primary driver of IT success. Focusing on delivery of digital products that align with organizational goals will produce improved outcomes and will foster an improved relationship between business and IT.

    Increase product success by involving IT, business, and customers in your product roadmaps, planning, and delivery

    Product management and delivery seek to promote improved relationships among IT, business, and customers, a critical driver for business satisfaction.

    IT

    Stock image of an IT professional.

    1

    Collaboration

    IT, business, and customers work together through all stages of the product lifecycle, from market research through the roadmapping and delivery processes and into maintenance and retirement. The goal is to ensure the risks and dependencies are realized before work is committed.

    Stakeholders, Customers, and Business

    Stock image of a business professional.

    2

    Communication

    Prioritize high-value modes of communication to break down existing silos and create common understanding and alignment across functions. This approach increases transparency and visibility across the entire product lifecycle.

    3

    Integration

    Explore methods to integrate the workflows, decision making, and toolsets among the business, IT, and customers. The goal is to become more reactive to changes in business and customer expectations and more proactive about market trends.

    Product does not mean the same thing to everyone

    Do not expect a universal definition of products.
    Every organization and industry has a different definition of what a product is. Organizations structure their people, processes, and technologies according to their definition of the products they manage. Conflicting product definitions between teams increase confusion and misalignment of product roadmaps.

    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.” (Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance) “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.” (TechTarget) “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.” (Mark Curphey)

    Organizations need a common understanding of what a product is and how it pertains to the business.

    This understanding needs to be accepted across the organization.

    “There is not a lot of guidance in the industry on how to define [products]. This is dangerous because what will happen is that product backlogs will be formed in too many areas. All that does is create dependencies and coordination across teams … and backlogs.” (Chad Beier, “How Do You Define a Product?” Scrum.org)

    Products enable the long-term and continuous delivery of value

    Diagram laying out the lifecycles and roadmaps contributing to the 'Continuous delivery of value'. Beginning with 'Project Lifecycle' in which Projects with features and services end in a Product Release that is disconnected from the continuum. Then the 'Hybrid Lifecycle' and 'Product Lifecycle' which are connected by a 'Product Roadmap' and 'Product Backlog' have Product Releases that connect to the continuum.

    Phase 1

    Build the case for product-centric delivery

    Phase 1
    1.1 Define product
    1.2 Define your drivers and goals
    1.3 Understand the role of product ownership
    1.4 Communicate what comes next
    1.5 Make the case to your stakeholders

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define product in your context.
    • Define your drivers and goals for moving to product delivery.
    • Understand the role of product ownership.
    • Communicate what comes next for your transition to product.
    • Lay out the case to your stakeholders.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Step 1.1

    Define product

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Define “product” in your context
    • 1.1.2 Consider examples of what is (and is not) a product in your organization
    • 1.1.3 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A clear definition of product in your organization’s context.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Exercise 1.1.1 Define “product” in your context

    30-60 minutes

    Output: Your enterprise/organizational definition of products and services

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Discuss what “product” means in your organization.
    2. Create a common, enterprise-wide definition for “product.”
    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.” (Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance) “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.” (TechTarget) “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.” (Mark Curphey)

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product-Centric Delivery Workbook.

    Example: What is a product?

    Not all organizations will define products in the same way. Take this as a general example:

    “A tangible solution, tool, or service (physical or digital) that enables the long-term and evolving delivery of value to customers and stakeholders based on business and user requirements.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    A proper definition of product recognizes three key facts:

    1. Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
    2. Products are not just “apps” but can be software or services that drive the delivery of value.
    3. There is more than one stakeholder group that derives value from the product or service.
    Stock image of an open human head with gears and a city for a brain.

    How do we know what is a product?

    What isn’t a product:
    • Features (on their own)
    • Transactions
    • Unstructured data
    • One-time solutions
    • Non-repeatable processes
    • Solutions that have no users or consumers
    • People or teams
    You have a product if the given item...
    • Has end users or consumers
    • Delivers quantifiable value
    • Evolves or changes over time
    • Has predictable delivery
    • Has definable boundaries
    • Has a cost to produce and operate

    Exercise 1.1.2 Consider examples of what is (and is not) a product in your organization

    15 minutes

    Output: Examples of what is and isn’t a product in your specific context.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Leverage the definition you created in exercise 1.1.1 and the explanation on the slide What is a product?
    2. Pick examples that effectively show the difference between products and non-products and facilitate a conversation on the ones that seem to be on the line. Specific server instances, or instances of providing a service, are worthwhile examples to consider.
    3. From the list you come up with, take the top three examples and put them into the Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template.
    Example:
    What isn’t a product?
    • Month-end SQL scripts to close the books
    • Support Engineer doing a password reset
    • Latest research project in R&D
    What is a product?
    • Self-service password reset portal
    • Oracle ERP installation
    • Microsoft Office 365

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Product delivery practices should consider everything required to support it, not just what users see.

    Cross-section of an iceberg above and below water with visible product delivery practices like 'Funding', 'External Relationships', and 'Stakeholder Management' above water and internal product delivery practices like 'Product Governance', 'Business Functionality', and 'R&D' under water. There are far more processes below the water.

    Products and services share the same foundation and best practices

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. Product is used for consistency but would apply to services as well.

    Product = Service

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:
    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Exercise 1.1.3 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    30-60 minutes

    Output: List of differences between project and product delivery

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Consider project delivery and product delivery.
    2. Discuss what some differences are between the two.
      Note: This exercise is not about identifying the advantages and disadvantages of each style of delivery. This is to identify the variation between the two.
    Theme Project Delivery (Current) Product Delivery (Future)
    Timing Defined start and end Does not end until the product is no longer needed
    Funding Funding projects Funding products and teams
    Prioritization LoB sponsors Product owner
    Capacity Management Project management Managed by product team

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

    Project Product
    Fund projects — Funding –› Fund products or teams
    Line of business sponsor — Prioritization –› Product owner
    Makes specific changes to a product —Product management –› Improves product maturity and support
    Assignment of people to work — Work allocation –› Assignment of work to product teams
    Project manager manages — Capacity management –› Team manages capacity

    Info-Tech Insights

    • Product ownership should be one of your first areas of focus when transitioning from project to product delivery.
    • Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

    Diagram laying out the lifecycles and roadmaps contributing to the 'Continuous delivery of value'. Beginning with 'Project Lifecycle' in which Projects with features and services end in a Product Release that is disconnected from the continuum. Then the 'Hybrid Lifecycle' and 'Product Lifecycle' which are connected by a 'Product Roadmap' and 'Product Backlog' have Product Releases that connect to the continuum. Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release.

    Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

    Step 1.2

    Define your drivers and goals

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery
    • 1.2.2 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A clear understanding of your motivations and desired outcomes for moving to product delivery.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Exercise 1.2.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

    30-60 minutes

    Output: Organizational drivers to move to product-centric delivery.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify your pain points in the current delivery model.
    2. What is the root cause of these pain points?
    3. How will a product-centric delivery model fix the root cause (drivers)?
    Pain Points
    • Lack of ownership
    Root Causes
    • Siloed departments
    Drivers
    • Accountability

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Exercise 1.2.2 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    30 minutes

    Output: Goals for product-centric delivery

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Review the differences between project and product delivery from exercise 1.1.3 and the list of drivers from exercise 1.2.1.
    2. Define your goals for achieving a product-centric organization.
      Note: Your drivers may have already covered the goals. If so, review if you would like to change the drivers based on your renewed understanding of the differences between project and product delivery.
    Pain Points
    • Lack of ownership
    Root Causes
    • Siloed departments
    Drivers
    • Accountability
    Goals
    • End-to-end ownership

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Step 1.3

    Understand the role of product ownership

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Identify product ownership capabilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product owner capabilities that you agree are critical to start your product transformation.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Accountability for the delivery of value through product ownership is not optional

    Tree of 'Enterprise Goals and Priorities' leading to 'Product' through a 'Product Family'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    People treat the assignment of accountability for products (aka product ownership) as optional. Without assigning accountability up front, your transition to product delivery will stall. Accountable individuals will be focused on the core outcome for product delivery, which is the delivery of the right value, at the right time, to the right people.

    Description of the tree levels shown in the diagram on the left. First is 'Enterprise Goals and Priorities', led by 'Executive Leadership' using the 'Enterprise Strategic Roadmap'. Second is 'Product Family', led by 'Product Manager' using the 'Product Family Roadmap'. Last is 'Product', led by the 'Product Owner' using the 'Product Roadmap' and 'Backlog' on the strategic end, and 'Releases' on the Tactical end. In the holistic context, 'Product Family is considered 'Strategic' while 'Product' is 'Tactical'.

    Recognize the different product owner perspectives

    Business
    • Customer facing, revenue generating
    Technical
    • IT systems and tools
    Operations
    • Keep the lights on processes

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Recognize that product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.

    “A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.” (Robbin Schuurman, “Tips for Starting Product Owners”)

    Implement the Info-Tech product owner capability model

    As discussed in Build a Better Product Owner, most product owners operate with an incomplete knowledge of the skills and capabilities needed to perform the role. Common gaps include focusing only on product backlogs, acting as a proxy for product decisions, and ignoring the need for key performance indicators (KPIs) and analytics in both planning and value realization. 'Product Owner Capabilities': 'Vision', 'Leadership', 'Product Lifecycle Management', 'Value Realization'.
    Vision
    • Market Analysis
    • Business Alignment
    • Product Roadmap
    Leadership
    • Soft Skills
    • Collaboration
    • Decision Making
    Product Lifecycle Management
    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run
    Value Realization
    • KPIs
    • Financial Management
    • Business Model

    Details on product ownership capabilities can be found in the appendix.

    Exercise 1.3.1 Identify product ownership capabilities

    60 minutes

    Output: Product owner capability mapping

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Write down the capabilities product owners need to perform their duties (one per sticky note) in order to describe product ownership in your organization. Consider people, processes, and tools.
    2. Mark each capability with a plus (current capability), circle (some proficiency), or dash (missing capability).
    3. Discuss each capability and place on the appropriate quadrant.

    'Product Owner Capabilities': 'Vision', 'Leadership', 'Product Lifecycle Management', 'Value Realization'.

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Differentiate between product owners and product managers

    Product Owner (Tactical Focus)
    • Backlog management and prioritization
    • Epic/story definition, refinement in conjunction with business stakeholders
    • Sprint planning with Scrum Master
    • Working with Scrum Master to minimize disruption to team velocity
    • Ensuring alignment between business and Scrum teams during sprints
    • Profit and loss (P&L) product analysis and monitoring
    Product Manager (Strategic Focus)
    • Product strategy, positioning, and messaging
    • Product vision and product roadmap
    • Competitive analysis and positioning
    • New product innovation/definition
    • Release timing and focus (release themes)
    • Ongoing optimization of product-related marketing and sales activities
    • P&L product analysis and monitoring

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Product owner” and “product manager” are terms that should be adapted to fit your culture and product hierarchy. These are not management relationships but rather a way to structure related products and services that touch the same end users.

    Step 1.4

    Communicate what comes next

    Activities
    • 1.4.1 How do we get started?

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A now, next, later roadmap indicating your overall next steps.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Make a plan in order to make a plan!

    Consider some of the techniques you can use to validate your strategy.

    Cyclical diagram of the 'Continuous Delivery of Value' within 'Business Value'. Surrounding attributes are 'User Centric', 'Adaptable', 'Accessible', 'Private & Secured', 'Informative & Insightful', 'Seamless Application Connection', 'Relationship & Network Building', 'Fit for Purpose'.

    Go to your backlog and prioritize the elements that need to be answered sooner rather than later.

    Possible areas of focus:

    • Regulatory requirements or questions to answer around accessibility, security, privacy.
    • Stress testing any new processes against situations that may occur.
    Learning Milestones

    The completion of a set of artifacts dedicated to validating business opportunities and hypotheses.

    Possible areas of focus:

    • Align teams on product strategy prior to build
    • Market research and analysis
    • Dedicated feedback sessions
    • Provide information on feature requirements
    Stock image of people learning.
    Sprint Zero (AKA Project-before-the-project)

    The completion of a set of key planning activities, typically the first sprint.

    Possible areas of focus:

    • Focus on technical verification to enable product development alignment
    • Sign off on architectural questions or concerns
    Stock photo of a person writing on a board of sticky notes.

    The “Now, Next, Later” roadmap

    Use this when deadlines and delivery dates are not strict. This is best suited for brainstorming a product plan when dependency mapping is not required.

    • Now
      What are you going to do now?
    • Next
      What are you going to do very soon?
    • Later
      What are you going to do in the future?
    A priority map laid out as a half rainbow with 'Now' as the inner, 'Next' as the middle, and 'Later' as the outer. Various 'Features', 'Releases', and an 'MVP' are mapped into the sections.
    (Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017)

    Exercise 1.4.1 How do we get started?

    30-60 minutes

    Output: Product transformation critical steps and basic roadmap

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify what the critical steps are for the organization to embrace product-centric delivery.
    2. Group each critical step by how soon you need to address it:
      • Now: Let’s do this ASAP.
      • Next: Sometime very soon, let’s do these things.
      • Later: Much further off in the distance, let’s consider these things.
    A priority map laid out as a half rainbow with 'Now' as the inner, 'Next' as the middle, and 'Later' as the outer. Various 'Features', 'Releases', and an 'MVP' are mapped into the sections.
    (Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017)

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Example

    Example table for listing tasks to complete Now, Next, or Later

    Step 1.5

    Make the case to your stakeholders

    Activities
    • 1.5.1 Identify what support you need from your stakeholders
    • 1.5.2 Build your pitch for product delivery

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A deliverable that helps make the case for product delivery.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Develop a stakeholder strategy to define your product owner landscape

    Stakeholder Influence

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner is able to accomplish.

    Product teams operate within this network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    See the appendix for activities and guidance on how to devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Image of four puzzle pieces being put together, labelled 'Product Lifecycle', 'Project Delivery', 'Operational Support', 'and Stakeholder Management'.

    Exercise 1.5.1 Identify what support you need from your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    Output: Clear understanding of stakeholders, what they need from you, and what you need from them.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. If you don’t yet know who your stakeholders are, consider completing one or more of the stakeholder management exercises in the appendix.
    2. Identify your key stakeholders who have an interest in solution delivery.
    3. Consider their perspective on product-centric delivery. (For example: For head of support, what does solution delivery mean to them?)
    4. Identify what role each stakeholder would play in the transformation.
      • This role represents what you need from them for this transformation to product-centric delivery.
    Stakeholder
    What does solution delivery mean to them?
    What do you need from them in order to be successful?

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Exercise 1.5.2 Build your pitch deck

    30 minutes (and up)

    Output: A completed presentation to help you make the case for product delivery.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Take the results from the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook and transfer them into the presentation template.
    2. Follow the instructions on each page listed in the instruction bubbles to know what results to place where.
    3. This is meant to be a template; you are welcome to add and remove slides as needed to suit your audience!

    Sample of slides from the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook with instruction bubbles overlaid.

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Appendix

    Additional research to start your journey

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Product Delivery

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    • Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Build a Better Product Owner

    • Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

    • Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    • Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    • Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    • Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    • Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    • Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

    Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

    • Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Application Portfolio Management

    Application Portfolio Management (APM) Research Center

    • See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

    Application Portfolio Management for Small Enterprises

    • There is no one-size-fits-all rationalization. Tailor your framework to meet your goals.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    • Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Build an Application Rationalization Framework

    • Manage your application portfolio to minimize risk and maximize value.

    Modernize Your Applications

    • Justify modernizing your application portfolio from both business and technical perspectives.

    Review Your Application Strategy

    • Ensure your applications enable your business strategy.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    • Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Streamline Application Management

    • Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    • Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    • Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

    • Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    • Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    • Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    • Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    • Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    • Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Org Design and Performance

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    • Have the right people, in the right place, at the right time.

    Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

    • Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    • Measure employee sentiment to drive IT performance

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    • Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • PMOs, if you don't know who is responsible for org change, it's you.

    Appendix

    Product delivery strategy communication

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we demonstrate how the product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path, and as a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    Diagram on how to get from product owner capabilities to 'Business Value Realization' through 'Product Roadmap' with a 'Tiered Backlog', 'Delivery Capacity and Throughput' via a 'Product Delivery Pipeline'.
    (Adapted from: Pichler, “What Is Product Management?”)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver.
    Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    Two-part diagram showing the 'Product Backlog' segmented into '1. Current: Features/ Stories', '2. Near-term: Capabilities', and '3. Future: Epics', and then the 'Product Roadmap' with the same segments placed into a timeline.

    Multiple roadmap views can communicate differently, yet tell the same truth

    Product managers and product owners have many responsibilities, and a roadmap can be a useful tool to complete those objectives through communication or organization of tasks.

    However, not all roadmaps address the correct audience and achieve those objectives. Care must be taken to align the view to the given audience.

    Pie Chart showing the surveyed most important reason for using a product roadmap. From largest to smallest are 'Communicate a strategy', 'Plan and prioritize', 'Communicate milestones and releases', 'Get consensus on product direction', and 'Manage product backlog'.
    Surveyed most important reason for using a product roadmap (Source: ProductPlan, 2018)

    Audience
    Business/ IT leaders Users/Customers Delivery teams
    Roadmap View
    Portfolio Product Technology
    Objectives
    To provide a snapshot of the portfolio and priority apps To visualize and validate product strategy To coordinate and manage teams and show dev. progress
    Artifacts
    Line items or sections of the roadmap are made up of individual apps, and an artifact represents a disposition at its highest level. Artifacts are generally grouped by various product teams and consist of strategic goals and the features that realize those goals. Artifacts are grouped by the teams who deliver that work and consist of features and technical enablers that support those features.

    Appendix

    Managing stakeholder influence

    From Build a Better Product Owner

    Step 1.3 (from Build a Better Product Owner)

    Manage Stakeholder Influence

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Visualize interrelationships to identify key influencers
    • 1.3.2 Group your product owners into categories
    • 1.3.3 Prioritize your stakeholders
    • 1.3.4 Delegation Poker: Reach better decisions

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    To be successful, product owners need to identify and manage all stakeholders for their products. This step will build a stakeholder map and strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers
    • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers
    • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization
    • Better understanding of decision-making approaches and delegation
    Product Owner Foundations
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3

    Develop a product owner stakeholder strategy

    Stakeholder Influence

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner is able to accomplish.

    Product owners operate within this network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    First, product owners must identify members of their stakeholder network. Next, they should devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Without accomplishing these missing pieces, product owners will encounter obstacles, resistance, or unexpected changes.

    Image of four puzzle pieces being put together, labelled 'Product Lifecycle', 'Project Delivery', 'Operational Support', 'and Stakeholder Management'.

    Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Legend
    Black arrow with a solid line and single direction. Black arrows indicate the direction of professional influence
    Green arrow with a dashed line and bi-directional. Dashed green arrows indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product operates in. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

    Use “connectors” to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantive relationships with your stakeholders.

    1.3.1 Visualize interrelationships to identify key influencers

    60 minutes

    Input: List of product stakeholders

    Output: Relationships among stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. List direct stakeholders for your product.
    2. Determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
      1. Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
      2. Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.
    5. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps product owners categorize their stakeholders by their level or influence and ownership in the product and/or teams.

    Stakeholder prioritization map split into four quadrants along two axes, 'Influence', and 'Ownership/Interest': 'Players' (high influence, high interest); 'Mediators' (high influence, low interest); 'Noisemakers' (low influence, high interest); 'Spectators' (low influence, low interest). Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.
    • Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.
    • Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    1.3.2 Group your product owners into categories

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder map

    Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify your stakeholder’s interest in and influence on your Agile implementation as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model below to determine each stakeholder’s category.
    3. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.
    Same stakeholder prioritization map as before but with example positions mapped onto it.
    Level of Influence
    • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
    • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
    • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
    • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
    • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.
    Level of Interest

    How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

    Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Stakeholder prioritization table with 'Stakeholder Category' as row headers ('Player', 'Mediator', 'Noisemaker', 'Spectator') and 'Level of Support' as column headers ('Supporter', 'Evangelist', 'Neutral', 'Blocker'). Importance ratings are 'Critical', 'High', 'Medium', 'Low', and 'Irrelevant'.

    Consider the three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by rating the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would recommend your product? These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive the focus of your attention. The table to the right indicates how stakeholders are ranked.

    1.3.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder matrix, Stakeholder prioritization

    Output: Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would endorse your product?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.
    3. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.
    Stakeholder Category Level of Support Prioritization
    CMO Spectator Neutral Irrelevant
    CIO Player Supporter Critical

    Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    Stakeholder strategy map assigning stakeholder strategies to stakeholder categories, as described in the adjacent table.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, the product owner can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers, while ensuring the needs of the Mediators and Players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence; high interest – actively engage Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence; low interest – keep satisfied They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence; high interest – keep informed Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence; low interest – monitor They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Appendix

    Product owner capability details

    From Build a Better Product Owner

    Develop product owner capabilities

    Capability 'Vision' with sub-capabilities 'Market Analysis, 'Business Alignment', and 'Product Roadmap'.

    Each capability has three components needed for successful product ownership.

    Definitions are on the following slides.

    Central diagram title 'Product Owner Capabilities'.

    Define the skills and activities in each component that are directly related to your product and culture.

    Capability 'Leadership' with sub-capabilities 'Soft Skills', 'Collaboration', and 'Decision Making'.
    Capability 'Product Lifecycle Management' with sub- capabilities 'Plan', 'Build', and 'Run'. Capability 'Value Realization' with sub-capabilities 'KPIs', 'Financial Management', and 'Business Model'.

    Capabilities: Vision

    Market Analysis

    • Unique solution: Identify the target users and unique value your product provides that is not currently being met.
    • Market size: Define the size of your user base, segmentation, and potential growth.
    • Competitive analysis: Determine alternative solutions, products, or threats that affect adoption, usage, and retention.

    Business Alignment

    • SWOT analysis: Complete a SWOT analysis for your end-to-end product lifecycle. Use Info-Tech’s Business SWOT Analysis Template.
    • Enterprise alignment: Align product to enterprise goals, strategies, and constraints.
    • Delivery strategy: Develop a delivery strategy to achieve value quickly and adapt to internal and external changes.

    Product Roadmap

    • Roadmap strategy: Determine the duration, detail, and structure of your roadmap to accurately communicate your vision.
    • Value prioritization: Define criteria used to evaluate and sequence demand.
    • Go to market strategy: Create organizational change management, communications, and a user implementation approach.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data comes from many places and may still not tell the complete story.

    Capability 'Vision' with sub-capabilities 'Market Analysis, 'Business Alignment', and 'Product Roadmap'.

    “Customers are best heard through many ears.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Capabilities: Leadership

    Soft Skills

    • Communication: Maintain consistent, concise, and appropriate communication using SMART guidelines (specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and timely).
    • Integrity: Stick to your values, principles, and decision criteria for the product to build and maintain trust with your users and teams.
    • Influence: Manage stakeholders using influence and collaboration over contract negotiation.

    Collaboration

    • Stakeholder management: Build a communications strategy for each stakeholder group, tailored to individual stakeholders.
    • Relationship management: Use every interaction point to strengthen relationships, build trust, and empower teams.
    • Team development: Promote development through stretch goals and controlled risks to build team capabilities and performance.

    Decision Making

    • Prioritized criteria: Remove personal bias by basing decisions off data analysis and criteria.
    • Continuous improvement: Balance new features with the need to ensure quality and create an environment of continuous improvement.
    • Team empowerment/negotiation: Push decisions to teams closest to the problem and solution, using Delegation Poker to guide you.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners cannot be just a proxy for stakeholder decisions. The product owner owns product decisions and management of all stakeholders.

    Capability 'Leadership' with sub-capabilities 'Soft Skills', 'Collaboration', and 'Decision Making'.

    “Everything walks the walk. Everything talks the talk.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Capabilities: Product lifecycle management

    Plan

    • Product backlog: Follow a schedule for backlog intake, refinement, updates, and prioritization.
    • Journey map: Create an end-user journey map to guide adoption and loyalty.
    • Fit for purpose: Define expected value and intended use to ensure the product meets your end user’s needs.

    Build

    • Capacity management: Work with operations and delivery teams to ensure consistent and stable outcomes.
    • Release strategy: Build learning, release, and critical milestones into a repeatable release plan.
    • Compliance: Build policy compliance into delivery practices to ensure alignment and reduce avoidable risk (privacy, security).

    Run

    • Adoption: Focus attention on end-user adoption and proficiency to accelerate value and maximize retention.
    • Support: Build operational support and business continuity into every team.
    • Measure: Measure KPIs and validate expected value to ensure product alignment to goals and consistent product quality.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners must actively manage the full lifecycle of the product.

    Capability 'Product Lifecycle Management' with sub- capabilities 'Plan', 'Build', and 'Run'.

    “Pay fantastic attention to detail. Reward, recognize, celebrate.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Capabilities: Value realization

    Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

    • Usability and user satisfaction: Assess satisfaction through usage monitoring and end-user feedback.
    • Value validation: Directly measure performance against defined value proposition, goals, and predicted ROI.
    • Fit for purpose: Verify the product addresses the intended purpose better than other options.

    Financial Management

    • P&L: Manage each product as if it were its own business with profit and loss statements.
    • Acquisition cost/market growth: Define the cost of acquiring a new consumer, onboarding internal users, and increasing product usage.
    • User retention/market share: Verify product usage continues after adoption and solution reaches new user groups to increase value.

    Business Model

    • Defines value proposition: Dedicate your primary focus to understanding and defining the value your product will deliver.
    • Market strategy and goals: Define your acquisition, adoption, and retention plan for users.
    • Financial model: Build an end-to-end financial model and plan for the product and all related operational support.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Most organizations stop with on-time and on-budget. True financial alignment needs to define and manage the full lifecycle P&L.

    Capability 'Value Realization' with sub-capabilities 'KPIs', 'Financial Management', and 'Business Model'.

    “The competition is anyone the customer compares you with.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Avoid common capability gaps

    Vision

    • Focusing solely on backlog refining (tactical only)
    • Ignoring or failing to align product roadmap to enterprise goals
    • Operational support and execution
    • Basing decisions on opinion rather than market data
    • Ignoring or missing internal and external threats to your product

    Leadership

    • Failing to include feedback from all teams who interact with your product
    • Using a command-and-control approach
    • Viewing product owner as only a delivery role
    • Acting as a proxy for stakeholder decisions
    • Avoiding tough strategic decisions in favor of easier tactical choices

    Product Lifecycle Management

    • Focusing on delivery and not the full product lifecycle
    • Ignoring support, operations, and technical debt
    • Failing to build knowledge management into the lifecycle
    • Underestimating delivery capacity, capabilities, or commitment
    • Assuming delivery stops at implementation

    Value Realization

    • Focusing exclusively on “on time/on budget” metrics
    • Failing to measure a 360-degree end-user view of the product
    • Skipping business plans and financial models
    • Limiting financial management to project/change budgets
    • Ignoring market analysis for growth, penetration, and threats

    Bibliography – Product Ownership

    A, Karen. “20 Mental Models for Product Managers.” Medium, Product Management Insider, 2 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Adams, Paul. “Product Teams: How to Build & Structure Product Teams for Growth.” Inside Intercom, 30 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Agile Alliance. “Product Owner.” Agile Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Banfield, Richard, et al. “On-Demand Webinar: Strategies for Scaling Your (Growing) Enterprise Product Team.” Pluralsight, 31 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Blueprint. “10 Ways Requirements Can Sabotage Your Projects Right From the Start.” Blueprint, 2012. Web.

    Breddels, Dajo, and Paul Kuijten. “Product Owner Value Game.” Agile2015 Conference, 2015. Web.

    Cagan, Martin. “Behind Every Great Product.” Silicon Valley Product Group, 2005. Web.

    Cohn, Mike “What is a product?” Mountain Goat Software, 16 Sept. 2016, Web

    Connellan, Thomas K. Inside the Magic Kingdom. Bard Press, 1997. Print.

    Curphey, Mark, “Product Definition.” slideshare.net, 25 Feb. 2007. Web

    Eringa, Ron. “Evolution of the Product Owner.” RonEringa.com, 12 June 2016. Web.

    Fernandes, Thaisa. “Spotify Squad Framework - Part I.” Medium.com, 6 March 2017. Web.

    Galen, Robert. “Measuring Product Ownership – What Does ‘Good’ Look Like?” RGalen Consulting, 5 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Halisky, Merland, and Luke Lackrone. “The Product Owner’s Universe.” Agile Alliance, Agile2016, 2016. Web.

    Kamer, Jurriaan. “How to Build Your Own ‘Spotify Model’.” Medium.com, 9 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Kendis Team. “Exploring Key Elements of Spotify’s Agile Scaling Model.” Medium.com, 23 July 2018. Web.

    Lindstrom, Lowell. “7 Skills You Need to Be a Great Product Owner.” Scrum Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Lukassen, Chris. “The Five Belts Of The Product Owner.” Xebia.com, 20 Sept. 2016. Web.

    Management 3.0. “Delegation Poker Product Image.” Management 3.0, n.d. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “Scaling Product Management: Secrets to Defeating Common Challenges.” ProductPlan, 12 July 2019. Web.

    Bibliography – Product Ownership

    McCloskey, Heather. “When and How to Scale Your Product Team.” UserVoice, 21 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Mironov, Rich. “Scaling Up Product Manager/Owner Teams: Rich Mironov's Product Bytes.” Rich Mironov's Product Bytes, Mironov Consulting, 12 April 2014 . Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “A Product Owner Self-Assessment.” Barry Overeem, 6 March 2017. Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “Retrospective: Using the Team Radar.” Barry Overeem, 27 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “How to Scale the Scrum Product Owner.” Roman Pichler, 28 June 2016 . Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Product Management Framework.” Pichler Consulting Limited, 2014. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Sprint Planning Tips for Product Owners.” LinkedIn, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “What Is Product Management?” Pichler Consulting Limited, 26 Nov. 2014. Web.

    Radigan, Dan. “Putting the ‘Flow' Back in Workflow With WIP Limits.” Atlassian, n.d. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Agile Product Management.” Scrum.org, 28 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on (Business) Value.” Scrum.org, 30 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Scrum.org, 5 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on the Product Vision.” Scrum.org, 29 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Starting Product Owners.” Scrum.org, 27 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Sharma, Rohit. “Scaling Product Teams the Structured Way.” Monetary Musings, 28 Nov. 2016. Web.

    Bibliography – Product Ownership

    Steiner, Anne. “Start to Scale Your Product Management: Multiple Teams Working on Single Product.” Cprime, 6 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Shirazi, Reza. “Betsy Stockdale of Seilevel: Product Managers Are Not Afraid To Be Wrong.” Austin VOP #50, 2 Oct. 2018. Web.

    “The Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” The Standish Group, 2015. Web.

    Theus, Andre. “When Should You Scale the Product Management Team?” ProductPlan, 7 May 2019. Web.

    Tolonen, Arto. “Scaling Product Management in a Single Product Company.” Smartly.io, 26 Apr. 2018. Web.

    Ulrich, Catherine. “The 6 Types of Product Managers. Which One Do You Need?” Medium.com, 19 Dec. 2017. Web.

    VersionOne. “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

    Verwijs, Christiaan. “Retrospective: Do The Team Radar.” Medium.com, 10 Feb. 2017. Web.

    “How do you define a product?” Scrum.org, 4 April 2017, Web.

    “Product Definition.” TechTarget, Sept. 2005. Web

    Bibliography – Product Roadmap

    Ambysoft. “2018 IT Project Success Rates Survey Results.” Ambysoft. 2018. Web.

    Bastow, Janna. “Creating Agile Product roadmaps Everyone Understands.” ProdPad, 22 Mar. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bastow, Janna. “The Product Tree Game: Our Favorite Way To Prioritize Features.” ProdPad, 21 Feb. 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Chernak, Yuri. “Requirements Reuse: The State of the Practice.” 2012, Herzlia, Israel, 2012 IEEE International Conference on Software Science, Technology and Engineering, 12 June 2012. Web.

    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Harrin, Elizabeth. “Learn What a Project Milestone Is.” The Balance Careers, 10 May 2018. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    “How to create a product roadmap.” Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “How to Master the 3 Horizons of Product Strategy.” Aha!, 24 Sept. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “The Product Roadmap vs. the Technology Roadmap.” Aha!, 23 June 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Juncal, Shaun. “How Should You Set Your Product Roadmap Timeframes?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile, Inc., 2017. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “What is a Minimum Viable Product (MVP)?” LEANSTACK, 12 June 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. “10 Tips for Creating an Agile Product Roadmap.” Roman Pichler, 20 July 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. Strategize: Product Strategy and Product Roadmap Practices for the Digital Age. Pichler Consulting, 2016.

    “Product Roadmap Contents: What Should You Include?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Saez, Andrea. “Why Your Roadmap Is Not a Release Plan.” ProdPad, 23 Oct. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples.” Scrum.org, 7 Dec. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Emily Archer, Lead Business Analyst, Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency.

    Emily Archer
    Lead Business Analyst,
    Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency

    Emily Archer is a consultant currently working with Fortune 500 clients to ensure the delivery of successful projects, products, and processes. She helps increase the business value returned for organizations’ investments in designing and implementing enterprise content hubs and content operations, custom web applications, digital marketing, and e-commerce platforms.

    Photo of David Berg, Founder & CTO, Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg
    Founder & CTO
    Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg is a product commercialization expert that has spent the last 20 years of his career delivering product management and business development services across a broad range of industries. Early in his career, David worked with product management and engineering teams to build core network infrastructure products that secure and power the internet we benefit from today. David’s experience also includes working with clean technologies in the area of clean power generation, agritech, and Internet of Things infrastructure. Over the last five years, David has been focused on his latest venture, Strainprint Technologies, a data and analytics company focused on the medical cannabis industry. Strainprint has built the largest longitudinal medical cannabis dataset in the world with the goal to develop an understanding of treatment behavior, interactions, and chemical drivers to guide future product development.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Blank photo template.

    Kathy Borneman
    Digital Product Owner, SunTrust Bank

    Kathy Borneman is a senior product owner who helps people enjoy their jobs again by engaging others in end-to-end decision making to deliver software and operational solutions that enhance the client experience and allow people to think and act strategically.

    Photo of Charlie Campbell, Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions.

    Charlie Campbell
    Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions

    Charlie Campbell is an experienced problem solver with the ability to quickly dissect situations and recommend immediate actions to achieve resolution, liaise between technical and functional personnel to bridge the technology and communication gap, and work with diverse teams and resources to reach a common goal.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Yarrow Diamond, Sr. Director, Business Architecture, Financial Services.

    Yarrow Diamond
    Sr. Director, Business Architecture
    Financial Services

    Yarrow Diamond is an experienced professional with expertise in enterprise strategy development, project portfolio management, and business process reengineering across financial services, healthcare and insurance, hospitality, and real estate environments. She has a master’s in Enterprise Architecture from Penn State University, LSSMBB, PMP, CSM, ITILv3.

    Photo of Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA, Enterprise Business Systems Analyst, Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA
    Enterprise Business Systems Analyst,
    Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey has a history in software development and implementation as a Business Analyst and Project Manager for financial and taxation software vendors. Active in the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA), Cari participated on the writing team for the BA Body of Knowledge 3.0 and the certification exam.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Kieran Gobey, Senior Consultant Professional Services, Blueprint Software Systems.

    Kieran Gobey
    Senior Consultant Professional Services
    Blueprint Software Systems

    Kieran Gobey is an IT professional with 24 years of experience, focused on business, technology, and systems analysis. He has split his career between external and internal customer-facing roles, and this has resulted in a true understanding of what is required to be a Professional Services Consultant. His problem-solving skills and ability to mentor others have resulted in successful software implementations.

    Kieran’s specialties include deep system troubleshooting and analysis skills, facilitating communications to bring together participants effectively, mentoring, leadership, and organizational skills.

    Photo of Rupert Kainzbauer, VP Product, Digital Wallets, Paysafe Group.

    Rupert Kainzbauer
    VP Product, Digital Wallets
    Paysafe Group

    Rupert Kainzbauer is an experienced senior leader with a passion for defining and delivering products that deliver real customer and commercial benefit. Together with a team of highly experienced and motivated product managers, he has successfully led highly complex, multi-stakeholder payments initiatives, from proposition development and solution design through to market delivery. Their domain experience is in building online payment products in high-risk and emerging markets, remittance, prepaid cards, and mobile applications.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Saeed Khan, Founder, Transformation Labs.

    Saeed Khan
    Founder,
    Transformation Labs

    Saeed Khan has been working in high tech for 30 years in both Canada and the US and has held a number of leadership roles in Product Management over that time. He speaks regularly at conferences and has been writing publicly about technology product management since 2005.

    Through Transformation Labs, Saeed helps companies accelerate product success by working with product teams to improve their skills, practices, and processes. He is a cofounder of ProductCamp Toronto and currently runs a Meetup group and global Slack community called Product Leaders, the only global community of senior-level product executives.

    Photo of Hoi Kun Lo, Product Owner, Nielsen.

    Hoi Kun Lo
    Product Owner
    Nielsen

    Hoi Kun Lo is an experienced change agent who can be found actively participating within the IIBA and WITI groups in Tampa, FL, and a champion for Agile, architecture, diversity, and inclusion programs at Nielsen. She is currently a Product Owner in the Digital Strategy team within Nielsen Global Watch Technology.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Abhishek Mathur, Sr Director, Product Management, Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur
    Sr Director, Product Management
    Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur is a product management leader, an artificial intelligence practitioner, and an educator. He has led product management and engineering teams at Clarifai, IBM, and Kasisto to build a variety of artificial intelligence applications within the space of computer vision, natural language processing, and recommendation systems. Abhishek enjoys having deep conversations about the future of technology and helping aspiring product managers enter and accelerate their careers.

    Photo of Jeff Meister, Technology Advisor and Product Leader.

    Jeff Meister
    Technology Advisor and Product Leader

    Jeff Meister is a technology advisor and product leader. He has more than 20 years of experience building and operating software products and the teams that build them. He has built products across a wide range of industries and has built and led large engineering, design, and product organizations.

    Jeff most recently served as Senior Director of Product Management at Avanade, where he built and led the product management practice. This involved hiring and leading product managers, defining product management processes, solution shaping and engagement execution, and evangelizing the discipline through pitches, presentations, and speaking engagements.

    Jeff holds a Bachelor of Applied Science (Electrical Engineering) and a Bachelor of Arts from the University of Waterloo, an MBA from INSEAD (Strategy), and certifications in product management, project management, and design thinking.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Vincent Mirabelli, Principal, Global Project Synergy Group.

    Vincent Mirabelli
    Principal,
    Global Project Synergy Group

    With over 10 years of experience in both the private and public sectors, Vincent Mirabelli possesses an impressive track record of improving, informing, and transforming business strategy and operations through process improvement, design and re-engineering, and the application of quality to business analysis, project management, and process improvement standards.

    Photo of Oz Nazili, VP, Product & Growth, TWG.

    Oz Nazili
    VP, Product & Growth
    TWG

    Oz Nazili is a product leader with a decade of experience in both building products and product teams. Having spent time at funded startups and large enterprises, he thinks often about the most effective way to deliver value to users. His core areas of interest include Lean MVP development and data-driven product growth.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Mark Pearson, Principal IT Architect, First Data Corporation.

    Mark Pearson
    Principal IT Architect
    First Data Corporation

    Mark Pearson is an executive business leader grounded in the process, data, technology, and operations of software-driven business. He knows the enterprise software landscape and is skilled in product, technology, and operations design and delivery within information technology organizations, outsourcing firms, and software product companies.

    Photo of Brenda Peshak, Product Owner, Widget Industries, LLC.

    Brenda Peshak
    Product Owner,
    Widget Industries, LLC

    Brenda Peshak is skilled in business process, analytical skills, Microsoft Office Suite, communication, and customer relationship management (CRM). She is a strong product management professional with a Master’s focused in Business Leadership (MBL) from William Penn University.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Mike Starkey, Director of Engineering, W.W. Grainger.

    Mike Starkey
    Director of Engineering
    W.W. Grainger

    Mike Starkey is a Director of Engineering at W.W. Grainger, currently focusing on operating model development, digital architecture, and building enterprise software. Prior to joining W.W. Grainger, Mike held a variety of technology consulting roles throughout the system delivery lifecycle spanning multiple industries such as healthcare, retail, manufacturing, and utilities with Fortune 500 companies.

    Photo of Anant Tailor, Cofounder & Head of Product, Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor
    Cofounder & Head of Product
    Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor is a cofounder at Dream Payments where he currently serves as the COO and Head of Product, having responsibility for Product Strategy & Development, Client Delivery, Compliance, and Operations. He has 20+ years of experience building and operating organizations that deliver software products and solutions for consumers and businesses of varying sizes.

    Prior to founding Dream Payments, Anant was the COO and Director of Client Services at DonRiver Inc, a technology strategy and software consultancy that he helped to build and scale into a global company with 100+ employees operating in seven countries.

    Anant is a Professional Engineer with a Bachelor’s degree in Electrical Engineering from McMaster University and a certificate in Product Strategy & Management from the Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Angela Weller, Scrum Master, Businessolver.

    Angela Weller
    Scrum Master, Businessolver

    Angela Weller is an experienced Agile business analyst who collaborates with key stakeholders to attain their goals and contributes to the achievement of the company’s strategic objectives to ensure a competitive advantage. She excels when mediating or facilitating teams.

    Manage Your Technical Debt

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}108|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $60,833 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 24 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • All organizations, of all sizes, have some amount of technical debt, but very few systematically track, manage, and communicate it.
    • Deferred project work is pushed over to operations, sometimes with little visibility or hand-off, where it gets deprioritized and lost.
    • IT doesn’t have the resources or authority to make needed changes to address the impact of tech debt and can’t make the case for improvement without good data on the problem.
    • Efforts to track technical debt get stuck in the weeds, don’t connect technical issues to business impact, and run out of steam.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Technical debt is a type of technical risk, which in turn is business risk. The business, not IT, must make the decision to accept or mitigate risk – but IT must help the business make an informed decision.
    • There are two ways to keep your technical debt at a manageable level – effectively, to mitigate risk: either stop introducing new debt or start paying back what you already have.

    Impact and Result

    • Define and identify your technical debt. Focus on tech debt you think you can actually fix.
    • Conduct a streamlined and targeted business impact analysis to prioritize tech debt based on its ongoing business impact.
    • Identify options to better manage technical debt and present your findings to business decision makers.

    Manage Your Technical Debt Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the business case to manage technical debt, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify your technical debt

    Define, identify, and organize your technical debt in preparation for the technical debt impact analysis.

    • Technical Debt Business Impact Analysis Tool

    2. Measure your technical debt

    Conduct a technical debt business impact analysis.

    • Roadmap Tool

    3. Manage your technical debt

    Identify options to resolve technical debt and summarize the challenge and potential solutions for business decision makers.

    • Technical Debt Executive Summary Presentation
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Manage Your Technical Debt

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define and Identify Technical Debt

    The Purpose

    Create a working definition of technical debt and identify the technical debt in your environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List your technical debt.

    Activities

    1.1 Develop a working definition for technical debt.

    1.2 Discuss your organization’s technical debt risk.

    1.3 Identify 5-10 high-impact technical debts to structure the impact analysis.

    Outputs

    Goals, opportunities, and constraints related to tech debt management

    A list of technical debt

    2 Measure Technical Debt

    The Purpose

    Conduct a more-objective assessment of the business impact of technical debt.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the most-critical technical debt in your environment, in terms of business risk.

    Activities

    2.1 Review and modify business impact scoring scales.

    2.2 Identify reasonable scenarios to structure the impact analysis.

    2.3 Apply the scoring scale to identify the business impact of each technical debt.

    Outputs

    Business impact scoring scales

    Scenarios to support the impact analysis

    Technical debt impact analysis

    3 Build a Roadmap to Manage Technical Debt

    The Purpose

    Leverage the technical debt impact analysis to identify, compare, and quantify projects that fix technical debt and projects that prevent it.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create your plan to manage technical debt.

    Activities

    3.1 Brainstorm projects and action items to manage and pay back critical technical debt. Prioritize projects and action items to build a roadmap.

    3.2 Identify three possible courses of action to pay back each critical technical debt.

    3.3 Identify immediate next steps to manage remaining tech debt and limit the introduction of new tech debt.

    Outputs

    Technical debt management roadmap

    Technical debt executive summary

    Immediate next steps to manage technical debt

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}132|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 115 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management

    Organizations are joining the wave and adopting machine learning and artificial intelligence (AI) to unlock the value in their data and power their competitive advantage. But to succeed with these complex analytics programs, they need to begin by looking at their data – empowering their people to realize and embrace the valuable insights within the organization’s data.

    The key to achieve becoming a data-driven organization is to foster a strong data culture and equip employees with data skills through an organization-wide data literacy program.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Start with real business problems in a hands-on format to demonstrate the value of data.
    • Use a formalized organization-wide approach to data literacy program to bridge the data skills gap.
    • Provide relevant and practical training programs tailored to different learning styles and tenures (e.g. onboarding, development plan).

    Impact and Result

    Data literacy is critical to the success of digital transformation and AI analytics. Info-Tech’s approach to creating a sustainable and effective data literacy program is recognizing it is:

    • More than just technical training. A data literacy program isn’t just about data; it encompasses aspects of business, IT, and data.
    • More than a one-off exercise. To keep the literacy skills alive the program must be regular, sustainable, and tailored to different needs across all levels of the organization.
    • More than one delivery format. Different delivery methods need to be considered to suit various learning styles to ensure an effective delivery.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy Storyboard – A step-by-step guide to help organizations build an effective and sustainable data literacy program that benefits all employees who work with data.

    Data literacy as part of the data governance strategic program should be launched to all levels of employees that will help your organization bridge the data knowledge gap at all levels of the organization. This research recommends approaches to different learning styles to address data skill needs and helps members create a practical and sustainable data literacy program.

    • Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy Storyboard

    2. Fundamental Data Literacy Program Template – A document that provides an example of a fundamental data literacy program.

    Kick off a data awareness program that explains the fundamental understanding of data and its lifecycle. Explore ways to create or mature the data literacy program with smaller amounts of information on a more frequent basis.

    • Fundamental Data Literacy Program Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture, bridging the data knowledge gaps across all levels of the organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    Data literacy is the missing link to becoming a data-driven organization.

    “Digital transformation” and “data driven” are two terms that are inseparable. With organizations accelerating in their digital transformation roadmap implementation, organizations need to invest in developing data skills with their people. Talent is scarce and the demand for data skills is huge, with 70% of employees expected to work heavily with data by 2025. There is no time like the present to launch an organization-wide data literacy program to bridge the data knowledge gap and foster a data-driven culture.

    Data literacy training is as important as your cybersecurity training. It impacts all levels of the organization. Data literacy is critical to success with digital transformation and AI analytics.

    Annabel Lui

    Principal Advisory Director, Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Organizations are joining the wave and adopting machine learning (ML) and artificial intelligence (AI) to unlock the value in their data and power their competitive advantage. But to succeed with these complex analytics programs, they need to begin by empowering their people to realize and embrace the valuable insights within the organization’s data.

    The key to becoming a data-driven organization is to foster a strong data culture and equip people with data skills through an organization-wide data literacy program.

    Common Obstacles

    Challenges the data leadership is likely to face as digital transformation initiatives drive intensified competition:

    • Resistance to change
    • Technological distractions
    • “Shadow data”
    • Difficulty securing resources and skilled data professionals
    • Inability to appreciate the value of data and its meaning for users – even fear of it

    Info-Tech's Approach

    We interviewed data leaders and instructors to gather insights about investing in data:

    • Start with real business problems in a hands-on format to demonstrate the value of data.
    • Implement a formalized organization-wide approach to data literacy program to bridge the data skill gap.
    • Provide relevant and practical training programs tailored to different learning styles and tenures (e.g. onboarding,development plan).

    Info-Tech Insight

    By thoughtfully designing a data literacy training program for the audience's own experience, maturity level, and learning style, organizations build the data-driven and engaged culture that helps them to unlock their data's full potential and outperform other organizations.

    Your Challenge

    Data literacy is the missing link to drive business outcomes from data.

    • Having a data-driven culture as an organization’s mission statement without implementing a data literacy program is like making an empty promise and leaving the value unrealized and unattainable.
    • A study conducted by the Data Literacy Project clearly indicates that organizations with aggressive data literacy programs will outperform those who do not have such programs. By 2030, data literacy will be one of the most sought-after skill sets. All employees require data literacy skills.
    • Everyone has a role in data. From employees who are actively involved in data collection to operational teams who create reports with analytics tools and finally to executives who use data to make business decisions – they all require continuous data literacy training in a data-driven organization. Because of differences in maturity, data literacy strategies cannot be one-size-fits-all.

    “Data literacy is the ability to read, work with, analyze, and communicate with data. It's a skill that empowers all levels of workers to ask the right questions of data and machines, build knowledge, make decisions, and communicate meaning to others.” – Qlik, n.d.

    75% of organizational employees have access to data tools – only 21% demonstrated confidence in their data skills.

    Source: Accenture, 2020.

    89% of C-level executives expect team members to explain how data has informed their decisions, but only 11% employees are fully confident in their ability to read, analyze, work with, and communicate with data

    Source: Qlik, 2022.

    Data debt or data asset?

    Manage your data as strategic assets.

    “[Data debt is] when you have undocumented, unused, incomplete, and inconsistent data,” according to Secoda (2023). “When … data debt is not solved, data teams could risk wasting time managing reports no one uses and producing data that no one understands.”

    Signs of data debt when considering investing in data literacy:

    • Lack of definition and understanding of data terms, therefore they don’t speak the same language. Without data literacy, an organization will not succeed in becoming a data-driven organization.
    • Putting data literacy as a low priority. Organization sees this as “another” training to put on the list and keeps it on the back burner.
    • Data literacy is not seen as the number one skill set needed in the organization. However, anyone who works with data requires data skills.
    • End users are not trained on self-serve features and tools.
    • Focusing on a minority group of people rather than everyone in the organization or seeing it as a one-off exercise.
    • Delays or failure to deliver digital transformation projects due to lack of data skills and data access issues.

    66%

    of organizations say a backlog of data debt is impacting new data management initiatives.

    40%

    of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.

    30%

    of organizations are unable to become data-driven.

    Source: Experian, 2020

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Data literacy is critical to success with digital transformation and AI analytics.

    Diagram showing components of Data literacy: 1 - Data: understand your data, 2 - Business: define the purpose, 3 - IT: Introduce new ways of working

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. More than just technical training. Data literacy program isn’t just about data but rather encompasses aspects of business, IT, and data.
    2. More than a one-off exercise. To keep literacy skills alive, the program must be routine and sustainable, tailored to different needs across all levels of the organization.
    3. More than one delivery format. Different delivery methods need to be considered to suit various learning styles.

    Data needs to be processed

    Data – facts – are organized, processed, and given meaning to become insights.

    Data, information, knowledge, insight, wisdom

    Image source: Welocalize, 2020.

    Data represents a discrete fact or event without relation to other things (e.g. it is raining). Data is unorganized and not useful on its own.

    Information organizes and structures data so that it is meaningful and valuable for a specific purpose (i.e. it answers questions). Information is a refined form of data.

    When information is combined with experience and intuition, it results in knowledge. It is our personal map/model of the world.

    Knowledge set with context generates insight. We become knowledgeable as a result of reading, researching, and memorizing (i.e. accumulating information).

    Wisdom means the ability to make sound judgments. Wisdom synthesizes knowledge and experiences into insights.

    Investment in data literacy is a game changer.

    Data literacy is the ability to collect, manage, evaluate, and apply data in a critical manner.

    A data-driven culture is “an operating environment that seeks to leverage data whenever and wherever possible to enhance business efficiency and effectiveness” (Forbes).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data-driven culture refers to a workplace where decisions are made based on data evidence, not on gut instinct.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for building a data literacy program

    Phase Steps

    1. Define Data Literacy Objectives

    1.1 Understand organization’s needs

    1.2 Create vision and objective for data literacy program

    2. Assess Learning Style and Align to Program Design

    2.1 Create persona and identify audience

    2.2 Assess learning style and align to program design

    2.3 Determine the right delivery method

    3. Socialize Roadmap and Milestones

    3.1 Establish a roadmap

    3.2 Set key performance metrics and milestones

    Phase Outcomes

    Identify key objectives to establish and grow the data literacy program by articulating the problem and solutions proposed.

    Assess each audience’s learning style and adapt the program to their unique needs.

    Show a roadmap with key performance indicators to track each milestone and tell a data story.

    Insight Summary

    “In a world of more data, the companies with more data-literate people are the ones that are going to win.”

    – Miro Kazakoff, senior lecturer, MIT Sloan, in MIT Sloan School of Management, 2021

    Overarching insight

    By thoughtfully designing a data literacy training program personalized to each audience's maturity level, learning style, and experience, organizations can develop and grow a data-driven culture that unlocks the data's full potential for competitive differentiation.

    Module 1 insight

    We can learn a lot from each other. Literacy works both ways – business data stewards learn to “speak data” while IT data custodians understand the business context and value. Everyone should strive to exchange knowledge.

    Module 2 insight

    Avoid traditional classroom teaching – create a data literacy program that is learner-centric to allow participants to learn and experiment with data.

    Aligning program design to those learning styles will make participants more likely to be receptive to learning a new skill.

    Module 3 insight

    A data literacy program isn’t just about data but rather encompasses aspects of business, IT, and data. With executive support and partnership with business, running a data literacy program means that it won’t end up being just another technical training. The program needs to address why, what, how questions.

    Tactical insight

    A lot of programs don’t include the fundamentals. To get data concepts to stick, focus on socializing the data/information/knowledge/wisdom foundation.

    Tactical insight

    Many programs speak in abstract terms. We present case studies and tangible use cases to personalize training to the audience’s world and showcase opportunities enabled through data.

    Key performance indicators (KPIs) for your data literacy program

    How do you know if your data literacy program is successful? Here are some useful KPIs:

    Program Adoption Metrics

    • Percentage of employees attending data literacy training
    • Percentage of participants who report gains in data management knowledge after training sessions
    • Maturity assessment result
    • Survey and diagnostic feedback before and after training
    • Trend analysis of overall data literacy program

    Operational Metrics

    • Number of requests for analytics/reporting services
    • Number of reports created by users
    • Speed and quality of business decisions
    • User satisfaction with reports and analytics services
    • Improved business performance (customer satisfaction)
    • Improved valuation of organization data

    A data-driven culture builds tools and skills, builds users’ trust in the quality of data across sources, and raises the skills and understanding among the frontlines by encouraging everyone to leverage data for critical thinking and innovation.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of the project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1

    Session 2

    Session 3

    Session 4

    Activities

    Define Data Literacy Objectives

    1.1 Review Data Culture Diagnostic results

    1.2 Identify business context: business goals, initiatives

    1.3 Create vision and objective for data literacy program

    Assess Learning Style and Align to Program Design

    2.1 Identify audience

    2.2 Assess learning style and align to program design

    2.3 Determine the right delivery method

    Build a Data Literacy Roadmap and Milestones

    3.1 Identify program initiatives and topics

    3.2 Determine delivery methods

    3.3 Build the data literacy roadmap

    Operational Strategy to implement Data Literacy

    4.1 Identify key performance metrics

    4.2 Identify owners and document RACI matrix

    4.3 Discuss next steps and wrap up.

    Deliverables

    1. Diagnostics reports (data culture survey)
    2. Vision and value statement
    1. Assessment of audience covering all levels of organization
    1. List of key program initiatives and topics
    2. Allocation of delivery methods
    3. Roadmap
    1. Data literacy metrics
    2. List of owners and roles and responsibilities
    3. Next step and implementation schedule

    Phase 1

    Define Data Literacy Objectives

    Phase 1: step 1 - Understand organization's needs, step 2 - Create vision and objective for data literacy program.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the organization’s needs.
    • Create vision and objective for data literacy program.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data governance sponsor
    • Data owners
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians

    1.1 Gauge your organization’s current data culture

    Conduct data culture survey or diagnostic.

    1. Identify members of the data user base, data consumers, and other key stakeholders for surveying.
    2. Conduct an information session to introduce Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic survey. Explain the objective and importance of the survey and its role in helping to understand the organization’s current data culture and inform the improvement of that culture.
    3. Roll out the Info-Tech Data Culture Diagnostic survey to the identified users and stakeholders.
    4. Debrief and document the results and scorecard in the Data Strategy Stakeholder Interview Guide and Findings document.

    Input

    • Email addresses of participants in your organization who should receive the survey

    Output

    • Your organization’s Data Culture Scorecard for understanding current data culture as it relates to the use and consumption of data
    • An understanding of whether data is currently perceived to be an asset to the organization

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic service

    Participants

    • Participants include those at the senior leadership level through to middle management, as well as other business stakeholders at varying levels across the organization
    • Data owners, stewards, and custodians
    • Core data users and consumers

    Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for details on launching a Data Culture Diagnostic.

    1.2 Define data literacy objectives

    1. Understand the organization’s needs by identifying opportunities and challenges relating to data. Document the described real-life examples.
    2. Categorize the list and identify areas where data literacy can address the business problem.
    3. Create a vision statement for the data literacy program, ensuring that it covers all levels of the organization.
    4. Articulate the intended targets and goals in planning for a data literacy program.

    Input

    • List of opportunities and challenges relating to data
    • Relevant business real-life examples

    Output

    • Categorized list of data literacy needs
    • Vision for literacy program
    • Targets and goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • CDO or sponsor
    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data governance working group

    Quick wins for improving data literacy

    Data collected through Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic suggests three ways to improve data literacy:

    87%

    think more can be done to define and document commonly used terms with methods such as a business data glossary.

    68%

    think they can have a better understanding of the meaning of all data elements that are being captured or managed.

    86%

    feel that they can have more training in terms of tools as well as on what data is available at the organization.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group's Data Culture Diagnostic, 2022; N=2,652

    Quick Wins

    • Create a business data glossary to document and define common terms.
    • Provide easy access to the business data glossary and procedures on how data is captured and managed.
    • Launch an organization-wide data literacy program.

    Delivering value is a means and the goal

    Start with real business problems in a hands-on format to demonstrate the value of data.

    Identify business problem:

    • Business decisions without facts are just guesses.
    • Management spends a lot of time finding and fixing data.
    • Unknown challenges on data assets and risk.
    • Incomplete view of customer/client and industry.
    • Not ready for modern data opportunities (e.g. artificial intelligence).

    Create an objective

    Treat data as a strategic asset to gain insight into our customers for all levels of organization.

    The solution: Data-driven culture powered by people who speak data.

    • Data dictionary
    • Data literacy
    • Trusted single source
    • Access to analytics tools
    • Decision making

    "According to Forrester, 91% of organizations find it challenging to improve the use of data insights for decision-making – even though 90% see it as a priority. Why the disconnect? A lack of data literacy."

    – Alation, 2020

    Fundamental data literacy

    Data literacy is more than just a technical training or a one-off exercise.

    Info-Tech provides various topics suited for a data literacy program that can accommodate different data skill requirements and encompasses relevant aspects of business, IT, and data.

    Info-Tech Research Group’s Data Literacy Program

    Use discovery and diagnostics to understand users’ comfort level and maturity with data.

    Data lunch 'n' learn

    • The power and value of data
    • Everyone is a data steward
    • Becoming data literate
    • Data 101
    • The future is data
    1 hour
    For: General audience, senior leadership, data leads, change management

    Speak data

    • What is data
    • Meet the data team
    • Day in the life of a steward
    • How data impacts you
    • Tools of the trade
    1/2 day
    For: New stewards, data owners, pre-data strategy workshop

    Your data story

    • Ask the right questions
    • Find the top five data elements
    • Understand your data
    • Present your data story
    • Lessons from COVID-19
    1/2 day
    For: New stewards, business data owners, pre-BI/analytics workshop

    Phase 2

    Assess Learning Style and Align to Program Design

    Phase 2: step 1 - Identify audience, step 2 - Access learning style and align to program design, step 3 - Determine the right delivery method.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify your audience.
    • Assess learning styles and align them to the data program design.
    • Determine the right delivery method.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data governance sponsor
    • Data owners
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians

    Avoid common pitfalls

    75%

    feel that training was too long to remember or to apply in their day-to-day work.

    21%

    find training had insufficient follow-up to help them apply on the job.

    Source: Grovo, 2018.

    1. Information Overload

      Trying to cover too much useful information results in overwhelm and does not deliver on key training objectives.
    2. Limited Implementation

      Learning is only the beginning. The real results are obtained when learning is followed by practice, which turns new knowledge into reliable habits.
    3. Lack of Organizational Alignment

      Implementing training without a clear link to organizational objectives leaves you unable to clearly communicate its value, undermines your ability to secure buy-in from attendees and executives, and leaves you unable to verify that the training is actually improving effectiveness.

    2.1 Understand learning style

    1. Create persona and identify the audiences and their roles in data across all levels of the organization.
    2. Identify the data program initiatives and assign the best delivery method to each initiative.
    3. Assign participants to each program initiative based on their skill gap and learning style.

    Input

    • List of audiences, their roles, and tenures
    • Data skill gap assessment
    • List of literacy program initiatives/topics

    Output

    • Target audience grouping
    • List of program initiatives with assigned groups

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • CDO or sponsor
    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data governance working group

    You and data

    Is data an integral part of your work?

    Do you feel comfortable finding and using data in your organization?

    • Many people feel intimidated by data and therefore miss out on what data can do for them.
    • Often the obstacle is language. If you don’t understand the semantics around data, you will not feel confident to contribute to discussions around data.
    • You use data every day but need additional vocabulary to understand how to handle it properly.
    • Data literacy is the ability to “speak data” and to understand what data means (i.e. how to read charts and graphs, draw valid conclusions, and recognize when data is misinterpreted or used inappropriately to be misleading).
    • The business often doesn’t understand its role in data governance and how it informs and assists IT in responsible data management.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT and data professionals need to understand the business as much as business needs to talk about data. Bidirectional learning and feedback improves the synergy between business and IT.

    Create personas

    Persona creation is a way to brainstorm ideas for the data literacy program.

    Choose a data role (e.g. data steward, data owner, data scientist).

    Describe the persona based on goals, priorities, tenures, preferred learning style, type of work with data.

    Identify data skill and level of skills required.

    Persona 1: Denise - Manager, People and Culture. Goals, priorities, tenure, data role, learning style, skill level

    Consider these other ways to brainstorm:

    • Review current in-flight projects.
    • Analyze types of data requests.
    • Understand needs by department.
    • Share learnings in a community of practice.

    Program design

    Categorize into six data skill areas

    Not everyone needs the same level of skill sets

    Bullseye board with skill levels (Innermost going outward): Expert, advanced, intermediate and Basic. The six data skill areas: 1. Understanding Data, 2. Find and Obtain Data, 3. Read, Interpret and Evaluate Data, 4. Manage Data, 5. Create and Use Data, 6. Tell a Story and Share Data are placed equally around in sections.

    Map the personas to the program

    Bridging the data knowledge gap.

    • Each component will promote the value of data to all levels of employees when demonstrating the right way for data to be understood, managed, and consumed in the organization.
    • Categorizing the data literacy program into six areas and levels of skill sets will provide clarity into which areas to focus on.
    • The program is intended to be implemented in stages, allowing the audience to learn and adopt the new skills. Leveraging in-flight projects for rolling out training will have a higher success because the need is already built into the project.
    Personas are placed at different points in the data skill area and skill level.

    Align program design to learning styles

    The four methods (Discussion, Information, Coaching, and Self-Discovery) are based on learner-centered model design rather than the traditional teacher-centered model.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Tailor your data literacy program to meet your organization’s needs, filling your range of knowledge gaps and catering to different levels of users.

    When it comes to rolling out a data literacy program, there is no one-size-fits-all solution. Your data literacy program is intended to spread knowledge throughout your organization. It should target everyone from executive leadership to management to subject matter experts across all functions of the business.

    Discussion method

    Delivery Method

    • Interactive format between instructor and learner
    • Instructor empowers and motivates learner through dialogues and exercises

    The imaginative learner

    The imaginative learner group likes to engage in feelings and spend time on reflection. This type of learner desires personal meaning and involvement. They focus on personal values for themselves and others and make connections quickly.

    For this group of learners, their question is: why should I learn this?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek meaning
    • Need to be personally involved
    • Learn by listening and sharing ideas
    • Function through social interaction

    Information method

    Delivery Method

    • Instructor does most of the talking in the training
    • Instructor is teaching the content, delivering the training content, and demonstrating

    Analytical learner

    The analytical learner group likes to listen, to think about information, and to come up with ideas. They are interested in acquiring facts and delving into concepts and processes. They can learn effectively and enjoy doing independent research.

    For this group of learners, their question is: what should I learn?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek and examine the facts
    • Need to know what experts think
    • Interested in ideas and concepts
    • Critique information and collect data
    • Function by adapting to experts

    Coaching method

    Delivery Method

    • Learning has on-the-job training or learning through role-play exercises
    • Instructor is coaching and facilitating learner

    Common sense learner

    The common sense learner group likes thinking and doing. They are satisfied when they can carry out experiments, build and design, and create usability. They like tinkering and applying useful ideas.

    For this group of learners, their question is: how should I learn?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek usability
    • Need to know how things work
    • Learn by testing theories using practical methods
    • Use factual data to build concepts
    • Enjoy hands-on experience

    Self-discovery method

    Delivery Method

    • Interactive format between instructor and learner
    • Instructor provides evaluation and remedial instruction

    Common sense learner

    The dynamic learner group learns through doing and experiencing. They are continually looking for hidden possibilities and researching ideas to make original adjustments. They learn through trial and error and self-discovery.

    For this group of learners, their question is: what if I learn this?

    Learning characteristics

    • Seek hidden possibilities
    • Need to know what can be done with things
    • Learn by trial and error
    • Enjoy variety and excel in being flexible

    Delivery method considerations

    There are four common ways to learn a new skill: by watching, conceptualizing, doing, and experiencing. The following are some suggestions on ways to implement your data literacy program through different delivery methods.

    There are four common ways to learn a new skill: by watching, conceptualizing, doing, and experiencing. The following are some suggestions on ways to implement your data literacy program through different delivery methods.

    Phase 3

    Map Out Data Literacy Roadmap and Milestones

    Phase 3: step 1 - Roadmap exercise, step 2 - Set key performance metrics and milestones.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Complete a roadmap exercise.
    • Set key performance metrics and milestones.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data governance sponsor
    • Data owners
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians

    3.1 Build the data literacy roadmap and milestones

    1-3 hours
    1. Gather the data literacy objectives and list of program initiatives with their assigned groups.
    2. Discuss each program initiative with the data literacy creation team, assigning content owners and estimating effort required to build the content.

    For the Gantt chart:

    • Input the roadmap start year.
    • List each data literacy topic and delivery method.
    • Populate the planned start and end dates for the prepopulated list of program initiatives.

    Input

    • List of data literacy topics with assigned groups
    • Vision statement of data literacy program
    • Data literacy objectives

    Output

    • Roadmap Gantt chart
    • List of program initiatives with start and end date
    • Content owner assignment

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • MS Projects/Excel

    Participants

    • CDO or sponsor
    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data governance working group

    Data literacy journey mapping

    Making it sustainable

    • Deliver the literacy program in stages to make it easier for the audience to consume the content.
    • Allow opportunities to apply the learnings at work.
    • Map out the data literacy trainings as they get delivered and identify gaps, if any. Continue to refine and adjust the program and delivery method for better outcome.
    • Set clear goals and KPIs measurement up front.
    • Conduct Info-Tech Research Group’s Data Culture Diagnostics to set the baseline and repeat the assessment in 12 to 18 months.
    • Assign champions to lead change and influence end users to adopt better processes.
    Data Literacy journey mapping. Different departments need different skills in data literacy.

    Research contributors

    Name

    Position

    Andrea Malick Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Andy Neill AVP, Data and Analytics, Chief Enterprise Architect, Info-Tech Research Group
    Crystal Singh Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Imad Jawadi Senior Manager, Consulting Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group
    Irina Sedenko Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Reddy Doddipalli Senior Workshop Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    Sherwick Min Technical Counselor, Info-Tech Research Group
    Wayne Cain Principal Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech’s Data Literacy Program

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1

    Session 2

    Session 3

    Session 4

    Activities

    Understand the WHY and Value of Data

    1.1 Business context, business objectives, and goals

    1.2 You and data

    1.3 Data journey from data to insights

    1.4 Speak data – common terminology

    Learn about the WHAT Through Data Flow

    2.1 Data creation

    2.2 Data ingestion

    2.3 Data accumulation

    2.4 Data augmentation

    2.5 Data delivery

    2.6 Data consumption

    Explore the HOW Through Data Visualization Training

    3.1 Ask the right questions

    3.2 Find the top five data elements

    3.3 Understand your data

    3.4 Present your data story

    3.5 Sharing of lessons learned

    Put Them All Together Through Data Governance Awareness

    4.1 Data governance framework

    4.2 Data roles and responsibilities

    4.3 Data domain and owners

    Deliverables

    1. Learning material for understanding the data fundamental and its terminology
    1. Learning material for data flow elements
    1. Learning material for data visualization
    1. Learning material for data governance awareness program

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Establish Data Governance

    Deliver measurable business value.

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    Streamline your data management program with our simplified framework.

    Bibliography

    About Learning. “4MAT overview.” About Learning., 16 Aug. 2001. Web.

    Accenture. “The Human Impact of Data Literacy,” Accenture, 2020. Web.

    Anand, Shivani. “IDC Reveals India Data and Content Technologies Predictions for 2022 and onwards; Focus on Data Literacy for an Elevated data Culture.” IDC, 14 Mar. 2022. Web.

    Belissent, Jennifer, and Aaron Kalb. “Data Literacy: The Key to Data-Driven Decision Making.” Alation, April 2020. Web.

    Brown, Sara. “How to build data literacy in your company.” MIT Sloan School of Management, 9 Feb 2021. Web.

    ---. “How to build a data-driven company.” MIT Sloan School of Management, 24 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Domo. “Data Never Sleeps 9.0.” Domo, 2021. Web.

    Dykes, Brent. “Creating A Data-Driven Culture: Why Leading By Example Is Essential.” Forbes, 26 Oct. 2017. Web.

    Experian. “10 signs you are sitting on a pile of data debt.” Experian, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021. Web.

    Experian. “2019 Global Data Management Research.” Experian, 2019. Web.

    Knight, Michelle. “Data Literacy Trends in 2023: Formalizing Programs.” Dataversity, 3 Jan. 2023. Web.

    Ghosh, Paramita. “Data Literacy Skills Every Organization Should Build.” Dataversity, 2 Nov. 2022. Web.

    Johnson, A., et al., “How to Build a Strategy in a Digital World,” Compact, 2018, vol. 2. Web.

    LifeTrain. “Learning Style Quiz.” EMTrain, Web.

    Lambers, E., et al. “How to become data literate and support a data-drive culture.” Compact, 2018, vol. 4. Web.

    Marr, Benard. “Why is data literacy important for any business?” Bernard Marr & Co., 16 Aug. 2022. Web.

    Marr, Benard. “8 simple ways to enhance your data literacy skills.” Bernard Marr & Co., 16 Aug. 2022. Web/

    Mendoza, N.F. “Data literacy: Time to cure data phobia” Tech Republic, 27 Sept. 2022. Web.

    Mizrahi, Etai. “How to stay ahead of data debt and downtime?” Secoda, 17 April 2023. Web.

    Needham, Mass., “IDC FutureScape: Top 10 Predictions for the Future of Intelligence.” IDC, 5 Dec. 2022. Web.

    Paton, J., and M.A.P. op het Veld. “Trusted Analytics.” Compact, 2017, vol. 2. Web.

    Qlik. “Data Literacy to be Most In-Demand Skill by 2030 as AI Transforms Global Workplaces.” Qlik., 16 Mar 2022. Web.

    Qlik. “What is data literacy?” Qlik, n.d. Web.

    Reed, David. Becoming Data Literate. Harriman House Publishing, 1 Sept. 2021. Print.

    Salomonsen, Summer. “Grovo’s First-Time Manager Microlearning® Program Will Help Your New Managers Thrive in 2018.” Grovos Blog, 5 Dec. 2018. Web.

    Webb, Ryan. “More Than Just Reporting: Uncovering Actionable Insights From Data.” Welocalize, 1 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Explore the Secrets of Workday Licensing

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}144|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Organizations examining a move to Workday or renewing a contract struggle to gain information and leverage in the negotiation process on commercial components such as pricing transparency, contractual flexibility, terms, and license use rights.
    • Implementations and customization can become difficult if adequate planning steps and communication are not taken beforehand.
    • The FSE Worker Calculation formula is used in the pricing process and can be negotiable.
    • Information and training documentation must be searched in online handbooks, making it difficult to find and time consuming
    • Workday’s partner ecosystem, while closely managed, isn’t flowing with resources. Finding the right partner, at the right cost to support an implementation can be challenging.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    1. Know which defined areas of the agreement can be negotiated and which can't.
    2. Workday closely manages the Partner ecosystem and requests feedback on how to better support and implement its technologies. However, resource availability and talent management can be difficult as not many have the necessary skills.
    3. Recognize and accept that you’ve chosen the premium priced product in the market, so be prepared to pay up for best-in-class capabilities on a cloud-native ERP platform.

    Impact and Result

    • Focus on needs first. Conduct a thorough needs assessment and document the results. Well-documented worker counts by category and licenses required will be your best asset in navigating Workday licensing and negotiating your agreement.
    • Ensure the chosen implementation partner isn’t simply an integrator but provides consultative help and service.
    • Leverage executive relationships, downstream increased spending opportunities, and effective communication to drive and manage the relationship and attain necessary information to make effective decisions.

    Explore the Secrets of Workday Licensing Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should explore the secrets of Workday licensing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand Workday

    Understand Workday’s business model, competitive options, and what to know when conducting due diligence and requirements gathering.

    • Explore the Secrets of Workday Licensing – Phase 1: Understand Workday

    2. Understand licensing, negotiate commercial terms, and purchase

    Review product options and licensing rules. Determine negotiation points. Evaluate and finalize the contract.

    • Explore the Secrets of Workday Licensing – Phase 2: Understand Licensing, Negotiate Commercial Terms, and Purchase
    • Workday Terms and Conditions Evaluation Tool
    [infographic]

    Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}140|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $73,994 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • SAP has strict audit practices, which, in combination with 50+ types of user classifications and manual accounting for some licenses, make maintaining compliance difficult.
    • Mapping and matching SAP products to the environment can be highly complex, leading to overspending and an inability to reduce spend later.
    • Beware of indirect access to SAP applications from third-party applications (e.g. Salesforce).
    • Products that have been acquired by SAP may have altered licensing terms that are innocuously referred to in support renewal documents.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on needs first. Conduct a thorough requirements assessment and document the results. Well-documented license needs will be your core asset in navigating SAP licensing and negotiating your agreement.
    • Examine indirect access possibilities. Understanding how in-house or third-party applications may be accessing the SAP software is critical.
    • Know whats in the contract. Each customer agreement is different and there may be terms that are beneficial. Older agreements may provide both benefits and challenges when evaluating your SAP license position.

    Impact and Result

    • Conduct an analysis to remove inactive and duplicate users as multiple logins may exist and could end up costing the organization license fees when audited.
    • Adopt a cyclical approach to reviewing your SAP licensing and create a reference document to track your software needs, planned licensing, and purchase negotiation points.
    • Learn the “SAP way” of conducting business, which includes a best-in-class sales structure, unique contracts and license use policies, and a hyper-aggressive compliance function. Conducting business with SAP is not typical compared to other vendors, and you will need different tools to emerge successfully from a commercial transaction.
    • Manage SAP support and maintenance spend and policies. Once an agreement has been signed, it can be very difficult to decrease spend, as SAP will reprice products if support is dropped.

    Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you need to understand and document your SAP licensing strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish licensing requirements

    Begin your proactive SAP licensing journey by understanding which information to gather and assessing the current state and gaps.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 1: Establish Licensing Requirements
    • SAP License Summary and Analysis Tool

    2. Evaluate licensing options

    Review current licensing models and determine which licensing models will most appropriately fit your environment.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 2: Evaluate Licensing Options

    3. Evaluate agreement options

    Review SAP’s contract types and assess which best fit the organization’s licensing needs.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 3: Evaluate Agreement Options

    4. Purchase and manage licenses

    Conduct negotiations, purchase licensing, and finalize a licensing management strategy.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 4: Purchase and Manage Licenses
    [infographic]

    Explore the Secrets of IBM Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}141|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • IBM customers want to make effective use of their paid-up licenses to avoid overspending and stay compliant with agreements.
    • Each IBM software product is subject to different rules.
    • Clients control and have responsibility for aligning usage and payments. Over time, the usage of the software may be out of sync with what the client has paid for, resulting in either overspending or violation of the licensing agreement.
    • IBM audits software usage in order to generate revenue from non-compliant customers.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You have a lot of work to do if you haven’t been paying attention to your IBM software.
    • Focus on needs first. Conduct and document a thorough requirements assessment. Well-documented needs will be your core asset in negotiation.
    • Know what’s in IBM’s terms and conditions. Failure to understand these can lead to major penalties after an audit.
    • Review your agreements and entitlements quarterly. IBM may have changed the rules, and you have almost certainly changed your usage.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish clear licensing requirements.
    • Maintain an effective process for managing your IBM license usage and compliance.
    • Identify any cost-reduction opportunities.
    • Prepare for penalty-free IBM audits.

    Explore the Secrets of IBM Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why you need to invest effort in managing usage and licensing of your IBM software.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review terms and conditions for your IT contract

    Use Info-Tech’s licensing best practices to avoid the common mistakes of overspending on IBM licensing or failing an IBM audit.

    • IBM Passport Advantage Software RFQ Template
    • IBM 3-Year Bundled Price Analysis Tool
    [infographic]

    Availability and Capacity Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}10|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}10|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}10|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10.0
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,950
    • member rating average days saved: 10
    • Parent Category Name: Resilient IT Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /resilience/resilient-operations-and-it
    Develop your availability and capacity management plant and align it with exactly what the business expects.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}544|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $5,734 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • IT’s performance and stakeholder satisfaction with IT services hinge on IT’s ability to attract and retain top talent and to motivate teams to go above and beyond.
    • With the growing IT job market, turnover is a serious threat to IT’s ability to deliver seamless value and continuously drive innovation.
    • Engagement initiatives are often seen as being HR’s responsibility; however, IT leadership needs to take accountability for the retention and productivity of their employees in order to drive business value.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Engagement is a two-way street. Initiatives must address a known need and be actively sought by employees – not handed down from management.
    • Engagement initiatives are useless unless they target the right issues. It can be tempting to focus on the latest perks and gadgets and ignore difficult issues. Use a systematic approach to uncover and tackle the real problems.
    • It’s time for IT leadership to step up. IT leaders have a much bigger impact on IT staff engagement than HR ever can. Leverage this power to lead your team to peak performance.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech engagement diagnostics and accompanying tools will help you perform a deep dive into the root causes of disengagement on your team.
    • The guidance that accompanies Info-Tech’s tools will help you avoid common engagement program pitfalls and empower IT leaders to take charge of their own team’s engagement.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to discover why engagement is critical to IT performance, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand how our tools will help you construct an effective employee engagement program.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Measure employee engagement

    Use Info-Tech's Pulse or Full Engagement Surveys to measure employee engagement.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 1: Measure Employee Engagement
    • Engagement Strategy Record
    • Engagement Communication Template

    2. Analyze results and ideate solutions

    Understand the drivers of engagement that are important for your team, and involve your staff in brainstorming engagement initiatives.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 2: Analyze Results and Ideate Solutions
    • Engagement Survey Results Interpretation Guide
    • Full Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide
    • Pulse Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide
    • Focus Group Facilitation Guide Driver Definitions
    • One-on-One Manager Meeting Worksheet

    3. Select and implement engagement initiatives

    Select engagement initiatives for maximal impact, create an action plan, and establish open and ongoing communication about engagement with your team.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 3: Select and Implement Engagement Initiatives
    • Summary of Interdepartmental Engagement Initiatives
    • Engagement Progress One-Pager
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 (Preparation) Run Engagement Survey

    The Purpose

    Select and run your engagement survey prior to the workshop.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Receive an in-depth report on your team’s engagement drivers to form the basis of your engagement strategy.

    Activities

    1.1 Select engagement survey.

    1.2 Identify engagement program goals and metrics.

    1.3 Run engagement survey.

    Outputs

    Full or Pulse engagement survey report

    Engagement survey results interpretation guide

    2 Explore Engagement

    The Purpose

    To understand the current state of engagement and prepare to discuss the drivers behind it with your staff.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Empower your leadership team to take charge of their own teams’ engagement.

    Activities

    2.1 Review engagement survey results.

    2.2 Finalize focus group agendas.

    2.3 Train managers.

    Outputs

    Customized focus group agendas

    3 Hold Focus Groups

    The Purpose

    Establish an open dialogue with your staff to understand what would improve their engagement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Employee-generated initiatives have the greatest chance at success.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify priority drivers.

    3.2 Identify engagement KPIs.

    3.3 Brainstorm engagement initiatives.

    3.4 Vote on initiatives within teams.

    Outputs

    Summary of focus groups results

    Identified engagement initiatives

    Identified engagement initiatives

    4 Select and Plan Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Learn the characteristics of successful engagement initiatives and build execution plans for each.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Choose initiatives with the greatest impact on your team’s engagement, and ensure you have the necessary resources for success.

    Activities

    4.1 Select engagement initiatives with IT leadership.

    4.2 Create initiative project plans.

    4.3 Present project plans.

    4.4 Define implementation checkpoints.

    4.5 Develop communications plan.

    4.6 Define strategy for ongoing engagement monitoring.

    Outputs

    Engagement project plans

    Implementation and communication checkpoints

    Further surveys planned (optional)

    5 Additional Leadership Training

    The Purpose

    Select training modules that best address your team’s needs from Info-Tech’s modular leadership training program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Arm your IT leadership team with the key skills of effective leadership, tailored to their existing experience level.

    Activities

    5.1 Adopting an Integrated Leadership Mindset

    5.2 Optimizing Talent Leadership Practices

    5.3 Driving Diversity & Inclusion

    5.4 Fortifying Internal Stakeholder Relations

    5.5 Engaging Executives and the Board

    5.6 Crafting Your Leadership Brand

    5.7 Crafting and Delivering Compelling Presentations

    5.8 Communication & Difficult Conversations

    5.9 Conflict Management

    5.10 Performance Management

    5.11 Feedback & Coaching

    5.12 Creating a Culture of Personal Accountability

    Outputs

    Develop the skills to lead resourcefully in times of uncertainty

    Apply leadership behaviors across enterprise initiatives to deploy and develop talent successfully

    Develop diversity and inclusion practices that turn the IT function and leaders into transformative champions of inclusion

    Identify elements of effective partnering to maximize the impact of internal interactions

    Understand the major obstacles to CEO and board relevance and uncover the keys to elevating your internal executive profile

    Develop a leadership brand statement that demonstrates leadership competency and is aligned with the brand, mission, vision, and goals of the organization

    Identify the components of effective presentations and hone your presentation skills

    Gain the skills to confront and drive solutions from difficult situations

    Develop strategies to engage in conflict constructively and reach a resolution that benefits the team or organization

    Learn to identify the root causes of low performance and develop the skills to guide employees through the process of improvement

    Adopt a behavior-focused coaching model to help managers sustain and apply effective coaching principles

    Understand how and when to encourage autonomy and how to empower employees to take success into their own hands

    Build a Software Quality Assurance Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}284|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,972 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 14 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Testing, Deployment & QA
    • Parent Category Link: /testing-deployment-and-qa
    • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new systems and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
    • Many organizations lack the critical capabilities and resources needed to satisfy their growing testing backlog, risking product success.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Testing is often viewed as a support capability rather than an enabler of business growth. It receives focus and investment only when it becomes a visible problem.
    • The rise in security risks, aggressive performance standards, constantly evolving priorities, and misunderstood quality policies further complicate QA as it drives higher expectations for effective practices.
    • QA starts with good requirements. Tests are only as valuable as the requirements they are validating and verifying. Early QA improves the accuracy of downstream tests and reduces costs of fixing defects late in delivery.
    • Quality is an organization-wide accountability. Upstream work can have extensive ramifications if all roles are not accountable for the decisions they make.
    • Quality must account for both business and technical requirements. Valuable change delivery is cemented in a clear understanding of quality from both business and IT perspectives.

    Impact and Result

    • Standardize your definition of a product. Come to an organizational agreement of what attributes define a high-quality product. Accommodate both business and IT perspectives in your definition.
    • Clarify the role of QA throughout your delivery pipeline. Indicate where and how QA is involved throughout product delivery. Instill quality-first thinking in each stage of your pipeline to catch defects and issues early.
    • Structure your test design, planning, execution, and communication practices to better support your quality definition and business and IT environments and priorities. Adopt QA good practices to ensure your tests satisfy your criteria for a high-quality and successful product.

    Build a Software Quality Assurance Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a strong foundation for quality, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your QA process

    Standardize your product quality definition and your QA roles, processes, and guidelines according to your business and IT priorities.

    • Build a Strong Foundation for Quality – Phase 1: Define Your QA Process
    • Test Strategy Template

    2. Adopt QA good practices

    Build a solid set of good practices to define your defect tolerances, recognize the appropriate test coverage, and communicate your test results.

    • Build a Strong Foundation for Quality – Phase 2: Adopt QA Good Practices
    • Test Plan Template
    • Test Case Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Software Quality Assurance Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your QA Process

    The Purpose

    Discuss your quality definition and how quality is interpreted from both business and IT perspectives.

    Review your case for strengthening your QA practice.

    Review the standardization of QA roles, processes, and guidelines in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded understanding of quality that is accepted across IT and between the business and IT.

    Clear QA roles and responsibilities.

    A repeatable QA process that is applicable across the delivery pipeline.

    Activities

    1.1 List your QA objectives and metrics.

    1.2 Adopt your foundational QA process.

    Outputs

    Quality definition and QA objectives and metrics.

    QA guiding principles, process, and roles and responsibilities.

    2 Adopt QA Good Practices

    The Purpose

    Discuss the practices to reveal the sufficient degree of test coverage to meet your acceptance criteria, defect tolerance, and quality definition.

    Review the technologies and tools to support the execution and reporting of your tests.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    QA practices aligned to industry good practices supporting your quality definition.

    Defect tolerance and acceptance criteria defined against stakeholder priorities.

    Identification of test scenarios to meet test coverage expectations.

    Activities

    2.1 Define your defect tolerance.

    2.2 Model and prioritize your tests.

    2.3 Develop and execute your QA activities.

    2.4 Communicate your QA activities.

    Outputs

    Defect tolerance levels and courses of action.

    List of test cases and scenarios that meet test coverage expectations.

    Defined test types, environment and data requirements, and testing toolchain.

    Test dashboard and communication flow.

    Legacy Active Directory Environment

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}471|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy

    You are looking to lose your dependency on Active Directory (AD), and you need to tackle infrastructure technical debt, but there are challenges:

    • Legacy apps that are in maintenance mode cannot shed their AD dependency or have hardware upgrades made.
    • You are unaware of what processes depend on AD and how integrated they are.
    • Departments invest in apps that are integrated with AD without informing you until they ask for Domain details after purchasing.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Remove your dependency on AD one application at a time. If you are a cloud-first organization, rethink your AD strategy to ask “why” when you add a new device to your Active Directory.
    • With the advent of hybrid work, AD is now a security risk. You need to shore up your security posture. Think of zero trust architecture.
    • Take inventory of your objects that depend on Kerberos and NTML and plan on removing that barrier through applications that don’t depend on AD.

    Impact and Result

    Don’t allow Active Directory services to dictate your enterprise innovation and modernization strategies. Determine if you can safely remove objects and move them to a cloud service where your Azure AD Domain Services can handle your authentication and manage users and groups.

    Legacy Active Directory Environment Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Legacy Active Directory Environment Deck – Legacy AD was never built for modern infrastructure. Understand the history and future of Active Directory and what alternatives are in the market.

    Build all new systems with cloud integration in mind. Many applications built in the past had built-in AD components for access, using Kerberos and NTLM. This dependency has prevented organizations from migrating away from AD. When assessing new technology and applications, consider SaaS or cloud-native apps rather than a Microsoft-dependent application with AD ingrained in the code.

    • Legacy Active Directory Environment Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Legacy Active Directory Environment

    Kill the technical debt of your legacy Active Directory environment.

    Analyst Perspective

    Understand what Active Directory is and why Azure Active Directory does not replace it.

    It’s about Kerberos and New Technology LAN Manager (NTLM).

    The image contains a picture of John Donovan.

    Many organizations that want to innovate and migrate from on-premises applications to software as a service (SaaS) and cloud services are held hostage by their legacy Active Directory (AD). Microsoft did a good job taking over from Novell back in the late 90s, but its hooks into businesses are so deep that many have become dependent on AD services to manage devices and users, when in fact AD falls far short of needed capabilities, restricting innovation and progress.

    Despite Microsoft’s Azure becoming prominent in the world of cloud services, Azure AD is not a replacement for on-premises AD. While Azure AD is a secure authentication store that can contain users and groups, that is where the similarities end. In fact, Microsoft itself has an architecture to mitigate the shortcomings of Azure AD by recommending organizations migrate to a hybrid model, especially for businesses that have an in-house footprint of servers and applications.

    If you are a greenfield business and intend to take advantage of software, infrastructure, and platform as a service (SaaS, IaaS, and PaaS), as well as Microsoft 365 in Azure, then Azure AD is for you and you don’t have to worry about the need for AD.

    John Donovan
    Principal Director, I&O Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Insight Summary

    Legacy AD was never built for modern infrastructure

    When Microsoft built AD as a free component for the Windows Server environment to replace Windows NT before the demise of Novell Directory Services in 2001, it never meant Active Directory to work outside the corporate network with Microsoft apps and devices. While it began as a central managing system for users and PCs on Microsoft operating systems, with one user per PC, the IT ecosystem has changed dramatically over the last 20 years, with cloud adoption, SaaS, IaaS, PaaS, and everything as a service. To make matters worse, work-from-anywhere has become a serious security challenge.

    Build all new systems with cloud integration in mind

    Many applications built in the past had built-in AD components for access, using Kerberos and NTLM. This dependency has prevented organizations from migrating away from AD. When assessing new technology and applications, consider SaaS or cloud-native apps rather than a Microsoft-dependent application with AD ingrained in the code. Ensure you are engaged when the business is assessing new apps. Stop the practice of the business purchasing apps without IT’s involvement; for example, if your marketing department is asking you for your Domain credentials for a vendor when you were not informed of this purchase.

    Hybrid AD is a solution but not a long-term goal

    Economically, Microsoft has no interest in replacing AD anytime soon. Microsoft wants that revenue and has built components like Azure AD Connect to mitigate the AD dependency issue, which is basically holding your organization hostage. In fact, Microsoft has advised that a hybrid solution will remain because, as we will investigate, Azure AD is not legacy AD.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    You are looking to lose your dependency on Active Directory, and you need to tackle infrastructure technical debt, but there are challenges.

    • Legacy apps that are in maintenance mode cannot shed their AD dependency or have hardware upgrades made.
    • You are unaware of what processes depend on AD and how integrated they are.
    • Departments invest in apps that are integrated with AD without informing you until they ask for Domain details after purchasing.
    • Legacy applications can prevent you from upgrading servers or may need to be isolated due to security concerns related to inadequate patching and upgrades.
    • You do not see any return on investment in AD maintenance.
    • Mergers and acquisitions can prevent you from migrating away from AD if one company is dependent on AD and the other is fully in the cloud. This increases technical debt.
    • Remove your dependency on AD one application at a time. If you are a cloud-first organization, rethink your AD strategy to ask “why” when you add a new device to your Active Directory.
    • With the advent of hybrid work, AD is now a security risk. You need to shore up your security posture. Think of zero trust architecture.
    • Take inventory of your objects that depend on Kerberos and NTML and plan on removing that barrier through applications that don’t depend on AD.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t allow Active Directory services to dictate your enterprise innovation and modernization strategies. Determine if you can safely remove objects and move them to a cloud service where your Azure AD Domain Services can handle your authentication and manage users and groups.

    The history of Active Directory

    The evolution of your infrastructure environment

    From NT to the cloud

    AD 2001 Exchange Server 2003 SharePoint 2007 Server 2008 R2 BYOD Security Risk All in Cloud 2015
    • Active Directory replaces NT and takes over from Novell as the enterprise access and control plane.
    • With slow WAN links, no cellphones, no tablets, and very few laptops, security was not a concern in AD.
    • In 2004, email becomes business critical.
    • This puts pressure on links, increases replication and domains, and creates a need for multiple identities.
    • Collaboration becomes pervasive.
    • Cross domain authentication becomes prevalent across the enterprise.
    • SharePoint sites need to be connected to multiple Domain AD accounts. More multiple identities are required.
    • Exchange resource forest rolls out, causing the new forest functional level to be a more complex environment.
    • Fine-grained password policies have impacted multiple forests, forcing them to adhere to the new password policies.
    • There are powerful Domain controllers, strong LAN and WAN connections, and an increase in smartphones and laptops.
    • Audits and compliance become a focus, and mergers and acquisitions add complexity. Security teams are working across the board.
    • Cloud technology doesn’t work well with complicated, messy AD environment. Cloud solutions need simple, flat AD architecture.
    • Technology changes after 15+ years. AD becomes the backbone of enterprise infrastructure. Managers demand to move to cloud, building complexity again.

    Organizations depend on AD

    AD is the backbone of many organizations’ IT infrastructure

    73% of organizations say their infrastructure is built on AD.

    82% say their applications depend on AD data.

    89% say AD enables authenticated access to file servers.

    90% say AD is the main source for authentication.

    Source: Dimensions research: Active Directory Modernization :

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations fail to move away from AD for many reasons, including:

    • Lack of time, resources, budget, and tools.
    • Difficulty understanding what has changed.
    • Migrating from AD being a low priority.

    Active Directory components

    Physical and logical structure

    Authentication, authorization, and auditing

    The image contains a screenshot of the active directory components.

    Active Directory has its hooks in!

    AD creates infrastructure technical debt and is difficult to migrate away from.

    The image contains a screenshot of an active directory diagram.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Due to the pervasive nature of Active Directory in the IT ecosystem, IT organizations are reluctant to migrate away from AD to modernize and innovate.

    Migration to Microsoft 365 in Azure has forced IT departments’ hand, and now that they have dipped their toe in the proverbial cloud “lake,” they see a way out of the mounting technical debt.

    AD security

    Security is the biggest concern with Active Directory.

    Neglecting Active Directory security

    98% of data breaches came from external sources.

    Source: Verizon, Data Breach Report 2022

    85% of data breach took weeks or even longer to discover.

    Source: Verizon Data Breach Report, 2012

    The biggest challenge for recovery after an Active Directory security breach is identifying the source of the breach, determining the extent of the breach, and creating a safe and secure environment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Neglecting legacy Active Directory security will lead to cyberattacks. Malicious users can steal credentials and hijack data or corrupt your systems.

    What are the security risks to legacy AD architecture?

    • It's been 22 years since AD was released by Microsoft, and it has been a foundational technology for most businesses over the years. However, while there have been many innovations over those two decades, like Amazon, Facebook, iPhones, Androids, and more, Active Directory has remained mostly unchanged. There hasn’t been a security update since 2016.
    • This lack of security innovation has led to several cyberattacks over the years, causing businesses to bolt on additional security measures and added complexity. AD is not going away any time soon, but the security dilemma can be addressed with added security features.

    AD event logs

    84% of organizations that had a breach had evidence of that breach in their event logs.

    Source: Verizon Data Breach Report, 2012

    What is the business risk

    How does AD impact innovation in your business?

    It’s widely estimated that Active Directory remains at the backbone of 90% of Global Fortune 1000 companies’ business infrastructure (Lepide, 2021), and with that comes risk. The risks include:

    • Constraints of AD and growth of your digital footprint
    • Difficulty integrating modern technologies
    • Difficulty maintaining consistent security policies
    • Inflexible central domains preventing innovation and modernization
    • Inability to move to a self-service password portal
    • Vulnerability to being hacked
    • BYOD not being AD friendly

    AD is dependent on Windows Server

    1. Even though AD is compliant with LDAP, software vendors often choose optional features of LDAP that are not supported by AD. It is possible to implement Kerberos in a Unix system and establish trust with AD, but this is a difficult process and mistakes are frequent.
    2. Restricting your software selection to Windows-based systems reduces innovation and may hamper your ability to purchase best-in-class applications.

    Azure AD is not a replacement for AD

    AD was designed for an on-premises enterprise

    The image contains a screenshot of a Azure AD diagram.

    • Despite Microsoft’s Azure becoming prominent in the world of cloud services, Azure AD is not a replacement for on-premises AD.
    • In fact, Microsoft itself has an architecture to mitigate the shortcomings of Azure AD by recommending organizations migrate to a hybrid model, especially those businesses that have an in-house footprint of servers and applications.
    • If you are a greenfield business and intend to take advantage of SaaS, IaaS, and PaaS, as well as Microsoft 365 in Azure, then Azure AD is for you and you don’t have to worry about the need for AD.

    "Azure Active Directory is not designed to be the cloud version of Active Directory. It is not a domain controller or a directory in the cloud that will provide the exact same capabilities with AD. It actually provides many more capabilities in a different way.

    That’s why there is no actual ‘migration’ path from Active Directory to Azure Active Directory. You can synchronize your on-premises directories (Active Directory or other) to Azure Active Directory but not migrate your computer accounts, group policies, OU etc."

    – Gregory Hall,
    Brand Representative for Microsoft
    (Source: Spiceworks)

    The hybrid model for AD and Azure AD

    How the model works

    The image contains a screenshot of a hybrid model for AD and Azure AD.

    Note: AD Federated Services (ADFS) is not a replacement for AD. It’s a bolt-on that requires maintenance, support, and it is not a liberating service.

    Many companies are:

    • Moving to SaaS solutions for customer relationship management, HR, collaboration, voice communication, file storage, and more.
    • Managing non-Windows devices.
    • Moving to a hybrid model of work.
    • Enabling BYOD.

    Given these trends, Active Directory is becoming obsolete in terms of identity management and permissions.

    The difference between AD Domain Services and Azure AD DS

    One of the core principles of Azure AD is that the user is the security boundary, not the network.

    Kerberos is the default authentication and authorization protocol for AD. Kerberos is involved in nearly everything from the time you log on to accessing Sysvol, which is used to deliver policy and logon scripts to domain members from the Domain Controller.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you are struggling to get away from AD, Kerberos and NTML are to blame. Working around them is difficult. Azure AD uses SAML2.0 OpenID Connect and OAuth2.0.

    Feature Azure AD DS Self-managed AD DS
    Managed service
    Secure deployments Administrator secures the deployment
    DNS server ✓ (managed service)
    Domain or Enterprise administrator privileges
    Domain join
    Domain authentication using NTLM and Kerberos
    Kerberos-constrained delegation Resource-based Resource-based and account-based
    Custom OU structure
    Group Policy
    Schema extensions
    AD domain/forest trusts ✓ (one-way outbound forest trusts only)
    Secure LDAP (LDAPS)
    LDAP read
    LDAP write ✓ (within the managed domain)
    Geo-distributed deployments

    Source: “Compare self-managed Active Directory Domain Services...” Azure documentation, 2022

    Impact of work-from-anywhere

    How AD poses issues that impact the user experience

    IT organizations are under pressure to enable work-from-home/work-from-anywhere.

    • IT teams regard legacy infrastructure, namely Active Directory, as inadequate to securely manage remote workloads.
    • While organizations previously used VPNs to access resources through Active Directory, they now have complex webs of applications that do not reside on premises, such as AWS, G-Suite, and SaaS customer relationship management and HR management systems, among others. These resources live outside the Windows ecosystem, complicating user provisioning, management, and security.
    • The work environment has changed since the start of COVID-19, with businesses scrambling to enable work-from-home. This had a huge impact on on-premises identity management tools such as AD, exposing their limitations and challenges. IT admins are all too aware that AD does not meet the needs of work-from-home.
    • As more IT organizations move infrastructure to the cloud, they have the opportunity to move their directory services to the cloud as well.
      • JumpCloud, OneLogin, Okta, Azure AD, G2, and others can be a solution for this new way of working and free up administrators from the overloaded AD environment.
      • Identity and access management (IAM) can be moved to the cloud where the modern infrastructure lives.
      • Alternatives for printers using AD include Google Cloud Print, PrinterOn, and PrinterLogic.

    How AD can impact your migration to Microsoft 365

    The beginning of your hybrid environment

    • Businesses that have a large on-premises footprint have very few choices for setting up a hybrid environment that includes their on-premises AD and Azure AD synchronization.
    • Microsoft 365 uses Azure AD in the background to manage identities.
    • Azure AD Connect will need to be installed, along with IdFix to identify errors such as duplicates and formatting problems in your AD.
    • Password hash should be implemented to synchronize passwords from on-premises AD so users can sign in to Azure without the need for additional single sign-on infrastructure.
    • Azure AD Connect synchronizes accounts every 30 minutes and passwords within two minutes.

    Alternatives to AD

    When considering retiring Active Directory from your environment, look at alternatives that can assist with those legacy application servers, handle Kerberos and NTML, and support LDAP.

    • JumpCloud: Cloud-based directory services. JumpCloud provides LDAP-as-a-Service and RADIUS-as-a-Service. It authenticates, authorizes, and manages employees, their devices, and IT applications. However, domain name changes are not supported.
    • Apache Directory Studio Pro: Written in Java, it supports LDAP v3–certified directory services. It is certified by Eclipse-based database utilities. It also supports Kerberos, which is critical for legacy Microsoft AD apps authentication.
    • Univention Corporate Server (UCS): Open-source Linux-based solution that has a friendly user interface and gets continuous security and feature updates. It supports Kerberos V5 and LDAP, works with AD, and is easy to sync. It also supports DNS server, DHCP, multifactor authentication and single sign-on, and APIs and REST APIs. However, it has a limited English knowledgebase as it is a German tool.

    What to look for

    If you are embedded in Windows systems but looking for an alternative to AD, you need a similar solution but one that is capable of working in the cloud and on premises.

    Aside from protocols and supporting utilities, also consider additional features that can help you retire your Active Directory while maintaining highly secure access control and a strong security posture.

    These are just a few examples of the many alternatives available.

    Market drivers to modernize your infrastructure

    The business is now driving your Active Directory migration

    What IT must deal with in the modern world of work:

    • Leaner footprint for evolving tech trends
    • Disaster recovery readiness
    • Dynamic compliance requirements
    • Increased security needs
    • The need to future-proof
    • Mergers and acquisitions
    • Security extending the network beyond Windows

    Organizations are making decisions that impact Active Directory, from enabling work-from-anywhere to dealing with malicious threats such as ransomware. Mergers and acquisitions also bring complexity with multiple AD domains.
    The business is putting pressure on IT to become creative with security strategies, alternative authentication and authorization, and migration to SaaS and cloud services.

    Activity

    Build a checklist to migrate off Active Directory.

    Discovery

    Assessment

    Proof of Concept

    Migration

    Cloud Operations

    ☐ Catalog your applications.

    ☐ Define your users, groups and usage.

    ☐ Identify network interdependencies and complexity.

    ☐ Know your security and compliance regulations.

    ☐ Document your disaster recovery plan and recovery point and time objectives (RPO/RTO).

    ☐ Build a methodology for migrating apps to IaaS.

    ☐ Develop a migration team using internal resources and/or outsourcing.

    ☐ Use Microsoft resources for specific skill sets.

    ☐ Map on-premises third-party solutions to determine how easily they will migrate.

    ☐ Create a plan to retire and archive legacy data.

    ☐ Test your workload: Start small and prove value with a phased approach.

    ☐ Estimate cloud costs.

    ☐ Determine the amount and size of your compute and storage requirements.

    ☐ Understand security requirements and the need for network and security controls.

    ☐ Assess network performance.

    ☐ Qualify and test the tools and solutions needed for the migration.

    ☐ Create a blueprint of your desired cloud environment.

    ☐ Establish a rollback plan.

    ☐ Identify tools for automating migration and syncing data.

    ☐ Understand the implications of the production-day data move.

    ☐ Keep up with the pace of innovation.

    ☐ Leverage 24/7 support via skilled Azure resources.

    ☐ Stay on top of system maintenance and upgrades.

    ☐ Consider service-level agreement requirements, governance, security, compliance, performance, and uptime.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Manage the Active Directory in the Service Desk

    • Build and maintain your Active Directory with good data.
    • Actively maintaining the Active Directory is a difficult task that only gets more difficult with issues like stale accounts and privilege creep.

    SoftwareReviews: Microsoft Azure Active Directory

    • The Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) enterprise identity service provides SSO and multifactor authentication to help protect your users from 99.9% of cybersecurity attacks

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    • Don’t think about the cloud as an inevitable next step for all workloads. The cloud is merely another tool in the toolbox, ready to be used when appropriate and put away when it’s not needed. Cloud-first isn’t always the way to go.

    Bibliography

    “2012 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2012. Web.
    “2022 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2012. Web.
    “22 Best Alternatives to Microsoft Active Directory.” The Geek Page, 16 Feb 2022. Accessed 12 Sept. 2022.
    Altieri, Matt. “Infrastructure Technical Debt.” Device 42, 20 May 2019. Accessed Sept 2022.
    “Are You Ready to Make the Move from ADFS to Azure AD?’” Steeves and Associates, 29 April 2021. Accessed 28 Sept. 2022.
    Blanton, Sean. “Can I Replace Active Directory with Azure AD? No, Here’s Why.” JumpCloud, 9 Mar 2021. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    Chai, Wesley, and Alexander S. Gillis. “What is Active Directory and how does it work?” TechTarget, June 2021. Accessed 10 Sept. 2022.
    Cogan, Sam. “Azure Active Directory is not Active Directory!” SamCogan.com, Oct 2020. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    “Compare Active Directory to Azure Active Directory.” Azure documentation, Microsoft Learn, 18 Aug. 2022. Accessed 12 Sept. 2022.
    "Compare self-managed Active Directory Domain Services, Azure Active Directory, and managed Azure Active Directory Domain Services." Azure documentation, Microsoft Learn, 23 Aug. 2022. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    “Dimensional Research, Active Directory Modernization: A Survey of IT Professionals.” Quest, 2017. Accessed Sept 2022.
    Grillenmeier, Guido. “Now’s the Time to Rethink Active Directory Security.“ Semperis, 4 Aug 2021. Accessed Oct. 2013.
    “How does your Active Directory align to today’s business?” Quest Software, 2017, accessed Sept 2022
    Lewis, Jack “On-Premises Active Directory: Can I remove it and go full cloud?” Softcat, Dec.2020. Accessed 15 Sept 2022.
    Loshin, Peter. “What is Kerberos?” TechTarget, Sept 2021. Accessed Sept 2022.
    Mann, Terry. “Why Cybersecurity Must Include Active Directory.” Lepide, 20 Sept. 2021. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    Roberts, Travis. “Azure AD without on-prem Windows Active Directory?” 4sysops, 25 Oct. 2021. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    “Understanding Active Directory® & its architecture.” ActiveReach, Jan 2022. Accessed Sept. 2022.
    “What is Active Directory Migration?” Quest Software Inc, 2022. Accessed Sept 2022.

    Get Started With FinOps

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}473|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Runaway cloud costs are wrecking the CIO’s budget, but cloud costs are hard to reign in because vendors are not always up front about the true costs, it’s easy to oversubscribe to services and quickly run up costs with pay-as-you-go service, and cloud bills are complex.
    • While IT isn’t the business owner for cloud services, they often carry the cost of overruns on their budget, and don’t have the skills or influence to more effectively manage cloud costs.
    • Truly optimizing cloud spend and maximizing business value from cloud requires insight and collaboration from IT/engineering, finance, and business owners, but those teams are often siloed and manage their cloud usage or spend differently.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The business units that need to collaborate to make FinOps work are often siloed, with different processes, data, metrics and cloud expertise. Coordinating their efforts to encourage shared responsibility can be a big obstacle to overcome.
    • FinOps requires a cultural shift to empower every cloud user to take accountability for cloud cost optimization.
    • To get started with FinOps, it’s essential to first break down those silos and get the multiple teams involved on the same page. Everyone must understand how FinOps is part of their responsibilities.

    Impact and Result

    • Implementing FinOps will lead to improved visibility and control over cloud spend, optimized resource allocation and reduced cloud waste, enhanced transparency, improved forecasting and budgeting, and increased accountability over cloud costs across business units.
    • This blueprint will help you get started with FinOps by identifying the roles involved in FinOps, defining the key activities that must be conducted, and assigning ownership to each task. This will help foster a shared responsibility for FinOps and encourage everyone to work toward common goals.

    Get Started With FinOps Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Get Started With FinOps Deck – A guide to defining and assigning the roles and activities involved in FinOps.

    This storyboard will help you define FinOps roles and structure of the FinOps and other teams, identify key activities, and assign ownership to each. It will also provide guidance on analyzing the results of the RACI chart.

    • Get Started With FinOps Storyboard

    2. FinOps RACI Chart – A tool to help you assess the current state of FinOps activities and assign ownership to each.

    This tool will help you assess the current state of FinOps activities and assign ownership to each activity. Use the outputs of the exercise to define how roles across the organization will be involved in FinOps and where to focus efforts in maturing in FinOps.

    • FinOps RACI Chart
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Get Started With FinOps

    FinOps goes beyond identifying cloud savings. It empowers every cloud user to maximize the value of their spend.

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    The first step of FinOps is collectively realizing that maximizing value is every cloud user's responsibility.

    Natalie Sansone

    Natalie Sansone, PhD
    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    As cloud adoption increases, and with it the complexity of cloud environments, managing and optimizing cloud spend has become both a top challenge and priority for IT organizations. In response, the practice of FinOps has emerged to help organizations maximize the value they get from the cloud. As its popularity surges, organizations are told they must do FinOps, but many feel their practice is not yet mature. One of their biggest obstacles is empowering engineers and other cloud users to work toward this shared goal with other teams.

    To grow and mature your FinOps practice, your first challenge is breaking down silos, encouraging collaboration across varying business units, and getting all cloud users to be accountable for their cloud usage and spend and to understand the shared goals of FinOps. Beyond finding ways to reduce cloud costs, FinOps is a cultural shift that enables better collaboration between distributed teams. It allows them to leverage data to identify opportunities to maximize business value from cloud investments.

    Whether you’re starting the FinOps journey or looking to mature your practice, this blueprint will help you organize by defining the required role and tasks. Then you can work through a collective exercise to ensure everyone understands who is involved and responsible for each activity. You’ll gain the information you need and be better positioned to continuously improve and mature your processes, but success begins with everyone understanding that FinOps is a shared responsibility.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Runaway cloud costs are wrecking the CIO’s budget, but these are hard to rein in because cloud vendors are not always upfront about the true costs. It’s easy to oversubscribe to services and quickly run up costs with pay-as-you-go service and complex bills.
    • While IT isn’t the business owner for cloud services, they often carry the cost of overruns on their budget, and don’t have the skills or influence to more effectively manage cloud costs.
    • Truly optimizing cloud spend and maximizing its business value requires insight and collaboration from IT/engineering, finance, and business owners, but those teams are often siloed and manage their cloud usage/spend differently.
    • IT leaders are instructed to implement a FinOps practice, but don’t truly understand what that is, who needs to be involved, or where to start.
    • Business units that must collaborate to make FinOps work are often siloed and have different processes, data, metrics, and cloud expertise. Coordinating efforts to encourage shared responsibility can be a challenge. FinOps requires a cultural shift to empower every cloud user to take accountability for cost optimization.
    • Lack of visibility into cloud usage, spending patterns, and cost drivers along with inadequate tools to get the required data to drive decision making. This leads to hindered progress.
    • Implementing FinOps will improve visibility and control over cloud spend, optimize resource allocation and reduce waste, enhance transparency, improve forecasting and budgeting, and improve cost accountability across business units.
    • To get started with FinOps, first it’s essential to break down those silos and coordinate the multiple teams involved. Everyone must understand how FinOps is part of their responsibilities.
    • This blueprint will help you identify the roles involved in FinOps, define the key activities that must be conducted, and assign ownership to each task. This will help foster a shared responsibility for FinOps and encourage everyone to work toward common goals.

    Info-Tech Insight

    FinOps is not just about driving cloud savings. It’s a cultural shift empowering every cloud user to maximize the value of their spend. The first step of FinOps is therefore to help everyone understand their share of responsibility.

    What is FinOps?

    Definition

    “FinOps is an evolving cloud financial management discipline and cultural practice that enables organizations to get maximum business value by helping engineering, finance, technology, and business teams to collaborate on data-driven spending decisions.”

    Definition Updated: November 2021 by the FinOps Foundation Technical Advisory Council

    The ultimate purpose of FinOps is to bring business value to your organization by reducing cloud waste.

    • FinOps is the people, processes, and tools you use to eliminate waste and ensure you get the most value from your cloud spend.
    • FinOps is the framework within which teams can operate to ensure they are optimizing their use of cloud resources.
    • FinOps brings financial accountability to cloud spend.
    • FinOps is a culture practice where everyone collaborates and takes ownership for their cloud usage while being supported and governed by a central group. It breaks down silos so teams that haven’t worked closely together in the past collaborate toward shared goals.
    • It brings financial accountability and cultural change to cloud spend by enabling distributed teams to better collaborate and leverage data to decide where/when to invest in cloud for maximum business value.
    • FinOps is not done by an individual or just one team. It’s a change in the way that many disparate teams work together, from engineering to finance to business teams.

    Common misconceptions about FinOps

    FinOps is not

    FinOps is

    • Only about saving money
    • Only focused on activities related to cost optimization
    • IT financial management, which involves tracking and analyzing all costs associated with IT services
    • An activity (or set of activities) done by one person or team
    • Short for financial operations
    • About maximizing value. FinOps is optimizing cloud costs to provide maximum business value and support scalability (sometimes this means investing more money in cloud)
    • FinOps also involves building a culture of accountability, visibility, and collaboration around cloud usage and cost
    • Focused specifically on managing/optimizing cloud costs
    • A cultural shift around how disparate teams work together, people from all areas of the organization can play a role
    • The term is a portmanteau (combination) of Finance and (Dev)Ops, emphasizing the collaboration between business and engineering teams1
    1 “What is FinOps?” FinOps Foundation, 2023

    FinOps’ popularity has exploded in recent years

    2012 - The practice of FinOps begins to emerge through early scalers in public cloud like Adobe and Intuit

    2017 - Many IT departments begin to use the cloud for limited use cases, but very few enterprises are all in the cloud

    2019 - Many companies begin moving to a cloud-first strategy, shifting IT spend from capital to operational expenditure (CapEx to OpEx), complicating cloud bills

    February 2019 - The FinOps Foundation is born out of Cloudability’s Customer Advisory Board meeting where many cloud practitioners discuss the need for a community of practitioners

    June 2020 - The FinOps Foundation merges with Linux Foundation and sets the standard for cloud financial management

    Sources: Carr, 2022; Linux Foundation, 2023, Storment & Fuller, 2023.

    The image contains a graph that demonstrates the increasing number of people listing FinOps as a skill.

    Where did the term come from?

    The term FinOps has risen in popularity over the last few years. Originally, organizations used the term cloud cost management, then cloud cost optimization, then more broadly, cloud financial management. The latter has now been largely replaced by FinOps.

    Why is FinOps so essential? (1/2)

    The shift from fixed to variable spend has changed the way organizations must manage and report on costs.

    In the traditional data center era:

    • The enterprise procured infrastructure through large capital refreshes of data center hardware.
    • Infrastructure teams tried their best to avoid running out of storage before the next hardware refresh. Equipment was intentionally oversized to accommodate unexpected growth.
    • IT teams would not worry about how much infrastructure resources they consumed, provided they stayed within planned capacity limits. If capacity ran low, resource usage would be adjusted.
    • The business might not like laying out large capital expenditures, but it had full visibility into the cost and got to approve spending in advance using financial controls.
    • Monthly costs were well-understood and monthly or infrequent reporting was acceptable because day-to-day costs did not vary.
    • Mature organizations might chargeback or showback costs to application teams based on number of virtual machines or other measures, but traditional on-premises chargeback wouldn't save money overall.

    Why is FinOps so essential? (2/2)

    The shift from fixed to variable spend has changed the way organizations must manage and report on costs.

    In the cloud era:

    • Infrastructure resources must no longer be provisioned in advance through spending capital budgets.
    • Capacity management isn’t a major concern. Spare capacity is always available, and savings can result from not paying for unnecessary capacity.
    • Cloud services often offer pay-as-you-go pricing models, allowing more control and flexibility to pay only for the resources you consume.
    • When services use more resources than they need, running costs increase. Cost reductions are realized through reducing the size of allocated resources.
    • The variable consumption model can reduce operating costs but can make budgeting and forecasting difficult. IT and the business can no longer predict what they will pay for infrastructure resources.
    • Billing is no longer straightforward and monthly. Resources are individually charged in micro amounts. Costs must be regularly reviewed as unexpected or forgotten resource usage can add up significantly.

    Managing cloud spend remains a challenge for many organizations

    Given the variable nature of cloud costs and complex pricing structures, it can be easy to overspend without mature FinOps processes in place. Indeed, 82% of organizations cite managing cloud spend as one of their top challenges.

    Respondents reported that public cloud spend was over budget by an average of 18%, up from 13% the previous year.

    Source: Flexera 2023 State of the Cloud Report, n=750

    Organization's top cloud challenges.

    While FinOps adoption has rapidly increased, maturity has not

    Most organizations understand the value of FinOps but are not mature in their practice.

    NetApp’s 2023 State of CloudOps Report found that:

    96% say FinOps is important to their cloud strategy

    9% have a mature FinOps practice

    92% report that they struggle with FinOps

    Source: NetApp, 2023 State of CloudOps Report, n=310 IT decision makers in the United States responsible for public cloud infrastructure investments.

    Flexera’s 2023 State of the Cloud report found that 72% of organizations have a dedicated FinOps team.

    Flexera’s annual report also found that year over year, cloud cost responsibilities are increasingly shifting away from Finance/Accounting and Vendor Management teams and over to FinOps teams as they emerge and mature.

    Source: Flexera, 2023 State of the Cloud Report, n=750 decision-makers and users around the world

    Release management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}9|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}9|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}9|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $35,731
    • member rating average days saved: 20
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Today's world requires frequent and fast deployments. Stay in control with release management.

    Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}355|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Complex application landscapes require delivery teams to work together and coordinate changes across multiple product lines and releases.
    • Leadership wants to balance strategic goals with localized prioritization of changes.
    • Traditional methodologies are not well suited to support enterprise agility: Scrum doesn’t scale easily, and Waterfall is too slow and risky.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    SAFe’s popularity is largely due to its structural resemblance to enterprise portfolio and project planning with top-down prioritization and decision making. This directly conflicts with Agile’s purpose and principles of empowerment and agility.

    • Poor culture, processes, governance, and leadership will disrupt any methodology. Many drivers for SAFe could be solved by improving and standardizing development and release management within current methodologies.
    • Few organizations are capable or should be applying a pure SAFe framework. Successful organizations have adopted and modified SAFe frameworks to best fit their needs, teams, value streams, and maturity.

    Impact and Result

    • Start with a clear understanding of your needs, constraints, goals, and culture.
      • Start with an Agile readiness assessment. Agile is core to value realization.
      • Take the time to determine your drivers and goals.
      • If SAFe is right for you, selecting the right implementation partner is key.
    • Plan SAFe as a long-term enterprise cultural transformation requiring changes at all levels.

    Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe Storyboard – Research to help you understand where SAFe fits into delivery methodologies and determine if SAFe is right for your organization.

    This deck will guide you to define your primary drivers for SAFe, assess your Agile readiness, define enablers and blockers, estimate implementation risk, and start your SAFe implementation plan.

    • Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe Storyboard

    2. Scaled Agile Readiness Assessment – A tool to conduct an Agile readiness survey.

    Start your journey with a clear understanding about the level of Agile and product maturity throughout the organization. Each area that lacks strength should be evaluated further and added to your journey map.

    • Scaled Agile Readiness Assessment

    3. SAFe Transformation Playbook – A template to build a change management plan to guide your transition.

    Define clear ownership for every critical step.

    • SAFe Transformation Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand where SAFe fits into delivery methodologies and SDLCs

    The Purpose

    Understand what is driving your proposed SAFe transformation and if it is the right framework for your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of your scaled agile needs and drivers

    Activities

    1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe.

    1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe.

    Outputs

    List of primary drivers for SAFe

    List of pros and cons of SAFe

    2 Determine if you are ready for SAFe

    The Purpose

    Identify factors influencing a SAFe implementation and ensure teams are aware and prepared.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Starting understanding of your organization’s readiness to implement a SAFe framework

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your Agile readiness.

    2.2 Define enablers and blockers of scaling Agile delivery.

    2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk.

    2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan.

    Outputs

    Agile readiness assessment results

    List of enablers and blockers of scaling Agile delivery

    Estimated SAFe implementation risk

    High-level SAFe implementation plan template

    Further reading

    Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe

    Approach the Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe) with open eyes and an open wallet.

    Analyst Perspective

    Ensure that SAFe is the right move before committing.

    Waterfall is dead. Or obsolete at the very least.

    Organizations cannot wait months or years for product, service, application, and process changes. They need to embrace business agility to respond to opportunities more quickly and deliver value sooner. Agile established values and principles that have promoted smaller cycle times, greater connections between teams, improved return on investment (ROI) prioritization, and improved team empowerment.

    Where organizations continue to struggle is matching localized Scrum teams with enterprise initiatives. This struggle is compounded by legacy executive planning cycles, which undermine Agile team authority. SAFe has provided a series of frameworks to help organizations deal with these issues. It combines enterprise planning and alignment with cross-team collaboration.

    Don't rely on popularity or marketing to make your scaled Agile decision. SAFe is a highly disruptive transformation, and it requires extensive training, coaching, process changes, and time to implement. Without the culture shift to an Agile mindset at all levels, SAFe becomes a mirror of Waterfall processes dressed in SAFe names. Furthermore, SAFe itself will not fix problems with communication, requirements, development, testing, release, support, or governance. You will still need to fix these problems within the SAFe framework to be successful.

    Hans Eckman, Principal Research Director, Applications Delivery and Management

    Hans Eckman
    Principal Research Director, Applications Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
    • Complex application landscapes require delivery teams to work together and coordinate changes across multiple product lines and releases.
    • Leadership wants to maintain executive strategic planning with faster delivery of changes.
    • Traditional methodologies are not well suited to support enterprise agility.
      • Waterfall is too slow, inefficient, and full of accumulated risk.
      • Scrum is not easy to scale and requires behavioral changes.
    • Enterprise transformations are never fast or easy, and SAFe is positioned as a complete replacement of your delivery practices.
    • Teams struggle with SAFe's rigid framework, interconnected methodologies, and new terms.
    • Few organizations are successful at implementing a pure SAFe framework.
    • Organizations without scaled product families have difficulties organizing SAFe teams into proper value streams.
    • Team staffing and stability are hard to resolve.
    Start with a clear understanding of your needs, constraints, goals, and culture.
    • Developing an Agile mindset is core to value realization. Start with Info-Tech's Agile Readiness Assessment.
    • Take the time to identify your drivers and goals.
    • If SAFe is right for you, build a transformation plan and select the right implementation partner.
    Plan SAFe as a long-term enterprise cultural transformation, requiring changes at all levels.

    Info-Tech Insight
    SAFe is a highly disruptive enterprise transformation, and it won't solve your organizational delivery challenges by itself. Start with an open mind, and understand what is needed to support a multi-year cultural transition. Decide how far and how fast you are willing to transform, and make sure that you have the right transformation and coaching partner in place. There is no right software development lifecycle (SDLC) or methodology. Find or create the methodology that best aligns to your needs and goals.

    Agile's Four Core Values

    "...while there is value in the items on the right, we value the items on the left more."
    - The Agile Manifesto

    STOP! If you're not Agile, don't start with SAFe.

    Agile over SAFe

    Successful SAFe requires an Agile mindset at all levels.

    Be aware of common myths around Agile and SAFe

    SAFe does not...

    1...solve development and communication issues.

    2...ensure that you will finish requirements faster.

    3...mean that you do not need planning and documentation.

    "Without proper planning, organizations can start throwing more resources at the work, which spirals into the classic Waterfall issues of managing by schedule."
    – Kristen Morton, Associate Implementation Architect,
    OneShield Inc. (Info-Tech Interview)

    Info-Tech Insight
    Poor culture, processes, governance, and leadership will disrupt any methodology. Many drivers for SAFe could be solved by improving and standardizing development and release management within current methodologies.

    Review the drivers that are motivating your organization to adopt and scale Agile practices

    Functional groups have their own drivers to adopt Agile development processes, practices, and techniques (e.g. to improve collaboration, decrease churn, or increase automation). Their buy-in to scaling Agile is just as important as the buy-in of stakeholders.

    If a group's specific needs and drivers are not addressed, its members may develop negative sentiments toward Agile development. These negative sentiments can affect their ability to see the benefits of Agile, and they may return to their old habits once the opportunity arises.

    It is important to find opportunities in which both business objectives and functional group drivers can be achieved by scaling Agile development. This can motivate teams to continuously improve and adhere to the new environment, and it will maintain business buy-in. It can also be used to justify activities that specifically address functional group drivers.

    Examples of Motivating Drivers for Scaling Agile

    • Improve artifact handoffs between development and operations.
    • Increase collaboration among development teams.
    • Reveal architectural and system risks early.
    • Expedite the feedback loop from support.
    • Improve capacity management.
    • Support development process innovation.
    • Create a safe environment to discuss concerns.
    • Optimize value streams.
    • Increase team engagement and comradery.

    Don't start with scaled Agile!

    Scaling Agile is a way to optimize product management and product delivery in application lifecycle management practices. Do not try to start with SAFe when the components are not yet in place.

    Scaled Agile


    Thought model describing how Agile connects Product Management to Product Delivery to elevate the entire Solution Lifecycle.

    Scale Agile delivery to improve cross-functional dependencies and releases

    Top Business Concerns When Scaling Agile

    1 Organizational Culture: The current culture may not support team empowerment, learning from failure, and other Agile principles. SAFe also allows top-down decisions to persist.

    2 Executive Support: Executives may not dedicate resources, time, and effort into removing obstacles to scaling Agile because of lack of business buy-in.

    3 Team Coordination: Current collaboration structures may not enable teams and stakeholders to share information freely and integrate workflows easily.

    4 Business Misalignment: Business vision and objectives may be miscommunicated early in development, risking poorly planned and designed initiatives and low-quality products.

    Extending collaboration is the key to success.

    Uniting stakeholders and development into a single body is the key to success. Assess the internal and external communication flow and define processes for planning and tracking work so that everyone is aware of how to integrate, communicate, and collaborate.

    The goal is to enable faster reaction to customer needs, shorter release cycles, and improved visibility of the project's progress with cross-functional and diverse conversations.

    Advantages of successful SAFe implementations

    Once SAFe is complete and operational, organizations have seen measurable benefits:

    • Multiple frameworks to support different levels of SAFe usage
    • Deliberate and consistent planning and coordination
    • Coordinating dependencies within value streams
    • Reduced time to delivery
    • Focus on customers and end users
    • Alignment to business goals and value streams
    • Increased employee engagement

    Sources: TechBeacon, 2019; Medium, 2020; "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023;
    "Pros and Cons," PremierAgile, n.d.; "Scaling Agile Challenges," PremierAgile, n.d.

    Advantages of successful SAFe implementations

    Source: "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023

    Recognize the difference between Scrum teams and the Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe)

    SAFe provides a framework that aligns Scrum teams into coordinated release trains driven by top-down prioritization.

    Scrum vs SAFe

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation

    Source: Scaled Agile, Inc.

    Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework

    Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework

    Info-Tech Insight
    SAFe is an enterprise, culture, and process transformation that impacts all IT services. Some areas of Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework have higher impacts and require special attention. Plan to include transformation support for each of these topics during your SAFe implementation. SAFe will not fix broken processes on its own.

    Without adopting an Agile mindset, SAFe becomes Waterfall with SAFe terminology

    Waterfall with SAFe terminology

    Source: Scaled Agile, Inc.

    Info-Tech Insight
    When first implementing SAFe, organizations reproduce their organizational design and Waterfall delivery structures with SAFe terms:

    • Delivery Manager = Release Train Engineer
    • Stakeholder/Sponsor = Product Manager
    • Release = Release Train
    • Project/Program = Project or Portfolio

    SAFe isn't without risks or challenges

    Risks and Causes of Failed SAFe Transformations

    • SAFe conflicts with legacy cultures and delivery processes.
    • SAFe promotes continued top-down decisions, undermining team empowerment.
    • Scaled product families are required to define proper value streams.
    • Team empowerment and autonomy are reduced.
    • SAFe activities are poorly executed.
    • There are high training and coaching costs.
    • Implementation takes a long time.
    • End-to-end delivery management tools aligned to SAFe are required.
    • Legacy delivery challenges are not specifically solved with SAFe.
    • SAFe is designed to work for large-scale development teams.

    Challenges

    • Adjusting to a new set of terms for common roles, processes, and activities
    • Executing planning cycles
    • Defining features and epics at the right level
    • Completing adequate requirements
    • Defining value streams
    • Coordinating releases and release trains
    • Providing consistent quality

    Sources: TechBeacon, 2019; Medium, 2020; "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023;
    "Pros and Cons," PremierAgile, n.d.; "Scaling Agile Challenges," PremierAgile, n.d.

    Focus on your core competencies instead

    Before undertaking an enterprise transformation, consider improving the underlying processes that will need to be fixed anyway. Fixing these areas while implementing SAFe compounds the effort and disruption.

    Product Delivery

    Product Management

    "But big-bang transitions are hard. They require total leadership commitment, a receptive culture, enough talented and experienced agile practitioners to staff hundreds of teams without depleting other capabilities, and highly prescriptive instruction manuals to align everyone's approach."
    – "Agile at Scale," Harvard Business Review

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight
    SAFe is a highly disruptive enterprise transformation, and it will not solve your organizational delivery challenges by itself. Start with an open mind, and understand what is needed to support a multi-year cultural transition. Decide how far and fast you are willing to transform and make sure that you have the right transformation and coaching partner in place.

    SAFe conflicts with core Agile principles.
    The popularity of SAFe is largely due to its structural resemblance to enterprise portfolio and project planning with top-down prioritization and decision-making. This directly conflicts with Agile's purpose and principles of empowerment and agility.

    SAFe and Agile will not solve enterprise delivery challenges.
    Poor culture, processes, governance, and leadership will disrupt any methodology. Many issues with drivers for SAFe could be solved by improving development and release management within current methodologies.

    Most organizations should not be using a pure SAFe framework
    Few organizations are capable of, or should be, applying a pure SAFe framework. Successful organizations have adopted and modified SAFe frameworks to best fit their needs, teams, value streams, and maturity.

    Without an Agile mindset, SAFe will be executed as Waterfall stages using SAFe terminology.
    Groups that "Do Agile" are not likely to embrace the behavioral changes needed to make any scaled framework effective. SAFe becomes a series of Waterfall PIs using SAFe terminology.

    Your transformation does not start with SAFe.
    Start your transition to scaled Agile with a maturity assessment for current delivery practices. Fixing broken process, tools, and teams must be at the heart of your initiative.

    Blueprint Deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key Deliverable

    SAFe Transformation Playbook

    Build a transformation and organizational change management plan to guide your transition. Define clear ownership for every critical step.

    Scaled Agile Readiness Assessment

    Conduct the Agile readiness survey. Without an Agile mindset, SAFe will follow Waterfall or WaterScrumFall practices.

    Case Study

    Spotify's approach to Agile at scale

    INDUSTRY: Digital Media
    SOURCE: Unified Communications and Collaborations

    Spotify's Scaling Agile Initiative

    With rapid user adoption growth (over 15 million active users in under six years), Spotify had to find a way to maintain an Agile mindset across 30+ teams in three different cities, while maintaining the benefits of cross-functional collaboration and flexibility for future growth.

    Spotify's Approach

    Spotify found a fit-for-purpose way for the organization to increase team autonomy without losing the benefits of cross-team communication from economics of scale. Spotify focused on identifying dependencies that block or slow down work through a mix of reprioritization, reorganization, architectural changes, and technical solutions. The organization embraced dependencies that led to cross-team communication and built in the necessary flexibility to allow Agile to grow with the organization.

    Spotify's scaling Agile initiative used interview processes to identify what each team depended on and how those dependencies blocked or slowed the team.

    Squad refers to an autonomous Agile release team in this case study.

    Case Study

    Suncorp instilled dedicated communication streams to ensure cross-role collaboration and culture.

    INDUSTRY: Insurance
    SOURCE: Agile India, International Conference on Agile and Lean Software Development, 2014

    Challenge Solution Results
    • Suncorp Group wanted to improve delivery and minimize risk. Suncorp realized that it needed to change its project delivery process to optimize business value delivery.
    • With five core business units, over 15,000 employees, and US$96 billion in assets, Suncorp had to face a broad set of project coordination challenges.
    • Suncorp decided to deliver all IT projects using Agile.
    • Suncorp created a change program consisting of five main streams of work, three of which dealt with the challenges specific to Agile culture:
      • People: building culture, leadership, and support
      • Communication: ensuring regular employee collaboration
      • Capabilities: blending training and coaching
    • Sponsorship from management and champions to advocate Agile were key to ensure that everyone was unified in a common purpose.
    • Having a dedicated communication stream was vital to ensure regular sharing of success and failure to enable learning.
    • Having a structured, standard approach to execute the planned culture change was integral to success.

    Case Study

    Nationwide embraces DevOps and improves software quality.

    INDUSTRY: Insurance
    SOURCE: Agile India, International Conference on Agile and Lean Software Development, 2014

    Challenge Solution Results
    • In the past, Nationwide primarily followed a Waterfall development process. However, this method created conflicts between IT and business needs.
    • The organization began transitioning from Waterfall to Agile development. It has seen early successes with Agile: decrease in defects per release and more success in meeting delivery times.
    • Nationwide needed to respond more efficiently to changing market requirements and regulations and to increase speed to market.
    • Nationwide decided to take a DevOps approach to application development and delivery.
    • IT wanted to perform continuous integration and deployment in its environments.
    • Cross-functional teams were organically created, made up of members from the business and multiple IT groups, including development and operations.
    • DevOps allowed Nationwide to be more Agile and more responsive to its customers.
    • Teams were able to perform acceptance testing with their customers in parallel with development. This allowed immediate feedback to help steer the project in the right direction.
    • DevOps improved code quality by 50% over a three-year period and reduced user downtime by 70%.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Call #1:

    Scope your requirements, objectives, and specific challenges.

    Call #2:

    1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe.

    1.1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe.

    Call #3:

    1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness.

    1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery.

    1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk.

    Call #4:

    1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan.

    Summarize your results and plan your next steps.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is one to four calls over the course of one to six weeks.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Planning Step 1.1 Step 1.2
    Identify your stakeholders. Step 1.1 Understand where SAFe fits into your delivery methodologies and SDLCs. Step 1.2 Determine if you are ready for SAFe.
    Activities 1. Determine stakeholders and subject matter experts.
    2. Coordinate timing and participation.
    3. Set goals and expectations for the workshop.
    1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe.
    1.1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe
    1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness.
    1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery.
    1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk.
    1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan.
    Deliverables
  • Workshop schedule
  • Participant commitment
    • List of primary drivers for SAFe
    • List of pros and cons of SAFe
    • Agile Readiness Assessment results
    • List of enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery
    • Estimated SAFe implementation risk
    • Template for high-level SAFe implementation plan

    Supporting Your Agile Journey

    Enable Product Agile Delivery Executive Workshop Develop Your Agile Approach Spread Best Practices with an Agile Center of Excellence Implement DevOps Practices That Work Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile
    Number One Number two Number Three Number Four Number Five

    Align and prepare your IT leadership teams.

    Audience: Senior and IT delivery leadership

    Size: 8-16 people

    Time: 7 hours

    Tune Agile team practices to fit your organization culture.

    Audience: Agile pilot teams and subject matter experts (SMEs)

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 4 days

    Leverage Agile thought leadership to expand your best practices.

    Audience: Agile SMEs and thought leaders

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 4 days

    Build a continuous integration and continuous delivery pipeline.

    Audience: Product owners (POs) and delivery team leads

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 4 days

    Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods.

    Audience: Agile steering team and SMEs

    Size: 3-8 people

    Time: 3 hours

    Repeat Legend

    Sample agendas are included in the following sections for each of these topics.

    Your Product Transformation Journey

    1. Make the Case for Product Delivery2. Enable Product Delivery - Executive Workshop3. Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision4. Deliver Digital Products at Scale5. Mature and Scale Product Ownership
    Align your organization with the practices to deliver what matters most.Participate in a one-day executive workshop to help you align and prepare your leadership.Enhance product backlogs, roadmapping, and strategic alignment.Scale product families to align with your organization's goals.Align and mature your product owners.

    Audience: Senior executives and IT leadership

    Size: 8-16 people

    Time: 6 hours

    Repeat Symbol

    Audience: Product owners/managers

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 3-4 days

    Repeat Symbol

    Audience: Product owners/managers

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 3-4 days

    Audience: Product owners/managers

    Size: 8-16 people

    Time: 2-4 days

    Repeat Symbol

    Repeat Legend

    Phase 1

    Determine if SAFe Is Right for Your Organization

    Phase 1
    1.1 Understand where SAFe fits into your delivery methodologies and SDLCs
    1.2 Determine if you are ready for SAFe (fit for purpose)

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe.
    • 1.1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe.
    • 1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness.
    • 1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery.
    • 1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk.
    • 1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior leadership
    • IT leadership
    • Project Management Office
    • Delivery managers
    • Product managers/owners
    • Agile thought leaders and coaches
    • Compliance teams leads

    Step 1.1

    Understand where SAFe fits into your delivery methodologies and SDLCs

    Activities
    1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe
    1.1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Outcomes of this step:

    • List of primary drivers for SAFe
    • List of pros and cons of SAFe

    Agile's Four Core Values

    "...while there is value in the items on the right, we value the items on the left more."
    – The Agile Manifesto

    STOP! If you're not Agile, don't start with SAFe.

    Agile's Four Core Values

    Successful SAFe requires an Agile mindset at all levels.

    Be aware of common myths around Agile and SAFe

    SAFe does not...

    1...solve development and communication issues.

    2...ensure that you will finish requirements faster.

    3...mean that you do not need planning and documentation.

    "Without proper planning, organizations can start throwing more resources at the work, which spirals into the classic Waterfall issues of managing by schedule."
    – Kristen Morton, Associate Implementation Architect,
    OneShield Inc. (Info-Tech Interview)

    Info-Tech Insight
    SAFe only provides a framework and steps where these issues can be resolved.

    The importance of values and principles

    Modern development practices (such as Agile, Lean, and DevOps) are based on values and principles. This supports the move away from command-and-control management to self-organizing teams.

    Values

    • Values represent your team's core beliefs and capture what you want to instill in your team.

    Principles

    • Principles represent methods for solving a problem or deciding.
    • Given that principles are rooted in specifics, they can change more frequently because they are both fallible and conducive to learning.

    Consider the guiding principles of your application team

    Teams may have their own perspectives on how they deliver value and their own practices for how they do this. These perspectives can help you develop guiding principles for your own team to explain your core values and cement your team's culture. Guiding principles can help you:

    • Enable the appropriate environment to foster collaboration within current organizational, departmental, and cultural constraints
    • Foster the social needs that will engage and motivate your team in a culture that suits its members
    • Ensure that all teams are driven toward the same business and team goals, even if other teams are operating differently
    • Build organizational camaraderie aligned with corporate strategies

    Info-Tech Insight
    Following methodologies by the book can be detrimental if they do not fit your organization's needs, constraints, and culture. The ultimate goal of all teams is to deliver value. Any practices or activities that drive teams away from this goal should be removed or modified.

    Review the drivers that are motivating your organization to adopt and scale Agile practices

    Functional groups have their own drivers to adopt Agile development processes, practices, and techniques (e.g. to improve collaboration, decrease churn, or increase automation). Their buy-in to scaling Agile is just as important as the buy-in of stakeholders.

    By not addressing a group's specific needs and drivers, the resulting negative sentiments of its members toward Agile development can affect their ability to see the benefits of Agile and they may return to old habits once the opportunity arises.

    Find opportunities in which both business objectives and functional group drivers can be achieved with scaling Agile development. This alignment can motivate teams to continuously improve and adhere to the new environment, and it will maintain business buy-in. This assessment can also be used to justify activities that specifically address functional group drivers.

    Examples of Motivating Drivers for Scaling Agile

    • Improve artifact hand-offs between development and operations.
    • Increase collaboration among development teams.
    • Reveal architectural and system risks early.
    • Expedite the feedback loop from support.
    • Improve capacity management.
    • Support development process innovation.
    • Create a safe environment to discuss concerns.
    • Optimize value streams.
    • Increase team engagement and comradery.

    Exercise 1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe

    30 minutes

    • Brainstorm a list of drivers for scaling Agile.
    • Build a value canvas to help capture and align team expectations.
    • Identify jobs or functions that will be impacted by SAFe.
    • List your current pains and gains.
    • List the pain relievers and gain creators.
    • Identify the deliverable needed for a successful transformation.
    • Complete your SAFe value canvas in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.

    Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.

    Input
    • Organizational understanding
    • Existing Agile delivery strategic plans
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    SAFe Value Canvas Template

    SAFe Value Canvas Template

    Case Study

    A public utilities organization steadily lost stakeholder engagement, diminishing product quality.

    INDUSTRY: Public Utilities
    SOURCE: Info-Tech Expert Interview

    Challenge

    • The goal of a public utilities organization was to adopt Agile so it could quickly respond to changes and trim costs.
    • The organization decided to scale Agile using a structured approach. It began implementation with IT teams that were familiar with Agile principles and leveraged IT seniors as Agile champions. To ensure that Agile principles were widespread, the organization decided to develop a training program with vendor assistance.
    • As Agile successes began to be seen, the organization decided to increase the involvement of business teams gradually so it could organically grow the concept within the business.

    Results

    • Teams saw significant success with many projects because they could easily demonstrate deliverables and clearly show the business value. Over time, the teams used Agile for large projects with complex processing needs.
    • Teams continued to deliver small projects successfully, but business engagement waned over time. Some of the large, complex applications they delivered using Agile lacked the necessary functionality and appropriate controls and, in some cases, did not have the ability to scale due to a poor architectural framework. These applications required additional investment, which far exceeded the original cost forecasts.

    While Agile and product development are intertwined, they are not the same!

    Delivering products does not necessarily require an Agile mindset. However, Agile methods help to facilitate the journey because product thinking is baked into them.

    Agile and product development are intertwined

    Recognize the difference between Scrum teams and the Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe)

    SAFe provides a framework that aligns Scrum teams into coordinated release trains driven by top-down prioritization.

    Difference between Scrum and SAFe

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation

    Without adopting an Agile mindset, SAFe becomes Waterfall with SAFe terminology

    Waterfall with SAFe terminology

    Info-Tech Insight
    When first implementing SAFe, organizations reproduce their organizational design and Waterfall delivery structures with SAFe terms:

    • Delivery Manager = Release Train Engineer
    • Stakeholder/Sponsor = Product Manager
    • Release = Release Train
    • Project/Program = Project or Portfolio

    Advantages of successful SAFe implementations

    Once SAFe is complete and operational, organizations have seen measurable benefits:

    • Multiple frameworks to support different levels of SAFe usage
    • Deliberate and consistent planning and coordination
    • Coordinating dependencies within value streams
    • Reduced time to delivery
    • Focus on customers and end users
    • Alignment to business goals and value streams
    • Increased employee engagement

    Sources: TechBeacon, 2019; Medium, 2020; "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023;
    "Pros and Cons," PremierAgile, n.d.; "Scaling Agile Challenges," PremierAgile, n.d.

    Advantages of successful SAFe implementations

    Source: "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023

    SAFe isn't without risks or challenges

    Risks and Causes of Failed SAFe Transformations

    • SAFe conflicts with legacy cultures and delivery processes.
    • SAFe promotes continued top-down decisions, undermining team empowerment.
    • Scaled product families are required to define proper value streams.
    • Team empowerment and autonomy are reduced.
    • SAFe activities are poorly executed.
    • There are high training and coaching costs.
    • Implementation takes a long time.
    • End-to-end delivery management tools aligned to SAFe are required.
    • Legacy delivery challenges are not specifically solved with SAFe.
    • SAFe is designed to work for large-scale development teams.

    Challenges

    • Adjusting to a new set of terms for common roles, processes, and activities
    • Executing planning cycles
    • Defining features and epics at the right level
    • Completing adequate requirements
    • Defining value streams
    • Coordinating releases and release trains
    • Providing consistent quality

    Sources: TechBeacon, 2019; Medium, 2020; "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023; "Pros and Cons," PremierAgile, n.d.; "Scaling Agile Challenges," PremierAgile, n.d.

    Exercise 1.1.2 Create your own list of the pros and cons of SAFe

    1 hour

    Pros Cons

    Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook

    Input
    • Organizational drivers
    • Analysis of SAFe
    • Estimate of fit for purpose
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Focus on your core competencies instead

    Before undertaking an enterprise transformation, consider improving the underlying processes that will need to be fixed anyway. Fixing these areas while implementing SAFe compounds the effort and disruption.

    Product Delivery

    Product Management

    "But big-bang transitions are hard. They require total leadership commitment, a receptive culture, enough talented and experienced agile practitioners to staff hundreds of teams without depleting other capabilities, and highly prescriptive instruction manuals to align everyone's approach."
    - "Agile at Scale," Harvard Business Review

    Step 1.2

    Determine if you are ready for SAFe (fit for purpose)

    Activities
    1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness
    1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery
    1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk
    1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Agile Readiness Assessment results
    • Enablers and blockers for scaling Agile
    • SAFe implementation risk
    • SAFe implementation plan

    Use CLAIM to guide your Agile journey

    Use CLAIM to guide your Agile journey

    Conduct the Agile Readiness Assessment Survey

    Without an Agile mindset, SAFe will follow Waterfall or WaterScrumFall practices.

    • Start your journey with a clear understanding of the level of Agile and product maturity throughout your organization.
    • Each area that lacks strength should be evaluated further and added to your journey map.

    Chart of Agile Readiness

    Exercise 1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness

    1 hour

    • Open and complete the Agile Readiness Assessment in your playbook or the Excel tool provided.
    • Discuss each area's high and low scores to reach a consensus.
    • Record your results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.

    Chart of Agile Readiness

    Enter the results in Scaled Agile Readiness Assessment.

    Input
    • Organizational knowledge
    • Agile Readiness Assessment
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project Management Office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Exercise 1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery

    1 hour

    • Identify and mitigate blockers for scaling Agile in your organization.
      • Identify enablers who will support successful SAFe transformation.
      • Identify blockers who will make the transition to SAFe more difficult.
      • For each blocker, define at least one mitigating step.
    Enablers Blockers Mitigation

    Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook

    Input
    • Agile Readiness Assessment
    • Organizational knowledge
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Estimate your SAFe implementation risk

    Poor Fit High Risk Scaling Potential
    Team size <50 >150 or non-dedicated 50-150 dedicated
    Agile maturity Waterfall and project delivery Individual Scrum DevOps teams Scrum DevOps teams coordinating dependencies
    Product management maturity Project-driver changes from stakeholders Proxy product owners within delivery teams Defined product families and products
    Strategic goals Localized decisions Enterprise goals implemented at the app level Translation and refinement of enterprise goals through product families
    Enterprise architecture Siloed architecture standards Common architectures Future enterprise architecture and employee review board (ERB) reviews
    Release management Independent release schedules Formal release calendar Continuous integration/development (CI/CD) with organizational change management (OCM) scheduled cross-functional releases
    Requirements management and quality assurance Project based Partial requirements and test case coverage Requirements as an asset and test automation

    Exercise 1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk

    30 minutes

    • Determine which description best matches your overall organizational state.
    • Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.
    • Change the text to bold in the cell you selected to describe your current state and/or add a border around the cell.

    Chart of SAFe implementation risk

    Enter the results in SAFe Transformation Playbook.

    Input
    • Agile Readiness Assessment
    • Organizational knowledge
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Interpret your SAFe implementation risks

    Analyze your highlighted selections and patterns in the rows and columns. Use these factors to inform your SAFe implementation steps and timing.

    Interpret your SAFe implementation risks

    Build your implementation plan

    Build a transformation and organizational change management plan to guide your transition. Define clear ownership for every critical step.

    Plan your transformation.

    • Align stakeholders and thought leaders.
    • Select an implementation partner.
    • Insert critical steps.

    Build your SAFe framework.

    • Define your target SAFe framework.
    • Customize your SAFe framework.
    • Establish SAFe governance and reporting.
    • Insert critical steps.

    Implement SAFe practices.

    • Define product families and value streams.
    • Conduct SAFe training for:
      • Executive leadership
      • Agile SAFe coaches
      • Practitioners
    • Insert critical steps.

    For additional help with OCM, please download Master Organizational Change Management Practices.

    Exercise 1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan

    30 minutes

    • Using the high-level SAFE implementation framework, begin building out the critical steps.
    • Record the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.
    • Your playbook is an evergreen document to help guide your implementation. It should be reviewed often.

    SAFe implementation plan

    Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook

    Input
    • SAFe readiness assessment
    • Enablers and blockers
    • Drivers for SAFe
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Select an implementation partner

    Finding the right SAFe implementation partner is critical to your transformation success.

    • Using your previous assessment, align internal and external resources to support your transformation.
    • Select a partner who has experience in similar organizations and is aligned with your delivery goals.
    • Plan to transition support to internal teams when SAFe practices have stabilized and moved into continuous improvement.
    • Augment your transformation partner with internal coaches.
    • Plan for a multiyear engagement before SAFe benefits are realized.

    Summary of Accomplishments

    Your journey begins.

    Implementing SAFe is a long, expensive, and difficult process. For some organizations, SAFe provides the balance of leadership-driven prioritization and control with shorter release cycles and time to value. The key is making sure that SAFe is right for you and you are ready for SAFe. Few organizations fit perfectly into one of the SAFe frameworks. Instead, consider fine-tuning and customizing SAFe to meet your needs and gradual transformation.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Below are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Scaled Agile Delivery Readiness Assessment
    This assessment will help identify enablers and blockers in your organizational culture using our CLAIM+G organization transformation model.

    SAFE Value Canvas
    Use a value campus to define jobs, pains, gains, pain relievers, gain creators, and needed deliverables to help inform and guide your SAFe transformation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Bibliography

    "6 Biggest SAFe Agile Implementation Mistakes to Avoid." Triumph Strategic Consulting, 27 July 2017.

    "The 7 Must-Haves for Achieving Scaling Agile Success." The 7 Must-Haves for Achieving Scaling Agile Success.

    Ageling, Willem-Jan. "11 Most Common Reasons to Use Scaled Agile Framework (SAFE) and How to Do This With Unscaled Scrum." Medium, Serious Scrum, 26 Jan. 2020.

    Agile India, International Conference on Agile and Lean Software Development, 2014.

    "Air France - KLM - Agile Adoption with SAFe." Scaled Agile, 28 Nov. 2022.

    "Application Development Trends 2019 - Global Survey Report." OutSystems.

    "Benefits of SAFe: How It Benefits Organizations." Scaled Agile, 13 Mar. 2023.

    Berkowitz, Emma. "The Cost of a SAFe(r) Implementation: CPRIME Blog." Cprime, 30 Jan. 2023.

    "Chevron - Adopting SAFe with Remote Workforce." Scaled Agile, 28 Nov. 2022.

    "Cisco It - Adopting Agile Development with SAFe." Scaled Agile, 13 Sept. 2022.

    "CMS - Business Agility Transformation Using SAFe." Scaled Agile, 13 Sept. 2022.

    Crain, Anthony. "4 Biggest Challenges in Moving to Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe)." TechBeacon, 25 Jan. 2019.

    "The Essential Role of Communications ." Project Management Institute .

    Gardiner, Phil. "SAFe Implementation: 4 Tips for Getting Started." Applied Frameworks, 20 Jan. 2022.

    "How Do I Start Implementing SAFe?" Agility in Mind, 29 July 2022.

    "How to Masterfully Screw Up Your SAFe Implementation." Wibas Artikel-Bibliothek, 6 Sept. 2022.

    "Implementation Roadmap." Scaled Agile Framework, 14 Mar. 2023.

    Islam, Ayvi. "SAFe Implementation 101 - The Complete Guide for Your Company." //Seibert/Media, 22 Dec. 2020.

    "Johnson Controls - SAFe Implementation Case Study." Scaled Agile, 28 Nov. 2022.

    "The New Rules and Opportunities of Business Transformation." KPMG.

    "Nokia Software - SAFe Agile Transformation." Scaled Agile, 28 Nov. 2022.

    Pichler, Roman. "What Is Product Management?" Romanpichler, 2014.

    "Product Documentation." ServiceNow.

    "Pros and Cons of Scaled Agile Framework." PremierAgile.

    "Pulse of the Profession Beyond Agility." Project Management Institute.

    R, Ramki. "Pros and Cons of Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe)." Medium, 3 Mar. 2019.

    R, Ramki. "When Should You Consider Implementing SAFe (Scaled Agile Framework)?" Medium, Medium, 3 Mar. 2019.

    Rigby, Darrell, Jeff Sutherland, and Andy Noble. "Agile at Scale: How to go from a few teams to hundreds." Harvard Business Review, 2018.

    "SAFe Implementation Roadmap." Scaled Agile Framework, Scaled Agile, Inc., 14 Mar. 2023.

    "SAFe Partner Cprime: SAFe Implementation Roadmap: Scaled Agile." Cprime, 5 Apr. 2023.

    "SAFe: The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly." Project Management Institute.

    "Scaled Agile Framework." Wikipedia, Wikimedia Foundation, 29 Mar. 2023.

    "Scaling Agile Challenges and How to Overcome Them." PremierAgile.

    "SproutLoud - a Case Study of SAFe Agile Planning." Scaled Agile, 29 Nov. 2022.

    "Story." Scaled Agile Framework, 13 Apr. 2023.

    Sutherland , Jeff. "Scrum: How to Do Twice as Much in Half the Time." Tedxaix, YouTube, 7 July 2014.

    Venema, Marjan. "6 Scaled Agile Frameworks - Which One Is Right for You?" NimbleWork, 23 Dec. 2022.

    Warner, Rick. "Scaled Agile: What It Is and Why You Need It." High-Performance Low-Code for App Development, OutSystems, 25 Oct. 2019.

    Watts, Stephen, and Kirstie Magowan. "The Scaled Agile Framework (SAFE): What to Know and How to Start." BMC Blogs, 9 Sept. 2020.

    "What Is SAFe? The Scaled Agile Framework Explained." CIO, 9 Feb. 2021.

    "Why Agile Transformations Fail: Four Common Culprits." Planview.

    "Why You Should Use SAFe (and How to Find SAFe Training to Help)." Easy Agile.

    Y., H. "Story Points vs. 'Ideal Days.'" Cargo Cultism, 19 Aug. 2010.

    Bibliography

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Ambler, Scott W. "Agile Architecture: Strategies for Scaling Agile Development." Agile Modeling, 2012.

    - - -. "Comparing Approaches to Budgeting and Estimating Software Development Projects." AmbySoft.

    - - -. "Agile and Large Teams." Dr. Dobb's, 17 Jun 2008.

    Ambler, Scott W. and Mark Lines. Disciplined Agile Delivery: A Practitioner's Guide to Agile Software Delivery in the Enterprise. IBM Press, 2012.

    Ambler, Scott W., and Mark Lines. "Scaling Agile Software Development: Disciplined Agility at Scale." Disciplined Agile Consortium White Paper Series, 2014.

    AmbySoft. "2014 Agile Adoption Survey Results." Scott W. Ambler + Associates, 2014.

    Bersin, Josh. "Time to Scrap Performance Appraisals?" Forbes Magazine, 5 June 2013. Accessed 30 Oct. 2013..

    Cheese, Peter, et al. " Creating an Agile Organization." Accenture, Oct. 2009. Accessed Nov. 2013..

    Croxon, Bruce, et al. "Dinner Series: Performance Management with Bruce Croxon from CBC's 'Dragon's Den.'" HRPA Toronto Chapter. Sheraton Hotel, Toronto, ON, 12 Nov. 2013. Panel discussion.

    Culbert, Samuel. "10 Reasons to Get Rid of Performance Reviews." Huffington Post Business, 18 Dec. 2012. Accessed 28 Oct. 2013.

    Denning, Steve. "The Case Against Agile: Ten Perennial Management Objections." Forbes Magazine, 17 Apr. 2012. Accessed Nov. 2013.

    Estis, Ryan. "Blowing up the Performance Review: Interview with Adobe's Donna Morris." Ryan Estis & Associates, 17 June 2013. Accessed Oct. 2013.

    Heikkila et al. "A Revelatory Case Study on Scaling Agile Release Planning." EUROMICRO Conference on Software Engineering and Advanced Applications (SEAA), 2010.

    Holler, Robert, and Ian Culling. "From Agile Pilot Project to Enterprise-Wide Deployment: Five Sure-Fire Ways To Fail When You Scale." VersionOne, 2010.

    Kniberg, Henrik, and Anders Ivarsson, "Scaling Agile @ Spotify," Unified Communications and Collaborations, 2012.

    Narayan, Sriram. "Agile IT Organization Design: For Digital Transformation and Continuous Delivery." Addison-Wesley Professional, 2015.

    Shrivastava, NK, and Phillip George. "Scaling Agile." RefineM, 2015.

    Sirkia, Rami, and Maarit Laanti. "Lean and Agile Financial Planning." Scaled Agile Framework Blog, 2014.

    Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe). "Agile Architecture." Scaled Agile Inc., 2015.

    VersionOne. 9th Annual: State of Agile Survey. VersionOne, LLC, 2015.

    Appendix A: Supporting Info-Tech Research

    Transformation topics and supporting research to make your journey easier, with less rework

    Supporting research and services

    Improving IT Alignment

    Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy
    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals, IT excellence, and driving technology innovation.

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable
    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Create an IT View of the Service Catalog
    Unlock the full value of your service catalog with technical components.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations
    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Shifting Toward Agile DevOps

    Agile/DevOps Research Center
    Access the tools and advice you need to be successful with Agile.

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation
    Understand Agile fundamentals, principles, and practices so you can apply them effectively in your organization.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work
    Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Perform an Agile Skills Assessment
    Being Agile isn't about processes, it's about people.

    Define the Role of Project Management in Agile and Product-Centric Delivery
    Projects and products are not mutually exclusive.

    Shifting Toward Product Management

    Make the Case for Product Delivery
    Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision
    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale
    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership
    Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Build a Value Measurement Framework
    Focus product delivery on business value- driven outcomes.

    Improving Value and Delivery Metrics

    Build a Value Measurement Framework
    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard
    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively
    Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case
    Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Improving Governance, Prioritization, and Value

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable
    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Maximize Business Value From IT Through Benefits Realization
    Embed benefits realization into your governance process to prioritize IT spending and confirm the value of IT.

    Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies
    Innovate and transform your business models with digital platforms.

    Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution
    Building a digital strategy is only half the battle: create a systematic roadmap of technology initiatives to execute the strategy and drive digital transformation.

    Build a Value Measurement Framework
    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard
    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Improving Requirements Management and Quality Assurance

    Requirements Gathering for Small Enterprises
    Right-size the guidelines of your requirements gathering process.

    Improve Requirements Gathering
    Back to basics: great products are built on great requirements.

    Build a Software Quality Assurance Program
    Build quality into every step of your SDLC.

    Automate Testing to Get More Done
    Drive software delivery throughput and quality confidence by extending your automation test coverage.

    Manage Your Technical Debt
    Make the case to manage technical debt in terms of business impact.

    Create a Business Process Management Strategy
    Avoid project failure by keeping the "B" in BPM.

    Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook
    Optimize and automate your business processes with a user-centric approach.

    Improving Release Management

    Optimize Applications Release Management
    Build trust by right-sizing your process using appropriate governance.

    Streamline Application Maintenance
    Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Streamline Application Management
    Move beyond maintenance to ensure exceptional value from your apps.

    Optimize IT Change Management
    Right-size IT change management to protect the live environment.

    Manage Your Technical Debt
    Make the case to manage technical debt in terms of business impact.

    Improve Application Development Throughput
    Drive down your delivery time by eliminating development inefficiencies and bottlenecks while maintaining high quality.

    Improving Business Relationship Management

    Embed Business Relationship Management in IT
    Show that IT is worthy of Trusted Partner status.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership
    Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Improving Security

    Build an Information Security Strategy
    Create value by aligning your strategy to business goals and business risks.

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies
    Enhance your overall security posture with a defensible and prescriptive policy suite.

    Simplify Identity and Access Management
    Leverage risk- and role-based access control to quantify and simplify the identity and access management (IAM) process.

    Improving and Supporting Business-Managed Applications

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications
    Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices
    Ensure your software systems solution is architected to reflect stakeholders' short- and long-term needs.

    Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code
    Extend IT, automation, and digital capabilities to the business with the right tools, good governance, and trusted organizational relationships.

    Build Your First RPA Bot
    Support RPA delivery with strong collaboration and management foundations.

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation
    Embrace the symbiotic relationship between the human and digital workforce.

    Improving Business Intelligence, Analytics, and Reporting

    Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results
    Enable the business to achieve operational excellence, client intimacy, and product leadership with an innovative, agile, and fit-for-purpose data architecture practice.

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy
    Deliver actionable business insights by creating a business-aligned reporting and analytics strategy.

    Build Your Data Quality Program
    Quality data drives quality business decisions.

    Design Data-as-a-Service
    Journey to the data marketplace ecosystems.

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy
    Learn about the key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Build an Application Integration Strategy
    Level the table before assembling the application integration puzzle or risk losing pieces.

    Appendix B: SDLC Transformation Steps

    Waterfall SDLC

    Valuable product delivered at the end of an extended project lifecycle, frequently in years

    Waterfall SDLC

    • Business is separated from the delivery of technology it needs. Only one-third of the product is actually valuable (ITRG, N=40,000).
    • In Waterfall, a team of experts in specific disciplines hand off different aspects of the lifecycle.
    • Document sign-offs are required to ensure integration between silos (Business, Development, and Operations) and individuals.
    • A separate change-request process lays over the entire lifecycle to prevent changes from disrupting delivery.
    • Tools are deployed to support a specific role (e.g. BA) and seldom integrated (usually requirements <-> test).

    Wagile/Agifall/WaterScrumFall SDLC

    Valuable product delivered in multiple releases

     Wagile/Agifall/WaterScrumFall SDLC

    • Business is more closely integrated by a business product owner, who is accountable for day-to-day delivery of value for users.
    • The team collaborates and develops cross-functional skills as they define, design, build, and test code over time.
    • Sign-offs are reduced but documentation is still focused on satisfying project delivery and operations policy requirements.
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Tools start to be integrated to streamline delivery (usually requirements and Agile work management tools).

    Agile SDLC

    Valuable product delivered iteratively: frequency depends Ops' capacity

    Agile SDLC

    • Business users are closely integrated through regularly scheduled demos (e.g. every two weeks).
    • Team is fully cross-functional and collaborates to plan, define, design, build, and test the code, supported by specialists.
    • Documentation is focused on future development and operations needs.
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Automation is explored for application development (e.g. automated regression testing).

    Agile With DevOps SDLC

    High frequency iterative delivery of valuable product (e.g. every two weeks)

     Agile With DevOps SDLC

    • Business users are closely integrated through regularly scheduled demos.
    • Development and operations teams collaborate to plan, define, design, build, test, and deploy code, supported by automation.
    • Documentation is focused on supporting users, future changes, and operational support.
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Test, build, deploy process is fully automated. (Service desk is still separated.)

    DevOps SDLC

    Continuous integration and delivery

     DevOps SDLC

    • Business users are closely integrated through regularly scheduled demos.
    • Fully integrated DevOps team collaborates to plan, define, design, build, test, deploy, and maintain code.
    • Documentation is focused on future development and use adoption.
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Development and operations toolchain are fully integrated.

    Fully integrated product SDLC

    Agile + DevOps + continuous delivery of valuable product on demand

     Fully integrated product SDLC

    • Business users are fully integrated with the teams through dedicated business product owner.
    • Cross-functional teams collaborate across the business and technical life of the product.
    • Documentation supports internal and external needs (business, users, operations).
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Toolchain is fully integrated (including service desk).

    Appendix C: Understanding Agile Scrum Practices and Ceremonies

    Cultural advantages of Agile

    Cultural advantages of Agile

    Agile* SDLC

    With shared ownership instead of silos, we are able to deliver value at the end of every iteration (aka sprint)

    Agile SDLC

    Key Elements of the Agile SDLC

    • You are not "one and done." There are many short iterations with constant feedback.
    • There is an empowered product owner. This is a single authoritative voice who represents stakeholders.
    • There is a fluid product backlog. This enables prioritization of requirements "just-in-time."
    • There is a cross-functional, self-managing team. This team makes commitments and is empowered by the organization to do so.
    • There is working, tested code at the end of each sprint: Value becomes more deterministic along sprint boundaries.
    • Stakeholders are allowed to see and use the functionality and provide necessary feedback.
    • Feedback is being continuously injected back into the product backlog. This shapes the future of the solution.
    • There is continuous improvement through sprint retrospectives.
    • The virtuous cycle of sprint-demo-feedback is internally governed when done right.

    * There are many Agile methodologies to choose from, but Scrum is by far the most widely used (and is shown above).

    Understand the Scrum process

    The scrum process coordinates multiple stakeholders to deliver on business priorities.

    Understand the Scrum process

    Understand the ceremonies part of the scrum process

     Understand the ceremonies part of the scrum process

    Scrum vs. Kanban: Key differences

    Scrum vs. Kanban: Key differences

    Scrum vs. Kanban: When to use each

    Scrum

    Related or grouped changes are delivered in fixed time intervals.

    Use when:

    • Coordinating the development or release of related items
    • Maturing a product or service
    • Coordinating interdependencies between work items

    Kanban

    Independent items are delivered as soon as each is ready.

    Use when:

    • Completing work items from ticketing or individual requests
    • Completing independent changes
    • Releasing changes as soon as possible

    Appendix D: Improving Product Management

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    Manage and communicate key milestones

    Successful product-delivery managers understand and define key milestones in their product-delivery lifecycles. These milestones need to be managed along with the product backlog and roadmap.

    Manage and communicate key milestones

    Info-Tech Best Practice
    Product management is not just about managing the product backlog and development cycles. Teams need to manage key milestones, such as learning milestones, test releases, product releases, phase gates, and other organizational checkpoints.

    A backlog stores and organizes product backlog items (PBIs) at various stages of readiness

    Organize product backlog at various stages of readiness

    A well-formed backlog can be thought of as a DEEP backlog:

    Detailed Appropriately: PBIs are broken down and refined as necessary.

    Emergent: The backlog grows and evolves over time as PBIs are added and removed.

    Estimated: The effort that a PBI requires is estimated at each tier.

    Prioritized: A PBI's value and priority are determined at each tier.

    Source: Perforce, 2018

    Backlog tiers facilitate product planning steps

    Ranging from the intake of an idea to a PBI ready for development; to enter the backlog, each PBI must pass through a given quality filter.

    Backlog tiers facilitate product planning steps

    Each activity is a variation of measuring value and estimating effort in order to validate and prioritize a PBI.

    A PBI successfully completes an activity and moves to the next backlog tier when it meets the appropriate criteria. Quality filters should exist between each tier.

    Use quality filters to ensure focus on the most important PBIs

    Expand the concepts of defining "ready" and "done" to include the other stages of a PBI's journey through product planning.

    Use quality filters to ensure focus on the most important PBIs

    Info-Tech Best Practice
    A quality filter ensures that quality is met and the appropriate teams are armed with the correct information to work more efficiently and improve throughput.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    In "Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision," we demonstrate how a product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path. As a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals, as well as your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    Info-Tech Insight
    The quality of your product backlog - and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline - is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

    Info-Tech's approach

    Operationally align product delivery to enterprise goals

    Operationally align product delivery to enterprise goals

    The Info-Tech Difference

    Create a common definition of what a product is and identify the products in your inventory.

    Use scaling patterns to build operationally aligned product families.

    Develop a roadmap strategy to align families and products to enterprise goals and priorities.

    Use products and families to assess value realization.

    Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}282|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Mobile Development
    • Parent Category Link: /mobile-development
    • IT managers don’t know where to start when initiating a mobile program.
    • IT has tried mobile development in the past but didn't achieve success.
    • IT must initiate a mobile program quickly based on business priorities and needs a roadmap based on best practices.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Form factors and mobile devices won't drive success – business alignment and user experience will. Don't get caught up with the latest features in mobile devices.
    • Software emulation testing is not true testing. Get on the device and run your tests.
    • Cross form-factor testing cannot be optimized to run in parallel. Therefore, anticipate longer testing cycles for cross form-factor testing.

    Impact and Result

    • Prepare your development, testing, and deployment teams for mobile development.
    • Get a realistic assessment of ROI for the launch of a mobile program.

    Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make the Case for a Mobile Program

    Understand the current mobile ecosystem. Use this toolkit to help you initiate a mobile development program.

    • Storyboard: Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration

    2. Assess Your Dev Process for Readiness

    Review and evaluate your current application development process.

    3. Prepare to Execute Your Mobile Program

    Prioritize your mobile program based on your organization’s prioritization profile.

    • Mobile Program Tool

    4. Communicate with Stakeholders

    Summarize the execution of the mobile program.

    • Project Status Communication Worksheet
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build your Future Mobile Development State

    The Purpose

    Understand the alignment of stakeholder objectives and priorities to mobile dev IT drivers.

    Assess readiness of your organization for mobile dev.

    Understand how to build your ideal mobile dev process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify and address the gaps in your existing app dev process.

    Build your future mobile dev state.

    Activities

    1.1 Getting started

    1.2 Assess your current state

    1.3 Establish your future state

    Outputs

    List of key stakeholders

    Stakeholder and IT driver mapping and assessment of current app dev process

    List of practices to accommodate mobile dev

    2 Prepare and Execute your Mobile Program

    The Purpose

    Assess the impact of mobile dev on your existing app dev process.

    Prioritize your mobile program.

    Understand the dev practice metrics to gauge success.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Properly prepare for the execution of your mobile program.

    Calculate the ROI of your mobile program.

    Prioritize your mobile program with dependencies in mind.

    Build a communication plan with stakeholders.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct an impact analysis

    2.2 Prepare to execute

    2.3 Communicate with stakeholders

    Outputs

    Impact analysis of your mobile program and expected ROI

    Mobile program order of execution and project dependencies mapping

    List of dev practice metrics

    Gain Real Insights with a Social Analytics Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}561|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Social media is wildly popular with consumers and as a result, many businesses are starting to develop a presence on social media services like Facebook and Twitter. However, many businesses still struggle with understanding how to leverage consumer insights from these services to drive business decisions. They’re intimidated by the sheer volume of social data, and aren’t sure what to do about it.
    • Companies that do have an analytics program are often operating it on an ad-hoc basis rather than making an effort to integrate social insights with existing sourcing of consumer data. In doing this, they’re failing to make holistic decisions and missing out on valuable consumer and competitive insights.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Social analytics are indispensable in gaining real-time insights across marketing, sales, and customer service. SMBs can use social analytics to gain valuable consumer insights at a significantly lower expense than traditional forms of market research.
    • The greatest value from social analytics comes when organizations marry social data sources with other forms of customer information, such as point-of-sale data, customer surveys, focus groups, and psychographic profiles.
    • Social analytics must be integrated with your broader BI program for maximum effect. Consider creating a Customer Insights Center of Excellence (CICOE) to serve as a one-stop shop for both traditional and social customer analytics.
    • IT has an invaluable role to play in helping to govern and manage the analytics program. A best-of-breed Social Media Management Platform is the key enabling technology for conducting analytics, and IT must assist with selection, implementation and operation of this solution.
    • Internal social analytics is an emerging field that allows you to gauge the sentiment of your employees, while turbocharging ideation and feedback processes. Social networking analysis is particularly valuable for internal analysis.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the value of a social analytics program and the various departmental use cases – how social analytics improves decision making and boosts critical KPIs like revenue attainment and customer satisfaction.
    • Determine the different social metrics (such as sentiment and frequency analysis) your business should be tracking and how to turn metrics into deep consumer insights.
    • Follow a step-by-step guide for successfully executing a social analytics program across your organization.
    • Roll out an internal analytics program to gauge the sentiment of your employees, improve engagement, and understand informal influencer networks.

    Gain Real Insights with a Social Analytics Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Determine the organization’s use cases

    Decide which functional areas in the organization will benefit the most from using social data, and create use cases accordingly.

    • Storyboard: Gain Real Insights with a Social Analytics Program

    2. Define and interpret metrics

    Identify and evaluate key social analytics metrics and understand the importance of combining multiple metrics to get the most out of the analytics program.

    • Social Analytics Maturity Assessment

    3. Execute the social analytics program

    Leverage a cross-departmental Social Media Steering Committee and evaluate SMMPs and other social analytics tools.

    • Social Analytics Specialist
    • Social Analytics Business Plan

    4. Leverage internal social analytics

    Identify specific uses of internal social analytics: crowd-sourcing ideation, harvesting employee feedback, and rewarding internal brand advocates.

    [infographic]

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}38|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}38|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Teaser Video: Visit Website
    • Teaser Video Title: Disaster Recovery Planning
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $92,268
    • member rating average days saved: 36
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk
    The show must go on. Make sure your IT has right-sized DR capabilities.

    Run Better Meetings

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}287|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Voice & Video Management
    • Parent Category Link: /voice-video-management

    Your newly hybrid workplace will include virtual, hybrid, and physical meetings, presenting several challenges:

    • The experience for onsite and remote attendees is not equal.
    • Employees are experiencing meeting and video fatigue.
    • Meeting rooms are not optimized for hybrid meetings.
    • The fact is that many people have not successfully run hybrid meetings before.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Successful hybrid workplace plans must include planning around hybrid meetings. Seamless hybrid meetings are the result of thoughtful planning and documented best practices.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify your current state and the root cause of unsatisfactory meetings.
    • Review and identify meetings best practices around meeting roles, delivery models, and training.
    • Improve the technology that supports meetings.
    • Use Info-Tech’s quick checklists and decision flowchart to accelerate meeting planning and cover your bases.

    Run Better Meetings Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should run better meetings, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the current state of meetings

    Understand the problem before you try to fix it. Before you can improve meetings, you need to understand what your norms and challenges currently are.

    • Checklist: Run a Virtual or Hybrid Meeting

    2. Publish best practices for how meetings should run

    Document meeting roles, expectations, and how meetings should run. Decide what kind of meeting delivery model to use and develop a training program.

    • Meeting Challenges and Best Practices
    • Meeting Type Decision Flowchart (Visio)
    • Meeting Type Decision Flowchart (PDF)

    3. Improve meeting technology

    Always be consulting with users: early in the process to set a benchmark, during and after every meeting to address immediate concerns, and quarterly to identify trends and deeper issues.

    • Team Charter
    • Communications Guide Poster Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Run Better Meetings

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Current State of Meetings

    The Purpose

    Understand the current state of meetings in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    What you need to keep doing and what you need to change

    Activities

    1.1 Brainstorm meeting types.

    1.2 Document meeting norms.

    1.3 Document and categorize meeting challenges.

    Outputs

    Documented challenges with meetings

    Meeting norms

    Desired changes to meeting norms

    2 Review and Identify Best Practices

    The Purpose

    Review and implement meeting best practices.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined meeting best practices for your organization

    Activities

    2.1 Document meeting roles and expectations.

    2.2 Review common meeting challenges and identify best practices.

    2.3 Document when to use a hybrid meeting, virtual meeting, or an in-person meeting.

    2.4 Develop a training program.

    Outputs

    Meeting roles and expectations

    List of meeting best practices

    Guidelines to help workers choose between a hybrid, virtual, or in-person meeting

    Training plan for meetings

    3 Improve Meeting Technology

    The Purpose

    Identify opportunities to improve meeting technology.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A strategy for improving the underlying technologies and meeting spaces

    Activities

    3.1 Empower virtual meeting attendees.

    3.2 Optimize spaces for hybrid meetings.

    3.3 Build a team of meeting champions.

    3.4 Iterate to build and improve meeting technology.

    3.5 Guide users toward each technology.

    Outputs

    Desired improvements to meeting rooms and meeting technology

    Charter for the team of meeting champions

    Communications Guide Poster

    Improve IT-Business Alignment Through an Internal SLA

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}455|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • The business is rarely satisfied with IT service levels, yet there is no clear definition of what is acceptable.
    • Dissatisfaction with service levels is often based on perception. Your uptime might be four 9s, but the business only remembers the outages.
    • IT is left trying to hit a moving target with a limited budget and no agreement on where services levels need to improve.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Business leaders have service level expectations regardless of whether there is a formal agreement. The SLA process enables IT to manage those expectations.
    • Track current service levels and report them in plain language (e.g. hours and minutes of downtime, not “how many 9s” which then need to be translated) to gain a clearer mutual understanding of current versus desired service levels.
    • Use past incidents to provide context (how much that hour of downtime actually impacted the business) in addition to a business impact analysis to define appropriate target service levels based on actual business need.

    Impact and Result

    Create an effective internal SLA by following a structured process to report current service levels and set realistic expectations with the business. This includes:

    • Defining the current achievable service level by establishing a metrics tracking and monitoring process.
    • Determining appropriate (not ideal) business needs.
    • Creating an SLA that clarifies expectations to reduce IT-business friction.

    Improve IT-Business Alignment Through an Internal SLA Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create an internal SLA, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Scope the pilot project

    Establish the SLA pilot project and clearly document the problems and challenges that it will address.

    • Improve IT-Business Alignment Through an Internal SLA – Phase 1: Scope the Pilot Project
    • Internal SLA Process Flowcharts (PDF)
    • Internal SLA Process Flowcharts (Visio)
    • Build an Internal SLA Project Charter Template
    • Internal SLA Maturity Scorecard Tool

    2. Establish current service levels

    Expedite the SLA process by thoroughly, carefully, and clearly defining the current achievable service levels.

    • Improve IT-Business Alignment Through an Internal SLA – Phase 2: Determine Current Service Levels
    • Availability and Reliability SLA Metrics Tracking Template
    • Service Desk SLA Metrics Tracking Template
    • Service Catalog SLA Metrics Tracking Template

    3. Identify target service levels and create the SLA

    Create a living document that aligns business needs with IT targets by discovering the impact of your current service level offerings through a conversation with business peers.

    • Improve IT-Business Alignment Through an Internal SLA – Phase 3: Set Target Service Levels and Create the SLA
    • SLA Project Roadmap Tool
    • Availability Internal Service Level Agreement Template
    • Service Catalog Internal Service Level Agreement Template
    • Service Desk Internal Service Level Agreement Template
    • Internal SLA Executive Summary Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}76|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • Amid the pandemic-fueled surge in online services, organizations require secure solutions to safeguard digital interactions. These solutions must be uniform, interoperable, and fortified against security threats.
    • Although the digital identity ecosystem has garnered significant attention and investment, many organizations remain uncertain about its potential for authentication and the authorization required for B2B and B2C transactions, and in turn reducing their cost of operations and transferring their data risks.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Limited / lack of understanding of the global digital ID ecosystem and its varying approaches across countries handicaps businesses in defining the benefits digital ID can bring to customer interactions and overall business management.
    • In addition, key obstacles exist in balancing customer privacy, data security, and regulatory requirements while pursuing excellent end-user experience and high customer adoption.
    • Info-Tech Insight: Focusing on customer touchpoints and transforming them are key to excellent experience and increasing their life-time value (LTV) to them and to your organization. Digital ID is that tool of transformation.

    Impact and Result

    • Digital ID has many dimensions, and its ecosystem's sustainability lies in the key principles it is built on. Understanding the digital identity ecosystem and its responsibilities is crucial to formulating an approach to adopt it. Also, focusing on key success factors drives digital ID adoption.
    • Before embarking on the digital identity adoption journey, it is essential to assess your readiness. It is also necessary to understand the risks and challenges. Specific steps to digital ID adoption can help realize the potential of digital identity and enhance the customers' experience.

    Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience Storyboard – Learn how to adopt Digital ID to drive benefits, enhance customer experience, improve efficiency, manage data risks, and uncover new opportunities.

    This research focuses on verified digital identity ecosystems and explores risks, opportunities, and challenges of relying on verified digital IDs and also how adopting digital identity initiatives can improve customer experience and operational efficiency. It covers:

  • Definition and dimensions of digital identity
  • Key responsibilities and principles of digital identity ecosystem
  • Success factors for digital identity adoption
  • Global evolution and unique approaches in Estonia, India, Canada, UK, and Australia
  • Industries that benefit most from digital ID development
  • Key use cases of digital ID
  • Benefits to governments, ID providers, ID consumers, and end users
  • Readiness checklist and ten steps to digital ID adoption
  • Risks and challenges of digital identity adoption
  • Key recommendations to realize potential of digital identity
  • Taxonomy and definitions of terms in the digital identity ecosystem
    • Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience Storyboard
    • Familiarize Yourself With the Digital ID Ecosystem Taxonomy
    • Assess Your Digital ID Adoption Readiness

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience

    Beyond the hype: How it can help you become more customer-focused?

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Amid the pandemic-fueled surge of online services, organizations require secure solutions to safeguard digital interactions. These solutions must be uniform, interoperable, and fortified against security threats.

    Although the digital identity ecosystem has garnered significant attention and investment, many organizations remain uncertain about its potential for authentication and authorization required for B2B and B2C transactions.

    They still wonder if digital ID can help reduce cost of operations and transfer data risks.

    Limited or lack of understanding of the global Digital ID ecosystem and its varying approaches across countries handicap businesses in defining the potential benefits Digital ID can bring to customer interactions and overall business management.

    In addition, key obstacles exist in balancing customer privacy (including the right to be forgotten), data security, and regulatory requirements while pursuing desired end-user experience and high customer adoption.

    Digital ID has many dimensions, and its ecosystem's sustainability lies in the key principles it is built on. Understanding the digital identity ecosystem and its responsibilities is crucial to formulate an approach to adopt it. Also, focusing on key success factors drives digital ID adoption.

    Before embarking on the digital identity adoption journey, it is essential to assess your readiness. It is also necessary to understand the risks and challenges. Specific steps to digital ID adoption can help realize the potential of digital identity and enhance the customers' experience.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focusing on customer touchpoints and transforming them is key to excellent user experience and increasing their lifetime value (LTV) to them and to your organization. Digital ID is that tool of transformation.

    Analyst Perspective

    Manish Jain.

    Manish Jain

    Principal Research Director

    Analyst Profile

    “I just believed. I believed that the technology would change people's lives. I believed putting real identity online - putting technology behind real identity - was the missing link.”

    - Sheryl Sandberg (Brockes, Emma. “Facebook’s Sheryl Sandberg: who are you calling bossy?” The Guardian, 5 April 2014)

    Sometimes dismissed as mere marketing gimmicks, digital identity initiatives are anything but. While some argue that any online credential is a "Digital ID," rendering the hype around it pointless, the truth is that a properly built digital ID ecosystem has the power to transform laggard economies into global digital powerhouses. Moreover, digital IDs can help businesses transfer some of their cybersecurity risks and unlock new revenue channels by enabling a foundation for secure and efficient value delivery.

    In addition, digital identity is crucial for digital and financial inclusion, simplifying onboarding processes and opening up new opportunities for previously underserved populations. For example, in India, the Aadhaar digital ID ecosystem brought over 481 million1 people into the formal economy by enabling access to financial services. Similarly, in Indonesia, the e-KIP digital ID program paved the way for 10 million new bank accounts, 94% of which were for women2.

    However, digital identity initiatives also come with valid concerns, such as the risk of a single point of failure and the potential to widen the digital divide.

    This research focuses on the verified digital identity ecosystem, exploring the risks, opportunities, and challenges organizations face relying on these verified digital IDs to know their customers before delivering value. By understanding and adopting digital identity initiatives, organizations can unlock their full potential and provide a seamless customer experience while ensuring operational efficiency.

    1 India Aadhaar PMJDY (https://pmjdy.gov.in/account)
    2 Women’s World Banking, 2020.

    Digital Identity Ecosystem and vital ingredients of adoption

    Digital Identity Ecosystem.

    What is digital identity?

    Definitions may vary, depending on the focus.

    “Digital identity (ID) is a set of attributes that links a physical person with their online interactions. Digital ID refers to one’s online persona - an online footprint. It touches important aspects of one’s everyday life, from financial services to health care and beyond.” - DIACC Canada

    “Digital identity is a digital representation of a person. It enables them to prove who they are during interactions and transactions. They can use it online or in person.” - UK Digital Identity and Attributes Trust Framework

    “Digital identity is an electronic representation of an entity (person or other entity such as a business) and it allows people and other entities to be recognized online.” - Australia Trusted Digital Identity Framework

    A digital identity is primarily an electronic form of identity representing an entity uniquely , while abstracting all other identity attributes of the entity. In addition to an electronic form, it may also exist in a physical form (identity certificate), linked through an identifier representing the same entity.

    Digital identity has many dimensions*, and in turn categories

    Trust

    • Verified (Govt. issued IDs)
    • Unverified (Email Id)

    Subject

    • Individual
    • Organization
    • Device
    • Service

    Usability

    • Single-purpose (Disposable)
    • Multi-purpose (Reusable)

    Provider

    • Sovereign Government
    • Provincial Government
    • Local Government
    • Public Organization
    • Private Organization
    • Self

    Jurisdiction

    • Global (Passport)
    • National (DL)
    • State/Provincial (Health Card)
    • Local (Voting Card)
    • Private (Social)

    Form

    • Physical Card
    • Virtual Identifier
    • Online/App Account
    • PKI Keys
    • Tokens

    Governance

    • Sovereign
    • Federated
    • Decentralized
    • Trust Framework -based
    • Self-sovereign

    Expiry

    • Permanent (Lifetime, Years)
    • Temporary (Minutes, Hours)
    • Revocable

    Usage Mode

    • online only
    • offline only
    • Online/offline

    Purpose

    • Authorization (driver’s license, passport, employment)
    • Authentication (birth certificate, social security number)
    • Activity Linking (preferences, habits, and priorities)
    • Historical Record (Resume, educational financial, health history)
    • Social Interactions (Social Media)
    • Machine Connectivity

    Info-Tech Insight

    Digital ID has taken different meanings for different people, serving different purposes in different environments. Based on various aspects of Digital Identification, it can be categorized in several types. However, most of the time when people refer to a form of identification as Digital ID, they refer to a verified id with built-in trust either from the government OR the eco-system.

    * Please refer to Taxonomy for the definition of each of the dimensions

    Understanding a digital identity ecosystem is key to formulating your approach to adopt it

    The image contains a screenshot of a digital identity ecosystem diagram.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Digital identity ecosystems comprise many entities playing different roles, and sometimes more than one. In addition, variations in approach by jurisdictions drive how many active players are in the ecosystem for that jurisdiction.

    For example, in countries like Estonia and India, government plays the role of trust and governance authority as well as ID provider, but didn’t start with any Digital ID wallet. In contrast, in Ukraine, Diia App is primarily a Digital ID Wallet. Similarly, in the US, different states are adopting private Digital ID Wallet providers like Apple.

    Digital ID ecosystem’s sustainability lies in the key principles it is built on

    Social, economic, and legal alignment with target stakeholders
    Transparent governance and operation
    Legally auditable and enforceable
    Robust and Resilient – High availability
    Security – At rest, in progress, and in transit
    Privacy and Control with users
    Omni-channel Convenience – User and Operations
    Minimum data transfer between entities
    Technical interoperability enabled through open standards and protocol
    Scalable and interoperable at policy level
    Cost effective – User and operations
    Inclusive and accessible

    Info-Tech Insight

    A transparent, resilient, and auditable digital ID system must be aligned with socio-economic realities of the target stakeholders. It not only respects their privacy and security of their data by minimizing the data transfer between entities, but also drives desired customer experience by providing an omni-channel, interoperable, scalable, and inclusive ecosystem while still being cost-effective for the collaborators.

    Source: Adapted from Canada PCTF, UK Trust framework, European Commission, Australia TDIF, and others

    Focus on key success factors to drive the digital ID adoption

    Digital ID success factors

    Legislative regulatory framework – Removes uncertainty
    Security & Privacy Assurance- builds trust
    Smooth user experience – Drives preferences
    Transparent ecosystem – Drives inclusivity
    Multi-channel – Drive consistent experience online / offline
    Inter-operability thorough open standards
    Digital literacy – Education and awareness
    Multi-purpose & reusable – Reduce consumer burden
    Collaborative ecosystem –Build network effect

    Source: Adapted from Canada PCTF, UK digital identity & attributes trust framework , European eIDAS, and others

    Info-Tech Insight

    Driving adoption of Digital ID requires affirmative actions from all ecosystem players including governing authorities, identity providers, and identity consumers (relying parties).

    These nine success factors can help drive sustainable adoption of the Digital ID.

    Among many responsibilities the ecosystem players have, identity governance is the key to sustainability

    • Digital identity provision
      • Creating identity attributes
      • Create a reusable identity and attribute service
      • Create a digital identity
      • Assess and manage quality of an identity and attributes
      • Making identity provision inclusive and accessible
    • Digital identity resolution
      • Enabling inclusive access to products and services through digital identity
      • Authenticate and authorize identity subjects before permitting access to their identity and attributes
    • Digital identity governance
      • Manage digital identity and attributes
      • Make Identity service interoperable, and sharable
      • Recover digital identity and attribute accounts
      • Notifying users on accessing identity or making changes on more attributes
      • Report and audit – exclusion, accessibility
      • Retiring an identity or attribute service
      • Respond to complaints and disputes
    • Enterprise risk management and governance
    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate how identity governance is the key to sustainability.
    • Privacy and security
      • Use encryption
      • Privacy compliance framework
      • Consumer Privacy Protection laws (CPPA, GDPR etc.)
      • Acquiring and managing user consents & agreements
      • Prohibited processing of personal data
      • Security controls and governance
    • Information management
      • Record management
      • Archival
      • Disposal (on expiry or to comply with regulations)
      • CIA (confidentiality, integrity, availability)
    • Fraud management
      • Fraud monitoring and reporting
      • Fraud intelligence and analysis
      • Sharing threat indicators
      • Legal, policies and procedures for fraud management
    • Incident response
      • Respond to fraud incidents
      • Respond to a service delivery incident
      • Responding to data breaches
      • Performing and participating in investigation

    Global evolution of digital ID is following the socio-economic aspirations of countries

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph that demonstrates global evolution of digital ID.

    Source: Adapted from the book: Identification Revolution: Can Digital ID be harnessed for Development? (Gelb & Metz), 2018

    Info-Tech Insight

    The world became global a long time ago; however, it sustained economic progress without digital IDs for most of the world's population.

    With the pandemic, when political rhetoric pointed to the demand for localized supply chains, economies became irreversibly digital. In this digital economy, the digital ID ecosystem is the fulcrum of sustainable growth.

    At a time in overlapping jurisdictions, multiple digital IDs can exist. For example, one is issued by a local municipality, one by the province, and another by the national government.

    Global footprint of digital ID is evolving rapidly, but varies in approach

    The image contains a screenshot of a Global footprint of digital ID.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Countries’ approach to the digital ID is rooted in their socio-economic environment and global aspirations.

    Emerging economies with large underserved populations prioritize fast implementation of digital ID through centralized systems.

    Developed economies with smaller populations, low trust in government, and established ID systems prioritize developing trust frameworks to drive decentralized full-scale implementation.

    There is no right way except the one which follows Digital ID principles and aligns with a country’s and its people’s aspirations.

    Estonia's e-identity is the key to its digital agenda 2030

    • Regulatory Body and Operational Governance: Estonian Information System Authority (RIA).
    • Identity Providers: Government of Estonia; Private sector doesn’t issue IDs but can leverage Digital ID ecosystem.
    • Decentralized Approach: Permissioned Blockchain Architecture with built-in data traceability implemented on KSI (Keyless Signature Infrastructure).
    • X-Road – Secure, interoperable open-source data exchange platform between collection point where Data is stored.
    • Digital Identity Form: e-ID
    • Key Use cases:
      • Financial, Telecom: e-KYC, e-Banking
      • Digital Authentication: ID Card, Mobile ID, Smart ID, Digital Signatures
      • E-governance: e-Voting, e-Residency, e-Services Registries, e-Business Register
      • Smart City and mobility: Freight Transportation, Passenger Mobility
      • Healthcare: e-Health Record, e-Prescription, e-Ambulance
    • ID-card
    • Smart ID
    • Mobile ID
    • e-Residency

    Uniqueness

    Estonia pioneered the digital ID implementation with a centralized approach and later transitioned to a decentralized ecosystem driving trust to attract non-citizens into Estonia’s digital economy.

    99% Of Estonian residents have an ID card enabling use of electronic ID

    1.4 B Digital signatures given (2021)

    99% Public Services available as e-Services

    17K+ Productive years saved (five working days/citizen/year saved accessing public services)

    25K E-resident companies contributed more than €32 million in tax

    *Source: https://e-estonia.com/wp-content/uploads/e-estonia-211022_eng.pdf ;

    https://www.e-resident.gov.ee/dashboard

    The image contains a timeline of events from 2001-2020 for Estonia..

    India’s Aadhaar is the foundation of its digital journey through “India stack”

    • Regulatory Accountability and Operational Governance: Unique Identification Authority of India (UIDAI).
    • Identity Provider: Govt. of India.
    • Digital Identity Form: Physical and electronic ID Card; Online (Identifier + OTP), and offline (identifier + biometric) usage; mAadhaar App & Web Portal
    • India Stack: a set of open APIs and digital assets to leverage Aadhaar in identity, data, and payments at scale.
    • Key Use cases:
      • Financial, Telecom: eKYC, Unified Payments Interface (UPI)
      • Digital Wallet: Digi Locker
      • Digital Authentication: eSign, and Aadhaar Auth.
      • Public Welfare: Public Distribution of Service, Social Pension, Employment Guarantee
      • Public service access: Enrollment to School, Healthcare

    1.36B People enrolled

    80% Beneficiaries feel Aadhaar has made PDS, employment guarantee and social pensions more reliable

    91.6% Are very satisfied or somewhat satisfied with Aadhaar

    14B eKYC transactions done by 218 eKYC authentication agencies (KUA)

    Source: https://uidai.gov.in/aadhaar_dashboard/india.php; https://www.stateofaadhaar.in/

    World Bank Report on Private Sector Impacts from ID

    Uniqueness

    “The Aadhaar digital identity system could reduce onboarding costs for Indian firms from 1,500 rupees to as low as an estimated 10 rupees.”

    -World Bank Report on Private Sector Impacts from ID

    With lack of public trust in private sector, government brought in private sector executives in public ecosystem to lead the largest identity program globally and build the India stack to leverage the power of Digital Identity.

    The image contains a screenshot of India's Aadhaar timeline from 2009-2022.

    Ukraine’s Diia is a resilient act to preserve their identities during threat to their existence

    Regulatory Accountability and Operational Governance: Ministry of Digital Transformation.

    Identity provider: Federated govt. agencies.

    Digital identity form: Diia App & Portal as a digital wallet for all IDs including digital driving license.

    • Key use cases:
      • eGovernance – Issuing license and permits, business registration, vaccine certificates.
      • Public communication: air-raid alerts, notifications, court decisions and fines.
      • Financial, Telecom: KYC compliance, mobile donations.
      • eBusiness: Diia City legal framework for IT industry, Diia Business Portal for small and medium businesses.
      • Digital sharing and authentication: Diia signature and Diia QR.
      • Public service access: Diia Education Portal for digital education and digital skills development, healthcare.

    18.5M People downloaded the Diia app.

    14 Digital IDs provided by other ID providers are available through Diia.

    70 Government services are available through Diia.

    ~1M Private Entrepreneurs used Diia to register their companies.

    1300 Tons of paper estimated to be saved by reducing paper applications for new IDs and replacements.

    Source:

    • Ukraine Govt. Website for Invest and trade
    • Diia Case study prepared for the office of Canadian senator colin deacon.

    Uniqueness

    “One of the reasons for the Diia App's popularity is its focus on user experience. In September 2022, the Diia App simplified 25 public services and digitized 16 documents. The Ministry of Digital Transformation aims to make 100% of all public services available online by 2024.”

    - Vladyslava Aleksenko

    Project Lead—digital Identity, Ukraine

    The image contains a screenshot of the timeline for Diia.

    Canada’s PCTF (Pan Canadian Trust Framework) driving the federated digital identity ecosystem

    • Regulatory Accountability: Treasury Board of Canada Secretariat (TBS); Canadian Digital Service (CDS); Office of CIO
    • Standard Setting: Digital Identification and Authentication Council of Canada (DIACC)
    • Frameworks:
      • Treasury Board Directive on Identity Management
      • Pan Canadian Trust Framework (PCTF)
      • Voilà Verified Trustmark Program: ISO aligned compliance certification program on PCTF
      • Governing / Certificate Authority: Trustmark Oversight Board (TOB) and DIACC accredited assessor
      • Operational Governance: Federated between identity providers and identity consumers
      • Identity Providers: Public and Private Sector
      • Other entities involved: Digital ID Lab (Voila Verified Auditor); Kuma (Accredited Assessor)
    The image contains a screenshot of PCTF Components.

    82% People supportive of Digital ID.

    2/3 Canadians prefer public-private partnership for Pan-Canadian digital ID framework.

    >40% Canadians prefer completing various tasks and transactions digitally.

    75% Canadians are willing to share personal information for better experience.

    >80% Trust government, healthcare providers, and financial institutions with their personal information.

    Source: DIACC Survey 2021

    Uniqueness

    Although a few provinces in Canada started their Digital ID journey already, federally, Canada lacked an approach.

    Now Canada is developing a federated Digital ID ecosystem driven through the Pan-Canadian Trust Framework (PCTF) led by a non-profit (DIACC) formed with public and private partnership.

    The image contains a screenshot of Canada's PCTF timeline from 2002-2025.

    Australia’s digital id is pivotal to its vision to become one of the Top-3 digital governments globally by 2025*

    * Australia Digital Government Strategy 2021
    • Regulatory responsibility and standard: Digital Transformation Agency (DTA)’s Digital Identity
    • Operational support and oversight: Service Australia, Interim Oversight Authority (IOA).
    • Accredited identity providers (by 2022): Australian Taxation Office (ATO)’s myGovID, Australia Post’s Digital ID, MasterCard’s ID, OCR Labs App
    • Framework: Trusted Digital Identity Framework (TDIF)
      • Digital Identity Exchange
      • Identity Service Providers and Attribute Verification Service
      • Attribute Service Providers
      • Credential Service Providers
      • Relying Parties
    • Others: States such as NSW, Victoria, and Queensland have their own digital identity programs

    8.6M People using myGovID by Jun-2022

    117 Services accessible through Digital Id System

    The image contains a screenshot diagram of Digital Identity.

    Uniqueness

    Australia started its journey of Digital ID with a centralized Digital ID ecosystem.

    However, now it preparing to transition to a centrally governed Trust framework-based ecosystem expanding to private sector.

    The image contains a screenshot of Australia's Digital id timeline from 2014-2022.

    UK switches gear to the Trust Framework approach to build a public-private digital ID ecosystem

    • Government: Ministry of Digital Infrastructure / Department of Digital, Culture, Media, and Sport
    • Governing Body / Certificate Authority / Operational Governance: TBD
    • Approach: Trust Framework-based UK Digital Identity and attributes trust framework (UKDIATF)
    • Identity providers: Transitioning from “GOV.UK Verify” to a federated digital identity system aligned with “Trust Framework” – enabling both government (“One Login for Government”) and private sector identity providers.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Trust Framework.

    Uniqueness

    UK embarked its Digital ID journey through Gov.UK Verify but decided to scrap it recently.

    It is now preparing to build a trust framework-based federated digital ID ecosystem with roles like schema-owners and orchestration service providers for private sector and drive the collaboration between industry players.

    The image contains a screenshot of UK timeline from 2011-2023.

    Digital ID will transform all industries, though financial services and e-governance will gain most

    Cross Industry

    Financial Services

    Insurance

    E-governance

    Healthcare & Lifesciences

    Travel and Tourism

    E-Commerce

    • Onboarding (customer, employee, patient, etc.)
    • Fraud-prevention (identity theft)
    • Availing restricted services (buying liquor)
    • Secure-sharing of credentials and qualifications (education, experience, gig worker)
    • For businesses, customer 360
    • For businesses, reliable data-driven decision making with lower frequency of ‘astroturfing’ (false identities) and ‘ballot-stuffing’ (duplicate identities)
    • Account opening
    • Asset transfer
    • Payments
    • For businesses, risk management - know your customer (KYC), anti-money laundering (AML), customer due diligence (CDD)
    • Insurance history
    • Insurance claim
    • Public distribution schemes (PDS)
    • Subsidy payments (direct to consumer)
    • Obtain government benefits (maternity, pension, employment guarantee / insurance payments)
    • Tax filing
    • Issuing credentials (birth certificate, passport)
    • Voting
    • For businesses, availing governments supports
    • For SMB businesses, easier regulatory compliance
    • Digital health
    • Out of state public healthcare
    • Secure access to health and diagnostic records
    • For businesses, data sharing between providers and with payers
    • Travel booking
    • Cross-border travel
    • Car rental
    • Secure peer-to-peer sales
    • Secure peer-to-peer sales

    USE CASE

    Car rental

    INDUSTRY: Travel & Tourism

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    Verifying the driver’s license (DL) is the first step a car rental company takes before handing over the keys.

    While the rental company only need to know the validity of the DL and if it belongs to the presenter, is bears the liability of much more data presented to them through the DL.

    For customers, it is impossible to rent a car if they forget their DL. If the customer has their driver’s license, they compromise their privacy and security as they hand over their license to the representative.

    The process is not only time consuming, it also creates unnecessary risks to both the business and the renter.

    A digital id-based rental process allows the renter to present the digital id online or in person.

    As the customer approaches the car rental they present their digital id on the mobile app, which has already authenticated the presenter though the biometrics or other credentials.

    The customer selects the purpose of the business as “Car Rental”, and only the customer’s name, photo, and validity of the DL appear on the screen for the representative to see (selective disclosures).

    If the car pick-up is online, only this information is shared with the car rental company, which in turn shares the car and key location with the renter.

    A digital identity-based identity verification can ensure a rental company has access to the minimum data it needs to comply with local laws, which in turn reduces its data leak risk.

    It also reduces customer risks linked to forgetting the DL, and data privacy.

    Digital identity also reduces the risk originated from identity fraud leading to stolen cars.

    USE CASE

    e-Governance public distribution service

    INDUSTRY: Government

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    In both emerging and developed economies, public distribution of resources – food, subsidies, or cash – is a critical process through which many people (especially from marginalized sections) survive on.

    They often either don’t have required valid proof of identity or fall prey to low-level corruption when someone defrauds them by claiming the benefit.

    As a result, they either completely miss out on claiming government-provided social benefits OR only receive a part of what they are eligible for.

    A Digital ID based public distribution can help created a Direct Benefit Transfer ecosystem.

    Here beneficiaries register (manually OR automatically from other government records) for the benefits they are eligible for.

    On the specific schedule, they receive their benefit – monetary benefit in their bank accounts, and non-cash benefits, in person from authorized points-of-sales (POS), without any middleman with discretionary decision powers on the distribution.

    India launched its Financial Inclusion Program (Prime Minister's Public Finance Scheme) in 2014.

    The program was linked with India’s Digital Id Aadhaar to smoothen the otherwise bureaucratic and discretionary process for opening a bank account.

    In last eight years, ~481M (Source: PMJDY) beneficiaries have opened a bank account and deposited ~ ₹1.9Trillion (USD$24B), a part of which came as social benefits directly deposited to these accounts from the government of India.

    USE CASE

    Real-estate investment and sale

    INDUSTRY: Asset Management

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    “Impersonators posing as homeowners linked to 32 property fraud cases in Ontario and B.C.” – Global News Canada1

    “The level of fraud in the UK is such that it is now a national security threat” – UK Finance Lobby Group2

    Real estate is the most expensive investment people make in their lives. However, lately it has become a soft target for title fraud. Fraudsters steal the title to one’s home and sell it or apply for a new mortgage against it.

    At the root cause of these fraud are usually identity theft when a fraudster steals someone’s identity and impersonates them as the title owner.

    Digital identity tagged to the home ownership / title record can reduce the identity fraud in title transfer.

    When a person wants to sell their house OR apply for a new mortgage on house, multiple notifications will be triggered to their contact attributes on digital ID – phone, email, postal address, and digital ID Wallet, if applicable.

    The homeowner will be mandated to authorize the transaction on at least two channels they had set as preferred, to ensure that the transaction has the consent of the registered homeowner.

    This process will stop any fraud transactions until at least two modes are compromised.

    Even if two modes are compromised, the real homeowner will receive the notification on offline communication modes, and they can then alert the institution or lawyer to block the transaction.

    It will especially help elderly people, who are more prone to fall prey to identity frauds when somebody uses their IDs to impersonate them.

    1 Global News (https://globalnews.ca/news/9437913/homeowner-impersonators-lined-32-fraud-cases-ontario-bc/)

    2 UK Finance Lobby Group (https://www.ukfinance.org.uk/system/files/Half-year-fraud-update-2021-FINAL.pdf)

    Adopting digital ID benefits everybody – governments, id providers, id consumers, and end users

    Governments & identity providers

    (public & private)

    Customers and end users

    (subjects)

    Identity consumer

    (relying parties)

    • Growth in GDP
    • Save costs of providing identity
    • Unlock new revenue source by economic expansion
    • Choice and convenience
    • Control of what data is shared
    • Experience driven by simplicity and data minimalization
    • Reduced cost of availing services
    • Operational efficiency
    • Overall cost efficiency of delivering service and products
    • Reduce risk of potential litigation
    • Reduce risk of fraud
    • Enhanced customer experience leading to increased lifetime value
    • Streamlined storage and access
    • Encourage innovation

    Digital ID will transform all industries, though financial services and e-governance will gain most

    Governments and identity providers (public and private)

    • Growth in GDP by reducing bureaucracy and discretion from the governance processes.
      • As per a McKinsey report, digital ID could unlock the economic value equivalent of 3%-13% of GDP across seven focus countries (Brazil, Ethiopia, India, Nigeria, China, UK, USA) in 2030.
      • “Estonia saves two percent of GDP by signing things digitally; imagine if it could go global.” - aavi Rõivas, Prime Minister of the Republic of Estonia (International Peace Institute)
    • Unlock new revenue source by economic expansion.
      • Estonia earned €32 million in tax revenue from e-resident companies (e-Estonia).
    • Save costs of providing identity in collaboration with 3rd parties and reduce fraud.
      • Canada estimates savings of $482 million for provincial and federal governments, and $4.5 billion for private sector organizations through digital id adoption (2022 Budget Statement).

    Digital ID brings end users choice, convenience, control, and cost-saving, driving overall experience

    Customers and end users (subjects)

    • Choice: Citizens have the choice and convenience to interact safely and conveniently online and offline.
    • Convenience: No compulsion to make physical trips to access service, as end users can identify themselves safely and reliably online, as they do offline.
    • Control: A decentralized, privacy enhancing solution – neither government nor private companies control your digital ID. How and when you use digital ID is entirely up to you.
    • Cost Saving: Save costs of availing service by reducing the offline documentation.
    • Experience: Improved experience while availing service without a need to present multiple documents every time.

    Digital id benefits identity consumers by enhancing multiple dimensions of their value streams

    Identity consumer (relying parties)

    • Operational efficiency: Eliminating unnecessary steps and irrelevant data from the value stream increases overall operational efficiency.
    • Cost efficiency: Helps businesses to reduce overall cost of operations like regulatory requirements.
      • World Bank estimated that the Aadhaar could reduce onboarding costs for Indian firms from ₹1,500/- ($23) to as low as an estimated ₹10/- ($0.15) (*World Bank ID4D)
    • Reduce risk of potential litigation issues: Encourage data minimization.
    • Privacy and security: Businesses can reduce the risk of fraud to organizations and users and can significantly boost the privacy and security of their IT assets.
    • Enhanced customer experience: The decrease in the number of touchpoints and faster turnaround.
    • Streamlined storage and access: Store all available data in a single place, and when required.
    • Encourage innovation: Reduce efforts required in authentication and authorization of users.

    Before embarking on the digital identity adoption journey, assess your readiness

    Legislative coverage

    Does your target jurisdiction have adequate legislative framework to enable uses of digital identities in your industry?

    Trust framework

    If the Digital ID ecosystem in your target jurisdiction is trust framework-based, do you have adequate understanding of it?

    Customer touch-points

    Do you have exact understanding of value stream and customer touch-points where you interact with user identity?

    Relevant identity attributes

    Do you have exact understanding of the identity attributes that your business processes need to deliver customer value?

    Regulatory compliance

    Do you have required systems to ensure your compliance with industry regulations around customer PII and identity?

    Interoperability with IMS

    Is your existing identity management system interoperable with Open-source Digital Identity ecosystem?

    Enterprise governance

    Have you established an integrated enterprise governance framework covering business processes, technical systems, and risk management?

    Communication strategy

    Do have a clear strategy (mode, method, means) to communicate with your target customer and persuade them to adopt digital identity?

    Security operations center

    Do you have security operations center coordinating detection, response, resolution, and communication of potential data breaches?

    Ten steps to adopt to enhance the customer experience

    Considering the complexity of digital identity adoption, and its impact on customer experience, it is vital to assess the ecosystem and adopt an MVP approach before a big-bang launch.

    Diagram to help assess the ecosystem.

    1. Define the use case and identify the customer touchpoint in the value stream which can be improved with a verified digital identity.
    2. Ensure your organization is ready to adopt digital identity (Refer to Digital identity adoption readiness),
    3. Identify an Identity Service Provider (Government, private sector), if there are options.
    4. Understand its technical requirements and assess, to the finer detail, your technical landscape for interoperability.
    5. Set-up a business contract for terms of usages and liabilities.
    6. Create and execute a Minimum Viable Program (MVP) of integration which can be tested with real customers.
    7. Extend MVP to the complete solution and define key success metrics.
    8. Canary-launch with a segment of target customers before a full launch.
    9. Educate customers on the usages and benefits, and adapt your communication plan taking feedback
    10. Monitor and continuously improve the solution based on the feedback from ecosystem partners and end-customers, and regulatory changes.

    Understand and manage the risks and challenges of digital identity adoption

    Digital ID adoption is a major change for everyone in the ecosystem.

    Manage associated risks to avoid the derailing of integration with your business processes and a negative impact on customer experience.

    Manage Risks.

    1. Privacy and security risks – Customer’s sensitive data may get centralized with the identity provider.
    2. Single point of failure while relying a specific IDs; it also increases the impact of identity theft and fraud risk.
    3. Centralization and control risks – Identity provider or identity service broker / orchestrator may control who can participate.
    4. Not universal, interoperability risks – if purpose-specific.
    5. Impact omni-channel experience - Not always available (legal / printable) for offline use.
    6. Exclusion and discrimination risks – Specific data requirements may exclude a group of people.
    7. Scope for misuse and misinterpretation if compromised and not reclaimed in timely manner.
    8. Adoption and usability risks – Subjects / relying parties may not see benefit due to lack of awareness or suspicion.
    9. Liability Agreement gaps between identity provider and identity consumer (relying party).

    Recommendations to help you realize the potential of digital identity into your value streams

    1

    Customer-centricity

    Digital identity initiative should prioritize customer experience when evaluating its fit in the value stream. Adopting it should not sacrifice end-user experience to gain a few brownie points.

    See Info-Tech’s Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization blueprint, to ensure customer remains at the center of your Digital Adoption initiative.

    2

    Privacy and security

    Adopting digital identity reduces data risk by minimizing data transfer between providers and consumers. However, securing identity attributes in value streams still requires strengthening enterprise security systems and processes.

    See Info-Tech’s Assess and Govern Identity Security blueprint for the actions you may take to secure and govern digital identity.

    3

    Inclusion and awareness

    Adopting digital identity may alter customer interaction with an organization. To avoid excluding target customer segments, design digital identity accordingly. Educating and informing customers about the changes can facilitate faster adoption.

    See Info-Tech’s Social Media blueprint and IT Diversity & Inclusion Tactics to make inclusion and awareness part of digital adoption

    4

    Quantitative success metrics

    To measure the success of a digital ID adoption program, it's essential to use quantitative metrics that align with business KPIs. Some measurable KPIs may include:

    • Reduction in number of IDs business used to serve 90% of customers
    • Reduction in overall cost of operation
      • Reduction in cost of user authentication
    • Reduction in process cycle time (less time required to complete a task – e.g. KYC)

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues..

    Attributes: An identity attribute is a statement or information about a specific aspect of entity’s identity ,substantiating they are who they claim to be, own, or have.

    Attribute (or Credential) provider: An attribute or credential provider could be an organization which issues the primary attribute or credential to a subject or entity. They are also responsible for identity-attribute binding, credential maintenance, suspension, recovery, and authentication.

    Attribute (or Credential) service provider: An attribute service provider could be an organization which originally vetted user’s credentials and certified a specific attribute of their identity. It could also be a software, such as digital wallet, which can store and share a user’s attribute with a third party once consented by the user. (Source: UK Govt. Trust Framework)

    Attribute binding: This is a process an attribute service providers uses to link the attributes they created to a person or an organization through an identifier. This process makes attributes useful and valuable for other entities using these attributes. For example, when a new employee joins a company, they are given a unique employee number (an identifier), which links the person with their job title and other aspects (attributes) of his job. (Source: UK Govt. Trust Framework)

    Authentication service provider: An organization which is responsible for creating and managing authenticators and their lifecycle (issuance, suspension, recovery, maintenance, revocation, and destruction of authenticators). (Source: DIACC)

    Authenticator: Information or biometric characteristics under the control of an individual that is a specific instance of something the subject has, knows, or does. E.g. private signing keys, user passwords, or biometrics like face, fingerprints. (Source: Canada PCTF)

    Authentication (identity verification): The process of confirming or denying that the identity presented relates to the subject who is making the claim by comparing the credentials presented with the ones presented during identity proofing.

    Authorization: The process of validating if the authenticated entity has permission to access a resource (service or product).

    Biometrics attributes: Human attributes like retina (iris), fingerprint, heartbeat, facial, handprint, thumbprint, voice print.

    Centralized identity: Digital identities which are fully governed by a centralized government entity. It may have enrollment or registration agencies, private or public sector, to issue the identities, and the technical system may still be decentralized to keep data federated.

    Certificate Authority (CA or accredited assessors): An organization or an entity that conducts assessments to validate the framework compliance of identity or attribute providers (such as websites, email addresses, companies, or individual persons) serving other users, and binding them to cryptographic keys through the issuance of electronic documents known as digital certificates.

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues..

    Collective (non-resolvable) attributes: Nationality, domicile, citizenship, immigration status, age group, disability, income group, membership, (outstanding) credit limit, credit score range.

    Contextual identity: A type of identity which establishes an entity’s existence in a specific context – real or virtual. These can be issued by public or private identity providers and are governed by the organizational policies. E.g. employee ID, membership ID, social media ID, machine ID.

    Credentials: A physical or a digital representation of something that establishes an entity’s eligibility to do something for which it is seeking permission, or an association/affiliation with another, generally well-known entity. E.g. Passport, DL, password. In the context of Digital Identity, every identity needs to be attached with a credential to ensure that the subject of the identity can control how and by whom that identity can be used.

    Cryptographic hash function: A hash function is a one-directional mathematical operation performed on a message of any length to get a unique, deterministic, and fixed size numerical string (the hash) which can’t be reverse engineered to get the input data without deploying disproportionate resources. It is the foundation of modern security solutions in DLT / blockchain as they help in verifying the integrity and authenticity of the message.

    Decentralized identity (DID) or self-sovereign identity: This is a way to give back the control of identity to the subject whose identity it is, using an identity wallet in which they collect verified information about themselves from certified issuers (such as the government). By controlling what information is shared from the wallet to requesting third parties (e.g. when registering for a new online service), the user can better manage their privacy, such as only presenting proof that they’re over 18 without needing to reveal their date of birth. Source: (https://www.gsma.com/identity/decentralised-identity)

    Digital identity wallet: A type of digital wallet refers to a secure, trusted software applications (native mobile app, mobile web apps, or Rivas-hosted web applications) based on common standards, allowing a user to store and use their identity attributes, identifiers, and other credentials without loosing or sharing control of them. This is different than Digital Payment Wallets used for financial transactions. (Source: https://www.worldbank.org/content/dam/photos/1440x300/2022/feb/eID_WB_presentation_BS.pdf)

    Digital identity: A digital identity is primarily an electronic form of identity representing an entity uniquely , while abstracting all other identity attributes of the entity. In addition to an electronic form, it may also exist in a physical form (identity certificate), linked through an identifier representing the same entity. E.g. Estonia eID , India Aadhar, digital citizenship ID.

    Digital object architecture: DOA is an open architecture for interoperability among various information systems, including ID wallets, identity providers, and consumers. It focuses on digital objects and comprises three core components: the identifier/resolution system, the repository system, and the registry system. There are also two protocols that connect these components. (Source: dona.net)

    Digital signature: A digital signature is an electronic, encrypted stamp of authentication on digital information such as email messages, macros, or electronic documents. A signature confirms that the information originated from the signer and has not been altered. (Source: Microsoft)

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues..

    Entity (or Subject): In the context of identity, an entity is a person, group, object, or a machine whose claims need to be ascertained and identity needs to be established before his request for a service or products can be fulfilled. An entity can also be referred to as a subject whose identity needs to be ascertained before delivering a service.

    Expiry: This is another dimension of an identity and determines the validity of an ID. Most of the identities are longer term, but there can be a few like digital tokens and URLs which can be issued for a few hours or even minutes. There are some which can be revoked after a pre-condition is met.

    Federated identity: Federated identity is an agreement between two organizations about the definition and use of identity attributes and identifiers of a consumer entity requesting a service. If successful, it allows a consumer entity to get authenticated by one organization (identity provider) and then authorized by another organization. E.g. accessing a third-party website using Google credentials.

    Foundational identity: A type of identity which establishes an entity’s existence in the real world. These are generally issued by public sector / government agencies, governed by a legal farmwork within a jurisdiction, and are widely accepted at least in that jurisdiction. E.g. birth certificate, citizenship certificate.

    Governance: This is a dimension of identity that covers the governance model for a digital ID ecosystem. While traditionally it has been under the sovereign government or a federated structure, in recent times, it has been decentralized through DLT technologies or trust-framework based. It can also be self-sovereign, where individuals fully control their data and ID attributes.

    Identifier: A digital identifier is a string of characters that uniquely represents an entity’s identity in a specific context and scope even if one or more identity attributes of the subject change over time. E.g. driver’s license, SSN, SIN, email ID, digital token, user ID, device ID, cookie ID.

    Identity: An identity is an instrument used by an entity to provide the required information about itself to another entity in order to avail a service, access a resource, or exercise a privilege. An identity formed by 1-n identity attributes and a unique identifier.

    Identity and access management (IAM): IAM is a set of frameworks, technologies, and processes to enable the creation, maintenance, and use of digital identity, ensuring that the right people gain access to the right materials and records at the right time. (Source: https://iam.harvard.edu/)

    Identity consumer (Relying party): An organization, or an entity relying on identity provider to mitigate IT risks around knowing its customers before delivering the end-user value (product/service) without deteriorating end-user experience. E.g. Canada Revenue Agency using SecureKey service and relying on Banking institutions to authenticate users; Telecom service providers in India relying on Aadhaar identity system to authenticate the customer's identity.

    Identity form: A dimension of identity that defines its forms depending on the scope it wants to serve. It can be a physical card for offline uses, a virtual identifier like a number, or an app/account with multiple identity attributes. Cryptographic keys and tokens can also be forms of identity.

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues...

    Identity infrastructure provider: Organizations involved in creating and maintaining technological infrastructure required to manage the lifecycle of digital identities, attributes, and credentials. They implement functions like security, privacy, resiliency, and user experience as specified in the digital identity policy and trust framework.

    Identity proofing: A process of asserting the identification of a subject at a useful identity assurance level when the subject provides evidence to a credential service provider (CSP), reliably identifying themselves. (Source: NIST Special Publication 800-63A)

    Identity provider (Attestation authority): An organization or an entity validating the foundation or contextual claims of a subject and establishing identifier(s) for a subject. E.g. DMV (US) and MTA (Canada) issuing drivers’ licenses; Google / Facebook issuing authentication tokens for their users logging in on other websites.

    Identity validation: The process of confirming or denying the accuracy of identity information of a subject as established by an authorized party. It doesn’t ensure that the presenter is using their own identity.

    Identity verification (Authentication): The process of confirming or denying that the identity presented relates to the subject who is making the claim by comparing the credentials presented with the ones presented during identity proofing.

    Internationalized resource identifier (IRI): IRIs are equivalent to URIs except that IRIs also allow non-ascii characters in the address space, while URIs only allow us-ascii encoding. (Source: w3.org)

    Jurisdiction: A dimension of identity that covers the physical area or virtual space where an identity is legally acceptable for the purpose defined under law. It can be global, like it is for passport, or it can be local within a municipality for specific services. For unverified digital IDs, it can be the social network.

    Multi-factor Authentication (MFA): Multi-factor authentication is a layered approach to securing digital assets (data and applications), where a system requires a user to present a combination of two or more credentials to verify a user’s identity for login. These factors can be a combination of (i) something you know like a password/PIN; (ii) something you have like a token on mobile device; and (iii) something you are like a biometric. (Adapted from https://www.cisa.gov/publication/multi-factor-authentication-mfa)

    Oauth (Open authorization): OAuth is a standard authorization protocol and used for access delegation. It allows internet users to access websites by using credentials managed by a third-party authorization server / Identity Provider. It is designed for HTTP and allows access tokens to be issued by an authorization server to third-party websites. E.g. Google, Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn use Oauth to delegate access.

    OpenID: OpenID is a Web Authentication Protocol and implements reliance authentication mechanism. It facilitates the functioning of federated identity by allowing a user to use an existing account (e.g. Google, Facebook, Yahoo) to sign into third-party websites without needing to create new credentials. (Source: https://openid.net/).

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues...

    Personally identifiable information (PII): PII is a set of attributes which can be used, through direct or indirect means, to infer the real-world identity of the individual whose information is input. E.g. National ID (SSN/SIN/Aadhar) DL, name, date of birth, age, address, age, identifier, university credentials, health condition, email, domain name, website URI (web resolvable) , phone number, credit card number, username/password, public key / private key. (Source: https://www.dol.gov)

    Predicates: The mathematical or logical operations such as equality or greater than on attributes (e.g. prove your salary is greater than x or your age is greater than y) to prove a claim without sharing the actual values.

    Purpose: This dimension of a digital id defines for what purpose digital id can be used. It can be one or many of these – authentication, authorization, activity linking, historical record keeping, social interactions, and machine connectivity for IoT use cases.

    Reliance authentication: Relying on a third-party authentication before providing a service. It is a method followed in a federated entity system.

    Risk-based authentication: A mechanism to protect against account compromise or identity theft. It correlates an authentication request with transitional facts like requester’s location, past frequency of login, etc. to reduce the risk of potential fraud.

    Scheme in trust framework: A specific set of rules (standard and custom) around the use of digital identities and attributes as agreed by one or more organizations. It is useful when those organizations have similar products, services, business processes. (Source: UK Govt. Trust Framework). E.g. Many credit unions agree on how they will use the identity in loan origination and servicing.

    Selective disclosure (Assertion): A way to present one’s identity by sharing only a limited amount information that is critical to make an authentication / authorization decision. E.g. when presenting your credentials, you could share something proving you are 18 years or above, but not share your name, exact age, address, etc.

    Trust: A dimension of an identity, which essentially is a belief in the reliability, truth, ability, or strength of that identity. While in the physical world all acceptable form of identities come with a verified trust, in online domain, it can be unverified. Also, where an identity is only acceptable as per the contract between two entities, but not widely.

    Trust framework: The trust framework is a set of rules that different organizations agree to follow to deliver one or more of their services. This includes legislation, standards, guidance, and the rules in this document. By following these rules, all services and organizations using the trust framework can describe digital identities and attributes they’ve created in a consistent way. This should make it easier for organizations and users to complete interactions and transactions or share information with other trust framework participants. (Source: UK Govt. Trust Framework)

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues...

    Uniform resource identifier (URI): A universal name in registered name spaces and addresses referring to registered protocols or name spaces.

    Uniform resource locator (URL): A type of URI which expresses an address which maps onto an access algorithm using network protocols. (Source: https://www.w3.org/)

    Uniform resource name (URN): A type of URI that includes a name within a given namespace but may not be accessible on the internet.

    Usability: A dimension of identity that defines how many times it can be used. While most of the identities are multi-use, a few digital identities are in token form and can be used only once to authenticate oneself.

    Usage mode: A dimension of identity that defines the service mode in which a digital ID can be used. While all digital IDs are made for online usage, many can also be used in offline interactions.

    Verifiable credentials: This W3C standard specification provides a standard way to express credentials on the Web in a way that is cryptographically secure, privacy-respecting, and machine-verifiable. (Source: https://www.w3.org/TR/vc-data-model/)

    X.509 Certificates: X.509 certificates are standard digital documents that represent an entity providing a service to another entity. They're issued by a certification authority (CA), subordinate CA, or registration authority. These certificates play an important role in ascertaining the validity of an identity provider and in turn the identities issued by it. (Source: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/iot-hub/reference-x509-certificates)

    Zero-knowledge proofs: A method by which one party (the prover) can prove to another party (the verifier) that something is true, without revealing any information apart from the fact that this specific statement is true. (Source: 1989 SIAM Paper)

    Zero-trust security: A cybersecurity paradigm focused on resource protection and the premise that trust is never granted implicitly but must be continually evaluated. It evaluates each access request as if it is a fraud attempt, and grants access only if it passes the authentication and authorization test. (Source: Adapted from NIST, SP 800-207: Zero Trust Architecture, 2020)

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap
    Leverage an iterative and repeatable process to apply zero trust to your organization.

    Assess and Govern Identity Security
    Strong identity security and governance are the keys to the zero-trust future.

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization
    Innovation needs design thinking to ensure customer remains at the center of everything the organization does.

    Social Media
    Leveraging Social Media to connect with your customers and educate them to drive the value proposition of your efforts.

    IT Diversity & Inclusion Tactics
    Equip your teams to create an inclusive environment and mobilize inclusion efforts across the organization.


    Research Contributors and Experts

    David Wallace

    David Wallace
    Executive Counselor

    Erik Avakian

    Erik Avakian
    Technical Counselor, Data Architecture and Governance

    Matthew Bourne

    Matthew Bourne
    Managing Partner, Public Sector Global Services

    Mike Tweedie

    Mike Tweedie
    Practice Lead, CIO Research Development

    Aaron Shum

    Aaron Shum
    Vice President, Security & Privacy

    Works Cited

    India Aadhaar PMJDY (https://pmjdy.gov.in/account)
    Theis, S., Rusconi, G., Panggabean, E., Kelly, S. (2020). Delivering on the Potential of Digitized G2P: Driving Women’s Financial Inclusion and Empowerment through Indonesia’s Program Keluarga Harapan. Women’s World Banking.
    DIACC Canada (https://diacc.ca/the-diacc/)
    UK digital identity & attributes trust framework alpha v2 (0.2) - GOV.UK (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    Australia Trusted Digital Identity Framework (https://www.digitalidentity.gov.au/tdif#changes)
    eIDAS (https://digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/policies/eidas-regulation)
    Europe Digital Wallet – POTENTIAL (https://www.digital-identity-wallet.eu/)
    Canada PCTF (https://diacc.ca/trust-framework/)
    Identification Revolution: Can Digital ID be harnessed for Development? (Gelb & Metz), 2018
    e-Estonia website (https://e-estonia.com/solutions/e-identity/id-card/)
    Aadhaar Dashboard (https://uidai.gov.in/)
    DIACC Website (https://diacc.ca/the-diacc/)
    Australia Digital ID website (https://www.digitalidentity.gov.au/tdif#changes)
    UK Policy paper - digital identity & attributes trust framework (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    Ukraine Govt. website (https://ukraine.ua/invest-trade/digitalization/)
    Singapore SingPass Website (https://www.tech.gov.sg/products-and-services/singpass/)
    Norway BankID Website (https://www.bankid.no/en/private/about-us/)
    Brazil National ID Card website (https://www.gov.br/casacivil/pt-br/assuntos/noticias/2022/julho/nova-carteira-de-identidade-nacional-modelo-unico-a-partir-de-agosto)
    Indonesia Coverage in Professional Security Magazine (https://www.professionalsecurity.co.uk/products/id-cards/indonesian-cards/)
    Philippine ID System (PhilSys) website (https://www.philsys.gov.ph/)
    China coverage on eGovReview (https://www.egovreview.com/article/news/559/china-announces-plans-national-digital-ids)
    Thales Group Website - DHS’s Automated Biometric Identification System IDENT (https://www.thalesgroup.com/en/markets/digital-identity-and-security/government/customer-cases/ident-automated-biometric-identification-system)
    FranceConnect (https://franceconnect.gouv.fr/)
    Germany: Office for authorization cert. (https://www.personalausweisportal.de/Webs/PA/DE/startseite/startseite-node.html)
    Italian Digital Services Authority (https://www.spid.gov.it/en/)
    Monacco Mconnect (https://mconnect.gouv.mc/en)
    Estonia eID (https://e-estonia.com/wp-content/uploads/e-estonia-211022_eng.pdf)
    E-Residency Dashboard (https://www.e-resident.gov.ee/dashboard)
    Unique ID authority of India (https://uidai.gov.in/aadhaar_dashboard/india.php)
    State of Aadhaar (https://www.stateofaadhaar.in/)
    World Bank (https://documents1.worldbank.org/curated/en/219201522848336907/pdf/Private-Sector-Economic-Impacts-from-Identification-Systems.pdf)
    WorldBank - ID4D 2022 Annual Report (https://documents.worldbank.org/en/publication/documents-reports/documentdetail/099437402012317995/idu00fd54093061a70475b0a3b50dd7e6cdfe147)
    Ukraine Govt. Website for Invest and trade (https://ukraine.ua/invest-trade/digitalization/)
    Diia Case study prepared for the office of Canadian senator colin deacon (https://static1.squarespace.com/static/63851cbda1515c69b8a9a2b9/t/6398f63a9d78ae73d2fd5725/1670968891441/2022-case-study-report-diia-mobile-application.pdf)
    Canadian Digital Identity Research (https://diacc.ca/wp-content/uploads/2022/04/DIACC-2021-Research-Report-ENG.pdf)
    Voilà Verified Trustmark (https://diacc.ca/voila-verified/)
    Digital Identity, 06A Federation Onboarding Guidance paper, March 2022 (https://www.digitalidentity.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-04/TDIF%2006A%20Federation%20Onboarding%20Guidance%20-%20Release%204.6%20%28Doc%20Version%201.2%29.pdf)
    UK digital identity & attributes trust framework alpha v2 (0.2) - GOV.UK (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    A United Nations Estimate of KYC/AML (https://www.imf.org/Publications/fandd/issues/2018/12/imf-anti-money-laundering-and-economic-stability-straight)
    India Aadhaar PMJDY (https://pmjdy.gov.in/account)
    Global News (https://globalnews.ca/news/9437913/homeowner-impersonators-lined-32-fraud-cases-ontario-bc/)
    UK Finance Lobby Group (https://www.ukfinance.org.uk/system/files/Half-year-fraud-update-2021-FINAL.pdf) McKinsey Digital ID report ( https://www.mckinsey.com/capabilities/mckinsey-digital/our-insights/digital-identification-a-key-to-inclusive-growth) International Peace Institute ( https://www.ipinst.org/2016/05/information-technology-and-governance-estonia#7)
    E-Estonia Report (https://e-estonia.com/wp-content/uploads/e-estonia-211022_eng.pdf)
    2022 Budget Statement (https://diacc.ca/2022/04/07/2022-budget-statement/)
    World Bank ID4D - Private Sector Economic Impacts from Identification Systems 2018 (https://documents1.worldbank.org/curated/en/219201522848336907/Private-Sector-Economic-Impacts-from-Identification-Systems.pdf)
    DIACC Canada (https://diacc.ca/the-diacc/)
    UK digital identity & attributes trust framework alpha v2 (0.2) - GOV.UK (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    https://www.gsma.com/identity/decentralised-identity
    https://www.worldbank.org/content/dam/photos/1440x300/2022/feb/eID_WB_presentation_BS.pdf
    Microsoft Digital signatures and certificates (https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/office/digital-signatures-and-certificates-8186cd15-e7ac-4a16-8597-22bd163e8e96)
    https://www.worldbank.org/content/dam/photos/1440x300/2022/feb/eID_WB_presentation_BS.pdf
    https://www.dona.net/digitalobjectarchitecture
    IAM (https://iam.harvard.edu/)
    NIST Special Publication 800-63A (https://pages.nist.gov/800-63-3/sp800-63a.html)
    https://www.cisa.gov/publication/multi-factor-authentication-mfa
    https://openid.net/
    U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR (https://www.dol.gov/)
    UK govt. trust framework (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    https://www.w3.org/
    Verifiable Credentials Data Model v1.1 (https://www.w3.org/TR/vc-data-model/)
    https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/iot-hub/reference-x509-certificates

    Annual CIO Survey Report 2024

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}106|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    CIOs today face increasing pressures, disruptive emerging technologies, talent shortages, and a slew of other challenges. What are their top concerns, priorities, and technology bets that will define the future direction of IT?

    CIO responses to our Future of IT 2024 survey reveal key insights on spending projects, the potential disruptions causing the most concern, plans for adopting emerging technology, and how firms are responding to generative AI.

    See how CIOs are sizing up the opportunities and threats of the year ahead

    Map your organization’s response to the external environment compared to CIOs across geographies and industries. Learn:

    • The CIO view on continuing concerns such as cybersecurity.
    • Where they rate their IT department’s maturity.
    • What their biggest concerns and budget increases are.
    • How they’re approaching third-party generative AI tools.

    Annual CIO Survey Report 2024 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Future of IT Survey 2024 – A summary of key insights from the CIO responses to our Future of IT 2024 survey.

    Take the pulse of the IT industry and see how CIOs are planning to approach 2024.

    • Annual CIO Survey Report for 2024
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Annual CIO Survey Report 2024

    An inaugural look at what's on the minds of CIOs.

    1. Firmographics

    • Region
    • Title
    • Organization Size
    • IT Budget Size
    • Industry

    Firmographics

    The majority of CIO responses came from North America. Contributors represent regions from around the world.

    Countries / Regions Response %
    United States 47.18%
    Canada 11.86%
    Australia 9.60%
    Africa 6.50%
    China 0.28%
    Germany 1.13%
    United Kingdom 5.37%
    India 1.41%
    Brazil 1.98%
    Mexico 0.56%
    Middle East 4.80%
    Asia 0.28%
    Other country in Europe 4.52%

    n=354

    Firmographics

    A typical CIO respondent held a C-level position at a small to mid-sized organization.

    Half of CIOs hold a C-level position, 10% are VP-level, and 20% are director level

    Pie Chart of CIO positions

    38% of respondents are from an organization with above 1,000 employees

    Pie chart of size of organizations

    Firmographics

    A typical CIO respondent held a C-level position at a small to mid-sized organization.

    40% of CIOs report an annual budget of more than $10 million

    Pie chart of CIO annual budget

    A range of industries are represented, with 29% of respondents in the public sector or financial services

    Range of industries

    2. Key Factors

    • IT Maturity
    • Disruptive Factors
    • IT Spending Plans
    • Talent Shortage

    Two in three respondents say IT can deliver outcomes that Support or Optimize the business

    IT drives outcomes

    Most CIOs are concerned with cybersecurity disruptions, and one in four expect a budget increase of above 10%

    How likely is it that the following factors will disrupt your business in the next 12 months?

    Chart for factors that will disrupt your business

    Looking ahead to 2024, how will your organization's IT spending change compared to spending in 2023?

    Chart of IT spending change

    3. Adoption of Emerging Technology

    • Fastest growing tech for 2024 and beyond

    CIOs plan the most new spend on AI in 2024 and on mixed reality after 2024

    Top five technologies for new spending planned in 2024:

    1. Artificial intelligence - 35%
    2. Robotic process automation or intelligent process automation - 24%
    3. No-code/low-code platforms - 21%
    4. Data management solutions - 14%
    5. Internet of Things (IoT) - 13%

    Top five technologies for new spending planned after 2024:

    1. Mixed reality - 20%
    2. Blockchain - 19%
    3. Internet of Things (IoT) - 17%
    4. Robotics/drones - 16%
    5. Robotic process automation or intelligent process automation - 14%

    n=301

    Info-Tech Insight
    Three in four CIOs say they have no plans to invest in quantum computing, more than any other technology with no spending plans.

    4. Adoption of AI

    • Interest in generative AI applications
    • Tasks to be completed with AI
    • Progress in deploying AI

    CIOs are most interested in industry-specific generative AI applications or text-based

    Rate your business interest in adopting the following generative AI applications:

    Chart for interest in AI

    There is interest across all types of generative AI applications. CIOs are least interested in visual media generators, rating it just 2.4 out of 5 on average.

    n=251

    Info-Tech Insight
    Examples of generative AI solutions specific to the legal industry include Litigate, CoCounsel, and Harvey.

    By the end of 2024, CIOs most often plan to use AI for analytics and repetitive tasks

    Most popular use cases for AI by end of 2024:

    1. Business analytics or intelligence - 69%
    2. Automate repetitive, low-level tasks - 68%
    3. Identify risks and improve security - 66%
    4. IT operations - 62%
    5. Conversational AI or virtual assistants - 57%

    Fastest growing uses cases for AI in 2024:

    1. Automate repetitive, low-level tasks - 39%
    2. IT operations - 38%
    3. Conversational AI or virtual assistants - 36%
    4. Business analytics or intelligence - 35%
    5. Identify risks and improve security - 32%

    n=218

    Info-Tech Insight
    The least popular use case for AI is to help define business strategy, with 45% saying they have no plans for it.

    One in three CIOs are running AI pilots or are more advanced with deployment

    How far have you progressed in the use of AI?

    Chart of progress in use of AI

    Info-Tech Insight
    Almost half of CIOs say ChatGPT has been a catalyst for their business to adopt new AI initiatives.

    5. AI Risk

    • Perceived impact of AI
    • Approach to third-party AI tools
    • AI features in business applications
    • AI governance and accountability

    Six in ten CIOs say AI will have a positive impact on their organization

    What overall impact do you expect AI to have on your organization?

    Overall impact of AI on organization

    The majority of CIOs are waiting for professional-grade generative AI tools

    Which of the following best describes your organization's approach to third-party generative AI tools (such as ChatGPT or Midjourney)?

    Third-party generative AI

    Info-Tech Insight
    Business concerns over intellectual property and sensitive data exposure led OpenAI to announce ChatGPT won't use data submitted via its API for model training unless customers opt in to do so. ChatGPT users can also disable chat history to avoid having their data used for model training (OpenAI).

    One in three CIOs say they are accountable for AI, and the majority are exploring it cautiously

    Who in your organization is accountable for governance of AI?

    Governance of AI

    More than one-third of CIOs say no AI governance steps are in place today

    What AI governance steps does your organization have in place today?

    Chart of AI governance steps

    Among organizations that plan to invest in AI in 2024, 30% still say there are no steps in place for AI governance. The most popular steps to take are to publish clear explanations about how AI is used, and to conduct impact assessments (n=170).

    Chart of AI governance steps

    Among all CIOs, including those that do not plan to invest in AI next year, 37% say no steps are being taken toward AI governance today (n=243).

    6. Contribute to Info-Tech's Research Community

    • Volunteer to be interviewed
    • Attend LIVE in Las Vegas

    It's not too late; take the Future of IT online survey

    Contribute to our tech trends insights

    If you haven't already contributed to our Future of IT online survey, we are keeping the survey open to continue to collect insights and inform our research reports and agenda planning process. You can take the survey today. Those that complete the survey will be sent a complimentary Tech Trends 2024 report.

    Complete an interview for the Future of IT research project

    Help us chart the future course of IT

    If you are receiving this for completing the Future of IT online survey, thank you for your contribution. If you are interested in further participation and would like to provide a complementary interview, please get in touch at brian.Jackson@infotech.com. All interview subjects must also complete the online survey.

    If you've already completed an interview, thank you very much, and you can look forward to seeing more impacts of your contribution in the near future.

    LIVE 2023

    Methodology

    All data in this report is from Info-Tech's Future of IT online survey 2023 edition.

    A CIO focus for the Future of IT

    Data in this report represents respondents to the Future of IT online survey conducted by Info-Tech Research Group between May 11 and July 7, 2023.

    Only CIO respondents were selected for this report, defined as those who indicated they are the most senior member of their organization's IT department.

    This data segment reflects 355 total responses with 239 completing every question on the survey.

    Further data from the Future of IT online survey and the accompanying interview process will be featured in Info-Tech's Tech Trends 2024 report this fall and in forthcoming Priorities reports including Applications, Data & EA, CIO, Infrastructure, and Security.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}175|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Your organization has started to realize benefits from adopting Agile principles and practices. However, these advances are contained within your IT organization.
    • You are seeking to extend Agile development beyond IT into other areas of the organization. You are looking for a coordinated approach aligned to business priorities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Not all lessons from scaling Agile to IT are transferable. IT Agile scaling processes are tailored to IT’s scope, team, and tools, which may not account for diverse attributes within your organization.
    • Control may be necessary for coordination. With increased time-to-value, enforcing consistent cadences, reporting, and communication is a must if teams are not disciplined or lack good governance.
    • Extend Agile in departments tolerant to change. Incrementally roll out Agile in departments where its principles are accepted (e.g. a culture that embraces failures as lessons).

    Impact and Result

    • Complete an assessment of your prior efforts to scale Agile across IT to gauge successful, consistent adoption. Identify the business objectives and the group drivers that are motivating the extension of Agile to the business.
    • Understand the challenges that you may face when extending Agile to business partners. Investigate the root causes of existing issues that can derail your efforts.
    • Ideate solutions to your scaling challenges and envision a target state for your growing Agile environment. Your target state should realize new opportunities to drive more business value and eliminate current activities driving down productivity.
    • Coordinate the implementation and execution of your scaling Agile initiatives with an implementation action plan. This collaborative document will lay out the process, roles, goals, and objectives needed to successfully manage your Agile environment.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should extend Agile practices to improve product delivery, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess your readiness to scale agile vertically

    Assess your readiness to scale Agile vertically by identifying and mitigating potential Agile maturity gaps remaining after scaling Agile across your IT organization.

    • Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT – Phase 1: Assess Your Readiness to Scale Agile Vertically
    • Agile Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Establish an enterprise scaled agile framework

    Complete an overview of various scaled Agile models to help you develop your own customized delivery framework.

    • Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT – Phase 2: Establish an Enterprise Scaled Agile Framework
    • Framework Selection Tool

    3. Create your implementation action plan

    Determine the effort and steps required to implement your extended delivery framework.

    • Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT – Phase 3: Create Your Implementation Action Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Current State of Agile Maturity

    The Purpose

    Assess your readiness to scale Agile vertically.

    Identify and mitigate potential Agile maturity gaps remaining after scaling Agile across your IT organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    IT Agile maturity gaps identified and mitigated to ensure successful extension of Agile to the business

    Activities

    1.1 Characterize your Agile implementation using the CLAIM model.

    1.2 Assess the maturity of your Agile teams and organization.

    Outputs

    Maturity gaps identified with mitigation requirements

    2 Establish an Enterprise Scaled Agile Framework

    The Purpose

    Complete a review of scaled Agile models to help you develop your own customized delivery framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A customized Agile delivery framework

    Activities

    2.1 Explore various scaled frameworks.

    2.2 Select an appropriate scaled framework for your enterprise.

    2.3 Define the future state of your team and the communication structure of your functional business group.

    Outputs

    Blended framework delivery model

    Identification of team and communication structure impacts resulting from the new framework

    3 Create Your Implementation Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Create your implementation action plan for the new Agile delivery framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clearly defined action plan

    Activities

    3.1 Define your value drivers.

    3.2 Brainstorm the initiatives that must be completed to achieve your target state.

    3.3 Estimate the effort of your Agile initiatives.

    3.4 Define your Agile implementation action plan.

    Outputs

    List of target state initiatives

    Estimation of effort to achieve target state

    An implementation action plan

    Passwordless Authentication

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}466|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing
    • Stakeholders believe that passwords are still good enough.
    • You don’t know how the vendor products match to the capabilities you need to offer.
    • What do you need to test when you prototype these new technologies?
    • What associated processes/IT domains will be impacted or need to be considered?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Passwordless is the right direction even if it’s not your final destination.

    Impact and Result

    • Be able to handle objections from those who believe passwords are still “fine.”
    • Prioritize the capabilities you need to offer the enterprise, and match them to products/features you can buy from vendors.
    • Integrate passwordless initiatives with other key functions (cloud, IDaM, app rationalization, etc.).

    Passwordless Authentication Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Passwordless Authentication – Know when you’ve been beaten!

    Back in 2004 we were promised "the end of passwords" – why, then, are we still struggling with them today?

    • Passwordless Authentication Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Passwordless Authentication

    Know when you've been beaten!

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • The IT world is an increasingly dangerous place.
    • Every year literally billions of credentials are compromised and exposed on the internet.
    • The average employee has between 27 and 191 passwords to manage.
    • The line between business persona and personal persona has been blurred into irrelevancy.
    • You need a method of authenticating users that is up to these challenges

    Common Obstacles

    • Legacy systems aside (wouldn't that be nice) this still won't be easy.
    • Social inertia – passwords worked before, so surely, they can still work today! Besides, users don't want to change.
    • Analysis paralysis – I don't want to get this wrong! How do I choose something that is going to be at the core of my infrastructure for the next 10 years?
    • Identity management – how can you fix authentication when people have multiple usernames?

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Inaction is not an option.
    • Most commercial, off-the-shelf apps are moving to a SaaS model, so start your efforts with them.
    • Your existing vendors already have technologies you are underusing or ignoring – stop that!
    • Your users want this change – they just might not know it yet…
    • Much like zero trust network access, the journey is more important than the destination. Incremental steps on the path toward passwordless authentication will still yield significant benefits.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Users have been burdened with unrealistic expectations when it comes to their part in maintaining enterprise security. Given the massive rise in the threat landscape, it is time for Infrastructure to adopt a user-experience-based approach if we want to move the needle on improving security posture.

    Password Security Fallacy

    "If you buy the premise…you buy the bit."
    Johnny Carson

    We've had plenty of time to see this coming.

    Why haven't we done something?

    • Passwords are a 1970s construct.
    • End-users are complexity averse.
    • Credentials are leaked all the time.
    • New technologies will defeat even the most complex passwords.

    Build the case, both to business stakeholders and end users, that "password" is not a synonym for "security."

    Be ready for some objection handling!

    This is an image of Bill Gates and Gavin Jancke at the 2004 RSA Conference in San Francisco, CA

    Image courtesy of Microsoft

    RSA Conference, 2004
    San Francisco, CA

    "There is no doubt that over time, people are going to rely less and less on passwords. People use the same password on different systems, they write them down and they just don't meet the challenge for anything you really want to secure."
    Bill Gates

    What about "strong" passwords?

    There has been a password arms race going on since 1988

    A massive worm attack against ARPANET prompted the initial research into password strength

    Password strength can be expressed as a function of randomness or entropy. The greater the entropy the harder for an attacker to guess the password.

    This is an image of Table 1 from Google Cloud Solutions Architects.  it shows the number of bits of entropy for a number of Charsets.

    Table: Modern password security for users
    Ian Maddox and Kyle Moschetto, Google Cloud Solutions Architects

    From this research, increasing password complexity (length, special characters, etc.) became the "best practice" to secure critical systems.

    How many passwords??

    XKCD Comic #936 (published in 2011)

    This is an image of XKCD Comic # 936.

    Image courtesy of Randall Munroe XKCD Comics (CC BY-NC 2.5)

    It turns out that humans however are really bad at remembering complex passwords.

    An Intel study (2016) suggested that the average enterprise employee needed to remember 27 passwords. A more recent study from LastPass puts that number closer to 191.

    PEBKAC
    Problem Exists Between Keyboard and Chair

    Increasing entropy is the wrong way to fight this battle – which is good because we'd lose anyway.

    Over the course of a single year, researchers at the University of California, Berkeley identified and tracked nearly 2 billion compromised credentials.

    3.8 million were obtained via social engineering, another 788K from keyloggers. That's approx. 250,000 clear text credentials harvested every week!

    The entirety of the password ecosystem has significant vulnerabilities in multiple areas:

    • Unencrypted server- and client-side storage
    • Sharing
    • Reuse
    • Phishing
    • Keylogging
    • Question-based resets

    Even the 36M encrypted credentials compromised every week are just going to be stored and cracked later.

    Source: Google, University of California, Berkeley, International Computer Science Institute

     data-verified=22B hash/s">

    Image courtesy of NVIDIA, NVIDIA Grace

    • Current GPUs (2021) have 200+ times more cracking power than CPU systems.

    <8h 2040-bit RSA Key

    Image: IBM Quantum System One (CES 2020) by IBM Research is licensed under CC BY-ND 2.0

    • Quantum computing can smash current encryption methods.
    • Google engineers have demonstrated techniques that reduce the number of qubits required from 1B to a mere 20 million

    Enabling Technologies

    "Give me a place to stand, and a lever long enough, and I will move the world."
    Archimedes

    Technology gives us (too many) options

    The time to prototype is NOW!

    Chances are you are already paying for one or more of these technologies from a current vendor:

    • SSO, password managers
    • Conditional access
    • Multifactor
    • Hardware tokens
    • Biometrics
    • PINs

    Address all three factors of authentication

    • Something the user knows
    • Something the user has
    • Something the user is

    Global Market of $12.8B
    ~16.7% CAGR
    Source: Report Linker, 2022.

    Focus your prototype efforts in four key testing areas

    • Deployment
    • User adoption/training
    • Architecture (points of failure)
    • Disaster recovery

    Three factors for positive identification

    Passwordless technologies focus on alternate authentication factors to supplement or replace shared secrets.

    Knows: A secret shared between the user and the system; Has: A token possessed by the user and identifiable as unique by the system; Is: A distinctive and repeatable attribute of the user sampled by the system

    Something you know

    Shared secrets have well-known significant modern-day problems, but only when used in isolation. For end users, consider time-limited single use options, password managers, rate-limited login attempts, and reset rather than retrieval requests. On the system side, never forget strong cryptographic hashing along with a side of salt and pepper when storing passwords.

    Something you have

    A token (now known as a cryptographic identification device) such as a pass card, fob, smartphone, or USB key that is expected to be physically under the control of the user and is uniquely identifiable by the system. Easily decoupled in the event the token is lost, but potentially expensive and time-consuming to reprovision.

    Something you are or do

    Commonly referred to as biometrics, there are two primary classes. The first is measurable physical characteristics of the user such as a fingerprint, facial image, or retinal scan. The second class is a series of behavioral traits such as expected location, time of day, or device. These traits can be linked together in a conditional access policy.

    Unlike other authentication factors, biometrics DO NOT provide for exact matches and instead rely on a confidence interval. A balance must be struck against the user experience of false negatives and the security risk of a false positive.

    Prototype testing criteria

    Deployment

    Does the solution support the full variety of end-user devices you have in use?

    Can the solution be configured with your existing single sign-on or central identity broker?

    User Experience

    Users already want a better experience than passwords.

    What new behavior are you expecting (compelling) from the user?

    How often and under what conditions will that behavior occur?

    Architecture

    Where are the points of failure in the solution?

    Consider technical elements like session thresholds for reauthorization, but also elements like automation and self-service.

    Disaster Recovery

    Understand the exact responsibilities Infra&Ops have in the event of a system or user failure.

    As many solutions are based in the public cloud, manage stakeholder expectations accordingly.

    Next Steps

    "Move the goalposts…and declare victory."
    Informal Fallacy (yet very effective…)

    It is more a direction than a destination…

    Get the easy wins in the bank and then lay the groundwork for the long campaign ahead.

    You're not going to get to a passwordless world overnight. You might not even get there for many years. But an agile approach to the journey ensures you will realize value every step of the way:

    • Start in the cloud:
    • Choose a single sign-on platform such as Azure Active Directory, Okta, Auth0, AWS IAM, TruSONA, HYPR, or others. Document Your Cloud Strategy.
    • Integrate the SaaS applications from your portfolio with your chosen platform.
    • Establish visibility and rationalize identity management:
      • Accounts with elevated privileges present the most risk – evaluate your authentication factors for these accounts first.
      • There is elegance (and deployment success) in Simplifying Identity & Access Management.
    • Pay your tech debt:

    Fast IDentity Online (2) is now part of the web's DNA and is critical for digital transformation

    • IoT
    • Anywhere remote work
    • Government identity services
    • Digital wallets

    Bibliography

    "Backup Vs. Archiving: Know the Difference." Open-E. Accessed 05 Mar 2022.Web.
    G, Denis. "How to Build Retention Policy." MSP360, Jan 3, 2020. Accessed 10 Mar 2022.
    Ipsen, Adam. "Archive Vs. Backup: What's the Difference? A Definition Guide." BackupAssist, 28 Mar 2017. Accessed 04 Mar 2022.
    Kang, Soo. "Mitigating the Expense of E-Discovery; Recognizing the Difference Between Back-Ups and Archived Data." Zasio Enterprises, 08 Oct 2015. Accessed 3 Mar 2022.
    Mayer, Alex. "The 3-2-1 Backup Rule – An Efficient Data Protection Strategy." Naviko. Accessed 12 Mar 2022.
    Steel, Amber. "LastPass Reveals 8 Truths about Passwords in the New Password Exposé." LastPass Blog, 1 Nov. 2017. Web.
    "The Global Passwordless Authentication Market Size Is Estimated to Be USD 12.79 Billion in 2021 and Is Predicted to Reach USD 53.64 Billion by 2030 With a CAGR of 16.7% From 2022-2030." Report Linker, 9 June 2022. Web.
    "What Is Data-Archiving?" Proofpoint. Accessed 07 Mar 2022.

    Cybersecurity in Healthcare 2024

    Healthcare cybersecurity is a major concern for healthcare organizations and patients alike. In 2024, the healthcare industry faces several cybersecurity challenges, including the growing threat of ransomware, the increasing use of mobile devices in healthcare, and the need to comply with new regulations.

    Continue reading

    Design a VIP Experience for Your Service Desk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}480|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • VIPs and executives expect to get immediate service for every IT issue, no matter how minor, and the service desk is constantly in reactive mode trying to quickly resolve these issues.
    • VIPs don’t understand or have input into service desk processes, procedures, and SLAs, especially when it comes to prioritization of their issues over other tickets.
    • The C-suite calls the CIO directly with every issue they have, tying them up and forcing them to redirect resources with little notice.
    • VIP tickets sit in the queue too long without a response or resolution, and VIPs are dissatisfied with the service they receive.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service desk and IT leaders are unclear on VIPs' service delivery expectations or the best support model to meet their needs while continuing to meet SLAs for the rest of the organization.
    • Deploying resources to service VIPs ahead of other users or more critical problems can result in inappropriate prioritization of issues and poor service delivery to the rest of the organization.
    • The reality for most organizations is that VIPs need special treatment; but providing VIP service shouldn’t come at the expense of good service delivery for the rest of the organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Stop being reactive to VIP requests and start planning for them so you can formally define the service and set expectations.
    • Talk to all relevant stakeholders to clarify their expectations before choosing a VIP service delivery model. Once you have designed your model, define and document the VIP service processes and procedures and communicate them to your stakeholders so everyone is clear on what is in and out of scope.
    • Once you’ve launched the service, track and report on key service desk metrics associated with VIP requests so you can properly allocate resources, budget accurately, evaluate the effectiveness of the service and demonstrate it to executives.

    Design a VIP Experience for Your Service Desk Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Design a VIP Experience for Your Service Desk Storyboard – A guide to defining your VIP service desk support model

    Follow the seven steps outlined in this blueprint to design a VIP support model that best suits your organization, then communicate and evaluate the service to ensure it delivers results.

    • Design a VIP Experience for Your Service Desk Storyboard

    2. Service Desk VIP Procedures Template – A customizable template to document your service desk procedures for handling VIP tickets.

    This template is designed to assist with documenting your service desk procedures for handling VIP or executive tickets. It can be adapted and customized to reflect your specific support model and procedures.

    • Service Desk VIP Procedures Template

    3. VIP Support Process Workflow Example – A Visio template to document your process for resolving VIP tickets.

    This Visio template provides an example of a VIP support process, with every step involved in resolving or fulfilling VIP service desk tickets. Use this as an example to follow and a template to document your own process.

    • VIP Support Process Workflow Example

    4. VIP Support Service Communication Template – A customizable PowerPoint template to communicate and market the service to VIP users.

    This template can be customized to use as an executive presentation to communicate and market the service to VIP users and ensure everyone is on the same page.

    • VIP Support Service Communication Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Design a VIP Experience for Your Service Desk

    Keep the C-suite satisfied without sacrificing service to the rest of the organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    Stop being reactive to VIP demands and formalize their service offering.

    Natalie Sansone, PHD

    Natalie Sansone, PHD

    Research Director,
    Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    In a perfect world, executives wouldn’t need any special treatment because the service desk could rapidly resolve every ticket, regardless of the submitter, keeping satisfaction levels high across the board.

    But we know that’s not the case for most organizations. Executives and VIPs demand higher levels of service because the reality in most companies is that their time is worth more. And any IT leader who’s had a VIP complain about their service knows that their voice also carries more weight than that of a regular dissatisfied user.

    That said, most service desks feel strapped for resources and don’t know how to improve service for VIPs without sacrificing service to the rest of the organization.

    The key is to stop being reactive to VIP demands and formalize your VIP service procedures so that you can properly set expectations for the service, monitor and measure it, and continually evaluate it to make changes if necessary.

    A VIP offering doesn’t have to mean a white glove concierge service, either – it could simply mean prioritizing VIP tickets differently. How do you decide which level of service to offer? Start by assessing your specific needs based on demand, gather requirements from relevant stakeholders, choose the right approach to fit your business needs and capabilities, clearly define and document all aspects of the service then communicate it so that everyone is on the same page as to what is in and out of scope, and continually monitor and evaluate the service to make changes and improvements as needed.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • VIPs and executives expect to get immediate service for every IT issue, no matter how minor, and the service desk is constantly in reactive mode trying to quickly resolve these issues.
    • VIPs don’t understand or have input into service desk processes, procedures, and SLAs, especially when it comes to prioritization of their issues over other tickets.
    • The C-suite calls the CIO directly with every issue they have, tying them up and forcing them to redirect resources with little notice.
    • VIP tickets sit in the queue too long without a response or resolution, and VIPs are dissatisfied with the service they receive.

    Common Obstacles

    • Service desk and IT leaders are unclear on the expectations that VIPs have for service delivery, or they disagree about the best support model to meet their needs while continuing to meet SLAs for the rest of the organization.
    • Service desk teams with limited resources are unsure how best to allocate those resources to handle VIP tickets in a timely manner.
    • There aren’t enough resources available at the service desk to provide the level of service that VIPs expect for their issues.
    • Deploying resources to service VIPs ahead of other users can result in inappropriate prioritization of issues and poor service delivery to the rest of the organization

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Stop being reactive to VIP requests and start planning for them so you can formally define the service and set expectations.
    • Talk to all relevant stakeholders to clarify their expectations before choosing a VIP service delivery model.
    • Define and document the VIP service processes and procedures, including exactly what is in and out of scope.
    • Track and report on metrics associated with VIP requests so you can properly allocate resources and budget for the service.
    • Continually evaluate the service to expand, reduce, or redefine it, as necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The reality for most organizations is that VIPs need special treatment. But providing VIP service shouldn’t come at the expense of good service delivery for the rest of the organization. To be successful with your approach, formalize the VIP offering to bring consistency and clear expectations for both users and the IT staff delivering the service.

    Do any of these scenarios sound familiar?

    All these familiar scenarios can occur when the service desk treats VIP issues reactively and doesn’t have a defined, documented, and agreed-upon VIP process in place.
    • A VIP calls because their personal printer isn’t working, but you also have a network issue affecting payroll being able to issue paychecks. The VIP wants their issue fixed immediately despite there being a workaround and a higher priority incident needing resources.
    • The COO calls the CIO after hours about issues they’re having with their email. The CIO immediately deploys a field tech back to the office to help the COO. Once the tech arrives, the COO says the issue could have waited until the morning.
    • The company president wants IT to spend a day at their house setting up their new personal laptop to be able to connect into the office before their vacation tomorrow. It would take away one FTE from an already understaffed service desk.
    • The CEO brings their child’s new iPhone in and asks the service desk if they have time to set it up as a favor today. The service desk manager instructs the T2 apps specialist to drop his other tickets to work on this immediately.
    • Two tickets come in at the same time – one is from an SVP who can’t log in to Teams and has an online meeting in half an hour, and the other is for a department of 10 who can’t access the network. The service desk doesn’t know who to help first.

    Different organizations can take very different approaches to VIP requests

    CASE STUDIES

    Providing VIP support helped this company grow

    Allocating a dedicated VIP technician slowed down service delivery for this company

    Situation

    A SaaS company looking to build and scale its services and customers decided to set up a VIP support program, which involved giving their most valuable customers white glove treatment to ensure they had a great experience, became long-term customers, and thus had a positive influence on others to build up the company’s customer base. VIPs were receiving executive-level support with a dedicated person for VIP tickets. The VIPs were happy with the service, but the VIP technician’s regular work was frequently impeded by having to spend most of her time doing white glove activities. The service desk found that in some cases, more critical work was slipping as a result of prioritizing all executive tickets.

    Resolution

    First, they defined who would receive VIP support, then they clearly defined the service, including what VIP support includes, who gets the service, and what their SLAs for service are. They found that the program was an effective way to focus their limited resources on the customers with the highest value potential to increase sales.
    While this model differs from an IT service desk VIP support program, the principles of dedicating resources to provide elevated support to your most important and influential customers for the benefit and growth of the company as a whole remain the same.
    The service desk decided to remove the VIP function. They demonstrated that the cost per contact was too high for dedicated executive support, and reallocating that dedicated technician to the service desk would improve the resolution time of all business incidents and requests. VIPs could still receive prioritized support through the escalation process, but they would contact the regular service desk with their issues. VIPs approved the change, and as a result of removing the dedicated support function, the service desk reduced average incident resolution times by 28% and request fulfillment times by 33%.

    A well-designed and communicated VIP support service can deliver many benefits

    The key to deciding whether a VIP service is right for your organization is to first analyze your needs, match them against your resources, then clearly define and document exactly what is in scope for the service.

    A successfully designed VIP service will lead to:

    • Executives and VIPs can easily contact the service desk and receive exceptional support and customer service from a knowledgeable technician, increasing their trust in the service desk.
    • All service desk tickets are prioritized appropriately and effectively in order to maximize overall ticket resolution and fulfillment times.
    • All users have a clear understanding of how to get in touch with the service desk and expected SLAs for specific ticket types.
    • Critical, business-impacting issues still receive priority service ahead of minor tickets submitted by a VIP.
    • All service desk technicians are clear on processes and procedures for prioritizing and handling VIP tickets.
    • Executives are satisfied with the service they receive and the value that IT provides
    • Reduced VIP downtime, contributing to overall organization productivity and growth.

    A poorly designed or reactive VIP service will lead to:

    • VIPs expect immediate service for non-critical issues, including after-hours.
    • VIPs circumvent the correct process and contact the CIO or service desk manager directly for all their issues.
    • Service desk resources stretched thin, or poor allocation of resources leads to degraded service for the majority of users.
    • More critical business issues are pushed back in order to fix non-critical executive issues.
    • Service desk is not clear how to prioritize tickets and always addresses VIP tickets first regardless of priority.
    • The service desk automatically acts on VIP tickets even when the VIP doesn’t require it or realize they’re getting a different level of service.
    • Non-VIP users are aware of the different service levels and try to request the same priority for their tickets. Support costs are over budget.

    Follow Info-Tech’s approach to design a successful VIP support model

    Follow the seven steps in this blueprint to design a VIP support model that works for your organization:
    1. Understand the support models available, from white glove service to the same service for everyone.
    2. Gather business requirements from all relevant stakeholders.
    3. Based on your business needs, choose the right approach.
    4. Define and document all details of the VIP service offering.
    5. Communicate and market the offering to VIPs so they’re aware of what’s in scope.
    6. Monitor volume and track metrics to evaluate what’s working.
    7. Continually improve or modify the service as needed over time.

    Blueprint deliverables

    The templates listed below are designed to assist you with various stages of this project. This storyboard will direct you when and how to complete them.

    Service Desk VIP Procedures Template

    Use this template to assist with documenting your service desk procedures for handling VIP or executive tickets.

    VIP Support Process Workflow Example

    Use this Visio template to document your process for resolving or fulfilling VIP tickets, from when the ticket is submitted to when it’s closed.

    VIP Support Service Communication Template

    Use this template to customize your executive presentation to communicate and market the service to VIP users.

    Insight Summary

    Key Insight

    The reality for most organizations is that VIPs need special treatment. But providing VIP service shouldn’t be at the expense of good service delivery for the rest of the organization. To be successful with your approach, formalize the VIP offering to bring consistency and clear expectations for both users and the IT staff delivering the service.

    Additional insights:

    Insight 1

    VIP service doesn’t have to mean concierge service. There are different levels and models of VIP support that range in cost and level of service provided. Carefully evaluate your needs and capacity to choose the approach that works best for your organization.

    Insight 2

    This service is for your most valued users, so design it right from the start to ensure their satisfaction. Involve stakeholders from the beginning, incorporate their feedback and requirements, keep them well-informed about the service, and continually collect and act on feedback to deliver the intended value.

    Insight 3

    Intentional, continual monitoring and measurement of the program must be part of your strategy. If your metrics or feedback show that something isn’t working, fix it. If you find that the perceived value isn’t worth the high cost of the program, make changes. Even if everything seems to be working fine, identify ways to improve it or make it more efficient.

    Step 1: Understand the different support models

    Step overview:

    • Understand the support models available, from white glove service to the same service for everyone

    First, define what “VIP support” means in your organization

    VIP support from the service desk usually refers to an elevated level of service (i.e. faster, after-hours, off-site, and/or with more experienced resources) that is provided to those at the executive level of the organization.

    A VIP typically includes executives across the business (e.g. CIO, CEO, CxO, VPs) and sometimes the executive assistants who work directly with them. However, it can also include non-executive-level but critical business roles in some organizations.

    The level of VIP service provided can differ from receiving prioritization in the queue to having a dedicated, full-time technician providing “white glove” service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You don’t have to use the term “VIP”, as long as you clearly define the terms you are using. Some organizations use the term “VIR” to refer to very important roles rather than people, and some define “critical users” to reflect who should receive prioritized service, for example.

    There are essentially two options for VIP support, but multiple determining factors

    While the details are more specific, your options for VIP support really come down to two: they either receive some kind of enhanced service (either from a dedicated support team or through prioritization from the regular support team) or they don’t. Which option you choose will depend on a wide range of factors, some of which are represented in the diagram below. Factors such as IT budget, size of organization help determine which VIP support model you choose: Enhanced, or the same as everyone else. With enhanced service, you can opt to a dedicated support team or same support team but with prioritized service.

    Option 1: Same service for everyone

    What does it look like?

    VIP tickets are prioritized in the same way as every other ticket – with an assessment by impact and urgency. This allows every ticket to be prioritized appropriately according to how big the impact of the issue is and how quickly it needs to be resolved – regardless of who the submitter is. This means that VIPs with very urgent issues will still receive immediate support, as would a non-VIP user with a critical issue.

    Who is it best suited for?

    • Small organizations and IT teams.
    • Executives don’t want special treatment.
    • Not enough service desk resources or budget to provide prioritized or dedicated VIP service.
    • Service desk is already efficient and meeting SLAs for all requests and incidents.

    Pros

    • Highest level of consistency in service because the same process is followed for all user groups.
    • Ensures that service doesn’t suffer for non-VIP users for teams with a limited number of service desk staff.
    • No additional cost.
    • Potential to argue for more resources if executive service expectations aren’t met.

    Cons

    • Does not work if executives expect or require elevated service regardless of issue type.
    • Potential for increase in management escalations or complaints from dissatisfied executives. Some may end up jumping the queue as a result, which results in unstandardized VIP treatment only for some users.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t design a VIP service solely out of fear that VIPs will be unhappy with the standard level of support the service desk provides. In some cases, it is better to focus your efforts on improving your standard support for everyone rather than only for a small percentage of users, especially if providing that elevated VIP support would further deteriorate service levels for the rest of the organization.

    Option 2: Prioritized service for VIPs

    What does it look like?

    • VIPs still go through the service desk but receive higher priority than non-VIP tickets.
    • Requests from VIP submitters are still evaluated using the standard prioritization matrix but are bumped up in urgency or priority. More critical issues can still take precedence.
    • Existing service desk resources are still used to resolve the request, but requests are just placed closer to the “front of the line.”
    • VIP users are identified in the ticketing system and may have a separate number to call or are routed differently/skip the queue within the ACD/IVR.

    Who is it best suited for?

    • Organizations that want or need to give VIPs expedited or enhanced service, but that don’t have the resources to dedicate to a completely separate VIP service desk team.

    Pros

    • Meets the need of executives for faster service.
    • Balances the need for prioritized service to VIPs while not sacrificing resources to handle most user requests.
    • All tickets still go through a single point of contact to be triaged and monitored by the service desk.
    • Easy to measure and compare performance of VIP service vs. standard service because processes are the same.

    Cons

    • Slight cost associated with implementing changes to phone system if necessary.
    • Makes other users aware that VIPs receive “special treatment” – some may try to jump the queue themselves.
    • May not meet the expectations of some executives who prefer dedicated, face-to-face resources to resolve their issues.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you’re already informally bumping VIP tickets up the queue, this may be the most appropriate model for you. Bring formalization to your process by clearly defining exactly where VIP tickets fit in your prioritization matrix to ensure they are handled consistently and that VIPs are aware of the process.

    Option 3: Dedicated VIP service

    What does it look like?

    • VIPs contact a dedicated service desk and receive immediate/expedited support, often face to face.
    • Often a separate phone number or point of contact.
    • Similar to concierge service or “white glove” service models.
    • At least one dedicated FTE with good customer service skills and technical knowledge who builds trust with executives.

    Who is it best suited for?

    • Larger enterprises with many VIP users to support, but where VIPs are geographically clustered (as geography sprawls, the cost of the service will spiral).
    • IT organizations with enough resources on the service desk to support a dedicated VIP function.
    • Organizations where executives require immediate, in-person support.

    Pros

    • Most of the time, this model results in the fastest service delivery to executives.
    • Most personal method of delivering support with help often provided in person and from familiar, trusted technicians.
    • Usually leads to the highest level of satisfaction with the service desk from executives.

    Cons

    • Most expensive model; usually requires at least one dedicated, experienced FTE to support and sometimes after-hours support.
    • Essentially two separate service desks; can result in a disconnect between staff.
    • Career path and cross-training opportunities for the dedicated staff may be limited; role can be exhausting.
    • Reporting on the service can be more complicated and tickets are often logged after the fact.
    • If not done well, quality of service can suffer for the rest of the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This type of model is essential in many large enterprises where the success of the company can depend on VIPs having access to dedicated support to minimize downtime as much as possible. However, it also requires the highest level of planning and dedication to get right. Without carefully documented processes and procedures and highly trained staff to support the model, it will fail to deliver the expected benefits.

    Step 2: Capture business needs

    Step overview:

    • Analyze your data and gather requirements to determine whether there is a need for a VIP service.

    Assess current state and metrics

    You can’t define your target state without a clear understanding of your current state. Analyze your ticket data and reports to identify the type and volume of VIP requests the service desk receives and how well you’re able to meet these requests with your current resources and structure.

    Analyze ticket data

    • What volume of tickets are you supporting? How many of those tickets come from VIP users?
    • What is your current resolution time for incidents and requests? How well are you currently meeting SLAs?
    • How quickly are executive/VIP tickets being resolved? How long do they have to wait for a response?
    • How many after-hours requests do you receive?

    Assess resourcing

    • How many users do you support; what percentage of them would be identified as VIP users?
    • How many service desk technicians do you have at each tier?
    • How well are you currently meeting demand? Would you be able to meet demand if you dedicated one or more Tier 2 technicians to VIP support?
    • If you would need to hire additional resources, is there budget to do so?

    Use the data to inform your assessment

    • Do you have a current problem with service delivery to VIPs and/or all users that needs to be addressed by changing the VIP support model?
    • Do you have the demand to support the need for a VIP service?
    • Do you have the resources to support providing VIP service?

    Leverage Info-Tech’s tools to inform your assessment

    Analyze your ticket data and reports to understand how well you’re currently meeting SLAs, your average response and resolution times, and the volume and type of requests you get from VIPs in order to understand the need for changing your current model. If you don’t have the ticket data to inform your assessment, leverage Info-Tech’s Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool.

    Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool

    Use this tool to identify trends and patterns in your ticket data. The ticket summary dashboard contains multiple reports analyzing how tickets come in, who requests them, who resolves them, and how long it takes to resolve them.

    If you need help understanding how well your current staff is able to handle your current ticket volume, leverage Info-Tech’s Service Desk Staffing Calculator to analyze demand and ticket volume trends. While not specifically designed to analyze VIP tickets, you could run the assessment separately for VIP volume if you have that data available.

    Service Desk Staffing Calculator

    Use this tool to help you estimate the optimal resource allocation to support your demand over time.

    Engage stakeholders to understand their requirements

    Follow your organization’s requirements gathering process to identify and prioritize stakeholders, conduct stakeholder interviews, and identify, track, and prioritize their requirements and expectations for service delivery.

    Gather requirements from VIP stakeholders

    1. Identify which stakeholders need to be consulted.
    2. Prioritize stakeholders in terms of influence and interest in order to identify who to engage in the requirements gathering process.
    3. Build a plan for gathering the requirements of key stakeholders in terms of VIP service delivery.
    4. Conduct requirements gathering and record the results of each stakeholder interaction.
    5. Analyze and summarize the results to determine the top expectations and requirements for VIP service desk support.

    If your organization does not have a defined requirements gathering process or template, leverage Info-Tech tools and templates:

    The Improve Requirements Gathering blueprint can be adapted from software requirements gathering to service desk.

    The PMO Requirements Gathering Tool can be adapted from interviewing stakeholders on their PMO requirements to service desk requirements.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t guess at what your VIPs need or want – ask them and involve them in the service design. Many IT leaders sacrifice overall service quality to prioritize VIPs, thinking they expect immediate service. However, they later find out that the VIPs just assumed the service they were receiving was the standard service and many of their issues can wait.

    Identify additional challenges and opportunities by collecting perceptions of business users and stakeholders

    Formally measuring perceptions from your end users and key business stakeholders will help to inform your needs and determine how well the service desk is currently meeting demands from both VIP users and the entire user base.

    CIO Business Vision

    Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision program is a low-effort, high-impact program that will give you detailed report cards on the organization’s satisfaction with IT’s core services. Use these insights to understand your key business stakeholders, find out what is important to them, and improve your interactions.

    End User Satisfaction

    Info-Tech’s End User Satisfaction Program helps you measure end-user satisfaction and importance ratings of core IT services, IT communications, and business enablement to help you decide which IT service capabilities need to be addressed to meet the demands of the business.

    Learn more about Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision or End User Satisfaction Program .

    Step 3: Choose the right approach

    Step overview:

    • Based on your assessment from Step 2, decide on the best way to move forward with your VIP service model.

    Use your assessment results to choose the most appropriate support model

    The table below is a rough guide for how the results of your assessments may line up to the most appropriate model for your organization:

    Example assessment results for: Dedicated service, prioritized service, and same servce based off of the assessment source: Ticket analysis, staffing analysis, or stakeholder.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you’re in the position of deciding how to improve service to VIPs, it’s unlikely that you will end up choosing the “same service” model. If your data analysis tells you that you are currently meeting every metric target for all users, this may actually indicate that you’re overstaffed at the service desk.

    If you choose a specialized VIP support model, ensure there is a strong, defined need before moving forward

    Do not proceed if:

    • Your decision is purely reactive in response to a perceived need or challenges you’re currently experiencing
    • The demand is coming from a single dissatisfied executive without requirements from other VIPs being collected.
    • Your assessment data does not support the demand for a dedicated VIP function.
    • You don’t have the resources or support required to be successful in the approach.

    Proceed with a VIP model if:

    • You’re prepared to scale and support the model over the long term.
    • Business stakeholders have clearly expressed a need for improved VIP service.
    • Data shows that there is a high volume of urgent requests from VIPs.
    • You have the budget and resources required to support an enhanced VIP service delivery model.

    Step 4: Design the service offering

    Step overview:

    • Define and document all processes, procedures, and responsibilities relevant to the VIP support offering.

    Clearly define the service and eligible users

    Once you’ve decided on the most appropriate model, clearly describe the service and document who is eligible to receive it.

    1. Define exactly what the service is before going into the procedural details. High-level examples to start from are provided below:

    Prioritized Service Model

    When a designated VIP user contacts the service desk with a question, incident, or service request, their ticket will be prioritized over non-VIP tickets following the prioritization matrix. This process has been designed in accordance with business needs and requirements, as defined VIP users have more urgent demands on their time and the impact of downtime is greater as it has the potential to impact the business. However, all tickets, VIP tickets included, must still be prioritized by impact and urgency. Incidents that are more critical will still be resolved before VIP tickets in accordance with the prioritization process.

    Dedicated Service Model

    VIP support is a team of dedicated field technicians available to provide an elevated level of service including deskside support for executives and designated VIP users. VIP users have the ability to contact the VIP support service through a dedicated phone number and will receive expedited ticket handling and resolution by dedicated Tier 2 specialists with experience dealing with executives and their unique needs and requirements. This process has been designed in accordance with business needs and requirements.

    2 Identify VIP-eligible users

    • Define who qualifies as a VIP to receive VIP support or be eligible to contact the dedicated VIP service desk/concierge desk.
    • If other users or EAs can submit tickets on behalf of VIPs, identify those individuals as well.
    • Review the list and cut back if necessary. Less is usually more here, especially when starting out. If everyone is a VIP, then no one is truly a VIP.
    • Identify who maintains ownership over the list of eligible VIP users and how any changes to the list or requests for changes will be handled.
    • Ensure that all VIP-eligible users are clearly identified in the ITSM system.

    Map out the VIP process in a workflow

    Use a visual workflow to document the process for resolving or fulfilling VIP tickets, from when the ticket is submitted to when it gets closed.

    Your workflow should address the following:

    • How should the ticket be prioritized?
    • When are escalations necessary?
    • What happens if a user requests VIP service but is not defined as eligible?
    • Should the user verify that the issue is resolved before the ticket is closed?
    • What automatic notifications or communications need to go out and when?
    • What manual communications or notifications need to be sent out (e.g. when a ticket is escalated or reassigned)?
    VIP Support Process Example.

    Use the VIP Support Process Workflow Example as a template to map out your own process.

    Define and document all VIP processes and procedures

    Clearly describe the service and all related processes and procedures so that both the service delivery team and users are on the same page.

    Define all aspects of the service so that every VIP request will follow the same standardized process and VIPs will have clear expectations for the service they receive. This may include:

    • How VIPs should contact the service desk
    • How VIP tickets will be prioritized
    • SLAs and service expectations for VIP tickets
    • Ticket resolution or fulfillment steps and process
    • Escalation points and contacts
    • After-hours requests process

    If VIP user requests receive enhanced priority, for example, define exactly how those requests should be prioritized using your prioritization matrix. An example is found below and in the Service Desk VIP Procedures Template.

    Prioritization matrix for classification of incidents and requests.

    Use Info-Tech’s Service Desk VIP Procedures Template as a guide

    This template is designed to assist with documenting your service desk procedures for handling VIP or executive tickets. The template is not meant to cover all possible VIP support models but is an example of one support model only. It should be adapted and customized to reflect your specific support model and procedures.

    It includes the following sections:

    1. VIP support description/overview
    2. VIP support entitlement (who is eligible)
    3. Procedures
      • Ticket submission and triage
      • Ticket prioritization
      • SLAs and escalation
      • VIP ticket resolution process
      • After-hours requests
    4. Monitoring and reporting

    Download the Service Desk VIP Procedures Template

    Allocate resources or assign responsibilities specific to VIP support

    Regardless of the support model you choose, you’ll need to be clear on service desk agents’ responsibilities when dealing with VIP users.
    • Clarify the expectations of any service desk agent who will be handling VIP tickets; they should demonstrate excellent customer service skills and expertise, respect for the VIP and the sensitivity of their data, and prompt service.
    • Use a RACI chart to clarify responsibility and accountability for VIP-specific support tasks.
    • If you will be moving to a dedicated VIP support team, clearly define the responsibilities of any new roles or tasks. Sample responsibilities can be found on the right.
    • If you will be changing the role of an existing service desk agent to become focused solely on providing VIP support, clarify how the responsibilities of other service desk agents may change too, if at all.
    • Be clear on expectations of agents for after-hours support, especially if there will be a change to the current service provision.

    Sample responsibilities for a dedicated VIP support technician/specialist may include:

    • Resolve support tickets for all eligible VIP users following established processes and procedures.
    • Provide both onsite and remote support to executives.
    • Quickly and effectively diagnose and resolve technical issues with minimal disruption to the executive team.
    • Establish trust with executives/VIPs by maintaining confidentiality and privacy while providing technical support.
    • Set up, monitor, and support high-priority meetings, conferences, and events.
    • Demonstrate excellent communication and customer service skills when providing support to executives.
    • Coordinate more complex support issues with higher level support staff and track tickets through to resolution when needed.
    • Learn new technology and software ahead of implementation to train and support executive teams for use.
    • Conduct individual or group training as needed to educate on applications or how to best use technology to enhance productivity.
    • Proactively manage, maintain, update, and upgrade end-user devices as needed.

    Configure your ITSM tool to support your processes

    Configure your tool to support your processes, not the other way around.
    • Identify and configure VIP users in the system to ensure that they are easily identifiable in the system (e.g. there may be a symbol beside their name).
    • Configure automations or build ticket templates that would automatically set the urgency or priority of VIP tickets.
    • Configure any business rules or workflows that apply to the VIP support process.
    • Define any automated notifications that need to be sent when a VIP ticket is submitted, assigned, escalated, or resolved (e.g. notify service desk manager or a specific DL).
    • Define metrics and customize dashboards and reports to monitor VIP tickets and measure the success of the VIP service.
    • Configure any SLAs that apply only to VIPs to ensure displayed SLAs are accurate.

    Step 5: Launch the service

    Step overview:

    • Communicate and market the service to all relevant stakeholders so everyone is on the same page as to how it works and what’s in scope.

    Communicate the new or revised service to relevant stakeholders ahead of the launch

    If you did your due diligence, the VIP service launch won’t be a surprise to executives. However, it’s critical to

    continue the engagement and communicate the details of the service well to ensure there are no misperceptions about the

    service when it launches.

    Goals of communicating and marketing the service:

    1. Create awareness and understanding of the purpose of the VIP service and what it means for eligible users.
    2. Solidify commitment and buy-in for the service from all stakeholders.
    3. Ensure that all users know how to access the service and any changes to the way they should interact with the service desk.
    4. Set expectations for new/revised service levels.
    5. Reduce and address any concerns about the change in process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This step isn’t only for the launch of new services. Even if you’re enhancing or right-sizing an existing VIP service, take the opportunity to market the improvements, remind users of the correct processes, and collect feedback.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s communication template to structure your presentation

    This template can be customized to use as an executive presentation to communicate and market the service to VIP users. It includes:

    • Key takeaways
    • Current-state assessment
    • Requirements gathering and feedback results
    • Objectives for the service
    • Anticipated benefits
    • Service entitlement
    • How the service works
    • Escalations and feedback contacts
    • Timeline of next steps

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you’re launching a dedicated concierge service for VIPs, highlight the exclusivity of the service in your marketing to draw users in. For example, if eligible VIPs get a separate number to call, expedited SLAs, or access to more tenured service desk experts, promote this added value of the service.

    Download the VIP Support Service Communication Template

    Step 6: Monitor and measure

    Step overview:

    • Measure and monitor the success of the program by tracking and reporting on targeted metrics.

    Evaluate and demonstrate the success of the program with key metrics

    Targeted metrics to evaluate the success of the VIP program will be critical to understanding and demonstrating whether the service is delivering the intended value. Track key metrics to:

    • Track if and how well you’re meeting your defined SLAs for VIP support.
    • Measure demand for VIP support (i.e. ticket volume and types of tickets) and evaluate against resource supply to determine whether a staffing adjustment is needed to meet demand.
    • Measure the cost of providing the VIP service in order to report back to executives.
    • Leverage real data to quantitatively demonstrate that you’re providing enhanced service to VIPs if there is an escalation or negative feedback from one individual.
    • Monitor service delivery to non-VIP users to ensure that service to the rest of the organization isn’t impacted by the VIP service
    • Evaluate the types of ticket that are submitted to the VIP service to inform training plans, self-service options, device upgrades, or alternatives to reduce future volume.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If your data definitively shows the VIP offering delivers enhanced service levels, publish these results to business leadership. A successful VIP service is a great accomplishment to market and build credibility for the service desk.

    Tie metrics to critical success factors

    Apart from your regular service desk metrics, identify the top metrics to tie to the key performance indicators of the program’s success factors.

    Sample Critical Success Factors

    • Increased executive satisfaction with the service desk
    • Improved response and resolution times to VIP tickets
    • Demand for the service is matched by supply

    Sample Metrics

    • End-user satisfaction scores on VIP tickets
    • Executive satisfaction with the service desk as measured on a broader annual survey
    • Response and resolution times for VIP tickets
    • Percentage of SLAs met for VIP tickets
    • VIP ticket volume
    • Average speed of answer for VIP calls

    Download Define Service Desk Metrics that Matter and the Service Desk Metrics Workbook for help defining CSFs, KPIs, and key metrics

    Step 7: Continually improve

    Step overview:

    • Continually evaluate the program to identify opportunities for improvement or modifications to the service support model.

    Continually evaluate the service to identify improvements

    Executives are happy, resolution times are on target – now what? Even if everything seems to be working well, never stop monitoring, measuring, and evaluating the service. Not only can metrics change, but there can also always be ways to improve service.

    • Continual improvement should be a mindset – there are always opportunities for improvement, and someone should be responsible for identifying and tracking these opportunities so that they actually get done.
    • Just as you asked for feedback and involvement from VIPs (and their assistants who may submit tickets on their behalf) in designing the service, you should continually collect that feedback and use it to inform improvements to the service.
    • End-user satisfaction surveys, especially broader, more targeted surveys, are also a great source of improvement ideas.
    • Even if end users don’t perceive any need for improvement, IT should still assess how they can make their own processes more efficient or offer alternatives to make delivery easier.

    Download Info-Tech’s Build a Continual Improvement Program blueprint to help you build a process around continual improvement, and use the Continual Improvement Register tool to help you identify and prioritize improvement initiatives.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t limit your continual improvement efforts to the VIP service. Once you’ve successfully elevated the VIP service, look to how you can apply elements of that service to elevate support to the rest of the organization. For example, through providing a roaming service desk, a concierge desk, a Genius-Bar-style walk-in service, etc.

    Expand, reduce, or modify as needed

    Don’t stop with a one-time program evaluation. Continually use your metrics to evaluate whether the service offering needs to change to better suit the needs of your executives and organization. It may be fine as is, or you may find you need to do one of the following:

    Expand

    • If the service offering has been successful and/or your data shows underuse of VIP-dedicated resources, you may be able to expand the offering to identify additional roles as VIP-eligible.
    • Be cautious not to expand the service too widely; not only should it feel exclusive to VIPs, but you need to be able to support it.
    • Also consider whether elements that have been successful in the VIP program (e.g. a concierge desk, after-hours support) should be expanded to be offered to non-VIPs.

    Reduce

    • If VIPs are not using the service as much as anticipated or data shows supply outweighs demand, you may consider scaling back the service to save costs and resources.
    • However, be careful in how you approach this – it shouldn’t negatively impact service to existing users.
    • Rather, evaluate costly services like after-hours support and whether it’s necessary based on demand, adjust SLAs if needed, or reallocate service desk resources or responsibilities. For example, if demand doesn’t justify a dedicated service desk technician, either add non-VIP tasks to their responsibilities or consider moving to a prioritized model.

    Modify

    • The support model doesn’t need to be set in stone. If elements aren’t working, change them! If the entire support model isn’t working, reevaluate if it’s the best model for your organization.
    • Don’t make decisions in a vacuum, though. Just as executives were involved in decision-making at the outset, continually gather their feedback and use it to inform the service design.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    This project will help you build and improve essential service desk processes, including incident management, request fulfillment, and knowledge management to create a sustainable service desk.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    This project will help you build a strategy to shift service support left to optimize your service desk operations and increase end-user satisfaction.

    Build a Continual Improvement Plan

    This project will help you build a continual improvement plan for the service desk to review key processes and services and manage the progress of improvement initiatives.

    Deliver a Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department

    This project will help you deliver a targeted customer service training program to your IT team to enhance their customer service skills when dealing with end users, improve overall service delivery, and increase customer satisfaction.

    Works Cited

    Munger, Nate. “Why You Should Provide VIP Customer Support.” Intercom, 13 Jan. 2016. Accessed Jan. 2023.

    Ogilvie, Ryan. “We Did Away With VIP Support and Got More Efficient.” HDI, 17 Sep. 2020. Accessed Jan. 2023.

    2020 Applications Priorities Report

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}159|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Although IT may have time to look at trends, it does not have the capacity to analyze the trends and turn them into initiatives.
    • IT does not have time to parse trends for initiatives that are relevant to them.
    • The business complains that if IT does not pursue trends the organization will get left behind by cutting-edge competitors. At the same time, when IT pursues trends, the business feels that IT is unable to deal with the basic issues.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Take advantage of a trend by first understanding why it is happening and how it is actionable. Build momentum now. Breaking a trend into bite-sized initiatives and building them into your IT foundations enables the organization to maintain pace with competitors and make the technological leap.
    • The concepts of shadow IT and governance are critical. As it becomes easier for the business to purchase its own applications, it will be essential for IT to embrace this form of user empowerment. With a diminished focus on vendor selection, IT will drive the most value by directing its energy toward data and integration governance.

    Impact and Result

    • Determine how to explore, adopt, and optimize the technology and practice initiatives in this report by understanding which core objective(s) each initiative serves:
      • Optimize the effectiveness of the IT organization.
      • Boost the productivity of the enterprise.
      • Enable business growth through technology.

    2020 Applications Priorities Report Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief for a summary of the priorities and themes that an IT organization should focus on this year.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Read the 2020 Applications Priorities Report

    Use Info-Tech's 2020 Applications Priorities Report to learn about the five initiatives that IT should prioritize for the coming year.

    • 2020 Applications Priorities Report Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Implement Infrastructure Shared Services

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}456|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Organizations have service duplications for unique needs. These duplications increase business expenditure.
    • Lack of collaboration between business units to share their services increases business cost and reduces business units’ faith to implement shared services.
    • Transitioning infrastructure to shared services is challenging for many organizations. It requires an accurate planning and efficient communication between participating business units.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identify your current process, tool, and people capabilities before implementing shared services. Understand the financial compensations prior to implementation and assess if your organization is ready for transitioning to shared services model.
    • Do not implement shared services when the nature of the services differs greatly between business units.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand benefits of shared services for the business and determine whether transitioning to shared services would benefit the organization.
    • Identify the best implementation plan based on goals, needs, and services.
    • Build a shared-services process to manage the plan and ensure its success.

    Implement Infrastructure Shared Services Research & Tools

    Start here – Read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement shared services, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Conduct gap analysis

    Identify benefits of shared services to your organization and define implementation challenges.

    • Implement Infrastructure Shared Services – Phase 1: Conduct Gap Analysis
    • Shared Services Implementation Executive Presentation
    • Shared Services Implementation Business Case Template
    • Shared Services Implementation Assessment Tool

    2. Choose the right path

    Identify your process and staff capabilities and discover which services will be transitioned to shared services plan. It will also help you to figure out the best model to choose.

    • Implement Infrastructure Shared Services – Phase 2: Choose the Right Path
    • Sample Enterprise Services

    3. Plan the transition

    Discuss an actionable plan to implement shared services to track the project. Walk through a communication plan to document the goals, progress, and expectations with customer stakeholders.

    • Implement Infrastructure Shared Services – Phase 3: Plan the Transition
    • Shared Services Implementation Roadmap Tool
    • Shared Services Implementation Customer Communication Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement Infrastructure Shared Services

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Challenges

    The Purpose

    Establish the need for change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set a clear understanding about benefits of shared services to your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify your organization’s main drivers for using a shared services model.

    1.2 Define if it is beneficial to implement shared services.

    Outputs

    Shared services mission

    Shared services goals

    2 Assess Your Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Become aware of challenges to implement shared services and your capabilities for such transition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Discover the primary challenges for transitioning to shared services, eliminate resistance factors, and identify your business potentials for implementation.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify your organization’s resistance to implement shared services.

    2.2 Assess process and people capabilities.

    Outputs

    Shared Services Business Case

    Shared Services Assessment

    3 Define the Model

    The Purpose

    Determine the shared services model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the core services to be shared and the best model that fits your organization.

    Activities

    3.1 Define core services that will be moved to shared services.

    3.2 Assess different models of shared services and pick the one that satisfies your goals and needs.

    Outputs

    List of services to be transferred to shared services

    Shared services model

    4 Implement and Communicate

    The Purpose

    Define and communicate the tasks to be delivered.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Confidently approach key stakeholders to make the project a reality.

    Activities

    4.1 Define the roadmap for implementing shared services.

    4.2 Make a plan to communicate changes.

    Outputs

    List of initiatives to reach the target state, strategy risks, and their timelines

    Draft of a communication plan

    Security Priorities 2022

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}244|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Ransomware activities and the cost of breaches are on the rise.
    • Cybersecurity talent is hard to find, and an increasing number of cybersecurity professionals are considering leaving their jobs.
    • Moving to the digital world increases the risk of a breach.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The pandemic has fundamentally changed the technology landscape. Security programs must understand how their threat surface is now different and adapt their controls to meet the challenge.
    • The upside to the upheaval in 2021 is new opportunities to modernize your security program.

    Impact and Result

    • Use the report to ensure your plan in 2022 addresses what’s important in cybersecurity.
    • Understand the current situation in the cybersecurity space.

    Security Priorities 2022 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Security Priorities 2022 – A report that describes priorities and recommendations for CISOs in 2022.

    Use this report to understand the current situation in the cybersecurity space and inform your plan for 2022. This report includes sections on protecting against and responding to ransomware, acquiring and retaining talent, securing a remote workforce, securing digital transformation, and adopting zero trust.

    • Security Priorities for 2022 Report

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Security Priorities 2022

    The pandemic has changed how we work

    disruptions to the way we work caused by the pandemic are here to stay.

    The pandemic has introduced a lot of changes to our lives over the past two years, and this is also true for various aspects of how we work. In particular, a large workforce moved online overnight, which shifted the work environment rapidly.

    People changed how they communicate, how they access company information, and how they connect to the company network. These changes make cybersecurity a more important focus than ever.

    Although changes like the shift to remote work occurred in response to the pandemic, they are largely expected to remain, regardless of the progression of the pandemic itself. This report will look into important security trends and the priorities that stemmed from these trends.

    30% more professionals expect transformative permanent change compared to one year ago.

    47% of professionals expect a lot of permanent change; this remains the same as last year. (Source: Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey; N=475)

    The cost of a security breach is rising steeply

    The shift to remote work exposes organizations to more costly cyber incidents than ever before.

    $4.24 million

    Average cost of a data breach in 2021
    The cost of a data breach rose by nearly 10% in the past year, the highest rate in over seven years.

    $1.07 million

    More costly when remote work involved in the breach

    The average cost of breaches where remote work is involved is $1.07 million higher than breaches where remote work is not involved.

    The ubiquitous remote work that we saw in 2021 and continue to see in 2022 can lead to more costly security events. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Remote work is here to stay, and the cost of a breach is higher when remote work is involved.

    The cost comes not only directly from payments but also indirectly from reputational loss. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Security teams can participate in the solution

    The numbers are clear: in 2022, when we face a threat environment like WE’VE never EXPERIENCED before, good security is worth the investment

    $1.76 million

    Saved when zero trust is deployed facing a breach

    Zero trust controls are realistic and effective controls.

    Organizations that implement zero trust dramatically reduce the cost of an adverse security event.

    35%

    More costly if it takes more than 200 days to identify and contain a breach

    With increased BYOD and remote work, detection and response is more challenging than ever before – but it is also highly effective.

    Organizations that detect and respond to incidents quickly will significantly reduce the impact. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Breaches are 34% less costly when mature zero trust is implemented.

    A fully staffed and well-prepared security team could save the cost through quick responses. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Top security priorities and constraints in 2022

    Survey results

    As part of its research process for the 2022 Security Priorities Report, Info-Tech Research Group surveyed security and IT leaders (N=97) to ask their top security priorities as well as their main obstacles to security success in 2022:

    Top Priorities
    A list of the top three priorities identified in the survey with their respective percentages, 'Acquiring and retaining talent, 30%', 'Protecting against and responding to ransomware, 23%', and 'Securing a remote workforce, 23%'.

    Survey respondents were asked to force-rank their security priorities.

    Among the priorities chosen most frequently as #1 were talent management, addressing ransomware threats, and securing hybrid/remote work.

    Top Obstacles
    A list of the top three obstacles identified in the survey with their respective percentages, 'Staffing constraints, 31%', 'Demand of ever-changing business environment, 23%', and 'Budget constraints, 15%'.

    Talent management is both the #1 priority and the top obstacle facing security leaders in 2022.

    Unsurprisingly, the ever-changing environment in a world emerging from a pandemic and budget constraints are also top obstacles.

    We know the priorities…

    But what are security leaders actually working on?

    This report details what we see the world demanding of security leaders in the coming year.

    Setting aside the demands – what are security leaders actually working on?

    A list of 'Top security topics among Info-Tech members' with accompanying bars, 'Security Strategy', 'Security Policies', 'Security Operations', 'Security Governance', and 'Security Incident Response'.

    Many organizations are still mastering the foundations of a mature cybersecurity program.

    This is a good idea!

    Most breaches are still due to gaps in foundational security, not lack of advanced controls.

    We know the priorities…

    But what are security leaders actually working on?

    A list of industries with accompanying bars representing their demand for security. The only industry with a significant positive percentage is 'Government'. Security projects included in annual plan relative to industry.

    One industry plainly stands out from the rest. Government organizations are proportionally much more active in security than other industries, and for good reason: they are common targets.

    Manufacturing and professional services are proportionally less interested in security. This is concerning, given the recent targeting of supply chain and personal data holders by ransomware gangs.

    5 Security Priorities for 2022 Logo for Info-Tech. Logo for ITRG.

    People

    1. Acquiring and Retaining Talent
      Create a good working environment for existing and potential employees. Invest time and effort into talent issues to avoid being understaffed.
    2. Securing a Remote Workforce
      Create a secure environment for users and help your people build safe habits while working remotely.

    Process

    1. Securing Digital Transformation
      Build in security from the start and check in frequently to create agile and secure user experiences.

    Technology

    1. Adopting Zero Trust
      Manage access of sensitive information based on the principle of least privilege.
    2. Protecting Against and Responding to Ransomware
      Put in your best effort to build defenses but also prepare for a breach and know how to recover.

    Main Influencing Factors

    COVID-19 Pandemic
    The pandemic has changed the way we interact with technology. Organizations are universally adapting their business and technology processes to fit the post-pandemic paradigm.
    Rampant Cybercrime Activity
    By nearly every conceivable metric, cybercrime is way up in the past two years. Cybercriminals smell blood and pose a more salient threat than before. Higher standards of cybersecurity capability are required to respond to this higher level of threat.
    Remote Work and Workforce Reallocation
    Talented IT staff across the globe enabled an extraordinarily fast shift to remote and distance work. We must now reckon with the security and human resourcing implications of this huge shift.

    Acquire and Retain Talent

    Priority 01

    Security talent was in short supply before the pandemic, and it's even worse now.

    Executive summary

    Background

    Cybersecurity talent has been in short supply for years, but this shortage has inflected upward since the pandemic.

    The Great Resignation contributed to the existing talent gap. The pandemic has changed how people work as well as how and where they choose work. More and more senior workers are retiring early or opting for remote working opportunities.

    The cost to acquire cybersecurity talent is huge, and the challenge doesn’t end there. Retaining top talent can be equally difficult.

    Current situation

    • A 2021 survey by ESG shows that 76% of security professional agree it’s difficult to recruit talent, and 57% said their organization is affected by this talent shortage.
    • (ISC)2 reports there are 2.72 million unfilled job openings and an increasing workforce gap (2021).

    2.72 million unfilled cybersecurity openings (Source: (ISC)2, 2021)

    IT leaders must do more to attract and retain talent in 2022

    • Over 70% of IT professionals are considering quitting their jobs (TalentLMS, 2021). Meanwhile, 51% of surveyed cybersecurity professionals report extreme burnout during the last 12 months and many of them have considered quitting because of it (VMWare, 2021).
    • Working remotely makes it easier for people to look elsewhere, lowering the barrier to leaving.
    • This is a big problem for security leaders, as cybersecurity talent is in very short supply. The cost of acquiring and retaining quality cybersecurity staff in 2022 is significant, and many organizations are unwilling or unable to pay the premium.
    • Top talent will demand flexible working conditions – even though remote work comes with security risk.
    • Most smart, talented new hires in 2022 are demanding to work remotely most of the time.
    Top reasons for resignations in 2021
    Burnout 30%
    Other remote opportunities 20%
    Lack of growth opportunities 20%
    Poor culture 20%
    Acquisition concerns 10%
    (Source: Survey of West Coast US cybersecurity professionals; TechBeacon, 2021)

    Talent will be 2022’s #1 strength and #1 weakness

    Staffing obstacles in 2022:

    “Attracting and retaining talent is always challenging. We don’t pay as well and my org wants staff in the office at least half of the time. Most young, smart, talented new hires want to work remotely 100 percent of the time.“

    “Trying to grow internal resources into security roles.”

    “Remote work expectations by employees and refusal by business to accommodate.”

    “Biggest obstacle: payscales that are out of touch with cybersecurity market.”

    “Request additional staff. Obtaining funding for additional position is most significant obstacle.”

    (Info-Tech Tech Security Priorities Survey 2022)
    Top obstacles in 2022:

    As you can see, respondents to our security priorities survey have strong feelings on the challenges of staffing a cybersecurity team.

    The growth of remote work means local talent can now be hired by anybody, vastly increasing your competition as an employer.

    Hiring local will get tougher – but so will hiring abroad. People who don’t want to relocate for a new job now have plenty of alternatives. Without a compelling remote work option, you will find non-local prospects unwilling to move for a new job.

    Lastly, many organizations are still reeling at the cost of experienced cybersecurity talent. Focused internal training and development will be the answer for many organizations.

    Recommended Actions

    Provide career development opportunities

    Many security professionals are dissatisfied with their unclear career development paths. To improve retention, organizations should provide their staff with opportunities and clear paths for career and skills advancement.

    Be open-minded when hiring

    To broaden the candidate pool, organizations should be open-minded when considering who to hire.

    • Enable remote work.
    • Do not fixate on certificates and years of experience; rather, be open to developing those who have the right interest and ability.
    • Consider using freelance workers.
    Facilitate work-life balance

    Many security professionals say they experience burnout. Promoting work-life balance in your organization can help retain critical skills.

    Create inclusive environment

    Hire a diverse team and create an inclusive environment where they can thrive.

    Talent acquisition and retention plan

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Address a top priority and a top obstacle with a plan to attract and retain top organizational and cybersecurity talent.

    Initiative Description:

    • Provide secure remote work capabilities for staff.
    • Work with HR to refine a hiring plan that addresses geographical and compensation gaps with cybersecurity and general staff.
    • Survey staff engagement to identify points of friction and remediate where needed.
    • Define a career path and growth plan for staff.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduction in costs due to turnover and talent loss

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Productivity due to good morale/ engagement
    Arrow pointing up.
    Improved corporate culture
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Big organizational and cultural changes
    • Increased attack surface of remote/hybrid workforce

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Secure a Remote Workforce

    Priority 02

    Trends suggest remote work is here to stay. Addressing the risk of insecure endpoints can no longer be deferred.

    Executive summary

    Remote work poses unique challenges to cybersecurity teams. The personal home environment may introduce unauthorized people and unknown network vulnerabilities, and the organization loses nearly all power and influence over the daily cyber hygiene of its users.

    In addition, the software used for enabling remote work itself can be a target of cybersecurity criminals.

    Current situation

    • 70% of workers in technical services work from home.
    • Employees of larger firms and highly paid individuals are more likely to be working outside the office.
    • 80% of security and business leaders find that remote work has increased the risk of a breach.
    • (Source: StatCan, 2021)

    70% of tech workers work from home (Source: Statcan, 2021)

    Remote work demands new security solutions

    The security perimeter is finally gone

    The data is outside the datacenter.
    The users are outside the office.
    The endpoints are … anywhere and everywhere.

    Organizations that did not implement digital transformation changes following COVID-19 experience higher costs following a breach, likely because it is taking nearly two months longer, on average, to detect and contain a breach when more than 50% of staff are working remotely (IBM, 2021).

    In 2022 the cumulative risk of so many remote connections means we need to rethink how we secure the remote/hybrid workforce.

    Security
    • Distributed denial of service
    • DNS hijacking
    • Weak VPN protocols
    Identity
    • One-time verification allowing lateral movement
    Colorful tiles representing the surrounding security solutions. Network
    • Risk perimeter stops at corporate network edge
    • Split tunneling
    Authentication
    • Weak authentication
    • Weak password
    Access
    • Man-in-the-middle attack
    • Cross-site scripting
    • Session hijacking

    Recommended Actions

    Mature your identity management

    Compromised identity is the main vector to breaches in recent years. Stale accounts, contractor accounts, misalignment between HR and IT – the lack of foundational practices leads to headline-making breaches every week.
    Tighten up identity control to keep your organization out of the newspaper.

    Get a handle on your endpoints

    Work-from-home (WFH) often means unknown endpoints on unknown networks full of other unknown devices…and others in the home potentially using the workstation for non-work purposes. Gaining visibility into your endpoints can help to keep detection and resolution times short.

    Educate users

    Educate everyone on security best practices when working remotely:

    • Apply secure settings (not just defaults) to the home network.
    • Use strong passwords.
    • Identify suspicious email.
    Ease of use

    Many workers complain that the corporate technology solution makes it difficult to get their work done.

    Employees will take productivity over security if we force them to choose, so IT needs to listen to end users’ needs and provide a solution that is nimble and secure.

    Roadmap to securing remote/hybrid workforce

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    The corporate network now extends to the internet – ensure your security plan has you covered.

    Initiative Description:

    • Reassess enterprise security strategy to include the WFH attack surface (especially endpoint visibility).
    • Ensure authentication requirements for remote workers are sufficient (e.g. MFA, strong passwords, hardware tokens for high-risk users/connections).
    • Assess the value of zero trust networking to minimize the blast radius in the case of a breach.
    • Perform penetration testing annually.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.


    Reduced cost of security incidents/reputational damage

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Improved ability to attract and retain talent
    Arrow pointing up.
    Increased business adaptability
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Potential disruption to traditional working patterns
    • Cost of investing in WFH versus risk of BYOD

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Secure Digital Transformation

    Priority 03

    Digital transformation could be a competitive advantage…or the cause of your next data breach.

    Executive summary

    Background

    Digital transformation is occurring at an ever-increasing rate these days. As Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella said early in the pandemic, “We’ve seen two years’ worth of digital transformation in two months.”

    We have heard similar stories from Info-Tech members who deployed rollouts that were scheduled to take months over a weekend instead.

    Microsoft’s own shift to rapidly expand its Teams product is a prime example of how quickly the digital landscape has changed. The global adaption to a digital world has largely been a success story, but rapid change comes with risk, and there is a parallel story of rampant cyberattacks like we have never seen before.

    Insight

    There is an adage that “slow is smooth, and smooth is fast” – the implication being that fast is sloppy. In 2022 we’ll see a pattern of organizations working to catch up their cybersecurity with the transformations we all made in 2020.

    $1.78 trillion expected in digital transformation investments (Source: World Economic Forum, 2021)

    An ounce of security prevention versus a pound of cure

    The journey of digital transformation is a risky one.

    Digital transformations often rely heavily on third-party cloud service providers, which increases exposure of corporate data.

    Further, adoption of new technology creates a new threat surface that must be assessed, mitigations implemented, and visibility established to measure performance.

    However, digital transformations are often run on slim budgets and without expert guidance.

    Survey respondents report as much: rushed deployments, increased cloud migration, and shadow IT are the top vulnerabilities reported by security leaders and executives.

    In a 2020 Ponemon survey, 82% of IT security and C-level executives reported experiencing at least one data breach directly resulting from a digital transformation they had undergone.

    Scope creep is inevitable on any large project like a digital transformation. A small security shortcut early in the project can have dire consequences when it grows to affect personal data and critical systems down the road.

    Recommended Actions

    Engage the business early and often

    Despite the risks, organizations engage in digital transformations because they also have huge business value.

    Security leaders should not be seeking to slow or stop digital transformations; rather, we should be engaging with the business early to get ahead of risks and enable successful transformation.

    Establish a vendor security program

    Data is moving out of datacenters and onto third-party environments. Without security requirements built into agreements, and clear visibility into vendor security capabilities, that data is a major source of risk.

    A robust vendor security program will create assurance early in the process and help to reinforce the responsibility of securing data with other parts of the organization.

    Build/revisit your security strategy

    The threat surface has changed since before your transformation. This is the right time to revisit or rebuild your security strategy to ensure that your control set is present throughout the new environment – and also a great opportunity to show how your current security investments are helping secure your new digital lines of business!

    Educate your key players

    Only 16% of security leaders and executives report alignment between security and business processes during digital transformation.

    If security is too low a priority, then key players in your transformation efforts are likely unaware of how security risks impact their own success. It will be incumbent upon the CISO to start that conversation.

    Securing digital transformation

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Ensure your investment in digital transformation is appropriately secured.

    Initiative Description:

    • Engage security with digital transformation and relevant governance structures (steering committees) to ensure security considerations are built into digital transformation planning.
    • Incorporate security stage gates in project management procedures.
    • Establish a vendor security assessment program.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Increased likelihood of digital transformation success

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Ability to make informed decisions for the field rep strategy
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced long-term cost of digital transformation
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Potential increased up front cost (reduced long-term cost)
    • Potential slowed implementation with security stage gates in project management

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Adopt Zero Trust

    Priority 04

    Governments are recognizing the importance of zero trust strategies. So should your organization.

    Why now for zero trust?

    John Kindervag modernized the concept of zero trust back in 2010, and in the intervening years there has been enormous interest in cybersecurity circles, yet in 2022 only 30% of organizations report even beginning to roll out zero trust capabilities (Statista, 2022).

    Why such little action on a revolutionary and compelling model?

    Zero trust is not a technology; it is a principle. Zero trust adoption takes concerted planning, effort, and expense, for which the business value has been unclear throughout most of the last 10 years. However, several recent developments are changing that:

    • Securing technology has become very hard! The size, complexity, and attack surface of IT environments has grown significantly – especially since the pandemic.
    • Cyberattacks have become rampant as the cost to deploy harmful ransomware has become lower and the impact has become higher.
    • The shift away from on-premises datacenters and offices created an opening for zero trust investment, and zero trust technology is more mature than ever before.

    The time has come for zero trust adoption to begin in earnest.

    97% will maintain or increase zero trust budget (Source: Statista, 2022)

    Traditional perimeter security is not working

    Zero trust directly addresses the most prevalent attack vectors today

    A hybrid workforce using traditional VPN creates an environment where we are exposed to all the risks in the wild (unknown devices at any location on any network), but at a stripped-down security level that still provides the trust afforded to on-premises workers using known devices.

    What’s more, threats such as ransomware are known to exploit identity and remote access vulnerabilities before moving laterally within a network – vectors that are addressed directly by zero trust identity and networking. Ninety-three percent of surveyed zero trust adopters state that the benefits have matched or exceeded their expectations (iSMG, 2022).

    Top reasons for building a zero trust program in 2022

    (Source: iSMG, 2022)

    44%

    Enforce least privilege access to critical resources

    44%

    Reduce attacker ability to move laterally

    41%

    Reduce enterprise attack surface

    The business case for zero trust is clearer than ever

    Prior obstacles to Zero Trust are disappearing

    A major obstacle to zero trust adoption has been the sheer cost, along with the lack of business case for that investment. Two factors are changing that paradigm in 2022:

    The May 2021 US White House Executive Order for federal agencies to adopt zero trust architecture finally placed zero trust on the radar of many CEOs and board members, creating the business interest and willingness to consider investing in zero trust.

    In addition, the cost of adopting zero trust is quickly being surpassed by the cost of not adopting zero trust, as cyberattacks become rampant and successful zero trust deployments create a case study to support investment.

    Bar chart titled 'Cost to remediate a Ransomware attack' with bars representing the years '2021' and '2020'. 2021's cost sits around $1.8M while 2020's was only $750K The cost to remediate a ransomware attack more than doubled from 2020 to 2021. Widespread adoption of zero trust capabilities could keep that number from doubling again in 2022. (Source: Sophos, 2021)

    The cost of a data breach is on average $1.76 million less for organizations with mature zero trust deployments.

    That is, the cost of a data breach is 35% reduced compared to organizations without zero trust controls. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Recommended Actions

    Start small

    Don’t put all your eggs in one basket by deploying zero trust in a wide swath. Rather, start as small as possible to allow for growing pains without creating business friction (or sinking your project altogether).

    Build a sensible roadmap

    Zero trust principles can be applied in a myriad of ways, so where should you start? Between identities, devices, networking, and data, decide on a use case to do pilot testing and then refine your approach.

    Beware too-good-to-be-true products

    Zero trust is a powerful buzzword, and vendors know it.

    Be skeptical and do your due diligence to ensure your new security partners in zero trust are delivering what you need.

    Zero trust roadmap

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Develop a practical roadmap that shows the business value of security investment.

    Initiative Description:

    • Define desired business and security outcomes from zero trust adoption.
    • Assess zero trust readiness.
    • Build roadmaps for zero trust:
      1. Identity
      2. Networking
      3. Devices
      4. Data
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Increased security posture and business agility

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced impact of security events
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced cost of managing complex control set
    Arrow pointing up.
    More secure business transformation (i.e. cloud/digital)
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Learning curve of implementation (start small and slow)
    • Transition from current control set to zero trust model

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Protect Against and Respond to Ransomware

    Priority 05

    Ransomware is still the #1 threat to the safety of your data.

    Executive summary

    Background

    • Ransomware attacks have transformed in 2021 and show no sign of slowing in 2022. There is a new major security breach every week, despite organizations spending over $150 billion in a year on cybersecurity (Nasdaq, 2021).
    • Ransomware as a service (RaaS) is commonplace, and attackers are doubling down by holding encrypted data ransom and also demanding payment under threat to disclose exfiltrated data – and they are making good on their threats.
    • The global cost of ransomware is expected to rise to $265 billion by 2031 (Cybersecurity Ventures, 2021).
    • We expect to see an increase in ransomware incidents in 2022, both in severity and volume – multiple attacks and double extortion are now the norm.
    • High staff turnover increases risk because new employees are unfamiliar with security protocols.

    150% increase ransomware attacks in 2020 (Source: ENISA)

    This is a new golden age of ransomware

    What is the same in 2022

    Unbridled ransomware attacks make it seem like attackers must be using complex new techniques, but prevalent ransomware attack vectors are actually well understood.

    Nearly all modern variants are breaching victim systems in one of three ways:

    • Email phishing
    • Software vulnerabilities
    • RDP/Remote access compromise
    What is new in 2022
    The sophistication of victim targeting

    Victims often find themselves asking, “How did the attackers know to phish the most security-oblivious person in my staff?” Bad actors have refined their social engineering and phishing to exploit high-risk individuals, meaning your chain is only as strong as the weakest link.

    Ability of malware to evade detection

    Modern ransomware is getting better at bypassing anti-malware technology, for example, through creative techniques such as those seen in the MedusaLocker variant and in Ghost Control attacks.

    Effective anti-malware is still a must-have control, but a single layer of defense is no longer enough. Any organization that hopes to avoid paying a ransom must prepare to detect, respond, and recover from an attack.

    Many leaders still don’t know what a ransomware recovery would look like

    Do you know what it would take to recover from a ransomware incident?

    …and does your executive leadership know what it would take to recover?

    The organizations that are most likely to pay a ransom are unprepared for the reality of recovering their systems.

    If you have not done a tabletop or live exercise to simulate a true recovery effort, you may be exposed to more risk than you realize.

    Are your defenses sufficiently hardened against ransomware?

    Organizations with effective security prevention are often breached by ransomware – but they are prepared to contain, detect, and eradicate the infection.

    Ask yourself whether you have identified potential points of entry for ransomware. Assume that your security controls will fail.

    How well are your security controls layered, and how difficult would it be for an attacker to move east/west within your systems?

    Recommended Actions

    Be prepared for a breach

    There is no guarantee that an organization will not fall victim to ransomware, so instead of putting all their effort into prevention, organizations should also put effort into planning to respond to a breach.

    Security awareness training/phishing detection

    Phishing continues to be the main point of entry for ransomware. Investing in phishing awareness and detection among your end users may be the most impactful countermeasure you can implement.

    Zero trust adoption

    Always verify at every step of interaction, even when access is requested by internal users. Manage access of sensitive information based on the principle of least privilege access.

    Encrypt and back up your data

    Encrypt your data so that even if there is a breach, the attackers don’t have a copy of your data. Also, keep regular backups of data at a separate location so that you still have data to work with after a breach occurs.

    You never want to pay a ransom. Being prepared to deal with an incident is your best chance to avoid paying!

    Prevent and respond to ransomware

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Determine your current readiness, response plan, and projects to close gaps.

    Initiative Description:

    • Execute a systematic assessment of your current security and ransomware recovery capabilities.
    • Perform tabletop activities and live recoveries to test data recovery capabilities.
    • Train staff to detect suspicious communications and protect their identities.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Improved productivity and brand protection

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced downtime and disruption
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced cost due to incidents (ransom payments, remediation)
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Friction with existing staff

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Deepfakes: Dark-horse threat for 2022

    Deepfake video

    How long has it been since you’ve gone a full workday without having a videoconference with someone?

    We have become inherently trustful that the face we see on the screen is real, but the technology required to falsify that video is widely available and runs on commercially available hardware, ushering in a genuinely post-truth online era.

    Criminals can use deepfakes to enhance social engineering, to spread misinformation, and to commit fraud and blackmail.

    Deepfake audio

    Many financial institutions have recently deployed voiceprint authentication. TD describes its VoicePrint as “voice recognition technology that allows us to use your voiceprint – as unique to you as your fingerprint – to validate your identity” over the phone.

    However, hackers have been defeating voice recognition for years already. There is ripe potential for voice fakes to fool both modern voice recognition technology and the accounts payable staff.

    Bibliography

    “2021 Ransomware Statistics, Data, & Trends.” PurpleSec, 2021. Web.

    Bayern, Macy. “Why 60% of IT security pros want to quit their jobs right now.” TechRepublic, 10 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Bresnahan, Ethan. “How Digital Transformation Impacts IT And Cyber Risk Programs.” CyberSaint Security, 25 Feb. 2021. Web.

    Clancy, Molly. “The True Cost of Ransomware.” Backblaze, 9 Sept. 2021.Web.

    “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM, 2021. Web.

    Cybersecurity Ventures. “Global Ransomware Damage Costs To Exceed $265 Billion By 2031.” Newswires, 4 June 2021. Web.

    “Digital Transformation & Cyber Risk: What You Need to Know to Stay Safe.” Ponemon Institute, June 2020. Web.

    “Global Incident Response Threat Report: Manipulating Reality.” VMware, 2021.

    Granger, Diana. “Karmen Ransomware Variant Introduced by Russian Hacker.” Recorded Future, 18 April 2017. Web.

    “Is adopting a zero trust model a priority for your organization?” Statista, 2022. Web.

    “(ISC)2 Cybersecurity Workforce Study, 2021: A Resilient Cybersecurity Profession Charts the Path Forward.” (ISC)2, 2021. Web.

    Kobialka, Dan. “What Are the Top Zero Trust Strategies for 2022?” MSSP Alert, 10 Feb. 2022. Web.

    Kost, Edward. “What is Ransomware as a Service (RaaS)? The Dangerous Threat to World Security.” UpGuard, 1 Nov. 2021. Web.

    Lella, Ifigeneia, et al., editors. “ENISA Threat Landscape 2021.” ENISA, Oct. 2021. Web.

    Mello, John P., Jr. “700K more cybersecurity workers, but still a talent shortage.” TechBeacon, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Naraine, Ryan. “Is the ‘Great Resignation’ Impacting Cybersecurity?” SecurityWeek, 11 Jan. 2022. Web.

    Oltsik, Jon. “ESG Research Report: The Life and Times of Cybersecurity Professionals 2021 Volume V.” Enterprise Security Group, 28 July 2021. Web.

    Osborne, Charlie. “Ransomware as a service: Negotiators are now in high demand.” ZDNet, 8 July 2021. Web.

    Osborne, Charlie. “Ransomware in 2022: We’re all screwed.” ZDNet, 22 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “Retaining Tech Employees in the Era of The Great Resignation.” TalentLMS, 19 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Rubin, Andrew. “Ransomware Is the Greatest Business Threat in 2022.” Nasdaq, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Samartsev, Dmitry, and Daniel Dobrygowski. “5 ways Digital Transformation Officers can make cybersecurity a top priority.“ World Economic Forum, 15 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Seymour, John, and Azeem Aqil. “Your Voice is My Passport.” Presented at black hat USA 2018.

    Solomon, Howard. “Ransomware attacks will be more targeted in 2022: Trend Micro.” IT World Canada, 6 Jan. 2022. Web.

    “The State of Ransomware 2021.” Sophos, April 2021. Web.

    Tarun, Renee. “How The Great Resignation Could Benefit Cybersecurity.” Forbes Technology Council, Forbes, 21 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “TD VoicePrint.” TD Bank, n.d. Web.

    “Working from home during the COVID-19 pandemic, April 202 to June 2021.” Statistics Canada, 4 Aug. 2021. Web.

    “Zero Trust Strategies for 2022.” iSMG, Palo Alto Networks, and Optiv, 28 Jan. 2022. Web.

    Master M&A Cybersecurity Due Diligence

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}261|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance

    This research is designed to help organizations who are preparing for a merger or acquisition and need help with:

    • Understanding the information security risks associated with the acquisition or merger.
    • Avoiding the unwanted possibility of acquiring or merging with an organization that is already compromised by cyberattackers.
    • Identifying best practices for information security integration post merger.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The goal of M&A cybersecurity due diligence is to assess security risks and the potential for compromise. To succeed, you need to look deeper.

    Impact and Result

    • A repeatable methodology to systematically conduct cybersecurity due diligence.
    • A structured framework to rapidly assess risks, conduct risk valuation, and identify red flags.
    • Look deeper by leveraging compromise diagnostics to increase confidence that you are not acquiring a compromised entity.

    Master M&A Cybersecurity Due Diligence Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to master M&A cyber security due diligence, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand how we can support you in completing this project.

    [infographic]

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}147|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $50,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Estimation and planning practices set and reinforce the expectations of product delivery, which is a key driver of IT satisfaction.
    • However, today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products and business needs create mounting pressure for teams to make accurate estimates with little knowledge of the problem or solution to it, risking poor-quality products.
    • Many organizations lack the critical foundations involved in making acceptable estimates in collaboration with the various perspectives and estimation stakeholders.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Estimation reflects your culture and operating model. The accuracy of your estimates is dependent on the roles involved, which is not encouraged in traditional and top-down methodologies. Stakeholders must respect and support the team’s estimates.
    • Estimates support value delivery. IT satisfaction is driven by the delivery of valuable products and services. Estimates set the appropriate stakeholder expectations to ensure successful delivery and make the right decisions.
    • Estimates are more than just guesses. They are tools used to make critical business, product, and technical decisions and inform how to best utilize resources and funding.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish the right expectations. Gain a grounded understanding of estimation value and limitations. Discuss estimation challenges to determine if poor practices and tactics are the root causes or symptoms.
    • Strengthen analysis and estimation practices. Obtain a thorough view of the product backlog item (PBI) through good analysis tactics. Incorporate multiple analysis and estimation tactics to verify and validate assumptions.
    • Incorporate estimates into your delivery lifecycle. Review and benchmark estimates, and update expectations as more is learned.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize your estimation practice, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Justify estimation optimization

    Set the right stakeholder expectations for your delivery estimates and plans.

    • Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence – Phase 1: Justify Estimation Optimization
    • Estimation Quick Reference Template

    2. Commit to achievable delivery

    Adopt the analysis, estimation, commitment, and communication tactics to successfully develop your delivery plan.

    • Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence – Phase 2: Commit to Achievable Delivery

    3. Mature your estimation practice

    Build your estimation optimization roadmap.

    • Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence – Phase 3: Mature Your Estimation Practice
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set the Context

    The Purpose

    Discuss the decisions that estimates will help make.

    Level set estimation expectations by clarifying what they can and cannot do.

    Review the current state of your estimation practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded understanding of estimation that is accepted by all audiences and stakeholders.

    Identification of whether estimation practices are the root cause of estimation challenges or a symptom of a different issue.

    Activities

    1.1 Define estimation expectations.

    1.2 Reveal your root cause challenges.

    Outputs

    Estimation expectations

    Root causes of estimation challenges

    2 Build Your Estimation Practice

    The Purpose

    Discuss the estimation and planning practices used in the industry.

    Define the appropriate tactics to use to make key business and delivery decisions.

    Simulate the tactics to verify and validate their fit with your teams.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Knowledge of good practices that can improve the effectiveness of your estimates and plans.

    Practice using new tactics.

    Activities

    2.1 Ground estimation fundamentals.

    2.2 Strengthen your analysis tactics.

    2.3 Strengthen your estimation tactics.

    2.4 Commit and communicate delivery.

    2.5 Simulate your target state planning and estimation tactics.

    Outputs

    Estimation glossary and guiding principles

    Defined analysis tactics

    Defined estimation and consensus-building tactics

    Defined commitment and communication tactics

    Lessons learned

    3 Define Your Optimization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Review the scope and achievability of your improved estimation and planning practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Realistic and achievable estimation optimization roadmap.

    Activities

    3.1 Mature your estimation practice.

    Outputs

    Estimation optimization roadmap

    Improve Application Development Throughput

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}151|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $59,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • The business is demanding more features at an increasing pace. It is expecting your development teams to keep up with its changing needs while maintaining high quality.
    • However, your development process is broken. Tasks are taking significant time to complete, and development handoffs are not smooth.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Lean development is independent of your software development lifecycle (SDLC) methodology. Lean development practices can be used in both Agile and Waterfall teams.
    • Lean isn’t about getting rid of sound development processes. Becoming lean means fine-tuning the integration of core practices like coding and testing.
    • Lean thinking motivates automation. By focusing on optimizing the development process, automation becomes a logical and necessary step toward greater maturity and improved throughput.

    Impact and Result

    • Gain a deep understanding of lean principles and associated behaviors. Become familiar with the core lean principles and the critical attitudes and mindsets required by lean. Understand how incorporating DevOps and Agile principles can help your organization.
    • Conduct a development process and tool review. Use a value-stream analysis of your current development process and tools to reveal bottlenecks and time-consuming or wasteful tasks. Analyze these insights to identify root causes and the impact to product delivery.
    • Incorporate the right tools and practices to become more lean. Optimize the key areas where you are experiencing the most pain and consuming the most resources. Look at how today’s best development and testing practices (e.g. version control, branching) and tools (e.g. automation, continuous integration) can improve the throughput of your delivery pipeline.

    Improve Application Development Throughput Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should make development teams leaner, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Conduct a current state analysis

    Acquire a holistic perspective of the development team, process, and tools to identify the bottlenecks and inefficiency points that are significantly delaying releases.

    • Improve Application Development Throughput – Phase 1: Conduct a Current State Analysis
    • Lean Implementation Roadmap Template
    • Lean Development Readiness Assessment

    2. Define the lean future state

    Identify the development guiding principles and artifact management practices and build automation and continuous integration processes and tools that best fit the context and address the organization’s needs.

    • Improve Application Development Throughput – Phase 2: Define the Lean Future State

    3. Create an implementation roadmap

    Prioritize lean implementation initiatives in a gradual, phased approach and map the critical stakeholders in the lean transformation.

    • Improve Application Development Throughput – Phase 3: Create an Implementation Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Improve Application Development Throughput

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Conduct a Current State Analysis

    The Purpose

    Assess the current state of your development environment.

    Select a pilot project to demonstrate the value of your optimization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Realization of the root causes behind the bottlenecks and inefficiencies in your current development process.

    Valuation of your current development tools.

    Selection of a pilot project that will be used to gather the metrics in order obtain buy-in for wider optimization initiatives.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess your readiness to transition to lean development.

    1.2 Conduct a SWOT analysis and value-stream assessment of your current development process.

    1.3 Evaluate your development tools.

    1.4 Select a pilot project.

    Outputs

    Lean development readiness assessment

    Current state analysis of development process

    Value assessment of existing development tools

    Pilot project selection

    2 Define Your Lean Future State

    The Purpose

    Establish your development guiding principles.

    Enhance the versioning and management of your development artifacts.

    Automatically build and continuously integrate your code.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded and well-understood set of guiding principles that are mapped to development tasks and initiatives.

    Version control strategy of development artifacts, including source code, adapted to support lean development.

    A tailored approach to establish the right environment to support automated build, testing, and continuous integration tools.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your alignment to the lean principles.

    2.2 Define your lean development guiding principles.

    2.3 Define your source code branching approach.

    2.4 Define your build automation approach.

    2.5 Define your continuous integration approach.

    Outputs

    Level of alignment to lean principles

    Development guiding principles

    Source code branching approach

    Build automation approach.

    Continuous integration approach

    3 Create Your Implementation Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Prioritize your optimization initiatives to build an implementation roadmap.

    Identify the stakeholders of your lean transformation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Phased implementation roadmap that accommodates your current priorities, constraints, and enablers.

    Stakeholder engagement strategy to effectively demonstrate the value of the optimized development environment.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify metrics to gauge the success of your lean transformation.

    3.2 List and prioritize your implementation steps.

    3.3 Identify the stakeholders of your lean transformation.

    Outputs

    List of product, process, and tool metrics

    Prioritized list of tasks to optimize your development environment

    Identification of key stakeholders

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}432|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,059 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • All too often, the portfolio of programs and projects looks more like a random heap than a strategically organized and balanced collection of investments that will drive the business forward.
    • Portfolio managers know that with the right kind of information and the right level of process maturity they can get better results through the portfolio; however, organizations often assume (falsely) that the required level of maturity is out of reach from their current state and perpetually delay improvements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The information needed to define clear and usable criteria for organizing the portfolio of programs and projects already exists. Portfolio managers only need to identify the sources of that information and institute processes for regularly reviewing that information in order to define those criteria.
    • Once a portfolio manager has a clear idea of the goals and constraints that shape what ought to be included (or removed) from the portfolio and once these have been translated into clear and usable portfolio criteria, basic portfolio management processes can be instituted to ensure that these criteria are used consistently throughout the various stages of the project lifecycle.
    • Portfolio management frameworks and processes do not need to be built from scratch. Well-known frameworks – such as the one outlined in COBIT 5 APO05 – can be instituted in a way that will allow even low-maturity organizations to start organizing their portfolio.
    • Organizations do not need to grow into portfolio management frameworks to get the benefits of an organized portfolio; instead, they can grow within such frameworks.

    Impact and Result

    • An organized portfolio will ensure that the projects and programs included in it are strategically aligned and can actually be executed within the finite constraints of budgetary and human resource capacity.
    • Portfolio managers are better empowered to make decisions about which projects should be included in the portfolio (and when) and are better empowered to make the very tough decisions about which projects should be removed from the portfolio (i.e. cancelled).
    • Building and maturing a portfolio management framework will more fully integrate the PMO into the broader IT management and governance frameworks, making it a more integral part of strategic decisions and a better business partner in the long run.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should maintain an organized portfolio of programs and projects, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current state of the portfolio and PPM processes

    Analyze the current mix of programs and projects in your portfolio and assess the maturity of your current PPM processes.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 1: Assess the Current State of the Portfolio and PPM Processes
    • Project Portfolio Organizer
    • COBIT APO05 (Manage Portfolio) Alignment Workbook

    2. Enhance portfolio organization through improved PPM criteria and processes

    Enhance and optimize your portfolio management processes to ensure portfolio criteria are clearly defined and consistently applied across the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 2: Enhance Portfolio Organization Through Improved PPM Criteria and Processes
    • Portfolio Management Standard Operating Procedures

    3. Implement improved portfolio management practices

    Implement your portfolio management improvement initiatives to ensure long-term sustainable adoption of new PPM practices.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 3: Implement Improved Portfolio Management Practices
    • Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Portfolio Mix and Portfolio Process Current State

    The Purpose

    Analyze the current mix of the portfolio to determine how to better organize it according to organizational goals and constraints.

    Assess which PPM processes need to be enhanced to better organize the portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An analysis of the existing portfolio of projects (highlighting areas of concern).

    An analysis of the maturity of current PPM processes and their ability to support the maintenance of an organized portfolio.

    Activities

    1.1 Pre-work: Prepare a complete project list.

    1.2 Define existing portfolio categories, criteria, and targets.

    1.3 Analyze the current portfolio mix.

    1.4 Identify areas of concern with current portfolio mix.

    1.5 Review the six COBIT sub-processes for portfolio management (APO05.01-06).

    1.6 Assess the degree to which these sub-processes have been currently achieved at the organization.

    1.7 Assess the degree to which portfolio-supporting IT governance and management processes exist.

    1.8 Perform a gap analysis.

    Outputs

    Analysis of the current portfolio mix

    Assessment of COBIT alignment and gap analysis.

    2 Define Portfolio Target Mix, Criteria, and Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Define clear and usable portfolio criteria.

    Record/design portfolio management processes that will support the consistent use of portfolio criteria at all stages of the project lifecycle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly defined and usable portfolio criteria.

    A portfolio management framework that supports the consistent use of the portfolio criteria across all stages of the project lifecycle.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify determinants of the portfolio mix, criteria, and constraints.

    2.2 Define the target mix, portfolio criteria, and portfolio metrics.

    2.3 Identify sources of funding and resourcing.

    2.4 Review and record the portfolio criteria based upon the goals and constraints.

    2.5 Create a PPM improvement roadmap.

    Outputs

    Portfolio criteria

    Portfolio metrics for intake, monitoring, closure, termination, reprioritization, and benefits tracking

    Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap

    3 Design Improved Portfolio Sub-Processes

    The Purpose

    Ensure that the portfolio criteria are used to guide decision making at each stage of the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Processes that support decision making based upon the portfolio criteria.

    Processes that ensure the portfolio remains consistently organized according to the portfolio criteria.

    Activities

    3.1 Ensure that the metrics used for each sub-process are based upon the standard portfolio criteria.

    3.2 Establish the roles, accountabilities, and responsibilities for each sub-process needing improvement.

    3.3 Outline the workflow for each sub-process needing improvement.

    Outputs

    A RACI chart for each sub-process

    A workflow for each sub-process

    4 Change Impact Analysis and Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    The Purpose

    Ensure that the portfolio management improvement initiatives are sustainably adopted in the long term.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Stakeholder engagement.

    Sustainable long-term adoption of the improved portfolio management practices.

    Activities

    4.1 Conduct a change impact analysis.

    4.2 Create a stakeholder engagement plan.

    Outputs

    Change Impact Analysis

    Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    Completed Portfolio Management SOP

    Build an Application Department Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}180|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $220,866 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 34 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Application delivery has modernized. There are increasing expectations on departments to deliver on organizational and product objectives with increasing velocity.
    • Application departments produce many diverse, divergent products, applications, and services with expectations of frequent updates and changes based on rapidly changing landscapes

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There is no such thing as a universal “applications department.” Unlike other domains of IT, there are no widely accepted frameworks that clearly outline universal best practices of application delivery and management.
    • Different software needs and delivery orientations demand a tailored structure and set of processes, especially when managing a mixed portfolio or multiple delivery methods.

    Impact and Result

    Understand what your department’s purpose is through articulating its strategy in three steps:

    • Determining your application department’s values, principles, and orientation.
    • Laying out the goals, objectives, metrics, and priorities of the department.
    • Building a communication plan to communicate your overall department strategy.

    Build an Application Department Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build an application department strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take stock of who you are

    Consider and record your department’s values, principles, orientation, and capabilities.

    • Build an Application Department Strategy – Phase 1: Take Stock of Who You Are
    • Application Department Strategy Supporting Workbook

    2. Articulate your strategy

    Define your department’s strategy through your understanding of your department combined with everything that you do and are working to do.

    • Build an Application Department Strategy – Phase 2: Articulate Your Strategy
    • Application Department Strategy Template

    3. Communicate your strategy

    Communicate your department’s strategy to your key stakeholders.

    • Build an Application Department Strategy – Phase 3: Communicate Your Strategy

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build an Application Department Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Take Stock of Who You Are

    The Purpose

    Understand what makes up your application department beyond the applications and services provided.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Articulating your guiding principles, values, capabilities, and orientation provides a foundation for expressing your department strategy.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify your team’s values and guiding principles.

    1.2 Define your department’s orientation.

    Outputs

    A summary of your department’s values and guiding principles

    A clear view of your department’s orientation and supporting capabilities

    2 Articulate Your Strategy

    The Purpose

    Lay out all the details that make up your application department strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A completed application department strategy canvas containing everything you need to communicate your strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Write your application department vision statement.

    2.2 Define your application department goals and metrics.

    2.3 Specify your department capabilities and orientation.

    2.4 Prioritize what is most important to your department.

    Outputs

    Your department vision

    Your department’s goals and metrics that contribute to achieving your department’s vision

    Your department’s capabilities and orientation

    A prioritized roadmap for your department

    3 Communicate Your Strategy

    The Purpose

    Lay out your strategy’s communication plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Your application department strategy presentation ready to be presented to your stakeholders.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify your stakeholders.

    3.2 Develop a communication plan.

    3.3 Wrap-up and next steps

    Outputs

    List of prioritized stakeholders you want to communicate with

    A plan for what to communicate to each stakeholder

    Communication is only the first step – what comes next?

    Communicate Any IT Initiative

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}428|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead

    IT communications are often considered ineffective and unengaging. This is demonstrated by the:

    • Lack of expectation that IT should communicate well. Why develop a skill that no one expects IT to deliver on?
    • Failure to recognize the importance of communication to engage employees and communicate ideas.
    • Perception that communication is a broadcast not a continuous dialogue.
    • Inability to create, monitor, and manage feedback mechanisms.
    • Overreliance on data as the main method of communication instead of as evidence to support a broader narrative.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don't make data your star. It is a supporting character. People can argue about the collection methods or interpretation of the data, but they cannot argue with the story you share.
    • Messages are also non-verbal. Practice using your voice and body to set the right tone and impact your audience.
    • Recognize that communications are essential even in highly technical IT environments.
    • Measure if the communication is being received and resulting in the desired outcome. If not, modify what and how the message is being expressed.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop an actionable plan to deliver consistent, timely messaging for all audiences.
    • Compose and deliver meaningful messages.
    • Consistently deliver the right information and the right time to the right stakeholders.

    Communicate Any IT Initiative Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Communicate Any IT Initiative Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to plan, compose, and deliver communications to any stakeholder up, down, or across the organization.

    This blueprint not only provides the tools and techniques for planning, composing, and delivering effective communications, but also walks you through practical exercises. Practice and perfect your communication, composition, and delivery skills for any IT initiative.

    • Communicate Any IT Initiative – Phases 1-3

    2. Communicate Any IT Initiative Facilitation Deck – A step-by-step communications workshop deck suitable for any workshop with a communication component.

    Communication concepts and exercises that teach you how to plan, compose, and deliver effective communications. The deck includes practical tools, techniques, and skills practice.

    • Communicate Any IT Initiative Facilitation Deck

    3. Communications Planner – An communications plan template that includes a section to define a change, a communications plan, communications calendars, and a pitch composition exercise.

    This communications planner is a tool that accompanies the Effective IT Communications blueprint and the Communicate Any IT Initiative Facilitation Deck so that you can plan your communications, view your deliverables, and compose your pitch all in one document.

    • Communications Planner Tool

    4. Stakeholder Analysis Tool – A tool to help ensure that all stakeholders are identified and none are missed.

    A tool for identifying stakeholders and conducting an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.

    • Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Communicate Any IT Initiative

    Plan, compose, and deliver communications that engage your audience.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach
    Communicating about your initiative is when the work really begins. Many organizations struggle with:
    • Knowing what target audiences need to be communicated with.
    • Communicating the same message consistently and clearly across target audiences.
    • Communicating to target audiences at the right times.
    • Selecting a channel that will be most effective for the message and practicing to deliver that message.
    Some of the challenges IT faces when it comes to communicating its initiatives includes:
    • Not being given the opportunity or time to practice composing or delivering communications.
    • Coordinating the communications of this initiative with other initiative communications.
    • Forgetting to communicate with key stakeholders.
    Choosing not to communicate because we do not know how it’s leading to initiative failures and lack of adoption by impacted parties.
    For every IT initiative you have going forward, focus on following these three steps:
    1. Create a plan of action around who, what, how, and when communications will take place.
    2. Compose an easy-to-understand pitch for each stakeholder audience.
    3. Practice delivering the message in an authentic and clear manner.
    By following these steps, you will ensure that your audience always understands and feels ready to engage with you.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Every IT employee can be a great communicator; it just takes a few consistent steps, the right tools, and a dedication to practicing communicating your message.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Effective communications is not a broadcast but a dialogue between communicator and audience in a continuous feedback loop.

    Continuous Feedback Loop

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. The skills needed to communicate effectively as a front-line employee or CIO are the same. It’s important to begin the development of these skills from the beginning of one's career.
    2. Time is a non-renewable resource. Any communication needs to be considered valuable and engaging by the audience or they will be unforgiving.
    3. Don't make data your star. It is a supporting character. People can argue about the collection methods or interpretation of the data, but they cannot argue about the story you share.

    Poor communication can lead to dissatisfied stakeholders

    27.8% of organizations are not satisfied with IT communications.

    25.8% of business stakeholders are not satisfied with IT communications.

    Source: Info-Tech Diagnostic Programs; n=34,345 business stakeholders within 604 organizations

    The bottom line? Stakeholders for any initiative need to be communicated with often and well. When stakeholders become dissatisfied with IT’s communication, it can lead to an overall decrease in satisfaction with IT.

    Good IT initiative communications can be leverage

    • IT risk mitigation and technology initiative funding are dependent on critical stakeholders comprehending the risk impact and initiative benefit in easy-to-understand terms.
    • IT employees need clear and direct information to feel empowered and accountable to do their jobs well.
    • End users who have a good experience engaging in communications with IT employees have an overall increase in satisfaction with IT.
    • Continuously demonstrating IT’s value to the organization comes when those initiatives are clearly aligned to overall objectives – don’t assume this alignment is being made.
    • Communication prevents assumptions and further miscommunication from happening among IT employees who are usually impacted and fear change the most.

    “Nothing gets done properly if it's not communicated well.”
    -- Nastaran Bisheban, CTO KFC Canada

    Approach to communications

    Introduction
    Review effective communications.

    Plan
    Plan your communications using a strategic tool.

    Compose
    Create your own message.

    Deliver
    Practice delivering your own message.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for effective IT communications

    1. Plan Strategic Communications 2. Compose a Compelling Message 3. Deliver Messages Effectively
    Step Activities
    1. Define the Change
    2. Determine Target Audience
    3. Communication Outcomes
    4. Clarify the Key Message(s)
    5. Identify the Owner and Messenger(s)
    6. Select the Right Channels
    7. Establish a Frequency and Time Frame
    8. Obtain Feedback and Improve
    9. Finalize the Calendar
    1. Craft a Pitch
    2. Revise the Pitch
    1. Deliver Your Pitch
    2. Refine and Deliver Again
    Step Outcomes Establish an easy-to-read view of the key communications that need to take place related to your initiative or change. Practice writing a pitch that conveys the message in a compelling and easy-to-understand way. Practice delivering the pitch. Ensure there is authenticity in the delivery while still maintaining the audience’s attention.

    This blueprint can support communication about any IT initiative

    • Strategy or roadmap
    • Major transformational change
    • System integration
    • Process changes
    • Service changes
    • New solution rollouts
    • Organizational restructuring

    We recommend considering this blueprint a natural add-on to any completed Info-Tech blueprint, whether it is completed in the DIY fashion or through a Guided Implementation or workshop.

    Key deliverable:

    Communication Planner
    A single place to plan and compose all communications related to your IT initiative.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Facilitation Guide
    A step-by-step guide to help your IT organization develop a communication plan and practice composing and delivering key messages.

    Stakeholder Analysis
    An ability to assess all stakeholders based on impact, influence, and involvement.

    Workshop Overview

    MorningAfternoon
    ActivitiesPlan Strategic Communications for Your Initiative
    1. Define the Change
    2. Determine Target Audience
    3. Communication Outcomes
    4. Clarify the Key Message(s)
    5. Identify the Owner and Messenger(s)
    6. Select the Right Channels
    7. Establish a Frequency and Time Frame
    8. Obtain Feedback and Improve
    9. Finalize the Calendar
    Compose and Deliver a Compelling Message
    1. Craft a Pitch
    2. Revise the Pitch
    3. Deliver Your Pitch
    4. Refine and Deliver Again
    Deliverables
    1. Communication planner with weekly, monthly, and yearly calendar views to ensure consistent and ongoing engagement with every target audience member
    1. Crafted pitches that can be used for communicating the initiative to different stakeholders
    2. Skills and ability to deliver messages more effectively

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Key KPIs for communication with any stakeholder

    Measuring communication is hard; use these to determine effectiveness:

    Goal Key Performance Indicator (KPI) Related Resource
    Obtain board buy-in for IT strategic initiatives. X% of IT initiatives that were approved to be funded.
    Number of times that technical initiatives were asked to be explained further.
    Using our Board Presentation Review
    Ensure stakeholders feel engaged during initiatives. X% of business leadership satisfied with the statement “IT communicates with your group effectively.” Using the CIO Business Vision Diagnostic
    End users know what IT initiatives are going to impact the products or services they use. X% of end users that are satisfied with communications around changing services or applications. Using the End-User Satisfaction Survey
    Project stakeholders receive sufficient communication throughout the initiative. X% overall satisfaction with the quality of the project communications. Using the PPM Customer Satisfaction Diagnostic
    Employees are empowered to perform on IT initiatives. X% satisfaction employees have with statement “I have all the resources and information I need to do a great job.” Using the Employee Engagement Diagnostic Program

    Phase 1

    Plan Strategic Communications

    Activities
    1.1 Define the Change
    1.2 Determine Target Audience
    1.3 Communication Outcomes
    1.4 Clarify the Key Message(s)
    1.5 Identify the Owner and Messenger(s)
    1.6 Select the Right Channels
    1.7 Establish a Frequency and Time Frame
    1.8 Obtain Feedback and Improve
    1.9 Finalize the Calendar

    Communicate Any IT Initiative Effectively
    Phase1 > Phase 2 > Phase 3

    This step involves the following participants:
    Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Outcomes of this step
    Create an easy-to-follow communications plan to ensure that the right message is sent to the right audience using the right medium and frequency.

    What is an IT change?

    Before communicating, understand the degree of change.

    Incremental Change:
    • Changes made to improve current processes or systems (e.g. optimizing current technology).
    Transitional Change:
    • Changes that involve dismantling old systems and/or processes in favor of new ones (e.g. new product or services added).
    Transformational Change:
    • Significant change in organizational strategy or culture resulting in substantial shift in direction.
    Examples:
    • New or changed policy
    • Switching from on-premises to cloud-first infrastructure
    • Implementing ransomware risk controls
    • Implementing a learning & development plan
    Examples:
    • Moving to an insourced or outsourced service desk
    • Developing a BI & analytics function
    • Integrating risk into organization risk
    • Developing a strategy (technology, architecture, security, data, service, infrastructure, application)
    Examples:
    • Organizational redesign
    • Acquisition or merger of another organization
    • Implementing a digital strategy
    • A new CEO or board taking over the organization's direction

    Consider the various impacts of the change

    Invest time at the start of the project to develop a detailed understanding of the impact of the change. This will help to create a plan that will simplify the change and save time in the end. Evaluate the impact from a people, process, and technology perspective.

    Leverage a design thinking principle: Empathize with the stakeholder – what will change?

    People

    • Team structure
    • Reporting structure
    • Career paths
    • Job skills
    • Responsibilities
    • Company vision/mission
    • Number of FTE
    • Culture
    • Training required

    Process

    • Budget
    • Work location
    • Daily workflow
    • Working conditions
    • Work hours
    • Reward structure
    • Required number of completed tasks
    • Training required

    Technology

    • Required tools
    • Required policies
    • Required systems
    • Training required

    1.1 Define the change

    30 minutes

    1. While different stakeholders will be impacted by the change differently, it’s important to be able to describe what the change is at a higher level.
    2. Have everyone take eight minutes to jot down what the change is and why it is happening in one to two sentences. Tab 2 of the Communication Planner Tool can also be used to house the different ideas.
    3. Present the change statements to one another.
    4. By leveraging one of the examples or consolidating many examples, as a group document:
      • What is the change?
      • Why is it happening?
    5. The goal is to ensure that all individuals involved in establishing or implementing the change have the same understanding.
    Input Output
    • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
    • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
    Materials Participants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Ensure effective communication by focusing on four key elements

    Audience
    Stakeholders (either groups or individuals) who will receive the communication.

    Message
    Information communicated to impacted stakeholders. Must be rooted in a purpose or intent.

    Messenger
    Person who delivers the communication to the audience. The communicator and owner are two different things.

    Channel
    Method or channel used to communicate to the audience.

    Identify the target audience

    The target audience always includes groups and individuals who are directly impacted by the change and may also include those who are change adjacent.

    Define the target audience: Identify which stakeholders will be the target audience of communications related to the initiative. Stakeholders can be single individuals (CFO) or groups (Applications Team).

    Stakeholders to consider:

    • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
    • Who benefits from the initiative?
    • Who loses from the initiative?
    • Who can make approvals?
    • Who controls resources?
    • Who has specialist skills?
    • Who implements the changes?
    • Who will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts in areas of influence that are affected by what you are doing?
    • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
    • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?

    1.2a Determine target audience

    20 minutes

    1. Consider all the potential individuals or groups of individuals who will be impacted or can influence the outcome of the initiative.
    2. On tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool, list each of the stakeholders who will be part of the target audience. If in person, use sticky notes to define the target audiences. The individuals or group of individuals that make up the target audience are all the people who require being communicated with before, during, or after the initiative.
    3. As you list each target audience, consider how they perceive IT. This perception could impact how you choose to communicate with the stakeholder(s).
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • Why the change is needed
    • A list of individuals or group of individuals that will be communicated with.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    1.2b Conduct a stakeholder analysis (optional)

    1 hour

    1. For each stakeholder identified as a part of the target audience, conduct an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.
    2. Based on the stakeholder, the influence or impact of the change, initiative, etc. can inform the type and way of communicating.
    3. This is a great activity for those who are unsure how to frame communications for each stakeholder identified as a target audience.
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • Why the change is needed
    • A list of individuals or group of individuals that will be communicated with
    • The degree of influence or impact each target audience stakeholder has.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool

    Determine the desired outcome of communicating with each audience

    For each target audience, there will be an overall goal on why they need to be communicated with. This outcome or purpose is often dependent on the type of influence the stakeholder wields within the organization as well as the type of impact the change or initiative will have. Depending on the target audience, consider each of the communication outcomes listed below.

    Communicating Across the Organization Communicating Up to Board or Executives Communicating Within IT
    • Obtain buy-in
    • Obtain approval
    • Obtain funding
    • Demonstrate alignment to organization objectives
    • Reduce concerns about risk
    • Demonstrate alignment to organization objectives
    • Demonstrate alignment to individual departments or functions
    • Obtain other departments’ buy-in
    • Inform about a crisis
    • Inform about the IT change
    • Obtain adoption related to the change
    • Obtain buy-in
    • Inform about the IT change
    • Create a training plan
    • Inform about department changes
    • Inform about organization changes
    • Inform about a crisis
    • Obtain adoption related to the change
    • Distribute key messages to change agents

    1.3 Communication outcomes

    30 minutes

    1. For each stakeholder, there may be one or more reasons why you need to communicate with them. On tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool or on a whiteboard, begin to identify the objective or outcome your team is seeking by engaging in each target audience.
    2. As you move through the communication outcomes, it could result in more than one outcome for each target audience.
    3. Ensure there is one line for each target audience desired communication outcome. Many stakeholders might need to be communicated with for several reasons. If using the Communication Planner Tool, add the target audience name in column C for as many different communication outcomes there are in column D related to that stakeholder.
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • A list of individuals or group of individuals that will be communicated with
    • Outcome or objective of communicating with each stakeholder
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Establish and define key messages based on organizational objectives

    What are key messages?
    • Key messages guide all internal communications to ensure they are consistent, unified, and straightforward.
    • Distill key messages down from organizational objectives and use them to reinforce the organization’s strategic direction. Key messages should inspire employees to act in a way that will help the organization reach its objectives.
    How to establish key messages: Ground key messages in organizational strategy and culture. These should be the first places you look to determine the organization’s key messages:
    • Refer to organizational strategy documents. What needs to be reinforced in internal communications to ensure the organization can achieve its strategy? This is a key message.
    • Look at the organization’s values. How do values guide how work should be done? Do employees need to behave in a certain way or keep a certain value top of mind? This is a key message.

    Key messages should be clear, concise, and consistent (Porter, 2014). The intent is to convey important information in a way that is relatable and memorable, to promote reinforcement, and ultimately, to drive action.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Empathizing with the audience is key to anticipating and addressing objections as well as identifying benefits. Customize messaging based on audience attributes such as work model (e.g. hybrid), anticipated objections, what's in it for me? (WIIFM), and specific expectations.

    1.4 Clarify the key messages

    25 minutes

    1. Divide the number of communication lines up equally amongst the participants.
    2. Based on the outcome expected from engaging that target audience in communications, define one to five key messages that should be expressed.
    3. The key messages should highlight benefits anticipated, concerns anticipated, details about the change, and plan of action or next steps. The goal here is to ensure the target audience is included in the communication process.
    4. The key messages should be focused on how the target audience receives a consistent message, especially if different communication messengers are involved.
    5. Document the key messages on tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool.
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcomes
    • Key messages to support a consistent approach
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Understand to how to identify appropriate messengers

    Messages must be communicated by a variety of individuals across the organization. Select the messenger depending on the message characteristics (e.g. audience, message, medium). The same messenger can be used for a variety of messages across different mediums.

    Personal impact messages should be delivered by an employee's direct supervisor.

    Organizational impact messages and rationale should be delivered by senior leaders in the affected areas.

    Chart Preferred Messenger for Change Messages

    Recent research by Prosci found employees prefer to hear personal messages from their direct manager and organizational messages from the executive leadership team.

    Fifty percent of respondents indicated the CEO as the preferred messenger for organizational change messages.

    Select the appropriate messenger

    For each audience, message, and medium, review whether the message is personal or organizational to determine which messengers are best.

    The number and seniority of messengers involved depends on the size of the change:

    • Incremental change
      • Personal messages from direct supervisors
      • Organizational messages from a leader in the audience’s function or the direct supervisor
    • Transitional change
      • Personal messages from direct supervisors or function leaders
      • Organizational messages from a leader in the audience’s function or the C suite
    • Transformational change
      • Personal messages from direct supervisors or function leaders
      • Organizational messages from the CEO or C-suite
      • Cascading messages are critical in this type of change because all levels of the organization will be involved

    Communication owner vs. messenger

    Communication Owner

    Single person
    Accountable for the communication message and activities
    Oversees that the communication does not contradict other communications
    Validates the key messages to be made

    Communication Messenger(s)

    Single person or many people
    Responsible for delivering the intended message
    Engages the target audience in the communication
    Ensures the key messages are made in a consistent and clear manner

    1.5 Identify the owner and messenger(s)

    30 minutes

    1. For every communication, there needs to be a single owner. This is the person who approves the communication and will be accountable for the communication
    2. The messenger(s) can be several individuals or a single individual depending on the target audience and desired outcome being sought through the communications.
    3. Identify the person or role who will be accountable for the communication and document this in the Communication Planner Tool.
    4. Identify the person(s) or role(s) who will be responsible for delivering the communication and engaging the target audience and document this in the Communication Planner Tool.
    Input Output
    • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
    • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
    Materials Participants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Review appropriate channel for different types of messages

    Communication channels are in-person, paper-based, or tech-enabled. Provide communicators with guidance on which mediums to use in different situations.

    First question: Should the communication be delivered in-person or not?
    Types of channels In-Person Paper-Based or Tech-Enabled
    Questions to consider
    • How is your message likely to be received? Is the message primarily negative?
    • Will the message prompt a lot of dialogue or questions? Will it require significant context or clarification?
    Note: Messages that are important, complex, or negative must be delivered in person. This allows the sender to provide context, clarify questions, and collect feedback.
    • Use paper-based and tech-enabled communications to provide reminders or updates.
    • When deciding which of the two to use, think about your audience: do they have regular access to a computer?
    Two-way interaction Supplement in-person communications with paper-based or tech-enabled communications to provide follow-up and consistency (Government of Nova Scotia). Tech-enabled communications allow the sender to deliver messages when they do not co-locate with the receiver. That said, make sure paper-based communications are provided to those without regular access to a computer.

    Consider accessibility when communicating change – not all employees will have access to the same mediums. To ensure inclusivity, strategically plan which mediums to use to reach the entire audience.

    Select communication channels

    Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
    One-on-One Meetings Individual meetings between managers and their direct reports to ensure they understand the change, can express any concerns, and obtain feedback or recommendations.
    • How the change will impact the employee, what they can expect throughout the change, how they can get support, what the timelines are, etc.
    • Requests for feedback.
    • Responses to feedback.
    • Most applicable for personal messages throughout all stages of change.
    • When real-time feedback is needed.
    • To understand the change’s impact on each employee, understand their emotional reactions and provide support.
    • After a change has been announced and continuing at a regular cadence until after the change has been implemented. Frequency of meetings will vary by employee over the course of the change.
    Team Meeting A meeting of a work unit or department. Can be virtual, in person, or a combination. Led by the work unit or department head/manager.
    • How the change will impact the team – how work gets done, who they work with, etc.
    • Available timelines regarding the change.
    • Support available throughout the change.
    • Most applicable for personal messages throughout all change stages.
    • When real-time communication is needed to keep everyone on the same page and provide an opportunity to ask questions (essential for buy-in).
    • To announce a small change or after a larger change announcement. Continue frequently until the end of adoption, with time reserved for ad hoc meetings.
    Email Electronic communication sent to the audience’s company emails, or in the absence of that, to their personal emails.
    • Overarching details and timelines.
    • Short, easy-to-digest pieces of information that either provide a summary of what to expect or describe actions employees need to take.
    • Applicable for both personal and organizational messages, depending on the messenger. Send personal messages in separate emails from organizational messages.
    • To communicate key details quickly and to a distributed workforce.
    • To reinforce or reiterate information that has been shared in person. Can be used broadly or target specific employees/groups.

    Select communication channels

    Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
    Town Hall Virtual or in-person meeting where senior leadership shares information with a wide audience about the change and answers questions.
    • Messaging that is applicable to a large audience.
    • The strategic decisions of senior leadership.
    • Highlight positive initiative outcomes.
    • Recognize employee efforts.
    • Report on engagement.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages to launch a change or between milestones in a long-term or complex change.
    • To enable senior leaders to explain strategic decisions to employees.
    • To allow employees to ask questions and provide feedback.
    • When support of senior leadership is critical to change success.
    Roadshow A series of meetings where senior leadership or the change champion travels to different geographic locations to hold town halls adapted to each location’s audience.
    • Why the change is happening, when the change is happening, who will be impacted, expectations, and key points of contact.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages to launch a change and between milestones during a long-term, large, or complex change.
    • For a change impacting several locations.
    • When face time with senior leadership is critical to developing understanding and adoption of the change. Satellite locations can often feel forgotten. A roadshow provides access to senior leadership and lends the credibility of the leader to the change.
    • To enable live two-way communication between employees and leadership.

    Select communication channels

    Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
    Intranet An internal company website that a large number of employees can access at any time.
    • Information that has already been communicated to the audience before, so they can access it at any time.
    • FAQs and/or general details about the change (e.g. milestones).
    • Most applicable for organizational messages.
    • To post relevant documentation so the audience can access it whenever they need it.
    • To enable consistency in answers to common questions.
    Training Scheduled blocks of time for the team to learn new skills and behaviors needed to successfully adapt to the change.
    • Reinforce the need for change and the benefits the change will have.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages during the implementation stage.
    • To reduce anxiety over change initiatives, improve buy-in, and increase adoption by helping employees develop skills and behaviors needed to perform effectively.
    Video Message A prerecorded short video clip designed for either simultaneous broadcast or just-in-time viewing. Can be sent over email or mobile or uploaded to a company portal/intranet.
    • Positive messaging to convey enthusiasm for the change.
    • Details about why the organization is changing and what the benefits will be, updates on major milestone achievements, etc.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages, used on a limited basis at any point during the change.
    • Effective when the message needs to appear more personal by putting a face to the message and when it can be presented in a condensed time frame.
    • When a message needs to be delivered consistently across a variety of employees, locations, and time zones.
    • To provide updates and recognize key achievements.

    Select communication channels

    Medium Description Key Messages When to Use
    Shift Turnover Meeting A meeting between teams or departments when a shift changes over; sometimes called a shift report. Used to communicate any relevant information from the outgoing shift to the incoming shift members.
    • Details related to the activities performed during the shift.
    • Most applicable for personal impact messages during the implementation stage to reinforce information shared using other communication mediums.
    • Where change directly impacts role expectations or performance so teams hear the same message at the same time.
    Company Newsletter Electronic or hardcopy newsletter published by the company. Contains timely updates on company information.
    • Overarching change details.
    • Information that has already been communicated through other mediums.
    • Varies with the change stage and newsletter frequency.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages throughout the change.
    • When the change implementation is expected to be lengthy and audiences need to be kept updated.
    • To celebrate change successes and milestone achievements.
    Sign/Poster Digital or paper-based sign, graphic, or image. Includes posters, screensavers, etc.
    • Positive messaging to convey enthusiasm for the change.
    • Key dates and activities.
    • Key contacts.
    • Most applicable for organizational messages throughout the change.
    • As visual reminders in common, highly visible locations (e.g. a company bulletin board, elevator TV monitors).

    1.6 Select the right channels

    20 minutes

    1. Consider the different channels that were described and presented on the previous five slides. Each channel has element(s) to it that will allow it to be more beneficial based on the communication target audience, outcome, and messenger.
    2. Evenly assign the number of communication rows on tab 3 of the Communication Planner Tool and input the channel that should be used.
    3. Consider if the channel will:
      • Obtain the desired outcome of the communication.
      • Be completed by the messenger(s) defined.
      • Support the target audience in understanding the key messages.
    4. If any target audience communication requires several channels, add additional rows to the planner on TAB 3.
    InputOutput
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcome
    • Communication messenger(s)
    • The right channel selected to support the desired communication outcome.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Define the communication time frame based on the initiative

    Communication occurs during four of the five stages of an initiative:

    01 Identify and prioritize 02 Prepare for initiative 03 Create a communication plan 04 Implement change 05 Sustain the desired outcome
    Before During After
    • Communication begins with sponsors and the project team.
    • Set general expectations with project team and sponsors.
    • Outline the communication plan for the remaining stages.
    • Set specific expectations with each stakeholder group.
    • Implement the communication plan.
    • Use feedback loops to determine updates or changes to communications.
    • Communication continues as required after the change.
    • Feedback loops continue until change becomes business as usual.
    Where communication needs to happen

    Don’t forget: Cascade messages down through the organization to ensure those who need to deliver messages have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others. Include a mix of personal and organizational messages, but where possible, separate personal and organizational content into different communications.

    Establish a frequency that aligns to the desired communication outcome

    Successful communications are frequent communications.

    • The cadence of a communication is highly dependent on the objective of the communication.
    • Each target requires a different frequency as well:
      • Board Presentations > four times a year is a good frequency
      • Executive Leadership > monthly frequency
      • Organizationally > annually and when necessary
      • Organization Crises > daily, if not hourly
      • IT Initiatives and Projects > weekly
      • IT Teams > weekly, if not daily

    Tech Team Frequency for Discussing Goals

    “When goals are talked about weekly, teams are nearly 3X more likely to feel confident hitting them.”
    – Hypercontext, 2022

    Info-Tech Insight
    Communications made once will always fail. Ensure there is a frequency appropriate for every communication — or do not expect the desired outcome.

    1.7 Establish a frequency and time frame

    30 minutes

    1. For each row in tab 3, determine how frequently that communication needs to take place and when that communication needs to be completed by.
      • Frequency: How often the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. one-time, monthly, as needed).
      • Time frame: When the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. a planned period or a specific date).
    2. When selecting the time frame, consider what dependencies need to take place prior to that communication. For example, IT employees should not be communicated with on anything that has not yet been approved by the CEO. Also consider when other communications might be taking place so the message is not lost in the noise.
    3. For frequency, the only time that a communication needs to take place once is when presenting up to senior leaders of the organization. And even then it will sometimes require more than one conversation. Be mindful of this.
    InputOutput
    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcome
    • Communication channel
    • Frequency and time frame of the communication
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    First, ensure feedback mechanisms are in place

    Soliciting and acting on feedback involves employees in the decision-making process and demonstrates to them that their contributions matter.

    Prior to the strategy rollout, make sure you have also established feedback mechanisms to collect feedback on both the messages delivered and how they were delivered. Some ways to collect feedback include:

    • Evaluating intranet comments and interactions (likes, etc.) if this function is enabled.
    • Measuring comprehension and satisfaction through surveys and polls.
    • Looking for themes in the feedback and questions employees bring forward to managers during in-person briefings.

    Feedback Mechanisms:

    • CIO Business Vision Survey
    • Engagement Surveys
    • Focus Groups
    • Suggestion Boxes
    • Team Meetings
    • Random Sampling
    • Informal Feedback
    • Direct Feedback
    • Audience Body Language
    • Repeating the Message Back

    Select metrics to measure progress on key results

    There are two types of metrics that can be used to measure the impact of an internal communications strategy and progress toward strategy goals. These metrics are used to measure both outputs and outcomes.

    Select metrics measuring both:
    Tactical Effectiveness (Outputs) Strategic Effectiveness (Outcomes)
    • Open rate
    • Click-through rate
    • Employee sentiment
    • Participation rates
    • Physical distractions
    • Shift in behavior
    • Manager capability to communicate
    • Organizational ability to meet goals
    • Engagement
    • Turnover

    Pyramid of metrics to measure process on key results

    1.8 Obtain feedback and improve

    20 minutes

    1. Evenly distribute the number of rows in the communication plan to all those involved. Consider a metric that would help inform whether the communication outcome was achieved.
    2. For each row, identify a feedback mechanism (slide 38) that could be used to enable the collection and confirm a successful outcome.
    3. Come back as a group and validate the feedback mechanisms selected.
    4. The important aspect here is not just to measure if the desired outcome was achieved. However, if the desired outcome is not achieved, consider what you might do to change or enable better communication to that target audience.
    5. Every communication can be better. Feedback, whether it is tactical or strategic, will help inform methods to improve future communication activities.
    InputOutput
    • Communication outcome
    • Target audience
    • Communication channel
    • A mechanism to measure communication feedback and adjust future communications when necessary.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Example of internal communications survey

    Use and modify the questions below when building an internal communications survey. Use a Likert scale to gauge responses.

    1. I am satisfied with the communications at our organization.
    2. I am kept fully informed of news and updates relevant to our organization.
    3. I receive information that is relevant to me on a regular basis.
    4. I have the information I need to do my job.
    5. I know where to go to find the information I am looking for.
    6. My manager communicates with me in-person on a regular basis.
    7. I feel I can believe the information I receive from the company.
    8. I feel heard by senior leaders and know that they have received my feedback.
    9. The content and information that I receive is interesting to me.

    Create an easy-to-read approach to communication

    Example of an easy-to-read approach to communication

    1.9 Finalize the calendar

    2 hours

    1. Once the information on tabs 2 and 3 of the Communication Planner Tool has been completed, start to organize the information in an easy-to-read view.
    2. Using the annual, monthly, and weekly calendar views on tabs 3 to 5, begin to formalize the dates of when communications will take place.
    3. Following the instructions on each tab, complete one or all of the views of the communication plan. Remember, the stakeholder that makes up the target audience needs to be considered and whether this communication will overlap with any other communications.
    InputOutput
    • Communication Plan on tab 2
    • Yearly, monthly, and weekly communication calendars
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Phase 2

    Compose a Compelling Message

    Activities

    2.1 Craft a Pitch
    2.2 Revise the Pitch

    This step involves the following participants:
    Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Outcomes of this step
    Ability to create a clear, concise, and consistent message using best practices and a pitch framework.

    Communication Any IT Initiative Effectively

    Phase 1 > Phase 2 > Phase 3

    Include all the following pieces in your message for an effective communication

    Pieces needed in your message for effective communication

    Info-Tech Insight
    Time is a non-renewable resource. The message crafted must be considered a value-add communication to your audience.

    Enable good communication with these components

    Be Consistent Be Clear
    • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Test your communication with your team or colleagues to obtain feedback before delivering to a broader audience.
    • A lack of consistency can be interpreted as an attempt at deception. This can hurt credibility and trust.
    • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
    • Choice of language is important: “Do you think this is a good idea? I think we could really benefit from your insights and experience here.” Or do you mean: “I think we should do this. I need you to do this to make it happen.”
    • Don’t use jargon.
    Be Relevant Be Concise
    • Talk about what matters to the stakeholder.
    • Talk about what matters to the initiative.
    • Tailor the details of the message to each stakeholder’s specific concerns.
    • IT thinks in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be understood, but this does not matter to stakeholders. Think: “what’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.
    • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
    • There is a risk of diluting your key message if you include too many other details.
    • If you provide more information than necessary, the clarity and consistency of the message can be lost.

    Draft the core messages to communicate

    Draft core messages communicating information consistent with the high-level communications plan. This includes the overall goal of communications, key messaging, specifics related to the change action, and customizations for each audience. It’s also important to:

    1. Hook your audience: Use a compelling introduction that ensures your target audience cares about the message. Use a statistic or another piece of information that presents the problem in a unique way.
    2. Demonstrate you can help: Let the audience know that based on the unique problem you can help. There is value to engaging and working with you further.
    3. Repeat messages several times and through several messengers and mediums throughout the change stages to ensure all audience members receive and understand the details.
    4. Write for the ear: Use concise and clear sentences, avoid technological language, and when you speak it aloud ensure it sounds like how you would normally speak.
    5. Keep messaging positive but realistic. Avoid continually telling stakeholders that “change is hard.” Instead, communicate messages around change success to positively prime the audience’s mindset (Harvard Business Review).
    6. Communicate what is meaningfully unchanged. Not everything will be impacted by the change. To help reduce fears, include information about meaningful aspects of employees’ work that will not be changing (e.g. employees are moving to report to a new manager on a new team, but the job responsibilities are staying the same).
    7. Finish with a call to action: Your concluding statement should not be a thank-you but a call to action that ignites how your audience will behave after the communication.

    Components of a good pitch

    Key Components of a Good Pitch
    Purpose of the pitch What are you asking for? What is the desired outcome of the conversation? What three things do you want the audience to take away?
    Speak to what matters to them Who is your audience and what are their biggest challenges today? What do they care? What is the “so what”? Humanize it. Start with an example of a real person.
    Sell the improvement How is your solution going to solve that problem? Is your solution a pain killer or vitamin?
    Show real value How will your solution create real value? How can that be measured? Give an example.
    Discuss potential fears Identify and alleviate fears the stakeholder may have in working with you. Think about what they think now and what you want them to think.
    Have a call to action Identify what your ask is. What are you looking for from the stakeholder? Listen and respond.
    Follow up with a thank-you Did you ensure that the participants’ time was respected and appreciated? Be genuine and sincere.

    Key questions to answer with change communication

    To effectively communicate change, answer questions before they’re asked, whenever possible. To do this, outline at each stage of the change process what’s happening next for the audience and answer other anticipated questions. Pair key questions with core messages in change communications.

    Examples of key questions by change stage include:

    What is changing?
    When is the change expected?
    Who will be championing the change?
    What are the change expectations?
    Will I have input into how the change is happening?
    What’s happening next?
    Why are we changing?
    Why is the change happening now?
    What are the risks of not changing?
    What will be new?
    What’s in it for me?
    What training will be available?
    Who will be impacted?
    How will I be impacted?
    How will my team be impacted?
    What’s happening next?
    Who should I contact with questions or concerns?
    How will I be updated?
    How can I access more information?
    Will the previous process be available throughout the new process implementation?
    What needs to be done and what needs to stop to succeed?
    Will I be measured on this change?
    What’s happening next?
    How can I access more information?
    Will this change be added to key performance indicators?
    How did the change implementation go?
    What’s happening next?
    Before change During change After change
    Prepare for change Create change action and communication plan Implement change Sustain the change

    2.1 Craft a pitch

    20 minutes

    1. Using the set of stakeholders identified in activity 1.2, every participant takes one stakeholder.
    2. Open tab 7 of the Communication Planner Tool or use a piece of paper and create a communication message specific to that stakeholder.
    3. Select a topic from your workshop or use something you are passionate about.
    4. Consider the pitch components as a way to create your pitch. Remember to use what you have learned from the planning and composing sections of this training (in bold).
    5. Compose a three-minute pitch that you will deliver to your audience member.
    InputOutput
    • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
    • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Communication Composition Checklist

    • Did you open the communication with a statistic or other memorable piece of information?
    • Is the topic being communicated in a compelling way that engages the target audience?
    • Are there statistics or data to support the story?
    • Are the statistics and data clear so they cannot be conveyed in any other way than their intended method?
    • Are you writing in clear and concise sentences?
    • Are you avoiding any technical jargon?
    • Is the message only focused on what needs to be said? Have you removed all unnecessary components?
    • Is the content organized in priority order? Could you adapt if the presentation time is shortened?
    • Is the way the communication is written sound like how you would speak normally? Are you writing for the ear?
    • Do you have a clear call to action that the audience will be asked to complete at the end?
    • Does your communication encourage discussion with the target audience? Is the audience a part of the solution?

    2.2 Revise the pitch

    10 minutes

    1. Review the pitch that was created in activity 2.1.
    2. Consider what could be done to make the pitch better:
      • Concise: Identify opportunities to remove unnecessary information.
      • Clear: It uses only terms or language the target audience would understand.
      • Relevant: It matters to the target audience and the problems they face.
      • Consistent: The message could be repeated across audiences.
    3. Validate that when you say the pitch out loud, it sounds like something you would say normally when communicating with other people.
    4. Make updates to the pitch and get ready to present.
    Input Output
    • Individual ideas about what change is occurring and why.
    • A single statement that reflects the change occurring and the rationale for why the change is needed.
    Materials Participants
    • Communication Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Download the Communication Planner Tool

    Phase 3

    Deliver Messages Effectively

    Activities
    3.1 Deliver Your Pitch
    3.2 Refine and Deliver Again

    This step involves the following participants:
    Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Outcomes of this step
    Ability to deliver the pitch in a manner that is clear and would be understood by the specific stakeholder the pitch is intended for.

    Communicate Any IT Initiative Effectively

    Phase 1 > Phase 2 > Phase 3

    Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

    Using voice and body

    Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, and frame all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

    If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

    Be professional and confident

    State the main points of your presentation confidently. While this should be obvious, it is essential. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

    Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or a calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

    Connect with your audience

    Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

    Avoid reading from your slides. If there is text on a slide, paraphrase it while maintaining eye contact.

    Info-Tech Insight
    You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren’t engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

    Use clear slides that avoid distracting the audience

    Which slide will be better to present?

    Sample A:

    Sample A

    Sample B:

    Sample B

    3.1 Deliver your pitch

    20 minutes

    1. Take ten minutes to think about how to deliver your pitch. Where will you emphasize words, speak louder, softer, lean in, stand tall, make eye contact, etc.?
    2. Group into pairs. One person is the speaker and the other the audience.
    3. Set a timer on your phone or watch.
    4. Speaker:
      1. Take a few seconds to center yourself and prepare to deliver your pitch.
      2. Deliver your pitch to Person 2. Don’t forget to use your body language and your voice to deliver.
    5. Audience:
      1. Repeats ideas back to Person 1. Are the ideas correct? Are you convinced?
      2. Identifies who the audience is. Are they correct?
    6. Reverse roles and repeat.
    7. Discuss and provide feedback to one another.
    InputOutput
    • Written pitch
    • Best practices for delivering
    • An ability to deliver the pitch in a clear and concise manner that could be understood by the intended stakeholder.
    • Feedback from person 2.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Pitch framework
    • Communications Plan Tool
    • Piece of paper
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Communication Delivery Checklist

    • Are the slides clean so the audience can focus on your speaking and not on reading the context-heavy slide?
    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to team members or coaches?
    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to someone with little to no technology background?
    • Are you making yourself open to feedback and improvement opportunities?
    • If the communication is derailed from your plan, are you prepared to handle that change?
    • Can you deliver the communication without reading your notes word for word?
    • Have you adapted your voice throughout the communication to highlight specific components you want the audience to focus on?
    • Are you presenting in a way that is genuine to you and your personality?
    • Can you communicate the message within the time allotted?
    • Are you moving in an appropriate manner based on your communication (e.g. toward the screen, across the stage, hand gestures).

    3.2 Refine and deliver again

    1 hour

    1. Go back to what you wrote as your pitch and take ten minutes to eliminate more information to get the pitch down to two minutes based on the feedback from your original partner.
    2. Repeat the last exercise where you deliver your pitch; however, deliver it to the larger group this time.
    3. Focus on ways to adjust body language and voice to make the message more compelling.
    4. Identify if your audience is telling you anything with their body language (e.g. leaning in, leaning back). Use this to adjust as you are presenting.
    5. Have the group provide additional feedback on what was effective about the message and opportunities to further improve the message.
    InputOutput
    • Three-minute pitch
    • Feedback from first delivery
    • An ability to deliver the pitch in a clear and concise manner that could be understood by the intended stakeholder.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Pitch framework
    • Communications Plan Tool
    • Piece of paper
    • Varies based on those who would be relevant to your initiative.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Whether the CIO or a service desk technician, delivering a presentation is a fear for every role in IT. Prepare your communication to help overcome the fears that are within your control.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Anuja Agrawal, National Communications Director, PwC

    Anuja Agrawal
    National Communications Director
    PwC

    Anuja is an accomplished global communications professional, with extensive experience in the insurance, banking, financial, and professional services industry in Asia, the US, and Canada. She is currently the National Communications Director at PwC Canada. Her prior work experience includes communication leadership roles at Deutsche Bank, GE, Aviva, and Veritas. Anuja works closely with senior business leaders and key stakeholders to deliver measurable results and effective change and culture building programs. Anuja has experience in both internal and external communications, including strategic leadership communication, employee engagement, PR and media management, digital and social media, M&A/change and crisis management. Anuja believes in leveraging digital tools and technology-enabled solutions combined with in-person engagement to help improve the quality of dialogue and increase interactive communication within the organization to help build an inclusive culture of belonging.

    Nastaran Bisheban, Chief Technology Officer, KFC Canada

    Nastaran Bisheban
    Chief Technology Officer
    KFC Canada

    A passionate technologist and seasoned transformational leader. A software engineer and computer scientist by education, a certified Project Manager that holds an MBA in Leadership with Honors and Distinction from University of Liverpool. A public speaker on various disciplines of technology and data strategy with a Harvard Business School executive leadership program training to round it all. Challenges status quo and conventional practices; is an advocate for taking calculated risk and following the principle of continuous improvement. With multiple computer software and project management publications she is a strategic mentor and board member on various non-profit organizations. Nastaran sees the world as a better place only when everyone has a seat at the table and is an active advocate for diversity and inclusion.

    Heidi Davidson, Co-founder & CEO, Galvanize Worldwide and Galvanize On Demand

    Heidi Davidson
    Co-founder & CEO
    Galvanize Worldwide and Galvanize On Demand

    Dr. Heidi Davidson is the Co-Founder and CEO of Galvanize Worldwide, the largest distributed network of marketing and communications experts in the world. She also is the Co-Founder and CEO of Galvanize On Demand, a tech platform that matches marketing and communications freelancers with client projects. Now with 167 active experts, the Galvanize team delivers startup advisory work, outsourced marketing, training, and crisis communications to organizations of all sizes. Before Galvanize, Heidi spent four years as part of the turnaround team at BlackBerry as the Chief Communications Officer and SVP of Corporate Marketing, where she helped the company move from a device manufacturer to a security software provider.

    Eli Gladstone, Co-founder, Speaker Labs

    Eli Gladstone
    Co-Founder
    Speaker Labs

    Eli is a Co-Founder of Speaker Labs. He has spent over 6 years helping countless individuals overcome their public speaking fears and communicate with clarity and confidence. When he's not coaching others on how to build and deliver the perfect presentation, you'll probably find him reading some weird books, teaching his kids how to ski or play tennis, or trying to develop a good enough jumpshot to avoid being a liability on the basketball court.

    Francisco Mahfuz, Keynote Speaker & Storytelling Coach

    Francisco Mahfuz
    Keynote Speaker & Storytelling Coach

    Francisco Mahfuz has been telling stories in front of audiences for a decade, and even became a National Champion of public speaking. Today, Francisco is a keynote speaker and storytelling coach and offers communication training to individuals and international organisations, and has worked with organisations like Pepsi, HP, the United Nations, Santander and Cornell University. He's the author of Bare: A Guide to Brutally Honest Public Speaking, the host of The Storypowers Podcast, and he’s been part of the IESE MBA communications course since 2020. He's received a BA in English Literature from Birkbeck University in London.

    Sarah Shortreed, EVP & CTO, ATCO Ltd.

    Sarah Shortreed
    EVP & CTO
    ATCO Ltd.

    Sarah Shortreed is ATCO’s Executive Vice President and Chief Technology Officer. Her responsibilities include leading ATCO’s Information Technology (IT) function as it continues to drive agility and collaboration throughout ATCO’s global businesses and expanding and enhancing its enterprise IT strategy, including establishing ATCO’s technology roadmap for the future. Ms. Shortreed's skill and expertise are drawn from her more than 30-year career that spans many industries and includes executive roles in business consulting, complex multi-stakeholder programs, operations, sales, customer relationship management and product management. She was recently the Chief Information Officer at Bruce Power and has previously worked at BlackBerry, IBM and Union Gas. She sits on the Board of Governors for the University of Western Ontario and is the current Chair of the Chief Information Officer (CIO) Committee at the Conference Board of Canada.

    Eric Silverberg, Co-Founder Speaker Labs

    Eric Silverberg
    Co-Founder
    Speaker Labs

    Eric is a Co-Founder of Speaker Labs and has helped thousands of people build their public speaking confidence and become more dynamic and engaging communicators. When he's not running workshops to help people grow in their careers, there's a good chance you'll find him with his wife and dog, drinking Diet Coke and rewatching iconic episodes of the reality TV show Survivor! He's such a die-hard fan, that you'll probably see him playing the game one day.

    Stephanie Stewart, Communications Officer & DR Coordinator, Info Security Services Simon Fraser University

    Stephanie Stewart
    Communications Officer & DR Coordinator
    Info Security Services Simon Fraser University

    Steve Strout, President, Miovision Technologies

    Steve Strout
    President
    Miovision Technologies

    Mr. Strout is a recognized and experienced technology leader with extensive experience in delivering value. He has successfully led business and technology transformations by leveraging many dozens of complex global SFDC, Oracle and/or SAP projects. He is especially adept at leading what some call “Project Rescues” – saving people’s careers where projects have gone awry; always driving "on-time and on-budget.“ Mr. Strout is the current President of Miovision Technologies and the former CEO and board member of the Americas’ SAP Users’ Group (ASUG). His wealth of practical knowledge comes from 30 years of extensive experience in many CxO and executive roles at some prestigious organizations such as Vonage, Sabre, BlackBerry, Shred-it, The Thomson Corporation (now Thomson Reuters) and Morris Communications. Served on Boards including Customer Advisory Boards of Apple, AgriSource Data, Dell, Edgewise, EMC, LogiSense, Socrates.ai, Spiro Carbon Group, and Unifi.

    Info-Tech Research Group Contributors:
    Sanchia Benedict, Research Lead
    Koula Bouloukos, Production Manager
    Antony Chan, Executive Counsellor
    Janice Clatterbuck, Executive Counsellor
    Ahmed Jowar, Research Specialist
    Dave Kish, Practice Lead
    Nick Kozlo, Senior Research Analyst
    Heather Leier Murray, Senior Research Analyst
    Amanda Mathieson, Research Director
    Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead
    Joe Meier, Executive Counsellor
    Andy Neill, AVP, Research
    Thomas Randall, Research Director

    Plus an additional two contributors who wish to remain anonymous.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Boardroom Presentation Review

    • You will come away with a clear, concise, and compelling board presentation that IT leaders can feel confident presenting in front of their board of directors.
    • Add improvements to your current board presentation in terms of visual appeal and logical flow to ensure it resonates with your board of directors.
    • Leverage a best-of-breed presentation template.

    Build a Better Manager

    • Management skills training is needed, but organizations are struggling to provide training that makes a long-term difference in the skills managers actually use in their day to day.
    • Many training programs are ineffective because they offer the wrong content, deliver it in a way that is not memorable, and are not aligned with the IT department’s business objectives.

    Crisis Communication Guides

    During a crisis it is important to communicate to employees through messages that convey calm and are transparent and tailored to your audience. Use the Crisis Communication Guides to:

    • Draft a communication strategy.
    • Tailor messages to your audience.
    • Draft employee crisis communications.

    Use this guide to equip leadership to communicate in times of crisis.

    Bibliography

    Gallo, Carmine. "How Great Leaders Communicate." Harvard Business Review. 23 November 2022.

    Gallup. State of the American Workplace Report. Washington, D.C.: Gallup, 6 February 2020.

    Guthrie, Georgina. “Why Good Internal Communications Matter Now More than Ever.” Nulab. 15 Dec. 2021.

    Hypercontext. “The State of High Performing Teams in Tech 2022.” Hypercontext. 2022.

    Lambden, Duncan. “The Importance of Effective Workplace Communication – Statistics for 2022.” Expert Market. 13 June 2022.

    McCreary, Gale & WikiHow. “How to Measure the Effectiveness of Communication: 14 Steps.” WikiHow.

    Nowak, Marcin. “Top 7 Communication Problems in the Workplace.” MIT Enterprise Forum CEE, 2021.

    Nunn, Philip. “Messaging That Works: A Unique Framework to Maximize Communication Success.” iabc.

    Picincu, Andra. “How to Measure Effective Communications.” Small Business Chron. 12 January 2021.

    Price. David A. “Pixar Story Rules.”

    Prosci. “Best Practices in Change Management 2020 Edition.” Prosci, 2020.

    Roberts, Dan. “How CIOs Become Visionary Communicators.” CIO, 2019.

    Schlesinger, Mark. “Why building effective communication skill in IT is incredibly important.”

    Skills Framework for the Information Age, “Mapping SFIA Levels of Responsibilities to Behavioural Factors.” Skills Framework for the Information Age, 2021.

    St. James, Halina. Talk It Out. Podium, 2005.

    TeamState. “Communication in the Workplace Statistics: Importance and Effectiveness in 2022.” TeamStage, 2022.

    Walters, Katlin. “Top 5 Ways to Measure Internal Communication.” Intranet Connections, 30 May 2019.

    Design Your Cloud Operations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}462|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
    • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess your key workflows’ maturity for life in the cloud and evaluate your readiness and need for new ways of working
    • Identify the work that must be done to deliver value in cloud services
    • Design your cloud operations framework and communicate it clearly and succinctly to secure buy-in

    Design Your Cloud Operations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Design Your Cloud Operations Deck – A step-by-step storyboard to help guide you through the activities and tools in this project.

    This storyboard will help you assess your cloud maturity, understand relevant ways of working, and create a meaningful design of your cloud operations that helps align team members and stakeholders.

    • Design Your Cloud Operations – Storyboard
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Roadmap Tool

    2. Planning and design tools.

    Use these templates and tools to assess your current state, design the cloud operations organizing framework, and create a roadmap.

    • Cloud Maturity Assessment

    3. Communication tools.

    Use these templates and tools to plan how you will communicate changes to key stakeholders and communicate the new cloud operations organizing framework in an executive presentation.

    • Cloud Operations Communication Plan
    • Cloud Operations Organizing Framework: Executive Brief

    Infographic

    Workshop: Design Your Cloud Operations

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Day 1

    The Purpose

    Establish Context

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment on target state

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement

    1.2 Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

    1.3 Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    1.4 Develop organization design principles

    Outputs

    Cloud maturity assessment

    Project drivers

    Cloud challenges and objectives

    Organization design principles

    2 Day 2

    The Purpose

    Establish Context

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of cloud workstreams

    Activities

    2.1 Evaluate new ways of working

    2.2 Develop a workstream target statement

    2.3 Identify cloud work

    Outputs

    Workstream target statement

    Cloud operations workflow diagrams

    3 Day 3

    The Purpose

    Design the Organization

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Visualization of the cloud operations future state

    Activities

    3.1 Design a future-state cloud operations diagram

    3.2 Create a current-state cloud operations diagram

    3.3 Define success indicators

    Outputs

    Future-state cloud operations diagram

    Current-state cloud operations diagram

    Success indicators

    4 Day 4

    The Purpose

    Communicate the Changes

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment and buy-in from stakeholders

    Activities

    4.1 Create a roadmap

    4.2 Create a communication plan

    Outputs

    Roadmap

    Communication plan

    Further reading

    It’s “day two” in the cloud. Now what?

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analysts’ Perspective

    The image contains a picture of Andrew Sharp.

    Andrew Sharp

    Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    It’s “day two” in the cloud. Now what?

    Just because you’re in the cloud doesn’t mean everyone is on the same page about how cloud operations work – or should work.

    You have an opportunity to implement new ways of working. But if people can’t see the bigger picture – the organizing framework of your cloud operations – it will be harder to get buy-in to realize value from your cloud services.

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to build out and visualize a cloud operations organizing framework that defines cloud work and aligns it to the right areas.

    The image contains a picture of Nabeel Sherif.

    Nabeel Sherif

    Principal Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    The image contains a picture of Emily Sugerman.

    Emily Sugerman

    Research Analyst

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    Scott Young

    Principal Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Widespread cloud adoption has created new opportunities and challenges:

    • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
    • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist, leading to a lack of direction, employee frustration, missed work, inefficiency, and unacceptable risk.
    • Many organizations have bought their way into a SaaS portfolio. Now, as key applications leave their network, I&O leaders still have accountability for these apps, but little visibility and control over them.
    • Few organizations are, or will ever be, cloud only. Your operations will be both on-prem and in-cloud for the foreseeable future and you must be able to accommodate both.
    • Traditional infrastructure siloes no longer work for cloud operations, but key stakeholders are wary of significant change.

    Clearly communicate the need for operations changes:

    • Identify current challenges with cloud operations. Assess your readiness and fit for new ways of working involved in cloud operations: DevOps, SRE, Platform Engineering, and more.
    • Use Info-Tech’s templates to design a cloud operations organizing framework. Define cloud work, and align work to the right work areas.
    • Communicate the design. Gain buy-in from your key stakeholders for the considerable organizational change management required to achieve durable change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

    Your Challenge

    Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.

    • As key applications leave for the cloud, I&O teams are still expected to manage access, spend, and security but may have little or no visibility or control over the applications themselves.
    • The automation and self-service capabilities of cloud aren’t delivering the speed the business expected because teams don’t work together effectively.
    • Business leaders purchase their own cloud solutions because, from their point of view, IT’s processes are cumbersome and ineffective.
    • Accounting practices and governance mechanisms haven’t adjusted to enable new development practices and technologies.
    • Security and cost management requirements may not be accounted for by teams acquiring or developing solutions.
    • All of this contributes to frustration, missed work, wasteful spending, and unacceptable risk.

    Obstacles, by the numbers:

    85% of respondents reported security in the cloud was a serious concern.

    73% reported balancing responsibilities between a central cloud team and business units was a top concern.

    The average organization spent 13% more than they’d budgeted on cloud – even when budgets were expected to increase by 29% in the next year.

    32% of all cloud spend was estimated to be wasted spend.

    56% of operations professionals said their primary focus is cloud services.

    81% of security professionals thought it was difficult to get developers to prioritize bug fixes.

    42% of security professionals felt bugs were being caught too late in the development process.

    1. Flexera 2022 State of the Cloud Report. 2. GitLab DevSecOps 2021 Survey

    Cloud operations are different, but IT departments struggle to change

    • There’s no sense of urgency in the organization that change is needed, particularly from teams that aren’t directly involved in operations. It can be challenging to make the case that change is needed.
    • Beware “analysis paralysis”! With so many options, philosophies, approaches, and methodologies, it’s easy to be overwhelmed by choice and fail to make needed changes.
    • The solution to the problem requires organizational changes beyond the operations team, but you don’t have the authority to make those changes directly. Operations can influence the solution, but they likely can’t direct it.
    • Behavior, culture, and organizations take time and work to change. Progress is usually evolutionary – but this can also mean it feels like it’s happening too slowly.
    • It’s not just cloud, and it probably never will be. You’ll need to account for operating both on-premises and cloud technologies for the foreseeable future.

    Follow Info-Tech’s Methodology

    1. Ensure alignment with the risks and drivers of the business and understand your organization’s strengths and gaps for a cloud operations world.

    2. Understand the balance of different types of deliveries you’re responsible for in the cloud.

    3. Reduce risk by reinforcing the key operational pillars of cloud operations to your workstreams.

    4. Identify “work areas,” decide which area is responsible for what tasks and how work areas should interact in order to best facilitate desired business outcomes.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram demonstrating Info-Tech's Methodology, as described in the text above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Start by designing operations around the main workflow you have for cloud services; i.e. If you mostly build or host in cloud, build the diagram to maximize value for that workflow.

    Operating Framework Elements

    Proper design of roles and responsibilities for each cloud workflow category will help reduce risk by reinforcing the key operational pillars of cloud operations.

    We base this on a composite of the well-architected frameworks established by the top global cloud providers today.

    Workflow Categories

    • Build
    • Host
    • Consume

    Key Pillars

    • Performance
    • Reliability
    • Cost Effectiveness
    • Security
    • Operational Excellence

    Risks to Mitigate

    • Changes to Support Model
    • Changes to Security & Governance
    • Changes to Skills & Roles
    • Replicating Old Habits
    • Misaligned Stakeholders

    Cloud Operations Design

    Info-Tech’s Methodology

    Assess Maturity and Ways of Working

    Define Cloud Work

    Design Cloud Operations

    Communicate and Secure Buy-in

    Assess your key workflows’ maturity for “life in the cloud,” related to Key Operational Pillars. Evaluate your readiness and need for new ways of working.

    Identify the work that must be done to deliver value in cloud services.

    Define key cloud work areas, the work they do, and how they should share information and interact.

    Outline the change you recommend to a range of stakeholders. Gain buy-in for the plan.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Cloud Maturity Assessment

    Assess the intensity and cloud maturity of your IT operations for each of the key cloud workstreams: Consume, Host, and Build

    The image contains screenshots of the Cloud Maturity Assessment.

    Communication Plan

    Identify stakeholders, what’s in it for them, what the impact will be, and how you will communicate over the course of the change.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Communcation Plan.

    Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook

    Capture the diagram as you build it.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook.

    Roadmap Tool

    Build a roadmap to put the design into action.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Roadmap Tool.

    Key deliverable:

    Cloud Operations Organizing Framework

    The Cloud Operations Organizing Framework is a communication tool that introduces the cloud operations diagram and establishes its context and justification.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework.

    Project Outline

    Phase 1: Establish Context

    1.1: Identify challenges, opportunities, and cloud maturity

    1.2: Evaluate new ways of working

    1.3: Define cloud work

    Phase 2: Design the organization and communicate changes

    2.1: Design a draft cloud operations diagram

    2.2: Communicate changes

    Outputs

    Cloud Services Objectives and Obstacles

    Cloud Operations Workflow Diagrams

    Cloud Maturity Assessment

    Draft Cloud Operations Diagram

    Communication Plan

    Roadmap Tool

    Cloud Operations Organizing Framework

    Project benefits

    Benefits for IT

    Benefits for the business

    • Define the work required to effectively deliver cloud services to deliver business value.
    • Define key roles for operating cloud services.
    • Outline an operations diagram that visually communicates what key work areas do and how they interact.
    • Communicate needed changes to key stakeholders.
    • Receive more value from cloud services when the organization is structured to deliver value including:
      • Avoiding cost overruns
      • Securing services
      • Providing faster, more effective delivery
      • Increasing predictability
      • Reducing error rates

    Calculate the value of Info-Tech’s Methodology

    The value of the project is the delivery of organizational change that improves the way you manage cloud services

    Example Goal

    How this blueprint can help

    How you might measure success/value

    Streamline Responsibilities

    The operations team is spending too much time fighting applications fires, which is distracting it from needed platform improvements.

    • Identify shared and separate responsibilities for development and platform operations teams.
    • Focus the operations team on securing and automating cloud platform(s).
    • Reduce time wasted on back and forth between development and operations teams (20 hrs. per employee per year x 50 staff = 1000 hrs.).
    • Deliver automation features that reduces development lead time by one hour per sprint (40 devs x 20 sprints per yr. x 1 hr. = 800 hrs.).

    Improve Cost Visibility

    The teams responsible for cost management today don’t have the authority, visibility, or time to effectively find wasted spend.

    The teams responsible for cost management today don’t have the authority, visibility, or time to effectively find wasted spend.

    • Ensure operations contributes to visibility and execution of cost governance.
    • $1,000,000 annual spend on cloud services.
    • Of this, assume 32% is wasted spend ($320k).1
    • New cost management function has a target to cut waste by half next year saving ~$160k.
    • Cost visibility and capture metrics (e.g. accurate tagging metrics, right-sizing execution).
    1. Average wasted cloud spend across all organizations, from the 2022 Flexera State of the Cloud Report

    Understand your cloud vision and strategy before you redesign operations

    Guide your operations redesign with an overarching cloud vision and strategy that aligns to and enables the business’s goals.

    Cloud Vision

    The image contains a screenshot of the Define Your Cloud Vision.

    Cloud Strategy

    It is difficult to get or maintain buy-in for changes to operations without everyone on the same page about the basic value proposition cloud offers your organization.

    Do the workload and risk analysis to create a defensible cloud vision statement that boils down into a single statement: “This is how we want to use the cloud.”

    Once you have your basic cloud vision, take the next step by documenting a cloud strategy.

    Establish your steering committee with stakeholders from IT, business, and leadership to work through the essential decisions around vision and alignment, people, governance, and technology.

    Your cloud operations design should align to a cloud strategy document that provides guidelines on establishing a cloud council, preparing staff for changing skills, mitigating risks through proper governance, and setting a direction for migration, provisioning, and monitoring decisions.

    Key Insights

    Focus on the future, not the present

    Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

    Responsibilities change in the cloud

    Understand what you mean by cloud work

    Focus where it matters

    Cloud is a different way of consuming IT resources and applications and it requires a different operational approach than traditional IT.

    In most cases, cloud operations involves less direct execution and more service validation and monitoring

    Work that is invisible to the customer can still be essential to delivering customer value. A lot of operations work is invisible to your organization’s customers but is required to deliver stability, security, efficiency, and more.

    Cloud work is not just applications that have been approved by IT. Consider how unsanctioned software purchased by the business will be integrated and managed.

    Start by designing operations around the main workflow you have for cloud services. If you mostly build or host in the cloud, build the diagram to maximize value for that workflow.

    Design principles will often change over time as the organization’s strategy evolves.

    Identify skills requirements and gaps as early as possible to avoid skills gaps later. Whether you plan to acquire skills via training or cross-training, hiring, contracting, or outsourcing, effectively building skills takes time.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges

    Calls #2&3: Assess cloud maturity and drivers for org. redesign

    Call #4: Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    Call #5: Evaluate new ways of working and identify cloud work

    Calls #6&7: Create your Cloud Operations diagram

    Call #8: Create your communication plan and build roadmap

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish Context

    Design the Organization and Communicate Changes

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement

    1.2 Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

    1.3 Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    1.4 Develop organization design principles

    2.1 Evaluate new ways of working

    2.2 Develop a workstream target statement

    2.3 Identify cloud work

    3.1 Design a future-state cloud operations diagram

    3.2 Create a current state cloud operations diagram

    3.3 Define success indicators

    4.1 Create a roadmap

    4.2 Create a communication plan

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Cloud Maturity Assessment
    2. Cloud Challenges and Objectives
    1. Workstream target statement
    2. Cloud Operations Workflow Diagrams
    1. Future and current state cloud operations diagrams
    1. Roadmap
    2. Communication Plan

    Cloud Operations Organizing Framework.

    Phase 1:

    Establish context

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Establish operating model design principals by identifying goals & challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

    1.2 Evaluate new ways of working

    1.3 Identify cloud work

    2.1 Draft an operating model

    2.2 Communicate proposed changes

    Phase Outcomes:

    Define current maturity and which workstreams are important to your organization.

    Understand new operating approaches and which apply to your workstream balance.

    Identify a new target state for IT operations.

    Before you get started

    Set yourself up for success with these three steps:

    • This methodology and the related slides are intended to be executed via intensive, collaborative working sessions using the rest of this slide deck.
    • Ensure the working sessions are successful by working through these steps before you start work on defining your cloud operations.

    1. Identify an operations design working group

    2. Review cloud vision and strategy

    3. Create a working folder

    This should be a group with insight into current cloud challenges, and with the authority to drive change. This group is the main audience for the activities in this blueprint.

    Review your established planning work and documentation.

    Create a repository to house your notes and any work in progress.

    Create a working folder

    15 minutes

    Create a central repository to support transparency and collaboration. It’s an obvious step, but one that’s often forgotten.

    1. Download all the documents associated with this blueprint to a shared repository accessible to all participants. Keep separate folders for templates and work-in-progress.
    2. Share the link to the repository with all attendees. Include links to the repository in any meeting invites you set up as working sessions for the project.
    3. Use the repository for all the work you do in the activities listed in this blueprint.

    Step 1.1: Identify goals and challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group, which may include:
      • Cloud owners
      • Platform/Applications Team leads
      • Infra & Ops managers

    Outcomes

    • Identify your current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement.
    • Define the advantages you expect to realize from cloud services and any obstacles you have to overcome to meet those objectives.
    • Identify the reasons why redesigning cloud operations is necessary.
    • Develop organization design principles.

    “Start small: Begin with a couple services. Then, based on the feedback you receive from Operations and the business, modify your approach and keep increasing your footprint.” – Nenad Begovic

    Cloud changes operational activities, tactics, and goals

    As you adopt cloud services, the operations core mission remains . . .

    • IT operations are expected to deliver stable, efficient, and secure IT services.

    . . . but operational activities are evolving.

    • Core IT operational processes remain relevant, such as incident or capacity management, but opportunities to automate or outsource operations tasks will change how that work is done.
    • As you rely more on automation and outsourcing, the team may see less direct execution in its day-to-day work and more solution design and validation.
    • Outsourcing frees the team from operational toil but reduces the direct control over your end-to-end solution and increases your reliance on your vendor.
    • Pay-as-you-go pricing models present opportunities for streamlined delivery and cost rationalization but require you to rethink how you do cost and asset management.
    • It’s very easy for the business to buy a SaaS solution without consulting IT, which can lead to duplicated functionality, integration challenges, security threats, and more.

    Design a model for cloud operations that helps you achieve value from your cloud environment.

    “As operating models shift to the cloud, you still need the same people and processes. However, the shift is focused on a higher level of operations. If your people no longer focus on server uptime, then their success metrics will change. When security is no longer protected by the four walls of a datacenter, your threat profile changes.

    (Microsoft, “Understand Cloud Operating Models,” 2022)

    Operational responsibilities are shared with a range of stakeholders

    When using a vendor-operated public cloud, IT exists in a shared responsibility model with the cloud service provider, one that is further differentiated by the type of cloud service model in use: broadly, software-as a service (SaaS), platform-as-a-service (PaaS), or infrastructure-as-a-service (IaaS).

    Your IT operations organization may still reflect a structure where IT retains control over the entire infrastructure stack from facilities to application and defines their operational roles and processes accordingly.

    If the organization chooses a co-location facility, they outsource facility responsibility to a third-party provider, but much of the rest of the traditional IT operating model remains the same. The operations model that worked for an entirely premises-based environment is very different from one that is made up of, for instance, a portfolio of SaaS applications, where your control is limited to the top of the infrastructure stack at the application layer.

    Once an organization migrates workloads to the cloud, IT gives up an increasing amount of control to the vendor, and its traditional operational roles & responsibilities necessarily change.

    The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates what the cloud service models are.

    Align operations with customer value

    • Decisions about operational design should be made with customer value in mind. Remember that cloud adoption should be an enabler of adaptability in the face of changing business needs!
    • Think about how the operations team is indispensable to the value received by your customer. Think about the types of changes that can add to the value your customers receive.
    • A focus on value will help you establish and explain the rationale and urgency required to deliver on needed changes. If you can’t explain how the changes you propose will help deliver value, your proposal will come across as change for the sake of change.
    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate how operational design decisions need to be made with customer value in mind.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Work that is invisible to the customer can still be essential to delivering customer value. A lot of operations work is invisible to your organization’s customers but required to deliver stability, security, efficiency, and more.

    A new consumption model means a different mix of activities

    Evolving to cloud-optimal operations also means re-assessing and adapting your team’s approach to achieving cloud maturity, especially with respect to how automation and standardization can be leveraged to best achieve optimization in cloud.

    Traditional ITDesignExecuteValidateSupportMonitor
    CloudDesignExecuteValidateSupportMonitor

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cloud is a different way of consuming IT resources and applications and requires a different operational approach than traditional IT.

    In most cases, cloud operations involves less direct execution and more service validation and monitoring.

    The Service Models in cloud correspond to the way your organization delivers IT

    Service Model

    Example

    Function

    Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)

    Salesforce.com

    Office 365

    Workday

    Consume

    Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS)

    Azure Stack

    AWS SageMaker

    WordPress

    Build

    Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS)

    Microsoft Azure

    Amazon EC2

    Google Cloud Platform

    Host

    Define how you plan to use cloud services

    Your cloud operations will include different tasks, teams, and workflows, depending on whether you consume cloud services, build them, or host on them.

    Function

    Business Need

    Service Model

    Example Tasks

    Consume

    “I need a commodity, off-the-shelf service that we can configure to our organization’s needs.

    Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)

    Onboard and add users to a new SaaS offering. Vendor management of SaaS providers. Configure/integrate the SaaS offering to meet business needs.

    Build

    “I need to create significantly customized or net-new products and services.”

    Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS) & Infrastructure as-a-Service (IaaS)

    Create custom applications. Build and maintain a container platform. Manage CI/CD pipelines and tools. Share infrastructure and applications patterns.

    Host

    “I need compute, storage, and networking components that reflect key cloud characteristics (on-demand self-service, metered usage, etc.).”

    Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS)

    Stand up compute, networking, and storage resources to host a COTS application. Plan to increase storage capacity to support future demand.

    Align to the well-architected framework

    • Each cloud provider has defined a well-architected framework (WAF) that defines effective deployment and operations for their services.
    • WAFs embody a set of best practices and design principles to leverage the cloud in a more efficient, secure, and cost-effective manner.
    • While each vendor’s WAF has its own definitions and nuances, they collectively share a set of key principles, or “pillars,” that define the desired outcome of any cloud deployment.
    • These pillars address the key areas of risk when migrating to a public cloud platform.

    “In order to accelerate public cloud adoption, you need to focus on infrastructure-as-code and script everything you can. Unlike traditional operations, CloudOps focuses on creating scripts: a script for task A, a script for task B, etc.”

    – Nenad Begovic

    Pillars

    • Reliability
    • Security
    • Cost Optimization
    • Operational Excellence
    • Performance Efficiency

    General Best Practice Capability Areas

    • Host
    • Network
    • Data
    • Identity Management
    • Cost/Subscription Management

    Assess cloud maturity

    2 hours

    1. Download a copy of the Cloud Maturity Assessment Tool.
    2. As a group, work through:
      • The balance of your operations activities from a Host/Build/Consume perspective. What are you responsible for delivering now? How do you expect things will change in the future?
      • Which workstreams to focus on. Are there activity categories that are critical or non-critical or that don’t represent a significant portion of overall work? Conversely, are there workstreams that you feel are subject to particular risk when moving to cloud?
    3. Fill out the Maturity Quiz tab in the Cloud Maturity Assessment Tool for the workstreams you have chosen to focus on.
    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
    • Maturity scoring for key workload streams as they align to the pillars of a general well-architected cloud framework
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Operating model template
    • Cloud platform SMEs

    Download theCloud Maturity Assessment Tool

    Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

    Whiteboard Activity

    An absolute must-have in any successful redesign is a shared understanding and commitment to changing the status quo.

    Without a clear and urgent call to action, the design changes will be seen as change for the sake of change and therefore entirely safe to ignore.

    Take up the following questions as a group:

    1. What kind of organizational change is needed?
    2. Why do we think the need for this change is urgent?
    3. What do we think will happen if no change occurs? What’s the worst-case scenario?

    Record your answers so you can reference and use them in the communication materials you’ll create in Phase 2.

    InputOutput
    • Cloud maturity assessment
    • Objectives and obstacles
    • Insight into existing challenges stemming from organizational design challenges
    • A list of reasons that form a compelling argument for organizational change
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    “We know, for example, that 70 percent of change programs fail to achieve their goals, largely due to employee resistance and lack of management support. We also know that when people are truly invested in change it is 30 percent more likely to stick.”

    – Ewenstein, Smith, Sologar

    McKinsey (2015)

    Consider the value of change from advantage and obstacle perspectives

    Consider what you intend to achieve and the obstacles to overcome to help identify the changes required to achieve your desired future state.

    Advantage Perspective

    Ideas for Change

    Obstacle Perspective

    What advantages do cloud services offer us as an organization?

    For example:

    • Enhance service features.
    • Enhance user experience.
    • Provide ubiquitous access.
    • Scalability to align with demand.
    • Automate or outsource routine tasks.

    What obstacles prevent us from realizing value in cloud services?

    For example:

    • Inadequate stability and reliability
    • Difficult to observe or monitor workloads
    • Challenges ensuring cloud security
    • Insufficient access to relevant skills

    Review risks and challenges

    Changes to Support Model

    • Have we identified who is on the cloud ops team?
    • Do we know where we are procuring skills (internal IT vs. third party) and for how long?
    • Do we know where we are in the migration process?

    Changes to security & governance

    • Have we identified how our attack surface changes in the cloud?
    • Do we have guardrails in place to govern self-provisioning users?
    • Are we managing cost overage risks?

    Replicating old habits

    • Have we made concrete plans to leverage cloud capabilities to standardize and automate outputs?
    • Are we simply reproducing existing systems in the cloud?

    Changes to Skills & Roles

    • Is our staff excited to learn new skills and technologies? Are our specialists prepared to acquire generalist skills to support cloud services?
    • Do we have training plans created and aligned to our technology roadmap?
    • Do we know what head count we need?

    Misaligned stakeholders

    • Have we identified our key stakeholders and teams? Have we considered what changes will impact them and how?
    • Are we meeting regularly and collaborating effectively with our peers, or are we siloed?

    Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    Whiteboard Activity

    1 hour

    1. With your working group, review why you’re using cloud in the first place. What advantages do you expect to realize by adopting cloud services? If we achieve what we’ve set out to do, what should that look and feel like to us, our organization, and our organization’s customers?
      • You should have identified cloud drivers and objectives in your cloud vision and strategy – leverage and validate what you already have!
    2. Next, identify obstacles that are preventing you from fully realizing the value of cloud services.
    3. Finally, brainstorm initial ideas for change. What could we start doing that could help us better use cloud in the future? Are there changes to how we need to organize ourselves to collaborate more effectively?
    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment
    • Identified key business outcomes you expect to realize by adopting cloud services
    • Identified challenges and obstacles that are preventing you from realizing key outcomes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud operations design working group.

    Commonly cited advantages and obstacles

    Cloud Advantages/Objectives

    • Deliver faster on commitments to the business by removing infrastructure provisioning as a bottleneck.
    • Simplify capacity management on flexible cloud-based infrastructure.
    • Reduce capital spending on IT infrastructure.
    • Create sandboxes/innovation practices to experiment with and develop new functionality on cloud platforms.
    • Easily enable ubiquitous access to key corporate services.
    • Minimize the expense and effort required to maintain a data center – power & cooling, cabling, or physical hardware.
    • Leverage existing automation tools from cloud vendors to speed up integration and deployment.
    • Direct costs for specific services can improve transparency and cost allocation, allowing IT to directly “show-back” or charge-back cloud costs to specific cost centers.

    Obstacles

    Need to speed up provisioning of PaaS/IaaS/data resources to development and project teams.

    No time to develop and improve platform services and standards due to other responsibilities.

    We constantly run up unexpected cloud costs.

    Not enough time for continuous learning and development.

    The business will buy SaaS apps and only let us know after they’ve been purchased, leading to overlapping functionality; gaps in compliance, security, or data protection requirements; integration challenges; cost inefficiencies; and more.

    Role descriptions haven’t kept up with tech changes.

    Obvious opportunities to rationalize costs aren’t surfaced (e.g. failing to make use of existing volume licensing agreements).

    Skills needed to properly operate cloud solutions aren’t identified until breakdowns happen.

    Establish organization design principles

    You’ve established a need for organizational change. What will that change look like?

    Design principles are concise, direct statements that describe how you will design your organization to achieve key objectives and address key challenges.

    This is a critically important step for several reasons:

    • A set of clear, concise statements that describe what the design should achieve provides parameters that will help you create and evaluate different design options.
    • A focused, facilitated discussion to create those statements will help uncover conflicting assumptions between key stakeholders.
    • A comprehensive description of the various ways the organization should change makes it easier to identify misaligned or incompatible objectives.
    • A description of what your organization should look like in the future will help you identify where changes will be required .

    Examples of design principles:

    1. We will create a path to review and publish effective application/platform patterns.
    2. A single governing body should have oversight into all cloud costs.
    3. Development must happen only on approved cloud platforms.
    4. Application teams must address operational issues that derive from the applications they’ve created.
    5. Security practices should be embedded into approved cloud platforms and be automatically applied wherever possible.
    6. Focus is on improving developer experience on cloud platforms.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Design principles will often change as the organization’s strategy evolves.

    Align design principles to your objectives

    Developing design principles starts with your key objectives. What do we absolutely have to get right to deliver value through cloud services?

    Once you have your direction set, work through the points in the star model to establish how you will meet your objectives and deliver value. Each point in the star is an important element in your design – taken together, it paints a holistic picture of your future-state organization.

    The changes you choose to implement that affect capabilities, structure, processes, rewards, and people should be self-reinforcing. Each point in the star is connected to, and should support, the other points.

    “There is no one-size-fits-all organization design that all companies – regardless of their particular strategy needs – should subscribe to.”

    – Jay Galbraith, “The Star Model”

    The image contains a screenshot of a modified versio of Jay Galbraith's Star Model of Organizational Design.

    Establish design principles

    Track your findings in the table on the next slide.

    1. Review the cloud objectives and challenges from the previous activity. As a group, decide from that list: what are the key objectives you are trying to achieve? What are the things you absolutely must get right to get value from cloud services?
    2. Work through the following questions as a group:
      • What capabilities or technologies do we need to adopt or leverage differently?
      • How must our structure change? How will power shift in the new structure?
      • Will our new structure require changes to processes or information sharing?
      • How must we change how we motivate or reward employees?
      • What new skills or knowledge is required? How will we acquire those skills or knowledge?
    InputOutput
    • Cloud objectives and challenges
    • Different viewpoints into how your organization must change to realize objectives and overcome challenges
    • Organizational design principles for cloud operations
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip charts
    • Cloud operations design working group

    Design principles (example)

    What is our key objective?

    • Rapidly develop innovative cloud services aligned to business value.

    What capabilities or technologies do we need to adopt or leverage differently?

    • We will adopt more agile development techniques to make smaller changes, faster.
    • We will standardize and automate tasks that are routine and repeatable.

    How must our structure change? How will power shift in the new structure?

    • Embed development teams within business units to better align to business unit needs.
    • Create a focused cloud platform team to develop infrastructure services.

    Will our new structure require changes to processes or information sharing?

    • Development teams will take on responsibility for application support.
    • Platform teams will be deeply embedded with development teams on new projects to build new infrastructure functionality.

    How must we change how we motivate or reward employees?

    • We will highlight innovative work across the company.
    • We will encourage experimentation and risk-taking.

    What new skills or knowledge is required, and how will we acquire it?

    • We will focus on acquiring skills most closely aligned to our technology roadmap.
    • We will ensure budget is available for training employees who ask for it.
    • We will contract to find skills we cannot develop in-house and use engagements as an opportunity to learn internally.

    Step 1.2: Evaluate new ways of working

    Participants

    Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    Shared understanding of the horizon of work possibilities:

    • Ways to work
    • Ways to govern and learn

    Consider the different approaches on the following slides, how they change operational work, and decide which approaches are the right fit for you.

    Evaluate new ways of working

    Cut through the hype

    • There are new approaches/ways of working that deal head on with the persistent breakdowns and headaches that come with operations management – work thrown over the wall from development, manual and repetitive work, siloed teams, and more.
    • Many of these approaches emphasize an operations-aware approach to solutions development and apply techniques traditionally associated with AppDev to Operations.
    • Cloud services present opportunities to outsource/automate away routine tasks.

    “DevOps is a set of practices, tools, and a cultural philosophy that automates and integrates the processes between software development and IT teams. It emphasizes team empowerment, cross-team communication and collaboration, and technology automation.”

    – Atlassian, “DevOps”

    “ITIL 4 brings ITIL up to date by…embracing new ways of working, such as Lean, Agile, and DevOps.”

    – ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4 Edition

    “Over time, left to their own devices, the SRE team should end up with very little operational load and almost entirely engage in development tasks, because the service basically runs and repairs itself.”

    – Ben Treynor Sloss, “Site Reliability Engineering”

    The more things change, the more they stay the same:

    • Core processes remain, but they may be done differently, and new technologies and services create new challenges.
    • Not all approaches are right for all organizations, and what’s right for you depends on how you use cloud services.
    • The best solution draws from these management ideas to build an approach to operations that is right for you.

    Leverage patterns to think about new ways of approaching operations work

    Patterns are strategies, approaches, and philosophies that can help you imagine new ways of working in your own organization.

    • The following slides provide an overview of organizing patterns that are applicable to cloud operations.
    • These are strategies that have been applied successfully elsewhere. Review what they can and cannot do and decide whether they are something you can use in your own organizational design.
    • Not every pattern will apply to every organization. For example, an organization which typically consumes SaaS applications will likely have very little need for SRE approaches and techniques.

    Ways to work

    • What work do we do? What skills do we need?
    • How do we create and support systems?

    Ways to govern and learn

    • How do we set and enforce rules?
    • How do we create and share knowledge?

    Explore Applicable Patterns

    Ways to work

    Ways to govern and learn

    1. DevOps

    2. Site Reliability Engineering

    3. Platform Engineering

    4. Cloud Centre of Excellence

    5. Cloud Community of Practice

    What is DevOps?

    “Look for obstacles constantly and treat them as opportunities to experiment and learn.” – Jez Humble, et al. Lean Enterprise: How High Performance Organizations Innovate at Scale

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • Another word for automation or CI/CD tools.
    • A specific role.
    • A fix-all to address friction between existing siloed application and development teams.
    • An approach that will be successful without getting the basics right first.
    • The right fit for every IT organization or every team.

    An operational philosophy that seeks to:

    • Converge accountability for development and operations to align all teams to the goal of delivering customer value.
    • Improve the relationship between Development and Operations teams.
    • Increase the rate of deployment of valuable functionality into production.
    • “A cultural shift giving development teams more control over shipping code to production.” 1
    • You’re doing a lot of custom development.
    • There are opportunities for operations and development teams to work more closely.
    • You want to improve coding quality and throughput.
    • You want to shift the culture of the team to focus on customer value rather than exclusively uptime or new features.
    1 DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering

    What is Site Reliability Engineering (SRE)?

    “Hope is not a strategy” – Benjamin Treynor Sloss, Site Reliability Engineering: How Google Runs Production Systems

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • Deeply focussed on a specific technical domain; SRE work “does not discriminate between infrastructure, software, networking, or platforms.” 2
    • A different name for a team of sysadmins.
    • A programming framework or a specific set of technologies.
    • A way to manage COTS software. SRE is less useful when you’re using applications out-of-the-box with minimal customization, integration, or development.
    • An application of skills and approaches from software engineering to improve system reliability.
    • A team responsible for “availability, latency, performance, efficiency, change management, monitoring, emergency response, and capacity planning.”3
    • A team responsible for building systems that become “a platform and workflow that encompasses monitoring, incident management, eliminating single points of failure, [and] failure mitigation.”1
    • You are building services and providing them at scale.
    • You want to improve reliability and reduce “the frequency and impact of failures that can impact the overall reliability of a cloud application.”1
    • You need to define related service metrics and SLOs.
    • To increase the use of automation in operations to avoid mistakes and minimize toil. 3
    1 SRE vs Platform Engineering
    2. Lakhani, Usman. “ISite Reliability Engineering: What Is It? Why Is It Important for Online Businesses?,” 2020.
    3. Sloss, “Introduction,” 2017

    What4 is Platform Engineering?

    “Platform engineers can act as a shield between developers and the infrastructure”

    – Carlos Schults, “What is Platform Engineering? The Concept Behind the Term”

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • A team that manages every aspect of each application on a particular platform.
    • Focussed solely on platform reliability and availability.
    • A different name for a team of sysadmins.
    • Needed for all cloud service deployments. Platform engineers are most useful when you’re building extensively on a particular platform (e.g. AWS, Azure, or your internal cloud).
    • Platform engineers design, build, and manage the infrastructure that supports and hosts work done by developers.
    • The work done by platform engineering allows developers to avoid the repetitive work of setting everything up anew each time.
    • Requires engineers with a deep understanding of cloud services and other platform technologies (e.g. Kubernetes).
    • The big public cloud platforms are built for everyone. You need platform engineering when you need to extensively adapt or manage standard cloud services to support your own requirements.
    • Platform engineers are responsible for creating a secure, stable, maintainable environment that enables developers to do their work faster and without having to manage the underlying technology infrastructure.
    1 DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering

    What is a Cloud Center of Excellence?

    You need a strong core to grow a cloud culture.

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • A project management office (PMO) for cloud services.
    • An easy, quick, or temporary fix to cloud governance problems. The CCoE requires champions who provide ongoing support to realize value over time.
    • An approach that’s only for enterprise-sized IT organizations.
    • A standing meeting – members of the CCoE may meet regularly to review progress on their mandate, but work and collaboration need to happen outside of meetings.
    • A cross-functional team responsible for oversight of all cloud initiatives, including architectural, technical, security, financial, contractual, and operational aspects of planned and deployed solutions.
    • The CCoE’s responsibilities typically include governance and continuous improvement; alignment between technical and accounting practices; documentation, training, best practices and standards development; and vendor management.
    • CCoE duties are often part of an existing role rather than a full-time responsibility.
    • You want to enable a core group of cloud experts to promote collaboration and accelerate adoption of cloud services, including members from infrastructure, applications, and security.
    • You need to manage cloud risks, set guidelines and policies, and govern costs across cloud environments.
    • There is an unmet need for training, knowledge sharing, and best practice development across the organization.

    What is a Cloud Community of Practice?

    “We have to stop optimizing for programmers and start optimizing for users”

    – Jeff Atwood

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • A replacement for effective oversight and governance practices, though they may help users navigate and understand governance requirements.
    • A way to advertise cloud to potential new practitioners – engaged members of a CoP are typically already using a particular service.
    • Always exclusively composed of internal staff; in certain cases, a CoP could have external members as well.
    • A network of engaged users and experts who share knowledge and best practices for related technologies, crowdsource solutions to problems, and suggest improvements.
    • Often supported by communication and collaboration tools (e.g. chat channels, knowledge base, forums). May use a range of techniques (e.g. drop-ins, vendor-led training, lunch and learns).
    • Communities of practice may be deliberately created by the organization or develop organically.
    • Communities of practice are an effective way for practitioners to support one another and share ideas and solutions.
    • A CoP can help “shift left” work and help practitioners help themselves.
    • An engaged CoP can help IT to identify improvement opportunities and can also be a channel to communicate updates or changes to practitioners.

    Reinforce what we mean by patterns

    Patterns are . . .

    Ways of Working

    • Sets of habits, processes, and methodologies you want to adopt as part of your operational guidelines and commonly agreed upon definitions.

    Patterns are also . . .

    Ways to Govern and Learn

    • The formal and informal practices and groups that focus on enabling governance, risk management, and adoption.

    Review the implications of each pattern for organizational design

    Ways of Working

    DevOps

    Development teams take on operational work to support the services they create after they are launched to production.

    Some DevOps teams may be aligned around a particular function or product rather than a technology – there are individuals with skills on a number of technologies that are part of the same team.

    Site Reliability Engineering (SRE)

    In the beginning, you can start to adopt SRE practices within existing teams. As demand grows for SRE skills and services, you may decide to create focused SRE roles or teams.

    SRE teams may work across applications or be aligned to just infrastructure services or a particular application, or they may focus on tools that help developers manage reliability. SREs may also be embedded long-term with other teams or take on an internal consulting roles with multiple teams.1

    Platform Engineering

    Platform engineering will often, though not always, be the responsibility of a dedicated team. This team must work very closely with, and tuned into the needs of, its internal customers. There is a constant need to find ways to add value that aren’t already part and parcel of the platform – or its external roadmap.

    This team will take on responsibility for the platform, in terms of feature development, automation, availability and reliability, security, and more. They may also be internal consultants or advisors on the platform to developers.

    1. Gustavo Franco and Matt Brown, “How SRE teams are organized and how to get started.”

    Review the implications of each pattern for organizational design

    Ways to Govern and Learn

    Cloud Center of Excellence

    • A CCoE is a cross-functional group with technical experts from security, infrastructure, applications, and more.
    • There should, ideally, be someone focused on leading the CCoE full-time – often someone with an architecture background. Team members may work on the CCoE part-time alongside their main role, and dedicate more of their time to the CCoE as needed.
    • As the CCoE is a governance function, it will typically bridge and sit above teams working on cloud services, reporting to the CIO, CTO, or to an architecture function.

    Cloud Community of Practice

    • Participation in a community of practice is often above and beyond a core role – it’s a leadership activity taken on by technologically adept experts with a drive to help others.
    • Some organizations will create a role to foster community collaboration, run events, raise opportunities and issues identified by the community with product or technology teams, manage collaboration tools, and more.

    Evolve your organization to meet the needs of increased adoption

    Your operating model should evolve as you increase adoption of cloud services.

    Least Adoption Greatest Adoption

    Initial Adoption

    Early Centralization

    Scaling Up

    Full Steam Ahead

    • One or more small agile teams design, build, manage, and operate individual solutions on cloud resources. Solutions provide early value, and identify new opportunities using small, safe-to-fail experiments.
    • Governance is likely done locally to each team. Knowledge sharing, guidelines, and standards are likely informal.
    • Early experience with cloud services help the organization identify where to invest in cloud services to best meet business demands.
    • Accountability and governance over the platform are more clearly defined, possibly still separate from core IT governance processes. Best practices may be shared across teams through a Community of Practice.
    • Operations may be centralized, where valuable, to support monitoring and incident response.
    • Additional product/service-aligned development teams are created to keep up with demand.
    • There is a focused effort to consolidate best practices and platform knowledge, which can be supported through a culture of learning, effective automation, and appropriate tools.
    • The CCoE takes on additional roles in cloud governance, security, operations, and administration.
    • The organization has reached a relatively steady-state for cloud adoption. Innovation and new service development takes place on a stable platform.
    • A Cloud Center of Excellence is accountable for cloud governance across the organization.
    Adapted from Microsoft, “Get Started: Align your organization,” 2021

    Choose new ways of working that make sense for your team

    1 hour

    Consider if, and how, the approaches to management and governance you’ve just reviewed can offer value to your organization.

    1. List the organizing/managing ideas listed in the previous slides in the table below.
    2. Define why it’s for you. What benefits do you expect to realize? What challenges do you expect this will help you overcome? How does this align with your key benefits and drivers for moving to cloud?
    3. List risks or challenges to adoption. Why will it be hard to do? What could get in the way of adoption? Why might it not be a good fit?
    4. Identify next steps to adopt proposed practices.

    Why it’s for us (drivers)

    Risks or challenges to adoption

    Next steps to build/adopt it

    CCoE

    DevOps

    InputOutput
    • Related Info-Tech slides on new ways of working.
    • Opportunities and challenges in your own cloud deployment that may be addressed through new ways of working.
    • Identify new ways of working aligned to your goals.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Step 1.3: Identify cloud work

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    • Identify core work required to deliver value in key cloud workstreams.

    “At first, for many people, the cloud seems vast. But what you actually do is carve out space.”

    –DevOps Manager

    Identify work

    Before you can identify roles and responsibilities, you have to confirm what work you do as an organization and how that work enables you to meet your goals.

    • A comprehensive approach that connects the work you do to your organizational goals will help you identify work that’s falling through the cracks.
    • Identifying work is an opportunity to look at the tasks you regularly execute and ensure they actually drive value.
    • Working through the exercise as a group will help you develop a common language around the work you do.
    • To make the evident obvious: you can’t decide who should be responsible for something if you don’t know about it in the first place.

    Defining work can be a lot of … work! We recommend you start by identifying work for the workstream you do most – Build, Consume, or Host – to focus your efforts. You can repeat the exercise as needed.

    Map work in workstream diagrams

    The image contains a screenshot of the map work in workstream diagrams.

    The five Well-Architected Framework pillars. These are principles/directions/guideposts that should inform all cloud work.

    The work being done to achieve the workstream target. These are roughly aligned with the three streams on the right.

    Workstream Target: A concise statement of the value you aim to achieve through this workstream. All work should help deliver value (directly or indirectly).

    Define the scope of the exercise

    Whiteboard Activity

    20 minutes

    Over the next few exercises, you’ll do a deep dive into the work you do in one specific workstream. In this exercise, we’ll decide on a workstream to focus on first.

    1. Are you primarily building, hosting on, or consuming cloud services? Start with the workstream where you’re doing the most work.
    2. If this isn’t sufficient to narrow your focus, look at the workstream that is most closely tied to mission critical applications, or that is most in need of review in terms of what work is done and who does it.
    3. You can narrow the scope further if there’s a very specific sub-area that differs from the rest (e.g. managing your O365 environment vs. managing all SaaS applications).
    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
    • Your completed cloud maturity assessment.
    • Identify one workstream where you’ll define work first.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • None
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Create a workstream target statement

    Whiteboard Activity

    30 minutes

    In this activity, come up with a short sentence to describe what all this work you do is building toward. The target statement helps align participants on why work is being done and helps focus the activity on work that is most important to achieving the target statement.

    Start with this common workstream target statement:

    “Deliver valuable, secure, available, reliable, and efficient cloud services.”

    Now, review and adjust the target statement by working through the questions below:

    1. Return to the earlier exercises in Phase 1.1 where you reviewed your key objectives for cloud services. Does the target statement align with what you’d identified previously?
    2. Who is the customer for the work you do? Would they see the target differently than you’ve described it?
    3. Can you be more specific? Are there value drivers that are more specific to your industry, organization, business functions, or products that are key to the value your customers receive from this workstream?
    InputOutput
    • Previous exercises.
    • Workstream target statement.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Identify cloud work

    1-2 hours

    1. Use the workstream diagram template in the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook, or draw the template out on a whiteboard and use sticky notes to identify work.
    2. Identify the workstream at the top of the slide. Update the template value statement on the right with the value statement you created in the previous exercise.
    3. Review one or more of the examples in the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook to get a sense of the level of detail required for this exercise.

    Activity instructions continue on the next slide.

    Some notes to the facilitator:

    • Working directly from the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook will save you time with transcription. Sharing the document with participants (e.g. via OneDrive) will allow you to collaborate and edit the document together in real-time.
    • Don’t worry about being too tidy for the moment, just get the information written down and you can clean up the diagram later.
    InputOutput
    • Previously identified design principles.
    • An understanding of the work done, and that needs to be done, in your cloud environment.
    • Identify the work that needs to be done to support your key cloud services workstream in the future.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Whiteboard and sticky notes (optional)
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Identify cloud work (cont’d)

    4. Work together to identify work, documenting one work item per box. This should focus on future state, so record work whether it’s actually done today or not. Your space is limited on the sheet, so focus on work that is indispensable to delivering the value statement. Use the lists on the right as a reminder of key IT practice areas.

    5. As much as possible, align the work items to the appropriate row (Govern & Align, Design & Execute, or Validate, Support & Monitor). You can overlap boxes between rows if needed.

    Have you captured work related to:

    ITIL practices, such as:

    • Request management
    • Incident & problem management
    • Service catalog
    • Service level management
    • Configuration management

    Security-aligned practices, such as:

    • Identity & access management
    • Vulnerability management
    • Security incident management

    Financial practices, such as:

    • IT asset management
    • Cost management & budgeting
    • Vendor management
    • Portfolio management

    Data-aligned practices, such as:

    • Data integrations
    • Data governance

    Technology-specific tasks, such as:

    • Network, Server & Storage
    • Structured/unstructured DBs
    • Composite services
    • IDEs and compilers

    Other key practices:

    • Monitoring & observability
    • Continuous improvement
    • Testing & quality assurance
    • Training and knowledge management
    • Manage shadow IT

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cloud work is not just applications that have been approved by IT. Consider how unsanctioned software purchased by the business will be integrated and managed.

    Identify cloud work (cont’d)

    6. If you have decided to adopt any of the new ways of working outlined in Step 1.2 (e.g. DevOps, SRE, etc.) review the next slide for examples of the type of work that frequently needs to be done in each of those work models. Add any additional work items as needed.

    7. Consolidate boxes and clean up the diagram (e.g. remove duplicate work items, align boxes, clarify language).

    8. Do a final review. Is all the work in the diagram truly aligned with the value statement? Is the work identified aligned with the design principles from Step 1.1?

    If you used a whiteboard for this exercise, transcribe the output to a copy of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook, and repeat the exercise for other key workstreams. You will use this diagram in Phase 2.

    Examples of work

    Examples of work in the "Host" workstream:

    • Bulk patch servers
    • Add a server
    • Add capacity
    • Develop a new server template
    • Incident management

    Examples of work in the "Build" workstream:

    • Provision a production server
    • Provision a test environment
    • Test recovery procedures
    • Add capacity for a service
    • Publish a new pattern
    • Manage capacity/performance for a service
    • Identify wasted spend across services
    • Identify performance bottlenecks
    • Review and shut down idle/unneeded services

    Examples of work in the "Consume" workstream:

    • Conduct vendor risk assessments
    • Develop a standard evaluation matrix to compare solutions to existing or potential in-house offerings
    • Onboard a solution
    • Offboard a solution
    • Conduct a renewal
    • Review and negotiate a contract
    • Rationalize software titles

    Phase 2:

    Design the organization and communicate changes

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Establish operating model design principals by identifying goals & challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

    1.2 Evaluate new ways of working

    1.3 Identify cloud work

    2.1 Draft an operating model

    2.2 Communicate proposed changes

    Phase Outcomes:

    Draft your cloud operations diagram, identify key messages and impacts to communicate to your stakeholders, and build out the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework communication deck.

    Step 2.1: Identify groups and responsibilities

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    • Cloud Operations Diagram
    • Success Indicators
    • Roadmap

    “No-one ever solved a problem by restructuring.”

    – Anonymous

    Visualize your cloud operations

    Create a visual to help you abstract, analyze, and clarify your vision for the future state of your organization in order to align and instruct stakeholders.

    Create a visual, high-level view of your organization to help you answer questions such as:

    • “What work do we do? What are the roles and responsibilities of different teams?”
    • “How do we interact between work areas?”
    • “How has our organization changed already, and what additional changes may be needed?”
    • “How do we make technology decisions?”
    • “How do we provide services?”
    • “How might this change be received by people on the ground?”
    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Diagram Example.

    Decide whether to centralize or decentralize

    Specialization & Focus: A group or work unit developing a focused concentration of skills, expertise, and activities aligned with an area of focus (such as the ones at right).

    Decentralization: Operational teams that report to a decentralized IT or business function, either directly or via a “dotted line” relationship.

    Decentralization and Specialization can:

    • Duplicate work.
    • Localize decision-making authority, which can increase agility and responsiveness.
    • Transfer authority and accountability to local and typically smaller teams, clarifying responsibilities and encouraging staff to take ownership for service delivery.
    • Enable the team to focus on complex and rapidly changing technologies or processes.
    • Create islands of expertise, which can get in the way of collaboration, innovation, and decision making across groups and work units and make oversight difficult.
    • Complicate the transfer of resources and knowledge between groups.

    Examples: Areas of Focus

    Business unit

    • Manufacturing
    • R&D
    • Sales & Marketing

    Region

    • Americas
    • EMEA
    • APAC

    Service

    • ERP
    • Commercial website

    Technology

    • On-premises servers/storage
    • Network
    • Cloud services

    Operational process focus

    • Capacity management & planning
    • Incident management
    • Problem management

    “The concept of organization design is simple in theory but highly complex in practice. Like any strategic decision, it involves making multiple trade-offs before choosing what is best suited to a business context.”

    – Nitin Razdan & Arvind Pandit

    Identify key work areas

    Balance specialization with effective collaboration

    • Much is said about breaking down organizational silos. But at some level, silos are inevitable – any company with more than one employee will have to divide work up somehow.
    • Dividing up work is a delicate balancing act – ensuring individuals and groups are able to do work that is related, meaningful, and that allows autonomy while allowing for effective collaboration between groups that need to work together to achieve business goals.

    Why “work areas”?

    Why don’t we just use teams, groups, squads, or departments, or some other more common term for groups of people working together?

    • We are not yet at the point of deciding who in the organization should be aligned to which areas in the design.
    • Describing work areas as teams can shift the conversation to the organizational chart – to who does the work, rather than what needs to be done.

    That’s not the goal of this exercise. If the conversation gets stuck on what you do today, it can get in the way of thinking about what you need to do in the future.

    Create a future-state cloud operations diagram

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the example cloud operations diagram example in your copy of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook.
    2. Identify key work areas (e.g. applications, infrastructure, platform engineering, DevOps, security). Add the name of each work area in one of the larger boxes.
      • Go back to your design principles. Did you define any work areas in your design principles that should be represented here?
      • If you have several groups or teams with similar responsibilities, consider lumping them together in one box (e.g. applications teams, 3x DevOps teams).
    3. Copy the tasks from any workstream diagrams you’ve created to the same slide as the organization design diagram. Keep the workstream diagram intact, as you’ll want to be able to refer back to it later.

    Activity instructions continue on the next slide.

    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
    • Cloud Operations Diagram
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip charts
    • Cloud Operations
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Cloud operations diagram (cont’d)

    1-3 hours

    4. As a group, move the work boxes from the workstream diagram into the appropriate work area.

    • Don’t worry about being too tidy for the moment – clean up the diagram when the exercise is done.
    • Make adjustments to the wording of the work boxes if needed.

    5. Use the space between work areas to describe how work areas must interact to achieve organizational goals. For example:

    • What information should be shared between groups?
    • What information sharing channels may be used?
    • What processes will be handed-off between groups and how?
    • How often will teams interact?
    • Will interactions be formal or informal?

    Create a current-state operations diagram

    1 -2 hours

    This exercise can be done by one person, then reviewed with the working group at a later time.

    This current state diagram helps clarify the changes that may need to happen to get to your future state.

    1. Color code the work boxes for each work area. For example, if you have a “DevOps” work area, make all the work boxes assigned to “DevOps” the same color.
    2. On a separate slide, sketch your existing organization indicating your current teams.
    3. Copy the tasks from the future-state diagram to this current-state chart. Align the tasks to the appropriate groups.
    4. Review the chart with the working group. Discuss: are there teams that are doing work today that will also be done by different teams? Are there groups that may merge into one team? What types of changes may be required?
    InputOutput
    • Future-state cloud operations diagram
    • Current-state cloud operations diagram
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Projector/screen/virtual meeting
    • Project lead
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Check for biases to make better choices

    Use the strategies below to spot and address flaws in your team’s thinking about your future-state design.

    Biases

    What’s the risk?

    Mitigation strategies

    Is the team making mistakes due to self-interest, love of a single idea, or groupthink?

    Important information may be ignored or left unspoken.

    Rigorously check for the other biases, below. Tactfully seek dissenting opinions.

    Do recommendations use unreasonable analogies to other successes or failures?

    Opportunities or challenges in the current situation may not be sufficiently understood.

    Ask for other examples, and check whether the analogies are still valid.

    Is the team blinkered by the weight of past decisions?

    Doubling-down on bad decisions (sunk costs) or ignoring new opportunities.

    Ask yourself what you'd do if you were new to the position or organization.

    Does the data support the recommendations?

    Data used to make the case isn't a good fit for the challenge, is based on faulty assumptions, or is incomplete.

    If you had a year to make the decision, what data would you want? How much can you get?

    Are there realistic alternative recommendations?

    Alternatives don't exist or are "strawman" options.

    Ask for additional options.

    Is the recommendation too risk averse or cautious?

    Recommendations that may be too risky are ignored, leading to missed opportunities.

    Review options to accept, transfer, distribute, or mitigate the risk of the decision.

    Framework above adapted from Kahneman, Lovallo, and Sibony (2011)

    Be specific with metrics

    Thinking of ways you could measure success can help uncover what success actually means to you.

    Work collectively to generate success indicators for each key cloud initiative. Success indicators are metrics, with targets, aligned to goals, and if you are able to measure them accurately, they should help you report your progress toward your objectives.

    For example, if your driver is “faster access to resources” you might consider indicators like developer satisfaction, project completion time, average time to provision, etc.

    There are several reasons you may not publicize these metrics. They may be difficult to calculate or misconstrued as targets, warping behavior in unexpected ways. But managed properly, they have value in measuring operational success!

    Examples: Operations redesign project metrics

    Key stakeholder satisfaction scores

    IT staff engagement scores

    Support Delivery of New Functionality

    Double number of accepted releases per cycle

    80% of key cloud initiatives completed on time, on budget, and in scope

    Improve Operational Effectiveness

    <1% of servers have more than two major versions out of date

    No more than one capacity-related incident per Q

    Define success indicators

    Whiteboard Activity

    45 minutes

    1. On a whiteboard, draw a table with key objectives for the design across the top.
      • What cloud objectives should the redesign help you achieve? Refer back to the design principles from Phase 1.
      • Think about the redesign itself. How will you measure whether the project itself is proceeding according to plan? Consider metrics such as employee engagement scores and satisfaction scores from key stakeholders.
    2. Consider whether the metrics are feasible to track. Record your decisions in your copy of the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework deck.
    InputOutput
    • Key design goals
    • Success indicators for your design
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Populate a roadmap

    Tool Activity

    45 minutes

    1. In the Roadmap Tool, populate the data entry tab with the initiatives you will take to support changes toward the new cloud operations organizing framework.
    2. Input each of the tasks in the data entry tab and provide a description and rationale behind the task (as needed).
    3. Assign an effort, priority, and cost level to each task (high, medium, low).
    4. Assign an owner to each task – someone who can take points and shepherd the task to completion.
    5. Identify the timeline for each task based on the priority, effort, and cost (short, medium, and long term).
    6. Highlight risk for each task if it will be deferred.
    7. Track the progress of each task with the status column.
    InputOutput
    • Cloud Operations Organizing Framework
    • Roadmap/ implementation plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Roadmap Tool
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Download the Roadmap Tool

    Step 2.2: Communicate changes

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    • Build a communication plan for key stakeholders
    • Complete the communication deck Cloud Operations Organizing Framework
    • Build a roadmap

    “Words, words, words.”

    – Shakespeare

    Communicate changes

    Which stakeholders will be affected by the changes?

    Decision makers: Who do you ultimately need to convince to proceed with any changes you’ve outlined?

    Peers: How will managers of other areas be affected by the changes you’re proposing? If you are you suggesting changes to the way that they, or their teams, do their work, you will have to present a compelling case that there’s value in it for them.

    Staff: Are you dictating changes or looking for feedback on the path forward?

    The image contains a screenshot of the Five Elements of Change that is displayed in a cycle. The five elements are: What is the change? Why are we doing it? How are we going to go about it? How long will it take us? What is the role of each team and individual.

    Source: The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change

    Follow these guidelines for good communication

    Be relevant

    • Talk about what matters to each stakeholder group.
    • Talk about what matters to the initiative.
    • IT thinks in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be “understood” but this does not matter to stakeholders; think “what’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.
    • If you expect objections, create a plan to handle them.

    Be clear

    • Lead with the point you’re trying to make.
    • Don’t use jargon.
    • Avoid idiomatic language and clichés.
    • Have a third party review draft communications and ask them to tell you the key messages in their own words. If they’re missing the main points, there’s a good chance the draft isn’t clear.

    Be consistent

    • Ensure the core message is consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Changing the core message from one group to another can be interpreted as incompetence or an attempt at deception. This will damage your credibility and can lead to a loss of trust.

    Be concise

    • Get to the point.
    • Minimize word count wherever possible.

    “We tend to use a lot of jargon in our discussions, and that is a sure fire way to turn people away. We realized the message wasn’t getting out because the audience wasn’t speaking the same language. You have to take it down to the next level and help them understand where the needs are.”

    – Jeremy Clement, Director of Finance, College of Charleston

    Create a communication plan

    1 hour

    Fill out the table below.

    Stakeholder group: Identify key stakeholders who may be impacted by changes to the operations team. This might include IT leadership, management, and staff.

    Benefits: What’s in it for them?

    Impact: What are we asking in return?

    How: What mechanisms or channels will you use to communicate?

    When: When (and how often) will you get the message out?

    Benefits

    Impact

    How

    When

    IT Mgrs.

    • Improve agility, stability
    • Deliver faster against business goals
    • Respond to identified needs
    • Improve confidence in IT
    • Must support the process
    • Change and engagement issues during restructuring may affect staff engagement and productivity
    • Training budget required
    • Present at leadership meeting
    • Kick-off email
    • Sept. leadership meeting
    • Weekly touchpoints
    • Informally throughout project

    Ops Staff

    • Clearer direction and clear priorities (Operations mission statement and RACI)
    • Higher-value work – address problems, contribute to plans
    • New skills and training
    • More personal accountability
    • Push toward process consistency
    • Must make time and plan for training during work hours
    • Present at operations team’s offsite meeting
    • AMA channel on Slack
    • 1:1 meetings
    • Add RACI, org. sketch to shared folder
    • Operations offsite
    • Sept. all-hands meeting
    • Ongoing coaching and informal conversations
    InputOutput
    • Discussion
    • Communication Plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Download the Communication Plan Template

    Support the transition with a plan to acquire skills

    Identify the preferred way to acquire needed skill sets: contracting, outsourcing, training, or hiring.

    • Some cloud projects will change the demand for some skills in the organization, and not all skills should be cultivated internally. Uncertainty about future skills and jobs will cause anxiety for your team and can lead to employee exit.
    • Use Info-Tech’s research to conduct a demand analysis to identify which new and critical skills should be acquired via training or hiring (rather than outsourcing or contracting).
    • Create a roadmap to clarify when training needs to be completed, a budget plan that accounts for training costs, and role descriptions that paint a picture of future work.
    • Within the confines of a collective agreement, managers may be required to retrain staff into new roles before those staff are required to do work in their new jobs. Failing to plan can be more consequential.
    • Remember that in cloud, a wealth of automation opportunities present a great option for offloading tasks as well!

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify skills requirements and gaps as early as possible to avoid skills gaps later. Whether you plan to acquire skills via training or cross-training, hiring, contracting, or outsourcing, effectively building skills takes time. Use Info-Tech’s methodology to address skills gaps in a prioritized and rational way.

    Involve HR for implementation

    Your HR team should help you work through:

    • Which staff and managers will move to which roles, and any headcount changes.
    • Job descriptions, performance metrics, career paths, compensation, and succession planning.
    • Organizational change management and implementation plans.

    When do you need to involve HR?

    Role changes will result in job description changes.

    • New or changed job descriptions need to be evaluated for impact on pay, title, exempt status, career pathing, and more.
    • This is especially true in more traditional or unionized organizations that require specific and granular job descriptions of responsibilities.
    • Changed jobs will likely require union review and approval.

    You anticipate changes to the reporting structure.

    • Work with HR to develop a transition plan including communications, training to new managers, and support to new teams.

    You anticipate redundancies.

    • Your HR department can prepare you for difficult discussions, help you navigate labor laws, and support the offboarding process.

    You anticipate new positions.

    • Recruitment and hiring takes time. Give HR advance notice to support recruitment, hiring, and onboarding to ensure you hire the right people, with the right skills, at the right time.

    Training and development budget is required.

    • If training is a critical part of the onboarding process, don’t just assume funding is available. Work with HR to build your case.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    Define your cloud vision before it defines you.

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    Drive consensus by outlining how your organization will use the cloud.

    Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization

    Be practical and proactive – identify needed technical skills for your future-state environment and the most efficient way to acquire them.

    Bibliography

    “2021 GitLab DevSecOps Survey.” Gitlab, 2021.
    “2022 State of the Cloud Report.” Flexera, 2022.
    “DevOps.” Atlassian, ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Atwood, Jeff. “The 2030 Self-Driving Car Bet.” Coding Horror, 4 Mar 2022. Web. 5 Aug 2022.
    Campbell, Andrew. “What is an operating model?” Operational Excellence Society, 12 May 2016. Web. 13 July 2022.
    “DevOps.” Atlassian, ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Ewenstein, Boris, Wesley Smith, Ashvin Sologar. “Changing change management” McKinsey, 1 July 2015. Web. 8 April 2022.
    Franco, Gustavo and Matt Brown. “How SRE teams are organized, and how to get started.” Google Cloud Blog, 26 June 2019. Web. July 13 2022.
    “Get started: Build a cloud operations team.” Microsoft, 10 May 2021.
    ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4 Edition. Axelos, 2019.
    Humble, Jez, Joanne Molesky, and Barry O’Reilly. Lean Enterprise: How High Performance Organizations Innovate at Scale. O’Reilly Media, 2015.
    Franco, Gustavo and Matt Brown. “How SRE teams are organized and how to get started.” 26 June 2019. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Galbraith, Jay. “The Star Model”. ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Kahnemanm Daniel, Dan Lovallo, and Olivier Sibony. “Before you make that big decision.” Harv Bus Rev. 2011 Jun; 89(6): 50-60, 137. PMID: 21714386.
    Kesler, Greg. “Star Model of Organizational Design.” YouTube, 1 Oct 2018. Web Video. 21 Jul 2022.
    Lakhani, Usman. “Site Reliability Engineering: What Is It? Why Is It Important for Online Businesses?” Info-Tech. Web. 25 May 2020.
    Mansour, Sherif. “Product Management: The role and best practices for beginners.” Atlassian Agile Coach, n.d.
    Murphy, Annie, Jamie Kirwin, Khalid Abdul Razak. “Operating Models: Delivering on strategy and optimizing processes.” EY, 2016.
    Shults, Carlos. “What is Platform Engineering? The Concept Behind the Term.” liatrio, 3 Aug 2021. Web. 5 Aug 2022.
    Sloss, Benjamin Treynor. Site Reliability Engineering Part I: Introduction. O’Reilly Media, 2017.
    “SRE vs. Platform Engineering.” Ambassador Labs, 8 Feb 2021.
    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, n.d. Web.
    “Understand cloud operating models.” Microsoft, 02 Sept. 2022.
    Velichko, Ivan. “DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering.” 15 Mar 2022.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Nenad Begovic

    Executive Director, Head of IT Operations

    MUFG Investor Services

    Desmond Durham

    Manager, ICT Planning & Infrastructure

    Trinidad & Tobago Unit Trust Corporation

    Virginia Roberts

    Director, Enterprise IT

    Denver Water

    Denis Sharp

    IT/LEAN Consultant

    Three anonymous contributors

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}192|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,532 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • Risk is unavoidable. Without a formal program to manage IT risk, you may be unaware of your severest IT risks.
    • The business could be making decisions that are not informed by risk.
    • Reacting to risks AFTER they occur can be costly and crippling, yet it is one of the most common tactics used by IT departments.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT risk is business risk. Every IT risk has business implications. Create an IT risk management program that shares accountability with the business.

    Impact and Result

    • Transform your ad hoc IT risk management processes into a formalized, ongoing program, and increase risk management success.
    • Take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s greatest risks before they occur.
    • Involve key stakeholders including the business senior management team to gain buy-in and to focus on IT risks most critical to the organization.

    Build an IT Risk Management Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build an IT Risk Management Program – A holistic approach to managing IT risks within your organization and involving key business stakeholders.

    Gain business buy-in to understanding the key IT risks that could negatively impact the organization and create an IT risk management program to properly identify, assess, respond, monitor, and report on those risks.

    • Build an IT Risk Management Program – Phases 1-3

    2. Risk Management Program Manual – A single source of truth for the risk management program to exist and be updated to reflect changes.

    Leverage this Risk Management Program Manual to ensure that the decisions around how IT risks will be governed and managed can be documented in a single source accessible by those involved.

    • Risk Management Program Manual

    3. Risk Register & Risk Costing Tool – A set of tools to document identified risk events. Assess each risk event and consider the appropriate response based on your organization’s threshold for risk.

    Engage these tools in your organization if you do not currently have a GRC tool to document risk events as they relate to the IT function. Consider the best risk response to high severity risk events to ensure all possible situations are considered.

    • Risk Register Tool
    • Risk Costing Tool

    4. Risk Event Action Plan and Risk Report – A template to document the chosen risk responses and ensure accountable owners agree on selected response method.

    Establish clear guidelines and responses to risk events that will leave your organization vulnerable to unwanted threats. Ensure risk owners have agreed to the risk responses and are willing to take accountability for that response.

    • Risk Event Action Plan
    • Risk Report

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    The Purpose

    To assess current risk management maturity, develop goals, and establish IT risk governance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified obstacles to effective IT risk management.

    Established attainable goals to increase maturity.

    Clearly laid out risk management accountabilities and responsibilities for IT and business stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current program maturity

    1.2 Complete RACI chart

    1.3 Create the IT risk council

    1.4 Identify and engage key stakeholders

    1.5 Add organization-specific risk scenarios

    1.6 Identify risk events

    Outputs

    Maturity Assessment

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Risk Register

    2 Identify IT Risks

    The Purpose

    Identify and assess all IT risks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Created a comprehensive list of all IT risk events.

    Risk events prioritized according to risk severity – as defined by the business.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify risk events (continued)

    2.2 Augment risk event list using COBIT 5 processes

    2.3 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk

    2.4 Create impact and probability scales

    2.5 Select a technique to measure reputational cost

    2.6 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    Outputs

    Finalized List of IT Risk Events

    Risk Register

    Risk Management Program Manual

    3 Identify IT Risks (continued)

    The Purpose

    Prioritize risks, establish monitoring responsibilities, and develop risk responses for top risks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Risk monitoring responsibilities are established.

    Risk response strategies have been identified for all key risks.

    Activities

    3.1 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    3.2 Document the proximity of the risk event

    3.3 Conduct expected cost assessment

    3.4 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols

    3.5 Root cause analysis

    3.6 Identify and assess risk responses

    Outputs

    Risk Register

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Risk Event Action Plans

    4 Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    The Purpose

    Assess and select risk responses for top risks and effectively communicate recommendations and priorities to the business.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Thorough analysis has been conducted on the value and effectiveness of risk responses for high severity risk events.

    Authoritative risk response recommendations can be made to senior leadership.

    A finalized Risk Management Program Manual is ready for distribution to key stakeholders.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify and assess risk responses

    4.2 Risk response cost-benefit analysis

    4.3 Create multi-year cost projections

    4.4 Review techniques for embedding risk management in IT

    4.5 Finalize the Risk Report and Risk Management Program Manual

    4.6 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers

    Outputs

    Risk Report

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Further reading

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Mitigate the IT risks that could negatively impact your organization.

    Table of Contents

    3 Executive Brief

    4 Analyst Perspective

    5 Executive Summary

    19 Phase 1: Review IT Risk Fundamentals & Governance

    43 Phase 2: Identify and Assess IT Risk

    74 Phase 3: Monitor, Communicate, and Respond to IT Risk

    102 Appendix

    108 Bibliography

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Mitigate the IT risks that could negatively impact your organization.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Siloed risks are risky business for any enterprise.

    Photo of Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, CIO Practice.
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director, CIO Practice
    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice.
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice

    Risk is an inherent part of life but not very well understood or executed within organizations. This has led to risk being avoided or, when it’s implemented, being performed in isolated siloes with inconsistencies in understanding of impact and terminology.

    Looking at risk in an integrated way within an organization drives a truer sense of the thresholds and levels of risks an organization is facing – making it easier to manage and leverage risk while reducing risks associated with different mitigation responses to the same risk events.

    This opens the door to using risk information – not only to prevent negative impacts but as a strategic differentiator in decision making. It helps you know which risks are worth taking, driving strong positive outcomes for your organization.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    IT has several challenges when it comes to addressing risk management:

    • Risk is unavoidable. Without a formal program to manage IT risk, you may be unaware of your severest IT risks.
    • The business could be making decisions that are not informed by risk.
    • Reacting to risks after they occur can be costly and crippling, yet it is one of the most common tactics used by IT departments.

    Common Obstacles

    Many IT organizations realize these obstacles:

    • IT risks and business risks are often addressed separately, causing inconsistencies in the approach.
    • Security risk receives such a high profile that it often eclipses other important IT risks, leaving the organization vulnerable.
    • Failing to include the business in IT risk management leaves IT leaders too accountable; the business must have accountability as well.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Transform your ad hoc IT risk management processes into a formalized, ongoing program and increase risk management success.
    • Take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s greatest risks before they occur.
    • Involve key stakeholders, including the business senior management team, to gain buy-in and to focus on the IT risks most critical to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT risk is business risk. Every IT risk has business implications. Create an IT risk management program that shares accountability with the business.

    Ad hoc approaches to managing risk fail because…

    If you are like the majority of IT departments, you do not have a consistent and comprehensive strategy for managing IT risk.

    1. Ad hoc risk management is reactionary.
    2. Ad hoc risk management is often focused only on IT security.
    3. Ad hoc risk management lacks alignment with business objectives.

    The results:

    • Increased business risk exposure caused by a lack of understanding of the impact of IT risks on the business.
    • Increased IT non-compliance, resulting in costly settlements and fines.
    • IT audit failure.
    • Ineffective management of risk caused by poor risk information and wrong risk response decisions.
    • Increased unnecessary and avoidable IT failures and fixes.

    58% of organizations still lack a systematic and robust method to actually report on risks (Source: AICPA, 2021)

    Data is an invaluable asset – ensure it’s protected

    Case Studies

    Logo for Cognyte.

    Cognyte, a vendor hired to be a cybersecurity analytics company, had over five billion records exposed in Spring 2021. The data was compromised for four days, providing attackers with plenty of opportunities to obtain personally identifying information. (SecureBlink., 2021 & Security Magazine, 2021)

    Logo for Facebook.

    Facebook, the world’s largest social media giant, had over 533 million Facebook users’ personal data breached when data sets were able to be cross-listed with one another. (Business Insider, 2021 & Security Magazine, 2021)

    Logo for MGM Resorts.

    In 2020, over 10.6 million customers experienced some sort of data being accessible, with 1,300 having serious personally identifying information breached. (The New York Times, 2020)

    Risk management is a business enabler

    Formalize risk management to increase your likelihood of success.

    By identifying areas of risk exposure and creating solutions proactively, obstacles can be removed or circumvented before they become a real problem.

    A certain amount of risk is healthy and can stimulate innovation:

    • A formal risk management strategy doesn’t mean trying to mitigate every possible risk; it means exposing the organization to the right amount of risk.
    • Taking a formal risk management approach allows an organization to thoughtfully choose which risks it is willing to accept.
    • Organizations with high risk management maturity will vault themselves ahead of the competition because they will be aware of which risks to prepare for, which risks to ignore, and which risks to take.

    Only 12% of organizations are using risk as a strategic tool most or all of the time (Source: AICPA, 2021)

    IT risk is enterprise risk

    Accountability for IT risks and the decisions made to address them should be shared between IT and the business.

    Multiple types of risk, 'Finance', 'IT', 'People', and 'Digital', funneling into 'ENTERPRISE RISKS'. IT risks have a direct and often aggregated impact on enterprise risks and opportunities in the same way other business risks can. This relationship must be understood and addressed through integrated risk management to ensure a consistent approach to risk.

    Follow the steps of this blueprint to build or optimize your IT risk management program

    Cycle of 'Goverance' beginning with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report'.

    Start Here

    PHASE 1
    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance
    PHASE 2
    Identify and Assess IT Risk
    PHASE 3
    Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    1.1

    Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals

    1.2

    Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    2.1

    Identify IT Risks

    2.2

    Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    3.1

    Monitor IT Risks and Develop Risk Responses

    3.2

    Report IT Risk Priorities

    Integrate Risk and Use It to Your Advantage

    Accelerate and optimize your organization by leveraging meaningful risk data to make intelligent enterprise risk decisions.

    Risk management is more than checking an audit box or demonstrating project due diligence.

    Risk Drivers
    • Audit & compliance
    • Preserve value & avoid loss
    • Previous risk impact driver
    • Major transformation
    • Strategic opportunities
    Arrow pointing right. Only 7% of organizations are in a “leading” or “aspirational” level of risk maturity. (OECD, 2021) 63% of organizations struggle when it comes to defining their appetite toward strategy related risks. (“Global Risk Management Survey,” Deloitte, 2021) Late adopters of risk management were 70% more likely to use instinct over data or facts to inform an efficient process. (Clear Risk, 2020) 55% of organizations have little to no training on ERM to properly implement such practices. (AICPA, NC State Poole College of Management, 2021)
    1. Assess Enterprise Risk Maturity 3. Build a Risk Management Program Plan 4. Establish Risk Management Processes 5. Implement a Risk Management Program
    2. Determine Authority with Governance
    Unfortunately, less than 50% of those in risk focused roles are also in a governance role where they have the authority to provide risk oversight. (Governance Institute of Australia, 2020)
    IT can improve the maturity of the organization’s risk governance and help identify risk owners who have authority and accountability.

    Governance and related decision making is optimized with integrated and aligned risk data.

    List of 'Integrated Risk Maturity Categories': '1. Context & Strategic Direction', '2. Risk Culture and Authority', '3. Risk Management Process', and '4. Risk Program Optimization'. The five types of a risk in 'Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)': 'IT', 'Security', 'Digital', 'Vendor/TPRM', and 'Other'.

    ERM incorporates the different types of risk, including IT, security, digital, vendor, and other risk types.

    The program plan is meant to consider all the major risk types in a unified approach.

    The 'Risk Process' cycle starting with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report', and back to the beginning. Implementation of an integrated risk management program requires ongoing access to risk data by those with decision making authority who can take action.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable:

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Use the tools and activities in each phase of the blueprint to create a comprehensive, customized program manual for the ongoing management of IT risk.

    Sample of the key deliverable, Risk Manangement Program Fund.
    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    Assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM).

    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment blueprint. Centralized Risk Register

    The repository for all the risks that have been identified within your environment.

    Sample of the Centralized Risk Register blueprint.
    Risk Costing Tool

    A potential cost-benefit analysis of possible risk responses to determine a good method to move forward.

    Sample of the Risk Costing Tool blueprint. Risk Report & Risk Event Action Plan

    A method to report risk severity and hold risk owners accountable for chosen method of responding.

    Samples of the Risk Report & Risk Event Action Plan blueprints.

    Benefit from industry-leading best practices

    As a part of our research process, we used the COSO, ISO 31000, and COBIT 2019 frameworks. Contextualizing IT risk management within these frameworks ensured that our project-focused approach is grounded in industry-leading best practices for managing IT risk.

    Logo for COSO.

    COSO’s Enterprise Risk Management — Integrating with Strategy and Performance addresses the evolution of enterprise risk management and the need for organizations to improve their approach to managing risk to meet the demands of an evolving business environment. (COSO)

    Logo for ISO.

    ISO 31000
    Risk Management can help organizations increase the likelihood of achieving objectives, improve the identification of opportunities and threats, and effectively allocate and use resources for risk treatment. (ISO 31000)

    Logo for COBIT.

    COBIT 2019’s IT functions were used to develop and refine our Ten IT Risk Categories used in our top-down risk identification methodology. (COBIT 2019)

    Abandon ad hoc risk management

    A strong risk management foundation is valuable when building your IT risk management program.

    This research covers the following IT risk fundamentals:

    • Benefits of formalized risk management
    • Key terms and definitions
    • Risk management within ERM
    • Risk management independent of ERM
    • Four key principles of IT risk management
    • Importance of a risk management program manual
    • Importance of buy-in and support from the business

    Drivers of Formalized Risk Management:

    Drivers External to IT
    External Audit Internal Audit
    Mandated by ERM
    Occurrence of Risk Event
    Demonstrating IT’s value to the business Proactive initiative
    Emerging IT risk awareness
    Grassroots Drivers

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Increased on-time, in-scope, and on-budget completion of IT projects.
    • Meet the business’ service requirements.
    • Improved satisfaction with IT by senior leadership and business units.
    • Fewer resources wasted on fire-fighting.
    • Improved availability, integrity, and confidentiality of sensitive data.
    • More efficient use of resources.
    • Greater ability to respond to evolving threats.

    Business Benefits

    • Reduced operational surprises or failures.
    • Improved IT flexibility when responding to risk events and market fluctuations.
    • Reduced budget uncertainty.
    • Improved ability to make decisions when developing long-term strategies.
    • Improved stakeholder and shareholder confidence.
    • Achieved compliance with external regulations.
    • Competitive advantage over organizations with immature risk management practices.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Phase 1

    • Call #1: Assess current risk maturity and organizational buy-in.
    • Call #2: Establish an IT risk council and determine IT risk management program goals.
    • Phase 2

    • Call #3: Identify the risk categories used to organize risk events.
    • Call #4: Identify the threshold for risk the organization can withstand.
    • Phase 3

    • Call #5: Create a method to assess risk event severity.
    • Call #6: Establish a method to monitor priority risks and consider possible risk responses.
    • Call #7: Communicate risk priorities to the business and implement risk management plan.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Activities
    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    1.1 Assess current program maturity

    1.2 Complete RACI chart

    1.3 Create the IT risk council

    1.4 Identify and engage key stakeholders

    1.5 Add organization-specific risk scenarios

    1.6 Identify risk events

    Identify IT Risks

    2.1 Identify risk events (continued)

    2.2 Augment risk event list using COBIT5 processes

    2.3 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk

    2.4 Create impact and probability scales

    2.5 Select a technique to measure reputational cost

    2.6 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    Assess IT Risks

    3.1 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    3.2 Document the proximity of the risk event

    3.3 Conduct expected cost assessment

    3.4 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols

    3.5 Perform root cause analysis

    3.6 Identify and assess risk responses

    Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    4.1 Identify and assess risk responses

    4.2 Risk response cost-benefit analysis

    4.3 Create multi-year cost projections

    4.4 Review techniques for embedding risk management in IT

    4.5 Finalize the Risk Report and Risk Management Program Manual

    4.6 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Outcomes
    1. Maturity Assessment
    2. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Finalized List of IT Risk Events
    2. Risk Register
    3. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Risk Register
    2. Risk Event Action Plans
    3. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Risk Report
    2. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Workshop Report
    2. Risk Management Program Manual

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Phase 1

    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals
    • 1.2 Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify IT Risks
    • 2.2 Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Develop Risk Responses and Monitor IT Risks
    • 3.2 Report IT Risk Priorities

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Gain buy-in from senior leadership
    • Assess current program maturity
    • Identify obstacles and pain points
    • Determine the risk culture of the organization
    • Develop risk management goals
    • Develop SMART project metrics
    • Create the IT risk council
    • Complete a RACI chart

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • Business executive leadership

    Step 1.1

    Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Gain buy-in from senior leadership
    • 1.1.2 Assess current program maturity

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • Business executive leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    • Reviewed key IT principles and terminology
    • Gained understanding of the relationship between IT risk management and ERM
    • Introduced to Info-Tech’s IT Risk Management Framework
    • Obtained the support of senior leadership
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2

    Effective IT risk management is possible with or without ERM

    Whether or not your organization has ERM, integrating your IT risk management program with the business is possible.

    Most IT departments find themselves in one of these two organizational frameworks for managing IT risk:

    Core Responsibilities With an ERM Without an ERM
    • Risk Decision-Making Authority
    • Final Accountability
    Senior Leadership Team Senior Leadership Team
    • Risk Governance
    • Risk Prioritization & Communication
    ERM IT Risk Management
    • Risk Identification
    • Risk Assessment
    • Risk Monitoring
    IT Risk Management
    Pro: IT’s risk management responsibilities are defined (assessment schedules, escalation and reporting procedures).
    Con: IT may lack autonomy to implement IT risk management best practices.
    Pro: IT is free to create its own IT risk council and develop customized processes that serve its unique needs.
    Con: Lack of clear reporting procedures and mechanisms to share accountability with the business.

    Info-Tech’s IT risk management framework walks you through each step to achieve risk readiness

    IT Risk Management Framework

    Risk Governance
    • Optimize Risk Management Processes
    • Assess Risk Maturity
    • Measure the Success of the Program
    A cycle surrounds the words 'Business Objectives', referring to the surrounding lists. On the top half is 'Communication', and the bottom is 'Monitoring'. Risk Identification
    • Engage Stakeholder Participation
    • Use Risk Identification Frameworks
    • Compile IT-Related Risks
    Risk Response
    • Establish Monitoring Responsibilities
    • Perform Cost-Benefit Analysis
    • Report Risk Response Actions
    Risk Assessment
    • Establish Thresholds for Unacceptable Risk
    • Calculate Expected Cost
    • Determine Risk Severity & Prioritize IT Risks

    Effective IT risk management benefits

    Obtain the support of the senior leadership team or IT steering committee by communicating how IT risk impacts their priorities.

    Risk management benefits To engage the business...
    IT is compliant with external laws and regulations. Identify the industry or legal legislation and regulations your organization abides by.
    IT provides support for business compliance. Find relevant business compliance issues, and relate compliance failures to cost.
    IT regularly communicates costs, benefits, and risks to the business. Acknowledge the number of times IT and the business miscommunicate critical information.
    Information and processing infrastructure are very secure. Point to past security breaches or potential vulnerabilities in your systems.
    IT services are usually delivered in line with business requirements. Bring up IT services that the business was unsatisfied with. Explain that their inputs in identifying risks are correlated with project quality.
    IT related business risks are managed very well. Make it clear that with no risk tracking process, business processes become exposed and tend to slow down.
    IT projects are completed on time and within budget. Point out late or over-budget projects due to the occurrence of unforeseen risks.

    1.1.1 Gain buy-in from senior leadership

    1-4 hours

    Input: List of IT personnel and business stakeholders

    Output: Buy-in from senior leadership for an IT risk management program

    Materials: Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    The resource demands of IT risk management will vary from organization to organization. Here are typical requirements:

    • Occasional participation of key IT personnel and select business stakeholders in IT risk council meetings (e.g. once every two weeks).
    • Periodic risk assessments (e.g. 4 days, twice a year).
    • IT personnel must take on risk monitoring responsibilities (e.g. 1-4 hours per week).
    • Record the results in the Program Manual sections 3.3, 3.4 and 3.5.

    Record the results in the Risk Management Program Manual.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    The purpose of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment is to assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM)

    Frequently and continually assessing your organization’s maturity toward integrated risk ensures the right risk management program can be adopted by your organization.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment
    A simple tool to understand if your organization is ready to embrace integrated risk management by measuring maturity across four key categories: Context & Strategic Direction, Risk Culture & Authority, Risk Management Process, and Risk Program Optimization.
    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Use the results from this integrated risk maturity assessment to determine the type of risk management program that can and should be adopted by your organizations.

    Some organizations will need to remain siloed and focused on IT risk management only, while others will be able to integrate risk-related information to start enabling automatic controls that respond to this data.

    1.1.2 Assess current program maturity

    1-4 hours

    Input: List of IT personnel and business stakeholders

    Output: Maturity scores across four key risk categories

    Materials: Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment Tool

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    This assessment is intended for frequent use; process completeness should be re-evaluated on a regular basis.

    How to Use This Assessment:

    1. Download the Integrated Risk Management Maturity Assessment Tool.
    2. Tab 2, "Data Entry:" This is a qualitative assessment of your integrated risk management process and is organized by the categories of integrated risk maturity. You will be asked to rate the extent to which you are executing the activities required to successfully complete each phase of the assessment. Use the drop-down menus provided to select the appropriate level of execution for each activity listed.
    3. Tab 3, "Results:" This tab will display your rate of IRM completeness/maturity. You will receive a score for each category as well as an overall score. The results will be displayed numerically, by percentage, and graphically.

    Record the results in the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Categories

    Semi-circle with colored points indicating four categories.

    1

    Context & Strategic Direction Understanding of the organization’s main objectives and how risk can support or enhance those objectives.

    2

    Risk Culture and Authority Examine if risk-based decisions are being made by those with the right level of authority and if the organization’s risk appetite is embedded in the culture.

    3

    Risk Management Process Determine if the current process to identify, assess, respond to, monitor, and report on risks is benefitting the organization.

    4

    Risk Program Optimization Consider opportunities where risk-related data is being gathered, reported, and used to make informed decisions across the enterprise.

    Step 1.2

    Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Identify pain points/obstacles and opportunities
    • 1.2.2 Determine the risk culture of the organization
    • 1.2.3 Develop risk management goals
    • 1.2.4 Develop SMART project metrics
    • 1.2.5 Create the IT risk council
    • 1.2.6 Complete a RACI chart

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • Business executive leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    • Developed goals for the risk management program
    • Established the IT risk council
    • Assigned accountability and responsibility for risk management processes

    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2

    Create an IT risk governance framework that integrates with the business

    Follow these best practices to make sure your requirements are solid:

    1. Self-assess your current approach to IT risk management.
    2. Identify organizational obstacles and set attainable risk management goals.
    3. Track the effectiveness and success of the program using SMART risk management metrics.
    4. Establish an IT risk council tasked with managing IT risk.
    5. Set clear risk management accountabilities and responsibilities for IT and business stakeholders.

    Key metrics for your IT risk governance framework

    Challenges:
    • Key stakeholders are left out or consulted once risks have already occurred.
    • Failure to employ consistent risk identification methodologies results in omitted and unknown risks.
    • Risk assessments do not reflect organizational priorities and may not align with thresholds for acceptable risk.
    • Risk assessment occurs sporadically or only after a major risk event has already occurred.
    Key metrics:
    • Number of risk management processes done ad hoc.
    • Frequency that IT risk appears as an agenda item at IT steering committee meetings.
    • Percentage of IT employees whose performance evaluations reflect risk management objectives.
    • Percentage of IT risk council members who are trained in risk management activities.
    • Number of open positions in the IT risk council.
    • Cost of risk management program operations per year.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Metrics provide the foundation for determining the success of your IT risk management program and ensure ongoing funding to support appropriate risk responses.

    IT risk management success factors

    Support and sponsorship from senior leadership

    IT risk management has more success when initiated by a member of the senior leadership team or the board, rather than emerging from IT as a grassroots initiative.

    Sponsorship increases the likelihood that risk management is prioritized and receives the necessary resources and attention. It also ensures that IT risk accountability is assumed by senior leadership.

    Risk culture and awareness

    A risk-aware organizational culture embraces new policies and processes that reflect a proactive approach to risk.

    An organization with a risk-aware culture is better equipped to facilitate communication vertically within the organization.

    Risk awareness can be embedded by revising job descriptions and performance assessments to reflect IT risk management responsibilities.

    Organization size

    Smaller organizations can often institute a mature risk management program much more quickly than larger organizations.

    It is common for key personnel within smaller organizations to be responsible for multiple roles associated with risk management, making it easier to integrate IT and business risk management.

    Larger organizations may find it more difficult to integrate a more complex and dispersed network of individuals responsible for various risk management responsibilities.

    1.2.1 Identify obstacles and pain points

    1-4 hours

    Input: Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    Output: Obstacles and pain points identified

    Materials: IT Risk Management Success Factors

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    Anticipate potential challenges and “blind spots” by determining which success factors are missing from your current situation.

    Instructions:

    1. List the potential obstacles and missing success factors that you must overcome to effectively manage IT risk and build a risk management program.
    2. Consider some opportunities that could be leveraged to increase the success of this program.
    3. Use this list in Activity 1.2.3 to develop program goals.

    Risk Management

    Replace the example pain points and opportunities with real scenarios in your organization.

    Pain Points/Obstacles
    • Lack of leadership buy-in
    • Skills and understanding around risk management within IT
    • Skills and understanding around risk management within the organization
    • Lack of a defined risk management posture
    Opportunities
    • Changes in regulations related to risk
    • Organization moving toward an integrated risk management program
    • Ability to leverage lessons learned from similar companies
    • Strong process management and adherence to policies by employees in the organization

    1.2.2 Determine the risk culture of your organization

    1-3 hours

    Determine how your organization fits the criteria listed below. Descriptions and examples do not have to match your organization perfectly.

    Risk Tolerant
    • You have no compliance requirements.
    • You have no sensitive data.
    • Customers do not expect you to have strong security controls.
    • Revenue generation and innovative products take priority and risk is acceptable.
    • The organization does not have remote locations.
    • It is likely that your organization does not operate within the following industries:
      • Finance
      • Health care
      • Telecom
      • Government
      • Research
      • Education
    Moderate
    • You have some compliance requirements, e.g.:
      • HIPAA
      • PIPEDA
    • You have sensitive data, and are required to retain records.
    • Customers expect strong security controls.
    • Information security is visible to senior leadership.
    • The organization has some remote locations.
    • Your organization most likely operates within the following industries:
      • Government
      • Research
      • Education
    Risk Averse
    • You have multiple, strict compliance and/or regulatory requirements.
    • You house sensitive data, such as medical records.
    • Customers expect your organization to maintain strong and current security controls.
    • Information security is highly visible to senior management and public investors.
    • The organization has multiple remote locations.
    • Your organization operates within the following industries:
      • Finance
      • Healthcare
      • Telecom

    Be aware of the organization’s attitude towards risk

    Risk culture is an organization’s attitude towards taking risks. This attitude manifests itself in two ways:

    One element of risk culture is what levels of risk the organization is willing to accept to pursue its objectives and what levels of risk are deemed unacceptable. This is often called risk appetite.
    Risk tolerant

    Risk-tolerant organizations embrace the potential of accelerating growth and the attainment of business objectives by taking calculated risks.

    Risk averse

    Risk-averse organizations prefer consistent, gradual growth and goal attainment by embracing a more cautious stance toward risk.

    The other component of risk culture is the degree to which risk factors into decision making.
    Risk conscious

    Risk-conscious organizations place a high priority on being aware of all risks impacting business objectives, regardless of whether they choose to accept or respond to those risks.

    Unaware

    Organizations that are largely unaware of the impact of risk generally believe there are few major risks impacting business objectives and choose to invest resources elsewhere.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations typically fall in the middle of these spectrums. While risk culture will vary depending on the industry and maturity of the organization, a culture with a balanced risk appetite that is extremely risk conscious is able to make creative, dynamic decisions with reasonable limits placed on risk-related decision making.

    1.2.3 Develop goals for the IT risk management program

    1-4 hours

    Input: Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment, Risk Culture, Pain Points and Opportunities

    Output: Goals for the IT risk management program

    Materials: Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    Translate your maturity assessment and knowledge about organizational risk culture, potential obstacles, and success factors to develop goals for your IT risk management program.

    Instructions:

    1. In the Risk Management Program Manual, revise, replace, or add to the high-level goals provided in section 2.4.
    2. Make sure that you have three to five high-level goals that reflect the current and targeted maturity of IT risk management processes.
    3. Integrate potential obstacles, pain points, and insights from the organization’s risk culture.

    Record the results in the Risk Management Program Manual.

    1.2.4 Develop SMART project metrics

    1-3 hours

    Create metrics for measuring the success of the IT risk management program.

    Ensure that all success metrics are SMART Instructions
    1. Document a list of appropriate metrics to assess the success of the IT risk management program on a whiteboard.
    2. Use the sample metrics listed in the table on the next slide as a starting point.
    3. Fill in the chart to indicate the:
      1. Name of the success metric
      2. Method for measuring success
      3. Baseline measurement
      4. Target measurement
      5. Actual measurements at various points throughout the process of improving the risk management program
      6. A deadline for each metric to meet the target measurement
    Strong Make sure the objective is clear and detailed.
    Measurable Objectives are measurable if there are specific metrics assigned to measure success. Metrics should be objective.
    Actionable Objectives become actionable when specific initiatives designed to achieve the objective are identified.
    Realistic Objectives must be achievable given your current resources or known available resources.
    Time-Bound An objective without a timeline can be put off indefinitely. Furthermore, measuring success is challenging without a timeline.

    1.2.4 Develop SMART project metrics (continued)

    1-3 hours

    Attach metrics to your goals to gauge the success of the IT risk management program.

    Replace the example metrics with accurate KPIs or metrics for your organization.

    Sample Metrics
    Name Method Baseline Target Deadline Checkpoint 1 Checkpoint 2 Final
    Number of risks identified (per year) Risk register 0 100 Dec. 31
    Number of business units represented (risk identification) Meeting minutes 0 5 Dec. 31
    Frequency of risk assessment Assessments recorded in risk management program manual 0 2 per year Year 2
    Percentage of identified risk events that undergo expected cost assessment Ratio of risks assessed in the risk costing tool to risks assessed in the risk register 0 20% Dec. 31
    Number of top risks without an identified risk response Risk register 5 0 March 1
    Cost of risk management program operations per year Meeting frequency and duration, multiplied by the cost of participation $2,000 $5,000 Dec. 31

    Create the IT risk committee (ITRC)

    Responsibilities of the ITRC:
    1. Formalize risk management processes.
    2. Identify and review major risks throughout the IT department.
    3. Recommend an appropriate risk appetite or level of exposure.
    4. Review the assessment of the impact and likelihood of identified risks.
    5. Review the prioritized list of risks.
    6. Create a mitigation plan to minimize risk likelihood and impact.
    7. Review and communicate overall risk impact and risk management success.
    8. Assign risk ownership responsibilities of key risks to ensure key risks are monitored and risk responses are effectively implemented.
    9. Address any concerns in regards to the risk management program, including, but not limited to, reviewing their risk management duties and resourcing.
    10. Communicate risk reports to senior management annually.
    11. Make any alterations to the committee roster and the individuals’ responsibilities as needed and document changes.
    Must be on the ITRC:
    • CIO
    • CRO (if applicable)
    • Senior Directors
    • Security Officer
    • Head of Operations

    Must be on the ITRC:

    • CFO
    • Senior representation from every business unit impacted by IT risk

    1.2.5 Create the IT risk council

    1-4 hours

    Input: List of IT personnel and business stakeholders

    Output: Goals for the IT risk management program

    Materials: Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: CIO, CRO (if applicable), Senior Directors, Head of Operations

    Identify the essential individuals from both the IT department and the business to create a permanent committee that meets regularly and carries out IT risk management activities.

    Instructions:

    1. Review sections 3.1 (Mandate) and 3.2 (Agenda and Responsibilities) of the IT Risk Committee Charter, located in the Risk Management Program Manual. Make any necessary revisions.
    2. In section 3.3, document how frequently the council is scheduled to meet.
    3. In section 3.4, document members of the IT risk council.
    4. Obtain sign-off for the IT risk council from the CIO or another member of the senior leadership team in section 3.5 of the manual.

    Record the results in the Risk Management Program Manual.

    1.2.6 Complete RACI chart

    1-3 hours

    A RACI diagram is a useful visualization that identifies redundancies and ensures that every role, project, or task has an accountable party.

    RACI is an acronym made up of four participatory roles: Instructions
    1. Use the template provided on the following slide, and add key stakeholders who do not appear and are relevant for your organization.
    2. For each activity, assign each stakeholder a letter.
    3. There must be an accountable party for each activity (every activity must have an “A”).
    4. For activities that do not apply to a particular stakeholder, leave the space blank.
    5. Once the chart is complete, copy/paste it into section 4.1 of the Risk Management Program Manual.
    Responsible Stakeholders who undertake the activity.
    Accountable Stakeholders who are held responsible for failure or take credit for success.
    Consulted Stakeholders whose opinions are sought.
    Informed Stakeholders who receive updates.

    1.2.6 Complete RACI chart (continued)

    1-3 hours

    Assign risk management accountabilities and responsibilities to key stakeholders:

    Stakeholder Coordination Risk Identification Risk Thresholds Risk Assessment Identify Responses Cost-Benefit Analysis Monitoring Risk Decision Making
    ITRC A R I R R R A C
    ERM C I C I I I I C
    CIO I A A A A A I R
    CRO I R C I R
    CFO I R C I R
    CEO I R C I A
    Business Units I C C C
    IT I I I I I I R C
    PMO C C C
    Legend: Responsible Accountable Consulted Informed

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Phase 2

    Identify and Assess IT Risk

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals
    • 1.2 Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify IT Risks
    • 2.2 Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Develop Risk Responses and Monitor IT Risks
    • 3.2 Report IT Risk Priorities

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Add organization-specific risk scenarios
    • Identify risk events
    • Augment risk event list using COBIT 2019 processes
    • Conduct a PESTLE analysis
    • Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk
    • Create a financial impact assessment scale
    • Select a technique to measure reputational cost
    • Create a likelihood scale
    • Assess risk severity level
    • Assess expected cost

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Business Risk Owners

    Step 2.1

    Identify IT Risks

    Activities
    • 2.1.1 Add organization-specific risk scenarios
    • 2.1.2 Identify risk events
    • 2.1.3 Augment risk event list using COBIT 19 processes
    • 2.1.4 Conduct a PESTLE analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • IT Risk Council
    • Business executive leadership
    • Business risk owners

    Outcomes of this step

    • Participation of key stakeholders
    • Comprehensive list of IT risk events
    Identify and Assess IT Risk
    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    Get to know what you don’t know

    1. Engage the right stakeholders in risk identification.
    2. Employ Info-Tech’s top-down approach to risk identification.
    3. Augment your risk event list using alternative frameworks.
    Key metrics:
    • Total risks identified
    • New risks identified
    • Frequency of updates to the Risk Register Tool
    • Number of realized risk events not identified in the Risk Register Tool
    • Level of business participation in enterprise IT risk identification
      • Number of business units represented
      • Number of meetings attended in person
      • Number of risk reports received

    Info-Tech Insight

    What you don’t know CAN hurt you. How do you identify IT-related threats and vulnerabilities that you are not already aware of? Now that you have created a strong risk governance framework that formalizes risk management within IT and connects it to the enterprise, follow the steps outlined in this section to reveal all of IT’s risks.

    Engage key stakeholders

    Ensure that all key risks are identified by engaging key business stakeholders.

    Benefits of obtaining business involvement during the risk identification stage:
    • You will identify risk events you had not considered or you weren’t aware of.
    • You will identify risks more accurately.
    • Risk identification is an opportunity to raise awareness of IT risk management early in the process.

    Executive Participation:

    • CIO participation is integral when building a comprehensive register of risk events impacting IT.
    • CIOs and IT directors possess a holistic view of all of IT’s functions.
    • CIOs and IT directors are uniquely placed to identify how IT affects other business units and the attainment of business objectives. If applicable, CRO and CTO participation is also critical.

    Prioritizing and Selecting Stakeholders

    1. Reliance on IT services and technologies to achieve business objectives.
    2. Relationship with IT, and willingness to engage in risk management activities.
    3. Unique perspectives, skills, and experiences that IT may not possess.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While IT personnel are better equipped to identify IT risk than anyone, IT does not always have an accurate view of the business’ exposure to IT risk. Strive to maintain a 3 to 1 ratio of IT to non-IT personnel involved in the process.

    Enable IT to target risk holistically

    Take a top-down approach to risk identification to guide brainstorming

    Info-Tech’s risk categories are consistent with a risk identification method called Risk Prompting.

    A risk prompt list is a list that categorizes risks into types or areas. The n10 risk categories encapsulate the services, activities, responsibilities, and functions of most IT departments. Use these categories and the example risk scenarios provided as prompts to guide brainstorming and organize risks.

    Risk Category: High-level groupings that describe risk pertaining to major IT functions. See the following slide for all ten of Info-Tech’s IT risk categories. Risk Scenario: An abstract profile representing common risk groups that are more specific than risk categories. Typically, organizations are able to identify two to five scenarios for each category. Risk Event: Specific threats and vulnerabilities that fall under a particular risk scenario. Organizations are able to identify anywhere between 1 and 20 events for each scenario. See the Appendix of the Risk Management Program Manual for a list of risk event examples.

    Risk Category

    Risk Scenario

    Risk Event

    Compliance Regulatory compliance Being fined for not complying/being aware of a new regulation.
    Externally originated attack Phishing attack on the organization.
    Operational Technology evaluation & selection Partnering with a vendor that is not in compliance with a key regulation.
    Capacity planning Not having sufficient resources to support a DRP.
    Third-Party Risk Vendor management Vendor performance requirements are improperly defined.
    Vendor selection Vendors are improperly selected to meet the defined use case.

    2.1.1 Add organization-specific risk scenarios

    1-3 hours

    Review Info-Tech’s ten IT risk categories and add risk scenarios to the examples provided.

    IT Reputational
    • Negative PR
    • Consumers writing negative reviews
    • Employees writing negative reviews
    IT Financial
    • Stock prices drop
    • Value of the organization is reduced
    IT Strategic
    • Organization prioritizes innovation but remains focused on operational
    • Unable to access data to support strategic initiative
    Operational
    • Enterprise architecture
    • Technology evaluation and selection
    • Capacity planning
    • Operational errors
    Availability
    • Power outage
    • Increased data workload
    • Single source of truth
    • Lacking knowledge transfer processes for critical tasks
    Performance
    • Network failure
    • Service levels not being met
    • Capacity overload
    Compliance
    • Regulatory compliance
    • Standards compliance
    • Audit compliance
    Security
    • Malware
    • Internally originated attack
    Third Party
    • Vendor selection
    • Vendor management
    • Contract termination
    Digital
    • No back-up process if automation fails

    2.1.2 Identify risk events

    1-4 hours

    Input: IT risk categories

    Output: Risk events identified and categorized

    Materials: Risk Register Tool

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owners, CRO (if applicable)

    Use Info-Tech’s IT risk categories and scenarios to brainstorm a comprehensive list of IT-related threats and vulnerabilities impacting your organization.

    Instructions:

    1. Document risk events in the Risk Register Tool.
    2. List risk scenarios (organized by risk category) in the Risk Events/Threats column.
    3. Disseminate the list to key stakeholders who were unable to participate and solicit their feedback.
      • Consult the RACI chart located in section 4.1 of the Risk Management Program Manual.
    4. Attack one scenario at a time, exhausting all realistic risk events for that grouping before moving onto the next scenario. Each scenario should take approximately 45-60 minutes.

    Tip: If disagreement arises regarding whether a specific risk event is relevant to the organization or not and it cannot be resolved quickly, include it in the list. The applicability of these risks will become apparent during the assessment process.

    Record the results in the Risk Register Tool.

    2.1.3 Augment the risk event list using COBIT 2019 processes (Optional)

    1-3 hours

    Other industry-leading frameworks provide alternative ways of conceptualizing the functions and responsibilities of IT and may help you uncover additional risk events.

    1. Managed IT Management Framework
    2. Managed Strategy
    3. Managed Enterprise Architecture
    4. Managed Innovation
    5. Managed Portfolio
    6. Managed Budget and Costs
    7. Managed Human Resources
    8. Managed Relationships
    9. Managed Service Agreements
    10. Managed Vendors
    11. Managed Quality
    12. Managed Risk
    13. Managed Security
    14. Managed Data
    15. Managed Programs
    16. Managed Requirements Definition
    17. Managed Solutions Identification and Build
    18. Managed Availability and Capacity
    19. Managed Organizational Change Enablement
    20. Managed IT Changes
    1. Managed IT Change Acceptance and Transitioning
    2. Managed Knowledge
    3. Managed Assets
    4. Managed Configuration
    5. Managed Projects
    6. Managed Operations
    7. Managed Service Requests and Incidents
    8. Managed Problems
    9. Managed Continuity
    10. Managed Security Services
    11. Managed Business Process Controls
    12. Managed Performance and Conformance Monitoring
    13. Managed System of Internal Control
    14. Managed Compliance with External Requirements
    15. Managed Assurance
    16. Ensured Governance Framework Setting and Maintenance
    17. Ensured Benefits Delivery
    18. Ensured Risk Optimization
    19. Ensured Resource Optimization
    20. Ensured Stakeholder Engagement

    Instructions:

    1. Review COBIT 2019’s 40 IT processes and identify additional risk events.
    2. Match risk events to the corresponding risk category and scenario and add them to the Risk Register Tool.

    2.1.4 Finalize your risk register by conducting a PESTLE analysis (Optional)

    1-3 hours

    Explore alternative identification techniques to incorporate external factors and avoid “groupthink.”

    Consider the External Environment – PESTLE Analysis

    Despite efforts to encourage equal participation in the risk identification process, key risks may not have been shared in previous exercises.

    Conduct a PESTLE analysis as a final safety net to ensure that all key risk events have been identified.

    Avoid “Groupthink” – Nominal Group Technique

    The Nominal Group Technique uses the silent generation of ideas and an enforced “safe” period of time where ideas are shared but not discussed to encourage judgement-free idea generation.

    • Ideas are generated silently and independently.
    • Ideas are then shared and documented; however, discussion is delayed until all of the group’s ideas have been recorded.
    • Idea generation can occur before the meeting and be kept anonymous.

    Note: Employing either of these techniques will lengthen an already time-consuming process. Only consider these techniques if you have concerns regarding the homogeneity of the ideas being generated or if select individuals are dominating the exercise.

    List the following factors influencing the risk event:
    • Political factors
    • Economic factors
    • Social factors
    • Technological factors
    • Legal factors
    • Environmental factors
    'PESTLE Analysis' presented as a wheel with the acronym's meanings surrounding the title. 'Political Factors', 'Economic Factors', 'Social Factors', 'Technological Factors', 'Legal Factors', and 'Environmental Factors'.

    Step 2.2

    Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Activities
    • 2.2.1 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk
    • 2.2.2 Create a financial impact assessment scale
    • 2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost
    • 2.2.4 Create a likelihood scale
    • 2.2.5 Risk severity level assessment
    • 2.2.6 Expected cost assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Business risk owners

    Outcomes of this step

    • Business-approved thresholds for unacceptable risk
    • Completed Risk Register Tool with risks prioritized according to severity
    • Expected cost calculations for high-priority risks

    Identify and Assess IT Risk

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    Reveal the organization’s greatest IT threats and vulnerabilities

    1. Establish business-approved risk thresholds for acceptable and unacceptable risk.
    2. Conduct a streamlined assessment of all risks to separate acceptable and unacceptable risks.
    3. Perform a deeper, cost-based assessment of prioritized risks.
    Key metrics:
    • Frequency of IT risk assessments
      • (Annually, bi-annually, etc.)
    • Assessment accuracy
      • Percentage of risk assessments that are substantiated by later occurrences or testing
      • Ratio of cumulative actual costs to expected costs
    • Assessment consistency
      • Percentage of risk assessments that are substantiated by third-party audit
    • Assessment rigor
      • Percentage of identified risk events that undergo first-level assessment (severity scores)
      • Percentage of identified risk events that undergo second-level assessment (expected cost)
    • Stakeholder oversight and participation
      • Level of executive participation in IT risk assessment (attend in person, receive report, etc.)
      • Number of business stakeholder reviews per risk assessment

    Info-Tech Insight

    Risk is money. It’s impossible to make intelligent decisions about risks without knowing what their financial impact will be.

    Review risk assessment fundamentals

    Risk assessment provides you with the raw materials to conduct an informed cost-benefit analysis and make robust risk response decisions.

    In this section, you will be prioritizing your IT risks according to their risk severity, which is a reflection of their expected cost.

    Calculating risk severity

    How much you expect a risk event to cost if it were to occur:

    Likelihood of Risk Impact

    e.g. $250,000 or “High”

    X

    Calibrated by how likely the risk is to occur:

    Likelihood of Risk Occurrence

    e.g. 10% or “Low”

    =

    Produces a dollar value or “severity level” for comparing risks:

    Risk Severity

    e.g. $25,000 or “Medium”
    Which must be evaluated against thresholds for acceptable risk and the cost of risk responses.

    Risk Tolerance
    Risk Response

    CBA
    Cost-benefit analysis

    Maintain the engagement of key stakeholders in the risk assessment process

    1

    Engage the Business During Assessment Process

    Asking business stakeholders to make significant contributions to the assessment exercise may be unrealistic (particularly for members of the senior leadership team, other than the CIO).

    Ensure that they work with you to finalize thresholds for acceptable or unacceptable risk.

    2

    Verify the Risk Impact and Assessment

    If IT has ranked risk events appropriately, the business will be more likely to offer their input. Share impact and likelihood values for key risks to see if they agree with the calculated risk severity scores.

    3

    Identify Where the Business Focuses Attention

    While verifying, pay attention to the risk events that the business stresses as key risks. Keep these risks in mind when prioritizing risk responses as they are more likely to receive funding.

    Try to communicate the assessments of these risk events in terms of expected cost to attract the attention of business leaders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If business executives still won’t provide the necessary information to update your initial risk assessments, IT should approach business unit leaders and lower-level management. Lean on strong relationships forged over time between IT and business managers or supervisors to obtain any additional information.

    Info-Tech recommends a two-level approach to risk assessment

    Review the two levels of risk assessment offered in this blueprint.

    Risk severity level assessment (mandatory)

    1

    Information

    Number of risks: Assess all risk events identified in Phase 1.
    Units of measurement: Use customized likelihood and impact “levels.”
    Time required: One to five minutes per risk event.

    Assess Likelihood

    Negligible
    Low
    Moderate
    High
    Very High

    X

    Assess Likelihood

    Negligible
    Low
    Moderate
    High
    Very High

    =

    Output


    Risk Security Level:

    Moderate

    Example of a risk severity level assessment chart.
    Chart risk events according to risk severity as this allows you to organize and prioritize IT risks.

    Assess all of your identified risk events with a risk severity-level assessment.

    • By creating a likelihood and impact assessment scale divided into three to nine “levels” (sometimes referred to as “buckets”), you can evaluate every risk event quickly while being confident that risks are being assessed accurately.
    • In the following activities, you will create likelihood and impact scales that align with your organizational risk appetite and tolerance.
    • Severity-level assessment is a “first pass” of your risk list, revealing your organization’s most severe IT risks, which can be assessed in greater detail by incorporating expected cost into your evaluation.

    Info-Tech recommends a two-level approach to risk assessment (continued)

    Expected cost assessment (optional)

    2

    Information

    Number of risks: Only assess high-priority risks revealed by severity-level assessment.
    Units of measurement: Use actual likelihood values (%) and impact costs ($).
    Time required: 10-20 minutes per risk event.

    Assess Likelihood

    15%

    Moderate

    X

    Assess Likelihood

    $100,000

    High

    =

    Output


    Expected Cost:

    $15,000

    Expected cost is useful for conducting cost-benefit analysis and comparing IT risks to non-IT risks and other budget priorities for the business.

    Conduct expected cost assessments for IT’s greatest risks.

    For risk events warranting further analysis, translate risk severity levels into hard expected-cost numbers.

    Why conduct expected cost assessments?
    • Expected cost represents how much you would expect to pay in an average year for each risk event.
    • Communicate risk priorities to the business in language they can understand.
    • While risk severity levels are useful for comparing one IT risk to another, expected cost data allows the business to compare IT risks to non-IT risks that may not use the same scales.
    Why is expected cost assessment optional?
    • Determining robust likelihood values and precise impact estimates can be challenging and time consuming.
    • Some risk events may require extensive data gathering and industry analysis.

    Implement and leverage a centralized risk register

    The purpose of the risk register is to act as the repository for all the risks that have been identified within your environment.

    Use this tool to:

    1. Collect and maintain a repository for all IT risk events impacting the organization and relevant information for each risk.
      • Capture all relevant IT risk information in one location.
      • Organize risk identification and assessment information for transparent risk management, stakeholder review, and/or internal audit.
    2. Calculate risk severity scores to prioritize risk events and determine which risks require a risk response.
      • Separate acceptable and unacceptable risks (as determined by the business).
      • Rank risks based on severity levels.
    3. Assess risk responses and calculate residual risk.
      • Evaluate the effect that proposed risk response actions will have on top risk events and quantify residual risk magnitude.
      • This step will be completed in section 3.1

    2.2.1 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk

    1-4 hours

    Input: Risk events, Risk appetite

    Output: Threshold for risk identified

    Materials: Risk Register Tool, Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owner

    Instructions:

    There are times when the business needs to know about IT risks with high expected costs.

    1. Create an expected cost threshold that defines what constitutes an acceptable and unacceptable risk for the organization. This figure should be a concrete dollar value. In the next exercises, you will build risk impact and likelihood scales with this value in mind, ensuring that “high” or “extreme” risks are immediately communicated to senior leadership.
    2. Do not consider IT budget restrictions when developing this number. The acceptable risk threshold should reflect the business’ tolerance/appetite for risk.

    This threshold is typically based on the organization’s ability to absorb financial losses, and its tolerance/appetite towards risk.

    If your organization has ERM, adopt the existing acceptability threshold.

    Record this threshold in section 5.3 of the Risk Management Program Manual

    2.2.2 Create a financial impact assessment scale

    1-4 hours

    Input: Risk events, Risk threshold

    Output: Financial impact scale created

    Materials: Risk Register Tool, Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owner

    Instructions:

    1. Create a scale to assess the financial impact of risk events.
      • Typically, risk impacts are assessed on a scale of 1-5; however, some organizations may prefer to assess risks using 3, 4, 7, or 9-point scales.
    2. Ensure that the unacceptable risk threshold is reflected in the scale.
      • In the example provided, the unacceptable risk threshold ($100,000) is represented as “High” on the impact scale.
    3. Attach labels to each point on the scale. Effective labels will easily distinguish between risks on either side of the unacceptable risk threshold.

    Record the risk impact scale in section 5.3 of the Risk Management Program Manual

    Convert project overruns and service outages into costs

    Use the tables below to quickly convert impacts typically measured in units of time to financial cost. Replace the values in the table with those that reflect your own costs.

    • While project overruns and service outages may have intangible impacts beyond the unexpected costs stemming from paying employees and lost revenue (such as adding complexity to project management and undermining the business’ confidence in IT), these measurements will provide adequate impact estimations for risk assessment.
    • Remember, complex risk events can be analyzed further with an expected cost assessment.
    Project Overruns Scale for the use of cost assessment with dollar amounts associated with impact levels. '$250,000 - Extreme', '$100,000 - High', '$60,000 - Moderate', '$35,000 - Low', '$10,000 - Negligible'.

    Project

    Time (days)

    20 days

    Number of employees

    8

    Average cost per employee (per day)

    $300

    Estimated cost

    $48,000
    Service Outages

    Service

    Time (hours)

    4 hours

    Lost revenue (per hour)

    $10,000

    Estimated cost

    $40,000

    Impact scale

    Low

    2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost (1 of 3)

    1-3 hours

    Realized risk events may have profound reputational costs that do not immediately impact your bottom line.

    Reputational cost can take several forms, including the internal and external perception of:
    1. Brand likeability
    2. Product quality
    3. Leadership capability
    4. Social responsibility

    Based on your industry and the nature of the risk, select one of the three techniques described in this section to incorporate reputational costs into your risk assessment.

    Technique #1 – Use financial indicators:

    For-profit companies typically experience reputational loss as a gradual decline in the strength of their brand, exclusion from industry groups, or lost revenue.

    If possible, use these measures to put a price on reputational loss:

    • Lost revenue attributable to reputation loss
    • Loss of market share attributable to reputation loss
    • Drops in share price attributable to reputation loss (for public companies)

    Match this dollar value to the corresponding level on the impact scale created in Activity 2.2.2.

    • If you are not able to effectively translate all reputational costs into financial costs, proceed to techniques 2 and 3 on the following slides.

    2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost (2 of 3)

    1-3 hours
    It is common for public sector or not-for-profit organizations to have difficulty putting a price tag on intangible reputational costs.
    • For example, a government organization may be unable to directly quantify the cost of losing the confidence and/or support of the public.
    • A helpful technique is to reframe how reputation is assigned value.
    Technique #2 – Calculate the value of avoiding reputational cost:
    1. Imagine that the particular risk event you are assessing has occurred. Describe the resulting reputational cost using qualitative language.

    For example:

    A data breach, which caused the unsanctioned disclosure of 2,000 client files, has inflicted high reputational costs on the organization. These have impacted the organization in the following ways:

    • Loss of organizational trust in IT
    • IT’s reputation as a value provider to the organization is tarnished
    • Loss of client trust in the organization
    • Potential for a public reprimand of the organization by the government to restore public trust
  • Then, determine (hypothetically) how much money the organization would be willing to spend to prevent the reputational cost from being incurred.
  • Match this dollar value to the corresponding level on the impact scale created in Activity 2.2.2.
  • 2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost (3 of 3)

    1-3 hours

    If you feel that the other techniques have not reflected reputational impacts in the overall severity level of the risk, create a parallel scale that roughly matches your financial impact scale.

    Technique #3 – Create a parallel scale for reputational impact:

    Visibility is a useful metric for measuring reputational impact. Visibility measures how widely knowledge of the risk event has spread and how negatively the organization is perceived. Visibility has two main dimensions:

    • Internal vs. External
    • Low Amplification vs. High Amplification
    • Internal/External: The further outside of the organization that the risk event is visible, the higher the reputational impact.
      Low/High Amplification: The greater the ability of the actor to communicate and amplify the occurrence of a risk event, the higher the reputational impact.
      After establishing a scale for reputational impact, test whether it reflects the severity of the financial impact levels in the financial impact scale.

    • For example, if the media learns about a recent data breach, does that feel like a $100,000 loss?
    Example:
    Scale for the use of cost assessment  of reputational impact with dimension combinations associated with impact levels. 'External, High Amp, (regulators, lawsuits) - Extreme', 'Internal, High Amp, (CEO) - Low', 'Internal, Low Amp (IT) - Negligible'.

    2.2.4 Create a likelihood scale

    1-3 hours

    Instructions:
    1. Create a scale to assess the likelihood that a risk event will occur over a given period of time.
      • Info-Tech recommends assessing the likelihood that the risk event will occur over a period of one year (the IT risk council should be reassessing the risk event no less than once per year).
    2. Ensure that the likelihood scale contains the same number of levels as the financial impact scale (3, 4, 5, 7, or 9).
    3. The example provided is likely to satisfy most IT departments; however, you may customize the distribution of likelihood values to reflect the organization’s aversion towards uncertainty.
      • For example, an extremely risk-averse organization may consider any risk event with a likelihood greater than 20% to have a “High” likelihood of occurrence.
    4. Attach the same labels used for the financial impact scale (Low, Moderate, High, etc.)

    Record the risk impact scale in section 5.3 of the Risk Management Program Manual

    Scale to assess the likelihood that a risk event will occur. '80-99% - Extreme', '60-79% - High', '40-59% - Moderate' '20-39% - Low', '1-19% - Negligible'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Note: Info-Tech endorses the use of likelihood values (1-99%) rather than frequency (3 times per year) as a measurement.
    For an explanation of why likelihood values lead to more precise and robust risk assessment, see the Appendix.

    2.2.5 Risk severity level assessment

    6-10 hours

    Input: Risk events identified

    Output: Assessed the likelihood of occurrence and impact for all identified risk events

    Materials: Risk Register Tool

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owner

    Instructions:

    1. Document the “Risk Category” and “Existing Controls.” in the Risk Register Tool.
      • (See the slide following this activity for tips on identifying existing controls.)
    2. Assign each risk event a likelihood and impact level.
      • Remember, you are assessing the impact that a risk event will have on the organization as a whole, not just on IT.
    3. When assigning a financial impact level to a risk event, factor in the likely number of instances that the event will occur within the time frame for which you are assessing (usually one year).
      • For risk events like third-party service outages that typically occur a few times each year, assign them an impact level that reflects the likelihood of financial impact the risk event will have over the entire year.
      • E.g. If your organization is likely to experience two major service outages next year and each outage costs the organization approximately $15,000, the total financial impact is $30,000.

    Record results in the Risk Register Tool

    2.2.5 Risk severity level assessment (continued)

    Instructions (continued):
    1. Assign a risk owner to non-negligible risk events.
      • For organizations that practice ongoing risk management and frequently reassess their risk portfolio (minimum once per year), risk ownership does not need to be assigned to “Negligible” or low-level risks.
      • View the following slides for advice on how to select a risk owner and information on their responsibilities.
    2. As you input the first few likelihood and impact values, compare them to one another to ensure consistency and accuracy:
      • Is a service outage really twice as impactful as our primary software provider going out of business?
      • Is a data breach far more likely than a ›1 hour web-services outage?
    Tips for Selecting Likelihood Values:

    Does ~10% sound right?

    Test a likelihood estimate by assessing the truth of the following statements:

    • The risk event will likely occur once in the next ten years (if the environment remains nearly identical).
    • If ten organizations existed that were nearly identical to our own, it is likely that one out of ten would experience the risk event this year.

    Screenshot of a risk severity level assessment.

    Identify current risk controls

    Consider how IT is already addressing key risks.

    Types of current risk control

    Tactical controls

    Apply to individual risks only.

    Example: A tactical control for backup/replication failure is faster WAN lines.

    Tactical risk control Strategic controls

    Apply to multiple risks.

    Example: A strategic control for backup/replication failure is implementing formal DR plans.

    Strategic risk control
    Risk event Risk event Risk event

    Screenshot of the column headings on the risk severity level assessment with 'Current Controls' highlighted.
    Consider both tactical and strategic controls already in place when filling out risk event information in the Risk Register Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identifying existing risk controls (past risk responses) provides a clear picture of the measures already in place to avoid, mitigate, or transfer key risks. This reveals opportunities to improve existing risk controls, or where new strategies are needed, to reduce risk severity levels below business thresholds.

    Assign a risk owner for each risk event

    Designate a member of the IT risk council to be responsible for each risk event.

    Selecting the Appropriate Risk Owner

    Use the following considerations to determine the best owner for each risk:

    • The risk owner should be familiar with the process, project, or IT function related to the risk event.
    • The risk owner should have access to the necessary data to monitor and measure the severity of the risk event.
    • The risk owner’s performance assessment should reflect their ability to demonstrate the ongoing management of their assigned risk events.

    Screenshot of the column headings on the risk severity level assessment with 'Risk Owner' highlighted.

    Risk Owner Responsibilities

    Risk ownership means that an individual is responsible for the following activities:

    • Monitoring the threat or vulnerability for changes in the likelihood of occurrence and/or likely impact.
    • Monitoring changes in the market and external environment that may alter the severity of the risk event.
    • Monitoring changes of closely related risks with interdependencies.
    • Developing and using key risk indicators (KRIs) to measure changes in risk severity.
    • Regularly reporting changes in risk severity to the IT risk council.
    • If necessary, escalating the risk event to other IT risk council personnel or senior management for reassessment.
    • Monitoring risk severity levels for risk events after a risk response has been implemented.

    Use Info-Tech’s Risk Costing Tool to calculate the expected cost of IT’s high-priority risks (optional)

    Sample of the Risk Costing Tool.

    Use this tool to:

    1. Conduct a deeper analysis of severe risks.
      • Determine specific likelihood and financial impact values to communicate the severity of the risk in the Expected Cost tab.
      • Identify the maximum financial impact that the risk event may inflict.
    2. Assess the effectiveness of multiple risk responses for each risk event.
      • Determine how proposed risk events will change the likelihood of occurrence and financial impact of the risk event.
    3. Incorporate risk proximity into your cost-benefit analysis of risk responses.
      • Illustrate how spending decisions will impact the expected cost of the risk event over time.

    2.2.6 Expected cost assessment (optional)

    Assign likelihood and financial impact values to high-priority risks.

    Select risks with these characteristics:

    Strongly consider conducting an expected cost assessment for risk events that meet one or more of the following criteria.

    The risk:

    • Has been assigned to the highest risk severity level.
    • Has exposed the organization previously and had severe implications.
    • Exceeds the organization’s threshold for financial impact.
    • Involves an IT function that is highly visible to the business.
    • Will likely require risk response actions that will exceed current IT budgetary constraints.
    • Is conducive to expected cost assessment:
      • There is general consensus on likelihood estimates.
      • There is general consensus on financial impact estimates.
      • Historical data exists to support estimates.
    Determine which risks require a deeper assessment:

    Info-Tech recommends conducting a second-level assessment for 5-15% of your IT risk register.

    Communicating the expected cost of high-priority risks significantly increases awareness of IT risks by the business.

    Communicating risks to the business using their language also increases the likelihood that risk responses will receive the necessary support and investment


    Record the list of risk events requiring second-level assessment in the Risk Costing Tool.

    • Transfer the likelihood and impact levels for each event into the Risk Costing Tool using data from the Risk Register Tool.

    2.2.6 Expected cost assessment (continued)

    Assign likelihood and financial impact values to high-priority risks.

    Instructions:
    1. Go through the list of prioritized risks in the Risk Costing Tool one by one. Indicate the likelihood and impact level (from the Risk Register Tool) for the risk event being assessed.
    2. Record likelihood values (1-99%) and impact values ($) from participants.
      • Only record values from individuals that indicate they are fairly confident with their estimates.
      • Keep likelihood estimates to values that are multiples of five.
    3. Estimate and record the maximum impact that the risk event could inflict.
      • See Appendix III for information on how the possibility of high-impact scenarios may influence your decision making.
    4. Discuss the estimates provided. Eliminate outliers and retracted estimates.
      • If you are unable to achieve consensus, take the average of the values provided.
    5. If you are having difficulty arriving at a likelihood or impact value, select the median value of the level assigned to the risk during the risk severity level assessment.
      • E.g. Risk event assigned to likelihood level “Moderate” (20-39%). Select a likelihood value of 30%.

    Screenshot of the column headings on the risk severity level assessment with 'Optional Inherent Likelihood Parameters' and 'Optional Inherent Impact Parameters' highlighted.

    Who should participate?
    • Depending on the size of your IT risk council, you may want to consider conducting this exercise in a smaller group.
    • Ideally, you should try to find the right balance between ensuring that the necessary experience and knowledge is in the room while insulating the exercise from outlier opinions, noise, and distractions.

    Evaluate likelihood and impact

    Refine your risk assessment process by developing more accurate measurements of likelihood and impact.

    Intersubjective likelihood

    The goal of the expected cost assessment is to develop robust intersubjective estimates of likelihood and financial impact.

    By aggregating a number of expert opinions of what they deem to be the “correct” value, you will arrive at a collectively determined value that better reflects reality than an individual opinion.

    Example: The Delphi Method

    The Delphi Method is a common technique to produce a judgement that is representative of the collective opinion of a group.

    • Participants are sent a series of sequential questionnaires (typically by email).
    • The first questionnaire asks them what the likelihood, likely impact, and expected cost is for a specific risk event.
    • Data from the questionnaire is compiled and then communicated in a subsequent questionnaire, which encourages participants to restate or revise their estimates given the group’s judgements.
    • With each successive questionnaire, responses will typically converge around a single intersubjective value.
    Justifying Your Estimates:

    When asked to explain the numbers you arrived at during the risk assessment, pointing to an assessment methodology gives greater credibility to your estimates.

    • Assign one individual to take notes during the assessment exercise.
    • Have them document the main rationale behind each value and the level of consensus.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The underlying assumption behind intersubjective forecasting is that group judgements are more accurate than individual judgements. However, this may not be the case at all.

    Sometimes, a single expert opinion is more valuable than many uninformed opinions. Defining whose opinion is valuable and whose is not is an unpleasant exercise; therefore, selecting the right personnel to participate in the exercise is crucially important.

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Phase 3

    Monitor, Respond, and Report on IT Risk

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals
    • 1.2 Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify IT Risks
    • 2.2 Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Develop Risk Responses and Monitor IT Risks
    • 3.2 Report IT Risk Priorities

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols
    • Establish the reporting schedule
    • Identify and assess risk responses
    • Analyze risk response cost-benefit
    • Create multi-year cost projections
    • Obtain executive approval for risk action plans
    • Socialize the Risk Report
    • Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers
    • Finalize the Risk Management Program Manual

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Risk business owner

    Step 3.1

    Monitor IT Risks and Develop Risk Responses

    Activities
    • 3.1.1 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols
    • 3.1.2 Establish the reporting schedule
    • 3.1.3 Identify and assess risk responses
    • 3.1.4 Risk response cost-benefit analysis
    • 3.1.5 Create multi-year cost projections

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Business risk owner

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed risk event action plans
    • Risk responses identified and assessed for top risks
    • Risk response selected for top risks

    Monitor, Respond, and Report on IT Risk

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    Use Info-Tech’s Risk Event Action Plan to manage high-priority risks

    Manage risks in between risk assessments and create a paper trail for key risks that exceed the unacceptable risk threshold. Use a new form for every high-priority risk that requires tracking.

    Risk Event Action Plan Sample of the Risk Event Action Plan deliverable.

    Obtaining sign-off from the senior leadership team or from the ERM office is an important step of the risk management process. The Risk Event Action Plan ensures that high-priority risks are closely monitored and that changes in risk severity are detected and reported.

    Clear documentation is a way to ensure that critical information is shared with management so that they can make informed risk decisions. These reports should be succinct yet comprehensive; depending on time and resources, it is good practice to fill out this form and obtain sign-off for the majority of IT risks.

    3.1.1 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols

    The risk owner should be held accountable for monitoring their assigned risks but may delegate responsibility for these tasks.

    Instructions:
    1. Design key risk indicators (KRIs) for risks that measure changes in their severity and document them in the Risk Event Action Plan.
      • See the following slide for examples.
    2. Clearly document the risk owner and the individual(s) carrying out risk monitoring activities (delegates) in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    Note: Examples of KRIs can be found on the following slide.

    What are KRIs?
    • KRIs should be observable metrics that alert the IT risk council and management when risk severity exceeds acceptable risk thresholds.
    • KRIs should serve as tripwires or early-warning indicators that trigger further actions to be taken on the risk.
    • Further actions may include:
      • Escalation to the risk owner (if delegated) or to a member of the senior leadership team.
      • Reporting to the IT risk council or IT steering committee.
      • Reassessment.
      • Updating the risk monitoring schedule.

    Document KRIs, escalation thresholds, and escalation protocols for each risk in a Risk Event Action Plan.

    Developing KRIs for success

    Visualization of KRI development, from the 'Risk Event' to the 'Intermediate Steps' with 'KRI Measurements' to the image of a growing seed.

    Examples of KRIs

    • Number of resources who quit or were fired who had access to critical data
    • Number of risk mitigation initiatives unfunded
    • Changes in time horizon of mitigation implementation
    • Number of employees who did not report phishing attempts
    • Amount of time required to get critical operations access to necessary data
    • Number of days it takes to implement a new regulation or compliance control

    3.1.2 Establish the reporting schedule

    For each risk event, document how frequently the risk owner must report to the IT risk council in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    • A clear reporting schedule enforces accountability for each risk event, ensuring that risk owners are fulfilling their monitoring responsibilities.
    • The ongoing discussion of risks between assessment cycles also increases overall awareness of how IT risks are not static but constantly evolving.
    Reporting Risk Event
    Weekly reports to ITRC Risk event severity represented as a thermometer with levels 'Extreme', 'High', 'Moderate', 'Low', and 'Negligible'.
    Bi-weekly reports to ITRC
    Monthly reports to ITRC
    Report to ITRC only if KRI thresholds triggered
    No reports; reassessed bi-annually

    Use Info-Tech’s tools to identify, analyze, and select risk responses

    1

    (Mandatory)
    Tool

    Screenshot of the Risk Register Tool.

    Risk Register Tool

    Information
    • Develop risk responses for all risk events pre-populated on the “2. Risk Register” sheet of the Risk Register Tool.
    • Document the root cause of the risk (Activity 3.1.3) and other contributing factors (Activity 3.1.4).
    • Identify risk responses (Activity 3.1.5).
    • Predict the effectiveness of the risk response, if implemented, by estimating the residual likelihood and impact of the risk (Activity 3.1.5).
    • The tool will calculate the residual severity of the risk after applying the risk response.

    2

    (Optional)
    Tool

    Screenshot of the Risk Costing Tool.

    Risk Costing Tool

    Information
    • Continue your second-level risk analysis for top risks for which you calculated expected cost in section 2.2.
    • Activity 3.1.5:
      • Identify between one and four risk response options for each risk.
      • Develop precise values for residual likelihood and impact.
      • Compare expected cost of the risk event to expected residual cost.
      • Select the risk response to recommend to senior leadership and document it in the Risk Register Tool.

    Determine the root cause of IT risks

    Root cause analysis

    Use the “Five Whys” methodology to identify the root cause and contributing/exacerbating factors for each risk event.

    Diagnosing the root cause of a risk as well as the environmental factors that increase its potential impact and likelihood of occurring allow you to identify more effective risk responses.

    Risk responses that only address the symptoms of the risk are less likely to succeed than responses that address the core issue.

    Concentric circles with 'Root Cause' at the center, 'Contributing Factors' around it, and 'Symptoms' on the outer circle.

    Example of 'The Five Whys Methodology', tracing symptoms to their root cause. In 'Symptoms' we see 'Risk Event: Network outage', Why? 'Network congestion', Why? Then on to 'Contributing Factors' the answer is 'Inadequate bandwidth for latency-sensitive applications', Why? 'Increased business use of latency-sensitive applications', Why? And finally to the 'Root Cause', 'Business units rely on 'real-time' data gathered from latency-sensitive applications', Why?

    Identify factors that contribute to the severity of the risk

    Environmental factors interact with the root cause to increase the likelihood or impact of the risk event.

    What factors matter?

    Identify relevant actors and assets that amplify or diminish the severity of the risk.

    Actors

    • Internal (business units)
    • External (vendor, regulator, market, competitor, hostile actor)

    Assets/Resources

    • Infrastructure
    • Applications
    • Processes
    • Information/data
    • Personnel
    • Reputation
    • Operations
    Develop risk responses that target contributing factors.
    Root cause:
    Business units rely on “real-time” data gathered from latency-sensitive applications

    Actors: Enterprise App users (Finance, Product Development, Product Management)

    Asset/resource: Applications, network

    Risk response:
    Decrease the use of latency-sensitive applications.

    X

    Decreasing the use of key apps contradicts business objectives.

    Contributing factors:
    Unreliable router software

    Actors: Network provider, router vendor, router software vendor, IT department

    Asset/resource: Network, router, router software

    Risk response:
    Replace the vendor that provides routers and router software.

    Replacing the vendor would reduce network outages at a relatively low cost.

    Symptoms:
    Network outage

    Actors: All business units, network provider

    Asset/resource: Network, business operations, employee productivity

    Risk response:
    Replace legacy systems.

    X

    Replacing legacy systems would be too costly.

    3.1.3 Identify and assess risk responses

    Instructions:
    Complete the following steps for each risk event.
    1. Identify a risk response action that will help reduce the likelihood of occurrence or the impact if the event were to occur.
      • Indicate the type of risk response (avoidance, mitigation, transfer, acceptance, or no risk exists).
    2. Assign each risk response action a residual likelihood level and a residual impact level.
      • This is the same step performed in Activity 2.2.6, when initial likelihood and impact levels were determined; however, now you are estimating the likelihood and impact of the risk event after the risk response action has been implemented successfully.
      • The Risk Register Tool will generate a residual risk severity level for each risk event.
    3. Identify the potential Risk Action Owner (Project Manager) if the response is selected and turned into an IT project, and document this in the Risk Register Tool.
    Document the following in the Risk Event Action Plan for each risk event:
      • Risk response actions
      • Residual likelihood and impact levels
      • Residual risk severity level
    • Review the following slides about the four types of risk response to help complete the activity.
      1. Avoidance
      2. Mitigation
      3. Transfer
      4. Acceptance

    Record the results in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    Take actions to avoid the risk entirely

    Risk Avoidance

    • Risk avoidance involves taking evasive maneuvers to avoid the risk event.
    • Risk avoidance targets risk likelihood, decreasing the likelihood of the risk event occurring.
    • Since risk avoidance measures are fairly drastic, the likelihood is often reduced to negligible levels.
    • However, risk avoidance response actions often sacrifice potential benefits to eliminate the possibility of the risk entirely.
    • Typically, risk avoidance measures should only be taken for risk events with extremely high severity and when the severity (expected cost) of the risk event exceeds the cost (benefits sacrificed) of avoiding the risk.

    Example

    Risk event: Information security vulnerability from third-party cloud services provider.

    • Risk avoidance action: Store all data in-house.
    • Benefits sacrificed: Cost savings, storage flexibility, etc.
    Stock photo of a person hikiing along a damp, foggy, valley path.

    Pursue projects that reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event

    Risk Mitigation

    • Risk mitigation actions are risk responses that reduce the likelihood and impact of the risk event.
    • Risk mitigation actions can be to either implement new controls or enhance existing ones.
    Example 1

    Most risk responses will reduce both the likelihood of the risk event occurring and its potential impact.

    Example

    Mitigation: Purchase and implement enterprise mobility management (EMM) software with remote wipe capability.

    • EMM reduces the likelihood that sensitive data is accessed by a nefarious actor.
    • The remote-wipe capability reduces the impact by closing the window that sensitive data can be accessed from.
    Example 2

    However, some risk responses will have a greater effect on decreasing the likelihood of a risk event with little effect on decreasing impact.

    Example

    Mitigation: Create policies that restrict which personnel can access sensitive data on mobile devices.

    • This mitigation decreases the number of corporate phones that have access to (or are storing) sensitive data, thereby decreasing the likelihood that a device is compromised.
    Example 3

    Others will reduce the potential impact without decreasing its likelihood of occurring.

    Example

    Mitigation: Use robust encryption for all sensitive data.

    • Corporate-issued mobile phones are just as likely to fall into the hands of nefarious actors, but the financial impact they can inflict on the organization is greatly reduced.

    Pursue projects that reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event (continued)

    Use the following IT functions to guide your selection of risk mitigation actions:

    Process Improvement

    Key processes that would most directly improve the risk profile:

    • Change Management
    • Project Management
    • Vendor Management
    Infrastructure Management
    • Disaster Recovery Plan/Business Continuity Plan
    • Redundancy and Resilience
    • Preventative Maintenance
    • Physical Environment Security
    Personnel
    • Greater staff depth in key areas
    • Increased discipline around documentation
    • Knowledge Management
    • Training
    Rationalization and Simplification

    This is a foundational activity, as complexity is a major source of risk:

    • Application Rationalization – reducing the number of applications
    • Data Management – reducing the volume and locations of data

    Transfer risks to a third party

    Risk transfer: the exchange of uncertain future costs for fixed present costs.

    Insurance

    The most common form of risk transfer is the purchase of insurance.

    • The uncertain future cost of an IT risk event can be transferred to an insurance company who assumes the risk in exchange for insurance premiums.
    • The most common form of IT-relevant insurance is cyberinsurance.

    Not all risks can be insured. Insurable risks typically possess the following five characteristics:

    1. The loss must be accidental (the risk event cannot be insured if it could have been avoided by taking reasonable actions).
    2. The insured cannot profit from the occurrence of the risk event.
    3. The loss must be able to be measured in monetary terms.
    4. The organization must have an insurable interest (it must be the party that incurs the loss).
    5. An insurance company must offer insurance against that risk.
    Other Forms of Risk Transfer

    Other forms of risk transfer include:

    • Self-insurance
      • Appropriate funds can be set aside in advance to address the financial impact of a risk event should it occur.
    • Warranties
    • Contractual transfer
      • The financial impact of a risk event can be transferred to a third party through clauses agreed to in a contract.
      • For example, a vendor can be contractually obligated to assume all costs resulting from failing to secure the organization’s data.
    • Example email addressing fields of an IT Risk Transfer to an insurance company.

    Accept risks that fall below established thresholds

    Risk Acceptance

    Accepting a risk means tolerating the expected cost of a risk event. It is a conscious and deliberate decision to retain the threat.

    You may choose to accept a risk event for one of the following three reasons:

    1. The risk severity (expected cost) of the risk event falls below acceptability thresholds and does not justify an investment in a risk avoidance, mitigation, or transfer measure.
    2. The risk severity (expected cost) exceeds acceptability thresholds but all effective risk avoidance, mitigation, and transfer measures are ineffective or prohibitively expensive.
    3. The risk severity (expected cost) exceeds acceptability thresholds but there are no feasible risk avoidance, mitigation, and transfer measures to be implemented.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Constant monitoring and the assignment of responsibility and accountability for accepted risk events is crucial for effective management of these risks. No IT risk should be accepted without detailed documentation outlining the reasoning behind that decision and evidence of approval by senior management.

    3.1.4 Risk response cost-benefit analysis (optional)

    The purpose of a cost-benefit analysis (CBA) is to guide financial decision making.

    This helps IT make risk-conscious investment decisions that fall within the IT budget and helps the organization make sound budgetary decisions for risk response projects that cannot be addressed by IT’s existing budget.

    Instructions:
    1. Reopen the Risk Costing Tool. For each risk that you conducted an expected cost assessment in section 2.2 for, find the Excel sheet that corresponds to the risk number (e.g. R001).
    2. Identify between one and four risk response options for the risk event and document them in the Risk Costing Tool.
      • The “Risk Response 1” field will be automatically populated with expected cost data for a scenario where no action was taken (risk acceptance). This will serve as a baseline for comparing alternative responses.
      • For the following steps, go through the risk responses one by one.
    3. Estimate the first-year cost for the risk response.
      • This cost should reflect initial capital expenditures and first-year operating expenditures.
    Screenshot of the Risk Response cost-benefit-analysis from the Risk Costing Tool with 'Capital Expenditures' and 'Operating Expenditures' highlighted.

    Record the results in the Risk Costing Tool.

    3.1.4 Risk response cost-benefit analysis (continued)

    The purpose of a cost-benefit analysis (CBA) is to guide financial decision making.

    Instructions:

    1. Estimate residual risk likelihood and financial impact for Year 1 with the risk response in place.
      • Rather than estimating the likelihood level (low, medium, high), determine a precise likelihood value of the risk event occurring once the response has been implemented.
      • Estimate the dollar value of financial impacts if the risk event were to occur with the risk response in place.
      • Screenshot of the Risk Response cost-benefit-analysis from the Risk Costing Tool with figured for 'Financial Impact' and 'Probability' highlighted. The tool will calculate the expected residual cost of the risk event: (Financial Impact x Likelihood) - Costs = Expected Residual Cost
    2. Select the highest value risk response and document it in the Risk Register Tool.
    3. Document your analysis and recommendations in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    Note: See Activity 3.1.5 to build multi-year cost projections for risk responses.

    3.1.5 Create multi-year cost projections (optional)

    Select between risk response options by projecting their costs and benefits over multiple years.

    • It can be difficult to choose between risk response options that require different payment schedules. A risk response project with costs spread out over more than one year (e.g. incremental upgrades to an IT system) may be more advantageous than a project with costs concentrated up front that may cost less in the long run (e.g. replacing the system).
    • However, the impact that risk response projects have on reducing risk severity is not necessarily static. For example, an expensive project like replacing a system may drastically reduce the risk severity of a system failure. Whereas, incremental system upgrades may only marginally reduce risk severity in the short term but reach similar levels as a full system replacement in a few years.
    Instructions:

    Calculate expected cost for multiple years using the Risk Costing Tool for:

    • Risk events that are subject to change in severity over time.
    • Risk responses that reduce the severity of the risk gradually.
    • Risk responses that cannot be implemented immediately.

    Copy and paste the graphs into the Risk Report and the Risk Event Action Plan for the risk event.

    Sample charts on the cost of risk responses from the Risk Costing Tool.

    Record the results in the Risk Costing Tool.

    Step 3.2

    Report IT Risk Priorities

    Activities
    • 3.2.1 Obtain executive approval for risk action plans
    • 3.2.2 Socialize the Risk Report
    • 3.2.3 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers
    • 3.2.4 Finalize the Risk Management Program Manual

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Obtained approval for risk action plans
    • Communicated IT’s risk recommendations to senior leadership
    • Embedded risk management into day-to-day IT operations

    Monitor, Respond, and Report on IT Risk

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    Effectively deliver IT risk expertise to the business

    Communicate IT risk management in two directions:

    1. Up to senior leadership (and ERM if applicable)
    2. Down to IT employees (embedding risk awareness)
    3. Visualization of communicating Up to 'Senior Leadership' and Down to 'IT Personnel'.

    Create a strong paper trail and obtain sign-off for the ITRC’s recommendations.

    Now that you have collected all of the necessary raw data, you must communicate your insights and recommendations effectively.

    A fundamental task of risk management is communicating risk information to senior management. It is your responsibility to enable them to make informed risk decisions. This can be considered upward communication.

    The two primary goals of upward communication are:

    1. Transferring accountability for high-priority IT risks to the ERM or to senior leadership.
    2. Obtaining funds for risk response projects recommended by the ITRC.

    Good risk management also has a trickle-down effect impacting all of IT. This can be considered downward communication.

    The two primary goals of downward communication are:

    1. Fostering a risk-aware IT culture.
    2. Ensuring that the IT risk management program maintains momentum and runs effectively.

    3.2.1 Obtain executive approval for risk action plans

    Best Practices and Key Benefits

    Best practice is for all acceptable risks to also be signed-off by senior leadership. However, for ITRCs that brainstorm 100+ risks, this may not be possible. If this is the case, prioritize accepted risks that were assessed to be closest to the organization’s thresholds.

    By receiving a stamp of approval for each key risk from senior management, you ensure that:

    1. The organization is aware of important IT risks that may impact business objectives.
    2. The organization supports the risk assessment conducted by the ITRC.
    3. The organization supports the plan of action and monitoring responsibilities proposed by the ITRC.
    4. If a risk event were to occur, the organization holds ultimate accountability.
    Sample of the Risk Event Action Plan template.

    Task:
    All IT risks that were flagged for exceeding the organization’s severity thresholds must obtain sign-off by the CIO or another member of the senior leadership team.

    • In the assessment phase, you evaluated risks using severity thresholds approved by the business and determined whether or not they justified a risk response.
    • Whether your recommendation was to accept the risk or to analyze possible risk responses, the business should be made aware of most IT risks.

    3.2.2 Socialize the risk report

    Create a succinct, impactful document that summarizes the outcomes of risk assessment and highlights the IT risk council’s top recommendations to the senior leadership team.

    The Risk Report contains:
    • An executive summary page highlighting the main takeaways for senior management:
      • A short summary of results from the most recent risk assessment
      • Dashboard
      • A list of top 10 risks ordered from most severe to least
    • Subsequent individual risk analyses (1 to 10)
      • Detailed risk assessment data
      • Risk responses
      • Risk response analysis
      • Multi-year cost projection (see the following slide)
      • Dashboard
      • Recommendations
    Sample of the Risk Report template.

    Risk Report

    Pursue projects that reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event

    Encourage risk awareness to extend the benefits of risk management to every aspect of IT.

    Benefits of risk awareness:

    • More preventative and proactive approaches to IT projects are discussed and considered.
    • Changes to the IT threat landscape are more likely to be detected, communicated, and acted upon.
    • IT possesses a realistic perception of its ability to perform functions and provide services.
    • Contingency plans are put in place to hedge against risk events.
    • Fewer IT risks go unidentified.
    • CIOs and business executives make better risk decisions.

    Consequences of low risk awareness:

    • False confidence about the number of IT risks impacting the organization and their severity.
    • Risk-relevant information is not communicated to the ITRC, which may result in inaccurate risk assessments.
    • Confusion surrounding whose responsibility it is to consider how risk impacts IT decision making.
    • Uncertainty and panic when unanticipated risks impact the IT department and the organization.

    Embedding risk management in the IT department is a full-time job

    Take concrete steps to increase risk-aware decision making in IT.

    The IT risk council plays an instrumental role in fostering a culture of risk awareness throughout the IT department. In addition to periodic risk assessments, fulfilling reporting requirements, and undertaking ongoing monitoring responsibilities, members of the ITRC can take a number of actions to encourage other IT employees to adopt a risk-focused approach, particularly at the project planning stage.

    Embed risk management in project planning

    Make time for discussing project risks at every project kick-off.
    • A main benefit of including senior personnel from across IT in the ITRC is that they are able to disseminate the IT risk council’s findings to their respective practices.
    • At project kick-off meetings, schedule time to identify and assess project-specific risks.
    • Encourage the project team to identify strategies to reduce the likelihood and impact of those risks and document these in the project charter.
    • Lead by example by being clear and open about what constitutes acceptable and unacceptable risks.

    Embed risk management with employee

    Train IT staff on the ITRC’s planned responses to specific risk events.
    • If a response to a particular risk event is not to implement a project but rather to institute new policies or procedures, ensure that changes are communicated to employees and that they receive training.
    Provide risk management education opportunities.
    • Remember that a more risk-aware IT employee provides more value to the organization.
    • Invest in your employees by encouraging them to pursue education opportunities like receiving risk management accreditation or providing them with educational experiences such as workshops, seminars, and eLearning.

    Embedding risk management in the IT department is a full-time job (continued)

    Encourage risk awareness by adjusting performance metrics and job titles.

    Performance metrics:

    Depending on the size of your IT department and the amount of resources dedicated to ongoing risk management, you may consider embedding risk management responsibilities into the performance assessments of certain ITRC members or other IT personnel.

    • Personalize the risk management program metrics you have documented in your Risk Management Program Manual.
    • Evidence that KPIs are monitored and frequently reported is also a good indicator that risk owners are fulfilling their risk management responsibilities.
    • Info-Tech Insight

      If risk management responsibilities are not built into performance assessments, it is less likely that they will invest time and energy into these tasks. Adding risk management metrics to performance assessments directly links good job performance with good risk management, making it more likely that ITRC activities and initiatives gain traction throughout the IT department.

    Job descriptions:

    Changing job titles to reflect the focus of an individual’s role on managing IT risk may be a good way to distinguish personnel tasked with developing KRIs and monitoring risks on a week-to-week basis.

    • Some examples include IT Risk Officer, IT Risk Manager, and IT Risk Analyst.

    3.2.3 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers

    Once risk responses have obtained approval and funding, it is time to transform them into fully-fledged projects.

    Image of a hand giving a key to another hand and a circle split into quadrants of Governance with 'Governance of Risks' being put into 'Governance of Projects'.

    3.2.4 Finalize the Risk Management Program Manual

    Go back through the Risk Management Program Manual and ensure that the material will accurately reflect your approach to risk management going forward.

    Remember, the program manual is a living document that should be evolving alongside your risk management program, reflecting best practices, knowledge, and experiences accrued from your own assessments and experienced risk events.

    The best way to ensure that the program manual continues to guide and document your risk management program is to make it the focal point of every ITRC meeting and ensure that one participant is tasked with making necessary adjustments and additions.

    Sample of the Risk Management Program Manual. Risk Management Program Manual

    “Upon completing the Info-Tech workshop, the deliverables that we were left with were really outstanding. We put together a 3-year project plan from a high level, outlining projects that will touch upon our high risk areas.” (Director of Security & Risk, Water Management Company)

    Don’t allow your risk management program to flatline

    54% of small businesses haven’t implemented controls to respond to the threat of cyber attacks (Source: Insurance Bureau of Canada, 2021)

    Don’t be lulled into a false sense of security. It might be your greatest risk.

    So you’ve identified the most important IT risks and implemented projects to protect IT and the business.

    Unfortunately, your risk assessment is already outdated.

    Perform regular health checks to keep your finger on the pulse of the key risks threatening the business and your reputation.

    To continue the momentum of your newly forged IT risk management program, read Info-Tech’s research on conducting periodic risk assessments and “health checks”:

    Revive Your Risk Management Program With a Regular Health Check

    • Complete Info-Tech’s Risk Management Health Check to seize the momentum you created by building a robust IT risk management program and create a process for conducting periodic health checks and embedding ongoing risk management into every aspect of IT.
    • Our focus is on using data to make IT risk assessment less like an art and more like a science. Ongoing data-driven risk management is self-improving and grounded in historical data.

    Appendix I: Familiarize yourself with key risk terminology

    Review important risk management terms and definitions.

    Risk

    An uncertain event or set of events which, should it occur, will have an effect on the achievement of objectives. A risk consists of a combination of the likelihood of a perceived threat or opportunity occurring and the magnitude of its impact on objectives (Office of Government Commerce, 2007).

    Threat

    An event that can create a negative outcome (e.g. hostile cyber/physical attacks, human errors).

    Vulnerability

    A weakness that can be taken advantage of in a system (e.g. weakness in hardware, software, business processes).

    Risk Management

    The systematic application of principles, approaches, and processes to the tasks of identifying and assessing risks, and then planning and implementing risk responses. This provides a disciplined environment for proactive decision making (Office of Government Commerce, 2007).

    Risk Category

    Distinct from a risk event, a category is an abstract profile of risk. It represents a common group of risks. For example, you can group certain types of risks under the risk category of IT Operations Risks.

    Risk Event

    A specific occurrence of an event that falls under a particular risk category. For example, a phishing attack is a risk event that falls under the risk category of IT Security Risks.

    Risk Appetite

    An organization’s attitude towards risk taking, which determines the amount of risk that it considers acceptable. Risk appetite also refers to an organization’s willingness to take on certain levels of exposure to risk, which is influenced by the organization’s capacity to financially bear risk.

    Enterprise Risk Management

    (ERM) – A strategic business discipline that supports the achievement of an organization’s objectives by addressing the full spectrum of organizational risks and managing the combined impact of those risks as an interrelated risk portfolio (RIMS, 2015).

    Appendix II: Likelihood vs. Frequency

    Why we measure likelihood, not frequency:

    The basic formula of Likelihood x Impact = Severity is a common methodology used across risk management frameworks. However, some frameworks measure likelihood using Frequency rather than Likelihood.

    Frequency is typically measured as the number of instances an event occurs over a given period of time (e.g. once per month).

    • For risk assessment, historical data regarding the frequency of a risk event is commonly used to indicate the likelihood that the event will happen in the future.

    Likelihood is a numerical representation of the “degree of belief” that the risk event will occur in a given future timeframe (e.g. 25% likelihood that the event will occur within the next year).

    False Objectivity

    While some may argue that frequency provides an objective measurement of likelihood, it is well understood in the field of likelihood theory that historical data regarding the frequency of a risk event may have little bearing over the likelihood of that event happening in the future. Frequency is often an indication of future likelihood but should not be considered an objective measurement of it.

    Likelihood scales that use frequency underestimate the magnitude of risks that lack historical precedent. For example, an IT department that has never experienced a high-impact data breach would adopt a very low likelihood score using the frequentist approach. However, if all of the organization’s major competitors have suffered a major breach within the last two years, they ought to possess a much higher degree of belief that the risk event will occur within the next year.

    Likelihood is a more comprehensive measurement of future likelihood, as frequency can be used to inform the selection of a likelihood value. The process of selecting intersubjective likelihood values will naturally internalize historical data such as the frequency that the event occurred in the past. Further, the frequency that the event is expected to occur in the future can be captured by the expected impact value. For example, a risk event that has an expected impact per occurrence of $10,000 that is expected to occur three times over the next year has an expected impact of $30,000.

    Appendix III: Should max impacts sway decision making?

    Don’t just fixate on the most likely impact – be aware of high-impact outcomes.

    During assessment, risks are evaluated according to their most likely financial impact.

    • For example, a service outage will likely last for two hours and may have an expected cost of $14,000.

    Naturally, focusing on the most likely financial impact will exclude higher impacts that – while theoretically possible – are so unlikely that they do not warrant any real consideration.

    • For example, it is possible that a service outage could last for days; however, the likelihood for such an event may be well below 1%.

    While the risk severity level assessment allows you to present impacts as a range of values (e.g. $50,000 to $75,000), the expected cost assessment requires you to select specific values.

    • However, this analysis may fail to consider much higher potential impacts that have non-negligible likelihood values (likelihood values that you cannot ignore).
    • What you consider “non-negligible” will depend on your organizational risk tolerance/appetite.

    Sometimes called Black Swan events or Fat-Tailed outcomes, high-impact events may occur when the far right of the likelihood distribution – or the “tail” – is thicker than a normal distribution (see fig. 2).

    • A good example is a data breach. While small to medium impacts are far more likely to occur than a devastating intrusion, the high-impact scenario cannot be ignored completely.

    For risk events that contain non-negligible likelihoods (too high to be ignored) consider elevating the risk severity level or expected cost.

    Figure 1 is a graph presenting a 'Normal Likelihood Distribution', the axes being 'Likelihood' and 'Financial Impact'.
    Figure 2 is a graph presenting a 'Fat-Tailed Likelihood Distribution' with a point at the top of the parabola labelled 'Most Likely Impact' but with a much wider bottom labelled 'Fat-Tailed Outcomes', the axes being 'Likelihood' and 'Financial Impact'.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s research on security and compliance risk to identify additional risk events

    Title card of the Info-tech blueprint 'Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit' with subtitle 'Don't gamble recklessly with external compliance. Play a winning system and take calculated risks to stack the odds in your favor.


    Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t gamble recklessly with external compliance. Play a winning system and take calculated risks to stack the odds in your favor.

    Take an agile approach to analyze your gaps and prioritize your remediations. You don’t always have to be fully compliant as long as your organization understands and can live with the consequences.

    Stock photo of a woman sitting at a computer surrounded by rows of computers.


    Develop and Implement a Security Risk Management Program

    Info-Tech Insight

    Security risk management equals cost effectiveness.

    Time spent upfront identifying and prioritizing risks can mean the difference between spending too much and staying on budget.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Sandi Conrad
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Christine Coz
    Executive Counsellor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Milena Litoiu
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Magerfleisch
    Executive Advisor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Aadil Nanji
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andy Neill
    Associate Vice-President of Research
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Daisha Pennie
    IT Risk Management
    Oklahoma State University

    Ken Piddington
    CIO and Executive Advisor
    MRE Consulting

    Frank Sewell
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrew Sharpe
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Chris Warner
    Consulting Director- Security
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Sterling Bjorndahl
    Director of IT Operations
    eHealth Saskatchewan

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Tamara Dwarika
    Internal Auditor
    A leading North American Utility

    Anne Leroux
    Director
    ES Computer Training

    Ian Mulholland
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Michel Fossé
    Consulting Services Manager
    IBM Canada (LGS)

    Petar Hristov
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Steve Woodward
    Research Director
    CEO, Cloud Perspectives

    *Plus 10 additional interviewees who wish to remain anonymous.

    Bibliography

    “2021 State of the CIO.” IDG, 28 January 2021. Web.

    “4 Reasons Why CIOs Lose Their Jobs.” Silverton Consulting, 2012. Web.

    Beasley, Mark, Bruce Branson, and Bonnie Hancock. “The State of Risk Oversight,” AICPA, April 2021. Web.

    COBIT 2019. ISACA, 2019. Web.

    “Cognyte jeopardized its database exposing 5 billion records, including earlier data breaches.” SecureBlink, 21 June 2021. Web.

    Culp, Steve. “Accenture 2019 Global Risk Management Study, Financial Services Report.” Accenture, 2019. Web.

    Curtis, Patchin, and Mark Carey. “Risk Assessment in Practice.” COSO Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, Deloitte & Touche LLP, 2012. Web.

    “Cyber Risk Management.” Insurance Bureau of Canada (IBC), 2022. Web.

    Eccles, Robert G., Scott C. Newquist, and Roland Schatz. “Reputation and Its Risks.” Harvard Business Review, February 2007. Web.

    Eden, C. and F. Ackermann. Making Strategy: The Journey of Strategic Management. Sage Publications, 1998.

    “Enterprise Risk Management Maturity Model.” OECD, 9 February 2021. Web.

    Ganguly, Saptarshi, Holger Harreis, Ben Margolis, and Kayvaun Rowshankish. “Digital Risks: Transforming risk management for the 2020s.” McKinsey & Company, 10 February 2017. Web.

    “Governance Institute of Australia Risk Management Survey 2020.” Governance Institute of Australia, 2020. Web.

    “Guidance on Enterprise Risk Management.” COSO, 2022. Web.

    Henriquez, Maria. “The Top 10 Data Breaches of 2021” Security Magazine, 9 December 2021. Web.

    Holmes, Aaron. “533 million Facebook users’ phone numbers and personal data have been leaked online.” Business Insider, 3 April 2021. Web.

    Bibliography

    “Integrated Risk and Compliance Management for Banks and Financial Services Organizations: Benefits of a Holistic Approach.” MetricStream, 2022. Web.

    “ISACA’s Risk IT Framework Offers a Structured Methodology for Enterprises to Manage Information and Technology Risk.” ISACA, 25 June 2020. Web.

    ISO 31000 Risk Management. ISO, 2018. Web.

    Lawton, George. “10 Enterprise Risk Management Trends in 2022.” TechTarget, 2 February 2022. Web.

    Levenson, Michael. “MGM Resorts Says Data Breach Exposed Some Guests’ Personal Information.” The New York Times, 19 February 2020. Web.

    Management of Risk (M_o_R): Guidance for Practitioners. Office of Government Commerce, 2007. Web.

    “Many small businesses vulnerable to cyber attacks.” Insurance Bureau of Canada (IBC), 5 October 2021.

    Maxwell, Phil. “Why risk-informed decision-making matters.” EY, 3 December 2019. Web.

    “Measuring and Mitigating Reputational Risk.” Marsh, September 2014. Web.

    Natarajan, Aarthi. “The Top 6 Business Risks you should Prepare for in 2022.” Diligent, 22 December 2021. Web.

    “Operational Risk Management Excellence – Get to Strong Survey: Executive Report.” KMPG and RMA, 2014. Web.

    “Third-party risk is becoming a first priority challenge.” Deloitte, 2022. Web.

    Thomas, Adam, and Dan Kinsella. “Extended Enterprise Risk Management Survey, 2020.” Deloitte, 2021. Web.

    Treasury Board Secretariat. “Guide to Integrated Risk Management.” Government of Canada, 12 May 2016. Web.

    Webb, Rebecca. “6 Reasons Data is Key for Risk Management.” ClearRisk, 13 January 2021. Web.

    “What is Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)?” RIMS, 2015. Web.

    Wiggins, Perry. “Do you spend enough time assessing strategic risks?” CFO, 26 January 2022. Web.

    Business Process Controls and Internal Audit

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}37|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}37|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: security-and-risk
    Establish an Effective System of Internal IT Controls to Mitigate Risks.

    Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}568|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions

    Digital Marketers working with an outdated or bad SEO strategy often see:

    • Declining keyword ranking and traffic
    • Poor keyword strategy
    • On-page errors

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Most marketers fail in their SEO efforts because they focus on creating content for computers, not people.

    Impact and Result

    Using the SoftwareReviews methodology, digital marketers are able to break up their SEO project and data into bite-sized, actionable steps that focus on long-term improvement. Our methodology includes:

    • Competitive keyword research and identification of opportunities
    • On-page keyword strategy

    Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy

    Update your on-page SEO strategy with competitively relevant keywords.

    • Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy
    Update your on-page SEO strategy with competitively relevant keywords.

    Analyst Perspective

    Most marketers fail in their SEO efforts because they focus on creating content for computers, not people.

    Leading search engine optimization methods focus on creating and posting relevant keyword-rich content, not just increasing page rank. Content and keywords should move a buyer along their journey, close a sale, and develop long-term relationships. Unfortunately, many SEO specialists focus on computers, not the buyer. What's even more concerning is that up to 70% of SaaS businesses have already been impacted by outdated and inefficient SEO techniques. Poor strategies often focus on ballooning SEO metrics in the short-term instead of building the company's long-term PageRank.

    Best-in-class digital marketers stop chasing the short-term highs and focus on long-term growth. This starts with developing a competitive keyword strategy and updating website content with the new keywords.

    SEO is a large topic, so we have broken the strategy into small, easy-to-implement steps, taking the guesswork out of how to use the data from SEO tools and giving CMOs a solid path to increase their SEO results.

    This is a picture of Terra Higginson

    Terra Higginson
    Marketing Research Director
    SoftwareReviews

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Digital marketers working with an outdated or bad SEO strategy often see:

    • Declining keyword ranking and traffic
    • Poor keyword strategy
    • On-page errors

    Search algorithms change all the time, which means that the strategy is often sitting on the sifting sands of technology, making SEO strategies quickly outdated.

    Common Obstacles

    Digital marketers are responsible for developing and implementing a competitive SEO strategy but increasingly encounter the following obstacles:

    • SEO practitioners that focus on gaming the system
    • Ever-changing SEO technology
    • Lack of understanding of the best SEO techniques
    • SEO techniques focus on the needs of computers, not people
    • Lack of continued investment

    SoftwareReviews' Approach

    Using the SoftwareReviews methodology, digital marketers are able to break up their SEO project and data into bite-sized, actionable steps that focus on long-term improvement. Our methodology includes:

    • Competitive keyword research and identification of opportunities
    • On-page keyword strategy

    Our methodology will take a focused step-by-step strategy in a series of phases that will increase PageRank and competitive positioning.

    SoftwareReviews' SEO Methodology

    In this blueprint, we will cover:

    Good SEO vs. Poor SEO Techniques

    The difference between good and bad SEO techniques.

    Common Good
    SEO Techniques

    Common Poor
    SEO Techniques

    • Writing content for people, not machines.
    • Using SEO tools to regularly adjust and update SEO content, keywords, and backlinks.
    • Pillar and content cluster strategy in addition to a basic on- and off-page strategy.
    • Keyword stuffing and content duplication.
    • A strategy that focuses on computers first and people second.
    • Low-quality or purchased backlinks.

    Companies With Great SEO…

    Keyword Strategy

    • Have identified a keyword strategy that carves out targets within the white space available between themselves and the competition.

    Error-Free Site

    • Have error-free sites without duplicate content. Their URLs and redirects are all updated. Their site is responsive, and every page loads in under two seconds.

    Pillar & Content Clusters

    • Employ a pillar and content cluster strategy to help move the buyer through their journey.

    Authentic Off-Page Strategy

    • Build an authentic backlink strategy that incorporates the right information on the right sites to move the buyer through their journey.

    SEO Terms Defined

    A glossary to define common Phase 1 SEO terms.

    Search Volume: this measures the number of times a keyword is searched for in a certain time period. Target keywords with a volume of between 100-100,000. A search volume greater than 100,000 will be increasingly difficult to rank (A Beginner's Guide to Keyword Search Volume, 2022, Semrush).

    Keyword Difficulty: the metric that quantifies how difficult it will be to rank for a certain keyword. The keyword difficulty percentage includes the number of competitors attempting to rank for the same keyword, the quality of their content, the search intent, backlinks, and domain authority (Keyword Difficulty: What Is It and Why Is It Important? 2022, Semrush).

    Intent: this metric focuses on the intent of the user's search. All search intent is categorized into Informational, Commercial, Navigational, and Transactional (What Is Search Intent? A Complete Guide, 2022, Semrush).

    On-Page SEO: refers to the practice of search engine optimizing elements of your site such as title tags, internal links, HTML code, URL optimization, on-page content, images, and user experience.

    Off-Page SEO: refers to the practice of optimizing brand awareness (What Is Off-Page SEO? A Comprehensive Guide, 2022, Semrush).

    H1: HTML code that tells a search engine the title of the page (neilpatel.com).

    SEO Tool: A subscription-based all-in-one search engine optimization MarTech tool.

    Google's mission is to organize the world's information and make it universally accessible and useful… We believe Search should deliver the most relevant and reliable information available.
    – An excerpt from Google's mission statement

    Your Challenge

    Google makes over 4.5k algorithm changes per year1, directly impacting digital marketing search engine optimization efforts.

    Digital marketers with SEO problems will often see the following issues:

    • Keyword ranking – A decline in keyword ranking is alarming and results in decreased PageRank.
    • Bounce rate – Attracting the wrong audience to your site will increase the bounce rate because the H1 doesn't resonate with your audience.
    • Outdated keywords – Many companies are operating on a poor keyword strategy, or even worse, no keyword strategy. In addition, many marketers haven't updated their strategy to include pillar and cluster content.
    • Errors – Neglected sites often have a large number of errors.
    • Bad backlinks – Neglected sites often have a large number of toxic backlinks.

    The best place to hide a dead body is on page two of the search results.
    – Huffington Post

    Common Obstacles

    Digital marketers are responsible for developing and executing a competitive SEO strategy but increasingly encounter the following obstacles:

    • Inefficient and ineffective SEO practitioners.
    • Changing SEO technology and search engine algorithms.
    • Lack of understanding of the best-in-class SEO techniques.
    • Lack of a sustainable plan to manage the strategy and invest in SEO.

    SEO is a helpful activity when it's applied to people-first content. However, content created primarily for search engine traffic is strongly correlated with content that searchers find unsatisfying.
    – Google Search Central Blog

    Benefits of Proper SEO

    A good SEO keyword strategy will create long-term, sustainable SEO growth:

    • Write content for people, not algorithms – Good SEO prioritizes the needs of humans over the needs of computers, being ever thoughtful of the meaning of content and keywords.
    • Content that aligns with intent – Content and keyword intent will align with the buyer journey to help move prospects through the funnel.
    • Competitive keyword strategy – Find keyword white space for your brand. Keywords will be selected to optimize your ranking among competition with reasonable and sustainable targets.
    • Actionable and impactful fixes – By following the SoftwareReviews phases of SEO, you will be able to take a very large task and divide it into conquerable actions. Small improvements everyday lead to very large improvements over time.

    Digital Marketing SEO Stats

    61%
    61% of marketers believe that SEO is the key to online success.
    Source: Safari Digital

    437%
    Updating an existing title tag with an SEO optimised one can increase page clicks by more than 437%.
    Source: Safari Digital

    Good SEO Aligns With Search Intent

    What type of content is the user searching for? Align your keyword to the logical search objective.

    Informational

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to inform or educate themselves on a specific topic.

    Commercial

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to do research before making a purchase.

    Transactional

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to purchase something.

    Navigational

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to find a specific page.

    SoftwareReviews' Methodology toCreate an Effective SEO Strategy

    1. Competitive Analysis & Keyword Discovery 2. On-Page Keyword Optimization
    Phase Steps
    1. Make a list of keywords in your current SEO strategy – including search volume, keyword difficulty percentage, intent.
    2. Research the keywords of top competitors.
    3. Make a list of target keywords you would like to own – including the search volume, keyword difficulty percentage, and intent. Make sure that these keywords align with your buyer persona.
    1. List product and service pages, along with the URL and current ranking(s) for the keyword(s) for that URL.
    2. Create a new individual page strategy for each URL. Record the current keyword, rank, title tag, H1 tag, and meta description. Then, with keyword optimization in mind, develop the new title tag, new H1 tag, and new meta description. Build the target keywords into the pages and tags.
    3. Record the current ranking for the pages' keywords then reassess after three to six months.
    Phase Outcomes
    • Understanding of competitive landscape for SEO
    • A list of target new keywords
    • Keyword optimized product and service pages

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Identify your current SEO keyword strategy.

    Call #2: Discuss how to start a competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #4: Discuss how to build the list of target keywords.

    Call #6: Discuss keyword optimization of the product & services pages.

    Call #8: (optional)

    Schedule a call to update every three to six months.

    Call #3: Discuss the results of the competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #5: Discuss which pages to update with new target keywords.

    Call #7: Review final page content and tags.

    Call #9: Schedule a call for SEO Phase 2: On-Page Technical Refinement.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Identify your current SEO keyword strategy.

    Call #2: Discuss how to start a competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #4: Discuss how to build the list of target keywords.

    Call #6: Discuss keyword optimization of the product & services pages.

    Call #8: (optional)

    Schedule a call to update every three to six months.

    Call #3: Discuss the results of the competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #5: Discuss which pages to update with new target keywords.

    Call #7: Review final page content and tags.

    Call #9: Schedule a call for SEO Phase 2: On-Page Technical Refinement.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    SoftwareReviews offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    Included Within an Advisory Membership Optional Add-Ons
    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Insight Summary

    People-First Content

    Best-in-class SEO practitioners focus on people-first content, not computer-first content. Search engine algorithms continue to focus on how to rank better content first, and a strategy that moves your buyers through the funnel in a logical and cohesive way will beat any SEO trick over the long run.

    Find White Space

    A good SEO strategy uses competitive research to carve out white space and give them a competitive edge in an increasingly difficult ranking algorithm. An understanding of the ideal client profile and the needs of their buyer persona(s) sit as a pre-step to any good SEO strategy.

    Optimize On-Page Keywords

    By optimizing the on-page strategy with competitively relevant keywords that target your ideal client profile, marketers are able to take an easy first step at improving the SEO content strategy.

    Understand the Strategy

    If you don't understand the strategy of your SEO practitioner, you are in trouble. Marketers need to work hand in hand with their SEO specialists to quickly uncover gaps, create a strategy that aligns with the buyer persona(s), and execute the changes.

    Quality Trumps Quantity

    The quality of the prospect that your SEO efforts bring to your site is more important than the number of people brought to your site.

    Stop Here and Ask Yourself:

    • Do I have an updated (completed within the last two years) buyer persona and journey?
    • Do I know who the ICP (ideal client profile) is for my product or company?

    If not, stop here, and we can help you define your buyer persona and journey, as well as your ideal client profile before moving forward with SEO Phase 1.

    The Steps to SEO Phase 1

    The Keyword Strategy

    1. Current Keywords
      • Identify the keywords your SEO strategy is currently targeting.
    2. Competitive Analysis
      • Research the keywords of competitor(s). Identify keyword whitespace.
    3. New Target Keywords
      • Identify and rank keywords that will result in more quality leads and less competition.
    4. Product & Service Pages
      • Identify your current product and service pages. These pages represent the easiest content to update on your site.
    5. Individual Page Update
      • Develop an SEO strategy for each of your product and service pages, include primary target keyword, H1, and title tags, as well as keyword-rich description.

    Resources Needed for Search Engine Optimization

    Consider the working skills required for search engine optimization.

    Required Skills/Knowledge

    • SEO
    • Web development
    • Competitive analysis
    • Content creation
    • Understanding of buyer persona and journey
    • Digital marketing

    Suggested Titles

    • SEO Analyst
    • Competitive Intelligence Analyst
    • Content Marketing Manager
    • Website Developer
    • Digital Marketing Manager

    Digital Marketing Software

    • CMS that allows you to easily access and update your content

    SEO Software

    • SEO tool

    Step 1: Current Keywords

    Use this sheet to record your current keyword research.

    Use your SEO tool to research keywords and find the following:
    Use a quality tool like SEMRush to obtain SEO data.

    1. Keyword difficulty
    2. Search volume
    3. Search intent

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, which can be used to identify current keywords.

    Step 2: Competitive Analysis

    Use this sheet to guide the research on your competitors' keywords.

    Use your SEO tool to find the following:

    1. Top organic keywords
    2. Ranking of keywords
    3. Domain authority and trust
    4. Position changes

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, which can be used to perform an competitive analysis

    Step 3: New Target Keywords

    Use this sheet to record target keywords that have a good volume but are less competitive. The new target keywords should align with your buyer persona and their journey.

    Use your SEO tool to research keywords and find the following:
    Use a quality tool like SEMRush to obtain SEO data.

    1. Keyword difficulty
    2. Search volume
    3. Search intent

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, which can be used to identify new target keywords.

    Step 4: Product & Service Pages

    Duplicate this page so that you have a separate page for each URL from Step 4

    Use this sheet to identify your current product and service pages.

    Use your SEO tool to find the following:

    1. Current rank
    2. Current keywords

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, showing where you can display product and service pages.

    Step 5: Individual Page Strategy

    Develop a keyword strategy for each of your product and service pages. Use a fresh page for each URL.

    Date last optimized:
    mm/dd/yyyy

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, with an example of how you can use an individual page strategy to develop a keyword strategy.

    Bibliography

    Council, Y. "Council Post: The Rundown On Black Hat SEO Techniques And Why You Should Avoid Them." Forbes, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    "Our approach – How Google Search works." Google Search. Accessed September 2022.

    "The Best Place to Hide a Dead Body is Page Two of Google." HuffPost, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    Patel, Neil. "How to Create the Perfect H1 Tag for SEO." neilpatel.com. Accessed September 2022.

    Schwartz, B. "Google algorithm updates 2021 in review: Core updates, product reviews, page experience and beyond." Search Engine Land, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    Schwartz, B. "Google algorithm updates 2021 in review: Core updates, product reviews, page experience and beyond." Search Engine Land, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    Build Your Data Practice and Platform

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}347|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management

    The complex nature of data investment leads to de-scoping and delivery of data services that do not meet business needs or give value to the business. Subject matter experts are hired to resolve the problem, but their success is impacted by absent architecture, technology, and organizational alignment.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Walking through a book of architecture building plans with a personal guide is cheaper and faster than employing an architect to build and design your home.

    Impact and Result

    Info-Tech's approach provides a proven methodology that includes the following:

    • Business-aligned data initiatives and capabilities that address data challenges and realize business strategic objectives.
    • Comprehensive data practice designed based on the required business and data capabilities.
    • Data platform design based on Info-Tech data architecture reference patterns and prioritized data initiatives and capabilities.

    Build Your Data Practice and Platform Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Your Data Practice and Platform Storyboard – A step-by-step document that leverages road-tested patterns and frameworks to properly build your data practice and pattern in continuous alignment with the business landscape.

    Info-Tech's approach provides a proven methodology that includes following:   

  • Business-aligned data initiatives and capabilities that address data challenges and realize business strategic objectives.
  • Comprehensive data practices designed based on the required business and data capabilities.
    • Build Your Data Practice and Platform Storyboard

    2. Data Practice and Platform Models – Leveraging best-of-breed frameworks to help you build a clear, concise, and compelling data practice and platform.

    Data practice & platform pre-build pattern templates based on Info-Tech data reference patterns and data platform design best practices.

    • Data Practice and Platform Models

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build Your Data Practice and Platform

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish Business Context and Value

    The Purpose

    Establish business context and value.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Business context and strategic driver.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand/confirm the organization's strategic goals

    1.2 Classify the strategic goals and map to business drivers

    1.3 Identify the business capabilities that the strategy focuses on

    1.4 Identify the business processes realizing the strategy

    Outputs

    Business context and strategic drivers

    Prioritized business capabilities and processes

    Data culture survey results analysis

    2 Identify Your Top Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Identify your top initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    High-value business-aligned data initiative.

    Activities

    2.1 Highlight data-related outcomes/goals to realize to fulfill the business goal

    2.2 Map business data initiatives to the business strategic goals

    2.3 Prioritize data initiatives

    Outputs

    High-value, business-aligned data initiatives

    3 Analyze Data Challenges

    The Purpose

    Analyze data challenges.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear understanding of the data challenges.

    Activities

    3.1 Map data challenges to Info-Tech data challenges

    3.2 Review Info-Tech data capabilities based on prioritized initiatives

    3.3 Discuss data platform and practice next steps

    Outputs

    List of data challenges preventing data maturation with the organization

    4 Map Data Capability

    The Purpose

    Map data capability.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized data capability.

    Activities

    4.1 Map data challenges to Info-Tech data challenges

    4.2 Review Info-Tech data capabilities based on prioritized initiatives

    4.3 Discuss data platform and practice next steps

    Outputs

    Required data capabilities

    Data platform and practice – plan

    Initialized data management RACI 

    Further reading

    Build Your Data Practice and Platform

    Construct a scalable data foundation

    Analyst Perspective

    Build a data practice and platform that delivers value to your organization.

    The build or optimization of your data practice and data platform must be predicated on a thorough understanding of the organization’s goals, objectives, and priorities and the business capabilities and process they are meant to support and enable.

    Formalizing your practice or constructing your platform just for the sake of doing so often results in an initiative that is lengthy, costly, fizzles out, does not deliver business value, and ends up being considered a failure.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s approach and incorporate our pre-built models and patterns to effectively navigate that crucial and often difficult phase upfront of comprehensively defining business data needs so you can ultimately realize faster time-to-delivery of your overall data practice and platform.

    Photo of Rajesh Parab, Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Rajesh Parab
    Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Photo of Crystal Singh, Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Crystal Singh
    Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Attempting to Solve Data Problems?

    Situation
    • Lack of data centric leadership results in downstream issues such as integration, quality, and accessibility.
    • The complex nature of the data and lack of understanding leads to de-scoping delivery of data services that does not meet business needs or add value.
    • Poorly designed practice and siloed platforms result in an initiative that is lengthy, costly, fizzles out, does not deliver business value, and ends up being considered a failure.
    Complication
    • Data problem: When the data problem is diagnosed, the organization adopts a tactical approach.
    • Confirmation bias: Subject matter experts (SME) are hired to resolve the poorly defined problem, but the success of the SME is impacted by lack of architecture, technology, and organizational alignment.
    • Still no value: The selected tactical approach does not provide a solid foundation or solve your data problem.
    • Strategy for sake of strategy: Implementing a strategic approach for the sake of being strategic but this becomes overwhelming.
    • Fall back to tactical and operational: The data services are now potentially exposed and vulnerable, which strains business continuity and increases data debt.
    • Increased complexity and risk: Data silos, poor understanding, and high complexity results in an unmanageable data environment.
    Resolution
    • Requirements: Define and align your data requirement to business.
    • Capabilities: Discover data, identify data capabilities, and map your requirements.
    • Practices: Design and select fit-for-purpose data practices.
    • Platform: Optimize your data platform investments though sound architecture.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The true value of data comes from defining intentional relationships between the business and the data through a well thought out data platform and practice.

    Situation – Perpetual Data Problem

    Diagram of a head with gears around it and speech bubbles with notes titled 'Data Problem'. The surrounding gears, clockwise from bottom left, say 'Accessibility', 'Trust', 'Data Breach', 'Ambiguity', 'Ownership', 'Duplication', 'System Failure', and 'Manual Manipulation'. The speech bubbles notes, clockwise from bottom left, say 'Value-Add: How do I translate business needs to data capabilities?', 'Practice Organization: How do I organize resources and roles assignment challenges?', 'Platform: How do I organize data flows with no conceptual view of the environment?', and 'Break Down Silos: How do I break down silos?'
    I can’t access the data.
    I don’t trust the data in the report.
    It takes too long to get to the data for decision making
    • Lack of data-centric leadership results in downstream issues: integration, quality, accessibility
    • The organization’s data is too complex to manage without a cohesive plan.
    • The complex nature of the data and a lack of understanding leads to de-scoping delivery of data services that does not meet business needs or add value.
    • Poorly designed practice and siloed platforms result in an initiative that is lengthy, costly, fizzles out, does not deliver business value, and ends up being considered a failure.

    Complication – Data Initiative Fizzles Out

    • Data problem: When the data problem is diagnosed the organization adopts a tactical approach.
    • Confirmation bias: Subject matter experts (SME) are hired to resolve the poorly defined problem, but the success of the SME is impacted by lack of architecture, technology, and organizational alignment.
    • Still no value: the selected tactical approach does not provide a solid foundation or solve your data problem.
    • Strategy for sake of strategy: Implementing a strategic approach for sake of being strategic but this becomes overwhelming.
    • Fall back to tactical and operational: The data services are now potentially exposed and vulnerable, which strains business continuity and increases data debt.
    • Increased complexity and risk: Data silos, poor understanding, and high complexity result in an unmanageable data environment.
    Flowchart beginning with 'Data Symptom Exhibited' and 'Data Problem Diagnosed', then splitting into two paths 'Solve Data Problem as a point solution' or 'Attempt Strategic approach without culture, capacity, and business leadership'. Each approach ends with 'Data too complex, and initiative fizzles out...' and cycles back to the beginning.
    Use the road-tested patterns and frameworks in our blueprint to break the perpetual data solution cycle. Focus on the value that a data and analytics platform will bring rather than focusing on the data problems alone.

    Build Your Data Practice and Platform

    Bring Your Data Strategy to Life

    Logo for Info-Tech.
    Logo for #iTRG.
    CONVENTIONAL WISDOM

    Attempting to Solve Your Data Problems

    DATA SYMPTOM EXHIBITED

    Mismatch report, data quality issue, or similar symptom of a data problem.

    DATA PROBLEM DIAGNOSED

    Data expert identifies it as a data problem.

    COMPLEX STRATEGIC APPROACH ATTEMPTED

    Recognized need to attempt it strategically, but don't have capacity or culture to execute.

    Cycle diagram titled 'Data Problems' with numbers connected to surrounding steps, and a break after Step 3 where one can 'BREAK THE CYCLE'. In the middle are a list of data problems: 'Accessibility’, ‘Data Breach', 'Manual Manipulation', 'System Failure', 'Ambiguity', 'Duplication', 'Ownership', and 'Trust'.
    SOLUTION FAILS

    The tactical solution fails to solve the root cause of the data problem, and the data symptoms persist.

    TACTICAL SOLUTION FALLBACK

    A quick and dirty solution is attempted in order to fix the data problem.

    THE COMPLEX APPROACH FIZZLES OUT

    Attempted strategic approach takes too long, fizzles out.

    BREAK THE CYCLE

    Solving Your Data Problems

    1. DEFINE YOUR DATA REQUIREMENTS Incorporate a Business to Data Approach by utilizing Info-Tech's business capability templates for identifying data needs. BUSINESS-ALIGNED DATA REQUIREMENTS
    2. CONDUCT YOUR DATA DISCOVERY Understand the data behind your business problem. Identify the required data capabilities and domains as required by your business processes. RECOMMENDED DATA CAPABILITIES
    3. DESIGN YOUR DATA PRACTICES Build your custom data practices based on the predefined reusable models. CUSTOMIZED DATA PRACTICE
    4. ARCHITECT YOUR DATA PLATFORM Build your custom data platform based on the redefined reusable architecture patterns. CUSTOMIZED DATA PLATFORM
    CONTINUOUS PHASE: ROADMAP, SPONSORSHIP FEEDBACK AND DELIVERY

    Develop a roadmap to establish the practice and implement the architecture as designed. Ensure continuous alignment of the practice and architecture with the business landscape.

    Phase-by-Phase Approach to Build Your Data Practice and Platform

    Flowchart detailing the path to take through the four phases of this blueprint beginning with the 'Inputs' and 'People' involved and incorporating 'Deliverables' along the way. Phase-by-Phase Approach
    • Phase 1: Step 1 – Define Your Data Requirement
    • Phase 1: Step 2 – Conduct Your Data Discovery
    • Phase 2 – Design Your Data Practice
    • Phase 3 – Architect Your Data Platform

    Measure value when building your data practice and platform

    Sample Data Management Metrics

    Lists of data management metrics in different categories.

    • Refine the metrics for the overall Data Management practice and every initiative therein.
    • Refine the metrics at each platform and practice component to show business value against implementation effort.

    Understand and Build Data Culture

    See your Info-Tech Account Representative for more details on our Data Culture Diagnostic

    Only 14.29% of Transportation and Logistics respondents agree BI and Analytics Process and Technology are sufficient What is a diagnostic?

    Our diagnostics are the simplest way to collect the data you need, turn it into actionable insights, and communicate with stakeholders across the organization.

    52.54% of respondents from the healthcare industry are unaware of their organization’s data security policy
    Ask the Right Questions

    Use our low-effort surveys to get the data you need from stakeholders across the organization.

    Use Our Diagnostic Engine

    Our diagnostic engine does all the heavy lifting and analysis, turning your data into usable information.

    Communicate & Take Action

    Wow your executives with the incredible insights you've uncovered. Then, get to action: make IT better.

    On average only 40% agree that they have the reporting when needed


    (Source: Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic, 53 Organizations, 3138 Responses)

    35% of respondents feel that a governance body is in place looking at strategic data

    Build a Data-Driven Strategy Using Info-Tech Diagnostic Programs

    Make informed IT decisions by starting your diagnostic program today. Your account manager is waiting to help you.
    Sample of Info-Tech's 'Data Culture Scorecard'.

    Use Our Predefined Data and Analytics Patterns to Build Your DnA Landscape

    Walking through a book of architecture building plans with a personal guide is cheaper and faster than employing an architect to build and design your home

    Two books titled 'The Everything Homebuilding Book' and 'Architecture 101'. An open book with a finger pointing to a diagram.

    The first step is to align business strategy with data strategy and then start building your data practice and data platform

    Flowchart starting with business strategy focuses, then to data strategy focuses, and eventually to 'Data Metrics'.

    Insights

    The true value of data comes from defining intentional relationships between the business and the data through a well-thought-out data platform and practice.

    • Phase 1
      • Some organizations are low maturity so using the traditional Capability Maturity Model Integration (CMMI) would not make sense. A great alternative is to leverage existing models and methodologies to get going off the bat.
      • The Data Strategy is an input into the platform and practice. This is considered the Why; Data Practice and Platform is the How.
    • Phase 2
      • Info-Tech’s approach is business-goal driven and it leverages patterns, which enable the implementation of critical and foundational components and subsequently facilitates the evolution and development of the practice over time.
      • Systems should not be designed in isolation. Cross-functional collaboration throughout the design is critical to ensure all types of issues are revealed early. Otherwise, crucial tests are omitted, deployments fail, and end-users are dissatisfied.
    • Phase 3
      • Build your conceptual data architecture based on well-thought-out formulated patterns that align with your organization’s needs and environment.
      • Functional needs often take precedence over quality architecture. Quality must be baked into design, execution, and decision-making practices to ensure the right trade-offs are made.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Info-Tech’s Methodology for Building Your Data Practice and Platform

    Phase 1 –
    Define Your Data Requirements and Conduct Your Data Discovery
    Phase 2 –
    Design Your Data Practices
    Phase 3 –
    Architect Your Data Platform
    Phase Steps
    1. Identify your top initiatives
    2. Map your data initiatives to data capabilities
    1. Understand the practices value statement
    2. Review the Info-Tech practice pattern
    3. Initiate your practice design and setup
    1. Identify your data component
    2. Refine your data platform architecture
    3. Design your data platform
    4. Identify your new components and capabilities
    5. Initiative platform build and rollout
    Phase Outcomes Business-aligned data initiatives and capabilities that address data challenges and realize business strategic objectives Comprehensive data practice design based on the required business and data capabilities Data platform design based on Info-Tech data architecture reference pattern and prioritized data initiatives and capabilities

    Data Platform and Practice Implementation Plan

    Example timeline for data platform and practice implementation plan with 'Fiscal Years' across the top, and below they're broken down into quarters. Along the left side 'Phase 1: Step 1...', 'Phase 1: Step 2...', 'Phase 2...' and 'Phase 3'. Tasks are mapped onto the timeline in each phase with a short explanation.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889
    Info-Tech’s Workshop support for Build Your Data Practice and Platform. 'Build Your Data Practice and Platform' slide from earlier.
    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Workshop 1

    Data Needs and Discovery

    Workshop 2

    Data Practice Design

    Workshop 3

    Data Platform Design

    Workshop 1:
    Data Needs and Discovery

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889
    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
    Establish Business Context and Value
    Identify Your Top Initiatives
    Analyze Data Challenges
    Map Data Capability
    Activities

    1.1 Understand/confirm your organization’s strategic goals

    1.2 Classify the strategic goals and map to business drivers

    1.3 Identify the business capabilities that the strategy focus is on

    1.4 Identify the business processes realizing the strategy

    2.1 Highlight data-related outcomes /goals to realize to fulfill the business goal

    2.2 Map business data initiatives to the business strategic goals

    2.3 Prioritize Data initiatives

    3.1 Understand data management capabilities and framework

    3.2 Classify business data requirements using Info-Tech’s classification approach

    3.3 Highlight data challenges in your current environment

    4.1 Map data challenges to Info-Tech data challenges

    4.2 Review Info-Tech data capabilities based on prioritized initiative

    4.3 Discuss Data Platform and Practice Next Steps

    Deliverables
    • Business context and strategic drivers
    • Prioritized business capabilities and processes
    • Data Culture Survey results analysis
    • High-value business-aligned data initiative
    • List of data challenges preventing data maturation with the organization
    • Required data capabilities
    • Data platform and practice – plan
    • Initialized data management RACI
    Participants Business stakeholder, Business leader Business Subject Matter Expert, Data IT sponsor (CIO), Head of Data, Data Architect Business stakeholder, Business leader Business Subject Matter Expert, Data IT sponsor (CIO), Head of Data, Data Architect Data experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data Architect Data experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data Architect

    Workshop 2:
    Data Practice Design

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889
    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
    Plan Your Data Practices
    Design Your Data Practices 1
    Design Your Data Practices 2
    Design Your Data Practices 3
    Activities

    Prerequisite: Business context, business data requirement, and data capabilities

    1.1 Understand data practice framework

    1.2 Define your practice implementation approach

    1.3 Review and update data management RACI

    2.1 Understand Info-Tech data practice patterns for each prioritized practice

    2.2 Define your practice setup for each prioritized practice

    2.3 Highlight critical processes for each practice

    3.1 Understand Info-Tech data practice patterns for each prioritized practice

    3.2 Define your practice setup for each prioritized practice

    3.3 Highlight critical processes for each practice

    4.1 Understand Info-Tech data practice patterns for each prioritized practice

    4.2 Define your practice setup for each prioritized practice

    4.3 Highlight critical processes for each practice

    4.4 Discuss data platform and practice next steps

    Deliverables
    • Data practice implementation approach
    • Data management RACI
    • Data practice setup pattern for your organization
    • Data practice process pattern for your organization
    • Data practice setup pattern for your organization
    • Data practice process pattern for your organization
    • Data practice setup pattern for your organization
    • Data practice process pattern for your organization
    • Data platform and practice – plan
    Participants Data experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data Architect Data experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data Architect Data experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data Architect Data experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data Architect

    Workshop 3:
    Data Platform Design

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889
    Day 1Day 2Day 3Day 4
    Data Platform Overview
    Update Data Platform Reference Architecture
    Design Your Data Platform
    Design Your Data Practices 4
    Activities

    Prerequisite: Business context, business data requirement, and data capabilities

    1.1 Understand data platform framework and data capabilities

    1.2 Understand key data architecture principles and best practices

    1.3 Shortlist data platform patterns

    2.1 Map and identify data capabilities to data platform components

    2.2 Build data platform architecture using Info-Tech data platform reference architecture

    2.3 Highlight critical processes for each practice

    3.1 Design your target data platform using Info-Tech’s data platform template

    3.2 Identify new capabilities and components in your platform design

    4.1 Identify new capabilities and component in your platform design

    4.2 Discuss data platform initiatives

    Deliverables
    • Shortlisted data platform patterns
    • Data platform reference architecture for your organization
    • Data platform design for your organization
    • Data platform plan
    ParticipantsData experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data ArchitectData experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data ArchitectData experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data ArchitectData experts, Business Subject Matter Expert, Head of Data, Data Architect

    Build Your Data Practice and Platform

    Phase 1

    Phase 1: Step 1 – Define Your Data Requirements
    Phase 1: Step 2 – Conduct Your Data Discovery

    Phase 1

    1.1 Define Your Data Requirements
    1.2 Conduct Your Data Discovery

    Phase 2 Phase 3

    Phase 1: Step 1 – Define Your Data Requirements will walk you through the following activities:

    • Confirm the organizational strategic goals, business drivers, business capabilities, and processes driving the Data Practice and Platform effort.
    • Identify the data related outcomes, goals, and ideal environment needed to fulfill the business goals.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    A blend of business leaders and business SMEs together with the Data Strategy team.

    Phase 1: Step 2 – Conduct Your Data Discovery will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify and highlight the data challenges faced in achieving the desired outcome.
    • Map the data challenges to the data capabilities required to realize the desired data outcome.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Key personnel from IT/Data team: (Data Architect, Data Engineers, Head of Head of Reporting and Analytics)

    2021 CIO Priorities Report

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}83|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • It is a new year, but the challenges of 2020 remain: COVID-19 infection rates continue to climb, governments continue to enforce lockdown measures, we continue to find ourselves in the worst economic crisis since the Great Depression, and civil unrest grows in many democratic societies.
    • At the start of 2020, no business leader predicted the disruption that was to come. This left IT in a reactive but critical role as the health crisis hit. It was core to delivering the organization’s products and services, as it drove the radical shift to work-from-home.
    • For the year ahead, IT will continue to serve a critical function in uncertain times. However, unlike last year, CIOs can better prepare for 2021. That said, in the face of the uncertainty and volatility of the year ahead, what they need to prepare for is still largely undefined.
    • But despite the lack of confidence on knowing specifically what is to come, most business leaders will admit they need to get ready for it. This year’s priority report will help.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • “Resilience” is the theme for this year’s CIO Priorities Report. In this context, resilience is about building up the capacity and the capabilities to effectively respond to emergent and unforeseen needs.
    • Early in 2021 is a good time to develop resilience in several different areas. As we explore in this year’s Report, CIOs can best facilitate enterprise resilience through strategic financial planning, proactive risk management, effective organizational change management and capacity planning, as well as through remaining tuned into emergent technologies to capitalize on innovations to help weather the uncertainty of the year ahead.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech’s 2021 CIO Priorities Report to prepare for the uncertainty of the year ahead. Across our five priorities we provide five avenues through which CIOs can demonstrate resilient planning, enabling the organization as a whole to better confront what’s coming in 2021.
    • Each of our priorities is backed up by a “call to action” that will help CIOs start to immediately implement the right drivers of resilience for their organization.
    • By building up resilience across our five key areas, CIOs will not only be able to better prepare for the year to come, but also strengthen business relations and staff morale in difficult times.

    2021 CIO Priorities Report Research & Tools

    Read the 2021 CIO Priorities Report

    Use Info-Tech’s 2021 CIO Priorities Report to prepare for the uncertainty of the year ahead. Across our five priorities we provide five avenues through which CIOs can demonstrate resilient planning, enabling the organization as a whole to better confront what’s coming in 2021.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create an appropriate budget reserve

    Identifying and planning sources of financial contingency will help ensure CIOs can meet unforeseen and emergent operational and business needs throughout the year.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 1 – Create an Appropriate Budget Reserve

    2. Refocus IT risk planning

    The start of 2021 is a time to refocus and redouble IT risk management and business continuity planning to bring it up to the standards of our “new normal.” Indeed, if last year taught us anything, it’s that no “black swan” should be off the table in terms of scenarios or possibilities for business disruption.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 2 – Refocus IT Risk Planning

    3. Strengthen organizational change management capabilities

    At its heart, resilience is having the capacity to deal with unexpected change. Organizational change management can help build up this capacity, providing the ability to strategically plot known changes while leaving some capacity to absorb the unknowns as they present themselves.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 3 – Strengthen Organizational Change Management Capabilities

    4. Establish capacity awareness

    Capacity awareness facilitates resilience by providing capital in the form of resource data. With this data, CIOs can make better decisions on what can be approved and when it can be scheduled for.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 4 – Establish Capacity Awareness

    5. Keep emerging technologies in view

    Having an up-to-date view of emerging technologies will enable the resilient CIO to capitalize on and deploy leading-edge innovations as the business requires.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 5 – Keep Emerging Technologies in View
    [infographic]

    Network Segmentation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}503|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Network Management
    • Parent Category Link: /network-management
    • Many legacy networks were built for full connectivity and overlooked potential security ramifications.
    • Malware, ransomware, and bad actors are proliferating. It is not a matter of if you will be compromised but how can the damage be minimized.
    • Cyber insurance will detective control, not a preventative one. Prerequisite audits will look for appropriate segmentation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Lateral movement amplifies damage. Contain movement within the network through segmentation.
    • Good segmentation is a balance between security and manageability. If solutions are too complex, they won’t be updated or maintained.
    • Network services and users change over time, so must your segmentation strategy. Networks are not static; your segmentation must maintain pace.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a common understanding of what is to be built, for whom, and why.
    • Define what services will be offered and how they will be governed.
    • Understand which assets that you already have can jump start the project.

    Network Segmentation Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Network Segmentation Deck – A deck to help you minimize risk by controlling traffic flows within the network.

    Map out appropriate network segmentation to minimize risk in your network.

    • Network Segmentation Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Network Segmentation

    Protect your network by controlling the conversations within it.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech Insight

    Lateral movement amplifies damage

    From a security perspective, bad actors often use the tactic of “land and expand.” Once a network is breached, if east/west or lateral movement is not restricted, an attacker can spread quickly within a network from a small compromise.

    Good segmentation is a balance between security and manageability

    The ease of management in a network is usually inversely proportional to the amount of segmentation in that network. Highly segmented networks have a lot of potential complications and management overhead. In practice, this often leads to administrators being confused or implementing shortcuts that circumvent the very security that was intended with the segmentation in the first place.

    Network services and users change over time, so must your segmentation strategy

    Network segmentation projects should not be viewed as singular or “one and done.” Services and users on a network are constantly evolving; the network segmentation strategy must adapt with these changes. Be sure to monitor and audit segmentation deployments and change or update them as required to maintain a proper risk posture.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Networks are meant to facilitate communication, and when devices on a network cannot communicate, it is generally seen as an issue. The simplest answer to this is to design flat, permissive networks. With the proliferation of malware, ransomware, and advanced persistent threats (ATPs) a flat or permissive network is an invitation for bad actors to deliver more damage at an increased pace.

    Cyber insurance may be viewed as a simpler mitigation than network reconfiguration or redesign, but this is not a preventative solution, and the audits done before policies are issued will flag flat networks as a concern.

    Network segmentation is not a “bolt on” fix. To properly implement a minimum viable product for segmentation you must, at a minimum:

    • Understand the endpoints and their appropriate traffic flows.
    • Understand the technologies available to implement segmentation.

    Implementing appropriate segmentation often involves elements of (if not a full) network redesign.

    To ensure the best results in a timely fashion, Info-Tech recommends a methodology that consists of:

    • Understand the network (or subset thereof) and prioritizing segmentation based on risk.
    • Align the appropriate segmentation methodology for each surfaced segment to be addressed.
    • Monitor the segmented environment for compliance and design efficacy, adding to and modifying existing as required.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The aim of networking is communication, but unfettered communication can be a liability. Appropriate segmentation in networks, blocking communications where they are not required or desired, restricts lateral movement within the network, allowing for better risk mitigation and management.

    Network segmentation

    Compartmentalization of risk:

    Segmentation is the practice of compartmentalizing network traffic for the purposes of mitigating or reducing risk. Segmentation methodologies can generally be grouped into three broad categories:

    1. Physical Segmentation

    The most common implementation of physical segmentation is to build parallel networks with separate hardware for each network segment. This is sometimes referred to as “air gapping.”

    2. Static Virtual Segmentation

    Static virtual segmentation is the configuration practice of using technologies such as virtual LANs (VLANs) to assign ports or connections statically to a network segment.

    3. Dynamic Virtual Segmentation

    Dynamic virtual segmentation assigns a connection to a network segment based on the device or user of the connection. This can be done through such means as software defined networking (SDN), 802.1x, or traffic inspection and profiling.

    Common triggers for network segmentation projects

    1. Remediate Audit Findings

    Many security audits (potentially required for or affecting premiums of cyber insurance) will highlight the potential issues of non-segmented networks.

    2. Protect Vulnerable Technology Assets

    Whether separating IT and OT or segmenting off IoT/IIoT devices, keeping vulnerable assets separated from potential attack vectors is good practice.

    3. Minimize Potential for Lateral Movement

    Any organization that has experienced a cyber attack will realize the value in segmenting the network to slow a bad actor’s movement through technology assets.

    How do you execute on network segmentation?

    The image contains a screenshot of the network segmentation process. The process includes: identify risk, design segmentation, and operate and optimize.

    Identify risks by understanding access across the network

    Gain visibility

    Create policy

    Prioritize change

    "Security, after all, is a risk business. As companies don't secure everything, everywhere, security resilience allows them to focus their security resources on the pieces of the business that add the most value to an organization, and ensure that value is protected."

    – Helen Patton,

    CISO, Cisco Security Business Group, qtd. In PR News, 2022

    Discover the data flows within the network. This should include all users on the network and the environments they are required to access as well as access across environments.

    Examine the discovered flows and define how they should be treated.

    Change takes time. Use a risk assessment to prioritize changes within the network architecture.

    Understand the network space

    A space is made up of both services and users.

    Before starting to consider segmentation solutions, define whether this exercise is aimed at addressing segmentation globally or at a local level. Not all use cases are global and many can be addressed locally.

    When examining a network space for potential segmentation we must include:

    • Services offered on the network
    • Users of the network

    To keep the space a consumable size, both of these areas should be approached in the abstract. To abstract, users and services should be logically grouped and generalized.

    Groupings in the users and services categories may be different across organizations, but the common thread will be to contain the amount of groupings to a manageable size.

    Service Groupings

    • Are the applications all components of a larger service or environment?
    • Do the applications serve data of a similar sensitivity?
    • Are there services that feed data and don’t interact with users (IoT, OT, sensors)?

    User Groupings

    • Do users have similar security profiles?
    • Do users use a similar set of applications?
    • Are users in the same area of your organization chart?
    • Have you considered access by external parties?

    Info-Tech Insight

    The more granular you are in the definition of the network space, the more granular you can be in your segmentation. The unfortunate corollary to this is that the difficulty of managing your end solution grows with the granularity of your segmentation.

    Create appropriate policy

    Understand which assets to protect and how.

    Context is key in your ability to create appropriate policy. Building on the definition of the network space that has been created, context in the form of the appropriateness of communications across the space and the vulnerabilities of items within the space can be layered on.

    To decide where and how segmentation might be appropriate, we must first examine the needs of communication on the network and their associated risk. Once defined, we can assess how permissive or restrictive we should be with that communication.

    The minimum viable product for this exercise is to define the communication channel possibilities, then designate each possibility as one of the following:

    • Permissive – we should freely allow this traffic
    • Restricted – we should allow some of the traffic and/or control it
    • Rejected – we should not allow this traffic

    Appropriate Communications

    • Should a particular group of users have access to a given service?
    • Are there external users involved in any grouping?

    Potential Vulnerabilities

    • Are the systems in question continually patched/updated?
    • Are the services exposed designed with the appropriate security?

    Prioritize the potential segmentation

    Use risk as a guide to prioritize segmentation.

    For most organizations, the primary reason for network segmentation is to improve security posture. It follows that the prioritization of initiatives and/or projects to implement segmentation should be based on risk.

    When examining risk, an organization needs to consider both:

    • Impact and likelihood of visibility risk in respect to any given asset, data, or user
    • The organization’s level of risk tolerance

    The assets or users that are associated with risk levels higher than the tolerance of the organization should be prioritized to be addressed.

    Service Risks

    • If this service was affected by an adverse event, what would the impact on the organization be?

    User Risks

    • Are the users in question FTEs as opposed to contractors or outsourced resources?
    • Is a particular user group more susceptible to compromise than others?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Be sure to keep this exercise relative so that a clear ranking occurs. If it turns out that everything is a priority, then nothing is a priority. When ranking things relative to others in the exercise, we ensure clear “winners” and “losers.”

    Assess risk and prioritize action

    1-3 hours

    1. Define a list of users and services that define the network space to be addressed. If the lists are too long, use an exercise like affinity diagramming to appropriately group them into a smaller subset.
    2. Create a matrix from the lists (put users and services along the rows and columns). In the intersecting points, label how the traffic should be treated (e.g. Permissive, Restricted, Rejected).
    3. Examine the matrix and assess the intersections for risk using the lens of impact and likelihood of an adverse event. Label the intersections for risk level with one of green (low impact/likelihood), yellow (medium impact/likelihood), or red (high impact/likelihood).
    4. Find commonalities within the medium/high areas and list the users or services as priorities to be addressed.
    Input Output
    • Network, application, and security documentation
    • A prioritized list of areas to address with segmentation
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    OR

    • Excel spreadsheet
    • Network Team
    • Application Team
    • Security Team
    • Data Team

    Design segmentation

    Segmentation comes in many flavors; decide which is right for the specific circumstance.

    Methodology

    Access control

    "Learning to choose is hard. Learning to choose well is harder. And learning to choose well in a world of unlimited possibilities is harder still, perhaps too hard."

    ― Barry Schwartz, The Paradox of Choice: Why More Is Less

    What is the best method to segment the particular user group, service, or environment in question?

    How can data or user access move safely and securely between network segments?

    Decide on which methods work for your circumstances

    You always have options…

    There are multiple lenses to look through when making the decision of what the correct segmentation method might be for any given user group or service. A potential subset could include:

    • Effort to deploy
    • Cost of the solution
    • Skills required to operate
    • Granularity of the segmentation
    • Adaptability of the solution
    • Level of automation in the solution

    Info-Tech Insight

    Network segmentation within an organization is rarely a one-size-fits-all proposition. Be sure to look at each situation that has been identified to need segmentation and align it with an appropriate solution. The overall number of solutions deployed has to maintain a balance between that appropriateness and the effort to manage multiple environments.

    Framework to examine segmentation methods

    To assess we need to understand.

    To assess when technologies or methodologies are appropriate for a segmentation use case, we need to understand what those options are. We will be examining potential segmentation methods and concepts within the following framework:

    WHAT

    A description of the segmentation technology, method, or concept.

    WHY

    Why would this be used over other choices and/or in what circumstances?

    HOW

    A high-level overview of how this option could or would be deployed.

    Notional assessments will be displayed in a sidebar to give an idea of Effort, Cost, Skills, Granularity, Adaptability, and Automation.

    Implement

    Notional level of effort to implement on a standard network

    Cost

    Relative cost of implementing this segmentation strategy

    Maintain

    Notional level of time and skills needed to maintain

    Granularity

    How granular this type of segmentation is in general

    Adaptability

    The ability of the solution to be easily modified or changed

    Automation

    The level of automation inherent in the solution

    Air gap

    … And never the twain shall meet.

    – Rudyard Kipling, “The Ballad of East and West.”

    WHAT

    Air gapping is a strategy to protect portions of a network by segmenting those portions and running them on completely separate hardware from the primary network. In an air gap scenario, the segmented network cannot have connectivity to outside networks. This difference makes air gapping a very specific implementation of parallel networks (which are still segmented and run on separate hardware but can be connected through a control point).

    WHY

    Air gap is a traditional choice when environments need to be very secure. Examples where air gaps exist(ed) are:

    • Operational technology (OT) networks
    • Military networks
    • Critical infrastructure

    HOW

    Most networks are not overprovisioned to a level that physical segmentation can be done without purchasing new equipment. The major steps required for constructing an air gap include:

    • Design segmentation
    • Purchase and install new hardware
    • Cable to new hardware

    The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates pie graphs with the notional assessments: Effort, Cost, Skills, Granularity, and Automation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    An air gapped network is the ultimate in segmentation and security … as long as the network does not require connectivity. It is unfortunately rare in today’s world that a network will stand on its own without any need for external connectivity.

    VLAN

    Do what you can, with what you’ve got…

    – Theodore Roosevelt

    WHAT

    Virtual local area networks (VLANs) are a standard feature on today’s firewalls, routers, and manageable switches. This configuration option allows for network traffic to be segmented into separate virtual networks (broadcast domains) on existing hardware. This segmentation is done at layer 2 of the OSI model. All traffic will share the same hardware but be partitioned based on “tags” that the local device applies to the traffic. Because of these tags, traffic is handled separately at layer 2 of the OSI model, but traffic can pass between segments at layer 3 (e.g. IP layer).

    WHY

    VLANs are commonly used because most existing deployments already have the technology available without extra licensing. VLANs are also potentially used as foundational components in more complex segmentation strategies such as static or dynamic overlays.

    HOW

    VLANs allow for segmentation of a device at the port level. VLAN strategies are generally on a location level (e.g. most VLAN deployments are local to a site, though the same structure may be used among sites). To deploy VLANs you must:

    • Define VLAN segments
    • Assign ports appropriately

    The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates pie graphs with the notional assessments: Effort, Cost, Skills, Granularity, and Automation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    VLANs are tried and true segmentation workhorses. The fact that they are already included in modern manageable solutions means that there is very little reason to not have some level of segmentation within a network.

    Micro-segmentation

    Everyone is against micromanaging, but macro managing means you’re working on the big picture but don’t understand the details.

    – Henry Mintzberg

    WHAT

    Micro-segmentation is used to secure and control network traffic between workloads. This is a foundational technology when implementing zero trust or least-privileged access network designs. Segmentation is done at or directly adjacent to the workload (on the system or its direct network connectivity) through firewall or similar policy controls. The controls are set to only allow the network communication required to execute the workload and is limited to appropriate endpoints. This restrictive design restricts all traffic (including east-west) and reduces the attack surface.

    WHY

    Micro-segmentation is primarily used:

    • In server-to-server communication.
    • When lateral movement by bad actors is identified as a concern.

    HOW

    Micro-segmentation can be deployed at different places within the connectivity depending on the technologies used:

    • Workload/server (e.g. server firewall)
    • VM network overlay (e.g. VMware NSX)
    • Network port (e.g. ACL, firewall, ACI)
    • Cloud native (e.g. Azure Firewall)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Micro-segmentation is necessary in the data center to limit lateral movement. Just be sure to be thorough in defining required communication as this technology works on allowlists, not traditional blocklists.

    Static overlay

    Adaptability is key.

    – Marc Andreessen

    WHAT

    Static overlays are a form of virtual segmentation that allows multiple network segments to exist on the same device. Most of these solutions will also allow for these segments to expand across multiple devices or sites, creating overlay virtual networks on top of the existing physical networks. The static nature of the solution is because the ports that participate in the overlays are statically assigned and configured. Connectivity between devices and sites is done through encapsulation and may have a dynamic component of the control plane handled through routing protocols.

    WHY

    Static overlays are commonly deployed when the need is to segment different use cases or areas of the organization consistently across sites while allowing easy access within the segments between sites. This could be representative of segmenting a department like Finance or extending a layer 2 segment across data centers.

    HOW

    Static overlays are can segment and potentially extend a layer 2 or layer 3 network. These solutions could be executed with technologies such as:

    • VXLAN (Virtual eXtensible LAN)
    • MPLS (Multi Protocol Label Switching)
    • VRF (Virtual Routing & Forwarding)

    The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates pie graphs with the notional assessments: Effort, Cost, Skills, Granularity, and Automation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Static overlays are commonly deployed by telecommunications providers when building out their service offerings due to the multitenancy requirements of the network.

    Dynamic overlay

    Never tell people how to do things. Tell them what to do and they will surprise you with their ingenuity.

    – George S. Patton

    WHAT

    A dynamic overlay segmentation solution has the ability to make security or traffic decisions based on policy. Rather than designing and hardcoding the network architecture, the policy is architected and the network makes decisions based on that policy. Differing levels of control exist in this space, but the underlying commonality is that the segmentation would be considered “software defined” (SDN).

    WHY

    Dynamic overlay solutions provide the most flexibility of the presented solutions. Some use cases such as BYOD or IoT devices may not be easily identified or controlled through static means. As a general rule of thumb, the less static the network is, the more dynamic your segmentation solution must be.

    HOW

    Policy is generally applied at the network ingress. When applying policy, which policy to be applied can be identified through different methodologies such as:

    • Authentication (e.g. 802.1x)
    • Device agents
    • Device profiling

    The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates pie graphs with the notional assessments: Effort, Cost, Skills, Granularity, and Automation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Dynamic overlays allow for more flexibility through its policy-based configurations. These solutions can provide the highest value when positioned where we have less control of the points within a network (e.g. BYOD scenarios).

    Define how your segments will communicate

    No segment is an island…

    Network segmentation allows for protection of devices, users, or data through the act of separating the physical or virtual networks they are on. Counter to this protective stance, especially in today’s networks, these devices, users, or data tend to need to interact with each other outside of the neat lines we draw for them. Proper network segmentation has to allow for the transfer of assets between networks in a safe and secure manner.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The solutions used to facilitate the controlled communication between segments has to consider the friction to the users. If too much friction is introduced, people will try to find a way around the controls, potentially negating the security that is intended with the solution.

    Potential access methods

    A ship in harbor is safe, but that is not what ships are built for.

    – John A. Shedd

    Firewall

    Two-way controlled communication

    Firewalls are tried and true control points used to join networks. This solution will allow, at minimum, port-level control with some potential for deeper inspection and control beyond that.

    • Traditionally firewalls are sized to handle internet-bound (North-South) traffic. When being used between segments, (East-West) loads are usually much higher, necessitating a more powerful device.

    Jump Box

    A place between worlds

    Also sometimes referred to as a “Bastion Host,” a jump box is a special-purpose computer/server that has been hardened and resides on multiple segments of a network. Administrators or users can log into this box and use it to securely use the tools installed to act on other segments of the network.

    • Jump box security is of utmost importance. Special care should be taken in hardening, configuration, and application installed to ensure that users cannot use the box to tunnel or traverse between the segments outside of well-defined and controlled circumstances.

    Protocol Gateway

    Command-level control

    A protocol gateway is a specific and special subset of a firewall. Whereas a firewall is a security generalist, a protocol gateway is designed to understand and have rule-level control over the commands passing through it within defined protocols. This granularity, for example, allows for control and filtering to only allow defined OT commands to be passed to a secure SCADA network.

    • Protocol gateways are generally specific feature sets of a firewall and traditionally target OT network security as their core use case.

    Network Pump

    One-way data extraction

    A network pump is a concept designed to allow data to be transferred from a secure network to a less secure network while still protecting against covert channels such as using the ACK within a transfer to transmit data. A network pump will consist of trusted processes and schedulers that allow for data to pass but control channels to be sufficiently modified so as to not allow security concerns.

    • Network pumps would generally be deployed in the most security demanding of environments and are generally not “off the shelf” products.

    Operate and optimize

    Security is not static. Monitor and iterate on policies within the environment.

    Monitor

    Iterate

    Two in three businesses (68%) allow more employee data access than necessary.

    GetApp's 2022 Data Security Survey Report

    Are the segmentation efforts resulting in the expected traffic changes? Are there any anomalies that need investigation?

    Using the output from the monitoring stage, refine and optimize the design by iterating on the process.

    Monitor for efficacy, compliance, and the unknown

    Monitor to ensure your intended results and to identify new potential risks.

    Monitoring network segments

    A combination of passive and active monitoring is required to ensure that:

    • The rules that have been deployed are working as expected.
    • Appropriate proof of compliance is in place for auditing and insurance purposes.
    • Environments are being monitored for unexpected traffic.

    Active monitoring goes beyond the traditional gathering of information for alerts and dashboards and moves into the space of synthetic users and anomaly detection. Using these strategies helps to ensure that security is enforced appropriately and responses to issues are timely.

    "We discovered in our research that insider threats are not viewed as seriously as external threats, like a cyberattack. But when companies had an insider threat, in general, they were much more costly than external incidents. This was largely because the insider that is smart has the skills to hide the crime, for months, for years, sometimes forever."

    – Dr. Larry Ponemon, Chairman Ponemon Institute, at SecureWorld Boston

    Info-Tech Insight

    Using solutions like network detection and response (NDR) will allow for monitoring to take advantage of advanced analytical techniques like artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning (ML). These technologies can help identify anomalies that a human might miss.

    Monitoring options

    It’s not what you look at that matters, it’s what you see.

    – Henry David Thoreau

    Traditional

    Monitor cumulative change in a variable

    Traditional network monitoring is a minimum viable product. With this solution variables can be monitored to give some level of validation that the segmentation solution is operating as expected. Potential areas to monitor include traffic volumes, access-list (ACL) matches, and firewall packet drops.

    • This is expected baseline monitoring. Without at least this level of visibility, it is hard to validate the solutions in place

    Rules Based

    Inspect traffic to find a match against a library of signatures

    Rules-based systems will monitor traffic against a library of signatures and alert on any matches. These solutions are good at identifying the “known” issues on the network. Examples of these systems include security incident and event management (SIEM) and intrusion detection/prevention systems (IDS/IPS).

    • These solutions are optimally used when there are known signatures to validate traffic against.
    • They can identify known attacks and breaches.

    Anomaly Detection

    Use computer intelligence to compare against baseline

    Anomaly detection systems are designed to baseline the network traffic then compare current traffic against that to find anomalies using technologies like Bayesian regression analysis or artificial intelligence and machine learning (AI/ML). This strategy can be useful in analyzing large volumes of traffic and identifying the “unknown unknowns.”

    • Computers can analyze large volumes of data much faster than a human. This allows these solutions to validate traffic in (near) real-time and alert on things that are out of the ordinary and would not be easily visible to a human.

    Synthetic Data

    Mimic potential traffic flows to monitor network reaction

    Rather than wait for a bad actor to find a hole in the defenses, synthetic data can be used to mimic real-world traffic to validate configuration and segmentation. This often takes the form of real user monitoring tools, penetration testing, or red teaming.

    • Active monitoring or testing allows a proactive stance as opposed to a reactive one.

    Gather feedback, assess the situation, and iterate

    Take input from operating the environment and use that to optimize the process and the outcome.

    Optimize through iteration

    Output from monitoring must be fed back into the process of maintaining and optimizing segmentation. Network segmentation should be viewed as an ongoing process as opposed to a singular structured project.

    Monitoring can and will highlight where and when the segmentation design is successful and when new traffic flows arise. If these inputs are not fed back through the process, designs will become stagnant and admins or users will attempt to find ways to circumvent solutions for ease of use.

    "I think it's very important to have a feedback loop, where you're constantly thinking about what you've done and how you could be doing it better. I think that's the single best piece of advice: constantly think about how you could be doing things better and questioning yourself."

    – Elon Musk, qtd. in Mashable, 2012

    Info-Tech Insight

    The network environment will not stay static; flows will change as often as required for the business to succeed. Take insights from monitoring the environment and integrate them into an iterative process that will maintain relevance and usability in your segmentation.

    Bibliography

    Andreessen, Marc. “Adaptability is key.” BrainyQuote, n.d.
    Barry Schwartz. The Paradox of Choice: Why More Is Less. Harper Perennial, 18 Jan. 2005.
    Capers, Zach. “GetApp’s 2022 Data Security Report—Seven Startling Statistics.” GetApp,
    19 Sept. 2022.
    Cisco Systems, Inc. “Cybersecurity resilience emerges as top priority as 62 percent of companies say security incidents impacted business operations.” PR Newswire, 6 Dec. 2022.
    “Dynamic Network Segmentation: A Must-Have for Digital Businesses in the Age of Zero Trust.” Forescout Whitepaper, 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Eaves, Johnothan. “Segmentation Strategy - An ISE Prescriptive Guide.” Cisco Community,
    26 Oct. 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Kambic, Dan, and Jason Fricke. “Network Segmentation: Concepts and Practices.” Carnegie Mellon University SEI Blog, 19 Oct. 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Kang, Myong H., et al. “A Network Pump.” IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering, vol. 22 no. 5, May 1996.
    Kipling, Rudyard. “The Ballad of East and West.” Ballads and Barrack-Room Ballads, 1892.
    Mintzberg, Henry. “Everyone is against micro managing but macro managing means you're working at the big picture but don't know the details.” AZ Quotes, n.d.
    Murphy, Greg. “A Reimagined Purdue Model For Industrial Security Is Possible.” Forbes Magazine, 18 Jan. 2022. Accessed Oct. 2022.
    Patton, George S. “Never tell people how to do things. Tell them what to do and they will surprise you with their ingenuity.” BrainyQuote, n.d.
    Ponemon, Larry. “We discovered in our research […].” SecureWorld Boston, n.d.
    Roosevelt, Theodore. “Do what you can, with what you've got, where you are.” Theodore Roosevelt Center, n.d.
    Sahoo, Narendra. “How Does Implementing Network Segmentation Benefit Businesses?” Vista Infosec Blog. April 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    “Security Outcomes Report Volume 3.” Cisco Secure, Dec 2022.
    Shedd, John A. “A ship in harbor is safe, but that is not what ships are built for.” Salt from My Attic, 1928, via Quote Investigator, 9 Dec. 2023.
    Singleton, Camille, et al. “X-Force Threat Intelligence Index 2022” IBM, 17 Feb. 2022.
    Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Stone, Mark. “What is network segmentation? NS best practices, requirements explained.” AT&T Cyber Security, March 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    “The State of Breach and Attack Simulation and the Need for Continuous Security Validation: A Study of US and UK Organizations.” Ponemon Institute, Nov. 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Thoreau, Henry David. “It’s not what you look at that matters, it’s what you see.” BrainyQuote, n.d.
    Ulanoff, Lance. “Elon Musk: Secrets of a Highly Effective Entrepreneur.” Mashable, 13 April 2012.
    “What Is Microsegmenation?” Palo Alto, Accessed Nov. 2022.
    “What is Network Segmentation? Introduction to Network Segmentation.” Sunny Valley Networks, n.d.

    Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}339|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,449 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Organizations are struggling to understand what's involved in the analytics developer lifecycle to generate reusable insights faster.
    • Discover what it takes to become a citizen analytics developer. Identify the proper way to enable self-serve analytics.
    • Self-serve business intelligence/analytics is misunderstood and confusing to the business, especially with regards to the roles and responsibilities of IT and the business.
    • End users are dissatisfied due to a lack of access to the data and the absence of a single source of truth.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Organizations that take data seriously should:

    • Decouple processes in which data is separated from business processes and elevate the visibility of the organization's data assets.
    • Leverage a secure platform where data can be easily exchanged for insights generation.
    • Create density for analytics where resources are mobilized around analytics ideas to generate value.

    Analytics is a journey, not a destination. This journey can eventually result in some level of sophisticated AI/machine learning in your organization. Every organization needs to mobilize its resources and enhance its analytics capabilities to quickly and incrementally add value to data products and services. However, most organizations fail to mobilize their resources in this way.

    Impact and Result

    • Firms become more agile when they realize efficiencies in their analytics operating models and can quickly implement reusable analytics.
    • IT becomes more flexible and efficient in understanding the business' data needs and eliminates redundant processes.
    • Trust in data-driven decision making goes up with collaboration, engagement, and transparency.
    • There is a clear path to continuous improvement in analytics.

    Establish an Analytics Operating Model Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief that outlines Info-Tech’s methodology for assessing the business' analytics needs and aligning your data governance, capabilities, and organizational structure to deliver analytics faster.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your analytics needs

    This phase helps you understand your organization's data landscape and current analytics environment so you gain a deeper understanding of your future analytics needs.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 1: Define Your Analytics Needs

    2. Establish an analytics operating model

    This phase introduces you to data operating model frameworks and provides a step-by-step guide on how to capture the right analytics operating model for your organization.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 2: Establish an Analytics Operating Model
    • Analytics Operating Model Building Tool

    3. Implement your operating model

    This phase helps you implement your chosen analytics operating model, as well as establish an engagement model and communications plan.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 3: Implement Your Analytics Operating Model
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Analytics Needs

    The Purpose

    Achieve a clear understanding and case for data analytics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A successful analytics operating model starts with a good understanding of your analytical needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Understand your analytics needs.

    1.3 Draft analytics ideas and use cases.

    1.4 Capture minimum viable analytics.

    Outputs

    Documentation of analytics products and services

    2 Perform an Analytics Capability Assessment

    The Purpose

    Achieve a clear understanding of your organization's analytics capability and mapping across organizational functions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand your organization's data landscape and current analytics environment to gain a deeper understanding of your future analytics needs.

    Activities

    2.1 Capture your analytics capabilities.

    2.2 Map capabilities to a hub-and-spoke model.

    2.3 Document operating model results.

    Outputs

    Capability assessment results

    3 Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    The Purpose

    Capture the right analytics operating model for your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Explore data operating model frameworks.

    Capture the right analytics operating model for your organization using a step-by-step guide.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss your operating model results.

    3.2 Review your organizational structure’s pros and cons.

    3.3 Map resources to target structure.

    3.4 Brainstorm initiatives to develop your analytics capabilities.

    Outputs

    Target operating model

    4 Implement Your Analytics Operating Model

    The Purpose

    Formalize your analytics organizational structure and prepare to implement your chosen analytics operating model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Implement your chosen analytics operating model.

    Establish an engagement model and communications plan.

    Activities

    4.1 Document your target organizational structure and RACI.

    4.2 Establish an analytics engagement model.

    4.3 Develop an analytics communications plan.

    Outputs

    Reporting and analytics responsibility matrix (RACI)

    Analytics engagement model

    Analytics communications plan

    Analytics organizational chart

    Develop Infrastructure & Operations Policies and Procedures

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}452|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $46,324 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 42 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Time and money are wasted dealing with mistakes or missteps that should have been addressed by procedures or policies.
    • Standard operating procedures are less effective without a policy to provide a clear mandate and direction.
    • Adhering to policies is rarely a priority, as compliance often feels like an impediment to getting work done.
    • Processes aren’t measured or audited to assess policy compliance, which makes enforcing the policies next to impossible.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Document what you need to document and forget the rest. Always check to see if you can use a previously approved policy before you create a new one. You may only need to create new guidelines or standards rather than approve a new policy.

    Impact and Result

    • Start with a comprehensive policy framework to help you identify policy gaps. Prioritize and address those policy gaps.
    • Create effective policies that are reasonable, measurable, auditable, and enforceable.
    • Create and document procedures to support policy changes.

    Develop Infrastructure & Operations Policies and Procedures Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should change your approach to developing Infrastructure & Operations policies and procedures, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify policy and procedure gaps

    Create a prioritized action plan for documentation based on business need.

    • Develop Infrastructure & Operations Policies and Procedures – Phase 1: Identify Policy and Procedure Gaps

    2. Develop policies

    Adapt policy templates to meet your business requirements.

    • Develop Infrastructure & Operations Policies and Procedures – Phase 2: Develop Policies
    • Availability and Capacity Management Policy
    • Business Continuity Management Policy
    • Change Control – Freezes & Risk Evaluation Policy
    • Change Management Policy
    • Configuration Management Policy
    • Firewall Policy
    • Hardware Asset Management Policy
    • IT Triage and Support Policy
    • Release Management Policy
    • Software Asset Management Policy
    • System Maintenance Policy – NIST
    • Internet Acceptable Use Policy

    3. Document effective procedures

    Improve policy adherence and service effectiveness through procedure standardization and documentation.

    • Develop Infrastructure & Operations Policies and Procedures – Phase 3: Document Effective Procedures
    • Capacity Plan Template
    • Change Management Standard Operating Procedure
    • Configuration Management Standard Operation Procedures
    • Incident Management and Service Desk SOP
    • DRP Summary Template
    • Service Desk Standard Operating Procedure
    • HAM Standard Operating Procedures
    • SAM Standard Operating Procedures
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Develop Infrastructure & Operations Policies and Procedures

    Document what you need to document and forget the rest.

    Table of contents

    Project Rationale

    Project Outlines

    • Phase 1: Identify Policy and Procedure Gaps
    • Phase 2: Develop Policies
    • Phase 3: Document Effective Procedures

    Bibliography

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Document what you need to document now and forget the rest.

    "Most IT organizations struggle to create and maintain effective policies and procedures, despite known improvements to consistency, compliance, knowledge transfer, and transparency.

    The numbers are staggering. Fully three-quarters of IT professionals believe their policies need improvement, and the same proportion of organizations don’t update procedures as required.

    At the same time, organizations that over-document and under-document perform equally poorly on key measures such as policy quality and policy adherence. Take a practical, step-by-step approach that prioritizes the documentation you need now. Leave the rest for later."

    (Andrew Sharp, Research Manager, Infrastructure & Operations Practice, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • Infrastructure Managers
    • Chief Technology Officers
    • IT Security Managers

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Address policy gaps
    • Develop effective procedures and procedure documentation to support policy compliance

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Chief Information Officers
    • Enterprise Risk and Compliance Officers
    • Chief Human Resources Officers
    • Systems Administrators and Engineers

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Understand the importance of a coherent approach to policy development
    • Understand the importance of Infrastructure & Operations policies
    • Support Infrastructure & Operations policy development and enforcement

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    This blueprint supports templates for key policies and procedures that help Infrastructure & Operations teams to govern and manage internal operations. For security policies, see the NIST SP 800-171 aligned Info-Tech blueprint, Develop and Deploy Security Policies.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Time and money are wasted dealing with mistakes or missteps that should have been addressed by procedures or policies.
    • Standard operating procedures are less effective without a policy to provide a clear mandate and direction.

    Complication

    • Existing policies were written, approved, signed – and forgotten for years because no one has time to maintain them.
    • Adhering to policies is rarely a priority, as compliance often feels like an impediment to getting work done.
    • Processes aren’t measured or audited to assess policy compliance, which makes enforcing the policies next to impossible.

    Resolution

    • Start with a comprehensive policy framework to help you identify policy gaps. Prioritize and address those policy gaps.
    • Create effective policies that are reasonable, measurable, auditable, and enforceable.
    • Create and document procedures to support policy changes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Document what you need to document and forget the rest.
      Always check if a previously approved policy exists before you create a new one. You may only need to create new guidelines or standards rather than approve a new policy.
    2. Support policies with documented procedures.
      Build procedures that embed policy adherence in daily operations. Find opportunities to automate policy adherence (e.g. removing local admin rights from user computers).

    What are policies, procedures, and processes?

    A policy is a governing document that states the long-term goals of the organization and in broad strokes outlines how they will be achieved (e.g. a Data Protection Policy).

    In the context of policies, a procedure is composed of the steps required to complete a task (e.g. a Backup and Restore Procedure). Procedures are informed by required standards and recommended guidelines. Processes, guidelines, and standards are three pillars that support the achievement of policy goals.

    A process is higher level than a procedure – a set of tasks that deliver on an organizational goal.

    Better policies and procedures reduce organizational risk and, by strengthening the ability to execute processes, enhance the organization’s ability to execute on its goals.

    Visualization of policies, procedures, and processes using pillars. Two separate structures, 'Policy A' and 'Policy B', are each held up by three pillars labelled 'Standards', 'Procedures', and 'Guidelines'. Two lines pass through the pillars of both structures and are each labelled 'Value-creating process'.

    Document to improve governance and operational processes

    Deliver value

    Build, deliver, and support Infrastructure assets in a consistent way, which ultimately reduces costs associated with downtime, errors, and rework. A good manual process is the foundation for a good automated process.

    Simplify Training

    Use documentation for knowledge transfer. Routine tasks can be delegated to less-experienced staff.

    Maintain compliance

    Comply with laws and regulations. Policies are often required for compliance, and formally documented and enforced policies help the organization maintain compliance by mandating required due diligence, risk reduction, and reporting activities.

    Provide transparency

    Build an open kitchen. Other areas of the organization may not understand how Infra & Ops works. Your documentation can provide the answer to the perennial question: “Why does that take so long?”

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Governance goals must be supported with effective, well-aligned procedures and processes. Use Info-Tech’s research to support the key Infrastructure & Operations processes that enable your business to create value.

    Document what you need to document – and forget the rest

    Half of all organizations believe their policy suite is insufficient. (Info-Tech myPolicies Survey Data (N=59))

    Pie chart with three sections labelled 'Too Many Policies and Procedures 14%', 'Adequate Policies and Procedures 37%', 'Insufficient Policies and Procedures 49%'

    Too much documentation and a lack of documentation are both ineffective. (Info-Tech myPolicies Survey Data (N=59))

    Two bar charts labelled 'Policy Adherence' and 'Policy Quality' each with three bars representing 'Too Many Policies and Procedures', 'Insufficient Policies and Procedures', and 'Adequate Policies and Procedures'. The values shown are an average score out of 5. For Policy Adherence: Too Many is 2.4, Insufficient is 2.1, and Adequate is 3.2. For Policy Quality: Too Many is 2.9, Insufficient is 2.6, and Adequate is 4.1.

    77% of IT professionals believe their policies require improvement. (Kaspersky Lab)

    Presenting: A COBIT-aligned policy suite

    We’ve developed a suite of effective policy templates for every Infra & Ops manager based on Info-Tech’s IT Management & Governance Framework.

    Policy templates and the related aspects of Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Look for these symbols as you work through the deck. Prioritize and focus on the policies you work on first based on the value of the policy to the enterprise and the existing gaps in your governance structure.

    Project outline

    Phases

    1. Identify policy and procedure gaps 2. Develop policies 3. Document effective procedures

    Steps

    • Review and right-size the existing policy set
    • Create an action plan to address policy gaps
    • Modify policy templates and gather feedback
    • Implement, enforce, measure, and maintain new policies
    • Scope and outline procedures
    • Document and maintain procedures

    Outcomes

    Action list of policy and procedure gaps New or updated Infrastructure & Operations policies Procedure documentation

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Accelerate policy development with a Guided Implementation

    Your trusted advisor is just a call away.

    • Identify Policy and Procedure Gaps (Calls 1-2)
      Assess current policies, operational challenges, and gaps. Mitigate significant risks first.
    • Create and Review Policies (Calls 2-4)
      Modify and review policy templates with an Info-Tech analyst.
    • Create and Review Procedures (Calls 4-6)
      Workflow procedures, using templates wherever possible. Review documentation best practices.

    Contact Info-Tech to set up a Guided Implementation with a dedicated advisor who will walk you through every stage of your policy development project.

    Develop Infrastructure & Operations Policies and Procedures

    Phase 1

    Identify Policy and Procedure Gaps

    PHASE 1: Identify Policy and Procedure Gaps

    Step 1.1: Review and right-size the existing policy set

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify gaps in your existing policy suite
    • Document challenges to core Infrastructure & Operations processes
    • Identify documentation that can close gaps
    • Prioritize your documentation effort

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure & Operations Manager
    • Infrastructure Supervisors

    Results & Insights

    • Results: A review of the existing policy suite and identification of opportunities for improvement.
    • Insights: Not all gaps necessarily require a fresh policy. Repurpose, refresh, or supplement existing documentation wherever appropriate.

    Conduct a policy review

    Associated Activity icon 1(a) 30 minutes per policy

    You’ve got time to review your policy suite. Make the most of it.

    1. Start with organizational requirements.
      • What initiatives are on the go? What policies or procedures do you have a mandate to create?
    2. Weed out expired and dated policies.
      • Gather your existing policies. Identify when each one was published or last reviewed.
      • Decide whether to retire, merge, or update expired or obviously dated policy.
    3. Review policy statements.
      • Check that the organization is adequately supporting policy statements with SOPs, standards, and guidelines. Ensure role-related information is up to date.
    4. Document and bring any gaps forward to the next activity. If no action is required, indicate that you have completed a review and submit the findings for approval.

    But they just want one policy...

    A review of your policy suite is good practice, especially when it hasn’t been done for a while. Why?
    • Existing policies may address what you’re trying to do with a new policy. Using or modifying an existing policy avoids overlap and contradiction and saves you the effort required to create, communicate, approve, and maintain a new policy.
    • Review the suite to validate that you’re addressing the most important challenges first.

    Brainstorm improvements for core Infrastructure & Operations processes

    Associated Activity icon 1(b) 1 hour

    Supplement the list of gaps from your policy review with process challenges.

    1. Write out key Infra & Ops–related processes – one piece of flipchart paper per process. You can work through all of these processes or cherry-pick the processes you want to improve first.
    2. With participants, write out in point form how you currently execute on these processes (e.g. for Asset Management, you might be tagging hardware, tracking licenses, etc.)
    3. Work through a “Start – Stop – Continue” exercise. Ask participants: What should we start doing? What must we stop doing? What do we do currently that’s valuable and must continue? Write ideas on sticky notes.
    4. Once you’ve worked through the “Start – Stop – Continue” exercise for all processes, group similar suggestions for improvements.

    Asset Management: Manage hardware and software assets across their lifecycle to protect assets and manage costs.

    Availability and Capacity Management: Balance current and future availability, capacity, and performance needs with cost-to-serve.

    Business Continuity Management: Continue operation of critical business processes and IT services.

    Change Management: Deliver technical changes in a controlled manner.

    Configuration Management: Define and maintain relationships between technical components.

    Problem Management: Identify incident root cause.

    Operations Management: Coordinate operations.

    Release and Patch Management: Deliver updates and manage vulnerabilities in a controlled manner.

    Service Desk: Respond to user requests and all incidents.

    PHASE 1: Identify Policy and Procedure Gaps

    Step 1.2: Create an action plan to address policy gaps

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify challenges and gaps that can be addressed via documentation
    • Prioritize high-value, high-risk gaps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure & Operations Manager
    • Infrastructure Supervisors

    Results & Insights

    • Results: An action plan to tackle policy and procedures gaps, aligned with business requirements and business value.
    • Insights: Not all documentation is equally valuable. Prioritize documentation that delivers value and mitigates risk.

    Support policies with procedures, standards, and guidelines

    Use a working definition for each type of document.

    Policy: Directives, rules, and mandates that support the overarching, long-term goals of the organization.

    • Standards: Prescriptive, uniform requirements.
    • Procedures: Specific, detailed, step-by-step instructions for completing a task.
    • Guidelines: Non-enforceable, recommended best practices.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Take advantage of your Info-Tech advisory membership by scheduling review sessions with an analyst. We provide high-level feedback to ensure your documentation is clear, concise, and consistent and aligns with the governance objectives you’ve identified.

    Answer the following questions to decide if governance documentation can help close gaps

    Associated Activity icon 1(c) 30 minutes

    Documentation supports knowledge sharing, process consistency, compliance, and transparency. Ask the following questions:

    1. What is the purpose of the documentation?
      Procedures support task completion. Policies set direction and manage organizational risk.
    2. Should it be enforceable?
      Policies and standards are enforceable; guidelines are not. Procedures are enforceable in that they should support policy enforcement.
    3. What is the scope?
      To document a task, create a procedure. Set overarching rules with policies. Use standards and guidelines to set detailed rules and best practices.
    4. What’s the expected cadence for updates?
      Policies should be revisited and revised less frequently than procedures.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Reinvent the wheel? I don’t think so!

    Always check to see if a gap can be addressed with existing tools before drafting a new policy

    • Is there an existing policy that could be supported with new or updated procedures, technical standards, or guidelines?
    • Is there a technical control you can deploy that would enforce the terms of an existing, approved policy?
    • It may be simpler to amend an existing policy instead of creating a new one.

    Some problems can’t be solved by better documentation (or by documentation alone). Consider additional strategies that address people, process, and technology.

    Tackle high-value, high-risk gaps first

    Associated Activity icon 1(d) 30 minutes

    Prioritize your documentation effort.

    1. List each proposed piece of documentation on the board.
    2. Assign a score to the risk posed to the business by the lack of documentation and to the expected benefit of completing the documentation. Use a scoring scale between 1 and 3 such as the one on the right.
    3. Prioritize documentation that mitigates risks and maximizes benefits.
    4. If you need to break ties, consider effort required to develop, implement, and enforce policies or procedures.

    Example Scoring Scale

    Score Business risk of missing documentation Business benefit of value of documentation

    1

    Low: Affects ad hoc activities or non-critical data. Low: Minimal impact.

    2

    Moderate: Impacts productivity or internal goodwill. Moderate: Required periodically; some cross-training opportunities.

    3

    High: Impacts revenue, safety, or external goodwill. High: Save time for common or ongoing processes; extensive improvement to training/knowledge transfer.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Documentation pulls resources away from other important programs and projects, so ultimately it must be a demonstrably higher priority than other work. This exercise is designed to align documentation efforts with business goals.

    Phase 1: Review accomplishments

    Policy pillars: Standards, Procedures, Guidelines

    Summary of Accomplishments

    • Identified gaps in the existing policy suite and identified pain points in existing Infra & Ops processes.
    • Developed a list of policies and procedures that can address existing gaps and prioritized the documentation effort.

    Develop Infrastructure & Operations Policies and Procedures

    Phase 2

    Develop Policies

    PHASE 2: Develop Policies

    Step 2.1: Modify policy templates and gather feedback

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Modify policy templates

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure & Operations Manager
    • Technical Writer

    Results & Insights

    • Results: Your own COBIT-aligned policies built by modifying Info-Tech templates.
    • Insights: Effective policies are easy to read and navigate.

    Write Good-er: Be Clear, Consistent, and Concise

    Effective policies adhere to the three Cs of documentation.

    1. Be clear. Make it as easy as possible for a user to learn how to comply with your policy.
    2. Be consistent. Write policies that complement each other, not contradict each other.
    3. Be concise. Make it as quick and easy as possible to read and understand your policy.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    To download the full suite of templates all at once, click the “Download Research” button on the research landing page on the website.

    Use the three Cs: Be Clear

    Understanding makes compliance possible. Create policy with the goal of making compliance as easy as possible. Use positive, simple language to convey your intentions and rationale to your audience. Staff will make an effort adhere to your policy when they understand the need and are able to comply with the terms.

    1. Choose a skilled writer. Select a writer who can write clearly and succinctly.
    2. Default to simple language and define key terms. Define scope and key terms upfront. Avoid using technical terms outside of technical documentation; if they’re necessary be sure to define them as well.
    3. Use active, positive language. Where possible, tell people what they can do, not what they can’t.
    4. Keep the structure simple. Complicated documents are less likely to be understood and read. Use short sentences and paragraphs. Lists are a helpful way to summarize important information. Guide your reader through the document with appropriately named section headers, tables of contents, and numeration.
    5. Add a process for handling exceptions. Refer to procedures, standards, and guidelines documentation. Try to keep these links as static as possible. Also, refer to a process for handling exceptions.
    6. Manage the integrity of electronic documents. When published electronically, the policy should have restricted editing access or should be published in a non-editable format. Access to the procedure and policy storage database for employees should be read-only.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Highly effective policies are easy to navigate. Your policies should be “skimmable.” Very few people will fully read a policy before accepting it. Make it easy to navigate so the reader can easily find the policy statements that apply to them.

    Use the three Cs: Be Consistent

    Ensure that policies are aligned with other organizational policies and procedures. It detracts from compliance if different policies prescribe different behavior in the same situation. Moreover, your policies should reflect the corporate culture and other company standards. Use your policies to communicate rules and get employees aligned with how your company works.

    1. Use standard sentences and paragraphs. Policies are usually expressed in short, standard sentences. Lists should also be used when necessary or appropriate.
    2. Remember the three Ws. When writing a policy, always be sure to clearly state what the rule is, when it should be applied, and who needs to follow it. Policies should clearly define their scope of application and whether directives are mandatory or recommended.
    3. Use an outline format. Using a numbered or outline format will make a document easier to read and will make content easier to look up when referring back to the document at a later time.
    4. Avoid amendments. Avoid the use of information that is quickly outdated and requires regular amendment (e.g. names of people).
    5. Reference a set of supplementary documents. Codify your tactics outside of the policy document, but make reference to them within the text. This makes it easier to ensure consistency in the behavior prescribed by your policies.

    "One of the issues is the perception that policies are rules and regulations. Instead, your policies should be used to say ‘this is the way we do things around here.’" (Mike Hughes CISA CGEIT CRISC, Principal Director, Haines-Watts GRC)

    Use the three Cs: Be Concise

    Reading and understanding policies shouldn’t be challenging, and it shouldn’t significantly detract from productive time. Long policies are more difficult to read and understand, increasing the work required for employees to comply with them. Put it this way: How often do you read the Terms and Conditions of software you’ve installed before accepting them?

    1. Be direct. The quicker you get to the point, the easier it is for the reader to interpret and comply with your policy.
    2. Your policy is a rule, not a recipe. Your policy should outline what needs to be accomplished and why – your standards, guidelines, and SOPs address the how.
    3. Keep policies short. Nobody wants to read a huge policy book, so keep your policies short.
    4. Use additional documentation where needed. In addition to making consistency easier, this shortens the length of your policies, making them easier to read.
    5. Policy still too large? Modularize it. If you have an extremely large policy, it’s likely that it’s too widely scoped or that you’re including statements that should be part of procedure documentation. Consider breaking your policy into smaller, focused, more digestible documents.

    "If the policy’s too large, people aren’t going to read it. Why read something that doesn’t apply to me?" (Carole Fennelly, Owner and Principal, cFennelly Consulting)

    "I always try to strike a good balance between length and prescriptiveness when writing policy. Your policies … should be short and describe the problem and your approach to solving it. Below policies, you write standards, guidelines, and SOPs." (Michael Deskin, Policy and Technical Writer, Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission)

    Customize policy documents

    Associated Activity icon 2(a) 1-2 hours per policy

    Use the policies templates to support key Infrastructure & Operations programs.

    INPUT: List of prioritized policies

    OUTPUT: Written policy drafts ready for review

    Materials: Policy templates

    Participants: Policy writer, Signing authority

    No policy template will be a perfect fit for your organization. Use Info-Tech’s research to develop your organization’s program requirements. Customize the policy templates to support those requirements.

    1. Work through policies from highest to lowest priority as defined in Phase 1.
    2. Follow the instructions written in grey text to customize the policy. Follow the three Cs when you write your policy.
    3. When your draft is finished, prepare to request signoff from your signing authority by reviewing the draft with an Info-Tech analyst.
    4. Complete the highest ranked three or four draft policies. Review all these policies with relevant stakeholders and include all relevant signing authorities in the signoff process.
    5. Rinse and repeat. Iterate until all relevant polices are complete.

    Request, Incident, and Problem Management

    An effective, timely service desk correlates with higher overall end-user satisfaction across all other IT services. (Info-Tech Research Group, 2016 (N=25,998))

    An icon for the 'DSS02 Service Desk' template. An icon for the 'DSS03 Incident and Problem Management' template.

    Use the following template to create a policy that outlines the goals and mandate for your service and support organization:

    • IT Triage and Support Policy

    Support the program and associated policy statements using Info-Tech’s research:

    • Standardize the Service Desk
    • Incident and Problem Management
    • Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog

    Embrace Standardization

    • Outline the support and service mandate with the policy. Support the policy with the methodology in Info-Tech’s research.
    • Over time, organizations without standardized processes face confusion, redundancies, and cost overruns. Standardization avoids wasting energy and effort building new solutions to solved issues.
    • Standard processes for IT services define repeatable approaches to work and sandbox creative activities.
    • Create tickets for every task and categorize them using a standard classification system. Use the resulting data to support root-cause analysis and long-term trend management.
    • Create a single point of contact for users for all incidents and requests. Escalate and resolve tickets faster.
    • Empower end users and technicians with knowledge bases that help them solve problems without intervention.

    Change, Release, and Patch Management

    Slow turnaround, unauthorized changes, and change-related incidents are all too familiar to many managers.

    An icon for the 'BAI06 Change Management' template. An icon for the 'BAI07 Release Management' template.

    Use the following templates to create policies that define effective patch, release, and change management:

    • Change Management Policy
    • Release and Patch Management Policy
    • Change Control – Freezes & Risk Evaluation Policy

    Ensure the policy is supported by using the following Info-Tech research:

    • Optimize Change Management

    Embrace Change

    • IT system owners resist change management when they see it as slow and bureaucratic.
    • At the same time, an increasingly interlinked technical environment may cause issues to appear in unexpected places. Configuration management systems are often not kept up to date, so preventable conflicts get missed.
    • No process exists to support the identification and deployment of critical security patches. Tracking down users to find a maintenance window takes significant, dedicated effort and intervention from the management team.
    • Create a unified change management process that reduces risk and is balanced in its approach toward deploying changes, while also maintaining throughput of patches, fixes, enhancements, and innovation.

    IT Asset Management (ITAM)

    A proactive, dynamic ITAM program will pay dividends in support, contract management, appropriate provisioning, and more.

    An icon for the 'BAI09 Asset Management' template.

    Start by outlining the requirements for effective asset management:

    • Hardware Asset Management Policy
    • Software Asset Management Policy

    Support ITAM policies with the following Info-Tech research:

    • Implement IT Asset Management

    Leverage Asset Data

    • Create effective, directional policies for your asset management program that provide a mandate for action. Support the policies with robust procedures, capable staff, and right-fit technology solutions.
    • Poor management of assets generally leads to higher costs due to duplicated purchases, early replacement, loss, and so on.
    • Visibility into asset location and ownership improves security and accountability.
    • A centralized repository of asset data supports request fulfilment and incident management.
    • Asset management is an ongoing program, not a one-off project, and must be resourced accordingly. Organizations often implement an asset management program and let it stagnate.

    "Many of the large data breaches you hear about… nobody told the sysadmin the client data was on that server. So they weren’t protecting and monitoring it." (Carole Fennelly, Owner and Principal, cFennelly Consulting)

    Business Continuity Management (BCM)

    Streamline the traditional approach to make BCM practical and repeatable.

    An icon for the 'DSS04 DR and Business Continuity' template.

    Set the direction and requirements for effective BCM:

    • Business Continuity Management Policy

    Support the BCM policy with the following Info-Tech research:

    • Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    • Develop a Business Continuity Plan

    Build Organizational Resilience

    • Evidence of disaster recovery and business continuity planning is increasingly required to comply with regulations, mitigate business risk, and meet customer demands.
    • IT leaders are often asked to take the lead on business continuity, but overall accountability for business continuity rests with the board of directors, and each business unit must create and maintain its business continuity plan.
    • Set an organizational mandate for BCM with the policy.
    • Divide the business continuity mandate into manageable parcels of work. Follow Info-Tech’s practical methodology to tackle key disaster recovery and business continuity planning activities one at a time.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Governance goals must be supported with effective, well-aligned procedures and processes. Use Info-Tech’s research to support the key Infrastructure & Operations processes that enable your business to create value.

    Availability, Capacity, and Operations Management

    What was old is new again. Use time-tested techniques to manage and plan cloud capacity and costs.

    An icon for the 'BAI04 Availability and Capacity Management' template. An icon for the 'DSS01 Operations Management' template. An icon for the 'BAI10 Configuration Management' template.

    Set the direction and requirements for effective availability and capacity management:

    • Availability and Capacity Management Policy
    • System Maintenance Policy – NIST

    Support the policy with the following Info-Tech research:

    • Develop an Availability and Capacity Management Plan
    • Improve IT Operations Management
    • Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    Mature Service Delivery

    • Hybrid IT deployments – managing multiple locations, delivery models, and service providers – are the future of IT. Hybrid deployments significantly complicate capacity planning and operations management.
    • Effective operations management practices develop structured processes to automate activities and increase process consistency across the IT organization, ultimately improving IT efficiency.
    • Trying to add mature service delivery can feel like playing whack-a-mole. Systematically improve your service capabilities using the tactical, iterative approach outlined in Improve IT Operations Management.

    Enhance your overall security posture with a defensible, prescriptive policy suite

    Align your security policy suite with NIST Special Publication 800-171.

    Security policies support the organization’s larger security program. We’ve created a dedicated research blueprint and a set of templates that will help you build security policies around a robust framework.

    • Start with a security charter that aligns the security program with organizational objectives.
    • Prioritize security policies that address significant risks.
    • Work with technical and business stakeholders to adapt Info-Tech’s NIST SP 800-171–aligned policy templates (at right) to reflect your organizational objectives.

    A diagram listing all the different elements in a 'Security Charter': 'Access Control', 'Audit & Acc.', 'Awareness and Training', 'Config. Mgmt.', 'Identification and Auth.', 'Incident Response', 'Maintenance', 'Media Protection', 'Personnel Security', 'Physical Protection', 'Risk Assessment', 'Security Assessment', 'System and Comm. Protection', and 'System and Information Integrity'.

    Review and download Info-Tech's blueprint Develop and Deploy Security Policies.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Customize Info-Tech’s policy framework to align your policy suite to NIST SP 800-171. Given NIST’s requirements for the control of confidential information, organizations that align their policies to NIST standards will be in a strong governance position.

    PHASE 2: Develop Policies

    Step 2.2: Implement, enforce, measure, and maintain new policies

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Gather stakeholder feedback
    • Identify preventive and detective controls
    • Identify required supports
    • Seek policy approval
    • Establish roles and responsibilities for policy maintenance

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure & Operations Manager
    • Infrastructure Supervisors
    • Technical Writer
    • Policy Stakeholders

    Results & Insights

    • Results: Well-supported policies that have received signoff.
    • Insights: If you’re not prepared to enforce the policy, you might not actually need a policy. Use the policy statements as guidelines or standards, create and implement procedures, and build a culture of compliance. Once you can confidently execute on required controls, seek signoff.

    Gather feedback from users to assess the feasibility of the new policies

    Associated Activity icon 2(b) Review period: 1-2 weeks

    Once the policies are drafted, roundtable the drafts with stakeholders.

    INPUT: Draft policies

    OUTPUT: Reviewed policy drafts ready for approval

    Materials: Policy drafts

    Participants: Policy stakeholders

    1. Form a test group of users who will be affected by the policy in different ways. Keep the group to around five staff.
    2. Present new policies to the testers. Allow them to read the documents and attempt to comply with the new policies in their daily routines.
    3. Collect feedback from the group.
      • Consider using interviews, email surveys, chat channels, or group discussions.
      • Solicit ideas on how policy statements could be improved or streamlined.
    4. Make reasonable changes to the first draft of the policies before submitting them for approval. Policies will only be followed if they’re realistic and user friendly.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Allow staff the opportunity to provide input on policy development. Giving employees a say in policy development helps avoid obstacles down the road. This is especially true if you’re trying to change behavior rather than lock it in.

    Develop mechanisms for monitoring and enforcement

    Associated Activity icon 2(c) 20 minutes per policy

    Brainstorm preventive and detective controls.

    INPUT: Draft policies

    OUTPUT: Reviewed policy drafts ready for approval

    Materials: Policy drafts

    Participants: Policy stakeholders

    Preventive controls are designed to discourage or pre-empt policy breaches before they occur. Training, approvals processes, and segregation of duties are examples of preventive controls. (Ohio University)

    Detective controls help enforce the policy by identifying breaches after they occur. Forensic analysis and event log auditing are examples of detective controls. (Ohio University)

    Not all policies require the same level of enforcement. Policies that are required by law or regulation generally require stricter enforcement than policies that outline best practices or organizational values.

    Identify controls and enforcement mechanisms that are in line with policy requirements. Build control and enforcement into procedure documentation as needed.

    Suggestions:

    1. Have staff sign off on policies. Disclose any monitoring/surveillance.
    2. Ensure consequences match the severity of the infraction. Document infractions and ensure that enforcement is applied consistently across all infractions.
    3. Automatic controls shouldn’t get in the way of people’s ability to do their jobs. Test controls with users before you roll them out widely.

    Support the policy before seeking approval

    A policy is only as strong as its supporting pillars.

    Create Standards

    Standards are requirements that support policy adherence. Server builds and images, purchase approval criteria, and vulnerability severity definitions can all be examples of standards that improve policy adherence.

    Where reasonable, use automated controls to enforce standards. If you automate the control, consider how you’ll handle exceptions.

    Create Guidelines

    If no standards exist – or best practices can’t be monitored and enforced, as standards require – write guidelines to help users remain in compliance with the policy.

    Create Procedures: We’ll cover procedure development and documentation in Phase 3.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In general, failing to follow or strictly enforce a policy creates a risk for the business. If you’re not confident a policy will be followed or enforced, consider using policy statements as guidelines or standards as an interim measure as you update procedures and communicate and roll out changes that support adherence and enforcement.

    Seek approval and communicate the policy

    Policies ultimately need to be accepted by the business.

    • Once the drafts are completed, identify who is in charge of approving the policies.
    • Ensure all stakeholders understand the importance, context, and repercussions of the policies.
    • The approvals process is about appropriate oversight of the drafted policies. For example:
      • Do the policies satisfy compliance and regulatory requirements?
      • Do the policies work with the corporate culture?
      • Do the policies address the underlying need?

    If the draft is rejected:

    • Acquire feedback and make revisions.
    • Resubmit for approval.

    If the draft is approved:

    • Set the effective date and a review date.
    • Begin communication, training, and implementation.
    • Employees must know that there are new policies and understand the steps they must take to comply with the policies in their work.
    • Employees must be able to interpret, understand, and know how to act upon the information they find in the policies.
    • Employees must be informed on where to get help or ask questions and from whom to request policy exceptions.

    "A lot of board members and executive management teams… don’t understand the technology and the risks posed by it." (Carole Fennelly, Owner and Principal, cFennelly Consulting)

    Identify policy management roles and responsibilities

    Associated Activity icon 2(d) 30 minutes

    Discuss and assign roles and responsibilities for ongoing policy management.

    Role

    Responsibilities

    Executive sponsor

  • Supports the program at the highest levels of the business, as needed
  • Program lead

  • Leads the Infrastructure & Operations policy management program
  • Identifies and communicates status updates to the executive sponsor and the project team
  • Coordinates business demands and interviews and organizes stakeholders to identify requirements
  • Manages the work team and coordinates policy rollout
  • Policy writer

  • Authors and updates policies based on requirements
  • Coordinates with outsourced editor for completion of written documents
  • IT infrastructure SMEs

  • Provide technical insight into capabilities and limitations of infrastructure systems
  • Provide advice on possible controls that can aid policy rollout, monitoring, and enforcement
  • Legal expert

  • Provides legal advice on the policy’s legal terms and enforceability
  • "Whether at the level of a government, a department, or a sub-organization: technology and policy expertise complement one another and must be part of the conversation." (Peter Sheingold, Portfolio Manager, Cybersecurity, MITRE Corporation)

    Phase 2: Review accomplishments

    Effective Policies: Clear, Consistent, and Concise

    An icon for the 'DSS02 Service Desk' template.

    An icon for the 'DSS03 Incident and Problem Management' template.

    An icon for the 'BAI06 Change Management' template.

    An icon for the 'BAI07 Release Management' template.

    An icon for the 'BAI09 Asset Management' template.

    An icon for the 'DSS04 DR and Business Continuity' template.

    An icon for the 'BAI04 Availability and Capacity Management' template.

    An icon for the 'DSS01 Operations Management' template.

    An icon for the 'BAI10 Configuration Management' template.

    Summary of Accomplishments

    • Built priority policies based on templates aligned with the IT Management & Governance Framework and COBIT 5.
    • Reviewed controls and policy supports.
    • Assigned roles and responsibilities for ongoing policy maintenance.

    Develop Infrastructure & Operations Policies and Procedures

    Phase 3

    Document Effective Procedures

    PHASE 3: Document Effective Procedures

    Step 3.1: Scope and outline procedures

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Prioritize SOP documentation
    • Draft workflows using a tabletop exercise
    • Modify templates, as applicable

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure & Operations Manager
    • Technical Writer
    • Infrastructure Supervisors

    Results & Insights

    • Results: An action plan for SOP documentation and an outline of procedure workflows.
    • Insights: Don’t let tools get in the way of documentation – low-tech solutions are often the most effective way to build and analyze workflows.

    Prioritize your SOP documentation effort

    Associated Activity icon 3(a) 1-2 hours

    Build SOP documentation that gets used and doesn’t just check a box.

    1. Review the list of procedure gaps from Phase 1. Are any other procedures needed? Are some of the procedures now redundant?
    2. Establish the scope of the proposed procedures. Who are the stakeholders? What policies do they support?
    3. Run a basic prioritization exercise using a three-point scale. Higher scores mean greater risks or greater benefits. Score the risk of the undocumented procedure to the business (e.g. potential effect on data, productivity, goodwill, health and safety, or compliance). Score the benefit to the business of documenting the procedure (e.g. throughput improvements or knowledge transfer).
    4. Different procedures require different formats. Decide on one or more formats that can help you effectively document the procedure:
      • Flowcharts: Depict workflows and decision points. Provide an at-a-glance view that is easy to follow. Can be supported by checklists and diagrams where more detail is required.
      • Checklists: A reminder of what to do, rather than how to do it. Keep instructions brief.
      • Diagrams: Visualize objects, topologies, and connections for reference purposes.
      • Tables: Establish relationships between related categories.
      • Prose: Use full-text instructions where other documentation strategies are insufficient.

    Modify the following Info-Tech templates for larger SOPs

    Support these processes...

    ...with these blueprints...

    ...to create SOPs using these templates.

    An icon for the 'DSS04 DR and Business Continuity' template. Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan DRP Summary
    An icon for the 'BAI09 Asset Management' template. Implement IT Asset Management HAM SOP and SAM SOP
    An icon for the 'BAI06 Change Management' template. An icon for the 'BAI07 Release Management' template. Optimize Change Management Change Management SOP
    An icon for the 'DSS02 Service Desk' template. An icon for the 'DSS03 Incident and Problem Management' template. Standardize the Service Desk Service Desk SOP

    Use tabletop planning or whiteboards to draft workflows

    Associated Activity icon 3(b) 30 minutes

    Tabletop planning is a paper-based exercise in which your team walks through a particular process and maps out what happens at each stage.

    OUTPUT: Steps in the current process for one SOP

    Materials: Tabletop, pen, and cue cards

    Participants: Process owners, SMEs

    1. For this exercise, choose one particular process to document.
    2. Document each step of the process on cue cards, which can be arranged on the table in sequence.
    3. Be sure to include task ownership in your steps.
    4. Map out the process as it currently happens – we’ll think about how to improve it later.
    5. Keep focused. Stay on task and on time.

    Example:

    • Step 3: PM reviews new defects daily
    • Step 4: PM assigns defects to tech leads
    • Step 5: Assigned resource updates status – frequency is based on ticket priority

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t get weighed down by tools. Relying on software or other technological tools can detract from the exercise. Use simple tools such as cue cards to record steps so that you can easily rearrange steps or insert steps based on input from the group.

    Collaborate to optimize the SOP

    Associated Activity icon 3(c) 30 minutes

    Review the tabletop exercise. What gaps exist in current processes?
    How can the processes be made better? What are the outputs and checkpoints?

    OUTPUT: Identify steps to optimize the SOP

    Materials: Tabletop, pen, and cue cards

    Participants: Process owners, SMEs

    Example:

    • Step 3: PM reviews new defects daily
    • NEW STEP: Schedule 10-minute daily defect reviews with PM and tech leads to evaluate ticket priority
    • Step 4: PM assigns defects to tech leads
    • Step 5: Assigned resource updates status – frequency is based on ticket priority
      • Step 5 Subprocess: Ticket status update
      • Step 5 Output: Ticket status moved to OPEN by assigned resource – acknowledges receipt by assigned resource

    A note on colors: Use white cards to record steps. Record gaps on yellow cards (e.g. a process step not documented) and risks on red cards (e.g. only one person knows how to execute a step) to highlight your gaps/to-dos and risks to be mitigated or accepted.

    If it’s necessary to clarify complex process flows during the exercise, you can also use green cards for decision diamonds, purple for document/report outputs, and blue for subprocesses.

    PHASE 3: Document Effective Procedures

    Step 3.2: Document effective procedures

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Document workflows, checklists, and diagrams
    • Establish a cadence for document review and updates

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Technical Writer

    Results & Insights

    • Results: Improved SOP documentation and document management practices.
    • Insights: It’s possible to keep up with changes if you put the right cues and accountabilities in place. Include document review in project and change management procedures and hold staff accountable for completion.

    Document workflows with flowcharting software

    Suggestions for workflow documentation

    • Whether you draft the workflow on a whiteboard or using cue cards, the first iteration is usually messy. Clean up the flow as you document the results of the exercise.
    • Make the workflow as simple as possible and no simpler. Eliminate any decision points that aren’t strictly necessary to complete the procedure.
    • Use standard flowchart shapes (see next slide).
    • Use links to connect to related documentation.
    • Review the documented workflow with participants.

    Download the following workflow examples:

    Establish flowcharting standards

    If you don’t have existing flowchart standards, then keep it simple and stick to basic flowcharting conventions as described below.

    Basic flowcharting convention: a circle can be used for 'Start, End, and Connector'. Start, End, and Connector: Traditional flowcharting standards reserve this shape for connectors to other flowcharts or other points in the existing flowchart. Unified Modeling Language (UML) also uses the circle for start and end points.
    Basic flowcharting convention: a rounded rectangle can be used for 'Start and End'. Start and End: Traditional flowcharting standards use this for start and end. However, Info-Tech recommends using the circle shape to reduce the number of shapes and avoid confusion with other similar shapes.
    Basic flowcharting convention: a rectangle can be used for 'Process Step'. Process Step: Individual process steps or activities (e.g. create ticket or escalate ticket). If it’s a series of steps, then use the subprocess symbol and flowchart the subprocess separately.
    Basic flowcharting convention: a rectangle with double-line on the ends can be used for 'Subprocess'. Subprocess: A series of steps. For example, a critical incident SOP might reference a recovery process as one of the possible actions. Marking it as a subprocess, rather than listing each step within the critical incident SOP, streamlines the flowchart and avoids overlap with other flowcharts (e.g. the recovery process).
    Basic flowcharting convention: a diamond can be used for 'Decision'. Decision: Represents decision points, typically with Yes/No branches, but you could have other branches depending on the question (e.g. a “Priority?” question could branch into separate streams for Priority 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 issues).
    Basic flowcharting convention: a rectangle with a wavy bottom can be used for 'Document/Report Output'. Document/Report Output: For example, the output from a backup process might include an error log.

    Support workflows with checklists and diagrams

    Diagrams

    • Diagrams are a visual representation of real-world phenomena and the connections between them.
    • Be sure to use standard shapes. Clearly label elements of the diagram. Use standard practices, including titles, dates, authorship, and versioning.
    • IT systems and interconnections are layered. Include physical, logical, protocol, and data flow connections.

    Examples:

    • XMPL Recovery Workflows
    • Workflow Library

    Checklists

    • Checklists are best used as short-form reminders on how to complete a particular task.
    • Remember the audience. If the process will be carried out by technical staff, there’s technical background material you won’t need to spell out in detail.

    Examples:

    • Employee Termination Process Checklist
    • XMPL Systems Recovery Playbook

    Establish a cadence for documentation review and maintenance

    Lock-in the work with strong document management practices.

    • Identify documentation requirements as part of project planning.
    • Require a manager or supervisor to review and approve SOPs.
    • Check documentation status as part of change management.
    • Hold staff accountable for documentation.

    "It isn’t unusual for us to see infrastructure or operations documentation that is wildly out of date. We’re talking months, even years. Often it was produced as one big effort and then not reliably maintained." (Gary Patterson, Consultant, Quorum Resources)

    Only a quarter of organizations update SOPs as needed

    A bar chart representing how often organizations update SOPs. Each option has two bars, one representing 'North America', the other representing 'Europe and Asia'. 'Never or rarely' is 11% in North America and 3% in Europe and Asia. 'Ad-hoc approach' is 38% in North America and 28% in Europe and Asia. 'For audits/annual reviews' is 33% in North America and 45% in Europe and Asia. 'As needed/via change management' is 18% in North America and 25% in Europe and Asia. Source: Info-Tech Research Group (N=104)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Use Info-Tech’s research Create Visual SOP Documents to further evaluate document management practices and toolsets.

    Phase 3: Review accomplishments

    Workflow documentation: Cue cards into flowcharts

    Summary of Accomplishments

    • Identified priority procedures for documentation activities.
    • Created procedure documentation in the appropriate format and level of granularity to support Infra & Ops policies.
    • Published and maintained procedure documentation.

    Research contributors and experts

    Carole Fennelly, Owner
    cFennelly Consulting

    Picture of Carole Fennelly, Owner, cFennelly Consulting.

    Carole Fennelly provides pragmatic cyber security expertise to help organizations bridge the gap between technical and business requirements. She authored the Center for Internet Security (CIS) Solaris and Red Hat benchmarks, which are used globally as configuration standards to secure IT systems. As a consultant, Carole has defined security strategies, and developed policies and procedures to implement them, at numerous Fortune 500 clients. Carole is a Certified Information Security Manager (CISM), Certified Security Compliance Specialist (CSCS), and Certified HIPAA Professional (CHP).

    Marko Diepold, IT Audit Manager
    audit2advise

    Picture of Marko Diepold, IT Audit Manager, audit2advise.

    Marko is an IT Audit Manager at audit2advise, where he delivers audit, risk advisory, and project management services. He has worked as a Security Officer, Quality Manager, and Consultant at some of Germany’s largest companies. He is a CISA and is ITIL v3 Intermediate and ITGCP certified.

    Research contributors and experts

    Martin Andenmatten, Founder & Managing Director
    Glenfis AG

    Picture of Martin Andenmatten, Founder and Managing Director, Glenfis AG.

    Martin is a digital transformation enabler who has been involved in various fields of IT for more than 30 years. At Glenfis, he leads large Governance and Service Management projects for various customers. Since 2002, he has been the course manager for ITIL® Foundation, ITIL® Service Management, and COBIT training. He has published two books on ISO 20000 and ITIL.

    Myles F. Suer, CIO Chat Facilitator
    CIO.com/Dell Boomi

    Picture of Myles F. Suer, CIO Chat Facilitator, CIO.com/Dell Boomi.

    Myles Suer, according to LeadTails, is the number 9 influencer of CIOs. He is also the facilitator for the CIOChat, which has executive-level participants from around the world in such industries as banking, insurance, education, and government. Myles is also the Industry Solutions Marketing Manager at Dell Boomi.

    Research contributors and experts

    Peter Sheingold, Portfolio Manager
    Cybersecurity, Homeland Security Center, The MITRE Corporation

    Picture of Peter Sheingold, Portfolio Manager, Cybersecurity, Homeland Security Center, The MITRE Corporation.

    Peter leads tasks that involve collaboration with the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) sponsors and MITRE colleagues and connect strategy, policy, organization, and technology. He brings a deep background in homeland security and strategic analysis to his work with DHS in the immigration, border security, and cyber mission spaces. Peter came to MITRE in 2005 but has worked with DHS from its inception.

    Robert D. Austin, Professor
    Ivey Business School

    Picture of Robert D. Austin, Professor, Ivey Business School.

    Dr. Austin is a professor of Information Systems at Ivey Business School and an affiliated faculty member at Harvard Medical School. Before his appointment at Ivey, he was a professor of Innovation and Digital Transformation at Copenhagen Business School, and, before that, a professor of Technology and Operations Management at the Harvard Business School.

    Research contributors and experts

    Ron Jones, Director of IT Infrastructure and Service Management
    DATA Communications

    Picture of Ron Jones, Director of IT Infrastructure and Service Management, DATA Communications.

    Ron is a senior IT leader with over 20 years of management experiences from engineering to IT Service Management and operations support. He is known for joining organizations and leading enhanced process efficiency and has improved software, hardware, infrastructure, and operations solution delivery and support. Ron has worked for global and Canadian firms including BlackBerry, DoubleClick, Cogeco, Infusion, Info-Tech Research Group, and Data Communications Management.

    Scott Genung, Executive Director of Networking, Infrastructure, and Service Operations
    University of Chicago

    Picture of Scott Genung, Executive Director of Networking, Infrastructure, and Service Operations, University of Chicago.

    Scott is an accomplished IT executive with 26 years of experience in technical and leadership roles. In his current role, Scott provides strategic leadership, vision, and oversight for an IT portfolio supporting 31,000 users consisting of services utilized by campuses located in North America, Asia, and Europe; oversees the University’s Command Center; and chairs the UC Cyberinfrastructure Alliance (UCCA), a group of research IT providers that collectively deliver services to the campus and partners.

    Research contributors and experts

    Steve Weil, CISSP, CISM, CRISC, Information Security Director, Cybersecurity Principal Consultant
    Point B

    Picture of Steve Weil, CISSP, CISM, CRISC, Information Security Director, Cybersecurity Principal Consultant, Point B.

    Steve has 20 years of experience in information security design, implementation, and assessment. He has provided information security services to a wide variety of organizations, including government agencies, hospitals, universities, small businesses, and large enterprises. With his background as a systems administrator, security consultant, security architect, and information security director, Steve has a strong understanding of both the strategic and tactical aspects of information security. Steve has significant hands-on experience with security controls, operating systems, and applications. Steve has a master's degree in Information Science from the University of Washington.

    Tony J. Read, Senior Program/Project Lead & Interim IT Executive
    Read & Associates

    Picture of Tony J. Read, Senior Program/Project Lead and Interim IT Executive, Read and Associates.

    Tony has over 25 years of international IT leadership experience, within high tech, computing, telecommunications, finance, banking, government, and retail industries. Throughout his career, Tony has led and successfully implemented key corporate initiatives, contributing millions of dollars to the top and bottom line. He established Read & Associates in 2002, an international IT management and program/project delivery consultancy practice whose aim is to provide IT value-based solutions, realizing stakeholder economic value and network advantage. These key concepts are presented in his new book: The IT Value Network: From IT Investment to Stakeholder Value, published by J. Wiley, NJ.

    Related Info-Tech research

    • Develop and Deploy Security Policies
    • Develop an Availability and Capacity Management Plan
    • Improve IT Operations Management
    • Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook
    • Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    • Develop a Business Continuity Plan
    • Implement IT Asset Management
    • Optimize Change Management
    • Standardize the Service Desk
    • Incident and Problem Management
    • Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog

    Bibliography

    “About Controls.” Ohio University, ND. Web. 2 Feb 2018.

    England, Rob. “How to implement ITIL for a client?” The IT Skeptic. Two Hills Ltd, 4 Feb. 2010. Web. 2018.

    “Global Corporate IT Security Risks: 2013.” Kaspersky Lab, May 2013. Web. 2018.

    “Information Security and Technology Policies.” City of Chicago, Department of Innovation and Technology, Oct. 2014. Web. 2018.

    ISACA. COBIT 5: Enabling Processes. International Systems Audit and Control Association. Rolling Meadows, IL.: 2012.

    “IT Policy & Governance.” NYC Information Technology & Telecommunications, ND. Web. 2018.

    King, Paula and Kent Wada. “IT Policy: An Essential Element of IT Infrastructure”. EDUCAUSE Review. May-June 2001. Web. 2018.

    Luebbe, Max. “Simplicity.” Site Reliability Engineering. O’Reilly Media. 2017. Web. 2018.

    Swartout, Shawn. “Risk assessment, acceptance, and exception with a process view.” ISACA Charlotte Chapter September Event, 2013. Web. 2018.

    “User Guide to Writing Policies.” Office of Policy and Efficiency, University of Colorado, ND. Web. 2018.

    “The Value of Policies and Procedures.” New Mexico Municipal League, ND. Web. 2018.

    Enterprise Network Design Considerations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}502|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Network Management
    • Parent Category Link: /network-management

    Security, risk, and trust models play into how networks are designed and deployed. If these models are not considered during network design, band-aids and workarounds will be deployed to achieve the needed goals, potentially bypassing network controls.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The cloud “gold rush” has made it attractive for many enterprises to migrate services off the traditional network and into the cloud. These services are now outside of the traditional network and associated controls. This shifts the split of east-west vs. north-south traffic patterns, as well as extending the network to encompass services outside of enterprise IT’s locus of control.

    Impact and Result

    Where users access enterprise data or services and from which devices dictate the connectivity needed. With the increasing shift of work that the business is completing remotely, not all devices and data paths will be under the control of IT. This shift does not allow IT to abdicate from the responsibility to provide a secure network.

    Enterprise Network Design Considerations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Enterprise Network Design Considerations Deck – A brief deck that outlines key trusts and archetypes when considering enterprise network designs.

    This blueprint will help you:

    • Enterprise Network Design Considerations Storyboard

    2. Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool – Build an infrastructure assessment in an hour.

    Dispense with detailed analysis and customizations to present a quick snapshot of the road ahead.

    • Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Enterprise Network Design Considerations

    It is not just about connectivity.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech Insight

    Connectivity and security are tightly coupled

    Security, risk, and trust models play into how networks are designed and deployed. If these models are not considered during network design, band-aids and workarounds will be deployed to achieve the needed goals, potentially bypassing network controls.

    Many services are no longer within the network

    The cloud “gold rush” has made it attractive for many enterprises to migrate services off the traditional network and into the cloud. These services are now outside of the traditional network and associated controls. This shifts the split of east-west vs. north-south traffic patterns, as well as extending the network to encompass services outside of enterprise IT’s locus of control.

    Users are demanding an anywhere, any device access model

    Where users access enterprise data or services and from which devices dictate the connectivity needed. With the increasing shift of work that the business is completing remotely, not all devices and data paths will be under the control of IT. This shift does not allow IT to abdicate from the responsibility to provide a secure network.

    Enterprise networks are changing

    The new network reality

    The enterprise network of 2020 and beyond is changing:

    • Services are becoming more distributed.
    • The number of services provided “off network” is growing.
    • Users are more often remote.
    • Security threats are rapidly escalating.

    The above statements are all accurate for enterprise networks, though each potentially to differing levels depending on the business being supported by the network. Depending on how affected the network in question currently is and will be in the near future, there are different common network archetypes that are best able to address these concerns while delivering business value at an appropriate price point.

    High-Level Design Considerations

    1. Understand Business Needs
    2. Understand what the business needs are and where users and resources are located.

    3. Define Your Trust Model
    4. Trust is a spectrum and tied tightly to security.

    5. Align With an Archetype
    6. How will the network be deployed?

    7. Understand Available Tooling
    8. What tools are in the market to help achieve design principles?

    Understand business needs

    Mission

    Never ignore the basics. Start with revisiting the mission and vision of the business to address relevant needs.

    Users

    Identify where users will be accessing services from. Remote vs. “on net” is a design consideration now more than ever.

    Resources

    Identify required resources and their locations, on net vs. cloud.

    Controls

    Identify required controls in order to define control points and solutions.

    Define a trust model

    Trust is a spectrum

    • There is a spectrum of trust, from fully trusted to not trusted at all. Each organization must decide for their network (or each area thereof) the appropriate level of trust to assign.
    • The ease of network design and deployment is directly proportional to the trust spectrum.
    • When resources and users are outside of direct IT control, the level of appropriate trust should be examined closely.

    Implicit

    Trust everything within the network. Security is perimeter based and designed to stop external actors from entering the large trusted zone.

    Controlled

    Multiple zones of trust within the network. Segmentation is a standard practice to separate areas of higher and lower trust.

    Zero

    Verify trust. The network is set up to recognize and support the principle of least privilege where only required access is supported.

    Align with an archetype

    Archetypes are a good guide

    • Using a defined archetype as a guiding principle in network design can help clarify appropriate tools or network structures.
    • Different aspects of a network can have different archetypes where appropriate (e.g. IT vs. OT [operational technology] networks).

    Traditional

    Services are provided from within the traditional network boundaries and security is provided at the network edge.

    Hybrid

    Services are provided both externally and from within the traditional network boundaries, and security is primarily at the network edge.

    Inverted

    Services are provided primarily externally, and security is cloud centric.

    Traditional networks

    Resources within network boundaries

    Moat and castle security perimeter

    Abstract

    A traditional network is one in which there are clear boundaries defined by a security perimeter. Trust can be applied within the network boundaries as appropriate, and traffic is generally routed through internally deployed control points that may be centralized. Traditional networks commonly include large firewalls and other “big iron” security and control devices.

    Network Design Tenets

    • The full network path from resource to user is designed, deployed, and controlled by IT.
    • Users external to the network must first connect to the network to gain access to resources.
    • Security, risk, and trust controls will be implemented by internal enterprise hardware/software devices.

    Control

    In the traditional network, it is assumed that all required control points can be adequately deployed across hardware/software that is “on prem” and under the control of central IT.

    Info-Tech Insight

    With increased cloud services provided to end users, this network is now more commonly used in data centers or OT networks.

    Traditional networks

    The image contains an example of what traditional networks look like, as described in the text below.

    Defining Characteristics

    • Traffic flows in a defined path under the control of IT to and from central IT resources.
    • Due to visibility into, and the control of, the traffic between the end user and resources, IT can relatively simply implement the required security controls on owned hardware.

    Common Components

    • Traditional offices
    • Remote users/road warriors
    • Private data center/colocation space

    Hybrid networks

    Resources internal and external to network

    Network security perimeter combined with cloud protection

    Abstract

    A hybrid network is one that combines elements of a traditional network with cloud resources. As some of these resources are not fully under the control of IT and may be completely “offnet” or loosely coupled to the on-premises network, the security boundaries and control points are less likely to be centralized. Hybrid networks allow the flexibility and speed of cloud deployment without leaving behind traditional network constructs. This generally makes them expensive to secure and maintain.

    Network Design Tenets

    • The network path from resource to user may not be in IT’s locus of control.
    • Users external to the network must first connect to the network to gain access to internal resources but may directly access publicly hosted ones.
    • Security, risk, and trust controls may potentially be implemented by a mixture of internal enterprise hardware/software devices and external control points.

    Control

    The hallmark of a hybrid network is the blending of public and private resources. This blending tends to necessitate both public and private points of control that may not be homogenous.

    Info-Tech Insight

    With multiple control points to address, take care in simplifying designs while addressing all concerns to ease operational load.

    Hybrid networks

    The image contains an example of what hybrid networks look like, as described in the text below.

    Defining Characteristics

    • Traffic flows to central resources across a defined path under the control of IT.
    • Traffic to cloud assets may be partially under the control of IT.
    • For central resources, the traffic to and from the end user can have the required security controls relatively simply implemented on owned hardware.
    • For public cloud assets, IT may or may not have some control over part of the path.

    Common Components

    • Traditional offices
    • Remote users/road warriors
    • Private data center/colocation space
    • Public cloud assets (IaaS/PaaS/SaaS)

    Inverted perimeter

    Resources primarily external to the network

    Security control points are cloud centric

    Abstract

    An inverted perimeter network is one in which security and control points cover the entire workflow, on or off net, from the consumer of services through to the services themselves with zero trust. Since the control plane is designed to encompass the workflow in a secure manner, much of the underlying connectivity can be abstracted. In an extreme version of this deployment, IT would abstract end-user access, and any cloud-based or on-premises resources would be securely published through the control plane with context-aware precision access.

    Network Design Tenets

    • The network path from resource to user is abstracted and controlled by IT through services like secure access service edge (SASE).
    • Users only need internet access and appropriate credentials to gain access to resources.
    • Security, risk, and trust controls will be implemented through external cloud based services.

    Control

    An inverted network abstracts the lower-layer connectivity away and focuses on implementing a cloud-based zero trust control plane.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This model is extremely attractive for organizations that consume primarily cloud services and have a large remote work force.

    Inverted networks

    The image contains an example of what inverted networks look like, as described in the text below.

    Defining Characteristics

    • The end user does not have to be in a defined location.
    • All central resources that are to be accessed are hosted on cloud resources.
    • IT has little to no control of the path between the end user and central resources.

    Common Components

    • Traditional offices
    • Regent offices/shared workspaces
    • Remote users/road warriors
    • Public cloud assets (IaaS/PaaS/SaaS)

    Understand available tooling

    Don’t buy a hammer and go looking for nails

    • A network archetype must be defined in order to understand what tools (hardware or software) are appropriate for consideration in a network build or refresh.
    • Tools are purpose built and generally designed to solve specific problems if implemented and operated correctly. Choose the tools to align with the challenges that you are solving as opposed to choosing tools and then trying to use those purchases to overcome challenges.
    • The purchase of a tool does not allow for abdication of proper design. Tools must be chosen appropriately and integrated properly to orchestrate the best solutions. Purchasing a tool and expecting the tool to solve all your issues rarely succeeds.

    “It is essential to have good tools, but it is also essential that the tools should be used in the right way.” — Wallace D. Wattles

    Software-defined WAN (SD-WAN)

    Simplified branch office connectivity

    Archetype Value: Traditional Networks

    What It Is Not

    SD-WAN is generally not a way to slash spending by lowering WAN circuit costs. Though it is traditionally deployed across lower cost access, to minimize risk and realize the most benefits from the platform many organizations install multiple circuits with greater bandwidths at each endpoint when replacing the more costly traditional circuits. Though this maximizes the value of the technology investment, it will result in the end cost being similar to the traditional cost plus or minus a small percentage.

    What It Is

    SD-WAN is a subset of software-defined networking (SDN) designed specifically to deploy a secure, centrally managed, connectivity agnostic, overlay network connecting multiple office locations. This technology can be used to replace, work in concert with, or augment more traditional costly connectivity such as MPLS or private point to point (PtP) circuits. In addition to the secure overlay, SD-WAN usually also enables policy-based, intelligent controls, based on traffic and circuit intelligence.

    Why Use It

    You have multiple endpoint locations connected by expensive lower bandwidth traditional circuits. Your target is to increase visibility and control while controlling costs if and where possible. Ease of centralized management and the ability to more rapidly turn up new locations are attractive.

    Cloud access security broker (CASB)

    Inline policy enforcement placed between users and cloud services

    Archetype Value: Hybrid Networks

    What It Is Not

    CASBs do not provide network protection; they are designed to provide compliance and enforcement of rules. Though CASBs are designed to give visibility and control into cloud traffic, they have limits to the data that they generally ingest and utilize. A CASB does not gather or report on cloud usage details, licencing information, financial costing, or whether the cloud resource usage is aligned with the deployment purpose.

    What It Is

    A CASB is designed to establish security controls beyond a company’s environment. It is commonly deployed to augment traditional solutions to extend visibility and control into the cloud. To protect assets in the cloud, CASBs are designed to provide central policy control and apply services primarily in the areas of visibility, data security, threat protection, and compliance.

    Why Use It

    You a mixture of on-premises and cloud assets. In moving assets out to the cloud, you have lost the traditional controls that were implemented in the data center. You now need to have visibility and apply controls to the usage of these cloud assets.

    Secure access service edge (SASE)

    Convergence of security and service access in the cloud

    Archetype Value: Inverted Networks

    What It Is Not

    Though the service will consist of many service offerings, SASE is not multiple services strung together. To present the value proposed by this platform, all functionality proposed must be provided by a single platform under a “single pane of glass.” SASE is not a mature and well-established service. The market is still solidifying, and the full-service definition remains somewhat fluid.

    What It Is

    SASE exists at the intersection of network-as-a-service and network-security-as-a-service. It is a superset of many network and security cloud offerings such as CASB, secure web gateway, SD-WAN, and WAN optimization. Any services offered by a SASE provider will be cloud hosted, presented in a single stack, and controlled through a single pane of glass.

    Why Use It

    Your network is inverting, and services are provided primarily as cloud assets. In a full realization of this deployment’s value, you would abstract how and where users gain initial network access yet remain in control of the communications and data flow.

    Activity

    Understand your enterprise network options

    Activity: Network assessment in an hour

    • Learn about the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool
    • Complete the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool

    This activity involves the following participants:

    • IT strategic direction decision makers.
    • IT managers responsible for network.
    • Organizations evaluating platforms for mission critical applications.

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Completed Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    Review your design options with security and compliance in mind. Infrastructure is no longer a standalone entity and now tightly integrates with software-defined networks and security solutions.

    Build an assessment in an hour

    Learn about the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool.

    This workbook provides a high-level analysis of a technology’s readiness for adoption based on your organization’s needs.

    • The workbook then places the technology on a graph that measures both the readiness and fit for your organization. In addition, it provides warnings for specific issues and lets you know if you have considerable uncertainty in your answers.
    • At a glance you can now communicate what you are doing to help the company:
      • Grow
      • Save money
      • Reduce risk
    • Regardless of your specific audience, these are important stories to be able to tell.
    The image contains three screenshots from the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool.

    Build an assessment in an hour

    Complete the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool.

    Dispense with detailed analysis and customizations to present a quick snapshot of the road ahead.

    1. Weightings: Adjust the Weighting tab to meet organizational needs. The provided weightings for the overall solution areas are based on a generic firm; individual firms will have different needs.
    2. Data Entry: For each category, answer the questions for the technology you are considering. When you have completed the questionnaire, go to the next tab for the results.
    3. Results: The Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool provides a value versus readiness assessment of your chosen technology customized to your organization.

    The image contains three screenshots from the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool. It has a screenshot for each step as described in the text above.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services

    Acquiring a service is like buying an experience. Don’t confuse the simplicity of buying hardware with buying an experience.

    Outsource IT Infrastructure to Improve System Availability, Reliability, and Recovery

    There are very few IT infrastructure components you should be housing internally – outsource everything else.

    Build Your Infrastructure Roadmap

    Move beyond alignment: Put yourself in the driver’s seat for true business value.

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

    Leverage your vendor sourcing process to get better results.

    Research Authors

    The image contains a photo of Scott Young.

    Scott Young, Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Young is a Director of Infrastructure Research at Info-Tech Research Group. Scott has worked in the technology field for over 17 years, with a strong focus on telecommunications and enterprise infrastructure architecture. He brings extensive practical experience in these areas of specialization, including IP networks, server hardware and OS, storage, and virtualization.

    The image contains a photo of Troy Cheeseman.

    Troy Cheeseman, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Troy has over 24 years of experience and has championed large enterprise-wide technology transformation programs, remote/home office collaboration and remote work strategies, BCP, IT DRP, IT operations and expense management programs, international right placement initiatives, and large technology transformation initiatives (M&A). Additionally, he has deep experience working with IT solution providers and technology (cloud) startups.

    Bibliography

    Ahlgren, Bengt. “Design considerations for a network of information.” ACM Digital Library, 21 Dec. 2008.

    Cox Business. “Digital transformation is here. Is your business ready to upgrade your mobile work equation?” BizJournals, 1 April 2022. Accessed April 2022.

    Elmore, Ed. “Benefits of integrating security and networking with SASE.” Tech Radar, 1 April 2022. Web.

    Greenfield, Dave. “From SD-WAN to SASE: How the WAN Evolution is Progressing.” Cato Networks, 19 May 2020. Web

    Korolov, Maria. “What is SASE? A cloud service that marries SD-WAN with security.” Network World, 7 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Korzeniowski, Paul, “CASB tools evolve to meet broader set of cloud security needs.” TechTarget, 26 July 2019. Accessed March 2022.

    Build a Platform-Based Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}98|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,420 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • The organization is riddled with bureaucracy. Some even believe that bureaucracy is inevitable and is an outcome of a complex business operating in a complex market and regulatory environment.
    • Time to market for new products and services is excruciatingly long.
    • Digital natives like Facebook, Netflix, and Spotify do not compare well with the organization and cannot be looked to for inspiration.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Large corporations often consist of a few operating units, each with its own idiosyncracies about strategies, culture, and capabilities. These tightly integrated operating units make a company prone to bureaucracy.
    • The antidote to this bureaucracy is a platform structure: small, autonomous teams operating as startups within the organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Platforms consist of related activities and associated technologies that deliver on a specific organizational goal. A platform can therefore be run as a business or as a service. This structure of small autonomous teams that are loosely joined will make your employees directly accountable to the customers. In a way, they become entrepreneurs and do not remain just employees.

    Build a Platform-Based Organization Research & Tools

    Build a platform-based organization

    Download our guide to learn how you can get started with a platform structure.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Build a Platform-Based Organization Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Build a Platform-Based Organization

    Use a platform structure to overcome bureaucracy.

    Analyst Perspective

    Build a platform-based organization.

    Bureaucracy saps innovation out of large corporations. Some even believe that bureaucracy is inevitable and is an outcome of a complex business operating in a complex market and regulatory environment.

    So, what is the antidote to bureaucracy? Some look to startups like Uber, Airbnb, Netflix, and Spotify, but they are digital native and don’t compare well to a large monolithic corporation.

    However, all is not lost for large corporations. Inspiration can be drawn from a company in China – Haier, which is not a typical poster child of the digital age like Spotify. In fact, three decades ago, it was a state-owned company with a shoddy product quality.

    Haier uses an intriguing organization structure based on microenterprises and platforms that has proven to be an antidote to bureaucracy.

    Vivek Mehta
    Research Director, Digital & Innovation
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    The Challenge

    Large corporations are prone to bureaucracies, which sap their organizations of creativity and make them blind to new opportunities. Though many executives express the desire to get rid of it, bureaucracy is thriving in their organizations.

    Why It Happens

    As organizations grow and become more complex over time, they yearn for efficiency and control. Some believe bureaucracy is the natural outcome of running a complex organization in a complex business and regulatory environment.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    A new organizational form – the platform structure – is challenging the bureaucratic model. The platform structure makes employees directly accountable to customers and organizes them in an ecosystem of autonomous units.

    As a starting point, sketch out a platform structure that works for your organization. Then, establish a governance model and identify and nurture key capabilities for the platform structure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The antidote to bureaucracy is a platform structure: small, autonomous teams operating as startups within the organization.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Small pieces, loosely joined

    Haier

    Industry: Manufacturing
    Source: Harvard Business Review November-December 2018

    Haier, based in China, is currently the world’s largest appliance maker. Zhang Ruimin, Haier’s CEO, has built an intriguing organizing structure where every employee is directly accountable to customers – internal and/or external. A large corporation often consists of a few operating units, each with its own idiosyncrasies, which makes it slow to innovate. To avoid that, Haier has divided itself into 4,000 microenterprises (MEs), most of which have ten to 15 employees. There are three types of microenterprises in Haier:

    1. Approximately 200 “transforming” MEs: market-facing units like Zhisheng, which manufactures refrigerators, a legacy Haier product, for today’s young urbanites.
    2. Approximately 50 “incubating” MEs: entirely new businesses like Xinchu that wrap existing products into entirely new business models.
    3. Approximately 3,800 “node” MEs: units that sell component products and services such as design, manufacturing, and human resources support to Haier’s market-facing MEs.

    Each ME operates as an autonomous unit with its own targets – an organizing structure that enables innovation at Haier.

    (Harvard Business Review, 2018)

    The image is a rectangular graphic with the words Refrigeration Platform in the centre. There are six text boxes around the centre, reading (clockwise from top left): Zhisheng Young urbanites; Langdu Premium; Jinchu Mid-priced; Xinchu Internet-connected; Overseas Export markets; Leader Value-priced. There are a series of white boxes bordering the graphic, with the following labels: at top--Sales nodes; at right--Support nodes (R&D, HR, supply chain, etc.); at bottom left---Design nodes; at bottom right--Production nodes.

    Markets disproportionately reward platform structure

    Tech companies like Facebook, Netflix, and Spotify are organized around a set of modular platforms run by accountable platform teams. This modular org structure enables them to experiment, learn, and scale quickly – a key attribute of innovative organizations.

    Facebook ~2,603 million monthly active users

    India ~1,353 million population

    Netflix ~183 million monthly paid subscribers

    Spotify ~130 million premium subscribers

    Canada ~37 million population

    (“Facebook Users Worldwide 2020,” “Number of Netflix Subscribers 2019,” “Spotify Users - Subscribers in 2020,” Statista.)

    1. Sketch Out the Platform Structure

    What is a platform anyway?

    A modular component of an org structure

    Platforms consist of a logical cluster of activities and associated technology that delivers on a specific business goal and can therefore be run as a business, or ‘as a service’ … Platforms focus on business solutions to serve clients (internal or external) and to supply other platforms.” – McKinsey, 2019

    Platforms operate as independent units with their own business, technology, governance, processes, and people management. As an instance, a bank could have payments platform under a joint business and IT leadership. This payments-as-a-service platform could provide know-how, processes, and technology to the bank’s internal customers such as retail and commercial business units.

    Many leading IT organizations are set up in a platform-based structure that allows them to rapidly innovate. It’s an imperative for organizations in other industries that they must pilot and then scale with a platform play.

    What a platform-based org looks like

    It looks like a multicellular organism, where each cell is akin to a platform

    An organism consists of multiple cells of different types, sizes, and shapes. Each cell is independent in its working. Regardless of the type, a cell would have three features –the nucleus, the cell membrane, and, between the two, the cytoplasm.

    Similarly, an organization could be imagined as one consisting of several platforms of different types and sizes. Each platform must be autonomous, but they all share a few common features – have a platform leader, set up and monitor targets, and enable interoperability amongst platforms. Platforms could be of three types (McKinsey, 2019):

    1. Customer-journey platforms enable customer proposition and experience built on reusable code. They provide “journey as a service”; for example, Account Opening in a bank.
    2. Business-solution platforms are modular and run as a business or as a service. They provide “company as a service”; for example, Payments or Fraud Detection in a bank.
    3. Core IT provisioning platforms provide core IT services for the organization, for example, cloud, data, automation.

    There are two images: in the lower part of the graphic shows a multicellular organism, and has text pointing to a single cell. At the top, there is a zoomed in image of that single cell, with its component parts labelled: Cell Membrane, Nucleus, and Cytoplasm.

    Case study: Payments platform in a bank

    Payments as a service to internal business units

    The payments platform is led by an SVP – the platform leader. Business and IT teams are colocated and have joint leadership. The platform team works with a mindset of a startup, serving internal customers of the bank – retail and commercial lines of business.

    A diagram showing Advisory Council in a large grey box on the left. To the right are smaller dark blue boxes labeled 'Real-time peer-to-peer payments,' Wire transfers,' 'Batch payments,' 'Mobile wallets,' and 'International payments (VISA, WU, etc.),' and one light blue box labeled 'Payments innovation.'


    Advisory Council: An Advisory Council is responsible for strategy, business, and IT architecture and for overseeing the work within the team. The Advisory Council prioritizes the work, earmarks project budgets, sets standards such as for APIs and ISO 20022, and leads vendor evaluation.

    International payments (VISA, WU, etc.): Project execution teams are structured around payment modes. Teams collaborate with each other whenever a common functionality is to be developed, like fraud check on a payment or account posting for debits and credits.

    Payments innovation: A think tank keeping track of trends in payments and conducting proof of concepts (POCs) with prospective fintech partners and with new technologies.

    Use a capability map to sketch out a platform-based structure

    Corral your organization’s activities and associated tech into a set of 20 to 40 platforms that cover customer journeys, business capabilities, and core IT. Business and IT teams must jointly work on this activity and could use a capability map as an aid to facilitate the discussion.

    The image is an example of a capability map, shown in more detail in the following section.

    An example of sketching a platform-based org structure for an insurance provider (partial)

    Design Policy Create Policy Issue Policy Service Customers Process Claims Manage Investments
    Defining Market Research & Analysis Underwriting Criteria Selection Customer Targeting Interaction Management First Notice of Loss (FNOL) Investment Strategy
    Actuarial Analysis Product Reserving Needs Assessment & Quotes Payments Claims Investigation Portfolio Management
    Catastrophe Risk Modeling Reinsurance Strategy Contract Issuance Adjustments Claims Adjudication Deposits & Disbursements
    Product Portfolio Strategy Product Prototyping Application Management Renewals Claims Recovery (Subrogation) Cash & Liquidity Management
    Rate Making Product Testing Sales Execution Offboarding Dispute Resolution Capital Allocation
    Policy Definition Product Marketing Contract Change Management

    Customer Retention

    [Servicing a customer request is a customer-journey platform.]

    Claims Inquiry

    [Filing a claim is a customer-journey platform.]

    Credit Bureau Reporting
    Shared Customer Management

    Account Management

    [Customer and account management is a business-capability platform to enable journeys.]

    Channel Management Risk Management Regulatory & Compliance Knowledge Management
    Partner Management

    Access and Identity Management

    [Access and identity management is a core IT platform.]

    Change Management Enterprise Data Management Fraud Detection [Fraud detection is a business-capability platform to enable journeys.] Product Innovation
    Enabling Corporate Governance Strategic Planning Reporting Accounting Enterprise Architecture Human Resources
    Legal Corporate Finance IT Facilities Management

    2. Establish Governance and Nurture Key Capabilities

    Two ingredients of the platform structure

    Establish a governance

    Advisory Council (AC) operates like a conductor at an orchestra, looking across all the activities to understand and manage the individual components.

    Nurture key capabilities

    Team structure, processes and technologies must be thoughtfully orchestrated and nurtured.

    Establish strong governance

    Empowerment does not mean anarchy

    While platforms are distinct units, they must be in sync with each other, like individual musicians in an orchestra. The Advisory Council (AC) must act like a conductor of the orchestra and lead and manage across platforms in three ways.

    1. Prioritize spend and effort. The AC team makes allocation decisions and prioritizes spend and effort on those platforms that can best support organizational goals and/or are in most urgent technical need. The best AC teams have enterprise architects who can understand business and dive deep enough into IT to manage critical interdependencies.
    2. Set and enforce standards. The AC team establishes both business and technology standards for interoperability. For example, the AC team can set the platform and application interfaces standards and the industry standards like ISO 20022 for payments. The AC team can also provide guidance on common apps and tools to use, for example, a reconciliation system for payments.
    3. Facilitate cross-platform work. The AC team has a unique vantage point where it can view and manage interdependencies among programs. As these complexities emerge, the AC team can step in and facilitate the interaction among the involved platform teams. In cases when a common capability is required by multiple platforms, the AC team can facilitate the dialogue to have it built out.

    Nurture the following capabilities:

    Design thinking

    “Zero distance from the customer” is the focus of platform structure. Each platform must operate with a mindset of a startup serving internal and/or external users.

    Agile delivery model

    Platform teams iteratively develop their offerings. With guidance from Advisory Council, they can avoid bottlenecks of formal alignment and approvals.

    Enterprise architecture

    The raison d'être of enterprise architecture discipline is to enable modularity in the architecture, encourage reusability of assets, and simplify design.

    Microservices

    Microservices allow systems to grow with strong cohesion and weak coupling and enable teams to scale components independently.

    APIs

    With their ability to link systems and data, APIs play a crucial role in making IT systems more responsive and adaptable.

    Machine learning

    With the drop in its cost, predictability is becoming the new electricity for business. Platforms use machine learning capability for better predictions.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies
    Innovate and transform your business models with digital platforms.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work
    Guide your organization through its Agile transformation journey.

    Design a Customer-Centric Digital Operating Model
    Putting the customer at the center of digital transformation.

    Bibliography

    Bossert, Oliver, and Jürgen Laartz. “Perpetual Evolution—the Management Approach Required for Digital Transformation.” McKinsey, 5 June 2017. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    Bossert, Oliver, and Driek Desmet. “The Platform Play: How to Operate like a Tech Company.” McKinsey, 28 Feb. 2019. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    “Facebook Users Worldwide 2020.” Statista. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    Hamel, Gary, and Michele Zanini. “The End of Bureaucracy.” Harvard Business Review. Nov.-Dec. 2018. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    “Number of Netflix Subscribers 2019.” Statista. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    “Spotify Users - Subscribers in 2020.” Statista. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}324|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

    There are four key scenarios or entry points for IT as the selling/divesting organization in M&As:

    • IT can suggest a divestiture to meet the business objectives of the organization.
    • IT is brought in to strategy plan the sale/divestiture from both the business’ and IT’s perspectives.
    • IT participates in due diligence activities and complies with the purchasing organization’s asks.
    • IT needs to reactively prepare its environment to enable the separation.

    Consider the ideal scenario for your IT organization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Divestitures are inevitable in modern business, and IT’s involvement in the process should be too. This progression is inspired by:

    • The growing trend for organizations to increase, decrease, or evolve through these types of transactions.
    • A maturing business perspective of IT, preventing the difficulty that IT is faced with when invited into the transaction process late.
    • Transactions that are driven by digital motivations, requiring IT’s expertise.
    • There never being such a thing as a true merger, making the majority of M&A activity either acquisitions or divestitures.

    Impact and Result

    Prepare for a sale/divestiture transaction by:

    • Recognizing the trend for organizations to engage in M&A activity and the increased likelihood that, as an IT leader, you will be involved in a transaction in your career.
    • Creating a standard strategy that will enable strong program management.
    • Properly considering all the critical components of the transaction and integration by prioritizing tasks that will reduce risk, deliver value, and meet stakeholder expectations.

    Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how your organization can excel its reduction strategy by engaging in M&A transactions. Review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Proactive Phase

    Be an innovative IT leader by suggesting how and why the business should engage in an acquisition or divestiture.

    • One-Pager: M&A Proactive
    • Case Study: M&A Proactive
    • Information Asset Audit Tool
    • Data Valuation Tool
    • Enterprise Integration Process Mapping Tool
    • Risk Register Tool
    • Security M&A Due Diligence Tool
    • Service Catalog Internal Service Level Agreement Template

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    Create a standardized approach for how your IT organization should address divestitures or sales.

    • One-Pager: M&A Discovery & Strategy – Sell
    • Case Study: M&A Discovery & Strategy – Sell

    3. Due Diligence & Preparation

    Comply with due diligence, prepare the IT environment for carve-out possibilities, and establish the separation project plan.

    • One-Pager: M&A Due Diligence & Preparation – Sell
    • Case Study: M&A Due Diligence & Preparation – Sell
    • IT Due Diligence Charter
    • IT Culture Diagnostic
    • M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint)
    • SharePoint Template: Step-by-Step Deployment Guide
    • M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel)

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    Deliver on the separation project plan successfully and communicate IT’s transaction value to the business.

    • One-Pager: M&A Execution & Value Realization – Sell
    • Case Study: M&A Execution & Value Realization – Sell

    Infographic

    Workshop: Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Pre-Transaction Discovery & Strategy

    The Purpose

    Establish the transaction foundation.

    Discover the motivation for divesting or selling.

    Formalize the program plan.

    Create the valuation framework.

    Strategize the transaction and finalize the M&A strategy and approach.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All major stakeholders are on the same page.

    Set up crucial elements to facilitate the success of the transaction.

    Have a repeatable transaction strategy that can be reused for multiple organizations.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct the CIO Business Vision and CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostics.

    1.2 Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.

    1.3 Understand the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a divestiture or sale.

    1.4 Assess the IT/digital strategy.

    1.5 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the divestiture/sale.

    1.6 Create the IT vision statement and mission statement and identify IT guiding principles and the transition team.

    1.7 Document the M&A governance.

    1.8 Establish program metrics.

    1.9 Create the valuation framework.

    1.10 Establish the separation strategy.

    1.11 Conduct a RACI.

    1.12 Create the communication plan.

    1.13 Prepare to assess target organizations.

    Outputs

    Business perspectives of IT

    Stakeholder network map for M&A transactions

    Business context implications for IT

    IT’s divestiture/sale strategic direction

    Governance structure

    M&A program metrics

    IT valuation framework

    Separation strategy

    RACI

    Communication plan

    Prepared to assess target organization(s)

    2 Mid-Transaction Due Diligence & Preparation

    The Purpose

    Establish the foundation.

    Discover the motivation for separation.

    Identify expectations and create the carve-out roadmap.

    Prepare and manage employees.

    Plan the separation roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All major stakeholders are on the same page.

    Methodology identified to enable compliance during due diligence.

    Employees are set up for a smooth and successful transition.

    Separation activities are planned and assigned.

    Activities

    2.1 Gather and evaluate the stakeholders involved, M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.

    2.2 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale.

    2.3 Establish the separation strategy.

    2.4 Create the due diligence charter.

    2.5 Create a list of IT artifacts to be reviewed in the data room.

    2.6 Create a carve-out roadmap.

    2.7 Create a service/technical transaction agreement.

    2.8 Measure staff engagement.

    2.9 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.

    2.10 Create employee transition and functional workplans.

    2.11 Establish the separation roadmap.

    2.12 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.

    2.13 Estimate integration costs.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder map

    IT strategy assessed

    IT operating model and IT governance structure defined

    Business context implications for IT

    Separation strategy

    Due diligence charter

    Data room artifacts

    Carve-out roadmap

    Service/technical transaction agreement

    Engagement assessment

    Culture assessment

    Employee transition and functional workplans

    Integration roadmap and associated resourcing

    3 Post-Transaction Execution & Value Realization

    The Purpose

    Establish the transaction foundation.

    Discover the motivation for separation.

    Plan the separation roadmap.

    Prepare employees for the transition.

    Engage in separation.

    Assess the transaction outcomes.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All major stakeholders are on the same page.

    Separation activities are planned and assigned.

    Employees are set up for a smooth and successful transition.

    Separation strategy and roadmap are executed to benefit the organization.

    Review what went well and identify improvements to be made in future transactions.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.

    3.2 Gather and evaluate the M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.

    3.3 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale.

    3.4 Establish the separation strategy.

    3.5 Prioritize separation tasks.

    3.6 Establish the separation roadmap.

    3.7 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.

    3.8 Estimate separation costs.

    3.9 Measure staff engagement.

    3.10 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.

    3.11 Create employee transition and functional workplans.

    3.12 Complete the separation by regularly updating the project plan.

    3.13 Assess the service/technical transaction agreement.

    3.14 Confirm separation costs.

    3.15 Review IT’s transaction value.

    3.16 Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT.

    3.17 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions.

    Outputs

    M&A transaction team

    Stakeholder map

    IT strategy assessed

    IT operating model and IT governance structure defined

    Business context implications for IT

    Separation strategy

    Separation roadmap and associated resourcing

    Engagement assessment

    Culture assessment

    Employee transition and functional workplans

    Updated separation project plan

    Evaluated service/technical transaction agreement

    SWOT of transaction

    M&A Sell Playbook refined for future transactions

    Further reading

    Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint

    For IT leaders who want to have a role in the transaction process when their business is engaging in an M&A sale or divestiture.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Don’t wait to be invited to the M&A table, make it.

    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Research Analyst, CIO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.
    Brittany Lutes
    Research Analyst,
    CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst, CIO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group.
    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst,
    CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    IT has always been an afterthought in the M&A process, often brought in last minute once the deal is nearly, if not completely, solidified. This is a mistake. When IT is brought into the process late, the business misses opportunities to generate value related to the transaction and has less awareness of critical risks or inaccuracies.

    To prevent this mistake, IT leadership needs to develop strong business relationships and gain respect for their innovative suggestions. In fact, when it comes to modern M&A activity, IT should be the ones suggesting potential transactions to meet business needs, specifically when it comes to modernizing the business or adopting digital capabilities.

    IT needs to stop waiting to be invited to the acquisition or divestiture table. IT needs to suggest that the table be constructed and actively work toward achieving the strategic objectives of the business.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    There are four key scenarios or entry points for IT as the selling/divesting organization in M&As:

    • IT can suggest a divestiture to meet the business objectives of the organization.
    • IT is brought in to strategy plan the sale/divestiture from both the business’ and IT’s perspectives.
    • IT participates in due diligence activities and complies with the purchasing organization’s asks.
    • IT needs to reactively prepare its environment to enable the separation.

    Consider the ideal scenario for your IT organization.

    Common Obstacles

    Some of the obstacles IT faces include:

    • IT is often told about the transaction once the deal has already been solidified and is now forced to meet unrealistic business demands.
    • The business does not trust IT and therefore does not approach IT to define value or reduce risks to the transaction process.
    • The people and culture element is forgotten or not given adequate priority.

    These obstacles often arise when IT waits to be invited into the transaction process and misses critical opportunities.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Prepare for a sale/divestiture transaction by:

    • Recognizing the trend for organizations to engage in M&A activity and the increased likelihood that, as an IT leader, you will be involved in a transaction in your career.
    • Creating a standard strategy that will enable strong program management.
    • Properly considering all the critical components of the transaction and integration by prioritizing tasks that will reduce risk, deliver value, and meet stakeholder expectations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As the number of merger, acquisition, and divestiture transactions continues to increase, so too does IT’s opportunity to leverage the growing digital nature of these transactions and get involved at the onset.

    The changing M&A landscape

    Businesses will embrace more digital M&A transactions in the post-pandemic world

    • When the pandemic occurred, businesses reacted by either pausing (61%) or completely cancelling (46%) deals that were in the mid-transaction state (Deloitte, 2020). The uncertainty made many organizations consider whether the risks would be worth the potential benefits.
    • However, many organizations quickly realized the pandemic is not a hindrance to M&A transactions but an opportunity. Over 16,000 American companies were involved in M&A transactions in the first six months of 2021 (The Economist). For reference, this had been averaging around 10,000 per six months from 2016 to 2020.
    • In addition to this transaction growth, organizations have increasingly been embracing digital. These trends increase the likelihood that, as an IT leader, you will engage in an M&A transaction. However, it is up to you when you get involved in the transactions.

    The total value of transactions in the year after the pandemic started was $1.3 billion – a 93% increase in value compared to before the pandemic. (Nasdaq)

    71% of technology companies anticipate that divestitures will take place as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic. (EY, 2020)

    Your challenge

    IT is often not involved in the M&A transaction process. When it is, it’s often too late.

    • The most important driver of an acquisition is the ability to access new technology (DLA Piper), and yet 50% of the time, IT isn’t involved in the M&A transaction at all (IMAA Institute, 2017).
    • Additionally, IT’s lack of involvement in the process negatively impacts the business:
      • Most organizations (60%) do not have a standardized approach to integration (Steeves and Associates), let alone separation.
      • Two-thirds of the time, the divesting organization and acquiring organization will either fail together or succeed together (McKinsey, 2015).
      • Less than half (47%) of organizations actually experience the positive results sought by the M&A transaction (Steeves and Associates).
    • Organizations pursuing M&A and not involving IT are setting themselves up for failure.

    Only half of M&A deals involve IT (Source: IMAA Institute, 2017)

    Common Obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • IT is rarely afforded the opportunity to participate in the transaction deal. When IT is invited, this often happens later in the process where separation will be critical to business continuity.
    • IT has not had the opportunity to demonstrate that it is a valuable business partner in other business initiatives.
    • One of the most critical elements that IT often doesn’t take the time or doesn’t have the time to focus on is the people and leadership component.
    • IT waits to be invited to the process rather then actively involving themselves and suggesting how value can be added to the process.

    In hindsight, it’s clear to see: Involving IT is just good business.

    47% of senior leaders wish they would have spent more time on IT due diligence to prevent value erosion. (Source: IMAA Institute, 2017)

    “Solutions exist that can save well above 50 percent on divestiture costs, while ensuring on-time delivery.” (Source: SNP)

    Info-Tech's approach

    Acquisitions & Divestitures Framework

    Acquisitions and divestitures are inevitable in modern business, and IT’s involvement in the process should be too. This progression is inspired by:

    1. The growing trend for organizations to increase, decrease, or evolve through these types of transactions.
    2. Transactions that are driven by digital motivations, requiring IT’s expertise.
    3. A maturing business perspective of IT, preventing the difficulty that IT is faced with when invited into the transaction process late.
    4. There never being such a thing as a true merger, making the majority of M&A activity either acquisitions or divestitures.
    A diagram highlighting the 'IT Executives' Role in Acquisitions and Divestitures' when they are integrated at different points in the 'Core Business Timeline'. There are four main entry points 'Proactive', 'Discovery and Strategy', 'Due Diligence and Preparation', and 'Execution and Value Realized'. It is highlighted that IT can and should start at 'Proactive', but most organizations start at 'Execution and Value Realized'. 'Proactive': suggest opportunities to evolve the organization; prove IT's value and engage in growth opportunities early. Innovators start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Proactive' are 'Organization strategies are defined' and 'M and A is considered to enable strategy'. After a buy or sell transaction is initiated is 'Discovery and Strategy': pre-transaction state. If it is a Buy transaction, 'Establish IT's involvement and approach'. If it is a Sell transaction, 'Prepare to engage in negotiations'. Business Partners start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Discovery and Strategy' are 'Searching criteria is set', 'Potential candidates are considered', and 'LOI is sent/received'. 'Due Diligence and Preparation': mid-transaction state. If it is a Buy transaction, 'Identify potential transaction benefits and risks'. If it is a Sell transaction, 'Comply, communicate, and collaborate in transaction'. Trusted Operators start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Due Diligence and Preparation' are 'Due diligence engagement occurs', 'Final agreement is reached', and 'Preparation for transaction execution occurs'. 'Execution and Value Realization': post-transaction state. If it is a Buy transaction, 'Integrate the IT environments and achieve business value'. If it is a Sell transaction, 'Separate the IT environment and deliver on transaction terms'. Firefighters start here. Steps of the business timeline in 'Execution and Value Realization' are 'Staff and operations are addressed appropriately', 'Day 1 of implementation and integration activities occurs', '1st 100 days of new entity state occur' and 'Ongoing risk mitigating and value creating activities occur'.

    The business’ view of IT will impact how soon IT can get involved

    There are four key entry points for IT

    A colorful visualization of the four key entry points for IT and a fifth not-so-key entry point. Starting from the top: 'Innovator', Information and Technology as a Competitive Advantage, 90% Satisfaction; 'Business Partner', Effective Delivery of Strategic Business Projects, 80% Satisfaction; 'Trusted Operator', Enablement of Business Through Application and Work Orders, 70% Satisfaction; 'Firefighter', Reliable Infrastructure and IT Service Desk, 60% Satisfaction; and then 'Unstable', Inability to Consistently Deliver Basic Services, <60% Satisfaction.
    1. Innovator: IT suggests a sale or divestiture to meet the business objectives of the organization.
    2. Business Partner: IT is brought in to strategy plan the sale/divestiture from both the business’ and IT’s perspective.
    3. Trusted Operator: IT participates in due diligence activities and complies with the purchasing organization’s asks.
    4. Firefighter: IT needs to reactively prepare its environment in order to enable the separation.

    Merger, acquisition, and divestiture defined

    Merger

    A merger looks at the equal combination of two entities or organizations. Mergers are rare in the M&A space, as the organizations will combine assets and services in a completely equal 50/50 split. Two organizations may also choose to divest business entities and merge as a new company.

    Acquisition

    The most common transaction in the M&A space, where an organization will acquire or purchase another organization or entities of another organization. This type of transaction has a clear owner who will be able to make legal decisions regarding the acquired organization.

    Divestiture

    An organization may decide to sell partial elements of a business to an acquiring organization. They will separate this business entity from the rest of the organization and continue to operate the other components of the business.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A true merger does not exist, as there is always someone initiating the discussion. As a result, most M&A activity falls into acquisition or divestiture categories.

    Selling vs. buying

    The M&A process approach differs depending on whether you are the selling or buying organization

    This blueprint is only focused on the sell side:

    • Examples of sell-related scenarios include:
      • Your organization is selling to another organization with the intent of keeping its regular staff, operations, and location. This could mean minimal separation is required.
      • Your organization is selling to another organization with the intent of separating to be a part of the purchasing organization.
      • Your organization is engaging in a divestiture with the intent of:
        • Separating components to be part of the purchasing organization permanently.
        • Separating components to be part of a spinoff and establish a unit as a standalone new company.
    • As the selling organization, you could proactively seek out suitors to purchase all or components of your organization, or you could be approached by an organization.

    The buy side is focused on:

    • More than two organizations could be involved in a transaction.
    • Examples of buy-related scenarios include:
      • Your organization is buying another organization with the intent of having the purchased organization keep its regular staff, operations, and location. This could mean minimal integration is required.
      • Your organization is buying another organization in its entirety with the intent of integrating it into your original company.
      • Your organization is buying components of another organization with the intent of integrating them into your original company.
    • As the purchasing organization, you will probably be initiating the purchase and thus will be valuating the selling organization during due diligence and leading the execution plan.

    For more information on acquisitions or purchases, check out Info-Tech’s Mergers & Acquisitions: The Buy Blueprint.

    Core business timeline

    For IT to be valuable in M&As, you need to align your deliverables and your support to the key activities the business and investors are working on.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Selling Organizations in Mergers, Acquisitions, or Divestitures

    1. Proactive

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    3. Due Diligence & Preparation

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    Phase Steps

    1. Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    2. Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    3. Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities
    1. Establish the M&A Program Plan
    2. Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    1. Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    2. Prepare to Separate
    1. Execute the Transaction
    2. Reflection and Value Realization

    Phase Outcomes

    Be an innovative IT leader by suggesting how and why the business should engage in an acquisition or divestiture.

    Create a standardized approach for how your IT organization should address divestitures or sales.

    Comply with due diligence, prepare the IT environment for carve-out possibilities, and establish the separation project plan.

    Deliver on the separation project plan successfully and communicate IT’s transaction value to the business.

    Metrics for each phase

    1. Proactive

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    3. Valuation & Due Diligence

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    • % Share of business innovation spend from overall IT budget
    • % Critical processes with approved performance goals and metrics
    • % IT initiatives that meet or exceed value expectation defined in business case
    • % IT initiatives aligned with organizational strategic direction
    • % Satisfaction with IT's strategic decision-making abilities
    • $ Estimated business value added through IT-enabled innovation
    • % Overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT
    • % Percent of business leaders that view IT as an Innovator
    • % IT budget as a percent of revenue
    • % Assets that are not allocated
    • % Unallocated software licenses
    • # Obsolete assets
    • % IT spend that can be attributed to the business (chargeback or showback)
    • % Share of CapEx of overall IT budget
    • % Prospective organizations that meet the search criteria
    • $ Total IT cost of ownership (before and after M&A, before and after rationalization)
    • % Business leaders that view IT as a Business Partner
    • % Defects discovered in production
    • $ Cost per user for enterprise applications
    • % In-house-built applications vs. enterprise applications
    • % Owners identified for all data domains
    • # IT staff asked to participate in due diligence
    • Change to due diligence
    • IT budget variance
    • Synergy target
    • % Satisfaction with the effectiveness of IT capabilities
    • % Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • $ Impact of vendor SLA breaches
    • $ Savings through cost-optimization efforts
    • $ Savings through application rationalization and technology standardization
    • # Key positions empty
    • % Frequency of staff turnover
    • % Emergency changes
    • # Hours of unplanned downtime
    • % Releases that cause downtime
    • % Incidents with identified problem record
    • % Problems with identified root cause
    • # Days from problem identification to root cause fix
    • % Projects that consider IT risk
    • % Incidents due to issues not addressed in the security plan
    • # Average vulnerability remediation time
    • % Application budget spent on new build/buy vs. maintenance (deferred feature implementation, enhancements, bug fixes)
    • # Time (days) to value realization
    • % Projects that realized planned benefits
    • $ IT operational savings and cost reductions that are related to synergies/divestitures
    • % IT staff–related expenses/redundancies
    • # Days spent on IT separation
    • $ Accurate IT budget estimates
    • % Revenue growth directly tied to IT delivery
    • % Profit margin growth

    IT's role in the selling transaction

    And IT leaders have a greater likelihood than ever of needing to support a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.

    1. Reduced Risk

      IT can identify risks that may go unnoticed when IT is not involved.
    2. Increased Accuracy

      The business can make accurate predictions around the costs, timelines, and needs of IT.
    3. Faster Integration

      Faster integration means faster value realization for the business.
    4. Informed Decision Making

      IT leaders hold critical information that can support the business in moving the transaction forward.
    5. Innovation

      IT can suggest new opportunities to generate revenue, optimize processes, or reduce inefficiencies.

    The IT executive’s critical role is demonstrated by:

    • Reduced Risk

      47% of senior leaders wish they would have spent more time on IT due diligence to prevent value erosion (IMAA Institute, 2017).
    • Increased Accuracy

      Sellers often only provide 15 to 30 days for the acquiring organization to decide (Forbes, 2018), increasing the necessity of accurate pricing.
    • Faster Integration

      36% of CIOs have visibility into only business unit data, making the divestment a challenge (EY, 2021).
    • Informed Decision Making

      Only 38% of corporate and 22% of private equity firms include IT as a significant aspect in their transaction approach (IMAA Institute, 2017).
    • Innovation

      Successful CIOs involved in M&As can spend 70% of their time on aspects outside of IT and 30% of their time on technology and delivery (CIO).

    Playbook benefits

    IT Benefits

    • IT will be seen as an innovative partner to the business, and its suggestions and involvement in the organization will lead to benefits, not hindrances.
    • Develop a streamlined method to prepare the IT environment for potential carve-out and separations, ensuring risk management concerns are brought to the business’ attention immediately.
    • Create a comprehensive list of items that IT needs to do during the separation that can be prioritized and actioned.

    Business Benefits

    • The business will get accurate and relevant information about its IT environment in order to sell or divest the company to the highest bidder for a true price.
    • Fewer business interruptions will happen, because IT can accurately plan for and execute the high-priority separation tasks.
    • The business can obtain a high-value offer for the components of IT being sold and can measure the ongoing value the sale will bring.

    Insight summary

    Overarching Insight

    IT controls if and when it gets invited to support the business through a purchasing growth transaction. Take control of the process, demonstrate the value of IT, and ensure that separation of IT environments does not lead to unnecessary and costly decisions.

    Proactive Insight

    CIOs on the forefront of digital transformation need to actively look for and suggest opportunities to acquire or partner on new digital capabilities to respond to rapidly changing business needs.

    Discovery & Strategy Insight

    IT organizations that have an effective M&A program plan are more prepared for the transaction, enabling a successful outcome. A structured strategy is particularly necessary for organizations expected to deliver M&As rapidly and frequently.

    Due Diligence & Preparation Insight

    IT often faces unnecessary separation challenges because of a lack of preparation. Secure the IT environment and establish how IT will retain employees early in the transaction process.

    Execution & Value Realization Insight

    IT needs to demonstrate value and cost savings within 100 days of the transaction. The most successful transactions are when IT continuously realizes synergies a year after the transaction and beyond.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Key Deliverable: M&A Sell Playbook

    The M&A Sell Playbook should be a reusable document that enables your IT organization to successfully deliver on any divestiture transaction.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Sell Playbook' deliverable.

    M&A Sell One-Pager

    See a one-page overview of each phase of the transaction.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Sell One-Pagers' deliverable.

    M&A Sell Case Studies

    Read a one-page case study for each phase of the transaction.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Sell Case Studies' deliverable.

    M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint)

    Manage the separation process of the divestiture/sale using this SharePoint template.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint)' deliverable.

    M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel)

    Manage the separation process of the divestiture/sale using this Excel tool if you can’t or don’t want to use SharePoint.

    Screenshots of the 'M and A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel)' deliverable.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 6 to 10 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

      Proactive Phase

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.
    • Discovery & Strategy Phase

    • Call #2: Determine stakeholders and business perspectives on IT.
    • Call #3: Identify how M&A could support business strategy and how to communicate.
    • Due Diligence & Preparation Phase

    • Call #4: Establish a transaction team and divestiture/sale strategic direction.
    • Call #5: Create program metrics and identify a standard separation strategy.
    • Call #6: Prepare to carve out the IT environment.
    • Call #7: Identify the separation program plan.
    • Execution & Value Realization Phase

    • Call #8: Establish employee transitions to retain key staff.
    • Call #9: Assess IT’s ability to deliver on the divestiture/sale transaction.

    The Sell Blueprint

    Phase 1

    Proactive

    Phase 1

    Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Reduction Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    • 3.1 Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    • 3.2 Prepare to Separate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic
    • Conduct the CIO Business Vision diagnostic
    • Visualize relationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers
    • Group stakeholders into categories
    • Prioritize your stakeholders
    • Plan to communicate
    • Valuate IT
    • Assess the IT/digital strategy
    • Determine pain points and opportunities
    • Align goals to opportunities
    • Recommend reduction opportunities

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT and business leadership

    What is the Proactive phase?

    Embracing the digital drivers

    As the number of merger, acquisition, or divestiture transactions driven by digital means continues to increase, IT has an opportunity to not just be involved in a transaction but actively seek out potential deals.

    In the Proactive phase, the business is not currently considering a transaction. However, the business could consider one to reach its strategic goals. IT organizations that have developed respected relationships with the business leaders can suggest these potential transactions.

    Understand the business’ perspective of IT, determine who the critical M&A stakeholders are, valuate the IT environment, and examine how it supports the business goals in order to suggest an M&A transaction.

    In doing so, IT isn’t waiting to be invited to the transaction table – it’s creating it.

    Goal: To support the organization in reaching its strategic goals by suggesting M&A activities that will enable the organization to reach its objectives faster and with greater-value outcomes.

    Proactive Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Proactive phase, you should have addressed the following:

    • Understand what mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures are.
    • Understand what mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures mean for the business.
    • Understand what mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures mean for IT.

    Review the Executive Brief for more information on mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures for selling organizations.

    Proactive

    Step 1.1

    Identify M&A Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT

    Activities

    • 1.1.1 Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic
    • 1.1.2 Conduct the CIO Business Vision diagnostic
    • 1.1.3 Visualize relationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers
    • 1.1.4 Group stakeholders into categories
    • 1.1.5 Prioritize your stakeholders
    • 1.16 Plan to communicate

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leader
    • IT leadership
    • Critical M&A stakeholders

    Outcomes of Step

    Understand how the business perceives IT and establish strong relationships with critical M&A stakeholders.

    Business executives' perspectives of IT

    Leverage diagnostics and gain alignment on IT’s role in the organization

    • To suggest or get involved with a merger, acquisition, or divestiture, the IT executive leader needs to be well respected by other members of the executive leadership team and the business.
    • Specifically, the Proactive phase relies on the IT organization being viewed as an Innovator within the business.
    • Identify how the CEO/business executive currently views IT and where they would like IT to move within the Maturity Ladder.
    • Additionally, understand how other critical department leaders view IT and how they view the partnership with IT.
    A colorful visualization titled 'Maturity Ladder' detailing levels of IT function that a business may choose from based on the business executives' perspectives of IT. Starting from the bottom: 'Struggle', Does not embarrass, Does not crash; 'Support', Keeps business happy, Keeps costs low; 'Optimize', Increases efficiency, Decreases costs; 'Expand', Extends into new business, Generates revenue; 'Transform', Creates new industry.

    Misalignment in target state requires further communication between the CIO and CEO to ensure IT is striving toward an agreed-upon direction.

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision (CIO BV) diagnostic measures a variety of high-value metrics to provide a well-rounded understanding of stakeholder satisfaction with IT.

    Sample of Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision diagnostic measuring percentages of high-value metrics like 'IT Satisfaction' and 'IT Value' regarding business leader satisfaction. A note for these two reads 'Evaluate business leader satisfaction with IT this year and last year'. A section titled 'Relationship' has metrics such as 'Understands Needs' and 'Trains Effectively'. A note for this section reads 'Examine relationship indicators between IT and the business'. A section titled 'Security Friction' has metrics such as 'Regulatory Compliance-Driven' and 'Office/Desktop Security'.

    Business Satisfaction and Importance for Core Services

    The core services of IT are important when determining what IT should focus on. The most important services with the lowest satisfaction offer the largest area of improvement for IT to drive business value.

    Sample of Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision diagnostic specifically comparing the business satisfaction of 12 core services with their importance. Services listed include 'Service Desk', 'IT Security', 'Requirements Gathering', 'Business Apps', 'Data Quality', and more. There is a short description of the services, a percentage for the business satisfaction with the service, a percentage comparing it to last year, and a numbered ranking of importance for each service. A note reads 'Assess satisfaction and importance across 12 core IT capabilities'.

    1.1.1 Conduct the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic

    2 weeks

    Input: IT organization expertise and the CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic

    Output: An understanding of an executive business stakeholder’s perception of IT

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook, CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Business executive/CEO

    1. The CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic can be a powerful input. Speak with your Info-Tech account representative to conduct the diagnostic. Use the results to inform current IT capabilities.
    2. You may choose to debrief the results of your diagnostic with an Info-Tech analyst. We recommend this to help your team understand how to interpret and draw conclusions from the results.
    3. Examine the results of the survey and note where there might be specific capabilities that could be improved.
    4. Determine whether there are any areas of significant disagreement between the you and the CEO. Mark down those areas for further conversations. Additionally, take note of areas that could be leveraged to support transactions or support your rationale in recommending transactions.

    Download the sample report.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    1.1.2 Conduct the CIO Business Vision diagnostic

    2 weeks

    Input: IT organization expertise, CIO BV diagnostic

    Output: An understanding of business stakeholder perception of certain IT capabilities and services

    Materials: M&A Buy Playbook, CIO Business Vision diagnostic

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Senior business leaders

    1. The CIO Business Vision (CIO BV) diagnostic can be a powerful tool for identifying IT capability focus areas. Speak with your account representative to conduct the CIO BV diagnostic. Use the results to inform current IT capabilities.
    2. You may choose to debrief the results of your diagnostic with an Info-Tech analyst. We recommend this to help your team understand how to interpret the results and draw conclusions from the diagnostic.
    3. Examine the results of the survey and take note of any IT services that have low scores.
    4. Read through the diagnostic comments and note any common themes. Especially note which stakeholders identified they have a favorable relationship with IT and which stakeholders identified they have an unfavorable relationship. For those who have an unfavorable relationship, identify if they will have a critical role in a growth transaction.

    Download the sample report.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Create a stakeholder network map for M&A transactions

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Example:

    Diagram of stakeholders and their relationships with other stakeholders, such as 'Board Members', 'CFO/Finance', 'Compliance', etc. with 'CIO/IT Leader' highlighted in the middle. There are unidirectional black arrows and bi-directional green arrows indicating each connection.

      Legend
    • Black arrows indicate the direction of professional influence
    • Dashed green arrows indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape that the M&A transaction will occur within. This will identify who holds various levels of accountability and decision-making authority when a transaction does take place.

    Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantial relationships with your stakeholders.

    1.1.3 Visualize relationships among stakeholders to identify key influencers

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of M&A stakeholders

    Output: Relationships among M&A stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership

    1. The purpose of this activity is to list all the stakeholders within your organization that will have a direct or indirect impact on the M&A transaction.
    2. Determine the critical stakeholders, and then determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
      • Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
      • Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps IT leaders categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership in the merger, acquisition, or divestiture process.

    A prioritization map of stakeholder categories split into four quadrants. The vertical axis is 'Influence', from low on the bottom to high on top. The horizontal axis is 'Ownership/Interest', from low on the left to high on the right. 'Spectators' are low influence, low ownership/interest. 'Mediators' are high influence, low ownership/interest. 'Noisemakers' are low influence, high ownership/interest. 'Players' are high influence, high ownership/interest.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.

    Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.

    Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.

    Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    1.1.4 Group stakeholders into categories

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder map, Stakeholder list

    Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Stakeholders

    1. Identify your stakeholders’ interest in and influence on the M&A process as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model to the right to determine each stakeholder’s category.

    Same prioritization map of stakeholder categories as before. This one has specific stakeholders mapped onto it. 'CFO' is mapped as low interest and middling influence, between 'Mediator' and 'Spectator'. 'CIO' is mapped as higher than average interest and high influence, a 'Player'. 'Board Member' is mapped as high interest and high influence, a 'Player'.

    Level of Influence
    • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
    • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
    • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
    • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
    • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.
    Level of Interest

    How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Level of Support

    Supporter

    Evangelist

    Neutral

    Blocker

    Stakeholder Category Player Critical High High Critical
    Mediator Medium Low Low Medium
    Noisemaker High Medium Medium High
    Spectator Low Irrelevant Irrelevant Low

    Consider the three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by answering the following question: How significant is that stakeholder to the M&A or divestiture process?

    These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive your focused attention.

    1.1.5 Prioritize your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder matrix

    Output: Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership, M&A/divestiture stakeholders

    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: How significant is that stakeholder to the M&A transaction process?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.

    Stakeholder

    Category

    Level of Support

    Prioritization

    CMO Spectator Neutral Irrelevant
    CIO Player Supporter Critical

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    A revisit to the map of stakeholder categories, but with strategies listed for each one, and arrows on the side instead of an axis. The vertical arrow is 'Authority', which increases upward, and the horizontal axis is Ownership/Interest which increases as it moves to the right. The strategy for 'Players' is 'Engage', for 'Mediators' is 'Satisfy', for 'Noisemakers' is 'Inform', and for 'Spectators' is 'Monitor'.

    Type

    Quadrant

    Actions

    Players High influence, high interest – actively engage Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence, low interest – keep satisfied They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence, high interest – keep informed Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence, low interest – monitor They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying stakeholder groups, the IT executive leader can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers while ensuring the needs of Mediators and Players are met.

    1.1.6 Plan to communicate

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder priority, Stakeholder categorization, Stakeholder influence

    Output: Stakeholder communication plan

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive leadership, M&A/divestiture stakeholders

    The purpose of this activity is to make a communication plan for each of the stakeholders identified in the previous activities, especially those who will have a critical role in the M&A transaction process.

    1. In the M&A Sell Playbook, input the type of influence each stakeholder has on IT, how they would be categorized in the M&A process, and their level of priority. Use this information to create a communication plan.
    2. Determine the methods and frequency of communication to keep the necessary stakeholder satisfied and maintain or enhance IT’s profile within the organization.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Proactive

    Step 1.2

    Assess IT’s Current Value and Method to Achieve a Future State

    Activities

    • 1.2.1 Valuate IT
    • 1.2.2 Assess the IT/digital strategy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leader
    • IT leadership
    • Critical stakeholders to M&A

    Outcomes of Step

    Identify critical opportunities to optimize IT and meet strategic business goals through a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.

    How to valuate your IT environment

    And why it matters so much

    • Valuating your current organization’s IT environment is a critical step that all IT organizations should take, whether involved in an M&A or not, to fully understand what it might be worth.
    • The business investments in IT can be directly translated into a value amount. For every $1 invested in IT, the business might be gaining $100 in value back or possibly even loosing $100.
    • Determining, documenting, and communicating this information ensures that the business takes IT’s suggestions seriously and recognizes why investing in IT is so critical.
    • There are three ways a business or asset can be valuated:
      • Cost Approach: Look at the costs associated with building, purchasing, replacing, and maintaining a given aspect of the business.
      • Market Approach: Look at the relative value of a particular aspect of the business. Relative value can fluctuate and depends on what the markets and consequently society believe that particular element is worth.
      • Discounted Cash Flow Approach: Focus on what the potential value of the business could be or the intrinsic value anticipated due to future profitability.
    • (Source: “Valuation Methods,” Corporate Finance Institute)

    Four ways to create value through digital

    1. Reduced costs
    2. Improved customer experience
    3. New revenue sources
    4. Better decision making
    5. (Source: McKinsey & Company)

    1.2.1 Valuate IT

    1 day

    Input: Valuation of data, Valuation of applications, Valuation of infrastructure and operations, Valuation of security and risk

    Output: Valuation of IT

    Materials: Relevant templates/tools listed on the following slides, Capital budget, Operating budget, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership

    The purpose of this activity is to demonstrate that IT is not simply an operational functional area that diminishes business resources. Rather, IT contributes significant value to the business.

    1. Review each of the following slides to valuate IT’s data, applications, infrastructure and operations, and security and risk. These valuations consider several tangible and intangible factors and result in a final dollar amount.
    2. Input the financial amounts identified for each critical area into a summary slide. Use this information to determine where IT is delivering value to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consistency is key when valuating your IT organization as well as other IT organizations throughout the transaction process.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Data valuation

    Data valuation identifies how you monetize the information that your organization owns.

    Create a data value chain for your organization

    When valuating the information and data that exists in an organization, there are many things to consider.

    Info-Tech has two tools that can support this process:

    1. Information Asset Audit Tool: Use this tool first to take inventory of the different information assets that exist in your organization.
    2. Data Valuation Tool: Once information assets have been accounted for, valuate the data that exists within those information assets.

    Data Collection

    Insight Creation

    Value Creation

    Data Valuation

    01 Data Source
    02 Data Collection Method
    03 Data
    04 Data Analysis
    05 Insight
    06 Insight Delivery
    07 Consumer
    08 Value in Data
    09 Value Dimension
    10 Value Metrics Group
    11 Value Metrics
    Screenshots of Tab 2 of Info-Tech's Data Valuation Tool.

    Instructions

    1. Using the Data Valuation Tool, start gathering information based on the eight steps above to understand your organization’s journey from data to value.
    2. Identify the data value spectrum. (For example: customer sales service, citizen licensing service, etc.)
    3. Fill out the columns for data sources, data collection, and data first.
    4. Capture data analysis and related information.
    5. Then capture the value in data.
    6. Add value dimensions such as usage, quality, and economic dimensions.
      • Remember that economic value is not the only dimension, and usage/quality has a significant impact on economic value.
    7. Collect evidence to justify your data valuation calculator (market research, internal metrics, etc.).
    8. Finally, calculate the value that has a direct correlation with underlying value metrics.

    Application valuation

    Calculate the value of your IT applications

    When valuating the applications and their users in an organization, consider using a business process map. This shows how business is transacted in the company by identifying which IT applications support these processes and which business groups have access to them. Info-Tech has a business process mapping tool that can support this process:

    • Enterprise Integration Process Mapping Tool: Complete this tool first to map the different business processes to the supporting applications in your organization.

    Instructions

    1. Start by calculating user costs. This is the multiplication of: (# of users) × (% of time spent using IT) × (fully burdened salary).
    2. Identify the revenue per employee and divide that by the average cost per employee to calculate the derived productivity ratio (DPR).
    3. Once you have calculated the user costs and DPR, multiply those total values together to get the application value.
    4. User Costs

      Total User Costs

      Derived Productivity Ratio (DPR)

      Total DPR

      Application Value

      # of users % time spent using IT Fully burdened salary Multiply values from the 3 user costs columns Revenue per employee Average cost per employee (Revenue P.E) ÷ (Average cost P.E) (User costs) X (DPR)

    5. Once the total application value is established, calculate the combined IT and business costs of delivering that value. IT and business costs include inflexibility (application maintenance), unavailability (downtime costs, including disaster exposure), IT costs (common costs statistically allocated to applications), and fully loaded cost of active (full-time equivalent [FTE]) users.
    6. Calculate the net value of applications by subtracting the total IT and business costs from the total application value calculated in step 3.
    7. IT and Business Costs

      Total IT and Business Costs

      Net Value of Applications

      Application maintenance Downtime costs (include disaster exposure) Common costs allocated to applications Fully loaded costs of active (FTE) users Sum of values from the four IT and business costs columns (Application value) – (IT and business costs)

    (Source: CSO)

    Infrastructure valuation

    Assess the foundational elements of the business’ information technology

    The purpose of this exercise is to provide a high-level infrastructure valuation that will contribute to valuating your IT environment.

    Calculating the value of the infrastructure will require different methods depending on the environment. For example, a fully cloud-hosted organization will have different costs than a fully on-premises IT environment.

    Instructions:

    1. Start by listing all of the infrastructure-related items that are relevant to your organization.
    2. Once you have finalized your items column, identify the total costs/value of each item.
      • For example, total software costs would include servers and storage.
    3. Calculate the total cost/value of your IT infrastructure by adding all of values in the right column.

    Item

    Costs/Value

    Hardware Assets Total Value +$3.2 million
    Hardware Leased/Service Agreement -$
    Software Purchased +$
    Software Leased/Service Agreement -$
    Operational Tools
    Network
    Disaster Recovery
    Antivirus
    Data Centers
    Service Desk
    Other Licenses
    Total:

    For additional support, download the M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations.

    Risk and security

    Assess risk responses and calculate residual risk

    The purpose of this exercise is to provide a high-level risk assessment that will contribute to valuating your IT environment. For a more in-depth risk assessment, please refer to the Info-Tech tools below:

    1. Risk Register Tool
    2. Security M&A Due Diligence Tool

    Instructions

    1. Review the probability and impact scales below and ensure you have the appropriate criteria that align to your organization before you conduct a risk assessment.
    2. Identify the probability of occurrence and estimated financial impact for each risk category detail and fill out the table on the right. Customize the table as needed so it aligns to your organization.
    3. Probability of Risk Occurrence

      Occurrence Criteria
      (Classification; Probability of Risk Event Within One Year)

      Negligible Very Unlikely; ‹20%
      Very Low Unlikely; 20 to 40%
      Low Possible; 40 to 60%
      Moderately Low Likely; 60 to 80%
      Moderate Almost Certain; ›80%

    Note: If needed, you can customize this scale with the severity designations that you prefer. However, make sure you are always consistent with it when conducting a risk assessment.

    Financial & Reputational Impact

    Budgetary and Reputational Implications
    (Financial Impact; Reputational Impact)

    Negligible (‹$10,000; Internal IT stakeholders aware of risk event occurrence)
    Very Low ($10,000 to $25,000; Business customers aware of risk event occurrence)
    Low ($25,000 to $50,000; Board of directors aware of risk event occurrence)
    Moderately Low ($50,000 to $100,000; External customers aware of risk event occurrence)
    Moderate (›$100,000; Media coverage or regulatory body aware of risk event occurrence)

    Risk Category Details

    Probability of Occurrence

    Estimated Financial Impact

    Estimated Severity (Probability X Impact)

    Capacity Planning
    Enterprise Architecture
    Externally Originated Attack
    Hardware Configuration Errors
    Hardware Performance
    Internally Originated Attack
    IT Staffing
    Project Scoping
    Software Implementation Errors
    Technology Evaluation and Selection
    Physical Threats
    Resource Threats
    Personnel Threats
    Technical Threats
    Total:

    1.2.2 Assess the IT/digital strategy

    4 hours

    Input: IT strategy, Digital strategy, Business strategy

    Output: An understanding of an executive business stakeholder’s perception of IT, Alignment of IT/digital strategy and overall organization strategy

    Materials: Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Business executive/CEO

    The purpose of this activity is to review the business and IT strategies that exist to determine if there are critical capabilities that are not being supported.

    Ideally, the IT and digital strategies would have been created following development of the business strategy. However, sometimes the business strategy does not directly call out the capabilities it requires IT to support.

    1. On the left half of the corresponding slide in the M&A Sell Playbook, document the business goals, initiatives, and capabilities. Input this information from the business or digital strategies. (If more space for goals, initiatives, or capabilities is needed, duplicate the slide).
    2. On the other half of the slide, document the IT goals, initiatives, and capabilities. Input this information from the IT strategy and digital strategy.

    For additional support, see Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Proactive

    Step 1.3

    Drive Innovation and Suggest Growth Opportunities

    Activities

    • 1.3.1 Determine pain points and opportunities
    • 1.3.2 Align goals with opportunities
    • 1.3.3 Recommend reduction opportunities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leader
    • IT leadership
    • Critical M&A stakeholders

    Outcomes of Step

    Establish strong relationships with critical M&A stakeholders and position IT as an innovative business partner that can suggest reduction opportunities.

    1.3.1 Determine pain points and opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic, CIO Business Vision diagnostic, Valuation of IT environment, IT-business goals cascade

    Output: List of pain points or opportunities that IT can address

    Materials: Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business stakeholders

    The purpose of this activity is to determine the pain points and opportunities that exist for the organization. These can be external or internal to the organization.

    1. Identify what opportunities exist for your organization. Opportunities are the potential positives that the organization would want to leverage.
    2. Next, identify pain points, which are the potential negatives that the organization would want to alleviate.
    3. Spend time considering all the options that might exist, and keep in mind what has been identified previously.

    Opportunities and pain points can be trends, other departments’ initiatives, business perspectives of IT, etc.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    1.3.2 Align goals with opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostic, CIO Business Vision diagnostic, Valuation of IT environment, IT-business goals cascade, List of pain points and opportunities

    Output: An understanding of an executive business stakeholder’s perception of IT, Foundations for reduction strategy

    Materials: Computer, Whiteboard and markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business stakeholders

    The purpose of this activity is to determine whether a growth or separation strategy might be a good suggestion to the business in order to meet its business objectives.

    1. For the top three to five business goals, consider:
      1. Underlying drivers
      2. Digital opportunities
      3. Whether a growth or reduction strategy is the solution
    2. Just because a growth or reduction strategy is a solution for a business goal does not necessarily indicate M&A is the way to go. However, it is important to consider before you pursue suggesting M&A.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    1.3.3 Recommend reduction opportunities

    1-2 hours

    Input: Growth or separation strategy opportunities to support business goals, Stakeholder communication plan, Rationale for the suggestion

    Output: M&A transaction opportunities suggested

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, Business executive/CEO

    The purpose of this activity is to recommend a merger, acquisition, or divestiture to the business.

    1. Identify which of the business goals the transaction would help solve and why IT is the one to suggest such a goal.
    2. Leverage the stakeholder communication plan identified previously to give insight into stakeholders who would have a significant level of interest, influence, or support in the process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    With technology and digital driving many transactions, leverage your organizations’ IT environment as an asset and reason why the divestiture or sale should happen, suggesting the opportunity yourself.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    By the end of this Proactive phase, you should:

    Be prepared to suggest M&A opportunities to support your company’s goals through sale or divestiture transactions

    Key outcome from the Proactive phase

    Develop progressive relationships and strong communication with key stakeholders to suggest or be aware of transformational opportunities that can be achieved through sale or divestiture strategies.

    Key deliverables from the Proactive phase
    • Business perspective of IT examined
    • Key stakeholders identified and relationship to the M&A process outlined
    • Ability to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT’s value to the business
    • Assessment of the business, digital, and IT strategies and how M&As could support those strategies
    • Pain points and opportunities that could be alleviated or supported through an M&A transaction
    • Sale or divestiture recommendations

    The Sell Blueprint

    Phase 2

    Discovery & Strategy

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3Phase 4
    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Reduction Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    • 3.1 Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    • 3.2 Prepare to Separate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create the mission and vision
    • Identify the guiding principles
    • Create the future-state operating model
    • Determine the transition team
    • Document the M&A governance
    • Create program metrics
    • Establish the separation strategy
    • Conduct a RACI
    • Create the communication plan
    • Assess the potential organization(s)

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish the Transaction FoundationDiscover the Motivation for Divesting or SellingFormalize the Program PlanCreate the Valuation FrameworkStrategize the TransactionNext Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    • 0.1 Conduct the CIO Business Vision and CEO-CIO Alignment diagnostics
    • 0.2 Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process
    • 0.3 Identify the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a divestiture or sale
    • 1.1 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale
    • 1.2 Assess the IT/digital strategy
    • 1.3 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the divestiture/sale
    • 1.4 Create the IT vision statement, create the IT mission statement, and identify IT guiding principles
    • 2.1 Create the future-state operating model
    • 2.2 Determine the transition team
    • 2.3 Document the M&A governance
    • 2.4 Establish program metrics
    • 3.1 Valuate your data
    • 3.2 Valuate your applications
    • 3.3 Valuate your infrastructure
    • 3.4 Valuate your risk and security
    • 3.5 Combine individual valuations to make a single framework
    • 4.1 Establish the separation strategy
    • 4.2 Conduct a RACI
    • 4.3 Review best practices for assessing target organizations
    • 4.4 Create the communication plan
    • 5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    • 5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Business perspectives of IT
    2. Stakeholder network map for M&A transactions
    1. Business context implications for IT
    2. IT’s divestiture/sale strategic direction
    1. Operating model for future state
    2. Transition team
    3. Governance structure
    4. M&A program metrics
    1. IT valuation framework
    1. Separation strategy
    2. RACI
    3. Communication plan
    1. Completed M&A program plan and strategy
    2. Prepared to assess target organization(s)

    What is the Discovery & Strategy phase?

    Pre-transaction state

    The Discovery & Strategy phase during a sale or divestiture is a unique opportunity for many IT organizations. IT organizations that can participate in the transaction at this stage are likely considered a strategic partner of the business.

    For one-off sales/divestitures, IT being invited during this stage of the process is rare. However, for organizations that are preparing to engage in many divestitures over the coming years, this type of strategy will greatly benefit from IT involvement. Again, the likelihood of participating in an M&A transaction is increasing, making it a smart IT leadership decision to, at the very least, loosely prepare a program plan that can act as a strategic pillar throughout the transaction.

    During this phase of the pre-transaction state, IT may be asked to participate in ensuring that the IT environment is able to quickly and easily carve out components/business lines and deliver on service-level agreements (SLAs).

    Goal: To identify a repeatable program plan that IT can leverage when selling or divesting all or parts of the current IT environment, ensuring customer satisfaction and business continuity

    Discovery & Strategy Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Discovery & Strategy phase, you should have addressed the following:

    • Understand the business perspective of IT.
    • Know the key stakeholders and have outlined their relationship to the M&A process.
    • Be able to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT's value to the business.
    • Understand the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a sale or divestiture and the opportunities or pain points the sale should address.

    Discovery & Strategy

    Step 2.1

    Establish the M&A Program Plan

    Activities

    • 2.1.1 Create the mission and vision
    • 2.1.2 Identify the guiding principles
    • 2.1.3 Create the future-state operating model
    • 2.1.4 Determine the transition team
    • 2.1.5 Document the M&A governance
    • 2.1.6 Create program metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Establish an M&A program plan that can be repeated across sales/divestitures.

    The vision and mission statements clearly articulate IT’s aspirations and purpose

    The IT vision statement communicates a desired future state of the IT organization, whereas the IT mission statement portrays the organization’s reason for being. While each serves its own purpose, they should both be derived from the business context implications for IT.

    Vision Statements

    Mission Statements

    Characteristics

    • Describe a desired future
    • Focus on ends, not means
    • Concise
    • Aspirational
    • Memorable
    • Articulate a reason for existence
    • Focus on how to achieve the vision
    • Concise
    • Easy to grasp
    • Sharply focused
    • Inspirational

    Samples

    To be a trusted advisor and partner in enabling business innovation and growth through an engaged IT workforce. (Source: Business News Daily) IT is a cohesive, proactive, and disciplined team that delivers innovative technology solutions while demonstrating a strong customer-oriented mindset. (Source: Forbes, 2013)

    2.1.1 Create the mission and vision statements

    2 hours

    Input: Business objectives, IT capabilities, Rationale for the transaction

    Output: IT’s mission and vision statements for reduction strategies tied to mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create mission and vision statements that reflect IT’s intent and method to support the organization as it pursues a reduction strategy.

    1. Review the definitions and characteristics of mission and vision statements.
    2. Brainstorm different versions of the mission and vision statements.
    3. Edit the statements until you get to a single version of each that accurately reflects IT’s role in the reduction process.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Guiding principles provide a sense of direction

    IT guiding principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of IT in constructing, transforming, and operating the enterprise by informing and restricting IT investment portfolio management, solution development, and procurement decisions.

    A diagram illustrating the place of 'IT guiding principles' in the process of making 'Decisions on the use of IT'. There are four main items, connecting lines naming the type of process in getting from one step to the next, and a line underneath clarifying the questions asked at each step. On the far left, over the question 'What decisions should be made?', is 'Business context and IT implications'. This flows forward to 'IT guiding principles', and they are connected by 'Influence'. Next, over the question 'How should decisions be made?', is the main highlighted section. 'IT guiding principles' flows forward to 'Decisions on the use of IT', and they are connected by 'Guide and inform'. On the far right, over the question 'Who has the accountability and authority to make decisions?', is 'IT policies'. This flows back to 'Decisions on the use of IT', and they are connected by 'Direct and control'.

    IT principles must be carefully constructed to make sure they are adhered to and relevant

    Info-Tech has identified a set of characteristics that IT principles should possess. These characteristics ensure the IT principles are relevant and followed in the organization.

    Approach focused. IT principles should be focused on the approach – how the organization is built, transformed, and operated – as opposed to what needs to be built, which is defined by both functional and non-functional requirements.

    Business relevant. Create IT principles that are specific to the organization. Tie IT principles to the organization’s priorities and strategic aspirations.

    Long lasting. Build IT principles that will withstand the test of time.

    Prescriptive. Inform and direct decision making with actionable IT principles. Avoid truisms, general statements, and observations.

    Verifiable. If compliance can’t be verified, people are less likely to follow the principle.

    Easily Digestible. IT principles must be clearly understood by everyone in IT and by business stakeholders. IT principles aren’t a secret manuscript of the IT team. IT principles should be succinct; wordy principles are hard to understand and remember.

    Followed. Successful IT principles represent a collection of beliefs shared among enterprise stakeholders. IT principles must be continuously communicated to all stakeholders to achieve and maintain buy-in.

    In organizations where formal policy enforcement works well, IT principles should be enforced through appropriate governance processes.

    Consider the example principles below

    IT Principle Name

    IT Principle Statement

    1. Risk Management We will ensure that the organization’s IT Risk Management Register is properly updated to reflect all potential risks and that a plan of action against those risks has been identified.
    2. Transparent Communication We will ensure employees are spoken to with respect and transparency throughout the transaction process.
    3. Separation for Success We will create a carve-out strategy that enables the organization and clearly communicates the resources required to succeed.
    4. Managed Data We will handle data creation, modification, separation, and use across the enterprise in compliance with our data governance policy.
    5.Deliver Better Customer Service We will reduce the number of products offered by IT, enabling a stronger focus on specific products or elements to increase customer service delivery.
    6. Compliance With Laws and Regulations We will operate in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations for both our organization and the potentially purchasing organization.
    7. Defined Value We will create a plan of action that aligns with the organization’s defined value expectations.
    8. Network Readiness We will ensure that employees and customers have immediate access to the network with minimal or no outages.
    9. Value Generator We will leverage the current IT people, processes, and technology to turn the IT organization into a value generator by developing and selling our services to purchasing organizations.

    2.1.2 Identify the guiding principles

    2 hours

    Input: Business objectives, IT capabilities, Rationale for the transaction, Mission and vision statements

    Output: IT’s guiding principles for reduction strategies tied to mergers, acquisitions, and divestitures

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create the guiding principles that will direct the IT organization throughout the reduction strategy process.

    1. Review the role of guiding principles and the examples of guiding principles that organizations have used.
    2. Brainstorm different versions of the guiding principles. Each guiding principle should start with the phrase “We will…”
    3. Edit and consolidate the statements until you have a list of approximately eight to ten statements that accurately reflect IT’s role in the reduction process.
    4. Review the guiding principles every six months to ensure they continue to support the delivery of the business’ reduction strategy goals.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Create two IT teams to support the transaction

    IT M&A Transaction Team

    • The IT M&A Transaction Team should consist of the strongest members of the IT team who can be expected to deliver on unusual or additional tasks not asked of them in normal day-to-day operations.
    • The roles selected for this team will have very specific skills sets or deliver on critical separation capabilities, making their involvement in the combination of two or more IT environments paramount.
    • These individuals need to have a history of proving themselves very trustworthy, as they will likely be required to sign an NDA as well.
    • Expect to have to certain duplicate capabilities or roles across the M&A Team and Operational Team.

    IT Operational Team

    • This group is responsible for ensuring the business operations continue.
    • These employees might be those who are newer to the organization but can be counted on to deliver consistent IT services and products.
    • The roles of this team should ensure that end users or external customers remain satisfied.

    Key capabilities to support M&A

    Consider the following capabilities when looking at who should be a part of the IT Transaction Team.

    Employees who have a significant role in ensuring that these capabilities are being delivered will be a top priority.

    Infrastructure & Operations

    • System Separation
    • Data Management
    • Helpdesk/Desktop Support
    • Cloud/Server Management

    Business Focus

    • Service-Level Management
    • Enterprise Architecture
    • Stakeholder Management
    • Project Management

    Risk & Security

    • Privacy Management
    • Security Management
    • Risk & Compliance Management

    Build a lasting and scalable operating model

    An operating model is an abstract visualization, used like an architect’s blueprint, that depicts how structures and resources are aligned and integrated to deliver on the organization’s strategy.

    It ensures consistency of all elements in the organizational structure through a clear and coherent blueprint before embarking on detailed organizational design.

    The visual should highlight which capabilities are critical to attaining strategic goals and clearly show the flow of work so that key stakeholders can understand where inputs flow in and outputs flow out of the IT organization.

    As you assess the current operating model, consider the following:

    • Does the operating model contain all the necessary capabilities your IT organization requires to be successful?
    • What capabilities should be duplicated?
    • Are there individuals with the skill set to support those roles? If not, is there a plan to acquire or develop those skills?
    • A dedicated project team strictly focused on M&A is great. However, is it feasible for your organization? If not, what blockers exist?
    A diagram with 'Initiatives' and 'Solutions' on the left and right of an area chart, 'Customer' at the top, the area between them labelled 'Functional Area n', and six horizontal bars labelled 'IT Capability' stacked on top of each other. The 'IT Capability' bars are slightly skewed to the 'Solutions' side of the chart.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Investing time up-front getting the operating model right is critical. This will give you a framework to rationalize future organizational changes, allowing you to be more iterative and allowing your model to change as the business changes.

    2.1.3 Create the future-state operating model

    4 hours

    Input: Current operating model, IT strategy, IT capabilities, M&A-specific IT capabilities, Business objectives, Rationale for the transaction, Mission and vision statements

    Output: Future-state operating model for divesting organizations

    Materials: Operating model, Capability overlay, Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to establish what the future-state operating model will be if your organization needs to adjust to support a divestiture transaction. If your organization plans to sell in its entirety, you may choose to skip this activity.

    1. Ensuring that all the IT capabilities are identified by the business and IT strategy, document your organization’s current operating model.
    2. Identify what core capabilities would be critical to the divesting transaction process and separation. Highlight and make copies of those capabilities in the M&A Sell Playbook. As a result of divesting, there may also be capabilities that will become irrelevant in your future state.
    3. Ensure the capabilities that will be decentralized are clearly identified. Decentralized capabilities do not exist within the central IT organization but rather in specific lines of businesses, products, or locations to better understand needs and deliver on the capability.

    An example operating model is included in the M&A Sell Playbook. This process benefits from strong reference architecture and capability mapping ahead of time.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    2.1.4 Determine the transition team

    3 hours

    Input: IT capabilities, Future-state operating model, M&A-specific IT capabilities, Business objectives, Rationale for the transaction, Mission and vision statements

    Output: Transition team

    Materials: Reference architecture, Organizational structure, Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a team that will support your IT organization throughout the transaction. Determining which capabilities and therefore which roles will be required ensures that the business will continue to get the operational support it needs.

    1. Based on the outcome of activity 2.1.3, review the capabilities that your organization will require on the transition team. Group capabilities into functional groups containing capabilities that are aligned well with one another because they have similar responsibilities and functionalities.
    2. Replace the capabilities with roles. For example, stakeholder management, requirements gathering, and project management might be one functional group. Project management and stakeholder management might combine to create a project manager role.
    3. Review the examples in the M&A Sell Playbook and identify which roles will be a part of the transition team.

    For more information, see Redesign Your Organizational Structure

    What is governance?

    And why does it matter so much to IT and the M&A process?

    • Governance is the method in which decisions get made, specifically as they impact various resources (time, money, and people).
    • Because M&A is such a highly governed transaction, it is important to document the governance bodies that exist in your organization.
    • This will give insight into what types of governing bodies there are, what decisions they make, and how that will impact IT.
    • For example, funds to support separation need to be discussed, approved, and supplied to IT from a governing body overseeing the acquisition.
    • A highly mature IT organization will have automated governance, while a seemingly non-existent governance process will be considered ad hoc.
    A pyramid with four levels representing the types of governing bodies that are available with differing levels of IT maturity. An arrow beside the pyramid points upward. The bottom of the arrow is labelled 'Traditional (People and document centric)' and the top is labelled 'Adaptive (Data centric)'. Starting at the bottom of the pyramid is level 1 'Ad Hoc Governance', 'Governance that is not well defined or understood within the organization. It occurs out of necessity but often not by the right people'. Level 2 is 'Controlled Governance', 'Governance focused on compliance and decisions driven by hierarchical authority. Levels of authority are defined and often driven by regulatory'. Level 3 is 'Agile Governance', 'Governance that is flexible to support different needs and quick response in the organization. Driven by principles and delegated throughout the company'. At the top of the pyramid is level 4 'Automated Governance', 'Governance that is entrenched and automated into organizational processes and product/service design. Empowered and fully delegated governance to maintain fit and drive organizational success and survival'.

    2.1.5 Document M&A governance

    1-2 hours

    Input: List of governing bodies, Governing body committee profiles, Governance structure

    Output: Documented method on how decisions are made as it relates to the M&A transaction

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine the method in which decisions are made throughout the M&A transaction as it relates to IT. This will require understanding both governing bodies internal to IT and those external to IT.

    1. First, determine the other governance structures within the organization that will impact the decisions made about M&A. List out these bodies or committees.
    2. Create a profile for each committee that looks at the membership, purpose of the committee, decision areas (authority), and the process of inputs and outputs. Ensure IT committees that will have a role in this process are also documented. Consider the benefits realized, risks, and resources required for each.
    3. Organize the committees into a structure, identifying the committees that have a role in defining the strategy, designing and building, and running.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Current-state structure map – definitions of tiers

    Strategy: These groups will focus on decisions that directly connect to the strategic direction of the organization.

    Design & Build: The second tier of groups will oversee prioritization of a certain area of governance as well as design and build decisions that feed into strategic decisions.

    Run: The lowest level of governance will be oversight of more-specific initiatives and capabilities within IT.

    Expect tier overlap. Some committees will operate in areas that cover two or three of these governance tiers.

    Measure the IT program’s success in terms of its ability to support the business’ M&A goals

    Upper management will measure IT’s success based on your ability to support the underlying reasons for the M&A. Using business metrics will help assure business stakeholders that IT understands their needs and is working with the business to achieve them.

    Business-Specific Metrics

    • Revenue Growth: Increase in the top line as seen by market expansion, product expansion, etc. by percentage/time.
    • Synergy Extraction: Reduction in costs as determined by the ability to identify and eliminate redundancies over time.
    • Profit Margin Growth: Increase in the bottom line as a result of increased revenue growth and/or decreased costs over time.

    IT-Specific Metrics

    • IT operational savings and cost reductions due to synergies: Operating expenses, capital expenditures, licenses, contracts, applications, infrastructure over time.
    • Reduction in IT staff expense and headcount: Decreased budget allocated to IT staff, and ability to identify and remove redundancies in staff.
    • Meeting or improving on IT budget estimates: Delivering successful IT separation on a budget that is the same or lower than the budget estimated during due diligence.
    • Meeting or improving on IT time-to-separation estimates: Delivering successful IT carve-out on a timeline that is the same or shorter than the timeline estimated during due diligence.
    • Business capability support: Delivering the end state of IT that supports the expected business capabilities and growth.

    Establish your own metrics to gauge the success of IT

    Establish SMART M&A Success Metrics

    S pecific Make sure the objective is clear and detailed.
    M easurable Objectives are measurable if there are specific metrics assigned to measure success. Metrics should be objective.
    A ctionable Objectives become actionable when specific initiatives designed to achieve the objective are identified.
    R ealistic Objectives must be achievable given your current resources or known available resources.
    T ime-Bound An objective without a timeline can be put off indefinitely. Furthermore, measuring success is challenging without a timeline.
    • What should IT consider when looking to identify potential additions, deletions, or modifications that will either add value to the organization or reduce costs/risks?
    • Provide a definition of synergies.
    • IT operational savings and cost reductions due to synergies: Operating expenses, capital expenditures, licenses, contracts, applications, infrastructure.
    • Reduction in IT staff expense and headcount: Decreased budget allocated to IT staff, and ability to identify and remove redundancies in staff.
    • Meeting or improving on IT budget estimates: Delivering successful IT separation on a budget that is the same or lower than the budget estimated during due diligence.
    • Meeting or improving on IT time-to-separation estimates: Delivering successful IT carve-out on a timeline that is the same or shorter than the timeline estimated during due diligence.
    • Revenue growth: Increase in the top line as a result, as seen by market expansion, product expansion, etc., as a result of divesting lines of the business and selling service-level agreements to the purchasing organization.
    • Synergy extraction: Reduction in costs, as determined by the ability to identify and eliminate redundancies.
    • Profit margin growth: Increase in the bottom line as a result of increased revenue growth and/or decreased costs.

    Metrics for each phase

    1. Proactive

    2. Discovery & Strategy

    3. Valuation & Due Diligence

    4. Execution & Value Realization

    • % Share of business innovation spend from overall IT budget
    • % Critical processes with approved performance goals and metrics
    • % IT initiatives that meet or exceed value expectation defined in business case
    • % IT initiatives aligned with organizational strategic direction
    • % Satisfaction with IT's strategic decision-making abilities
    • $ Estimated business value added through IT-enabled innovation
    • % Overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT
    • % Percent of business leaders that view IT as an Innovator
    • % IT budget as a percent of revenue
    • % Assets that are not allocated
    • % Unallocated software licenses
    • # Obsolete assets
    • % IT spend that can be attributed to the business (chargeback or showback)
    • % Share of CapEx of overall IT budget
    • % Prospective organizations that meet the search criteria
    • $ Total IT cost of ownership (before and after M&A, before and after rationalization)
    • % Business leaders that view IT as a Business Partner
    • % Defects discovered in production
    • $ Cost per user for enterprise applications
    • % In-house-built applications vs. enterprise applications
    • % Owners identified for all data domains
    • # IT staff asked to participate in due diligence
    • Change to due diligence
    • IT budget variance
    • Synergy target
    • % Satisfaction with the effectiveness of IT capabilities
    • % Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • $ Impact of vendor SLA breaches
    • $ Savings through cost-optimization efforts
    • $ Savings through application rationalization and technology standardization
    • # Key positions empty
    • % Frequency of staff turnover
    • % Emergency changes
    • # Hours of unplanned downtime
    • % Releases that cause downtime
    • % Incidents with identified problem record
    • % Problems with identified root cause
    • # Days from problem identification to root cause fix
    • % Projects that consider IT risk
    • % Incidents due to issues not addressed in the security plan
    • # Average vulnerability remediation time
    • % Application budget spent on new build/buy vs. maintenance (deferred feature implementation, enhancements, bug fixes)
    • # Time (days) to value realization
    • % Projects that realized planned benefits
    • $ IT operational savings and cost reductions that are related to synergies/divestitures
    • % IT staff–related expenses/redundancies
    • # Days spent on IT separation
    • $ Accurate IT budget estimates
    • % Revenue growth directly tied to IT delivery
    • % Profit margin growth

    2.1.6 Create program metrics

    1-2 hours

    Input: IT capabilities, Mission, vision, and guiding principles, Rationale for the acquisition

    Output: Program metrics to support IT throughout the M&A process

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine how IT’s success throughout a growth transaction will be measured and determined.

    1. Document a list of appropriate metrics on the whiteboard. Remember to include metrics that demonstrate the business impact. You can use the sample metrics listed on the previous slide as a starting point.
    2. Set a target and deadline for each metric. This will help the group determine when it is time to evaluate progression.
    3. Establish a baseline for each metric based on information collected within your organization.
    4. Assign an owner for tracking each metric as well as someone to be accountable for performance.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Discovery & Strategy

    Step 2.2

    Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale

    Activities

    • 2.2.1 Establish the separation strategy
    • 2.2.2 Conduct a RACI
    • 2.2.3 Create the communication plan
    • 2.2.4 Assess the potential organization(s)

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Identify IT’s plan of action when it comes to the separation/sale and align IT’s separation/sale strategy with the business’ M&A strategy.

    Separation strategies

    There are several IT separation strategies that will let you achieve your target technology environment.

    IT Separation Strategies
    • Divest. Carve out elements of the IT organization and sell them to a purchasing organization with or without a service-level agreement.
    • Sell. Sell the entire IT environment to a purchasing organization. The purchasing organization takes full responsibility in delivering and running the IT environment.
    • Spin-Off Joint Venture. Carve out elements of the IT organization and combine them with elements of a new or purchasing organization to create a new entity.

    The approach IT takes will depend on the business objectives for the M&A.

    • Generally speaking, the separation strategy is well understood and influenced by the frequency of and rationale for selling.
    • Based on the initiatives generated by each business process owner, you need to determine the IT separation strategy that will best support the desired target technology environment, especially if you are still operating or servicing elements of that IT environment.

    Key considerations when choosing an IT separation strategy include:

    • What are the main business objectives of the M&A?
    • What are the key synergies expected from the transaction?
    • What IT separation strategy best helps obtain these benefits?
    • What opportunities exist to position the business for sustainable and long-term growth?

    Separation strategies in detail

    Review highlights and drawbacks of different separation strategies

    Divest
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses striving to reduce costs and potentially even generate revenue for the business through the delivery of SLAs.
    • Opportunity to reduce or scale back on lines of business or products that are not driving profits.
      Drawbacks
    • May be forced to give up critical staff that have been known to deliver high value.
    • The IT department is left to deliver services to the purchasing organization with little support or consideration from the business.
    • There can be increased risk and security concerns that need to be addressed.
    Sell
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses looking to gain capital to exit the market profitably or to enter a new market with a large sum of capital.
    • The business will no longer exist, and as a result all operational costs, including IT, will become redundant.
      Drawbacks
    • IT is no longer needed as an operating or capital service for the organization.
    • Lost resources, including highly trained and critical staff.
    • May require packaging employees off and using the profit or capital generated to cover any closing costs.
    Spin-Off or Joint Venture
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses looking to expand their market presence or acquire new products. Essentially aligning the two organizations in the same market.
    • Each side has a unique offering but complementing capabilities.
      Drawbacks
    • As much as the organization is going through a separation from the original company, it will be going through an integration with the new company.
    • There could be differences in culture.
    • This could require a large amount of investment without a guarantee of profit or success.

    2.2.1 Establish the separation strategy

    1-2 hours

    Input: Business separation strategy, Guiding principles, M&A governance

    Output: IT’s separation strategy

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to determine IT’s approach to separating or selling. This approach might differ slightly from transaction to transaction. However, the businesses approach to transactions should give insight into the general separation strategy IT should adopt.

    1. Make sure you have clearly articulated the business objectives for the M&A, the technology end state for IT, and the magnitude of the overall separation.
    2. Review and discuss the highlights and drawbacks of each type of separation.
    3. Use Info-Tech’s Separation Posture Selection Framework on the next slide to select the separation posture that will appropriately enable the business. Consider these questions during your discussion:
      1. What are the main business objectives of the M&A? What key IT capabilities will need to support business objectives?
      2. What key synergies are expected from the transaction? What opportunities exist to position the business for sustainable growth?
      3. What IT separation best helps obtain these benefits?

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Separation Posture Selection Framework

    Business M&A Strategy

    Resultant Technology Strategy

    M&A Magnitude (% of Seller Assets, Income, or Market Value)

    IT Separation Posture

    A. Horizontal Adopt One Model ‹100% Divest
    ›99% Sell
    B. Vertical Create Links Between Critical Systems Any Divest
    C. Conglomerate Independent Model Any Joint Venture
    Divest
    D. Hybrid: Horizontal & Conglomerate Create Links Between Critical Systems Any Divest
    Joint Venture

    M&A separation strategy

    Business M&A Strategy Resultant Technology Strategy M&A Magnitude (% of Seller Assets, Income, or Market Value) IT Separation Posture

    You may need a hybrid separation posture to achieve the technology end state.

    M&A objectives may not affect all IT domains and business functions in the same way. Therefore, the separation requirements for each business function may differ. Organizations will often choose to select and implement a hybrid separation posture to realize the technology end state.

    Each business division may have specific IT domain and capability needs that require an alternative separation strategy.

    • Example: Even when conducting a joint venture by forming a new organization, some partners might view themselves as the dominant partner and want to influence the IT environment to a greater degree.
    • Example: Some purchasing organizations will expect service-level agreements to be available for a significant period of time following the divestiture, while others will be immediately independent.

    2.2.2 Conduct a RACI

    1-2 hours

    Input: IT capabilities, Transition team, Separation strategy

    Output: Completed RACI for Transition team

    Materials: Reference architecture, Organizational structure, Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to identify the core accountabilities and responsibilities for the roles identified as critical to your transition team. While there might be slight variation from transaction to transaction, ideally each role should be performing certain tasks.

    1. First, identify a list of critical tasks that need to be completed to support the sale or separation. For example:
      • Communicate with the company M&A team.
      • Identify the key IT solutions that can and cannot be carved out.
      • Gather data room artifacts and provide them to acquiring organization.
    2. Next, identify at the activity level which role is accountable or responsible for each activity. Enter an A for accountable, R for responsible, or A/R for both.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Communication and change

    Prepare key stakeholders for the potential changes

    • Anytime you are starting a project or program that will depend on users and stakeholders to give up their old way of doing things, change will force people to become novices again, leading to lost productivity and added stress.
    • Change management can improve outcomes for any project where you need people to adopt new tools and procedures, comply with new policies, learn new skills and behaviors, or understand and support new processes.
    • M&As move very quickly, and it can be very difficult to keep track of which stakeholders you need to be communicating with and what you should be communicating.
    • Not all organizations embrace or resist change in the same ways. Base your change communications on your organization’s cultural appetite for change in general.
      • Organizations with a low appetite for change will require more direct, assertive communications.
      • Organizations with a high appetite for change are more suited to more open, participatory approaches.

    Three key dimensions determine the appetite for cultural change:

    • Power Distance. Refers to the acceptance that power is distributed unequally throughout the organization.
      In organizations with a high power distance, the unequal power distribution is accepted by the less powerful employees.
    • Individualism. Organizations that score high in individualism have employees who are more independent. Those who score low in individualism fall into the collectivism side, where employees are strongly tied to one another or their groups.
    • Uncertainty Avoidance. Describes the level of acceptance that an organization has toward uncertainty. Those who score high in this area find that their employees do not favor uncertain situations, while those that score low in this area find that their employees are comfortable with change and uncertainty.

    2.2.3 Create the communication plan

    1-2 hours

    Input: IT’s M&A mission, vision, and guiding principles, M&A transition team, IT separation strategy, RACI

    Output: IT’s M&A communication plan

    Materials: Flip charts/whiteboard, Markers, RACI, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a communication plan that IT can leverage throughout the initiative.

    1. Create a structured communication plan that allows for continuous communication with the integration management office, senior management, and the business functional heads.
    2. Outline key topics of communication, with stakeholders, inputs, and outputs for each topic.
    3. Review Info-Tech’s example communication plan in the M&A Sell Playbook and update it with relevant information.
    4. Does this communication plan make sense for your organization? What doesn’t make sense? Adjust the communication guide to suit your organization.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Assessing potential organizations

    As soon as you have identified organizations to consider, it’s imperative to assess critical risks. Most IT leaders can attest that they will receive little to no notice when the business is pursuing a sale and IT has to assess the IT organization. As a result, having a standardized template to quickly assess the potential acquiring organization is important.

    Ways to Assess

    1. News: Assess what sort of news has been announced in relation to the organization. Have they had any risk incidents? Has a critical vendor announced working with them?
    2. LinkedIn: Scan through the LinkedIn profiles of employees. This will give you a sense of what platforms they have based on employees. It will also give insight into positive or negative employee experiences that could impact retention.
    3. Trends: Some industries will have specific solutions that are relevant and popular. Assess what the key players are (if you don’t already know) to determine the solution.
    4. Business Architecture: While this assessment won’t perfect, try to understand the business’ value streams and the critical business and IT capabilities that would be needed to support them. Will your organization or employee skills be required to support these long term?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Assessing potential organizations is not just for the purchaser. The seller should also know what the purchasing organization’s history with M&As is and what potential risks could occur if remaining connected through ongoing SLAs.

    2.2.4 Assess the potential organization(s)

    1-2 hours

    Input: Publicized historical risk events, Solutions and vendor contracts likely in the works, Trends

    Output: IT’s valuation of the potential organization(s) for selling or divesting

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the organization(s) that your organization is considering selling or divesting to.

    1. Complete the Historical Valuation Worksheet in the M&A Sell Playbook to understand the type of IT organization that your company may support.
      • The business likely isn’t looking for in-depth details at this time. However, as the IT leader, it is your responsibility to ensure critical risks are identified and communicated to the business.
    2. Use the information identified to help the business narrow down which organizations could be the right organizations to sell or divest to.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    By the end of this pre-transaction phase you should:

    Have a program plan for M&As and a repeatable M&A strategy for IT when engaging in reduction transactions

    Key outcomes from the Discovery & Strategy phase
    • Prepare the IT environment to support the potential sale or divestiture by identifying critical program plan elements and establishing a separation or carve-out strategy that will enable the business to reach its goals.
    • Create a M&A strategy that accounts for all the necessary elements of a transaction and ensures sufficient governance, capabilities, and metrics exist.
    Key deliverables from the Discovery & Strategy phase
    • Create vision and mission statements
    • Establish guiding principles
    • Create a future-state operating model
    • Identify the key roles for the transaction team
    • Identify and communicate the M&A governance
    • Determine target metrics
    • Identify the M&A operating model
    • Select the separation strategy framework
    • Conduct a RACI for key transaction tasks for the transaction team
    • Document the communication plan

    M&A Sell Blueprint

    Phase 3

    Due Diligence & Preparation

    Phase 1Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4
    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Reduction Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    • 3.1 Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    • 3.2 Prepare to Separate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Drive value with a due diligence charter
    • Gather data room artifacts
    • Measure staff engagement
    • Assess culture
    • Create a carve-out roadmap
    • Prioritize separation tasks
    • Establish the separation roadmap
    • Identify the buyer’s IT expectations
    • Create a service/transaction agreement
    • Estimate separation costs
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Create functional workplans for employees
    • Align project metrics with identified tasks

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team
    • Business leaders
    • Purchasing organization
    • Transition team

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish the Transaction FoundationDiscover the Motivation for SeparationIdentify Expectations and Create the Carve-Out RoadmapPrepare and Manage EmployeesPlan the Separation RoadmapNext Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    • 0.1 Identify the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a divestiture/sale.
    • 0.2 Identify key stakeholders and determine the IT transaction team.
    • 0.3 Gather and evaluate the M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.
    • 1.1 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale.
    • 1.2 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the divestiture/sale.
    • 1.3 Establish the separation strategy.
    • 1.4 Create the due diligence charter.
    • 2.1 Identify the buyer’s IT expectations.
    • 2.2 Create a list of IT artifacts to be reviewed in the data room.
    • 2.3 Create a carve-out roadmap.
    • 2.4 Create a service/technical transaction agreement.
    • 3.1 Measure staff engagement.
    • 3.2 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.
    • 3.3 Create an employee transition plan.
    • 3.4 Create functional workplans for employees.
    • 4.1 Prioritize separation tasks.
    • 4.2 Establish the separation roadmap.
    • 4.3 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.
    • 4.4 Estimate separation costs.
    • 5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.
    • 5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. IT strategy
    2. IT operating model
    3. IT governance structure
    4. M&A transaction team
    1. Business context implications for IT
    2. Separation strategy
    3. Due diligence charter
    1. Data room artifacts identified
    2. Carve-out roadmap
    3. Service/technical transaction agreement
    1. Engagement assessment
    2. Culture assessment
    3. Employee transition plans and workplans
    1. Separation roadmap and associated resourcing
    1. Divestiture separation strategy for IT

    What is the Due Diligence & Preparation phase?

    Mid-transaction state

    The Due Diligence & Preparation phase during a sale or divestiture is a critical time for IT. If IT fails to proactively participate in this phase, IT will have to merely react to separation expectations set by the business.

    If your organization is being sold in its entirety, staff will have major concerns about their future in the new organization. Making this transition as smooth as possible and being transparent could go a long way in ensuring their success in the new organization.

    In a divestiture, this is the time to determine where it’s possible for the organization to divide or separate from itself. A lack of IT involvement in these conversations could lead to an overcommitment by the business and under-delivery by IT.

    Goal: To ensure that, as the selling or divesting organization, you comply with regulations, prepare staff for potential changes, and identify a separation strategy if necessary

    Due Diligence Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Due Diligence & Preparation phase, you must have addressed the following:

    • Understand the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a sale or divestiture and what opportunities or pain points the sale should alleviate.
    • Identify the key roles for the transaction team.
    • Identify the M&A governance.
    • Determine target metrics.
    • Select a separation strategy framework.
    • Conduct a RACI for key transaction tasks for the transaction team.

    Before coming into the Due Diligence & Preparation phase, we recommend addressing the following:

    • Create vision and mission statements.
    • Establish guiding principles.
    • Create a future-state operating model.
    • Identify the M&A operating model.
    • Document the communication plan.
    • Examine the business perspective of IT.
    • Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.
    • Be able to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT’s value to the business.

    The Technology Value Trinity

    Delivery of Business Value & Strategic Needs

    • Digital & Technology Strategy
      The identification of objectives and initiatives necessary to achieve business goals.
    • IT Operating Model
      The model for how IT is organized to deliver on business needs and strategies.
    • Information & Technology Governance
      The governance to ensure the organization and its customers get maximum value from the use of information and technology.

    All three elements of the Technology Value Trinity work in harmony to deliver business value and achieve strategic needs. As one changes, the others need to change as well.

    • Digital and IT Strategy tells you what you need to achieve to be successful.
    • IT Operating Model and Organizational Design is the alignment of resources to deliver on your strategy and priorities.
    • Information & Technology Governance is the confirmation of IT’s goals and strategy, which ensures the alignment of IT and business strategy. It’s the mechanism by which you continuously prioritize work to ensure that what is delivered is in line with the strategy. This oversight evaluates, directs, and monitors the delivery of outcomes to ensure that the use of resources results in the achieving the organization’s goals.

    Too often strategy, operating model and organizational design, and governance are considered separate practices. As a result, “strategic documents” end up being wish lists, and projects continue to be prioritized based on who shouts the loudest – not based on what is in the best interest of the organization.

    Due Diligence & Preparation

    Step 3.1

    Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff

    Activities

    • 3.1.1 Drive value with a due diligence charter
    • 3.1.2 Gather data room artifacts
    • 3.1.3 Measure staff engagement
    • 3.1.4 Assess culture

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Company M&A team
    • Business leaders
    • Prospective IT organization
    • Transition team

    Outcomes of Step

    This step of the process is when IT should prepare and support the business in due diligence and gather the necessary information about staff changes.

    3.1.1 Drive value with a due diligence charter

    1-2 hours

    Input: Key roles for the transaction team, M&A governance, Target metrics, Selected separation strategy framework, RACI of key transaction tasks for the transaction team

    Output: IT Due Diligence Charter

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a charter leveraging the items completed in the previous phase, as listed on the Due Diligence Prerequisite Checklist slide, to gain executive sign-off.

    1. In the IT Due Diligence Charter in the M&A Sell Playbook, complete the aspects of the charter that are relevant for you and your organization.
    2. We recommend including these items in the charter:
      • Communication plan
      • Transition team roles
      • Goals and metrics for the transaction
      • Separation strategy
      • Sale/divestiture RACI
    3. Once the charter has been completed, ensure that business executives agree to the charter and sign off on the plan of action.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    3.1.2 Gather data room artifacts

    4 hours

    Input: Future-state operating model, M&A governance, Target metrics, Selected separation strategy framework, RACI of key transaction tasks for the transaction team

    Output: List of items to acquire and verify can be provided to the purchasing organization while in the data room

    Materials: Critical domain lists on following slides, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Transition team, Legal team, Compliance/privacy officers

    The purpose of this activity is to create a list of the key artifacts that you could be asked for during the due diligence process.

    1. Review the lists on the following pages as a starting point. Identify which domains, stakeholders, artifacts, and information should be requested for the data room.
    2. IT leadership may or may not be asked to enter the data room directly. The short notice for having to find these artifacts for the purchasing organization can leave your IT organization scrambling. Identify the critical items worth obtaining ahead of time.
    3. Once you have identified the artifacts, provide the list to the legal team or compliance/privacy officers and ensure they also agree those items can be provided. If changes to the documents need to be made, take the time to do so.
    4. Store all items in a safe and secure file or provide to the M&A team ahead of due diligence.

    **Note that if your organization is not leading/initiating the data room, then you can ignore this activity.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Critical domains

    Understand the key stakeholders and outputs for each domain

    Domain

    Stakeholders

    Key Artifacts

    Key Information to request

    Business
    • Enterprise Architecture
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Business Process Owners
    • Business capability map
    • Capability map (the M&A team should be taking care of this, but make sure it exists)
    • Business satisfaction with various IT systems and services
    Leadership/IT Executive
    • CIO
    • CTO
    • CISO
    • IT budgets
    • IT capital and operating budgets (from current year and previous year)
    Data & Analytics
    • Chief Data Officer
    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Master data domains, system of record for each
    • Unstructured data retention requirements
    • Data architecture
    • Master data domains, sources, and storage
    • Data retention requirements
    Applications
    • Applications Manager
    • Application Portfolio Manager
    • Application Architect
    • Applications map
    • Applications inventory
    • Applications architecture
    • Copy of all software license agreements
    • Copy of all software maintenance agreements
    Infrastructure
    • Head of Infrastructure
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Infrastructure map
    • Infrastructure inventory
    • Network architecture (including which data centers host which infrastructure and applications)
    • Inventory (including separation capabilities of vendors, versions, switches, and routers)
    • Copy of all hardware lease or purchase agreements
    • Copy of all hardware maintenance agreements
    • Copy of all outsourcing/external service provider agreements
    • Copy of all service-level agreements for centrally provided, shared services and systems
    Products and Services
    • Product Manager
    • Head of Customer Interactions
    • Product lifecycle
    • Product inventory
    • Customer market strategy

    Critical domains (continued)

    Understand the key stakeholders and outputs for each domain

    Domain

    Stakeholders

    Key Artifacts

    Key Information to request

    Operations
    • Head of Operations
    • Service catalog
    • Service overview
    • Service owners
    • Access policies and procedures
    • Availability and service levels
    • Support policies and procedures
    • Costs and approvals (internal and customer costs)
    IT Processes
    • CIO
    • IT Management
    • VP of IT Governance
    • VP of IT Strategy
    • IT process flow diagram
    • Processes in place and productivity levels (capacity)
    • Critical processes/processes the organization feels they do particularly well
    IT People
    • CIO
    • VP of Human Resources
    • IT organizational chart
    • Competency & capacity assessment
    • IT organizational structure (including resources from external service providers such as contractors) with appropriate job descriptions or roles and responsibilities
    • IT headcount and location
    Security
    • CISO
    • Security Architect
    • Security posture
    • Information security staff
    • Information security service providers
    • Information security tools
    • In-flight information security projects
    Projects
    • Head of Projects
    • Project portfolio
    • List of all future, ongoing, and recently completed projects
    Vendors
    • Head of Vendor Management
    • License inventory
    • Inventory (including what will and will not be transitioning, vendors, versions, number of licenses)

    Retain top talent throughout the transition

    Focus on retention and engagement

    • People are such a critical component of this process, especially in the selling organization.
    • Retaining employees, especially the critical employees who hold specific skills or knowledge, will ensure the success and longevity of the divesting organization, purchasing organization, or the new company.
    • Giving employees a role in the organization and ensuring they do not see their capabilities as redundant will be critical to the process.
    • It is okay if employees need to change what they were doing temporarily or even long-term. However, being transparent about these changes and highlighting their value to the process and organization(s) will help.
    • The first step to moving forward with retention is to look at the baseline engagement and culture of employees and the organization. This will help determine where to focus and allow you to identify changes in engagement that resulted from the transaction.
    • Job engagement drivers are levers that influence the engagement of employees in their day-to-day roles.
    • Organizational engagement drivers are levers that influence an employee’s engagement with the broader organization.
    • Retention drivers are employment needs. They don’t necessarily drive engagement, but they must be met for engagement to be possible.

    3.1.3 Measure staff engagement

    3-4 hours

    Input: Engagement survey

    Output: Baseline engagement scores

    Materials: Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT employees of current organization

    The purpose of this activity is to measure current staff engagement to have a baseline to measure against in the future state. This is a good activity to complete if you will be divesting or selling in entirety.

    The results from the survey should act as a baseline to determine what the organization is doing well in terms of employee engagement and what drivers could be improved upon.

    1. Review Info-Tech’s Build an IT Employee Engagement Program research and select a survey that will best meet your needs.
    2. Conduct the survey and note which drivers employees are currently satisfied with. Likewise, note where there are opportunities.
    3. Document actions that should be taken to mitigate the negative engagement drivers throughout the transaction and enhance or maintain the positive engagement drivers.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Assess culture as a part of engagement

    Culture should not be overlooked, especially as it relates to the separation of IT environments

    • There are three types of culture that need to be considered.
    • Most importantly, this transition is an opportunity to change the culture that might exist in your organization’s IT environment.
    • Make a decision on which type of culture you’d like IT to have post transition.

    Target Organization's Culture. The culture that the target organization is currently embracing. Their established and undefined governance practices will lend insight into this.

    Your Organization’s Culture. The culture that your organization is currently embracing. Examine people’s attitudes and behaviors within IT toward their jobs and the organization.

    Ideal Culture. What will the future culture of the IT organization be once separation is complete? Are there aspects that your current organization and the target organization embrace that are worth considering?

    Culture categories

    Map the results of the IT Culture Diagnostic to an existing framework

    Competitive
    • Autonomy
    • Confront conflict directly
    • Decisive
    • Competitive
    • Achievement oriented
    • Results oriented
    • High performance expectations
    • Aggressive
    • High pay for good performance
    • Working long hours
    • Having a good reputation
    • Being distinctive/different
    Innovative
    • Adaptable
    • Innovative
    • Quick to take advantage of opportunities
    • Risk taking
    • Opportunities for professional growth
    • Not constrained by rules
    • Tolerant
    • Informal
    • Enthusiastic
    Traditional
    • Stability
    • Reflective
    • Rule oriented
    • Analytical
    • High attention to detail
    • Organized
    • Clear guiding philosophy
    • Security of employment
    • Emphasis on quality
    • Focus on safety
    Cooperative
    • Team oriented
    • Fair
    • Praise for good performance
    • Supportive
    • Calm
    • Developing friends at work
    • Socially responsible

    Culture Considerations

    • What culture category was dominant for each IT organization?
    • Do you share the same dominant category?
    • Is your current dominant culture category the most ideal to have post-separation?

    3.1.4 Assess Culture

    3-4 hours

    Input: Cultural assessments for current IT organization, Cultural assessment for target IT organization

    Output: Goal for IT culture

    Materials: IT Culture Diagnostic

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT employees of current organization, IT employees of target organization, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the different cultures that might exist within the IT environments of the organizations involved. By understanding the culture that exists in the purchasing organization, you can identify the fit and prepare impacted staff for potential changes.

    1. Complete this activity by leveraging the blueprint Fix Your IT Culture, specifically the IT Culture Diagnostic.
    2. Fill out the diagnostic for the IT department in your organization:
      1. Answer the 16 questions in tab 2, Diagnostic.
      2. Find out your dominant culture and review recommendations in tab 3, Results.
    3. Document the results from tab 3, Results, in the M&A Sell Playbook if you are trying to record all artifacts related to the transaction in one place.
    4. Repeat the activity for the purchasing organization.
    5. Leverage the information to determine what the goal for the culture of IT will be post-separation if it will differ from the current culture.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Due Diligence & Preparation

    Step 3.2

    Prepare to Separate

    Activities

    • 3.2.1 Create a carve-out roadmap
    • 3.2.2 Prioritize separation tasks
    • 3.2.3 Establish the separation roadmap
    • 3.2.4 Identify the buyer’s IT expectations
    • 3.2.5 Create a service/transaction agreement
    • 3.2.6 Estimate separation costs
    • 3.2.7 Create an employee transition plan
    • 3.2.8 Create functional workplans for employees
    • 3.2.9 Align project metrics with identified tasks

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Transition team
    • Company M&A team
    • Purchasing organization

    Outcomes of Step

    Have an established plan of action toward separation across all domains and a strategy toward resources.

    Don’t underestimate the importance of separation preparation

    Separation involves taking the IT organization and dividing it into two or more separate entities.

    Testing the carve capabilities of the IT organization often takes 3 months. (Source: Cognizant, 2014)

    Daimler-Benz lost nearly $19 billion following its purchase of Chrysler by failing to recognize the cultural differences that existed between the two car companies. (Source: Deal Room)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Separating the IT organization requires more time and effort than business leaders will know. Frequently communicate challenges and lost opportunities when carving the IT environment out.

    Separation needs

    Identify the business objectives of the sale to determine the IT strategy

    Set up a meeting with your IT due diligence team to:

    • Ensure there will be no gaps in the delivery of products and services in the future state.
    • Discuss the people and processes necessary to achieve the target technology environment and support M&A business objectives.

    Use this opportunity to:

    • Identify data and application complexities between the involved organizations.
    • Identify the IT people and process gaps, initiatives, and levels of support expected.
    • Determine your infrastructure needs to ensure effectiveness and delivery of services:
      • Does IT have the infrastructure to support the applications and business capabilities?
      • Identify any gaps between the current infrastructure in both organizations and the infrastructure required.
      • Identify any redundancies/gaps.
      • Determine the appropriate IT separation strategies.
    • Document your gaps, redundancies, initiatives, and assumptions to help you track and justify the initiatives that must be undertaken and help estimate the cost of separation.

    Separation strategies

    There are several IT separation strategies that will let you achieve your target technology environment.

    IT Separation Strategies
    • Divest. Carve out elements of the IT organization and sell them to a purchasing organization with or without a service-level agreement.
    • Sell. Sell the entire IT environment to a purchasing organization. The purchasing organization takes full responsibility in delivering and running the IT environment.
    • Spin-Off Joint Venture. Carve out elements of the IT organization and combine them with elements of a new or purchasing organization to create a new entity.

    The approach IT takes will depend on the business objectives for the M&A.

    • Generally speaking, the separation strategy is well understood and influenced by the frequency of and rationale for selling.
    • Based on the initiatives generated by each business process owner, you need to determine the IT separation strategy that will best support the desired target technology environment, especially if you are still operating or servicing elements of that IT environment.

    Key considerations when choosing an IT separation strategy include:

    • What are the main business objectives of the M&A?
    • What are the key synergies expected from the transaction?
    • What IT separation strategy best helps obtain these benefits?
    • What opportunities exist to position the business for sustainable and long-term growth?

    Separation strategies in detail

    Review highlights and drawbacks of different separation strategies

    Divest
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses striving to reduce costs and potentially even generate revenue for the business through the delivery of SLAs.
    • Opportunity to reduce or scale back on lines of business or products that are not driving profits.
      Drawbacks
    • May be forced to give up critical staff that have been known to deliver high value.
    • The IT department is left to deliver services to the purchasing organization with little support or consideration from the business.
    • There can be increased risk and security concerns that need to be addressed.
    Sell
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses looking to gain capital to exit the market profitably or to enter a new market with a large sum of capital.
    • The business will no longer exist, and as a result all operational costs, including IT, will become redundant.
      Drawbacks
    • IT is no longer needed as an operating or capital service for the organization.
    • Lost resources, including highly trained and critical staff.
    • May require packaging employees off and using the profit or capital generated to cover any closing costs.
    Spin-Off or Joint Venture
      Highlights
    • Recommended for businesses looking to expand their market presence or acquire new products. Essentially aligning the two organizations in the same market.
    • Each side has a unique offering but complementing capabilities.
      Drawbacks
    • As much as the organization is going through a separation from the original company, it will be going through an integration with the new company.
    • There could be differences in culture.
    • This could require a large amount of investment without a guarantee of profit or success.

    Preparing the carve-out roadmap

    And why it matters so much

    • When carving out the IT environment in preparation for a divestiture, it’s important to understand the infrastructure, application, and data connections that might exist.
    • Much to the business’ surprise, carving out the IT environment is not easy, especially when considering the services and products that might depend on access to certain applications or data sets.
    • Once the business has indicated which elements they anticipate divesting, be prepared for testing the functionality and ability of this carve-out, either through automation or manually. There are benefits and drawbacks to both methods:
      • Automated requires a solution and a developer to code the tests.
      • Manual requires time to find the errors, possibly more time than automated testing.
    • Identify if there are dependencies that will make the carve-out difficult.
      • For example, the business is trying to divest Product X, but that product is integrated with Product Y, which is not being sold.
      • Consider all the processes and products that specific data might support as well.
      • Moreover, the data migration tool will need to enter the ERP system and identify not just the data but all supporting and historical elements that underlie the data.

    Critical components to consider:

    • Selecting manual or automated testing
    • Determining data dependencies
    • Data migration capabilities
    • Auditing approval
    • People and skills that support specific elements being carved out

    3.2.1 Create a carve-out roadmap

    6 hours

    Input: Items included in the carve-out, Dependencies, Whether testing is completed, If the carve-out will pass audit, If the carve-out item is prepared to be separated

    Output: Carve-out roadmap

    Materials: Business’ divestiture plan, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business leaders, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to prepare the IT environment by identifying a carve-out roadmap, specifically looking at data, infrastructure, and applications. Feel free to expand the roadmap to include other categories as your organization sees fit.

    1. In the Carve-Out Roadmap in the M&A Sell Playbook, identify the key elements of the carve-out in the first column.
    2. Note any dependencies the items might have. For example:
      • The business is selling Product X, which is linked to Data X and Data Y. The organization does not want to sell Data Y. Data X would be considered dependent on Data Y.
    3. Once the dependencies have been confirmed, begin automated or manual testing to examine the possibility of separating the data sets (or other dependencies) from one another.
    4. After identifying an acceptable method of separation, inform the auditing individual or body and confirm that there would be no repercussions for the planned process.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    3.2.2 Prioritize separation tasks

    2 hours

    Input: Separation tasks, Transition team, M&A RACI

    Output: Prioritized separation list

    Materials: Separation task checklist, Separation roadmap

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to prioritize the different separation tasks that your organization has identified as necessary to this transaction. Some tasks might not be relevant for this particular transaction, and others might be critical.

    1. Begin by downloading the SharePoint or Excel version of the M&A Separation Project Management Tool.
    2. Identify which separation tasks you want to have as part of your project plan. Alter or remove any tasks that are irrelevant to your organization. Add in tasks you think are missing.
    3. When deciding criticality of the task, consider the effect on stakeholders, those who are impacted or influenced in the process of the task, and dependencies (e.g. data strategy needs to be addressed first before you can tackle its dependencies, like data quality).
    4. Feel free to edit the way you measure criticality. The standard tool leverages a three-point scale. At the end, you should have a list of tasks in priority order based on criticality.

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint).

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel).

    Separation checklists

    Prerequisite Checklist
    • Build the project plan for separation and prioritize activities
      • Plan first day
      • Plan first 30/100 days
      • Plan first year
    • Create an organization-aligned IT strategy
    • Identify critical stakeholders
    • Create a communication strategy
    • Understand the rationale for the sale or divestiture
    • Develop IT's sale/divestiture strategy
      • Determine goal opportunities
      • Create the mission and vision statements
      • Create the guiding principles
      • Create program metrics
    • Consolidate reports from due diligence/data room
    • Conduct culture assessment
    • Create a transaction team
    • Establish a service/technical transaction agreement
    • Plan and communicate culture changes
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Assess baseline engagement
    Business
    • Design an enterprise architecture
    • Document your business architecture
    • Meet compliance and regulatory standards
    • Identify and assess all of IT's risks
    Applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
      • CRM
      • HRIS
      • Financial
      • Sales
      • Risk
      • Security
      • ERP
      • Email
    • Develop method of separating applications
    • Model critical applications that have dependencies on one another
    • Identify the infrastructure capacity required to support critical applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
    Leadership/IT Executive
    • Build an IT budget
    • Structure operating budget
    • Structure capital budget
    • Identify the workforce demand vs. capacity
    • Establish and monitor key metrics
    • Communicate value realized/cost savings
    Data
    • Confirm data strategy
    • Confirm data governance
    • Build a data architecture roadmap
    • Analyze data sources and domains
    • Evaluate data storage (on-premises vs. cloud)
    • Develop an enterprise content management strategy and roadmap
    • Ensure cleanliness/usability of data sets
    • Identify data sets that can remain operational if reduced/separated
    • Develop reporting and analytics capabilities
    • Confirm data strategy
    Operations
    • Manage sales access to customer data
    • Determine locations and hours of operation
    • Separate/terminate phone lists and extensions
    • Split email address books
    • Communicate helpdesk/service desk information

    Separation checklists (continued)

    Infrastructure
    • Manage organization domains
    • Consolidate data centers
    • Compile inventory of vendors, versions, switches, and routers
    • Review hardware lease or purchase agreements
    • Review outsourcing/service provider agreements
    • Review service-level agreements
    • Assess connectivity linkages between locations
    • Plan to migrate to a single email system if necessary
    • Determine network access concerns
    Vendors
    • Establish a sustainable vendor management office
    • Review vendor landscape
    • Identify warranty options
    • Identify the licensing grant
    • Rationalize vendor services and solutions
    People
    • Design an IT operating model
    • Design your future IT organizational structure
    • Conduct a RACI for prioritized activities
    • Conduct a culture assessment and identify goal IT culture
    • Build an IT employee engagement program
    • Determine critical roles and systems/process/products they support
    • Define new job descriptions with meaningful roles and responsibilities
    • Create employee transition plans
    • Create functional workplans
    Projects
    • Identify projects to be on hold
    • Communicate project intake process
    • Reprioritize projects
    Products & Services
    • Redefine service catalog
    • Ensure customer interaction requirements are met
    • Select a solution for product lifecycle management
    • Plan service-level agreements
    Security
    • Conduct a security assessment
    • Develop accessibility prioritization and schedule
    • Establish an information security strategy
    • Develop a security awareness and training program
    • Develop and manage security governance, risk, and compliance
    • Identify security budget
    • Build a data privacy and classification program
    IT Processes
    • Evaluate current process models
    • Determine productivity/capacity levels of processes
    • Identify processes to be changed/terminated
    • Establish a communication plan
    • Develop a change management process
    • Establish/review IT policies
    • Evaluate current process models

    3.2.2 Establish the separation roadmap

    2 hours

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Carve-out roadmap, Employee transition plan, Separation RACI, Costs for activities, Activity owners

    Output: Separation roadmap

    Materials: M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (SharePoint), M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (Excel), SharePoint Template: Step-by-Step Deployment Guide

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Transition team, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a roadmap to support IT throughout the separation process. Using the information gathered in previous activities, you can create a roadmap that will ensure a smooth separation.

    1. Use our Separation Project Management Tool to help track critical elements in relation to the separation project. There are a few options available:
      1. Follow the instructions on the next slide if you are looking to upload our SharePoint project template. Additional instructions are available in the SharePoint Template Step-by-Step Deployment Guide.
      2. If you cannot or do not want to use SharePoint as your project management solution, download our Excel version of the tool.
        **Remember that this your tool, so customize to your liking.
    2. Identify who will own or be accountable for each of the separation tasks and establish the time frame for when each project should begin and end. This will confirm which tasks should be prioritized.

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint).

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel).

    Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint Template)

    Follow these instructions to upload our template to your SharePoint environment

    1. Create or use an existing SP site.
    2. Download the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint) .wsp file from the Mergers & Acquisitions: The Sell Blueprint landing page.
    3. To import a template into your SharePoint environment, do the following:
      1. Open PowerShell.
      2. Connect-SPO Service (need to install PowerShell module).
      3. Enter in your tenant admin URL.
      4. Enter in your admin credentials.
      5. Set-SPO Site https://YourDomain.sharepoint.com/sites/YourSiteHe... -DenyAddAndCustomizePages 0
      OR
      1. Turn on both custom script features to allow users to run custom
    4. Screenshot of the 'Custom Script' option for importing a template into your SharePoint environment. Feature description reads 'Control whether users can run custom script on personal sites and self-service created sites. Note: changes to this setting might take up to 24 hours to take effect. For more information, see http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkIn=397546'. There are options to prevent or allow users from running custom script on personal/self-service created sites.
    5. Enable the SharePoint Server feature.
    6. Upload the .wsp file in Solutions Gallery.
    7. Deploy by creating a subsite and select from custom options.
      • Allow or prevent custom script
      • Security considerations of allowing custom script
      • Save, download, and upload a SharePoint site as a template
    8. Refer to Microsoft documentation to understand security considerations and what is and isn’t supported:

    For more information, check out the SharePoint Template: Step-by-Step Deployment Guide.

    Supporting the transition and establishing service-level agreements

    The purpose of this part of the transition is to ensure both buyer and seller have a full understanding of expectations for after the transaction.

    • Once the organizations have decided to move forward with a deal, all parties need a clear level of agreement.
    • IT, since it is often seen as an operational division of an organization, is often expected to deliver certain services or products once the transaction has officially closed.
    • The purchasing organization or the new company might depend on IT to deliver these services until they are able to provide those services on their own.
    • Having a clear understanding of what the buyer’s expectations are and what your company, as the selling organization, can provide is important.
    • Have a conversation with the buyer and document those expectations in a signed service agreement.

    3.2.4 Identify the buyer's IT expectations

    3-4 hours

    Input: Carve-out roadmap, Separation roadmap, Up-to-date version of the agreement

    Output: Buyer’s IT expectations

    Materials: Questions for meeting

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Purchasing company M&A team, Purchasing company IT leadership

    The purpose of this activity is to determine if the buyer has specific service expectations for your IT organization. By identifying, documenting, and agreeing on what services your IT organization will be responsible for, you can obtain a final agreement to protect you as the selling organization.

    1. Buyers should not assume certain services will be provided. Organize a meeting with IT leaders and the company M&A teams to determine what services will be provided.
    2. The next slide has a series of questions that you can start from. Ensure you get detailed information about each of the services.
    3. Once you fully understand the buyer’s IT expectations, create an SLA in the next activity and obtain sign-off from both organizations.

    Questions to ask the buyer

    1. What services would you like my IT organization to provide?
    2. How long do you anticipate those services will be provided to you?
    3. How do you expect your staff/employees to communicate requests or questions to my staff/employees?
    4. Are there certain days or times that you expect these services to be delivered?
    5. How many staff do you expect should be available to support you?
    6. What should be the acceptable response time on given service requests?
    7. When it comes to the services you require, what level of support should we provide?
    8. If a service requires escalation to Level 2 or Level 3 support, are we still expected to support this service? Or are we only Level 1 support?
    9. What preventative security methods does your organization have to protect our environment during this agreement period?

    3.2.5 Create a service/ transaction agreement

    6 hours

    Input: Buyer's expectations, Separation roadmap

    Output: SLA for the purchasing organization

    Materials: Service Catalog Internal Service Level Agreement Template, M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (SharePoint), M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (Excel)

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Purchasing company M&A team, Purchasing company IT leadership

    The purpose of this activity is to determine if the buyer has specific service expectations for your IT organization post-transaction that your IT organization is agreeing to provide.

    1. Document the expected services and the related details in a service-level agreement.
    2. Provide the SLA to the purchasing organization.
    3. Obtain sign-off from both organizations on the level of service that is expected of IT.
    4. Update the M&A Separation Project Management Tool Excel or SharePoint document to reflect any additional items that the purchasing organization identified.

    *For organizations being purchased in their entirety, this activity may not be relevant.

    Modify the Service Catalog Internal Service Level Agreement with the agreed-upon terms of the SLA.

    Importance of estimating separation costs

    Change is the key driver of separation costs

    Separation costs are dependent on the following:
    • Meeting synergy targets – whether that be cost saving or growth related.
      • Employee-related costs, licensing, and reconfiguration fees play a huge part in meeting synergy targets.
    • Adjustments related to compliance or regulations – especially if there are changes to legal entities, reporting requirements, or risk mitigation standards.
    • Governance or third party–related support required to ensure timelines are met and the separation is a success.
    Separation costs vary by industry type.
    • Certain industries may have separation costs made up of mostly one type, differing from other industries, due to the complexity and demands of the transaction. For example:
      • Healthcare separation costs are mostly driven by regulatory, safety, and quality standards, as well as consolidation of the research and development function.
      • Energy and Utilities tend to have the lowest separation costs due to most transactions occurring within the same sector rather than as cross-sector investments. For example, oil and gas transactions tend to be for oil fields and rigs (strategic fixed assets), which can easily be added to the buyer’s portfolio.

    Separation costs are more related to the degree of change required than the size of the transaction.

    3.2.6 Estimate separation costs

    3-4 hours

    Input: Separation tasks, Transition team, Valuation of current IT environment, Valuation of target IT environment, Outputs from data room, Technical debt, Employees

    Output: List of anticipated costs required to support IT separation

    Materials: Separation task checklist, Separation roadmap, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to estimate the costs that will be associated with the separation. Identify and communicate a realistic figure to the larger M&A team within your company as early in the process as possible. This ensures that the funding required for the transaction is secured and budgeted for in the overarching transaction.

    1. On the associated slide in the M&A Sell Playbook, input:
      • Task
      • Domain
      • Cost type
      • Total cost amount
      • Level of certainty around the cost
    2. Provide a copy of the estimated costs to the company’s M&A team. Also provide any additional information identified earlier to help them understand the importance of those costs.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Employee transition planning

    Considering employee impact will be a huge component to ensure successful separation

    • Meet With Leadership
    • Plan Individual and Department Redeployment
    • Plan Individual and Department Layoffs
    • Monitor and Manage Departmental Effectiveness
    • For employees, the transition could mean:
      • Changing from their current role to a new role to meet requirements and expectations throughout the transition.
      • Being laid off because the role they are currently occupying has been made redundant.
    • It is important to plan for what the M&A separation needs will be and what the IT operational needs will be.
    • A lack of foresight into this long-term plan could lead to undue costs and headaches trying to retain critical staff, rehiring positions that were already let go, and keeping redundant employees longer then necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Being transparent throughout the process is critical. Do not hesitate to tell employees the likelihood that their job may be made redundant. This will ensure a high level of trust and credibility for those who remain with the organization after the transaction.

    3.2.7 Create an employee transition plan

    3-4 hours

    Input: IT strategy, IT organizational design

    Output: Employee transition plans

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook, Whiteboard, Sticky notes, Markers

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a transition plan for employees.

    1. Transition planning can be done at specific individual levels or more broadly to reflect a single role. Consider these four items in the transition plan:
      • Understand the direction of the employee transitions.
      • Identify employees that will be involved in the transition (moved or laid off).
      • Prepare to meet with employees.
      • Meet with employees.
    2. For each employee that will be facing some sort of change in their regular role, permanent or temporary, create a transition plan.
    3. For additional information on transitioning employees, review the blueprint Streamline Your Workforce During a Pandemic.

    **Note that if someone’s future role is a layoff, then there is no need to record anything for skills needed or method for skill development.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    3.2.8 Create functional workplans for employees

    3-4 hours

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Employee transition plan, Separation RACI, Costs for activities, Activity owners

    Output: Employee functional workplans

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook, Learning and development tools

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT management team, Company M&A team, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to create a functional workplan for the different employees so that they know what their key role and responsibilities are once the transaction occurs.

    1. First complete the transition plan from the previous activity (3.2.7) and the separation roadmap. Have these documents ready to review throughout this process.
    2. Identify the employees who will be transitioning to a new role permanently or temporarily. Creating a functional workplan is especially important for these employees.
    3. Identify the skills these employees need to have to support the separation. Record this in the corresponding slide in the M&A Sell Playbook.
    4. For each employee, identify someone who will be a point of contact for them throughout the transition.

    It is recommended that each employee have a functional workplan. Leverage the IT managers to support this task.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Metrics for separation

    Valuation & Due Diligence

    • % Defects discovered in production
    • $ Cost per user for enterprise applications
    • % In-house-built applications vs. enterprise applications
    • % Owners identified for all data domains
    • # IT staff asked to participate in due diligence
    • Change to due diligence
    • IT budget variance
    • Synergy target

    Execution & Value Realization

    • % Satisfaction with the effectiveness of IT capabilities
    • % Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • $ Impact of vendor SLA breaches
    • $ Savings through cost-optimization efforts
    • $ Savings through application rationalization and technology standardization
    • # Key positions empty
    • % Frequency of staff turnover
    • % Emergency changes
    • # Hours of unplanned downtime
    • % Releases that cause downtime
    • % Incidents with identified problem record
    • % Problems with identified root cause
    • # Days from problem identification to root cause fix
    • % Projects that consider IT risk
    • % Incidents due to issues not addressed in the security plan
    • # Average vulnerability remediation time
    • % Application budget spent on new build/buy vs. maintenance (deferred feature implementation, enhancements, bug fixes)
    • # Time (days) to value realization
    • % Projects that realized planned benefits
    • $ IT operational savings and cost reductions that are related to synergies/divestitures
    • % IT staff–related expenses/redundancies
    • # Days spent on IT separation
    • $ Accurate IT budget estimates
    • % Revenue growth directly tied to IT delivery
    • % Profit margin growth

    3.2.9 Align project metrics with identified tasks

    3-4 hours

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Employee transition plan, Separation RACI, Costs for activities, Activity owners, M&A goals

    Output: Separation-specific metrics to measure success

    Materials: Separation roadmap, M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Transition team

    The purpose of this activity is to understand how to measure the success of the separation project by aligning metrics to each identified task.

    1. Review the M&A goals identified by the business. Your metrics will need to tie back to those business goals.
    2. Identify metrics that align to identified tasks and measure achievement of those goals. For each metric you consider, ask the following questions:
      • What is the main goal or objective that this metric is trying to solve?
      • What does success look like?
      • Does the metric promote the right behavior?
      • Is the metric actionable? What is the story you are trying to tell with this metric?
      • How often will this get measured?
      • Are there any metrics it supports or is supported by?

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    By the end of this mid-transaction phase you should:

    Have successfully evaluated your IT people, processes, and technology to determine a roadmap forward for separating or selling.

    Key outcomes from the Due Diligence & Preparation phase
    • Participate in due diligence activities to comply with regulatory and auditing standards and prepare employees for the transition.
    • Create a separation roadmap that considers the tasks that will need to be completed and the resources required to support separation.
    Key deliverables from the Due Diligence & Preparation phase
    • Drive value with a due diligence charter
    • Gather data room artifacts
    • Measure staff engagement
    • Assess culture
    • Create a carve-out roadmap
    • Prioritize separation tasks
    • Establish the separation roadmap
    • Identify the buyer’s IT expectations
    • Create a service/transaction agreement
    • Estimate separation costs
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Create functional workplans for employees
    • Align project metrics with identified tasks

    M&A Sell Blueprint

    Phase 4

    Execution & Value Realization

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Phase 4

    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Their Perspective of IT
    • 1.2 Assess IT’s Current Value and Future State
    • 1.3 Drive Innovation and Suggest Reduction Opportunities
    • 2.1 Establish the M&A Program Plan
    • 2.2 Prepare IT to Engage in the Separation or Sale
    • 3.1 Engage in Due Diligence and Prepare Staff
    • 3.2 Prepare to Separate
    • 4.1 Execute the Transaction
    • 4.2 Reflection and Value Realization

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Monitor service agreements
    • Continually update the project plan
    • Confirm separation costs
    • Review IT’s transaction value
    • Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT
    • Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Vendor management team
    • IT transaction team
    • Company M&A team

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Engage in Separation

    Day 4

    Establish the Transaction FoundationDiscover the Motivation for IntegrationPlan the Separation RoadmapPrepare Employees for the TransitionEngage in SeparationAssess the Transaction Outcomes (Must be within 30 days of transaction date)

    Activities

    • 0.1 Identify the rationale for the company's decision to pursue a divestiture/sale.
    • 0.2 Identify key stakeholders and determine the IT transaction team.
    • 0.3 Gather and evaluate the M&A strategy, future-state operating model, and governance.
    • 1.1 Review the business rationale for the divestiture/sale.
    • 1.2 Identify pain points and opportunities tied to the divestiture/sale.
    • 1.3 Establish the separation strategy.
    • 1.4 Create the due diligence charter.
    • 2.1 Prioritize separation tasks.
    • 2.2 Establish the separation roadmap.
    • 2.3 Establish and align project metrics with identified tasks.
    • 2.4 Estimate separation costs.
    • 3.1 Measure staff engagement
    • 3.2 Assess the current culture and identify the goal culture.
    • 3.3 Create an employee transition plan.
    • 3.4 Create functional workplans for employees.
    • S.1 Complete the separation by regularly updating the project plan.
    • S.2 Assess the service/technical transaction agreement.
    • 4.1 Confirm separation costs.
    • 4.2 Review IT’s transaction value.
    • 4.3 Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT.
    • 4.4 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions.

    Deliverables

    1. IT strategy
    2. IT operating model
    3. IT governance structure
    4. M&A transaction team
    1. Business context implications for IT
    2. Separation strategy
    3. Due diligence charter
    1. Separation roadmap and associated resourcing
    1. Engagement assessment
    2. Culture assessment
    3. Employee transition plans and workplans
    1. Evaluate service/technical transaction agreement
    2. Updated separation project plan
    1. SWOT of transaction
    2. M&A Sell Playbook refined for future transactions

    What is the Execution & Value Realization phase?

    Post-transaction state

    Once the transaction comes to a close, it’s time for IT to deliver on the critical separation tasks. As the selling organization in this transaction, you need to ensure you have a roadmap that properly enables the ongoing delivery of your IT environment while simultaneously delivering the necessary services to the purchasing organization.

    Throughout the separation transaction, some of the most common obstacles IT should prepare for include difficulty separating the IT environment, loss of key personnel, disengaged employees, and security/compliance issues.

    Post-transaction, the business needs to understands the value they received by engaging in the transaction and the ongoing revenue they might obtain as a result of the sale. You also need to ensure that the IT environment is functioning and mitigating any high-risk outcomes.

    Goal: To carry out the planned separation activities and deliver the intended value to the business.

    Execution Prerequisite Checklist

    Before coming into the Execution & Value Realization phase, you must have addressed the following:

    • Understand the rationale for the company's decisions to pursue a sale or divestiture and what opportunities or pain points the sale should alleviate.
    • Identify the key roles for the transaction team.
    • Identify the M&A governance.
    • Determine target metrics.
    • Select a separation strategy framework.
    • Conduct a RACI for key transaction tasks for the transaction team.
    • Create a carve-out roadmap.
    • Prioritize separation tasks.
    • Establish the separation roadmap.
    • Create employee transition plans.

    Before coming into the Execution & Value Realization phase, we recommend addressing the following:

    • Create vision and mission statements.
    • Establish guiding principles.
    • Create a future-state operating model.
    • Identify the M&A operating model.
    • Document the communication plan.
    • Examine the business perspective of IT.
    • Identify key stakeholders and outline their relationship to the M&A process.
    • Establish a due diligence charter.
    • Be able to valuate the IT environment and communicate IT’s value to the business.
    • Gather and present due diligence data room artifacts.
    • Measure staff engagement.
    • Assess and plan for culture.
    • Estimate separation costs.
    • Create functional workplans for employees.
    • Identify the buyer’s IT expectations.
    • Create a service/ transaction agreement.

    Separation checklists

    Prerequisite Checklist
    • Build the project plan for separation and prioritize activities
      • Plan first day
      • Plan first 30/100 days
      • Plan first year
    • Create an organization-aligned IT strategy
    • Identify critical stakeholders
    • Create a communication strategy
    • Understand the rationale for the sale or divestiture
    • Develop IT's sale/divestiture strategy
      • Determine goal opportunities
      • Create the mission and vision statements
      • Create the guiding principles
      • Create program metrics
    • Consolidate reports from due diligence/data room
    • Conduct culture assessment
    • Create a transaction team
    • Establish a service/technical transaction agreement
    • Plan and communicate culture changes
    • Create an employee transition plan
    • Assess baseline engagement
    Business
    • Design an enterprise architecture
    • Document your business architecture
    • Meet compliance and regulatory standards
    • Identify and assess all of IT's risks
    Applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
      • CRM
      • HRIS
      • Financial
      • Sales
      • Risk
      • Security
      • ERP
      • Email
    • Develop method of separating applications
    • Model critical applications that have dependencies on one another
    • Identify the infrastructure capacity required to support critical applications
    • Prioritize and address critical applications
    Leadership/IT Executive
    • Build an IT budget
    • Structure operating budget
    • Structure capital budget
    • Identify the workforce demand vs. capacity
    • Establish and monitor key metrics
    • Communicate value realized/cost savings
    Data
    • Confirm data strategy
    • Confirm data governance
    • Build a data architecture roadmap
    • Analyze data sources and domains
    • Evaluate data storage (on-premises vs. cloud)
    • Develop an enterprise content management strategy and roadmap
    • Ensure cleanliness/usability of data sets
    • Identify data sets that can remain operational if reduced/separated
    • Develop reporting and analytics capabilities
    • Confirm data strategy
    Operations
    • Manage sales access to customer data
    • Determine locations and hours of operation
    • Separate/terminate phone lists and extensions
    • Split email address books
    • Communicate helpdesk/service desk information

    Separation checklists (continued)

    Infrastructure
    • Manage organization domains
    • Consolidate data centers
    • Compile inventory of vendors, versions, switches, and routers
    • Review hardware lease or purchase agreements
    • Review outsourcing/service provider agreements
    • Review service-level agreements
    • Assess connectivity linkages between locations
    • Plan to migrate to a single email system if necessary
    • Determine network access concerns
    Vendors
    • Establish a sustainable vendor management office
    • Review vendor landscape
    • Identify warranty options
    • Identify the licensing grant
    • Rationalize vendor services and solutions
    People
    • Design an IT operating model
    • Design your future IT organizational structure
    • Conduct a RACI for prioritized activities
    • Conduct a culture assessment and identify goal IT culture
    • Build an IT employee engagement program
    • Determine critical roles and systems/process/products they support
    • Define new job descriptions with meaningful roles and responsibilities
    • Create employee transition plans
    • Create functional workplans
    Projects
    • Identify projects to be on hold
    • Communicate project intake process
    • Reprioritize projects
    Products & Services
    • Redefine service catalog
    • Ensure customer interaction requirements are met
    • Select a solution for product lifecycle management
    • Plan service-level agreements
    Security
    • Conduct a security assessment
    • Develop accessibility prioritization and schedule
    • Establish an information security strategy
    • Develop a security awareness and training program
    • Develop and manage security governance, risk, and compliance
    • Identify security budget
    • Build a data privacy and classification program
    IT Processes
    • Evaluate current process models
    • Determine productivity/capacity levels of processes
    • Identify processes to be changed/terminated
    • Establish a communication plan
    • Develop a change management process
    • Establish/review IT policies
    • Evaluate current process models

    Execution & Value Realization

    Step 4.1

    Execute the Transaction

    Activities

    • 4.1.1 Monitor service agreements
    • 4.1.2 Continually update the project plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Monitor service agreements
    • Continually update the project plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Vendor management team
    • IT transaction team
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Successfully execute the separation of the IT environments and update the project plan, strategizing against any roadblocks as they come.

    Key concerns to monitor during separation

    If you are entering the transaction at this point, consider and monitor the following three items above all else.

    Your IT environment, reputation as an IT leader, and impact on key staff will depend on monitoring these aspects.

    • Risk & Security. Make sure that the channels of communication between the purchasing organization and your IT environment are properly determined and protected. This might include updating or removing employees’ access to certain programs.
    • Retaining Employees. Employees who do not see a path forward in the organization or who feel that their skills are being underused will be quick to move on. Make sure they are engaged before, during, and after the transaction to avoid losing employees.
    • IT Environment Dependencies. Testing the IT environment several times and obtaining sign-off from auditors that this has been completed correctly should be completed well before the transaction occurs. Have a strong architecture outlining technical dependencies.

    For more information, review:

    • Reduce and Manage Your Organization’s Insider Threat Risk
    • Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure Operations Organization
    • Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    4.1.1 Monitor service agreements

    3-6 months

    Input: Original service agreement, Risk register

    Output: Service agreement confirmed

    Materials: Original service agreement

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, External organization IT senior leadership

    The purpose of this activity is to monitor the established service agreements on an ongoing basis. Your organization is most at risk during the initial months following the transaction.

    1. Ensure the right controls exist to prevent the organization from unnecessarily opening itself up to risks.
    2. Meet with the purchasing organization/subsidiary three months after the transaction to ensure that everyone is satisfied with the level of services provided.
    3. This is not a quick and completed activity, but one that requires ongoing monitoring. Repeatedly identify potential risks worth mitigating.

    For additional information and support for this activity, see the blueprint Build an IT Risk Management Program.

    4.1.2 Continually update the project plan

    Reoccurring basis following transition

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Separation RACI, Activity owners

    Output: Updated separation project plan

    Materials: M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (SharePoint), M&A Separation Project Plan Tool (Excel)

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, IT transaction team, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to ensure that the project plan is continuously updated as your transaction team continues to execute on the various components outlined in the project plan.

    1. Set a regular cadence for the transaction team to meet, update the project plan, review the status of the various separation task items, and strategize how to overcome any roadblocks.
    2. Employ governance best practices in these meetings to ensure decisions can be made effectively and resources allocated strategically.

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (SharePoint).

    Record the updates in the M&A Separation Project Management Tool (Excel).

    Execution & Value Realization

    Step 4.2

    Reflection and Value Realization

    Activities

    • 4.2.1 Confirm separation costs
    • 4.2.2 Review IT’s transaction value
    • 4.2.3 Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT
    • 4.2.4 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive/CIO
    • IT senior leadership
    • Transition team
    • Company M&A team

    Outcomes of Step

    Review the value that IT was able to generate around the transaction and strategize about how to improve future selling or separating transactions.

    4.2.1 Confirm separation costs

    3-4 hours

    Input: Separation tasks, Carve-out roadmap, Transition team, Previous RACI, Estimated separation costs

    Output: Actual separation costs

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Transaction team, Company M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to confirm the associated costs around separation. While the separation costs would have been estimated previously, it’s important to confirm the costs that were associated with the separation in order to provide an accurate and up-to-date report to the company’s M&A team.

    1. Taking all the original items identified previously in activity 3.2.6, identify if there were changes in the estimated costs. This can be an increase or a decrease.
    2. Ensure that each cost has a justification for why the cost changed from the original estimation.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    Track cost savings and revenue generation

    Throughout the transaction, the business would have communicated its goals, rationales, and expectations for the transaction. Sometimes this is done explicitly, and other times the information is implicit. Either way, IT needs to ensure that metrics have been defined and are measuring the intended value that the business expects. Ensure that the benefits realized to the organization are being communicated regularly and frequently.

    1. Define Metrics: Select metrics to track synergies through the separation.
      1. You can track value by looking at percentages of improvement in process-level metrics depending on the savings or revenue being pursued.
      2. For example, if the value being pursued is decreasing costs, metrics could range from capacity to output, highlighting that the output remains high despite smaller IT environments.
    2. Prioritize Value-Driving Initiatives: Estimate the cost and benefit of each initiative's implementation to compare the amount of business value to the cost. The benefits and costs should be illustrated at a high level. Estimating the exact dollar value of fulfilling a synergy can be difficult and misleading.
        Steps
      • Determine the benefits that each initiative is expected to deliver.
      • Determine the high-level costs of implementation (capacity, time, resources, effort).
    3. Track Cost Savings and Revenue Generation: Develop a detailed workplan to resource the roadmap and track where costs are saved and revenue is generated as the initiatives are undertaken.

    4.2.2 Review IT’s transaction value

    3-4 hours

    Input: Prioritized separation tasks, Separation RACI, Activity owners, M&A company goals

    Output: Transaction value

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Company's M&A team

    The purpose of this activity is to track how your IT organization performed against the originally identified metrics.

    1. If your organization did not have the opportunity to identify metrics, determine from the company M&A what those metrics might be. Review activity 3.2.9 for more information on metrics.
    2. Identify whether the metric (which should support a goal) was at, below, or above the original target metric. This is a very critical task for IT to complete because it allows IT to confirm that they were successful in the transaction and that the business can count on them in future transactions.
    3. Be sure to record accurate and relevant information on why the outcomes (good or bad) are supporting the M&A goals set out by the business.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    4.2.3 Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT

    2 hours

    Input: Separation costs, Retention rates, Value that IT contributed to the transaction

    Output: Strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats

    Materials: Flip charts, Markers, Sticky notes

    Participants: IT executive/CIO, IT senior leadership, Business transaction team

    The purpose of this activity is to assess the positive and negative elements of the transaction.

    1. Consider the internal and external elements that could have impacted the outcome of the transaction.
      • Strengths. Internal characteristics that are favorable as they relate to your development environment.
      • Weaknesses Internal characteristics that are unfavorable or need improvement.
      • Opportunities External characteristics that you may use to your advantage.
      • Threats External characteristics that may be potential sources of failure or risk.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    M&A Sell Playbook review

    With an acquisition complete, your IT organization is now more prepared then ever to support the business through future M&As

    • Now that the transaction is more than 80% complete, take the opportunity to review the key elements that worked well and the opportunities for improvement.
    • Critically examine the M&A Sell Playbook your IT organization created and identify what worked well to help the transaction and where your organization could adjust to do better in future transactions.
    • If your organization were to engage in another sale or divestiture under your IT leadership, how would you go about the transaction to make sure the company meets its goals?

    4.2.4 Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    4 hours

    Input: Transaction and separation SWOT

    Output: Refined M&A playbook

    Materials: M&A Sell Playbook

    Participants: IT executive/CIO

    The purpose of this activity is to revise the playbook and ensure it is ready to go for future transactions.

    1. Using the outputs from the previous activity, 4.2.3, determine what strengths and opportunities there were that should be leveraged in the next transaction.
    2. Likewise, determine which threats and weaknesses could be avoided in the future transactions.
      Remember, this is your M&A Sell Playbook, and it should reflect the most successful outcome for you in your organization.

    Record the results in the M&A Sell Playbook.

    By the end of this post-transaction phase you should:

    Have completed the separation post-transaction and be fluidly delivering the critical value that the business expected of IT.

    Key outcomes from the Execution & Value Realization phase
    • Ensure the separation tasks are being completed and that any blockers related to the transaction are being removed.
    • Determine where IT was able to realize value for the business and demonstrate IT’s involvement in meeting target goals.
    Key deliverables from the Execution & Value Realization phase
    • Monitor service agreements
    • Continually update the project plan
    • Confirm separation costs
    • Review IT’s transaction value
    • Conduct a transaction and separation SWOT
    • Review the playbook and prepare for future transactions

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Congratulations, you have completed the M&A Sell Blueprint!

    Rather than reacting to a transaction, you have been proactive in tackling this initiative. You now have a process to fall back on in which you can be an innovative IT leader by suggesting how and why the business should engage in a separation or sale transaction. You have:

    • Created a standardized approach for how your IT organization should address divestitures or sales.
    • Retained critical staff and complied with any regulations throughout the transaction.
    • Delivered on the separation project plan successfully and communicated IT’s transaction value to the business.

    Now that you have done all of this, reflect on what went well and what can be improved if you were to engage in a similar divestiture or sale again.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8899

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    John Annand
    Principal Research Director | Infrastructure
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Scott Bickley
    Principal Research Director | Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Cole Cioran
    Practice Lead | Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Dana Daher
    Research Analyst | Strategy & Innovation
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Eric Dolinar
    Manager | M&A Consulting
    Deloitte Canada
    Christoph Egel
    Director, Solution Design & Deliver
    Cooper Tire & Rubber Company
    Nora Fisher
    Vice President | Executive Services Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Larry Fretz
    Vice President | Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Research Contributors and Experts

    David Glazer
    Vice President of Analytics
    Kroll
    Jack Hakimian
    Senior Vice President | Workshops and Delivery
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Gord Harrison
    Senior Vice President | Research & Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Jennifer Jones
    Research Director | Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Nancy McCuaig
    Senior Vice President | Chief Technology and Data Office
    IGM Financial Inc.
    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Kenneth McGee
    Research Fellow | Strategy & Innovation
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Nayma Naser
    Associate
    Deloitte
    Andy Neill
    Practice Lead | Data & Analytics, Enterprise Architecture
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Rick Pittman
    Vice President | Research
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Rocco Rao
    Research Director | Industry
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Mark Rosa
    Senior Vice President & Chief Information Officer
    Mohegan Gaming and Entertainment
    Tracy-Lynn Reid
    Research Lead | People & Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Jim Robson
    Senior Vice President | Shared Enterprise Services (retired)
    Great-West Life
    Steven Schmidt
    Senior Managing Partner Advisory | Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Nikki Seventikidis
    Senior Manager | Finance Initiative & Continuous Improvement
    CST Consultants Inc.
    Allison Straker
    Research Director | CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Justin Waelz
    Senior Network & Systems Administrator
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Sallie Wright
    Executive Counselor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    “5 Ways for CIOs to Accelerate Value During Mergers and Acquisitions.” Okta, n.d. Web.

    Altintepe, Hakan. “Mergers and acquisitions speed up digital transformation.” CIO.com, 27 July 2018. Web.

    “America’s elite law firms are booming.” The Economist, 15 July 2021. Web.

    Barbaglia, Pamela, and Joshua Franklin. “Global M&A sets Q1 record as dealmakers shape post-COVID world.” Nasdaq, 1 April 2021. Web.

    Boyce, Paul. “Mergers and Acquisitions Definition: Types, Advantages, and Disadvantages.” BoyceWire, 8 Oct. 2020. Web.

    Bradt, George. “83% Of Mergers Fail -- Leverage A 100-Day Action Plan For Success Instead.” Forbes, 27 Jan. 2015. Web.

    Capgemini. “Mergers and Acquisitions: Get CIOs, IT Leaders Involved Early.” Channel e2e, 19 June 2020. Web.

    Chandra, Sumit, et al. “Make Or Break: The Critical Role Of IT In Post-Merger Integration.” IMAA Institute, 2016. Web.

    Deloitte. “How to Calculate Technical Debt.” The Wall Street Journal, 21 Jan. 2015. Web.

    Ernst & Young. “IT As A Driver Of M&A Success.” IMAA Institute, 2017. Web.

    Fernandes, Nuno. “M&As In 2021: How To Improve The Odds Of A Successful Deal.” Forbes, 23 March 2021. Web.

    “Five steps to a better 'technology fit' in mergers and acquisitions.” BCS, 7 Nov. 2019. Web.

    Fricke, Pierre. “The Biggest Opportunity You’re Missing During an M&Aamp; IT Integration.” Rackspace, 4 Nov. 2020. Web.

    Garrison, David W. “Most Mergers Fail Because People Aren't Boxes.” Forbes, 24 June 2019. Web.

    Harroch, Richard. “What You Need To Know About Mergers & Acquisitions: 12 Key Considerations When Selling Your Company.” Forbes, 27 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Hope, Michele. “M&A Integration: New Ways To Contain The IT Cost Of Mergers, Acquisitions And Migrations.” Iron Mountain, n.d. Web.

    “How Agile Project Management Principles Can Modernize M&A.” Business.com, 13 April 2020. Web.

    Hull, Patrick. “Answer 4 Questions to Get a Great Mission Statement.” Forbes, 10 Jan. 2013. Web.

    Kanter, Rosabeth Moss. “What We Can Learn About Unity from Hostile Takeovers.” Harvard Business Review, 12 Nov. 2020. Web.

    Koller, Tim, et al. “Valuation: Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies, 7th edition.” McKinsey & Company, 2020. Web.

    Labate, John. “M&A Alternatives Take Center Stage: Survey.” The Wall Street Journal, 30 Oct. 2020. Web.

    Lerner, Maya Ber. “How to Calculate ROI on Infrastructure Automation.” DevOps.com, 1 July 2020. Web.

    Loten, Angus. “Companies Without a Tech Plan in M&A Deals Face Higher IT Costs.” The Wall Street Journal, 18 June 2019. Web.

    Low, Jia Jen. “Tackling the tech integration challenge of mergers today” Tech HQ, 6 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Lucas, Suzanne. “5 Reasons Turnover Should Scare You.” Inc. 22 March 2013. Web.

    “M&A Trends Survey: The future of M&A. Deal trends in a changing world.” Deloitte, Oct. 2020. Web.

    Maheshwari, Adi, and Manish Dabas. “Six strategies tech companies are using for successful divesting.” EY, 1 Aug. 2020. Web.

    Majaski, Christina. “Mergers and Acquisitions: What's the Difference?” Investopedia, 30 Apr. 2021.

    “Mergers & Acquisitions: Top 5 Technology Considerations.” Teksetra, 21 Jul. 2020. Web.

    “Mergers Acquisitions M&A Process.” Corporate Finance Institute, n.d. Web.

    “Mergers and acquisitions: A means to gain technology and expertise.” DLA Piper, 2020. Web.

    Nash, Kim S. “CIOs Take Larger Role in Pre-IPO Prep Work.” The Wall Street Journal, 5 March 2015. Web.

    O'Connell, Sean, et al. “Divestitures: How to Invest for Success.” McKinsey, 1 Aug. 2015. Web

    Paszti, Laila. “Canada: Emerging Trends In Information Technology (IT) Mergers And Acquisitions.” Mondaq, 24 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Patel, Kiison. “The 8 Biggest M&A Failures of All Time” Deal Room, 9 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Peek, Sean, and Paula Fernandes. “What Is a Vision Statement?” Business News Daily, 7 May 2020. Web.

    Ravid, Barak. “How divestments can re-energize the technology growth story.” EY, 14 July 2021. Web.

    Ravid, Barak. “Tech execs focus on growth amid increasingly competitive M&A market.” EY, 28 April 2021. Web.

    Resch, Scott. “5 Questions with a Mergers & Acquisitions Expert.” CIO, 25 June 2019. Web.

    Salsberg, Brian. “Four tips for estimating one-time M&A integration costs.” EY, 17 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Samuels, Mark. “Mergers and acquisitions: Five ways tech can smooth the way.” ZDNet, 15 Aug. 2018. Web.

    “SAP Divestiture Projects: Options, Approach and Challenges.” Cognizant, May, 2014. Web.

    Steeves, Dave. “7 Rules for Surviving a Merger & Acquisition Technology Integration.” Steeves and Associates, 5 Feb. 2020. Web.

    Tanaszi, Margaret. “Calculating IT Value in Business Terms.” CSO, 27 May 2004. Web.

    “The CIO Playbook. Nine Steps CIOs Must Take For Successful Divestitures.” SNP, 2016. Web.

    “The Role of IT in Supporting Mergers and Acquisitions.” Cognizant, Feb. 2015. Web.

    Torres, Roberto. “M&A playbook: How to prepare for the cost, staff and tech hurdles.” CIO Dive, 14 Nov. 2019. Web.

    “Valuation Methods.” Corporate Finance Institute, n.d. Web.

    Weller, Joe. “The Ultimate Guide to the M&A Process for Buyers and Sellers.” Smartsheet, 16 May 2019. Web.

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}451|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Infrastructure and operations teams are managing deployments on- and off-premises, and across multiple infrastructure services providers.
    • Though automation tools speed up the delivery process, documentation is always pushed off so the team can meet urgent deadlines.
    • Without documented delivery processes, wait times are longer, controls are adequate but ad hoc, builds are non-standard, and errors are more likely to be introduced in production.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Prioritize in-demand services to add to the playbook. Pilot a few services to get value from the project quickly.
    • Do not get lost in automation or tooling. You do not need a complex tool or back-end automation to get value from this project.
    • Learn, then iterate. With a few completed service processes, it is much easier to identify opportunities for service automation.

    Impact and Result

    • Prioritize in-demand services for documentation and standardization.
    • Build service workflows and document service requirements in the services playbook.
    • Create a costing model and track costs to deliver defined services.
    • Leverage data on costs and service requirements to improve service delivery.

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to find out why you should create an infrastructure services playbook, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define and prioritize infrastructure services

    Produce a prioritized list of high-demand infrastructure services.

    • Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook – Phase 1: Define and Prioritize Infrastructure Services
    • Infrastructure Services Playbook

    2. Build workflows and an infrastructure services playbook

    Design workflows and create the first draft of the infrastructure services playbook.

    • Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook – Phase 2: Build Workflows and an Infrastructure Services Playbook
    • Infrastructure Service Workflows (Visio)
    • Infrastructure Service Workflows (PDF)

    3. Identify costs and mature service delivery capabilities

    Build a service rate sheet to track costs and develop better service capabilities.

    • Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook – Phase 3: Identify Costs and Mature Service Delivery Capabilities
    • Service Rate Sheet
    • Infrastructure Service Catalog Mind Map Example
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define and Prioritize Infrastructure Services

    The Purpose

    Define and prioritize infrastructure services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify candidate services for the Playbook.

    Activities

    1.1 Define the services you own.

    1.2 Prioritize infrastructure services.

    Outputs

    Affinity map of infrastructure services

    Service pain points and root causes

    A list of high-demand infrastructure services

    2 Build the Infrastructure Services Playbook

    The Purpose

    Build workflows and an infrastructure services playbook.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Produce a draft infrastructure services playbook.

    Activities

    2.1 Design workflow for service delivery.

    2.2 Add steps and requirements to the Services Playbook.

    Outputs

    Documented service workflows

    Infrastructure Services Playbook

    3 Identify Costs and Mature Service Delivery Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Identify costs and mature service delivery capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build an infrastructure service rate sheet.

    Define next steps for infrastructure service capabilities.

    Activities

    3.1 Optimize infrastructure cost estimates.

    3.2 Mature your I&O organization into a service broker.

    Outputs

    Service Rate Sheet

    Master list of infrastructure services

    Action plan for Playbook implementation

    Further reading

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    Automation, SDI, and DevOps – build a cheat sheet to manage a changing Infrastructure & Operations environment.

    Table of contents

    Analyst Perspective

    Executive Summary

    Project Overview

    Summary and Conclusion

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Technology is changing how infrastructure services are delivered.

    "Managing a hybrid infrastructure environment is challenge enough. Add to this the pressure on IT Operations to deliver services faster and more continuously – it’s a recipe for boondoggle deployments, overcommitted staff, end-user frustration, and operational gridlock.

    It’s not every service you provide that causes problems, so prioritize a few in-demand, painful services. Build and maintain durable, flexible processes that enable your team to provide consistent, repeatable services at a standard cost. Identify opportunities to improve service delivery.

    You’ll save the business time and money and your own team significant grief." (Andrew Sharp, Research Manager, Infrastructure & Operations, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Your infrastructure and operations team is a service provider; standardize, document, and communicate service capabilities

    This Research is Designed For:

    • CTOs and Infrastructure Managers
    • Service Level Managers
    • ITSM Managers and Process Owners

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Inventory services that IT Infrastructure & Operations (I&O) provides to the business (servers, storage, and network).
    • Standardize services and track costs.
    • Articulate the value of these services to business owners.
    • Develop a catalog of infrastructure services.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • CIOs
    • Application Development Managers
    • Security Managers
    • Auditors

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Understand the complexities of technical service delivery.
    • Make better strategic IT infrastructure decisions.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Infrastructure and operations teams are managing deployments on- and off-premises and across multiple infrastructure service providers.
    • Though automation tools speed up the delivery process, documentation is always pushed off so the team can meet urgent deadlines.

    Complication

    • Cloud providers have set the bar high for ease of access to stable infrastructure services.
    • Without documented delivery processes, wait times are longer, controls are adequate but ad hoc, builds are non-standard, and errors are more likely to be introduced in production.

    Resolution

    • Prioritize in-demand services for documentation and standardization.
    • Build service workflows and document service requirements in the services playbook.
    • Create a costing model and track costs to deliver defined services.
    • Leverage data on costs and service requirements to improve service delivery.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Keep it simple. Work through a few in-demand services to get early value from the project.
    2. Don’t get lost in automation or tooling. You don’t need a complex tool or back-end automation to get value from standardized services.
    3. Do then iterate. With a few completed service processes, it’s much easier to identify opportunities for service automation.

    Create an infrastructure services playbook to improve efficiency, support DevOps, and streamline service delivery

    Begin building an infrastructure services playbook by defining the services you provide. This will also help your team support changes to service delivery (e.g. more use of cloud services and the shift to DevOps).

    In this blueprint, the first step will be to document infrastructure services to:

    1. Clarify infrastructure capabilities and achievable service levels.

      Document infrastructure services to clarify achievable service levels with given resources and what you will need to meet service-level requirement gaps. Establishing your ability to meet customer demands is the first step toward becoming a broker of internal or external services.
    2. Standardize infrastructure service delivery.

      Sometimes, it’s extremely important to do the exact same thing every time (e.g. server hardening). Sometimes, your team needs room to deviate from the script. Create a playbook that allows you to standardize service delivery as needed.
    3. Make good strategic infrastructure decisions.

      Knowledge is power. Defined services and capabilities will help you make important strategic infrastructure decisions around capacity planning and when outsourcing is appropriate.

    Review and optimize infrastructure service delivery as you shift to more cloud-based services

    If you can’t standardize and streamline how you support cloud services, you risk AppDev and business leaders circumventing the I&O team.

    Logo for 'vmware'.

    Example:

    Create a new server resource in a virtual environment vs. public cloud

    In a virtualized environment, provisioning processes can still be relatively siloed.

    In a software-defined environment, many steps require knowledge across the infrastructure stack. Better documentation will help your team deliver services outside their area of specialty.

    Logo for 'Microsoft Azure'.
    • Identify CPU requirements for a virtual machine (VM)
    • Calculate VM memory requirements
    • Configure the floppy drive for a VM
    • Configure IDE devices for a VM
    • Configure SCSI adapters for a VM
    • Configure network adapters for a VM
    • Configure VM priority for host CPU resources
    • Server is live

    • Complete SDI code development & review, version control, build status, etc.
    • Identify software and specifications for the instance you want to use
    • Review configuration, storage, and security settings
    • Secure the instance with an existing key pair or create a new key pair
    • Update documentation – public IP address, physical & logical connections, data flows, etc.
    • Launch and connect to instance
    • Server is live

    Strengthen DevOps with an infrastructure playbook

    The purpose behind DevOps is to reduce friction and deliver faster, more continuous, more automated services through the use of cross-functional teams.

    DevOps: bridging Applications Development and Infrastructure & Operations by embracing a culture, practices, and tools born out of Lean and Agile methodologies.

    • Create a common language across functions.
    • Ensure that all service steps are documented.
    • Move towards more standard deployments.
    • Increase transparency within the IT department.
    • Cultivate trust across teams.
    • Build the foundation for automated services.
    A colorful visualization of the DevOps cycle. On the Development side is 'Feedback', Plan', 'Build', 'Integrate', then over to the Operations side is 'Deploy', and 'Operate', then back to Dev with 'Feedback', starting the cycle over again.

    "The bar has been raised for delivering technology products and services – what was good enough in previous decades is not good enough now." (Kim, Humble, Debois, Willis (2016))

    Leverage an infrastructure services playbook to improve service delivery, one step at a time

    Crawl

    • Prioritize infrastructure services that are good candidates for standardization.
    • Document the steps and requirements to deliver the service.
    • Use the playbook and workflows internally as you gather requirements and deliver on requests.
    • Track costs internally.

    Walk

    • Provide infrastructure clients with the playbook and allow them to make requests against it.
    • Update and maintain existing documentation.
    • Automate, where possible.
    • Showback costs to the business.

    Run

    • Provide infrastructure customers with scripts to provision infrastructure resources.
    • Audit requests before fulfilling them.
    • Chargeback costs, as needed.
    A turtle smiles happily on four legs, simply content to be alive. Another turtle moves quickly on two legs, seemingly in a runner's trance, eyes closed, oblivious to the fact that another turtle has beaten him to finish line.

    Focus on in-demand infrastructure services — PHASE 1

    Standardize in-demand, repeatable services first.

    Demand for infrastructure services is usually driven by external requests or operational requirements. Prioritize services based on criticality, durability, frequency, availability, and urgency requirements.

    Scheduling Delays
    • Dealing with a slew of capital projects driven by a major funding initiative, the IT team of a major US transit system is struggling to execute on basic operational tasks.

    • Action:
    • A brainstorming and prioritization exercise identifies web server deployment as their most in-demand service.
    • Identifying breakdowns in web server deployment helps free up resources for other tasks and addresses a serious pain point.
    Think outside the box
    • On a new project for a sporting goods client, the IT department for a marketing firm deploys and supports a “locker” kiosk that users engage with for a chance to win a gift.

    • Action:
    • As the campaign proves successful, the I&O Manager creates a playbook to guide kiosk support and deployment in the future, including required skills, timelines, success metrics, and costs.
    Keep it standard, keep it safe
    • An IT audit at a higher education institution finds that no standard process for server hardening has been defined or documented by the infrastructure team.

    • Action:
    • Improving IT security is a strategic priority for the department.
    • The infrastructure team decides to standardize and document processes, guidelines, and configurations for hardening OS, SCCM, SaltStack, scripting, and patching.

    Leverage service workflows to populate the playbook — PHASE 2

    Infrastructure as Code is breaking down traditional infrastructure silos and support models.

    1. Document the workflow to deliver the service. Identify pain points and target broken processes first.
      Provision –› Configure –› Run –› Quiesce –› Destroy
    2. Define logical expected results and metrics for problematic steps in the process. Identify challenges and possible improvements to each problematic step.
      Building and deploying toolsets is taking a long time
      Start
      • Create a baseline offering for common requests.
      • Make clear that non-standard requests will take time to fulfil.
      Stop
      • Move to just one web server.
      Continue
      • Use weekly drop-ins to communicate the change.
    3. Document skills and roles, approvers, and pre-requirements to fill out the documentation, as needed. Use the documented process to guide internal process and align with external expectations.

    Cross-silo knowledge is needed: In a software-defined environment, building and launching a new server requires knowledge across the stack.

    • Complete SDI code development & review, version control, build status, etc.
    • Identify software and specifications for the instance you want to use
    • Review configuration, storage, and security settings
    • Secure the instance with an existing key pair, or create a new key pair
    • Update documentation – public IP address, physical & logical connections, data flows, etc.
    • Launch and connect to the instance
    • Server is live

    Take a progressive approach to cost tracking — PHASE 3

    Infrastructure & Operations are bound by two metrics:

    1. Are systems up?
    2. Is technology delivered as efficiently as possible?

    Because tracking cost is integral to efficiency, cost and budget management, by proxy, is one of the most important Infrastructure & Operations metrics.

    Cost management is not a numbers game. It is an indicator of how well infrastructure is managed.

    Track costs in a practical way that delivers value to your organization:

    1. Build and leverage an internal rate sheet to help estimate cost to serve.
    2. Showback rate sheet to help managers and architects make better infrastructure decisions.
    3. Chargeback costs to defined cost centers.

    Project overview

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to get value faster from your infrastructure services playbook.

    Phases

    Phase 1: Define and prioritize infrastructure services Phase 2: Build the infrastructure services playbook Phase 3: Identify costs and mature service delivery capabilities

    Steps

    1.1 Define the services you own 2.1 Design workflows for service delivery 3.1 Estimate infrastructure service costs
    1.2 Prioritize infrastructure services 2.2 Add steps and requirements to the services playbook 3.2 Mature your I&O organization into a service broker

    Tools & Templates

    Infrastructure Services Playbook Infrastructure Service Workflows Service Rate Sheet

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation Overview

    Your Trusted Advisor is just a call away.

    Scoping
    (Call 1)

    Scope requirements, objectives, and stakeholders. Review the playbook toolset and methodology, and establish fit-for-need.

    Identify Services
    (Call 2)

    Brainstorm common infrastructure services your group provides. Consolidate the list and identify priority services.

    Create Service Workflows
    (Calls 3-4)

    Build Visio workflows for 2-3 priority services.

    Populate the Playbook
    (Calls 4-5)

    Add data to the playbook based on infrastructure service workflows

    Create a Rate Sheet for Costs
    (Call 6)

    Build a rate sheet that allows you to calculate costs for additional

    Your Guided Implementation will pair you with an advisor from our analyst team for the duration of your infrastructure services project.

    Workshop Overview

    Module 1
    (Day 1)
    Module 1
    (Day 1)
    Module 1
    (Day 1)
    Offsite deliverables wrap-up (Day 5)
    Activities
    Define and Prioritize Infrastructure Services

    1.1 Assess current maturity of services and standardization processes.

    1.2 Identify, group, and break out important infrastructure services.

    1.3 Define service delivery pain points and perform root-cause analysis.

    1.4 Prioritize services based on demand criteria.

    Build the Infrastructure Services Playbook

    2.1 Determine criteria for standard versus custom services.

    2.2 Document standard workflows for better alignment and consistent delivery.

    2.3 Build a flowchart for the identified high-demand service(s).

    2.4 Outline information as it relates to the service lifecycle in the Playbook template.

    Identify Costs and Mature Service Delivery Capabilities

    4.1 Gather information for the rate sheet.

    4.2 Choose an allocation method for overhead costs.

    4.3 Select the right approach in the crawl, walk, run model for your organization.

    4.4 Discuss the promotion plan and target revision dates for playbook and rate sheet.

    Deliverables
    1. High-demand infrastructure services list
    1. Right-sized criteria for standardization
    2. Service workflows
    3. Infrastructure Services Playbook
    1. Service Rate Sheet
    2. Deployment plan

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    PHASE 1

    Define and Prioritize Infrastructure Services

    Step 1.1: Define the services you own

    PHASE 1

    Define and prioritize infrastructure services

    1.1

    Define the services you own

    1.2

    Prioritize infrastructure services

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define “infrastructure service”
    • Brainstorm service offerings
    • Consolidate services with affinity map

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure Manager
    • I&O SMEs

    Results & Insights

    • Results: Consolidated list of end-to-end services
    • Insights: Avoid analysis paralysis by brainstorming without restrictions. It is more effective to cut down in Step 1.2 rather than risk neglecting important services for the playbook.

    Consider a range of infrastructure services

    Your infrastructure team is a service provider to the applications team – and sometimes other users as well.

    Service Requests
    • A developer requests a new web server.
    • The marketing department asks for a database to support a six-month digital marketing campaign.
    Projects
    • A new service is promoted to production.
    Operations
    • Firewall rules are updated to support server, network, or security posture changes.
    • Standard practices are followed and maintained to harden a range of different operating systems.
    • Engineers follow a standard process to integrate new tools and entitlements into Active Directory.
    • Patches and firmware updates are applied to core infrastructure components as needed.
    Problems
    • A database batch job often breaks on overnight batch jobs and requires manual intervention to check and restart.
    A visualization of the word 'Infrastructure Services' being orbited by 'Service Requests', 'Projects', 'Operations', and 'Problems'.

    IT infrastructure & operations teams deliver services that fulfil requests, support projects, resolve problems, and operate systems.

    Cost-Reduction Planning for IT Vendors

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}73|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,733 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
    • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
    • Unprecedented health and economic conditions are putting extreme pressure and controls on expense management.
    • IT needs to implement proactive measures to reduce costs with immediate results.
    • IT must sustain these reductions beyond the near term since no one knows how long the current conditions will last.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Proactively initiating a “War on Waste” (WoW) to reduce the expenses and costs in areas that do not impact operational capabilities of IT is an easy way to reduce IT expenditures.
    • This is accomplished by following the principle “Stop Doing Stupid Stuff” (SDSS), which many organizations deemphasize or overlook during times of growth and prosperity.
    • Initiating a WoW and SDSS program with passion, creativity, and urgency will deliver short-term cost reductions.

    Impact and Result

    • Pinpoint and implement tactical countermeasures and savings opportunities to reduce costs immediately (Reactive: <3 months).
    • Identify and deploy proven practices to capture and sustain expense reduction throughout the mid-term (Proactive: 3-12months).
    • Create a long-term strategy to improve flexibility, make changes more swiftly, and quickly generate cost-cutting opportunities (Strategic: >12 months).
    • Use Info-Tech’s 4 R’s Framework (Required, Removed, Rescheduled, and Reduced) and guiding principles to develop your cost-reduction roadmap.

    Cost-Reduction Planning for IT Vendors Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Start here – read the Storyboard

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how you can reduce your IT cost in the short term while establishing a foundation for long-term sustainment of IT cost containment.

    • Cost-Reduction Planning for IT Vendors Storyboard
    • Cost-Cutting Classification and Prioritization Tool
    [infographic]

    Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}421|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Many organizations do not have developed plans for how to turn on-premises employees into remote workers in an emergency.
    • In an emergency situation, such as a pandemic, sending employees home to work remotely without time to prepare presents daunting challenges, such as trying to comprehend and prioritize the myriad of tasks that need accomplishing for human resources, the business, and IT in a VUCA (volatile, uncertain, complex, and ambiguous) world.
    • Security issues may arise from employees not used to working remotely. Indeed, employees sent home to work remotely in an emergency may not have been eligible otherwise. This creates security risks, including the proliferation of shadow IT.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The emergency will restructure the business: make sure it’s done right. While your organization may need quick fixes for day one of an emergency remote work plan, these are not viable long-term solutions. The emergency will vividly reinforce to the business side that more resources need to be directed to IT to enable strong business continuity and employee safety. Make sure the right plan is put in place during the crucial first weeks. The next emergency is just around the corner.
    • Prioritize key business processes. Before getting into the details of a work from home policy, identify which crucial business processes need to continue for the company to survive. Build the remote work policy around supporting those workflows.
    • Where the “carrot” is not possible, emergencies may require the “stick.” To ensure secure endpoints and prevent proliferation of shadow IT, you may need to enforce certain rules through policy. However, disenfranchising employees is not a long-term solution: once the emergency subsides, use this basis to explore end-user requirements properly and ensure employee-driven adoption plans. Where possible, for this latter scenario, always use the carrot.

    Impact and Result

    • A prioritized plan for IT processes through Info-Tech’s cascading responsibility checklists for emergency remote work.
    • A codified emergency remote work policy document to better prepare for future emergencies.

    Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan Research & Tools

    Start here

    Read our concise Executive Brief for why you need prioritized emergency remote work checklists and an accompanying policy document and review Info-Tech’s methodology.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan Storyboard

    1. Day one preparations

    Prioritize key action items on day one of sending your employees home to remotely work during an emergency.

    • Emergency Remote Work Plan Checklists
    • Home Office Survey
    • Checklist for Securing Remote Workers
    • None
    • Remote Access Policy
    • Equipment Loan Policy
    • None
    • Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users – Phases 1-2
    • Remote Work Assignment Log
    • Wiki Collection for Collaboration Tools
    • Pandemic Preparation: The People Playbook

    2. One-to-two weeks preparations

    Address key action items in the one-to-two weeks following an emergency that forced your employees to work remotely.

    • None

    3. Codify an emergency remote work policy

    Turn your emergency remote work checklists into policy.

    • Emergency Remote Work Policy
    • Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan Executive Presentation
    [infographic]

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}127|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $40,241 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 33 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Experiencing the pitfalls of poor data quality and failing to benefit from good data quality, including:
      • Unreliable data and unfavorable output.
      • Inefficiencies and costly remedies.
      • Dissatisfied stakeholders.
    • The chances of successful decision-making capabilities are hindered with poor data quality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Address the root causes of your data quality issues and form a viable data quality program.
      • Be familiar with your organization’s data environment and business landscape.
      • Prioritize business use cases for data quality fixes.
      • Fix data quality issues at the root cause to ensure proper foundation for your data to flow.
    • It is important to sustain best practices and grow your data quality program.

    Impact and Result

    • Implement a set of data quality initiatives that are aligned with overall business objectives and aimed at addressing data practices and the data itself.
    • Develop a prioritized data quality improvement project roadmap and long-term improvement strategy.
    • Build related practices such as artificial intelligence and analytics with more confidence and less risk after achieving an appropriate level of data quality.

    Build Your Data Quality Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should establish a data quality program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your organization’s data environment and business landscape

    Learn about what causes data quality issues, how to measure data quality, what makes a good data quality practice in relation to your data and business environments.

    • Business Capability Map Template

    2. Analyze your priorities for data quality fixes

    Determine your business unit priorities to create data quality improvement projects.

    • Data Quality Problem Statement Template
    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    3. Establish your organization’s data quality program

    Revisit the root causes of data quality issues and identify the relevant root causes to the highest priority business unit, then determine a strategy for fixing those issues.

    • Data Lineage Diagram Template
    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    4. Grow and sustain your data quality practices

    Identify strategies for continuously monitoring and improving data quality at the organization.

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build Your Data Quality Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape

    The Purpose

    Evaluate the maturity of the existing data quality practice and activities.

    Assess how data quality is embedded into related data management practices.

    Envision a target state for the data quality practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the current data quality landscape

    Gaps, inefficiencies, and opportunities in the data quality practice are identified

    Target state for the data quality practice is defined

    Activities

    1.1 Explain approach and value proposition

    1.2 Detail business vision, objectives, and drivers

    1.3 Discuss data quality barriers, needs, and principles

    1.4 Assess current enterprise-wide data quality capabilities

    1.5 Identify data quality practice future state

    1.6 Analyze gaps in data quality practice

    Outputs

    Data Quality Management Primer

    Business Capability Map Template

    Data Culture Diagnostic

    Data Quality Diagnostic

    Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    2 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 1

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives

    Define a data quality improvement strategy and roadmap

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improvement initiatives are defined

    Improvement initiatives are evaluated and prioritized to develop an improvement strategy

    A roadmap is defined to depict when and how to tackle the improvement initiatives

    Activities

    2.1 Create business unit prioritization roadmap

    2.2 Develop subject areas project scope

    2.3 By subject area 1 data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, and business analysis

    Outputs

    Business Unit Prioritization Roadmap

    Subject area scope

    Data Lineage Diagram

    3 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 2

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives

    Define a data quality improvement strategy and roadmap

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improvement initiatives are defined

    Improvement initiatives are evaluated and prioritized to develop an improvement strategy

    A roadmap is defined to depict when and how to tackle the improvement initiatives

    Activities

    3.1 Understand how data quality management fits in with the organization’s data governance and data management programs

    3.2 By subject area 2 data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, and business analysis

    Outputs

    Data Lineage Diagram

    Root Cause Analysis

    Impact Analysis

    4 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 3

    The Purpose

    Determine a strategy for fixing data quality issues for the highest priority business unit

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Strategy defined for fixing data quality issues for highest priority business unit

    Activities

    4.1 Formulate strategies and actions to achieve data quality practice future state

    4.2 Formulate a data quality resolution plan for the defined subject area

    4.3 By subject area 3 data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, and business analysis

    Outputs

    Data Quality Improvement Plan

    Data Lineage Diagram

    5 Create a Plan for Sustaining Data Quality

    The Purpose

    Plan for continuous improvement in data quality

    Incorporate data quality management into the organization’s existing data management and governance programs

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Sustained and communicated data quality program

    Activities

    5.1 Formulate metrics for continuous tracking of data quality and monitoring the success of the data quality improvement initiative

    5.2 Workshop Debrief with Project Sponsor

    5.3 Meet with project sponsor/manager to discuss results and action items

    5.4 Wrap up outstanding items from the workshop, deliverables expectations, GIs

    Outputs

    Data Quality Practice Improvement Roadmap

    Data Quality Improvement Plan (for defined subject areas)

    Further reading

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Quality Data Drives Quality Business Decisions

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    Get ahead of the data curve by conquering data quality challenges.

    Regardless of the driving business strategy or focus, organizations are turning to data to leverage key insights and help improve the organization’s ability to realize its vision, key goals, and objectives.

    Poor quality data, however, can negatively affect time-to-insight and can undermine an organization’s customer experience efforts, product or service innovation, operational efficiency, or risk and compliance management. If you are looking to draw insights from your data for decision making, the quality of those insights is only as good as the quality of the data feeding or fueling them.

    Improving data quality means having a data quality management practice that is sustainably successful and appropriate to the use of the data, while evolving to keep pace with or get ahead of changing business and data landscapes. It is not a matter of fixing one data set at a time, which is resource and time intensive, but instead identifying where data quality consistently goes off the rails, and creating a program to improve the data processes at the source.

    Crystal Singh

    Research Director, Data and Analytics

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your organization is experiencing the pitfalls of poor data quality, including:

    • Unreliable data and unfavorable output.
    • Inefficiencies and costly remedies.
    • Dissatisfied stakeholders.

    Poor data quality hinders successful decision making.

    Common Obstacles

    Not understanding the purpose and execution of data quality causes some disorientation with your data.

    • Failure to realize the importance/value of data quality.
    • Unsure of where to start with data quality.
    • Lack of investment in data quality.

    Organizations tend to adopt a project mentality when it comes to data quality instead of taking the strategic approach that would be all-around more beneficial in the long term.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Address the root causes of your data quality issues by forming a viable data quality program.

    • Be familiar with your organization’s data environment and business landscape.
    • Prioritize business use cases for data quality fixes.
    • Fixing data quality issues at the root cause to ensure a proper foundation for your data to flow.

    It is important to sustain best practices and grow your data quality program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Fix data quality issues as close as possible to the source of data while understanding that business use cases will each have different requirements and expectations from data quality.

    Data is the foundation of your organization’s knowledge

    Data enables your organization to make decisions.

    Reliable data is needed to facilitate data consumers at all levels of the enterprise.

    Insights, knowledge, and information are needed to inform operational, tactical, and strategic decision-making processes. Data and information are needed to manage the business and empower business processes such as billing, customer touchpoints, and fulfillment.

    Raw Data

    Business Information

    Actionable Insights

    Data should be at the foundation of your organization’s evolution. The transformational insights that executives are constantly seeking can be uncovered with a data quality practice that makes high-quality, trustworthy information readily available to the business users who need it.

    98% of companies use data to improve customer experience. (Experian Data Quality, 2019)

    High-Level Data Architecture

    The image is a graphic, which at the top shows different stages of data, and in the lower part of the graphic shows the data processes.

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    1. Data Quality & Data Culture Diagnostics Business Landscape Exercise
    2. Business Strategy & Use Cases
    3. Prioritize Use Cases With Poor Quality

    Info-Tech Insight

    As data is ingested, integrated, and maintained in the various streams of the organization's system and application architecture, there are multiple points where the quality of the data can degrade.

    1. Understand the organization's data culture and data quality environment across the business landscape.
    2. Prioritize business use cases with poor data quality.
    3. For each use case, identify data quality issues and requirements throughout the data pipeline.
    4. Fix data quality issues at the root cause.
    5. As data flow through quality assurance monitoring checkpoints, monitor data to ensure good quality output.

    Insight:

    Proper application of data quality dimensions throughout the data pipeline will result in superior business decisions.

    Data quality issues can occur at any stage of the data flow.

    The image shows the flow of data through various stages: Data Creation; Data Ingestion; Data Accumulation and Engineering; Data Delivery; and Reporting & Analytics. At the bottom, there are two bars: the left one labelled Fix data quality root causes here...; and the right reads: ...to prevent expensive cures here.

    The image is a legend that accompanies the data flow graphic. It indicates that a white and green square icon indicates Data quality dimensions; a red cube indicates a potential point of data quality degradation; the pink square indicates Root cause of poor data quality; and a green flag indicates Quality Assurance Monitoring.

    Prevent the domino effect of poor data quality

    Data is the foundation of decisions made at data-driven organizations.

    Therefore, if there are problems with the organization’s underlying data, this can have a domino effect on many downstream business functions.

    Let’s use an example to illustrate the domino effect of poor data quality.

    Organization X is looking to migrate their data to a single platform, System Y. After the migration, it has become apparent that reports generated from this platform are inconsistent and often seem wrong. What is the effect of this?

    1. Time must be spent on identifying the data quality issues, and often manual data quality fixes are employed. This will extend the time to deliver the project that depends on system Y by X months.
    2. To repair these issues, the business needs to contract two additional resources to complete the unforeseen work. The new resources cost $X each, as well as additional infrastructure and hardware costs.
    3. Now, the strategic objectives of the business are at risk and there is a feeling of mistrust in the new system Y.

    Three key challenges impacting the ability to deliver excellent customer experience

    30% Poor data quality

    30% Method of interaction changing

    30% Legacy systems or lack of new technology

    95% Of organizations indicated that poor data quality undermines business performance.

    (Source: Experian Data Quality, 2019)

    Maintaining quality data will support more informed decisions and strategic insight

    Improving your organization’s data quality will help the business realize the following benefits:

    Data-Driven Decision Making

    Business decisions should be made with a strong rationale. Data can provide insight into key business questions, such as, “How can I provide better customer satisfaction?”

    89% Of CIOs surveyed say lack of quality data is an obstacle to good decision making. (Larry Dignan, CIOs juggling digital transformation pace, bad data, cloud lock0in and business alignment, 2020)

    Customer Intimacy

    Improve marketing and the customer experience by using the right data from the system of record to analyze complete customer views of transactions, sentiments, and interactions.

    94% Percentage of senior IT leaders who say that poor data quality impinges business outcomes. (Clint Boulton, Disconnect between CIOs and LOB managers weakens data quality, 2016)

    Innovation Leadership

    Gain insights on your products, services, usage trends, industry directions, and competitor results to support decisions on innovations, new products, services, and pricing.

    20% Businesses lose as much as 20% of revenue due to poor data quality. (RingLead Data Management Solutions, 10 Stats About Data Quality I Bet You Didn’t Know)

    Operational Excellence

    Make sure the right solution is delivered rapidly and consistently to the right parties for the right price and cost structure. Automate processes by using the right data to drive process improvements.

    10-20% The implementation of data quality initiatives can lead to reductions in corporate budget of up to 20%. (HaloBI, 2015)

    However, maintaining data quality is difficult

    Avoid these pitfalls to get the true value out of your data.

    1. Data debt drags down ROI – a high degree of data debt will hinder you from attaining the ROI you’re expecting.
    2. Lack of trust means lack of usage – a lack of confidence in data results in a lack of data usage in your organization, which negatively effects strategic planning, KPIs, and business outcomes.
    3. Strategic assets become a liability – bad data puts your business at risk of failing compliance standards, which could result in you paying millions in fines.
    4. Increased costs and inefficiency – time spent fixing bad data means less workload capacity for your important initiatives and the inability to make data-based decisions.
    5. Barrier to adopting data-driven tech – emerging technologies, such as predictive analytics and artificial intelligence, rely on quality data. Inaccurate, incomplete, or irrelevant data will result in delays or a lack of ROI.
    6. Bad customer experience – Running your business on bad data can hinder your ability to deliver to your customers, growing their frustration, which negatively impacts your ability to maintain your customer base.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data quality suffers most at the point of entry. This is one of the causes of the domino effect of data quality – and can be one of the most costly forms of data quality errors due to the error propagation. In other words, fix data ingestion, whether through improving your application and database design or improving your data ingestion policy, and you will fix a large majority of data quality issues.

    Follow Our Data & Analytics Journey

    Data Quality is laced into Data Strategy, Data Management, and Data Governance.

    • Data Strategy
      • Data Management
        • Data Quality
        • Data Governance
          • Data Architecture
            • MDM
            • Data Integration
            • Enterprise Content Management
            • Information Lifecycle Management
              • Data Warehouse/Lake/Lakehouse
                • Reporting and Analytics
                • AI

    Data quality is rooted in data management

    Extract Maximum Benefit Out of Your Data Quality Management.

    • Data management is the planning, execution, and oversight of policies, practices, and projects that acquire, control, protect, deliver, and enhance the value of data and information assets (DAMA, 2009).
    • In other words, getting the right information, to the right people, at the right time.
    • Data quality management exists within each of the data practices, information dimensions, business resources, and subject areas that comprise the data management framework.
    • Within this framework, an effective data quality practice will replace ad hoc processes with standardized practices.
    • An effective data quality practice cannot succeed without proper alignment and collaboration across this framework.
    • Alignment ensures that the data quality practice is fit for purpose to the business.

    The DAMA DMBOK2 Data Management Framework

    • Data Governance
      • Data Quality
      • Data Architecture
      • Data Modeling & Design
      • Data Storage & Operations
      • Data Security
      • Data Integration & Interoperability
      • Documents & Content
      • Reference & Master Data
      • Data Warehousing & Business Intelligence
      • Meta-data

    (Source: DAMA International)

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    • People often think that the main problems they need to fix first are related to data quality when the issues transpire at a much larger level. This blueprint is the key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    • Refer to this blueprint to understand data quality in the context of data disciplines and methods for improving your data management capabilities.

    Establish Data Governance

    • Define an effective data governance strategy and ensure the strategy integrates well with data quality with this blueprint.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Data Quality

    Phase Steps 1. Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape 2. Analyze Your Priorities for Data Quality Fixes 3. Establish Your Organization’s Data Quality Program 4. Grow and Sustain Your Data Quality Practice
    Phase Outcomes This step identifies the foundational understanding of your data and business landscape, the essential concepts around data quality, as well as the core capabilities and competencies that IT needs to effectively improve data quality. To begin addressing specific, business-driven data quality projects, you must identify and prioritize the data-driven business units. This will ensure that data improvement initiatives are aligned to business goals and priorities. After determining whose data is going to be fixed based on priority, determine the specific problems that they are facing with data quality, and implement an improvement plan to fix it. Now that you have put an improvement plan into action, make sure that the data quality issues don’t keep cropping up. Integrate data quality management with data governance practices into your organization and look to grow your organization’s overall data maturity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Data Quality is in the eyes of the beholder.”– Igor Ikonnikov, Research Director

    Data quality means tolerance, not perfection

    Data from Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Diagnostic, which represents over 400 business stakeholders, shows that data quality is very important when satisfaction with data quality is low.

    However, when data quality satisfaction hit a threshold, it became less important.

    The image is a line graph, with the X-axis labelled Satisfaction with Data Quality, and the Y axis labelled Rated Importance for Data Quality. The line begins high, and then descends. There is text inside the graph, which is transcribed below.

    Respondents were asked “How satisfied are you with the quality, reliability, and effectiveness of the data you use to manage your group?” as well as to rank how important data quality was to their organization.

    When the business satisfaction of data quality reached a threshold value of 71-80%, the rated importance reached its lowest value.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data needs to be good, but truly spectacular data may go unnoticed.

    Provide the right level of data quality, with the appropriate effort, for the correct usage. This blueprint will help you to determine what “the right level of data quality” means, as well as create a plan to achieve that goal for the business.

    Data Roles and Responsibilities

    Data quality occurs through three main layers across the data lifecycle

    Data Strategy

    Data Strategy should contain Data Quality as a standard component.

    ← Data Quality issues can occur throughout at any stage of the data flow →

    DQ Dimensions

    Timeliness – Representation – Usability – Consistency – Completeness – Uniqueness – Entry Quality – Validity – Confidence – Importance

    Source System Layer

    • Data Resource Manager/Collector: Enters data into a database and ensures that data collection sources are accurate

    Data Transformation Layer

    • ETL Developer: Designs data storage systems
    • Data Engineer: Oversees data integrations, data warehouses and data lakes, data pipelines
    • Database Administrator: Manages database systems, ensures they meet SLAs, performances, backups
    • Data Quality Engineer: Finds and cleanses bad data in data sources, creates processes to prevent data quality problems

    Consumption Layer

    • Data Scientist: Gathers and analyses data from databases and other sources, runs models, and creates data visualizations for users
    • BI Analyst: Evaluates and mines complex data and transforms it into insights that drive business value. Uses BI software and tools to analyze industry trends and create visualizations for business users
    • Data Analyst: Extracts data from business systems, analyzes it, and creates reports and dashboards for users
    • BI Engineer: Documents business needs on data analysis and reporting and develops BI systems, reports, and dashboards to support them
    Data Creation → [SLA] Data Ingestion [ QA] →Data Accumulation & Engineering → [SLA] Data Delivery [QA] →Reporting & Analytics
    Fix Data Quality root causes here… to prevent expensive cures here.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Industry: Healthcare

    Source: Primary Info-Tech Research

    Align source systems to maximize business output.

    A healthcare insurance agency faced data quality issues in which a key business use case was impacted negatively. Business rules were not well defined, and default values instead of real value caused a concern. When dealing with multiple addresses, data was coming from different source systems.

    The challenge was to identify the most accurate address, as some were incomplete, and some lacked currency and were not up to date. This especially challenged a key business unit, marketing, to derive business value in performing key activities by being unable to reach out to existing customers to advertise any additional products.

    For this initiative, this insurance agency took an economic approach by addressing those data quality issues using internal resources.

    Results

    Without having any MDM tools or having a master record or any specific technology relating to data quality, this insurance agency used in-house development to tackle those particular issues at the source system. Data quality capabilities such as data profiling were used to uncover those issues and address them.

    “Data quality is subjective; you have to be selective in terms of targeting the data that matters the most. When getting business tools right, most issues will be fixed and lead to achieving the most value.” – Asif Mumtaz, Data & Solution Architect

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostic and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    • Call #1: Learn about the concepts of data quality and the common root causes of poor data quality.
    • Call #2: Identify the core capabilities of IT for improving data quality on an enterprise scale.
    • Call #3: Determine which business units use data and require data quality remediation.
    • Call #4: Create a plan for addressing business unit data quality issues according to priority of the business units based on value and impact of data.
    • Call #5: Revisit the root causes of data quality issues and identify the relevant root causes to the highest priority business unit.
    • Call #6: Determine a strategy for fixing data quality issues for the highest priority business unit.
    • Call #7: Identify strategies for continuously monitoring and improving data quality at the organization.
    • Call #8: Learn how to incorporate data quality practices in the organization’s larger data management and data governance frameworks.
    • Call #9: Summarize results and plan next steps on how to evolve your data landscape.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between eight to twelve calls over the course of four to six months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 1 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 2 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 3 Create a Plan for Sustaining Data Quality
    Activities
    1. Explain approach and value proposition.
    2. Detail business vision, objectives, and drivers.
    3. Discuss data quality barriers, needs, and principles.
    4. Assess current enterprise-wide data quality capabilities.
    5. Identify data quality practice future state.
    6. Analyze gaps in data quality practice.
    1. Create business unit prioritization roadmap.
    2. Develop subject areas project scope.
    3. By subject area 1:
    • Data lineage analysis
    • Root cause analysis
    • Impact assessment
    • Business analysis
    1. Understand how data quality management fits in with the organization’s data governance and data management programs.
    2. By subject area 2:
    • Data lineage analysis
    • Root cause analysis
    • Impact assessment
    • Business analysis
    1. Formulate strategies and actions to achieve data quality practice future state.
    2. Formulate data quality resolution plan for defined subject area.
    3. By subject area 3:
    • Data lineage analysis
    • Root cause analysis
    • Impact assessment
    • Business analysis
    1. Formulate metrics for continuous tracking of data quality and monitoring the success of the data quality improvement initiative.
    2. Workshop Debrief with Project Sponsor.
    • Meet with project sponsor/manager to discuss results and action items.
    • Wrap up outstanding items from the workshop, deliverables expectations, GIs.
    Deliverables
    1. Data Quality Management Primer
    2. Business Capability Map Template
    3. Data Culture Diagnostic
    4. Data Quality Diagnostic
    5. Data Quality Problem Statement Template
    1. Business Unit Prioritization Roadmap
    2. Subject area scope
    3. Data Lineage Diagram
    1. Data Lineage Diagram
    2. Root Cause Analysis
    3. Impact Analysis
    1. Data Lineage Diagram
    2. Data Quality Improvement Plan
    1. Data Quality Practice Improvement Roadmap
    2. Data Quality Improvement Plan (for defined subject areas)

    Phase 1

    Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Data quality is a methodology and must be treated as such

    A comprehensive data quality practice includes appropriate business requirements gathering, planning, governance, and oversight capabilities, as well as empowering technologies for properly trained staff, and ongoing development processes.

    Some common examples of appropriate data management methodologies for data quality are:

    • The data quality team has the necessary competencies and resources to perform the outlined workload.
    • There are processes that exist for continuously evaluating data quality performance capabilities.
    • Improvement strategies are designed to increase data quality performance capabilities.
    • Policies and procedures that govern data quality are well-documented, communicated, followed, and updated.
    • Change controls exist for revising policies and procedures, including communication of updates and changes.
    • Self-auditing techniques are used to ensure business-IT alignment when designing or recalibrating strategies.

    Effective data quality practices coordinate with other overarching data disciplines, related data practices, and strategic business objectives.

    “You don’t solve data quality with a Band-Aid; you solve it with a methodology.” – Diraj Goel, Growth Advisor, BC Tech

    Data quality can be defined by four key quality indicators

    Similar to measuring the acidity of a substance with a litmus test, the quality of your data can be measured using a simple indicator test. As you learn about common root causes of data quality problems in the following slides, think about these four quality indicators to assess the quality of your data:

    • Completeness – Closeness to the correct value. Encompasses accuracy, consistency, and comparability to other databases.
    • Usability – The degree to which data meets current user needs. To measure this, you must determine if the user is satisfied with the data they are using to complete their business functions.
    • Timeliness – Length of time between creation and availability of data.
    • Accessibility – How easily a user can access and understand the data (including data definitions and context). Interpretability can also be used to describe this indicator.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Quality is a relative term. Data quality is measured in terms of tolerance. Perfect data quality is both impossible and a waste of time and effort.

    How to get investment for your data quality program

    Follow these steps to convince leadership of the value of data quality:

    “You have to level with people, you cannot just start talking with the language of data and expect them to understand when the other language is money and numbers.” – Izabela Edmunds, Information Architect at Mott MacDonald

    1. Perform Phases 0 & 1 of this blueprint as this will offer value in carrying out the following steps.
    2. Build credibility. Show them your understanding of data and how it aligns to the business.
    3. Provide tangible evidence of how significant business use cases are impacted by poor quality data.
    4. Present the ROI of fixing the data quality issues you have prioritized.
    5. Explain how the data quality program will be established, implemented, and sustained.
    6. Prove the importance of fixing data quality issues at the source and how it is the most efficient, effective, and cost-friendly solution.

    Phase 1 deliverables

    Each of these deliverables serve as inputs to detect key outcomes about your organization and to help complete this blueprint:

    1. Data Culture Diagnostic

    Use this report to understand where your organization lies across areas relating to data culture.

    While the Quality & Trust area of the report might be most prevalent to this blueprint, this diagnostic may point out other areas demanding more attention.

    Please speak to your account manager for access

    2. Business Capability Map Template

    Perform this process to understand the capabilities that enable specific value streams. The output of this deliverable is a high-level view of your organization’s defined business capabilities.

    Download this tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understanding your data culture and business capabilities are foundational to starting the journey of data quality improvement.

    Key deliverable:

    3. Data Quality Diagnostic

    The Data Quality Report is designed to help you understand, assess, and improve key organizational data quality issues. This is where respondents across various areas in the organization can assess Data Quality across various dimensions.

    Download this tool

    Data Quality Diagnostic Value

    Prioritize business use cases with our data quality dimensions.

    • Complete this diagnostic for each major business use case. The output from the Data Culture Diagnostic and the Business Capability Map should help you understand which use cases to address.
    • Involve all key stakeholders involved in the business use case. There may be multiple business units involved in a single use case.
    • Prioritize the business use cases that need the most attention pertaining to data quality by comparing the scores of the Importance and Confidence data quality dimensions.

    If there are data elements that are considered of high importance and low confidence, then they must be prioritized.

    Sample Scorecard

    The image shows a screen capture of a scorecard, with sample information filled in.

    The image shows a screen capture of a scorecard, with sample information filled in.

    Poor data quality develops due to multiple root causes

    After you get to know the properties of good quality data, understand the underlying causes of why those indicators can point to poor data quality.

    If you notice that the usability, completeness, timeliness, or accessibility of the organization’s data is suffering, one or more of the following root causes are likely plaguing your data:

    Common root causes of poor data quality, through the lens of Info-Tech’s Five-Tier Data Architecture:

    The image shows a graphic of Info-Tech's Five-Tier Data Architecture, with root causes of poor data quality identified. In the data creation and ingestion stages, the root causes are identified as Poor system/application design, Poor database design, Inadequate enterprise integration. The root causes identified in the latter stages are: Absence of data quality policies, procedures, and standards, and Incomplete/suboptimal business processes

    These root causes of poor data quality are difficult to avoid, not only because they are often generated at an organization’s beginning stages, but also because change can be difficult. This means that the root causes are often propagated through stale or outdated business processes.

    Data quality problems root cause #1:

    Poor system or application design

    Application design plays one of the largest roles in the quality of the organization’s data. The proper design of applications can prevent data quality issues that can snowball into larger issues downstream.

    Proper ingestion is 90% of the battle. An ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure. This is true in many different topics, and data quality is one of them. Designing an application so that data gets entered properly, whether by internal staff or external customers, is the single most effective way to prevent data quality issues.

    Some common causes of data quality problems at the application/system level include:

    • Too many open fields (free-form text fields that accept a variety of inputs).
    • There are no lookup capabilities present. Reference data should be looked up instead of entered.
    • Mandatory fields are not defined, resulting in blank fields.
    • No validation of data entries before writing to the underlying database.
    • Manual data entry encourages human error. This can be compounded by poor application design that facilitates the incorrect data entry.

    Data quality problems root cause #2:

    Poor database design

    Database design also affects data quality. How a database is designed to handle incoming data, including the schema and key identification, can impact the integrity of the data used for reporting and analytics.

    The most common type of database is the relational database. Therefore, we will focus on this type of database.

    When working with and designing relational databases, there are some important concepts that must be considered.

    Referential integrity is a term that is important for the design of relational database schema, and indicates that table relationships must always be consistent.

    For table relationships to be consistent, primary keys (unique value for each row) must uniquely identify entities in columns of the table. Foreign keys (field that is defined in a second table but refers to the primary key in the first table) must agree with the primary key that is referenced by the foreign key. To maintain referential integrity, any updates must be propagated to the primary parent key.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Other types of databases, including databases with unstructured data, need data quality consideration. However, unstructured data may have different levels of quality tolerance.

    At the database level, some common root causes include:

    1. Lack of referential integrity.
    2. Lack of unique keys.
    3. Don’t have restricted data range.
    4. Incorrect datatype, string fields that can hold too many characters.
    5. Orphaned records.

    Databases and People:

    Even though database design is a technology issue, don’t forget about the people.

    A lack of training employees on database permissions for updating/entering data into the physical databases is a common problem for data quality.

    Data quality problems root cause #3:

    Improper integration and synchronization of enterprise data

    Data ingestion is another category of data-quality-issue root causes. When moving data in Tier 2, whether it is through ETL, ESB, point-to-point integration, etc., the integrity of the data during movement and/or transformation needs to be maintained.

    Tier 2 (the data ingestion layer) serves to move data for one of two main purposes:

    • To move data from originating systems to downstream systems to support integrated business processes.
    • To move data to Tier 3 where data rests for other purposes. This movement of data in its purest form means we move raw data to storage locations in an overall data warehouse environment reflecting any security, compliance and other standards in our choices for how to store. Also, it is where data is transformed for unique business purpose that will also be moved to a place of rest or a place of specific use. Data cleansing and matching and other data-related blending tasks occur at this layer.

    This ensures the data is pristine throughout the process and improves trustworthiness of outcomes and speed to task completion.

    At the integration layer, some common root causes of data quality problems include:

    1. No data mask. For example, zip code should have a mask of five numeric characters.
    2. Questionable aggregation, transformation process, or incorrect logic.
    3. Unsynchronized data refresh process in an integrated environment.
    4. Lack of a data matching tool.
    5. Lack of a data quality tool.
    6. Don’t have data profiling capability.
    7. Errors with data conversion or migration processes – when migrating, decommissioning, or converting systems – movement of data sets.
    8. Incorrect data mapping between data sources and targets.

    Data quality problems root cause #4:

    Insufficient and ineffective data quality policies and procedures

    Data policies and procedures are necessary for establishing standards around data and represent another category of data-quality-issue root causes. This issue spans across all five of the 5 Tier Architecture.

    Data policies are short statements that seek to manage the creation, acquisition, integrity, security, compliance, and quality of data. These policies vary amongst organizations, depending on your specific data needs.

    • Policies describe what to do, while standards and procedures describe how to do something.
    • There should be few data policies, and they should be brief and direct. Policies are living documents and should be continuously updated to respond to the organization’s data needs.
    • The data policies should highlight who is responsible for the data under various scenarios and rules around how to manage it effectively.

    Some common root causes of data quality issues related to policies and procedures include:

    1. Policies are absent or out of date.
    2. Employees are largely unaware of policies in effect.
    3. Policies are unmonitored and unenforced.
    4. Policies are in multiple locations.
    5. Multiple versions of the same policy exist.
    6. Policies are managed inconsistently across different silos.
    7. Policies are written poorly by untrained authors.
    8. Inadequate policy training program.
    9. Draft policies stall and lose momentum.
    10. Weak policy support from senior management.

    Data quality problems root cause #5:

    Inefficient or ineffective business processes

    Some common root causes of data quality issues related to business processes include:

    1. Multiple entries of the same record leads to duplicate records proliferating in the database.
    2. Many business definitions of data.
    3. Failure to document data manipulations when presenting data.
    4. Failure to train people on how to understand data.
    5. Manually intensive processes can result in duplication of effort (creates room for errors).
    6. No clear delineation of dependencies of business processes within or between departments, which leads to a siloed approach to business processes, rather than a coordinated and aligned approach.

    Business processes can impact data quality. How data is entered into systems, as well as employee training and knowledge about the correct data definitions, can impact the quality of your organization’s data.

    These problematic business process root causes can lead to:

    Duplicate records

    Incomplete data

    Improper use of data

    Wrong data entered into fields

    These data quality issues will result in costly and inefficient manual fixes, wasting valuable time and resources.

    Phase 1 Summary

    1. Data Quality Understanding

    • Understanding that data quality is a methodology and should be treated as such.
    • Data quality can be defined by four key indicators which are completeness, usability, timeliness, and accessibility.
    • Explained how to get investment for your data quality program and showcasing its value to leadership.

    2. Phase 0 Deliverables

    Introduced foundational tools to help you throughout this blueprint:

    • Complete the Data Culture Diagnostic and Business Capability Map Template as they are foundational in understanding your data culture and business capabilities to start the journey of data quality improvement.
    • Involve key relevant stakeholders when completing the Data Quality Diagnostic for each major business use case. Use the Importance and Confidence dimensions to help you prioritize which use case to address.

    3. Common Root Causes

    Addressed where multiple root causes can occur throughout the flow of your data.

    Analyzed the following common root causes of data quality:

    1. Poor system or application design
    2. Poor database design
    3. Improper integration and synchronization of enterprise data
    4. Insufficient and ineffective data quality policies and procedures
    5. Inefficient or ineffective business processes

    Phase 2

    Analyze Your Priorities for Data Quality Fixes

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Business Context & Data Quality

    Establish the business context of data quality improvement projects at the business unit level to find common goals.

    • To ensure the data improvement strategy is business driven, start your data quality project evaluation by understanding the business context. You will then determine which business units use data and create a roadmap for prioritizing business units for data quality repairs.
    • Your business context is represented by your corporate business vision, mission, goals and objectives, differentiators, and drivers. Collectively, they provide essential information on what is important to your organization, and some hints on how to achieve that. In this step, you will gather important information about your business view and interpret the business view to establish a data view.

    Business Vision

    Business Goals

    Business Drivers

    Business Differentiators

    Not every business unit uses data to the same extent

    A data flow diagram can provide value by allowing an organization to adopt a proactive approach to data quality. Save time by knowing where the entry points are and where to look for data flaws.

    Understanding where data lives can be challenging as it is often in motion and rarely resides in one place. There are multiple benefits that come from taking the time to create a data flow diagram.

    • Mapping out the flow of data can help provide clarity on where the data lives and how it moves through the enterprise systems.
    • Having a visual of where and when data moves helps to understand who is using data and how it is being manipulated at different points.
    • A data flow diagram will allow you to elicit how data is used in a different use case.

    Info-Tech’s Four-Column Model of Data will help you to identify the essential aspects of your data:

    Business Use Case →Used by→Business Unit →Housed in→Systems→Used for→Usage of the Data

    Not every business unit requires the same standard of data quality

    To prioritize your business units for data quality improvement projects, you must analyze the relative importance of the data they use to the business. The more important the data is to the business, the higher the priority is of fixing that data. There are two measures for determining the importance of data: business value and business impact.

    Business Value of Data

    Business value of data can be evaluated by thinking about its ties to revenue generation for the organization, as well as how it is used for productivity and operations at the organization.

    The business value of data is assessed by asking what would happen to the following parameters if the data is not usable (due to poor quality, for example):

    • Loss of Revenue
    • Loss of Productivity
    • Increased Operating Costs

    Business Impact of Data

    Business impact of data should take into account the effects of poor data on both internal and external parties.

    The business impact of data is assessed by asking what the impact would be of bad data on the following parameters:

    • Impact on Customers
    • Impact on Internal Staff
    • Impact on Business Partners

    Value + Impact = Data Priority Score

    Ensure that the project starts on the right foot by completing Info-Tech’s Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    Before you can identify a solution, you must identify the problem with the business unit’s data.

    Download this tool

    Use Info-Tech’s Data Quality Problem Statement Template to identify the symptoms of poor data quality and articulate the problem.

    Info-Tech’s Data Quality Problem Statement Template will walk you through a step-by-step approach to identifying and describing the problems that the business unit feels regarding its data quality.

    Before articulating the problem, it helps to identify the symptoms of the problem. The following W’s will help you to describe the symptoms of the data quality issues:

    What

    Define the symptoms and feelings produced by poor data quality in the business unit.

    Where

    Define the location of the data that are causing data quality issues.

    When

    Define how severe the data quality issues are in frequency and duration.

    Who

    Define who is affected by the data quality problems and who works with the data.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Symptoms vs. Problems. Often, people will identify a list of symptoms of a problem and mistake those for the problem. Identifying the symptoms helps to define the problem, but symptoms do not help to identify the solution. The problem statement helps you to create solutions.

    Define the project problem to articulate the purpose

    1 hour

    Input

    • Symptoms of data quality issues in the business unit

    Output

    • Refined problem description

    Materials

    • Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    Participants

    • Data Quality Improvement Project team
    • Business line representatives

    A defined problem helps you to create clear goals, as well as lead your thinking to determine solutions to the problem.

    A problem statement consists of one or two sentences that summarize a condition or issue that a quality improvement team is meant to address. For the improvement team to fix the problem, the problem statement therefore has to be specific and concise.

    Instructions

    1. Gather the Data Quality Improvement Project Team in a room and start with an issue that is believed to be related to data quality.
    2. Ask what are the attributes and symptoms of that reality today; do this with the people impacted by the issue. This should be an IT and business collaboration.
    3. Draw your conclusions of what it all means: what have you collectively learned?
    4. Consider the implications of your conclusions and other considerations that must be taken into account such as regulatory needs, compliance, policy, and targets.
    5. Develop solutions – Contain the problem to something that can be solved in a realistic timeframe, such as three months.

    Download the Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    Case Study

    A strategic roadmap rooted in business requirements primes a data quality improvement plan for success.

    MathWorks

    Industry

    Software Development

    Source

    Primary Info-Tech Research

    As part of moving to a formalized data quality practice, MathWorks leveraged an incremental approach that took its time investigating business cases to support improvement actions. Establishing realistic goals for improvement in the form of a roadmap was a central component for gaining executive approval to push the project forward.

    Roadmap Creation

    In constructing a comprehensive roadmap that incorporated findings from business process and data analyses, MathWorks opted to document five-year and three-year overall goals, with one-year objectives that supported each goal. This approach ensured that the tactical actions taken were directed by long-term strategic objectives.

    Results – Business Alignment

    In presenting their roadmap for executive approval, MathWorks placed emphasis on communicating the progression and impact of their initiatives in terms that would engage business users. They focused on maintaining continual lines of communication with business stakeholders to demonstrate the value of the initiatives and also to gradually shift the corporate culture to one that is invested in an effective data quality practice.

    “Don’t jump at the first opportunity, because you may be putting out a fire with a cup of water where a fire truck is needed.” – Executive Advisor, IT Research and Advisory Firm

    Use Info-Tech’s Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool to create your strategy for improving data quality

    Assess IT’s capabilities and competencies around data quality and plan to build these as the organization’s data quality practice develops. Before you can fix data quality, make sure you have the necessary skills and abilities to fix data quality correctly.

    The following IT capabilities are developed on an ongoing basis and are necessary for standardizing and structuring a data quality practice:

    • Meeting Business Needs
    • Services and Projects
    • Policies, Procedures, and Standards
    • Roles and Organizational Structure
    • Oversight and Communication
    • Data Quality of Different Data Types

    Download this Tool

    Data Handling and Remediation Competencies:

    • Data Standardization: Formatting values into consistent standards based on industry standards and business rules.
    • Data Cleansing: Modification of values to meet domain restrictions, integrity constraints, or other business rules for sufficient data quality for the organization.
    • Data Matching: Identification, linking, and merging related entries in or across sets of data.
    • Data Validation: Checking for correctness of the data.

    After these capabilities and competencies are assessed for a current and desired target state, the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool will suggest improvement actions that should be followed in order to build your data quality practice. In addition, a roadmap will be generated after target dates are set to create your data quality practice development strategy.

    Benchmark current and identify target capabilities for your data quality practice

    1 hour

    Input

    • Current and desired data quality practices in the organization

    Output

    • Assessment of where the gaps lie in your data quality practice

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality Project Lead
    • Business Line Representatives
    • Business Architects

    Use the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool to evaluate the baseline and target capabilities of your practice in terms of how data quality is approached and executed.

    Download this Tool

    Instructions

    1. Invite the appropriate stakeholders to participate in this exercise. Examples:
      1. Business executives will have input in Tab 2
      2. Unique stakeholders: communications expert or executive advisors may have input
    2. On Tab 2: Practice Components, assess the current and target states of each capability on a scale of 1–5. Note: “Ad hoc” implies a capability is completed, but randomly, informally, and without a standardized method.

    These results will set the baseline against which you will monitor performance progress and keep track of improvements over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focus on early alignment. Assessing capabilities within specific people’s job functions can naturally result in disagreement or debate, especially between business and IT people. Remind everyone that data quality should ultimately serve business needs wherever possible.

    Visualization improves the holistic understanding of where gaps exist in your data quality practice

    To enable deeper analysis on the results of your practice assessment, Tab 3: Data Quality Practice Scorecard in the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool creates visualizations of the gaps identified in each of your practice capabilities and related data management practices. These diagrams serve as analysis summaries.

    Gap assessment of “Meeting Business Needs” capabilities

    The image shows a screen capture of the Gap assessment of 
“Meeting Business Needs” capabilities, with sample information filled in.

    Visualization of gap assessment of data quality practice capabilities

    The image shows a bar graph titled Data Quality Capabilities.

    1. Enhance your gap analyses by forming a relative comparison of total gaps in key practice capability areas, which will help in determining priorities.
    • Example: In Tab 2 compare your capabilities within “Policies, Procedures, and Standards.” Then in Tab 3, compare your overall capabilities in “Policies, Procedures, and Standards” versus “Empowering Technologies.”
  • Put these up on display to improve discussion in the gap analyses and prioritization sessions.
  • Improve the clarity and flow of your strategy template, final presentations, and summary documents by copying and pasting the gap assessment diagrams.
  • Before engaging in the data quality improvement project plan, receive signoff from IT regarding feasibility

    The final piece of the puzzle is to gain sign-off from IT.

    Hofstadter's law: It always takes longer than you expect, even when you take into account Hofstadter’s Law.

    This means that before engaging IT in data quality projects to fix the business units’ data in Phase 2, IT must assess feasibility of the data quality improvement plan. A feasibility analysis is typically used to review the strengths and weaknesses of the projects, as well as the availability of required skills and technologies needed to complete them. Use the following workflow to guide you in performing a feasibility analysis:

    Project evaluation process:

    Present capabilities

    • Operational Capabilities
    • System Capabilities
    • Schedule Capabilities
      • Summary of Evaluation Results
        • Recommendations/ modifications to the project plan

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    While the PMO identifies and coordinates projects, IT must determine how long and for how much.

    Conduct gap analysis sessions to review and prioritize the capability gaps

    1 hour

    Input

    • Current and Target State Assessment

    Output

    • Documented initiatives to help you get to the target state

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality team
    • IT representatives

    Instructions

    • Analyze Gap Analysis Results – As a group, discuss the high-level results on Tab 3: Data Quality Practice Score. Discuss the implications of the gaps identified.
    • Do a line-item review of the gaps between current and target levels for each assessed capability by using Tab 2: Practice Components.
    • Brainstorm Alignment Strategies – Brainstorm the effort and activities that will be necessary to support the practice in building its capabilities to the desired target level. Ask the following questions:
      • What activities must occur to enable this capability?
      • What changes/additions to resources, process, technology, business involvement, and communication must occur?
    • Document Data Quality Initiatives – Turn activities into initiatives by documenting them in Tab 4. Data Quality Practice Roadmap. Review the initiatives and estimate the start and end dates of each one.
    • Continue to evaluate the assessment results in order to create a comprehensive set of data quality initiatives that support your practice in building capabilities.

    Download this Tool

    Create the organization’s data quality improvement strategy roadmap

    1 hour

    Input

    • Data quality practice gaps and improvement actions

    Output

    • Data quality practice improvement roadmap

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality Project Lead
    • Business Executives
    • IT Executives
    • Business Architects

    Generating Your Roadmap

    1. Plan the sequence, starting time, and length of each initiative in the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool.
    2. The tool will generate a Gantt chart based on the start and length of your initiatives.
    3. The Gantt chart is generated in Tab 4: Data Quality Practice Roadmap, and can be used to organize and ensure that all of the essential aspects of data quality are addressed.

    Use the Practice Roadmap to plan and improve data quality capabilities

    Download this Tool

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    To help get you started, Info-Tech has provided an extensive list of data quality improvement initiatives that are commonly undertaken by organizations looking to improve their data quality.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    2 hours

    Create practice-level metrics to monitor your data quality practice.

    Instructions:

    1. Establish metrics for both the business and IT that will be used to determine if the data quality practice development is effective.
    2. Set targets for each metric.
    3. Collect current data to calculate the metrics and establish a baseline.
    4. Assign an owner for tracking each metric to be accountable for performance.
    Metric Current Goal
    Usage (% of trained users using the data warehouse)
    Performance (response time)
    Performance (response time)
    Resource utilization (memory usage, number of machine cycles)
    User satisfaction (quarterly user surveys)
    Data quality (% values outside valid values, % fields missing, wrong data type, data outside acceptable range, data that violates business rules. Some aspects of data quality can be automatically tracked and reported)
    Costs (initial installation and ongoing, Total Cost of Ownership including servers, software licenses, support staff)
    Security (security violations detected, where violations are coming from, breaches)
    Patterns that are used
    Reduction in time to market for the data
    Completeness of data that is available
    How many "standard" data models are being used
    What is the extra business value from the data governance program?
    How much time is spent for data prep by BI & analytics team?

    Phase 2 summary

    As you improve your data quality practice and move from reactive to stable, don’t rest and assume that you can let data quality keep going by itself. Rapidly changing consumer requirements or other pains will catch up to your organization and you will fall behind again. By moving to the proactive and predictive end of the maturity scale, you can stay ahead of the curve. By following the methodology laid out in Phase 1, the data quality practices at your organization will improve over time, leading to the following results:

    Chaotic

    Before Data Quality Practice Improvements

    • No standards to data quality

    Reactive

    Year 1

    • Processes defined
    • Data cleansing approach to data quality

    Stable

    Year 2

    • Business rules/ stewardship in place
    • Education and training

    Proactive

    Year 3

    • Data quality practices fully in place and embedded in the culture
    • Trusted and intelligent enterprise

    (Global Data Excellence, Data Excellence Maturity Model)

    Phase 3

    Establish Your Organization’s Data Quality Program

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Create a data lineage diagram to map the data journey and identify the data subject areas to be targeted for fixes

    It is important to understand the various data that exist in the business unit, as well as which data are essential to business function and require the highest degree of quality efforts.

    Visualize your databases and the flow of data. A data lineage diagram can help you and the Data Quality Improvement Team visualize where data issues lie. Keeping the five-tier architecture in mind, build your data lineage diagram.

    Reminder: Five-Tier Architecture

    The image shows the Five-Tier Architecture graphic.

    Use the following icons to represent your various data systems and databases.

    The image shows four icons. They are: the image of a square and a computer monitor, labelled Application; the image of two sheets of paper, labelled Desktop documents; the image of a green circle next to a computer monitor, labelled Web Application; and a blue cylinder labelled Database.

    Use Info-Tech’s Data Lineage Diagram to document the data sources and applications used by the business unit

    2 hours

    Input

    • Data sources and applications used by the business unit

    Output

    • Data lineage diagram

    Materials

    • Data Lineage Diagram Template

    Participants

    • Business Unit Head/Data Owner
    • Business Unit SMEs
    • Data Analysts/Architects

    Map the flow and location of data within a business unit by creating a system context diagram.

    Gain an accurate view of data locations and uses: Engage business users and representatives with a wide breadth of knowledge-related business processes and the use of data by related business operations.

    1. Sit down with key business representatives of the business unit.
    2. Document the sources of data and processes in which they’re involved, and get IT confirmation that the sources of the data are correct.
    3. Map out the sources and processes in a system context diagram.

    Download this Tool

    Sample Data Lineage Diagram

    The image shows a sample data lineage diagram, split into External Applications and Internal Applications, and showing the processes involved in each.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool to document business context

    1 hour

    Input

    • Business vision, goals, and drivers

    Output

    • Business context for the data quality improvement project

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality project lead
    • Business line representatives
    • IT executives

    Develop goals and align them with specific objectives to set the framework for your data quality initiatives.

    In the context of achieving business vision, mission, goals, and objectives and sustaining differentiators and key drivers, think about where and how data quality is a barrier. Then brainstorm data quality improvement objectives that map to these barriers. Document your list of objectives in Tab 5. Prioritize business units of the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool.

    Establishing Business Context Example

    Healthcare Industry

    Vision To improve member services and make service provider experience more effective through improving data quality and data collection, aggregation, and accessibility for all the members.
    Goals

    Establish meaningful metrics that guide to the improvement of healthcare for member effectiveness of health care providers:

    • Data collection
    • Data harmonization
    • Data accessibility and trust by all constituents.
    Differentiator Connect service consumers with service providers, that comply with established regulations by delivering data that is accurate, trusted, timely, and easy to understand to connect service providers and eliminate bureaucracy and save money and time.
    Key Driver Seamlessly provide a healthcare for members.

    Download this Tool

    Document the identified business units and their associated data

    30 minutes

    Input

    • Business units

    Output

    • Documented business units to begin prioritization

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Project Manager

    Instructions

    1. Using Tab 5: Prioritize Business Units of the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool, document the business units that use data in the organization. This will likely be all business units in the organization.
    2. Next, document the primary data used by those business units.
    3. These inputs will then be used to assess business unit priority to generate a data quality improvement project roadmap.

    The image shows a screen capture of Tab 5: Prioritize Business Units, with sample information inputted.

    Reminder – Not every business unit requires the same standard of data quality

    To prioritize your business units for data quality improvement projects, you must analyze the relative importance of the data they use to the business. The more important the data is to the business, the higher the priority is of fixing that data. There are two measures for determining the importance of data: business value and business impact.

    Business Value of Data

    Business value of data can be evaluated by thinking about its ties to revenue generation for the organization, as well as how it is used for productivity and operations at the organization.

    The business value of data is assessed by asking what would happen to the following parameters if the data is not usable (due to poor quality, for example):

    • Loss of Revenue
    • Loss of Productivity
    • Increased Operating Costs

    Business Impact of Data

    Business impact of data should take into account the effects of poor data on both internal and external parties.

    The business impact of data is assessed by asking what the impact would be of bad data on the following parameters:

    • Impact on Customers
    • Impact on Internal Staff
    • Impact on Business Partners

    Value + Impact = Data Priority Score

    Assess the business unit priority order for data quality improvements

    2 hours

    Input

    • Assessment of value and impact of business unit data

    Output

    • Prioritization list for data quality improvement projects

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Data owners

    Instructions

    Instructions In Tab 5: Prioritize Business Units of the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool, assess business value and business impact of the data within each documented business unit.

    Use the ratings High, Medium, and Low to measure the financial, productivity, and efficiency value and impact of each business unit’s data.

    In addition to these ratings, assess the number of help desk tickets that are submitted to IT regarding data quality issues. This parameter is an indicator that the business unit’s data is high priority for data quality fixes.

    Download this Tool

    Create a business unit order roadmap for your data quality improvement projects

    1 hour

    Input

    • Rating of importance of data for each business unit

    Output

    • Roadmap for data quality improvement projects

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Product Manager
    • Business line representatives

    Instructions

    After assessing the business units for the business value and business impact of their data, the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool automatically assesses the prioritization of the business units based on your ratings. These prioritizations are then summarized in a roadmap on Tab 6: Data Quality Project Roadmap. The following is an example of a project roadmap:

    The image shows an example of a project roadmap, with three business units listed vertically along the left hand side, and a Gantt chart showing the time periods in which each Business Unit would work. At the bottom, a table shows the Length of the Project in days (100), and the start date for the first project.

    On Tab 6, insert the timeline for your data quality improvement projects, as well as the starting date of your first data quality project. The roadmap will automatically update with the chosen timing and dates.

    Download this Tool

    Identify metrics at the business unit level to track data quality improvements

    As you improve the data quality for specific business units, measuring the benefits of data quality improvements will help you demonstrate the value of the projects to the business.

    Use the following table to guide you in creating business-aligned metrics:

    Business Unit Driver Metrics Goal
    Sales Customer Intimacy Accuracy of customer data. Percent of missing or incomplete records. 10% decrease in customer record errors.

    Marketing

    Customer Intimacy Accuracy of customer data. Percent of missing or incomplete records. 10% decrease in customer record errors.
    Finance Operational Excellence Relevance of financial reports. Decrease in report inaccuracy complaints.
    HR Risk Management Accuracy of employee data. 10% decrease in employee record errors.
    Shipping Operational Excellence Timeliness of invoice data. 10% decrease in time to report.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Relating data governance success metrics to overall business benefits keeps executive management and executive sponsors engaged because they are seeing actionable results. Review metrics on an ongoing basis with those data owners/stewards who are accountable, the data governance steering committee, and the executive sponsors.

    Case Study

    Address data quality with the right approach to maximize the ROI

    EDC

    Industry: Government

    Source: Environment Development of Canada (EDC)

    Challenge

    Environment Development Canada (EDC) would initially identify data elements that are important to the business purely based on their business instinct.

    Leadership attempted to tackle the enterprise’s data issues by bringing a set of different tools into the organization.

    It didn’t work out because the fundamental foundational layer, which is the data and infrastructure, was not right – they didn't have the foundational capabilities to enable those tools.

    Solution

    Leadership listened to the need for one single team to be responsible for the data persistence.

    Therefore, the data platform team was granted that mandate to extensively execute the data quality program across the enterprise.

    A data quality team was formed under the Data & Analytics COE. They had the mandate to profile the data and to understand what quality of data needed to be achieved. They worked constantly with the business to build the data quality rules.

    Results

    EDC tackled the source of their data quality issues through initially performing a data quality management assessment with business stakeholders.

    From then on, EDC was able to establish their data quality program and carry out other key initiatives that prove the ROI on data quality.

    Begin your data quality improvement project starting with the highest priority business unit

    Now that you have a prioritized list for your data quality improvement projects, identify the highest priority business unit. This is the business unit you will work through Phase 3 with to fix their data quality issues.

    Once you have initiated and identified solutions for the first business unit, tackle data quality for the next business unit in the prioritized list.

    The image is a graphic labelled as Phase 2. On the left, there is a vertical arrow pointing upward labelled Priority of Business Units. Next to it, there are three boxes, with downward pointing arrows between them, each box labelled as each Business Unit's Data Quality Improvement Project. From there an arrow points right to a circle. Inside the circle are the steps necessary to complete the data quality improvement project.

    Create and document your data quality improvement team

    1 hour

    Input

    • Individuals who fit the data quality improvement plan team roles

    Output

    • Project team

    Materials

    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data owner
    • Project Manager
    • Product Manager

    The Data Quality Improvement Plan is a concise document that should be created for each data quality project (i.e. for each business unit) to keep track of the project.

    Instructions

    1. Meet with the data owner of the business unit identified for the data quality improvement project.
    2. Identify individuals who fit the data quality improvement plan team roles.
    3. Using the Data Quality Improvement Plan Template to document the roles and individuals who will fit those roles.
    4. Have an introductory meeting with the Improvement team to clarify roles and responsibilities for the project.

    Download this Tool

    Team role Assigned to
    Data Owner [Name]
    Project Manager [Name]
    Business Analyst/BRM [Name]
    Data Steward [Name]
    Data Analyst [Name]

    Document the business context of the Data Quality Improvement Plan

    1 hour

    Input

    • Project team
    • Identified data attributes

    Output

    • Business context for the data quality improvement plan

    Materials

    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data owner
    • Project Sponsor
    • Product owner

    Data quality initiatives have to be relevant to the business, and the business context will be used to provide inputs to the data improvement strategy. The context can then be used to determine exactly where the root causes of data quality issues are, which will inform your solutions.

    Instructions

    The business context of the data quality improvement plan includes documenting from previous activities:

    1. The Data Quality Improvement Team.
    2. Your Data Lineage Diagram.
    3. Your Data Quality Problem Statement.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    While many organizations adopt data quality principles, not all organizations express them along the same terms. Have multiple perspectives within your organization outline principles that fit your unique data quality agenda. Anyone interested in resolving the day-to-day data quality issues that they face can be helpful for creating the context around the project.

    Download this tool

    Now that you have a defined problem, revisit the root causes of poor data quality

    You previously fleshed out the problem with data quality present in the business unit chosen as highest priority. Now it is time to figure out what is causing those problems.

    In the table below, you will find some of the common categories of causes of data quality issues, as well as some specific root causes.

    Category Description
    1. System/Application Design Ineffective, insufficient, or even incorrect system/application design accepts incorrect and missing data elements to the source applications and databases. The data records in those source systems may propagate into systems in tiers 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the 5-tier architecture, creating domino and ripple effects.
    2. Database design Database is created and modeled in an incorrect manner so that the management of the data records is incorrect, resulting in duplicated and orphaned records, and records that are missing data elements or records that contain incorrect data elements. Poor operational data in databases often leads to issues in tiers 2, 3, 4, and 5.
    3. Enterprise Integration Data or information is improperly integrated, transformed, masked, and aggregated in tier 2. In addition, some data integration tasks might not be timely, resulting in out-of-date data or even data that contradicts with other data. Enterprise integration is a precursor of loading a data warehouse and data marts. Issues in this layer affect tier 3, 4 and 5 on the 5-tier architecture.
    4. Policies and Procedures Policies and procedures are not effectively used to reinforce data quality. In some situations, policy gaps are found. In others, policies are overlapped and duplicated. Policies may also be out-of-date or too complex, affecting the users’ ability to interpret the policy objectives. Policies affect all tiers in the 5-tier architecture.
    5. Business Processes Improper business process design introduces poor data into the data systems. Failure to create processes around approving data changes, failure to document key data elements, and failure to train employees on the proper uses of data make data quality a burning problem.

    Leverage a root cause analysis approach to pinpoint the origins of your data issues

    A root cause analysis is a systematic approach to decompose a problem into its components. Use fishbone diagrams to help reveal the root causes of data issues.

    The image shows a fishbone diagram on the left, which starts with Process on the left, and then leads to Application and Integration, and then Database and Policies. This section is titled Root causes. The right hand section is titled Lead to problems with data... and includes 4 circles with the word or in between each. The circles are labelled: Completeness; Usability; Timeliness; Accessibility.

    Info-Tech recommends five root cause categories for assessing data quality issues:

    Application Design. Is the issue caused by human error at the application level? Consider internal employees, external partners/suppliers, and customers.

    Database Design. Is the issue caused by a particular database and stems from inadequacies in its design?

    Integration. Data integration tools may not be fully leveraged, or data matching rules may be poorly designed.

    Policies and Procedures. Do the issues take place because of lack of governance?

    Business Processes. Do the issues take place due to insufficient processes?

    For Example:

    When performing a deeper analysis of your data issues related to the accuracy of the business unit’s data, you would perform a root cause analysis by assessing the contribution of each of the five categories of data quality problem root causes:

    The image shows another fishbone diagram, with example information filled in. The first section on the left is titled Application Design, and includes the text: Data entry problems lead to incorrect accounting entries. The second is Integration, and includes the text: Data integration tools are not fully leveraged. The third section is Policies, and includes the text: No policy on standardizing name and address. The last section is Database design, with text that reads: Databases do not contain unique keys. The diagram ends with an arrow pointing right to a blue circle with Accuracy in it.

    Leverage a combination of data analysis techniques to identify and quantify root causes

    Info-Tech Insight

    Including all attributes of the key subject area in your data profiling activities may produce too much information to make sense of. Conduct data profiling primarily at the table level and undergo attribute profiling only if you are able to narrow down your scope sufficiently.

    Data Profiling Tool

    Data profiling extracts a sample of the target data set and runs it through multiple levels of analysis. The end result is a detailed report of statistics about a variety of data quality criteria (duplicate data, incomplete data, stale data, etc.).

    Many data profiling tools have built-in templates and reports to help you uncover data issues. In addition, they quantify the occurrences of the data issues.

    E-Discovery Tool

    This supplements a profiling tool. For Example, use a BI tool to create a custom grouping of all the invalid states (e.g. “CAL,” “AZN,” etc.) and visualize the percentage of invalid states compared to all states.

    SQL Queries

    This supplements a profiling tool. For example, use a SQL statement to group the customer data by customer segment and then by state to identify which segment–state combinations contain poor data.

    Identify the data issues for the particular business unit under consideration

    2 hours

    Input

    • Issues with data quality felt by the business unit
    • Data lineage diagram

    Output

    • Categorized data quality issues

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, markers, sticky notes
    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data quality improvement project team
    • Business line representatives

    Instructions

    1. Gather the data quality improvement project team in a room, along with sticky notes and a whiteboard.
    2. Display your previously created data lineage diagram on the whiteboard.
    3. Using color-coded sticky notes, attach issues to each component of the data lineage diagram that team members can identify. Use different colors for the four quality attributes: Completeness, Usability, Timeliness, and Accessibility.

    Example:

    The image shows the data lineage diagram that has been shown in previous sections. In addition, the image shows 4 post-its arranges around the diagram, labelled: Usability; Completeness; Timeliness; and Accessibility.

    Map the data issues on fishbone diagrams to identify root causes

    1 hour

    Input

    • Categorized data quality issues

    Output

    • Completed fishbone diagrams

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, markers, sticky notes
    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data quality improvement project team

    Now that you have data quality issues classified according to the data quality attributes, map these issues onto four fishbone diagrams.

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, which is titled Example: Root cause analysis diagram for data accuracy.

    Download this Tool

    Get to know the root causes behind system/application design mistakes

    Suboptimal system/application design provides entry points for bad data.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Insufficient data mask No data mask is defined for a free-form text field in a user interface. E.g. North American phone number should have 4 masks – country code (1-digit), area code (3-digit), and local number (7-digit). X X
    Too many free-form text fields Incorrect use of free-form text fields (fields that accept a variety of inputs). E.g. Use a free-form text field for zip code instead of a backend look up. X X
    Lack of value lookup Reference data is not looked up from a reference list. E.g. State abbreviation is entered instead of being looked up from a standard list of states. X X
    Lack of mandatory field definitions Mandatory fields are not identified and reinforced. Resulting data records with many missing data elements. E.g. Some users may fill up 2 or 3 fields in a UI that has 20 non-mandatory fields. X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Application Design section is highlighted.

    Get to know the root causes behind common database design mistakes

    Improper database design allows incorrect data to be stored and propagated.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Incorrect referential integrity Referential integrity constraints are absent or incorrectly implemented, resulting in child records without parent records, or related records are updated or deleted in a cascading manner. E.g. An invoice line item is created before an invoice is created. X X
    Lack of unique keys Lack of unique keys creating scenarios where record uniqueness cannot be guaranteed. E.g. Customer records with the same customer_ID. X X
    Data range Fail to define a data range for incoming data, resulting in data values that are out of range. E.g. The age field is able to store an age of 999. X X
    Incorrect data type Incorrect data types are used to store data fields. E.g. A string field is used to store zip codes. Some users use that to store phone numbers, birthdays, etc. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Database Design section is highlighted

    Get to know the root causes behind enterprise integration mistakes

    Improper data integration or synchronization may create poor analytical data.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Incorrect transformation Transformation is done incorrectly. A wrong formula may have been used, transformation is done at the wrong data granularity, or aggregation logic is incorrect. E.g. Aggregation is done for all customers instead of just active customers. X X
    Data refresh is out of sync Data is synchronized at different intervals, resulting in a data warehouse where data domains are out of sync. E.g. Customer transactions are refreshed to reflect the latest activities but the account balance is not yet refreshed. X X
    Data is matched incorrectly Fail to match records from disparate systems, resulting in duplications and unmatched records. E.g. Unable to match customers from different systems because they have different cust_ID. X X
    Incorrect data mapping Fields from source systems are not properly matched with data warehouse fields. E.g. Status fields from different systems are mixed into one field. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Integration section is highlighted

    Get to know the root causes behind policy and procedure mistakes

    Suboptimal policies and procedures undermine the effect of best practices.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Policy Gaps There are gaps in the policy landscape in terms of some missing key policies or policies that are not refreshed to reflect the latest changes. E.g. A data entry policy is absent, leading to inconsistent data entry practices. X X
    Policy Communications Policies are in place but the policies are not communicated effectively to the organization, resulting in misinterpretation of policies and under-enforcement of policies. E.g. The data standard is created but very few developers are aware of its existence. X X
    Policy Enforcement Policies are in place but not proactively re-enforced and that leads to inconsistent application of policies and policy adoption. E.g. Policy adoption is dropping over time due to lack of reinforcement. X X
    Policy Quality Policies are written by untrained authors and they do not communicate the messages. E.g. A non-technical data user may find a policy that is loaded with technical terms confusing. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Policies section is highlighted

    Get to know the root causes behind common business process mistakes

    Ineffective and inefficient business processes create entry points for poor data.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Lack of training Key data personnel and business analysts are not trained in data quality and data governance, leading to lack of accountability. E.g. A data steward is not aware of downstream impact of a duplicated financial statement. X X
    Ineffective business process The same piece of information is entered into data systems two or more times. Or a piece of data is stalled in a data system for too long. E.g. A paper form is scanned multiple times to extract data into different data systems. X X
    Lack of documentation Fail to document the work flows of the key business processes. A lack of work flow results in sub-optimal use of data. E.g. Data is modeled incorrectly due to undocumented business logic. X X
    Lack of integration between business silos Business silos hold on to their own datasets resulting in data silos in which data is not shared and/or data is transferred with errors. E.g. Data from a unit is extracted as a data file and stored in a shared drive with little access. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Processes section is highlighted

    Phase 3 Summary

    1. Data Lineage Diagram
    • Creating the data lineage diagram is recommended to help visualize the flow of your data and to map the data journey and identify the data subject areas to be targeted for fixes.
    • The data lineage diagram was leveraged multiple times throughout this Phase. For example, the data lineage diagram was used to document the data sources and applications used by the business unit
  • Business Context
    • Business context was documented through the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool.
    • The same tool was used to document identified business units and their associated data.
    • Metrics were also identified at the business unit level to track data quality improvements.
  • Common Root Causes
    • Leverage a root cause analysis approach to pinpoint the origins of your data quality issues.
    • Analyzed and got to know the root causes behind the following:
      1. System/application design mistakes
      2. Common database design mistakes
      3. Enterprise integration mistakes
      4. Policies and procedures mistakes
      5. Common business processes mistakes
  • Phase 4

    Grow and Sustain Your Data Quality Program

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    For the identified root causes, determine the solutions for the problem

    As you worked through the previous step, you identified the root causes of your data quality problems within the business unit. Now, it is time to identify solutions.

    The following slides provide an overview of the solutions to common data quality issues. As you identify solutions that apply to the business unit being addressed, insert the solution tables in Section 4: Proposed Solutions of the Data Quality Improvement Plan Template.

    All data quality solutions have two components to them:

    • Technology
    • People

    For the next five data quality solution slides, look for the slider for the contributions of each category to the solution. Use this scale to guide you in creating solutions.

    When designing solutions, keep in mind that solutions to data quality problems are not mutually exclusive. In other words, an identified root cause may have multiple solutions that apply to it.

    For example, if an application is plagued with inaccurate data, the application design may be suboptimal, but also the process that leads to data being entered may need fixing.

    Data quality improvement strategy #1:

    Fix data quality issues by improving system/application design.

    Technology

    Application Interface Design

    Restrict field length – Capture only the characters you need for your application.

    Leverage data masks – Use data masks in standardized fields like zip code and phone number.

    Restrict the use of open text fields and use reference tables – Only present open text fields when there is a need. Use reference tables to limit data values.

    Provide options – Use radio buttons, drop-down lists, and multi-select instead of using open text fields.

    Data Validation at the Application Level

    Validate data before committing – Use simple validation to ensure the data entered is not random numbers and letters.

    Track history – Keep track of who entered what fields.

    Cannot submit twice – Only design for one-time submission.

    People

    Training

    Data-entry training – Training that is related to data entry, creating, or updating data records.

    Data resolution training – Training data stewards or other dedicated data personnel on how to resolve data records that are not entered properly.

    Continuous Improvement

    Standards – Develop application design principles and standards.

    Field testing – Field data entry with a few people to look for abnormalities and discrepancies.

    Detection and resolution – Abnormal data records should be isolated and resolved ASAP.

    Application Testing

    Thorough testing – Application design is your first line of defence against poor data. Test to ensure bad data is kept out of the systems.

    Case Study

    HMS

    Industry: Healthcare

    Source: Informatica

    Improve your data quality ingestion procedures to provide better customer intimacy for your users

    Healthcare Management Systems (HMS) provides cost containment services for healthcare sponsors and payers, and coordinates benefits services. This is to ensure that healthcare claims are paid correctly to both government agencies and individuals. To do so, HMS relies on data, and this data needs to be of high quality to ensure the correct decisions are made, the right people get the correct claims, and the appropriate parties pay out.

    To improve the integrity of HMS’s customer data, HMS put in place a framework that helped to standardize the collection of high volume and highly variable data.

    Results

    Working with a data quality platform vendor to establish a framework for data standardization, HMS was able to streamline data analysis and reduce new customer implementations from months to weeks.

    HMS data was plagued with a lack of standardization of data ingestion procedures.

    Before improving data quality processes After improving data quality processes
    Data Ingestion Data Ingestion
    Many standards of ingestion. Standardized data ingestion
    Data Storage Data Storage
    Lack of ability to match data, creating data quality errors.
    Data Analysis Data Analysis
    = =
    Slow Customer Implementation Time 50% Reduction in Customer Implementation Time

    Data quality improvement strategy #2:

    Fix data quality issues using proper database design.

    Technology

    Database Design Best Practices

    Referential integrity – Ensure parent/child relationships are maintained in terms of cascade creation, update, and deletion.

    Primary key definition – Ensure there is at least one key to guarantee the uniqueness of the data records, and primary key should not allow null.

    Validate data domain – Create triggers to check the data values entered in the database fields.

    Field type and length – Define the most suitable data type and length to hold field values.

    One-Time Data Fix (more on the next slide)

    Explore solutions – Where to fix the data issues? Is there a case to fix the issues?

    Running profiling tools to catch errors – Run scans on the database with defined criteria to identify occurrences of questionable data.

    Fix a sample before fixing all records – Use a proof-of-concept approach to explore fix options and evaluate impacts before fixing the full set.

    People

    The DBA Team

    Perform key tasks in pairs – Take a pair approach to perform key tasks so that validation and cross-check can happen.

    Skilled DBAs – DBAs should be certified and accredited.

    Competence – Assess DBA competency on an ongoing basis.

    Preparedness – Develop drills to stimulate data issues and train DBAs.

    Cross train – Cross train team members so that one DBA can cover another DBA.

    Data quality improvement strategy #3:

    Improve integration and synchronization of enterprise data.

    Technology

    Integration Architecture

    Info-Tech’s 5-Tier Architecture – When doing transformations, it is good practice to persist the integration results in tier 3 before the data is further refined and presented in tier 4.

    Timing, timing, and timing – Think of the sequence of events. You may need to perform some ETL tasks before other tasks to achieve synchronization and consistence.

    Historical changes – Ensure your tier 3 is robust enough to include historical data. You need to enable type 2 slowly, changing dimension to recreate the data at a point in time.

    Data Cleansing

    Standardize – Leverage data standardization to standardize name and address fields to improve matching and integration.

    Fuzzy matching – When there are no common keys between datasets. The datasets can only be matched by fuzzy matching. Fuzzy matching is not hard science; define a confidence level and think about a mechanism to deal with the unmatched.

    People

    Reporting and Documentations

    Business data glossary and data lineage – Define a business data glossary to enhance findability of key data elements. Document data mappings and ETL logics.

    Create data quality reports – Many ETL platforms provide canned data quality reports. Leverage those quality reports to monitor the data health.

    Code Review

    Create data quality reports – Many ETL platforms provide canned data quality reports. Leverage those quality reports to monitor the data health.

    ARB (architectural review board) – All ETL codes should be approved by the architectural review board to ensure alignment with the overall integration strategy.

    Data quality improvement strategy #4:

    Improve data quality policies and procedures.

    Technology

    Policy Reporting

    Data quality reports – Leverage canned data quality reports from the ETL platforms to monitor data quality on an on-going basis. When abnormalities are found, provoke the right policies to deal with the issues.

    Store policies in a central location that is well known and easy to find and access. A key way that technology can help communicate policies is by having them published on a centralized website.

    Make the repository searchable and easily navigable. myPolicies helps you do all this and more.

    myPolicies helps you do all this and more.

    Go to this link

    People

    Policy Review and Training

    Policy review – Create a schedule for reviewing policies on a regular basis – invite professional writers to ensure polices are understandable.

    Policy training – Policies are often unread and misread. Training users and stakeholders on policies is an effective way to make sure those users and stakeholders understand the rationale of the policies. It is also a good practice to include a few scenarios that are handled by the policies.

    Policy hotline/mailbox – To avoid misinterpretation of the policies, a policy hotline/mailbox should be set up to answer any data policy questions from the end users/stakeholders.

    Policy Communications

    Simplified communications – Create handy one-pagers and infographic posters to communicate the key messages of the polices.

    Policy briefing – Whenever a new data project is initiated, a briefing of data policies should be given to ensure the project team follows the policies from the very beginning.

    Data quality improvement strategy #5:

    Streamline and optimize business processes.

    Technology

    Requirements Gathering

    Data Lineage – Leverage a metadata management tool to construct and document data lineage for future reference.

    Documentations Repository – It is a best practice to document key project information and share that knowledge across the project team and with the stakeholder. An improvement understanding of the project helps to identify data quality issues early on in the project.

    “Automating creation of data would help data quality most. You have to look at existing processes and create data signatures. You can then derive data off those data codes.” – Patrick Bossey, Manager of Business Intelligence, Crawford and Company

    People

    Requirements Gathering

    Info-Tech’s 4-Column Model – The datasets may exist but the business units do not have an effective way of communicating the quality needs. Use our four-column model and the eleven supporting questions to better understand the quality needs. See subsequent slides.

    I don’t know what the data means so I think the quality is poor – It is not uncommon to see that the right data presented to the business but the business does not trust the data. They also do not understand the business logic done on the data. See our Business Data Glossary in subsequent slides.

    Understand the business workflow – Know the business workflow to understand the manual steps associated with the workflow. You may find steps in which data is entered, manipulated, or consumed inappropriately.

    “Do a shadow data exercise where you identify the human workflows of how data gets entered, and then you can identify where data entry can be automated.” – Diraj Goel, Growth Advisor, BC Tech

    Brainstorm solutions to your data quality issues

    4 hours

    Input

    • Data profiling results
    • Preliminary root cause analyses

    Output

    • Proposals for data fix
    • Fixed issues

    Materials

    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Business and Data Analysts
    • Data experts and stewards

    After walking through the best-practice solutions to data quality issues, propose solutions to fix your identified issues.

    Instructions

    1. Review Root Cause Analyses: Revisit the root cause analysis and data lineage diagram you have generated in Step 3.2. to understand the issues in greater details.
    2. Characterize Each Issue: You may need to generate a data profiling report to characterize the issue. The report can be generated by using data quality suites, BI platforms, or even SQL statements.
    3. Brainstorm the Solutions: As a group, discuss potential ways to fix the issue. You can tackle the issues by approaching from these areas:
    Solution Approaches
    Technology Approach
    People Approach

    X crossover with

    Problematic Areas
    Application/System Design
    Database Design
    Data Integration and Synchronization
    Policies and Procedures
    Business Processes
    1. Document and Communicate: Document the solutions to your data issues. You may need to reuse or refer to the solutions. Also brainstorm some ideas on how to communicate the results back to the business.

    Download this Tool

    Sustaining your data quality requires continuous oversight through a data governance practice

    Quality data is the ultimate outcome of data governance and data quality management. Data governance enables data quality by providing the necessary oversight and controls for business processes in order to maintain data quality. There are three primary groups (at right) that are involved in a mature governance practice. Data quality should be tightly integrated with all of them.

    Define an effective data governance strategy and ensure the strategy integrates well with data quality with Info-Tech’s Establish Data Governance blueprint.

    Visit this link

    Data Governance Council

    This council establishes data management practices that span across the organization. This should be comprised of senior management or C-suite executives that can represent the various departments and lines of business within the organization. The data governance council can help to promote the value of data governance, facilitate a culture that nurtures data quality, and ensure that the goals of the data governance program are well aligned with business objectives.

    Data Owners

    Identifying the data owner role within an organization helps to create a greater degree of accountability for data issues. They often oversee how the data is being generated as well as how it is being consumed. Data owners come from the business side and have legal rights and defined control over a data set. They ensure data is available to the right people within the organization.

    Data Stewards

    Conflict can occur within an organization’s data governance program when a data steward’s role is confused with that of the steering committee’s role. Data stewards exist to enforce decisions made about data governance and data management. Data stewards are often business analysts or power users of a particular system/dataset. Where a data owner is primarily responsible for access, a data steward is responsible for the quality of a dataset.

    Integrate the data quality management strategy with existing data governance committees

    Ongoing and regular data quality management is the responsibility of the data governance bodies of the organization.

    The oversight of ongoing data quality activities rests on the shoulders of the data governance committees that exist in the organization.

    There is no one-size-fits-all data governance structure. However, most organizations follow a similar pattern when establishing committees, councils, and cross-functional groups. They strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic, tactical, and operational level:

    The image shows a pyramid, with Executive Sponsors at the top, with the following roles in descending order: DG Council; Steering Committee; Working Groups; Data Owners and Data Stewards; and Data Users. Along the left side of the pyramid, there are three labels, in ascending order: Operational, Tactical, and Strategic.

    The image is a flow chart showing project roles, in two sections: the top section is labelled Governing Bodies, and the lower section is labelled Data Quality Improvement Team. There is a note indicating that the Data Owner reports to and provides updates regarding the state of data quality and data quality initiatives.

    Create and update the organization’s Business Data Glossary to keep up with current data definitions

    2 hours

    Input

    • Metrics and goals for data quality

    Output

    • Regularly scheduled data quality checkups

    Materials

    • Business Data Glossary Template
    • Data Quality Dashboard

    Participants

    • Data steward

    A crucial aspect of data quality and governance is the Business Data Glossary. The Business Data Glossary helps to align the terminology of the business with the organization’s data assets. It allows the people who interact with the data to quickly identify the applications, processes, and stewardship associated with it, which will enhance the accuracy and efficiency of searches for organization data definitions and attributes, enabling better access to the data. This will, in turn, enhance the quality of the organization’s data because it will be more accurate, relevant, and accessible.

    Use the Business Data Glossary Template to document key aspects of the data, such as:

    • Definition
    • Source System
    • Possible Values
    • Data Steward
    • Data Sensitivity
    • Data Availability
    • Batch or Live
    • Retention

    Data Element

    • Mkt-Product
    • Fin-Product

    Info-Tech Insight

    The Business Data Glossary ensures that the crucial data that has key business use by key business systems and users is appropriately owned and defined. It also establishes rules that lead to proper data management and quality to be enforced by the data owners.

    Download this Tool

    Data Steward(s): Use the Data Quality Improvement Plan of the business unit for ongoing quality monitoring

    Integrating your data quality strategy into the organization’s data governance program requires passing the strategy over to members of the data governance program. The data steward role is responsible for data quality at the business unit level, and should have been involved with the creation and implementation of the data quality improvement project. After the data quality repairs have been made, it is the responsibility of the data steward to regularly monitor the quality of the business unit’s data.

    Create Improvement Plan ↓
    • Data Quality Improvement Team identifies root cause issues.
    • Brainstorm solutions.
    Implement Improvement Plan ↓
    • Data Quality Improvement Team works with IT.
    Sustain Improvement Plan
    • Data Steward should regularly monitor data quality.

    Download this tool

    See Info-Tech’s Data Steward Job Description Template for a detailed understanding of the roles and responsibilities of the data steward.

    Responsible for sustaining

    The image shows a screen capture of a document entitled Business Context & Subject Area Selection.

    Develop a business-facing data quality dashboard to show improvements or a sudden dip in data quality

    One tool that the data steward can take advantage of is the data quality dashboard. Initiatives that are implemented to address data quality must have metrics defined by business objectives in order to demonstrate the value of the data quality improvement projects. In addition, the data steward should have tools for tracking data quality in the business unit to report issues to the data owner and data governance steering committee.

    • Example 1: Marketing uses data for direct mail and e-marketing campaigns. They care about customer data in particular. Specifically, they require high data quality in attributes such as customer name, address, and product profile.
    • Example 2: Alternatively, Finance places emphasis on financial data, focusing on attributes like account balance, latency in payment, credit score, and billing date.

    The image is Business dashboard on Data Quality for Marketing. It features Data Quality metrics, listed in the left column, and numbers for each quarter over the course of one year, on the right.

    Notes on chart:

    General improvement in billing address quality

    Sudden drop in touchpoint accuracy may prompt business to ask for explanations

    Approach to creating a business-facing data quality dashboard:

    1. Schedule a meeting with the functional unit to discuss what key data quality metrics are essential to their business operations. You should consider the business context, functional area, and subject area analyses you completed in Phase 1 as a starting point.
    2. Discuss how to gather data for the key metrics and their associated calculations.
    3. Discuss and decide the reporting intervals.
    4. Discuss and decide the unit of measurement.
    5. Generate a dashboard similar to the example. Consider using a BI or analytics tool to develop the dashboard.

    Data quality management must be sustained for ongoing improvements to the organization’s data

    • Data quality is never truly complete; it is a set of ongoing processes and disciplines that requires a permanent plan for monitoring practices, reviewing processes, and maintaining consistent data standards.
    • Setting the expectation to stakeholders that a long-term commitment is required to maintain quality data within the organization is critical to the success of the program.
    • A data quality maintenance program will continually revise and fine-tune ongoing practices, processes, and procedures employed for organizational data management.

    Data quality is a program that requires continual care:

    →Maintain→Good Data →

    Data quality management is a long-term commitment that shifts how an organization views, manages, and utilizes its corporate data assets. Long-term buy-in from all involved is critical.

    “Data quality is a process. We are trying to constantly improve the quality over time. It is not a one-time fix.” – Akin Akinwumi, Manager of Data Governance, Startech.com

    Define a data quality review agenda for data quality sustainment

    2 hours

    Input

    • Metrics and goals for data quality

    Output

    • Regularly scheduled data quality checkups

    Materials

    • Data Quality Diagnostic
    • Data Quality Dashboard

    Participants

    • Data Steward

    As a data steward, you are responsible for ongoing data quality checks of the business unit’s data. Define an improvement agenda to organize the improvement activities. Organize the activities yearly and quarterly to ensure improvement is done year-round.

    Quarterly

    • Measure data quality metrics against milestones. Perform a regular data quality health check with Info-Tech’s Data Quality Diagnostic.
    • Review the business unit’s Business Data Glossary to ensure that it is up to date and comprehensive.
    • Assess progress of practice area initiatives (time, milestones, budget, benefits delivered).
    • Analyze overall data quality and report progress on key improvement projects and corrective actions in the executive dashboard.
    • Communicate overall status of data quality to oversight body.

    Annually

    • Calculate your current baseline and measure progress by comparing it to previous years.
    • Set/revise quality objectives for each practice area and inter-practice hand-off processes.
    • Re-evaluate/re-establish data quality objectives.
    • Set/review data quality metrics and tracking mechanisms.
    • Set data quality review milestones and timelines.
    • Revisit data quality training from an end-user perspective and from a practitioner perspective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do data quality diagnostic at the beginning of any improvement plan, then recheck health with the diagnostic at regular intervals to see if symptoms are coming back. This should be a monitoring activity, not a data quality fixing activity. If symptoms are bad enough, repeat the improvement plan process.

    Take the next step in your Data & Analytics Journey

    After establishing your data quality program, look to increase your data & analytics maturity.

    • Artificial Intelligence (AI) is a concept that many organizations strive to implement. AI can really help in areas such as data preparation. However, implementing AI solutions requires a level of maturity that many organizations are not at.
    • While a solid data quality foundation is essential for AI initiatives being successful, AI can also ensure high data quality.
    • An AI analytics solution can address data integrity issues at the earliest point of data processing, rapidly transforming these vast volumes of data into trusted business information. This can be done through Anomaly detection, which flags “bad” data, identifying suspicious anomalies that can impact data quality. By tracking and evaluating data, anomaly detection gives critical insights into data quality as data is processed. (Ira Cohen, The End to a Never-Ending Story? Improve Data Quality with AI Analytics, anodot, 2020)

    Consider… “Garbage in, garbage out.”

    Lay a solid foundation by addressing your data quality issues prior to investing heavily in an AI solution.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Are You Ready for AI?

    • Use AI as a compelling event to expedite funding, resources, and project plans for your data-related initiatives. Check out this note to understand what it takes to be ready to implement AI solutions.

    Get Started With Artificial Intelligence

    • Current AI technology is data-enabled, automated, adaptive decision support. Once you believe you are ready for AI, check out this blueprint on how to get started.

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    • The data lineage diagram was a key tool used in establishing your data quality program. Check out this blueprint and learn how to optimize your data architecture to provide greatest value from data.

    Create an Architecture for AI

    • Build your target state architecture from predefined best practice building blocks. This blueprint assists members first to assess if they have the maturity to embrace AI in their organization, and if so, which AI acquisition model fits them best.

    Phase 4 Summary

    1. Data Quality Improvement Strategy
    • Brainstorm solutions to your data quality issues using the following data quality improvement strategies as a guide:
      1. Fix data quality issues by improving system/application design
      2. Fix data quality issues using proper database design
      3. Improve integration and synchronization of enterprise data
      4. Improve data quality policies and procedures
      5. Streamline and optimize business processes
  • Sustain Your Data Quality Program
    • Quality data is the ultimate outcome of data governance and data quality management.
    • Sustaining your data quality requires continuous oversight through a data governance practice.
    • There are three primary groups (Data Governance Council, Data Owners, and Data Stewards) that are involved in a mature governance practice.
  • Grow Your Data & Analytics Maturity
    • After establishing your data quality program, take the next step in increasing your data & analytics maturity.
    • Good data quality is the foundation of pursuing different ways of maximizing the value of your data such as implementing AI solutions.
    • Continue your data & analytics journey by referring to Info-Tech’s quality research.
  • Research Contributors and Experts

    Izabela Edmunds

    Information Architect Mott MacDonald

    Akin Akinwumi

    Manager of Data Governance Startech.com

    Diraj Goel

    Growth Advisor BC Tech

    Sujay Deb

    Director of Data Analytics Technology and Platforms Export Development Canada

    Asif Mumtaz

    Data & Solution Architect Blue Cross Blue Shield Association

    Patrick Bossey

    Manager of Business Intelligence Crawford and Company

    Anonymous Contributors

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader

    Research Specialist Info-Tech Research Group

    Ibrahim is a Research Specialist at Info-Tech Research Group. In his career to date he has assisted many clients using his knowledge in process design, knowledge management, SharePoint for ECM, and more. He is expanding his familiarity in many areas such as data and analytics, enterprise architecture, and CIO-related topics.

    Reddy Doddipalli

    Senior Workshop Director Info-Tech Research Group

    Reddy is a Senior Workshop Director at Info-Tech Research Group, focused on data management and specialized analytics applications. He has over 25 years of strong industry experience in IT leading and managing analytics suite of solutions, enterprise data management, enterprise architecture, and artificial intelligence–based complex expert systems.

    Andy Neill

    Practice Lead, Data & Analytics and Enterprise Architecture Info-Tech Research Group

    Andy leads the data and analytics and enterprise architecture practices at ITRG. He has over 15 years of experience in managing technical teams, information architecture, data modeling, and enterprise data strategy. He is an expert in enterprise data architecture, data integration, data standards, data strategy, big data, and development of industry standard data models.

    Crystal Singh

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Crystal is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. She brings a diverse and global perspective to her role, drawing from her professional experiences in various industries and locations. Prior to joining Info-Tech, Crystal led the Enterprise Data Services function at Rogers Communications, one of Canada’s leading telecommunications companies.

    Igor Ikonnikov

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Igor is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. He has extensive experience in strategy formation and execution in the information management domain, including master data management, data governance, knowledge management, enterprise content management, big data, and analytics.

    Andrea Malick

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrea Malick is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group, focused on building best practices knowledge in the enterprise information management domain, with corporate and consulting leadership in enterprise architecture and content management (ECM).

    Natalia Modjeska

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Natalia Modjeska is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. She advises members on topics related to AI, machine learning, advanced analytics, and data science, including ethics and governance. Natalia has over 15 years of experience in developing, selling, and implementing analytical solutions.

    Rajesh Parab

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Rajesh Parab is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. He has over 20 years of global experience and brings a unique mix of technology and business acumen. He has worked on many data-driven business applications. In his previous architecture roles, Rajesh created a number of product roadmaps, technology strategies, and models.

    Bibliography

    Amidon, Kirk. "Case Study: How Data Quality Has Evolved at MathWorks." The Fifth MIT Information Quality Industry Symposium. 13 July 2011. Web. 19 Aug. 2015.

    Boulton, Clint. “Disconnect between CIOs and LOB managers weakens data quality.” CIO. 05 February 2016. Accessed June 2020.

    COBIT 5: Enabling Information. Rolling Meadows, IL: ISACA, 2013. Web.

    Cohen, Ira. “The End to a Never-Ending Story? Improve Data Quality with AI Analytics.” anodot. 2020.

    “DAMA Guide to the Data Management Body of Knowledge (DAMA-DMBOK Guide).” First Edition. DAMA International. 2009. Digital. April 2014.

    "Data Profiling: Underpinning Data Quality Management." Pitney Bowes. Pitney Bowes - Group 1 Software, 2007. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    Data.com. “Data.com Clean.” Salesforce. 2016. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    “Dawn of the CDO." Experian Data Quality. 2015. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    Demirkan, Haluk, and Bulent Dal. "Why Do So Many Analytics Projects Fail?" The Data Economy: Why Do so Many Analytics Projects Fail? Analytics Magazine. July-Aug. 2014. Web.

    Dignan, Larry. “CIOs juggling digital transformation pace, bad data, cloud lock-in and business alignment.” ZDNet. 11 March 2020. Accessed July.

    Dumbleton, Janani, and Derek Munro. "Global Data Quality Research - Discussion Paper 2015." Experian Data Quality. 2015. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    Eckerson, Wayne W. "Data Quality and the Bottom Line - Achieving Business Success through a Commitment to High Quality Data." The Data Warehouse Institute. 2002. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    “Infographic: Data Quality in BI the Costs and Benefits.” HaloBI. 2015 Web.

    Lee, Y.W. and Strong, D.M. “Knowing-Why About Data Processes and Data Quality.” Journal of Management Information Systems. 2004.

    “Making Data Quality a Way of Life.” Cognizant. 2014. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    "Merck Serono Achieves Single Source of Truth with Comprehensive RIM Solutions." www.productlifegroup.com. ProductLife Group. 15 Apr. 2015. Web. 23 Nov. 2015.

    Myers, Dan. “List of Conformed Dimensions of Data Quality.” Conformed Dimensions of Data Quality (CDDQ). 2019. Web.

    Redman, Thomas C. “Make the Case for Better Data Quality.” Harvard Business Review. 24 Aug. 2012. Web. 19 Aug. 2015.

    RingLead Data Management Solutions. “10 Stats About Data Quality I Bet You Didn’t Know.” RingLead. Accessed 7 July 2020.

    Schwartzrock, Todd. "Chrysler's Data Quality Management Case Study." Online video clip. YouTube. 21 April. 2011. Web. 18 Aug. 2015

    “Taking control in the digital age.” Experian Data Quality. Jan 2019. Web.

    “The data-driven organization, a transformation in progress.” Experian Data Quality. 2020. Web.

    "The Data Quality Benchmark Report." Experian Data Quality. Jan. 2015. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    “The state of data quality.” Experian Data Quality. Sept. 2013. Web. 17 Aug. 2015.

    Vincent, Lanny. “Differentiating Competence, Capability and Capacity.” Innovation Management Services. Web. June 2008.

    “7 ways poor data quality is costing your business.” Experian Data Quality. July 2020. Web.

    The First 100 Days As CIO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}540|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $54,525 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: High Impact Leadership
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • You’ve been promoted from within to the role of CIO.
    • You’ve been hired externally to take on the role of CIO.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Foundational understanding must be achieved before you start. Hit the ground running before day one by using company documents and initial discussions to pin down the company’s type and mode.
    • Listen before you act (usually). In most situations, executives benefit from listening to peers and staff before taking action.
    • Identify quick wins early and often. Fix problems as soon as you recognize them to set the tone for your tenure.

    Impact and Result

    • Collaborate to collect the details needed to identify the right mode for your organization and determine how it will influence your plan.
    • Use Info-Tech’s diagnostic tools to align your vision with that of business executives and form a baseline for future reference.

    The First 100 Days As CIO Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why the first 100 days of being a new executive is a crucial time that requires the right balance of listening with taking action. See how seven calls with an executive advisor will guide you through this period.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Check in with your executive advisor over seven calls

    Organize your first 100 days as CIO into activities completed within two-week periods, aided by the guidance of an executive advisor.

    • The First 100 Days As CIO – Storyboard
    • Organizational Catalog
    • Cultural Archetype Calculator
    • IT Capability Assessment

    2. Communicate your plan to your manager

    Communicate your strategy with a presentation deck that you will complete in collaboration with Info-Tech advisors.

    • The First 100 Days As CIO – Presentation Deck

    3. View an example of the final presentation

    See an example of a completed presentation deck, from the new CIO of Gotham City.

    • The First 100 Days As CIO – Presentation Deck Example

    4. Listen to our podcast

    Check out The Business Leadership podcast in Info-Tech's special series, The First 100 Days.

    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Alan Fong, CTO, DealerFX
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Denis Gaudreault, country manager for Intel’s Canada and Latin America region
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Dave Penny & Andrew Wertkin, BlueCat
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Wayne Berger, CEO IWG Plc Canada and Latin America
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Eric Wright, CEO, LexisNexis Canada
    • "The First 100 Days" Podcast – Erin Bury, CEO, Willful
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    The First 100 Days As CIO

    Partner with Info-Tech for success in this crucial period of transition.

    Analyst Perspective

    The first 100 days refers to the 10 days before you start and the first three months on the job.

    “The original concept of ‘the first 100 days’ was popularized by Franklin Delano Roosevelt, who passed a battery of new legislation after taking office as US president during the Great Depression. Now commonly extended to the business world, the first 100 days of any executive role is a critically important period for both the executive and the organization.

    But not every new leader should follow FDR’s example of an action-first approach. Instead, finding the right balance of listening and taking action is the key to success during this transitional period. The type of the organization and the mode that it’s in serves as the fulcrum that determines where the point of perfect balance lies. An executive facing a turnaround situation will want to focus on more action more quickly. One facing a sustaining success situation or a realignment situation will want to spend more time listening before taking action.” (Brian Jackson, Research Director, CIO, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • You’ve been promoted from within to the role of CIO.
    • You’ve been hired externally to take on the role of CIO.

    Complication

    Studies show that two years after a new executive transition, as many as half are regarded as failures or disappointments (McKinsey). First impressions are hard to overcome, and a CIO’s first 100 days are heavily weighted in terms of how others will assess their overall success. The best way to approach this period is determined by both the size and the mode of an organization.

    Resolution

    • Work with Info-Tech to prepare a 100-day plan that will position you for success.
    • Collaborate to collect the details needed to identify the right mode for your organization and determine how it will influence your plan.
    • Use Info-Tech’s diagnostic tools to align your vision with that of business executives and form a baseline for future reference.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Foundational understanding must be achieved before you start.
      Hit the ground running before day one by using company documents and initial discussions to pin down the company’s type and mode.
    2. Listen before you act (usually).
      In most situations, executives benefit from listening to peers and staff before taking action.
    3. Identify quick wins early and often.
      Fix problems as soon as you recognize them to set the tone for your tenure.

    The First 100 Days: Roadmap

    A roadmap timeline of 'The 100-Day Plan' for your first 100 days as CIO and related Info-Tech Diagnostics. Step A: 'Foundational Preparation' begins 10 days prior to your first day. Step B: 'Management's Expectations' is Days 0 to 30, with the diagnostic 'CIO-CEO Alignment'. Step C: 'Assessing the IT Team' is Days 10 to 75, with the diagnostics 'IT M&G Diagnostic' at Day 30 and 'IT Staffing Assessment' at Day 60. Step D: 'Assess the Key Stakeholders' is Days 40 to 85 with the diagnostic 'CIO Business Vision Survey'. Step E: 'Deliver First-Year Plan' is Days 80 to 100.

    Concierge service overview

    Organize a call with your executive advisor every two weeks during your first 100 days. Info-Tech recommends completing our diagnostics during this period. If you’re not able to do so, instead complete the alternative activities marked with (a).

    Call 1 Call 2 Call 3 Call 4 Call 5 Call 6 Call 7
    Activities
    Before you start: Day -10 to Day 1
    • 1.1 Interview your predecessor.
    • 1.2 Learn the corporate structure.
    • 1.3 Determine STARS mode.
    • 1.4 Create a one-page intro sheet.
    • 1.5 Update your boss.
    Day 0 to 15
    • 2.1 Introduce yourself to your team.
    • 2.2 Document your sphere of influence.
    • 2.3 Complete a competitor array.
    • 2.4 Complete the CEO-CIO Alignment Program.
    • 2.4(a) Agree on what success looks like with the boss.
    • 2.5 Inform team of IT M&G Framework.
    Day 16 to 30
    • 3.1 Determine the team’s cultural archetype.
    • 3.2 Create a cultural adjustment plan.
    • 3.3 Initiate IT M&G Diagnostic.
    • 3.4 Conduct a high-level analysis of current IT capabilities.
    • 3.4 Update your boss.
    Day 31 to 45
    • 4.1 Inform stakeholders about CIO Business Vision survey.
    • 4.2 Get feedback on initial assessments from your team.
    • 4.3 Initiate CIO Business Vision survey.
    • 4.3(a) Meet stakeholders and catalog details.
    Day 46 to 60
    • 5.1 Inform the team that you plan to conduct an IT staffing assessment.
    • 5.2 Initiate the IT Staffing Assessment.
    • 5.3 Quick wins: Make recommend-ations based on CIO Business Vision Diagnostic/IT M&G Framework.
    • 5.4 Update your boss.
    Day 61 to 75
    • 6.1 Run a start, stop, continue exercise with IT staff.
    • 6.2 Make a categorized vendor list.
    • 6.3 Determine the alignment of IT commitments with business objectives.
    Day 76 to 90
    • 7.1 Finalize your vision – mission – values statement.
    • 7.2 Quick Wins: Make recommend-ations based on IT Staffing Assessment.
    • 7.3 Create and communicate a post-100-day plan.
    • 7.4 Update your boss.
    Deliverables Presentation Deck Section A: Foundational Preparation Presentation Deck slides 9, 11-13, 19-20, 29 Presentation Deck slides 16, 17, 21 Presentation Deck slides 30, 34 Presentation Deck slides 24, 25, 2 Presentation Deck slides 27, 42

    Call 1

    Before you start: Day -10 to Day 1

    Interview your predecessor

    Interviewing your predecessor can help identify the organization’s mode and type.

    Before reaching out to your predecessor, get a sense of whether they were viewed as successful or not. Ask your manager. If the predecessor remains within the organization in a different role, understand your relationship with them and how you'll be working together.

    During the interview, make notes about follow-up questions you'll ask others at the organization.

    Ask these open-ended questions in the interview:

    • Tell me about the team.
    • Tell me about your challenges.
    • Tell me about a major project your team worked on. How did it go?
    • Who/what has been helpful during your tenure?
    • Who/what created barriers for you?
    • What do your engagement surveys reveal?
    • Tell me about your performance management programs and issues.
    • What mistakes would you avoid if you could lead again?
    • Why are you leaving?
    • Could I reach out to you again in the future?

    Learn the corporate structure

    Identify the organization’s corporate structure type based on your initial conversations with company leadership. The type of structure will dictate how much control you'll have as a functional head and help you understand which stakeholders you'll need to collaborate with.

    To Do:

    • Review the organization’s structure list and identify whether the structure is functional, prioritized, or a matrix. If it's a matrix organization, determine if it's a strong matrix (project manager holds more authority), weak matrix (functional manager holds more authority), or balanced matrix (managers hold equal authority).

    Functional

    • Most common structure.
    • Traditional departments such as sales, marketing, finance, etc.
    • Functional managers hold most authority.

    Projectized

    • Most programs are implemented through projects with focused outcomes.
    • Teams are cross-functional.
    • Project managers hold the most authority.

    Matrix

    • Combination of projectized and functional.
    • Organization is a dynamic environment.
    • Authority of functional manager flows down through division, while authority of project manager flows sideways through teams.

    This organization is a ___________________ type.

    (Source: Simplilearn)

    Presentation Deck, slide 6

    Determine the mode of the organization: STARS

    Based on your interview process and discussions with company leadership, and using Michael Watkins’ STARS assessment, determine which mode your organization is in: startup, turnaround, accelerated growth, realignment, or sustaining success.

    Knowing the mode of your organization will determine how you approach your 100-day plan. Depending on the mode, you'll rebalance your activities around the three categories of assess, listen, and deliver.

    To Do:

    • Review the STARS table on the right.

    Based on your situation, prioritize activities in this way:

    • Startup: assess, listen, deliver
    • Turnaround: deliver, listen, assess
    • Accelerated Growth: assess, listen, deliver
    • Realignment: listen, assess, deliver
    • Sustaining success: listen, assess, deliver

    This organization is a ___________________ type.

    (Source: Watkins, 2013.)

    Presentation Deck, slide 6

    Determine the mode of the organization: STARS

    STARS Startup Turnaround Accelerated Growth Realignment Sustaining Success
    Definition Assembling capabilities to start a project. Project is widely seen as being in serious trouble. Managing a rapidly expanding business. A previously successful organization is now facing problems. A vital organization is going to the next level.
    Challenges Must build strategy, structures, and systems from scratch. Must recruit and make do with limited resources. Stakeholders are demoralized; slash and burn required. Requires structure and systems to scale; hiring and onboarding. Employees need to be convinced change is needed; restructure at the top required. Risk of living in shadow of a successful former leader.
    Advantages No rigid preconceptions. High-energy environment and easy to pivot. A little change goes a long way when people recognize the need. Motivated employee base willing to stretch. Organization has clear strengths; people desire success. Likely a strong team; foundation for success likely in place.

    Satya Nadella's listen, lead, and launch approach

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Software
    Source Gregg Keizer, Computerworld, 2014

    When Satya Nadella was promoted to the CEO role at Microsoft in 2014, he received a Glassdoor approval rating of 85% and was given an "A" grade by industry analysts after his first 100 days. What did he do right?

    • Created a sense of urgency by shaking up the senior leadership team.
    • Already understood the culture as an insider.
    • Listened a lot and did many one-on-one meetings.
    • Established a vision communicated with a mantra that Microsoft would be "mobile-first, cloud-first."
    • Met his words with actions. He launched Office for iPad and made many announcements for cloud platform Azure.
    Photo of Satya Nadella, CEO, Microsoft Corp.
    Satya Nadella, CEO, Microsoft Corp. (Image source: Microsoft)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Alan Fong

    Create a one-page introduction sheet to use in communications

    As a new CIO, you'll have to introduce yourself to many people in the organization. To save time on communicating who you are as a person outside of the office, create a brief one-pager that includes a photo of you, where you were born and raised, and what your hobbies are. This helps make a connection more quickly so your conversations can focus on the business at hand rather than personal topics.

    For your presentation deck, remove the personal details and just keep it professional. The personal aspects can be used as a one-pager for other communications. (Source: Personal interview with Denis Gaudreault, Country Lead, Intel.)

    Presentation Deck, slide 5

    Call 2

    Day 1 to Day 15

    Introduce yourself to your team

    Prepare a 20-second pitch about yourself that goes beyond your name and title. Touch on your experience that's relevant to your new role or the industry you're in. Be straightforward about your own perceived strengths and weaknesses so that people know what to expect from you. Focus on the value you believe you'll offer the group and use humor and humility where you're comfortable. For example:

    “Hi everyone, my name is John Miller. I have 15 years of experience marketing conferences like this one to vendors, colleges, and HR departments. What I’m good at, and the reason I'm here, is getting the right people, businesses, and great ideas in a room together. I'm not good on details; that's why I work with Tim. I promise that I'll get people excited about the conference, and the gifts and talents of everyone else in this room will take over from there. I'm looking forward to working with all of you.”

    Have a structured set of questions ready that you can ask everyone.

    For example:
    • How well is the company performing based on expectations?
    • What must the company do to sustain its financial performance and market competitiveness?
    • How do you foresee the CIO contributing to the team?
    • How have past CIOs performed from the perspective of the team?
    • What would successful performance of this role look like to you? To your peers?
    • What challenges and obstacles to success am I likely to encounter? What were the common challenges of my predecessor?
    • How do you view the culture here and how do successful projects tend to get approved?
    • What are your greatest challenges? How could I help you?

    Get to know your sphere of influence: prepare to connect with a variety of people before you get down to work

    Your ability to learn from others is critical at every stage in your first 100 days. Keep your sphere of influence in the loop as you progress through this period.

    A diagram of circles within circles representing your spheres of influence. The smallest circle is 'IT Leaders' and is noted as your 'Immediate circle'. The next largest circle is 'IT Team', then 'Peers - Business Leads', then 'Internal Clients' which is noted as you 'Extended circle'. The largest circle is 'External clients'.

    Write down the names, or at least the key people, in each segment of this diagram. This will serve as a quick reference when you're planning communications with others and will help you remember everyone as you're meeting lots of new people in your early days on the job.

    • Everyone knows their networks are important.
    • However, busy schedules can cause leaders to overlook their many audiences.
    • Plan to meet and learn from all people in your sphere to gain a full spectrum of insights.

    Presentation Deck, slide 29

    Identify how your competitors are leveraging technology for competitive advantage

    Competitor identification and analysis are critical steps for any new leader to assess the relative strengths and weaknesses of their organization and develop a sense of strategic opportunity and environmental awareness.

    Today’s CIO is accountable for driving innovation through technology. A competitive analysis will provide the foundation for understanding the current industry structure, rivalry within it, and possible competitive advantages for the organization.

    Surveying your competitive landscape prior to the first day will allow you to come to the table prepared with insights on how to support the organization and ensure that you are not vulnerable to any competitive blind spots that may exist in the evaluations conducted by the organization already.

    You will not be able to gain a nuanced understanding of the internal strengths and weaknesses until you are in the role, so focus on the external opportunities and how competitors are using technology to their advantage.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    For a more in-depth approach to identifying and understanding relevant industry trends and turning them into insights, leverage the following Info-Tech blueprints:

    Presentation Deck, slide 9

    Assess the external competitive environment

    Associated Activity icon

    INPUT: External research

    OUTPUT: Competitor array

    1. Conduct a broad analysis of the industry as a whole. Seek to answer the following questions:
      1. Are there market developments or new markets?
      2. Are there industry or lifestyle trends, e.g. move to mobile?
      3. Are there geographic changes in the market?
      4. Are there demographic changes that are shaping decision making?
      5. Are there changes in market demand?
    2. Create a competitor array by identifying and listing key competitors. Try to be as broad as possible here and consider not only entrenched close competitors but also distant/future competitors that may disrupt the industry.
    3. Identify the strengths, weaknesses, and key brand differentiators that each competitor brings to the table. For each strength and differentiator, brainstorm ways that IT-based innovation enables each. These will provide a toolkit for deeper conversations with your peers and your business stakeholders as you move further into your first 100 days.
    Competitor Strengths Weaknesses Key Differentiators IT Enablers
    Competitor 1
    Competitor 2
    Competitor 3

    Complete the CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Associated Activity icon Run the diagnostic program or use the alternative activities to complete your presentation

    INPUT: CEO-CEO Alignment Program (recommended)

    OUTPUT: Desired and target state of IT maturity, Innovation goals, Top priorities

    Materials: Presentation Deck, slides 11-13

    Participants: CEO, CIO

    Introduce the concept of the CEO-CIO Alignment Program using slide 10 of your presentation deck and the brief email text below.

    Talk to your advisory contact at Info-Tech about launching the program. More information is available on Info-Tech’s website.

    Once the report is complete, import the results into your presentation:

    • Slide 11, the CEO’s current and desired states
    • Slide 12, IT innovation goals
    • Slide 13, top projects and top departments from the CEO and the CIO

    Include any immediate recommendations you have.

    Hello CEO NAME,

    I’m excited to get started in my role as CIO, and to hit the ground running, I’d like to make sure that the IT department is aligned with the business leadership. We will accomplish this using Info-Tech Research Group’s CEO-CIO Alignment Program. It’s a simple survey of 20 questions to be completed by the CEO and the CIO.

    This survey will help me understand your perception and vision as I get my footing as CIO. I’ll be able to identify and build core IT processes that will automate IT-business alignment going forward and create an effective IT strategy that helps eliminate impediments to business growth.

    Research shows that IT departments that are effectively aligned to business goals achieve more success, and I’m determined to make our IT department as successful as possible. I look forward to further detailing the benefits of this program to you and answering any questions you may have the next time we speak.

    Regards,
    CIO NAME

    New KPIs for CEO-CIO Alignment — Recommended

    Info-Tech CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program is set up to build IT-business alignment in any organization. It helps the CIO understand CEO perspectives and priorities. The exercise leads to useful IT performance indicators, clarifies IT’s mandate and which new technologies it should invest in, and maps business goals to IT priorities.

    Benefits

    Master the Basics
    Cut through the jargon.
    Take a comprehensive look at the CEO perspective.
    Target Alignment
    Identify how IT can support top business priorities. Address CEO-CIO differences.
    Start on the Right Path
    Get on track with the CIO vision. Use correct indicators and metrics to evaluate IT from day one.

    Supporting Tool or Template icon Additional materials are available on Info-Tech’s website.

    The desired maturity level of IT — Alternative

    Associated Activity icon Use only if you can’t complete the CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Step 1: Where are we today?

    Determine where the CEO sees the current overall maturity level of the IT organization.

    Step 2: Where do we want to be as an organization?

    Determine where the CEO wants the IT organization to be in order to effectively support the strategic direction of the business.

    A colorful visual representation of the different IT maturity levels. At the bottom is 'STRUGGLE, Unable to Provide Reliable Business Services', then moving upwards are 'SUPPORT, Reliable Infrastructure and IT Service Desk', 'OPTIMIZE, Effective Fulfillment of Work Orders, Functional Business Applications, and Reliable Service Management', 'EXPAND, Effective Execution on Business Projects, Strategic Use of Analytics and Customer Technology', and at the top is 'TRANSFORM, Reliable Technology Innovation'.

    Presentation Deck, slide 11

    Tim Cook's powerful use of language

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Consumer technology
    Source Carmine Gallo, Inc., 2019

    Apple CEO Tim Cook, an internal hire, had big shoes to fill after taking over from the late Steve Jobs. Cook's ability to control how the company is perceived is a big credit to his success. How does he do it? His favorite five words are “The way I see it..." These words allow him to take a line of questioning and reframe it into another perspective that he wants to get across. Similarly, he'll often say, "Let me tell you the way I look at it” or "To put it in perspective" or "To put it in context."

    In your first two weeks on the job, try using these phrases in your conversations with peers and direct reports. It demonstrates that you value their point of view but are independently coming to conclusions about the situation at hand.

    Photo of Tim Cook, CEO, Apple Inc.
    Tim Cook, CEO, Apple Inc. (Image source: Apple)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Denis Gaudreault

    Inform your team that you plan to do an IT Management & Governance Diagnostic survey

    Associated Activity icon Run the diagnostic program or use the alternative activities to complete your presentation

    INPUT: IT Management & Governance Diagnostic (recommended)

    OUTPUT: Process to improve first, Processes important to the business

    Materials: Presentation Deck, slides 19-20

    Participants: CIO, IT staff

    Introduce the IT Management & Governance Diagnostic survey that will help you form your IT strategy.

    Explain that you want to understand current IT capabilities and you feel a formal approach is best. You’ll also be using this approach as an important metric to track your department’s success. Tell them that Info-Tech Research Group will be conducting the survey and it’s important to you that they take action on the email when it’s sent to them.

    Example email:

    Hello TEAM,

    I appreciate meeting each of you, and so far I’m excited about the talents and energy on the team. Now I need to understand the processes and capabilities of our department in a deeper way. I’d like to map our process landscape against an industry-wide standard, then dive deeper into those processes to understand if our team is aligned. This will help us be accountable to the business and plan the year ahead. Advisory firm Info-Tech Research Group will be reaching out to you with a simple survey that shouldn’t take too long to complete. It’s important to me that you pay attention to that message and complete the survey as soon as possible.

    Regards,
    CIO NAME

    Call 3

    Day 16 to Day 30

    Leverage team interviews as a source of determining organizational culture

    Info-Tech recommends that you hold group conversations with your team to uncover their opinions of the current organizational culture. This not only helps build transparency between you and your team but also gives you another means of observing behavior and reactions as you listen to team members’ characterizations of the current culture.

    A visualization of the organizational culture of a company asks the question 'What is culture?' Five boxes are stacked, the bottom two are noted as 'The invisible causes' and the top two are noted as 'The visible signs'. From the bottom, 'Fundamental assumptions and beliefs', 'Values and attitudes', 'The way we do things around here', 'Behaviors', and at the top, 'Environment'. (Source: Hope College Blog Network)

    Note: It is inherently difficult for people to verbalize what constitutes a culture – your strategy for extracting this information will require you to ask indirect questions to solicit the highest value information.

    Questions for Discussion:

    • What about the current organizational environment do you think most contributes to your success?
    • What barriers do you experience as you try to accomplish your work?
    • What is your favorite quality that is present in our organization?
    • What is the one thing you would most like to change about this organization?
    • Do the organization's policies and procedures support your efforts to accomplish work or do they impede your progress?
    • How effective do you think IT’s interactions are with the larger organization?
    • What would you consider to be IT’s top three guiding principles?
    • What kinds of people fail in this organization?

    Supporting Tool or Template icon See Info-Tech’s Cultural Archetype Calculator.

    Use the Competing Values Framework to define your organization’s cultural archetype

    THE COMPETING VALUES FRAMEWORK (CVF):

    CVF represents the synthesis of academic study of 39 indicators of effectiveness for organizations. Using a statistical analysis, two polarities that are highly predictive of differences in organizational effectiveness were isolated:

    1. Internal focus and integration vs. external focus and differentiation.
    2. Stability and control vs. flexibility and discretion.

    By plotting these dimensions on a matrix of competing values, four main cultural archetypes are identified with their own value drivers and theories of effectiveness.

    A map of cultural archetypes with 'Internal control and integration' on the left, 'External focus and differentiation' on the right, 'Flexibility and discretion' on top, and 'Stability and control' on the bottom. Top left is 'Clan Archetype', internal and flexible. Top right is 'Adhocracy Archetype', external and flexible. Bottom left is 'Hierarchy Archetype', internal and controlled. Bottom right is 'Market Archetype', external and controlled.

    Presentation Deck, slide 16

    Create a cultural adjustment plan

    Now that you've assessed the cultural archetype, you can plan an appropriate approach to shape the culture in a positive way. When new executives want to change culture, there are a few main options at hand:

    Autonomous evolution: Encourage teams to learn from each other. Empower hybrid teams to collaborate and reward teams that perform well.

    Planned and managed change: Create steering committee and project-oriented taskforces to work in parallel. Appoint employees that have cultural traits you'd like to replicate to hold responsibility for these bodies.

    Cultural destruction: When a toxic culture needs to be eliminated, get rid of its carriers. Putting new managers or directors in place with the right cultural traits can be a swift and effective way to realign.

    Each option boils down to creating the right set of incentives and deterrents. What behaviors will you reward and which ones will you penalize? What do those consequences look like? Sometimes, but not always, some structural changes to the team will be necessary. If you feel these changes should be made, it's important to do it sooner rather than later. (Source: “Enlarging Your Sphere of Influence in Your Organization,” MindTools Corporate, 2014.)

    As you're thinking about shaping a desired culture, it's helpful to have an easy way to remember the top qualities you want to espouse. Try creating an acronym that makes it easy for staff to remember. For example: RISE could remind your staff to be Responsive, Innovative, Sustainable, and Engaging (RISE). Draw upon your business direction from your manager to help produce desired qualities (Source: Jennifer Schaeffer).

    Presentation Deck, slide 17

    Gary Davenport’s welcome “surprise”

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Telecom
    Source Interview with Gary Davenport

    After Gary Davenport was hired on as VP of IT at MTS Allstream, his first weekend on the job was spent at an all-executive offsite meeting. There, he learned from the CEO that the IT department had a budget reduction target of 25%, like other departments in the company. “That takes your breath away,” Davenport says.

    He decided to meet the CEO monthly to communicate his plans to reduce spending while trying to satisfy business stakeholders. His top priorities were:

    1. Stabilize IT after seven different leaders in a five-year period.
    2. Get the IT department to be respected. To act like business owners instead of like servants.
    3. Better manage finances and deliver on projects.

    During Davenport’s 7.5-year tenure, the IT department became one of the top performers at MTS Allstream.

    Photo of Gary Davenport.
    Gary Davenport’s first weekend on the job at MTS Allstream included learning about a 25% reduction target. (Image source: Ryerson University)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – David Penny & Andrew Wertkin

    Initiate IT Management & Governance Diagnostic — Recommended

    Info-Tech Management & Governance Diagnostic

    Talk to your Info-Tech executive advisor about launching the survey shortly after informing your team to expect it. You'll just have to provide the names and email addresses of the staff you want to be involved. Once the survey is complete, you'll harvest materials from it for your presentation deck. See slides 19 and 20 of your deck and follow the instructions on what to include.

    Benefits

    A sample of the 'High Level Process Landscape' materials available from Info-Tech. A sample of the 'Strategy and Governance In Depth Results' materials available from Info-Tech. A sample of the 'Process Accountability' materials available from Info-Tech.
    Explore IT Processes
    Dive deeper into performance. Highlight problem areas.
    Align IT Team
    Build consensus by identifying opposing views.
    Ownership & Accountability
    Identify process owners and hold team members accountable.

    Supporting Tool or Template icon Additional materials available on Info-Tech’s website.

    Conduct a high-level analysis of current IT capabilities — Alternative

    Associated Activity icon

    INPUT: Interviews with IT leadership team, Capabilities graphic on next slide

    OUTPUT: High-level understanding of current IT capabilities

    Run this activity if you're not able to conduct the IT Management & Governance Diagnostic.

    Schedule meetings with your IT leadership team. (In smaller organizations, interviewing everyone may be acceptable.) Provide them a list of the core capabilities that IT delivers upon and ask them to rate them on an effectiveness scale of 1-5, with a short rationale for their score.

    • 1. Not effective (NE)
    • 2. Somewhat Effective (SE)
    • 3. Effective (E)
    • 4. Very Effective (VE)
    • 5. Extremely Effective (EE)

    Presentation Deck, slide 21

    Use the following set of IT capabilities for your assessment

    Strategy & Governance

    IT Governance Strategy Performance Measurement Policies Quality Management Innovation

    People & Resources

    Stakeholder Management Resource Management Financial Management Vendor Selection & Contract Management Vendor Portfolio Management Workforce Strategy Strategic Comm. Organizational Change Enablement

    Service Management & Operations

    Operations Management Service Portfolio Management Release Management Service Desk Incident & Problem Management Change Management Demand Management

    Infrastructure

    Asset Management Infrastructure Portfolio Management Availability & Capacity Management Infrastructure Management Configuration Management

    Information Security & Risk

    Security Strategy Risk Management Compliance, Audit & Review Security Detection Response & Recovery Security Prevention

    Applications

    Application Lifecycle Management Systems Integration Application Development User Testing Quality Assurance Application Maintenance

    PPM & Projects

    Portfolio Management Requirements Gathering Project Management

    Data & BI

    Data Architecture BI & Reporting Data Quality & Governance Database Operations Enterprise Content Management

    Enterprise Architecture

    Enterprise Architecture Solution Architecture

    Quick wins: CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Complete this while waiting on the IT M&G survey results. Based on your completed CEO-CIO Alignment Report, identify the initiatives you can tackle immediately.

    If you are here... And want to be here... Drive toward... Innovate around...
    Business Partner Innovator Leading business transformation
    • Emerging technologies
    • Analytical capabilities
    • Risk management
    • Customer-facing tech
    • Enterprise architecture
    Trusted Operator Business Partner Optimizing business process and supporting business transformation
    • IT strategy and governance
    • Business architecture
    • Projects
    • Resource management
    • Data quality
    Firefighter Trusted Operator Optimize IT processes and services
    • Business applications
    • Service management
    • Stakeholder management
    • Work orders
    Unstable Firefighter Reduce use disruption and adequately support the business
    • Network and infrastructure
    • Service desk
    • Security
    • User devices

    Call 4

    Day 31 to Day 45

    Inform your peers that you plan to do a CIO Business Vision survey to gauge your stakeholders’ satisfaction

    Associated Activity icon Run the diagnostic program or use the alternative activities to complete your presentation

    INPUT: CIO Business Vision survey (recommended)

    OUTPUT: True measure of business satisfaction with IT

    Materials: Presentation Deck, slide 30

    Participants: CIO, IT staff

    Meet the business leaders at your organization face-to-face if possible. If you can't meet in person, try a video conference to establish some rapport. At the end of your introduction and after listening to what your colleague has to say, introduce the CIO Business Vision Diagnostic.

    Explain that you want to understand how to meet their business needs and you feel a formal approach is best. You'll also be using this approach as an important metric to track your department's success. Tell them that Info-Tech Research Group will be conducting the survey and it’s important to you that they take the survey when the email is sent to them.

    Example email:

    Hello PEER NAMES,

    I'm arranging for Info-Tech Research Group to invite you to take a survey that will be important to me. The CIO Business Vision survey will help me understand how to meet your business needs. It will only take about 15 minutes of your time, and the top-line results will be shared with the organization. We will use the results to plan initiatives for the future that will improve your satisfaction with IT.

    Regards,
    CIO NAME

    Gain feedback on your initial assessments from your IT team

    There are two strategies for gaining feedback on your initial assessments of the organization from the IT team:

    1. Review your personal assessments with the relevant members of your IT organization as a group. This strategy can help to build trust and an open channel for communication between yourself and your team; however, it also runs the risk of being impacted by groupthink.
    2. Ask for your team to complete their own assessments for you to compare and contrast. This strategy can help extract more candor from your team, as they are not expected to communicate what may be nuanced perceptions of organizational weaknesses or criticisms of the way certain capabilities function.

    Who you involve in this process will be impacted by the size of your organization. For larger organizations, involve everyone down to the manager level. In smaller organizations, you may want to involve everyone on the IT team to get an accurate lay of the land.

    Areas for Review:

    • Strategic Document Review: Are there any major themes or areas of interest that were not covered in my initial assessment?
    • Competitor Array: Are there any initiatives in flight to leverage new technologies?
    • Current State of IT Maturity: Does IT’s perception align with the CEO’s? Where do you believe IT has been most effective? Least effective?
    • IT’s Key Priorities: Does IT’s perception align with the CEO’s?
    • Key Performance Indicators: How has IT been measured in the past?

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    You need your team’s hearts and minds or you risk a short tenure. Overemphasizing business commitment by neglecting to address your IT team until after you meet your business stakeholders will result in a disenfranchised group. Show your team their importance.

    Susan Bowen's talent maximization

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Infrastructure Services
    Source Interview with Susan Bowen

    Susan Bowen was promoted to be the president of Cogeco Peer 1, an infrastructure services firm, when it was still a part of Cogeco Communications. Part of her mandate was to help spin out the business to a new owner, which occurred when it was acquired by Digital Colony. The firm was renamed Aptum and Bowen was put in place as CEO, which was not a certainty despite her position as president at Cogeco Peer 1. She credits her ability to put the right talent in the right place as part of the reason she succeeded. After becoming president, she sought a strong commitment from her directors. She gave them a choice about whether they'd deliver on a new set of expectations – or not. She also asks her leadership on a regular basis if they are using their talent in the right way. While it's tempting for directors to want to hold on to their best employees, those people might be able to enable many more people if they can be put in another place.

    Bowen fully rounded out her leadership team after Aptum was formed. She created a chief operating officer and a chief infrastructure officer. This helped put in place more clarity around roles at the firm and put an emphasis on client-facing services.

    Photo of Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum.
    Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum (Image source: Aptum)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Susan Bowen

    Initiate CIO Business Vision survey – new KPIs for stakeholder management — Recommended

    Info-Tech CIO Business Vision

    Be sure to effectively communicate the context of this survey to your business stakeholders before you launch it. Plan to talk about your plans to introduce it in your first meetings with stakeholders. When ready, let your executive advisor know you want to launch the tool and provide the names and email addresses of the stakeholders you want involved. After you have the results, harvest the materials required for your presentation deck. See slide 30 and follow the instructions on what to include.

    Benefits

    Icon for Key Stakeholders. Icon for Credibility. Icon for Improve. Icon for Focus.
    Key Stakeholders
    Clarify the needs of the business.
    Credibility
    Create transparency.
    Improve
    Measure IT’s progress.
    Focus
    Find what’s important.

    Supporting Tool or Template icon Additional materials are available on Info-Tech’s website.

    Create a catalog of key stakeholder details to reference prior to future conversations — Alternative

    Only conduct this activity if you’re not able to run the CIO Business Vision diagnostic.

    Use the Organizational Catalog as a personal cheat sheet to document the key details around each of your stakeholders, including your CEO when possible.

    The catalog will be an invaluable tool to keep the competing needs of your different stakeholders in line, while ensuring you are retaining the information to build the political capital needed to excel in the C-suite.

    Note: It is important to keep this document private. While you may want to communicate components of this information, ensure your catalog remains under lock and (encryption) key.

    Screenshot of the Organizational Catalog for Stakeholders. At the top are spaces for 'Name', 'Job Title', etc. Boxes include 'Key Personal Details', 'Satisfaction Levels With IT', 'Preferred Communications', 'Key Activities', 'In-Flight and Scheduled Projects', 'Key Performance Indicators', and 'Additional Details'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While profiling your stakeholders is important, do not be afraid to profile yourself as well. Visualizing how your interests overlap with those of your stakeholders can provide critical information on how to manage your communications so that those on the receiving end are hearing exactly what they need.

    Activity: Conduct interviews with your key business stakeholders — Alternative

    Associated Activity icon

    1. Once you have identified your key stakeholders through your interviews with your boss and your IT team, schedule a set of meetings with those individuals.
    2. Use the meetings to get to know your stakeholders, their key priorities and initiatives, and their perceptions of the effectiveness of IT.
      1. Use the probative questions to the right to elicit key pieces of information.
      2. Refer to the Organizational Catalog tool for more questions to dig deeper in each category. Ensure that you are taking notes separate from the tool and are keeping the tool itself secure, as it will contain private information specific to your interests.
    3. Following each meeting, record the results of your conversation and any key insights in the Organizational Catalog. Refer to the following slide for more details.

    Questions for Discussion:

    • Be indirect about your personal questions – share stories that will elicit details about their interests, kids, etc.
    • What are your most critical/important initiatives for the year?
    • What are your key revenue streams, products, and services?
    • What are the most important ways that IT supports your success? What is your satisfaction level with those services?
    • Are there any current in-flight projects or initiatives that are a current pain point? How can IT assist to alleviate challenges?
    • How is your success measured? What are your targets for the year on those metrics?

    Presentation Deck, slide 34

    Call 5

    Day 46 to Day 60

    Inform your team that you plan to do an IT staffing assessment

    Associated Activity icon Introduce the IT Staffing Assessment that will help you get the most out of your team

    INPUT: Email template

    OUTPUT: Ready to launch diagnostic

    Materials: Email template, List of staff, Sample of diagnostic

    Participants: CIO, IT staff

    Explain that you want to understand how the IT staff is currently spending its time by function and by activity. You want to take a formal approach to this task and also assess the team’s feelings about its effectiveness across different processes. The results of the assessment will serve as the foundation that helps you improve your team’s effectiveness within the organization.

    Example email:

    Hello PEER NAMES,

    The feedback I've heard from the team since joining the company has been incredibly useful in beginning to formulate my IT strategy. Now I want to get a clear picture of how everyone is spending their time, especially across different IT functions and activities. This will be an opportunity for you to share feedback on what we're doing well, what we need to do more of, and what we're missing. Expect to receive an email invitation to take this survey from Info-Tech Research Group. It's important to me that you complete the survey as soon as you're can. Attached you’ll find an example of the report this will generate. Thank you again for providing your time and feedback.

    Regards,
    CIO NAME

    Wayne Berger's shortcut to solve staffing woes

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Office leasing
    Source Interview with Wayne Berger

    Wayne Berger was hired to be the International Workplace Group (IWG) CEO for Canada and Latin America in 2014.

    Wayne approached his early days with the office space leasing firm as a tour of sorts, visiting nearly every one of the 48 office locations across Canada to host town hall meetings. He heard from staff at every location that they felt understaffed. But instead of simply hiring more staff, Berger actually reduced the workforce by 33%.

    He created a more flexible approach to staffing:

    • Employees no longer just reported to work at one office; instead, they were ready to go to wherever they were most needed in a specific geographic area.
    • He centralized all back-office functions for the company so that not every office had to do its own bookkeeping.
    • Finally, he changed the labor profile to consist of full-time staff, part-time staff, and time-on-demand workers.
    Photo of Wayne Berger, CEO, IWG Plc.
    Wayne Berger, CEO, IWG Plc (Image source: IWG)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Wayne Berger

    Initiate IT Staffing Assessment – new KPIs to track IT performance — Recommended

    Info-Tech IT Staffing Assessment

    Info-Tech’s IT Staffing Assessment provides benchmarking of key metrics against 4,000 other organizations. Dashboard-style reports provide key metrics at a glance, including a time breakdown by IT function and by activity compared against business priorities. Run this survey at about the 45-day mark of your first 90 days. Its insights will be used to inform your long-term IT strategy.

    Benefits

    Icon for Right-Size IT Headcount. Icon for Allocate Staff Correctly. Icon for Maximize Teams.
    Right-Size IT Headcount
    Find the right level for stakeholder satisfaction.
    Allocate Staff Correctly
    Identify staff misalignments with priorities.
    Maximize Teams
    Identify how to drive staff.

    Supporting Tool or Template icon Additional materials are available on Info-Tech’s website.

    Quick wins: Make recommendations based on IT Management & Governance Framework

    Complete this exercise while waiting on the IT Staffing Assessment results. Based on your completed IT Management & Governance report, identify the initiatives you can tackle immediately. You can conduct this as a team exercise by following these steps:

    1. Create a shortlist of initiatives based on the processes that were identified as high need but scored low in effectiveness. Think as broadly as possible during this initial brainstorming.
    2. Write each initiative on a sticky note and conduct a high-level analysis of the amount of effort that would be required to complete it, as well as its alignment with the achievement of business objectives.
    3. Draw the matrix below on a whiteboard and place each sticky note onto the matrix based on its potential impact and difficulty to address.
    A matrix of initiative categories based on effort to achieve and alignment with business objectives. It is split into quadrants: the vertical axis is 'Potential Impact' with 'High, Fully supports achievement of business objectives' at the top and 'Low, Limited support of business objectives' at the bottom; the horizontal axis is 'Effort' with 'Low' on the left and 'High' on the right. Low impact, low effort is 'Low Current Value, No immediate attention required, but may become a priority in the future if business objectives change'. Low impact, high effort is 'Future Reassessment, No immediate attention required, but may become a priority in the future if business objectives change'. High impact, high effort is 'Long-Term Initiatives, High impact on business outcomes but will take more effort to implement. Schedule these in your long-term roadmap'. High impact, low effort is 'Quick Wins, High impact on business objectives with relatively small effort. Some combination of these will form your early wins'.

    Call 6

    Day 61 to Day 75

    Run a start, stop, continue exercise with your IT staff — Alternative

    This is an alternative activity to running an IT Staffing Assessment, which contains a start/stop/continue assessment. This activity can be facilitated with a flip chart or a whiteboard. Create three pages or three columns and label them Start, Stop, and Continue.

    Hand out sticky notes to each team member and then allow time for individual brainstorming. Instruct them to write down their contributions for each category on the sticky notes. After a few minutes, have everyone stick their notes in the appropriate category on the board. Discuss as a group and see what themes emerge. Record the results that you want to share in your presentation deck (GroupMap).

    Gather your team and explain the meaning of these categories:

    Start: Activities you're not currently doing but should start doing very soon.

    Stop: Activities you're currently doing but aren’t working and should cease.

    Continue: Things you're currently doing and are working well.

    Presentation Deck, slide 24

    Determine the alignment of IT commitments with business objectives

    Associated Activity icon

    INPUT: Interviews with IT leadership team

    OUTPUT: High-level understanding of in-flight commitments and investments

    Run this only as an alternative to the IT Management & Governance Diagnostic.

    1. Schedule meetings with IT leadership to understand what commitments have been made to the business in terms of new products, projects, or enhancements.
    2. Determine the following about IT’s current investment mix:
      1. What are the current IT investments and assets? How do they align to business goals?
      2. What investments in flight are related to which information assets?
      3. Are there any immediate risks identified for these key investments?
      4. What are the primary business issues that demand attention from IT consistently?
      5. What choices remain undecided in terms of strategic direction of the IT organization?
    3. Document your key investments and commitments as well as any points of misalignment between objectives and current commitments as action items to address in your long-term plans. If they are small fixes, consider them during your quick-win identification.

    Presentation Deck, slide 25

    Determine the alignment of IT commitments with business objectives

    Run this only as an alternative to the IT Staffing Assessment diagnostic.

    Schedule meetings with IT leadership to understand what commitments have been made to the business in terms of new products, projects, or enhancements.

    Determine the following about IT’s current investment mix:

    • What are the current IT investments and assets?
    • How do they align to business goals?
    • What in-flight investments are related to which information assets?
    • Are there any immediate risks identified for these key investments?
    • What are the primary business issues that demand attention from IT consistently?
    • What remains undecided in terms of strategic direction of the IT organization?

    Document your key investments and commitments, as well as any points of misalignment between objectives and current commitments, as action items to address in your long-term plans. If they are small-effort fixes, consider them during your quick-win identification.

    Presentation Deck, slide 25

    Make a categorized vendor list by IT process

    As part of learning the IT team, you should also create a comprehensive list of vendors under contract. Collaborate with the finance department to get a clear view of how much of the IT budget is spent on specific vendors. Try to match vendors to the IT processes they serve from the IT M&G framework.

    You should also organize your vendors based on their budget allocation. Go beyond just listing how much money you’re spending with each vendor and categorize them into either “transactional” relationships or “strategic relationships.” Use the grid below to organize them. Ideally, you’ll want most relationships to be high spend and strategic (Source: Gary Davenport).

    A matrix of vendor categories with the vertical axis 'Spend' increasing upward, and the horizontal axis 'Type of relationship' with values 'Transactional' or 'Strategic'. The bottom left corner is 'Low Spend Transactional', the top right corner is 'High Spend Strategic'.

    Where to source your vendor list:

    • Finance department
    • Infrastructure managers
    • Vendor manager in IT

    Further reading: Manage Your Vendors Before They Manage You

    Presentation Deck, slide 26

    Jennifer Schaeffer’s short-timeline turnaround

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Education
    Source Interview with Jennifer Schaeffer

    Jennifer Schaeffer joined Athabasca University as CIO in November 2017. She was entering a turnaround situation as the all-online university lacked an IT strategy and had built up significant technical debt. Armed with the mandate of a third-party consultant that was supported by the president, Schaeffer used a people-first approach to construct her strategy. She met with all her staff, listening to them carefully regardless of role, and consulted with the administrative council and faculty members. She reflected that feedback in her plan or explained to staff why it wasn’t relevant for the strategy. She implemented a “strategic calendaring” approach for the organization, making sure that her team members were participating in meetings where their work was assessed and valued. Drawing on Spotify as an inspiration, she designed her teams in a way that everyone was connected to the customer experience. Given her short timeline to execute, she put off a deep skills analysis of her team for a later time, as well as creating a full architectural map of her technology stack. The outcome is that 2.5 years later, the IT department is unified in using the same tooling and optimization standards. It’s more flexible and ready to incorporate government changes, such as offering more accessibility options.

    Photo of Jennifer Schaeffer.
    Jennifer Schaeffer took on the CIO role at Athabasca University in 2017 and was asked to create a five-year strategic plan in just six weeks.
    (Image source: Athabasca University)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Eric Wright

    Call 7

    Day 76 to Day 90

    Finalize your vision – mission – values statement

    A clear statement for your values, vision, and mission will help crystallize your IT strategy and communicate what you're trying to accomplish to the entire organization.

    Mission: This statement describes the needs that IT was created to meet and answers the basic question of why IT exists.

    Vision: Write a statement that captures your values. Remember that the vision statement sets out what the IT organization wants to be known for now and into the future.

    Values: IT core values represent the standard axioms by which the IT department operates. Similar to the core values of the organization as a whole, IT’s core values are the set of beliefs or philosophies that guide its strategic actions.

    Further reading: IT Vision and Mission Statements Template

    Presentation Deck, slide 42

    John Chen's new strategic vision

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Mobile Services
    Source Sean Silcoff, The Globe and Mail

    John Chen, known in the industry as a successful turnaround executive, was appointed BlackBerry CEO in 2014 following the unsuccessful launch of the BlackBerry 10 mobile operating system and a new tablet.

    He spent his first three months travelling, talking to customers and suppliers, and understanding the company's situation. He assessed that it had a problem generating cash and had made some strategic errors, but there were many assets that could benefit from more investment.

    He was blunt about the state of BlackBerry, making cutting observations of the past mistakes of leadership. He also settled a key question about whether BlackBerry would focus on consumer or enterprise customers. He pointed to a base of 80,000 enterprise customers that accounted for 80% of revenue and chose to focus on that.

    His new mission for BlackBerry: to transform it from being a "mobile technology company" that pushes handset sales to "a mobile solutions company" that serves the mobile computing needs of its customers.

    Photo of John Chen, CEO of BlackBerry.
    John Chen, CEO of BlackBerry, presents at BlackBerry Security Summit 2018 in New York City (Image source: Brian Jackson)

    Listen to 'The First 100 Days' podcast – Erin Bury

    Quick wins: Make recommendations based on the CIO Business Vision survey

    Based on your completed CIO Business Vision survey, use the IT Satisfaction Scorecard to determine some initiatives. Focus on areas that are ranked as high importance to the business but low satisfaction. While all of the initiatives may be achievable given enough time, use the matrix below to identify the quick wins that you can focus on immediately. It’s important to not fail in your quick-win initiative.

    • High Visibility, Low Risk: Best bet for demonstrating your ability to deliver value.
    • Low Visibility, Low Risk: Worth consideration, depending on the level of effort required and the relative importance to the stakeholder.
    • High Visibility, High Risk: Limit higher-risk initiatives until you feel you have gained trust from your stakeholders, demonstrating your ability to deliver.
    • Low Visibility, High Risk: These will be your lowest value, quick-win initiatives. Keep them in a backlog for future consideration in case business objectives change.
    A matrix of initiative categories based on organizational visibility and risk of failure. It is split into quadrants: the vertical axis is 'Organizational Visibility' with 'High' at the top and 'Low' at the bottom; the horizontal axis is 'Risk of Failure' with 'Low' on the left and 'High' on the right. 'Low Visibility, Low Risk, Few stakeholders will benefit from the initiative’s implementation.' 'Low Visibility, High Risk, No immediate attention is required, but it may become a priority in the future if business objectives change.' 'High Visibility, Low Risk, Multiple stakeholders will benefit from the initiative’s implementation, and it has a low risk of failure.' 'High Visibility, High Risk, Multiple stakeholders will benefit from the initiative’s implementation, but it has a higher risk of failure.'

    Presentation Deck, slide 27

    Create and communicate a post-100 plan

    The last few slides of your presentation deck represent a roundup of all the assessments you’ve done and communicate your plan for the months ahead.

    Slide 38. Based on the information on the previous slide and now knowing which IT capabilities need improvement and which business priorities are important to support, estimate where you'd like to see IT staff spend their time in the near future. Will you be looking to shift staff from one area to another? Will you be looking to hire staff?

    Slide 39. Take your IT M&G initiatives from slide 19 and list them here. If you've already achieved a quick win, list it and mark it as completed to show what you've accomplished. Briefly outline the objectives, how you plan to achieve the result, and what measurement will indicate success.

    Slide 40. Reflect your CIO Business Vision initiatives from slide 31 here.

    Slide 41. Use this roadmap template to list your initiatives by roughly when they’ll be worked on and completed. Plan for when you’ll update your diagnostics.

    Expert Contributors

    Photo of Alan Fong, Chief Technology Officer, Dealer-FX Alan Fong, Chief Technology Officer, Dealer-FX
    Photo of Andrew Wertkin, Chief Strategy Officer, BlueCat NetworksPhoto of David Penny, Chief Technology Officer, BlueCat Networks Andrew Wertkin, Chief Strategy Officer, BlueCat Networks
    David Penny, Chief Technology Officer, BlueCat Networks
    Photo of Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum Susan Bowen, CEO, Aptum
    Photo of Erin Bury, CEO, Willful Erin Bury, CEO, Willful
    Photo of Denis Gaudreault, Country Manager, Intel Canada and Latin America Denis Gaudreault, Country Manager, Intel Canada and Latin America
    Photo of Wayne Berger, CEO, IWG Plc Wayne Berger, CEO, IWG Plc
    Photo of Eric Wright, CEO, LexisNexis Canada Eric Wright, CEO, LexisNexis Canada
    Photo of Gary Davenport Gary Davenport, past president of CIO Association” of Canada, former VP of IT, Enterprise Solutions Division, MTS AllStream
    Photo of Jennifer Schaeffer, VP of IT and CIO, Athabasca University Jennifer Schaeffer, VP of IT and CIO, Athabasca University

    Bibliography

    Beaudan, Eric. “Do you have what it takes to be an executive?” The Globe and Mail, 9 July 2018. Web.

    Bersohn, Diana. “Go Live on Day One: The Path to Success for a New CIO.” PDF document. Accenture, 2015. Web.

    Bradt, George. “Executive Onboarding When Promoted From Within To Follow A Successful Leader.” Forbes, 15 Nov. 2018. Web.

    “CIO Stats: Length of CIO Tenure Varies By Industry.” CIO Journal, The Wall Street Journal. 15 Feb. 2017. Web.

    “Enlarging Your Sphere of Influence in Your Organization: Your Learning and Development Guide to Getting People on Side.” MindTools Corporate, 2014.

    “Executive Summary.” The CIO's First 100 Days: A Toolkit. PDF document. Gartner, 2012. Web.

    Forbes, Jeff. “Are You Ready for the C-Suite?” KBRS, n.d. Web.

    Gallo, Carmine. “Tim Cook Uses These 5 Words to Take Control of Any Conversation.” Inc., 9 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Giles, Sunnie. “The Most Important Leadership Competencies, According to Leaders Around the World.” Harvard Business Review, 15 March 2016. Web.

    Godin, Seth. “Ode: How to tell a great story.” Seth's Blog. 27 April 2006. Web.

    Green, Charles W. “The horizontal dimension of race: Social culture.” Hope College Blog Network, 19 Oct. 2014. Web.

    Hakobyan, Hayk. “On Louis Gerstner And IBM.” Hayk Hakobyan, n.d. Web.

    Bibliography

    Hargrove, Robert. Your First 100 Days in a New Executive Job, edited by Susan Youngquist. Kindle Edition. Masterful Coaching Press, 2011.

    Heathfield, Susan M. “Why ‘Blink’ Matters: The Power of Your First Impressions." The Balance Careers, 25 June 2019. Web.

    Hillis, Rowan, and Mark O'Donnell. “How to get off to a flying start in your new job.” Odgers Berndtson, 29 Nov. 2018. Web.

    Karaevli, Ayse, and Edward J. Zajac. “When Is an Outsider CEO a Good Choice?” MIT Sloan Management Review, 19 June 2012. Web.

    Keizer, Gregg. “Microsoft CEO Nadella Aces First-100-Day Test.” Computerworld, 15 May 2014. Web.

    Keller, Scott, and Mary Meaney. “Successfully transitioning to new leadership roles.” McKinsey & Company, May 2018. Web.

    Kress, R. “Director vs. Manager: What You Need to Know to Advance to the Next Step.” Ivy Exec, 2016. Web.

    Levine, Seth. “What does it mean to be an ‘executive’.” VC Adventure, 1 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Lichtenwalner, Benjamin. “CIO First 90 Days.” PDF document. Modern Servant Leader, 2008. Web.

    Nawaz, Sabina. “The Biggest Mistakes New Executives Make.” Harvard Business Review, 15 May 2017. Web.

    Pruitt, Sarah. “Fast Facts on the 'First 100 Days.‘” History.com, 22 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Rao, M.S. “An Action Plan for New CEOs During the First 100 Days.” Training, 4 Oct. 2014. Web.

    Reddy, Kendra. “It turns out being a VP isn't for everyone.” Financial Post, 17 July 2012. Web.

    Silcoff, Sean. “Exclusive: John Chen’s simple plan to save BlackBerry.” The Globe & Mail, 24 Feb. 2014. Web.

    Bibliography

    “Start Stop Continue Retrospective.” GroupMap, n.d. Web.

    Surrette, Mark. “Lack of Rapport: Why Smart Leaders Fail.” KBRS, n.d. Web.

    “Understanding Types of Organization – PMP Study.” Simplilearn, 4 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Wahler, Cindy. “Six Behavioral Traits That Define Executive Presence.” Forbes, 2 July 2015. Web.

    Watkins, Michael D. The First 90 Days, Updated and Expanded. Harvard Business Review Press, 2013.

    Watkins, Michael D. “7 Ways to Set Up a New Hire for Success.” Harvard Business Review, 10 May 2019. Web.

    “What does it mean to be a business executive?” Daniels College of Business, University of Denver, 12 Aug. 2014. Web.

    Yeung, Ken. “Turnaround: Marissa Mayer’s first 300 days as Yahoo’s CEO.” The Next Web, 19 May 2013. Web.

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}417|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $52,224 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 38 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Disaster recovery plan (DRP) documentation is often driven by audit or compliance requirements rather than aimed at the team that would need to execute recovery.
    • Between day-to-day IT projects and the difficulty of maintaining 300+ page manuals, DRP documentation is not updated and quickly becomes unreliable.
    • Inefficient publishing strategies result in your DRP not being accessible during disaster or key staff not knowing where to find the latest version.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • DR documentation fails when organizations try to boil the ocean with an all-in-one plan aimed at auditors, business leaders, and IT. It’s too long, too hard to maintain, and ends up being little more than shelf-ware.
    • Using flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams aimed at an IT audience is more concise and effective in a disaster, quicker to create, and easier to maintain.
    • Create your DRP in layers to keep the work manageable. Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response, and build out supporting documentation over time.

    Impact and Result

    • Create visual and concise DR documentation that strips out unnecessary content and is written for an IT audience – the team that would actually be executing the recovery. Your business leaders can take the same approach to create separate business response plans. Don’t mix the two in an all-in-one plan that is not effective for either audience.
    • Determine a documentation distribution strategy that supports ease of maintenance and accessibility during a disaster.
    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into change management procedures to systematically update and refine the DR documentation. Don’t save up changes for a year-end blitz, which turns document maintenance into an onerous project.

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt a visual-based DRP, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Streamline DRP documentation

    Start by documenting your recovery workflow. Create supporting documentation in the form of checklists, flowcharts, topology diagrams, and contact lists. Finally, summarize your DR capabilities in a DRP Summary Document for stakeholders and auditors.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Phase 1: Streamline DRP Documentation

    2. Select the optimal DRP publishing strategy

    Select criteria for assessing DRP tools, and evaluate whether a business continuity management tool, document management solution, wiki site, or manually distributing documentation is best for your DR team.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Phase 2: Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy
    • DRP Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool
    • BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria

    3. Keep your DRP relevant through maintenance best practices

    Learn how to integrate DRP maintenance into core IT processes, and learn what to look for during testing and during annual reviews of your DRP.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Phase 3: Keep Your DRP Relevant Through Maintenance Best Practices
    • Sample Project Intake Form Addendum for Disaster Recovery
    • Sample Change Management Checklist for Disaster Recovery
    • DRP Review Checklist
    • DRP-BCP Review Workflow (Visio)
    • DRP-BCP Review Workflow (PDF)

    4. Appendix: XMPL Case Study

    Model your DRP after the XMPL case study disaster recovery plan documentation.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Appendix: XMPL Case Study
    • XMPL DRP Summary Document
    • XMPL Notification, Assessment, and Declaration Plan
    • XMPL Systems Recovery Playbook
    • XMPL Recovery Workflows (Visio)
    • XMPL Recovery Workflows (PDF)
    • XMPL Data Center and Network Diagrams (Visio)
    • XMPL Data Center and Network Diagrams (PDF)
    • XMPL DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool
    • XMPL DRP Workbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Streamline DRP Documentation

    The Purpose

    Teach your team how to create visual-based documentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn how to create visual-based DR documentation.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct a table-top planning exercise.

    1.2 Document your high-level incident response plan.

    1.3 Identify documentation to include in your playbook.

    1.4 Create an initial collection of supplementary documentation.

    1.5 Discuss what further documentation is necessary for recovering from a disaster.

    1.6 Summarize your DR capabilities for stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Documented high-level incident response plan

    List of documentation action items

    Collection of 1-3 draft checklists, flowcharts, topology diagrams, and contact lists

    Action items for ensuring that the DRP is executable for both primary and backup DR personnel

    DRP Summary Document

    2 Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy

    The Purpose

    Learn the considerations for publishing your DRP.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the best strategy for publishing your DRP.

    Activities

    2.1 Select criteria for assessing DRP tools.

    2.2 Evaluate categories for DRP tools.

    Outputs

    Strategy for publishing DRP

    3 Learn How to Keep Your DRP Relevant Through Maintenance Best Practices

    The Purpose

    Address the common pain point of unmaintained DRPs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create an approach for maintaining your DRP.

    Activities

    3.1 Alter your project intake considerations.

    3.2 Integrate DR considerations into change management.

    3.3 Integrate documentation into performance measurement and performance management.

    3.4 Learn best practices for maintaining your DRP.

    Outputs

    Project Intake Form Addendum Template

    Change Management DRP Checklist Template

    Further reading

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    Put your DRP on a diet – keep it fit, trim, and ready for action.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    The traditional disaster recovery plan (DRP) “red binder” is dead. It takes too long to create, it’s too hard to maintain, and it’s not usable in a crisis.

    “This blueprint outlines the following key tactics to streamline your documentation effort and produce a better result:

    • Write for an IT audience and focus on how to recover. You don’t need 30 pages of fluff describing the purpose of the document.
    • Use flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams over traditional manuals. This drives documentation that is more concise, easier to maintain, and effective in a crisis.
    • Create your DRP in layers to get tangible results faster, starting with a recovery workflow that outlines your DR strategy, and then build out the specific documentation needed to support recovery.”
    (Frank Trovato, Research Director, Infrastructure, Info-Tech Research Group)

    This project is about DRP documentation after you have clarified your DR strategy; create these necessary inputs first

    These artifacts are the cornerstone for any disaster recovery plan.

    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DR Roles and Responsibilities
    • Recovery Workflow

    Missing a component? Start here. ➔ Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan

    This blueprint walks you through building these inputs.
    Our approach saves clients on average US$16,825.22. (Clients self-reported an average saving of US$16,869.21 while completing the Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan blueprint through advisory calls, guided implementations, or workshops (Info-Tech Research Group, 2017, N=129).)

    How this blueprint will help you document your DRP

    This Research is Designed For:

    • IT managers in charge of disaster recovery planning (DRP) and execution.
    • Organizations seeking to optimize their DRP using best-practice methodology.
    • Business continuity professionals that are involved with disaster recovery.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Divide the process of creating DR documentation into manageable chunks, providing a defined scope for you to work in.
    • Identify an appropriate DRP document management and distribution strategy.
    • Ensure that DR documentation is up to date and accessible.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • IT managers preparing for a DR audit.
    • IT managers looking to incorporate components of DR into an IT operations document.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Follow a structured approach in building DR documentation using best practices.
    • Integrate DR into day-to-day IT operations.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • DR documentation is often driven by audit or compliance requirements, rather than aimed at the team that would need to execute recovery.
    • Traditional DRPs are text-heavy, 300+ page manuals that are simply not usable in a crisis.
    • Compounding the problem, DR documentation is rarely updated, so it’s just shelf-ware.

    Complication

    • DRP is often given lower priority as day-to-day IT projects displace DR documentation efforts.
    • Inefficient publishing strategies result in your DRP not being accessible during disasters or key staff not knowing where to find the latest version.
    • Organizations that create traditional DRPs end up with massive manuals that are difficult to maintain, so they quickly become unreliable.

    Resolution

    • Create visual and concise DR documentation that strips out unnecessary content and is written for an IT audience – the team that would actually be executing the recovery. Your business leaders can take the same approach to create separate business response plans – don’t mix the two into an all-in-one plan that is not effective for either audience.
    • Determine a documentation distribution strategy that supports ease of maintenance and accessibility during a disaster.
    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into change management and project intake procedures to systematically update and refine the DR documentation. Don’t save up changes for a year-end blitz, which turns document maintenance into an onerous project.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. DR documentation fails when organizations try to boil the ocean with an all-in-one plan aimed at auditors, business leaders, and IT. It’s too long, too hard to maintain, and ends up being little more than shelf-ware.
    2. Using flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams aimed at an IT audience is more concise and effective in a disaster, quicker to create, and easier to maintain.
    3. Create your DRP in layers to keep the work manageable. Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response, and build out supporting documentation over time.

    An effective DRP that mitigates a wide range of potential outages is critical to minimizing the impact of downtime

    The criticality of having an effective DRP is underestimated.

    Cost of Downtime for the Fortune 1000
    • Cost of unplanned apps downtime per year: $1.25B to $2.5B
    • Cost of critical apps failure per hour: $500,000 to $1M
    • Cost of infrastructure failure per hour: $100,000
    • 35% reported to have recovered within 12 hours.
    • 17% of infrastructure failures took more than 24 hours to recover.
    • 13% of application failures took more than 24 hours to recover.
    Size of Impact Increasing Across Industries
    • The cost of downtime is rising across the board and not just for organizations that traditionally depend on IT (e.g. e-commerce).
    • Downtime cost increase since 2010:
      • Hospitality: 129% increase
      • Transportation: 108% increase
      • Media organizations: 104% increase
    Potential Lost Revenue
    A line graph of Potential Lost Revenue with vertical axis 'LOSS ($)' and horizontal axis 'TIME'. The line starts with low losses near the origin where 'Incident Occurs', gradually accelerates to higher losses as time passes, then decelerates before 'All Revenue Lost'. Note: 'Delay in recovery causes exponential revenue loss'.
    (Adapted from: Rothstein, Philip Jan. Disaster Recovery Testing: Exercising Your Contingency Plan (2007 Edition).)

    The impact of downtime increases significantly over time, not just in terms of lost revenue (as illustrated here) but also goodwill/reputation and health/safety. An effective DR solution and overall resiliency that mitigate a wide range of potential outages are critical to minimizing the impact of downtime.

    Without an effective DRP, your organization is gambling on being able to define and implement a recovery strategy during a time of crisis. At the very least, this means extended downtime – potentially weeks – and substantial impact.

    Only 38% of those with a full or mostly complete DRP believe their DRPs would be effective in a real crisis

    Organizations continue to struggle with creating DRPs, let alone making them actionable.

    Why are so many living with either an incomplete or ineffective DRP? For the same reasons that IT documentation in general continues to be a pain point:

    • It is an outdated model of what documentation should be – the traditional manual with detailed (lengthy) descriptions and procedures.
    • Despite the importance of DR, low priority is placed on creating a DRP and the day-to-day SOPs required to support a recovery.
    • There is a lack of effective processes for ensuring documentation stays up to date.
    A bar graph documenting percentages of survey responses about the completeness of their DRP. 'Only 20% of survey respondents indicated they have a complete DRP'. 13% said 'No DRP'. 33% said 'Partial DRP'. 34% said 'Mostly Completed'. 20% said 'Full DRP'.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=165)
    A bar graph documenting percentages of survey responses about the level of confidence in their DRP. 'Only 38% of those who have a mostly completed or full DRP actually feel it would be effective in a crisis'. 4% said 'Low'. 58% said 'Unsure'. 38% said 'Confident'.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=69 (includes only those who indicated DRP is mostly completed or completed))

    Improve usability and effectiveness with visual-based and more-concise documentation

    Choose flowcharts over process guides, checklists over lengthy procedures, and diagrams over descriptions.

    If you need a three-inch binder to hold your DRP, imagine having to flip through it to determine next steps during a crisis.

    DR documentation needs to be concise, scannable, and quickly understood to be effective. Visual-based documentation meets these requirements, so it’s no surprise that it also leads to higher DR success.

    DR success scores are based on:

    • Meeting recovery time objectives (RTOs).
    • Meeting recovery point objectives (RPOs).
    • IT staff’s confidence in their ability to meet RTOs/RPOs.
    A line graph of DR documentation types and their effectiveness. The vertical axis is 'DR Success', from Low to High. The horizontal axis is Documentation Type, from 'Traditional Manual' to 'Primarily flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams'. The line trends up to higher success with visual-based and more-concise documentation.(Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=95)

    “Without question, 300-page DRPs are not effective. I mean, auditors love them because of the detail, but give me a 10-page DRP with contact lists, process flows, diagrams, and recovery checklists that are easy to follow.” (Bernard Jones, MBCI, CBCP, CORP, Manager Disaster Recovery/BCP, ActiveHealth Management)

    Maintainability is another argument for visual-based, concise documentation

    There are two end goals for your DR documentation: effectiveness and maintainability. Without either, you will not have success during a disaster.

    Organizations using a visual-based approach were 30% more likely to find that DR documentation is easy to maintain. “Easy to maintain” leads to a 46% higher rate of DR success.
    Two bar graphs documenting survey responses regarding maintenance ease of DR documentation types. The first graph compares Traditional Manual vs Visual-based. For 'Traditional Manual' 72% responded they were Difficult to maintain while 28% responded they were Easy to maintain; for 'Visual-based' 42% responded they were Difficult to maintain while 58% responded they were Easy to maintain. Visual-based DR documentation received 30% more votes for Easy to Maintain. The second graph compares success rates of 'Difficult to Maintain' vs 'Easy to Maintain' DR documentation with Difficult being 31% and Easy being 77%, a 46% difference. 'Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=96'.

    Not only are visual-based disaster recovery plans more effective, but they are also easier to maintain.

    Overcome documentation inertia with a tiered model that allows you to eat the elephant one bite at a time

    Start with a recovery workflow to at least ensure a coordinated response. Then use that workflow to determine required supporting documentation.

    Recovery Workflow: Starting the project with overly detailed documentation can slow down the entire process. Overcome planning inertia by starting with high-level incident response plans in a flowchart format. For examples and additional information, see XMPL Medical’s Recovery Workflows.

    Recovery Procedures (Systems Recovery Playbook): For each step in the high-level flowchart, create recovery procedures where necessary using additional flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams as appropriate. Leverage Info-Tech’s Systems Recovery Playbook example as a starting point.

    Additional Reference Documentation: Reference existing IT documentation, such as network diagrams and configuration documents, as well as more detailed step-by-step procedures where necessary (e.g. vendor documentation), particularly where needed to support alternate recovery staff who may not be as well versed as the primary system owners.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations that use flowcharts, checklist, and diagrams over traditional, dense DRP manuals are far more likely to meet their RTOs/RPOs because their documentation is more usable and easier to maintain.

    Use a DRP summary document to satisfy executives, auditors, and clients

    Stakeholders don’t have time to sift through a pile of paper. Summarize your overall continuity capabilities in one, easy-to-read place.

    DRP Summary Document

    • Summarize BIA results
    • Summarize DR strategy (including DR sites)
    • Summarize backup strategy
    • Summarize testing and maintenance plans

    Follow Info-Tech’s methodology to make DRP documentation efficient and effective

    Phases

    Phase 1: Streamline DRP documentation Phase 2: Select the optimal DRP publishing strategy Phase 3: Keep your DRP relevant through maintenance best practices

    Phases

    1.1

    Start with a recovery workflow

    2.1

    Decide on a publishing strategy

    3.1

    Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    1.2

    Create supporting DRP documentation

    3.2

    Conduct an annual focused review

    1.3

    Write the DRP Summary

    Tools and Templates

    End-to-End Sample DRP DRP Publishing Evaluation Tool Project In-take/Request Form

    Change Management Checklist

    Follow XMPL Medical’s journey through DR documentation

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Streamline your documentation and maintenance process by following the approach outlined in XMPL Medical’s journey to an end-to-end DRP.

    Outline of the Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s disaster recovery plan includes its business impact analysis and a subset of tier 1 and tier 2 patient care applications.

    Its DRP includes incident response flowcharts, system recovery checklists, and a communication plan. Its DRP also references IT operations documentation (e.g. asset management documents, system specs, and system configuration docs), but this material is not published with the example documentation.

    Resulting Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s DRP includes actionable documents in the form of high-level disaster response plan flowcharts and system recovery checklists. During an incident, the DR team is able to clearly see the items for which they are responsible.

    Disaster Recovery Plan
    • Recovery Workflow
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary
    • System Recovery Checklists
    • Communication, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    XMPL Medical’s disaster recovery plan illustrates an effective DRP. Model your end-to-end disaster recovery plan after XMPL’s completed templates. The specific data points will differ from organization to organization, but the structure of each document will be similar.

    Model your disaster recovery documentation off of our example

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Recovery Workflow:

    • Recovery Workflows (PDF, VSDX)

    Recovery Procedures (Systems Recovery Playbook):

    • DR Notification, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan
    • Systems Recovery Playbook
    • Network Topology Diagrams

    Additional Reference Documentation:

    • DRP Workbook
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary Document

    Use Info-Tech’s DRP Maturity Scorecard to evaluate your progress

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Project Overview

    1. Streamline DRP Documentation 2. Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy 3. Keep Your DRP Relevant
    Supporting Tool icon
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Start with a recovery workflow

    1.2 Create supporting DRP documentation

    1.3 Write the DRP summary

    2.1 Create Committee Profiles

    3.1 Build Governance Structure Map

    3.2 Create Committee Profiles

    Guided Implementations
    • Review Info-Tech’s approach to DRP documentation.
    • Create a high-level recovery workflow.
    • Create supporting DRP documentation.
    • Write the DRP summary.
    • Identify criteria for selecting a DRP publishing strategy.
    • Select a DRP publishing strategy.
    • Optional: Select requirements for a BCM tool and issue an RFP.
    • Optional: Review responses to RFP.
    • Learn best practices for integrating DRP maintenance into day-to-day IT processes.
    • Learn best practices for DRP-focused reviews.
    Associated Activity icon
    Onsite Workshop
    Module 1:
    Streamline DRP documentation
    Module 2:
    Select the optimal DRP publishing strategy
    Module 3:
    Learn best practices for keeping your DRP relevant
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • A complete end-to-end DRP
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Selection of a publishing and management tool for your DRP documentation
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • Strategy for maintaining your DRP documentation

    Workshop Overview Associated Activity icon

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Info-Tech Analysts Finalize Deliverables
    Activities
    Assess DRP Maturity and Review Current Capabilities

    0.1 Assess current DRP maturity through Info-Tech’s Maturity Scorecard.

    0.2 Identify the IT systems that support mission-critical business activities, and select 2 or 3 key applications to be the focus of the workshop.

    0.3 Identify current recovery strategies for selected applications.

    0.4 Identify current DR challenges for selected applications.

    Document Your Recovery Workflow

    1.1 Create a recovery workflow: review tabletop planning, walk through DR scenarios, identify DR gaps, and determine how to fill them.

    Create Supporting Documentation

    1.2 Create supporting DRP documentation.

    1.3 Write the DRP summary.

    Establish a DRP Publishing, Management, and Maintenance Strategy

    2.1 Decide on a publishing strategy.

    3.1 Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT.

    3.2 Considerations for reviewing your DRP regularly.

    Deliverables
    1. Baseline DRP metric (based on DRP Maturity Scorecard)
    1. High-level DRP workflow
    2. DRP gaps and risks identified
    1. Recovery workflow and/or checklist for sample of IT systems
    2. Customized DRP Summary Template
    1. Strategy for selecting a DRP publishing tool
    2. DRP management and maintenance strategy
    3. Workshop summary presentation deck

    Workshop Goal: Learn how to document and maintain your DRP.

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.


    Phase 1: Streamline DRP Documentation

    Step 1.1: Start with a recovery workflow

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 3.1 3.2
    Start with a Recovery Workflow Create Supporting Documentation Write the DRP Summary Select DRP Publishing Strategy Integrate into Core IT Processes Conduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review a model DRP.
    • Review your recovery workflow.
    • Identify documentation required to support the recovery workflow.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • System SMEs
    • Alternate DR Personnel

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding the visual-based, concise approach to DR documentation.
    • Creating a recovery workflow that provides a roadmap for coordinating incident response and identifying required supporting documentation.

    Info-Tech Insights

    A DRP is a collection of procedures and supporting documents that allow an organization to recover its IT services to minimize system downtime for the business.

    1.1 — Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response and identify required supporting documentation

    The recovery workflow clarifies your DR strategy and ensures the DR team is on the same page.

    Recovery Workflow

    The recovery workflow maps out the incident response plan from event detection, assessment, and declaration to systems recovery and validation.

    This documentation includes:

    • Clarifying initial incident response steps.
    • Clarifying the order of systems recovery and which recovery actions can occur concurrently.
    • Estimating actual recovery timeline through each stage of recovery.
    Recovery Procedures (Playbook)
    Additional Reference Documentation

    “We use flowcharts for our declaration procedures. Flowcharts are more effective when you have to explain status and next steps to upper management.” (Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry)

    Review business impact analysis (BIA) results to plan your recovery workflow

    The BIA defines system criticality from the business’s perspective. Use it to guide system recovery order.

    Specifically, review the following from your BIA:

    • The list of tier 1, 2, and 3 applications. This will dictate the recovery order in your recovery workflow.
    • Application dependencies. This will outline what needs to be included as part of an application recovery workflow.
    • The recovery time objective (RTO) and recovery point objective (RPO) for each application. This will also guide the recovery, and enable you to identify gaps where the recovery workflow does not meet RTOs and RPOs.

    CASE STUDY: The XMPL DRP documentation is based on this Business Impact Analysis Tool.

    Haven’t conducted a BIA? Use Info-Tech’s streamlined approach.

    Info-Tech’s publication Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan takes a very practical approach to BIA work. Our process gives IT leaders a mechanism to quickly get agreement on system recovery order and DR investment priorities.

    Conduct a tabletop planning exercise to determine your recovery workflow

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.1 Tabletop Planning Exercise

    1. Define a scenario to drive the tabletop planning exercise:
      • Use a scenario that forces a full failover to your DR environment, so you can capture an end-to-end recovery workflow.
      • Avoid scenarios that impact health and safety such as tornados or a fire. You want to focus on IT recovery.
      • Example scenarios: Burst water pipe that causes data-center-wide damage or a gas leak that forces evacuation and power to be shut down for at least two days.

    Note: You may have already completed this exercise as part of Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use scenarios to provide context for DR planning, and to test your plans, but don’t create a separate plan for every possibility.

    The high-level recovery plan will be the same whether the incident is a fire, flood, or tornado. While there might be some variances and outliers, these scenarios can be addressed by adding decision points and/or separate, supplementary instructions.

    Walk through the scenario and capture the recovery workflow

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 Tabletop Planning Exercise
    1. Capture the following information for tier 1, tier 2, and tier 3 systems:
      1. On white cue cards, record the steps and track start and end times for each step (where 00:00 is when the incident occurred).
      2. On yellow cue cards, document gaps in people, process, and technology requirements to complete the step.
      3. On red cue cards, indicate risks (e.g. no backup person for a key staff member).

    Note:

    • Ensure the language is sufficiently genericized (e.g. refer to events, not specifically a burst water pipe).
    • Review isolated failures (e.g. hardware, software). Typically, the recovery procedure documented for individual systems covers the essence of the recovery workflow whether it’s just the one system that failed or it’s part of a site-wide recovery.

    Note: You may have already completed this exercise as part of Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan.

    Document your current-state recovery workflow based on the results of the tabletop planning

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1.2 Incident Response Plan Flowcharts, Tabs 2 and 3

    After you finish the tabletop planning exercise, the steps on the set of cue cards define your recovery workflow. Capture this in a flowchart format.

    Use the sample DRP to guide your own flowchart. Some notes on the example are:

    • XMPL’s Incident Management to DR flowchart shows the connection between its standard Service Desk processes and DR processes.
    • XMPL’s high-level workflows outline its recovery of tier 1, 2, and 3 systems.
    • Where more detail is required, include links to supporting documentation. In this example, XMPL Medical includes links to its Systems Recovery Playbook.
    Preview of an Info-Tech Template depicting a sample flowchart.

    This sample flowchart is included in XMPL Recovery Workflows.

    Step 1.2: Create Supporting DRP Documentation

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create checklists for your playbook.
    • Document more complex procedures with flowcharts.
    • Gather and/or write network topology diagrams.
    • Compile a contact list.
    • Ensure there is enough material for backup personnel.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • System SMEs
    • Backup DR Personnel

    Outcomes of this step

    • Actionable supporting documentation for your disaster recovery plan.
    • Contact list for IT personnel, business personnel, and vendor support.

    1.2 — Create supporting documentation for your disaster recovery plan

    Now that you have a high-level incident response plan, collect the information you need for executing that plan.

    Recovery Workflow

    Write your recovery procedures playbook to be effective and usable. Your playbook documentation should include:

    • Supplementary flowcharts
    • Checklists
    • Topology diagrams
    • Contact lists
    • DRP summary

    Reference vendors’ technical information in your flowcharts and checklists where appropriate.

    Recovery Procedures (Playbook)

    Additional Reference Documentation

    Info-Tech Insight

    Write for your audience. The playbook is for IT; include only the information they need to execute the plan. DRP summaries are for executives and auditors; do not include information intended for IT. Similarly, your disaster recovery plan is not for business units; keep BCP content out of your DRP.

    Use checklists to streamline step-by-step procedures

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.1 XMPL Medical’s System Recovery Checklists

    Checklists are ideal when staff just need a reminder of what to do, not how to do it.

    XMPL Medical used its high-level flowcharts as a roadmap for creating its Systems Recovery Playbook.

    • Since its Playbook is intended for experienced IT staff, the writing style in the checklists is concise. XMPL includes links to reference material to support recovery, especially for alternate staff who might need additional instruction.
    • XMPL includes key parameters (e.g. IP addresses) rather than assume those details would be memorized, especially in a stressful DR scenario.
    • Similarly, include links to other useful resources such as VM templates.
    Preview of the Info-Tech Template 'Systems Recovery Playbook'.

    Included in the XMPL Systems Recovery Playbook are checklists for recovering XMPL’s virtual desktop infrastructure, mission-critical applications, and core infrastructure components.

    Use flowcharts to document processes with concurrent tasks not easily captured in a checklist

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.2 XMPL Medical’s Phone Services Recovery Flowchart

    Recovery procedures can consist of flowcharts, checklists, or both, as well as diagrams. The main goal is to be clear and concise.

    • XMPL Medical created a flowchart to capture its phone services recovery procedure to capture concurrent tasks.
    • Additional instructions, where required, could still be captured in a Playbook checklist or other supporting documentation.
    • The flowchart could have also included key settings or other details as appropriate, particularly if the DR team chose to maintain this recovery procedure just in a flowchart format.
    Preview of the Info-Tech Template 'Recovery Workflows'.

    Included in the XMPL DR documentation is an example flowchart for recovering phone systems. This flowchart is in Recovery Workflows.

    Reference this blueprint for more SOP flowchart examples: Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

    Use topology diagrams to capture network layout, integrations, and system information

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.4 XMPL Medical’s Data Center and Network Diagrams

    Topology diagrams, key checklists, and configuration settings are often enough for experienced networking staff to carry out their DR tasks.

    • XMPL Medical includes these diagrams with its DRP. Instead of recreating these diagrams, the XMPL Medical DR Manager asked their network team for these diagrams:
      • Primary data center diagram
      • DR site diagram
      • High-level network diagrams
    • Often, organizations already have network topology diagrams for reference purposes.

    “Our network engineers came to me and said our standard SOP template didn't work for them. They're now using a lot of diagrams and flowcharts, and that has worked out better for them.” (Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry)

    Preview of the Info-Tech Template 'Systems Recovery Playbook'.

    You can download a PDF and a VSD version of these Data Center and Network Diagrams from Info-Tech’s website.

    Create a list of organizational, IT, and vendor contacts that may be required to assist with recovery

    If there is something strange happening to your IT infrastructure, who you gonna call?

    Many DR managers have their team on speed dial. However, having the contact info of alternate staff, BCP leads, and vendors can be very helpful during a disaster. XMPL Medical lists the following information in its DRP Workbook:

    • The DR Teams, SMEs critical to disaster recovery, their backups, and key contacts (e.g. BC Management team leads, vendor contacts) that would be involved in:
      • Declaring a disaster.
      • Coordinating a response at an organizational level.
      • Executing recovery.
    • The people that have authority to declare a disaster.
    • Each person’s spending authority.
    • The rules for delegating authority.
    • Primary and alternate staff for each role.
    Example list of alternate staff, BCP leads, and vendors.

    Confirm with your DR team that you have all of the documentation that you need to recover during a disaster

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.7 Group Discussion

    DISCUSS: Is there enough information in your DRP for both primary and backup DR personnel?

    • Is it clear who is responsible for each DR task, including notification steps?
    • Have alternate staff for each role been identified?
    • Does the recovery workflow capture all of the high-level steps?
    • Is there enough documentation for alternate staff (e.g. network specs)?

    Step 1.3: Write the DRP Summary

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Write a DRP summary document.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner

    Outcomes of this step

    • High-level outline of your DRP capabilities for stakeholders such as executives, auditors, and clients.

    Summarize your DR capabilities using a DRP summary document

    Supporting Tool icon 1.3.1 DRP Summary Document

    The sample included on Info-Tech’s website is customized for the XMPL Medical Case Study – use the download as a starting point for your own summary document.

    DRP Summary Document

    XMPL’s DRP Summary is organized into the following categories:

    • DR requirements: This includes a summary of scope, business impact analysis (BIA), risk assessment, and high-level RTOs and achievable RTOs.
    • DR strategy: This includes a summary of XMPL’s recovery procedures, DR site, and backup strategy.
    • Testing and maintenance: This includes a summary of XMPL’s DRP testing and maintenance strategy.

    Be transparent about existing business risks in your DRP summary

    The DRP summary document is business facing. Include information of which business leaders (and other stakeholders) need to be aware.

    • Discrepancies between desired and achievable RTOs? Organizational leadership needs to know this information. Only then can they assign the resources and budget that IT needs to achieve the desired DR capabilities.
    • What is the DRP’s scope? XMPL Medical lists the IT components that will be recovered during a disaster, and components which will not. For instance, XMPL’s DRP does not recover medical equipment, and XMPL has separate plans for business continuity and emergency response coordination.
    Application tier Desired RTO (hh:mm) Desired RPO (hh:mm) Achievable RTO (hh:mm) Achievable RPO (hh:mm)
    Tier 1 4:00 1:00 *90:00 1:00
    Tier 2 8:00 1:00 *40:00 1:00
    Tier 3 48:00 24:00 *96:00 24:00

    The above table to is a snippet from the XMPL DR Summary Document (section 2.1.3.2).

    In the example, the DR team is unable to recover tier 1, 2, and 3 systems within the desired RTO. As such, they clearly communicate this information in the DRP summary, and include action items to address these gaps.

    Phase 2: Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy

    Step 2.1: Select a DRP Publishing Strategy

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Select criteria for assessing DRP tools.
    • Evaluate categories for DRP tools.
    • Optional: Write an RFP for a BCM tool.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner

    Outcomes of this step

    • Identified strategies for publishing your DRP (i.e. making it available to your DR team).

    Info-Tech Insights

    Diversify your publishing strategy to ensure you can access your DRP in a disaster. For example, if you are using a BCM tool or SharePoint Online as your primary documentation repository, also push the DRP to your DR team’s smartphones as a backup in case the disaster affects internet access.

    2.1 — Select a DR publishing and document management strategy that fits your organization

    Publishing and document management considerations:

    Portability/External Access: Assume your primary site is down and inaccessible. Can you still access your documentation? As shown in this chart, traditional strategies of either keeping a copy at another location (e.g. at the failover site) or with staff (e.g. on a USB drive) still dominate, but these aren’t necessarily the best options.
    A bar chart titled 'Portability Strategy Popularity'. 'External Website (wiki site, cloud-based DRP tool, etc.)' scored 16%. 'Failover Site (network drive or redundant SharePoint, etc.)' scored 53%. 'Distribute to Staff (use USB drive, personal email, etc.)' scored 50%. 'Not Accessible Offsite' scored 7%.
    Note: Percentages total more than 100% due to respondents using more than one portability strategy.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=118)
    Maintainability/Usability: How easy is it to create, update, and use the documentation? Is it easy to link to other documents as shown in the flowchart and checklist examples? Is there version control? Lack of version control can create a maintenance nightmare as well as issues in a crisis if staff are questioning whether they have the right version.
    Cost/Effort: Is the cost and effort appropriate? For example, a large enterprise may need a formal solution (e.g. DRP tools or SharePoint), but the cost might be hard to justify for a smaller company.

    Pros and cons of potential strategies

    This section will review the following strategies, their pros and cons, and how they meet publishing and document management requirements:

    • DRP tools (e.g. eBRP, Recovery Planner, LDRPS)
    • In-house solutions combining SharePoint and MS Office (or equivalent)
    • Wiki site
    • “Manual” approaches such as storing documents on a USB drive

    Avoid 42 hours of downtime due to a non-diversified publishing strategy

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Municipality
    Source Interview

    Situation

    • A municipal government has recently completed an end-to-end disaster recovery plan.
    • The team is feeling good about the fact that they were able to identify:
      • Relative criticality of applications.
      • Dependencies for each application.
      • Incident response plans for the current state and desired state.
      • System recovery procedures.

    Challenge

    • While the DR plan itself was comprehensive, the team only published the DR onto the government’s network drives.
    • A power generation issue caused power to be shut down, which in turn cascaded into downtime for the network.
    • Once the network was down, their DRP was inaccessible.

    Insights

    • Each piece of documentation that was created could have contributed to recovery efforts. However, because they were inaccessible, there was a delayed response to the incident. The result was 42 hours of downtime for end users.
    • Having redundant publishing strategies is just like having redundant IT infrastructure. In the event of downtime, not only do you need to have DR documentation, but you also need to make sure that it is accessible.

    Decide on a DR publishing strategy by looking at portability, maintainability, cost, and required effort

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.1 DRP Publishing and Management Evaluation Tool

    Use the information included in Step 2.1 to guide your analysis of DRP publishing solutions.

    The tool enables you to compare two possible solutions based on these key considerations discussed in this section:

    • Portability/external access
    • Maintainability/usability
    • Cost
    • Effort

    The right choice will depend on factors such as current in-house tools, maturity around document management, the size of your IT department, and so on.

    For example, a small shop may do very well with the USB drive strategy, whereas a multi-national company will need a more formal strategy to manage consistent DRP distribution.

    Preview of Info-Tech's 'DRP Publishing and Management Solution Evaluation Tool'.

    The DRP Publishing and Management Solution Evaluation Tool helps you to evaluate the tools included in this section.

    Don’t think of a business continuity management (BCM) tool as a silver bullet; know what you’re getting out of it

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Typically a SaaS option provides built-in external access with appropriate security and user administration to vary access rights.
    • Cons: Degree of external access is often dependent on the vendor.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in templates encourage consistency and guide initial content development by indicating what details need to be captured.
    • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support), centralized access/navigation to required documents, and some automation (e.g. update contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Not a silver bullet. You still have to do the work to define and capture your processes.
    • Cons: Requires end-user and administrator training.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: For large enterprises, the convenience of built-in document management and templates can outweigh the cost.
    • Cons: Expect leading DRP tools to cost $20K or more per year.

    About this approach:
    BCM tools are solutions that provide templates, tools, and document management to create BC and DR documentation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The business case for a BCM tool is built by answering the following questions:

    • Will the BCM tool solve an unmet need?
    • Will the tool be more effective and efficient than an in-house solution?
    • Will the solution provide enhanced capabilities that an in-house solution cannot provide?

    If you cannot get a satisfactory answer to each of these questions, then opt for an in-house solution.

    “We explored a DRP tool, and it was something we might have used, but it was tens of thousands of pounds per year, so it didn’t stack up financially for us at all.” (Rik Toms, Head of Strategy – IP and IT, Cable and Wireless Communications)

    For in-house solutions, leverage tools such as SharePoint to provide document management capabilities

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: SharePoint is commonly web-enabled and supports external access with appropriate security and user administration.
    • Cons: Must be installed at redundant sites or be cloud-based to be effective in a crisis that takes down your primary data center.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support) as well as centralized access/navigation to required documents.
    • Pros: No tool learning curve – SharePoint and MS Office would be existing solutions already used on a daily basis.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: Using existing tools, so this is a sunk cost in terms of capex.
    • Cons: Additional effort required to create templates and manage the documentation library.

    About this approach:
    DRPs and SOPs most often start as MS Office documents, even if there is a DRP tool available. For organizations that elect to bypass a formal DRP tool, and most do, the biggest gap they have to overcome is document management.

    Many organizations are turning to SharePoint to meet this need. For those that already have SharePoint in place, it makes sense to further leverage SharePoint for DR documentation and day-to-day SOPs.

    For SharePoint to be a practical solution, the documentation must still be accessible if the primary data center is down, e.g. by having redundant SharePoint instances at multiple in-house locations, or using a cloud-based SharePoint solution.

    “Just about everything that a DR planning tool does, you can do yourself using homegrown solutions or tools that you're already familiar with such as Word, Excel, and SharePoint.” (Allen Zuk, President and CEO, Sierra Management Consulting)

    A healthcare company uses SharePoint as its DRP and SOP documentation management solution

    CASE STUDY Healthcare

    • This organization is responsible for 50 medical facilities across three states.
    • It explored DRP tools, but didn’t find the right fit, so it has developed an in-house solution based in SharePoint. While DRP tools have improved, the organization no longer needs that type of solution. Its in-house solution is meeting its needs.
    • It has SharePoint instances at multiple locations to ensure availability if one site is down.

    Documentation Strategy

    • Created an IT operations library in SharePoint for DR and SOPs, from basic support to bare-metal restore procedures.
    • SOPs are linked from SharePoint to the virtual help desk for greater accessibility.
    • Where practical, diagrams and flowcharts are used, e.g. DR process flowcharts and network services SOPs dominated by diagrams and flowcharts.

    Management Strategy

    • Directors and the CIO have made finishing off SOPs their performance improvement objective for the year. The result is staff have made time to get this work done.
    • Status updates are posted monthly, and documentation is a regular agenda item in leadership meetings.
    • Regular tabletop testing validates documentation and ensures familiarity with procedures, including where to find required information.

    Results

    • Dependency on a few key individuals has been reduced. All relevant staff know what they need to do and where to access required documentation.
    • SOPs are enabling DR training as well as day-to-day operations training for new staff.
    • The organization has a high confidence in its ability to recovery from a disaster within established timelines.

    Explore using a wiki site as an inexpensive alternative to SharePoint and other content management solutions

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Wiki sites can support external access as with any web solution.
    • Cons: Must be installed at redundant sites, hosted, or cloud-based to be effective in a crisis that takes down your primary data center.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in document management (version control, metadata support, etc.) as well as centralized access/navigation to required information.
    • Pros: Authorized users can make updates dynamically, depending on how much restriction you have on the site.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: An inexpensive option compared to traditional content management solutions such as SharePoint.
    • Cons: Learning curve if wikis are new to your organization.

    About this approach:
    Wiki sites are websites where users collaborate to create and edit the content. Wikipedia is an example.

    While wiki sites are typically used for collaboration and dynamic content development, the traditional collaborative authoring model can be restricted to provide structure and an approval process.

    Several tools are available to create and manage wiki sites (and other collaboration solutions), as outlined in the following research:

    Info-Tech Insight

    If your organization is not already using wiki sites, this technology can introduce a culture shock. Start slow by using a wiki site within a specific department or for a particular project. Then evaluate how well your staff adapt to this technology as well as its potential effectiveness in your organization. Refer to our collaboration strategy research for additional guidance.

    For small IT shops, distributing documentation to key staff (e.g. via a USB drive) can still be effective

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Appropriate staff have the documentation with them; there is no need to log into a remote site or access a tool to get at the information.
    • Cons: Relies on staff to be diligent about ensuring they have the latest documentation and keep it with them (not leave it in their desk drawer).
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: With this strategy, MS Office (or equivalent) is used to create and maintain the documentation, so there is no learning curve.
    • Pros: Simple, straightforward methodology – keep the master on a network drive, and download a copy to your USB drive.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contact information) or document management (e.g. version control).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing rigid processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: Little to no cost and no tool management required.
    • Cons: “Manual” document management requires strict attention to process for version control, updates, approvals, and distribution.

    About this approach:
    With this strategy, your ERT and key IT staff keep a copy of your DRP and relevant documentation with them (e.g. on a USB drive). If the primary site experiences a major event, they have ready access to the documentation.

    Fifty percent of respondents in our recent survey use this strategy. A common scenario is to use a shared network drive or a solution such as SharePoint as the master centralized repository, but distribute a copy to key staff.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This approach can have similar disadvantages as using hard copies. Ensuring the USB drives are up to date, and that all staff who might need access have a copy, can become a burdensome process. More often, USB drives are updated periodically, so there is the risk that the information will be out of date or incomplete.

    Avoid extensive use of paper copies of DR documentation

    DR documents need to be easy to update, accessible from anywhere, and searchable. Paper doesn’t meet these needs.

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Does not rely on technology or power.
    • Cons: Requires all staff who might be involved in a DR to have a copy, and to have it with them at all times, to truly have access at any time from anywhere.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: In terms of usability, again there is no dependence on technology.
    • Cons: Updates need to be printed and distributed to all relevant staff every time there is a change to ensure staff have access to the latest, most accurate documentation if a disaster occurred. You can’t schedule disasters, so information needs to be current all the time.
    • Cons: Navigation to other information is manual – flipping through pages, etc. No searching or hyperlinks.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: No technology system to maintain, aside from what you use for printing.
    • Cons: Printing expenses are actually among the highest incurred by organizations, and this adds to it.
    • Cons: Labor intensive due to need to print and physically distribute documentation updates.

    About this approach:
    Traditionally DRPs are printed and distributed to managers and/or kept in a central location at both the primary site and a secondary site. In addition, wallet cards are distributed that contain key information such as contact numbers.

    A wallet card or even a few printed copies of your high-level DRP for general reference can be helpful, but paper is not a practical solution for your overall DR documentation library, particularly when you include SOPs for recovery procedures.

    One argument in favor of paper is there is no dependency on power during a crisis. However, in a power outage, staff can use smartphones and potentially laptops (with battery power) to access electronically stored documentation to get through first response steps. In addition, your DR site should have backup power to be an appropriate recovery site.

    Optional: Partial list of BCM tool vendors

    A partial list of BCM tool vendors, including: Business Protector, catalyst, clearview, ContinuityLogic. Fusion, Logic Manager, Quantivate, RecoveryPlanner.com, MetricStream, SimpleRisk, riskonnect, Strategic BCP - ResilienceONE, RSA, and Sungard Availability Services.

    The list is only a partial list of BCM tool vendors. The order in which vendors are presented, and inclusion in this list, does not represent an endorsement.

    Optional: Use our list of requirements as a foundation for selecting and reviewing BCM tools

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.2 BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria

    If a BCM tool is the best option for your environment, expedite the evaluation process with our BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria.

    Through advisory services, workshops, and consulting engagements, we have created this BCM Tool Requirements List. The featured requirements includes the following categories:

    1. Integrations
    2. Planning and Monitoring
    3. Administration
    4. Architecture
    5. Security
    6. Support and Training
    Preview of the Info-Tech template 'BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria'.

    This BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria can be appended to an RFP. You can leverage Info-Tech’s RFP Template if your organization does not have one.

    Info-Tech can write full RFPs

    As part of a consulting engagement, Info-Tech can write RFPs for BCM tools and provide a customized scoring tool based on your environment’s unique requirements.

    Phase 3: Keep Your DRP Relevant Through Maintenance Best Practices

    Step 3.1: Integrate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Integrate DRP maintenance with Project Management.
    • Integrate DRP considerations into Change Management.
    • Integrate with Performance Management.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • Head of Project Management Office
    • Head of Change Advisory Board
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    • Updated project intake form.
    • Updated change management practice.
    • Updated performance appraisals.

    3.1 — Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    Focusing on these three processes will help ensure that your plan stays current, accurate, and usable.

    The Info-Tech / COBIT5 'IT Management and Governance Framework' with three processes highlighted: 'MEA01 Performance Measurement', 'BAI06 Change Management', and 'BAI01 Project Management'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Prioritize quick wins that will have large benefits. The advice presented in this section offers easy ways to help keep your DRP up to date. These simple solutions can save a lot of time and effort for your DRP team as opposed to more intricate changes to the processes above.

    Assess how new projects impact service criticality and DR requirements upfront during project intake

    Icon for process 'BAI01 Project Management'.
    Supporting Tool icon 3.1.1 Sample Project Intake Form Addendum

    Understand the RTO/RPO requirements and IT impacts for new or enhanced services to ensure appropriate provisioning and overall DRP updates.

    • Have submitters include service continuity requirements. This information can be inserted into your business impact analysis. Use similar language that you use in your own BIA.
      • The submitter should know how critical the resulting project will be. Any items that the submitter doesn’t know, the Project Steering Committee should investigate.
    • Have IT assess the impact on the DRP. The submitter will not know how the DRP will be impacted directly. Ask the project committee to consider how DRP documentation and the DR environment will need to be changed due to the project under consideration.

    Note: The goal is not to make DR a roadblock, but rather to ensure project requirements will be met – including availability and DR requirements.

    Preview of the Info-Tech template 'Project Intake Form'.

    This Project Intake Form asks the submitter to fill out the availability and criticality requirements for the project.

    Leverage your change management process to identify required DRP updates as they occur

    Icon for process 'BAI06 Change Management'.

    Avoid the year-end rush to update your DRP. Keeping it up to date as changes occur saves time in the long run and ensures your plan is accurate when you need it.

    • As part of your change management process, identify potential updates to:
      • System documentation (e.g. configuration settings).
      • Recovery procedures (e.g. if a system has been virtualized, that changes the recovery procedure).
      • Your DR environment (e.g. system configuration updates for standby systems).
    • Keep track of how often a system has changed. Relevant DRP documentation might be due for a deeper review:
      • After a system has been changed ten times (even from routine changes), notify your DRP Manager to flag the relevant DRP documentation for review.
      • As part of formal DRP reviews, pay closer attention to DRP documentation for the flagged systems.
    Preview of the Info-Tech template 'Disaster Recovery Change Management'.

    This template asks the submitter to fill out the availability and criticality requirements for the project.

    For change management best practices beyond DRP considerations, please see Optimize Change Management.

    Integrate documentation into performance measurement and performance management

    Icon for process 'MEA01 Performance Measurement'.

    Documentation is a necessary evil – few like to create it and more immediate tasks take priority. If it isn’t scheduled and prioritized, it won’t happen.

    Why documentation is such a challenge

    How management can address these challenges

    We all know that IT staff typically do not like to write documentation. That’s not why they were hired, and good documentation is not what gets them promoted. Include documentation deliverables in your IT staff’s performance appraisal to stress the importance of ensuring documentation is up to date, especially where it might impact DR success.
    Similarly, documentation is secondary to more urgent tasks. Time to write documentation is often not allocated by project managers. Schedule time for developing documentation, just like any other project, or it won’t happen.
    Writing manuals is typically a time-intensive task. Focus on what is necessary for another experienced IT professional to execute the recovery. As discussed earlier, often a diagram or checklist is good enough and actually far more usable in a crisis.

    “Our directors and our CIO have tied SOP work to performance evaluations, and SOP status is reviewed during management meetings. People have now found time to get this work done.” (Assistant Director – IT Operations, Healthcare Industry)

    Step 3.2: Conduct an Annual Focused Review

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    1. Identify components of your DRP to refresh.
    2. Identify organizational changes requiring further focus.
    3. Test your DRP and identify problems.
    4. Correct problems identified with DRP.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • System SMEs
    • Backup DR Personnel

    Outcomes of this step

    • An actionable, up-to-date DRP.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Testing is a waste of time and resources if you do not fix what’s broken. Tabletop testing is effective at uncovering gaps in your DR processes, but if you don’t address those gaps, then your DRP will still be unusable in a disaster.

    Set up a safety net to capture changes that slipped through the cracks with a focused review process

    Evaluate documentation supporting high-priority systems, as well as documentation supporting IT systems that have been significantly changed.

    • Ideally you’re maintaining documentation as you go along. But you need to have an annual review to catch items that may have slipped through.
    • Don’t review everything. Instead, review:
      • IT systems that have had 10+ changes: small changes and updates can add up over time. Ensure:
        • The plans for these systems are updated for changes (e.g. configuration changes).
        • SMEs and backup personnel are familiar with the changes.
      • Tier 1 / Gold Systems: Ensure that you can still recover tier 1 systems with your existing DRP documentation.
    • Track documentation issues that you discovered with your ticketing system or service desk tool to ensure necessary documentation changes are made.
    1. Annual Focused Review
    2. Tier 1 Systems
    3. Significantly Changed Systems
    4. Organizational Changes

    Identify larger changes, both organizational and within IT, that necessitate DRP updates

    During your focused review, consider how organizational changes have impacted your DRP.

    The COBIT 5 Enablers provide a foundation for this analysis. Consider:

    • Changes in regulatory requirements: Are there new requirements for IT that are not reflected in your DRP? Is the organization required to comply with any additional regulations?
    • Changes to organizational structures, business processes, and how employees work: Can employees still be productive once tier 1 services are restored or have RTOs changed? Has organizational turnover impacted your DRP?
    • SMEs leaving or changing roles: Can IT still execute your DRP? Are there still people for all the key roles?
    • Changes to IT infrastructure and applications: Can the business still access the information they need during a disaster? Is your BIA still accurate? Do new services need to be considered tier 1?

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    COBIT 5 Enablers
    What changes need to be reflected in your DRP?

    A cycle visualization titled 'Disaster Recovery Plan'. Starting at 'Changes in Regulatory Requirements', it proceeds clockwise to 'Organizational Structure', 'Changes in Business Processes', and 'How Employees Work', before it returns to DRP. Then 'Changes to Applications', 'Changes to Infrastructure', 'SMEs Leaving or Changing Roles', and then back to the DRP.

    Create a plan during your annual focused review to test your DRP throughout the year

    Regardless of your documentation approach, training and familiarity with relevant procedures is critical.

    • Start with tabletop exercises and progress to technology-based testing (simulation, parallel, and full-scale testing).
    • Ask staff to reference documentation while testing, even if they do not need to. This practice helps to confirm documentation accuracy and accessibility.
    • Incorporate cross-training in DR testing. This gives important experience to backup personnel and will further validate that documents are complete and accurate.
    • Track any discovered documentation issues with your ticketing system or project tracking tools to ensure necessary documentation changes are made.

    Example Test Schedule:

    1. Q1: Tabletop testing shadowed by backup personnel
    2. Q2: Tabletop testing led by backup personnel
    3. Q3: Technology-based testing
    4. Annual Focused Review: Review Results

    Reference this blueprint for guidance on DRP testing plans: Reduce Costly Downtime Through DR Testing

    Appendix A: XMPL Case Study

    Follow XMPL Medical’s journey through DR documentation

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Streamline your documentation and maintenance process by following the approach outlined in XMPL Medical’s journey to an end-to-end DRP.

    Outline of the Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s disaster recovery plan includes its business impact analysis and a subset of tier 1 and tier 2 patient care applications.

    Its DRP includes incident response flowcharts, system recovery checklists, and a communication plan. Its DRP also references IT operations documentation (e.g. asset management documents, system specs, and system configuration docs), but this material is not published with the example documentation.

    Resulting Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s DRP includes actionable documents in the form of high-level disaster response plan flowcharts and system recovery checklists. During an incident, the DR team is able to clearly see the items for which they are responsible.

    Disaster Recovery Plan
    • Recovery Workflow
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary
    • System Recovery Checklists
    • Communication, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    XMPL Medical’s disaster recovery plan illustrates an effective DRP. Model your end-to-end disaster recovery plan after XMPL’s completed templates. The specific data points will differ from organization to organization, but the structure of each document will be similar.

    Model your disaster recovery documentation off of our example

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Recovery Workflow:

    • Recovery Workflows (PDF, VSDX)

    Recovery Procedures (Systems Recovery Playbook):

    • DR Notification, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan
    • Systems Recovery Playbook
    • Network Topology Diagrams

    Additional Reference Documentation:

    • DRP Workbook
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary Document

    Use our structure to create your practical disaster recovery plan.

    Appendix B: Summary, Next Steps, and Bibliography

    Insight breakdown

    Use visual-based documentation instead of a traditional DRP manual.

    • Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams are more concise, easier to maintain, and more effective in a crisis.
    • Write for an IT audience and focus on how to recover. You don’t need 30 pages of fluff describing the purpose of the document.

    Create your DRP in layers to keep the work manageable.

    • Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response, and build out supporting documentation over time.

    Prioritize quick wins to make DRP maintenance easier and more likely to happen.

    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into change management and project intake procedures to systematically update and refine the DR documentation. Don’t save up changes for a year-end blitz, which turns document maintenance into an onerous project.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • How to create visual-based DRP documentation
    • How to integrate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    Processes Optimized

    • DRP documentation creation
    • DRP publishing tool selection
    • DRP documentation maintenance

    Deliverables Completed

    • DRP documentation
    • Strategy for publishing your DRP
    • Modified project-intake form
    • Change management checklist for DR considerations

    Project step summary

    Client Project: Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    • Create a recovery workflow.
    • Create supporting DRP documentation.
    • Write a summary for your DRP.
    • Decide on a publishing strategy.
    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT processes.
    • Conduct an annual focused review.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This project has the ability to fit the following formats:

    • Onsite workshop by Info-Tech Research Group consulting analysts.
    • Do-it-yourself with your team.
    • Remote delivery (Info-Tech Guided Implementation).

    Related Info-Tech research

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    Close the gap between your DR capabilities and service continuity requirements.

    Reduce Costly Downtime Through DR Testing
    Improve the accuracy of your DRP and your team’s ability to efficiently execute recovery procedures through regular DR testing.

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind
    Go beyond satisfying auditors to drive process improvement, consistent IT operations, and effective knowledge transfer.

    Prepare for a DRP Audit
    Assess your current DRP maturity, identify required improvements, and complete an audit-ready DRP summary document.

    Bibliography

    A Structured Approach to Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) and the Requirements of ISO 31000. The Association of Insurance and Risk Managers, Alarm: The Public Risk Management Association, and The Institute of Risk Management, 2010.

    “APO012: Manage Risk.” COBIT 5: Enabling Processes. ISACA, 2012.

    Bird, Lyndon, Ian Charters, Mel Gosling, Tim Janes, James McAlister, and Charlie Maclean-Bristol. Good Practice Guidelines: A Guide to Global Good Practice in Business Continuity. Global ed. Business Continuity Institute, 2013.

    COBIT 5: A Business Framework for the Governance and Management of Enterprise IT. ISACA, 2012.

    “EDM03: Ensure Risk Optimisation.” COBIT 5: Enabling Processes. ISACA, 2012.

    Risk Management. ISO 31000:2009.

    Rothstein, Philip Jan. Disaster Recovery Testing: Exercising Your Contingency Plan. Rothstein Associates: 1 Oct. 2007.

    Societal Security – Business continuity management systems – Guidance. ISO 22313:2012.

    Societal Security – Business continuity management systems – Requirements. ISO 22301:2012.

    Understanding and Articulating Risk Appetite. KPMG, 2008.

    Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}372|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,779 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Organizations often tackle compliance efforts in an ad hoc manner, resulting in an ineffective use of resources.
    • The alignment of business objectives, information security, and data privacy is new for many organizations, and it can seem overwhelming.
    • GDPR is an EU regulation that has global implications; it likely applies to your organization more than you think.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Financial impact isn’t simply fines. A data controller fined for GDPR non-compliance may sue its data processor for damage.
    • Even day-to-day activities may be considered processing. Screen-sharing from a remote location is considered processing if the data shown onscreen contains personal data!
    • This is not simply an IT problem. Organizations that address GDPR in a siloed approach will not be as successful as organizations that take a cross-functional approach.

    Impact and Result

    • Follow a robust methodology that applies to any organization and aligns operational and situational GDPR scope. Info-Tech's framework allows organizations to tackle GDPR compliance in a right-sized, methodical approach.
    • Adhere to a core, complex GDPR requirement through the use of our documentation templates.
    • Understand how the risk of non-compliance is aligned to both your organization’s functions and data scope.
    • This blueprint will guide you through projects and steps that will result in quick wins for near-term compliance.

    Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should fast track your GDPR compliance efforts, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand your compliance requirements

    Understand the breadth of the regulation’s requirements and document roles and responsibilities.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 1: Understand Your Compliance Requirements
    • GDPR RACI Chart

    2. Define your GDPR scope

    Define your GDPR scope and prioritize initiatives based on risk.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 2: Define Your GDPR Scope
    • GDPR Initiative Prioritization Tool

    3. Satisfy documentation requirements

    Understand the requirements for a record of processing and determine who will own it.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 3: Satisfy Documentation Requirements
    • Record of Processing Template
    • Legitimate Interest Assessment Template
    • Data Protection Impact Assessment Tool
    • A Guide to Data Subject Access Requests

    4. Align your data breach requirements and security program

    Document your DPO decision and align security strategy to data privacy.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 4: Align Your Data Breach Requirements & Security Program

    5. Prioritize your GDPR initiatives

    Prioritize any initiatives driven out of Phases 1-4 and begin developing policies that help in the documentation effort.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 5: Prioritize Your GDPR Initiatives
    • Data Protection Policy
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Your Compliance Requirements

    The Purpose

    Kick-off the workshop; understand and define GDPR as it exists in your organizational context.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritize your business units based on GDPR risk.

    Assign roles and responsibilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Kick-off and introductions.

    1.2 High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.

    1.3 Identify and define GDPR initiative within your organization’s context.

    1.4 Determine what actions have been done to prepare; how have regulations been handled in the past?

    1.5 Identify key business units for GDPR committee.

    1.6 Document business units and functions that are within scope.

    1.7 Prioritize business units based on GDPR.

    1.8 Formalize stakeholder support.

    Outputs

    Prioritized business units based on GDPR risk

    GDPR Compliance RACI Chart

    2 Define Your GDPR Scope

    The Purpose

    Know the rationale behind a record of processing.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine who will own the record of processing.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the necessity for a record of processing.

    2.2 Determine for each prioritized business unit: are you a controller or processor?

    2.3 Develop a record of processing for most-critical business units.

    2.4 Perform legitimate interest assessments.

    2.5 Document an iterative process for creating a record of processing.

    Outputs

    Initial record of processing: 1-2 activities

    Initial legitimate interest assessment: 1-2 activities

    Determination of who will own the record of processing

    3 Satisfy Documentation Requirements and Align With Your Data Breach Requirements and Security Program

    The Purpose

    Review existing security controls and highlight potential requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the initiatives you’ll be working on align with existing controls and future goals.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine the appetite to align the GDPR project to data classification and data discovery.

    3.2 Discuss the benefits of data discovery and classification.

    3.3 Review existing incident response plans and highlight gaps.

    3.4 Review existing security controls and highlight potential requirements.

    3.5 Review all initiatives highlighted during days 1-3.

    Outputs

    Highlighted gaps in current incident response and security program controls

    Documented all future initiatives

    4 Prioritize GDPR Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Review project plan and initiatives and prioritize.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize outputs of the workshop, with a strong understanding of next steps.

    Activities

    4.1 Analyze the necessity for a data protection officer and document decision.

    4.2 Review project plan and initiatives.

    4.3 Prioritize all current initiatives based on regulatory compliance, cost, and ease to implement.

    4.4 Develop a data protection policy.

    4.5 Finalize key deliverables created during the workshop.

    4.6 Present the GDPR project to key stakeholders.

    4.7 Workshop executive presentation and debrief.

    Outputs

    GDPR framework and prioritized initiatives

    Data Protection Policy

    List of key tools

    Communication plans

    Workshop summary documentation

    Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}555|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Web Experience Management (WEM) solutions have emerged as applications that provide marketers and other customer experience professionals with a complete set of tools for web content management, delivery, campaign execution, and site analytics.
    • However, many organizations are unsure of how to leverage these new technologies to enhance their customer interaction strategy.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • WEM products are not a one-size-fits-all investment: unique evaluations and customization is required in order to deploy a solution that fits your organization.
    • WEM technology often complements core CRM and marketing management products – it does not supplant it, and must augment the rest of your customer experience management portfolio.
    • WEM provides benefits by giving web visitors a better experience – leveraging tools such as web analytics gives the customer a tailored experience. Marketing can then monitor their behavior and use this information to warm leads.

    Impact and Result

    • Deploy a WEM platform and execute initiatives that will strengthen the web-facing customer experience, improving customer satisfaction and unlocking new revenue opportunities.
    • Avoid making unnecessary new WEM investments.
    • Make informed decisions about the types of technologies and initiatives that are necessary to support WEM.

    Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a WEM strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Harness the value of web experience management

    Make the case for a web experience management suite and structure the WEM strategy project.

    • Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy Phase 1: Harness the Value of Web Experience Management
    • Web Experience Management Strategy Summary Template
    • WEM Project Charter Template

    2. Create the vision for web experience management

    Identify the target state WEM strategy, assess current state, and identify gaps.

    • Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy Phase 2: Create the Vision for Web Experience Management

    3. Execute initiatives for WEM deployment

    Build the WEM technology stack and create a web strategy initiatives roadmap.

    • Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy Phase 3: Execute Initiatives for WEM Deployment
    • Web Process Automation Investment Appropriateness Assessment Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Web Experience Management Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch the WEM Selection Project

    The Purpose

    Discuss the general project overview for the WEM selection.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Launch of your WEM selection project.

    Development of your organization’s WEM requirements. 

    Activities

    1.1 Facilitation of activities from the Launch the WEM Project and Collect Requirements phase, including project scoping and resource planning.

    1.2 Conduct overview of the WEM market landscape, trends, and vendors.

    1.3 Conduct process mapping for selected marketing processes.

    1.4 Interview business stakeholders.

    1.5 Prioritize WEM functional requirements.

    Outputs

    WEM Procurement Project Charter

    WEM Use-Case Fit Assessment

    2 Plan the Procurement and Implementation Process

    The Purpose

    Plan the procurement and the implementation of the WEM solution.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Selection of a WEM solution.

    A plan for implementing the selected WEM solution. 

    Activities

    2.1 Complete marketing process mapping with business stakeholders.

    2.2 Interview IT staff and project team, identify technical requirements for the WEM suite, and document high-level solution requirements.

    2.3 Perform a use-case scenario assessment, review use-case scenario results, identify use-case alignment, and review the WEM Vendor Landscape vendor profiles and performance.

    2.4 Create a custom vendor shortlist and investigate additional vendors for exploration in the marketplace.

    2.5 Meet with project manager to discuss results and action items.

    Outputs

    Vendor Shortlist

    WEM RFP

    Vendor Evaluations

    Selection of a WEM Solution

    WEM projected work break-down

    Implementation plan

    Framework for WEM deployment and CRM/Marketing Management Suite Integration

    Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}564|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Low number and quality of leads generated, poor conversion rates, and declining customer retention and loyalty
    • Higher customer acquisition vs. marketing costs
    • Difficulties attracting and keeping talent, partners, and investors
    • Slow or low growth and devaluation of the brand due to low brand equity

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The Brand: Intangible, yet a company’s most valuable asset.
    • Data-driven decisions for a strong brand.
    • Investing in brand-building efforts means investing in your success.

    Impact and Result

    • Increase brand awareness and equity.
    • Build trust and improve customer retention and loyalty.
    • Achieve higher and faster growth.

    Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth Research & Tools

    Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth Executive Brief – A deck to help diagnose brand health to improve business growth.

    In this executive brief, you will discover the importance of a strong brand on the valuation, growth, and sustainability of your company. You will also learn about SoftwareReviews' approach to assessing current performance and gaining visibility into areas of improvement.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Brand Diagnostic and Analysis Tool Kit

    A comprehensive set of tools to gather and interpret qualitative and quantitative brand performance metrics.

    • Brand Diagnostic Tool - Digital Metrics Analysis Template
    • Brand Diagnostic Tool - Financial Metrics Analysis Template
    • Brand Diagnostic Tool Survey and Interview Questionnaires and Lists Template
    • Survey Emails Best Practices Guidelines
    • Brand Diagnostic Tool - External and Internal Factors Metrics Analysis Template

    2. Brand Diagnostic Executive Presentation

    Fully customizable, pre-built PowerPoint presentation template to communicate the results of the brand performance diagnostic, areas of improvement and trends, as well as your recommendations. It will also allow you to identify and align executive members and key stakeholders on next steps, and set priorities.

    • Brand Diagnostic - Executive Presentation Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth

    Have a significant and well-targeted impact on business success and growth by knowing how your brand performs, identifying areas of improvement, and making data-driven decisions to fix it.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    SoftwareReviews is a division of Info-Tech Research Group Inc., a world-class IT research and consulting firm established in 1997.
    Backed by two decades of IT research and advisory experience, SoftwareReviews offers the most comprehensive insight into the enterprise software landscape and client-vendor relationships.

    Analyst Perspective

    Brand Diagnostic and Monitoring

    In the ever-changing market landscape in which businesses operate, it is imperative to ensure that the brand stays top of mind and quickly adapts. Having a good understanding of where the brand stands and how it performs has become crucial for any company to stand out from its competitors and succeed in a crowded and very dynamic market.

    Unfortunately, the brand does not always receive the attention and importance it deserves, leaving it vulnerable to becoming outdated and unclear to the target audience and to losing its equity.

    Knowing how the brand is perceived, as opposed to how individuals within an organization perceive it, addressing any brand-related issues in a timely manner, and implementing processes to continuously monitor its performance have become key tactics for any company that wants to thrive in today's highly competitive market.

    Photo of Nathalie Vezina, Marketing Research Director, SoftwareReviews Advisory.

    Nathalie Vezina
    Marketing Research Director
    SoftwareReviews Advisory

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Because it is vulnerable to becoming outdated and unclear to the target audience and to losing its equity, it is essential to ensure that the brand is performing well and to be attentive to these signs of a weakened brand:

    • Low number and quality of leads generated, poor conversion rates, and declining customer retention and loyalty
    • Lack of understanding of the value proposition; lack of interest and interaction with the brand
    • Higher customer acquisition/marketing costs
    • Difficulties attracting and keeping talent, partners, or future investors
    • Low/slow growth; devaluation of the brand due to low brand equity
    Common Obstacles

    Building a strong brand is an everyday challenge, and brand leaders often face what may seem like overwhelming obstacles in achieving their goal. Here are some of the roadblocks they regularly face:

    • Limited visibility on brand perception and overall performance
    • Insufficient supporting information to make clear, undisputable data-driven decisions and convince key stakeholders how to improve brand performance
    • Limited resources (time, budget, headcount, tools) to diagnose, measure, and execute
    • Stakeholders may not be fully aware of the benefits of a strong brand and the impacts that a weak brand can have on the overall performance of the business
    SoftwareReviews’ Approach

    This SoftwareReviews blueprint provides the guidance and tools required to perform a thorough brand diagnostic and enable brand leaders to:

    • Know how the brand performs; pinpoint gaps and areas for improvement
    • Make clear, data-driven recommendations and decisions on how to fix and optimize the brand
    • Communicate, convince key stakeholders, and align on proposed solutions to optimize the brand’s performance
    • Continuously monitor and optimize the brand

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight

    The brand is a company’s most valuable asset that should never fall into disrepair. In fact, business leaders should ensure that at least half of their marketing budget is allocated to brand-building efforts.

    What is a brand?

    The brand – both intangible and the most valuable asset for businesses.

    Despite its intangible nature, the brand is at the heart of every business, small and large, around which rotates what drives business success and growth.

    While measuring its real value on the marketplace can be difficult, a brand with high salience will attract and retain customers for as long as it keeps evolving and adapting to its dynamic environment.

    Up to 90% of the total market value of companies is based on intangible assets, such as brand recognition. (Source: Ocean Tomo, 2020)

    Multiple bubbles with the biggest bubble highlighted and labelled 'BRAND'. The other bubbles say 'IDENTITY', 'LOYALTY', 'TRUST', 'STRATEGY', 'GROWTH', 'AWARENESS', and 'VALUE'.

    What makes a brand strong?

    Perception Matters

    The brand reflects the image of a company or a product. The values it conveys and how it’s being perceived have a direct impact on a brand's ability to stand out and grow.

    A brand is strong when it:

    • Projects a positive image
    • Has a clear positioning and value proposition
    • Is authentic and inspiring
    • Conveys values that resonates
    • Is socially engaged
    • Builds awareness
    • Is consistent
    • Delivers on its promise
    • Inspires trust
    “In the past, a brand is what a company told you it was. Today, a brand is what people tell each other it is.” (Source: Mark Schaefer, 2019)

    Investing in building a brand, a top priority for businesses

    Company Valuation

    Branding has become a top priority for companies to increase the value of their business in the marketplace. A good market value is essential to attract and retain investors, obtain future rounds of financing, grow by acquisition, and find buyers.

    The more equity a brand gains, the higher its market value, despite the company’s annual revenue. While annual revenue is factored in the equation, the equity of the brand has a greater impact on the market value. A brand whose market value is lower than its revenue is an important indicator that the brand is weakened and needs to be addressed.

    Revenue and Growth

    Most successful companies are investing heavily in building their brand, and for good reason. A strong brand will deliver the right messaging, and a unique and clear value proposition will resonate with its audience and directly impact customer acquisition costs, outperform competition, enable higher pricing, and increase sales volume and customer lifetime value.

    A strong brand also helps develop partner channels, attract and engage high-value partners, and allow for actionable and incremental KPIs.

    Talent Acquisition and Retention

    Brands with strong values are more attractive to highly skilled talent without having to offer above-market salaries. In addition, when a brand inspires pride and shares common values with employees, it increases their motivation and the company’s retention rate.

    Retaining employees within the company allows for the development of talent and retention of knowledge within the organization, thus contributing to the sustainability of the organization.

    It's no wonder that employer branding has become an essential element of human resources strategies.

    “Sustainable Living Brands are growing 69% faster than the rest of the business and delivering 75% of the company’s growth.” (Source: Unilever, 2019, qtd. in Deloitte, 2021)

    Symptoms of a weakened brand

    Know if your brand is suffering and needs to be fixed.

    Brand leaders experiencing one or more of these brand-related symptoms should consider rebranding or optimizing their brand:
    • Low number and quality of leads generated, poor conversion rates, and declining customer retention and loyalty
    • Higher customer acquisition vs. marketing costs
    • Difficulties attracting and keeping talent, partners, and investors
    • Slow or low growth and devaluation of the brand due to low brand equity

    With visibility into your brand and the supporting data that provides a thorough diagnostic of the brand, combined with ongoing brand performance monitoring, you will have all the information you need to help you drive the brand forward, have a significant impact on business growth, and stand out as a brand leader.

    The largest software companies have an average market cap of 18X their revenue (Source: Companies Market Cap, May 2022)

    Building a strong brand, an everyday challenge

    Brand leaders are often faced with overwhelming obstacles in building a strong brand.

    Limited visibility on brand perception and overall performance Insufficient information to make clear, undisputable data-driven decisions and convince key stakeholders how to improve brand performance Stock image of a person pulling a boulder.
    Misunderstanding of the benefits of a strong brand and negative impacts of a weak brand on business valuation and growth Limited resources (time, budget, headcount, tools) to diagnose, measure, and execute
    Only
    54%
    of businesses have a B2B brand program in place for measuring brand perceptions. (Source: B2B International, 2016) Only
    4%
    of B2B marketing teams measure the impact of their marketing/brand building efforts beyond six months. (Source: LinkedIn’s B2B Institute, 2019) 50%
    of marketing budget is what successful brands spend on average on brand-building efforts. (Source: Les Binet and Peter Field, 2018)
    82% of investors say name recognition is an important factor guiding them in their investment decisions. (Source: Global Banking & Finance Review, 2018) 77% of B2B marketers say branding is crucial for growth. (Source: Circle Research)

    Making brand performance visible

    Implement data-driven strategies and make fact-based decisions to continuously optimize brand performance.

    Diagnose your brand’s health
    Know how your brand is being perceived and have visibility on its performance.
    Cycle titled 'BRAND' with steps 'Diagnose', 'Identify', 'Fix', 'Keep Monitoring' and back to 'Diagnose'. Identify trends and areas of improvement
    Rely on undisputable and reliable data to make clear decisions and educate and communicate with key stakeholders.
    Keep monitoring your brand’s performance
    Stay on top of the game and keep away competitors by continuously monitoring your brand’s health.
    Fix issues with your brand in a timely manner
    Don’t lose the momentum. Achieve better results and have a greater impact on your success and chances to grow.

    Qualitative and quantitative brand performance measures

    Segmented by SoftwareReviews Advisory into three categories for a comprehensive diagnostic.

    Icon of a megaphone. Icon of a head with puzzle pieces. Icon of coins.
    Brand Equity
    • Awareness
    • Perception
    • Positioning
    • Recognition/recall
    • Trust
    Buyer’s Behavior
    • Interaction with the brand
    • Preference
    • Purchase intent
    • Product reviews
    • Social engagement
    • Website traffic
    • Lead generation
    Financial
    • Revenue
    • Profit margin
    • Customer lifetime value (CLV)
    • Customer acquisition cost (CAC)
    • Intangible asset market value (IAMV)

    Benefits of a strong and healthy brand

    A healthy brand is the foundation of your success.

    Ensure a better understanding of the value proposition and positioning Drive more interest, interaction, and traction Increase brand awareness and equity Generate higher number and quality of leads
    Achieve higher and faster conversion rate Build trust and improve customer retention and loyalty Attract and keep talent, partners, and investors Achieve higher and faster growth

    Visual explaining the brand diagnostic methodology: 1. data collection and analysis; and 2. presentation and alignment. Outcomes: gain visibility into the brand's performance, highlight areas for improvement, and make data-driven decisions.

    Who benefits from diagnosing the brand?

    This Research Is Designed for:

    Brand leaders who are looking to:

    • Detect and monitor brand performance, issues, trends, and areas of improvement
    • Optimize and fix their brand
    • Develop strategies, and make recommendations and decisions based on facts
    • Get the support they need from key stakeholders
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Get the visibility you need on your brand’s performance
    • Pinpoint brand issues, trends, and areas of improvement
    • Develop data-driven strategies, and make recommendations and decisions based on facts
    • Communicate with and convince key stakeholders
    • Get the support you need from key stakeholders
    • Put in place new diagnostic and monitoring processes to continually improve your brand
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Sales with qualified lead generation and customer retention and loyalty
    • Human Resources in their efforts to attract and retain talent
    • The overall business with growth and increased market value
    This Research Will Help Them:
    • Have a better understanding of the importance of a strong brand on business growth and valuation
    • Align on next steps

    SoftwareReviews’ Brand Diagnostic Methodology

    0. Communication & Alignment 1. Data Collection 2. Data Analysis & Interpretation 3. Report & Presentation
    Phase Steps
    1. Engage and unify the team
    2. Communicate and present
    3. Align on next steps
    1. Identify and document internal and external changes affecting the brand
    2. Conduct internal and external brand perception surveys
    3. Gather customer loyalty feedback
    4. Collect digital performance metrics
    1. Analyze data collected
    2. Identify issues, trends, gaps, and inconsistencies
    3. Compare data with current brand statement
    1. Build report with recommendations
    2. Prioritize brand fixes from high to low positive impact
    3. Build presentation
    Phase Outcomes
    • Importance of the brand is recognized
    • Endorsement and prioritization
    • Support and resources
    • All relevant data/information is collected in one place
    • Visibility on the performance of the brand
    • All the data in hand to support recommendations and make informed decisions
    • Visibility and clear understanding of the brand’s health and how to fix or improve its performance

    Insight summary

    The Brand: Intangible, yet a company’s most valuable asset

    Intangible assets, such as brand recognition, account for almost all of a company’s value.1 Despite its intangible nature, the brand is at the heart of every business and has a direct impact on business growth, profitability, and revenue. While measuring its real value on the marketplace can be difficult, a brand with high traction will attract customers and keep them for as long as it keeps evolving and adapting to its dynamic environment.

    Making brand issues visible

    Having a clear understanding of how the brand performs has become crucial for any company that wants to stand out from its competitors and succeed in a crowded and highly dynamic marketplace.

    Data-driven decisions for a strong brand

    Intuition-based or uninformed decisions are obsolete. Brand leaders must base their decisions on facts to be able to convince key stakeholders.

    Building a strong brand, an everyday challenge

    Brand leaders often face overwhelming obstacles building strong brands. They need guidance and tools to support them to drive the business forward.

    Get team buy-in and alignment

    Brand leaders must ensure that the key stakeholders are aware of the importance of a strong brand to business growth and value increase and that they are aligned and committed to the efforts required to build a successful brand.

    Investing in brand-building efforts means investing in your success

    Successful business leaders allocate at least half of their marketing budget2 to brand-building efforts, enabling them to set themselves apart, significantly increase their market share, grow their business, and thrive in a highly competitive marketplace.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Marketing Analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Brand Diagnostic

    Data Analysis & Interpretation

    Report & Presentation Building

    Communication & Alignment

    Call #1: Discuss concept and benefits of performing a brand diagnostic. Identify key stakeholders. Anticipate concerns and objections.

    Call #2: Discuss how to use the tool. Identify resources and internal support needed.

    Call #3: Review results. Discuss how to identify brand issues, areas of improvement, and trends based on data collected and to interpret key metrics.

    Call #4 (optional): Continue discussion from call #3.

    Call #5: Discuss recommendations and best practices to fix the issues identified and resources required.

    Call #6: Discuss purpose and how to build the report and presentation, Prioritize the brand fixes from high to low positive impact.

    Call #7 (optional): Follow up with call on report and presentation preparation.

    Call #8: Discuss key points to focus on when presenting to key stakeholders and the desired outcome.

    Call #9: Discuss how to leverage brand diagnostic tools now in place and the benefits of continuously monitoring the brand.

    Call #10: Debrief and determine how we can help with next steps.

    Key deliverable:

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Brand Diagnostic Presentation Template

    Sample of the key deliverable, the Brand Diagnostic Presentation Template.

    Pre-built and fully customizable PowerPoint template to communicate key findings, areas of improvements, and recommendations to key stakeholders, align on next steps, and prioritize.

    Brand Diagnostic Report Dashboard

    Sample of the Brand Diagnostic Report Dashboard deliverable.

    Auto-filling dashboard built into the Brand Diagnostic Tool Kit. Ready to be saved and shared as a PDF.

    Brand Diagnostic Tool Kit

    Sample of the Brand Diagnostic Tool Kit deliverable.

    Comprehensive Excel Workbook to gather and interpret brand performance metrics. Includes survey questionnaires.

    Bibliography

    “71% of Consumers More Likely to Buy a Product or Service From a Name They Recognise.” Global Banking & Finance Review, 5 December 2018. Web.

    B2B Marketing Leaders Report. Circle Research, n.d. Web.

    Binet, Les, and Peter Field. Effectiveness In Context: A manual for Brand Building. Institute of Practitioners in Advertising, 12 October 2018. Ebook.

    “Current Trends in the World of B2B Marketing, 2016 Survey.” B2B International, 2016. Web.

    Intangible Asset Market Value Study. Ocean Tomo, July 2020. Web.

    Largest Software Companies By Market Cap. Companies Market Cap, May 2022. Web.

    “Unilever, purpose-led brands outperform.” Unilever, 6 October 2019. Web. qtd. in Kounkel, Suzanne, Amy Silverstein, and Kathleen Peeters. “2021 Global Marketing Trends.” Deloitte Insights, 2020. Web.

    Schaefer, Mark. “The Future Of Branding Is Human Impressions.” Mark Schaefer Blog, 3 June 2019. Web.

    The 5 Principles Of Growth In B2B Marketing - Empirical Observations on B2B Effectiveness. LinkedIn B2B Institute, 2019. Web.

    Visual explaining the brand diagnostic methodology: 1. data collection and analysis; and 2. presentation and alignment. Outcomes: gain visibility into the brand's performance, highlight areas for improvement, and make data-driven decisions.

    Who benefits from diagnosing the brand?

    This Research Is Designed for:

    Brand leaders who are looking to:

    • Detect and monitor brand performance, issues, trends, and areas of improvement
    • Optimize and fix their brand
    • Develop strategies, and make recommendations and decisions based on facts
    • Get the support they need from key stakeholders
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Get the visibility you need on your brand’s performance
    • Pinpoint brand issues, trends, and areas of improvement
    • Develop data-driven strategies, and make recommendations and decisions based on facts
    • Communicate with and convince key stakeholders
    • Get the support you need from key stakeholders
    • Put in place new diagnostic and monitoring processes to continually improve your brand
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Sales with qualified lead generation and customer retention and loyalty
    • Human Resources in their efforts to attract and retain talent
    • The overall business with growth and increased market value
    This Research Will Help Them:
    • Have a better understanding of the importance of a strong brand on business growth and valuation
    • Align on next steps

    SoftwareReviews’ Brand Diagnostic Methodology

    0. Communication & Alignment 1. Data Collection 2. Data Analysis & Interpretation 3. Report & Presentation
    Phase Steps
    1. Engage and unify the team
    2. Communicate and present
    3. Align on next steps
    1. Identify and document internal and external changes affecting the brand
    2. Conduct internal and external brand perception surveys
    3. Gather customer loyalty feedback
    4. Collect digital performance metrics
    1. Analyze data collected
    2. Identify issues, trends, gaps, and inconsistencies
    3. Compare data with current brand statement
    1. Build report with recommendations
    2. Prioritize brand fixes from high to low positive impact
    3. Build presentation
    Phase Outcomes
    • Importance of the brand is recognized
    • Endorsement and prioritization
    • Support and resources
    • All relevant data/information is collected in one place
    • Visibility on the performance of the brand
    • All the data in hand to support recommendations and make informed decisions
    • Visibility and clear understanding of the brand’s health and how to fix or improve its performance

    Insight summary

    The Brand: Intangible, yet a company’s most valuable asset

    Intangible assets, such as brand recognition, account for almost all of a company’s value.1 Despite its intangible nature, the brand is at the heart of every business and has a direct impact on business growth, profitability, and revenue. While measuring its real value on the marketplace can be difficult, a brand with high traction will attract customers and keep them for as long as it keeps evolving and adapting to its dynamic environment.

    Making brand issues visible

    Having a clear understanding of how the brand performs has become crucial for any company that wants to stand out from its competitors and succeed in a crowded and highly dynamic marketplace.

    Data-driven decisions for a strong brand

    Intuition-based or uninformed decisions are obsolete. Brand leaders must base their decisions on facts to be able to convince key stakeholders.

    Building a strong brand, an everyday challenge

    Brand leaders often face overwhelming obstacles building strong brands. They need guidance and tools to support them to drive the business forward.

    Get team buy-in and alignment

    Brand leaders must ensure that the key stakeholders are aware of the importance of a strong brand to business growth and value increase and that they are aligned and committed to the efforts required to build a successful brand.

    Investing in brand-building efforts means investing in your success

    Successful business leaders allocate at least half of their marketing budget2 to brand-building efforts, enabling them to set themselves apart, significantly increase their market share, grow their business, and thrive in a highly competitive marketplace.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Marketing Analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Brand Diagnostic

    Data Analysis & Interpretation

    Report & Presentation Building

    Communication & Alignment

    Call #1: Discuss concept and benefits of performing a brand diagnostic. Identify key stakeholders. Anticipate concerns and objections.

    Call #2: Discuss how to use the tool. Identify resources and internal support needed.

    Call #3: Review results. Discuss how to identify brand issues, areas of improvement, and trends based on data collected and to interpret key metrics.

    Call #4 (optional): Continue discussion from call #3.

    Call #5: Discuss recommendations and best practices to fix the issues identified and resources required.

    Call #6: Discuss purpose and how to build the report and presentation, Prioritize the brand fixes from high to low positive impact.

    Call #7 (optional): Follow up with call on report and presentation preparation.

    Call #8: Discuss key points to focus on when presenting to key stakeholders and the desired outcome.

    Call #9: Discuss how to leverage brand diagnostic tools now in place and the benefits of continuously monitoring the brand.

    Call #10: Debrief and determine how we can help with next steps.

    Key deliverable:

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Brand Diagnostic Presentation Template

    Sample of the key deliverable, the Brand Diagnostic Presentation Template.

    Pre-built and fully customizable PowerPoint template to communicate key findings, areas of improvements, and recommendations to key stakeholders, align on next steps, and prioritize.

    Brand Diagnostic Report Dashboard

    Sample of the Brand Diagnostic Report Dashboard deliverable.

    Auto-filling dashboard built into the Brand Diagnostic Tool Kit. Ready to be saved and shared as a PDF.

    Brand Diagnostic Tool Kit

    Sample of the Brand Diagnostic Tool Kit deliverable.

    Comprehensive Excel Workbook to gather and interpret brand performance metrics. Includes survey questionnaires.

    Bibliography

    “71% of Consumers More Likely to Buy a Product or Service From a Name They Recognise.” Global Banking & Finance Review, 5 December 2018. Web.

    B2B Marketing Leaders Report. Circle Research, n.d. Web.

    Binet, Les, and Peter Field. Effectiveness In Context: A manual for Brand Building. Institute of Practitioners in Advertising, 12 October 2018. Ebook.

    “Current Trends in the World of B2B Marketing, 2016 Survey.” B2B International, 2016. Web.

    Intangible Asset Market Value Study. Ocean Tomo, July 2020. Web.

    Largest Software Companies By Market Cap. Companies Market Cap, May 2022. Web.

    “Unilever, purpose-led brands outperform.” Unilever, 6 October 2019. Web. qtd. in Kounkel, Suzanne, Amy Silverstein, and Kathleen Peeters. “2021 Global Marketing Trends.” Deloitte Insights, 2020. Web.

    Schaefer, Mark. “The Future Of Branding Is Human Impressions.” Mark Schaefer Blog, 3 June 2019. Web.

    The 5 Principles Of Growth In B2B Marketing - Empirical Observations on B2B Effectiveness. LinkedIn B2B Institute, 2019. Web.

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}211|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $137,332 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Each year, IT organizations spend more money “outsourcing” tasks, activities, applications, functions, and other items.
    • The increased spend and associated outsourcing leads to less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. There are commonalites among vendor management initiatives, but the key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs, not the other way around.
    • All vendors are not of equal importance to an organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization’s investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.
    • Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI’s ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates “informally,” starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Build and implement a vendor management initiative tailored to your environment.
    • Create a solid foundation to sustain your vendor management initiative as it evolves and matures.
    • Leverage vendor management-specific tools and templates to manage vendors more proactively and improve communication.
    • Concentrate your vendor management resources on the right vendors.
    • Build a roadmap and project plan for your vendor management journey to ensure you reach your destination.
    • Build collaborative relationships with critical vendors.

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should jump start a vendor management initiative, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Plan

    Organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 1: Plan
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    2. Build

    Configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 2: Build
    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium
    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool
    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    3. Run

    Begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 3: Run

    4. Review

    Identify what the VMI should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 4: Review

    Infographic

    Workshop: Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Plan

    The Purpose

    Getting Organized

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined Roles and Goals for the VMI

    Activities

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

    1.2 Scope

    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities – OIC Chart

    1.5 Process Mapping

    1.6 Vendor Inventory Tool (Overview)

    Outputs

    Completed Mission Statement and Goals

    List of Items In Scope and Out of Scope for the VMI

    List of Strengths and Obstacles for the VMI

    Completed OIC Chart

    Sample Process Map for One Process

    Begun Using Vendor Inventory Tool

    2 Plan/Build/Run

    The Purpose

    Build VMI Tools and Templates

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI Based on Its Roles and Goals

    Activities

    2.1 Maturity Assessment

    2.2 Structure and Job Descriptions

    2.3 Attributes of a Valuable Vendor

    2.4 Classification Model

    2.5 Risk Assessment Tool

    2.6 Scorecards and Feedback

    2.7 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda

    Outputs

    Completed Maturity Assessment.

    Sample Job Descriptions and Phrases.

    List of Attributes of a Valuable Vendor.

    Configured Classification Model.

    Configured Risk Assessment Tool.

    Configured Scorecard and Feedback Questions.

    Configured Business Alignment Meeting Agenda.

    3 Build/Run

    The Purpose

    Continue Building VMI Tools and Templates

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI Based on Its Roles and Goals

    Activities

    3.1 Relationship Alignment Document

    3.2 Vendor Orientation

    3.3 Policies and Procedures

    3.4 3-Year Roadmap

    3.5 90-Day Plan

    3.6 Quick Wins

    3.7 Reports

    3.8 Kickoff Meeting

    Outputs

    Relationship Alignment Document Sample and Checklist

    Vendor Orientation Checklist

    Policies and Procedures Checklist

    Completed 3-Year Roadmap

    Completed 90-Day Plan

    List of Quick Wins

    List of Reports

    4 Review

    The Purpose

    Review the Past 12 Months of VMI Operations and Improve

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Keeping the VMI Aligned With the Organization’s Goals and Ensuring the VMI Is Leveraging Leading Practices

    Activities

    4.1 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships.

    4.2 Assess Compliance.

    4.3 Incorporate Leading Practices.

    4.4 Leverage Lessons Learned.

    4.5 Maintain Internal Alignment.

    4.6 Update Governances.

    Outputs

    Further reading

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Create and implement a vendor management framework to begin obtaining measurable results in 90 days.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    What is vendor management?

    When you read the phrase “vendor management,” what comes to mind? This isn’t a rhetorical question. Take your time … I’ll wait.

    Unfortunately, those words conjure up a lot of different meanings, and much of that depends on whom you ask. Those who work in the vendor management field will provide a variety of answers. To complicate matters, those who are vendor management “outsiders” will have a totally different view of what vendor management is. Why is this important? Because we need a common definition to communicate more effectively, even if the definition is broad.

    Let’s start creating a working definition that is not circular. Vendor management is not simply managing vendors. That expression basically reorders the words and does nothing to advance our cause; it only adds to the existing confusion surrounding the concept.

    Vendor management is best thought of as a spectrum or continuum with many points rather than a specific discipline like accounting or finance. There are many functions and activities that fall under the umbrella term of vendor management: some of them will be part of your vendor management initiative (VMI), some will not, and some will exist in your organization but be outside the VMI. This is the unique part of vendor management – the part that makes it fun, but also the part that leads to the confusion. For example, accounts payable sits within the accounting department almost exclusively, but contract management can sit within or outside the VMI. The beauty of vendor management is its flexibility; your VMI can be created to meet your specific needs and goals while leveraging common vendor management principles.

    Every conversation around vendor management needs to begin with “What do you mean by that?” Only then can we home in on the scope and nature of what people are discussing. “Managing vendors” is too narrow because it often ignores many of the reasons organizations create VMIs in the first place: to reduce costs, to improve performance, to improve processes, to improve relationships, to improve communication, and to manage risk better.

    Vendor management is a strategic initiative that takes the big picture into account … navigating the cradle to grave lifecycle to get the most out of your interactions and relationships with your vendors. It is flexible and customizable; it is not plug and play or overly prescriptive. Tools, principles, templates, and concepts are adapted rather than adopted as is. Ultimately, you define what vendor management is for your organization.

    We look forward to helping you on your vendor management journey no matter what it looks like. But first, let’s have a conversation about how you want to define vendor management in your environment.

    This is a picture of Phil Bode, Principal  Research Director, Vendor Management at Info-Tech Research Group.

    Phil Bode
    Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Each year, IT organizations “outsource” tasks, activities, functions, and other items. During 2021:

    • Spend on as-a-service providers increased 38% over 2020.*
    • Spend on managed service providers increased 16% over 2020.*
    • IT service providers increased their merger and acquisition numbers by 47% over 2020.*

    *Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    This leads to more spend, less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

    Common Obstacles

    As new contracts are negotiated and existing contracts are renegotiated or renewed, there is a perception that the contracts will yield certain results, output, performance, solutions, or outcomes. The hope is that these will provide a measurable expected value to IT and the organization. Oftentimes, much of the expected value is never realized. Many organizations don’t have a VMI to help:

    • Ensure at least the expected value is achieved.
    • Improve on the expected value through performance management.
    • Significantly increase the expected value through a proactive VMI.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management is a proactive, cross-functional lifecycle. It can be broken down into four phases:

    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run
    • Review

    The Info-Tech process addresses all four phases and provides a step-by-step approach to configure and operate your VMI. The content in this blueprint helps you quickly establish your VMI and set a solid foundation for its growth and maturity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Vendor management is not a one-size-fits-all initiative. It must be configured:

    • For your environment, culture, and goals.
    • To leverage the strengths of your organization and personnel.
    • To focus your energy and resources on your critical vendors.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Spend on managed service providers and as-a-service providers continues to increase. In addition, IT services vendors continue to be active in the mergers and acquisitions arena. This increases the need for a VMI to help with the changing IT vendor landscape. In 2021, there was increases of:

    38%

    Spend on As-a-Service Providers

    16%

    Spend on Managed Services Providers

    47%

    IT Services Merger & Acquisition Growth (Transactions)

    Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    Executive Summary

    Common Obstacles

    When organizations execute, renew, or renegotiate a contract, there is an “expected value” associated with that contract. Without a robust VMI, most of the expected value will never be realized. With a robust VMI, the realized value significantly exceeds the expected value during the contract term.

    A contract’s realized value with and without a vendor management initiative

    Two bars are depicted, showing that vendor collaboration and vendor performance management exceed expected value with a VMI, but without VMI, 75% of a contract's expected value can disappear within 18 months.

    Source: Based on findings from Geller & Company, 2003.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    A sound, cyclical approach to vendor management will help you create a VMI that meets your needs and stays in alignment with your organization as they both change (i.e. mature and grow).

    This is an image of Info-Tech's approach to VMI.  It includes the following four steps: 01 - Plan; 02 - Build; 03 - Run; 04 - Review

    Info-Tech’s Methodology for Creating and Operating Your VMI

    Phase 1: Plan Phase 2: Build Phase 3: Run Phase 4: Review

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    Phase Outcomes

    This phase helps you organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI. This phase helps you configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan. This phase helps you begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI. This phase helps the VMI identify what it should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1

    Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. While there are commonalities and leading practices associated with vendor management, your initiative won’t look exactly like another organization’s. The key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs.

    Insight 2

    All vendors are not of equal importance to your organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization’s investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.

    Insight 3

    Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI’s ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates “informally,” starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

    Blueprint Deliverables

    The four phases of creating and running a vendor management initiative are supported with configurable tools, templates, and checklists to help you stay aligned internally and achieve your goals.

    VMI Tools and Templates

    This image contains two screenshots of Info-Tech's VMI Tools and Templates

    Build a solid foundation for your VMI and configure tools and templates to help you manage your vendor relationships.

    Key Deliverables:

    1. Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium
    2. Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium
    3. Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool
    4. Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    A suite of tools and templates to help you create and implement your vendor management initiative.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Identify and manage risk proactively.
    • Reduce costs and maximize value.
    • Increase visibility with your critical vendors.
    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Create a collaborative environment with key vendors.
    • Segment vendors to allocate resources more effectively and more efficiently.

    Business Benefits

    • Improve vendor accountability.
    • Increase collaboration between departments.
    • Improve working relationships with your vendors.
    • Create a feedback loop to address vendor or customer issues before they get out of hand or are more costly to resolve.
    • Increase access to meaningful data and information regarding important vendors.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    Using the Maturity Assessment and 90-Day Plan tools, track how well you are able to achieve your goals and objectives:

    • Did you meet the targeted maturity level for each maturity category as determined by the point system?
    • Did you finish each activity in the 90-Day Plan completely and on time?
    1-Year Maturity Roadmap(by Category) Target Maturity (Total Points) Actual Maturity (Total Points)
    Contracts 12 12
    Risk 8 7
    Vendor Selection 9 9
    Vendor Relationships 21 21
    VMI Operations 24 16
    90-Day Plan (by Activity) Activity Completed
    Finalize mission and goals; gain executive approval Yes
    Finalize OIC chart; gain buy-in from other departments Yes
    Classify top 40 vendors by spend Yes
    Create initial scorecard Yes
    Develop the business alignment meeting agenda Yes
    Conduct two business alignment meetings No
    Update job descriptions Yes
    Map two VMI processes No

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phases 2 & 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Mission statement and goals, scope, and strengths and obstacles.

    Call #5: Classification model.

    Call #9: Policies and procedures and reports.

    Call #12: Assess compliance, incorporate leading practices, leverage lessons learned, maintain internal alignment, and update governances.

    Call #2: Roles and responsibilities and process mapping.

    Call #6: Risk assessment.

    Call #10: 3-year roadmap.

    Call #3: Charter and vendor inventory.

    Call #7: Scorecards and feedback and business alignment meetings.

    Call #11: 90-day plan and quick wins.

    Call #4: Maturity assessment and VMI structure.

    Call #8: Relationship alignment document, vendor orientation, and job descriptions.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
    Plan Plan/Build/Run Build/Run Review

    Activities

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    Deliverables

    1. Completed Mission Statement and Goals
    2. List of Items In Scope and Out of Scope for the VMI
    3. List of Strengths and Obstacles for the VMI
    4. Completed OIC Chart
    5. Sample Process Map for One Process
    6. Vendor Inventory tab
    1. Completed Maturity Assessment
    2. Sample Job Descriptions and Phrases
    3. List of Attributes of a Valuable Vendor
    4. Configured Classification Model
    5. Configured Risk Assessment Tool
    6. Configured Scorecard and Feedback Questions
    7. Configured Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    1. Relationship Alignment Document Sample and Checklist
    2. Vendor Orientation Checklist
    3. Policies and Procedures Checklist
    4. Completed 3-Year Roadmap
    5. Completed 90-Day Plan
    6. List of Quick Wins
    7. List of Reports

    Phase 1: Plan

    Get Organized

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 1: Plan

    Get organized.

    Phase 1: Plan focuses on getting organized. Foundational elements (mission statement, goals, scope, strengths and obstacles, roles and responsibilities, and process mapping) will help you define your VMI. These and the other elements of this Phase will follow you throughout the process of standing up your VMI and running it.

    Spending time up front to ensure that everyone is on the same page will help avoid headaches down the road. The tendency is to skimp (or even skip) on these steps to get to “the good stuff.” To a certain extent, the process provided here is like building a house. You wouldn’t start building your dream home without having a solid blueprint. The same is true with vendor management. Leveraging vendor management tools and techniques without the proper foundation may provide some benefit in the short term, but in the long term it will ultimately be a house of cards waiting to collapse.

    Step 1.1: Mission statement and goals

    Identify why the VMI exists and what it will achieve.

    Whether you are starting your vendor management journey or are already down the path, it is important to know why the vendor management initiative exists and what it hopes to achieve. The easiest way to document this is with a written declaration in the form of a mission statement and goals. Although this is the easiest way to proceed, it is far from easy.

    The mission statement should identify at a high level the nature of the services provided by the VMI, who it will serve, and some of the expected outcomes or achievements. The mission statement should be no longer than one or two sentences.

    The complement to the mission statement is the list of goals for the VMI. Your goals should not be a reassertion of your mission statement in bullet format. At this stage it may not be possible to make them SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based), but consider making them as SMART as possible. Without some of the SMART parameters attached, your goals are more like dreams and wishes. At a minimum, you should be able to determine the level of success achieved for each of the VMI goals.

    Although the VMI’s mission statement will stay static over time (other than for significant changes to the VMI or organization as a whole), the goals should be re-evaluated periodically using a SMART filter and adjusted as needed.

    1.1.1: Mission statement and goals

    20-40 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the reasons why the VMI will exist.
    2. Review external mission statements for inspiration.
    3. Review internal mission statements from other areas to ensure consistency.
    4. Draft and document your mission statement in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
    5. Continue brainstorming and identify the high-level goals for the VMI.
    6. Review the list of goals and make them as SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based) as possible.
    7. Document your goals in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
    8. Obtain sign-off on the mission statement and goals from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Input

    • Brainstorming results
    • Mission statements from other internal and external sources

    Output

    • Completed mission statement and goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.2: Scope

    Determine what is in scope and out of scope for the VMI

    Regardless of where your VMI resides or how it operates, it will be working with other areas within your organization. Some of the activities performed by the VMI will be new and not currently handled by other groups or individuals internally; at the same time, some of the activities performed by the VMI may be currently handled by other groups or individuals internally. In addition, executives, stakeholders, and other internal personnel may have expectations or make assumptions about the VMI. As a result, there can be a lot of confusion about what the VMI does and doesn’t do, and the answers cannot always be found in the VMI’s mission statement and goals.

    One component of helping others understand the VMI landscape is formalizing the VMI scope. The scope will define boundaries for the VMI. The intent is not to fence itself off and keep others out but provide guidance on where the VMI’s territory begins and ends. Ultimately, this will help clarify the VMI’s roles and responsibilities, improve workflow, and reduce errant assumptions.

    When drafting your VMI scoping document, make sure you look at both sides of the equation (similar to what you would do when following best practices for a statement of work): Identify what is in scope and what is out of scope. Be specific when describing the individual components of the VMI scope, and make sure executives and stakeholders are on board with the final version.

    1.2.1: Scope

    20-40 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the activities and functions in scope and out of scope for the VMI.
      1. Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.
      2. Go back and forth between in scope and out of scope as needed; it is not necessary to list all of the in-scope items and then turn your attention to the out-of-scope items.
    2. Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity. An item may be in scope or out of scope but not both.
    3. Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.2 Scope, to document the results.
    4. Obtain sign-off on the scope from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Mission statement and goals

    Output

    • Completed list of items in and out of scope for the VMI

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.2 Scope

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.3: Strengths and obstacles

    Pinpoint the VMI’s strengths and obstacles.

    A SWOT analysis (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) is a valuable tool, but it is overkill for your VMI at this point. However, using a modified and simplified form of this tool (strengths and obstacles) will yield significant results and benefit the VMI as it grows and matures.

    Your output will be two lists: the strengths associated with the VMI and the obstacles facing the VMI. For example, strengths could include items such as smart people working within the VMI and executive support. Obstacles could include items such as limited headcount and training required for VMI staff.

    The goals are 1) to harness the strengths to help the VMI be successful and 2) to understand the impact of the obstacles and plan accordingly. The output can also be used to enlighten executives and stakeholders about the challenges associated with their directives or requests (e.g. human bandwidth may not be sufficient to accomplish some of the vendor management activities and there is a moratorium on hiring until the next budget year).

    For each strength identified, determine how you will or can leverage it when things are going well or when the VMI is in a bind. For each obstacle, list the potential impact on the VMI (e.g. scope, growth rate, and number of vendors that can actively be part of the VMI).

    As you do your brainstorming, be as specific as possible and validate your lists with stakeholders and executives as needed.

    1.3.1: Strengths and obstacles

    20-40 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the VMI’s strengths and obstacles.
      1. Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.
      2. Go back and forth between strengths and obstacles as needed; it is not necessary to list all of the strengths and then turn your attention to the obstacles.
      3. It is possible for an item to be a strength and an obstacle; when this happens, add details to distinguish the situations.
    2. Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity.
    3. Determine how you will leverage each strength and how you will manage each obstacle.
    4. Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles, to document the results.
    5. Obtain sign-off on the strengths and obstacles from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Mission statement and goals
    • Scope

    Output

    • Completed list of items impacting the VMI’s ability to be successful: strengths the VMI can leverage and obstacles the VMI must manage

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.4: Roles and responsibilities

    Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what.

    One crucial success factor for VMIs is gaining and maintaining internal alignment. There are many moving parts to an organization, and a VMI must be clear on the various roles and responsibilities related to the relevant processes. Some of this information can be found in the VMI’s scope, referenced in Step 1.2, but additional information is required to avoid stepping on each other’s toes since many of the processes require internal departments to work together. (For example, obtaining requirements for a request for proposal takes more than one person or one department to complete this process.) While it is not necessary to get too granular, it is imperative that you have a clear understanding of how the VMI activities will fit within the larger vendor management lifecycle (which is comprised of many sub processes) and who will be doing what.

    As we have learned through our workshops and guided implementations, a traditional RACI* or RASCI* chart does not work well for this purpose. These charts are not intuitive, and they lack the specificity required to be effective. For vendor management purposes, a higher-level view and a slightly different approach provide much better results.

    This step will lead your through the creation of an OIC* chart to determine vendor management lifecycle roles and responsibilities. Afterward, you’ll be able to say, “Oh, I see clearly who is involved in each part of the process and what their role is.”

    *RACI – Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed
    *RASCI – Responsible, Accountable, Support, Consulted, Informed
    *OIC – Owner, Informed, Contributor

    This is an image of a table which shows an example of which role would be responsible for which step

    Step 1.4: Roles and responsibilities (cont.)

    Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what.

    To start, define the vendor management lifecycle steps or process applicable to your VMI. Next, determine who participates in the vendor management lifecycle. There is no need to get too granular – think along the lines of departments, subdepartments, divisions, agencies, or however you categorize internal operational units. Avoid naming individuals other than by title; this typically happens when a person oversees a large group (e.g. the CIO [chief information officer] or the CPO [chief procurement officer]). Be thorough, but the chart can get out of hand quickly. For each role and step of the lifecycle, ask whether the entry is necessary – does it add value to the clarity of understanding the responsibilities associated with the vendor management lifecycle? Consider two examples, one for roles and one for lifecycle steps: 1) Is IT sufficient or do you need IT Operations and IT Development? 2) Is “negotiate contract documents” sufficient or do you need “negotiate the contract” and “negotiate the renewal”? The answer will always depend on your culture and environment, but be wary of creating a spreadsheet that requires an 85-inch monitor to view it in its entirety.

    After defining the roles (departments, divisions, agencies) and the vendor management lifecycle steps or process, assign one of three letters to each box in your chart:

    • O – Owner – who owns the process; they may also contribute to it.
    • I – Informed – who is informed about the progress or results of the process.
    • C – Contributor – who contributes or works on the process; it can be tangible or intangible contributions.

    This activity can be started by the VMI or done as a group with representatives from each of the named roles. If the VMI starts the activity, the resulting chart should be validated by the each of the named roles.

    1.4.1: Roles and responsibilities

    1-6 hours

    1. Meet with the participants and configure the OIC Chart in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.4 OIC Chart.
      1. Review the steps or activities across the top of the chart and modify as needed.
      2. Review the roles listed along the left side of the chart and modify as needed.
    2. For each activity or step across the top of the chart, assign each role a letter – O for owner of that activity or step; I for informed; or C for contributor. Use only one letter per cell.
    3. Work your way across the chart. Every cell should have an entry or be left blank if it is not applicable.
    4. Review the results and validate that every activity or step has an O assigned to it; there must be an owner for every activity or step.
    5. Obtain sign-off on the OIC chart from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • A list of activities or steps to complete a project, starting with requirements gathering and ending with ongoing risk management
    • A list of internal areas (departments, divisions, agencies, etc.) and stakeholders that contribute to completing a project

    Output

    • Completed OCI chart indicating roles and responsibilities for the VMI and other internal areas

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.4 OIC Chart

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Representatives from other areas as needed
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives as needed

    Step 1.5: Process mapping

    Diagram the workflow.

    Although policies and procedures are important, their nature can make it difficult to grasp how things work at a high level (or even at the detail level). To help bridge the gap, map the applicable processes (determined by how deep and wide you want to go) involving the VMI. To start, look at the OIC chart from Step 1.4. You can expand the breadth and depth of your mapping to include the VMI scope, the 3-year roadmap (see Step 2.9), and the processes driven by the day-to-day work within the VMI.

    Various mapping tools can be used. Three common approaches that can be mixed and matched are:

    • Traditional flowcharts.
    • Swimlane diagrams.
    • Work breakdown structures.
    This is an example of a Workflow Process Map

    Step 1.5: Process mapping (cont.)

    Diagram the workflow.

    Your goal is not to create an in-depth diagram for every step of the vendor management lifecycle. However, for steps owned by the VMI, the process map should include sufficient details for the owner and the contributors (see Step 1.4) to understand what is required of them to support that step in the lifecycle.

    For VMI processes that don’t interact with other departments, follow the same pattern as outlined above for steps owned by the VMI.

    Whatever methodology you use to create your process map, make sure it includes enough details so that readers and users can identify the following elements:

    • Input:
      • What are the inputs?
      • Where do the inputs originate or come from?
    • Process:
      • Who is involved/required for this step?
      • What happens to the inputs in this step?
      • What additional materials, tools, or resources are used or required during this step?
    • Output:
      • What are the outputs?
      • Where do the outputs go next?

    1.5.1: Process Mapping

    1-8 hours (or more)

    1. Meet with the participants and determine which processes you want to map.
      1. For processes owned by the VMI, map the entire process.
      2. For processes contributed to by the VMI, map the entire process at a high level and map the VMI portion of the process in greater detail.
    2. Select the right charts/diagrams for your output.
      1. Flowchart
      2. Swimlane diagram
      3. Modified SIPOC (Supplier, Input, Process, Output, Customer)
      4. WBS (work breakdown structure)
    3. Begin mapping the processes either in a tool or using sticky notes. You want to be able to move the steps and associated information easily; most people don’t map the entire process accurately or with sufficient detail the first time through. An iterative approach works best.
    4. Obtain signoff on the process maps from stakeholders and executives as required. A copy of the final output can be kept in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.5 Process Mapping, if desired.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Existing processes (formal, informal, documented, and undocumented)
    • OIC chart

    Output

    • Process maps for processes contributed to or owned by the VMI

    Materials

    • Sticky Notes
    • Flowchart/process mapping software or something similar
    • (Optional) Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.5 Process Mapping

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Representatives from other areas as needed
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.6: Charter

    Document how the VMI will operate.

    As you continue getting organized by working through steps 1.1-1.5, you may want to document your progress in a charter and add some elements. Basically, a charter is a written document laying out how the VMI will operate within the organization. It clearly states the VMI’s mission, goals, scope, roles and responsibilities, and vendor governance model. In addition, it can include a list of team members and sponsors.

    Whether you create a VMI charter will largely depend on:

    • Your organization’s culture.
    • Your organization’s formality.
    • The perceived value of creating a charter.

    If you decide to create a VMI charter, this is a good place in the process to create an initial draft. As you continue working through the blueprint and your VMI matures, update the VMI charter as needed.

    VMI Charter:

    • Purpose
    • Sponsors
    • Roles
    • Responsibilities
    • Governance

    1.6.1: Charter

    1-4 hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the template in Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.6 Charter.
    2. Determine whether the participants will use this template or add materials to your standard charter template.
    3. Complete as much of the charter as possible, knowing that some information may not be available until later.
    4. Return to the charter as needed until it is completed.
    5. Obtain sign-off on the charter from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Mission statement and goals
    • Scope
    • Strengths and obstacles
    • OIC chart
    • List of stakeholders and executives and their VMI roles and responsibilities

    Output

    • Completed VMI charter

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.6 Charter
    • Your organization’s standard charter document

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.7: Vendor inventory

    Compile a list of vendors and relevant vendor information.

    As you prepare your VMI for being operational, it’s critical to identify all of your current vendors providing IT products or services to the organization. This can be tricky and may depend on how you view things internally. For example, you may have traditional IT vendors that are managed by IT, and you may have IT vendors that are managed by other internal departments (shadow IT or out-in-the-open IT). If it wasn’t determined with the help of stakeholders and executives before now, make sure you establish the purview of the VMI at this point. What types of vendors are included and excluded from the VMI?

    You may find that a vendor can be included and excluded based on the product or service they provide. A vendor may provide a service that is managed by IT and a service that is managed/controlled by another department. In this instance, a good working relationship and clearly defined roles and responsibilities between the VMI and the other department will be required. But, it all starts with compiling a list of vendors and validating the VMI’s purview (and any limitations) for the vendors with stakeholders and executives.

    Step 1.7: Vendor inventory (cont.)

    Compile a list of vendors and relevant vendor information.

    At a minimum, the VMI should be able to quickly retrieve key information about each of “its” vendors:

    • Vendor Name
    • Classification (see Steps 2.1 and 3.1)
    • Categories of Service
    • Names of Products and Services Provided
    • Brief Descriptions of Products and Services Provided
    • Annualized Vendor Spend
    • Vendor Contacts
    • Internal Vendor Relationship Owner

    Not all of this information will be available at this point, but you can begin designing or configuring your tool to meet your needs. As your VMI enters Phase 3: Run and continues to mature, you will return to this tool and update the information. For example, the vendor classification category won’t be known until Phase 3, and it can change over time.

    1.7.1: Vendor inventory

    1-10 hours

    Meet with the participants and review the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory. Determine whether the VMI wants to collect and/or monitor additional information and make any necessary modifications to the tool.

    Enter the “Annual IT Vendor Spend” amount in the appropriate cell toward the top of the spreadsheet. This is for IT spend for vendor-related activities within the VMI’s scope; include shadow IT spend and “non-shadow” IT spend if those vendors will be included in the VMI’s scope.

    Populate the data fields for your top 50 vendors by annual spend; you may need multiple entries for the same vendor depending on the nature of the products and services they provide.

    Ignore the “Classification” column for now; you will return to this later when classification information is available.

    Ignore the “Percentage of IT Budget” column as well; it uses a formula to calculate this information.

    Input

    • Data from various internal and external sources such as accounts payable, contracts, and vendor websites

    Output

    • List of vendors with critical information required to manage relationships with key vendors

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory

    Participants

    • VMI team (directly)
    • Other internal and external personnel (indirectly)

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 1.8: Maturity assessment

    Establish a VMI maturity baseline and set an ideal future state.

    Knowing where you are and where you want to go are essential elements for any journey in the physical world, and the same holds true for your VMI journey. Start by assessing your current-state VMI maturity. This will provide you with a baseline to measure progress against. Next, using the same criteria, determine the level of VMI maturity you would like to achieve one year in the future. This will be your future-state VMI maturity. Lastly, identify the gaps and plot your course.

    The maturity assessment provides three main benefits:

    1. Focus – you’ll know what is important to you moving forward.
    2. 3-Year Roadmap (discussed more fully in Step 2.9) – you’ll have additional input for your short-term and long-term roadmap (1, 2, and 3 years out).
    3. Quantifiable Improvement – you’ll be able to measure your progress and make midcourse corrections when necessary.

    Step 1.8: Maturity assessment (cont.)

    Establish a VMI maturity baseline and set an ideal future state.

    The Info-Tech VMI Maturity Assessment tool evaluates your maturity across several criteria across multiple categories. Once completed, the assessment will specify:

    • A current-state score by category and overall.
    • A target-state score by category and overall.
    • A quantifiable gap for each criterion.
    • A priority assignment for each criterion.
    • A level of effort required by criterion to get from the current state to the target state.
    • A target due date by criterion for achieving the target state.
    • A rank order for each criterion (note: limit your ranking to your top 7 or 9).

    Many organizations will be tempted to mature too quickly. Resource constraints and other items from Step 1.3 (Strengths and Obstacles) will impact how quickly you can mature. Being aggressive is fine, but it must be tempered with a dose of reality. Otherwise, morale, perception, and results can suffer.

    1.8.1: Maturity assessment

    45-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Input, to complete the first part of this activity. Provide the required information indicated below.
      1. Review each statement in column B and enter a value in the “Current” column using the drop-down menus based on how much you disagree or agree (0-4) with the statement. This establishes a baseline maturity.
      2. Repeat this process for the “Future” column using a target date of one year from now to achieve this level. This is your desired maturity.
      3. Enter information regarding priority, level of effort, and target due date in the applicable columns using the drop-down menus. (Priority levels are critical, high, medium, low, and maintain; Levels of Effort are high, medium, and low; Target Due Dates are broken into timelines: 1-3 months, 4-6 months, 7-9 months, and 10-12 months.)
    2. Review the information on Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Output; use the Distribution Tables to help you rank your top priorities. Enter a unique number into the Priority (Rank) column. Limit your ranking to the top 7 to 9 activities to provide focus.

    Input

    • Knowledge of current VMI practices and desired future states

    Output

    • VMI maturity baseline
    • Desired VMI target maturity state (in one year)
    • Prioritized areas to improve and due dates
    • Graphs and tables to identify maturity deltas and track progress

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Input
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Output

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.9: Structure

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    There are two parts to the VMI structure:

    1. Organization Structure. Who owns the VMI – where does it fit on the organization chart?
    2. Reporting Structure. What is the reporting structure within the VMI – what are the job functions, titles, and solid and dotted lines of accountability?

    VMI Organization Structure

    The decision regarding who owns the VMI can follow one of two paths:

    1. The decision has already been made by the board of directors, executives, senior leadership, or stakeholders; OR
    2. The decision has not been made, and options will be reviewed and evaluated before it is implemented.

    Many organizations overlook the importance of this decision. The VMI’s position on the organization chart can aid or hinder its success. Whether the decision has already been made or not, this is the perfect time to evaluate the decision or options based on the following question: Why is the VMI being created and how will it operate? Review the documents you created during Steps 1.1-1.8 and other factors to answer this question.

    Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    Based on your work product from Steps 1.1-1.8 and other factors, select where the VMI will be best located from the following areas/offices or their equivalent:

    • Chief Compliance Officer (CCO)
    • Chief Information Officer (CIO)
    • Chief Financial Officer (CFO)
    • Chief Procurement Officer (CPO)
    • Chief Operating Officer (COO)
    • Other area

    Without the proper support and placement in the organization chart, the VMI can fail. It is important for the VMI to find a suitable home with a direct connection to one of the sponsors identified above and for the VMI lead to have significant stature (aka title) within the organization. For example, if the VMI lead is a “manager” level who is four reporting layers away from the chief officer/sponsor, the VMI will have an image issue within and outside of the sponsor’s organization (as well as within the vendor community). While this is not to say that the VMI lead should be a vice president* or senior director, our experience and research indicate that the VMI and the VMI lead will be taken more seriously when the VMI lead is at least a director level reporting directly to a CXO.

    *For purposes of the example above, the reporting structure hierarchy used is manager, senior manager, director, senior director, vice president, CXO.

    Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    VMI Reporting Structure

    As previously mentioned, the VMI reporting structure describes and identifies the job functions, titles, and lines of accountability. Whether you have a formal vendor management office or you are leveraging the principles of vendor management informally, your VMI reporting structure design will involve some solid lines and some dotted lines. In this instance, the dotted lines represent part-time participation or people/areas that will assist the VMI in some capacity. For example, if the VMI sits within IT, a dotted line to Procurement will show that a good working relationship is required for both parties to succeed; or a dotted line to Christina in Legal will indicate that Christina will be helping the VMI with legal issues.

    There is no one-size-fits-all reporting structure for VMIs, and your approach must leverage the materials from Steps 1.1-1.8, your culture, and your needs. By way of example, your VMI may include some or all of the following functions:

    • Contract Management
    • Relationship Management
    • Financial Management
    • Asset Management
    • Performance Management
    • Sourcing/Procurement
    • Risk Management

    Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    Once you’ve identified the functional groups, you can assign titles, responsibilities, and reporting relationships. A good diagram goes a long way to helping others understand your organization. Traditional organization charts work well with VMIs, but a target diagram allows for rapid absorption of the dotted-line relationships. Review the two examples below and determine an approach that works best for you.

    An organizational Chart is depicted.  At the top of the chart is: Office of the CIO.  Below that is: VMI: Legal; Accounting & Finance; Corporate Procurement; below that are the following: Vendor Risk Management; Vendor Reporting and Analysis; Asset Management; Performance Management; Contract Management; IT Procurement Three concentric circles are depicted.  In the inner circle is the term: VMI.  In the middle circle are the terms: Reporting & Analysis; Asset Mgmt; Contract Mgmt; Performance Mgmt; It Proc; Vendor Risk.  In the outer circle are the following terms: Compliance; Finance; HR; Accounting; Procurement; Business Units; Legal; IT

    1.9.1: Structure

    15-60 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review decisions that have been made or options that are available regarding the VMI’s placement in the organization chart.
      1. Common options include the Chief Information Officer (CIO), Chief Financial Officer (CFO), or Chief Procurement Officer (CPO).
      2. Less common but viable options include the Chief Compliance Officer (CCO), Chief Operating Officer (COO), or another area.
    2. Brainstorm and determine the job functions and titles
    3. Define the reporting structure within the VMI.
    4. Identify the “dotted line” relationships between the VMI and other internal areas.
    5. Using flowchart, org. chart, or other similar software, reduce your results to a graphic representation that indicates where the VMI resides, its reporting structure, and its dotted-line relationships.
    6. Obtain sign-off on the structure from stakeholders and executives as required. A copy of the final output can be kept in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.9 Structure, if desired.

    Input

    • Mission statement and goals
    • Scope
    • Maturity assessment results (current and target state)
    • Existing org. charts
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Completed org. chart with job titles and reporting structure

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip chart
    • Sticky notes
    • Flowchart/org. chart software or something similar
    • (Optional) Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.9 Structure

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • VMI sponsor
    • Stakeholders and executives

    Phase 2: Build

    Create and Configure Tools, Templates, and Processes

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals


    1.2 Scope

    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

    1.5 Process Mapping

    1.6 Charter

    1.7 Vendor Inventory

    1.8 Maturity Assessment

    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Human Resources
    • Legal
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 2: Build

    Create and configure tools, templates, and processes.

    Phase 2: Build focuses on creating and configuring the tools and templates that will help you run your VMI. Vendor management is not a plug-and-play environment, and unless noted otherwise, the tools and templates included with this blueprint require your input and thought. The tools and templates must work in concert with your culture, values, and goals. That will require teamwork, insights, contemplation, and deliberation.

    During this Phase, you’ll leverage the various templates and tools included with this blueprint and adapt them for your specific needs and use. In some instances, you’ll be starting with mostly a blank slate; while in others, only a small modification may be required to make it fit your circumstances. However, it is possible that a document or spreadsheet may need heavy customization to fit your situation. As you create your VMI, use the included materials for inspiration and guidance purposes rather than as absolute dictates.

    Step 2.1: Classification model

    Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool.

    One of the functions of a VMI is to allocate the appropriate level of vendor management resources to each vendor since not all vendors are of equal importance to your organization. While some people may be able intuitively to sort their vendors into vendor management categories, a more objective, consistent, and reliable model works best. Info-Tech’s COST model helps you assign your vendors to the appropriate vendor management category so that you can focus your vendor management resources where they will do the most good.

    COST is an acronym for Commodity, Operational, Strategic, and Tactical. Your vendors will occupy one of these vendor management categories, and each category helps you determine the nature of the resources allocated to that vendor, the characteristics of the relationship desired by the VMI, and the governance level used.

    The easiest way to think of the COST model is as a 2x2 matrix or graph. The model should be configured for your environment so that the criteria used for determining a vendor’s classification align with what is important to you and your organization. However, at this point in your VMI’s maturation, a simple approach works best. The Classification Model included with this blueprint requires minimal configuration to get you started and that is discussed on the activity slide associated with this Step 2.1.


    Speed
    Operational Strategic
    Commodity Tactical
    →→→
    Criticality and Risk to the Organization

    Step 2.1: Classification model (cont.)

    Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool.

    Common Characteristics by Vendor Management Category

    Operational Strategic
    • Low to moderate risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
    • Product or service used by more than one area
    • Price is a key negotiation point
    • Product or service is valued by the organization
    • Quality or the perception of quality is a differentiator (i.e. brand awareness)
    • Moderate to high risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
    • Few competitors and differentiated products and services
    • Product or service significantly advances the organization’s vision, mission, and success
    • Well-established in their core industry
    Commodity Tactical
    • Low risk and criticality; low spend and switching costs
    • Product or service is readily available from many sources
    • Market has many competitors and options
    • Relationship is transactional
    • Price is the main differentiator
    • Moderate to high risk and criticality; low to moderate spend and switching costs
    • Vendor offerings align with or support one or more strategic objectives
    • Often IT vendors “outside” of IT (i.e. controlled and paid for by other areas)
    • Often niche or new vendors

    Source: Compiled in part from Stephen Guth, “Vendor Relationship Management Getting What You Paid for (And More)”

    2.1.1: Classification Model

    15-30 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the spend ranges in Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration, for your environment.
    2. Sort the data from Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory, by spend; if you used multiple line items for a vendor in the Vendor Inventory tab, you will have to aggregate the spend data for this activity.
    3. Update cells F14-J14 in the Classification Model based on your actual data.
      1. Cell F14 – set the boundary at a point between the spend for your 10th and 11th ranked vendors. For example, if the 10th vendor by spend is $1,009,850 and the 11th vendor by spend is $980,763, the range for F14 would be $1,000,00+.
      2. Cell G14 – set the bottom of the range at a point between the spend for your 30th and 31st ranked vendors; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in F14.
      3. Cell H14 – set the bottom of the range slightly below the spend for your 50th ranked vendor; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in G14.
      4. Cells I14 and J14 – divide the remaining range in half and split it between the two cells; for J14 the range will be $0 to $1 less than the bottom range in I14.
    4. Ignore the other variables at this time.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    Input

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory

    Output

    • Configured Vendor Classification Tool

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.2: Risk assessment tool

    Identify risks to measure, monitor, and report on.

    One of the typical drivers of a VMI is risk management. Organizations want to get a better handle on the various risks their vendors pose. Vendor risks originate from many areas: financial, performance, security, legal, and many others. However, security risk is the high-profile risk and the one organizations often focus on almost exclusively, which leaves the organization vulnerable in other areas.

    Risk management is a program, not a project – there is no completion date. A proactive approach works best and requires continual monitoring, identification, and assessment. Reacting to risks after they occur can be costly and can have other detrimental effects on the organization. Any risk that adversely affects IT will adversely affect the entire organization.

    While the VMI won’t necessarily be quantifying or calculating the risk directly, it generally is the aggregator of risk information across the risk categories, which it then includes in its reporting function. (See Steps 2.12 and 3.8.)

    At a minimum, your risk management strategy should involve:

    • Identifying the risks you want to measure and monitor.
    • Identifying your risk appetite (the amount of risk you are willing to live with).
    • Measuring, monitoring, and reporting on the applicable risks.
    • Developing and deploying a risk management plan to minimize potential risk impact.

    Vendor risk is a fact of life, but you do have options for how you handle it. Be proactive and thoughtful in your approach, and focus your resources on what is important.

    2.2.1: Risk assessment tool

    30-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the risk indicators in Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool, Tab 1. Set Parameters, for your environment.
    2. Review the risk categories and determine which ones you will be measuring and monitoring.
    3. Review the risk indicators under each risk category and determine whether the indicator is acceptable as written, is acceptable with modifications, should be replaced, or should be deleted.
    4. Make the necessary changes to the risk indicators; these changes will cascade to each of the vendor tabs. Limit the number of risk indicators to no more than seven per risk category.
    5. Gain input and approval as needed from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    Input

    • Scope
    • OIC Chart
    • Process Maps
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Configured Vendor Classification Tool

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    A vendor management scorecard is a great tool for measuring, monitoring, and improving relationship alignment. In addition, it is perfect for improving communication between you and the vendor.

    Conceptually, a scorecard is similar to a report card you received when you were in school. At the end of a learning cycle, you received feedback on how well you did in each of your classes. For vendor management, the scorecard is also used to provide periodic feedback, but there are some different nuances and some additional benefits and objectives when compared to a report card.

    Although scorecards can be used in a variety of ways, the main focus here will be on vendor management scorecards – contract management, project management, and other types of scorecards will not be included in the materials covered in this Step 2.3 or in Step 3.4.

    Category 1 Score
    Vendor Objective A 4
    Objective B 3
    Objective C 5
    Objective D 4 !

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Anatomy

    The Info-Tech Scorecard includes five areas:

    • Measurement Categories. Measurement categories help organize the scorecard. Limit the number of measurement categories to three to five; this allows the parties to stay focused on what’s important. Too many measurement categories make it difficult for the vendor to understand the expectations.
    • Criteria. The criteria describe what is being measured. Create criteria with sufficient detail to allow the reviewers to fully understand what is being measured and to evaluate it. Criteria can be objective or subjective. Use three to five criteria per measurement category.
    • Measurement Category Weights. Not all of your measurement categories may be of equal importance to you; this area allows you to give greater weight to a measurement category when compiling the overall score.
    • Rating. Reviewers will be asked to assign a score to each criteria using a 1 to 5 scale.
    • Comments. A good scorecard will include a place for reviewers to provide additional information regarding the rating or other items that are relevant to the scorecard.

    An overall score is calculated based on the rating for each criteria and the measurement category weights.

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Goals and Objectives

    Scorecards can be used for a variety of reasons. Some of the common ones are listed below:

    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Convey expectations to the vendor.
    • Identify and recognize top vendors.
    • Increase alignment between the parties.
    • Improve communication with the vendor.
    • Compare vendors across the same criteria.
    • Measure items not included in contract metrics.
    • Identify vendors for “strategic alliance” consideration.
    • Help the organization achieve specific goals and objectives.
    • Identify and resolve issues before they impact performance or the relationship.

    Identifying your scorecard drivers first will help you craft a suitable scorecard.

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Info-Tech recommends starting with simple scorecards to allow you and the vendors to acclimate to the new process and information. As you build your scorecards, keep in mind that internal personnel will be scoring the vendors and the vendors will be reviewing the scorecard. Make your scorecard easy for your personnel to fill out and composed of meaningful content to drive the vendor in the right direction. You can always make the scorecard more complex in the future.

    Our recommendation of five categories is provided below. Choose three to five categories to help you accomplish your scorecard goals and objectives:

    1. Timeliness – responses, resolutions, fixes, submissions, completions, milestones, deliverables, invoices, etc.
    2. Cost – total cost of ownership, value, price stability, price increases/decreases, pricing models, etc.
    3. Quality – accuracy, completeness, mean time to failure, bugs, number of failures, etc.
    4. Personnel – skilled, experienced, knowledgeable, certified, friendly, trustworthy, flexible, accommodating, etc.
    5. Risk – adequate contractual protections, security breaches, lawsuits, finances, audit findings, etc.

    Some criteria may be applicable in more than one category. The categories above should cover at least 80% of the items that are important to your organization. The general criteria listed for each category is not an exhaustive list, but most things break down into time, money, quality, people, and risk issues.

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Additional Considerations

    • Even a good rating system can be confusing. Make sure you provide some examples or a way for reviewers to discern the differences between 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Don’t assume your “Rating Key” will be intuitive.
    • When assigning weights, don’t go lower than 10% for any measurement category. If the weight is too low, it won’t be relevant enough to have an impact on the total score. If it doesn’t “move the needle,” don’t include it.
    • Final sign-off on the scorecard template should occur outside of the VMI. The heavy lifting can be done by the VMI to create it, but the scorecard is for the benefit of the organization overall and those impacted by the vendors specifically. You may end up playing arbiter or referee, but the scorecard is not the exclusive property of the VMI. Try to reach consensus on your final template whenever possible.
    • You should notice improved ratings and total scores over time for your vendors. One explanation for this is the Pygmalion Effect: “The Pygmalion [E]ffect describes situations where someone’s high expectations improves our behavior and therefore our performance in a given area. It suggests that we do better when more is expected of us.”* Convey your expectations and let the vendors’ competitive juices take over.
    • While you’re creating your scorecard and materials to explain the process to internal personnel, identify those pieces that will help you explain it to your vendors as part of your vendor orientation (see steps 2.6 and 3.4). Leveraging pre-existing materials is a great shortcut.

    *Source: The Decision Lab, 2020

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Vendor Feedback

    After you’ve built your scorecard, turn your attention to the second half of the equation – feedback from the vendor. A communication loop cannot be successful without the dialogue flowing both ways. While this can happen with just a scorecard, a mechanism specifically geared toward the vendor providing you with feedback improves communication, alignment, and satisfaction.

    You may be tempted to create a formal scorecard for the vendor to use. Our recommendation is to avoid that temptation until later in your maturity or development of the VMI. You’ll be implementing a lot of new processes, deploying new tools and templates, and getting people to work together in new ways. Work on those things first.

    For now, implement an informal process for obtaining information from the vendor. Start by identifying information that you will find useful, information that will allow you to improve overall, to reduce waste or time, to improve processes, to identify gaps in skills. Incorporate these items into your business alignment meetings (see Steps 2.4 and 3.5). Create three to five good questions to ask the vendor and include these in the business alignment meeting agenda. The goal is to get meaningful feedback, and that starts with asking good questions.

    Keep it simple at first. When the time is right, you can build a more formal feedback form or scorecard. Don’t be in a rush though. So long as the informal method works, keep using it.

    2.3.1: Scorecards and feedback

    30-60 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for your scorecard measurement categories:
      1. What makes a vendor valuable to your organization?
      2. What differentiates a “good” vendor from a “bad” vendor?
      3. What items would you like to measure and provide feedback to the vendor to improve performance, the relationship, risk, and other areas?
    2. Select three, but no more than five, of the following measure categories: timeliness, cost, quality, personnel, and risk.
    3. Within each measurement category, list two or three criteria that you want to measure and track for your vendors; choose items that are as universal as possible rather than being applicable to one vendor or one vendor type.
    4. Assign a weight to each measurement category, ensuring that the total weight is 100% for all measurement categories.
    5. Document your results as you go in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Scorecard.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Configured scorecard template

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Scorecard

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    2.3.2: Scorecards and feedback

    15-30 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for feedback to seek from your vendors during your business alignment meetings. During the brainstorming, identify questions to ask the vendor about your organization that will:
      1. Help you improve the relationship.
      2. Help you improve your processes or performance.
      3. Help you improve ongoing communication.
      4. Help you evaluate your personnel.
    2. Identify the top five questions you want to include in your business alignment meeting agenda. (Note: you may need to refine the actual questions from the brainstorming activity before they are ready to include in your business alignment meeting agenda.)
    3. Document both your brainstorming activity and your final results in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback. The brainstorming questions can be used in the future as your VMI matures and your feedback transforms from informal to formal. The final results will be used in Steps 2.4 and 3.5.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Feedback questions to include with the business alignment meeting agenda

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda

    Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

    A business alignment meeting (BAM) is a great, multi-faceted tool to ensure the customer and the vendor stay focused on what is important to the customer at a high level. BAMs are not traditional “operational” meetings where the parties get into the details of the contracts, deal with installation problems, address project management issues, or discuss specific cost overruns. The main focus of the BAM is the scorecard (see Step 2.3), but other topics are discussed and other purposes are served. For example, you can use the BAM to develop the relationship with the vendor’s leadership team so that if escalation is ever needed, your organization is more than just a name on a spreadsheet or customer list; you can learn about innovations the vendor is working on (without the meeting turning into a sales call); you can address high-level performance trends and request corrective action as needed; you can clarify your expectations; you can educate the vendor about your industry, culture, and organization; and you can learn more about the vendor.

    As you build your BAM agenda, someone in your organization may say, “Oh, that’s just a quarterly business review (QBR) or top-to-top meeting.” However, in most instances, an existing QBR or top-to-top meeting is not the same as a BAM. Using the term QBR or top-to-top meeting instead of BAM can lead to confusion internally. The VMI may say to the business unit, Procurement, or another department, “We’re going to start running some QBRs for our strategic vendors.” The typical response is, “There’s no need to do that. We already run QBRs/top-to-top meetings with our important vendors.” This may be accompanied by an invitation to join their meeting, where you may be an afterthought, have no influence, and get five minutes at the end to talk about your agenda items. Keep your BAM separate so that it meets your needs.

    Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda (cont.)

    Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

    As previously noted, using the term BAM more accurately depicts the nature of the VMI meeting and prevents confusion internally with other meetings already occurring. In addition, hosting the BAM yourself rather than piggybacking onto another meeting ensures that the VMI’s needs are met. The VMI will set and control the BAM agenda and determine the invite list for internal personnel and vendor personnel. As you may have figured out by now, having the right customer and vendor personnel attend will be essential.

    BAMs are conducted at the vendor level … not the contract level. As a result, the frequency of the BAMs will depend on the vendor’s classification category (see Steps 2.1 and 3.1). General frequency guidelines are provided below, but they can be modified to meet your goals:

    • Commodity Vendors – Not applicable
    • Operational Vendors – Biannually or annually
    • Strategic Vendors – Quarterly
    • Tactical Vendors – Quarterly or biannually

    BAMs can help you achieve some additional benefits not previously mentioned:

    • Foster a collaborative relationship with the vendor.
    • Avoid erroneous assumptions by the parties.
    • Capture and provide a record of the relationship (and other items) over time.

    Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda (cont.)

    Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

    As with any meeting, building the proper agenda will be one of the keys to an effective and efficient meeting. A high-level BAM agenda with sample topics is set out below:

    BAM Agenda

    • Opening Remarks
      • Welcome and introductions
      • Review of previous minutes
    • Active Discussion
      • Review of open issues
      • Scorecard and feedback
      • Current status of projects to ensure situational awareness by the vendor
      • Roadmap/strategy/future projects
      • Accomplishments
    • Closing Remarks
      • Reinforce positives (good behavior, results, and performance, value added, and expectations exceeded)
      • Recap
    • Adjourn

    2.4.1: Business alignment meeting agenda

    20-45 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the sample agenda in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.
    2. Using the sample agenda as inspiration and brainstorming activities as needed, create a BAM agenda tailored to your needs.
      1. Select the items from the sample agenda applicable to your situation.
      2. Add any items required based on your brainstorming.
      3. Add the feedback questions identified during Activity 2.3.2 and documented in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback.
    3. Gain input and approval from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required or appropriate.
    4. Document the final BAM agenda in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback

    Output

    • Configured BAM agenda

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.5: Relationship alignment document

    Draft a document to convey important VMI information to your vendors.

    Throughout this blueprint, alignment is mentioned directly (e.g. business alignment meetings [Steps 2.4 and 3.5]) or indirectly implied. Ensuring you and your vendors are on the same page, have clear and transparent communication, and understand each other’s expectations is critical to fostering strong relationships. One component of gaining and maintaining alignment with your vendors is the relationship alignment document (RAD). Depending upon the scope of your VMI and what your organization already has in place, your RAD will fill in the gaps on various topics.

    Early in the VMI’s maturation, the easiest approach is to develop a short document (i.e. 1 page) or a pamphlet (i.e. the classic trifold) describing the rules of engagement when doing business with your organization. The RAD can convey expectations, policies, guidelines, and other items. The scope of the document will depend on 1) what you believe is important for the vendors to understand, and 2) any other similar information already provided to the vendors.

    The first step to drafting a RAD is to identify what information vendors need to know to stay on your good side. For example, you may want vendors to know about your gift policy (e.g. employees may not accept gifts from vendors above a nominal value such as a pen or mousepad). Next, compare your list of what vendors need to know and determine if the content is covered in other vendor-facing documents such as a vendor code of conduct or your website’s vendor portal. Lastly, create your RAD to bridge the gap between what you want and what is already in place. In some instances, you may want to include items from other documents to reemphasize them with the vendor community.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The RAD can be used with all vendors regardless of classification category. It can be sent directly to the vendors or given to them during vendor orientation (see Step 3.3)

    2.5.1: Relationship alignment document

    1-4 hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the RAD sample and checklist in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc.
    2. Determine:
      1. Whether you will create one RAD for all vendors or one RAD for strategic vendors and another RAD for tactical and operational vendors; whether you will create a RAD for commodity vendors.
      2. The concepts you want to include in your RAD(s).
      3. The format for your RAD(s) – traditional, pamphlet, or other.
      4. Whether signoff or acknowledgement will be required by the vendors.
    3. Draft your RAD(s) and work with other internal areas such as Marketing to create a consistent brand for the RADS and Legal to ensure consistent use and preservation of trademarks or other intellectual property rights and other legal issues.
    4. Review other vendor-facing documents (e.g. supplier code of conduct, onsite safety and security protocols) for consistencies between them and the RAD(s).
    5. Obtain signoff on the RAD(s) from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Legal, Marketing, and others as needed.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Vendor-facing documents, policies, and procedures

    Output

    • Completed relationship alignment document(s)

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Marketing, as needed
    • Legal, as needed

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 01 - Orientation; 02 - Reorientation; 03 - Debrief

    Your organization is unique. It may have many similarities with other organizations, but your culture, risk tolerance, mission, vision, and goals, finances, employees, and “customers” (those that depend on you) make it different. The same is true of your VMI. It may have similar principles, objectives, and processes to other organizations’ VMIs, but yours is still unique. As a result, your vendors may not fully understand your organization and what vendor management means to you.

    Vendor orientation is another means to helping you gain and maintain alignment with your important vendors, educate them on what is important to you, and provide closure when/if the relationship with the vendor ends. Vendor orientation is comprised of three components, each with a different function:

    • Orientation
    • Reorientation
    • Debrief

    Vendor orientation focuses on the vendor management pieces of the puzzle (e.g. the scorecard process) rather than the operational pieces (e.g. setting up a new vendor in the system to ensure invoices are processed smoothly).

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 01 - Orientation

    Orientation

    Orientation is conceptually similar to new hire orientation for employees at your organization. Generally conducted as a meeting, orientation provides your vendors with the information they need to be successful when working with your organization. Sadly, this is often overlooked by customers; it can take months or years for vendors to figure it out by themselves. By controlling the narrative and condensing the timeline, vendor relationships and performance improve more rapidly.

    A partial list of topics for orientation is set out below:

    • Your organization’s structure
    • Your organization’s culture
    • Your relationship expectations
    • Your governances (VMI and other)
    • Their vendor classification designation (commodity, operational, strategic, or tactical)
    • The scorecard process
    • Business alignment meetings
    • Relationship alignment documents

    In short, this is the first step toward building (or continuing to build) a robust, collaborative, mutually beneficial relationship with your important vendors.

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 02 - Reorientation

    Reorientation

    Reorientation is either identical or similar to orientation, depending upon the circumstances. Reorientation occurs for a number of reasons, and each reason will impact the nature and detail of the reorientation content. Reorientation occurs whenever:

    • There is a significant change in the vendor’s products or services.
    • The vendor has been through a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.
    • A significant contract renewal/renegotiation has recently occurred.
    • Sufficient time has passed from orientation; commonly 2 to 3 years.
    • The vendor has been placed in a “performance improvement plan” or “relationship improvement plan” protocol.
    • Significant turnover has occurred within your organization (executives, key stakeholders, and/or VMI personnel).
    • Substantial turnover has occurred at the vendor at the executive or account management level.
    • The vendor has changed vendor classification categories after the most current classification.

    As the name implies, the goal is to refamiliarize the vendor with your current VMI situation, governances, protocols, and expectations. The drivers for reorientation will help you determine its scope, scale, and frequency.

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 03 - Debrief

    Debrief

    To continue the analogy from orientation, debrief is similar to an exit interview for an employee when their employment is terminated. In this case, debrief occurs when the vendor is no longer an active vendor with your organization – all contracts have terminated or expired, and no new business with the vendor is anticipated within the next three months.

    Similar to orientation and reorientation, debrief activities will be based on the vendor’s classification category within the COST model. Strategic vendors don’t go away very often; usually, they transition to operational or tactical vendors first. However, if a strategic vendor is no longer providing products or services to you, dig a little deeper into their experiences and allocate extra time for the debrief meeting.

    The debrief should provide you with feedback on the vendor’s experience with your organization and their participation in your VMI. In addition, it can provide closure for both parties since the relationship is ending. Be careful that the debrief does not turn into a finger-pointing meeting or therapy session for the vendor. It should be professional and productive; if it is going off the rails, terminate the meeting before more damage can occur.

    End the debrief on a high note if possible. Thank the vendor, highlight its key contributions, and single out any personnel who went above and beyond. You never know when you will be doing business with this vendor again – don’t burn bridges!

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    • As you create your vendor orientation materials, focus on the message you want to convey.
    • For orientation and reorientation:
      • What is important to you that vendors need to know?
      • What will help the vendors understand more about your organization … your VMI?
      • What and how are you different from other organizations overall … in your “industry”?
      • What will help them understand your expectations?
      • What will help them be more successful?
      • What will help you build the relationship?
    • For debrief:
      • What information or feedback do you want to obtain?
      • What information or feedback to you want to give?
    • The level of detail you provide strategic vendors during orientation and reorientation may be different from the information you provide tactical and operational vendors. Commodity vendors are not typically involved in the vendor orientation process. The orientation meetings can be conducted on a one-to-one basis for strategic vendors and a one-to-many basis for operational and tactical vendors; reorientation and debrief are best conducted on a one-to-one basis. Lastly, face-to-face or video meetings work best for vendor orientation; voice-only meetings, recorded videos, or distributing only written materials seldom hit their mark or achieve the desired results.

    2.6.1: Vendor orientation

    1 to several hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the Phase Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.6 Vendor Orientation.
      1. Use the orientation checklist to identify the materials you want to create for your orientation meetings.
      2. Use the reorientation checklist to identify the materials you want to create for your reorientation meetings.
    2. The selections can be made by classification category (i.e. different items can apply to strategic, operational, and tactical vendors).
    3. Create the materials and seek input and/or approval from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as needed.
    4. Use the debrief section of the tool to create an agenda, list the questions you want to ask vendors, and list information you want to provide to vendors. The agenda, questions, and information can be segregated by classification category.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Agendas and materials for orientation, reorientation, and debrief

    Materials

    • Phase Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.6 Vendor Orientation

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.7: Job descriptions

    Ensure new and existing job descriptions are up to date.

    Based on your work product from Steps 1.1-1.9, it’s time to start drafting new or modifying existing job descriptions applicable to the VMI team members. Some of the VMI personnel may be dedicated full-time to the VMI, while others may be supporting the VMI on a part-time basis. At a minimum, create or modify your job descriptions based on the categories set out below. Remember to get the internal experts involved so that you stay true to your environment and culture.

    01 Title

    This should align overall with what the person will be doing and what the person will be responsible for. Your hands may be tied with respect to titles, but try to make them intuitively descriptive if possible.

    02 Duties

    This is the main portion of the job description. List the duties, responsibilities, tasks, activities, and results expected. Again, there may be some limitations imposed by your organization, but be as thorough as possible.

    03 Qualifications

    This tends to be a gray area for many organizations, with the qualifications, certifications, and experience desired expressed in “ranges” so that good candidates are not eliminated from consideration unnecessarily.

    2.7.1: Job descriptions

    1 to several hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the VMI structure from Step 1.9.
      1. List the positions that require new job descriptions.
      2. List the positions that require updated job descriptions.
    2. Review the other Phase 1 work product and list the responsibilities, tasks, and functions that need to be incorporated into the new and updated job descriptions.
    3. Review the sample VMI job descriptions and sample VMI job description language in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions, and identify language and concepts you want to include in the new and revised job descriptions.
    4. Using your template, draft the new job descriptions and modify the existing job descriptions to synchronize with the VMI structure. Work with other internal areas such as Human Resources to ensure cultural fit and compliance.
    5. Obtain input and signoff on the job descriptions from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Human Resources, and others as needed.
    6. Document your final job descriptions in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Existing job descriptions
    • Work product from Phase 1

    Output

    • Job descriptions for new positions
    • Updated job descriptions for existing positions

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Human Resources (as needed)
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.8: Policies and procedures

    Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

    Policies and procedures are often thought of as boring documents that are 1) tedious to create, 2) seldom read after creation, and 3) only used to punish people when they do something “wrong.” However, when done well, these documents:

    • Communicate expectations.
    • Capture institutional knowledge.
    • Provide guidance for decision making.
    • Help workers avoid errors and minimize risk.
    • Ensure regulatory and organizational compliance.
    • List the steps required to achieve consistent results.

    Definitions of Policies and Procedures

    Policies and procedures are essential, but they are often confused with each other. A policy is a rule, guideline, or framework for making decisions. For example, in the vendor management space, you may want a policy indicating your organization’s view on gifts from vendors. A procedure is a set of instructions for completing a task or activity. For example, staying in the vendor management space, you may want a procedure to outline the process for classifying vendors.

    Step 2.8: Policies and procedures (cont.)

    Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

    Start With Your Policy/Procedure Template or Create One for Consistency

    When creating policies and procedures, follow your template. If you don’t have one (or want to see if anything is missing from your template) the following list of potential components for your governance documents is provided.* Not every concept is required. Use your judgment and err on the side of caution when drafting; balance readability and helpfulness against over documenting and over complicating.

    • Descriptive Title
    • Policy Number
    • Brief Overview
    • Purpose
    • Scope
    • The Policy or Procedure
    • Definitions
    • Revision Date
    • History
    • Related Documents
    • Keywords

    Step 2.8: Policies and procedures (cont.)

    Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

    Although they are not ever going to be compared to page-turning novels, policies and procedures can be improved by following a few basic principles. By following the guidelines set out below, your VMI policies and procedures will contribute to the effectiveness of your initiative.*

    • Use short sentences.
    • Organize topics logically.
    • Use white space liberally.
    • Use mandatory language.
    • Use gender-neutral terms.
    • Write with an active voice.
    • Avoid jargon when possible.
    • Use a consistent “voice” and tone.
    • Use pictures or diagrams when they will help.
    • Write in the same tense throughout the document.
    • Use icons and colors to designate specific elements.
    • Make sure links to other policies and procedures work.
    • Define all acronyms and jargon (when it must be used).
    • Avoid a numbering scheme with more than three levels.

    *Adapted in part from smartsheet.com

    Info-Tech Insight

    Drafting policies and procedures is an iterative process that requires feedback from the organization’s leadership team.

    2.8.1: Policies and procedures

    Several hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the sample policies and procedures topics in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures.
    2. Determine:
      1. The concepts you want to include in your policies and procedures; brainstorm for any additional concepts you want to include.
      2. The format/template for your policies and procedures.
    3. Draft your policies and procedures based on the sample topics and your brainstorming activity. Work with other internal areas such as Legal and Human Resources to ensure cultural and environmental fit within your organization.
    4. Obtain input and signoff on the policies and procedures from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Legal, Human Resources, and others as needed.
    5. Document your final policies and procedures in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures.
    6. Publish your policies and procedures and conduct training sessions or awareness sessions as needed.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Existing policies and procedures (if any)
    • Existing policies and procedures template (if any)
    • Scope
    • OIC chart
    • Process maps
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • VMI policies and procedures

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Legal and Human Resources (as needed)
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.9: 3-year roadmap

    Plot your path at a high level.

    The VMI exists in many planes concurrently: 1) it operates both tactically and strategically, and 2) it focuses on different timelines or horizons (e.g. the past, the present, and the future). Creating a 3-year roadmap facilitates the VMI’s ability to function effectively across these multiple landscapes.

    The VMI roadmap will be influenced by many factors. The work product from Phase 1: Plan, input from executives, stakeholders, and internal clients, and the direction of the organization as a whole are great sources of information as you begin to build your roadmap.

    To start, identify what you would like to accomplish in Year 1. This is arguably the easiest year to complete: budgets are set (or you have a good idea what the budget will look like), personnel decisions have been made, resources have been allocated, and other issues impacting the VMI are known with a higher degree of certainty than any other year. This does not mean things won’t change during the first year of the VMI, but expectations are usually lower and the short event horizon makes things more predictable during the Year-1 ramp-up period.

    Years 2 and 3 are more tenuous, but the process is the same: identify what you would like to accomplish or roll out in each year. Typically, the VMI maintains the Year 1 plan into subsequent years and adds to the scope or maturity. For example, you may start Year 1 with BAMs and scorecards for three of your strategic vendors; during Year 2, you may increase that to five vendors; and during Year 3, you may increase that to nine vendors. Or, you may not conduct any market research during Year 1, waiting to add it to your roadmap in Year 2 or 3 as you mature.

    Breaking things down by year helps you identify what is important and the timing associated with your priorities. A conservative approach is recommended. It is easy to overcommit, but the results can be disastrous and painful.

    2.9.1: 3-year roadmap

    45-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate Year 1 of your 3-year roadmap with your existing fiscal year or reporting year. Year 1 may be shorter or longer than a calendar year.
    2. Review the VMI activities listed in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.9 3-Year Roadmap. Use brainstorming and your prior work product from Phase 1 and Phase 2 to identify additional items for the roadmap and add them at the bottom of the spreadsheet.
    3. Starting with the first activity, determine when that activity will begin and put an X in the corresponding column; if the activity is not applicable, leave it blank or insert N/A.
    4. Go back to the top of the list and add information as needed.
      1. For any Year-1 or Year-2 activities, add an X in the corresponding columns if the activity will be expanded/continued in subsequent periods (e.g. if a Year 2 activity will continue in Year 3, put an X in Year 3 as well).
      2. Use the comments column to provide clarifying remarks or additional insights related to your plans or “X’s.” For example, “Scorecards begin in Year 1 with three vendors and will roll out to five vendors in Year 2 and nine vendors in Year 3.”
    5. Obtain signoff from stakeholders, sponsors, and executives as needed.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Phase 1 work product
    • Steps 2.1-2.8 work product
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • High level 3-year roadmap for the VMI

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.9 3-Year Roadmap

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.10: 90-day plan

    Pave your short-term path with a series of detailed quarterly plans.

    Now that you have prepared a 3-year roadmap, it’s time to take the most significant elements from the first year and create action plans for each three-month period. Your first 90-day plan may be longer or shorter if you want to sync to your fiscal or calendar quarters. Aligning with your fiscal year can make it easier for tracking and reporting purposes; however, the more critical item is to make sure you have a rolling series of four 90-day plans to keep you focused on the important activities and tasks throughout the year.

    The 90-day plan is a simple project plan that will help you measure, monitor, and report your progress. Use the Info-Tech tool to help you track:

    • Activities
    • Tasks comprising each activity
    • Who will be performing the tasks
    • An estimate of the time required per person per task
    • An estimate of the total time to achieve the activity
    • A due date for the activity
    • A priority of the activity

    The first 90-day plan will have the greatest level of detail and should be as thorough as possible; the remaining three 90-day plans will each have less detail for now. As you approach the middle of the first 90-day plan, start adding details to the next 90-day plan; toward the end of the first quarter add a high-level 90-day plan to the end of the chain. Continue repeating this cycle each quarter and consult the 3-year roadmap and the leadership team as necessary.

    90 Days

    2.10.1: 90-day plan

    45-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate the first 90-day plan with your existing fiscal year or reporting cycles. Your first plan may be shorter or longer than 90 days.
    2. Looking at the Year 1 section of the 3-year roadmap, identify the activities that will be started during the next 90 days.
    3. Using the Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 90-Day Plan, enter the following information into the spreadsheet for each activity to be accomplished during the next 90 days:
      1. Activity description
      2. Tasks required to complete the activity (be specific and descriptive)
      3. The people who will be performing each task
      4. The estimated number of hours required to complete each task
      5. The start date and due date for each task or the activity
    4. Validate the tasks are a complete list for each activity and the people performing the tasks have adequate time to complete the tasks by the due date(s).
    5. Assign a priority to each activity.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • 3-year roadmap
    • Phase 1 work product
    • Steps 2.1-2.9 work product
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Detailed plan for the VMI for the next quarter or 90 days

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 90-Day Plan

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.11: Quick wins

    Identify potential short-term successes to gain momentum and show value immediately.

    As the final step in the timeline trilogy, you are ready to identify some quick wins for the VMI. Using the first 90-day plan and a brainstorming activity, create a list of things you can do in 15 to 30 days that add value to your initiative and build momentum.

    As you evaluate your list of potential candidates, look for things that:

    • Are achievable within the stated timeline.
    • Don’t require a lot of effort.
    • Involve stopping a certain process, activity, or task; this is sometimes known as a “stop doing stupid stuff” approach.
    • Will reduce or eliminate inefficiencies; this is sometimes known as the war on waste.
    • Have a moderate to high impact or bolster the VMI’s reputation.

    As you look for quick wins, you may find that everything you identify does not meet the criteria. That’s ok … don’t force the issue. Return your focus to the 90-day plan and 3-year roadmap, and update those documents if the brainstorming activity associated with this Step 2.11 identified anything new.

    2.11.1: Quick wins

    15-30 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the 3-year roadmap and 90-day plan. Determine if any item on either document can be completed:
      1. Quickly (30 days or less)
      2. With minimal effort
      3. To provide or show moderate to high levels of value or provide the VMI with momentum
    2. Brainstorm to identify any other items that meet the criteria in step 1 above.
    3. Compile a comprehensive list of these items and select up to five to pursue.
    4. Document the list in the Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.11 Quick Wins.
    5. Manage the quick wins list and share the results with the VMI team and applicable stakeholders and executives.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • 3-year roadmap
    • 90-day plan
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • A list of activities that require low levels of effort to achieve moderate to high levels of value in a short period

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.11 Quick Wins

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.12: Reports

    Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

    Issuing reports is a critical piece of the VMI since the VMI is a conduit of information for the organization. It may be aggregating risk data from internal areas, conducting vendor research, compiling performance data, reviewing market intelligence, or obtaining relevant statistics, feedback, comments, facts, and figures from other sources. Holding onto this information minimizes the impact a VMI can have on the organization; however, the VMI’s internal clients, stakeholders, and executives can drown in raw data and ignore it completely if it is not transformed into meaningful, easily-digested information.

    Before building a report, think about your intended audience:

    • What information are they looking for … what will help them understand the big picture?
    • What level of detail is appropriate, keeping in mind the audience may not be like-minded?
    • What items are universal to all of the readers and what items are of interest to one or two readers?
    • How easy or hard will it be to collect the data … who will be providing it, how time consuming will it be?
    • How accurate, valid, and timely will the data be?
    • How frequently will each report need to be issued?

    Step 2.12: Reports (cont.)

    Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

    Use the following guidelines to create reports that will resonate with your audience:

    • Value information over data, but sometimes data does have a place in your report.
    • Use pictures, graphics, and other representations more than words, but words are often necessary in small, concise doses.
    • Segregate your report by user; for example, general information up top, CIO information below that on the right, CFO information to the left of CIO information, etc.
    • Send a draft report to the internal audience and seek feedback, keeping in mind you won’t be able to cater to or please everyone.

    Step 2.12: Reports (cont.)

    Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

    The report’s formatting and content display can make or break your reports.*

    • Make the report look inviting and easy to read. Use:
      • Short paragraphs and bullet points.
      • A simple layout and uncluttered, wide margins.
      • Minimal boldface, underline, or italics to attract the readers’ attention.
      • High contrast between text and background.
    • Charts, graphs, and infographics should be intuitive and tell the story on their own.
    • Make it easy to peruse the report for topics of interest.
      • Maintain consistent design features.
      • Use impactful, meaningful headings and subheadings.
      • Include callouts to draw attention to important high-level information.
    • Demonstrate the impact of the accomplishments or success stories when appropriate.
    • Finish with a simple concise summary when appropriate. Consider adding:
      • Key points for the reader to takeaway.
      • Action items or requests.
      • Plans for next reporting period.

    *Sources: Adapted and compiled in part from: designeclectic.com, ahrq.gov, and 60secondmarketer.com.

    2.12.1: Reports

    15-45 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the applicable work product from Phases 1 and 2; identify qualitative and quantitative items the VMI measures, monitors, tracks, or aggregates.
    2. Determine which items will be reported and to whom (by category):
      1. Internally to personnel within the VMI
      2. Internally to personnel outside the VMI
      3. Externally to vendors
    3. Within each category above, determine your intended audiences/recipients. For example, you may have a different list of recipients for a risk report than you do a scorecard summary report. This will help you identify the number of reports required.
    4. Create a draft structure for each report based on the audience and the information being conveyed. Determine the frequency of each report and person responsible for creating for each report.
    5. Document your final choices in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.12 Reports.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Phase 1 work product
    • Steps 2.1-2.11 work product

    Output

    • A list of reports used by the VMI
    • For each report:
    • The conceptual content
    • A list of who will receive or have access
    • A creation/distribution frequency

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.12 Reports

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Phase 3: Run

    Implement Your Processes and Leverage Your Tools and Templates

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 3: Run

    Implement your processes and leverage your tools and templates.

    All of the hard work invested in Phase 1: Plan and Phase 2: Build begins to pay off in Phase 3: Run. It’s time to stand up your VMI and ensure that the proper level of resources is devoted to your vendors and the VMI itself. There’s more hard work ahead, but the foundational elements are in place. This doesn’t mean there won’t be adjustments and modifications along the way, but you are ready to use the tools and templates in the real world; you are ready to begin reaping the fruits of your labor.

    Phase 3: Run guides you through the process of collecting data, monitoring trends, issuing reports, and conducting effective meetings to:

    • Manage risk better.
    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Improve vendor relationships.
    • Identify areas where the parties can improve.
    • Improve communication between the parties.
    • Increase the value proposition with your vendors.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors

    Begin classifying your top 25 vendors by spend.

    Step 3.1 sets the table for many of the subsequent steps in Phase 3: Run. The results of your classification process will determine: which vendors go through the scorecarding process (Step 3.4); which vendors participate in BAMs (Step 3.5); the nature and content of the vendor orientation activities (Step 3.3); which vendors will be part of the risk measurement and monitoring process (Step 3.8); which vendors will be included in the reports issued by the VMI (Step 3.9); and which vendors you will devote relationship-building resources to (Step 3.10).

    As you begin classifying your vendors, Info-Tech recommends using an iterative approach initially to validate the results from the classification model you configured in Step 2.1.

    1. Using the information from the Vendor Inventory tab (Step 1.7), identify your top 25 vendors by spend.
    2. Run your top 10 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results.
      1. If the results are what you expected and do not contain any significant surprises, go to next page.
      2. If the results are not what you expected or contain significant surprises, look at the configuration page of the tool (Tab 1) and adjust the weights or the spend categories slightly. Be cautious in your evaluation of the results before modifying the configuration page – some legitimate results are unexpected or surprising based on bias. If you modify the weighting, review the new results and repeat your evaluation. If you modify the spend categories, review the answers on the vendor tabs to ensure that the answers are still accurate; review the new results and repeat your evaluation.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Review your results and adjust the classification tool as needed.

    1. Run your top 11 through 25 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results. Identify any unexpected results or surprises. Determine if further configuration makes sense and repeat the process outlined in 2.b, previous page, as necessary. If no further modifications are required, continue to 4, below.
    2. Share the preliminary results with the leadership team, executives, and stakeholders to obtain their approval or adjustments to the results.
      1. They may have questions and want to understand the process before approving the results.
      2. They may request that you move a vendor from one quadrant to another based on your organization’s roadmap, the vendor’s roadmap, or other information not available to you.
    3. Identify the vendors that will be part of the VMI at this stage – how many and which ones. Based on this number and the VMI’s scope (Step 1.2), make sure you have the resources necessary to accommodate the number of vendors participating in the VMI. Proceed cautiously and gradually increase the number of vendors participating in the VMI.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Finalize the results and update VMI tools and templates.

    1. Update the Vendor Inventory tab (Step 1.7) to indicate the current classification status for the top 25 vendors by spend. Once your vendors have been classified, you can sort the Vendor Inventory tab by classification status to see all the vendors in that category at once.
    2. Review your 3-year roadmap (Step 2.9) and 90-day plans (Step 2.10) to determine if any modifications are needed to the activities and timelines.

    Additional classification considerations:

    • You should only have a few vendors that fit in the strategic category. As a rough guideline, no more than 5% to 10% of your IT vendors should end up in the strategic category. If you have a large number of vendors, even 5% may be too many. The classification model is an objective start to the classification process, but common sense must prevail over the “math” at the end of the day.
    • At this point, there is no need to go beyond the top 25 by spend. Most VMIs starting out can’t handle more than three to five strategic vendors initially. Allow the VMI to run a pilot program with a small sample size, work out any bugs, make adjustments, and then ramp up the VMI’s rollout in waves. Vendors can be added quarterly, biannually, or annually, depending upon the desired goals and available resources.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Align your vendor strategy to your classification results.

    As your VMI matures, additional vendors will be part of the VMI. Review the table below and incorporate the applicable strategies into your deployment of vendor management principles over time. Stay true to your mission, goals, and scope, and remember that not all of your vendors are of equal importance.

    Operational Strategic
    • Focus on spend containment
    • Concentrate on lowering total cost of ownership
    • Invest moderately in cultivating the relationship
    • Conduct BAMs biannually or annually
    • Compile scorecards quarterly or biannually
    • Identify areas for performance and cost improvement
    • Focus on value, collaboration, and alignment
    • Review market intelligence for the vendor’s industry
    • Invest significantly in cultivating the relationship
    • Initiate executive-to-executive relationships
    • Conduct BAMs quarterly
    • Compile scorecards quarterly
    • Understand how the vendors view your organization

    Commodity

    Tactical

    • Investigate vendor rationalization and consolidation
    • Negotiate for the best-possible price
    • Leverage competition during negotiations
    • Streamline the purchasing and payment process
    • Allocate minimal VMI resources
    • Assign the lowest priority for vendor management metrics
    • Conduct risk assessments biannually or annually
    • Cultivate a collaborative relationship based on future growth plans or potential with the vendor
    • Conduct BAMs quarterly or biannually
    • Compile scorecards quarterly
    • Identify areas of performance improvement
    • Leverage innovation and creative problem solving

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Be careful when using the word “partner” with your strategic and other vendors.

    For decades, vendors have used the term “partner” to refer to the relationship they have with their clients and customers. In many regards, this is often an emotional ploy used by the vendors to get the upper hand. To fully understand the terms “partner” and “partnership” let’s evaluate them through two more-objective, less-cynical lenses.

    If you were to talk to your in-house or outside legal counsel, you may be told that partners share in profits and losses, and they have a fiduciary obligation to each other. Unless there is a joint venture between the parties, you are unlikely to have a partnership with a vendor from this perspective.

    What about a “business” partnership … one that doesn’t involve sharing profits and losses? What would that look like? Here are some indicators of a business partnership (or preferably a strategic alliance):

    • Trust and transparent communication exist.
    • You have input into the vendor’s roadmap for products and services.
    • The vendor is aligned with your desired outcomes and helps you achieve success.
    • You and the vendor are accountable for actions and inactions, with both parties being at risk.
    • There is parity in the peer-to-peer relationships between the organizations (e.g. C-Level to C-Level).
    • The vendor provides transparency in pricing models and proactively suggests ways for you to reduce costs.
    • You and the vendor work together to make each party better, providing constructive feedback on a regular basis.
    • The vendor provides innovative suggestions for you to improve your processes, performance, the bottom line, etc.
    • Negotiations are not one-sided; they are meaningful and productive, resulting in an equitable distribution of money and risk.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Understand the implications and how to leverage the words “partner” and “partnership.”

    By now you might be thinking, “What’s all the fuss? Why does it matter?” At Info-Tech, we’ve seen firsthand how referring to the vendor as a partner can have the following impact:

    • Confidences are disclosed unnecessarily.
    • Negotiation opportunities and leverage are lost.
    • Vendors no longer have to earn the customer’s business.
    • Vendor accountability is missing due to shared responsibilities.
    • Competent skilled vendor resources are assigned to other accounts.
    • Value erodes over time since contracts are renewed without being competitively sourced.
    • One-sided relationships are established, and false assurances are provided at the highest levels within the customer organization.

    Proceed with caution when using partner or partnership with your vendors. Understand how your organization benefits from using these terms and mitigate the negatives outlined above by raising awareness internally to ensure people understand the psychology behind the terms. Finally, use the term to your advantage when warranted by referring to the vendor as a partner when you want or need something that the vendor is reluctant to provide. Bottom line: Be strategic in how you refer to vendors and know the risks.

    Step 3.2: Conduct internal “kickoff” meeting

    Raise awareness about the VMI and its mission, vision, and goals.

    To be effective, your VMI needs executive support, a clear vision, appropriate governances and tools, personnel with the right skills, and other items discussed in this blueprint. However, the VMI doesn’t exist in a vacuum … it can’t sit back and be reactive. As part of being proactive, the VMI must be aware of its brand and “market” its services. An effective way to market the VMI is to conduct an internal kickoff meeting. There are at least a couple of ways to do this:

    • Host a meeting for stakeholders, executives, and others who will be contributing to the VMI processes (but are not part of the VMI). The meeting can be part of a townhall or standalone meeting; it can be done live or via a recorded video.
    • Attend appropriate staff meetings and make your presentation.

    With either approach above or one of your choosing, keep in mind the following objectives for your kickoff meeting:

    • Make sure you provide a way for those in attendance to ask questions at that time and later. You want to create and foster a communication loop with the people who will be impacted by the VMI or participating with it.
    • Raise awareness of your existence and personnel. Tell the VMI’s story by sharing your mission statement, goals, and scope; this will help dispel (or confirm) rumors about the VMI that often lead to confusion and faulty assumptions.
    • As you share the VMI’s vision, connect the story to how the VMI will impact the organization and individuals and to how they can help. The VMI tends to be the least autonomous area within an organization; it needs the assistance of others to be successful. Convey an atmosphere of collaboration and appreciation for their help.

    Host a kickoff meeting annually to kickoff the new year. Remind people of your story, announce successes from the past year, and indicate what the future year holds. Keep it brief, make it personal for the audience, and help them connect the names of VMI personnel to faces.

    Step 3.3: Conduct vendor orientation

    Introduce your VMI to your top vendors.

    Based on the results from your vendor classification (Step 3.1) and your VMI deployment timeline, identify the vendors who will participate in the initial orientation meetings. Treat the orientation as a formal, required meeting for the vendors to attend. Determine the attendee list for your organization and the vendors, and send out invites. Ideally, you will want the account manager, a sales director or vice president, the “delivery” director or vice president, and an executive from the vendor in the meeting. From the customer side, you may need more than one or two people from the VMI to entice the vendor’s leadership team to attend; you may need attendance from your own leadership team to add weight or credibility to the meeting (unfortunately).

    Before going into the meeting, make sure everyone on your side knows their roles and responsibilities, and review the agenda. Control the agenda or the meeting is likely to get out of hand and turn into a sales call.

    Conduct orientation meetings even if the participating vendors have been doing business with you for several years. Don’t assume they know all about your organization and your VMI (even if their other clients have a VMI).

    Run two or three orientation meetings and then review the “results.” What needs to be modified? What lessons have you learned? Make any necessary adjustments and continue rolling out the orientation meetings.

    Early in the VMI’s deployment, reorientation and debrief may not be in play. As time passes, it is important to remember them! Use them when warranted to help with vendor alignment.

    Step 3.4: Compile scorecards

    Begin scoring your top vendors.

    The scorecard process typically is owned and operated by the VMI, but the actual rating of the criteria within the measurement categories is conducted by those with day-to-day interactions with the vendors, those using or impacted by the services and products provided by the vendors, and those with the skills to research other information on the scorecard (e.g. risk). Chances are one person will not be able to complete an entire scorecard by themselves. As a result, the scorecard process is a team sport comprising sub-teams where necessary.

    The VMI will compile the scores, calculate the final results, and aggregate all of the comments into one scorecard. There are two common ways to approach this task:

    1. Send out the scorecard template to those who will be scoring the vendor and ask them to return it when completed, providing them with a due date a few days before you actually need it; you’ll need time to compile, calculate, and aggregate.
    2. Invite those who will be scoring the vendor to a meeting and let the contributors use that time to score the vendors; make VMI team members available to answer questions and facilitate the process.

    Step 3.4: Compile scorecards (cont.)

    Gather input from stakeholders and others impacted by the vendors.

    Since multiple people will be involved in the scorecarding process or have information to contribute, the VMI will have to work with the reviewers to ensure that the right mix of data is provided. For example:

    • If you are tracking lawsuits filed by or against the vendor, one person from Legal may be able to provide that, but they may not be able to evaluate any other criteria on the scorecard.
    • If you are tracking salesperson competencies, multiple people from multiple areas may have valuable insights.
    • If you are tracking deliverable timeliness, several project managers may want to contribute across several projects.

    Where one person is contributing exclusively to limited criteria, make it easy for the person to identify the criteria they are to evaluate. When multiple people from the same functional area will provide insights, they can contribute individually (and the VMI will average their responses) or they can respond collectively after reaching consensus among themselves.

    After the VMI has compiled, calculated, and aggregated, share the results with executives, impacted stakeholders, and others who will be attending the BAM for that vendor. Depending upon the comments provided by internal personnel, you may need to create a sanitized version of the scorecard for the vendor.

    Make sure your process timeline has a buffer built in. You’ll be sending the final scorecard to the vendor three to five days before the BAM, and you’ll need some time to assemble the results. The scorecarding process can be perceived as a low-priority activity for people outside of the VMI, and other “priorities” will arise for them. Without a timeline buffer, the VMI may find itself behind schedule and unprepared due to things beyond its control.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings

    Determine which vendors will participate and how long the meetings will last.

    At their core, BAMs aren’t that different from any other meeting. The basics of running a meeting still apply, but there are a few nuances that apply to BAMs Set out below are leading practices for conducing your BAMs; adapt them to meet your needs and suit your environment.

    Who

    Initially, BAMs are conducted with the strategic vendors in your pilot program. Over time, you’ll add vendors until all of your strategic vendors are meeting with you quarterly. After that, roll out the BAMs to those tactical and operational vendors located close to the strategic quadrant in the classification model (Steps 2.1 and 3.1) and as VMI resources allow. It may take several years before you are holding regular BAMs with all of your strategic, tactical, and operational vendors.

    Duration

    Keep the length of your meetings reasonable. The first few with a vendor may need to be 60 to 90 minutes long. After that, you should be able to trim them to 45 to 60 minutes. The BAM does not have to fill the entire time. When you are done, you are done.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

    Identify who will be invited and send out invitations.

    Invitations

    Set up a recurring meeting whenever possible. Changes will be inevitable, but keeping the timeline regular works to your advantage. Also, the vendors included in your initial BAMs won’t change for twelve months. For the first BAM with a vendor, provide adequate notice; four weeks is sufficient in most instances, but calendars will fill up quickly for the main attendees from the vendor. Treat the meeting as significant and make sure your invitation reflects this. A simple meeting request will often be rejected, treated as optional, or ignored completely by the vendor’s leadership team (and maybe yours as well!).

    Invitees

    Internal invitees should include those with a vested interest in the vendor’s performance and the relationship. In addition, other functional areas may be invited based on need or interest. Be careful the attendee list doesn’t get too big. Based on this, internal BAM attendees often include representatives from IT, Sourcing/Procurement, and the applicable business units. At times, Finance and Legal are included.

    From the vendor’s side, strive to have decision makers and key leaders attend. The salesperson/account manager is often included for continuity, but a director or vice president of sales will have more insights and influence. The project manager is not needed at this meeting due to the nature of the meeting and its agenda; however, a director or vice president from the “product or service delivery” area is a good choice. Bottom line: get as high into the vendor’s organization as possible whenever possible; look at the types of contracts you have with that vendor to provide guidance on the type of people to invite.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

    Prepare for the meetings and maintain control.

    Preparation

    Send the scorecard and agenda to the vendor five days prior to the BAM. The vendor should provide you with any information you require for the meeting five days prior as well.

    Decide who will run the meeting. Some customers like to lead and others let the vendor present. How you craft the agenda and your preferences will dictate who runs the show.

    Make sure the vendor knows what materials it should bring to the meeting or have access to. This will relate to the agenda and any specific requests listed under the discussion points. You don’t want the vendor to be caught off guard and unable to discuss a matter of importance to you.

    Running the BAM

    Regardless of which party leads, make sure you manage the agenda to stay on topic. This is your meeting – not the vendor’s, not IT’s, not Procurement’s or Sourcing’s. Don’t let anyone hijack it.

    Make sure someone is taking notes. If you are running this virtually, consider recording the meeting. Check with your legal department first for any concerns, notices, or prohibitions that may impact your recording the session.

    As a reminder, this is not a sales call, and this is not a social activity. Innovation discussions are allowed and encouraged, but that can quickly devolve into a sales presentation. People can be friendly toward one another, but the relationship building should not overwhelm the other purposes.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

    Follow these additional guidelines to maximize your meetings.

    More Leading Practices

    • Remind everyone that the conversation may include items covered by various confidentiality provisions or agreements.
    • Publish the meeting minutes on a timely basis (within 48 hours).
    • Focus on the bigger picture by looking at trends over time; get into the details only when warranted.
    • Meet internally immediately beforehand to prepare – don’t go in cold; review the agenda and the roles and responsibilities for the attendees.
    • Physical meetings are better than virtual meetings, but travel constraints, budgets, and pandemics may not allow for physical meetings.

    Final Thoughts

    • When performance or the relationship is suffering, be constructive in your feedback and conversations rather than trying to assign blame; lead with the carrot rather than the stick.
    • Look for collaborative solutions whenever possible and avoid referencing the contract if possible. Communicate your willingness to help resolve outstanding issues.
    • Use inclusive language and avoid language that puts the vendor on the defensive.
    • Make sure that your meetings are not focused exclusively on the negative, but don’t paint a rosy picture where one doesn’t exist.
    • A vendor that is doing well should be commended. This is an important part of relationship building.

    Step 3.6: Work the 90-day plan

    Monitor your progress and share your results.

    Having a 90-day plan is a good start, but assuming the tasks on the plan will be accomplished magically or without any oversight can lead to failure. While it won’t take a lot of time to work the plan, following a few basic guidelines will help ensure the 90-day plan gets results and wasn’t created in vain.

    90-Day Plan: Activity 1; Activity 2; Activity 3; Activity 4; Activity 5
    1. Measure and track your progress against the initial/current 90-day plan at least weekly; with a short timeline, any delay can have a huge impact.
    2. If adjustments are needed to any elements of the plan, understand the cause and the impact of those adjustments before making them.
    3. Make adjustments ONLY when warranted. The temptation will be to push activities and tasks further out on the timeline (or to the next 90-day plan!) when there is any sort of “hiccup” along the way, especially when personnel outside the VMI are involved. Hold true to the timeline whenever possible; once you start slipping, it often becomes a habit.
    4. Report on progress every week and hold people accountable for their assignments and contributions.
    5. Take the 90-day plan seriously and treat it as you would any significant project – this is part of the VMI’s branding and image.

    Step 3.7: Manage the 3-year roadmap

    Keep an eye on the future since it will feed the present.

    The 3-year roadmap is a great planning tool, but it is not 100% reliable. There are inherent flaws and challenges. Essentially, the roadmap is a set of three “crystal balls” attempting to tell you what the future holds. The vision for Year 1 may be fairly clear, but for each subsequent year, the crystal ball becomes foggier. In addition, the timeline is constantly changing; before you know it, tomorrow becomes today and Year 2 becomes Year 1.

    To help navigate through the roadmap and maximize its potential, follow these principles:

    • Manage each year of the roadmap differently.
      • Review the Year 1 map each quarter to update your 90-day plans (See steps 2.10 and 3.6).
      • Review the Year 2 map every six months to determine if any changes are necessary. As you cycle through this, your vantage point of Year 2 will be 6 months or 12 months away from the beginning of Year 2, and time moves quickly.
      • Review the Year 3 map annually, and determine what needs to be added, changed, or deleted. Each time you review Year 3, it will be a “new” Year 3 that needs to be built.
    • Analyze the impact on the proposed modifications from two perspectives: 1) What is the impact if a requested modification is made? 2) What is the impact if a requested modification is not made?
    • Validate all modifications with leadership and stakeholders before updating the 3-year roadmap to ensure internal alignment.

    Step 3.8: Measure and monitor risk

    Understand and manage risk levels.

    Using the configured Vendor Risk Assessment Tool (Step 2.2), confirm which risks you will be measuring and monitoring and identify the vendors that will be part of the initial risk management process. Generally, organizations start measuring and monitoring risk in two to five risk categories for two or three strategic vendors. Over time, additional risk categories and/or vendors can be added in waves. Resist the temptation to add risk categories or vendors into the mix too quickly. Expanding requires resources inside and outside of the VMI.

    The VMI will rely heavily on other areas to provide input or the risk data, and the VMI needs to establish good working relationships with those areas. For example, if legal risk is something being measured and monitored, the VMI will need data from Legal on the number and nature of any lawsuits filed by or against the applicable vendors; the VMI will need data from Legal, Contract Management, or Procurement/Sourcing on the number and nature of any agreed upon deviations from your organization’s preferred contract terms that increase legal risk.

    With respect to risk, the VMI’s main role is threefold: 1) take the data obtained from others (or in some instances the VMI may have the data) and turn it into useful information, 2) monitor the risk categories over time and periodically issue reports, and 3) work with other areas to manage the risk.

    Step 3.9: Issue reports

    Inform internal personnel and vendors about trends, issues, progress, and results.

    Issuing the reports created in Step 2.12 is one of the main ways the VMI 1) will communicate with internal and external personnel and 2) track trends and information over time. Even with input from the potential reviewers of the reports, you’ll still want to seek their feedback and input periodically. It may take a few iterations until the reports are hitting their mark. You may find that a metric is no longer required, that a metric is missing completely or it is missing a component, or a formatting change would improve the report’s readability. Once a report has been “finalized,” try not to change it until you are engaged in Phase 4: Review activities. It can be unsettling for the reviewers when reports change constantly.

    Whenever possible, find ways to automate the reports. While issuing reports is critical, the function should not consume more time than necessary. Automation can remove some of the manual and repetitive tasks.

    Internal reports may need to be kept confidential. An automated dashboard or reporting tool can help lock down who has access to the information. At a minimum, the internal reports should contain a “Confidential” stamp, header, watermark, or other indicator that the materials are sensitive and should not be disclosed outside of your organization without approval.

    Reports for vendors may not need to be sent as often as reports are generated or prepared for internal personnel. Establish a cadence by classification model category and stick to it. Letting each vendor choose the frequency will make it more difficult for you to manage. The vendors can choose to ignore the report if they so choose.

    This is an image of an example of a bar graph showing ROI and Benchmark for Categories 1-6

    Step 3.10: Develop/improve vendor relationships

    Drive better performance through better relationships.

    One of the key components of a VMI is relationship management. Good relationships with your vendors provide many benefits for both parties, but they don’t happen by accident. Do not assume the relationship will be good or is good merely because your organization is buying products and services from a vendor.

    In many respects, the VMI should mirror a vendor’s sales organization by establishing relationships at multiple levels within the vendor organizations – not just with the salesperson or account manager. Building and maintaining relationships is hard work, but the return on investment makes it worthwhile.

    Business relationships are comprised of many components, not all of which have to be present to have a great relationship. However, there are some essential components. Whether you are trying to develop, improve, or maintain a relationship with a vendor, make sure you are conscious of the following:*

    • Focus your energies on strategic vendors first and then tactical and operational vendors.
    • Be transparent and honest in your communications.
    • Continue building trust by being responsive and honoring commitments (timely).
    • Create a collaborative environment and build upon common ground.
    • Thank the vendor when appropriate.
    • Resolve disputes early, avoid the “blame game,” and be objective when there are disagreements.

    Step 3.11: Contribute to other processes

    Continue assisting others and managing roles and responsibilities outside of the VMI.

    The VMI has processes that it owns and processes that it contributes to. Based on the VMI scope (Step 1.2), the OIC chart (Step 1.4), and the process mapping activities (Step 1.5), ensure that the VMI is honoring its contribution commitments. This is often easier said than done though. A number of factors can make it difficult to achieve the balance required to handle VMI processes and contribute to other processes associated with the VMI’s mission and vision. Understanding the issues is half the battle. If you see signs of these common “vampires,” take action quickly to address the situation.

    • The VMI’s first focus is often internal, and the tendency is to operate in a bubble. Classifying vendors, running BAMs, coordinating the risk process, and other inward-facing processes can consume all of the VMI’s energy. As a result, there is little time, effort, or let’s be honest, desire to participate in other processes outside of the VMI.
    • It is easy for VMI personnel to get dragged into processes and situations that are outside of its scope. This often happens when personnel join the VMI from other internal areas or departments and have good relationships with their former teammates. The relationships make it hard to say “No” when out-of-scope assistance is being requested.
    • The VMI may have “part-time” personnel who have responsibilities across internal departments, divisions, agencies, or teams. When the going gets tough and time is at a premium, people gravitate toward the easiest or most comfortable work. That work may not be VMI work.

    Phase 4: Review

    Keep Your VMI Up to Date and Running Smoothly

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals


    1.2 Scope

    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

    1.5 Process Mapping

    1.6 Charter

    1.7 Vendor Inventory

    1.8 Maturity Assessment

    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify what the VMI should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 4: Review

    Keep your VMI up to date and running smoothly.

    As the old adage says, “The only thing constant in life is change.” This is particularly true for your VMI. It will continue to mature; people inside and outside of the VMI will change; resources will expand or contract from year to year; your vendor base will change. As a result, your VMI needs the equivalent of a physical every year. In place of bloodwork, x-rays, and the other paces your physician may put you through, you’ll assess compliance with your policies and procedures, incorporate leading practices, leverage lessons learned, maintain internal alignment, and update governances.

    Be thorough in your actions during this Phase to get the most out of it. It requires more than the equivalent of gauging a person’s health by taking their temperature, measuring their blood pressure, and determining their body mass index. Keeping your VMI up to date and running smoothly takes hard work.

    Some of the items presented in this Phase require an annual review; others may require quarterly review or timely review (i.e. when things are top of mind and current). For example, collecting lessons learned should happen on a timely basis rather than annually, and classifying your vendors should occur annually rather than every time a new vendor enters the fold.

    Ultimately, the goal is to improve over time and stay aligned with other areas internally. This won’t happen by accident. Being proactive in the review of your VMI further reinforces the nature of the VMI itself – proactive vendor management, NOT reactive!

    Step 4.1: Assess compliance

    Determine what is functionally going well and not going well.

    Whether you have a robust set of vendor management-related policies and procedures or they are the bare minimum, gathering data each quarter and conducting an assessment each year will provide valuable feedback. The scope of your assessment should focus on two concepts: 1) are the policies and procedures being followed and 2) are the policies and procedures accurate and relevant. This approach requires parallel thinking, but it will help you understand the complete picture and minimize the amount of time required.

    Use the steps listed below (or modify them for your culture) to conduct your assessment:

    • Determine the type of assessment – formal or informal.
    • Determine the scale of the assessment – which policies and procedures will be reviewed and how many people will be interviewed.
    • Determine the compliance levels, and seek feedback on the policies and procedures – what is going well and what can be improved?
    • Review the compliance deviations.
    • Conduct a root cause analysis for the deviations.
    • Create a list of improvements and gain approval.
    • Create a plan for minimizing noncompliance in the future.
      • Improve/increase education and awareness.
      • Clarify/modify policies and procedures.
      • Add resources, tools, and people (as necessary and as allowed).

    Step 4.2: Incorporate leading practices

    Identify and evaluate what external VMIs are doing.

    The VMI’s world is constantly shifting and evolving. Some changes will take place slowly, while others will occur quickly. Think about how quickly the cloud environment has changed over the past five years versus the 15 years before that; or think about issues that have popped up and instantly altered the landscape (we’re looking at you COVID-19 and ransomware). As a result, the VMI needs to keep pace, and one of the best ways to do that is to incorporate leading practices.

    At a high level, a leading practice is a way of doing something that is better at producing a particular outcome or result or performing a task or activity than other ways of proceeding. The leading practice can be based on methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, and other items. Leading practices change periodically due to innovation, new ways of thinking, research, and other factors. Consequently, a leading practice is to identify and evaluate leading practices each year.

    Step 4.2: Incorporate leading practices (cont.)

    Update your VMI based on your research.

    • A simple approach for incorporating leading practices into your regular review process is set out below:
    • Research:
      • What other VMIs in your industry are doing.
      • What other VMIs outside your industry are doing.
      • Vendor management in general.
    • Based on your results, list specific leading practices others are doing that would improve your VMI (be specific – e.g. other VMIs are incorporating risk into their classification process).
    • Evaluate your list to determine which of these potential changes fit or could be modified to fit your culture and environment.
    • Recommend the proposed changes to leadership (with a short business case or explanation/justification, as needed) and gain approval.

    Remember: Leading practices or best practices may not be what is best for you. In some instances, you will have to modify them to fit your culture and environment; in other instances, you will elect not to implement them at all (in any form).

    Step 4.3: Leverage lessons learned

    Tap into the collective wisdom and experience of your team members.

    There are many ways to keep your VMI running smoothly, and creating a lessons learned library is a great complement to the other ways covered in this Phase 4: Review. By tapping into the collective wisdom of the team and creating a safe feedback loop, the VMI gains the following benefits:

    • Documented institutional wisdom and knowledge normally found only in the team members’ brains.
    • The ability for one team member to gain insights and avoid mistakes without having to duplicate the events leading to the insights or mistakes.
    • Improved methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, skills, and relationships.

    Many of the processes raised in this Phase can be performed annually, but a lessons learned library works best when the information is “deposited” in a timely manner. How you choose to set up your lessons learned process will depend on the tools you select and your culture. You may want to have regular “input” meetings to share the lessons as they are being deposited, or you may require team members to deposit lessons learned on a regular basis (within a week after they happen, monthly, or quarterly). Waiting too long can lead to vague or lost memories and specifics – timeliness of the deposits is a crucial element.

    Step 4.3: Leverage lessons learned (cont.)

    Create a library to share valuable information across the team.

    Lessons learned are not confined to identifying mistakes or dissecting bad outcomes. You want to reinforce good outcomes as well. When an opportunity for a lessons-learned deposit arises, identify the following basic elements:

    • A brief description of the situation and outcome.
    • What went well (if anything) and why did it go well?
    • What didn't go well (if anything) and why didn't it go well?
    • What would/could you do differently next time?
    • A synopsis of the lesson(s) learned.

    Info-Tech Insights

    The lessons learned library needs to be maintained. Irrelevant material needs to be culled periodically, and older or duplicate material may need to be archived.

    The lessons learned process should be blameless. The goal is to share insightful information … not to reward or punish people based on outcomes or results.

    Step 4.4: Maintain internal alignment

    Review the plans of other internal areas to stay in sync.

    Maintaining internal alignment is essential for the ongoing success of the VMI. Over time, it is easy to lose sight of the fact that the VMI does not operate in a vacuum; it is an integral component of a larger organization whose parts must work well together to function optimally. Focusing annually on the VMI’s alignment within the enterprise helps reduce any breakdowns that could derail the organization.

    To ensure internal alignment:

    • Review the key components of the applicable materials from Phase 1: Plan and Phase 2: Build with the appropriate members of the leadership team (e.g. executives, sponsors, and stakeholders). Not every item from those Phases and Steps needs to be reviewed, but err on the side of caution for the first set of alignment discussions, and be prepared to review each item. You can gauge the audience’s interest on each topic and move quickly when necessary or dive deeper when needed. Identify potential changes required to maintain alignment.
    • Review the strategic plans (e.g. 1-, 3-, and 5- year plans) for various portions of the organization if you have access to them or gather insights if you don’t have access.
      • If the VMI is under the IT umbrella, review the strategic plans for IT and its departments.
      • Review the strategic plans for the areas the VMI works with (e.g. Procurement, Business Units).
      • The organization itself.
    • Create and vet a list of modifications to the VMI and obtain approval.
    • Develop a plan for making the necessary changes.

    Step 4.5: Update governances

    Revise your protocols and return to the beginning of cyclical processes.

    You’re at the final Step and ready to update governances. This is comprised of two sequential paths.

    • First, use the information from Steps 4.1-4.4 to make any required modifications to the items in Phase 1: Plan, Phase 2: Build, and Phase 3: Run. For example, you may need to update your policies and procedures (Step 2.8) based on your findings in Step 4.1; or you may need to update the VMI’s scope (Step 1.2) to ensure internal alignment issues identified in Step 4.4. are accounted for.
    • Second, return to Phase 3: Run to perform the activities below; they tend to be performed annually, but use your discretion and perform them on an as-needed basis:
      • Reclassify vendors.
      • Complete a new maturity assessment.
      • Run reorientation sessions for vendors.
      • Conduct a kickoff meeting to update internal personnel.

    Other activities and tasks (e.g. scorecards and BAMs) may be impacted by the modifications made above, but the nature of their performance follows a shorter cadence. As a result, they are not specifically called out here in this Step 4.5 since they are performed on an ongoing basis. However, don’t overlook them as part of your update.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Vendor management is a broad, often overwhelming, comprehensive spectrum that encompasses many disciplines. By now, you should have a great idea of what vendor management can or will look like in your organization. Focus on the basics first: Why does the VMI exist and what does it hope to achieve? What is its scope? What are the strengths you can leverage, and what obstacles must you manage? How will the VMI work with others? From there, the spectrum of vendor management will begin to clarify and narrow.

    Leverage the tools and templates from this blueprint and adapt them to your needs. They will help you concentrate your energies in the right areas and on the right vendors to maximize the return on your organization’s investment in the VMI of time, money, personnel, and other resources. You may have to lead by example internally and with your vendors at first, but they will eventually join you on your path if you stay true to your course.

    At the heart of a good VMI is the relationship component. Don’t overlook its value in helping you achieve your vendor management goals. The VMI does not operate in a vacuum, and relationships (internal and external) will be critical.

    Lastly, seek continual improvement from the VMI and from your vendors. Both parties should be held accountable, and both parties should work together to get better. Be proactive in your efforts, and you, the VMI, and the organization will be rewarded.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively

    Don't leave negotiation preparations and outcomes to chance. Learn how to prepare for negotiations more effectively and improve your results.

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    Info-Tech’s guidance and insights will help you navigate the complex process of contract review and identify the key details necessary to maximize the protections for your organization.

    Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    Calculating the impact or value of a vendor management office (VMO) can be difficult without the right framework and tools. Let Info-Tech’s tools and templates help you account for the contributions made by your VMO.

    Bibliography

    “Best Practices for Writing Corporate Policies and Procedures.” PowerDMS, 29 Dec. 2020. Accessed 11 January 2022.

    Duncan. “Top 10 Tips for Creating Compelling Reports.” Design Eclectic, 11 October 2019. Accessed 29 March 2022.

    Eby, Kate. “Master Writing Policies, Procedures, Processes, and Work Instructions.” 1 June 2018, updated 19 July 2021. Accessed 11 January 2022.

    “Enterprise Risk Management.” Protiviti, n.d. Accessed 16 Feb. 2017.

    Geller & Company. “World-Class Procurement — Increasing Profitability and Quality.” Spend Matters, 2003. Accessed 4 March 2019.

    Guth, Stephen. “Vendor Relationship Management Getting What You Paid for (And More).” Citizens, 26 Feb. 2015. Web.

    Guth, Stephen. The Vendor Management Office: Unleashing the Power of Strategic Sourcing. Lulu.com, 2007. Print.

    “ISG Index 4Q 2021.” Information Services Group, Inc., 2022. Web.

    “Six Tips for Making a Quality Report Appealing and Easy To Skim.” AHRQ, Oct. 2019. Accessed 29 March 2022.

    Tucker, Davis. “Marketing Reporting: Tips to Create Compelling Reports.” 60 Second Marketer, 28 March 2020. Accessed 29 March 2022.

    “Why Do We Perform Better When Someone Has High Expectations of Us?” The Decision Lab, 9 Sept. 2020. Accessed 31 January 2022.